1 


















$ ^ 









.** ^ 






|5 oo l ^ '• 



bo"* ^ V* 










s^ .J.O 






,/V c° " '' * 






_r^Nv 











o 



PRACTICAL GRAMMAR 



LATIN LANGUAGE; 



WITH PERPETUAL EXERCISES IN 



SPEAKING AND WRITING, 



USE OF SCHOOLS, COLLEGES, AND PRIVATE LEARNERS. 



BY 

G. J. ADLER, A.M., 

LATE PROFESSOR OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE IN THE UNIVERSITY OF 
THE CITY OF NEW YORK. 



Iter autem per experientiae et rerum particularium silvas perpetuo faciendum est. ,; 

Eranciscus de Verulamio. 






STON: 
SANBORN, CARTER, BAZIN, & CO. 



m r>ccci,vm. 



>** 



^ K 



Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1857, by 

G. J. ABLER, 

in the Clerk's Office of the District Court of the District of Massachusetts. 



" Atque hoc mode- inter empiricam et rationalem facultateni (qua- 
rum uiorosa et inauspicata divortia et repudia omnia in humana 
familia turbavere) conjugium verum et legitimum in perpetuum nos 
firmasse existimamus." 

" Iter autem per experientiae et rerum particularimn 

silvas perpetuo faciendum est." 

Franciscus de Verulamio, Instaur. Magn. Praef. 



D^= A Key to the exercises of this Grammar, by the author, is in preparation, 
and will soon be published. 



CAMBRIDGE : 
ELECTKOTYPED Br METCALF ASD COMPACT. 



NOTICE 



The author of this Grammar gives practical instruction in 
the Latin and German languages and literatures. Circulars 
containing terms, &c, may be obtained of the Publishers, and 
al*o at the bookstore of Ticknor & Fields, 135 Washington 
St., Boston. Applications may be addressed per Post Office. 



TO 



CYRUS MASON, D.D., LL.D., 

LATE PROFESSOR OF POLITICAL ECONOMY IN THE UNIVERSITY OF THE CITY OF NEW YORK, 

IN ASSOCIATION WITH WHOM THE AUTHOR CHERISHES THE MEMORY 

OF MANY A PLEASANT HOUR DEVOTED TO THE STUDY OF THE 

CLASSICS, AND TO WHOSE KIND ENCOURAGEMENT HE IS 

CHIEFLY INDEBTED FOR HIS FIRST SUCCESS AS AN 

INSTRUCTOR IN THE CITY OF NEW YORK, 



fjjta Uolume 



IS RESPECTFULLY AND GRATEFULLY INSCRIBED. 



PREFACE 



The preparation of a text-book for the study of the Latin, similar 
to that edited by me, some twelve years ago, on the German, has since 
that time been repeatedly suggested to me by various persons inter- 
ested in the progress of education. Years however elapsed before I 
could even think of entering on such a task, partly on account of 
other time-absorbing occupations, partly because I felt, in common 
with many others, some hesitation to undertake the somewhat delicate 
part of treating a so-called dead language like a living organism, yet 
in vogue as an element of national existence. It was not until after I 
had completed what I considered myself bound to render, as professor 
of a modern language in the city of New York, that I could give the 
question a serious consideration; and in the winter of 1854, after my 
secession from the University of that city, some of my leisure hours 
were devoted to the collection and construction of exercises similar to 
those contained in my edition of Ollendorff's German Method. 

These tentatives, which were commenced for recreation merely, and 
without any direct reference to publication, were some months after 
again suspended and postponed indefinitely. I had, however, pro- 
ceeded far enough to convince myself perfectly of the feasibility of the 
plan, and felt assured, that, if the student in this practical pursuit of a 
new language would find a pleasure at all commensurate with the 
satisfaction I myself experienced in my attempts to explore and point 
out the road to him, my task would prove a promising and successful 
one. 

It was under this conviction, that, in the spring of 1856, I again 
took up my papers, and resolved to begin the work in earnest. I ac- 
cordingly revised and enlarged upon what I had already collected, 
until my materials amounted to ten fascicles of phrases and exercises, of 



IV PREFACE. 

about the extent of those contained in my edition of Ollendorff's Ger- 
man Method. Soon after, I concluded an arrangement for the publication 
of a complete practical Grammar of the Latin upon the basis of these 
preliminary studies, and after many months of new researches both 
into the theory and practice of the language, the final result has been 
the volume now offered to the inspection of the public. 

But although it was intended that the book should upon the whole 
pursue the course indicated by the methods on modern languages 
now almost exclusively in vogue, and to make constant repetition and 
the perpetual construction of connected sentences and phrases from 
English into the language to be acquired the chief exercise of the stu- 
dent, yet I could not make up my mind to surrender system to mere 
empirical practice to the extent to which this is done by Mr. Ollen- 
dorff. My aim was rather to sacrifice nothing of the theory, to leave 
no point of grammar unexplained or unconnected, but to make the 
student advance with equal pace from practice to theory, and from 
theory to practice, until he makes himself the master and conscious 
possessor of the entire structure of the language, as far at least as this 
can be effected by a Grammar. 

I have therefore commenced with the simplest elements, and with 
exercises which a child even could comprehend and learn from repe- 
tition or dictation. As the course advances, and the rules of con- 
struction come gradually more and more into requisition, the syntax 
commences, of which I have prefixed connected portions to each les- 
son, to be committed either entirely or in part, as the student pro- 
gresses with his exercises. I have thus succeeded in incorporating by 
degrees a complete syntax of the language, to the rules of which per- 
petual reference is made in subsequent parts of the book, and with 
which the student must become familiar before he can reach the end 
of the volume. In regard to the etymology, I have naturally treated 
the declension of substantives, adjectives, and pronouns in the first 
lessons. These, with the practice given, are soon completely in the 
power of the learner. But the doctrine of the gender of substantives, 
the declension of Greek nouns, the derivation of adjectives and ad- 
verbs, &c, which would only have embarrassed and retarded the 
student in the beginning, are deferred until nearly the close of the 
book. "With the verbs I have proceeded in a similar manner. I first 
give only the present tense active, then in another lesson the passive, 
and in a third the present of deponent verbs. A general outline of 
the formation of tenses follows, in Lesson XXVIII., from which the 



PREFACE. V 

student is referred to the paradigms of conjugation on pages 664-665, 
which may be read and committed, as in ordinary Grammars ; but in 
the regular order of the book, he learns and applies only one tense at 
a time, on which he practises until he is lit for another, and so on to 
the end. 

I have retained the division into Lessons, as the most suitable ar- 
rangement for a book of this description. A strict separation of the 
etymology and syntax, and a connected scientific treatment of the 
principles of grammar, however desirable in themselves, would have 
destroyed the characteristic feature of the method, which begins with 
sentences instead of isolated vocables, and thus applies the simpler 
principles of construction at the very outset. It is however by no 
means intended that those divisions called Lessons should be the task 
invariably assigned to the student. The judgment of the teacher 
must in all cases determine the proper pension of the learner, accord- 
ing to the capacity or proficiency of the latter, and that may some- 
times be more, and perhaps oftener less, than the pensum of the book, 
which is not unfrequently considerably longer than the average les- 
sons in similar manuals on modern languages. 

In the use of the book care should be taken to keep the main de- 
sign steadily in view, which is the writing and memorizing of the 
exercises appended to each lesson. In these the student applies di- 
rectly the principles already acquired, and undergoes as it were a daily 
self-examination on what has gone before. Hence it is much more 
important that he should properly attend to those, than that he should 
be kept too long upon the mere mechanical committing of barren 
lists of words, or of rules which, without application, always remain a 
dead letter in the memory. 

Much benefit can be derived from the guidance of the instructor, 
whose aid in reading over the advance lesson, in explaining and re- 
moving difficulties, in separating the essential points from those of 
minor importance, will not fail to contribute greatly to the encourage- 
ment and rapid progress of his studiosL As in many lessons of the 
book the principles advanced are far from being exhausted in the ex- 
ercises at the end, the teacher or scholar can easily expand them by 
adding others similar to those given, — a practice which cannot be too 
strongly recommended. 

To insure a correct pronunciation, I give directions at the very be- 
ginning for the accentuation of Latin words, and in the examples pre- 
ceding the exercises, as well as in those given under the principal rules, 



VI PREFACE. 

the use of the accent is practically exhibited. To enable the student 
to accent according to the rules set forth in the first lesson, the quan- 
tity of all the words given in the vocabularies, as well as of those de- 
clined or conjugated, is indicated with almost lexicographical minute- 
ness. In this respect I have rendered what I think is found in no 
other Grammar of the Latin, and am persuaded that this system, with- 
out which we can scarcely conceive of a correct pronunciation, will 
commend itself to the approbation of all competent to judge upon 
the subject. 

As many of the exercises relate to the familiar talk of daily inter- 
course, it has sometimes become necessary to designate objects either 
entirely unknown to the Ancients, or known under a different form. 
The words employed for this purpose are either modern, as cojfea, 
tabacum, bibliopegus (bookbinder), or else genuine Latin terms, but 
employed in a sense somewhat different from that in which they occur 
in classical Latinity, as, for example, calceus for our " shoe," _/;*7eus for 
our "hat," sjieculum for our "looking-glass," &c. To prevent mis- 
understanding or confusion on this subject, all the words of this de- 
scription are marked, as modern or applied to objects of modern life, 
with an asterisk before them ; e. g. *coffea, *piletfs, &c. 

I have one word to add with reference to the syntax. This impor- 
tant part of grammar has been treated much more comprehensively 
than one might suppose from its somewhat disjointed appearance. 
Thg subject of agreement, the syntax of the oblique cases, the use of 
the infinitive, the somewhat complicated doctrine of the subjunctive, 
and other equally important topics, are developed as fully as in many 
Grammars of larger size or greater pretensions, and it is hoped that 
on this point nothing of any moment will be found omitted. All the 
rules and remarks are illustrated by numerous examples carefully se- 
lected from the classical authors of antiquity. The examples under 
the rules are separated from the rest of the book by a different ar- 
rangement, the Latin on the right and the English on the left, while 
in the general oral exercises this order is inverted. The book is thus 
expected to carry its own authority in itself, and to justify the imita- 
tive combinations and constructions adopted in the exercises. The 
doctrine of questions is fully developed and elucidated in Lesson 
LXXXV. ; the order or arrangement of words and sentences, in 
Lesson XCVII. Both these lessons the teacher will do well to con- 
sult before he sets his students to work. 

In the elaboration of this volume, I have availed mvself of the 



PREFACE. Vll 

best authorities "which a long acquaintance with the philology of 
modern Germany had made familiar to me. On the etymology I 
have freely used Zumpt ; on the syntax, the somewhat larger and 
completer manuals of Ramshorn and Kriiger. On tfye orthography of 
words, and on the subject of quantity, I am chiefly indebted to the 
last edition of Dr. Georges' Lateinisch-Deutsches Hand-Worterbucli 
(Leipsic, 1855). On the use of the particles I have, besides the au- 
thorities already mentioned, examined a number of other sources, 
especially the original treatise of Tursellinus. For correct Latin 
equivalents for the English terms and constructions employed in the 
book, I have diligently consulted the German-Latin Lexicons of Schel- 
ler, Kraft, and especially the more recent work of Georges. On 
doubtful or difficult points I have also had an opportunity to consult 
the more comprehensive works of Freund, Facciolati and Forcellini, 
and several others. From these authorities I have, however, adopted 
nothing but what I could justify by classical examples and analogies, 
and I have given no Latin equivalents for English terms or phrases, 
without testing them by comparing all the connections in which they 
are recorded as occurring in the classical writers. The subject of 
questions and answers I myself examined by a careful reading of the 
comedies of Terence, from which I had made numerous extracts be- 
fore I was in possession of the sources from which I afterwards de- 
rived what I have advanced upon this point in Lesson LXXXV. 

I have thus had rather a redundancy than a lack of materials on 
the majority of topics connected with the theory of grammar, while 
on the practical application of many principles, I was more than once 
forced to the reading of my Terence or my Cicero in order to obtain 
the desired light. — In this connection I have publicly to express my 
obligations to several gentlemen of Cambridge for their j>oliteness 
in extending to me the privileges of their valuable University Li- 
brary, to which I am indebted for several of my authorities. 

I submit now the result of my somewhat protracted and by no 
means trivial labors to the candor and enlightened judgment of the 
classical scholars of America. As to the plan I have pursued, although 
it aims at nothing short of a radical change in the teaching of the 
language, I scarcely feel as if it needed an apology. The plan of 
learning a language by writing it, is not only the surest, but the only, 
road to its complete acquisition. Methods analogous to this, though 
unrecorded, must have been employed by those who have used, and 
who to some extent still use, the Latin as a medium of written com- 



Vlll PREFACE. 

munication, and not unfrequently with an elegance that reminds us 
of the Ancients. Let the reader think of an Erasmus, of Ficinus, 
of the learned family Stephanus, of Calvin, and other luminaries of 
the age of the revival of letters and of the Reformation, of others who 
have since reflected light and strength from the manly literature of 
ancient Rome. I think experience will prove, that the labor of ac- 
quisition, if not easier, will at any rate be more attractive and remu- 
nerative, with the method here proposed, which makes the student 
assist as it were in the production of his Latin, instead of forcing him 
to lay up barren lists of words or unproductive rules. 

I have in conclusion to add, however, that the course here pointed 
out does not by any means pretend to be the ultimate goal of the 
journey to be pursued. No method in the shape of grammar, or 
manual of any kind, can teach completely any language, ancient or 
modern. It can only be acquired by familiarity with those written 
monuments, which are at once the flowers and conservatories of the 
idioms, in which they breathe a life immortal. Of these the Romans 
have left us many of imperishable excellence, to which we must ever 
point as the most perfect exponents of their language, as the armories 
of the Roman mind. And these are yet to add wholesome vigor to 
the intellect of youth, and consolation to the failing strength of age. 

G. J. ADLER. 

Boston, February, 1858. 



ABBREVIATIONS. 



Cf. stands j "or confer, compare. 

Compos. " " compositum, compound, or composita, compounds. 

e. g. " " exempli gratia, for example. 

i. e. " " id est, that is to say. 

The asterisk (*) before a word shows it to be of modem origin, or applied 
to a modern object. 



ADLEITS 
NEW LATIN METHOD 



Lesson I. — pensum primum. 

INTRODUCTION. 

A. Latin Grammar, considered as a science, has for 
its object the investigation of the laws which govern 
the forms and the construction of the language. When 
destined for the practical purposes of instruction, it be- 
comes the art of learning to read, write, and speak the 
Latin language with correctness. 

OF THE ALPHABET. 

B. The letters of the Latin alphabet are twenty- 
five:— A, a; B, b; C, c; D, d ; E, e ; F, f ; G, g; 
H, h ; I, i ; J, j ; K, k ; L, 1 ; M, m ; N, n ; O, o ; P, p ; 

Q, q ; R, r ; S, s ; T, t ; U, u ; V, v ; X, x ; Y, y ; Z, z. 

Letters are divided into vowels (litterae vocales) and conso- 
nants (litterae consonantes). 

The sound of vowels is complete in itself, whereas that of 
consonants becomes distinct only in conjunction with a vowel. 

OF VOWELS AND DIPHTHONGS. 

C. The simple vowels of the Latin alphabet are six: 
a, e, t, o, u, y. To these may be added the double vow- 
els or diphthongs ae («), ai, au, ei, eu, oe («), oi, and id. 

1. The vowel y (ypslloii) is only found in words adopted from the 
Greek, as Cyrus, tyrannus, syngraphus. 

2. The diphthongs ci, oi, and ui occur only in a few interjections, 

1 



2 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 1. 

such as hci, eia, viei, hid, and in dein, prom, Jiuic, and cui, when these 
words are contracted into one syllable. 

3. The diphthong eu is found in words originally Greek, and in the 
Latin ceu, sen, heu, heus, neu, and neuter. 

4. Respecting the proper sounds of these vowels, there is at pres- 
ent no uniformity of usage, the common custom in vogue among the 
different nations of Europe being that of following the analogy of 
their respective vernacular idioms. This has given rise to a diversity 
of pronunciations, among which the English and the Continental are 
the most conspicuous. The following table exhibits the difference 
between the English and the German sounds of each of the vowels, 
both long ( - ) and short ( ~ ) : — 

ENGLISH SOUND. GERMAN SOUND. 

a mater, manna* a always ah, a as in am. 

e deleo, fessus e like a in fate, e as in fre 

i, y, finis, mirabilis I like ee in keen, i as mfin. 

o corona, dominus o as in bone, 6 as in shone. 

u usus, duumvir u like oo in moon, u the same sound short. 

ae Caesar, caestusf like a in fate. 

ai Maia,J aio broader, with the sound of both vowels. 

au aurum, causa like ou in house. 

ei eia, omneis like i in shine. 

eu Orpheus,§ neuter nearly like oi in foil. 

oe poena, foedus like the French eu in feu. 

ui huic, cui || like ooi rapidly sounded. 

Remark. — In the above examples, the learner is expected to 
sound the vowels as he would under similar circumstances in English 
words. 

OF THE CONSONANTS. 

D. The consonants are divided into liquids, mutes, 
and double consonants. 

The liquids are I, m, n, r. 

The mutes comprise the remaining simple consonants of the 
alphabet, with the exception of the sibilant s. 

The mutes are again subdivided, with reference to the organ 
by which they are pronounced, into labials (v, b, p,f), gutturals 
(<7, c, k, qu), and Unguals (d, t). 

* A final is generally sounded broad, like all ; but this is not prolonged unless 
the vowel is long, as Jlusa = Musah, but Musd = Musah. 

t In the diphthongs ae and oe (which are also printed ce, ce) the sound of 
e (long) only is heard. 

X But ai is also written aj, as Achaja, Maja, &c. 

§ This may become, by 'diaeresis, 'Orpheus, gen Orpli'ei. The same is true 
of other vowels usually treated as diphthongs, as Lahis, Laertes, &c. 

j| Pronounced in English hike, hi. 



LESSON 1.] CONSONANTS. 3 

The double consonants are x and z (called zeta). The for- 
mer combines the sounds cs, the latter ds. 

E. The power of these consonants is upon the whole the 
same as that of the corresponding English letters. Nor are 
there as many international discrepancies of pronunciation as 
in the vowels. The following remarks will illustrate their force 
more particularly : — 

1. C before a, o, u, or a consonant has the hard sound of k, as 
caput, cult us, clavis ; and before e, i, y, ae,ei, eu, and oe the soft sound 
of s, as Ceres, civis, caelebs, coelum.* 

2. Ch has the force of k, as pidcher, machtna. 

3. G before a, o, u, or another consonant is likewise hard, as in 
English, e. g. garrulus, guttus, gleba ; but it is soft before e, i, y, or an- 
other g, e. g. gener, gingiva, gypsum, agger.] 

4. H is a mere aspiration, and not regarded as a consonant. In 
some words it is either expressed or omitted, e. g. have or ave, alie- 
num or aenum, mild or mi. 

5. The ancient Romans made no distinction of form between the 
consonants j, v and the vowels i, u ; but the same characters / and V 
had sometimes the power of vowels and sometimes of consonants. 

6. K has now become a superfluous letter, and is only used in 
certain abbreviations, as K. for Kaeso ; Kal. for Calendae. 

7. Mat the beginning or in the middle of a word is sounded as in 
English. But m final,, when preceded by a vowel, was not so distinct- 
ly pronounced by the Ancients. Hence, when the following word 
commenced with a vowel, the m final was either entirely silent (in 
poetry always so) or regarded as a mere connecting link between the 
vowels. 

8. Q occurs only in connection with u followed by another vowel, 
as quwn, qui, coquus. 

9. £ has upon the whole the same power as in English. Among 
the older Latin writers, however, it seems to have had the stronger 
sound of ss, as they wrote cassus, caussa, accusso, &c, instead of the 
later casus, causa, accuso. 

10. Ti and ci short, when followed by another vowel, are generally 
sounded like slice, as in Horalius, nantius, justitia; Fabricius, novi- 
cius, &c. But ti retains its proper sound, a) when the i is long, as in 
islius, totius ; b) when the t is preceded by an s, x, or another t, as in 
ostium, mixtio, Bruttii ; c) in words originally Greek, as Miltiades, 
Aegyptius ; d) before the er of the infinitive passive, as nitier, jlectier, 
&c. ; e) at the beginning of a word, as in tiara. 

* It is, however, probable that the Romans once sounded the letter c always 
like 1c, as the Greeks did. But the above distinction is too old and general to 
be disregai'ded. 

f But in words of Greek origin it retains the hard sound of the original y, 
as gigas, giyno, &c. 






LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 1. 



OF THE HIATUS. 

F. The concurrence of two vowels, either in the middle of a 
word or at the close of one and the beginning of another, gives 
rise to what is called an hiatus. This the Romans avoided, 
especially in poetry, a) by the contraction of the two vowels into 
one long one, as in audlsti for audiisti, deprtndo for dejjrehen- 
do* &c. ; b) by Synaeresis, i. e. by pronouncing the two vowels 
rapidly like a diphthong, as deinde, hide, omnia ; and c), when 
the hiatus occurred between two words, by the elision (i. e. by 
the suppression in reading) of the final vowel of the first word, 
as in at que ego, sapere aude, which as thus elided read atqiC 
ego, saper' aude. 

OF SYLLABLES. 

G. A syllable may consist either of a single vowel 
or diphthong, or of the union of a vowel or diphthong 
with one or more consonants, e. g. o-vum, du-o, i-ste, 
con-stans. 

1. The Latin language generally tolerates no more than two 
consonants at the end of a syllable or word ; when there are 
three, the last is always an s, as in stirps. 

2. Nor does a syllable commonly commence with more than 
two consonants, except where at the beginning of a word sc, 
sp, and st are followed by an r, or where in the middle of a 
word one of the letters c, p, or s is followed by a mute and 
liquid, as scri-ptor, spre-tus, stri-ctim ; do-etrina, clau-strum, i- 
sthmus, magi-stri, corru-ptrix. 

3. The division of words into syllables may be regulated by 
the following laws : — 

a) A consonant between two vowels belongs to the last, as e-go, 
pa-ter, so-ror. 

b) The consonants which may begin a Greek or Latin word (ac- 
cording to Remark 2) belong together in the division of a word into 
its component syllables, as pa-tris, i-gnis, a-ctus, o-mnis, i-psi, pastor, 
po-sco,fau-stus, sce-ptrum, ca-strum, &c. 

c) Combinations of consonants which never occur at the beginning 

* The h, not being regarded as a consonant, does not prevent the hiatus. 
In verse this is equally true of m final, so that multuin Me et is pronounced 
mulf iir el, &c. In a similar manner the older Latin poets elided the final s 
of the terminations us and is, but only before consonants, as nuntiu 1 mortis for 
nuntius mortis, &c. 



LESSON 1.] QUANTITY. ACCENT. 5 

of a word are treated according to the analogy of the rest, e. g. Da- 
phne, rhy-thmus, smara-gdus, &c. 

d) Compounds are usually divided according to the parts of which 
they are composed, as ab-est, abs-condo, inter-sum, ob-tuli, red-eo, &c. 
But where the composition is uncertain or obscure, or when the first 
component has lost a part of its original termination, the division is 
effected as in simple words, e. g. am-bages, ani-madverto (contracted 
for animum adverto), long-aevus, po-tes (for pods + es), &c. 

4. Words consisting of one syllable are called monosyllables ; 
those of two, dissyllables ; and those of more than two, polysylla- 



OF THE QUANTITY OF SYLLxVBLES. 

H. The quantity of a syllable is the relative time 
occupied in its pronunciation. It is upon this principle 
that the entire fabric of Latin versification depends. 

Every syllable is either long (-), or short (-),* or common 
(-), i. e. sometimes long and sometimes short, as am act, le- 
gere, volucris. 

1. A syllable is long by nature, when its vowel is naturally long, as 
causa, concldo ; it is long by p>osition, when its vowel is followed by 
two consonants or a double consonant, as stirpis, sermo, discessit. 

2. All diphthongs and such simple vowels as have originated in a 
contraction are by nature long, as caedo, proelium, audax ; cogo (from 
codgo), bvbus (for bovibus). 

3. A vowel before another vowel is commonly short, as meus, dea, 
pius, velio. 

4. A vowel before a mute and liquid is common, as lucrum, tene- 
bra, tonitrus. 

5. The quantity of the simple vowels under other circumstances 
can only be determined by the authority of the poets, and is common- 
ly given in the Lexicon. The rules respecting the quantity of final 
syllables, &c. belong to Prosody. 

OF THE ACCENT. 

I. Accent is the peculiar tone or emphasis with 
which a particular syllable of a word is uttered. 

Every Latin word has one principal or leading accent, and 
only one. 

The leading accent is either the circumflex ( a ) or the 
acute ('). 

* The short syllable being taken as the unit of measure, the pronunciation 
of a long syllable would occupy double the -time of a short one. 



6 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 1. 

There is also a subordinate accent called the grave ( N ). 
But this denotes rather the ab.-ence of the principal accent, and 
is scarcely used. In words of several syllables, the last sylla- 
ble but one is called the penult or penultima (sc. sylluha), and 
the last but two, the antepenult or antepenultima. 

The place of the accent is determined by the following 
laws : — 

1. Monosyllables have the circumflex, when their vowel is long by 
nature, and the acute, when their vowel is short by nature or long by 
position, as fids, spes, mans, fons, but drs, dux, fax, purs. 

2. In words of two syllables the accent is always on the penult, and 
it is a) circumflex, when the penult is long by nature and the last 
syllable short, as juris, luce, musd, spina; but b) acute under all 
other circumstances,* as focus, homo, villa, axis, debs, miisd. 

3. Words of three or more syllables are accented either on the 
penult or on the antepenult : — 

a) When the penult is short, the antepenult has invariably the 
acute, as accendere, cae'dere, homines. 

b) When the penult is long by nature and the last syllable short, 
the former has the circumflex, as humdnus, amdsse, audisse. 

c) When the penult is long by position, or when the last syllable 
is likewise long, it has the acute, as modeslus, eductus, humdnls. 

4. The antepenult is the limit of the accent, and polysyllables are 
all treated like words of three, e. g. po'tmdtlbus, Consiantlnopolis, 
sollicitudimbus. 

5. Some words are entirely unaccented, as ne, que, ve, ce. But 
these never appear alone, being always appended to other words, of 
which they often change the place of the accent,f e. g. musdque, musd- 
que, habesne, plerdque, &c. 

6. The quantity of a word being given (as it commonly is in Lexi- 
cons), its accent can be easily determined according to one of the 
above rules. — The beginner should carefully distinguish between 
quantity and accent, which in Latin are not only distinct, but often 
apparently at variance. The former is the principle of versification, 
the latter the indispensable condition of a correct pronunciation and 
the very soul of living discourse. 

OF THE PARTS OF SPEECH. 

J. The words of the Latin language, arranged ac- 
cording to their signification, may be reduced to nine 
classes, usually called parts of speech^ of which five are 
inflected, and four invariable. 

* That is, 1) when both syllables are short (focus, homo) ; 2) when the first 
is short and the second long (deos, meos) ; 3) when the first is long by position 
only {axis, villa) ; 4) when both are long (musd). 

f This is generally thrown back upon the next syllable preceding them. 



LESSON 2.] THE FIRST DECLENSION. 7 

1. The declinable parts of speech are : Substantives or Nouns, 
Adjectives, Pronouns, Verbs, and Participles. 

2. The indeclinable are : Adverbs, Prepositions, Conjunctions, 
and Interjections. All these are termed Particulate or Particles. 

3. To these classes may be added the Gerunds and Supines, 
two forms of verbal substantives peculiar to the Latin. 

OF DECLENSION. 

K. Nouns and adjectives are said to be declined, and their 
inflection is called Declension. Verbs are said to be conjugated, 
and their inflection is called Conjugation. 

In the declension of substantives and adjectives, the relations 
of Gender, Number, and Case are indicated by certain changes 
of termination. 

Latin nouns have three genders, the Masculine, Feminine, 
and Neuter ; and two numbers, the Singular and the Plural. 

They have six cases : the Nominative, Genitive, Dative, Ac- 
cusative, Vocative, and Ablative. 

The Nominative is, as in English, employed as the subject of 
a finite verb. 

The Accusative corresponds upon the whole to the English 
Objective. 

The remaining cases serve to express various relations, 
which in English are usually denoted by such prepositions as 
of, to, for, with, by, &c. 

There are five different modes of inflecting substantives, 
called the first, second, third, fourth, and fifth declensions. 
These are distinguished from each other by the termination of 
the genitive singular, which in the first declension is ae, in the 
second i, in the third is, in the fourth us, and in the fifth ei. 



Lesson II. — pensum alterum. 

OF THE FIRST -DECLENSION. 

A. The first declension comprises all substantives 
and adjectives which form their genitive in ae. The 
nominative of such of these words as are of purely 
Roman origin ends in a, that of a few Greek words 
in e, eSj and as. Those in a and e are mostly fem- 
inine, the rest are masculine. The singular of a noon 



8 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 2. 

in a in connection with mta, " my," and tua, " thy " or 
" your," is thus inflected : — 

ISTom. my paper meu charta 

Gen. of my paper meae chartae 

Dat. to or for my paper raeae chartae 

Ace. my paper meam chartam 

Yoc. my paper mea charta 

Abl. with or by my paper mea charta. 

Nom. your table tua niensa 

Gen. of your table tuae mensae 

Dat. to ov for your table tuae mensae 

Ace. your table tuam mensam 

Yoc. your table tiia mensa 

Abl. with, from, or % yozw fa&fe tua mensa. 

So decline taenia, fascia, Aura, penna. 

Remark. — The a of the ablative of the first declension is always 
long, and sometimes printed a. — But in all other cases of words de- 
clined, the final a is generally short, as charta (Xom.) ; candelabra, 
candlesticks ; templet, temples. 

N. B. — In the vocabularies of this Grammar the quantity of every Latin 
word will be given, and the paradigms of inflection will show the quantity of 
the different case-terminations. From these data the student will accent ac- 
cording to the Rules of Lesson L, page 6. Examples of the application of 
these principles of accentuation are furnished in the phrases of each Lesson. 

TT Q < Habesne ? * Num habes ? 

HaTeyou? JEstnetibl? An habes? 

^r Q . T 7 ( Ita est,f ddmine, habeo. 

les, bir, 1 have. | gdn - qufdem? ddminej dst 

-u- ,, , ,« \ Habesne (til) pile urn ?± 

Have vou the hat ? - *, . , , T > -L 1 g * 

( Estne tibi pileus i 

* In asking questions, the Romans usually employed certain signs of in- 
terrogation, of which the most common are the enclitic ne (always affixed 
either to the verb or to some other word of the sentence), the particles num, 
an, ecquid, numquid, utrum, nonne. Sec. — The enclitic ne and ecquid can be 
used in questions of every description, whether the expected answer be affirm- 
ative or negative; num and numquid, only when it is expected to be "no" ; 
nonne. only when it is to be "yes" ; an and utrum chiefly in double questions. 

t The most current Latin adverbs corresponding to our English "yes" are : 
ettam (= even, even so-), vero (indeed), rede (vou are right), certe (certainly), 
Ud, itd est, sic est (it is so), sane or sane quidem (indeed, surely), immo or 
immo vfro (yes. yes). But the Romans frequently replv by a simple repe- 
tition of the verb or of the emphatic word of the inquiry, e. g. here with a 
simple Habeo and Est. — The ceremonious use of a word like our " Sir" was 
unknown to the ancients. To ddmine, however, the vocative of dominus (mas- 
ter, lord), there can be no objection. 

t The Romans have no article. Its place is in certain cases supplied by a 



LESSON 2.] THE FIRST DECLENSION. 9 

■xr o- t i ±l i t ( Sic est, ddraine, habeo pileum. 

les, Sir, I have the hat. ■{ ? , u ' -, , _ ' , , ,, t ,,^ 

I Etiam, clomine, est mini pileus. 

B. Obs. The verb habeo, being transitive, is fol- 
lowed by the accusative of the object, and the neuter 
verb est by the nominative. 

The pen. *Penna, ae,/. 

The ribbon. Taenia, ae,f. ; fascia, ae, y. 

The table. Mensa, ae,/. 

The paper. *Charta, ae,/. 

The hat. | !5j! us ' i '. m "> Af' P £ S T' f 

( *rileum, i, n. {Nam. & Ace.) 

The sugar Saccharum, i, n. (Norn. & ^4cc.) 

ryi i, ( Sal,* ^/en. salis, m., ace. salem. 

( Sal, gen. salis, n., ace. srd. 

C. Obs. Words of the neuter gender have the nom- 
inative, accusative, and vocative, singular and plural, 
always alike. 

Mnsc. Fern. Kent. 

( Nom. mens mea 



My. 



meum. 



| Ace. meum media meum. 

Masc. Fern. Neut. 

( Nom. turn tud . tuum. 



V \V M V'|Acc. fwwm 2wam Zww». 

D. Rule. Adjectives and adjective pronouns agree 
with their substantives in gender, number, and case. 
Thus : — 

My sugar. Meum saccharum (Nom. & Ace). 



My hat. 



Nom. pileus mens (in.), pileum meum («.)< 
Ace. pileum meum, or meum pileum. 



, t r j Nom. mea penna, or penna mea. 

y P * i Ace. meam pennam, or pennam meam. 

■y i, \ Nom. sal tuum (or m. tiius). 

lour salt. | Acc> sg j tiium} o/ , tiium gaL 

Have you my hat? Habesne meum pileum? 

xt o- T i i j. ( Vero, ddmine, pileum tiium ha- 

les, Sir, I have your hat. ■> , J ' x 

' ' ^ ( beo. 

Have you my ribbon ? Habesne taeniam meam ? 

1 have your ribbon. Habeo tiiam taeniam. 

demonstrative pronoun, by unns, one, aliquis, some one, &c. But ordinarily the 
distinctions expressed by our articles must be mentally supplied from the con- 
text. — Tbe learner will also notice the omission of the pronouns ego, tu, 
which tbe Latin language employs only for the sake of emphnsis or contrast. 

* The substantives pileus and sal have two form?, i. e. the masculine and 
neuter, without any difference of signification. 



10 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 3. 

Estne tibi 



TT ,, ( Estne tibi pcnna? 

Have vou the pen i A TT , „ K Q 

1 | Habesne pennain ? 

j Est mi'hi penna. 

( Habeo pennam. 



I have the 



pen. 



Exercise 1. 



Have you the table? — Yes, Sir, I Lave the table. — Have you 
my table ? — I have your table. — Have you your pen ? — I have my 
pen. — Have you the sugar ? — I have the sugar. — Have you my 
sugar ? — I have your sugar — Have you the paper ? — I have the 
paper. — Have you your paper ? — I have my paper. — Have you 
the salt ? — I have the salt. — Have you my salt ? — I have your salt. 



Lesson III. — pensum tertium. 

OF THE SECOND DECLENSION. 

A. The second declension comprises all substantives 
and adjectives which form their genitive in l. The ter- 
minations of the nominative are us (generally mascu- 
line, sometimes feminine), cr, \r (masculine),* and um 
(neuter). Examples : — 

Meus domiims, m., my master. Liber tiius, m., your booh. 



Nom 


. my master metis dominus 


your hook liber ttius 


Gen 


of my 


master mei do mini 


of your booh libri tfii 


DAT. 


to my 


master meo domino 


to your booh libro tiio 


Acc. 


my master meum dominilm 


your booh libriim tutim 


Voc. 


my 


master mif domine 


your booh liber tiie 


Abl. 


tvith my master meo domino. 


with your booh libro tuo. 






Saccharum bonum, n., 


good sugar. 




Nom. 


the good sugar 


saccharum bonum 




Gen. 


of the good sugar 


sacchari boni 




Dat. 


to the good sugar 


saccharo bono 




Acc. 


the good sugar 


saccharum bonum 




Yoc. 


good sugar 


saccharum bonum 




Abl. 


with the good sugar 


saccharo bono. 



* To these must be added one adjective in v.r, viz. saiur, saiura, sat&rum, 
sated, satisfied. 

t This vocative is sometimes meus and sometimes ml, after the analogy of 
proper names in ius, which have always i, as, Virgillus, Viryili; Horatius, 
Horatl; so also fUiu$,f~d~i; geniics, gerii. 



LESS 



ON 3.] 



THE SECOND DECLENSION. 



11 



Which (of many)? 

Which (of two)? 

Good. 

Great, large, big. 

Bad. 

Bad, i. e. worthless. 
Beautiful, fine. 



My good sugar. 
Your bad sugar. 



Like dominus decline pileus, pannus, equus, ccdceus, and all nouns 
and adjectives of this declension which end in us. After the man- 
ner of liber, decline ager, culler, fiber, mdgister, &c. ;* like saccha- 
vurn, all neuters in urn, as aurum, cdrlum, lignum, plumbum, &e. 
(Cf. Lesson IV.) 

Bemark 1. The final i of the genitive of this declension, and of 
Latin words generally, is long; except in vuhi, tibl, sibl, where it is 
common ( i ) . 

2. The final o of the dative and ablative singular of this declen- 
sion is always long. But in Latin words generally it is common, as 
scrmo, amo, htibeo. 

Masc. Fern. Neut. 
Qul(s), quae, quod or quid. 
Quern, qucim, quod or quid. 
Uter, utra, utriim. 
Utriim, utram, utrum* 
Bonus, a, iim. 
Bonum, am, um. 
Magnus, a, urn. 
Magnum, am, iim. 
Mains, a, um. 
Malum, am, iim. 
Vilis, vilis, vile. 
Vilem, vilem, vile. 
• Nequam (indeclinable). \ 
fNoM. Pulcher, pulchra, pulchriim. 
■} Ace. Pulchriim, pulchram, pulchriim. 
(Also: — Formosus, a, um 
j Nom. Turpis, turpis, turpe, 
I Ace. Turpem, turpem, turpe. 
Saccharum meum bdnum (Nom. & Ace.) 
Saccharum tuum vile (nequam). 
The fme table (pa- ( Nom. Mensa (charta, taenia) pulchra. 

per, ribbon). ( Ace. Mensam (chartam, taeniam) pulchram. 
The ugly hat j Nom. Pileus (liber, sal ) turpis. 

(book, salt). { Ace. Pileum (librum, salem) turpem. 
Which hat? 'Which ( Nom. Quis pileus ? Quae % charta ? 
paper? (Ace. Quem pileum? Quam chartam? 

Which sugar ? \ Q u ?f "T I S Nm l & , A \ C,) 

° I Quid sacchan ? (Nom. & Ace.) 



Nom. 

Ace. 
j Nom. 
(Ace. 

Nom. 

Ace- 

Nom. 
cc. 

Nom. 

Ace. 
( Nom. 
i Ace. 
Or:- 



(N( 



* Some nouns (and adjectives) in er retain the e in the genitive, and have 
eri instead of ri, as gener, generi, a son-in-law ; piier, -eri, a boy ; liber, -eri, 
free, &c._ — Vir, a man, has viri, and so its compounds, as decemvir, -viri; 
levir, -viri. 

t Malm is said of persons, and is morally bad ; vilis chiefly of things 
worthless ; nequam of persons and things both. 

J Diphthongs receive the accent upon the second vowel. 



12 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 4. 

B. Obs. The interrogative quod is always used adjectively, and 
agrees with its noun in gender, number, and case , quid is more like 
the English whatf and is either used independently or has its noun 
in the genitive. — The masculine which ? is more commonly qui than 
guts when a substantive is expressed with it. 

Have you good sugar ? Estne ti'bi saccharum bdnum ? 

v o. ti , ( Sane, ddmine, est nu'hi saccharum 

Yes, Sir, I have good sugar. j bdnum. 

Have you the fine ribbon ? Habesne taeniam piilchram ? 

I have the fine ribbon. Habeo taeniam piilchram. 

to-, • i t , T C Qui est tibi pi'leus ? 

\\ Inch hat have you? -I ^ , r 

J I Quern pileum habes i 

I have my ugly hat. Pileum meum tiirpem habeo. 

1V1 • i -i u i 'j \ Quae est ti'bi taenia? 

\\ Inch ribbon have vou i ■{ n ' fi.- A '' » o 

I Quam habes taeniam i 

I have your fine ribbon. Taeniam tiiam piilchram* habeo- 

Exercise 2. 
Have you the fine hat ? — Yes, Sir, I have the fine hat. — Have 
you my bad hat ? — I have your bad hat. — Have you the bad salt ? 

— I have the bad salt. — Have you your good salt ? — 1 have my 
good salt. — Which salt have you ? — I have your good salt. — 
Which sugar have you? — I have my good sugar. — Have you my 
good sugar? — I have your good sugar. — Which table have you? 

— I have the fine table. — Have you my fine table ? — I have your 
fine table. — Which paper have you ? — I have the bad paper. — 
Have you my ugly paper '? — I have your ugly paper. — Which bad 
hat have you ? — I have my bad hat. — Which fine ribbon have 
you ? — I have your fine ribbon. — Have you my fine pen ? — I 
have your fine pen. 



Lesson IY. — PENSUM QUARTUM. 
OE THE THIRD DECLENSION. 

A. Substantives and adjectives of the third declen- 
sion have their genitive in is. The terminations of the 
nominative are numerous, some ending in one of the 
vowels a, e, i, o, y, and others in one of the consonants 
c, (d), /, w, r, s, t, x. This declension comprises nouns 
of every gender, 

* In writing his exercises, the learner should be careful to select the proper 
case and gender of the adjectives, which must always correspond with that of 
the nouns with which they are to be connected. In this and the following 

lessons, the nominative and accusative are the only cases used. 



LESSON 4.] 



THE THIRD DECLENSION. 



13 



Nouns ending in a, e, i, ?/, c, Z,* and t are neuter. 

Nouns in o, or, os, and eus are generally masculine, but sometimes 
of-other genders. 

Those in as, ans, es, is, ys, bs, ns, and ps are generally feminine, 
sometimes masculine. 

Those in er and n are masculine and neuter. 



Lapis, ?n., a stone. 



Vestis, f, a garment. 



Now. 


a stone 


lapis 


the garment 


vestis 


Gen. 


of a stone 


lapidis 


of the garment 


vestis 


Dat. 


to a stone 


lapidi 


to the garment 


vest! 


Ace. 


a stone 


lapidem 


the garment 


vestem 


Voc. 


stone 


lapis 


the garment 


vestis 


Abl. 


with a stone 


lapide. 


with the garment veste. 


Q 


mis, m. &/.,t the dog. 


*TibiFile, n., the stocking. 


Nom. 


the dog 


canis 


the stocking 


tibiale 


Gen. 


of the dog 


cams 


of the stocking 


tibialis 


Dat. 


to the dog 


cam 


to the stocking 


tibial! 


Ace. 


the dog 


canem 


the stocking 


tibiale 


Voc. 


dog 


canis 


stocking 


tibiale 


Abl. 


with the dog 


cane. 


ivith the stocking tibiali.J 




Sartor, m., the tailor. 


Caput, n., the head. 


Nom. 


the tailor 


sartor 


the head 


caput 


Gen. 


of the tailor 


sartons 


of the head 


capitis 


Dat. 


to the tailor 


sartori 


to the head 


capltl 


Ace. 


the tailor 


sartorem 


the head 


caput 


Voc. 


tailor 


sartor 


the head 


caput 


Abl. 


ivith the tailor 


sartore. 


with the head 


capite. 


Frater, m., the brother. 


Sal, m. & n. 


the salt. 


Nom. 


the brother 


frater 


the salt 


sal neut. 


Gen. 


of the brother 


fratris 


of the salt 


sails 


Dat. 


to the brother 


fratri 


to the sedt 


sail 


Ace. 


the brother 


fratrem 


the salt 


salem, sal 


Voc. 


brother 


frater 


salt 


sal 


Abl. 


with the brother fratre. 


with the salt 


sale or -I. 



* Nouns in I are generally neuter, but sometimes masculine. 

t Nouns which are sometimes masculine and sometimes feminine, according 
to the context, are said to be of the common gender. So adolescens and juvenls, 
m. & f., a young man or woman ; conjux, m. & f., a husband or a wife ; 
infans, m. & f., an infant ; and a number of others. Nouns of which the 
gender is unsettled are said to be of the doubtful gender; as dies, m. & f., 
a day ; penus, m., f., & n., provisions. 

\ Neuters ending in e, dl, and dr have I in the ablative instead of e ; as 

2 



14 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 4. 

Remark. The final e of the ablative of the third declension is 
always short, and the final i long. 

Masc. Fem. Neut. 
j- (Nom. Is ea id. 

| Ace. Eiim earn id. 

B. Obs. The pronoun is, ea, id must be put in the 
me c 
stands. 



same case and gender as the substantive for which it 



Not: no. Non; non vera, fmnime. 

I have not. Non habeo. 

No, Sir. Non (minlme) vero, ddrnine. 

Have you the table ? Habesne mensam ? 

AT c- t -i -,_ , ( Mmime, ddmine: (earn) non habeo. 

No, Sir, I have it not. ■< A t- i m - i - ' ~ 

( jN'on habeo, clomine, non. 

Have you the hat ? An habes pileum ? 

No, Sir, I have it not. Mi'nime, ddmine ; (aim) non habeo. 

Have you the sugar ? Num habes saccharum ? 

I have it not. Non habeo. 

D. Obs. The English idiom requires here id non 
habeo. In Latin, however, the pronoun is, ea, id is 
frequently omitted, when it would have to stand in 
the same case as the no an to which it relates. 

The coat. *Toga, ae, f. 
The cloth. Pannus, i, m. 

The horse. Equus, i, m. 

The shoe. *Calceus, i, m. 
The thread. Fllum, i, n. 

The candlestick. Candelabrum, i, n. 

The wood. Lignum, i, n. 

The leather. Cdrlum, i, n. 

The lead. Plumbum, i, n. 

The gold. Aurum, i, n. 

Of. e, ex. 

E. Obs. The preposition e or ex is followed by the 
ablative. E can be put before consonants only, ex be- 
fore vowels and consonants both. 

Of gold. Ex aiiro, aureus, a, urn. 

Of cloth. E panno. 

mare, marl ; animal, ammall ; calcar, calcarl. Except sell, far, baccar, jubar, 
h'par, and nectar, which retain the e. 



LESSON 4.] 



THE TIITRD DECLENSION. 



15 



F. Obs. The materia 
ma~y either be expressed 
tive with e or ex, or by 
Thus: — 

Wooden or of wood. 

Paper — of paper. 

Leather — of leather. 

Leaden — of lead. 

Linen — of linen. 

Stone — of stone. 
Pretty. 
The paper hat. 

The wooden table. 

The linen (thread) stocking. 
The golden candlestick. 

The horse of stone. 
The golden ribbon. 
The cloth coat. 
Have you the paper hat ? 



Have you the stone table ? 
I have it not. 



of which anything is made 
by the ablative of a substan- 
means of an adjective in ens. 



Ligneus, a, um. 

Chartaceus, a, um. 

Scorteus, a, um, or e corio. 

Plumbeus, a, um, or e plumbo. 

Linteus, a, um. 
C Lapideus, a, um. 
\ Saxeus, a, um. 

( Bellus, a, um. 

\ Venustus, a, um. 

Nom. Pileus chartaceus. 

Ace. Pileum chartaceum. 
( Nom. Mensa lignea. 
\ Ace. Mensam ligneam. 

Nom. & Ace. Tibial e hnteum. 

Nom. & Ace. Candelabrum aure- 
^ um or ex aiiro. 
( Nom. Equus lapideus. 
\ Ace. Equum lapideum. 
j Nom. Taenia aiirea. 
\ Ace. Taeniam aiiream. 
j Nom. Toga e # panno. 
\ Ace. Tdgam e panno. 

Num habes pileum chartaceum ? 

Eum non habeo, ddmine, non. 

Non, ddmine ; eum non habeo. 

An habes mensam lapideam ? 

(Earn) non habeo. 



OF THE GENITIVE OF THE THIRD DECLENSION. 

G. From the paradigms of this lesson it will be 
perceived, that substantives of this declension vary con- 
siderably as to the manner, in which they assume the 
characteristic termination of the genitive. The follow- 
ing rules are intended to give the learner some insight 
into the extent of this variation.! 

1. Nouns in a change a into Ms, as poema, poematis, n., a poem. 

2. Nouns in e change e into is, as cubile, cubllis, n., a couch. 

* Prepositions before their cases are not accented. 

f These rules, though not directly connected with the exercises of this 
lesson, are yet recommended to the careful attention of the student. 



16 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSOX 4. 

3. Those in i* are generally indeclinable, but sometimes have 
itos, as kydromeli, hgdromelitos, n. , mead. 

4. Those in y add os, as misy, misyos, n., vitriol. 

5. commonly becomes orris, as sermo, sermonis^ m., speech. But 
do and go become dims and gtms, as grando, grandinis, f., hail; origo, 
origims, f., origin.f 

6. Nouns in c, d, I, n simply add is, as Jialec, lulled*, n. & f., 
a sort of pickle ; David, Davidts, m., a man's name; cubital, cubitcllis, 
n., a cushion ; ren, renis, m., the reins.J 

7. Those in ar, er, or, and ur commonly add likewise is, as nectar, 
nectdris, n., nectar; anser, anseris, m., a goose; lector, lectoris, in., 
a reader; sulphur, sulphuris, n., sulphur.§ 

8. Those in as generally change as into citis, as Veritas, veritdtis, 
f., truth. || 

9. The only nouns in aes are aes, n., brass, and praes, m., bonds- 
man, which have aera and praedis. 

10. Nouns in aus have audit, as faws, laudis, £, praise; fraus, 
fraudis. f., fraud. 

11. Those in es generally change es into is, as fames, famis, f., 
hunger; rupes, rupis, f., a rock; but sometimes into ec/Is, itis, or 
em, as Jtaeres, liaeredis, m., an heir; mlZes, m~ditis,m., a soldier; Ceres, 
Cererls, f., the goddess Ceres. 

12. Nouns in is have commonly is, as apis, is, f., a bee; oris, 
is, f., a sheep ; but sometimes also eris, mis, itis, or idis, as pulcis, 
pulveris, m., dust; sanguis, sanguinis, m., blood; lapis, lapidis, m., a 
stone; Quiris, Quiritis, in., a Roman. — Semis, in., one half, has se~ 
missis. 

13. Those in os change os into otis, as sacerdos, -Otis, m., a priest; 
nepos, -otis, m., a grandson ; but also into odis, ois, and om, as 
custos, -odis, m., a keeper; iitros, -ois, m., a hero; ros, roris, m , 
dew.f 

14. The termination ws becomes oris, eris, uris, udis Cutis'), or odis, 
as corpus, -oris, n., a body; o/jws, -eWs, n., a work; crus, cruris, n., 

* Nouns in i and y are Greek, and so are their genitives ilos and yos. 

t A number of other nouns in o have likewise inis, as /<()mo, a man ; nemo, 
nobody ; Apollo, Sec. — Cdro, flesh, f., has cartas, aud Anio, m., the name of 
a river, Anienis. 

% But lae, n., miik, has lactis, and those in men have minis, as numen, 
numinis, n., the deity. Greek nouns in on have onis and o«^"s, as icon, 
iconis, f., an image ; Acheron, -ontis, m., name of a river. 

§ But those in her and ter have oris and Ms, as October, Octobris; 2)dl£r, 
p'atris, m., a father. Some in ur have oris, as e£«r, e&om, n., ivory, &c. — 
Jecar, n., the liver, has jecuris or jecindris, and /ir/jar, n., the liver, hepatis 
or hepdtos ; cor, n., the heart, has cordis; iter, n., a journey, itlneris, and 
Jupiter, m., Jd»is. 

|| Greek nouns in as have cwrfis and &Zzs (or oc/os), as /Ttyfls, gigantis, m., a 
giant ; lampas, lampadis or lampados, f, a lamp. Other exceptions are : r7s, 
oss?5. m., a coin ; mas, maris, m., a male ; vds, vctdis, m., a surety, and yds, 
vasis, m., a vessel. 

1F os. n., the mouth, has <~m, but os, n., a bone, has ossis. The genitive of 
bos, m. & f, an ox or cow, is bach. 



LESSON 5.] DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 17 

the leg; incus, -udis, f., an anvil; stilus, -utis, f„, safety; trXpus, -odis, 

m., a tripod. 

T5. Greek nouns in ens have eos, as Orpheus, Orpheos, &c 

1G. Nouns in Is, ns, and rs change s into tis or dis, as jsw/s, -/«, f., 

a sort of pap; pars, -tis, f., a part; glans, -dis, f., any kernel-fruit; 

serpens, -tis, f., a serpent 

1 7. Those in bs, ps, and ms have 6«.9, pis, and mis, as wr&s, -5w, f., 
a city; stirps, -pis, m. & f., offspring; hiems, hiemis, f., winter.* 

18. The only nouns in t are caput, capitis, m., the head, and its 
compounds, occiput, -itis, &c. 

19. Nouns in x change this letter into cis or gis, as vox, vocis, 
f., the voice; calix, calicis, m., a cup; ?*ex, ra/w, m., a Icing; codex, 
codlcis, m., a book. — But nix, f., snow, has mm; nox, f., night, 
noctis ; senex, aclj , old, sem's or senicis ; and siipellex, f. , furniture, 
swpellectilis. 

Exercise 3. 

Have you the wooden table ? — No, Sir, I have it not. — Which 
table have you ? — I have the stone table. — Have you my golden 
candlestick ? — I have it not. — Which stocking have you ? — I have 
the thread stocking. — Have you my thread stocking ? — I have not 
your thread stocking. — Which coat have you ? — I have my cloth 
coat. — Which horse have you ? — I have the wooden horse. — 
Have you my leathern shoe ? — I have it not. — Have you the 
leaden horse V — I have it not. — Have you your good wooden 
horse ? — I have it not. — Which wood have you ? — I have your 
good wood. — Have you my good gold ? — I have it not. — Which 
gold have you ? — I have the good gold. — Which stone have you ? 
— I have your fine stone. — Which ribbon have you ? — I have 
your golden ribbon. — Have )ou my fine dog ? — I have it. — 
Have you my ugly horse ? — I have it not. 



Lesson Y. — pensum quintum. 

OE THE DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 

A. Adjectives are inflected like substantives of the 
first, second, and third declensions. Those in us, a, um 
and er, «, um belong to the first and second declension ; 
those in er, is, e, those in is, is, e, and all the adjectives 
of one termination, to the third. 

* But the adjective caelebs, single, has caelibis, and the compounds of ceps 
have ipis, as princeps, -xpis, the foremost. The genitive of anceps, doubtful, is 
ancvpUis. 

B 2* 



13 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[lesson 5. 



B. Some adjectives have a special termination for 
each of the three genders (e. g. bonus, a, um, deer, dens, 
acre), some have one common form for the masculine 
and feminine (e. g. viUs, m. & f., vile, n.), and others 
have but one ending (in the nominative singular) for 
every gender (e. g. felix, dives, &c). The following 
paradigms exhibit the declension of bonus, pulcher, and 
turpis, in the singular. 



Bonus, bona, bonum, good. 







Masc. 


Fern. 


Neut. 


Nom. 


the good 


bonus 


bona 


bontim 


Gen. 


of the good 


bom 


bonae 


bonl 


Dat. 


to the good 


bono 


bonae 


bono 


Ace. 


the good 


bonum 


bonam 


bontim 


Voc. 


the good 


bone 


bona 


bontim 


Abl. 


ivith the good 


bono 


bona 


bono. 




Pulcher, pulchra, pulchrum 


,* beautiful, 








Masc. 


Fern. 


Neut. 


Nom. 


the beautiful 


pulcher 


pulchra 


pulchrum 


Gen. 


of the beautiful 


pulchri 


pulchrae 


pulchri 


Dat. 


to the beautiful 


pulchro 


pulchrae 


pulchro 


Ace. 


the beautiful 


pulchrum 


pulchrum 


pulchrum 


Voc. 


the beautiful 


pulcher 


pulchra 


pulchrum 


Abl. 


by the beautiful 


pulchro 


pulchra 


pulchro. 




Turpis, 


turpis, turpe, 


ugly. 








]\[asc. 


Fern. 


Neut. 


Nom. 


the ugly 


turpis 


turpis 


turpe 


Gen. 


of the ugly 


turpis 


turpis 


turpis 


Dat. 


to the ugly 


turpi 


turpi 


turpi 


Ace. 


the ugly 


turpein 


turpem 


turpe 


Voc. 


the ugly 


turpis 


turpis 


turpe 


Abl. 


with the ugly. 


turpi f 


turpi 


turpi. 



Like bonus decline mollis, a, um; mens, a, um ; formosiis, a, urn, &c. 
— Like pulcher : aeger, sick; integer, entire; niger, black; jnger, slow, 
&c. — Like turpis : brevis, short ; deformis, deformed ; dulcXs, sweet ; 
omms, all ; uMis, useful, &c. 



* Some adjectives of this declension retain the e of the root-termination, 
e. g. tener, tenera, tenerum; miser, misera, miserum. But the majority reject it. 

T Adjectives of the third declension have e or i in the ablative singular, but 
those whose neuter ends in e have i only. 



LESSON 5.] DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 



19 



The trunk. 
,-- The button. 
The money. 
The cheese. 
The silver. 
Of silver. 
The baker. 

The neighbor. 

Anything, something. 
Nothing. 

Have you anything? 

I have something. 

Have you anything ? 

I have nothing. 

Hungry, 
Thirsty. 

Sleepy. 

Tired. 

Are you hungry ? 
I am hungry. 
Are you thirsty 
I am thirsty. 
I am not thirsty. 

Are you sleepy ? 

I am sleepy. 

I am not sleepy. 

Are you tired ? 

I am tired. 
I am not tired. 



*Biscus, i, m„ area, ae,/". 
*Orblculus fibulatoiius, i, m. 

Pecunia, ae, f. 

Caseus, i, m. 

Argentum, i, n. 

Argenteus, a, um (Adj.). 

Pistor, oris, m. 

Vicinus, i, m. 

Proximus, i, m 

Aliquid, quidquam, nonnihil. 
Nihil (indecl.); nilvdum, i, n. 

Estne tibi aliquid ? 

Habesne (tii) aliquid ? 

Est mihi nonnihil. 

Habeo aliquid. 
^ Niim quidquam * habes ? 
1 Niim est tibi quidquam ? 
( Est mihi nihil. 
| Nihil rei habeo. 

Esiiriens, tis. 

Sltlens,f tis. (Vide Lesson YI. B.) 

Somniculosus, a, iim. 

Cupidus (a, um) somni. 

Pessiis (defessus), a, iim. 

Esiirisne ? 

(Ego vero) esurlo. 

Sitisrie ? 

(Ego vero) sitio. 

Non sitio. 
\ Esne tii somniculosus ? 
\ An es cupidus sdmni ? 

Sum cupidus sdmni. 

Non sum cupidus sdmni. 

Ego somniculosus non siim. 

Esne tu. fessus ? 

ISJum es fessus ? 

Sum fessus. 

Non siim fessus. 

C. Rule. When a substantive expresses the relation 
of property or possession, it is put in the genitive; as, 

* Quidquam is generally put, when the sentence contains a negation (either 
expressed or implied), a condition, comparison, &c, and also in connection 
with the particle^ vix, scarcely, and sine, without. (Compare Lesson VI. C) 

f Emi-k-ns and sitiens, properly the present participles of the verbs esiirio, 
I am hungry, and sitio, I am thirsty. When hungry and thirsty are in the pred- 
icate of the sentence, it is necessary to use the verbs, and not the participles. 



20 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 5. 

The dog of the baker. Canis pistons (Nbm.). 

The baker's dog. Pistoris canem (Ace.)* 

The coat of the tailor. Tdgam sartoris (Ace). 

The tailor's coat. Sartoris toga (Xom.). 

-,, , ,, , ( Charta mei fratrisf (Xom.). 

My brothers paper. ^ P ., . ,. ,,, ' v //( < 

J x l I Iratns mei chartam (Ace). 

-» r . 1 , , Ti, \ Mei vicini sal bdnum. 

My neighbors o-ood salt. -I r,.i -, - • , . 

° ° ) Sal bonum vicini mei. 



The old bread. 



\ Nom. Panis vetulus. 

( Ace. Panem vetulum. 
The pretty dog. Canem bellum (venoistum). 

The silver ribbon. Taeniam argenteam (Ace.). 

D. Rule. Adjectives (and the adjective pronouns 
mens, tuns, &c.) may stand either before or after their 
substantives ; but when the substantive is a monosyl- 
lable, the adjective comes always last. 

Have you the neighbor's good salt ? Num habes sal bdnum vicini ? 

I have it not. Non habeo. 

Have you my brother's silver can- An habes fratris mei candelabrum 
dlestick ? argenteum ? 

Exercise 4. 

Have you the leathern trunk ? — I have not the leathern trunk ? 

— Have you my pretty trunk ? — I have not your pretty trunk. 

— Which trunk have you ? — I have the wooden trunk. — Have 
you my old button ? — I have it not — Which money have you ? 

— I have the good money. — Which cheese have you ? — I have 
the old cheese. — Have you anything ? — I have something. — Have 
you my large dog V — I have it not. — Have }-ou your good gold ? 

— I have it. — Which dog have you ? — I have the tailor's dog ? 

— Have you the neighbor's large dog ? — I have it not. — Have 
you the dog's golden ribbon? — No, Sir, I have it not. — Which 
coat have you '? — I have the tailor's good coat. — Have you the 
neighbor's good bread ? — I have it not. — Have you my tailor's 
golden ribbon ? — I have it. — Have you my pretty dog's ribbon ? — 
1 have it not. — Have you the good baker's good horse ? — I have it. 

— Have you the good tailor's horse ? — I have it not. — Are you 
hungry '? — I am hungry. — Are you sleepy ? — I am not sleepy. 

— Which candlestick have you ? — I have the golden candlestick 
of my good baker. 

* The common rule is that the genitive (and in general every word governed) 
should be put before the word governing it. This, however, is bv no means 
invariable, and the learner may safely use either of the formulas in the sense of 
their English equivalents. 

_ f Instead of the possessive genitive, the Romans sometimes emplov an ad- 
jective; as, ddmus paterna for domwpatris, the father's house ; homo ingeniosus 
for homo ingenii, a man of talent, &o. 



LESSON 6.] DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 



21 



Lesson VI. 



PENSUM SEXTUM. 



A. The adjectives in er, is, e are but few in num- 
ber. The nominative masculine has sometimes Is 
instead of er. 





Acer or acris, acris, acre, shar 


p. 




Masc. 


Fern. 


Neut. 


Nom. 


acer or acris 


acris 


acre 


Gen. 


acris 


acris 


acris 


Dat. 


acrl 


acrl 


acrl 


Ace. 


acrem 


acrem 


acre 


Voc. 


acer or acris 


acris 


acre 


Abl. 


Fieri 


acrl 


acrl. 



So decline alacer or alacris, cheerful ; celeber or Celebris, famous ; 
ce/er or ceteris, swift ; scduber or salubris, wholesome. 



ADJECTIVES OF ONE TERMINATION. 

5. Adjectives of one termination do not differ essen- 
tially from other words of the third declension, except 
that they may have either e or l in the ablative. The 
present participle in ns is included in this class. Exam- 
ples : — 

Sitiens, -ntis, thirsty. 

Masc. & Fern. Neut. 
sitiens 
sitientis 
sitienti 

sitientem sitiens 
sitiens 
sitiente or i. 

So decline felix, fellcls, happy ; pauper, pauperis, poor ; anceps, 
ancipitis, doubtful ; sollers, sollertis, clever ; prudens, prudentis, wise ; 
amans, amantis, loving, &c. 

REMARKS ON THE ABLATIVE. 

1, Participles in ans or ens have always e in the ablative, when 
they are used as participles proper or as substantives ; as, sole oriente, 
when the sun rises ; infans, abl. infante, the infant. But when used 
as adjectives, they have rather l than e. 



Dives, -vitis, rich. 


Vetus, -teris, old. 




Jlasc. & Fern. Neut. 


Masc. & Fern. Neut. 


Nom. 


dives 


vettis 


Gen. 


divitis 


veteris 


Dat. 


cliviti 


veteri 


Ace. 


divitem dives 


veterem vetus 


Voc. 


dives 


vetus 


Abl. 


divite.* 


vetere or i. 



* See Remark 5. 



22 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 6. 

2. Comparatives have rather e than l, as major, majore, greater, &c. 

3. Praesens, present, when said of things, has I; when said of per- 
sons, e. 

4. Proper names derived from adjectives have always e, as Clemens, 
Clemente. 

5. Those that have e exclusively are pauper, senex, princeps, and 
the majority of those in es, as dtves, sospes, d'eses, pubes, impubes, and 
super stes. 

Axl - dl • 7 ( Aliquid (quidquam, nomuJul) barium. 

Am it una or sometime/ good. ■< , 7 J >. , y • 7 x ~ .,„,( lw . 

J J J J \ Altquid (quidquam, nonmhd) bom. 

A x , 7 . , .7 . 7 ( Nihil bdnum. 

Nothing or wo* anything good, j ^^ & ^_ 

Something bad (worthless). Aliquid vile (nequam). 
Nothing bad (worthless). Nihil vile (nequanij. 

O. OZ>s. The partitive genitive of neuter adjectives 
after aliquid, nihil, &c. can only be used when the ad- 
jective is of the second declension. Thus we can only- 
say aliquid vile, turpe, &c, and not aliquid turpis ; but 
indifferently either aliquid bdnum or aliquid boni. 



Have you anything 



( Estne tibi aliquid bdnl ? 
\ Habesne aliquid bdnum ? 



T i i.i • i i \ Non est mini quidquam vile. 

1 have nothing bad. ■{ AT ,, M , i m 

° (Nihil nequam ha beo. 

tt ,i- i o ( Niim est tibi quidquam tiirpe ? 

Have you anything ugly ? ^ r ,,,_,,. H . -, /, ~ * 

J J ° ° ^ ( An habes aliquid turpe t 



I have nothing ugly 



\ Non est mihi quidquam tiirpe. 
\ Nihil tiirpe habeo. 



What ? Quid ? 

What We you V }$£££?' 

wi „+ i „ ^ ^ io ^ Quid est tibi bdnl ? 

What have you good i \ pt ,, , ,,_ -, , . 

17 ta ( Quid habes bonum ? 

I have the good bread. \ ^ dbeo h6 ? um **"»"■ 

° ( JDonum panem habeo. 



That or $e one. 



Masc. Fem. Neut. 
j" Nom. itte ilia illud. 

\ Ace. ilium Mam illud. 



D. Obs. The English that, or the one, is, among the 
later Latin authors, expressed by the demonstrative ille, 
ilia, illud. By the earlier classical writers, however, the 
noun is either itself repeated or to be supplied from the 
context. 



LESSON C] DECLENSION OE ADJECTIVES. 23 



Which book Lave you ? Quern librum habes ? 

( Habeo ilium pistons. 
( Pistons librum hiibeo. 
^ Quod saccharum habes ? 
| Quid est tibi sacchaii ? 



I have that of the baker, 
"Which sugar have you ? 



\ Habeo lllud mei fratns. 
I have that of my brother. - f , ,-, • - ■. ~ «*.. 

J ( Est mihi saccharum tratris. 

Or. An. 

E. Obs. In double questions, the first member is 
introduced by utrum (whether) or by the enclitic -tie, 
and the second member by an (or). Thus : — 

. , • -, i o S utrum es fcssus an somniculosus ? 

Are you tired or sleepy i A -^ .* ff , , _ «■.* 

J lJ I Esne tu lessus an somniculosus i 

I am sleepy. Somniculosus sum. 

Have you my book or that of (% tne *** libermeus an , vlcim ? _ 
the neighbor ? 1 W ™ hllbes llbmm meum aw V1 " 

° * pirn f 

I have that of the neighbor. \ TT ,, 

° I Habeo ilium vicini. 

ti„ „^„ i^-^+i^ ( Utrum tibi est liber tiius an pisto- 

ilave you your hat or the i • o l 



cini 
Est mihi liber vicini. 



baker's 



you your nat or tne ) . ? 



ns 



Tiuimne librum habes dn pistoris ? 

Are you hungry or thirsty ? i f rum ds * ris f f iS ? 

^ ° J J ( Esunsne an sitis i 

I am hungry. EsiiriOo 

Exercise 5. 

Have you my book ? — I have it not. — Which book have you ? 

— I have my good book. — Have you anything ugly? — I have 
nothing ugly ? — I have something pretty. — Which table have you ? 

— I have the baker's. — Have you the baker's dog or the neigh- 
bor's ? — I have the neighbor's. — What have you? — I have 
nothing. — Have you the good or bad sugar ? — I have the good 

— Have you the neighbor's good or bad horse ? — I have the good 
(one).* — Have you the golden or the silver candlestick ? — I have 
the silver candlestick. — Have you my neighbor's paper, or that of 
my tailor ? — I have that of your tailor. — Are you hungry or 
thirsty ? — I am hungry, — Are you sleepy or tired ? — I am tired. 

— What have you pretty ? — I have nothing pretty. — Have you 
anything ugly ? — I have nothing ugly. — Have you the leather 
shoe ? — I have it not. — What have you good ? — I have the 
good sugar. 

* The words included in parentheses are not to be translated in these exer- 
cises. 



24 



LATIN GSA1MAR. 



[LESSON 7. 



Lesson VII. — pexsoi septimttm. 

OE THE FOUETH DECLENSION. 

A. The fourth declension comprises all substantives 
which form their genitive in us. The nominative sin- 
gular has two terminations, viz. us for masculine and 
feminine nouns, and u for neuters. Examples : — 

Fructus, m., the fruit. Cornii, n., the horn.] Domus, f., thehov.se. 



Nom. 

Gen. 
Dat. 

Ace. 
Yoc. 
Abl. 



fructus 

fructus 

fructui 

fruetiun 

fructus 

fructu. 



cornu 

comus 

cornu (cornui) 

coruii 

cornu 

cornu. 



domus 

domus or dorai* 

doniul or domo 

doraum 

domtis 

domo. 



Like fructus decline adltus, access ; cantus, a song ; currus. a char- 
iot ; ictus, a stroke ; motus, motion : rlsus, laughter ; sendtus, the 
senate ; sumptus, expense ; rictus, living. Also the feminines acus, 
a needle; man us, a hand; tribiis, a tribe, &c. — Like cornu decline 
gelu, ice ; genu, the knee ; veru, a spear ; toruiru, thunder. 

Remark. — The final v. of Latin words generally is long. 

r Estne tibi toga mea an sartoris ? 
Have you my coat or the tailor's ? < Ufa-cm habes tdgam meam an (il- 

( r lam) sartoris V 
T , ( Est mihl tiia. 

I have yours. | Tuam habeo. 



Mine. 

Yours. 



B. Obs. The possessive pronouns mens, tuns, situs, 
&c. may either be joined to nouns in the sense of the 
conjunctive my, your (thy), Ms, &c, or they may stand 
absolutely, like the English mine, yours (thine), his, &c. 
They are inflected like bonus, a, inn. (Cf. Lesson V.) 

Masc. Fem. Kent. 

iyn- CNom. htc Tiaec ltitc. 

\ Ace. hunc lianc Mc. 





Masc. 


Fern. 


Neufc 


( Nom. 


mens 


mea 


meum. 


"( Ace. 


meum 


meam 


nit am. 


<' Nom. 


tuiis 


id a 


tiium. 


"( Ace. 


Warn 


tUGJJl 


tiium. 



* The genitive dorai is only used in the sense of at home. The dative domvi 
is the more usual form; but the ablative of this irregular noun is always domo. 



LESSON 7.] EXERCISE SIXTH. 25 

Js this your hat ? fetne hie pileus tdus ? 

No, Sir, it is not mine, but yours. Minime, ddrulne, non est meus, 

sed tiius. 

Is this my ribbon ? !Num haec est taenia mea ? 

No, it is not yours, but mine. Non est tiia, sed mea. 

Is this your sugar ? An hoc est saccharum tiium ? 

It is not mine, but that of my Xon est meum, sed mei fratris. 
brother. 

The man. j Ylr,* ^n. viri m 

( Homo, mis, m. 6: J. 

fu„ ct:„\r , ( Baculum. i. n. 

JLne stick, cane. So-. - • 

( bcipio, onis. m. 

My brother. Frater meus, gen. fratris mei. 

The shoemaker. Sutor. oris. m. 

The merchant. Mercator, oris, m. 

The friend. } ^ l1 !' }> n . u 

^ ± amihans, is, m. 

Neither — nor. 



Nee — 


nee. 


Neque 
Neque 


— neque 

— nee. 



C. Obs. The disjunctive conjunction? nee and neque 
are used in the same sense, except that the former 
more frequently stands before consonants and the lat- 
ter before vowels. 

Have you the merchant's stick or Tenesnef baculum mercatoris an 

yours ? tiium ? 

I have neither the merchant's Nee mercatoris baculum ne'e tiium 

stick nor yours. teneo. 

Are you hungry or thirsty ? I £ tnim *™ *? f is ? 

( Esunsne an sins . 

I am neither hungry nor thirsty. Ego neque esiirlo nee sitio. 
Exercise 6. 

Have you your cloth or mine ? — I have neither yours nor mine. 

— I have neither my bread nor the tailor's. — Have you my stick or 
yours '? — I have mine. — Have you the shoemaker's shoe or the 
merchant's ? — I have neither the shoemaker's nor the merchant's. 

— Have you my brother's coat? — I have it not. — Which paper 
have you '? — I have your friend's. — Have you my dog or un- 
friend's ? — I have vour friend's. — Have vou mv thread stocking or 



* Vir is used with reference to the sex, and homo with reference to the 
species. 

t Teneo is properly " I hold," and may be used in these exercises for variety, 
especially where "to have" may signify "to hold in one's hand," or "to 
retain, keep." 

3 



26 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 8. 

my brother's ? — I have neither yours nor your brother's. — Have 
you my good baker's good bread or that of my friend ? — I have 
neither your good baker's nor that of your friend. — Which bread 
have you ? — I have mine. — Which ribbon have you ? — I have 
yours. — Have you the good or the bad cheese ? — I have neither 
the good nor the bad. — Have you anything ? — I have nothing. — 
Have you my pretty or my ugly dog ? — I have neither your pretty 
nor your ugly dog. — Have you my friend's stick ? — I have it not. 
— Are you sleepy or hungry ? — I am neither sleepy nor hungry. — 
Have you the good or the bad salt ? — I have neither the good nor 
the bad. — Have you my horse or the man's ? — I have neither yours 
nor the man's. — What have you ? — I have nothing fine. — Are you 
tired ? — I am not tired. 



Lesson VIII. — pensum octayum. 

OF THE FIFTH DECLENSION. 

A. Nouns of the fifth declension have their genitive 
in ei and the nominative in es. The fifth declension 
differs but slightly from the third, and is a mere modi- 
fication of it. Dies, m. & /., the day, res, /., a thing, 
and species,/., the appearance, are thus inflected: — 

No :.i. dies 

reT 

re! 

rem 

res 

re. 



Gex. die! 

Dat. die! 

Acc. diem 

Voc. dies 



Abl. die. 



species 

specie! 

specie! 

speciem 

species 

specie* 



So decline acies, f., the edge or point ; fticies, f , the face ; effigies, 
f., the image, effigy ; merldies, in., midday, noon ; spes, f, hope ; series, 
f., the series. 

Remark. — The e of the ablative of the fifth declension is always 
long. 

B. Ohs. Nouns of this declension are feminine, except dies, 
which in the singular is generally masculine and sometimes 
feminine,f but in the plural always masculine. Its compound, 
merldies, is masculine, and used in the singular only. 

* The e of the genitive and dative is long when a vowel precedes, but short 
after a consonant, e. g. aciei, faciei, &c, but spei, rei,jidei, Sec. 

t It is feminine when it denotes, 1) duration of time, e. g. diem perexiguam, 
integrant, (for) a very short day, an entire day ; 2) an appointed day, e. g. 
cerid (constitutd, dicta, &c.) die, on the appointed day. 



LESSON 8.] 



PHRASES. 



27 



The cork. 
The corkscrew. 

The umbrella. 

The boy. 
The Frenchman. 
The carpenter. 
The hammer. 
The iron. 
Of iron, iron. 
The nail. 
The pencil. 
The thimble. 
The coffee. 
The honey. 
The (sea) biscuit. 

The sweet biscuit. 



Have I? 

You have. 

What have I ? 

You have the carpenter's ham- J 
mer. ( 

Have I the nail ? ■] 

You have it. 

Have I (the) biscuit ? 

You have it. 

1 am right (correct). 

I am wrong (incorrect) . 

You are correct, wrong. 

I am right (i. e. morally in doing so). 

I am wrong (morally in doing so). 



* Embolus, i, m. 
*Instrumentum * (i, n.) embolis cx- 

trahendis. 
*Mummentum (i, n.) capitis pluvi- 
ale ; umbraculum,f i, n. 

Piier, eri, ?n. 
*Francogallus, i, m. 

Faber (ri, ?n.) tignarius. 

Malleus, i, m. 

Ferrum, i, n. 

Ferreus, a, urn. 

Claviis, i, m. 
*Stilus cerussatus, i, m. 
*Munimentum (i, n.) digiti. 
*Coftea, ae,/. 

Mel, gen. mellis, n. 

Panis nauticus (castrensis). 

Panis dulciarius, m. 

Buccellatum, i, n. 

Habeone ? Ecqiiid ego lidbeo f 

An (ego) Tidbeo ? Estne mihi? 

Habes. Tenes. Tibi est. 

Quid (ego) habeo (teneo) ? 

Quid est mihi ? 

Malleum flibri tignarii habes (tenes). 

Est tibi malleus ftlbri tignarii. 

Habeone clavum V 

Estne mihi clavus ? 

Habes. Est. 

An ego habeo panem castrensem 

(naiiticum) ? 
Estne mihi panis (die) castrensis ? 
Habes. Tibi est. 
Vere (recte) loquor. 
Erro. 

Recte loqueris, erras. 
Est mihi fas. 
Est mihi nefas.J 



* The Ancients having no term for such an instrument, it must be expressed 
by crrcumlocution. On the dative embolis extrahendis, '' for extracting corks," 
compare Lesson XXV., Obs. — The same remark applies to munimentum capi- 
tis pluviale (where pluviale is an adjective in e), to munimentum digiti, and to a 
host of other names of modern objects. In all the cases, we can only approxi- 
mate by description. 

t The word umbrciculvm (from umbra, shade) was used by the Ancients in 
the sense of our " parasol." 

t The expressions vere or recte loquor nnd erro have reference to language 
or opinions simply ; whereas fas and nefds involve the moral distinction of 
right and wrong in action or in speech. The latter phrases are often followed 
by an infinitive, as, Estne mihi fas (or licelne mihi) hoc facere ? Is it right for 



28 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 9. 

Am I right (i. e. correct) or wrong ? Rectene ldquor an erro ? 

You are neither right nor wrong. Xeque recte ldqueris, neque erras. 

Am I right (correct) ? Loqudrne recte ? 

You are correct. Vere (recte) ldqueris. 

Am I right (correct) ? Niiin ldquor vere ? 

No, vou are wrong. tmmo vero* erras. 

Am I right (morally) ? | &tae ^ ^ ? 

Is it right tor me i ) 

It is wrong. Est tibi nefas. 

Which biscuit have I ? Quod buccellatum habeo ? 

You have that of my brother. Fratris mei buccellatum habes. 

Exercise 7. 

Which dog have you ? — I have neither the baker's dog nor that 
of my friend. — Are you sleepy ? — I am not sleepy. — I am hungry. 

— You are not hungry. — Am I thirsty ? — You are not thirsty. — 
Have I the cork ? — No, sir, you have it not. — Have I the carpen- 
ter's wood ? — You have it not. — Have I the Frenchman's good 
umbrella ? — You have it. ■ — Have I the carpenter's iron nails or 
yours V — You have mine. — You have neither the carpenter's nor 
mine. — Which pencil have I ? — You have that of the Frenchman. 

— Have I your thimble or that of the tailor ? — You have neither 
mine nor that of the tailor. — Which umbrella have I ? — You have 
my good umbrella. — Have I the Frenchman's good honey ? — You 
have it not. — Which biscuit have I ? — You have that of my good 
neighbor. — Have you my coffee or that of my boy ? — I have that 
of your good boy. — Have you your cork or mine ? — I have neither 
yours nor mine. — What have you '? — I have my good brother's 
good pencil. — Am I right (correct) ? — You are right (correct). — 
Am I wrong (morally) ? — You are wrong. — You are not wrong. 

— Am I right or wrong ? — You are neither right nor wrong. — Am 
I hungry ? — You are hungry. — You are not sleepy. — You are 
neither hungry nor thirsty. — What have I good ? — You have nei- 
ther the good coffee nor the good sugar. — What have I ? — You 
have nothing. — What have vou ? — I have something beautiful. 



Lesson IX. — PENSUM NOXUM. 

of PROXOUXS. 

A. The pronouns of the Latin language are divid- 
ed into the following classes : — 1. Personal : ego, tit, 

me to do so ? Am I right in doing so ? lUud dlcere tibi nefas est, It is wrong 
for you to say so, You are wrong in sa}*ing so. Fas and nefas are both inde- 
clinable, like nihil. 

* Immo vero corresponds to the English "nay, rather," "nay, on the con- 
trary." 



LESSON 9.] PRONOUNS. 29 

sui (and ipse). 2. Demonstratives : hie, iste, ille, is. 
3. B^elatives : qui, quae, quod. 4. Possessives : mens, 
turn, suits, noster, vester. 5. Interrogatives : quis ? 
quid? qui, quae, quod? 6. Indefinite: aliquis, qiiis, 
quisquam. 7. Patrials : nostras, vestras, cujas. 

B. The personal pronouns ego, I, tu, thou, sui, of himself, 
of herself, of itself, are thus inflected : — 

Nom. I ego 

Gen. of me mei 

Dat. to me mihi or mi 

Ace. me me 

Yoc. ego 

Abl. with me me. 



thou tu | — 

of thee ttii : of himself fyc. siii 

to thee tibi to himself S?c. sib! 

thee te 

thou tu 

with thee te. 



himself fyc. se 



with himself fyc. se. 

Remark. — The suffix te is sometimes emphatically added to the 
nominative tu; as tute, thou thyself: and the suffix met in the same 
sense to all the cases of ego, tu, and sui; as egomet, tutemet, sulmet, I 
myself, &c. — So also meme, tete, sese, for me, te, se, in the accusa- 
tive and ablative singular. 

C. The Latin language has no pronoun of the third 
person corresponding in every respect to the English 
he, she, it, the termination of the verb being commonly 
deemed sufficient to indicate the relation of personality. 
But when perspicuity or emphasis requires a pronoun, 
one of the demonstratives hie, iste, ille (most commonly 
the latter) is used for the nominative, and the oblique 
cases of is, ea, id for the remaining cases. The pro- 
noun of the third person would thus be something like 
the following : — 









Masc. 


Fern. 


Neut. 


Nom. 


he, she, it 




ille 


ilia 


illud 


Gen. 


of him, of her, of it 




ejus 


ejus 


ejus (rei)* 


Dat. 


to him, to her, to it 




el 


ei 


el (rei) 


Ace. 


him, her, it 




eum 


earn 


id (illud) 


Voc. 


— — — ! 




— 


— 


— 


Abl. 


with him, with her, with it 


eo 


ea 


eo (ea re). 


D. 


The pronoun ipse, 


ipsa, 


ipsum may 


be joined to 



* The Romans are fond of employing the word res, " thing." instead of the 
neuter of adjectives and pronouns. This becomes necessary in cases where 
ambiguity as to gender would otherwise arise, as here in the genitive, dative, 
and ablative. So also cujus rei, cui rei, qua re, for cujus, &c. 

3* 



30 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 9. 



every case of ego, tu, and sni, with the force of the 
English self (myself, thyself, himself &c). 
is thus declined : — 



Its singular 





Masc. 


Nom. 
Gen. 


ipse 


Dat. 




Ace. 
Yoc. 
Abl. 


ipsum 

ipse 

ipso 



Fern. 

ipsa 

ipsfus ■ 

ipsi 

ipsam 

ipsa 

ipsa 



Neut. 
ipsum 



ipsum 
ipsum 
ipso. 



Thus: ego ipse (ipsa), I myself; tu ipse (ipsa), thou thyself; (ilk) 
ipse, he himself; mihimet ipsi, to myself; temet ipsum, thyself; sui 
ipsius, of himself. 

Have I the iron or the golden Ferreiimne clavum habeo, an aii- 

nail ? reum ? 

You have neither the iron nor iNeque ferreum habes clavum, ne- 

the golden nail. que aiireum. 



The sheep. 
The ram. 
The hen. 
The chicken. 
The ship. 
The bag (sack). 
The painter. 
The young man. 

The youth (lad). 



Ovis, is,/ _ 

Vervex, ecis, m. 

Gallina, ae,/. 

Pullus galllnaceus (gen. i), m. 

Navis, is,/'. 

Saccus, i, m. 

Pictor, oris, m. 

Juvenis, is, m. 
( Adolescens, tis, m. 
( Adolescentulus, i, m. 

E. The substantives ovis, navis, and juvenis are thus in- 
flected : — 

Kom. ovis navis juvenis 

Gen. ovis navis juvenis 

Dat. ovi navi juveni 

Ace. ovem navem or navim juvenem 

Voc. ovis navis juvenis 

Abl. ove. navi or nave. jiivene. 

F. Obs. The words navis, messis, and clavis have usually em in 
the accusative, sometimes im. The nouns febr is, pelvis, pupph, vestis, 
securis, and turris have often er im than em. Those which have reg- 
ularly im are: a) the substantives amussis, ravis, sitis, tussis, and vis; 



* The genitive ijislus and the dative ipsi are here intended for all the gen- 
ders. The same applies to all the subsequent paradigms. 



LESSON 9.] 



TUONOUNS. 



31 



b) a variety of norms and proper names derived from (lie Greek, as 
basis, jwcsis, paraphrasis, Osiris, Zeuxis, Ckarybdis, &c. 



^ Who ? 

Who has ? 

Who lias the trunk ? 

The man has the trunk. 
The man lias not the trunk. 
Who has it V 
The youth has it. 
The youth has it not. 

He has. 

He has the knife. 
He has not the knife. 
Has the man ? 



Has the painter 



Qiits ? Cut (with est) 
Quis habet ? 



I Cut est? 



Has the friend ? 



Has the boy the carpenter's ham- 
mer ? 
He has it. 
Has the youth it ? 
He has it not. 
Is he thirsty ? 
He is thirsty. 

Is he tired ? 

He is not tired ? 

Is he right or wrong ? 

lie is right (correct). 
He is not wrong. 
Is he hungry ? 
He is not hungry. 



( Quis habet arcam ? 
( Cui est riscus ? 

Vir riscum habet (tenet). 

Vir riscum non habet (tenet). 

Quis eum habet ? 

Adolescens eum habet. 

Adolescentiiius eum non habet (te'- 
net). 

^ Habet, tenet (is, hie, ille).* 
\ Est ei. 

Is (rile) ciiltrum habet. 

Ciiltrum non habet. 

Habetne vir ? Ecquid habet lid- 
mo ? An habet homo ? 

Habetne pi'ctor ? Niim habet pi- 
ctor? Estne (an, niim est) pi- 
ctdii ? 

Habetne amicus ? An habet ami- 
cus ? Estne (ecquid, an est) 
amico ? (Cf. Lesson II. note *.) 

Tenetne piier malleum fabii tigna- 
rii ? 

Yero (eum) tenet. 

Eiimne tenet adolescens ? 

(Eum) non tenet. 

Sititne ? An (ecquid) is si'tit ? 

Ita est, sitit. 

Niim (niimquid) fessus est ? 

An est fessus V 

Non est fessus. 
( Rectene loquitur, an errat ? 
\ IJtruin vere lo'quitur, an errat ? 

Vere loquitur. 

Non errat. 

Esuritne ? Niim esiirit ? 

Non esiirit. 



Exercise 8. 

Is he thirsty or hungry ? — He is neither thirsty nor hungry. — 
Has the friend my hat ? — He has it. — He has it not. — Who has 



* The pronoun of the third person, like that of the second and first, is com- 
monly omitted, except where perspicuity requires it. 



32 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 10. 

my sheep ? — Your friend has it. — Who has my large sack ? — 
The baker has it. — Has the youth my book ? — He has it not. — 
What has he ? — He has nothing. — Has he the hammer or the nail ? 

— He has neither the hammer nor the nail. — Has he my umbrella 
or my stick '? — He has neither your umbrella nor your stick. — Has 
he my coffee or my sugar ? — He has neither your coffee nor your 
sugar ; he has your honey. — Has he my brother's biscuit or that of 
the Frenchman ? — He has neither your brother's nor that of the 
Frenchman ; he has that of the good boy. — Which ship has he ? — 
He has my good ship. — Has he the old sheep or the ram ? 

Exercise 9. 
Has the young man my knife or that of the painter ? — He has 
neither yours nor that of the painter. — Who has my brother's fine 
dog ? — Your friend has it. — What has my friend ? — He has the 
baker's good bread. — He has the good neighbor's good chicken. — 
AVhat have you ? — I have nothing. — Have you my bag or yours ? 

— I have that of your friend. — Have I your good knife ? — You 
have it. — You have it not. — Has the youth it ? — He has it not. 

— What has he ? — He has something good. — He has nothing bad. 

— Has he anything ? — He has nothing. — Is he sleepy ? — He is 
not sleepy. — He is hungry. — Who is hungry ? — The young man 
is hungry. — Your friend is hungry. — Your brother's boy is hungry. 
■ — My shoemaker's brother is hungry. — My good tailor's boy is 
thirsty. — Which man has my book V — The big (procerus) man has 
it. — Which man has my horse ? — Your friend has it. — He has 
your good cheese. — Has he it ? — Yes, sir, he has it. 



Lesson X. — pensum decimum. 



The husbandman. Agricola, ae, m. 

The peasant, rustic. Rusticus, i, m. ; homo agrestis. 

( Bos, gen. bovis, m. & f. 

\ Taurus, i, m. (a bull). 
The cook. Coquiis, i, m. ; coqua, ae,/. 

The servant. 



The ox. 



\ Minister, ri, in. ; famulus, i, m. 
I Mi 



Ministra, famula, ae,/. 

The bird 5 %!' *?> / 

I \61ucris, is, m. &/. 

The broom. Scopae, arum,*/, pi. 

The eye. Octilus, i, m. 

The foot. Pes, gen. pedis, m. 

The rice. Oryza, ae,/ 

* Many nouns in Latin are never used in the singular, as angustlae, difficul- 
ties ; divitiae, riches ; feriae, holidays ; liberi, children, &c. Compare Lesson 
XVII. B. l 



LESSON 10.] PRONOUNS. 33 

rr , . ,. v ( Suits, sua, siium. 

His (conjunctive). ■< _ . ' ' 

(. Ejus, Mius. 

A. Obs. The possessive pronoun s^ws is declined 
like mms and tfwws. It corresponds to the English 
"his" when, in the reflexive sense of "his own," the 
subject of the sentence is meant ; but when another 
person is referred to, ejus (of him) or illius (of that 
man) must be employed. As : — 

Has lie his (own) hat ? Tenetne pileum siium ? 

Have you his (the other man's) Tenesne tu pileum ejus (illius) ? 

hat? 

Has the servant his broom ? Habetne minister scdpas siias? (Cf. 

Lesson XIII. B.) 

1 j , , • , ( Habet scdpas siias. 

lie has his broom. i o ' ' u 'u *. 

I Scopas suas habet. 

Has the cook his (own) chicken Habetne cdquus gallinam suam, 

or that of the rustic ? an (lllam) riistici ? 

TT t i . ( Suam habet. 

lie has his own. ■< rt,, , , . u 

( Habet suam prop nam. 

( Suits, sua, siium * 
His or his own (absolute). < Proprius, a, um.\ 

{Ejus, illius (jpsius). 

B. Obs. The absolute possessive pronoun suns is 
declined like the conjunctive. Instead of it, proprius 
is sometimes used. There is here the same distinction 
between situs {proprius) and ejus (illius) as in Obs. A. 

f Habetne famulus riscum siium (pro- 
Has the servant his (own) trunk, ! prium), tin meum ? 

or mine ? j Suiimne riscum habet famulus, an 

[_ meum ? 

TT i , . < Siium prdprium habet. 

He has his own. ^ tj,, . f / 

( Habet suummet. 

f TJtrum tiium habes calceum, an 

Have you your (own) shoe, or j ejus (illius) ? 

his (that man's) ? 1 Tuiimne habes calceum, an ejus 

L (illius) ? 

* The suffix met is sometimes added to all the cases of suits, in the sense of 
the English "own," and commonly in connection with ipse, himself; e.g. 
Suummet librum ipse tenet, He himself has his own book. To the ablative singu- 
lar suo, sua (and also to meo, mea, tuo, tua, &c.) the syllable pte may be an- 
nexed in the same sense; as suapte manu, with his own hand ; meopte ingenio, 
by my own genius ; nostrapte culpa, by our own fault. 

t Both these words are sometimes put together, in order to render the notion 
of possession still more prominent : suits pvoprius, precisely like the English 
"his own." C 






LATIN GEAMMAK. 



[lesson 10. 



I have his (that man's) 



Ejus (habeo). 

Habeo (calceum) ejus (illius). 
Somebody or anybody, some one ( Aliquis ; quis ; quispiam. 

or any one. (Indefinite Pro- < Quisquam, ullus ; non nemo. 

nouns.) ( Nam quis ? s Ecquis ? 

C. Obs. The indefinite pronouns aliquis, quis, and quispiam 
are always positive, and differ but little from each other, except 
that quispiam is more general (= "some one or another"). 
Quisquam (like quidquam of Lesson VI., q. v.) and nullus, on 
the other hand, are only used where the sentence contains a 
negation, either expressed or implied. Quis may stand for 
aliquis, but only after particles like si (if), nisi (unless), num 



(whether), 
rosrative. 



and ne (lest). HJcquis ? and num quis ? are inter- 



Has 



any one t 
Has any one ? 
Some one has. 



(Yes.) 
(No.) 



5 Habetne aliquis (quispiam) ? 

( Ecquis habet ? 

( Num quis (quisquam) habet ? 

( Habetne quisquam (ullus) '? 

j Aliquis (quispiam) habet. 

I Non nemo habet. 
Nor has any one. Neque quisquam habet. 

If (unless, whether) any one has. Si (nisi, num) quis or aliquis ha- 
bet. 

D. The indefinite quis, and its compounds aliquis, ecquis, 
quisquam, and quispiam are thus inflected : — 



No m:. quis 

Gen. cujus 

Dat. cui 

Ace. quern 

Voc. 

Abl. quo. 



aliquis 

alicujus 

alicui 

aliquem 

aliquo. 



Has any one my hat ? 
Somebody has it. 

Who has my stick ? 
Nobody has it. 

No one, nobody, or not anybody. 



ecquis quisquam quispiam 

eccujus cujusquam cujusplam 
eccui cuiquam cuipiam 

ecquem j quemquam quempiam 

| 

ecquo. j quoquam. quopiam. 

( Habetne aliquis meum pileum ? 
< Ecquis habet pileum meum 'i 
( Num quis habet pileum meum ? 

Habet eum aliquis (quispiam, non 
nemo). 

Quis tenet scipionem meum ? 

Cui est baciilum meum ? 
( Nemo (nullus) eum tenet. 
\ Nemini (niilli) est. 
'Nemo, nullus. 

Nemo homo, nullus liomo. 

Nee quisquam, neque ullus.* 



* The Romans frequently emplo}- quisquam or ullus in connection with nee 



LESSON 10.] 



PRONOUNS. 



35 



E. Obs. The indefinite nemo is seldom used in the 
genitive, nullius being employed in its stead. The 
word homo is sometimes added to nemo as well as to 
nullus. These words are thus inflected: — 



Nom. 


nemo 


ullus 


nullus 


Gen. 


neminis 


ullius 


nullius * 


Dat. 


nemini 


ulll 


nulll 


Ace. 


neminem 


ullum 


nullum 


Voc. 
Abl. 


nemo 
nemine. 






ullo. 


nullo. 



Who has my ribbon ? 

Nobody has it. 

Who is right ? 

No one is right. 

Is any one hungry ? 

No one is hungry. 
Nor is any one hungry. 



J Q.ui's habct taeniam meam ? 
( Cui est taenia mea V 

Nemo (niillus) earn habet. 

(Ea) nemini (null!) est. 

Cui est fas ? 

Q.ui's loquitur vere ? 

Fits est nemini (milll). 

Nemo vere loquitur. 

Esuritne aliquis V Niim qui's esu- 
rit ? Ecquis esurit ? An qui's- 
quam esurit ? 
f Nemo esurit. 
( Esurit nullus. 

Nee quisquam (neque ullus) homo 
esurit. 



Exercise 10. 

Have you the ox of the peasant or that of the cook ? — I have 
neither that of the peasant nor that of the cook. — Has the peasant 
his rice ? — He has it. — Have you it ? — I have it not. — Has his 
boy the servant's broom ? — He has it. — Who has the boy's pen- 
cil ? — Nobody has it. — Has your brother my stick or that of the 
painter ? — ■ He has neither yours nor that of the painter ; he has his 
own. — Has he the good or bad money ? — He has neither the good 
nor the bad. — Has he the wooden or the leaden horse ? — He has 
neither the wooden nor the leaden horse. — What has he good? — 
He has my good honey. — Has my neighbor's boy my book ? — He 
has it not. — Which book has he ? — He has his fine book. — Has 



he my book or his own ? — He has his 



— Who has my gold 



button ? — Nobody has it. — Has anybody my thread stocking ? 
Nobody has it. 

nunqaam, instead of nemo, as in English we likewise say, " nor was there ever 
any one," instead of "no one ever was," &c. 

* Ullus and nullus are properly adjectives in us, a, um. But they deviate 
from the inflection of adjectives by having their genitive in lus (instead of 
i, ae, i) for every gender, and their dative in i (instead of o, ae, o). Compare 
units of Lesson XVIII. 



36 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[lesson 11. 



Exercise 11. 

Which, ship has the merchant ? — He has his own ? — Which 
horse has my friend ? — He has mine. — Has he his dog ? — He 
has it not. — Who has his dog ? — Nobody has it. — Who has my 
brother's umbrella ? — Somebody has it. — Which (quas) broom has 
the servant ? — He has his own. — Is anybody hungry ? — Nobody 
is hungry. — Is anybody sleepy ? — Nobody is sleepy. — Is any one 
tired ? — No one is tired. — Who is right ? — Nobody is right. — 
Have I his biscuit ? — You have it not. — Have I his good brother's 
ox ? — You have it not. — Which chicken have I ? — You have 
his. — Is anybody wrong '? — Nobody is wrong. 



Lesson XI. — pensum undecimum. 

OE DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 

A. The Latin language has three demonstrative 
pronouns, with special reference to each of the three 
persons, viz. : Ate, haec, hoc, this (of mine) ; iste, ista, 
istud, that (of yours) ; ille, ilia, illud, that (of his). To 
these must be added the determinative "is, ea, id, which 
sometimes has the demonstrative force of this or that. 
These words are thus inflected : — 



Hie, this {of mine). 



Ille, that (of his). 





Masc. 


Fern. 


Neut. 


Masc. 


Fern. 


Neut. 


NOil. 


hie 


haec 


hoc 


ille 


ilia 


illud 


Gen. 




hujus 






illfus 




Dat. 




linic 






ill! 




Ace. 


hunc 


hanc 


hoc 


ilium 


illara 


illud 


Voc. 


hie 


haec 


hoc 


ille 


ilia 


illud 


Abl. 


hoc 


hac 


hoc. 


illo 


ilia 


illo. 




Iste, 


that (of yo 


irs) . 


Is, 


that, this. 




Masc. 


Fern. 


Neut. 


Masc. 


Fern. 


Neut. 


Nom. 


iste 


ista 


isttid 


IS 


ea 


id 


Gen. 




istius 






ejus 




Dat. 




isti 






ei 




Ace. 


istiim 


istarn 


isttid 


eum 


earn 


id 


Yoc. 


iste 


ista 


istud 


is 


ea 


id 


Abl. 


isto 


ista 


isto. 


eo 


ea 


eo. 



LESSON 11.] DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 37 

Remarks. 

1. The demonstrative force of hie, &c. is often increased by the 
addition of the syllable ce, as hicce, haecce, hocce, hujusce, &c. — With 
the interrogative particle ne, the pronouns become hiccuie (or with 
one c, hicine) ? haeccine ? hocclne ? &c. 

2. In composition with ecce and en (= lo ! see ! here !), these pro- 
nouns have given rise to the following forms, frequently used in com- 
mon discourse : eccum, eccam (pi. eccos, eccas) ; eccillum or ellwn, 
ellam (pi. ellos, ellas), and eccistam, "there he (she) is," "there they 
come," " see there," &c. — Ea, in connection with re and the affix 
pse, gives rise to reapse, " indeed." 

3. Hie implies proximity, either of space or of time, to the person 
speaking. Ille, on the other hand, refers to something remote, and 
also to something well known, already mentioned, or distinguished. 
When directly opposed to each other, ille signifies " the former," and 
hie, " the latter." 

4. Iste has always reference to the person spoken to, and is hence 
called the pronoun of the second person ; as iste liber, istud saccharum, 
this book, that sugar (of yours or mentioned by you). It some- 
times conveys the notion of disapprobation or contempt, as ille does 
that of honor ; as iste homo, this fellow ; ille Socrates, the well-known 
(illustrious) Socrates. 

5. Is, when used as a demonstrative, points to a person or thing 
already mentioned, in the sense of the English " this man," " that 
thing" (of which I am speaking or have just spoken), or of an em- 
phatic " he, she, it"; e. g. Is est, an non est? Is it he (is this the man) or 
not ? In the oblique cases it is the pronoun of the third person (liis, 
him, hers, her, &c). See Lesson IX. C. 

6. The pronoun hie, in connection with ille and iste, gives rise to 
the compounds istic (or isthic), istaec, istoc or istuc, and illic, illaec, 
illoc or illuc, both of which are declined like hie, haec, hoc. 

( Homo nauticus. 

\ Nauta, ae, m. 
The chair. Sella, ae, /. 

The seat (of honor). Solium, i, n. ; sedes, is, f. 

The looking-glass. ^Speculum, i, n. 

The light. Lux, lucis, /. ; lumen, inis, n. 

The light, candle. Lumen, inis, n. ; candela, ae, f. 

The lamp. Lucerna, ae, / ; lampas, adis,/.* 

The tree. Arbor, or arbos, oris, f. 

The garden. Hortus, i, m. 

The foreigner. Peregrinus, i, m. ; advena, ae, m. 

(just arrived). 
The stranger (guest). Hospes, itis, m. 

* Lampas is a word of Greek origin, and sometimes retains its original in- 
flection. Tims : N. lampas, G. lampddis or -ados, D. lampadi, Ace. lampadem 
or -ada, V. lampas, Abl. lampa.de. 

4 



The sailor. 



38 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 11. 



The glove. 

The ass. 

The hay. 

The grain (seed). 

The corn (grain generally). 

The letter. 

The note (billet). 
The horse-shoe. 

This book — that book. 



This note — that note. 

This hay — that hay. 
This (that) hay (of yours). 
That worthless man. 
That great man. 
Is he (this) the man ? 
That is the cause. 



*Digitabulum, i, n. 

Asinus, i, m. 

Foenum, i, n. 

Granuni, i, n. 

Trumentum, i, n. ; annona, ae, f. 
(one year's produce). 

Epistola, ae, f. ; litterae, arum, f. 
pi. (Cf. Lesson XIII.) 

Schedula or scidula, ae, f. 
*S6lea ferrea (ae, /.) equi. 

( Nom. hie liber — ille liber. • 
( Ace. hiinc librum — ilium librum. 
(Nom. haec scidula — ilia scidula. 
^ Ace. banc scidulam — illam sci- 
( dulam. 

Hoc foenum — illud foenum. 

Istud foenum. 

Homo iste nequam. 

Vir ille magnus. 

An est is homo ? 

Ea est causa. 



Have you this hat or that one ? 
I have not this, but that one. 



Habesne hiinc pileum an ilium ? 
Non hiinc, sed ilium habeo. 
Non hiinc habeo, sed ilium. 

But. Sed, verum ; autem. 

B. Obs. The adversative conjunctions sed and ve- 
rum* are nearly synonymous, and are always placed 
at the beginning of the clause introduced by them. 
Autem, like the English " however," generally stands 
after the first, second, or third word. Examples : — 

Not I, but you. Non ego, sed (verum) tu. 

You are neither right nor wrong, Tu. neque recte ldqueris, neque er- 
but (however) your brother is ras, errat autem fritter tiius. 
wrong. 
Has the youth this book or that Tenetne adolescentiilus hiinc li- 

one ? brum an ilium ? 

He has this, but not that one. Hiinc quidem tenet, ilium aiitem 

non. 
Tenet non hiinc, sed (verum) 
ilium. 



He has not this, but that one. 



tt • xi • i i • i (utrum hoc speculum habes an 

Have you this lookmoj-mass or ] M1 , l 

, | , J 9 ° ° ■< illud ? 

( Hoccine speculum habes, an illud ? 



* Verum gives preponderance to the second member of the sentence, and 
may be rendered by '' but rather," " but in reality." 



LESSON 12.] INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. 39 

I have neither this nor that one. 5 ™% u e hdc M ^° nd 5 ne ^ 
r- ( Habeo neque hoc neque lllud. 

Have you this man's light or that Tenesne lumen hujus hdminis an 

one's ? illius V 

I have neither this man's nor that Teneo neque lumen hujus hdminis 

one's. ndque illius. 

I have not this man's, but that £go non hujus viri lumen teneo, 

one's. sed (verum) illius. 

Exercise 12. 

Which hay has the foreigner ? — He has that of the peasant. — 
Has the sailor my looking-glass ? — He has it not. — Have you this 
candle or that one ? — I have this one. — Have you the hay of my 
garden, or that of yours ? — I have neither that of your garden nor 
that of mine, but that of the foreigner. — Which glove have you ? — 
I have his glove. — Which chair has the foreigner ? — He has his 
own. — Who has my good candle ? — This man has it. — Who has 
that looking-glass ? — That foreigner has it. — What has your ser- 
vant ? — He has the tree of this garden. — Has he that man's book? 
— He has not the book of that man, but that of this boy. — Which ox 
has this peasant ? — He has that of your neighbor. — Have I your 
letter or his ? — You have neither mine nor his, but that of your 
friend. — Have you this horse's hay ? — I have not its hay, but its 
shoe. — Has your brother my note or his own r — He has that of the 
sailor. — Has this foreigner my glove or his own ? — He has neither 
yours nor his own, but that of his friend. — Are you hungry or 
thirsty ? — I am neither hungry nor thirsty, but sleepy. — Is he 
sleepy or hungry ? — He is neither sleepy nor hungry, but tired. — 
Am I right or wrong ? — You are neither right nor wrong, but your 
good boy is wrong. — Have I the good or the bad knife ? — You 
have neither the good nor the bad, but the ugly (one). — What 
have I ? — You have nothing good, but something bad. — Who 
has my ass ? — The peasant has it. 



Lesson XII. — pensum duodecimum. 

OF INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. 

A. There are three interrogative pronouns in Latin, 
viz. : 1) the substantive quis ? (rnasc. & fern.) " who ? " 
quid? "what?" 2) the adjective qui, quae, quod? 
"which?" and 3) ufcr, utra, utruml "which of the 
two ? " They are thus inflected : — 



40 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[lesson 12. 



Nom. 
Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 
Voc. 
Abl. 



Nom. 
Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 
Voc. 
Abl. 



Quis? quid? Who? what? 
who? what? quis? quid? 



quis ? 
whose? of what? cujus ? cujus rei ? 



to whom ? to what ? 
whom ? what ? 



quern ? 



cm rei ? 
quid ? 



with whom ? with what ? 



quo 



qua re ? 



Qui, quae, quod ? Which ? what ? 



which ? what ? 
of which or what ? 
to which or what ? 
which ? what ? 



qui 
quern 



quae 
cuj us ? 
cm ? 
quam 



quod ? 
quod ? 



with which or what ? quo 



qua 



quo ?f 



Uter, utra, utrum ? Which of the tiro ? 

Nom. ut utra utrum ? 

Gen. utrius ? j 

Dat. utri ? 

Ace. utrum utram utrum ? 

Yoc. ■ 

Abl. utro utra utro ? 

Remarks. 

1. The emphatic nam affixed to either of these pronouns gives 
animation to the inquiry ; as quisndm? who, pray ? quidndm? what 
then ? quinam, quaenam, quodndm ? which, pray ? 

2. The general rule is that quis should stand substantively for 
both genders, and qui, quae adjectively ; as, quis? who? qui vir? 
which (or what) man ? quae femina ? what woman ? But this 
distinction is frequently disregarded, especially for the sake of eu- 
phony ; e. g. qui (for quis) sis considera, consider who you are ; quis 
(for qui) iste tantus casus ? what is this great calamity of yours ? 

3. Instead of quod in the same case with its substantive, we may 



* On this use of rei, see note, page 29. 

t There is an obsolete ablative qui for every gender, yet in use in forms like 
qulcum (= quocum or quftcum, with whom, with which), and adverbiallv in the 
sense of how f e. g. Qui fit ? How comes it ? Qui tibi idfacere limit ? How 
could that have been lawful for you ? 

| The following nine adjectives are pronominals, and their compounds form 
the^ genitive in tits, and the dative in I: anas, solus, totiis, ulliis ; titer, neuter, 
alter, mdlus, and alius. Of these, alter alone has alterius, the rest have lus in 
prose and sometimes ius in poetry. 



LESSON 12.] RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 41 

use quid partitively with the genitive ; as quod saccharum ? or quid 
saccKari ? 

4. Instead of the genitive cujus, "whose" (both interrogative and 
relative), the adjective cujus, a, urn is sometimes employed; as cujus 
liber? cujamensa? cujumfoenum? whose book, &c. But this mode 
of expression is antiquated, and scarcely used except in law. 

5. To quis ? correspond in the answer the pronominal adjectives 
alius, another (one) ; id/us, any one; and nullus, no one. To uter? 
we reply with alter, the one of two, the other; neuter, neither of 
(the) two ; alteruter, the one or the other ; utervis and uterlibet, each 
of the two ; and the compound relative utercimque, whichever of the 
two. 

G. These pronouns are used precisely in the same manner when 
the question becomes indirect, in which case, however, the verb must 
be in the subjunctive ; e. g. Quis est ? who is it ? nescio quis sit, I do 
not know who it is (may be) ; die mini, uter habeat, tell me who has ; 
uter habeat, nescio, I know not who has (lit. may have). (Vide Les- 
son XXX. C.) 

OE RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 

B. The relative qui, quae, quod, "who," "that or 
which," is inflected like the interrogative of the same 
form. Relatives always agree with their antecedents 
in gender and number : — 

The man, who, whose, to, whom, Vir, qui, cujus, cui, quern, quo. 

whom, by whom. 

The woman, who, whose, to Femina, quae, cujus, cui, quam, 

whom, whom, by whom. qutL 

The affair, which, of which, to Negdtium, quod, cujus, cui, quod, 

which, which, with which. quo. 

Have you the hat which my Habesne tu pileum, quern frater 
brother has ? metis habet ? 

f Non habeo pileum, quern frater 
I have not the hat which your J tuus habet. 

brother has. j Quern habet frater tuus pileum 

[_ non habeo.* 
Have you the gold which I have ? An habes auruni, quod ego habeo ? 

( Habeo aurum, quod tu habes. 
I have the gold which you have. < Quod tu aurum habes, id et ego 

( habeo.* 

C. Obs, Of the relative qui, quae, quod there are two compounds, 
quicunque and quisquis, " whoever," " every one who," of which the 

* The general rule is that the Relative should be placed after its antecedent, 
and as near as possible to it. The clauses, however, are frequently inverted ; 
as, Terra, quod accepit, (id) nunquam sine usurd reddit, The earth never returns 
without usury what it has received. 
4* 



42 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 12. 

former is declined like the simple pronoun (with the syllable cunque 
affixed to each case) ; as, quicunque, quaecunque, quodcunque, gen. 
cujuscunque, &c. — The latter has a double inflection : quisquis (masc. 
& fern.), quidquid or quicquid (neut). E. g. Quisquis ille est, "who- 
ever he is (may be)." Quicunque is est, ei me profiteor inimicum, 
" Whoever he may be, I profess myself an enemy to him." 

OF DETERMINATIVE PRONOUNS. 

D. Determinative pronouns are such as serve to point out 
the antecedent of a relative. They are in Latin: is, ea, id, 
"he, she, or it," "that or the one"; the demonstrative ille, 
ilia, Mud, " the," " that or the one " ; and the compound idem, 
eadem, idem, " the same." They are thus inflected : — 

Is, ille — qui, &c, that or the one, which. 
Masculine. Feminine. Neuter. 

ea, ilia — quae I id, illud — quod 
ejus, illius — cujusj ejus, illius — cujus 



Nom. is, ille — qui 

Gen. ejus, illius — cujus 

Dat. ei, illi — cui 

Ace. eum, illam — quern 



ei, illi — cui ei, ilh — cm 
earn, illam — quam id, illud — quod 



Voc. 

Abl. eo, illo — quo. ea, ilia — qua. | eo, illo — quo 

f Habeo eum or ilium (earn or illam), 

I have that or the one which j f quern (quam) tu habes. 

you have (masc. Si/em.). J Est mihi is or ille (ea or ilia), qui 

[ (quae) tibi est. 

I have that or the one which j Habeo id (illud), quod til habes. 

you have (iieut.). ( Est mihi id (illud), quod tibi est. 

-tvn . r i i o ( Quern equum habes V 

vY Inch horse have vou r ■< r\ '> * A *t.« * o 



Quis est tibi equus ? 

I have that which your friend Habeo eum (ilium), quem amicus 

has. tiius habet. 

Have you not the light which I Nonne habes lumen, quod ego ha- 

have ? beo ? 

I have that (the one) which you Habeo id (illud), quod tu habes. 

have. 

E. The determinative idem, eadem, idem, "the same," 
" the very one," is a compound of is, ea, id and the syl- 
lable dem. It is thus inflected : — 

Idem, eadem, idem, the same — qui, which. 

Nom. the same idem, eadem, idem — qui, quae, quod 

Gen. of the same ejusdem — cujus 

Dat. to the same eidem — cui 

Ace. the same eundem, eandem, idem — quem, quam, quod 

Voc. the same idem, eadem, idem — qui, quae, quod 

Abl. with the same, eodem, eadem, eodem — quo, qua, quo. 



LESSON 12.] DETERMINATIVE PRONOUNS. 43 

f Habesnc til eiindem equum, quem 

Have you the same horse which J f ego habeo ? 

I have ? 1 Estne tibi idem equus, qui mihi 

I (est)? / 

T , ,, ( Habeo eiindem. 

I have the same. < -a , ,,» a -, 

( Est mini idem. 

W1 . , , , ,1 < Quam tdgam habet vir ille ? 

Which coat has the man i Apt ^ , ,° , - , u . , , 

( Quae est viro llh toga r 

He has the same which you ( Eandem habet, quam tu. (habes). 

have. \ Est ei eadem dc tibi. 

F. Obs. The pronoun idem serves to express the 
identity of two things, and is followed either by the 
relative qui, quae, quod, or by one of the particles ac, 
atque, ut, quam (= the English " as "), cam (= " with "), 
quasi (= " as if"), &c. 

TT i ,, t . -, fHabetne ille idem frumentum, quod 

Has he the same corn which you , ~ -, ,, ' L 

i o TT i -i tu habes r 

haver Has he the same corn -< +, , ,. , -, c , , , , 

, ..-, . Estne ei idem irumentum ac (or al- 
as you (with you) r , x ,,, „ , A 
* v ^ y [_ ^we, quam) tibi (or tecum *) r 

He has not the same which I ( Non idem habet, quod ego habeo. 

have. He has not the same •< Ei non est idem atque mihi (me- 

as I (with me). ( cum). 

The carriage. Curriis, us, in. ; pilentum, i, n. 

The house. 5 L)6l l 1 5 is ' " s ' / 5 ^edes^ ilim ' ^ /• 



(Vide Lesson XVII. B.) 
j Quem habes ciirrum ? 



Which carriage have you : 

° J ( Quod est tibi pilentum ? 

T , ,, , i . , /. • -. ( Eum habeo, quem amicus tiius ha- 

I have that which your friend j ^ ' - 1 



( Mihi est id, quod est amico tiio. 
Has he the same house which I Num. habet ille eandem ddmum, 

have ? quam et ego habeo ? 

He has not the same. (Eandem) non habet. 

Exercise 13. 

Have you the garden which I have ? — I have not the one that 
you have. — Which looking-glass have you ? — I have the one 
which your brother has. — Has he the book that your friend has ? — 
He has not the one which my friend has. — Which candle has he ? 
— He has that of his neighbor. — He has the one that I have. — 
Has he this tree or that one ? — He has neither this nor that, but 
the one which I have. — Which ass has the man ? — He has the 



* The preposition cum, " with," generally stands before the case governed 
by it , but it is suffixed to the pronominal ablatives me, te, nob's, vobis, which 
are always mecum, tecum, nobiscum, vobiscum. 



44 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSOSF 13. 

one that his boy has. — Has the stranger your chair or mine ? — He 
has neither yours nor mine ; but he has his friend's good chair. — 
Have you the glove which I have, or the one that my tailor has ? — 
I have neither the one which you have, nor the one which your 
tailor has, but my own. — Has your shoemaker my fine shoe, or that 
of his boy ? — He has neither yours nor that of his boy, but that of 
the o-ood stranger. — Which house has the baker ? — He has neither 
yours nor mine, but that of his good brother. — Which carriage have 
I ? — Have I mine or that of the peasant ? — You have neither 
yours nor that of the peasant ; you have the one which I have. — 
Have you my fine carriage ? — I have it not ; but the Frenchman 
has it ? — AVhat has the Frenchman ? — He has nothing. — What 
has the shoemaker ? — He has something fine. — What has he fine ? 

— He has his fine shoe. — Is the shoemaker right ? — He is not 
wrong ; but this neighbor, the baker, is right. — Is vour horse hungry ? 

— It is not hungry, but thirsty. — Have you my ass's hay, or yours ? 

— I have that which my brother has. — Has your friend the same 
horse that my brother has ? — He has not the same horse, but the 
same coat. — Has he my umbrella ? — He has it not. 



Lesson XIII. — pensum tertium decimum. 

OF THE PLURAL OF SUBSTANTIVES AND ADJECTIVES. 

A. The nominative plural of the five declensions is 
characterized by the following terminations : — 

1. Substantives and adjectives of the first declension have 
the nominative in ae, and the genitive in drum ; as mensae, men- 
sdrum ; bonae, bondrum. 

2. Masculines (and feminines) of the second declension form 
their plural in 1, neuters in a. The genitive of both is drum. 
E. g. domini, dommorum ; pueri, puerdrum ; fild, fildrum ; 
bom, neut. bona, bondrum. 

3. Masculines and feminines of the third declension change 
the is of the genitive singular into es , neuters, into a or id. 
The genitive of this declension is um or turn. E. g. lapidis, 
pi. Idpides, lapidum ; vestis, pi. vestes, vestium ; pistdrts, pi. pi- 
stores, pistorum ; capitis, pi. capita, capitum ; turpis, pi. turpes, 
neut. tiirpid, gen. turpium. 

4. Masculines and feminines of the fourth declension retain 
the us of the genitive singular, and neuters (in u) assume the 
termination ua. The genitive plural of this declension is uni- 
formly uiim. E. g. fructus, fructuum ; comua, cornuum. 



LESSON 13.] PLURAL OF SUBSTANTIVES AND ADJECTIVES. 45 



5. Nouns of the fifth declension form their plural in es, and 
their genitive in erum ; as res, rerum ; dies, dierum. 

The following list exhibits the nominative and genitive plural of 
the majority of substantives thus far used in this book, according to 
their respective declensions : — 

First Declension. 

The husbandmen. Agrlcolae, arum. 

The candles. Candelae, " 

The letters. Epistolae, " 

The hens. Galllnae, u 

The lamps. Lucernae, " 

The grains. Mlcae, " 

The pens. *Pennae, " 

The notes. Schedulae, " 

The brooms. Scopae, " 

The chairs. Sellae, " 

The horse-shoes. *S5leae ferreae, " 

Second Declension. 



The friends. 


Amici, 


orum 


The asses. 


Asini, 


u 


The cheeses. 


Casei, 


n 


The nails. 


Clavi, 


a 


The cooks. 


CSqui, 


u 


The knives. 


Cultri, 


a 


The corks. 


*Emboli, 


a 


The carpenters. 


Fabri tignarii, 
j" Famuli, 
( Ministri, 


u 
u 


The servants. 


a 


The Frenchmen. 


Francogalli, 


a 


The gardens. 


Horti, 


u 


The books. 


Libri, 


a 


The hammers. 


Mallei, 


a 


The eyes. 


Oculi, 


u. 


The buttons. 


*Orbiculi fibulatorii, 


a 


The strangers. 


Peregrini, 


a 


The hats. 


*Pilei, m. 


u 


The chickens. 


Pulli gallinacei, 


a 


The bags. 


Sacci, 


u 


The pencils. 


*Stili cerussati, 


a 


The men. 


Viri, > 


a 


The neighbors. 


Ylcini, 


a 


Tlie canes. 


Baciila, 


a 


The gloves. 


Digitabula, 


u 


The threads. 


Flla, 


a 


The grains. 


Gran a, 


u 


The carriages. 


Pilenta, 


a 


The knives. 


Scalpra, 


u 



46 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 13. 



The looking-glasses. 

The umbrellas. 



The youths. 

The trees. 

The birds. 

The oxen. 

The dogs. 

The brothers. 

The men. 

The strangers. 

The young men. 

The 'lamps. 

The merchants. 

The ships. 

The sheep. 

The {different sorts of) bread. 

The feet. 

The bakers. 

The (different sorts of) salt 

The tailors. 
The canes. 
The shoemakers. 
The rams. 
The garments. 
The birds. 
The heads. 
The lights. 
The stockings. 



The carriages. 
Tlie houses. 



*SpecuIa, orum. 
*Umbracula, " 

Third Declension. 

Adolescentes, mm, m. 
Arbores, um, f. 
Ares, mm, f 
Boves, bourn, m. & f. 
Canes, um, m. & f. 
F nitres, um, m. 
Homines, um, m. 
Hospites, um, in. 
Juvenes, um, in. 
Lampades,* um, f. 
Mercatores, um, m. 
Naves, mm, /. 
Oves, mm, /. 
Panes, um, m. 
Pedes, um, m. 
Pistores, um, m. 
Sales, mm, m. 
Salia, " n. 
Sartores, um, m. 
Scipiones, um, m. 
Sutores, um, in. 
Verveces, um, m. 
Vestes, ium, f 
Yolucres, um, in. & /. 
Capita, um, n. 
Lumina, um, n. 
*Tiblalia, mm, n. 
Fourth Declension. 

Currus, linm, m. 



Ddums, uum, f. 

B. The following paradigms may serve as examples 
of the declension of the plural number. 

1. Plural of the First Declension. 
Mensae, tables ; filiae, the daughters ; nautae, sailors. 



Nom. 


mensae 


filiae 


nautae 


Gen. 


mensarum 


filiarum 


nautarum 


Dat. 


mensis 


filiabus 


nautis 


Ace. 


mensas 


filias 


nautas 


Voc. 


mensae 


filiae 


nautae 


Abl. 


mensis. 


filiabus.f 


nautis. 



* The plural of this noun is likewise partly Greek : N. lampades, G. -ddum, 
D. -adibus, Ace. -ddes or -ddas, V. -ddes, Abl. -ddibus. 

t This form of the dative and ablative is the best for dea and flia, in order 



LESSON 13.] PLURAL OF SUBSTANTIVES AND ADJECTIVES. 47 



Eemaek. — In the plural of every declension the nominative and 
vocative, and the dative and ablative, end always alike. 

2. Plural of the Second Declension. 

Equi, the horses ; libri, the books ; candelabra, the candlesticks. 



Nom. 


equi 


libri 


candelabra 


Gen. 


equorun 


librorum 


canclelabrorum 


Dat. 


equis 


libris 


candelabris 


Ace. 


equos 


libros 


candelabra 


Voc. 


equi 


libri 


candelabra 


Abl. 


equis. 


libris. 


candelabris. 



The pi. liberi, children, and the plural of deus, a god, are 
thus declined : — ■ 

del, dii or di 

deorum or deum * 

dels, diis or dis, 

deos 

del, dii or di 

dels, diis or dls. 

3. Plural of the Third Declension. 

Homines, men ; pistores, bakers ; vestes, garments ; 
the ships. 



Nom. 


liberi 


Gen. 


liberorum or liberum* 


Dat. 


liberis 


Ace. 


liberos 


Voc. 


liberi 


Abl. 


liberis. 



naves, 



Nom. 


homines 


pistores 


vestes 




naves 


Gen. 


hominum 


pistorum 


vestium 


navium 


Dat. 


hominibus 


pistoribus 


vestlbus 


navibus 


Ace. 


homines 


pistores 


vestes 


naves 


Voc. 


homines 


pistores 


vestes 


naves 


Abl. 


hominibus. 


pistoribus. 


vestlbus. 


navibus. 


Lumina, lights; ti 


bialia, stockings ; poemata, n., poems. 


Nom. 


lumina 




tibialia 


poemata 


Gen. 


luminum 




tibialium 


poematum 


Dat. 


luminibtis 




tibialibus 


poemaiis 


Ace. 


lumina 




tibialia 


poemata 


Voc. 


lumina 




tibialia 


poemata 


Abl. 


luminibus 


• 


tibialibus. 


poematis. 



to distinguish them from the same cases of deus nnd/7#«sof the second declen- 
sion. So the words anima, the soul ; liberta, a freed-woman ; nata, daughter ; 
inula, a she-mule ; equa, a mare ; asina, a she-ass, — may have dbus instead of 
7s, and for the same reason. The numerals duo, two, and ambo, both, have 
duobus and ambabus regularly. 

* So also fabrum, socium, decemvirum, instead of fabrorum, &c. This con- 



48 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 13. 



Adolescentes, young men ; canes, dogs ; boves, oxen. 



No 31. 


adolescentes 




canes 


boves 


Gen. 


adolescentium 




canum 


bourn 


Dat. 


adolescentibus 




canibus 


bubtis or bobus 


Ace. 


adolescentes 




canes 


boves 


Voc. 


adolescentes 




canes 


boves 


Abl. 


adolescentibus. 




canibus. 


bubtis or bobus 




Rem 


ARKS. 





1. The normal termination for the Nom., Ace., and Voc. pi. of 
neuters is a. Some, however, have always id. They are: 1.) Those 
ending in e, at, ar, as maria, sa.Ua, calcaria, from mare, the sea, sal, 
salt, and calcar, a spur; 2.) All participles in ns and such adjectives 
as have either l or else e or i in the ablative singular, comparatives 
excepted, as dmantia, esurientia, pdna, facllXa, turpia, from amans, 
esuriens, par, facile, turpe. But we say mdjora, doctwra, from the 
comp. major, greater, doctior, more learned. 

2. The general termination of the genitive plural is um; but the 
following have mm : — 

a) All those which have ta in the nominative plural, as murium, 
calcarium, dmantium, fdcilium, turpium. 

b) Words in es and is which do not increase in the genitive sin- 
gular (i. e. which receive no additional syllable), as ncwis, navium; 
vestis, vest aim: nubes, nublum; except votes,- strues, canis, pdnis, and 
juvenis, which have vatum, struum, canum, &c. 

c) Of nouns in er some have mm, as imber, imbrium; linter, lin- 
ti'ium ; venter, ventrium ; liter, Tilrlum ; others again have um, as pa- 
trum, matrum, frairum, accXpitrum, from pater, mater, &c. — Cdro has 
carnlum, and senex, senum. 

d) Many monosyllables, especially those ending in s and x with 
a consonant preceding; as dens, dentuim ; mons, montium; merx, mer- 
cium ; lis, litium : os, ossium; nox, noctium; vis, virium, &c. 

e) Dissyllables and polysyllables in ns and rs have generally 
ium and sometimes um ; as editors, cohortium ; cliens, clientmm ; ddo- 
lescens, adolescentium; sapiens, saplentium ; but parenies, parentum. 

3. In the dative and ablative plural, Greek nouns in ma have 
usually is, sometimes however ibus ; as poema, poema&s or poematibus : 
diploma, diplomatis or diplomcitibus, &c. 

4. The accusative plural of those words which have ium in the 
genitive is among some writers is or eis, instead of es ; as artls, civls, 
omnls, instead of artes, dues, &c. 



tracted genitive (commonly but incorrectly printed um) is the common form of 
names of measures, weights, and coins, as" nummum, sestertium, denarium, ca- 
elum, viedimnum, modium, jiujerum, talentum. the regular genitive plural of 
nummus, sestertius, &c The poets extend this form to names of nations, 
and say Argivum, Danaum. &c, in lieu of Argivdmm, Sec. 



LESSON 13.] PLURAL OF SUBSTANTIVES AND ADJECTIVES. 49 



4. Plural op the Fourth and Fifth Declensions. 

Fructus, m., fruits ; cornua, n., horns ; domus, f., houses; dies, 
7ii., days ; res, f., things. 



Nom. 


fructus 


cornua 


domus 


dies 


res 


Gen. 


fructuum 


cornuum 


doraiium 


dierum 


rerum 


Dat. 


fructibus 


cornibus 


domlbus 


diebus 


rebus 


Ace. 


fructus 


cornua 


domos 


dies 


res 


Yoc. 


fructus 


cornua 


domus 


dies 


re 


Abl. 


fructibus. 


cornibus. 


domlbus. 


diebus. 


rebus. 



Rem. 1 . Some nouns of the fourth declension have ubus instead 
of i bus in the dat. and abl. pi. ; as arcus, arc ubus ; veru, verubus, &c. 
2. The plural of the fifth declension is regular throughout. 

5. The Plural of Adjectives. 
The plural of adjectives is subject to the same laws 



as that of substantives. Those in 



us, a, um. 



and er, 



ra, rum, follow the inflection of the first and second de- 
clensions, and the rest that of the third. Examples : — 

1. Bom, bonae, bona, the good ; pulchri, pulchrae, pulchra, the 
beautiful. 



Nom. 
Gen. 
Dat. 

Ace. 
Voc. 
Abl. 

Nom. 
Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 
Voc. 
Abl. 

Like boni. 



Masc. 
boni 

bonorum 
bonis 
bonos 
boni 
bonis 

pulchri 

pulchrorum 

pulchris 

pulchros 

pulchri 

pulchris 



Fern. 
bonae 
bonarum 
bonis 
bonas 
bonae 
bonis 

pulchrae 

pulchrariim 

pulchris 

pulchras 

pulchrae 

pulchris 



NeuL 
bona 
bonorum 
bonis 
bona 
bona 
bonis. 

pulchra 

pulchrorum 

pulchris 

pulchra 

pulchra 

pulchris. 



a, decline met, meae, mea, my, mine ; tin, tuae, tua, 
&c. Like pulchri, rae, ra : miser l, miser ae, 



thy (your), thine (yours) 
miserd, the miserable, &c. 

2. Deformes, deformla, the ugly ; acres, acria, the fierce. 
Masc. & Fern. Neut. Masc. & Fern. Neut. 

Nom. deformes 
Gen. deformlum 
Dat. deformlbus 
D 5 



deformla 


acres 


acria 


deformlum 


acrium 


acrium 


deformlbus 


acrlbus 


acrlbus 



50 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[lesson 13. 



Ace. deformes deformia acres acria 

Voc. deformes deforniia acres acria 

Abl. deformibus deformibus. acribus acribus. 

Remark. — The general rule is that all adjectives of the third de- 
clension have ict in the neuter plural and mm in the genitive. — Like 
deformes are inflected viles, turpes, and all adjectives in is, e ; like 
acres, all those ending in er, ris, re. 

3. Felices, felicia, happy ; veteres, Vetera, old ; sapientes, sapi- 
entia, wise. 



Nom. felices felicia 

Gen. felicium felicium 

Dat. felicibus felicibus 

Ace. felices felicia 

Voc. felices felicia 

Abl. felicibus felicibus. 



sapientes -tia 
sapientmm or -am 

sapientibus 
sapientes -tia 
sapientes -tia 



veteres Vetera 

veterum veterum 

veteribus veteribus 

veteres Vetera 

veteres Vetera 

veteribus veteribus. sapientibus. 
Remark. — Adjectives of one termination, including participles 
in ns, generally have id in the neuter plural and mm in the genitive. 
Some, however, have a instead of id in the nominative and accu- 
sative, as veterd, plura, and comparatives generally; e. g. fellcldra, 
majurd, &c. — Exceptions to the genitive in ium are : 1) such as 
have e only in the abl. sing., as pauperum, superstitum ; 2) com- 
pounds of facio and capio, or of such nouns as have urn in the gen. 
pi., as ancipitum, inopum, quadrupedum, &c. ; 3) the following adjec- 
tives have likewise um : caelebs, celer, ciciir, compos, impos, dives, 
memdr, immemdr, supplex, uber, vetus, and vigil; 4) participles in ns 
sometimes have um among the poets. 

C. The following table exhibits the terminations 
of the five declensions through all the cases, singular 
and plural. 

1. Terminations of the Singular. 



I. 


II. 

Neut. 


III. 


IV. 

Neut. 


V. 


Nom. a (e, as, es)* 


iis, er, um 
(os, on) 


a, e, o, c, 1, n, 

r, s, t,x 


US, u 


es 


Gen. aef (es) 


i 


IS 


us 


ei 


Dat. ae 


5 


I 


Ul 


el 


Ace. am (en) 


iim 


em, im 


iim, u 


em 


Voc. a (e) 


e, er, um 


Like Nom. 


us, u 


es 


Abl. a (e).* 


6. 


e(i). 


u. 


e. 



* Of the nouns in e, as, es of this declension no examples have as yet been 
given. They are mostly of Greek origin, and will be considered hereafter. 



f Of this there is also an ancient form in ai, 
a hall. But this is not used except in poetry. 



auldi, for aulae, from aula, 



LESSON 13.] PLURAL OF SUBSTANTIVES AND ADJECTIVES. 51 



2. Terminations of the Plural. 





I. 


II 


Neul. 


III. 

Neut. 


No NT. 


ae 


', 


a 


es, a. (la) 


Gen. 


arum 


6mm 




um (mm) 


Dat. 


is (abus) 


Is 




ib us 


Ace. 


as 


6s, 


a. 


es, a (la) 


Voc. 


ae 


h 


a 


es, a (la) 


Abl. 


is (abus). 


IS. 




ibus. 



IV. 

Neut. 
us, ila. 
uum 
ibus 
us, ua 
us, ua 



ibus. 



V. 

es 
erum 

ebus 
es 
es 
ebiis. 

Remark. — With respect to the quantity of the terminations 
of the plural number, the following rules may serve to guide the 
learner : — 

1. / final is always long, and a final always short, as dominl, libri, 
bond , fila. 

2. The is of the dative and ablative plural of the first and second 
declensions is long, as taenils, domiriis, candeldbrls. 

3. The terminations es and os are long, as canes, lapides, ddminos, 
libros. 

4. The vowel before the m final in all Latin words is generally 
considered short, as lapidem, cdnem, jmnem, dominorum. 

5. The us of the plural of the fourth declension is long, but in 
abus, ebus, ibus it is short; asfructus, mdnus ; fructibus, diebus, liomini- 
bus. 

Examples. 

(" Nom. Piierl bdnl. 
1 Ace. Piieros bdnos. 
\ Nom Mensae pulchrae. 
I Ace. Mensas piilchras. 
j Nom. Pueri nequam. 
( Ace. Piieros nequam. 
( Nom. Canes veniisti. 
\ Ace. Canes veniistos. 

Nom. & Ace. Canes defdrmes. 

Nom. & Ace. Tibnilia Vetera. 

Nom. & Ace. Candelabra mea ar- 
gentea. 
( Nom. Libri tul bdnl. 
| Ace. Libros tiios bonds. 

Num habes mensas lllas piilchras ? 

Non habeo. 
( ^Icquid tibi siint * canes veniisti ? 
( Habesne canes veniistos ? 



The good boys. 
The fine tables. 
The bad boys. 

The pretty dogs. 

The ugly dogs. 
The old stockings. 
My silver candlesticks. 

Your good books. 

Have you those fine tables ? 
I have them not. 

Have you pretty dogs ? 



* When the noun is in the plural, sunt, " there are," must take the place of 
the singular est. 



52 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 14. 

T , ,. , ( Sunt mini canes veniisti. 

I have pretty dogs. j mheQ (cfaea vemistos) . 

Have you my good books ? Tenesne tii libros meos bdnos ? 

I have your good books. Teneo (libros tiios bdnos). 

Have you my silver candlesticks ? Halesne candelabra inea argentea ? 

I have them not. Non habeo. 

Have I them ? An ego habeo ? 

You have them not. Non habes. 

Exercise 14. 

Have you the tables ? — Yes, sir, I have the tables ? — Have you 
my tables ? — No, sir, I have not your tables. — Have I your but- 
tons ? — You have my buttons. — Have I your fine houses ? — You 
have my fine houses ? — Has the tailor the buttons ? — He has not 
the buttons, but the threads. — Has your tailor my good buttons ? — 
My tailor has your good gold buttons. — What has the boy ? — He 
has the gold threads. — Has he my gold or my silver threads ? — 
He has neither your gold nor your silver threads. — Has the French- 
man the fine houses or the good notes ? — He has neither the fine 
houses nor the good notes. — What has he ? — He has his good 
friends. — Has this man my fine umbrellas ? — He has not your fine 
umbrellas, but your good coats. — Has any one my good letters ? — 
No one has your good letters. — Has the tailor's son my good knives 
or my good thimbles ? — He has neither your good knives nor your 
good thimbles, but the ugly coats of the stranger. — Have I your 
friend's good ribbons ? — You have not my friend's good ribbons, 
but my neighbor's fine carriage. — Has your friend the shoemaker's 
pretty sticks, or my good tailor's pretty dogs ? — My friend has my 
good shoemaker's fine books ; but he has neither the shoemaker's 
pretty sticks nor your good tailor's pretty dogs. — Is your neighbor 
right or wrong ? — He is neither right nor wrong. — Is he thirsty or 
hungry ? — He is neither thirsty nor hungry. — Is he tired or sleepy ? 
— He is sleepy. — Am I sleepy ? — You are not sleepy. — What have 
I ? — You have my fine notes. — You have the chairs of my neigh- 
bor. — Have you the knives of my friend ? — I have not the knives 
of your friend, but the dogs of my neighbor. 



Lesson XIV. — pensum quartum decimum. 

OF THE PLURAL OF PRONOUNS. 

A. The plural of the personal pronouns ego and tu 
is nos, "we," and vos, "you." The remaining cases 
are : — 



LESSON 14.] 



PLURAL OF PRONOUNS. 



53 



ISTojl we 
Gen. of us 
Dat. to us 

Acc. us 
Voc. ■ ■ 



31asc. & Fern. 
nos 

nostrum or nostri 
nobis 
nos 
nos 



Abl. with us nobis. 



Masc. & Fern. 
ye or you vos 
of you vestrum or vestrl 

to you vobis 

you vos 

ye or you vos 
with you vobis. 



Bemark. — The difference between nostri, vesiri and nostrum, 
vestrum consists in this : that the latter are chiefly used as partitive 
genitives after interrogatives, numerals, comparatives, and superla- 
tives, and the former after other words ; e. g. uter nostrum? which of 
us two ? nemo vestrum, no one of you ; vestrum primus, the first of 
you ; but miserere nostri, pity us ; amor nostri, love of (towards) us ; 
vesiri similes, your like (those like you). 

B. The pronoun of the third person is illl, Mae, ilia, " they," 
of which the remaining cases are : — 







Masc. 


Fern. 


Neut. 


Nom. 


they 


illl 


illae 


ilia 


Gen. 


of them 


eorum 


earum 


eorum 


Dat. 


to them 




lis or eis 




Acc. 


them 


eos 


eas 


ea 


Voc. 




illl 


illae 


ilia 




Abl. 


by them. 




lis or eis. 





C. The reflexive sui is the same in the plural as in 
the singular. The intensive ipse has ipsi, ipsae, ipsa. 
Thus: — 



Sui, of themselves. 



For every 
gender. 



Ipsi, ipsae, ipsa, ourselves, your 
selves, themselves. 



Masc. 



Fern. 



Ne.ut. 



Nom. 
Gen. 
Dat. 

Acc. 
Voc. 
Abl. 


of themselves 
to themselves 
themselves 


sui 
sibi 

se 

se. 


ipsi 
ipsorum 

ipsos 
ipsi 


ipsae 

ipsarum 

ipsis 

ipsas 

ipsae 

ipsis. 


ipsa 
ipsorum 

ipsa 


by themselves 





Remark. — We thus say, as in the singular, nos ipsi (or fem. 
ipsae), we ourselves; vos ipsi (or fem. ipsae), you yourselves; and 
illi ipsi (or fem. illae ipsae) or simply ipsi, they themselves ; ea ipsa, 
these things themselves, &c. 



54 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 14. 



D. The plurals of the demonstrative pronouns Mc, 
Me, iste, and is, are hi, illl, isti, and tt. The remaining 
genders and cases are as follows : — 



Hi, hae, haec, these. 



Nom. 
Gen. 
Dat. 

Ace. 
Yoc. 
Abl. 



Masc. 

hi 

horum 

hos 
In 



Fern. Neut. 

hae haec 

harum horum 

his 

has haec 

hae haec 

his. 



Isti, istae, ista, these (of yours). 



Masc. 
Nom. isti 
Gen. istorum, 
Dat. 

Ace. istos 
Yoc. isti 
Abl. 



Fern. 
istae 
istarum, 
istis 
istas 
istae 
istis. 



Neut. 
ista 
istorum 

ista 
ista 



Ilh, illae, ilia, those {of his). 

Masc. Fem. Neut. 

ill! illae ilia 

illorum illarum illorum 

illis 

illos illas ilia 

illl illae ilia 

mis. 

Ii, eae, ea, these, those. 
Masc. Fem. Neut. 

!I (el) eae ea 

eorum earum eoriim 

ils or els 
eos eas ea 

II (el) eae ea 

lis or els. 



E. The relative qui, quae, quod (and also the inter- 
rogatives of the same form) makes its plural in qui, 
quae, "who, which, or that," or interrogatively 



quae, 



"which? what?" Thus: 



Nom. 
Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 
Voc. 
Abl. 



Qui, quae, quae, which, that ; which ? what ? 

Masc. Fem. Neut. 

qui quae quae 

quorum quarum quorum 



which 

of wh ich 
to which 
which 

by which. 



quo? 



Fem. 

quae 

quarum 

quibus 

quas 



quae 



quibus. 



Remark. — For quibus, in the relative sense, there is an anti- 
quated form guts or quels, which is not unfrequently employed by 
prose-writers of a later period. 

F. The plural of the determinative is, ea, id is the 
same as that of the demonstrative ; that of idem is as 
follows : — 



: 



LESSON 14.] 



PLURAL OF PRONOUNS. 



55 



Iidem, eaedem, eadem, the same. 

Ma.sc. Fern. Neut. 

Nom. the same iidem eaedem eadem 

Gen. of the same eorundem earundem eorundem 
Dat. to the same iisdem or eisdem 

Ace. the same eosdem easdem eadem 

Voc. the same iidem eaedem eadem 

Abl. by the same. iisdem or eisdem. 

Remark. — The form iisdem is more common than eisdem. The 
same is true of Us, it, eis, and ei. 

G. The plural of the relative in connection with the 
determinative is, ea, id (vide Lesson XII. D.) is as 
follows : — 

Ii, eae, ea — qui, quae, quae, those which. 

Masculine. Feminine. Neuter. 

qui eae — quae 

quorum earum — quarum 
quibus lis — quibus 



Noil 
Gen. 
Dat. 

Ace. 
Voc. 
Abl. 



ii 

eorum 
lis 
eos 



quos 



earum 

IIS 

eas 



quas 



ea 
eorum 


— quae 

— quorum 


iis 


— quibus 


ea 


— quae 



quibus lis — quibus 



quibus. 



In the same manner decline ilh 



qui, 



Mae 



quae, 



ilia — 



quae, 



* those which"; and iidem — qui, eaedem — quae, eadem — quae, 
"the same which." 

fHabeo eos (illos, &c), quos tu ha- 
I have those which you have.] bcs. 

(Masc.) j Sunt mihi ii (ill!, &c), qui tfbi 

[_ sunt. 

rHtibeo eas (l'llas, &c), quas tu ha- 
I have those which you have.] bes. 

(Fern.) j Sunt mihi eae (l'llae, &c), quae 

[_ tibi sunt. 
I have those (things) which you ( Habco ea (ilia, &c), quae tu. habes. 
have. (Neut.) \ Sunt mihi ea, quae tibi siint. 

The Roman. Eomanus, i, m. 

The German. Germanus, Theodiscus, i, m. 

The Turk. *Turca, ae, m. 

The Italian. Italus, i, m. 



The Spaniard. 

Large (tall, big). 
Tall, high. 



( Hispanus, i, m. 
\ Hispaniensis, is, m. 

Grandis, is, e. 

Procerus, a, um. 

Altus, a, um. 



56 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 14. 

C Parvus, a, um. 
Small, little. -< Parvulus, a, urn. 

( Pusillus, a, um. 
Long. Longus, a, um. 

The small books. Libri parvi, libelli.* 

The large horses. Equi grandes (or proceri). 

Weyto™- \ Sunt lis. 

Have the English the fine horses Habentne Angli piilchros Franco- 

of the French *? gallorum equos *? 

They have not those of the Noa Franeogallorum sed Romano- 
French, but those of the E,o- rum equos habent. 
mans. 

Have you the books which the Habesne tu (illos libros), quos li- 

men have ? bros homines habent ? f 

G. Obs. The antecedent of the relative is sometimes 
repeated in connection with the pronoun of the second 
clause. Sometimes it is expressed with the relative 
only, and sometimes (though rarelv) it is entirely omit- 
ted. 

I have not the books which the Xon habeo (illos libros), quos (Ii- 

men have, but those which bros) homines habent, eos aiitem 

you have. habeo, quos tu habes. 

Have you not the same books Xdnne tu edsdem libros habes, 

which I have ? quos ego habeo ? 

I have the same. i ? 6sclem ( Mb * ) ' , n 

I Ego vero eosdem habeo. 

-TTTi- i 1.11 o \ Quos libros habes ? 

W Inch books have you ? ^n ,,,.,, ,,, _ 

J I Quid Jibrorum habes i 

I have those of the Romans. Libros Romanorum habeo. (Vide 

r Less. VJ. C.) 

( TJtrum hos libros habes an illos ? 
Have you these books or those ? ■} Hoscine libros habes an illos ? 

( ( Vide Less. XL A. Bern. 1 .) 

t -Uo^~ ,~:+i „ ^ *a \ Habeo neque hos neque illos. 

1 have neither these nor those. < ,-& s , x ,. , L ,„_ ,,,., 

( (Ego) neque hos neque illos habeo. 

I have neither those of the Span- j Neque Hispanorum nee Turcarum 

iards nor those of the Turks. ( libros habeo. (Cf. Less. VI. C.) 

Have you what I have ? An habes (id), quod ego habeo ? 

* From the diminutive libellus, i, m., a little book, a pamphlet. (Compare 
Lesson XX. E. 7.) 

f The question, " Have you the books which the men have ? " mav thus 
be expressed in several ways : 1) Habesne tu illos libros, quos homines tiabenl i 
2) Habesne tu illos libros. quos libros homines habent? 3) Habesne tu quos 
libros homines habent 1 The first of these is the most general. The antecedent 
is entirely suppressed in : 4) Sunt qui (or quos). for Smt homines qui (or quos), 

lhere are those who," " There are men whom." 



LESSON 14.] PLURAL OF PRONOUNS. 57 

II Rule. Adjectives and pronouns of the neuter 
gender, both singular and plural, are frequently em- 
ployed substantively, as hoc, " this (thing)," Mud, "that 
(thing,)" haec, " these things," ilia, " those things," 
triste, " a sad thing," multa, " many things," omnia, 
" all things," summum bonum, " the chief good." 

I have not what you have. Non habeo (id), ^;oV tu babes. 

Have the men those things which Habentne homines ea, quae tu ha- 

you have ? ^ bes ? 

They have the same things which (' Eadem habent, quae ego ipse habeo. 

I myself have (the same things ■} Eadem habent dtque ego ipse. (Cf. 

with myself). ( Less. XII. F.) 

Exercise 15. 

Have you these horses or those ? — I have not these, but those. — 
Have you the coats of the French or those of the English ? — I have 
not those of the French, but those of the English. — Have you the 
pretty sheep of the Turks or those of the Spaniards ? — I have nei- 
ther those of the Turks nor those of the Spaniards, but those of my 
brother. — Has your brother the fine asses of the Spaniards or those 
of the Italians ? — He has neither those of the Spaniards nor those 
of the Italians, but he has the fine asses of the French. — Which 
oxen has your brother ? — He has those of the Germans. — Has your 
friend my large letters or those of the Germans ? — He has neither 
the one nor the other (neque has neque Mas, or neque Mas neque alte- 
ram) . — Which letters has he V — He has the small letters which you 
have. — Have I these houses or those ? — You have neither these 
nor those. — Which houses have I ? — You have those of the Eng- 
lish. — Has any one the tall tailor's gold buttons ? — Nobody has the 
tailor's gold buttons, but somebody has those of your friend. 

Exercise 16. 

Have I the notes of the foreigners or those of my boy. — You 
have neither those of the foreigners nor those of your boy, but those 
of the great Turks. — Has the Turk my fine horse V — He has it 
not. — Which horse has he ? — He has his own. — Has your neigh- 
bor my chicken or my sheep ? — My neighbor has neither your 
chicken nor your sheep. — What has he ? — He has nothing good. : — 
Have you nothing fine ? — I have nothing fine. — Are you tired ? — 
I am not tired. — Which rice has your friend ? — He has that of his 
merchant. — Which sugar has he ? — He has that which I have. — 
Has he your merchant's good coffee or that of mine ? — He has 
neither that of yours nor that of mine; he has his own. — Which 
ships has the Frenchman ? — He has the ships of the English. — 
Which houses has the Spaniard ? — He has the same which you 
have. — Has he my good knives V — He has your good knives. — 



58 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 15. 



Has he the linen stockings "which I have ? — He has not the same 
that you have, but those of his brother. — Which books have you ? — 
I have those of the Romans. — Are those men hungry ? — They are 
not hungry, but thirsty. — - They are neither tired nor sleepy. 



Lesson XV. — pexsiuvi quintum decimum. 



The glass. 
The goblet. 
The comb. 

Have you my small combs V 
I have them. 
I have them not. 

Tliem (those). 



( Yas (gen. vasis)* vitreum, n. 
\ Scyphus, i, m. (wine-glass). 

Poculum, i, n. 
( Peeten, mis, m. 
I Pectunculus, i, m. (small comb). 

Habesne meos pectunculos ? 

(Eos) habeo. 

(Eos) non habeo. 
J Xom. u, eae, ea. 
I Ace. eus, eds, ea. 

A. Obs. The pronoun them is commonly not put in 
Latin, when it would have to stand in the same case 
as the substantive to which it relates. (Cf. page 14, 
D.) 

My or mine (plural). Mei, meae, mea. 

Your (thy) or yours. Tin, tilae, tua. 

His (own). Siii, suae, sua. 

His (another man's). Ejus, UUus (gen. sing ). 

m • / \ ui • ( Sixg. Suus, sua, suiim. 

1 heir (own) or theirs. < -r> TT „ c— ~ ~~ . 

v J \ Plur. bui, suae, sua.f 

Their or theirs (of a tliird per- (Masc. Eorum, illoriim (gen. pi.). 

son )- \ Fem. Eariim, illarum " 

B. The plural of the possessive pronouns mens, tuns, 
suits is inflected like that of the adjective bonus. Thus : — 







Masc. 


Fern. 


Neut. 


Nom. 


my or mine 


mei 


meae 


mea, 


Gen. 


of my or mine 


meortim 


mearum 


meortim 


Dat. 


to my or mine 




meis 




Ace. 


my or mine 


meos 


meas 


mea 


Yoc. 


my or mine 


mei 


meae 


mea 


Abl. 


with my or mine. 




meis. 





* The plural of vas is vasa, from another singular, vdsum. (See Lesson XIX. 
D. 2.) 

f The reflexive adjective pronoun suus is equivalent to the English "his/' 



LESSON 15.] 



PLURAL OF PRONOUNS. 



59 



Have you my fine glass ? 

Has he my fine glasses ? 

He has them. 

He has them not. 

Those men have them. 

Have those men them ? 

They have them not. 

Have you my books or his (i. e. 

that man's) ? 
I have neither yours nor his 

(books). 
Has he his (own) book, his 

(own) books ? 
He has them. 
Have they their (own) house, 

their (own) houses '? 
They have them not. 
Have you yourself their (i. e. 

those people's) good comb, 

good combs ? 
I have myself their good little 

combs. 

Which carriages have you ? 

I have my own. < 

They (those). 



Ecquid habes vas vitreum meum 

piilchrum ? 
An file habet vasa vitrea mea piil- 

chra ? 
Habet. 

(Ea) non habet. 
Virl ill! ea habent. 
Numquid ea virl ill! habent ? 
Ea non habent. 
Habesne libros meos an ejus (illi- 

, us ) ? 
Ego neque tiios neque illius libros 

habeo. 
Habetne librum siium, libros suos ? 

(Eos) htibet. 

Habentne ddmum siiam, ddmos sii- 

^as? 
(Eas) non habent. 
An tu ipse habes pectinem eorum 
bdnum, pectines illorum bdnos ? 

Ego ipse pectunculos eorum bonds 

habeo. 
Quds habes ciirms ? 
Quae pilenta habes ? 
Habeo meos prdprids. 
Mea propria habeo. 

llli, illae, ilia. 



C. Obs. The pronoun they is in Latin commonly 
omitted with the verb. But when the verb sum is em- 
ployed to denote possession, the dative Us or Mis must 
be put. E. g. : — 

C Habent (with the Ace). 

■1 Est iis (illis) (with the Nbm. Sing.). 

I Sunt iis (illis) (with the Norn. PL). 

( Habentne (illi) librum bdnum ? 

( Estne iis (illis) liber bonus ? 

< Habent librum bdnum. 

\ Est iis liber bonus. 

Esuriiintne ? Sitiiintne ? 

Non esuriunt (sitiunt). 



They have. 

Have they the good book ? 

They have the good book. 

Are they hungry ? thirsty ? 
They are not hungry (thirsty). 



when the subject of the sentence is in the singular, and to ''their" when it is 
in the plural." E. g. Has he his book, his hooks ? Habetne librum suum, libros 
suos ? — Have they their book, their books ? Habentne librum suum, libros 
suos ? 



60 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 15. 

Are they tired, sleepy ? Siintne fessi (fem. fessae), somnl- 

culdsi (fem. ae) ? 

They are sleepy. Ciipldi (fem. ae) sdmni sunt. 

Are they right '? "wrong ? Loquuntiirne recte ? Errantne ? 

They are neither right nor Ne'que recte loquiintur neque er- 

wrong. / rant. 

Are they right (morally) ? Estne Us fas ? Licetne lis ? 

OF COMPOUND SUBSTANTIVES. 

I). The compound or double substantives of the Latin lan- 
guage are comparatively few,* and of these even, many are 
most commonly treated as separate words. With respect to 
their declension, they are divided into two classes. 

1. Those of which the last component alone is inflected, as juris- 
dictio ( = juris + dictio), unis, f., the administration of justice; juris- 
consultus, or jureconsultus, i, m., a lawyer; plebiscltum, ?', n., a vote 
of the people ; senatusconsidtum, i, n., a decree of the senate. 

2. Those of which both components are inflected, either separately 
or combined. Such are : — 

a) Jusjurandum, ??., an oath. 

Singular. Plural. 

jurajuranda 
jurumjurandorum 
j uribusj urandis . 
jurajuranda 
jurajuranda 
juribusjurandis.f 





Nom. jusjurandum 




Gen. jurisjurandi 




Dat. jurijiirando 




Acc. jusjurandum 




Yoc. jusjurandum 




Abl. jurejurando 


b) 


Pater familias, or familiae 




Singular. 


Nom. 


pater familias or -ae 


Gex. 


patris familias " " 


DAT. 


patri familias ' ; " 


Acc. 


patrem familias " " 


Yoc. 


pater familias " " 


Ael. 


patre familias " " 



Plural. 

patre s familias or -arum 

patrum familias " " 

patribus familias " " 

patres familias " " 

patres familias " " 

patribus familias " " 

In the same manner decline mater familias, f., the mistress of a 
family; fdais familias, m., and fllla familias, f., the son, the daughter, 
of a family or house. 



* This remark applies only to such compounds as ai-e formed by the union 
of a noun with another or with an adjective. Compounds with particles (i. e. 
prepositions and adverbs) are quite numerous. 

f The Genitive, Dative, and Ablative plural do not occur. 



LESSON 15.] 


IRREGULAR 


NOUNS. 




c) Res publica, /., 


a commonwealth. 




Singular. 


Plural. 


Nom. 


res publica 


res publicae 


GejNT. 


rei publicae 


re rum pu bl ic ar urn 


Dat. 


rei publicae 


rebus publicis 


Acc. 


rem publicam 


res publicas 


Voc. 


res publica 


res publicae 


Abl. 


re publica 


rebus publicis. 



Gl 



OF IRREGULAR NOUNS.* 

E. The irregular nouns of the Latin language may be divid- 
ed into three general classes : — the Indeclinable, the Defective, 
and the Redundant. 

Those which do not admit of any inflection, i. e. are alto- 
gether indeclinable, are : — 

1 . Greek and Latin names of the letters of the alphabet, as alpha, 
beta, gamma, delta, &c. 

2. A number of substantives adopted from foreign languages, as 
manna, pascha, gummi, &c. 

3. Greek neuters in os and plurals in e, as Argos, chaos, cetos or 
cete, a sea-monster, Tempe, &c. 

4. Many Hebrew proper names, as Bethlehem, Gabriel, Jerusalem, 
liuth, &c. — Jesus has Jesum in the Acc. and Jesu in the remaining 
cases. 

5. The following Latin neuters: fas, right: nefas, wrono- ; instar. 
likeness ; mane, morning ; nihil, nothing ; parum, too little ; pondo, 
a pound (or pounds) ; seciis, sex ; senils, half. These are generally 
used in the Norn, and Acc. only, except mane, which occurs also in 
the ablative. 

6. Infinitives, adverbs, and other particles, used substantively, as 
scire tiium, your knowing (knowledge) ; ultimum vale, the last 
farewell ; hoc ipsum diu, the very word " a long time " ; istud cras, 
that to-morrow of yours, &c. 

7 To these may be added the indeclinable adjectives: frugl (the 
obsolete dative offrux, which is not used), useful, fit, honest; nequam, 
bad ; praesto*, present, ready ; potis or pote (obsolete, and only with 
esse, to be), able, capable ; semis, and a half; and damnus (only in 
law), guilty. 

F. Nouns are defective in case or in number. Those defec- 
tive in case are : — 

1. Those which want the nominative, as ddpis, of food; dicionis, 

* This examination of the irregular nouns in this and the following lessons 
has no necessary connection with the exercises, but is nevertheless recom- 
mended to the attention of the learner. 

6 



62 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 15. 

of dominion ; femmis, of the tliigh ; frugis, of fruit ; internecwnis, of 
carnage; opts, of power; pollinis, of meal-dust; vicis, of alternation; 
verberis, of a lash (stripe). Many of these genitives occur in the 
remaining cases of both numbers. 

2. A number of monosyllables -which want the genitive plural, as 
as, oris, the mouth ; vas, vadis, bail ; glos, gloris, the husband's sister ; 
pax, pads, a treaty, &c. 

3. Those which occur in the Nom. and Ace. only, as the indeclina- 
able fas, nefds, &c, to which may be added the plurals colla, the 
neck; fiamina, breezes; grates, thanks ; murmura, murmurs, &c. 

4 . A number of substantives, which occur only in certain cases, as 
astiis, cunning, Abl. astu, Nom. & Ace. PL astiis ; fors, chance, Abl. 
forte, by chance ; lues, disease, Ace. liiem, Abl. lue ; prices, pi., pray- 
ers, Abl. Sing, prece : satids for satietas, satiety, occurs only in the 
Nom. Sing. — Vis, might, power, wants the dative ; in the remaining 
cases it has G. vis, A. vim, V. vis, A. vi ; PL N. vires, G. virium, &c. 

5. A number of words used in certain connections are al- 
ways in a particular case, as : — 

a) The Genitives dicis and nauci in dicis causa, for form's sake ; 
non nauci facer e, not to value a straw. 

b) Certain Datives with the verb esse, to be, as despicdtui, dwi- 
sui, ostentui, diici esse, to be an object of contempt, to serve for di- 
vision, for display, as a guide, &c. 

c) The Accusatives infitlas w r ith Ire, to deny ; suppettas with 
ferre, to bring help; venum with ire (or dare), to be offered for sale 
(to offer for sale) . 

d) The Ablatives ndtu (by birth) in connection with major, mi- 
nor, maximus, &c, the elder, younger, oldest, &c. (by birth) ; 
sponte, with meet, tiia, sua, of my, thy, his own accord ; in promptu 
and in procinctu w r ith esse and stare, to be ready, to stand prepared. 

e) Verbal substantives in Abl. Sing, with one of the possessives 
meo, tuo, sad, &c, as admonilu, concessu or permissu, mandatu, jussii 
(and injussu, &c.) meo, tuo, sua, at my, thy, his own request, with 
my, thy, his own permission, command, order, &c. 

f) The Abl. PL grafts (from gratils), without reward, gratis ; in- 
grdtlis, against one's will ; foris, out of doors (to the question where ?), 
which to the question whither? becomes fords, Ace. 

6. Many nouns do not admit of the Vocative from the nature of 
their signification. 

7. The adjectives defective in case are : — 

a) Those w r hich do not occur in the nominative ; as (sons') sontis, 
"hurtful" ; (semmex) seminecis, "half dead"; and a few other similar 
compounds. To these add (ceterus), a, urn and ludicrus, a, um, of 
which the Nom. Masc. does not occur. 

b) The genitive primoris, " the fore," " first," which wants the 
Nom. and neuter forms, and the plural plerlque, " most," which bor- 
rows the genitive of plurimi. 



LESSON 16.] INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. G3 

c) Necesse and the obsolete necessum, "necessarv" wl,;,i, Q 
withes* &c ^ c ' agreeable, likewise used only 

Exercise 17. 
Have you my good combs ? — - 1 have thpm TT*™ ,1 

tire goo,] cheeses which vou havo ? n~ i ^ , the Itahan 
have, but those which yoaWk:? 'T not t,10se which z 
- He has them. - H^he theTa™^^ S'V'"^ 

the Spaniards ? - The En °I °1 1 „ . ' "~ ^?° has ti,e S, "P S ot 
these fhips „ those , - togt^'J^]*? %^ 

- Have Tw MT 7 aVe ne ," her raine nor those <>f tl,e English. 
neitW tl,. ,ook,n .f glasses or those (7//«) of his cook ? _ You have 
neither the one nor the other (neither these nor those).* 

Lesson XVI. - PENSUM SEXTOI DECIMUM. 

AKquis, -qua, -quod or -yuitf. 

Quldum. quaedum, quotidian or 
Some, any (some one, any one). J //""Mum. 

Uutis, a. um. 
i NonmMSs, a, ion. 
__ IMiqutit (pi. indeclinable). 



r 



64 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[lesson 16. 



Does any ? Whether any ? EcquXs, ecquae, ecquod or ecquid ? 

Jf ami (if any one). Si quis, si qua, si quod or quid. 

Lest any (= that no). Ne quis, ne qua, ne quod or quid. 

A. The indefinite pronouns allquis, quidam, ullus, 
nonnullus, si quis, ne quis, and ecquis ? are used either 
as substantives in the sense of some one, any one, some- 
thing, anything, or as adjectives in the sense of some or 
any. They are thus inflected : — 

Aliquis, -qua, -quod or -quid, some, any (generally). 





Singular. 




Plural. 


Nom. aliqui 


- _ C aliquod ) 
3 alic l ua jaliquid} 


aliqua 


aliquae aliqua 


Gen. 


alicujus 


aliquoram -arilm -orum 


DAT. 


alicui 




aliquibus 


Acc. allque 


wlv « ( aliquod ") 
m aliquam j a d j 


aliquos 


; aliquas aliqua 


Voc. Like Nom. 


Like Nom. 


Abl. aliquo 


aliqua idiquo 




aliquibus. 


Quidam, 


quaedam, quoddam or quiddam, a certain one. 




Singular. 




Nom. 


quidam quaedam 


( quoddam 
( quiddam 


Gen. 


cujusdam 




DAT. 


cuidam 




Acc. 


quendam* quandam 


( quoddam 
\ quiddam 


Voc. 


Like Nom. 




Abl. 


quodam quadam 
Plural. 


quodam. 


Nom. 


quidam quaedam 


quaedam 


Gen. 


quorundam quaruhdam 


quorundam 


Dat. 


quibusdam 




Acc. 


quosdam quasdam 


quaedam 


Yoc. 


Like Nom. 




Abl. 


quibusdam. 




Ecquis, ecquae or ecqua, ecquod or -quid ? 


any one (interroga- 




ti very). 






Singular. Plural. 


^ (ecquis ecquae ecquod} | ( 
0M " \ ecqul ecqua ecquid ) | 


>cqui 


( ecquae 
ecquae < x ^ 
H ( ecqua 



* The n instead of m in quendam, quandam, quorundam, and quarundam is 
euphonic. 



LESSON 16.] ALIQUIS. QUID AM. ECQUIS. ULLTJS. 



65 



Gen. 


ecciijiis 


ecquortim -arum -oriim 


DAT. 


eccui 


ecqulbus 


Acc. 


fecquod) 
ecquem ecquam ■< ~a C 


_ ( ecqnae 
ecquos ecqnas ■< ^ _ 
1 1 I ecqua 


Yoc. 






Abl. 


ecquo ecqua ecquo. 


ecquibtis. 



Ullus, ulla, ullum, any (negatively). 
Singular. Plural. 



Nom. ullus ulla ullum 

Gen. ulllus 

Dat. ulli 

Acc. ullum ullam ullum 

Voc. 

Abl. ullo ulla ullo. 



ulli ullae ulla 

ullorum ullarum ullorum. 

ullls 

ullos ullas ulla 



ullls. 



Eemarks. 

1. The neuter aliquod is always used adjectively in agreement with 
its noun, whereas aUquid generally stands substantively ; as aliquod 
detrimentum, some detriment; but aliquid, something; cdlquid boni, 
something (of) good, &c. — Aliquls is both substantive and adjective, 
and is sometimes joined with unus , as (unus) aliquls, some one; liber 
aliquis, some book. 

2. Quidam is said of individuals or objects, of the nature of which 
we are either ignorant, or which we do not wish to specify: "a cer- 
tain (one)," u a sort of," "a certain degree of." E. g. Quidam de 
meis amicis, a certain one (some one) of my friends ; quodam tempore, 
at a certain time ; quoddam commune vinculum, a certain (a sort of) 
common bond ; quiddam, boni, (a certain) something good, a certain 
degree of good. — This pronoun may stand either substantively or 
adjectively, and quiddam differs from quoddam, like aliquid from ali- 
quod. — The plural quidam, quaedam, quaedam is often used simply 
with the sense of aliquot or nonnulli, " some," " several." 

3. Between the forms ecquis and ecqui, ecquae and ecqua, there is 
no appreciable difference, ecquis and ecqui being both used either in- 
dependently in the sense of " any one," " some one," or adjectively 
in the sense of" any"; as Ecqirts (or ecqui) hie est ? Is there any one 
here ? Ecquis (or ecqui) est tibi liber ? Have you any book ? The 
same may be said of the neuters ecquod and ecquid. The latter, how- 
ever, (ecquid,) frequently loses all pronominal force, and serves 
merely to introduce a question. 

4. Ullus is generally an adjective, and is only used in sentences 
involving a negation or uncertainty . Hence it is frequently preceded 
by non, nee, sine, si, num or numquid ; as sine ulla spe, without any 
hope ; si tibi est ullus amicus, if you have any friend ; nerjo tibi esse 
ullum amicum, I deny that you have any friend, &c. — Ullus, how- 

E '6* 



66 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 16. 



ever, becomes positive by a double negation in nonnullus, a, urn, 
"some," as does also nihil in nonnihil, "something." 

5. Quis is commonly put instead of aliquis in all sentences involv- 
ing a condition, a negation, or comparison. When thus employed in 
the sense of any or any one, it is preceded by si, nisi, ne, num, quo, 
quanto, or quum ; as si qua ratione, if in any way ; si quid est tibi 
bonum, if you have anything good ; ne quod periculum incideret, lest 
(= that no) danger might occur ; quanto quis est doctior, eo modesti- 
or, the more learned any one is, the more modest he will be. — Si- 
quis and nequis are declined exactly like ecquis, i. e. the fem. sing. 
is siqua or slquae, and the neut. slquod or siquid. 

6. When the substantive denotes a quantity or mass in the singular, 
the English "some" or "any" may be expressed by aliquantum or 
aliquantulum (with the genitive), and when it denotes number in the 
plural, by the indeclinable aliquot (in the same case with the noun). 
E. g. aliquantum sacchari, some sugar ; aliquot libri or libros, some 
books. 

7. The English word "any" is often entirely suppressed in Latin. 
Thus : — 



The wine. 

Some (any) wine. 
Some (any) bread. 
Some (any) paper. 
Some (any) books. 

Some good cheese. 

Have you any wine ? 
I have some. 

Have you any water ? 

I have some. 

Have you any good wine ? 

I have some. 

Has he any good cloth ? 

He has some. 

Have you any shoes ? 

I have some. 



Vinum, i, n. ; merum, i, n. {pure 

ivine). 
Vinum or aliquantum vmi. 
Panem or aliquantum panis. 
Chartam or aliquantum chiirtae. 
Libros or aliquot (nonniillos) li- 
bros. 
<" Caseum bdnum. 
( Aliquantum casei boni. 

j Ecquid est tibi vinum ? 

( Habesne vinum (aliquantum vmi)? 

( Est (milii nonniillum). 

I (Aliquantum) habeo. 

T Ecqua (ecquid) est tibi aqua ? 

■} Habesne aquam (or aliquantum 

( r aquae) '? 

( Est (mihi nonniilla). 

( (Aliquantum) habeo. 

( Ecquid est tibi vinum bdnum ? 

( Habesne aliquantum vini bdni ? 

( Est (mihi aliquantum). 

( (Nonniillum) habeo. 

( Ecqui(s) est el bonus pannus ? 

\ Habetne bdnum pannum ? 

Est. Habet. 
( £cqui sunt tibi calcei ? 
\ Habesne calceos aliquot (aliquos) ? 
j Sunt mihi aliquot (aliqui). 
( Nonniillos (quosdam) habeo. 



LESSON 16.] NOUNS DEFECTIVE IN NUMBER. G7 

TT -, t -, (Ecqui tibi sunt equi bdni an ne- 

Have you some good or bad ) ,?„„_ o ^ 

v. i -< 9 "^ quam . 

( Habesne equos bdnos an nequam ? 

JSiint niihi (aliqui) bdni. 
Habeo (nonmillos or quosdam) 
bdnos. 
fEcquae est tibi aqua bona an ne- 

Have you good or bad water ? A t g^ quam Mbes bdnam fa vi . 

[ ,lem? 
T , , ( (Est mihi) bona. 

I have some good. j Bdnam habeo. 

TT , , , . o \ Estne tibi vinum bdnum an vile ? 

Have you good or bad wine r ■< T ' T , * , ,, , , , M ~ 

( Utrum vinum habes bonum an vile? 

j (Est mihi) vile. 

\ Vile (nequam) habeo. 



I have some bad. 



OF NOUNS DEFECTIVE IN NUMBER. 

B. Words defective in number are either such as 
have no plural, or such as have no singular. 

Those which do not admit of a plural are called singulciria 
tantum. They are : — ■ 

1 . Abstract nouns, or such as denote a quality or intellectual exist- 
ence considered as general or indivisible ; asjustitia, pietas, temperan- 
tia, senectus, fames, sitts, &c, justice, piety, temperance, old age, hun- 
ger, thirst,* &c. 

2. Names of materials or of a mass without subdivision ; as auruni, 
gold; argentum, silver; argilla, white clay; coenum, mire, mud; sabu- 
lum, sand ; sanguis, blood, &c. 

3. Collectives, i. e. such as denote a totality or mass of individuals 
or things ; as plebs and vulgus, the vulgar ; popiilus, the people ; su- 
pellex, furniture ; victus, food, support ; vlriis, poison (of every kind). 
So also indoles, natural parts; and scienUa, the totality of a man's 
knowledge. &c. 

4. Proper names, except when they are common to several indi- 
viduals ; as VirgXlius, Cicero, Plautus, &c. But Caesar, Caesares. 

5. The following words : justilium, suspension of business (in 
courts, &e.) ; letum, death ; meridies, noon ; specimen, example ; ver, 
spring ; vesper and vespera, evening. 

* Abstract terms, however, frequently do occur in the plural, a) when they 
denote different kinds of the same quality, as exeettentiae, quietes, trdcundiae, 
fortitudlnes, mortes, metus, different kinds of excellence, rest, anger, bravery, 
death, fear, &c. ; and b) to express a repetition of the same thing in different 
subjects, as adventus, effusion? s, arrivals, eruptions ; interitus, exitiis, odia, 
aniuii, destruction, exit, odium, courage, as experienced or incurred by differ- 
ent men. — To these may be added the idiomatic Latin plurals nive's, grandinis, 
imbres, pliwlae, falls of snow, hail, rain, and soles, spells of sunshine. 



68 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSOX 17. 

6. To these may be added the peculiar use of names of vegetables 
and fruits, where in English we employ the plural ; as fabam, lentem, 
rapum serere, to sow beans, lentils, turnips ; ciceris catlnus, a bowl 
of peas ; nux, uva, the nut, grape, i. e. nuts, grapes, &c. 

Exercise 18. 

Have you any sugar ? — I have some. — Have you any good cof- 
fee ? — I have some. — Have you any salt ? — I have some. — Have 
I any good salt '? — You have some. — Have I any shoes ? — You 
have some. — Have I any pretty dogs ? — You have some. — Has 
the man any good honey ? — He has some. — What has the man ? 

— He has some good bread. — What has the shoemaker ? — He has 
some pretty shoes. — Has the sailor any biscuits ? — He has some. — 
Has your friend any good pencils ? — He has some. — Have you 
good or bad coffee '? — I have some good. — Have you good or bad 
wood ? — I have some good. — Have I good or bad oxen ? — You 
have some bad (ones). — Has your brother good or bad cheese ? — 
He has neither good nor bad. — What has he good ? — He has some 
good friends. — Who has some cloth ? — My neighbor has some. — 
Who has some money ? — The French have some. — Who has some 
gold ? — The English have some. — Who has some good horses ? — 
The Germans have some. — W T ho has some good hay ? — This ass 
has some. — Who has some good bread ? — That Spaniard has some. 

— Who has some good books '? — These Frenchmen have some. — 
Who has some good ships ? — Those Englishmen have some. — Has 
anybody wine ? — Nobody has any. — Has the Italian fine or ugly 
horses ? — He has some ugly (ones). — Have you wooden or stone 
tables? — I have neither wooden nor stone (ones). — Has your boy 
the fine books of mine ? — He has not those of your boy, but his 
own. — Has he any good thread stockings ? — He has some. — What 
has the Turk ? — He has nothing. — He has (a certain) something 
bad (quiddam malt). — Who has something good '? — A certain 
stranger has something good. — Has any one hay ? — Certain hus- 
bandmen have some hay and (et) corn. 



Lesson XVII. — PENSUM SEPTULUM decimum. 

f Nullus, nulla, nullum. 

at . Nihil (with the <xen.). 

J\o, not any, none. -I Ar v . s I, „ 10 

J j JSumquis, -quae, -quod or -quid ? 

^ Sometimes simply Non. 

A. Obs. The pronominal adjective nullus is declined like 
uttus. (Vide Lesson XVI.) Its masculine singular is also em- 
ployed substantively in the place of nemo, " no one, nobody " 
(Lesson X. C.) Numquis is declined like ecquis, and is used 



LESSON 17.] NULLUS. NIHIL. NUMQUID. 



69 



in questions to which nullus is expected in the answer. In- 
stead T)f the adjective nullus, nihil is frequently put partitively 
with the genitive, singular and plural. Sometimes the Eno-lish 



no, 



none, is expressed by a simple non. 



Examples : — 

j Niimquis est tibi liber ? 

\ Habesne librum aliquem ? 

\ Non est. 

( Nullum habeo. 

] Niimquid est tibi vinum (vini) ? 

\ Num habes aliquantum vini ? 

j Non (nullum) est. 

\ Nullum habeo. 

j An est tibi nihil panis ? 

i An nullum panem habes ? 

\ Nihil. 

(Nullum (habeo). 

\ Niimquid est mihi nihil chartae ? 

| Num chartam millam habeo ? 

( Est tibi ndnnihil. 

\ Nonmillam ve'ro habes. 

j Non tibi sunt lilli calcei ? 

( An nihil calceorum habes ? 

j Niilli. 

( Nihil (niillos, non ullos) habeo. 

j Niimqui tibi sunt ? 

\ Num aliquos (lillos) habes ? 

( Non sunt. 

\ Niillos habeo. 

j Niim qui sunt viro illi ? 

( Niim vir llle lillos habet ? 

j Non sunt. 

( Niillos habet. 

j Ecqui sunt ei libri bdni ? 

( Habetne libros aliquos bo'nos ? 

J Sunt ei aliqui (nonniilli). 

I Non niillos (aliquot) habet. 

Nihil pecuniae, nihil librorum ha- 
beo. 
*Americanus, i, m. 

Hibernus, i, m. 

Scotus, i, m. 

Batavus, i, m. 
*Russus, i, m. 

Esne tu Americanus ? 

Slim. Non siim. 
fUtrum libros tenes Batavorum an 
Have you the books of the Dutch J Eussorum ? 

or those of the Russians ? 1 Batavoriimne libros tenes an Rus- 

l_ sorum ? 



Have you any book ? 

I have none. 

Have you any wine ? 

I have none. 

Have you no bread ? 

I have none. 

Have I no paper ? 

You have some. 

Have you no shoes ? 

I have none. 

Have you any ? 

I have none. 

Has the man any ? 

He has none. 

Has he any good books ? 

He has some. 

I have no money, no books. 

The American 

The Irishman. 

The Scotchman. 

The Dutchman. 

The Russian. 
Are you an American ? 
I am (one). I am not. 



70 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[lesson 17. 



B. The substantives which are pluralia tantum, i. e. used 
in the plural number only, are : — ■ 

1. The names of certain determinate days of the Roman month, 
as Calendae, the Calends ; Nonae, the nones ; Idus, the ides. To 
these add nundinae, a fair (held every ninth day) ; and ferXae, holi- 
days. 

2. The names of festivals and public games, as Bacchanalia, Flo- 
rcdia, Saturnalia, &c, festivals in honor of Bacchus, Flora, Saturn, 
&c, Olympla, the Olympic games, and ludi, public games generally. 
So also natalXtXa, birthday festival ; repotXa, drinking-bout after a 
feast ; sponsalXa, espousals. 

3. Many names of towns and countries, including such as are 
properly names of nations, e. g. Arbela (orum), Erbil ; Athenae, Ath- 
ens ; Gades, Cadiz ; Leuctrd (orurri) ; Delphi ; Trevirl, the country of 
the Treviri ; Pdrlsii, Paris ; Syraciisae, Syracuse ; Persae, Persia. 

4. The following substantives, which, with a plural form, commonly 
preserve a plural signification : — 



Alpes, the Alps. 

ambages, quibbles, subterfuges. 

argutiae, subtleties, wit. 

arma, arms. 

artus, limbs. 

bellaria, dainties. 

cani, gray hairs. 

coelites, the celestials. 

consentes, the twelve highest gods. 

crepundia, toys. 

deliciae, delight; darling. 

divitiae, riches. 

donaria, ) 

lautia, '\P"**t*> 

excubiae, watches. 

exta, 

intestina, y th 

viscera, 

exuviae, 

spolia, 

facetiae, pleasantry. 

fori, 



funeral rites. 



foruli, 



book-cases. 



foria, excrements. 

grates, thanks. 

gemini, twins. 

gerrae, 7 

° • J/n r nonsense. 

quisquiliae, ) 

ilia, the entrails. 

impedimenta, baggage, 

induviae, articles of clothing. 



inferiae, 

justa, 

inferi, the gods below. 

insldiae, snares. 

lamenta, complaints. 

lemures, departed spirits. 

liberi, children. 

majores, ancestors. 

manes, shades (of the dead). 

minae, menaces. 

moenia, icalls. 

parietinae, dilapidated walls. 

penates, household-gods. 

posteri, descendants. 

praestigiae, jugglers' tricks. 

preces, prayers. 

primores, } 77 7 7 
r - y nobles, leaders. 

proceres, j ' 

reliquiae, the remains. 

salebrae, impediments. 

sentes, ) j7 

>• thorns. 
vepres, j 

serta, garlands. 
superi, the upper gods. 
tormina, the gripes. 
tiicae, fooleries, gewgaws. 
utensilia, necessaries (of life). 
valvae, ) 7 „ 7 7 
fores, 'I door-folds. 

verbera, blows. 



LESSON 17.] 



PLUKALIA TANTUM. 



71 



5. The following substantives, which, though plural in form, 
have^niore or less a singular signification : — 
altaria, the high altar. 
t_,i • ' Y lattice-work, grating. 



hunter's net. 



casses, 
plagae, 
clitellae, pack-saddle. 

' Y the buttocks. 
nates, ) 

cunae, ") 

eunabula, > the cradle. 

incunabula, ) 

exsequiae, the funeral. 

fauces, the throat. 

fides, the lyre. 

induciae, armistice. 



mimicitiae, enmity. 
loculi, a casket. 
manubiae, booty. 
nuptiae, a wedding. 
obices, a bolt, bar. 
pantices, the paunch. 
praecordia, the diaphragm. 
pugillares, ") 

tabulae, > writing-tablets. 
cerae, ) 

scalae, the ladder. 
seopae, the broom. 
sordes, the dirt. 
tenebrae, darkness. 
virgulta, the brushwood. 



C. Some substantives assume a different signification in the 
plural, and sometimes also a different gender. Thus : — 

Singular. 

fastus, pride. 

forum, the market-place. 
lustrum, a period of Jive years. 
tempus, time. 



fastus, 



Plural. 

the calendar. 



fasti, 

fori, the gangways. 
lustra, dens of wild beasts. 
tempora, the temples {of the 



D. Others modify their signification in the plural without 
abandoning that of the singular : — 

Singular. 
aedes, is, a temple. 
aqua, water. 
auxilium, help. 
bonum, something good. 



career, a prison. 
castrum, a castle. 
comitium, a part of the Roman 

forum. 
copia, abundance. 
ciipedia, daintiness. 

epiilum, a banquet. 
facultas, ability, power. 
fortuna, fortune, luck. 
hortus, i, a common garden. 

littera (or litera), a letter of the 

alphabet. 
ludus, pastime, school. 



Plural. 
aedes, ium, a house. 
aquae, mineral springs. 
auxilla, auxiliary troops. 
bona, property. 
careeres, the lists (barrier). 
castra, a camp. 
comitia, an election-meeting. 



copiae, military forces. 

ciipediae or) 7 . , 7 ., 

~ r _ -,„ Y dainty bits. 

cupedia, n. \ J 

epulae, the food, meal. 

facultates, property, means. 

fortunae, gifts of fortune. 

1 4.-V [ a garden for pleasure. 

litterae (literae), a letter, writings. 

ludi, a public spectacle. 



72 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 18. 

naris, the nostril. nares, mm, tire nostrils, or the nose. 

natalis (i. e. dies), birthday. natales, the birth (icith respect to rooky. 

(ops), help. opes, power : property. 

opera, trouble, pains. operae, operatives. 

pars, the part. partes, a party ; role. 

rostrum, a beak, bill. rostra, the orator's stage.* 

sal, salt. sales, witty sayings, repartee. 

E. The Adjectives defective in number are pauci, a few, and ple- 
rique, most, which in ordinary language want the singular. Of pau- 
cus, the neuter diminutive pauxillum or pauxillulum only occurs in 
the sense of " some little." The singular plerusque was anciently 
used in the sense of " the greater part of," but is now only put in the 
neuter (plerumque), and adverbially, " for the most part." 

Exercise 19. 

Has the American good money ? — He has some. — Have the 

Dutch good cheese ? — Yes, sir, the Dutch have some. — Has the 

Russian no cheese ? — He has none. — Have you good stockings ? — 

I have some. — Have you good or bad honey '? — I have some good. 

— Have you some good coffee ? — I have none. — Have you some 
bad coffee ? — I have some. — Has the Irishman good wine ? — He 
has none. — Has he good water ? — He has some. — Has the Scotch- 
man some good salt 't — He has none. — What has the Dutchman ? 

— He has good ships. — Have I some bread ? — You have none. — 
Have I some good friends ? — You have none. — Who has good 
friends ? — The Frenchman has some. — Has your servant any coats 
or brooms ? — He has some good brooms, but no coats. — Has any 
one hay ? — Some one has some. — Who has some ? — My servant 
has some. — Has this man any bread ? — He has none. — Who has 
good shoes ? — My good shoemaker has some. — Have you the good 
hats of the Russians, or those of the Dutch ? — I have neither those 
of the Russians nor those of the Dutch, I have those of the Irish. — 
Which sacks has your friend ? — He has the good sacks of the mer- 
chants. — Has your boy the good hammers of the carpenters ? — 
No, sir, he has them not. — Has this little boy some sugar ? — He 
has none ? — Has the brother of your friend good combs ? — The 
brother of my friend has none, but I have some ? — Who has good 
wooden chairs ? — Nobody has any. 



Lesson XVIII. — pensum duodevicesimum. 

OF NUMERALS. 

A. The numerals of the Latin language are either 
adjectives or adverbs. 

* The platform or desk from which the ancient Eomans spoke, so called 
from its having been adorned with the beaks of captured ships. 



LESSON 18.] 



NUMERALS. 



73 



Numeral adjectives are divided into five classes : Cardinal, 
Ordinal, Distributive, Multiplicative, and Proportional. 

Of adverbial numerals there is but one class, which answer 
to the question hoiv many times f as semel, once, ter, thrice. 

B. Cardinals contain the answer to the question quot ? how 
many? as units, one, duo, two, centum, a hundred. Of these 
the first three are susceptible of declension, and those from 
quattuor (four) to centum (a hundred), inclusive of both, are 
invariable. The multiples of 100, as far as mille (a thou- 
sand), are declined like the plural of bonus ; as ducenti, ae, a, 
two hundred, &c. — Units, duo, and tres are thus inflected : — 

Unus, a,"um, one. 





Singular. 




Plural. 






Masc. 


Fern. Neut. 


Ifasc. 


Fern. 


Neut. 


Nom. 


unus 


una unum 


uni 


unae 


una 


Gen. 




unius 


unortim tin arum 


unoruiii 


Dat. 




urn 




tinis 




Ace. 


uniim 


unam unum 


unos 


unas 


una 


Voc. 


tine 


una uniim 


uni 


unae 


una 


Abl. 


uno 


una uno. 




tinis. 






Duo 


duae, duo, two. 




Tres, tria 


, three. 




Masc. 


Fern. 


Neut. 


Masc. & Fern. Neut. 


Nom. 


duo 


duae 


duo 


Nom. tres 


tria 


Gen. 


duorum 


duarum 


duorum 


Gen. tr 


lum 


Dat. 


duobus 


duabus 


duobus 


Dat. tribus 


Ace. 


duos or 


dtio duas 


duo 


Ace. tres 


tria 


Voc. 


duo 


duae 


duo 


Voc. tres 


tria 


Abl. 


duobus 


duabus 


duobus. 


Abl. tribus. 



Remark 1. The plural uni, unae, una, can only be used, a) when 
joined with substantives that are pluraUa tantum, i. e. used in the 
plural only ; as unae scopae, one broom ; unae litterae, one letter ; una 
castra, one camp ; in unis aedibus, in one house ; b) when it assumes 
the sense of "only," "alone," "one and the same," "like," &c. ; as 
ifres uni passus, only three steps ; unis moribus, with one and the 
same kind of manners, &c. 

2. Like duo is inflected ambo, ambae, ambo, "both." — Instead of 
the genitives duorum, duarum, the contracted form duum is frequently 
employed, especially with milium, thousand. 

C. Obs. The numeral mille, thousand, is indeclinable in the singu- 
lar, but is regularly inflected in the plural, e. g. milia, milium, milibus, 
&c. It is generally followed by the genitive (sometimes by an appo- 
sitional case) of the objects enumerated, as mille liominum, duo (tria, 

7 



74 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 18. 

quattuor,* &c.) milia hominum (more rarely homines), &c. — This is its 
construction as a substantive ; but mille is far more frequently used as 
an indeclinable adjective in all the cases, singular and plural; e. g. 
mille equltes, a thousand knights ; mille hominum numero, a thousand 
men in number ; mille modis, in a thousand ways. 

D. The Romans have a separate class of numerals in an- 
swer to the question, How many each (apiece)? or How many 
each time ? ( Quoteni, ae, a ?) These are always in the plural, 
and are called Distributives. E. g. vini (terni, quciterni, &c), 
'• two (three, four) each" or " two (three, four) each time" " two 
by two " ; singuli, " one each," " one by one," " one at a time." 
Examples : — 

Boys of sixteen or seventeen Pueri senum septenumve denum\ 

years each. annorum. 

They met with one interpreter Cum singulis interpretibus congres- 

each. si sunt. 

He gave us three books apiece. Dedit nobis ternos h'bros. 

His daughters have each a son. Filiae ejus singulos filios habent. 

He does not know how much Non dfdicit, bis bina qudt essent. 

twice two is. 

E. Obs. These distributives are employed instead of the cardinals, 
a) in connection with such substantives as are used in the plural 
only.f as binae (not duae) scopae, two brooms, quaternae nuptiae, four 
weddings, &c. ; b) with substantives whose plural assumes a simple 
signification different from the singular, as castrum, a castle, duo 
castra, two castles ; but una castra (pU peculiar), a camp, bina 
castra, two camps ; aedes, a temple, Ires aedes, three temples ; but 
aedes (a pi. with singular signification), a house, unae aedes, one 
house, trlnae§ aedes, three houses; littera, a letter (of the alphabet), 
quattuor litterae, four letters (of the alphabet) ; but litterae (pi-), a let- 
ter (epistle), unae litterae, one letter, quaternae litterae, four letters, &c. 

The hatter. *Opifex (gen. -icis) pileorum, m. 

The joiner. Faber (ri, m.) scriniarius. 

Round. Rotundus, a, um. 

A ov an (one). $ fMs,^, um. 

K y ( Aliquis, -qua, -quod. 

* It is also customary to use the distributives instead of the cardinal nu- 
merals, and to say bina {terna, quaterna, &c.) milia for duo milia, &c. — The 
accusative of the objects enumerated becomes necessary when one of the de- 
clinable numerals diicerii, &c. is added; as, habet tria milia trecentos milites, 
he has three thousand three hundred soldiers. 

f The plural in um is the regular form for this class of numerals, instead of 
the orum, arum, orum of other adjectives. 

| This applies only to such nouns as have a singular signification with this 
plural form. Plurals like Ubcri, children, follow the general law. 

§ In all these cases, where the distributive is thus used for the cardinal 
numeral with nouns of a plural form, the English u one " must be expressed by 
uni, ae, a, and " three" by trini, ae, a. Singuli and terni remain distributive 
always. 



LESSON 18.] NUMERALS. 75 

F. Obs. The indefinite article a or an is generally 
omitted in Latin. When expressed, however, it is 
units, a, um, " one," or aliquis, qua, quod, " some "one." 
Examples : — 

Have you a looking-glass ? 5 |^ e tibi (™ um ) speculum ? 

J ° & ( Habesne (unum) speculum .' 

tt „„ „ ( Est mihi unum. 

I have one. -^ TT ,, 

( Habeo unum. 

Have you a book ? i ff™ tih \ ^ nus ) *$** ? 

' ( Habesne (unum) librum ? 

T i „ (" Est mihi unus. 

1 nave one. ^ TT/ , . , ,, u . 

( Habeo unum (aliquem). 

I have none. \ Est mihi niillus (or Non est) . 

( JNullum habeo. 

fEstne tibi bdnum unum pileum 

Have you a good round hat ? \ c ^^T'" * 

J & j An habes bonum unum pileum ro- 

[_ r tundum ? 

I have one. 5 ? st mi bi unus. 

( Unum habeo. 

!Niim est ei ddmus piilchra ? 
Niimquid llle habet ddmum unam 
pulchram ? 

I have none f ^st di mllla ( or N6n e ' st )' 

I Nullam habet (or Non habet). 

I have two of them. i Mihi sunt duae 

( Ego (earum) duas habeo. 

He has three of them. ] ^lint f^ 8 ' , f A 

I Habet (earum) tres. 

G. Obs. The partitive genitive after numerals is 
commonly omitted in Latin, when the quantity de- 
noted by them is equal to the whole. But the relative 
pronoun may stand in the same case with the numeral. 

( Siint tibi quattuor. 

\ Quattuor (earum*) habes. 

~ n , . , , r ( Quae tibi quinque sunt. 

Of which you have five. -j Quasf qui ^ que \^ bes . 



You have. four of them. 



, Siintne tibi quinque equi bdni ? 
Have you five good horses ? j mm qufnqi / e h g QS dq \ 10S bdnos ? 



Nay rather, I have six of them. 



tmmo vero mihi sunt sex.. 
Habeo (eorum) sex. 



* Earum can only be correctly put when it refers to a larger number already 
alluded to. 

t Quae and quas, because the numeral quinque denotes the entire number 
possessed ; but qudrum if a larger number is meant. 



76 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[lesson 18. 



T , . , , , , C Sunt mihi sex bdni e't septem viles. 

I have six good and seven bad } ^ ^ bdnog septdm ^ e Vlles M . 



beo. 



And. (Copulative con- 
junction.) 



Et, ac, atque, -que. 



H. Obs. The conjunction ac cannot be used when 
the next word begins with a vowel or the letter h. Et 
and atque stand before vowels and consonants both. 
The enclitic que, like the interrogative ne, is always 
suffixed to the word which it serves to connect. 



Have you a (one) letter ? 
I have ten of them. 

I have ten letters and five notes. ■< 



f Estne tibi una epistola ? 

( Habesne unas literas ? 

( Sunt mihi decern. 

( Ilabeo (earum) denas. 

" Sunt mihi decern epistolae et (ac, 

dtque*) quinque schediilae. 
(Ego) denas litteras e't (ac, atque) 

quinque schedulas habeo. (See 



I 

L Obs. E.) 
Titus and Cajus have each of Titus et Cajus libros singulos ha- 

bent. 
Sunt iis quina specula. 
Quina specula habent. 
Sunt mihi aedes trinae et mille 

pennarum. 
Ego aedes trinas atque mille pen- 
nas habeo. 



them a book 
They have five looking-glasses 
apiece. 

I have three houses and a thou- 
sand pens. 



I. The following Table exhibits a list of the cardinal and 
distributive numerals of the Latin language : — 



Distributive. 
singiili, ae, a, one each. 

bini, ae, a, two each. 





Cardinal. 




1. 


unus, a, urn, one. 


I. 


2. 


duo, ae, o, two. 


II. 


3. 


tres, tria, three. 


III. 


4. 


quattuor, four. 


IV. 


5. 


quinque, five. 


V. 


G. 


sex, six, &c. 


VI. 


7. 


septem 


VII. 


8. 


octo 


VIII. 


9. 


nSveni 


IX. 


0. 


decern 


X. 



terni (or trini), ae, a, three each. 



quaterni, ae, a, 
quini, ae, a, 
seni, ae, a, 
septeni, ae, a. 
octoni, ae, a. 
noveni, ae, a. 
deni, ae, a. 



four each, 
five each. 
six each, &c. 



* Atque (= ad + que) is emphatic, and may be rendered by " and besides." 
Et connects objects considered as distinct, que things belonging to, or resulting 
from, each other. Ac has upon the whole the same force as atque, but it is 
often employed instead of a simple et, to prevent a repetition of the latter. 



LESSON 18.] 



NUMERALS. 



77 



11. 
12. 

13. 

14. 
15. 

16. 
17. 

18. 

19. 
20. 
21. 

22. 
23. 

28. 

29. 

30. 
40. 
50. 
60. 
70. 
80. 
90. 

99. 

100. 

109. 

200. 
300. 
400. 
500. 



Cardinal. 

undecim 

duodecira 

tredecim or ) 

decern et tres ) 

quattuordecim 

quindecim 
\ sedecim (sexdecim) or 
\ decern et sex 
( septendecim or 
\ decern et septem 

decern et octo or 

duodevlginti* 
\ decern et novem or |_ 



XI. 
XII. 



Distributive. 
undeni, ae, a. 
duodeni, ae, a. 



\ undevlginti 

viginti 

unus et viginti 

viginti unus f 
( duo et viginti 

viginti duo 

tres et viginti 

octo et viginti 

duodetrlginta 

novem et viginti | 

undetiiginta j 

triginta 

quadraginta 

quinquaginta 

sexaginta 

septuaginta 

octoginta 

nonaginta 

nonaginta novem 

undecentum 

centum 
( centum et novem 
( centum novem 

ducenti, ae, a 

trecenti, ae, a 

quadringenti, ae, a 

quingenti, ae, a 



J 



XIII. terni deni, ae, a. 

XIV. 
XV. 



XVI. 

XVII. 

XVIII. 

XIX. 

XX. 

XXI. 

XXII. 

XXIII. 
XXVIII. 

XXIX. 

XXX. 

XL? 

L. 

LX. 

LXX. 

LXXX. 

XC. 

IC. 

C. 

CIX. 

cc. 

ccc. 

cccc. 

13 or D. 



quaterni deni, ae, a. 
quini deni, ae, a. 

seni deni, ae, a. 

septeni deni, ae, a. 

( octoni deni, ae, a. 
( duodevlceni, ae, a. 
J noveni deni, ae, a. 
I undeviceni, ae, a. 
viceni, ae, a. 

viceni singiili, ae, a. 

viceni bini, ae, a. 
viceni terni, ae, a. 
viceni octoni, ae, a. 

viceni noveni, ae, a. 

trlceni, ae, a. 

quadrageni, ae, a. 

quinquageni, ae, a. 

sexageni, ae, a. 

septuageni, ae, a. 

octogeni, ae, a. 

nonageni, ae, a. 
\ nonageni noveni, ae, a. 
\ undeceni, ae, a. 

centeni, ae, a. 

centeni noveni, ae, 

duceni, ae, a. 
treceni, ae, a. 
quadringeni, ae, a. 
quingeni, ae, a. 



* For 18, 28, 38, &c. and for 19, 29, 39, &c. the subtractive expressions 
duodevlginti^ duodetriginta, undevlginta, &c, as far as undecentum, are more com- 
mon than the compounds decern et octo, &c, and neither the duo nor the un of 
these words is inflected. 

f The rule for the juxtaposition of the intermediate numbers is, that from 
20 to 100 either the smaller may precede with et, or the larger without et, as 
in the case of 21. But beyond 100, the larger always comes first, with or with- 
out et ; e. g. ducenti quadraginta sex, or ducenti et quadraginta sex, 246. 



78 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 18. 



600. 

700. 
800. 

900. 

1,000. 

2,000. 

5,000. 

10,000. 

100,000. 



Cardinal. 
sexcenti, ae, a 
septingenti, ae, a 
octingenti, ae, a 
nongenti, ae, a 
noningenti, ae, a 
mille 

duo (or bin a)* milia 
quinque (or qulna) milia 
decern milia 
centum milia 



DC. 

DCC. 

DCCC. 

DCCCC. 

CIO or M. 

MM. 

100. 

CCIOO. 

CCCI000. 



Distributive. 
sexceni, ae, a. 
septingeni, ae, a. 
octingeni, ae, a. 

nonageni, ae, a. 

singula milia. 
bina milia. 
quina milia. 
dena milia. 
centena milia. 



Exercise 20. 



Have you a good letter ? — I have a good letter and a good book. 
— Has your servant a broom ? — He has six brooms and five 
chickens. — Has your friend any houses ? — He has some. — He 
has ten houses (aedes) and five gardens. — What has the youth ? — 
He has a thousand books and two thousand notes. — Who has a 
beautiful round table ? — The hatter has one. — The friend of our 
tailor has ten round tables and twenty chairs. — Have you a good 
servant ? — I have one. — Has your hatmaker a beautiful house ? — 
Pie has two (of them). — Have I a pretty gold ribbon ? — You have 
one. — What has the joiner '? — He has beautiful tables. — Has he 
a beautiful round table '? — He has one. — Has the baker a large 
looking-glass ? — He has one. — Has the Scotchman the friends that 
I have ? — He has not the same that you have, but he has good 
friends. — Has he your good books ? — He has them. — Have I their 
good hammers ? — You have them not, but you have your good iron 
nails. — Has that hatter my good hat ? — He has not yours, but his 
own. — Have I my good shoes ? — You have not yours ; you have 
his. — Who has mine ? — Somebody has them. — lias anybody two 
letters ? — The brother of my neighbor has three. — Has your cook 
two sheep ? — He has four. — Has he six good chickens ? — He has 
three good and seven bad. — Has the merchant good wine V — He 
has some. — Has the tailor good coats? — He has none. — Has the 
baker good bread ? — He has some. — What has the carpenter V — 
He has good nails. — What has your merchant ? — He has good pen- 
cils, good coffee, good honey, and good biscuits. — Who has good 
iron ? — My good friend has some. — Am I right or wrong V — You 
are wrong. — Is anybody sleepy ? — The shoemaker is sleepy and 
thirsty. — Is he tired ? — He is not tired. — Has your servant the 
glasses of our (nostrorum, vide next Lesson) friends ? — He has not 
those of your friends, but those of his great merchants. — Has he my 
wooden chair ? — He has not yours, but that of his boy. — Are you 
thirsty ? — I am not thirsty, but very hungry (veJiementer esurio). 



* Vide page 74, note * . 



Only, hut. (Adv.) | taxdL 

TT , , , , ( Qudt tibi mensae sunt 9 

How many tables have you i < /r , ,,, , , 

^ •'J i.lnnin mnlras moncaa 



LESSON 19.] QUAM MULTUM. QUOT. QUALIS. 79 



Lesson XIX. — pensum undevicesimum. 

How much ? Qucim multiim ? quantum ? (with 

the gen.). 
TT a ( Qucim multi, ae, a ? 

How man y - \ Qudt f (indeclinable). 

TT , , , . n ( Quam miiltum panis, vi'ni, aquae ? 

How much bread, wine, water i < 7? , . ^ . l : , ' A 

I Quantum pams, vim, aquae i 

TT i • o S Qudt (quam imilti) ciiltri? 

How many knives ? -j Qu[im v multi CT1 i tr 5r U m ? 

TT , , i o ( Qudt (quam miiltae) mensae ? 

How many tables i 4 Pi > 'u ' «i 

( Quam multae mensarum :* 

TT i i • i n ( Qudt (quam multa) specula? 

How many looking-glasses r 1 r\ ' ' 'u i - o 

^ ° ° ( Quam multa speculorum i 

Tantum, solum,* non nm, dun- 
taxdt. 

idt tibi me'nsae sunt ? 

Quam miiltas mensas habes ? 

T i , , \ Mihi non sunt nisi diiae. 

I have only two. i -n, ' * - * i. 'i 

■^ 4 Unas tantum habeo. 

rr 1-t, of Qudt siint tibi ciiltri ? 

How many knives have you i < r \ , «. ,, . i,, Q 
^ ( Q uum multos cultros habes r 

T r i , i ^ Est mihi Cuius solus bonus. 

1 have but one good one. < ,« T m v ' i 'i 

& ( Unum solum bonum habeo. 

TT , , o \ Qudt sunt tibi vasa vitrea ? 

How many glasses have you i 1 7K > 'u - ^ - i. >t~ q 
J fo ^ ( Quam multa vasa vitrea habes r 

T , , , . ( Sunt mihi duntaxat sex. 

1 liave but six. ■< a , , , . , ,, 

( oex tantum habeo. 

I have ten, and those (and indeed) Decern mihi sunt, e'aque (et ea, cit- 

good ones. que e'a) bona. 

A. Obs. The demonstrative is, ea, id is often put with the conjunc- 
tions et, atque, que, et — quidem, and nee by way of explanation of 
something that precedes, in the sense of the English " and that," 
" and indeed," " nor indeed," " and not indeed" (nee is). 

I have a hundred books, and those Centum libros (librorum) habeo, 

good ones. et eos bdnos. 

I have but one table, and that a Unam tantum mensam habeo, etim- 

poor one. que tenuem. 

f Quis, quae, quod or quid. 

What? What land of? J Qui(s)nam, quaencim, quodnam 

What sort of ? ) or quidnclm ? 

[_ Quails, quails, quale? 



* In connection with a substantive, and especially with one denoting a per- 
son, the English "only" is frequently expressed by the adjective solus or 
unus ("alone"); as, ego solus habeo, I only (alone) have ; solos' jjoetas legit, he 
reads only poets. 



80 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSOX 19. 

B. Obs. The pronominal adjective quails denotes the 
nature or quality of a person or object, and is the cor- 
relative of Wis, "such," "so constituted/' It is in- 
flected like turpis (Lessons IV. and XIII.) . The pro- 
noun qui, quae, quod agrees with its noun in gender, 
number, and case, but quid stands substantively, and is 
followed by the genitive. 

-i-in i. /■ j?\-ui-l o ^ Qualis (qm's) est tibi liber ? 

What ( sort of a ) book nave you i A /: M i-u r >j m -\ t r o 

v J ( Qualem hbrum (quid libri) liabes ? 

T i r- i , ( Est mihi liber piilcher. 

I nave a fine book. i t -i n ^ v -i 

( Labrum pulchrum habeo. 

(' Qualis (quae nam) est ei mensa? 

What (kind of a) table lias he ? -] Quid mensae habet '? 

( Quam or qualem mensam habet ? 

tt -i i x ui ( Est ei mensa h'gnea. 

He has a wooden table. ■< A T , ■,, ° , ,, , 

( Aiensani ligneam habet. 

r Quale (quod) est amico tiio sac- 
char um ? 
Quidnam est amico tiio sacchari ? 
Quale (quod) habet amicus tuus 
saccharum ? 

T t i i ( Est ei saccharum bo'num. 

He has good su^ar. J t> - - i~ i -i *. 

. fe c ( -Donum saccharum habet. 

( Quales (qui) sunt ei libri ? 

What (sort of) knives has he ? 3 Quid librorum habet ? 

( Quales (quosnam) libros habet ? 

He has bad books. \ f^ 6 \ ^ xi l es (nequam) 

I Libros habet nequam (viles). 
(' Qualis (quae) est tibi charta ? 

What paper have you ? ■) Quidnam chartae habes ? 

( (Qualem (quam) chartam habes ? 

I have beautiful paper. 1 f* f M eh ^ P lu 5 h T ra - 

1 * I rulchram chartam habeo. 

Our, ours. Nosier, nostra, nostrum. 

Your, yours (plural). V ester, veslra, vestrum. 

C. The possessive pronouns noster and vester are 
declined like pulcher. Thus : — 

Noster, nostra, nostrum, our, ours. 



What (sort of) sugar has 
friend V 





Singular. 




Plural. 




No^r. 


noster nostra nostrum 


nostri 


nostrae 


nostra 


Gex. 


nostri nostrae nostri 


nostrorum 


-arum 


-orum 


Pat. 


nostro nostrae nostro 




nostris 




Ace. 


nostrum nostrum nostrum 


nostros 


nostras 


nostra 


Voc. 


Like Nom. 




Like Nom. 




Abl. 


nostro nostra nostro. 




nostris. 





LESSON 19.] REDUNDANT NOUNS. 



81 



Have you our candlestick or his ? Nostnimne candelabrum habes an 



I have his. 



ejus (illius) ? 
!Ejus (habeo). 



Has he his own hats or ours ? TJtrum file tenet pileos suosmet an 

ndstros ? 

lie has ours. Ndstros (tenet). 

Which paper have you ? Quam chartam habes ? 

1 have that of our friends. Familiarium nostrorum chartam ha- 

beo. 

How many are there of us ? Qudt (quam multi) siimus ? 

D. Obs. When quot or quam multi denotes the entire 
number, they do not admit the partitive genitive after 
them. The latter can only be put where in English we 



use among. 



How many are there of you ? Qudt e'stis ? 

How many are there of them ? Qudt sunt llli ? 

There are twenty of us, of you, Vigmti siimus, e'stis, sunt. 

of them. 

How many are there among us, Qudt sunt nostrum, vestrum, illd- 

among you, among them ? rum ? 

There are twelve among us, you, Duo'decim sunt nostrum, vestrum, 

them. illorum. 

OF REDUNDANT NOUNS. 

E. Redundant nouns are such as exhibit a superfluity of 
forms. This may take place in several ways : — 

1 . There may be two forms for the nominative and one only for the 
remaining cases ; as arbor or arbos, gen. arboris, f., a tree : honor or 
honos, gen. honoris, m., honor, &c, &c. 

_ 2. There may be one form for the nominative, and two forms of 
different declensions for the genitive and remaining cases ; as laurus, 
gen. i & us, f., the laurel-tree * ; cupressus, i & us, f., the cypress ; ficus, 
i kus, f, the fig-tree ; plnus, i & us, f., the pine; and coins, i & us, f., 
a distaff. Among these may be included jugerum, i, n., a Roman acre, 
which has a redundant ablative : sing, jugero & jugere, pi. jugerls & 
jugeribus f ; and the plural Ilia, the entrails, which in the gen. has 
ilium & Illorum, and in the dat. and abl. ilibus & tins. Vas, gen. vasis, 
n^, a vessel, has its plural from the secondary form vcisum, i, n. : — 
vasa, vasorum, &c. 



* The remaining cases are, Dat, lauro, Ace. laurum, Voc. laure. Abl. Imiro 
and laurw, PI. Nom. lauri and laurus, Gen. laurorum, Dat. and Abl. laurls, 
Ace. lauros, Voc. lauri. Other names of trees prefer the second declension, 
except quercus, which is entirely of the fourth. 

t The forms of the second declension are to be preferred in prose. 



82 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 19. 



3. One and the same noun may have two forms of different gen 
ders, but of the same declension. Such are : — 
baculum,* i, n. and baculus, i, m. 
balteus, i, m. " balteum, i, n. 



callus, i, m. " callum, i, n. 

catillus, i, m. " catillum, i, n. 

catinus, i, m. " catinum, i, n. 

clipeus, i, m. " clipeum, i, n. 

cubitus, i. m. " cubitum, i, n. 

intubus, i, m. " intubum, i, n. 

jiigulum, i, n. " jugulus, i, m. 

lupinus, i, m. " lupinum, i, n. 

palatum, i, n. " palatus, i, m. 

papyrus, i, m. 8c f. " papyrum, i, n. 

plleum, i, n. " pileus, i, n. 

porrum, i, n. " porrus, i, m. 

4. One and the same substantive may have two forms of different 
declensions, as : — 



a staff, st id: 

girdle, belt. 

hard flesh, callus. 

a small dish. 

a dish, platter. 

a shield. 

the fore-arm; a cubit.] 

succory (a plant). 

the collar-bone. 

lupine (a plant). 

the palate. 

the papyrus (reed). 

sort of hat. 

leek. 



alimonia, ae,/! and 

angiportus, us, m. " 

arcus, us, m. " 

buccina, ae, f. " 

cingulum, i, m. " 

consortio, onis, f. " 

delphinus, i, m. " 

elephantus, i, m. " 

essedum, i, n. " 

hebdomas, adis,/. " 

juventus, utis,/. " 



palumbes, is, m. 8c f. 

paupertas, atis,yi ll 
pavo, onis, m. " 

penum, i, n. " 

plebs, gen. plebis,/! " 
senectus, utis,/ " 

tapete, is, n. " 



alimonium, i, n. 

angiportum, i, n. 

arcus, % i, m. 

buccmum, i, n. 

cingula, ae,/. 

consortium, i. n. 

delphin, inis, m. 

elephas, antis, m. 

esseda, ae,yi 

hebdomada, ae,/. 
(juventa, ae,/ 
| juventas,§ atis,/ 

menda, ae,/ 
j" palymbus, i, m. 7 
\ palumba, ae, / \ 

pauperies, || ei,/ 

pavus, i, m. 
( penus, us & i, m. &/ 
\ penus, oris, n. 

plebes, ei,/ 

senecta,^| ae,/ 

tapetum, i, n. 

(tapes,) etis, m. 



aliment, 
alley, lane. 
a bow ; an arch. 
a horn, trumpet. 
a girdle, belt. 
partnership, 
a dolphin, 
an elephant. 
a war-chariot. 
a week. 

(the age of) youth. 

afaidt, error. 

the ling-dove. 

poverty. 
a peacock. 

provisions. 

the common people. 
old age. 

tapestry; carpet. 



* In this list the form most generally in use is put first, without reference to 
gender. 

f The measure is commonly denoted by cubitum, especially in the plural. 

j The latter chiefly of the rainbow. But this noun may also be referred to 
case 2. 

§ Chiefly in poetry : — youth personified. 

|| The poetical form. 

T[ This latter is poetical. 






LESSON 19.] REDUNDANT NOUNS. 83 

tonitrus, us, m. ' 



■ and tonitriium, i. n. thunder. 

tonitru, us, n. ) ' 

/. , ( vesper(us), eri * in. ") 

vespera, ae, f. " A * K ^V ' y eveninq. 

1 ' ,J I vesper, ens, m. ) J 

5. A number of feminine nouns have two forms, one of the first, 
the other of the fifth declension f : — 

barbaria, ae, and barbaries, el, f. barbarity. 

duiitia, ae, " duritles, ei, f. hardness. 

luxuria, ae, " luxuries, ei,/ profusion, luxury. 

maceria, ae, " maceries, ei,/ a garden-wall. 

materia, ae, " materies, ei,/! matter, materials. 

mollitia, ae, " mollifies, ei,/ suppleness, softness. 

nmria, ae, " murles, ei,/. salt liquor, brine. 

segnitia, ae, " segnities, ei,/ sluggishness. 

6. Verbal substantives of the fourth declension with a secondary 
form in um : — 

conatus, us, m. and conatum, i, n. an effort, attempt. 

eventus, us, m. " eventum, i, n. an issue, event. 

praetextus, us, m " praetextum, i, n. an ornament, a pretext. 

rictus, us, m. " rictum, i, n. the jaws, open mouth. 

F. Among redundant nouns we must include those which, 
in the plural, assume another gender and another form, partly 
in addition to the regular form. Such are : — 

1. Masculines, which in the plural have an additional Neuter 
form : — 

jocus, i, m. a jest, joke ; pi. joci and joca. 

locus, i, m. a place; " loci % " loca. 

slbllus, i, m. a whistling sound ; " slbili " sibila.§ 

Tartarus, i, m. the infernal region ; " Tartara (only). 

2. Feminines with an additional Neuter form in the plural : — 
carbasus, i,/ a curtain, sail ; pi. carbasi and carbasa. 
margarita, ae,/ a pearl ; " margarltae " margaiita, -orum. 
ostrea, ae,/ an oyster ; " ostreae " ostrea, -orum. 

3. Neuters with plurals of different genders : — 

balneum, i, n. a bath; pi. balnea, n. and balneae,|| / 

coelum, i, n. the sky, heavens ; " coeli (only), to. 

* Of this form there is only the Ace. vesperum and the Norn, commonly ves- 
per, sometimes vesperus. The ablative is vespere and vesperi. But vesper, eri, 
m., the evening-star, is regular. 

f But this form of the fifth declension is commonly used only in the Nom., 
Ace, and Abl. 

% The masculine, chiefly of places or passages in books; the neuter, of locali- 
ties proper. 

§ Slbili denotes single or isolated whistling or hissing sounds, and slbila con- 
tinued hissing (chieflv in poetry). 

|| The latter more frequent, and in the sense of " public baths." 



84 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 19. 



delicium, i, n. 
epulum, i, n. 
frenum, i, n. 
porrum,* i, n. 

rastrum, i, n. 
slser, eris, n. 



delight; 

a public banquet; 
the bridle, rein ; 
leek ; 

a rale, harrow; 
skinoort (a plan!) 



pi delieiae (only),/. 
" epCilae {only), f. 
" freni, m. and frena, n. 
" porri {only), m. 
" rastri, in. and rastra, n 
" siseres {only), m. 



Exercise 21. 

How many friends have you ? — I have two good friends. — Have 
you eight good trunks V — 1 have nine. — Has your friend ten good 
brooms ? — He has only three. — Has he two good ships ? — He has 
only one ? — How many hammers has the carpenter V — He has only 
f our . — How many shoes has the shoemaker? — He has ten. — Has 
the young man ten good books ? — He has only five. — Has the 
painter seven good umbrellas? — He has not seven, but one ? — How 
many corks have I ? — You have only three. — Has your neighbor 
our good bread ? — He has not ours, but that of his brother. — Has 
our horse any hay ? — It has some. — Has the friend of our tailor 
good buttons ? — He has some. — Has he gold buttons ? — He has no 
gold (buttons), but silver (ones). — How many oxen has our brother ? 

— He has no oxen. — How many coats has the young man of our 
neighbors ? — The young man of our neighbor has only one good 
coat, but that of your friend has three of them. — Plas he our good 
rams? — He has them. — Have I his ? — You have not his, but ours. 

— How many good rams have I ? — You have nine. 

Exercise 22. 

Who has our silver candlesticks ? — Our merchant's boy has them. 

— Has he our large birds ? — He has not ours, but those of the great 
Irishman. — Has the Italian great eyes or great feet ? — He has great 
eyes and great feet. — Who has great thread stockings ? — The Span- 
iard has some. — Has he any cheese ? — He has none ? — Has he 
corn ? — He has some. — What kind of corn has he ? — He has good 
corn. — What kind of rice has our cook ? — He has good rice. — 
What kind of pencils has our merchant ? — He has good pencils. — 
Has our baker good bread ? — He has good bread and wine. — Who 
has good cheese ? — Our neighbor has some. — Has our tailor's friend 
some cloth? — He has some. — He has none. — What has he? — 
He has our bad coats. — Who is thirsty ? — Nobody is thirsty ; but 
the friend of our neighbor is sleepy. — Who has our iron knives ? 

— The Scotchman has them. — Has he them ? — He has them. 

— What kind of friends have you ? — I have good friends. — Is 
the friend of our Englishman right ? — He is neither right nor 
wrong. — Has he good little birds, and good little sheep ? — He has 
neither birds nor sheep. — What has the Italian ? — He has nothing. 



* The singular poniis, m. is rarely used. 



LESSON 20.] MULTUM. — MDLTI. COPIA. 85 

— Has our tailor's boy anything beautiful ? — lie lias nothing 
beautiful, but something ugly. — What has he ugly? — He has an 
noiv dog. — Has he an ugly horse? — He has no horse. — What 
has our young friend? — He has nothing. — Has he a good book ? 

— He has one ? — Has he good salt ? — He has none. — How many 
are there of us ? — There are fifty of us. — How many are there 
among them ? — There are a thousand among them. — How many 
are tliere of you ? — There are twenty-live of us. — What sort of 
combs have you ? — I have good combs. 



Lesson XX. — pensum yicesimum. 

J' Multum (with the gen.). 
Multus, a, um. 
Permultum (a good deal). 
Multi, ae, a. 



Many, a large number. 



Multum (with the gen. pi.). 
Non pauci, ae, a.* 
Copia magna, ae, f. (with the 
. gen.). 

A. Obs. The indefinite numeral midtus is declined like 
bonus, and has the construction of adjectives. But instead of 
midtus in agreement with its substantive, the neuter multum 
is often put partitively, and followed by the genitive, either 
singular in the sense of "much," or plural in the sense of 
" many." As 

Much bread, money, sugar. Multum panis, pecuniae, sacchari. 

f" Multi libri, miiltae epistolae, miil- 

Many books, letters, candlesticks. -< tv T M , ru * ' • ,-,. 

J ' ' J Multum hbrorum, epistolarum, can- 

[_ delabrorum. 

t. t ( Multi homines (or hdminumYf 

Many men. ir^'-zi'- \ > 

J I Copia (hominum) magna. 

Many (i. e. men) ; many things. Miilti ; miilta (neut. pi.) = res 

miiltae. 
Have you much good wine ? J3stne ti'bi (habesne) multum vini 

bdni? 

T , j j i ( Est mihi permultum. 

I have a good deal. | Permiiltlun habea 

* Non pauci is negative : "not a few." — Copia or multitude* (gen. -dinis) 
magna, " a large force, body, or multitude." Besides these, frequentes is also 
used in the sense of " numerous." 

t Multi hominum is the same as the English "many among men," "many 
of the human family." 



86 LATIN GRAMMAR. [ LESSON 20. 

Have you much of the money ? Estne ti'bl (habesne) miiltum ejus 

pecuniae V 
_. . , . _. ( Est mini ejus satis miiltum. 

I have a good deal of it. j Sdds miiltum d j us hdbe0 . 

iNimius, a, urn. 
Nirms multiim, nimium (with the 
gen.). 
JNimis mult i, ae, a. 
Nimis multiim or minium (with the 
gen. pi.). 
Too much bread, money, wine. Nimis miiltum (minium) panis, pe- 
cuniae, vini. 
^ ( Nimis miilti homines (ho'minum) . 

loo many men. j Nimium hdminum. 

We. Nos. (Lesson IX. B.) 

w . ( Nobis est {pi. siint). 

u e have - \ Nos habemus (tenemus) . 
We are. Nos siimus. 

We are hungry, thirsty. (Nos) esurimus, sitimus. 

B. Obs. The pronoun nos, like ego, tit, We, &c, is 
commonly not expressed before the verb. 
We are right (correct), wrong. (Nos) recte ldquimur, (nos) erra- 

mus. 
„ T , , ( Nobis non est miiltum pecuniae. 

We have not much money. \ „. m ,.. m nft _ 5 •„ L hAlTllls . 



Non miiltum pecuniae habemus. 

Ye or you (pi.). Vos. (Lesson IX. i?.) 

„ , x , ( Vdbis est (pi. siint). 

Ye (or you) have. j Vos habetis. 

Ye (or you) are. Vos estis. 

Ye (or you) are hungry, thirsty. (Vos) esuritis, sititis. 

■v , v . t , ( (Vos) recte loquimini. 

Ye (or you) are right, wrong. | ^ ^^ i 

Ye (or you) are tired, sleepy. (Vos) estis fessi, somniciildsi. 

-^ 7 ( Satis, sat, adsatim (with the 

^ ( gen.) ; pi. safts miuti, ae, a. 

C. Obs. The adverb safe is often employed substantively, like 
the pronouns mini, quid, quantum, multum, &c.,and is followed by the 
genitive singular or plural. E. g. 

Enough bread, money, sugar. Satis (sat) panis, pecuniae, sac- 

chari* 

* Satis may, however, also stand adjectively ; as satis otium, satis consilium, 
leisure, advice enough ; so that Ave may likewise say, Satis pecunia, sacchd- 
rum, homines, &c. — In questions, sat hi 1 for satisne is very common ; as Satiii' 
salve t Is all quite well V Satiii 1 plane audio ? Do I hear with sufficient dis- 
tinctness ? 



LESSON 20.] PARUM. PAULUM. FAUCI. 



87 



Men enough. 
Looking-glasses enough. 
Have you money enough ' 



I 



have only a little, but (yet) 
enough. 

Little. 



( Sat (satis) hdminum. 
( Stitis multi homines. 
< Satis speculorum. 
I Satis nuilta specula, 
j Estne tibi satis pecuniae ? 
( Habesne satis pecuniae ? 
Parum tantum habeo, sed (tamen) 
satis. 
( Parum, paulum (with the gen.). 
( Pauxillum, pauxillulum. 

D. Ohs. The construction of the adverb parum (paulum) is the 
same as that of satis. Parum is frequently used in the sense of " too 
little." 

(But) little bread, money, sugar. Parum (paulum) panis, pecuniae, 

sacchari. 
C Nonnisi parum ( paulum) . 
■} Paulum (parum) tantum. 
(Non mal turn. (All with the gen.) 
Paulum, paululum, aliquantiilum, 

pauxillum. 
Aliquantiilum (paululum) vini, sa- 
lis, panis. 
( Estne tibi aliquantulum sacchari ? 
( Habesne paululum sacchari ? 

Est. — Habeo. 
( Non est tibi nniltum animi. 
| Parum tantum habes fortitiidinis. 
Animus, i, m. ; fbrtitudo, inis, f. ; 
virtus, utis, f. 
C Pauci, ae, a (pi.). 
I Perpaucl, ae, a (quite few). 
\ Paiiei homines (hdminum). 
\ Pauci (without homines). 
Paiicae res or patk-a (neut. pi.) 
Pauci (homines) satis pecuniae ha- 

bent. 
Paiica tantum habeo. 
Habetisne miiltos amicos ? 
j Paiicos tantum (eorum) habemus. 
\ Habemus non nisi paiicos. 

Eorum, edrum, eorum. 

Habetne peregrinus miiltum pecu- 
niae? 
( Parum tantum (ejus) habet. 
■} Non habet (ejus) nisi parum 
( (pauxillum). 



Only a little, not much, but little. 
A little (a small quantity). 
A little wine, salt, bread. 

Have you a little sugar ? 

I have. 

You have but little courage. 

The courage (spirit, gallantry). 

A few, few. 

(A) few men. 

(A) few things. 

Few men have money enough. 

I have only a few things. 
Have you (ye) many friends ? 

We have but few (of them) . 

Of them. 
Has the stranger much money ? 

He has but little (of it). 



88 LATIN GRAMMAK. [ LESSON 20. 

OF THE CLASSIFICATION OF SUBSTANTIVES. 

E. Latin substantives are commonly divided into a 
number of general classes, of which some are peculiar 
to the language. The principle of division depends 
partly on their signification and partly on their deriva- 
tion. These classes are : — 

1. Common Nouns, or such as denote a genus or species 
comprehending a plurality of individuals or parts; as homo, a 
man ; equus, a horse ; domus, a house. 

Among common nouns may be included tlie names of materials ; as 
aufum, gold ; sal, salt ; argentum, silver. 

2. Collectives, or those which, though singular in form, are 
plural in signification; as populus, a people ; senatus, a senate. 

3. Abstract Nouns, or such as denote some quality, activity, 
or mode of existence ; as pulchritudo, -mis, beauty; pietas, 
-mis, f., piety ; infantia, ae, f., infancy ; cursus, -us, m., a course ; 
f tunes, -is, f., hunger. 

The majority of these substantives are formed from adjectives or 
verbs. Those derived from adjectives commonly end in Has (ietas), 
ia, tudo, itia, or edo ; as bonus — bonitas, goodness ; vetus — vetustas, 
oldness, age ; elegans — elegantia, elegance ; miser — miseria, misery ; 
longus — tongltudo, length ; Justus — justiiia, justice ; dulcis — dulcedo, 
sweetness. 

4. Proper Nouns, or names of individuals, countries, and 
places ; as Ccesar, Cicero, Virgilius ; Italia, Roma. 

5. Patronymics, derived from proper names of persons, and 
indicative of extraction. These generally end in ides (ides, 
ades, iades) masculine, and in is (eis, ias), me, or ione * femi- 
nine. E. g. Priamides, a son of Priam ; Laertiades, a son of 
Laertes ; Nereis, a daughter of Nereus ; Neptunine, a daughter 
of Neptune. 

6. Patrials or Gentiles, derived from proper names of coun- 
tries or places, and indicative of nationality ; as Anglus, an 
Englishman ; Arabs, an Arab ; Celta, a Celt ; Tros (gen. 
Trois), a native of Troy ; Troas, -adis, f., a woman born at 
Troy ; Arpinds, -atis, a native of Arpinum. 

The majority of Patrials are originally adjectives ; as Romdnus, a, 
um ; Syracusanus, a, um ; Antwchensis, is, e ; Atheniensis, is, e, &c. 

* Patronymics in el's and tie are of the first declension ; as Priamides, -dae, 
-dae, -den, -de, -de (da) ; Neptunine,— es, -e, -en, -e, -e. Those in is and as, of 
the third; as Nereis, -idis or -ides, &c. ; Thestias, -iddis, f., &c. 



LESSON 20.] CLASSIFICATION OF SUBSTANTIVES. 



89 



7. Diminutives, or such as convey the idea of littleness, and 
sometimes of endearment ; as fraterciUas, a little brother; litter- 
lula, a little (short) letter. 

This class of substantives is very numerous in Latin. They arc 
formed from other substantives, and end (according to the gender of 
their primitives) most commonly in iilus, ula, ulum, or cuius, aula, 
cuktm ; sometimes also in olus, a, um; ellus (Jllus'), a, um, or unculus, 
a, um. The following, formed from words already known to the 
learner, may serve as examples : — 



servulus, i, m. 


a little servant ; 


from 


servus. 


hortulus, i, m. 


u 


garden ; 


a 


hortus. 


piierlulus, ~) 










puellus, > i, m. 


a 


hoy; 


a 


puer. 


puel lulus, ) 










iatantulus, i, in. 


a 


infant; 


u 


infans. 


capitulum, i, ri. 


" 


head ; 


a 


caput. 


opusculum, i, n. 


a 


icorfr ; 


a 


opus. 


chartiila, ae, f. 


u 


paper ; 


a 


charta. 


aediciila, ae,/. 


a 


house ; 


a 


aedes. 


diecula, ae, /. 


a 


while ; 


a 


dies. 


curriculum, i, n. 


u 


chariot ; 


a 


currus. 


corculum, i, n. 


a 


heart; . 


a 


cor. 


corniculum, i, n. 


u 


horn ; 


a 


cornu. 


ocellus, i, m. 


u 


eye; 


u 


oculus. 


libellus, i, m. 


i'. 


hook ; 


a 


liber. 


cultellus, i, m. 


a 


knife ; 


a 


culter. 


catellus, ) • 

^;^, ' V 1, m. 
catulus, ) ' 


a 


dog: 


u 


canis. 


filiolus, i, m. 


u 


son ; 


a 


filius. 


filiola, ae, f. 


u 


daughter ; 


tt 


filia. 


pileolus, i, m. } 
pileolum, i, n. j 


a 


hat ; 


u 


pileus (um). 


bacillum, i, n. 


a 


stick : 


u 


baculum. 


villum, i, n. 


a 


wine ; 


a 


vinum. 


lapillus, i, m. 


a 


stone ; 


a 


lapis. 


hSmunculus, i, m. 


a 


man ; 


u 


homo. 


domunciila, ae,/. 


u 


house ; 


u 


domus. 


cqauleus, i, m. 


u 


horse ; 


a 


equus. 



8. Amplifcatives (usually in o), which convey the notion of 
largeness and contempt ; as bucco, onis, m. (from hucca, the 
cheek), a blubber-head; nclso, onis, m. (from nasus, the nose), 
a man with a large nose. 

9. Verbal Nouns, or such as are de-rived from verbs. These 
are either common or abstract ; as lector, oris, m., a reader ; 
auditor, oris, m., a hearer ; amor, oris, m., love ; clamor, oris, 
m., a clamor ; contemptto, onis, f., and contemptus, us, m., con- 



tempt ; gaudium. 



8'* 



oruamentum, i, n., an ornament. 



90 LATIN GRAMMAR. [l.ESSON 20. 

Exercise 23. 

Have you much coffee ? — I have only a little. — Has your friend 
much water ? — He has a great deal. — Has the foreigner much corn ? 

— He has not much. — What has the American ? — He has much 
sugar. — What has the Russian ? — He has much salt. — Have Ave 
much rice ? — We have but little. — What have we ? — We have 
much wine, much water, and many friends. — Have we much gold ? 

— We have only a little, but enough. — Have you many boys ? — 
We have only a few. — Has our neighbor much hay ? — He has 
enough. — Has the Dutchman much cheese ? — He has a great deal. 

— Has this man courage ? — He has none. — Has that foreigner 
money ? — He has not a great deal, but enough. — Has the painter's 
boy candles V — He has some. — Have we good letters ? — We have 
some. — We have none. — Has the joiner good bread ? — He has 
some. — He has none. — Has he good honey? — He has none. — 
Has the Englishman a good horse ? — He has one. — What have we ? 

— We have good horses. — Who has a beautiful house ? — The Ger- 
man has one. — Has the Italian many pretty looking-glasses ? — He 
has a great many ; but he has only a little corn. — Has my good 
neighbor the same horse which you have ? — He has not the same 
horse, but the same carriage. — Has the Turk the same ships that we 
have ? — He has not the same ; he has those of the Russians. 

Exercise 24. 

How many servants have we ? — We have only one, but our broth- 
ers have three of them. — What knives have you ? — We have iron 
knives. — What bag has the peasant ? — He has a thread bag. — Has 
the young man our long (longas) letters? — He has them not. — Who 
has our pretty notes ? — The father of the sailor has them. — Has the 
carpenter his nails ? — The carpenter has his iron nails, and the hat- 
maker his paper hats. — Has the painter beautiful gardens ? — He has 
some, but his brother has none. — Have you many glasses ? — We 
have only a few. — Have you enough wine ? — We have enough of 
it. — Has anybody my brooms? — Nobody has them. — Has the 
friend of your hatmakcr our combs or yours? — He has neither yours 
nor ours ; he has his. — Has your boy my note or yours ? — He has 
that of his brother. — Have you my stick ? — I haA e not yours, but 
that of the merchant. — Have you my gloves? — I have not yours, 
but those of my good neighbor. 

Exercise 25. 

Has your little servant my broom ? — He has it not. — Who has 
my little paper ? — Our neighbor's little son has it. — Has any one 
my little daughter's little book ? — Nobody has your little daughter's 
little book, but somebody has her little carriage. — What has the little 
boy ? — He has the little work of his friend. — Have you any little 
houses ? — I have ten little houses, and six young (little) horses. — 
Who has my little stick ? — Your little brother has it. — Is any one 



LESSON 21.] ALIQUOT. NONNL'LLI. PAUCI. 



91 



sleepy ? — Tbe little daughter of the tailor is sleepy. — What has that 
little man ? — He has his little gardens, and his little knives. — Is he 
a Roman ? — No, sir, he is not a Roman, but an Arab. — Are you a 
Celt ? — I am not a Celt, but a German. — How many little eyes has 
that child (infantulus) ? — It has two. — How many little hats have 
y 0U ? _ I have but one. — Who is right (correct) ? — My littl 



is~right. — Is any one wron^ 
wrono;. 



The young man (adolescentulus) is 



Lesson XXL — PENSUM UNUM ET VICESIMUM. 

The pepper. Piper, eris, n. 

The meat (flesh). Caro, gen. carnis,/. 

The meat (food). Clbiis, i, m. ; esca, ae,y. 

The vinegar. Acetum, i, n. ; vinum acidum, i, n. 

The beer. Cerevisia (cervisla), ae,/. 

The shirt. *Indusium, i, n. ; tunica lintea, ae,/. 

The leg. Crus, gen. cruris, n. ; pes, pedis, m. 

(the foot). 

Caput, itis, n. 

(i.e. natural Ingenium, i, n. ; indoles, is,/. 



The head. 
The head 
talent). 
The arm. 
The heart. 

The heart (i.e. soul) 
The month. 
The work. 
The volume. 
The florin. 
The dollar (crown). 
The kreutzer (a coin) . 
The shilling. 



A few, some few. 



Bracchium, i, n. 

Cur, gen. cordis, n. 

Pectus, oris, n. ; animus, i, m. 

Mensis, is, m. 

Opus,* eris, n. 

Volumen, inis, n. ; tomus, i, n. 
*Florenus, i, m. 
*Thalerus, i, m. 
*Kreutzerus,f i. m. 
*Schillingus, i, m. 
f Aliquot (indeclinable). 
] Nbnnulll, ae, a. 

) Panel, ae, a ; perpaucl, ae, a (very 
L few). 

A. Obs. The proper equivalent for the English 
u few " is panel, ae, «, and is opposed to " many." — 
Instead of this, nonnulli and aliquot may be used in the 
sense of " some, some few, several." 



* This word, like the English, signifies both work or labor in general, and 
also a literary production. 

f I put these modern coins with a Latin termination, instead of the more 
inconvenient circumlocution numus noinen f/crens kreutzer, schilling. 



92 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 21. 



Have you a few books ? 

I have a few (some few). 

He has a few. 

I have only (but) a few knives. 

You have only a few. 

Few men. 

Few things. 

Very few (men), things. 

Other, the other, another. 



Siintne tibi aliquot libri ? 

Habesne aliquot libros ? 
J Sunt mihi aliquot. 
( Nonmillos habeo. » . 

\ Slint ei aliquot (nonniilli). 
I Nonmillos (aliquot) habet. 
J Pauei tantum cultri mihi sunt. 
' Ciiltros habeo non nisi paiicos. 

Pauci modo (tantum) tibi sunt. 

ILibes non nisi paiicos. 

Paiici homines, pauci. 

Paiieae res, pauca (n.pl.). 

Perpaiici, perpauca. 

Alter, era, erum (of two). 

Alius, a, ud (of several) . 



B. Obs. Alter is opposed to unus or another alter, 
and signifies the other of two. Alius, on the other hand, 
is applied to several or many, and is another (of many). 
These words are thus inflected : — 



S. altei 


:', the other. 


P. alter!, the others. 


Nom. alter 


altera 


alterum 


alter!, alterae, 


altera 


Gen. 


alterius 




alterorum alterartim 


-drum 


Dat. 


alter! 




alteris 




Ace. alterum 


alteram 


alterum 


alteros alteras 


altera 


Voc. alter 


altera 


alterum 


alter! alterae 


altera 


Abl. altero 


altera 


altero. 


alteris. 




S. alius, another. 




P. alii, others. 




Nom. alius 


alia 


aliud 


alii aliae 


alia 


Gen. 


alms 




alioriim -arum 


-drum 


Dat. 


alii 




allis 




Ace. {ilium 


allam 


aliud 


alios alias 


alia 


A"oc. alius 


alia 


aliud 


alii aliae 


alia 


Abl. alio 


alia 


alio. 


allis 





The other horse (of two). 

The other horses (of two troops) 
Another horse. 
Other horses. 
Another thing. 

Other things. 

Have you another horse ? 

I have another. 



( Alter equus. 

| Alter equorum or ex equis. 

. Equi alteri. 

Alius equus. 

Alii equi. 

Res alia, (or simply) aliud. 
son XV. H.) 

Res aliae, (or simply) alia. 
( Estne tibi alius equus V 
I Habesne alium equum ? 
f Est mihi alius. 
( Habeo alium. 



(Les- 



LESSON 21.] ALIUS. ALTER. CETERI. 



93 



Have you the other horse ? 
I have it not. 



( Estne ti'bi alter equorum ? 
\ Habesne alteram ex equis ? 
Non est. Non habeo. 



No (none) other. 
No other. 

I have no other horse. 

I have no other. 

Have you other horses ? 

I have no others. 

I have some others. 

Has he another shirt ? 

He has another. 

He has no other. 



^Masc. 
-J Fem. 
(Neut. 
( Masc. 
■3 Fem. 
(Neut. 



Nom. 
null us alius 
nulla alia 
nullum aliud 
nulll alii 
nullae aliae 
nulla alia 
Est mini millus 



Ace. 

nullum ciltiim. 
nullum aliam. 
nullum all lid. 
nullos alios, 
nullds cdids. 
nulla alia. 
equus alius 



aliorum equorum). 

Alium equum nullum habeo. 

Mihi est alius (aliorum) millus. 

Alium nullum habeo. 

Niim ti'bi sunt equi alii ? 

Niimquid habes equos alios ? 

Sunt mihi alii niilli. 
\ Nullos alios habeo. 
j Sunt mihi alii quidam. 
\ Nonniillos alios habeo. 
( Estne ei indiisium aliud ? 
\ Habetne (ille) indiisium aliud ? 
( Est (ei aliud). 
\ Habet aliud. 
( Est ei aliud nullum. 
1 Nullum aliud habet. 



(or 



C. Obs. When the words alter and alms are repeated 
in opposition to each other, the first alter signifies " the 
" the other " ; and the first alius 



" and the second 
one, 



one, 

« nnp » anc l the second " the other." 



The one hates the other. 

One (of many or of two parties) 

hates the other. 
They hate each other. 
It is one thing to asperse and 

another to accuse. 

The rest (the others). 



Alter (or unus) alteram odit. 
Alius alium odit. 



Alii alios oderunt. 
Aliud est maledicere 
cusare. 

Reliqui, ae, a. 
Ceteri, ae, a. 



aliud 



Have you the other (the rest of ( Siintne tibi equi ceteri ? 

the)"horses ? \ Habesne equos ceteros (reliquos) ? 

I have them not. Non sunt. Non habeo. 

**n , i ,i , ^li ii \ n ( Quid habent ceteri ? 

What have the rest (the others) ? j ^ ^ ^^ (r ^ liquis) ? 

Nihil habent. 



They have nothing. 

Has he the other things (i. e. the 

rest, remainder) ? 
He has them not. 



An habet cetera (reliqua) ? (Vide 

^Lesson XV. H.) 
(Ea) non habet. 



94 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 21. 

OF ORDINAL NUMERALS. 

D. Ordinal numerals contain the answer to the ques- 
tion Quotus, a, um ? " Which of a certain number, rank, 
or place ? " as primus, the first ; secundus, the second ; 
decimus, the tenth. They are all of them adjectives of 
the first and second declensions, and inflected like bonus, 
a, um. Examples : — 

f Estne tibi liber primus an secun- 
Have you the first or the second J dus ? 

book ? j Utrum librum habes prhnuni an 

[_ secundum ? 
T , ,, , , . , ( Est mihi tertius. 

I have the third. | Tertium habeo. 

TT7-, . t , , r, ( Quotum est tibi volumen ? 

Which volume have you i < /r .. i- m ~ \.-ak„ o 

J I Quotum volumen habes i 

I W the fifth. jgat?- 

W1 . , , , \ Quota est tibi schediila ? 

Which note have you ? j Qudfcam sch( , dCllam Mbes ? 

I have the fifth. < Est mmi qmnta. 

| Habeo quintam. 
Which is the hour (of the day) ? Quota hora est ? 
It is ten o'clock (the tenth). Hora decima est* 

What day of the month is it ? Quotus est dies mensis ? 

j . , . ., ■ <" Sextus est. 

I Dies est mensis sextus. 

E. Adverbial numerals correspond to the question Quottens ? 
or Quoties f " How many times ? " The answer then is either, 
generally, totiens (or tuties), so many times ; aliquotiens (or 
-es), several times ; or definitely, semel, once ; bis, twice ; decies, 
ten times, &c. 

F. The following table exhibits a list of the ordinals of the 
Latin language, and of the corresponding adverbial numerals : — 

Ordinals. Numeral Adverbs. 

1 j primus, a, um, the first ? ggmgl 
( prior, prius, oris, (ot two). \ ' 

2 j secundus, a, um, the second. > , u . 
( alter, era, erum (of two) . ) ' 

* Among the ancient Eomans the tenth hour was four o'clock, P. M., the 
first being our six, A. M. The division of the days of the month was likewise 
different from ours (as will be shown hereafter). In writing and speaking the 
Latin, however, it is now customary to follow the modern method. It is neces- 
sary to add here, that " at an hour," " on a day" (or, more generally, "time 
when"), must be put in the ablative; as hora prima, at one o'clock; tertio 
Aprilis, on the third of April. A date mav be written thus: — Romae, tertio 
Octobris, a. p. Chr. MDCCCLVI.; Rome, October 3d, 1856. 



LESSON 21.] 



ORDINAL NUMERALS. 



95 



3. 
4. 
5. 
6. 

7. 

8. 
-9. 
10. 
11. 
12. 
13. 
14. 
15. 
16. 
17. 

18. 
19. 
20. 
21. 
22. 
23. 
28. 
29. 

30. 

40. 

50. 
60. 
70. 
80. 



the ihitrd. 

the fourth, 
the fifth, 
the sixth, &c. 



Ordinals. 
tertius, a, ura, 
quartus, a, um 
quintus, a, um, 
sextus, a, um, 
septimus, a, um. 
octavus, a, um. 
norms, a, um. 
decimus, a, um. 
undeclmus, a, um. 
duodeclmus, a, um. 
tertius decimus, a, um. 
quartus decimus, a, um. 
quintus decimus, a, um. 
sextus decimus, a, um. 
septimus decimus, a, um. 
octavus decimus, a, um. 
diiodeviceslmus, a, um. 
nonus decimus, a, um. 
undevicesimus, a, um. 
vicesimus, a, um. ) 
vigeslmus, a, um. £ 
vicesimus primus,* a, um. 
unus et vicesimus, a, um. 
alter et vicesimus, a, um. 
vicesimus et alter, a, um. 
tertius et vicesimus, a, um 
vicesimus tertius, a, um. 
vicesimus octavus, a, um. 
du6detrlcesimus,f a, um. 
nonus et vicesimus, a, um. 
undetriceslmus, a, um. 
triceslmus, a, um. 
trigesimus, a, um 
quadrageslmus, a, um. 
quinquageslmus, a, um. 
sexageslmus, a, um. 
septuageslmus, a, um.. 
octogeslmus, a, um. 



Numeral Advkrrs. 

ter, thrice. 

quater, four limes. 

quinqules, five times. 

sexles, 67.r times, &c. 

septles. 

octles. 

novles. 

decles. 

undecles. 

duodecles. 

terdecles or tredecles. 

quaterdecles or quattuordecles. 

quinqulesdecies or quindecles. 

sexlesdecles or sedecies. 

septlesdccles. 

octlesdecles. 

duodevicles. 

novlesdecles. 

undevicles. 



semel et vicies. 
vicles (et) semcl. 
bis et vicles. 
vicles (et) bis. 
ter et vicles. 
vicles (et) ter. 
octles et vicles. 
vicles (et) octles. 
novles et vicles. 
vicles (et) novles. 

tricles. 

quadragies. 

quinquagles. 

sexagies. 

septuagies. 

octooies. 



* The rule respecting; the juxtaposition of ordinals is, that either the smaller 
numeral should precede the greater with " e<," or the greater the smaller with- 
out " et" as in this instance. To this, however, those from 13 to 19 must be 
regarded as exceptions, tertius decimus or tertius et decimus, &c. being here the 
only admissible forms. For 21st, unus et vicesimus, fem. una et vicesima (or, 
contracted, unetv'icesima). are more common than primus et vicesimus, &c. So 
also alter et vicesimus {tricesimus, qucidrdgesimus, &c.) better than secundus 
et vicesimus, &c. 

f For 28, 38, &c, 29, 39, 99, &c, the subtractive expressions duodetricesimus, 
dfiodequddrdgesimus, &c, undetriceslmus, undequddrdgesimus, undecentesimus, 
&c, are used, without any change of duo or un, precisely as in cardinals. 



96 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 21. 



Numeral Adverbs. 
nongies, ninety times. 
centies. 
diicenties. 
trecenties. 
quadringenties. 
quingenties. 
sexcenties. 
septingentles. 
octingentles. 
nongenties. 
millies. 
bis millies. 
ter millies. 
decies millies. 
centies millies. 
millies millies. 



Ordinals. 

90. noniigesimus, a, um. 

100. centeslmus, a, um. 

200. ducentcslmus, a, um. 

300. trecenteslmus, a, um. 

400. quadringentesimus, a, um. 

500. quingenteslmus, a, um. 

600. sexcenteslmus, a, um. 

700. septingentesimus, a, um. 

800. octingentesimus, a, um. 

900. nongentesimus, a, um. 

1,000. millesimus, a, um. 

2,000. bis millesimus, a, um. 

3,000. ter millesimus, a, um. 

10,000. decies millesimus, a, um. 

100,000. centies millesimus, a, um. 

1,000,000. decies centies millesimus, a, um. 

Exercise 26. 

Have you a few knives ? — I have a few. — Have you many rams ? 

— I have only a few. — Has the friend of the great painter many 
looking-glasses ? — He has only a few. — Have you a feAv florins ? — 
I have a few. — How many florins have you ? — I have ten. — How 
many kreutzers has your servant ? — He has not many, he has only 
two. — Have the men the beautiful glasses of the Italians ? — The 
men have them not, but we have them. — What haA r e we ? — We 
have much money. — Have you the carriage of the Dutchman or that 
of the German ? — I have neither the one nor the other. — Has the 
peasant's boy the fine or the ugly letter ? — He has neither the one 
nor the other. — Has he the gloves of the merchant or those of his 
brother ? — He has neither the one nor the other. — Which gloves 
has he '? — He has his own. — Have we the horses of the English or 
those of the Germans ? — We have neither the one nor the other. — 
Have we the umbrellas of the Spaniards ? — We have them not; the 
Americans have them. — Have you much pepper ? — I have only a 
little, but enough. — Have you much vinegar V — I have only a little. 

— Have the Russians much meat ? — The Russians have a great deal, 
but the Turks have only a little. — Have you no other pepper ? — I 
have no other. — Have I no other beer V — You have do other. — 
Have we no other good friends ? — We have no others. — Has the 
sailor many shirts ? — He has not many ; he has only two. — Have 
you a wooden leg ? — I have not a wooden leg, but a good heart. — 
Has this man a good head ? — He has a good head and a good heart. 
■ — How many arms has that boy ? — He has only on£ ; the other is 
of wood. — What kind of head (i. e. talents) has your boy ? — He 
has a good head. 

Exercise 27. 

Which volume have you ? — T have the first. — Have you the sec- 
ond volume of my work V — I have it. — Have you the third or the 



LESSON 22. J AMBO. UTEIIQUE. 07 

fourth book ? — I have neither the one nor the other. — Have we the 
fifth or sixth volume ? — We have neither the one nor the other. — 
Which volume have we ? — We have the seventh. — What day of 
the month is it? — It is the eighth. — Is it not {nonne) the eleventh ? 

— No, sir, it is the tenth. — Have the Spaniards many crowns ? — 
The Spaniards have only a few ; but the English have a great many. 

— Who has our crowns ? — The French have them. — Has the youth 
much head (i. e. talent) ? — He has not much head, but much courage. 

— How many arms has the man ? — He has two. — How many shirts 
has he ? — He has only two. — He has six good and ten bad (ones) . 

Exercise 28. 

Have you the crowns of the French or those o. the English ? — I 
have neither those of the French nor those of the English, but those 
of the Americans. — Has the German a few kreutzers? — He has a 
few. — Has he a few florins ? — He has six of them. — Have you 
another stick ? — I have another. — What other stick have you? — I 
have another iron stick. — Have you a few gold candlesticks? — AVe 
have a few. — Have these men vinegar? — These men have none, 
but their friends have some. — Have our boys candles ? — Our boys 
have none, but the friends of our boys have some. — Have you some 
other bags ? — I have no others. — Have you any other cheeses ? — 
I have some others. — Have you other meat? — I have no other. 

— Has your friend many other books ? — He has but very few 
others. — How many shillings has that boy ? — He has only five. — 
Have you the other horse ? — I have it not. — Have they the other 
(the rest) of the books ? — They have them. — Have you the other 
things (the remainder) ? — I have it not. — What is the hour ? — It 
is twelve o'clock. — Is it not five ? — No, sir, it is only four. 



Lesson XXII. — pensum altepum et vice- 

SIMUM. 

The part, portion. Pars, gen. partis, f. 

m i ( Volumen, inis, n. 

The volume, tome. ■{ rp~ - • ' ' 

I lomus, 1, m. 

Have you the first or third tome Utrum dperis mei tdmum kabes 

of my work ? primum an tertium ? 

I have both. Ambos (utriimque) habeo. 

-r, j7 < Arnbd, ambaei ambo. 

Both. •{ fT , ' « . J v . , 

I Uterque, utraque^.utrumque. 

A. Ohs. Ambo is " both," considered as united ; uterque, 
" both " in the sense of " each of the two," " the one as well as 
the other." The former is inflected like duo, and the latter like 
uter. (Cf. Lesson XII. A.) Thus : ■— 
G 9 



98 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 22. 



Nom. 
Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 
Yoc. 

L. 



both 
of both 
to both 
both 
both 
with both 



Fern. 

ambae 

ambariim 

ambabus 

arnbas 

ambae 

ambabus 



Neut. 
ambo 
amborum 
ambobus 
ambo 
ambo 
ambobus. 



Nom. 

GrEN. 
DAT. 

Acc. 
Yoc. 
Abl. 

Nom. 
Gen. 
Dat. 

Acc. 
Voc. 
Abl. 



Masc. 

uterque 



utrumque 

uterque 

utroque 

utrique 
utrorumque 

utrosque 
utrique 



Neut. 
utrumque 



utrumque 
utrumque 
utroque. 

utraque 
utrorumque 

utraque 
utraque 



Masc. 

ambo 

amborum 

ambobus 

ambos (ambo) 

ambo 

ambobus 

Singular. 

Fern. 
utraque 
utriusque 
utrique 
utramque 
utraque 
utraque 
Plural. 
utraeque 
utrarumque 
utrisque 
utrasque 
utraeque 
utrisque. 

Remarks. 

1. Amid, like duo, ires, ducenti, &c, is a natural plural, and con- 
sequently wants tlie singular. 

2. Uterque, although involving a plural signification's commonly- 
put in the singular ; as uterque polus, both poles ; utraque fortuna, 
both good and bad fortune ; uterque parens, both parents. Sometimes, 
however, also in the plural ; as utrique Dionysii, both the Dionysiuses ; 
utraque oppula, both towns. 

3. The plural utrique is regularly used, when two parties or collec- 
tive bodies are spoken of; as Utrique (i. e. plebs et senatus) victoriam 
crudeliter exercebant, They both (i.e. the people and the senate) made 
a cruel use of their (respective) victories. 

4. The remaining correlatives of uter, "which of (the) two?" are: 
alter, " the one of two," or "the other" (Lesson XXL B.) ; alteruter, 
" one or other of two," " the one or the other"; neuter, " neither of 
the two " ; utervis and uterlibet, " any one of the two you please," 
" either of the two." All these compounds of uter are inflected like 
the simple pronoun, except alteruter, of which either both components 
are declined separately, as alter uter, altera utra, alterum utrum, gen. 
alterius utrlus, &c, or the last only, as alteruter, alterutra, alterutrum, 
gen. alterutrius, &c. 

Have you my book or my pa- "Utrum habes meum librum an 

per ? meam chartam ? 

I have both. Ambo (utrumque) habeo. 



LESSON 22.] ADJECTIVES WITH TWO OR MORE NOUNS. 99 

B. Rule. — An adjective, participle, or pronoun, 
belonging to two or more nouns, is generally put in the 
plural. Its gender is determined according to the fol- 
lowing rules : — 

1. When the substantives are of the same gender, the adjective, par- 
ticTple, or pronoun agrees with them in gender. E. g. Pater mini et 
frater mortui sunt, My father and brother are dead. Soror ejus et 
mater mortuae sunt, His sister and mother are dead. 

2. When substantives denoting living beings are of different genders, 
the adjective is masculine rather than feminine, and feminine rather 
than neuter. E. g. Pater mini et mater mortui sunt, My father and 
mother are dead. Soror tua et ejus mancipium (neut.) inventae sunt, 
Your sister and her slave have been found.* 

3. When substantives denoting inanimate objects are of different 
genders, the adjective is neuter. E. g. Libros atque mensas multa pul- 
chraque habeo, I have many fine books and tables. Labor voluptasque 
dissimilia naturd sunt, Labor and pleasure are naturally unlike. 

4. When there is a mixture of animate and inanimate objects, the 
adjective either assumes the gender of the animate object, or is put 
into the neuter. E.g. Famulos et domos bonos multosgue habeo, I 
have good servants and houses, and many of them. Canes miki et cor- 
nua venatica multa eaque bona sunt, I have many dogs and hunting- 
horns, and those good ones. 

5. The adjective, however, frequently agrees (in gender, number, 
and case) with the nearest noun, and is understood with the rest. 
E. g. Amor tuus ac judicium (sc. tuum) de me, Your affection and 
(your) opinion of me. Libros atque mensas multas easque pulchras 
habeo. 

Which of us (of you, of them) TJter nostrum (vestrum, eorum) 

two has that book ? librum ilium habet ? 

Neither of us (of you, of them) Neuter nostrum (vestrum, eorum) 

has it. eum habet. 

One or the other of us (of you, Alteriiter nostrum (vestrum, eo- 

of them) has it. rum) eum habet. 

-r, ,, r, , n. c ,-, N1 C Uterque nostrum (vestrum, eorum) 

Both of us (of you, of them) have ) ^ MbeL v J 

I Nos (vos, l'lli) ambo eum habent. 

Which of the two books have Utrum f librum (librorum) habes ? 

you ? 

I have either, neither, both, of Alteriitrum, neiitrum, utmmque 

them. eorum (eos ambos) hdbeo. 

Which of the two pens has your TJtram habet frater tuus pennam 

brother ? (pennarum) ? 

* Inventae, if the slave is a female, but inventi if a male. 

1 From this we must distinguish the interrogative utrum, which has no influ- 
ence upon the construction of other words, except as the sign of a double 
question. 



100 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 22. 

TT , , ^ ( Utramque (utrasque) habet. 

He has both. JAmbas habet. 

Have you my light or my stick ? Utriimne habes meuin lumen an 

baeulum ? 

Utrumque (litraque) habeo. 

Habeo ea ambo. 



I have them both 



Which of the two sets of books IJtri sunt tibi libri (librorum) ? 

have you ? 
I have both. Utrique. (Vide A. Rem. 3.) 

Still, yet. Etiamnum, adhuc * (adverbs). 

C Sing. Etiamnum (adhuc) aliquantum. 
Some or any more. -I Pjlur. Etiamnum (adhuc) aliquot (o 

( aliquos, -quas, -qua). 

Left, remaining. Reliquus, a, urn. 



f Etiamnum (adhuc) aliquantum pa- 
jy,j nis, pecuniae, vini. 



Some or any more bread, money, , 

wine. j Aliquantum panis, pecuniae, vim 

(^ reliquum. 

f Adhuc (etiamnum) aliquot libros, 

,, , , , ,. epistolas, visa vitrea. 

borne or anymore books, letters ,1 ^^ ^ ^ 

g asses. I Ahquas epistolas reliquas. 

l^Aliqua vasa vitrea reliqua. 

f Estne tibi adhuc aliquantum vini, 
Have you any more wine, water, j aquae, panis ? 

bread (left) ? ) Habesne aliquantum vini, aquae, 

[_ / panis reliquum ? 

T , n « s ( Est mihi adhuc aliquantum. 

1 have some more (lelt). i tt'u mi i- 

v J I Habeo nonnullum reliquum. 

f Ecqui tibi sunt adhuc (etiamnum) 

Has he any more books ? ^ TJ , . ' ,,, / M - o. ■, -, 

J j Habesne ahquos (aliquot) libros 

(_ reliquos ? 

T , n ns \ Sunt mihi adhuc aliquot. 

1 have some more (left). i ttm mi m- 

v J I Habeo nonnullos reliquos. 

fEcqua (numqua) mihi sunt adhuc 

TT T 31 .. i o candelabra ? 

Have 1 any more candlesticks . < e ,,. . -,-, , u ,^ 

] An ego aliquot candelabra reliqua 

[ habeo '? 

T r i n iv\ S Nulla (non) sunt. 

1 ou have no more (left) . j NdUa ^^ ^^ 

A7 - . ( Nihil am plats (with the gen.). 

JSot ami more, no more. J. Ar ,,^ ,1 ~ o -^ * ?. J x 

J I JSullus (a, um) reltquus (a, urn). 

* The primary signification of adhuc (= ad + hue) is "hitherto,"' "thus 
far," "as yet." There is good authority, however, for its secondary senses of 
praeterea, "besides," and etiamnum, "yet," " as yet," "still." 



LESSON 22.] PARUM RELIQUUM. NON MULTUM AMPLIUS. 101 



Has he any more bread, water, 



vinegar r 



Niimquid est ei adhuc panis, aquae, 
aceti '? 

Num ille ali quantum panis, aquae, 
L aceti reliquum habet ? 
j Est ei nihil reliquum. 
( Nihil ejus amplius habet. 
{ Libri nn'hi niilli rellqui sunt. 
\ Nihil amplius librorum habeo 

JEpistolae mihi niillae reliquae 
sunt. 
Nihil amplius epistolarum habeo. 
( Specula mihi nulla reliqua sunt. 
I Nihil speculorum amplius habeo. 

( Piirum (paulum) reliquum. 

■} Non (haud) multum amplius (with 

( the gen. sing, and pi.) 

j Non multi (ae, a) rellqui (ae, a) . 

I Nonntsi panel (ae, a) rellqui (ae, a). 

( Niimquid est tibi adhuc multum 
■1 vini ? 

( Niim multum habes vini reliquum ? 
( Est mihi ejus reliquum non nisi 
I have not much more. -\ parum. 

Haud multum dmplius habeo. 
Num tibi etiamnum multi libri 

sunt ? 
Niim libros multos adhuc habes 

reliquos ? 
Pauci tantum mihi reliqui sunt. 
Non multos reliquos habeo. 

JEstne ei adhuc unus liber reli- 
quus? 
Habetne etiamnum unum librum ? 
("Est ei adhuc unus liber bonus re- 
I liquus. 

j Habet etiamnum unum librum bd- 
[_ num. 
Habeimisne adhuc aliquot libros 

(reliquos) ? 
Habemus (adhuc) nonniillos reli- 
quos. 
Ecquae lis adhuc siint epistolae ? 

m, , r , N ( Sunt lis adhuc aliquot. 

They have a few (some) more, j ^^ ^ ndlla ^ liquas . 

f Siintne ei adhuc aliquot bona pd- 



He has no more (left). 
I have no more books. 

I have no more letters. 



I have no more lookino-.o-lasses. 



Not much more (left). 

Not many more (left). 
(Only a few left). 

Have you much more wine ? 



Have you many more books ? 

I have not many more. 
Has lie one more book? 



He has one more good book. 



Have we a few more knives ? 

We have a few more. 

Have they any more letters ? 



Has he a few good 
(left) ? 



roblets I cula ? 



) Habetne nonnulla bona pdciila re- 
(_ liqua ? 



102 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 22. 

tt -i r n a v ( Sunt ei adhuc aliquot. 

He has a few more (left). j mbet ^^ ^^ 

Exercise 29. 

Which volume of his work have you? — I have the second. — How 
many tomes has this work ? — It has three. — Have you my work, or 
that of my brother ? — I have both. — Has the foreigner my comb or 
my knife ? — He has both. — Have you our bread or our cheese ? — 
I have both. — Have you my glass or that of my friend ? — I have 
neither the one nor the other. — Have we any more hay ? — We 
' have some more. — Has our merchant any more pepper ? — He has 
some more. — Has he any more candles'? — He has some more. — 
Have you any more coffee ? — We have no more coffee, but we have 
some more vinegar. — Has the German any more water ? — He has 
no more water, but he has some more meat. — Have we any more 
gold ribbons ? — We have no more gold ribbons, but we have some 
more silver (ribbons). — Has our friend any more sugar? — He 
has no more. — Have I any more beer ? — You have no more. — 
Has your young man any more friends ? — He has no more. 

Exercise 30. 

Has your brother one more horse ? — He has one more. — Have 
you one more ? — I have one more. — Has the peasant one more ox ? 

— He has one more. — Have you a few more gardens ? — We have 
a few more. — What have you more ? — We have a few good ships, 
and a few good sailors more. — Has our brother a few more friends ? 

— He has a few more. — Have I a little more money ? — You have a 
little more. — Have you any more courage? — I have no more. — 
Have you much more money ? — I have much more, but my brother 
has no more. — Has he enough salt ? — He has not enough. — Have 
we buttons enough ? — We have not enough. — Has the good son of 
your good tailor buttons enough ? — He has not enough. — Which of 
you two has some money left ? — Neither of us has any left. — One 
or the other of us has a good deal of it left. — Has the sailor my stick 
or my sack? — He has neither (neutrum) of the two. — Have you my 
hat or my coat ? — I have both. — Which of you (three) has my 
paper ? — I have it not. — Has the youth anything left ? — He has 
nothing left. — Have you many more candles ? — I have not many 
more. 

* Instead of relzquus (a, um) est, and reliqui (ae, a) sunt, the compounds of 
sum, superest and supersunt, may be employed in a similar sense. E. g. Super- 
estne tibl aliguantum aquae, vini, pecuniae ? — Superest. — Non superest. — Libri 
mihi multi iique boni supersunt, &c. 



LESSON 23.] TANTUM QUANTUM. — TOT QUOT. 



103 



Lesson XXIII. 



PENSUM TERTIUM ET VICE. 
SIMUM. 



As much — as. 

As many — as. 
As much bread as wine. 

As many men as children. 

Have you as much gold as silver ? 

I have as much of the former as 

of the latter. 
I have as much of the one as of 

the other. 



Tarn miiltam — quam (jnultum) . 
Tantum — quantum* (quam), (with 

the gen.). 
Tarn multl, ae, a — quam multl, 

ae, a. 
Tot (indecl.) — quot (indecl.). 
Tantum (tarn miiltum) panis, 

quantum (quam miiltum or 

quam) vihi. 
Tot homines qudtf liberi. 
Tarn miilti homines, quam (miilti) 

liberi. 
Habesne tantum aiiri, quantum 

(quam) argenti ? 
Habeo tantum illius, quantum 

(quam) hiijus. 
Tantum ex (de) altera (lino), 

quam ex (de) altera habeo. 

A. Obs. The partitive relation denoted by the Eng- 
lish "of" is in Latin expressed either by the genitive 
or by the prepositions e, ex, or de with the ablative. 



Have you as many hats as coats ? 
I have as many of these as of 

those. 
I have as many of the one as of 

the other. 
Have you as many (wine-) glasses 

as goblets ? 



Habesne tot pi'leos qudt togas ? 
Tot (tarn miiltas) illorum, qudt 

(quam miiltas) harum habeo. 
Habeo tarn miiltas (tot) ex linis, 

quam miiltos (qudt) ex alteris. % 
Siintne tibi tot (tarn miilti) scyphi, 

qudt (quam miilta or quam) pd- 

cula? 



* In a similar manner the Romans say, tantus — quantus, as great — as ; 
talis — quails, such — as; toties — quoties, as many times — as, &c. Words 
thus corresponding with each other are called correlatives. 

f Tot — quot, tantum — quantum are more frequent than tarn -multi, &c. 
The Romans are fond of inverting the logical order of these clauses, and of say- 
ing quot — tot, quantum — tantum, &c, and sometimes the tot, tantum, &c. is 
entirely suppressed; as Or as et quot dies (= tot dies, quot) erimus in Tusculano, 
To-morrow and as many days as we shall be in Tusculanum. 

J "The former" of two persons or things is commonly expressed by ille, 



and sometimes also (especially when two persons are spoken of) by prior, m 
& f.,prius, gen. prioris. " The latter" may then be either hie or posterior, m 
& f, posterius, n., gen. posterioris. "The one" may be expressed by alter 
or unus, " the other," by alter or ille. The words may thus be used in every 
gender and in any of their cases, singular and plural. The plural uni — alteri 
is here employed precisely like utrique of Lesson XXI. A. Rem. 3. 



104 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 23. 

I have quite as many of the one Sunt mihi tdtidem ex alteris, qudt 
as of the other. ex alteris or illis. 

Quite (or just) as many — as. Toiidem (indecl.) — quot. 

Quite (or just) as much — as. Tantumd 'em (or tantund em) — quan- 

tum. 

B. Obs. Totiden is a compound of tot and itidem, 
and tantumdem of tantum and itidem (= likewise). The 
construction of these words is the same as that of tot 
and tantum. 

I have just as much of this as of £st mihi tantiindem hiijus, quan- 

that. turn illius. 

I have just as many of these as Sunt mihi tdtidem horum, qudt 

of those. f illorum. 

I have just as much wine as water. Est mihi tantiindem vini, quantum 

aquae. 

You have just as many hats as Tibi sunt tdtidem pilei, qudt epi- 

letters. stolae. 

More. Plus, ])\. plures, plura. 

C. Obs. The comparative plus has only the neuter in the 
singular, but a double form in the plural. It is thus in- 
flected : — 

Singular. Plural. 

Neat. Masc. 8? Fern. Neut. 

Nom. plus plures plura (pluria) 

Gen. pluris plurfum 

Dat. pluribus 

Ace. plus plures plura (pluria) 

Voc. 

Abl. plure or i. pluribus. 

Remarks. 

1. The dative singular of plus is wanting. 

2. The form pluria for pAura is obsolete, but still in use in the com- 
pound compluria, several. 

3. Plures and complures are the only comparatives which have 
their genitives in mm. All others have um. (Cf. Less. XIII.) . 

4. The neuters plus and plura are often used substantively,* and 
then the former signifies "more " (in the abstract), the latter "more 
things." 

D. Obs. The neuter singular plus stands partitively, and is 
followed by the genitive of the noun, which may be either sin- 

* And plus also adverbially; as plus formosus (=formosior), more beautiful ; 
plusplusgue diUgere, to cherish more and more. 



LESSON 23.] QUAM, QUAM QUOT. MINUS. 



105 



gular or plural. Plures and plura have the agreement of reg- 
ular adjectives, but they are frequently employed in the sense 
of " more than one," or " several." Thus : — 



More bread, water, wine. 
More men. 
More letters. 
More goblets. 
Than. 

More water than wine. 
More men than children. 



More of this than of that. 

More of the one than of the 
other. 



More of these than of those. 



More of 
other. 



the one than of the 



I have more of your sugar than 
of mine. 

I have more books than letters. 

Less. 
Less water than wine. 

Less bread than sugar. 

How many books have you ? 
I have more than five hundred. 



Plus panis, aquae, vini. 
Plus hdminum, plures homines. 
Plus epistolarum, plures epistolae. 
Plus poeulorum, plura pdcula. 
Quam ; * quam quod, quam quan- 
tum ; quam quot. 
Plus aquae quam (quantum) vini. 
Plus hdminum quam (quot) li- 

berum (= liberorum). 
Plures homines quam (quot) li- 

beri. 
Plus hujiisce quam illius. 
Plus de (ex) hoc quam de (ex) 

l'llo. 
Plus ex (de) altera (uno), quam ex 

(de) altero or lllo. 
Plus horum (harum, horum) quam 

illorum (illarum, illorum). 
Plus (plures, plura) ex (de) his 

quam ex (de) illis. 
Plus (plures, plura) de alteris (li- 

nis), quam de alteris or a His . 
("Est mihi plus tul sacchari quam 

quantum mei. 
Ego plus de saccharo tiio habeo, 

quam quod de meo. 
Sunt mihi plures librorum quam 

quot epistolarum. 

Minus (neut. with the gen.). 
Minus aquae quam (quam quan- 
tum) vini. 
Minus panis quam (quod) sac- 
chari. 
( Quot sunt tibi libri ? 
( Quot libros habes ? 
j Sunt mihi plus quingenti. 
\ Plus quingentos habeo. 



1 



E. O.hs. When the comparatives plus, amplius, and minus 
are followed by a numeral, the particle quam is often omitted. 



* With reference to this quam, and the construction of comparatives gener- 
ally, see Lesson XL1I. The student will notice here the idiomatic use of quan- 
tum, quod, and quot. 



106 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 23. 

T , , ,, , ■ , ( Siint mihi minus visjinti. 

I have less than twenty. j ^^ ^^ Uhe ° 

How much money have you ? Quantam peciiniam habes ? 

I have less than ten dollars Minus decern thaleros habeo. 

(crowns). 

I have more than twenty thou- Sunt mihi amplius viginti milia 

sand dollars. thalerum (== thalerorum). 

Less (i. e. fewer) men than chil- Paucidres homines quam (quam 

dren. quot) liberi. 

Fewer (less). Pauciores, m. & f., pauciora, n. 

F. Obs. The neuter singular minus, " less," is construed 
like plus,* and the plural paucidres, a, "fewer," like plures. 
They are thus inflected : — 

pauciores pauciora 

pauciorum 

paucioribus 

pauciores pauciora 



Nom. 


minus 


Gen. 


minoris 


Dat. 


minori 


Ace. 


minus 


Voc. 
Abl. 




minore or i. 



paucioribus. 

f Minus hujiisce quam illius. 
Less of this than of that. < Minus de (ex) hoc quam de (ex) 

( illo. 
Fewer of these than of those. Paucidres ex (de) his quam ex 

(de) illis. 
Fewer of the one than of the Paucidres de alteris fiinisj, quam 
other. ' de alteris or illis. 

Fewer of us than of you. Paucidres nostrum quam (quam 

quot) vestrum. 

More than I, than you, than lie. Plus (plures, p>l ur u) qudm\ ego, 

quam tu, quam ille. 

Less than I, than you, than he. Minus quam ego, quam tu, quam 

ille. 

More than we, than you, than Plus (plures, pliira) quam nos, 
they. quam vos, quam llli. 

Fewer than I, than you, than he. Paucidres quam ego, quam tu, 

quam ille. 

Fewer things (less) than we, Pauciora quam nos, quam vos, 
than you, than they. quam illi. 

As much as I, you, he. Tdntum (tarn milltuiri), quantum 

(quam) ego, tu, ille. 

* With this difference, however, that minus is followed by the genitive sin- 
gular only. In the plural, pauciores, fewer, becomes necessary. 

t Or quam quantum, quam quod, quam quot, according to the context. 



LESSON 23.] TOT QUOT. COMPLURES. 107 

As many as we, you, they. Tot (tdm multos), qudt (quam) jios, 

vos, illi. 
fTenesne tu plus librorum, quam 

Have you more books than I? \ , °, ' .„. , , r , A 

J feuntne tibi plures librorum, quam 

[_ mihi ? 

T , -, n ,-, +1 ( Teneo edrum plus quam tu. 

I have more 01 them than you. 1 - , . ,,. , A K ,* . 
^ ( bunt mihi plures quam tibi. 

Have I less sugar than they ? Num est mihi minus sacchari quam 

illis ? 

Nay (on the contrary), you have tmmo vero tibi plus est. 

more. 

f Habetne jiivenis paucidres amicos, 

Has the young man fewer friends j quam nos (habemus) ? 

than we ? j Suntne jiiveni paucidres amici, 

[_ quam nobis (sunt) ? 

tt ^ ^ /£> \ S Paucidres habet. 

He has less (fewer). ■< /c , , ,- x 

v J I (bunt ei) pauciores. 

C Habemusne tantum panis, quantum 

Have we as much bread as they ? -< ' , ^ , x . ',', ,,, „ . 

^ j Estne nobis tarn multum panis 

[_ quam illis ? 

f Tantiindem habemus, quantum 

We have iust as much as they. -{ AT >, 1 ' ; K ' , , , 

J } JNobis est tantunuem, quantum 

[_ r (quam) illis. 

TT i m -i ( Ecquid vos tot liberos habetis, 

Have you as many children as \ 4^ ^ ^^ ^ 

* ' ( Suntne vdbis tot liberi qudt illis V 

JTdtidem habemus, qudt illi (ha- 
bent). 
Nobis sunt tdtidem qudt illis. 
(Plures, m. & f., plurd, n. 
Several. -< Complures, m. & f., compluria,* n. 

(^Nonnulll, ae, a. 

o 7 j-^r 4/7- \ S Diversl, ae, a. 
Several different (diverse). -' v&r ^ ^ I 

Several men, women, children. Plures (complures) viri, mulieres, 

liberi. 

Several lights, looking-glasses, Phlra (compluria) lumina, specula, 

candlesticks. candelabra. 

Several (different) houses, books, Ddmus, libri, equi diversi (varii).f 
horses. 

The father. Pater, gen. patris, m. 

The son. Films, i, m. 

The woman. Mulier, eris,/. 

* Compare C. Obs. and Remarks of this Lesson, 
f Compare Lesson XXII. B. Obs. 



108 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 23. 

The daughter. Filia, ae, / ; nata, ae,/. 

The child (infant). Infans, tis, m. &/. 

The children. Liberi, orum, m. pi* 

The captain (of the army). Centurio, onis, m. 
rr,, . . ( Praefectus (i, ??*.) navis. 

The sea-captam. j Navarchus, i, m/ 

The tea. Thea, ae,/ ; inf usuni (i, n.) theae.f 

The cake. Placenta, ae,/. 

Cakes (of every kind). Panlficia, orum, n. pi. 

The enemy. Inimlcus, i, m. ; hostis, is, m. 

The finger. Digitus, i, m.% 

" The boot. Caliga, ae,/. 

Exercise 31. 

Have you a coat ? — I have several. — Has he a looking-glass ? — 
He has several. — What kind of looking-glasses has he? — He has 
beautiful looking-glasses. — Who has my good cakes ? — Several men 
have them. — Has your brother a child ? — He has several. — Have 
you as much coffee as honey ? — I have as much of the one as of the 
other. — Has he as much tea as beer ? — He has as much of the one 
as of the other. — Has this man as many friends as enemies? — He 
has as many of the one as of the other. — Has the son of your friend 
as many coats as shirts ? — He has as many of the one as of the 
other. — Have we as many boots as shoes ? — We have as many of 
the one as of the other. — We have more of the one than of the other. 
— Have we less hay than he ? — We have just as much as he. 

Exercise 32. 

Has your father as much gold as silver ? — He has more of the 
latter than of the former. — Has he as much tea as coffee ? — He 
has more of the latter than of the former. — Has the captain as many 
sailors as ships ? — He has more of the one than of the other. — 
Have you as many rams as I? — 1 have just as many. — Has the 
foreigner as much courage as we ? — He has quite as much. — Have 
we as much good as bad paper ? — We have as much of the one as of 
the other. — Have we as much cheese as bread ? — We have more 
of the latter than of the former. — Has your son as many cakes as 
books ? — He has more of the latter than of the former ; more of the 
one than of the other. — How many books has he ? — He has more 
than five thousand. — Has he more than twenty ships ? — He has less 
than twenty ; he has only fifteen. — Has this little boy more than ten 
fingers ? — He has no more than ten. 



* On this plurale tantum, see Lesson XVII. B. 4. 

f Thea is the Linnsean name of the plant; infusvm, an infusion generally. 

£ This is the general name. The special names are: pollex, icis, m. (the 
thumb); index, ids, m.; medius, i, m. (the middle finger); annularis, is, m. 
(ring-finger); minimus, ?', m. (little finger). 



LESSON 24.] LATIN VERBS. 109 

Exercise 33. 

How many children have you ? — I have only one, but my brother 
has more than I ; he has five. — Has your son as much head as 
mine ? — He has less head than yours, but he has more courage. — 
My children have more courage than yours. — Have I as much 
money as you ? — You have less than I. — Have you as many books 
as I ? — I have less than you. — Have I as many enemies as your 
father ? — You have fewer than he. — Have the Americans more 
children than we ? — They have fewer than we. — Have we as many 
ships as the English ? — We have less than they. — Have we fewer 
knives than the children of our friends? — We have fewer than they. 
— How many have they V — They have more than eighty. — How 
many have we ? — We have less than twelve. 

Exercise 34. 

Who has fewer friends than we ? — Nobody has fewer. — Have 
you as much of my tea as of yours ? — I have as much of yours as 
of mine. — Have I as many of your books as of mine ? — You have 
fewer of mine than of yours. — Has the Spaniard as much of your 
money as of his own ? — He has less of his own than of ours. — 
Has your baker less bread than money ? — He has less of the latter 
than of the former. — Has our merchant fewer dogs than horses ? 
He has fewer of the latter than of the former; fewer of the one than 
of the other. — He, has fewer horses than we, and we have less bread 
than he. — Have our neighbors as many carriages as we ? — We have 
fewer than they. — We have less corn and less meat than they. — 
We have but little corn, but meat enough. — How many houses have 
you V — I have more than thirty of them. — How many horses has 
the brother of our friend ? — He has more than a hundred horses, 
and less than fifty books. — How much money have we ? — We have 
less than ten shillings. — Has your young man less (fewer) mirrors 
than we ? — He has more than you ; he has more than a thousand. 



Lesson XXIV. — pensum vicesimum quar- 

TUM. 

OF THE LATIN VERBS. 

A. Latin verbs are divided into three principal 
classes: — 1. Transitive verbs ; 2. Intransitive or neuter 
verbs ; 3. Deponent verbs. 

1. Transitive verbs are active verbs, the sense of which is 
not complete without the addition of an object, which is gener- 
10 



110 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 24. 

ally in the accusative ; as amo, I love, sc. amlcum, my friend ; 
scrtboj I write, sc. epistolam, a letter. 

2. Intransitive or neuter verbs are those which denote either 
a simple mode of existence, or such an activity as does not ter- 
minate in any object ; as dormio, I sleep, curro, I run. 

3. The class of deponent verbs is peculiar to the Latin. 
They have a passive form with an active (or reflexive) signi- 
fication ; as loquor, I speak, sequor, I follow. 

4. Transitive verbs have two forms, called the Active and the 
Passive Voices ; as moneo, I remind, moneor, I am reminded ; 
audio, I hear, audior, I am heard. 

5. Latin verbs have four Moods, viz. : — 1. the Indicative ; 
2. the Subjunctive ; 3. the Imperative ; and 4. the Infinitive ; 
as, 1. amo, I love ; 2. amdrem, I might love ; 3. amdto, let him 
love ; 4. amdre, to love. 

6. They have six Tenses : — 1. the Present; 2. the Imper- 
fect ; 3. the Perfect ; 4. the Pluperfect ; 5. the First Future ; 

and 6. the Future Perfect. E. g. 1. audio, I hear; 2. audiebam, 
I heard ; 3. audlvi, I have heard ; 4. audlveram, I had heard ; 
5. audiam, T shall hear ; 6. audlvero, I shall have heard. 

7. The Latin verb lias four Participles : — The present active 
in ns ; the future active, in turns ; the perfect passive, in tas ; 
and the future passive, in ndus ; e. g. amans, loving ; amdturus, 
about to love ; amdtus, loved ; amandus, to be loved. 

8. Among the forms of the Latin verb are usually included 
the Gerund (vide Lesson XXV.), the active Supine in um, 
and the passive Supine in u ; e. g. amdtum, to love ; amdtu, to 
be loved. 

OF THE CONJUGATION OF VERBS. 

B. There are in Latin four Conjugations, distin- 
guished from each other by the termination of the 
Infinitive Present, which ends as follows : — 
1. are ; 2. ere ; 3. ere ; 4. Ire. 

Examples : — amure, to love ; monere, to remind ; legere, to read ; 
aurtire, to hear. 

The characteristic terminations of the Present Indicative in the 
first and second persons are : — 

1. o, as ; 2. eo, es ; 3. o (lo), is ; 4. 10, is. 

Examples: — amo, amCis, I love, thou lovest; moneo, mimes, 1 re- 
mind, thou remindest ; lego, legis, I read, thou readest; audio, aud'is, 
I hear, thou hearest. 



LESSON 24.] CONJUGATION OF VERBS. Ill 

C. To the full conjugation of Latin verbs, it is essential to 
know four principal parts, from which the rest are derived. 
These parts are : — a) the Present Indicative ; b) the Present 
Infinitive ; c) the Perfect Indicative ; d) the Supine in um. 
The terminations of these parts are : — 



1st conj. 
2d conj. 
3d conj. 


eo, 

o (io), 


are, 
ere, 
ere, 


avi, 
ill, 


ill 


4th conj. 


10, 


Ire, 


Ivi, 


itum. 


s : — 1. amo, 


amare, 


amavi, 


amfitum ; 


2. moneo monere 



Examples 
moniii, monitum; 3. lego, legere, legi, lectum ; facio, facere, feci, 
factum ; 4. audio, audlre, audivi, audi turn. 

Remark 1. — The invariable or permanent part of the present 
(indicative and infinitive) is called the first or general root of the verb 
(am, mon, leg,aud) ; that of the perfect, the second root (amav,monu, 
teg, audlv) ; and that of the supine in um, the third root (amat, monit, 
leet, audit).* 

Remark 2. — Many verbs are irregular in the formation of these 
principal parts, which frequently follow the analogy of two different 
conjugations (e. g. the verb do below). In these cases the infini- 
tive present determines to which of the conjugations the verb is to be 
referred. Some verbs again are defective, the supine, or the perfect 
and the supine both, being wanting. 

( Amo, are, avi, atum, 
To love, cherish. < Diligo, ere, lexi, lectum. 

( (ALIQUEM, ALIQUID).f 

To set in order, arrange. Dispono, ere, posui, positum (aliquid). 
To open. Aperio, Ire, perui, pertum (aliquid). 

To do. Ago, ere, egi, actum (aliquid). 

To do (make). Facio, ere, feci, factum (aliquid). 

To give. Do, dare, dedi, datum % (alicui ali- 

quid). 
To see. Video, ere, vidi, visum (aliquem, ali- 

quid). 
To say, speak. Dlco, ere, dixi, dictum (aliquid). 

To carry. Porto, are, avi, atum (aliquid). 

To wash. Lavo, are, avi (or lavi), atum (lautum 

_ or lotum) (aliquem, aliquid). 

rp , -, ( Eo-co, ere, ui, — (aliqua re). 

Io want, need. It v - - — /.?™- TT -A 

I Indigeo, ere, ui, — (alicuJUS). 

* The manner in which the different tenses, &c. are formed from these pri- 
mary parts is explained in Lesson XXVIII., which see. The student should 
make himself familiar with the formula of every verb, as it occurs in this and 
in subsequent lessons. 

t See Rules F. and G. of this Lesson. 

\ The verb do has the syllable da short; as dare, damns. The monosyllabic 
forms da and das are the only exceptions. 



112 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 24. 



OF THE PRESENT INDICATIVE. 

D. The present indicative -of Latin verbs corresponds 
in general to that of the English. The distinctions, 
however, indicated by the English I love, do love, am 
loving, are not expressed by any separate forms in 
Latin. The present indicative of the respective conju- 
gations is thus inflected : — 



SlXG. 



1. Amo, Hove. 


2. Moneo, I remind. 


I love 


amo * 


I remind 


moneo 


Thou lovest 


am as 


Thou remindest 


mones 


He loves, 


amat, 


He reminds, 


monet, 


We love 


amamus 


We remind 


monemus 


Ye love 


amatis 


Ye remind 


monetis 


They love. 


amant. 


They remind. 


monent. 


3. Lego, I read. 


4. Audio, I hear. 


I read 


lego 


I hear 


audio 


Thou readest 


legis 


Thou hearest 


audis 


He reads, 


legit, 


He hears, 


audit, 


We read 


legimiis 


We hear 


audimus 


Ye read 


legitis 


Ye hear 


audltis 


They read. 


legunt. 


They hear. 


audlunt. 



Plur. 



Sing. 



Plur. 



Like amo inflect : do, porto, lavo, &c. — Like moneo : habeo, video, 
egeo, and indigeo, &c. — Like lego : diligo, dispono, dico, &c. — Like 
audio: aperio, esurio, sitlo, &c. 

E. Obs. Verbs of the third conjugation in io are inflected like 
audio, except that the i of the different persons is short. The verb 
sum, I am, is irregular. The present indicative of facto, I make, do, 
and sum runs thus : 

facio Jam sum 

facis Thou art es 

facit, He is, est, 

facimus We are sum us 

f acitis Ye are estis 

faciunt. They are. sunt. 

Amasne tii fratrem tiium ? 
Yero, eum amo. 

F. Rile. — The object of an active transitive verb 
is put in the Accusative. This accusative may be either 
a person (aliquem) or a thing (aliquid). As 



Sing. / do 

Thou dos 

He does, 
Plur. We do 

Ye do 

They do. 

Do you love your brother ? 
I do love him. 



* The o final of the present tense of all verbs is commonly long, but in poetry 
sometimes short. 



LESSON 24.] 



PRESENT INDICATIVE. 



113 



JPuer librum legit. 
I tdeo hominem. 
Aperi fenestram. 

Does your brother arrange his 

books V 
He does arrange them, 
lie does not arrange them. 
Desye see anything beautiful ? 
We do see something beautiful. 
What is that little boy doing '? 
lie is doing something bad. 
Do you open the window ? 
I am opening it. 
TVho is washing his stockings ? 
The sailors are washing them. 
What do the men say ? 
They say nothing. 
Does your father give you a 

good book ? 
He crives me a e;ood book. 



The boy reads the book. 
I see the man. 
Open the window. 

Disponitne frater tiius libros siios V 

Disponit. 

Eos non disponit. 

Videtisne aliquid pulchri ? 

Videmus vero quiddam piilehri. 

Quid agit file puerculus ? 

Agit aliquid nequam (mali). 

Aperisne fenestram ? 

Aperio. 

Quis lavat tibhilia siia ? 

Lavant ea naiitae. 

Quid dicunt homines ? 

Nihil dicunt. 

Datne ti'bi pater librum bdnum ? 

Dat mihi librum bdnum. 



G. Obs. In Latin, as in English, the immediate ob- 
ject of transitive verbs (whether they be active or de- 
ponent) is put in the Accusative (dllquem or dUquid), and 
the remote object (i. e. that for or with reference to which 
anything is done) in the Dative (alicui).* As 



Da mihi librum. 
Mitto iibi epistolam. 
Cdmmodal nobis cultrum. 
Non schdlae, sed vitae discimus. 

Dost thou love him ? 

I do not love him. 

Do you want your money ? 



Give me the booh: 

I send you the letter. 

He lends us the knife. 

We learn not for school, but for life. 

( Eiimne amas ? 

( Niimquid eum amas ? 

Eum non amo (non diiigo). 
( Egesne tu peciinia tiia V 
\ Indigesne pecuniae tiiae ? 

H. Obs. The verb egeo and its compound indxgeo are intransitive, 
and are generally followed f by the Ablative, but sometimes by the 
Genitive of the object needed. (Cf. Lesson XXVI. B.) 

* In connection with this rule it is necessary to remark, that many verbs in 
Latin are neuter, while their English equivalents are transitive. No details 
can at present be given, but the construction of every verb will be pointed out 
as it is needed by the student of this method. Of Latin verbs generally, some 
are followed by the Nominative, others govern the Genitive, Dative, Accusative, 
or Ablative. 

t I. e. they govern the Ablative and Genitive. In Latin the object com- 
monly precedes the verb, and can only be said to follow in logical order. 

H 10* 



114 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 24. 

T n -, , ., ( Eao vero ea e^eo. 

1 really do need it. < ^ . -,*? ~ 

J I bane, ejus mdigeo. 

What do you stand in need of? Qua re mdiges ? 

I do not need anything. Nihil egeo. 

Do you want any one (any- Egesne aliquo (aliqua re) ? 

thing) ? 

I need my father. Patris* indigeo. 

Exercise 35. 

Does your brother love you ? — He does love me. — Do you love 
him ? — I do love him. — Does your father love him ? — He does not 
love him. — Dost thou love me, my good child? — I love thee. — 
Dost thou love this ugly man? — I do not love him. — Does the ser- 
vant open the window ? — He does open it. — Dost thou open it ? — 
I do not open it. — Does he open the book ? — He does not open it. 
— Dost thou set my books in order ? — I set them in order. — Does 
the servant arrange our boots and shoes ? — He sets both the one and 
the other in order. — Do our children love us ? — They do love us. — 
Do we love our enemies ? — We do not love them. — What do you 
give me ? — I do not give thee anything (I give thee nothing). — Do 
you give my brother the book ? — I do give it to him. — Do you give 
him a hat ? — I do give him one. — What do you give him ? — I give 
him something beautiful. — What does he give you ? — He gives me 
nothing. 

Exercise 36. 

Does the sailor wash his stockings? — He does wash them. — Do 
you wash your hands (manus tuas) ? — I do wash them. — Does your 
brother wash as many shirts as stockings ? — He washes more of the 
one than of the other. — Do you wash your shirts ? — I do not wash 
them. — Do your brothers wash their stockings or ours ? — They 
neither wash yours nor theirs ; they wash those (i. e. the stockings) 
of their children. — What does your servant carry ? — He carries a 
large table. — What do these men carry ? — They carry their wooden 
chairs. — What books does the young man carry ? — He carries good 
books. — Does he read them? — He does not read them ? — What 
do you read ? — I am reading nothing. — What do the men say ? — 
They are saying something good. — What dost thou say? — I do not 
say anything. — What are you doing? — I am doing nothing. — 
What are the boys doing ? — They are doing something bad. — 
They are reading good books. — Are these men hungry or thirsty ? — 
They are neither hungry nor thirsty. 

Exercise 3 7. 

Dost thou hear anything ? — I hear nothing. — Does your father 
hear anything ? — He neither hears nor sees anything. — Dost thou 

* The genitive (especially of the person) is quite frequent after indiyeo. 



LESSON 25.] THE GERUND. 115 

see anything ? — I see nothing. — Do you see my large garden ? — I 
do see it. — Does your father see our ship ? — He does not see it, but 
we see it. — How many ships do you see V — We see a good many ; 
we see more than thirty (plus triginta). — Do you give me books ? — 
I do give thee some. — Does your father give you money? — He 
does not give us any. — Does he give you hats ? — He does not 
give us any. — Do you see many sailors ? — We see more sol- 
diers than sailors (quam nautarum). — Do . the soldiers see many 
storehouses ? — They see more gardens than storehouses. — Do the 
English give you good cakes? — They do give us some. — Do you 
give me as much wine as beer ? — I give thee as much of the one as 
of the other. — Do you give me some more cakes ( pan ificia aliquot 
amplius) ? — I do not give you any more. — Do you give me the horse 
which you have ? — I do not give you that which I have ? — Which 
horse do you give me ? — I give you that of my brother. — Do you 
want (need) your money ? — I do want it. — Does your father want 
his servant ? — He does want him. — Dost thou need anything 
(aliqua re)? — I need nothing (nihil). — Do we want our carriage ? — 
We do want it. — Do our friends want their clothes ? — They do 
want them. 



Lesson XXV. — pensum vicesimum quintum. 

OF THE GERUND. 

A. The gerund is a verbal substantive of the second 
declension neuter gender. It is formed from the present 
indicative by changing the 1. o, 2. eo, 3. o (to), 4. io of 
the respective conjugations into 1. andi, 2. endi* 3. endi 
(iendi), 4. iendi; as, arao, amandi; moneo, manendi; lego, 
legendi (faclo, faciendi) ; audio, audiendi. Its nomina- 
tive is wanting, the present infinitive being commonly 
used in its stead. The gerund is thus declined: — 



Gen. of loving amandi 


Gen. 


of seeing videndl 


Dat. to loving amando 


Dat. 


for seeing \idendo 


Ace. loving amandum 


Ace. 


seeing videndum 


Abl. by loving amando. 


Abl. 


by seeing videndo. 


So decline : aperiendi, dandi 


dlcendi, 


faciendi, lavandi, legendi, 


monendi, portandi, &c. 







B. Gerunds generally govern the same eases as their verbs. 
They are in other respects construed like substantives, accord- 
ing to the following rules : — 



116 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 25. 

a) The Genitive is used : 1. After certain adjectives implying an 
operation of the mind ; as cupidus, diligens, gncu-us, ignarus, memor, 
immemor, perltus, studwsus, &c. 2. After many substantives, espe- 
cially after ars, causa, consilium, cupiditas, facultas, occasio, potestas, 
spes, studium, tempus, voluntas, and the ablatives causa and gratia, 
" for the sake of." E. g. cupidus dicendi, desirous of speaking ; stu- 
diosus audiendi, fond of hearing ; ars pingendi, the art of painting ; 
tempus abeundi, the time of leaving (to leave) ; discendi causa, for the 
sake of learning. 

b) The Dative of the gerund is employed after verbs and adjectives, 
especially after intentum esse, operam dare, tempus impendere, and after 
utilis, inutilis, noxtus, par, aptus, indoneus, &c. ; as, operam dat stu- 
dendo, he applies himself to study ; intentus est legendo, he is bent on 
reading; aptus d'iscendo, apt to learn; utilis bibendo, useful to drink. 

c) The Accusative of the gerund always depends on prepositions, 
especially on ad (to, for) and inter (during, while) ; sometimes also 
on ante (before), circa, and ob. E. g. paratus ad videndum, ready to 
see ; inter ludendum, while playing, &c. 

d) The Ablative of the gerund is either used, 1. to denote the in- 
strument in answer to the question ichereby ? ivhere-ivith ? or, 2. it is 
dependent on one of the prepositions ab, de, ex, or in ; as, defessus sum 
scribendo, I am wearied with writing ; justitia in suo cuique tribuendo, 
justice in giving every man his own. 

Examples : — 

The desire of living well. Cupiditas bene vivendi. 

The science of avoiding unneces- Sclentia vittindi siiinptus super- 

sary expenses. vacuos. 

Desirous, fond of hearing. Cupidus, studiosus audiendi. 

Sulphur Avater is useful for drink- Aqua nitrosa utilis est bibendo. 

ing (to drink). 

He is not solvent (able to pay). Non (par) est solvendo (dat.). 

They were present at the regis- Scribendo (dat.) adfuerunt. (A 

tration. law term.) 

He came for the purpose of Venit ad videndum. 

seeing (to see). 

He keej)s dogs for hunting pur- Alit canes ad venandum. 

poses. 

Easy to take (to be taken). Facilis ad capiendum. 

While walking, drinking, j)laying. Inter eundum (ambulandum), bi- 

bendum, ludendum. 

The mind of man is nourished Hdminis mens discendo alitur et 

by learning and thinking. cogitando. 

He spends his leisure in reading Otium siium in legendo consumit 

and writing. inque scribendo. 

OF THE FUTURE PASSIVE PARTICIPLE. 

C. The future passive participle is formed according 



LESSON 25.] PARTICIPLE IN " DTJS." 117 

to the analogy of the gerund. Its terminations for the 
respective conjugations are : — 

1. andus, a, um ; 2. endus, a, um ; 8. endus, a, um (iendus, 
a, um) ; 4. iendus, a, um. As, amandus, a, um, to be loved ; 
videndus, a, um, to be seen ; legendus, a, um; to be read ; fact- 
endus, a, um, to be done ; audiendus, a, um, to be heard. This 
participle is regularly inflected like bonus, a, um ; it is used in 
all the cases, both singular and plural, and agrees with its sub- 
stantive in gender, number, and case. 

Remark. — Verbs of the third and fourth conjugations may also 
have undus instead of endus, especially when i precedes; as dicundus, 
faciundus, audiundus, &c. Thus, regularly, poliundus, from potior, 
I possess. In other verbs this form occurs chiefly in certain standard 
expressions, such as In jure dicundo, In administering justice ; Injini- 
ous dividundis, In determining the boundaries, &c. 

OF THE NOMINATIVE OF THE PARTICIPLE IN " DUS." 

D. The nominative (and sometimes the accusative) of the 
future passive participle has generally the signification of neces- 
sity or of propriety, more rarely also of possibility ; as amandus, 
" one that must be loved, is to be loved, ought to be loved " ; 
legendus, "that must be read, is required to be read," &c. 
The construction of this participle has the peculiarity of requir- 
ing the agent (by whom the action is to be performed) in the 
dative case, instead of in the ablative with ab. (Cf. Lesson 
XXXIV.) Examples: — 

I, thou, he, must love. Amandum est mini, tibi, illi. 

We, you, they, must see. Videndum est nobis, vdbis, lllis. 

I, you, they, must read. Legendum est mini, tibi, lis. 

I (thou, he) must write a letter Epistola mini (tibi, ei) scribenda * 

(I have a letter to write). est. 

We (ye, they) must write letters Epistolae (nobis, vdbis, eis) scri- 

(have to write letters). bendae sunt. 

I (you, they) have to read the Liber est mihi (tibi, illis) legendus. 

book. 

We (you, he) have to read Libri sunt mihi (tibi, illi) legendi. 

books. 

* It was customary among the earlier Latin writers (and also among the 
later poets) to employ the object accusative after the neuter form of the parti- 
ciple of transitive verbs, and to say, epistolam (or epistolas) mihi scribendum 
est; as, for example, Lucretius: Quoniam aeternas poenas in morte timendum est, 
instead of Quoniam aeternaepoenae in morte timendae sunt (Since we must dread 
eternal punishment in death). But this construction is rarely used by Cicero, 
and the rule should be to employ the nominative and the participle in the same 
case. 



118 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[lesson 2: 



I, thou, he, must rest (go, sleep), 

&c. 
We ought especially to cherish 

diligence, and to practise it 

always. 
One must venture (risk), one 

must die. 
Every one must (should) use his 

own judgment. 
I know that I must write a letter. 



Quiescendum (eiindum,* dormi- 
endum) est mihi, tibi, ei, &c. 

Diligentia praecipiie colenda est 
nobis, et semper adhibenda. 

Audendum est, moriendum est. 

Siio cuique judicio (ahl.) utendum 

est, 
Scio epistolam mihi esse scriben- 

dam. 



OF THE OBLIQUE CASES OF THE PARTICIPLE IN " DUS, 
OR OF THE GERUNDIVE. 

E. The future passive participle rarely retains its original 
signification of necessity or propriety in the oblique cases (i. e. 
in the genitive, dative, &c), but is commonly employed in the 
sense of a present participle or of the gerund. When thus 
used, it is called the Gerundive. Thus we say : — 

The design of writing a letter Consilium epistolae scribendae, in- 
stead of consilium scribendi epi- 
stolam. f 
Consilium epistolarum scribendd- 
rum, instead of consilium epi- 
stolas scribendi. 
Decemviri legibus scribendis (dat.). 



{lit. of a letter to be written) . 

The design of writing letters (lit 
of letters to be written). 



-ir agro dando (dat.). 



A committee of ten on legislation 

(lit. for the writing of laws). 
One of the committee of three on 

grants of public lands. 
He is born for the endurance of Xatus est miseriis ferendis (dat.). 

miseries. 
He was sent to procure ships. Missus est ad naves comparandas 

(for ad comparandum naves). 
He comes to defend the city. "Venit ad urbem defendendam (for 

ad defendendum urbem). 

* In intransitive verbs this neuter form of the participle with est, erat, &c is 
the only one in use. The dative of the agent is often left indeterminate. 

t This conversion of the object accusative of the gerund into the passive 
construction of the gerundive may always take place, unless in those cases 
where perspicuity would suffer from the change. "When the accusative after 
the gerund is a pronoun or adjective of the neuter gender, the conversion usu- 
ally does not take place, to prevent ambiguitv respecting the gender of these 
words. Thus always: Studium illud efficiendi (the desire of accomplishing 
that), and never ttlius efficiendi; Cupidus plura cognoseendi (desirous of knowing 
more ),_ and never plurium cognoscendomm. Thus also: In suur/i cuique tribu- 
eivlo (in giving every one his own), more commonlv than, In suo cuique tribu- 
endo. In general, however, the rule is, that, when the verb governs the accusa- 
tive, the passive construction with the participle is to be prej 'erred to the gerund 
■with the accusative. 



LESSON 25.] 



THE GERUNDIVE. 



119 



Fortitude In the endurance of 
hardships and dangers. 



I am engaged in writing a letter. 



I am engaged in writing letters. 



The plan has been formed of 
destroying the city, of murder- 
ing the inhabitants, of blotting 
out the Roman name. 



Fortitiido in labdribus periculisque 

subeiindis (for in subeiindo la- 

bores, &c). 
Occupatus sum in epistola scri- 

benda (for in scribendo epi- 

stolam). 
Occupatus sum in epistdlis scri- 

bendis (for in scribendo epi- 

stolas). 
tnita sunt consilia lirbis delendae, 

ci'vium trucidandorum, ndminis 

Romani extinouendi. 



F. Obs. From the above examples, it will be perceived that the 
gerundive agrees with its substantive in gender, number, and case. 
Violations of this general rule, however, both with respect to gender 
and to number, are not unfrequent in the genitive of substantives, and 
especially of pronouns. E. g. : — 



Since there is an opportunity of 

seeing you (fern.). 
For the sake of exhorting you. 

The liberty of plundering fruit. 

The power of selecting examples. 



Qudniam tui (fern.) videndi (for 

videndae) est cdpia. 
Vestri exhortdndi (for exliortando- 

ruiii) causa. 
Licentia diripiendi pomorum (for 

poma). 
Exemplornm (for exempla) eli- 

gendi potestas. 

Exercise 38. 

Are you fond of reading ? — I am fond of reading. — Are your 
brothers fond of reading ? — They are not fond of reading. — Who 
is fond of hearing ? — The merchants are fond of hearing. — Does he 
come for the purpose of seeing ? — He does come for the purpose of 
seeing. — They come (yeniunt) for the purpose of hearing. — Is it 
useful to drink wine ? — It is useful. — It is not useful to drink wine. 
— Are you (esne tu) solvent (i. e. can you pay your debts) ? — I am 
solvent. — I cannot pay my debts. — Is the place easy to take (easily 
taken) ? — It is difficult (difficilis) to be taken. — Do you read while 
you are playing ? — I do not read while I am playing. — By what 
(qua re) is the mind of man nourished ? — It is nourished by learn- 
ing and thinking. — Does he spend his leisure in reading? — No, sir, 
he spends it in playing. — Does he read for the sake of learning (dis- 
cendi gratia) ? — He reads for the sake of writing. 

Exercise 39. 

Must you read ? — I am not obliged to read. — Must they sleep ? — 
They must sleep. — Must your brother go? — He must go. — Who 
must go (cui) ? — The sailor must go. — The boys must go. — Must 
the captains go ? — They must go. — Must one venture ? — One must 



120 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSOX 26. 

venture. — One must not venture. — What must (should) one do 
(quid est facu ndurri) ? — Every one must (should) use his own judg- 
ment. — Do you keep (alisne tu) dogs for hunting? — I do not keep 
any. — Must you write a letter (Have you a letter to write)? — I 
must write one (I have one to write). — Have I any letters to write ? 

— You have some to write. — Who has (cui sunt) many letters to 
write ? — The merchant has many to write. — I have none to write. 

— Who should practise diligence? — We all (nobis omnibus') should 
practise and cherish it. 

Exercise 40. 

Have you (eslne tibi) the design of writing a letter ? — I have the 
design of writing several. — Has your father the design of writing- 
letters ? — He has the design of writing letters and notes. — Is the 
time of departure at hand (adestne tempus abeundi) ? — It is at 
hand. — The time of departure is not yet (nondum) at hand. — Is it 
time to speak ? — It is time to speak. — Are you (esne tu) engaged 
(occupatus) in writing a letter? — I am not engaged in writing a 
letter, but in writing notes. — Is your son fond of writing letters ? — 
He is not fond of writing, but of reading them. — Is paper useful for 
writing letters? — It is. — Have you an opportunity to speak? — I 
have an opportunity to speak. — Who has an opportunity to read ? 

— Your son has an opportunity to read and to write ? — Who comes 
to see? — I come (ego venio) to see. — Who was (quis missus est) sent 
to procure ships ? — The captain was sent. — Have you the desire to 
accomplish (i. e. of accomplishing) that? — I have (est). — What 
must we do ? — We must give every man his own. 



A mind (desire) to work. 



Lesson XXVI. — PENSUM VICESIMUM SEXTUM. 

A wish, a mind,, desire. Cupulttas, voluntas, citix, f. ; stadi- 

um, i, n. 
Time, leisure. Tempus, oris, n. ; spatium, dttum* 

?, n. 
Voluntas operandi. 
Stiidium dperis faciendi. 
Spatium ad laborandum. 
Time to work. -I Otium (tempus) ad opus facien- 

( r dum. 

fEst mi'hi voluntas (cupiditas, stii- 
I have a mind (wish, desire) to! dium) aliquid facie'ndi. 
do anything. ] Ciipidus sum aliquid faciendi. 

[_ Ciiplo aliquid facere. 

* Tempus is the proper word for "time" generally. Otium is "leisure." 
Spatium is properly " space," " room," i. e. a certain portion of time, an allot- 
ment or allowance of time for doing; anvthins;. 



LESSON 26.] VERBS OF PLENTY OR WANT. 



121 



A. Obs. The preposition to, which in 



English 



is 
always the sign of the infinitive, is not always so in 
Latin. It is sometimes rendered by the infinitive, some- 
times by the supine in um, and sometimes by one of the 
oblique cases of the gerund or gerundive. The shade 
of difference in these expressions will readily be per- 
ceived by the learner. 

( Est mihi spatium ad laborandum. 

( Habeo dtium ad opus faciendum. 

j Cvipidus sum labonindi. 

| Cupio opus faeere. 

( Est mihi animus loquendi. 

\ Audeo loqui (dieere). 



I have time to work (for work 
ing). 

I have a mind (desire) to work. 



I have the courage to speak. 
To work. 



To speak. 
To desire. 

To venture, dare. 

To cut. 

To buy. 

To lack (want, to be with- 
out) . 



( Luburo, are, avi, alum. 
\ Opus faeere (to do work). 

( Loquor, loqui, locutus sum.* 
( Dlco, ere, xi, ctum. 
Cupio, ere, ivi (ii), Itum (aliquid 

facere). 
Audeo, ere, ausus sum f (aliquid 

facere). 
Seco, are, secui, sectum (ali- 
_ quem, aliquid). 
Emo, ere, emi, emptum (aliquem, 

aliquid). 
Careo, ere, ui, itum (aliqua re). 



B. Rule. Verbs signifying plenty or want are gen- 
erally followed by the Ablative, sometimes by the Geni- 
tive. As : — 



Egeo pecunia. 
Caret ammo. 
Liber sedtet vitas. 
IncUget pdtris. 



I have not, I lack. 



/ want (am in want of) money. 

He lacks (Jias not) the courage. 

The book abounds in errors. 

lie needs his father. 
(Non habeo (with the ace). 
■} Mihi deest (with the nom.). 
( Careo (with the abl.). 



* Loquor is a deponent verb of the third conjugation. The principal parts 
of verbs of the passive form are only three, viz.: — 1. the Present Indicative {lo- 
quor); 2. the Present Infinitive {loqui); and 3. the Perfect Indicative {locutus 
sum). With respect to the signification, loqui is properly "to speak," "to 
talk," e. g. Latin, English; and dieere, "to say," or "to speak," in connect- 
ed or formal discourse. 

| On this deponent pei'fect, see Lesson XXXIII. A. Eem. 4. 
11 



122 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 26. 



I have not (I lack) the courage 
to speak. 

To cut it (of cutting, for cutting 
it). 

To cut them (of cutting, for cut- 
ting them). 



To cut some (shu/.). 
To cut some (plur.). 

Have you time to cut trees ? 

I have time to cut some. 

Have you a mind to cut the 
bread ? 

I have no mind (desire) to cut 

it. 

To buy some more. 
To buy one. 



To buy one more. 



Deest* mihi animus loquendi. 

Careo ammo loquendi. 

Non aiideo ldqui (fari). 

Eum, earn, id secure (secandi). 

Ad eum, id secandum. 

Ad earn secandam {/em.). 

Eos, eas, ea secare (secandi). 

Ad eos secandos (masc). 

Ad eas secandas (fern.). 

Ad ea secanda (neut). 

Aliquid secure (secandi). 

Ad nonniillum secandum. 

Ad nonmillam secandam {fern?). 

Aliquot (nonniillos, &c.) secare 
(secandi). 

Ad nonnuilos secandos, &c. 

Ad aliquot secanda. 

Habesne dtium ad secandum ar- 
bdres ? 

Estne tibi spatium ad arbdres ali- 
quas secandas ? 

Habeo dtium ad secandum aliquas. 

Est mihi spatium ad aliquot secan- 
das. 

Cupidusne es panis in frusta se- 
candi ? 

Cupisne panem in frusta secare ? 

Non siim ciipidus ejus in frusta 
secandi. 
I Eum in frusta secare non ciipio. 

( Plus (dmplius) emere or emendi. 

\Ad dmplius {plus) emendum. 

( Unum (-am, -urn) emcre or emen- 

] di. 

( Ad unum (-am, -um) emendum. 

f lino (-a, -o) dmplius (plus) f emere 

\ or emendi. 

j Ad emendum uno (-«, -o) j)lus (am- 

[_ pttus). 



* Deest is compounded of de + stirn, and is inflected precisely like the sim- 
ple verb. It is construed with the dative of the person: — Deest mihi, tibi, 
hominibiis, &c, " There is wanting to me, to you, to the men"; i. e. " 1 have 
not, lack, want." 

| Plus and amplius are here used substantively, like aliquid, nihil, and may 
like them be followed by a partitive genitive; e. g. plus equorum, more horses; 
amplius librorum, more books. Uno is the ablative of excess : " more by one." 
We thus can say either uno equo amjrfius, or uno amplius equorum, one more 
horse. 



LESSON 26.] THRASES AND EXERCISES. 



123 



To buy two. 



To bur two more. 



Have you a mind to buy one 
more horse ? 

I have a mind to buy one more. 

Have you a mind to buy some 
books ? 

I have a mind to buy some, but 
I have no time. 

Am I right in doing so ? (Is it 
right ibr me to do so ?) 

You are not right. (It is wrong 
for you.) 



Diios (diias, duo) emere or emendi. 
Ad emend u m duos (diias, duo). 
Dudbus (-fibus, -obus) amplius 

(plus) emere or emendi. 
Ad emendum duobus (-abus, -obus) 

plus (amplius).* 
Cupisne emere lino plus equorum ? 
Esne ciipldus emendi lino amplius 

equorum ? 
Ciipio emere lino plus. 
Sum ciipldus emendi uno amplius. 
Cupisne emere li'bros aliquos ? 
Cupidusne es librorum aliquot 

emendi ? 
Ciipio aliquot (nonmillos) emere,, 

sed careo dtio (deest mihi spa- 

tium). 
Estne mihi fas (or licetne milii) 

hoc facere ? 
Non est tibi fas (non licet). 
Est tibi nefas. 



Exercise 41. 

Have you still a mind to buy the house of my friend ? — I have still 
a mind to buy it, but I have no more money. — Have you time to 
work ? — I have time, but no mind to work. — Has he time to cut 
some sticks ? — He has time to cut some. — Have you a mind to cut 
some bread? — I have a mind to cut some, but I have no knife. — 
Have you time to cut some cheese? — I have time to cut some. — 
Has he a desire to cut the tree ? — He has a desire to cut it, but he 
has no time. — Has he time to cut the cloth ? — He has time to cut it. 

— Have I time to cut the trees ? — You have time to cut them ? — 
Has the painter a mind to buy a horse ? — He has a mind to buy 
two. — Has your captain of the navy time to speak (ad loquendwri) ? 

— He has time, but no desire to speak. — Have you a mind to buy 
a carriage? — I have a mind to buy one. — Have I a mind to buy 
a house ? — You have a mind to buy one. — Has your brother a mind 
to buy a great ox ? — He has a mind to buy a little one. — We have 
a mind to buy little oxen. — How many horses have you a mind to 
buy ? — I have a mind to buy four. — Has any one a mind to buy a 
broom ? — This man has a mind to buy one. — What has that man a 
mind to buy ? — He has a mind to buy a beautiful carriage, three 
beautiful horses, good tea, and good meat. 



* The learner must bear in mind that, although these formulas are arranged 
with special reference to the expressions eupio, cupidus sum, and otium ad of this 
Lesson, they are of general importance, as these same constructions will per- 
petually recur with other words in different parts of the book. 



124: LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 27. 

Exercise 42. 

Hare you a desire to speak ? — I have a desire, but no time to 
speak. — Have you the courage to cut your arm ? — I have not the 
courage to cut it. — Am I right in speaking ? — You are not wrong 
in speaking; but you are wrong in cutting my trees. — Has the son 
of your friend a desire to buy one more bird ? — He has a desire to 
buy one more. — Have you a mind to buy one more beautiful coat ? 

— I have a mind to buy one more. — Have we a mind to buy a few 
more horses ? — We have a mind to buy a few more, but we have no 
more money. — What have you a mind to buy ? — We have a mind 
to buy something good, and our neighbors have a mind to buy some- 
thing beautiful. — Have their children a desire to buy any birds ? — 
Their children have no desire to buy any. — Have you the courage 
to buy the trunk of the captain '? — I have a desire to buy it, but I 
have no more money. — Who has a mind to buy my beautiful dog? 

— Nobody has a mind to buy it. — Have you a mind to buy my 
beautiful birds, or those of the Frenchman ? — I have a mind to buy 
those of the Frenchman. — Which book has he a mind to buy? — He 
has a mind to buy that which you have, that which your son has, and 
that which mine has. — Have you two horses ? — I have only one, 
but I have a wish to buy one more. 



Lesson XXVII. — pexsoi vicesdium 

SEPTIMUM. 

OF COMPOUND VERBS. 

A. The majority of Latin compound verbs are formed 
by prefixing certain particles to simple verbs. These 
particles are either the separable prepositions a (cib or 
abs), ad, ante, circum, cum, de, e or ex, in, inter, ob, 
per, post prae, praeter, pro, sub, super, supter, and 
trans, or one of the inseparable prefixes amb {an), (lis 
(or di), re, and se. 

Remarks. 

1 . It is frequently the case that the radical vowel or diphthong of 
the simple verb is changed in the compound; as frango, dijfringo ; 
laedo, collido, &c. 

2. The final consonant of many of the above prepositions is often 
assimilated, i. e. changed, into the initial of the verb. The notes to 
the following list of compound verbs will show to what extent this is 
done. 



LESSON 27.] 



COMPOUND VERBS. 



125 



Example 

A 1 — amitto, I lose. 
Ab — abeo, 1 go away. 

" — aufugio, I escape. 
Abs — abscondo, I conceal. 
Ad 2 — addo, I add (to). 

" — affero, I bring (to). 

"~" — assumo, I take, assume. 
Ante 3 — antepono, I prefer. 

" — anticipo, I anticipate. 
Circum — circumeo, I go around. 
Cum 4 — comburo, I burn up. 

" — compono, 1 compose. 

" — colligo, I collect. 

" — corripio, 1 seize. 

" — conservo, I preserve. 

" — cofilesco, 1 blend with. 

" — comedo, I eat up. 

" — cogito (= co-agito), 7 
think, reflect. 
De — descendo, I descend. 
E 5 — ejicio, I cast out. 
" — escendo, I disembark. 
Ex — exaudio, I hear. 

" — expono, 1 expound. 
In 6 — intro, I enter. 



of Compound Verbs. 

In — illklo, I strike against. 
" — immuto, / change. 
" — irrumpo, I burst into. 
Inter 7 — interpono, I put between. 

" — intelligo, I comprehend. 
Ob 8 — obsto, I stand against. 
" — oppono, 1 place against. 
" — ostendo, I show. 
Per 9 — perlego, I read through. 

" — pelllcio, 7 allure. 
Post — postpono, 7 yaZwe less. 
Prae — praef ero, I prefer. 
Praeter — praetermitto, 7 <w«Y. 
Pro — procurro, 7 run forward. 
" — prodeo, 10 I go forth. 
Sub u — subjieio, 7 subject. 
" — succedo, I follow. 
" — suspendo, 7 suspend. 
Super — superimpono, I place upon. 
Supter — supterago, 7 rfr/fe under. 
Trans 12 — transeo, I pass over (be- 
yond). 
" — tradiico, 7 Zea<i ore/-. 
" — transcribo, 7 transcribe. 



B. The particle aw& (a??2, «?i) has the sense of around, ahout, con- 
cerning. Dis or di denotes separation or dispersion, sometimes also 



1 A is put before m and v ; ab before vowels and the majority of consonants ; 
abs only before c and t. In the verbs aufero, aufugio, the ab is changed into 
av = au. 

2 Ad remains unchanged before vowels, and before d,j, v, m ; but before the 
remaining consonants it is assimilated. 

3 Ante changes its e into i only in the verbs anticipare and antistare. 

4 Cum in composition never appears without a change of form. Before b, p, 
m, it becomes com; before I, n, r, it is assimilated into col, con, cor; before the 
remaining consonants it is always con; before vowels it is generally co, but 
sometimes com. 

5 Before vowels, and before c, p, q, s, t, generally ex ; before the rest of the 
consonants, e; before/", assimilation. 

6 In, before m, b, p, becomes im; before I and?' it is assimilated; in all 
other cases it remains unchanged. 

7 Inter remains unaltered, except in intelligo. 

8 Ob is assimilated only before/", g, p. The form ostendo is from the obsolete 
obs and tenclo. 

9 Per generally remains unaltered, except sometimes before r. 

10 The letter d is sometimes inserted between the prefix and the verb, to 
prevent a hiatus; as pro-d-eo, re-d-eo, &c. 

11 Sub before voAvels remains unchanged : it is assimilated before the conso- 
nants c. f, g, in, p, and sometimes also before r. 

12 Trans rejects the final s, when the verb begins with one ; it sometimes 
becomes tra before consonants. 

11* 



126 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 27. 

intensity. Be is generally back, again, but it sometimes likewise 
denotes separation. Its form before a vowel is red. Se is equivalent 
to the English aside, apart. These particles are called inseparable, 
because they are never used as independent words. Examples: — 

Amb — ambio, I go about. Re — remitto, I send back. 
" — ambigo, I quarrel (about). " — relego, / read again. 

" — amputo, 1 cut off. " — recludo, / unlock. 

" — anquiro, I investigate. " — redeo, I return. 

Dis — disjicio, I scatter. Se — sevoco, 7 call aside. 

" — dispono, I arrange " — seduco, 1 lead aside. 

" — dimitto, I dismiss. " — sejungo, I separate. 
" — differo, JpwZ o^! 

(7. <9&s. Verbs are also compounded with nouns, adjectives, 
and with other verbs and adverbs ; as venumdare, from venum -\- 
dare ; ccdefacere, from ccdidus -j- facere ; obstupefac ere, from 
06 -|- stupeo -\- facere, &c. But the great majority are com- 
pounds with prepositions. 

fFrango, ere, fregi, fractum (ali- 
To break, to break into J quid and neuter). 

pieces. j Confringo, ere, fregi, fractum. 

^DifFringo (aliquid). 

( Servo, are, avi, atum. 
To keep, take care of. -| Repono, ere, posui, positum. 

( (aliquid). 
To pick up. Tollo, ere, sustiili, sublatum (ali- 

quid). 

( Reptiro, are, avi, atum. 
To mend, repair. -j Ref Icio, ere, feci, fectum. 

( (aliquid). 
To light, kindle. Accendo, ere, di, sum (aliquid). 

To make (or light) a fire. Ignem (m.) accendere (facere). 



rr , n c ■< ( Uro, ere, ussi, ustum. 

lo burn (be on fire). -n ,. -.-. 

o burn i 
burning 



^ Ardeo, ere, arsi, arsum. 

rr, , -, , i ( Comburo, ere, bussi, bustum. 

lo burn up, destroy by } n ~ '_'_,'_• 

J -i Concremo, are, avi, atum. 

( (aliquem, aliquid). 
C Quaero, ere, quaeslvi, quaes! turn. 
To seek, look for. < Conqulro, ere, isivi, isitum. 

( (aliquem, aliquid). 
To warm. Calef acio, ere, feci, factum (ali- 

quid). 
f Facio, facere, feci, factum. 
To make. -c Conficio, ere, feci, fectum. 

( w (aliquid). 
Ago, agere, egi, actum. 
To do. -^ Faeio, facere, feci, factum. 

(aliquid). 



LESSON 27.] VOLO. NOLO. 127 

To be witting, to wish. Volo, velle, voliil (aliquid fa- 

cere). 

D. Obs. The present indicative of the verb volo, which is irregular, 
is thus inflected. 

Sing, i" will, am willing, or wish ego volo 

^ Thou wilt {you will), &c. tu vis 

He will, is loilling, &c. ille vult, 

Plur. We will, wish, &c. nos volumiis 

Ye will, luish, &c. vos vultis 

They will, wish, &c. hi, ii, illi volunt. 

Remark. — The forms volt and voltis occur in ancient authors in- 
stead of vult and vultis. 

Will you ? Do you wish ? Are ( Visne ? iEcquid vis ? 

you willing ? \ An (tu) vis ? Num. vis ? 

Will he ? Is he willing ? Does ( Viiltne ? Equid (is) viilt ? 

he wish ? (An (ille) viilt ? Mm vult ? 

Do you wish to make my fire ? Visne tu mihi accendere (fiicere) 

ignem ? 
Volo eum accendere. 
E20 eum facere non nolo. 



I am willing to make it. 



I do not wish to make it. Nolo eum accendere. 

Does he wish to buy your horse ? Viiltne equum tiium emere ? 

He wishes to buy it. Viilt eum emere. 

tt 1 i. • 1 j. u -i. \ Non viilt eum emere. 

He does not wish to buy it. ■{ +, , ~ . ,-.. 

J I -bum emere non vult. 

To be unwilling. Nolo, nolle, nolui (aliquid fa- 

cere). 

E. Obs. The verb volo is compounded of non and volo, and follows 
the inflection of 'the simple verb. Thus : — 

Sing. / am unwilling, &c. nolo 

Thou art unwilling, &c. non vis 

He is unwilling, &c. non vult, 

Plur. We are unwilling nolumus 

Ye are unwilling non vultis 

They are unwilling. nolunt. 

Remark. — Nevis and nevolt occur in the older Latin writers in- 
stead of nonvis and nonvult. 

F. Rule. The verbs volo, nolo, malo, cupio, soleo, 
audeo, and others expressing willingness, desire, ability, 
custom, duty, and the like, are followed by the infini- 
tive ; as, 



128 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 27. 



Vdlo fieri ddctus.* 
Non ri'ilt dblre. 
De'bes esse diligens. 
Solet tristis esse. 
Potest liber esse. 

Has the tailor time to mend my 
coat. 

He has time to mend it, 

Has the shoemaker time to mend 

my boots ? 
He has time to mend them. 
Am I right in keeping (is it right 

for me to keep) your money ? 
You are not right in keeping it. 

Who has to mend (who must 

mend) our coats ? 
The tailor has to mend them. 
What have I to do '? 
You have to warm our coffee. 



/ wish to become learned. 
He is unwilling to go. 
You ought to be diligent. 
lie is wont to be sad. 
He can be free. 

Habctne sartor spatium ad repa- 

randum meam tdgam ? 
Estne sartdri dtium ad tdgam meam 

renciendam V 
Est ei dtium ad earn reficiendain. 
Estne sutdri spatium ad caligas 

meas reficiendas '? 
Est ei spatium ad eas reficiendas. 
Estne mi'hi fas pecuniam tuam 

servare (repdnere) ? 
Non est ti'bi fas (tibi nefas est) earn 

servare (repdnere). 
Cui sunt tdgae ndstrae reparandae ? 

Reparandae sunt sartdri. 
Quid est mihi faciendum ? 
Coffea nostra tibi calefacienda est. 



Exercise 43. 

Have you a desire to keep my letter ? — I have a desire to keep 
it. — Am I right in keeping your money ? — You are right in keep- 
ing it. — Has the tailor a desire to make my coat ? — He has a de- 
sire to make it, but he has no time. — Has your tailor time to mend 
my coats ? — He has time to mend them. — 'Have you courage to burn 
my hat ? — I have not the courage to burn it ; I have a mind to keep 
it '? — Has the shoemaker's boy a mind to mend my boots ? — He has 
no time to mend them. — What has our friend's tailor to mend ? — 
He has to mend our old coats. — Who has to mend our boots ? — Our 
shoemaker has to mend them. — What has our hatmaker to do ? — 
He has to mend your great hats. — Has your brother's joiner any- 
thing to do ? — He has to mend our great tables and our little chairs. 
— Do you wish to keep my twenty-seven crowns ? — I wish to keep 
them. — Will you pick up that crown or that florin ? — I will pick up 
both. — Do you wish to cut his finger ? — I do not wish to cut it. — 
Does the painter wish to burn vinegar? — He wishes to burn some.* 



* After verbs expressing a desire or wish (such as vdlo, nolo, malo, cupio, 
opto, studeo), the noun, adjective, or participle of the predicate is in the Nomi- 
native, ichen the subject of the sentence remains the same, but in the Accusative 
when a new subject is introduced, or the pronoun of the same person repeated. 
Thus : Cupio esse clemens, I desire to be clement ; but Cupio te esse clementem, I 
desire you to be clement; and also Cupio me esse clementem, instead of Cupio 
esse clemens. And in the same way: Voh mm fieri doctum, T wish him to 
become learned; and Volo me fieri ductum, instead of Yolo fieri ductus. 



LESSON 28.] DERIVATION OF TENSES. 129 

— Is the peasant willing to burn his bread? — He is not -willing to 
burn his own, but that of his neighbor. — Have you anything to do ? 

— I have nothing to do. — Have Ave anything to do V — We have to 
warm our coffee. — Do you wish to speak ? — I wish to speak. — Is 
your son willing to work ? — He is not willing to work. 

Exercise 44. 

Do you wish to buy anything ? — I wish to buy something. — 
What do you wish to buy ? — I wish to buy some good books. — 
What has he to buy ? — He has to buy a good horse. — Will you buy 
this or that table ? — I will buy neither this nor that. — Which house 
does your friend wish to buy ? — He wishes to buy your brother's 
great house. — Is your servant willing to make my fire? — He is 
willing to make it. — AVill your father buy these rams or these oxen ? 
He will buy neither the one nor the other. — Does he wish to buy 
my umbrella or my cane ? — He wishes to buy both. — Do you wish 
to make a fire V — We do not wish to make any. — What do you wish 
to make ? — I wish to make vinegar. — Will you seek my knife ? — 
I will seek it. — Have you to look for anything ? — I have nothing to 
look for. — Has he time to seek my son ? — He has time, but he will 
not seek him. — What has he to do ? — He has to make a fire, to 
wash my thread stockings, to buy good coffee, good sugar, good water, 
and good meat. — Will he buy your good trunk ? — He will buy it. 

— Will you buy my great or my little house ? — I will buy neither 
your great nor your little house ; I wish to buy that of our friend. — 
Will you buy my beautiful horses? — I will not buy them. — How 
many rams will you buy ? — I will buy twenty-two. — Does the 
foreigner wish to buy much corn ? — He wishes to buy but little. — 
Do you wish to buy a great many gloves ? — We wish to buy only a 
few,* but our children wish to buy a great many. — Will they seek 
the same boots which we have ? — They will not seek those which 
you have, but those which my father has. — Will you look for my 
coats, or those of the good Frenchman. — I will look neither for yours 
nor for those of the good Frenchman ; I will look tor mine and for 
those of my good son. 



Lesson XXVIII. — pensum duodetkice- 

SIMUM. 
OF THE DERIVATION OF TENSES. 

It has already been said (Lesson XXIV.) that the different tenses 
and other parts of the Latin verbs are all formed from four principal 
parts ; namely, from the Present Indicative, the Present Infinitive, 
the Perfect Indicative, and the Supine in urn. This formation takes 
place according to the following laws : — 
I 



130 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 28. 

A. From the Present Infinitive (amdre, monere, legere, 
audire) are derived : — 

1. The Imperative Passive, which has invariably the same form; as 
amdre, monere, leg ere, audire, be thou loved, admonished, read, heard. 

2. The Imperative Active, by dropping the final re; as dma, mone, 
lege, audi, love, admonish, read, hear thou. 

3. The Present Infinitive Passive, by changing, 1. are, 2. ere, 4. ire, 
into, 1. ari, 2. eri, 4. iri, and 3. ere into i ; as amarl, monerl, legi, au- 
dirl, to be loved, admonished, read, heard. 

4. The Imperfect Subjunctive Active, by adding m ; as amdrem, mone- 
rem, legerem, audlrem, that I might be loved, admonished, read, heard. 

5. The Imperfect Subjunctive Passive, by adding r; as amdrer, 
monerer, legerer, audirer, that I might be loved, admonished, read, 
heard. 

B. From the Present Indicative (cimo, moneo, lego, 
audio) are derived : — 

1. The Present Indicative Passive, by adding r; as amor, mdneor, 
legor, audior, I am loved, admonished, read, heard. 

2. The Present Subjunctive Active, by changing the terminations of 
the Present Indicative (1. o, 2. eo, 3. o (id), 4. to) into, 1. em, 2. earn, 
3. am (jam), 4. iam; as arnem, moneam, legam (capiam), audiam, that 
I may love, admonish, read (take), hear. 

3. The Present Subjunctive Passive, by changing the final m of the 
Active into r ; as dmer, monear, legar (capiar), audiar, that I may be 
loved, admonished, read (taken), heard. 

4. The Imperfect Indicative Active, by changing the terminations of 
the Present into, 1. dbam, 2. ebam, 3. ebam (iebam), 4. iebam ; asamd- 
bam, monebam, legebam (capiebam), audiebam, I loved, admonished, 
read (took), heard. 

5. The Imperfect Indicative Passive, by changing the final m of the 
same tense in the Active into r ; as amabar, monebar, legebar (capie- 
bar), audiebar, I was loved, admonished, read (taken), heard. 

6. The Fh'st Future Active, by changing the termination of the 
Present into, 1. abo, 2. ebo, 3. am (jam), 4. mm ; as amdbo, monebo, 
legam (capiam), audiam, I shall love, admonish, read (take), hear. 

7. The First Future Passive, by changing the final m of the same 
tense in the Active into r ; as amabor, monebor, legar (capiar), audiar, 
I shall be loved, admonished, read (taken), heard. 

8. The Present Participle Active, by changing the terminations of 
the Present Indicative into, 1. ans, 2. ens, 3. ens (iens), 4. iens ; as 
amans, mdnens, legens (cajjiens), audiens, loving, admonishing, reading 
(taking), hearing. 

9. The Future Passive Participle, by changing the same termina- 
tions into, 1. and us, 2. endus, 3. endus (iendus), 4. iendus : as aman- 



LESSON 28.] DERIVATION OF TENSES. 131 

dus, monendus, legendus (capiendus), audiendus, to be loved, admon- 
ished, read (taken), heard. 

10. The Gerund, in a similar manner ; as amandi, monendi, legendi 
(capiendi), audiendi, of loving, admonishing, reading (taking), hear- 
ings 

01 From the Perfect Indicative (amdvi, monui, legi, 
audivi) are derived : — 

1. The Pluperfect Indicative, by changing the final i into eram; as 
amdveram, monueram, legeram, audlveram, I had loved, admonished, 
read, heard. 

2. The Future Perfect, by changing the final i into ero ; as ama- 
vero, monuero, legem, audlvero, I shall have loved, admonished, read, 
heard. 

3. The Perfect Subjimctive, by changing i into erim ; as amdverim 
monuerim, legerim, audiverim, that I may have loved, admonished, 
read, heard. 

4. The Pluperfect Subjunctive, by changing i into issem ; as amdvis- 
sem, monuissem, leg issem, audlvissem, that I might have loved, admon- 
ished, read, heard. 

5. The Perfect Infinitive Active, by changing i into isse ; as amd- 
visse, monuisse, legisse, audlvisse, to have loved, admonished, read, 
heard. 

D. From the Supine in "um" (amatum, momtum, ledum, 
auditum) are derived : — 

1. The Perfect Participle Passive, by changing the final um into us, 
a, um; as amCitus, a, um, loved; monitus, a, um, admonished; lectus, 
a, um, read ; audltus, a, um, heard. 

2. The Future Participle Active, by changing um into urus, a, um ; 
as amdturus, a, um, about to love ; moniturus, a, um, about to admon- 
ish ; lecturus, a, um, about to read ; audlturus, a, um, about to hear. 

Remark. — The Participle in urus in connection with esse serves 
to form the Future Infinitive Active ; as amdturum (am, um) esse, to 
be about to love ; moniturum (am, um) esse, to be about to admonish, 
&c. The same Participle, compounded with the different tenses of 
the verb sum, gives rise to a new conjugation, by which the various 
shades of a future or incipient action are indicated ; as amaturus sum, 
I am about to love ; amaturus eram, I was about to love ; amaturus 
ero, I shall be about to love, &c. 

M. In the Passive Voice several tenses are periphrastic 
or compound, and are formed by combining the Perfect Parti- 
ciple with one of the tenses of the verb sum. These compound 
tenses are : — 

1. The Perfect Indicative, with sum; as amdtus (a, um) sum, I have 
been loved ; monitus (a, um) su?n, I have been admonished, &c. 



132 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 28. 



2. The Perfect Subjunctive, -with sim : as amatus (a, urn) sim, that 
I may have been loved; audUus (a, u?ri) sim, that I may have been 
heard, &c. 

3. The Pluperfect Indicative, with eram ; as lectus (a, urn) eram, 
I had been read ; audltus (a, urn) eram, I had been heard, &c. 

4. The Pluperfect Subjunctive, with essem; as amatus (a,um) essem, 
that I might have been loved ; monitus (a, um) essem, that I might 
have been admonished, &c. 

5. The Future Perfect, with ero ; as audltus (a, um) ero, I shall 
have been heard ; lectus (a um) ero, I shall have been read, &c. 

6. The Perfect Infinitive, with esse; as amatum (am, um) esse, to 
have been loved ; audltum (am, um) esse, to have been heard, &c. 

7. To these compound or periphrastic parts of the Passive Voice we 
must add the Future Infinitive, which is formed by combining the 
Supine in um with iri; as amatum iri, tectum iri, &c, to be about to 
be loved, read, &c. (See Paradigms, pp. 664, 665.) 

(Discindo, ere, idi, issum. 
To tear, lacerate. 4 Ldcero, are, avi, atum. 

I (aliquid). 

( Bibo, ere, bibi, bibitum. 
To drink. 4 Poto, are, avi, atum or potum. 

( (aliquid). 

( Fero, ferre, tiili, latum. 
To carry (take). ■< Porto, are, avi, atum. 

( (aliquid). 

C Affero, afferre, attuli, allatum. 
To bring (carry). J Apporto, are, avi, atum. 

( _ (alicui aliquid). 
To go. Eo, Ire, ivi or ii, Itum (neuter). 

F. Obs. The verbs fero, I bear, carry, and eo, I go, are 
irregular in several tenses. The present indicative is thus 
inflected : — 

Sing. I carry 

Thou earnest 

He carries, 
Plur. We carry 

Ye carry 

They carry. 

To be. 
To be at home. 
To go home. 

G. Obs. 1. The English " at home " is in Latin expressed by the 
genitive dorm, to which may be added meae, tuae, nostrae, vestrae, and 
alienae, in the sense of "at my, thy (your), our, your, another man's 
house or home" ; but when another adjective or pronoun follows, the 



fero 




Sing. I go 


eo 


fers 




Thou goest 


is 


fert, 




He goes, 


it, 


ferimus 


Plur. We go 


Imus 


fertis 




Ye go 


itis 


ferunt. 




They go. 


eunt. 




Sum, 


esse, fui, futurus. 






D&mi 


(gen.) esse. 






Domum (ace.) ire. 





LESSON 28.] CONSTRUCTION OF "DOMUS." 133 

ablative with in is required ; as in ilia domo, in that home ; in clomo pri- 
vately in a private house. When the genitive of the possessor is added, 
either domi or in domo may be used ; as domi or in domo alicujus, at 
some one's house or home ; domi or in domo Caesaris, at the house of 
Ctesar. 

2. The English "home" (after verbs of motion) is expressed by 
the accusative domum, and so also domum meant, tuam, nostram, ve- 
stram, alienam, " to my, thy (your), our, your, another man's house or 
home " ; but with any other adjective or pronoun the preposition in 
is required ; as in domum illam, to that house or home ; in domum 
novam, to the new house or home. When the genitive of the pos- 
sessor is added, it is either domum or in domum alicujus, to some one's 
house or home. 

Is your father at home ? !Estne pater tiius domi ? 

He is not at home. Non est (domi). 

Is his brother going home ? Itne frater ejus do'mum ? 

He is going home. It (domum). 

CApud (Prep, with the Ace). 
With or at the house of. < Cum (Prep, with the Abl.) . 

( Domi or in domo (with the Gen.). 

( Ad (Prep, with the Ace). 
To or to the house of. -< Domum or in domum (with the 

( Gen.). 

To be with the man or at the ( Apud virum or cum viro esse. 

man's house. ( Domi or in domo viri esse. 

To go to the man or to the man's j Ad virum ire. 

house. I Domum or in domum viri ire. 

To be with one's friend (at the ) A P ud amicum or cum ami ' co ( slio ) 

house of one's friend). U, . ' . ,, , . , 

J ( JJomi or in domo amici esse. 

To go to one's friend or to the ( Ad amicum (siium) ire. 



house of one's friend. \ Domum or in domum amici ire. 

Apud me, te, nos, vos esse. 



To be with me, thee (you), us, 
you, at my house, &c. 



Mecum, tecum, nobiscum,* vobis- 

cum esse. 
Domi meae, tiiae, ndstrae, vestrae 
esse. 
To be at one's own, at another Domi suae, alienae esse. 

man's house. 
To go to one's own, to another Domum siiam, alienam ire. 
man's house. 

fApud eum, eos, aliquem esse. 
To be with him, with them, with) Cum eo, lis, aliquo esse. 

some one. J Domi or in domo ejus, eorum, ali- 

[ cujus esse. 

* The preposition cum with me, te, se, always becomes mecum, tecum, secum ; 
with nobis, vobis, either nobiscum, vobxscum, or cum nobis, cum vobls. 
12 



134 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 28. 

m x T.- i. j.i Ad eum, eos, aliquem ire. 

lo o-o to him, to them, to some ] -r^ - i * 

■> Domum or in domum ejus, eorum, 



one. 

( alicujus ire. 

M , .,, , ( Apud neminem (nullum) esse. 

To be -with no one, at no ones ) f , L ^ n ; ,, , . i x ,' 

. ' -I turn nullo (nemine) esse. 

(_ Ddmi or in ddmo nullius esse. 

To go to no one, to no one's ( Ad nullum (neminem) ire. 

house. \ Domum or in domum nullius ire. 

To be with one's father, at one's X Apud piitrem (eum putre) esse. 

father's house. \ In ddmo paterna esse. 

To go to one's father, to one's j Ad patrem ire. 

father's house. [ In domum paternam ire. 

Is your little boy at any one's j Estne puerculus tiius apud aliquem 

hous.e ? 1 (in ddmo alicujus) ? 

He is at no one's house (with no ( Non est apud quenquam. 

one) ? (In ddmo nullius est. 

Do you wish to go to your Visne ad amicum ttium (domum or 

friend ? in domum amici tiii) ire ? 

I do not wish to go to him. Nolo ad eum (domum or in domum 

ejus) ire. 
At whose house ? With whom ? Ciijus in ddmo ? Apud quern ? 
To whose house ? To ichom ? Ciijus in domum ? Ad quern ? 

To whom (to whose house) do Ad quern (ciijus in domum) vis 

you wish to go ? ire '? 

I do not wish to go to any one Nolo ad quenquam (in domum cu- 

(to any one's house). jiisquam) ire. 

With whom (at whose house) is Apud quem (ciijus in ddmo) est 

your brother ? frater tiius ? 

He is with us (at our house). j g$5S&S2 est. 
Exercise 45. 

Do you wish to tear my coat ? — I do not wish to tear it. — Does 
your brother wish to tear my beautiful book ? — He does not wish to 
tear it. — What does he wish to tear ? — He wishes to tear your 
heart. — With whom is our father V — He is with his friend. — To 
whom do you wish to go ? — I wish to go to you. — Will you go to 
my house ? — I will not go to yours, but to my tailor's. — Does your 
father wish to go to his friend? — He wishes to go to him. — At 
whose house is your son ? — He is at our house. — Do your children 
wish to go to our friends ? — They wish to go to them. — Is the for- 
eigner at our brother's ? — He is there (apud eum). — At whose house 
is the Englishman? — He is at yours. — Is the American at our house ? 
— No, sir, he is not at our house ; he is at his friend's. — Is the Ital- 
ian at his friends' ? — He is at their house. 

Exercise 46. 

Do you wish to go home ? — I do not wish to go home ; I wish to 
go to the son of my neighbor. — Is your father at home ? — No, sir, 



J 



LESSON 28.] EXERCISES 46, 47. 135 

he is not at home. — With whom is he ? — He is with the good chil- 
dren of our old neighbor. — Will you go to any one's house ? — I 
will go to no one's house. — At whose house is your son ? — He is at 
no one's house ; he is at home. — What will he do at home ? — He 
will drink good wine. — Will you carry my letters home ? — I will 
carry them to my father's. — Who will carry my notes ? — The 
young man will carry them. — Will he carry them to my house ? — 
No ; he will carry them to his brother's. — Is his father at home ? — 
He is not at home ; he is at the foreigner's. — What have you to 
drink? — I have nothing to drink. — Has your son anything to drink ? 
— He has good wine and good water to drink. — Will your servant 
carry my books to my brothers' ? — He will carry them to their 
house. — What will you carry to my house ? — I will carry to your 
house two chickens, three birds, good bread, and good wine. — Will 
you carry these chairs to my house ? — I will not carry these, but 
those. — What will the German do at home ? — He will work and 
drink good wine. 

Exercise 47. 

What have you at home ? — I have nothing at home. — Have you 
anything good to drink at home ? — I have nothing good to drink ; I 
have only bad water. — Has the captain as much coffee as sugar at 
home ? — He has as much of the one as of the other at home. — Will 
you carry as many crowns as buttons to my brother's ? — I will carry 
to his house as many of the one as of the other. — Will you carry 
great glasses to my house ? — I will carry some to your house. — Has 
the merchant a desire to buy as many oxen as rams ? — He wishes to 
buy as many of the one as of the other. — Has the shoemaker as many 
shoes as boots to mend ? — He has as many of the one as of the other 
to mend. — Has he as much wine as water to drink V — He has as 
much to drink of the one as of the other. — Has the Turk a desire to 
break some glasses ? — He has a desire to break some. — Has he a 
mind to drink some wine ? — He has no mind to drink any. — Will 
you buy anything of me (de me) ? — I will buy nothing of you. — Of 
whom (de quo) * will you buy your corn ? — I will buy it of the great 
merchant. — Of whom will the English buy their oxen ? — They will 
buy them of the Dutch. — Will the Spaniards buy anything ? — They 
will buy nothing. 

* The person ofivhom any is bought is in Latin put in the Ablative with the 
preposition de ; so that the formula is : aliquid de aliquo emere, to buy any of 
any one. 



136 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 29. 

Lesson XXIX. — pensum undetricesimum. 

OF THE CLASSIFICATION OF VERBS. 

A. Latin verbs in general may be divided into Prim- 
itive and Derivative, and with reference to their compo- 
sition into Simple and Compound. 

Primitive verbs are those which are not derived from any other 
"word, but are themselves the roots for other parts of speech. 

Derivatives are formed either from nouns, adjectives, or other 
verbs. 

Simple verbs may be either primitive or derivative. 

Compound verbs are formed by the union of a verb with another 
verb or with some other part of speech. (See Lesson XXVI.) 

B. The verbs derived from other verbs are subdi- 
vided into a number of classes. These classes are : — 

1. Frequentatives, or such as denote -a reiteration or frequent 
repetition of the action expressed by the primitive ; as dictare 
(from died), to say often ; quaeritare (from quaero), to inquire 
repeatedly. 

These verbs are all of the first conjugation, and are generally 
formed from the supine of their primitives, by changing the atum of 
the first conjugation into ito, itdre, and the um of the remaining con- 
jugations into o, are ; as portdtum (the supine of porto, I carry) — 
portito, are, I carry often ; downturn (the supine of dormio, I sleep) — 
dowitto, are, I am apt to sleep constantly, I am sleepy. But others 
again are formed from the present indicative of their primitive, and 
some even from other frequentatives ; as agito, are (from ago, I drive), 
to drive up and down; latlto, are (from lateo, I am concealed), I hide 
myself; dictlto, are, I say or tell often ; lecttto, are, I read again and 
again (from the obsolete frequentatives dictare, lectare), &c. 

2. Desideratives, in urio, ur'ire, denoting a desire for that 
which is indicated by the primitive. These verbs are likewise 
derived from the supine of the primitive, and are always of the 
fourth conjugation ; as esum (the supine of edo, I eat) — esurw, 
ire, I desire to eat, I am hungry ; emptum (from emo, I buy) — 
empturio, ire, I desire to buy ; coenatum (from coeno, I dine) — 
coendturio, Ire, I desire to dine, &c. 

But a number of verbs in urio, urire (and urio, uriare) are no fre- 
quentatives and can readily be distinguished by the long u ; as ligu- 
rire, to be dainty ; prurire, to itch ; centurtdre, to divide into cen- 
turies ; decurldre, to divide into companies. 

3. Inchoatives or Inceptives in sco, scere, which serve to indi- 
cate the beginning of an action or state ; as languesco, ere, I 



LESSON 29.] CLASSIFICATION OF VERBS. 137 

-am growing languid (from languere, to be languid) ; ingemisco, 
ere, I begin to sigh (from gemere, to sigh). 

The final sco of these inchoatives is asco from primitives of the 
first conjugation, esco from those of the second, and isco from those of 
the third and fourth. 

Inchoatives frequently occur compounded with prepositions, while 
their primitives are simple verbs ; as pertimesco, I begin to dread, from 
timeo, I am afraid ; conticesco, I become silent, from taceo, I am silent ; 
obdormisco, I fall asleep, from dormio, I sleep. 

Some inchoatives are derived from substantives and adjectives ; as 
maturesco, I grow ripe, from maturus, a, um ; puerasco, I am becoming 
a boy, from puer, a boy, &c. 

A number of verbs in sco are no inchoatives, as cresco, I grow ; 
nosco, I learn to know ; posco, I demand. 

4. Diminutives, with the termination Mo, Mare, which is 
annexed to the root of the primitive without any other change ; 
as cantillo, I sing a little, I trill (from cantare, to sing) ; con- 
scribillo, I scribble (from scribere, to write) ; sorbillo, I sip (from 
sorbere, to sup, drink up). The verbs of this class are but few 
in number. 

5. Intensities in sso, ssere ; as capesso, facesso, petesso (from 
capio, facto, peto), I seize, perform, seek with earnestness or 
eagerness. 

C. Verbs derived from nouns are called Denominatives. 
E. g. luceo, I shine ; fraudo, I deceive, defraud; vulntro, I wound 
(from lux, fraus, vulnus), &c. 

A large number of Latin verbs derived from substantives signify to 
be or to imitate that which is indicated by the noun. The majority of 
these verbs are deponents of the .first conjugation; as dominus — 
domindri, to act the lord, to domineer ; comix — cornicdri, to chatter 
like a crow ; fur — furari, to be a thief, to steal ; Graeciilus — graecdri, 
to live like a Graeculus, to live luxuriously and effeminately; but 
also pater — pcdrisso, are, I take after my father; bubo — bubulo, are, 
to screech like an owl, &c. 

Where? UM? UWnam?* (Adverbs.) 

Whither ? Where to ? Quo f Quorsum ? Quorsus ? (Ad- 

verbs.) 

D. Obs. 1. The interrogative adverb ubif implies motion or rest 
in a place, and the noun of the answer generally stands either in the 
genitive or ablative,f but sometimes in the accusative with one of the 
prepositions ad, apud, super, or supter. 

* This nam is affixed with some emphasis. So also Ubi loci? Ubi gentium ? 
Ubi terramm f Where in the world ? 

t When this ablative is the name of a town of the third declension, it stands ivitli- 
out a preposition; as Carthac/ine, at Carthage; but otherwise it has in before it. 

12* 



138 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[lesson 29. 



Obs. 2. The interrogative adverb quo ? implies motion or direction 
towards a place, and the noun of the answer is always in the accusa- 
tive, either with or without a preposition. 



There. 
Thither (there). 

To carry thither. 
To carry it thither. 

To carry some thither. 

To carry them thither. 

Where is my son ? 
He is at home. 

Is his brother there too ? 

He is not there, but at the neigh- 
bor's. 

"Will you carry my books to the 
merchant ? 

I do not wish to carry them to 
him. 

To send. 



To come. 



To lead. 

When 1 At what time ? 

E. Rule. Time when 
out a preposition, as : — 

Mora duodecimo,. 
Hoc tempore. 
Die constitutd. 

To-morrow. 

To-day, this day. 

Somewhere, anywhere. 
Somewhither, any whither. 



Ibi, illic, ictic (rest). 
Ed, Hid, illuc (motion). 

Eo (illo, illuc) portare (ferre). 

(Eum, earn), id illo portare. 
fSiNG. Aliquantum eo (illo, illuc) 

portare (ferre). 
1 Plur. Aliquot eo (illo, illuc) por- 
[_ r tare (ferre). 

Eos (eas, ea) eo (illo, illuc) por- 
tare or ferre. 

"Cbi est filius meus ? 
j" Ddmi est. 
( Ddmi suae est. 

Estne ibi et * frater ejus ? 

Kon est ibi ; apud vicinum est. 

Yisne tu libros meos ad mercato- 

rem portare ? 
Kdlo eos ad ilium portare. 

Mitto, ere, misi, missum (alicui 

ALIQUID, ALIQUID AD ALI- 
QUEM). 

( Venio, ere, veni, ventum. 

■} Pervenio, ere, veni, ventum (neu- 

( ter). 

( Duco, ere, duxi, ductum. 

■} Deduco, ere, duxi, ductum. 

( (aliquem ad aliquem). 

Quando ? Quo tempore ? 

is put in the Ablative with- 



At twelve o'clock. 

At this time. 

On the appointed day. 

Cras (adv.), crastino tempore. 
( Hodle (adv.), hoc die, hodierno 
I tempore. 

Alicilbi, usqudm, usptam (rest). 
Aliquo, qudquam, quoptdm (motion). 



* The conjunction et has sometimes the sense of also, too. 



LESSON 29.] ALICUBI. NUSQUAM. NUSPIAM. 



139 



F. Obs. The adverb alicubi is compounded of cdtquis and ubi, and 
is synonymous with in aliquo loco, " in some place," or " somewhere," 
" anywhere," generally. Uspiam may commonly stand in the same 
sense, but usquam can only be employed in clauses involving a con- 
dition or negation, as after the conjunctions si, nisi, neque (nee), non, 
nunquam, &c. The same distinctions apply to the corresponding 
adverbs of motion, aliquo, quopiam, and quoquam. 

Nowhere, not anywhere. Nusquam, nuspiam (rest). 

Nowhither, not anywhither. Nusquam (motion). 

Cupisne ire aliquo (quopiam) ? 



Do you desire to go anywhere 

(anywhither) ? 
I do desire to go somewhere 

(somewhither) . 
I desire to go to the house of my 

father. 
I do not desire to go anywhere. 
Nor do I desire to go anywhere. 
If he desires to go anywhere. 
Is your brother anywhere ? 

He is somewhere. 

He is at the house of his father. 

He is nowhere. 

Nor is his friend anywhere. 

Unless your friend is anywhere. 

Will you conduct me to your 

tailor ? 
I will conduct you to him. 



Ciipio ire aliquo. 

In ddmum paternam ire ciipio. 

Nusquam ire ciipio. 
Neque ego quoquam ire ciipio. 
Si ille quoquam ire ciipit. 
Estne frater tiius alicubi (uspi- 
am) ? 
Est alicubi (in aliquo loco). 
In ddino paterna est. 
Nusquam (niispiam) est. 
Neque amicus ejus usquam est. 
Nisi amicus tiius usquam est. 
Yisne me ad sartorem tiium dii- 



e'um diicere (dedii- 



Vdlo te ad 

cere) . 
Quando (quo tempore) me vis ad 

eum diicere ? 
I will lead you to him to-morrow. Ego te eras (crastino tempore) ad 

eum diicere vdlo. 
Quis viilt mihi mittere libros bd- 

nos ? 
Nemo tibi lillos mittere vult. 



When will you lead me to him ? 



Who will send me good books ? 



No one will send you any 

The physician. 
To write. 



Medicus, i, m. 

Scribo, ere, psi, ptum (aliquid 
alicui or ad aliquem). 

f Scribendaene tibi sunt tarn miiltae 
to J litterae quam patri meo ? 

1 Habesne tot litteras scribendas, 
[^ qudt pater meus ? 
f Scribendae sunt mihi plus (pliires) 
I have more (of them) to write J quam ei. 

than he. j Scribendas ego pliires habeo quam 

(^ ille (ipse). 



Have you as many letters 
write as my father ? 



140 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 29. 

Exercise 48. 

"WUl you go anywhither (anywhere) ? — I will go nowhither (no- 
where). — Will your good son go to anyone? — He will go to no 
one . — When will you take your young man to the painter ? — I 
w ill take him there {ad mm) to-day. — Where will he carry these 
birds to ? — He will carry them nowhither. — Will you take the 
physician to this man ? — I will take him there (ad mm, to him). — 
When will you take him there ? — I will take him there to-day. — 
Will the physicians come to your good brother ? — They will not 
come to him. — Will you send me a servant ? — I will send you none. 

— Will you send a child to the physician ? — I will send one to him. 

— With whom is the physician ? — He is with nobody. — Do you 
wish to go anywhither ? — I wish to go to the good Americans. — 
Has he time to come to my house ? — He has no time to come there. 

— Will the captain write one more letter ? — He will write one more. 

— Will you write a note ? — I will write one. — Has your friend a 
mind to write as many letters as I ? — He has a mind to write quite 
as many. 

Exercise 49. 

Where is your brother ? — He is at home. — Whither do you wish 
t go ? — I wish to go home. — AVhither does your father wish to 
go ? — He wishes to go to your house. — AVhither will you carry this 
letter ? — I will carry it to my neighbor's. — Is your son at home ? 

— He is there. — Whither will the shoemaker carry my boots? — 
He will carry them to your house ? — Will he carry them home ? — 
He will carry them thither. — Will you send good sugar home ? — I 
will send some thither. — Will the baker send good bread home ? — 
He will send some thither. — Will you come to me ? — I will come to 
you. — Whither do you wish to go ? — I wish to go to the good French- 
men. — Will the good Italians go to our house ? — They will go no- 
whither. — Will you take your son to my house ? — I will not take 
him to your house, but to the captain's. — When will you take him to 
the captain's ? — I will take him there to-morrow. — Have you many 
letters to write ? — I have only a few to write. — How many letters 
has our old neighbor to write ? — He has as many to write as you. — 
Who has long letters to write ? — The youth has some to write. — 
How many more letters has he to write ? — He has six more to write. 

— How many has he to send ? — He has twenty to send. — Has he 
as many letters to send as his father ? — He has fewer to send. — Has 
the hatmaker some more hats to send ? — He has no more to send. — 
Has your son the courage (audetne films tuns') to write a long letter ? 

— He has the courage to write one. — Will he write as many letters 
as mine ? — He will write quite as many. — Will you buy as many 
carriages as horses? — I will buy more of the latter than of the 
former. 



WESSON 30.] PRESENT SUBJUNCTIVE. 141 

Lesson XXX. — PENSUM TRICESIMUM. 

OF THE PRESENT SUBJUNCTIVE. 

A. The Present Subjunctive is formed from the 
Present Indicative by changing the terminations of the 
respective conjugations into, 1. em, 2. cam, 3. am (ia?n), 
4. mm; as, amo, amem ; moneo, moneam; lego, legam 
(f 'acio, faciam) ; audio, audiam* It is inflected as" fol- 
lows : — 

First Conjugation. 

Singular. Plural. 

That I may love amem That we may love amemiis 

That thou mayst love ames That ye may love ametis 

Tliat he may love, ainet, That they may love, ament. 
Second Conjugation. 

Singular. Plural. 

That I may remind moneam TJmt ive may remind moneamus 

ThatthoitmaystremindmonGks That ye may remind moneatis 

That he may remind, moneat, That they may remind, moneant. 

Third Conjugation. 

Singular. Plural. 

TJiat I may read legam That we may read legamus 
That thou mayst read legas That ye may read legatis 

TTtat he may read, legat, That they may read, legant. 

Fourth Conjugation. 
Singular. Plural. 

That I may hear audiam That we may hear audiamus 
That thou mayst hear audias That ye may hear audiatis 
TJiat he may hear, audiat, That they may hear, audiant. 

Like amem inflect : ordinem, clem, portem, laborem, lave?n, &c. 
Like moneam: Jiabeam, videam, foveam, &c. Like legam: dicam, di- 
sponam, scrlbam, faciam,\ &c. Like audiam: aperiam, esurXam, sitXam, 
remain, &c. 

Remark. — The present subjunctive of the first and third con- 
jugations sometimes has im instead of em or am ; as edirn, commedim ; 
duim, perduim ; % for edam, commedam ; clem, per dam. But this anti- 

* See Lesson XXVIII. B. 2. 

t Verbs of the third conjugation in ?o have their present subjunctive in tarn. 
Thus, also, capio, capiam, calefacio, calefaciam, &c. 
X From the obsolete forms duo,perdno (= do, perdo). 



142 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 30. 

quated form occurs only in a few verbs. It is retained in the irregu- 
lar verbs esse and velle, and their compounds ; as velim, nolim, malim : 
sim, possim, prosim, &c. 

B. The Present Subjunctive of the irregular verbs sum, volo, 
nolo, eo, an&fero (affero) is thus inflected: — 



Singular. 




Plural. 




That I may be 


sim 


TJiat we may be 


simus 


That thou mayst he 


sis 


That ye may be 


sitis 


That he may be, 


sit,* 


That they may be. 


sint. 



That I may be willing velim That we maybe willing vellmus 
That thou mayst be willing veils That ye may be willing velitis 
That he may be willing, velit, Tiiat they may be willing, velint. 

That I may go earn That we may go eamus 

That thou mayst go eas That ye may go earls 

That he may go, eat, That they may go. eant. 

That I may carry feram That we may carry feramus 

That thou mayst carry feras That ye may carry feratis 
That he may carry, ferat, That they may carry, ferant, 

Remark. — The compounds of these verbs are all of them inflected 
in the same way ; as desim, possim, prosim, from desum, possum, pro- 
sum ; mailing nolim, from malo, nolo : abeam, prodeam, transeam, from 
abeo, prodeo, transeo ; afferam, differ am, circumferam, from affero, 
diffe.ro, circumfero, &c. 

OF THE USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 

C. Obs. The Subjunctive serves to denote various 
modifications of the action or state expressed by the 
verb, and is often put in Latin where the English idiom 
requires the Indicative or Infinitive. It is chiefly em- 
ployed : — 

1st. After certain conjunctions, such as tit and quo, that, in 
order that ; ne, that not, lest ; licet and quamvis, although ; uti- 
nam, would that; quin and quommus, but that, &c. E. g. : — 

Ve'nia ut videam. I come to see (in order that I may 

see). 

* Instead of sim, sis. sit, the older Latin writers employ the forms stem, sies, 

siet; and also from the obsolete fuo, the forms fuam, funs, filed; , , 

fuant. 

t An ancient form of this is mavelim, is, it, &c. So the Imp. Subj. mnrellem 
for mcdlem; the Pres. Ind. mavulo for malo; the Future Indie, mavulam for 
malum, &c. 



LESSON 30.] USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 143 

Cave ne scribas. Take care lest you write. 

Utinam haberem. Would that I had. 

2d. In indirect or dependent questions, introduced by an in- 
terrogative adjective, pronoun, or adverb, such as quantus, 
qualis, quotus ; quis, qui, cujas ; ubi, quo, quorsum, quando, 
quoties, quomodo ; an, ne, &c. E. g. : — 

Ne'scio quantum habeas. I do not know how much you have. 

Die mild quis (quails) sit. Tell me ivho he is. 

Sclsne quando veniat ? Do you know when he comes ? 

Vide an venturus sit.* See whether he is about to come. 

3d. To denote possibility in general, and also an exhortation 
or command ; as 

Forsitan temere fecerim. I may possibly have acted rashly. 

JEmas quod necesse est. Buy what is necessary. 

Edmus. Scribdmus. Let us go. Let us write. 

f Venio ut videam. 
I come in order to see (for the I Venio ad videndum. 
sake of seeing, to see, about to \ Venio videndi causa, 
see). | Venio videre or visum. 

{_ Venio visurus. 

D. Obs. The compound conjunction in order to, in order that, is 
commonly expressed in Latin either by ut with the subjunctive, or 
(after verbs of motion) by the supine in urn ; but it may frequently be 
likewise rendered by the accusative of the gerund or gerundive with 
ad, by the genitive of the gerund with the ablative causa or gratia, 
" for the sake of," by a mere infinitive, or, lastly, by the future par- 
ticiple in urus. 

-r, • , , , i ,i C Visne ad fratrem tiium ire, ut eum 

Do vou wish to go to vour broth- \ , ,~_ ' 

J . , , & A •< videas i 

er in order to see mm t ) A7 . * s r *. , , 

( Visne ire visum fratrem tuum i 

I desire to go to him in order to ( Ciipio ad eum ire, ut eum videam. 

see him (for the sake of seeing \ Ego eum visum ire ciipio. 

him). ( Ciipio ad eum ire videndi gratia. 

f Estne fratri tiio ciilter ad secandum 

Has your brother a knife to cut j panem suum ? 

his bread ? j Habetne frater tiius ciiltrum, quif 

[^ r panem siium secet ? 

He has one to cut it (wherewith ( Est ei iinus ad eum secandum. 

to cut it) . ( Habet unum, qui eum secare pdssit. 

* The direct questions involved in these examples are: — Quantum habesf — 
Qids {qualis) est? — Quando (quo tempore) vend? — Venturusne est? 

t This qui is an old ablative, and may stand for every gender of that case 
singular and plural (i. e. for quo, qua, quibus). When thus used it represents 
the instrument or means, exactly like the English "wherewith," "whereby." 
Thus Nepos : — ut, qui efferretur, vix reliquerit, so that he left scarcely enough, 
wherewith he might be buried. 



144 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 30. 



non 



pa- 



f Peciiniam, qui panem emam, 
I have no money to buy bread j habeo. 

(wherewith I may buy bread). } Careo peciinia ad einendum 

(_ nem. 
Have you paper enough to write Estne tibi satis chartae ad litteram 

a letter (for writing a letter). scribendam ? 

I have not enough. Non est (mihi satis) . 

C Everro, ere, erri, ersum. 
«j Scopis purgo, are, avi, atum. 
( (aliquid, locum aliquem). 
( Occido, ere, idi, Isum. 
■< Interficio, ere, feci, factum. 
( (aliquem). 
Macto, are, avi, atum (aliquem, 

ANIMAL ALIQUOD). 

Sallo, ire, ivi or li, itum (aliquid). 
( Commodo, are, avi, atum. 
•< Credo, ere, crediti, creditum. 
( (alicui aliquid). 

5 Possum, posse, potui. 
Scio, ire, ivi or ii, itum. 
(aliquid facere). 



To sweep (out). 

To kill, slay. 
To slaughter. 
To salt. 
To lend. 

To be able. 

To know how (to be able). 



E. Obs. Possum signifies " to have the power or ability," scio, " to 
have the knowledge or skill," " to know how." Both these verbs may 
be followed by the infinitive of another verb. Possum is a compound 
ofjiotis and sum, and is inflected in the present as follows : — 

Indicative. 

Plural, 
possum We can (are able) 
potes Ye can {are able) 
potest, They can (are able). 

Subjunctive. 

Plural, 
possim That we may be able 
possis That ye may be able 
possit, That they may be able. 

( Potesne scribere epistolam ? 
| Scisne scribere epistolam ? 

Possum (scio) unam scribere. 

Niim ille laborare (opus facere) 
potest ? 

Laborare (opus facere) non potest. 

Possuntne venire ad nos ? 

Ad vos venire non pdssunt. 



Singular. 
I can (am able) 
Thou canst (art able) 
He can (is able), 

Singular. 
That I may be able 
That thou mayst be able 
That he may be able, 

Can you write a letter ? 

I can write one. 
Can he work ? 



possumus 

potestis 

possunt. 



possimus 

possitis 

possint.* 



He cannot work. 
Can they come to us ? 
They cannot come to you 



* Antiquated forms of this are possiem, es, et, Sec, or potessim, is, it, &c. 
also potestur forjiotest, an&potesse for posse. 



So 



LESSON 30.] 



PHRASES AND EXERCISES. 



145 



To kill me. 
To see me. 



Me accldere (interficere). 
Me videre. 



F. Obs. In Latin the accusative generally takes its place before 
the verb on which it depends, and the dative before the accusative.* 
The verb itself is commonly put at the end of the sentence. 

To speak to me (with me). Mecum loqui, ad me IdquL 



To speak to you (with you). 

To speak to him (with him). 

To speak to us (with us). 

To speak to you (Avith you). 

To speak to them (with them). 

To send to him. 

To send to his house. 

To send it to me. 

To send him (them, &c.) to me, 

to my house. 
To send it to me to-morrow. 

To send him (them) to me (i.e. 

to my house) to-morrow 
When will you send me the hat ? 

I will send it to you to day. 
Will you lend me some money ? 

I will lend you a little. 

Do you desire to see my brother, 

in order to speak to him ? 
I do desire to see him, in order 

to speak to him ? 
Has he a broom to sweep my 

house ? 
He has none. 

Have you anything to write, to eat, 
to say? 

I have something to write, to eat, 

to say. 
I have nothing to write, to eat, 

to say. 
Has he any money to give me ? 



Tecum f ldqui, ad te ldqui. 
Cum eo ldqui, ad eum ldqui. 
Nobiscum ldqui, ad nos ldqui. 
Vobiscum ldqui, ad v6s ldqui. 
Cum lllis ldqui, ad lllos ldqui. 
Ei mittere. 

Ad eum (in ddmum ejus) mittere. 
Eum (earn, id) mi'hi mittere. 
Eum (eos) ad me (ddmum meam) 

mittere. 
Eum (earn, id) mihi crastino tem- 

pdre mittere. 
Eum (eos) ad me (ddmum meam) 

eras mittere. 
Quando vis mihi pileum mittere ? 

(Cf Lesson XXIV. G.) 
Ego tibi eum mittere vdlo hddie. 
Visne mihi credere aliquantum pe- 
cuniae ? 
Vdlo tibi aliquantulum credere. 
Cupisne fratrem meum videre, ut 

cum eo (ad eum) ldquaris V 
Ciipio eum videre, ut cum eo (ad 

eum) ldquar.J 
Habetne sedpas ad ddmum meam 

everrendam ? 
Non habet. 

Habesne quod scrlbas, quod edas, 
quod dicas ? 

Habeo quod scribam, edam, dicam. 

Non habeo quod scribam, edam, 

dicam. 
Habetne quid mihi det pecuniae ? 



* Unless the accusative be a personal pronoun, which frequently precedes 
the dative. 

t Compare Lesson XXVIII. p. 133, note. 

| The present subjunctive of the deponent loquor is: — Sing, loquar, loqua- 
ris or loquare, loquatur ; Pluk. loquamur, loquamini, loquantur. Compare 
Lesson XXXV. 

J 13 



146 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 30. 

He has no money to give you. Non habet quid tibi det pecuniae. 
Do you lend us books to read ? Cominodatisne nobis libros legen- 

dos '? 
"We lend you books and letters Vdbis et libros legendos et litteras 
to read. commodamus. (Vide Lesson 

xxn. B. 5.) 

Exercise 50. 

Can you cut me some bread ? — I can cut you some. — Have you 
a knife to cut me some ? — I have one. — Can you wash your gloves ? 
I can wash them, but have no wish to do it. — Can the tailor make 
me a coat ? — He can make you one. — Will you speak to the phy- 
sician ? — I will speak to him. — Does your son wish to see me in 
order to speak to me (ut mecum or ad me hquatur) ? — He wishes to 
see you, in order to give you (ut tibi det) a crown. — Does he wish to 
kill me ? — He does not wish to kill you ; he only wishes to see you. 

— Does the son of our old friend wish to kill an ox ? — He wishes to 
kill two. — How much money can you send me ? — I can send you 
thirty crowns. — Will you send me my letter? — I will send it to 
you. — Will you send the shoemaker anything? — I will send him 
my boots. — Will you send him your coats ? — No, I will send them 
to my tailor. — Can the tailor send me my coat ? — He cannot send 
it to you. — Are your children able to write letters ? — They are able 
to write some. 

Exercise 51. 

Have you a glass to drink your wine ? — I have one, but I have no 
wine ; I have only water. — Will you give me money to buy some ? 

— I will give you some, but I have only a little. — Will you give me 
that which (quod) you have V — I will give it to you. — Can you drink 
as much wine as water ? — I can drink as much of the one as of the 
other. — Has our poor neighbor any wood to make a fire (ad ignem 
accendenduni) ? — He has some to make one, but he has no money to 
buy bread and meat. — Are you willing to lend him some ? — I am 
willing to lend him some. — Do you wish to speak to the German ? — 
I wish to speak to him. — Where is he ? — He is with the son of the 
captain. — Does the German wish to speak to me ? — He wishes to 

speak to you. — Does he wish to speak to my brother or to yours ? 

He wishes to speak to both. — Can the children of our tailor work ? — 
They can work, but they will not. 

Exercise 52. 

Has the carpenter money to buy a hammer ? — He has some to buy 
one. — Has the captain money to buy a ship ? — He has some to buy 
one. — Has the peasant money to buy sheep ? — He has none to buy 
any. — Have you time to see my father ? — I have no time to see 
him. — Does your father wish to see me ? — He does not wish to see 
you. — Has the servant a broom to sweep the house ? — He has one 
to sweep it. — Is he willing to sweep it ? — He is willing to sweep it. 



^LESSON 31.] CONSTRUCTION OF SENTENCES. 147 

— Have I salt enough to salt my meat? — You have not enough of it to 
salt it. — Will your friend come to my house in order to see me ? — 
He will neither come to your house nor see you. — Has our neighbor 
a desire to kill his horse ? — He has no desire to kill it. — Will you 
kill your friends V — I will kill only my enemies. — Do you wish to 
speak to the children of your shoemaker? — I wish to speak to them. 
What will you give them ? — I will give them large cakes. — Will 
you lend them anything ? — I have nothing to lend them (quod its 
commodem). — Has the cook some more salt to salt the meat? — He 
has a little, more. — Has he some more rice ? — He has a great deal 
more. — Will he give me some ? — He will give you some. — Will 
he give some to my poor children (liberis meis egenis) ? — He will 
give them some. — Will he kill this or that hen ? — He will kill 
neither (neutram). — Will he kill this or that ox? — He will kill both. 

— Who will send us biscuits? — The baker will send you some. — 
Have you anything good to give me ? — I have nothing good to give 
you. 



Lesson XXXI. — pensum unum et trice- 

SIMUM. 

OF THE CONSTRUCTION OF SENTENCES. 

A. A sentence is a thought or concept of the mind 
expressed in words. As 

Piter legit, the boy reads. Arbor floret, the tree blossoms. Deus 
est (erat, erit) Justus, God is (was, will be) just. 

Every sentence is composed of at least one subject and one 
predicate. 

The subject of a sentence is the person or object of which 
anything is affirmed ; as puer, arbor, Deus. 

The predicate is that which is affirmed of the person or thing 
called the subject ; as legit, floret, est (erat, erit) Justus. 

The subject is always a substantive, or some other word used 
substantively, and generally stands in the nominative. 

Remark. — But the subject of a verb in the infinitive mood is put 
in the accusative. 

The predicate is either a finite verb* or else a noun, adjec- 
tive, participle, or adverb, with one of the tenses of the copula 
sum ; e. g. est, erat, erit, &c. 



* The term finite verb (verbum finilnm) includes all the verbal forms of 
every mood, except the infinitive {verbum infinitum). 



148 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 31. 

B. The subject nominative may be variously modified or 
expanded by the addition of other words, which are said to 
stand in the attributive relation to it. This may be done, — 

1. By another noun, either in the same case or one of the oblique 
cases ; as, Deus, rex coelorum, Justus est, God, the king of heaven, is 
just ; amid nostri puer legit, the boy of our friend is reading. 

2. By an adjective, adjective pronoun, participle, or relative clause ; 
as, puer noster studiosus legit, our studious boy is reading ; arbor, quam 
Tieri in liorto vidisti, liodXe floret, the tree which you saw yesterday in 
the garden blossoms to-day. 

C. In a similar manner, the predicate may be modified or 
expanded by the addition of other words, which are said to 
stand in the objective relation to it. These words may be, — 

1. A noun in one of the oblique cases, or an adverb ; as, puer librum. 
suum bonum legit, the boy reads his good book ; arbor in liorto nostro 
floret, the tree blossoms in our garden; Deus semper erit Justus, God 
will always be just. 

2. An infinitive or another finite verb introduced by a relative, or 
a conjunction expressed or understood ; as, cupw abire, I desire to 
leave; (ille) idoneus non est, qui impetret, he is not fit to obtain ; care 
(ne) cadas, take care lest you fall. 

3. By a noun or adjective in the same case with the subject ; as, 
Pompejus imperator est appelldtus, Pompey was called commander ; 
(tu) videris vir bonus esse, you seem to be a good man ; incedo reglna, 
I walk a queen. 

Remark. — This construction takes place after certain neuter and 
passive verbs of naming, becoming, remaining, appearing, &c. (Cf. 
Lesson XXXIV. C.) ~ 

_D. The subject and predicate both are either simjrte 
or compound. 

A simple subject consists of one substantive or word used substan- 
tively, either alone or modified by attributes ; as Deus, arbor, puer 
noster studiosus. 

A compound subject consists of two or more simple subjects, gen- 
erally connected by a conjunction, and belonging to one common 
predicate ; as, puer et puella legunt, the boy and girl are reading ; ego 
et tu diligentes sumus, I and you are diligent. 

A simple predicate consists of one finite verb, either alone or ex- 
panded into the objective relation ; as, legit, floret, librum suum bonum 
legit, semper erit Justus. 

A compound predicate consists of two or more simple predicates 
depending on one common subject; as, Deus est,fuit, erit, God is, was, 
will be; Id et nobis erit per jucund urn, et tibi non sane devutm, This 
will be extremely pleasant for us, and surely not out of jour way. 



LESSON 31.] CONSTRUCTION OF SENTENCES. 149 

E. Sentences, like subject and predicate, are also 
either simple or compound. 

A simple sentence is one which contains a simple predicate, 
or one finite verb only. 

Remark. — There can be no sentence without a finite verb ex- 
pressed or understood, and there are as many sentences as there are 
finite verbs. 

A compound sentence contains two or more simple sentences, 
which are commonly called its members or clauses. 

The members of a compound sentence are either all coordinated as 
independent, or else one of them assumes the rank of a leading clause, 
to which the rest are subordinated as dependent. 

Independent clauses are such as make complete sense apart from 
their connection with each other ; as, Ego reges eject, vos tyrannos in- 
troducitis ; ego libertatem peperi, vos partam servdre non vultis, I have 
expelled the kings, you are introducing tyrants ; I have procured 
liberty, you are unwilling to preserve it, 

A subordinate clause can make complete sense only in connection 
with the main or leading clause, on which it is dependent ; as, Vita 
brevis est, licet supra mille annos exeat, Life is short, and were it to ex- 
ceed a thousand years ; Hoc ideo exposui, ut selves, I have explained 
this, in order that you might know it. 

Remark 1. — In these sentences the clauses commencing with licet 
and ut are subordinate and dependent on the leading clauses, by 
which they are preceded. 

Remark 2. — The members of a compound sentence are commonly 
linked together by conjunctions, relatives, or adverbs. 

F. Words are said to agree with each other when 
they correspond in gender, number, case, or person, and 
this relation is called Concord or Agreement. 

Agreement may take place under the following circum- 
stances : — 

1. Between one substantive and another; as, Cicero orator, Cicero 
the orator ; Augustus imperator, Augustus the Emperor. 

2. Between an adjective or participle and a noun ; as, vir Justus et 
sapiens, a good and wise man ; viri optrmi, most excellent men. 

3. Between a relative and its antecedent ; as, puer, qui legit, the boy 
who reads ; puella, quae currit, the girl who runs. 

4. Between a finite verb and its subject nominative ; as, ego lego, hi 
amas, nos sumus, homines dlcunt. 

G. One word is said to govern another, when it re- 
quires it to be put in a determinate case or mood, and 
this relation is called Government. 

13* 



150 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 31. 



A word subject to another, according to the laws of concord 
or government, is said to depend upon or follow it. 

All the oblique cases of Latin nouns, except the vocative, are 
commonly determined by some other word. 

1. The genitive is governed by nouns, adjectives, verbs, participles, 
and adverbs. 

2. The dative is governed by adjectives, verbs, participles, and 
adverbs. 

3. The accusative is governed by active transitive verbs or parti- 
ciples, and by prepositions. 

4. The ablative is governed by adjectives, verbs, participles, and 
prepositions. 

To iclwm ? Cut ? Cutnam * ? Ad quern ? 

Whom? Quern? Quemncim? 

What ? Quid ? Quidnam ? 

'Respondeo, ere, di, sum (alicui 
aliquid ; epistolae ov ad 
epistolam). 
Rescribo, ere, ipsi, iptum (alicui 

Or AD ALIQUEM ; LITTERIS OT 
AD LITTERAS). 

m t , ( Alicui respondere. f 

To answer or replv to some one. -Wi- - t ^ /i~ 

r J I Alicui or ad ahquem rescribere. 

5Epistolae or ad epistolam respon- 
dere. 
Litteris or ad litteras rescribere. 



To answer, reply. 



To answer a letter. 



Do you wish to answer me ? 
I do not wish to answer you. 
To whom do you wish to reply ? 

I wish to reply to my good friend. 



( Niim vis mihi respondere ? 

\ Niim vis mihi (ad me) rescribere ? 



Nolo tibi respondere. 
Nolo tibi (ad te) rescribere. 
Cui vis respondere ? 
Ad quern (cui) vis rescribere ? 
Amico meo bono respondere vdlo. 
Ego ad amicum meum bdnum re- 
scribere vdlo. 
What do you desire to answer ( Quid cupis ei respondere (rescri- 

him ? ( bere) ? 

I desire to answer him only (in) Ei non nisi pauca rescribere cii- 

a few words. pio. 

To whom must we reply ? Ad quern (cui) est nobis rescri- 

bendum ? 
We must reply to the English- Rescribendum est nobis Anglo (ad 
man. Anglum). 



* Compare Lesson XII. A. 1-6. 

f The verb respondere is properly "to answer or reply orally," and is some- 
times opposed to rescribere, which signifies " to write back or to answer in 
writing." But this distinction is not always observed, and respondere is often 
used in the sense of rescribere. 



LESSON 31.] CONSTRUCTION OF " IN " AND " SUB.' 



151 



What have I to do ? 
You have to reply to the letter 
of the Frenchmen. 

The place (in general). 

The garden. 

The theatre. 

The forest, wood. 

The grove. 

The warehouse. 

The storehouse. 

The magazine. 

The store, provisions. 

The supply, abundance. 
The room. 

The chamber (sleeping- 
room). 
The butcher. 



Quid est mini faciendum ? 
Rescrlbendum est tibi litteris (ud 
litteras) Francogallorum. 

Locus, m. pi, loci or loca. 

Hortus,* i, m. ; hortulus, i, m. dim. 

Theatrum, i, n. 

Silva, ae,/! 

Lucus,f i, m.; nemus, oris, n. 

Receptaculum (i, n.) mercium.f 

Cella penaria, ae,f 

Horreum, i, n. 

Penus, us or i, m. ; commeatus, us, 

m. (of an army). 
Copia, ae,/! 

Conclave, is, n. ; diaeta, ae, f 
Cubiciilum, i, n. 



To go into (an enclosed place). 

In, into (preposition). 
Under (preposition). 



juanius, 1, m. 

f Ineo, Ire, li (ivi), itum. 
j Introeo, ire, ivi (li), itum.§ 

J (LOCUM Or IN LOCUM, AD ALI- 
L QUEM) . 

In (with the ace. and abl.). 
Sub (with the ace. and abl.). 

H. Obs. The prepositions in and sub, denoting a tendency 
or motion towards a place, are followed by the accusative, but 
when they denote rest or situation in a place, they are followed 
by the ablative. 

( In conclave inire (introire) . 
( Conclave inire (introire). || 
In conclavi esse. 



To go into the room. 

To be in the room. 

To go into the garden. 

To be in the garden. 

To go in (i. e. into the house) . 

To be within (i. e. in the house). 

To go under the table. 

To be under the table. 



( In hdrtos inire (introire). 
\ Hortos inire (introire). 

In hdrtis esse. 

1 ntro (adv.) ire. 

Intus (adv.) esse. 

Sub mensarn ire. 

Sub mensa esse. 



* The singular has commonly the sense of a " vegetable garden," and the 
plural horti or the dim. hortulus, "a garden for pleasure." (Cf. Lesson 
XVIII. D.) 

t Liicus is a sacred grove ; nemus a woody landscape laid out for pleasure. 

X The genitive pi. of merx, merchandise. 

§ The verbs are compounds of eo (= in +• eo, intro + eo), and are inflected 
like the simple verb. _ (Cf. Lesson XXVIII. F.) 

|| The compounds inire and introire have frequently the force of transitive 
verbs, and then the preposition in before the object accusative is omitted. 



152 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[lesson 31. 



To go out (i. e. out of the house). 

To be out (i. e. out of the house). 

To go out. 

Where is our son ? 

He is in his room. 

Where is the Englishman going 

to? 
He is going into the forest. 
Do you wish to go into the 

theatre ? 
I do not wish to go there 

(thither). 
Is your father in (in the house) ? 
He is not in ; he is out. 
Does the stranger desire to go in 

(into the house) ? 
No, he desires to go out. 



Where is my dog ? 
He is under the table. 



Fdras (culc.) ire. 
Exire ddmo («&/.). 
Fdris (rtf/y.) esse. 
Exeo, ire, il (ivi), itum. 
TJbi est ndster films ? 
(Est) in cubiciilo siio. 
Quo (qudrsum) it Anglus '? 

(fnit) in silvam. 

Num vis (in) theatrum inire ? 

Nolo eo inire. 

Estne pater tuus intus ? 
Ndn est intus ; fdris est. 
Cupitne advena ire intrd ? 

tmmo vero fdras ire (ddmo exire) 

ciipit. 
TJbi est canis mens ? 
Sub mensa (est). 



Exercise 53. 



Will you answer your friend ? — I will answer him. — But whom 
will you answer ? — I will answer my good father. — Will you not 
answer your good friends ? — I will answer them. — Who will answer 
me ? — The Russian wishes to answer you, but he cannot. — Will the 
Russian write me a letter ? — He will write you one. — Can the 
Spaniards answer us ? — They cannot answer us, but we can answer 
them. — What has the Englishman to do ? — He has to answer a let- 
ter. — Which letter has he to answer ? — He has to answer that of 
the good Frenchman. — Have I to answer a letter ? — You have not 
to answer a letter, but a note. — Which note have I to answer ? — 
You have to answer that of the great captain. — Have we to answer 
the letters of the merchants ? — We have to answer them. — Will 
you answer the note of your tailor ? — I will answer it. — Will any 
one answer my great letter ? — No one will answer it. — Will your 
father answer this or that note ? — He will answer neither this nor 
that. — Which notes will he answer ? — He will answer only those of 
his good friends. — Will he answer me my letter V — He will answer 
it you. — Will your father go any whither ? — He will go nowhither. 
— Where is your brother ? — He is in the garden of our friend. — 
Where is the Englishman ? — He is in his little garden. — Where do 
we wish to go to ? — We wish to go into the garden of the French. — 
Where is your son ? — He is in his room. — Will he go to the maga- 
zine ? — He will go thither. — Will you go to the great theatre ? — I 
will not go thither, but my son has a mind to go thither. — Where is 
the Irishman ? — He is in the theatre. — Is the American in the for- 
est ? — He is there. 



J 1 

LESSON 32. J AGREEMENT OF VERBS. 153 

Exercise 54. 

Will you come to me in order to go to the forest ? — I have no wish 
to go the forest. — To which theatre do you wish to go ? — I wish to 
go to the great theatre. — Will you go into my garden, or into that of 
the Dutchman ? — I will go neither into yours nor into that of the 
Dutchman ; I will go into the gardens of the French. — Will you go 
into those of the Germans ? — I will not go thither. — Have the 
Americans great warehouses ? — They have some. — Have the En g- 
lish great stores ? — They have some. — Have the Germans as many 
warehouses as stores ? — They have as many of the latter as of the 
former. — Will you see our great stores ? — I will go into your ware- 
houses in order to see them. — Have you much hay in your store- 
houses ? — W r e have a great deal, but we have not enough corn. — 
Do you wish to buy some ? — We wish to buy some. — Have we as 
much corn as wine in our storehouses ? — We have as much of the 
one as of the other. — Have the English as much cloth as paper in 
their warehouses ? — They have more of the one than of the other in 
them. — Has your father time to write me a letter ? — He wishes to 
write you one, but he has no time to-day. — When will he answer 
that of my brother ? — He will answer it to-morrow. — Will you come 
to my house in order to see my great warehouses. — I cannot come to 
your house to-day ; I have letters to write. — Where is the knife ? — 
It is under the table. — Is our friend in (the house) ? — He is in. — 
He is going in. — Do you desire to go out ? — No ; I desire to go in. 
— Is the painter out V — He is not out. 



Lesson XXXII. — pensum alterum et tri- 

CESIMUM. 

OF THE AGREEMENT OF VERBS. 

A. Rule. — The verb must agree with its subject 
nominative in number and person. E. g. 

Ego dmo. I love. 

Tit Ugls. Thou reddest. 

Me scrlbit. Piier scribit. He writes. The boy writes. 

Nos mittimus. We send. 

Vos hdbetis. Ye have. 

llli dicunt. Homines dicunt. They say. The men say. 

Remarks. 

1 . It has already been noticed in several places, that the pronouns 
ego, tu, Me, nos, vos, Mi are commonly omitted, and only put where 
perspicuity or emphasis requires them. 

2. The nominative is entirely wanting be*fore impersonal verbs and 
verbs used impersonally ; as, Pluit, it rains. Pingit, it snows. Pudet 



154 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 32. 

me tui, I am ashamed before you. Actum est de me, It is all over with 
me. Orandum est nobis, We must pray. 

3. An infinitive, either alone or modified by other words, an ad- 
verb, participle, and an entire sentence, may become the subject of a 
finite verb, which then stands in the third person singular ; as, Mentiri 
est turpe, It is disgraceful to lie. Dulce et decorum est pro patria 
mori, To die for one's country is honorable and sweet. Dodo homhii 
vivere est cogitdre, To a man of letters living is thinking. Cras istud, 
quando venit ? When will that " to-morrow " come ? Homines errdre 
non mirum est, That men should err is not strange.* 

4. The infinitive sometimes supplies the place of the finite verb, 
especially in animated narration ; as, Arma, tela, equi, viri, liostes, cives, 
permixti (sc. sunt) ; nihil consilio, neque imperio agi ; fors omnia regere, 
— Arms, weapons, horses, men, enemies, and friends were mixed in 
promiscuous disorder ; nothing is now done by design or in obedience 
to command ; chance controls everything. This is called the historical 
infinitive, and is generally translated by the imperfect. 

5. The verb is sometimes entirely omitted ; as, Bona verba (sc. lo~ 
quere), Do not be angry! Softly! Da melwra (sc. dent) ! God for- 
bid! Quid plura (sc.dicam)? In short. Quot homines, tot sententiae 
(sc. sunt), As many men, so many minds. 

B. Rule. — After a collective noun the predicate is 
either in the singular or the plural. E. g. 

Pars militum cae'si, pars cdpti Part of the soldiers were Jailed, and 
sunt. a part of them taken prisoners. 

Pars stiipet donum exitidle, et Some are transfixed with amazement 
molem mirantur equi. at the fatal present, and admire 

the huge size of the horse. 

Remarks. 

1. A verb in the plural is very common, especially among the 
poets, after pars, turba, vis, mullitudo, exercitus, juventus, nobilitas, 
gens, plebs, and vulgus. 

2. The pronouns uterque, each; quisque, every one; alter .... 
alterum, and alius .... alium, may likewise take a plural verb ; as, 
Uterque eorum ex castris statlvis exercitum educunt, Each of them leads 
his army out of the camp. Quisque suos patimur manes, Every one of 
us suffers the punishment due to him. Alius alii subsidium ferebant, 
One brought help to the other. 

C. Rule. — Two or more subject-nominatives in the 
singular, connected by a copulative conjunction, ex- 

* The infinitive or an entire clause may also stand as the subject of an 
impersonal verb; as, Te hilari animo esse valde me jurat, I am delighted (lit. it 
delights me) that yon are in good spirits. Jurat me, quod vigent studia, I am 
glad that the study of letters is prosperous. This construction is very common. 



J 

LESSON 32.] AGREEMENT OF VERBS. 155 

pressed or understood, generally have a plural verb. 
Kg. 

Senatus populusque Romdnus pa- The Roman senate and people ap- 

cem comprobave'runt. proved of the peace. 

Vita, mors, divitiae, paupertas Life, death, wealth, poverty, affect all 

dmnes homines vehementissime men most powerfully, 
permdvent. 

Remarks. 

1. The verb is in the singular when the compound subject is con- 
ceived of as one complex notion or whole ; as, Tempus necessitasque 
postulat, Time and necessity demands. Setiatus populusque Romanus 
intelligit, The Roman senate and people understand. 

2. When the verb is referred to each of the simple subjects sepa- 
rately, or to the emphatic one, it is likewise in the singular ; as, Conon 
plurimum Cypri vixit, Iphicrates in Thracia, Timotheus Lesbi, Chares 
in Sigeo, Conon lived mostly on the island of Cyprus, Iphicrates in 
Thrace, Timotheus on Lesbos, and Chares in Sigeum. Aetas et forma 
et super omnia Romanum nomen te ferociorem facit, Age and beauty, 
and, above all, the name of Roman, render thee more warlike. 

3. When the sentence contains et . . . . et, turn .... turn (both .... 
and) or nee .... nee, the verb is commonly singular ; as, Illam ratio- 
nem et Pompejus et Flaccus secutus est, Pompey and Flaccus both 
pursued that plan. 

4. When the nominatives are connected by the disjunctive aut, 
" or," or by aut .... aut, " either .... or," the verb is commonly 
singular, but sometimes plural ; as, Si Aedcus aut Minos diceret, If 
iEacus or Minos should say. Ne Sulpicius aut Cotta plus quam ego 
apud te valere videantur, Lest Sulpicius or Cotta should appear to have 
more influence with you than I have. 

5. If an ablative with cum is put instead of a second nominative, 
the predicate is generally plural, but sometimes singular ; as, Demos- 
thenes cum ceteris in exilium erant expulsi, Demosthenes with the 
rest had been driven into exile. Tu ipse cum Sexto scire velim, quid 
cogites. I should like to know what purpose you yourself and Sextus 
have in view. 

D. Rule. — When the nominatives of a compound 
subject are of different persons, the predicate agrees 
with the first person in preference to the second, and 
with the second in preference to the third. E. g. 

Si tu et Tullia valetis, ego et If you and Tullia are well, Cicero 
Cicero valemus. and I are well. 

Remark. — In sentences containing an antithesis or a division 
(e. g. an et . . . . et), the verb assumes the person of the nearest noun ; 
as, Et tu et omnes homines sciunt, You yourself and all men know. 



156 



LATIX GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 32. 



Postqudm in tuto ipse (ego) et ille in pcricido esse coepit, After I my- 
self began to be safe and he in danger. 



The market (-place). 

The ball. 

The country (as opposed to 

city). 
The square, public place. 
The field. 

The nobleman. 

The boatman. 
The bailiff. 
The judge. 
People (in general). 

To, towards (prep.). 

To go to the market. 
To be at the market. 
To go to the square. 
To be in the square. 
To go into the field. 
To be in the field. 



Forum, i, n. 
Saltatio, onis, f. 
Rus, ruris, n. 



m. ; locus publicus, i, m. 
agri, m., or in the pi. 



eques, itis, m. (a 



Campus, i. 
Ager, gen 

agri, orum.* 
Humo nobllis 

knight). 

Nauta, ae, m. ; homo nautlcus, m. 
Quaesitor, oris, in. 
Judex, Icis, m. 
Homines, }>l. m. 

In, ad-\ (with the ace). 

In (ad) forum ire. 

In fdro esse. 

In (ad) locum publicum ire. 

In loco publico esse. 

In agrum (agros) ire. 

In agro (agris) esse. 



E. Rule. — Verbs signifying motion or direction 
towards a place or object are generally followed by the 
accusative with ad or in, or by an adverb of place. As, 

Quo (qudrsum) eunt homines illi ? 



Where (in -what direction) are 

these people going ? 
They are going to (towards) the 

square. 
Will you lead us into the fields ? 
I am unwilling to lead you thither. 
Does your brother come to the 

market ? 
He does not come there. 
"Whither do you send your little 

servant V 
I am sending him to the city to 

my father. 
To go into the country. 
To be in the country. 



Eunt ad locum publicum. 

Niim vis nos in agros due ere ? 
Xdlo vos eo (llluc) diicere. 
Yenitne frater tiius in forum ? 

Non venit. 

Quo mittis serviilum tiium ? 

Mi'tto eum ad patrem in urbem. 

Rus (ace.) ire. 
Riiri (or rure)J esse. 



* Often in the plural, especially when opposed to a collection of houses, like 
the English " fields." 

f Ad properly implies approximation, and has something of the force of the 
English " towards." It may thus stand before the names of persons as well as 
of places; in (in this sense), before the latter only. 

% The form run is preferable to rure. 



XESSON 



S2.J 



CONSTRUCTION OF "RUS. 



157 



F. Obs. Rus follows the construction of the names of towns, 



and rejects the preposition 
tive. As, 

Do you desire to go anywhere ? 
I desire to go into the country. 
Is the bailiff in the country ? 

No ; he is at our house. 

To go to the ball. 

To be (present) at the ball. 

To dance. 

The (act of) dancing. 

To be present at. 

Are the younjj men goin^; to the 

ball ? 
Yes, sir, they are going. 
By no means, sir ; they are not 

going._ 
Is the tailor at the ball ? 

He is there. 



in before the accusative and abia- 



Cupisne ire aliquo ? 

Ego riis ire cupio. 

Niim est quaesitor riiri (rure) ? 

Non ; apud nos est. 

Immo vero ddmi ndstrae est. 

Saltatum ire.* 

Saltatidni interesse (adesse). 

Salto, are, avi, atum. 

Saltatio, onis,/. 
j Adsum, esse, fui, futurus. 
\ Intersum,f esse, fui, futurus. 

Euntne adolescentuli saltatum ? 

Vero, ddmine, eunt. 

Mi'nime gentium, ddmine ; non 
eunt. 

Adestne (interestne) sartor salta- 
tidni ? 

Adest (interest). 



G. Rule. — Many verbs compounded with the prep- 
ositions ad, ante, con, in, inter, ob, post, prae, sub, and 
super are followed by the dative. As, 

i" preside over the commonwealth . 

He excels every one. 

Bring me the letters. 

The stars remain fixed in their 

abodes. 
He exposed himself to the weapons 

of the enemy. 

Apud, juxta, ad (cum ace). 
Sto, stare, steti, statum. 

Adsto, are, stiti, (alicui rei, 

apud, juxta). 
The window. Fenestra, ae, f. 



Praesum reipublicae. 
Antecellit omnibus. 

Jffcr (cidfer) mihi litteras. 
Sidera sedibus suis inhaerunl 

Objecit se telibus Jiostium.% 

At, near (prep.'). 
To stand. 
To stand by or near. 



* Saltatum is the supine of salto, thus put with Ire to denote the purpose: 
' : to dance," "■ for the purpose of dancing." Cf. Less. XL VII. A. 

f Adsum is properly " to be near or present." Intersum conveys the ad- 
ditional notion of " participating in." Both these compounds of sum are con- 
jugated like the simple verb. 

| Intransitive verbs comprehended under this rule are followed by the dative 
of the tl red object (e.g. antecellit, inhaerent. praesum), and transitive verbs by 
that of the remote object (e.g. qffer mihi, objecit telibus). This rule includes 
several compounds of sum: — adsum, insum, iatersum, praesum, subsuia, super- 
sum. 



II 



158 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 32. 



The fire. 

The fireplace, hearth. 
To go to the window. 

To stand at (near) the window. 

To go to the fire. 

To stand by the fire. 
Where is the boatman ? 
He is standing by the fire. 
Are we £oino; to the window ? 

TXT • 

\V e are not going. 

To write to some one (to send 
one a letter). 

Are you willing to write to me ? 

I am unwilling to write to you. 
To whom is you father writing ? 
He is writing to his best friend. 

"What is he writing him ? 
He is writing him to come to the 
city. 



Ignis, is, m. ; carbones, pi. m. (the 
coal fire). 

Focus, i, m. 

Ad fenestram ire. 

Adire (ad)* fenestram. 

Apud (juxta, ad) fenestram stare. 

Adstare fenestrae (juxta fene- 
stram) . 

Ad fdcum ire. 

Adire (ad) fdcum. 

Apud (ad) carbones stare. 

Adstare fdco (apud fdcum). 

17 binam est nauta ? 

Stat apud fdcum. 

Adstat carbdnibus (apud carbones). 

Imiisne (adimiisne) ad fenestram ? 

Non imus. 

Litteras ad aliquem dare or mitte- 
re (absolutely). 

Scribere alicui or ad aliquem f 
(with ut and the subj.). 

Yisne dare (mittere) litteras ad 
me ? 

Nolo dare (mittere) litteras ad te. 

Ad quern dat pater tiius litteras ? 

Litteras dat ad amicum suum opti- 
mum. 

Quid ei scribit ? 

Scribit ei, ut in urbem veniat (Less. 
XXX. C. 1.) 



Exercise 55. 

Where is our friend ? — He is at the market. — Where is my 
brother ? — He is in the country. — Do you wish to go into the 
country? — I do not wish to go there. — Whither do you desire to 
go ? — I desire to go to the market. — Is your brother at home? — 
Xo ; he is at the ball. — Whither does your son wish to go ? — He 
wishes to go to the great place. — Does the Englishman go into the 
country in order to see the fields ? — He does not wish to go into the 
country in order to see the fields, but in order to see the forests, the 
birds, the water, and to drink tea. — Where is the son of the peasant? 

— He is in the fields to cut corn (cutting corn = frumentum secerns), 

— Does the son of the nobleman wish to go anywhither ? — He does 
not wish to go anywhither ; he is tired. — Whither does the son of 

* Ad commonly implies motion towards a place; but sometimes also rest or 
situation in a place. The compound adire of this sentence belongs to Rule E. 

f The construction scribere alicui or ad aliquem can only be used properly 
when the contents of the letter are mentioned, or when a command or exhorta- 
tion is conveyed. 



LESSON 32.] EXERCISES 56, 57. 159 

the bailiff wish to carry corn ? — He wishes to carry some to the 
storehouse of your brother. — Does he wish to carry thither the wine 
and the meat ? — He wishes to carry both thither. 

Exercise 56. 

Have you time to stand at (ad slandum apud) the window ? — I 
have no time to stand at the window. — Is your brother at home ? — 
He is not at home ? — Where is he ? — He is in the country. — Has 
he anything to do in the country ? — He has nothing to do there. — 
Whither do you wish to go ? — I wish to go to the theatre. — Is the 
Turk in the theatre ? — He is there. — Who is in the garden ? — The 
children of the English and those of the Germans are there. — Where 
does your father wish to speak to me ? — He wishes to speak to you 
in his room. — To whom does your brother wish to speak ? — He 
wishes to speak to the Irishman. — Does he not wish to speak to the 
Scotchman ? — He wishes to speak to him. — Where will he speak 
to him? — He will speak to him at the theatre. — Does the Italian 
wish to speak to anybody ? — He wishes to speak to the physician. — 
Where will he speak to him ? — He will speak to him at the ball 
{inter saltandum, Less. XXV. B. c). — Can you send me some 
money ? — I can send you some. — How much money can you send 
me ? — I can send you thirty -two crowns. — When will you send me 
that money? — I will send it to you to-day. — Will you send it to 
me into the country ? — I will send it to you thither. — Will you send 
your servant to the market ? — I will send him thither. — Have you 
anything to buy at the market ? — I have to buy good cloth, good 
boots, and good shoes. 

Exercise 57. 

What does the butcher wish to do in the country ? — He wishes to 
buy there oxen and rams in order to kill them. — Do you wish to 
buy a chicken in order to kill it ? — I wish to buy one, but I have 
not the courage to kill it. — Does the boatman wish to kill any one ? 

— He does not wish to kill any one. — Have you a desire to burn 
my letters ? — I have not the courage to do it. — Will the servant 
seek my knife or my paper ? — He will seek both. — Which knife do 
you wish (to have)? — I wish (to have) my large knife. — What 
oxen does the butcher wish to kill ? — He wishes to kill large oxen. 

— What provisions does the merchant wish to buy ? — He wishes to 
buy good provisions. — Where does he wish to buy them ? — He 
wishes to buy them at the market. — To whom does he wish to send 
them ? — He wishes to send them to our enemies. — Will you send 
me one more book ? — I will send you several more. — Are you able 
to drink as much as your neighbor ? — I am able to drink as much as 
he ; but our friend the Russian is able to drink more than both of us 
(uterque nostrum). — Is the Russian able to drink as much of this 
wine as of that ? — He is able to drink as much of the one as of the 
other. — Have you anything good to drink ? — I have nothing to 
drink. 



1g0 latin grammar. [lesson 33. 

Exercise 58. 

Is the friend of the Spaniard able to carry provisions ? — lie can 
carry some. — "Whither does he "wish to cany provisions? — He 
wishes to carry some to our storehouses. — Do you wish to bay pro- 
visions in order to carry them to our storehouses? — I wish to buy 
some in order to carry them into the country. — Do you wish i 
to the window in order to see the youth ? — I have no time to go (n<[ 
eundum) to the window. — Have you anything to do? — I have a 
letter to write. — To whom have you a letter to write ? — I have to 
write one to my friend. — Do you wish to write to the bailiff? — I 
wish to write to him. — "What do you wisli to write to him ? — I wish 
to answer (him) his letter. — Are you able to write as many letters 
as I ? — I am able to write more (of them) than yon. — Can you 
write to your absent friends (ad arnicas absentes)? — I can write to 
them. — Have you paper to write (ad scribt nduni) ? — I have some. 
— Is the bailiff able to write to anybody ? — He is not able to write 
to anybody. 



Lesson XXXHL — PENSUM TRICESIMUM TER- 

TIUM. 

OF THE PASSIVE VOICE. 

A. In the active voice the agenl is the nominative 
of 11k 1 verb, and is represented as acting upon an object 

in the accusative; in the passive voice the object be- 
comes the subject of the verb, mid is represented as 
acted upon by the agenl in the ablative. E. g. 

a< rive. PASSU i . 

]*iii( r dmatfttium. Filius amdtur a pal 

Sol mundum Ulustrat. S6L mundus illustrator. 

Dei providenfia mundum admir J><i providenftd mundus wlmiui- 
nistrat. stralur,** 

Remarks. 

1. The passive voice in Latin is distinguished from the active by 
peculiar terminations. It has the same number of moods and tenses, 
but a number of its tenses are periphrastic. (Cf. Lesson XXVHL E.) 

2. Neuter verbs, from the nature of their signification, do not admit 
of a passive voice. The Romans, however, sometimes employ them 
passively, but only in the third person singular and impersonally : as, 
Bibitur, currilur, ilur, uenitur, There is drinking, running, going, 

* The father love? the son. Pass. The son is loved bv the father. — The sun 
illumine? the world. Pass. The world is illumined bv the sun.— God's provi- 
dence rules the world. Pass. The world is ruled by God's providence. 



XESSON 33.] PASSIVE VOICE. 161 

coming. So also the neuter of the future passive participle : Eundum 
est, veniendum est, There must be going, coming. 

3. The verbs flo, I become (am made) ; vajndo, I am beaten; and 
veneo, I am sold, have an active form with a passive signification. 

4. The neuters audeo, I venture ; fido, I trust ; gaudeo, I rejoice ; 
and soleo, I am accustomed, — assume a passive form in the perfect 
and the tenses derived from it. Thus : Ausus, Jisus, gavisus, solitm 
sum, I have ventured, trusted, rejoiced, been accustomed. They are 
hence called semi-deponentia. 

5. A numerous class of Latin verbs, both active and neuter, are 
only passive in form, having an active signification. They are called 
Deponent* Verbs, and are of every conjugation. 

B. I. The principal parts of the passive voice, from which 
all the remaining forms are derived, are, 1. The Present Indic- 
ative, 2. lite Present Infinitive, and 3. TJie Perfect Participle. 
Thus : — 

Prks. Ind. Pres. Ixf. Perf. Part. 

1. amor. ainarl, aiiialfis. 

2. moneor, monerl, mftnitus. 

3. legor, leg!, lectus. 

4. audlor, audiri, audita-. 

II. The formation of the different tense* of the passive voice 
has already been explained in Lesson XXVIII. A —M. The 
parts fo be considered in this Lesson are, — 

1. The Present Indicative Passive, formed from the same tense of 
the active voice by adding r : as, 

1. amo — amor, I am loved. 

2. moneo — moneor, lam reminded. 

3. lego — legor, I a in read. 

4. audio — audlor, / am heard. 

2. The Present Infinitive Passive, formed from the corresponding 
mood of the active voice, by converting, 1. are, •_'. ere, 4. ire, into, 
1. an, 2. eri, 4. iri, and the ere of the third conjugation into i only f ; as, 

1. amare — Imari, to be loved. 

2. monere — mSneri, to be reminded. 

3. lege- re — legi. in be read. 

4. audire — audiri, to be heard. 

3. The Perfect Participle, formed from the supine, by changing 
vm into us, a, um ; as, 

1. amatum — araatus, a. iim, loved. 

2. monitum — monitus, a, um, reminded. 

* So called from being supposed to have laid aside {depono, 1 put off, lay 
aside) the active voice and passive signification. 

t In the older monuments of the Latin language, and also among the later 
poets, the syllable er is sometimes appended to the infinitive passive; as ama~ 
■iter, legier, wittier, &c. 

K 14* 



162 



LATIN GRAMJIAR. 



[LESSON 33. 



3. lectiim — lectiis, a, um, read. 

4. audltuin — auditus, a, um, heard. 

4. The Present Subjunctive, formed from the same tense of the 
active voice, by changing the final m into r : as, 

1. amem — timer, that I may be loved. 

2. moneam — monear, that I may be reminded. 

3. legam — legar, thai I may be raid. 

4. audiam — audiar, that I may be heard. 

Conjugation of the Present Passive, 

C. The following paradigms exhibit the inflection of the 
present tense of the passive voice, indicative and subjunctive : — 

First Conjugation. 



INDICATIVE. 

Amor, I am loved. 
Sing, amor 

amaris or -re * 

a mat fir, 
Plur. amain fir 

amamini 

amantur. 

Second Conjugation. 
Indicative. Subjunctive. 

Moneor, lam reminded. Monear, that I may be reminded. 



Subjuni TIVE. 
Amer, thai J may be loved. 
Sing, amer 

a mere or -lis* 
a met fir, 
amemiir 
amemini 

anient fir. 



Via 



Sing. moneor 


Sing. monear 


mdneris or -re 


inoiifare or -lis 


mSnetur, 


moneatfir, 


Plur. mdnemur 


Plur. moneamur 


monemin! 


mtfneamuil 


moncntur. 


mdneantur. 


TniRD 


Conjugation. 


Indicative. 


Subjunctive. 


Legor, lam read. 


Legar, that I may be read. 


Sing. legor 


SiNG. legar 


legeris or -re 


h'gare or -lis 


legitiir, 


legatur, 


Plur. legimur 


Plur. legam fir 


legimini 


legamini 


leguntur. 


legantur. 



* Of this second person singnlar the form in vis is to be preferred for the 
indicative and that in re for the subjunctive. Thus the student may put Ind. 
amaris, moneris, legeris } audh-is, and Subj. anu're^ moneare, leg&re, aut/iare. 



LESSON 33.] 



PRESENT PASSIVE. 



163 



Fourth Conjugation. 



Indicative. 

Audior, I am heard. 
Sing, audior 

audlris or -re 

auditur, 
Plur. audlmiir 

audimini 

audiimtur. 

Like amor, inflect commodor 
secor, sercor, &e. Like montor 



Subjunctive. 
Audiar, that I may he heard. 
Sing, audiar. 

audlare or -ris 
audiatur, 
Plur. audiamur 
audiamlni 
audiantur. 



dor,* laccror, lar<»\ portor. rcparor, 
doceor (I am taught), habeor, jubeor 
(I am commanded), teneor, videor, &c. Like legor: dicor, diligor, 
ducor, emor, frangor, mittor, quaeror, scribor, tolior, &c. Like audior: 
custodtor (I am guarded), erudior (I am instructed), munior (I am 
fortified), vesttor (I am clothed), &e. 

D. The Present Passive of caput, and of other verbs in to 
of the third conjugation, is thus inflected : — 

Indicative. Subjunctive. 

Capior, lam taken. C&piar, that I may be taken. 

Sing, capior Sing. capiar 

caperfs or -re capiare or -ris 

capitur, capiatur, 

Plur. caplmur Plur. capiamur 

caplminl capiamini 

capiuntur. capiantur. 

Like capior are conjugated: 1. All its compounds; as, accipior, 
decipi&r, excipior, &c. 2. Those compounds of facio which change 
the radical a into i; as, afficior, conficior, interficior, &c. 3. Jacior, 
I am thrown, and its compounds abjicior^ dejicior, rejicior : &c. 

E. The Present Passive of the verb y*ero, and its compounds 
{affero, antefero, confero, defero, &c), is irregular. Thus: — 



Indicative. 
Feror, / am carru d. 
SiNG. feror 
ferris 
fertur, 
Tlur. ferimur 
ferimim 
feruntur. 



Si BJUNCTIVE. 

Ferar, that limay be carried. 
Sin<;. ferar 

ferare or -ris 
feratur, 
Plur. feramur 
feramini 
ferantur. 



F. The passive of facio is likewise irregular : fio, fl<'n, 
/actus sum. The present of/7o is inflected as follows : — 



* The passive of do shortens the first a, as in the active; as, darts, ddtur; da- 
mur, damini, dantur. The forms dor and rfer, however, are never used. 



164 







LATIN 


GRAMMAR. [LESSON 33. 




Indicative. 




Sl'BJUXCTIVE. 




fio,* I am made, 


1 become. 


Flam, that I may be made, &c. 




Sing, fio 






Sing, flam 




fis 






fias 




fit. 






fiat, 




Plur. fimus 






Plur. fiamus 




fitis 






fifltlS 




fiunt. 






fiant. 





Remark. — These compounds of facia, which retain the radical a, 
have likewise fio in the passive, but those which change the a in i 
have ficior ; e. g. arefacw — areflo ; calefacio — calefto : labefacio 
— labeflo, &c. ; but confclo — conficior . interfcio — interficior, &c. 

G. Obs. The Present Passive always represents the action 
denoted by the verb as incomplete and still going on. In this 
respect it is to be distinguished from the perfect, which exhibits 
it as already accomplished and complete. E. g. 

Pres. Ddmus aedifcdtur. 



Perf. Ddmus aedifcdta est. 

Are you (being) loved ? 

Yes, sir, I am loved. 

Is your brother loved ? 

He is not loved. 

Which book is read ? 

Mine. 

Are we heard or they ? 

They are heard. 

Are ye reminded ? 

AVe are reminded. 

We are not reminded. 

Where is the trunk carried to ? 

It is carried home. 

Is the coffee (being) warmed ? 

Yes, it is (being) warmed. 

Is any one killed ? 

No one is killed. 

There are many (being) killed. 

Good, well-behavi ■/. 

Naughty, bad. 

Skilful, clever, diligent. 

Awkward. 



The house is being built (is build- 
ing). 

The house is budt (finished). 
Amarisne '? Ecquid amaris ? 
Vero, ddmine, amor. 
F rat erne tiius amatur? 
Kon amatur. 
Quia liber legitur ? 

Mens. 

Utrum audimur nos an llli ? 
Audiiintur illi. 

Moneminine ? Num monemini? 
Monemur. 
Kon monemur. 
Qu6 fertur risens? 
Ddmum (fertur). 
Calefitne cofiea ? 
Ita e>t, calefit. 
Niim quia interfieitur ? 
Nemo (millus) interfieitur. 
Miilti interficiiintur. 
Bcnejf moratus, a, urn : bonus, a, um. 
PravuSj a, um ; malis muribus.% 
Peritus, a, um ; sollers, tis ; dill- 
gens, tis. 
Imperitus, a, um ; ineptus, a, um. 



* The i of the verb fio (although preceding another vowel) is long, except 
when followed by er ; as, fkun, fiunt; but fieri, fierem. 
t An adverb qualifying moralus. 

x. * T « is ,l s c , alled fc he ablative of quality, which must be translated like a geni- 
tive: " of bad manners." 



LESSON 33.] THE AGENT OF PASSIVE VERBS. 



165 



Assiduous, sedulous, stu- Sediilus, a, um ; assiduus, a, um ; 

dious. studiosus, a, um. 

Idle, lazy. Ignavus, a, um ; piger, ra, rum ; 

segnis, e. 
(Homo) deses, -idis, m. 
Laudo, are, avi, atuni (aliquem ; 

aliquid). 
Vitupero, are, avi, atum. 
Reprehendo, ere, di, sum. 

(aliquem de aliqua re). 
Praemlum alicui dare or deferre. 
Praemio* aliquem afl'icere or or- 

nare. 
Praemio affici or ornari. 
Praemlum consequoiyf -sequi, -se- 
cutus sum (dep.). 
fPiinio, ire, Ivi (ii), Itum (ali- 
To punish. J quem). 

( Aliquem poena afficere. 
To esteem. Aliquem magni f facere or aesti- 

mare. 
To despise. 5 Contemno, ere, -tempsi, -temptum. 

1 ( Uespicatui § habere (aliquem). 

To hate, to bear hatred to- Odium habere or gerere (in ali- 
wards any one. quem). 

To be hated. 



The idler, lazy fellow. 
To praise. 



To blame. 



To reward (any one). 



To be rewarded. 



5 Odio (dat.) esse (alicui). 

\ In odio esse (apud aliquem). 

A me — a nobis. 

A tc — a vobis. 

Ab eo (illo) — ab lis (l'llis). 

A patre — ab hominibus. 

Igni, aestu, ferro (all.). 



By me — by us. 

By thee — by you. 

By him — by them. 

By the father — by men. 

By fire, heat, by the sword. 

H. Rule. — If the agent of a passive verb is a per- 
son, it is put in the ablative, with the preposition a or 
ab, but if it is an impersonal cause 1 , means, or instru- 
ment, it stands in the ablative without a preposition. 
E. g. 

Lauddntur a me, a te, ab do {illo). 

YituperdrXs a nobis, ab illis, a 
patre. 



They are praised by me, by you, by 

h im . 
You are blamed by us, by them, by 

your father. 



* The Ablative = " to affect or adorn one with a reward." 

t Literally, " I obtain (consenuor, deponent) a reward." 

J Literally, " to make (or esteem) one of much account." Magni is the 
genitive of price, and agrees with pretii understood. 

§ The Dative of despiedtus. Literally, "to have (hold) one for contempt"; 
like the English " to hold one in contempt." 



16C 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 33. 



Terra ilia ferro igntque perva- 

stdta est. 
Fecunditdte drbbrum deUctor. 

Who is punished ? 
The boy is punished by his father. 
Why is he punished ? 
Because he is lazy and had. 
Which man is praised, and which 

one blamed ? 
He who is skilful is praised, but 

he who is awkward is blamed. 

Which boys are rewarded, and 
which punished ? 

Those who are clever and studi- 
ous are rewarded, but those 
who are awkward and lazy are 
punished. , 

We are loved by our friends, 
and you are despised by every 
one. 

I am punished, and you arc re- 
warded. 

These children are praised be- 
cause they are diligent and 
well-behaved : but those are 

reprehended because they arc 
lazy and bad. 

Why ? 

Because. 

The tutor, master. 

The pupil, scholar. 



That land was destroyed by fire and 

sword. 
I am delighted by the fruitfulness of 

the trees. 

Quia punitur? 

Puer punitur a patre. 

Quam ob rem poena alTicitur ? 

Quia est ignavus et nequam. 

Quia homo laudatur, (pus vitupe- 
ratur ? 

Quiciinque peritus est, laudatur, 
qui autem est imperitns, is vitu- 
peratur. 

Qui piieri praemiis afficiiintur, qui 
puniiintur ? 

Qui sollertes £tque studios sunt, 
praemiis orn£ntur, qui autem 
inepti ac segnes sunt, ii puni- 
iintur. 

Noa ab amicia ndstris amfunur, yos 
autem ab omnibus eontenmhnini. 

fego poena afficior, tu ornaris prae- 

mio. 
Hi liberi laudantur, quia dilige*ntea 

et bene mordti sunt, flli autem 

reprehendiintur, quia ignavi at- 

que malis mdribofl sunt. 

Cur? quam ob rem? (dm/.) 

Quia, quod (< '<>nj.). _ 

Tutor, oris, //'. : magister, ri, m. 

Discipulus, i- in.: alumnus, i, m. 



Exercise 59. 

Arc you loved by your father? — I am loved by him.— Is your 
brother' loved by him?— He is Loved by him. — By whom am I 
loved? — Thou cart loved by thy parents (parentes).— Are we loved . 

— You are loved.— By whom are we loved. — You an- loved by 
your friends.— Arc these men loved ? — They are loved by us and 
bv their .mod friends.— By whom is the blind (caecus) man led ' — 
lie is led bv me. — Where do you lead him to ? — I am leading him 
home. — By whom are we blamed ? — We arc blamed by our enemies. 

— Why are we blamed bv them ? — B Wise they do not love us. — 

Are you punished by your tutor ?— We are not punished by him, 
because we are studious' and good.— Are we heard? — "W e are heard. 

Bv whom are we heard ? — We are heard by our neighbors. — Is 

the master heard bv his pupils ? — lie is heard by them. — Which 



LESSON 34.] NOMINATIVE AFTER VERBS. 167 

children are praised ? — Those that are good. — Which are punished ? 

— Those that are idle and naughty. — Are you praised or blamed ? 

We are neither praised nor blamed. — Is our friend loved by his 
masters ? — He is loved and praised by them, because he is studious 
and good (well-behaved) ; but his brother is despised by his, because 
he is naughty and idle. — Is the letter (being) written ? — It is 
(being) written. — By whom are those books written? — They are 
written by our friends. — To whom is the table (being) sent ? — It is 
sent to our neighbor. — "Where are the knives sent to ? — Thev are 
&ent to our house. — Are you sent anywhere ? — I am sent nowhere. 

— Are our shirts washed by any one V — The)' are washed by no one. 

— Is your brother becoming studious? — He is not becoming so. — 
Is our coffee (being) warmed? — It is being wanned. — By whom 
are our coats (being) mended ? — They are mended by the tailor. — 
Are our horses (being) bought by any one ? — They are bought by 
no one. — By whom is the wine drunk ? — It is drunk by our friends. 

— Is the book read by any one ? — It is not read by any one. — By 
whom are good books read? — They are read by the wise and the 
learned (a sapientibus doctisque). — By what {qua re) are you de- 
lighted? — I am delighted by my new (ndous) books'. — How (quu- 
modo) are our enemies killed ? — They are killed by the sword. 



Lesson XXXIV. — PENSUM TRICESBfUM 
QUARTUM. 

OF THE NOMINATIVE AFTER VEKBS. 

A. Rule. — After certain neuter and passive verbs, 
the noun serving to complete the predicate is put in the 
same case as the subject to which it relates. E.g. 

AVk sumus amici. We are frit nds. 

Servus fit libertinus. Tkt slant is made a freed man. 

Cupio evddere orator. / desire to become an orator. 

CamUlus dictator dicitur. ( 'amillus is called dictator. 

Remarks. 

1. The noun in the predicate may be of any gender, but if it has 
a form of the same gender as the subject, that form is preferred ; as, 
Amicdia vinculum quoddam est hominum inter se, Friendship is a kind 
of bond which links men to each other. But, Licentia corruptrix est 
tnorum, Licentiousness is the corruptrix of morals. Aqiiila volucrum 
regina* est, The eagle is the queen of birds, Stilus optimus est di- 
cendi magister, Style is the best teacher of oratory. 

2. The noun of the predicate may be of a different number; as, 

* Regina, because the grammatical ponder of aquila is feminine. But the 
masculine rex would not be incorrect here. 



168 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 34. 

Captivi militum praeda (sing.} fuerant, The captives had been booty 
of the soldiers. Omnia Caesar erat, Caesar was everything. Haec 
urbs est Thebae, This city is Thebes. 

3. The verb commonly agrees with the subject, but is sometimes 
attracted into concord with the nearer noun of the predicate ; as, 
Loca, quae proxuma Carthaginem Numidia vocatur, The places in the 
vicinity of Carthage, which are called Xumidia. Amantium irae (pi.) 
amor is integratio est, The quarrels of lovers are the renewal of love. 

B. Rule. — An adjective, adjective pronoun, or par- 
ticiple, serving to complete the predicate after verbs 
neuter or passive, agrees in gender, number, and case 
with the subject to which it relates. E. g. 

llle piier est modestus. That boy is modest. 

HI libri sunt mei. These book's are mine. 

TO, vocaris Justus. , « You are called just. 

Cupit puidri bella. She desires to be considered hand- 

some. 

Scythae invicti mansere. The Scythians remained uncon- 

quered. 

Remarks. 

1 . The adjective of the predicate is sometimes put substantively in 
the neuter ; as, Valium et mutabile semper {est) femina, Woman is 
always a fickle and changeable being. Aliud est actio bona, aliud 
oratio, A good action is one thing, and good talk another. In these 
instances we commonly supply in English some general term, like 
" thing," " things," " being," &c. 

2. The adjective of the predicate sometimes agrees with another 
noun implied in the subject ; as, Capita (neut.) conjurationis caesi * 
(masc.) sunt, The heads of the conspiracy were killed. This is called 
the Constructio ad Synesin. 

3. If the predicate contains a participle with esse, it generally agrees 
with the nearest noun ; as, Non omnis error stultitia est dicenda, Every 
error cannot be called stupidity. Paupertas mihi onus (neut.) visum 
est miserinn et grave, Poverty seemed to me to be a wretched and a 
heavy burden. 

4. If the subject is compound, i.e. composed of two or more nomi- 
natives, the adjective or participle is generally in the plural, and its 
gender is determined by the rules of Lesson XXII. B. 1-5. Addi- 
tional examples are: Hex regiaque classis una profecti (sc. sunt), The 
king and the royal fleet departed together. Murus et porta de coelo 
tacta sunt, The wall and gate were struck by lightning. Filia atque 
units ejiliis captus est, The daughter and one of the sons were cap- 
tured. Populi provinciaeque liberatae sunt, The nations and provinces 
were made free. 

* In the masculine, because the heads of the conspiracy were considered 
men. 



LESSON 34.] NOMINATIVE AFTER VERBS. 1G9 

5. When the subject is in the accusative, the noun, adjective, or 
participle of the predicate is in the same case ; as, Cupio me esse cle- 
mentem,* I desire to be clement. Scio te liaberi doctum, I know that 
you are considered a scholar. 

6. When the infinitive of a verb neuter or passive is preceded by 
a dative, the noun or adjective of the predicate may stand in the same 
case ; as, Natura dedit omnibus esse beads, Nature has conceded hap- 
piness to all men. Licet mihi esse beato,f It is lawful for me to be 
happy. This construction is frequent with impersonal verbs govern- 
ing the dative. 

7. After the verb sum the predicate is frequently an adverb or a 
noun in an oblique case; as, Conatus ejus frustra, fuerunt, His attempts 
were in vain. Kecte est aeger, The patient is doing well. Esse cam 
imperio, To be in command (of an army) . 

C. The neuter and passive verbs which may thus be followed 
by nouns, adjectives, or participles, in the same case as the sub- 
ject, are, — 

1. The copula sum, and certain neuter verbs denoting motion or 
situation ; as, 

cado, I fall. jaceo, I lie. 

eo, I go. maneo, I remain. 

evado, I come off (become). sedeo, I sit. 

fio, 1 become. sto, I stand. 

fugio, I escape. venio, I come. % 
incedo, / walk. 

2. Passive verbs of naming, choosing, constituting, rendering; as, 
appellor, I am called. nominor, I am nominated. 
constituor, I am constituted. nuncupor, I am named. 
creor, / am created. perhibeor, / am said.§ 
declaror, i" am declared. reddor, i" am rendered. 
designor, I am designated. renuntior, / am proclaimed. 
dicor, I am send (called). salutor, I am saluted. 
eligor, I am elected. vocor, / am called.\\ 

* Compare page 128, note. 

f This may also be, Licet mild esse beatum. The logical order is, Me beatum 
esse mihi licet So also, Mihi negligenti esse non licuit, I was not allowed to be 
negligent. Vobis necesse est fortibus esse viris, It is necessary for you to be 
brave men. 

$ Thus: In pectus cecidit pronns, He fell flat on his chest. In causam it 
praeceps, He goes headlong into the case. Evadit victor, He comes off victor. 
Incedo regina, I walk queen. Manebit imperator, He will remain commander, 
&c. 

§ Many of these passive verbs, especially those of case 3, are construed with 
an infinitive of sum expressed or understood ; as, Nuntii fuisse perhibenlur, They 
are said to have been messengers. Videmini viri boni esse, Ye seem to be good 
men, &c. 

|| To these maybe added audio, which sometimes = appellor; as, Rex pater- 
que audisti, You heard yourself called king and father. 
15 



170 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 34. 



Passive verbs of esteeming, numbering, considering, and the 



like ; as, 

censeor, / am supposed. 
eredor, I am believed. 
deprehendor, / emi discovered. 
existimor, / am esteemed. 
feror, 1 am reported. 
habeor, / am considered. 

The corner. 

The well. 

The fountain. 

The hole. 

To order, command. 



I direct, let. 



To go for, fetch (of things). ~ 

( 
To go for, fetch, or call (a 

person) . 
To fetch, conduct. 



To send for (anything) . 
To send for (a person). 

Does the servant fetch anything 

for us ? 

He does not fetch us anything. 

Do you go for (call) any one ? 

I call (go for) no one. 

Do you send for anything ? 

I am sending for some wine. 

I order my books to be brought 

(I send for my books). 
"Will you send for the physician ? 
I will send for him. 
We desire wine to be brought. 
I direct paper to be brought 

(send for paper). 



judicor, I am judged. 
memoror, I am recounted. 
numeror, i" am numbered. 
putor, I am thought. 
reperior, I am found. 
videor, 1 seem. 

Angulus, i, mi. ; latibulum, i, n. 

(hiding-place). 
Puteus, i, m. 
Pons, tis, in. 
Foramen, inis, n. 
Jubeo, ere, jussi, jussum (aliquid 

FIERI, ALIQUEM FACERE ALI- 
QUID). 

Curo, are, avi, atum (aliquid fa- 
ciendum). 

Affero, -ferre, attuli, allatum. 

Apporto, are, avi, atum. 
(aliquid aliquo). 

Arcesso, ere, ivi, Itum (aliquem 
alicunde* aliquo). 

Adduco, ere, xi, ctum (aliquem 

ALIQUO Or AD ALIQUEM). 

Jiibeo aliquid aiferri or apportari. 
Curo aliquid apportandum. 
Jubeo aliquem arcessi or adduci.f 

Affertne (apportatne) servus ali- 
quid ad nos ? 
Nihil affert ad nos. 
Nobis non aifert quidquam. 
Arcessisne aliquem ? 
Neminem (nullum) arcesso. 
Jubesne apportari aliquid ? 
Vinum apportari jiibeo. 
Libros meos apportandos ciiro. 

Yisne jubere medicum arcessi ? 
Yolo iubere eum arcessi. 
JSos vmum apportari cuplmus. 
Ego chartam apportandam euro. 



* From some place somewhither. 

f The verbs jiibeo and curo are, however, frequently suppressed, and the verb 
itself is used in a factitive sense; as, Annulum sibi fecit, He had a ring made. 
Securi percussit archipiratam, He ordered the chief of the pirates to be executed. 
So arcessere may stand in the sense of " to send for" a person, and apportare, 
" to send for (cause to be brought) " a thing, &c. 



_J 



LESSON 34.] " OPORTET " AND " NECESSE EST." 171 

Let us send for a little bread. Jubeamus aflerri aliquantulum paV 
(Less. XXX. C. 3.) nis. 

-r Tr 7/^77 j ( Xdbordndum est nobis. 

We must work, (it behooves «s o ] A « > , , 7 7 

, v v A Nos opgrtet laborare. 

'* {Necesse est labor emus. 

D. Obs. The English phrase / must, I am obliged, is ex- 
pressed in Latin either by the participle in dus, or by the 
impersonal verbs oportet, " it behooves," and necesse est, " it is 
necessary." The former of the verbs is followed either by the 
accusative with an infinitive, or by the subjunctive without ut ; 
the latter is commonly followed by the dative and infinitive, or 
by the subjunctive, without ut. Thus : — 

I must write. Scribendum est milii. 

It behooves me to (I must) write. \ JJ8 ?&??. B ^ ribg "" 

I Uportet (ego) sen bam. 

It is necessary for me to write J Necesse est mini senbere. 

(I must write). ( Necesse est (ego) scribam. 

Must you write a letter to your Oportetne te dare litteras ad fra- 

brother ? trem ? 

T , ., * ( Oportet me dare unas. 

I must write one. A ^ * , . , -, , 

( Uportet dem unas. 

Is he obliged to go to the mar- j Necessene est ei in forum ire ? 

ket ? \ Necessene est eat in forum ? 

He is obliged to go thither. Necesse est eat llluc. 

Must you go ? Eundiimne est tibi ? 

I am not obliged to go. Mi'hi non est eiindum. 

What has the man to do ? Quid hdmini faciendum est ? 

He is obliged to go into the forest. Necesse est eat in silvam. 

W1 ,i , , o ( Quid est tibi faciendum ? 

What have you to do r A ^ . , , M „ . , , „ 

J I Quid habes faciendum i 

I Non est mi'hi quidquam facien- 
I have nothing to do. A dum. 

( Nihil faciendum habeo. 
What have you to drink ? Quid est tibi (quid babes) ad bi- 

bendum ? 

T , ,, . n . t ( Nihil ad bibendum habeo. 

I have nothing to drink. A AT , T ,-, ^ ,,-, 

55 ( Non habeo quod bibam. 

I have nothing but water to j Aquam solam ad bibendum habeo. 

drink. ( Non habeo quod bibam nisi aquam. 

Are you willing to make my fire ? Visne mihi accendere carbdnes ? 
1 am not unwilling to make it, !Eos accendere non nolo, eareo au- 

but I have no time. tem dtio. 

This evening. Hodie vesperi. 

In the evening. Vesperi, vespere (abL). 

This morning. Hodie mane (adv.). 

In the morning. Mane tadv.}. 



172 LATIN GRAMMAR. ^LESSON 34. 

When must you go into the Quo tempore te opdrtet ire rus ? 

country ? 
I must absolutely go this morn- Necesse est earn hddie mane. 

ing. 

Exercise 60. 

Will you go for some sugar ? — I will go for some. — My son (mi 
fili, cf. page 10, note *), wilt thou go for some water ? — Yes, father 
(mi paler), I will go for some. — Whither wilt thou go ? — I will go 
to the well, in order to fetch some water. — AVhere is thy brother ? — 
He is at the well. — Will you send for my son V — I will send for 
him. — Will the captain send for my child ? — He will send for him. 
— Where is he ? — He is in a corner of the ship. — Art thou able to 
write a letter to me ? — I am able to write one to you. — Must I go 
any whither ? — Thou must go into the garden.- — Must I send for 
anything ? — Thou must send for good wine, good cheese, and good 
bread. — What must I do V — You must write a long letter. — To 
whom must I write a long letter ? — You must write one to your 
friend. — Is your little boy diligent ? — He is both * modest and dili- 
gent. — Are these boys awkward and lazy ? — They are neither 
awkward nor lazy. — What are you called ? — I am called learned 
and wise (doctus et sapiens). — Are they becoming learned ? — They 
are becoming (so). — Does he come off (evaditne) an orator ? — He 
does come off one. — Do they remain good ? — They do not remain 
(so). — Do I walk (as) commander ? — You do walk (as one). — Are 
they considered handsome (formvsi) ? — They are, on the contrary, 
considered ugly (deformes). — Do they desire to become (fieri) clem- 
ent? — They do desire to become (so). — Is it lawful for me to be 
happy ? — It is lawful. — Do we seem to be just ? — You do not seem 
(to be so). 

Exercise Gl. 

What must we do ? — You must go into the forest in order to cut 
some wood. — What has the Englishman to do ? — He has nothing 
to do. — Has the Spaniard' anything to do? — He has to work. — 
Where can he work ? — He can work in his room and in mine. — 
When will you give me some money ? — I will give you some this 
evening. — Must I come to your house ? — You must come to my 
house. — When must I come to your house ? — This morning. — 
Must I come to your house in the morning or in the evening"? — 
You must come in the morning and in the evening. — Whither must 
I go ? — You must go to the great square in order to speak to the 
merchants. — Where must the peasant go to ? — He must go into the 
field in order to cut some hay. — Must I keep anything for you ? — 
You must keep for me my good gold and my good works. — Must the 
children of our friends do anything ? — They must work in the morn- 
ing and in the evening. — What must the tailor mend for you ? — 
He must mend my old coat for me. — Which chicken must the cook 



* " Both .... and " is in Latin et . . . . et, or non minus . 



quam. 



LESSON 35.] DEPONENT VERBS. 173 

kill ? — He must kill this and that. — Must I send you these or those 
books ? — You must send me both these and those. — Have you any- 
thing to drink ? — I have nothing to drink. — What have they to 
drink ? — They have nothing but water to drink ? — Where must 
you go ? — I must go into the garden. — Is it necessary for them to 
write ? — It is not necessary. — Does it behoove us to speak '? — It 
does behoove (you to speak) . — Must I send for water ? — You must 
send for some. — Who must send for the book ? — Our brother has 
to send for them. — Do they send for me ? — They do not send for 
you. 



K.g. 




Pres. Inf. 


Perf. Ind. 


ari, 


atus sum, I exhort. 


eri, 


veritus sum, I fear. 


loqui, 
iri, 


locutus sum, I speak. 
ltus sum, I flatter. 



Lesson XXXV. — pensum tricesimum quin- 

TUM. 

OF DEPONENT YERBS. 

A. The deponent verbs of the Latin language are 
regularly conjugated like the passive voice of other 
verbs. They are either active or neuter, and belong to 
every conjugation. 

Pres. Ind. 
1st Con j. Hortor, 
2d Conj. Vereor, 
3d Conj. Loquor, 
4th Conj. Blandlor, 

the present tense of deponent verbs. 

First Conjugation. 

Indicative. Subjunctive. 

Hortor, I exhort. Horter, that I may exhort. 

Sing, hortor Sing, horter 

hortans or -re hortere or -ris 

hortatur, hortetur, 

Plur. hortamtir Pltjr. hortemur 

hortamini hortemml 

hortantur. hortentur. 

Second Conjugation. 

Indicative. Subjunctive. 

Vereor, I fear, Verear, that I may fear. 

Sing, vereor Sing, verear 

vereris or -re vereare or -ris 

veretur, vereatiir, 
15* 



174 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 33. 



Plur. veremur Plur. vereamur 

veremini vereamini 

verentur. vereantur. 

Third Conjugation. 

Indicative. Subjuxctive. 



Loquor, I speak. 
Sing, loquor 

loqueris or -re 

loquitur, 
Plur. loquimur 

loquimim 

loquuntur. 

Fourth 
Indicative. 
Blandior, I flatter. 
Sing, blandior 

blandiris or -re 
blanditilr, 
Plur. blandimur 
blandimini 
blandiuntur. 



Loquar, that I may speal: 
Sing, loquar 

loquare or -its 
loquatur, 
Plur. loquamur 
loquamini 
loquantur. 

Conjugation. 

Subjuxctive. 
Blandiar, that I may flatter. 
Sing, blandiar 

blandiare or -its 
blandmtur, 
Plur. blandiamur 
blandiamini 
blandiantur. 



Like liortor are inflected arbitror, I think ; comitor, I escort ; do- 
minor, I rule ; falur, he speaks ; moror, I delay, stay, &c. — Like vereor 
go fateor, I confess ; mereor, I earn ; misereor, I pity ; tueor, I de- 
fend, &c. — Like loquor go fungor, I perform ; labor, I slip (fall) ; oNi- 
viscor, I forget; sequor, I follow, &c. — Like blandior inflect experior, 
I experience ; mentior, I lie ; largior, I lavish ; partior, I divide, &c. 

Do vou speak Latin ? Loquerisne Latin e ? 

Vero, ddmine, loquor. 
xson, ddmine, ldqui non possum. 
Loquiminine ? 
Kon loquimur. 
Quis loquitur Latine ? 
Ddcti soli loquuntur. 
( Blandin'sne alicul.* 
\ Nmnquid alicui blandiris ? 
Nemini blandior. 
Neque ego cuiquam blandior. 
Blandiminine ? 
Blandimur omnibus. 
Quern hortaris ? 
Amicos meos hdrtor. 



Yes, sir, I do speak it. 

No, sir, I am not able to speak it. 

Do ye speak it ? 

We do not speak it. 

Who speaks Latin ? 

The learned only speak it. 

Do you flatter any one ? 

I do not flatter any one. 
Xor do I flatter any one. 
Do ye flatter ? 
We flatter every one. 
Whom do you exhort? 
I exhort my friends. 



* Verbs of flattering govern the Dative. 



LESSON 35.] "USQUE Ad" OR "IN." "QUO USQUE." 1 



What do they exhort us to do ? 
They exhort us to come to them. 

Do ye exhort us ? 

AVe exhort you to send letters. 

Are ye afraid of anything ? 

AVe are afraid of nothing. 

Are you afraid to speak '? 

I am not afraid to speak, but to 

write. 
He is afraid that the enemy might 

kill him. 

As far as. 

How far? 
As far as here. 
As far as there. 
Thus far, up to this point. 
As far as the city. 
As far as the fields. 
As far as Rome. 
As far as the end of the road. 
As far as (i. e. up to) the chest. 

B. Obs. The preposition tenus is always put after its noun, 
which may stand either in the ablative or genitive. 

rn 4.-U i u c\\ i S Usque ad fiindum ddlii. 

lo the bottom of the cask. i t? ' i *.<■ m- 

( J? undo tenus doln. 

To the bottom of the well. \ P S< 1™ , ad ima P uteI ' 

( Imis tenus putei. 

The end (extremity, termi- 
nation) . 

The way, road. 

The bottom ; ground. 

The garret. 

The. cask. 

The barrel, hogshead. 

The purse. 

How far do you wish to go ? 
I wish to go as far as the square, 

as the fields, as Rome. 
How far does the water go (i. e. 

extend) ? 



Quid nd.s facere hortantur? 

Nos hortantur, ut* ad ipsos veniii- 

mus. 
Hortaminine nos ? 
Vds hortamur, ut litteras detis 
Numquid veremini ? 
Nihil veremur. 
Vererisne ldqui ? 
Non ldqui, sed scribere vereor. 

Veretur, nef hdstis cum interfi- 
ciat. 

Usque ad, usque in (with the ace.) ; 
tenus (prep, with abl. or gen.). 

Quo usque ? Quorsum usque ? 

Huciisque (adv ). 

^o usque ; usque isthinc. 

Hactenus (adv.) 

Usque ad lirbem. 

ijsque in agros. 

Usque Romam. 

Usque ad terminum viae. 

Pectore (or gen. pectoris) tenus. 



Finis, in. 8c f. (generally) . 

Extremum, I, n. (of time and space). 

Terminus, i, m. (of space only). 

Via, ae,y! 

Fundus, i, m. ; ima, drum, n. pi. 

Tabulatum, i, n. 

Dolfum, i, n. ; dim. ddlidlum, i, n. 

Cupa, ae,/*. 

Marsupium, i, n. ; criimena, J &e,f 

Quo risque vis ire ? 

Ego usque ad campum (in agros, 

Romam) ire ciipio. 
Quo usque extenditur aqua ? 



* This might also be expressed by an Accusative and Infinitive, nos ad se 
venire. 

t After verbs of fearing, ne = "lest," " that," and ut, "that not." 
j The latter was commonly worn around the neck. 



176 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 35. 



It sroes to the bottom of the sea. 

o 

Every day, daily. 
Every morning. 
Every evening. 

At itihat o'clock ? 

At what time ? 

At one o'clock. 

At twelve o'clock. 

At half past one. 

At a quarter past three. 

At a quarter before four. 

At noon. 

At midnight. 

At, i. e. about, towards. 

About six o'clock. 

About noon. 

About a quarter before five. 

Towards (or about) ten. 
Noon, midday. 
Night. 
The quarter. 

Three fourths. 

Half. 
The half part of. 
The middle part of. 
The lowest part of. 



Extenditur usque ad ima maris 
(l'mis tenus maris). 

Singulis diebus, quotidie, nullo non 

die. 
Quotidie mane, quot diebus mane. 
Quotidie vesperi. 
Nullo non vespere. 
Quota hard ? Qua hora ? 
Quo tempore ? 
Hdra prima.* 
Hdra duodecimo,. 
Media hdra post primam. 
Quadrante hdrae post tertiam. 
Dodrante hdrae post quartam. 
Meridie, tempore meridian o. 
Media ndcte. 

Circiter, sub (c. Ace. & AbL). 

Circlter hdra sexta. 

Sub horam sextam. 

Circlter meridie (meridiem). 

Sub meridiem. 

Quadrante circiter hdrae ante quin- 

tam. 
Sub horam decimam. 
Meridies, ei, m. 
Nox, gen. noctis,/! 
Quadrans, tis, m. ; pars (-tis, /.) 

quarta. 
Dodrans, tis, m. 
Dimidium, i, n. 
Dimldius, a, um 
Medius, a, um. 
Inflmus, or Imus, a, um. 



C. Rule. — The adjectives primus, medius, extremus, ulti- 
mus, infimus, Imus, summits, reltquus, and ceterus, frequently 
signify the first part, the middle part, &c. of the object denoted 
by the noun with which they are connected.f As, 

Media nox (= medium or media The middle of the night, 
pars ndclis). 



* Among the Romans the first hour was from six to seven, A. M. In these 
exercises, however, the adjectives "prima, secunda, &c. refer to the modern 
division of the day. 

f But -when the noun with -which these adjectives are connected is compared 
•with other objects of the same kind, they retain their original sense o£ tlie Ji rst, 
middle, last, &c; as, injimo loco, of the lowest rank. 



LESSON 35.] PHRASES AND EXERCISES. 



177 



In primo limine vtfae. 
Extremo hello Peloponne'sio. 

Alexandria reliqudque Aegyptus. 

To go out (of any place), 
walk out. 

To go out, walk out (in 
public). 

To remain, stay. 

At present, now. 

Here (in this place). 

There (in that place) . 
To remain here. 
To remain there. 
To remain or stay at home. 

To be present (to be here). 

To be absent (away'). 

Who is here (present) ? 

The young men are here. 

Is my son here ? 

No, he is absent. 

When will you so out ? 
T . , J fc* 

1 wish to go out now. 

Is any one going out of the 

house ? 
No one is going out. 
Are you going to your brother ? 
I am going to him. 
Do your children remain at 

home ? 
They do remain at home. 
They do not remain at home. 
Do you wish to take me to my 

father ? 
I do wish to take you to him. 
Are you willing- to give me a 

knife? *. ° 

I am willing to give you one. 
Am I going to him ? 
Thou art going not to him, but 

to me. 



At the very threshold of life. 
During the latter part of the Pelo- 

ponnesian war. 
Alexandria and the rest of Egypt. 

Exeo, ire, ii (Ivi), itum. 
Egredlor, di, egressus sum (dep.). 

(EX or AB ALIQUO LOCO) . 

Prodeo, Ire, Ii, Itum (in publi- 
cum ; ex loco). 
Maneo, ere, nsi, nsum.* 
Moror, ari, atus sum (dep.). 

(ALIQUO LOCO). 

Nunc, hoc tempore, in praesentia. 

Hie (adv.), hoc loco. 

Ibi, illic, isthic (adv.). 

Hie manere. 

Ibi (illic, istic) permanere. 

Ddmi manere (morari or se tenere). 

Adsum, esse, fid, futurus. 

Adsto, are, stiti, . 

Absum, esse, fui, futurus. 

Quis adest ? 

Adolescentes adsunt. 

Adestne films meus ? 

1 mmo vero abest. 

Quando vis prod ire in publicum ? 

Prodire in publicum nunc vdlo. 

Exitne (egrediturne) aliquis (ex) 

ddmo ? 
Nemo exit (egredltur). 
Isne tu ad l'ratrem ? 
Eo (ad cum). 
Manentne llberi tui ddmi ? 

Manent (ddmi). 

Non manent (ddmi). 

Cupisne me ad patrem ducere ? 

Ciipio te ad eum ducere. 
Visne mihi ciiltrum dare ? 

Vdlo tibi unum dare. 

Egdne ad eum eo ? 

Tu non is ad eum, sed ad me. 



* So also the compounds permanere, to remain for a given length of time, 
and demoruri, to abide, tarry in a place. 
L 



173 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSOX 33. 

Have your friends my books ? Niim amici tiii libros me'os habent? 

They have them not. (Eos) non habent. 

Or have they time to write ? An est lis spatium ad scribendum ? 

They have. Est. 

When do you go out in the Quando prddis in publicum matii- 

morning? tino tempore V 

I go out every morning about Prddeo in publicum quoti'die mane 

eight o'clock. hdra circiter octavo. 

Exercise 62. 

Do they speak Latin? — They cannot speak (it). — Do we speak 
(it) ? — We do not speak (it). — Whom do ye flatter ? — We flatter 
no one. — Do they exhort any one ? — They exhort their friends. — 
Do they exhort you to come to them ? — They do not exhort me 
to come to them, but to send them letters. — Art thou afraid of 
anything ? — I am afraid of nothing. — Are they afraid of being 
killed (ne interficiantur) ? — They are not afraid. — How far do -sou 
wish to go ? — I wish to go as far as the end of the forest. — How 
far does your brother wish to go ? — He wishes to go as far as the 
end of that road. — How far does the wine go? — It goes to the 
bottom of the cask. — How far does the water go ? — It goes to 
the bottom of the well. — Whither art thou going ? — I am going to 
the market. — Whither are we going? — We are going into "the 
country. — Are you going as far as the square ? — I am going as far 
as the fountain. — When does your cook go to the market? — lie 
goes there every morning. — Can you speak to the nobleman ? — I 
can speak to him everyday. — Can I see your father? — You can 
see him every evening. — At what o'clock can I see him ? — You 
can see him every evening at eight o'clock. — Will you come to me 
to-day? — I cannot come to you to-day, but to-morrow. — At what 
o'clock will you come to-morrow ? — I will come at half past eight. — 
Can you not come at a quarter pas* eight? — I cannot. — At what 
o'clock does your son go to the captain ? — He goes to him at a quar- 
ter before one. — At what o'clock is your friend at home ? — At 
midnight. 

Exercise G3. 

Have you a mind to go out ? — I have no mind to go out. — When 
will you go out ? — I will go out at half past three. — Does your 
father wish to go out ? — He does not wish to go out ; he wishes to 
remain at home. — Are you willing to remain here, my dear friend 
(amice mi carissime, voc.) ? — I cannot remain here ; I must go to the 
warehouse. — Must you go to your brother ? — I must go to him. — 
At; what o'clock must you write'your letters ? — I must write them at 
midnight. — Do you go to your neighbor in the evening or in the 
morning? — I go to him (both) in the evening and in the morning. — 
Where are you going to now? — lam going to the play. — AVhere 
are you £oing to to-night ? — lam going nowhither ; I must remain 
at home in order to write letters. — Are vour brothers at home ? 



LESSON 36.] APPOSITION. 179 

They are not there. — Where are they ? — They are in the country. 

— Where are your friends going to ? — They are going home.' — ■ 
Has your tailor as many children as your shoemaker ? — He has 
quite as many of them. — Have the sons of your shoemaker as many 
boots as their father ? — They have more than he. — Have the chil- 
dren of our hatter as much bread as wine ? — They have more of the 
one than of the other. — Has our carpenter one more son ? — He has 
several more. — Are the Italians thirsty ? — They are thirsty and 
hungry. — Have they anything to do ? — They have nothing to do. 

— Are the children of the Irish hungry or thirsty ? — They are 
neither hungry nor thirsty, but fatigued. 

Exercise G4. 

Have you time to go out ? — I have no time to go out. — What 
have you to do at home ? — I must write letters to my friends. — 
Must you sweep your room ? — I must sweep it. — Are you obliged 
to lend your brothers money ? — I am obliged to lend them some. — 
Must you go into the garden ? — I must go thither. — At what o'clock 
must you go thither V — I must go thither at a quarter past twelve. 

— Are you obliged to go to my father at eleven o'clock at night 
(noctis) ? — I am obliged to go to him at midnight. — Where are 
the brothers of our bailiff? — They are in the great forest in order 
to cut great trees. — Have they money to buy bread and wine? — 
They have some. — Does it behoove the children of the French to go 
to the children of the English ? — It does behoove them. — Will you 
send for some wine and glasses ? — Is it lawful (licetne) for the Turk 
to remain with the Russian? — It is lawful for him to remain with 
him. — It is not wrong (non est nefas) for him to remain there. — 
Are you willing to give me some money, so that I may go for some 
bread? — I am willing to give you some, to go for some bread and 
beer. — Do your children walk out every day ? — They do walk out 
every day at eleven o'clock. — When do you walk out ? — I walk out 
every morning. — At what hour does your brother walk out ? — He 
walks out at nine. — How fir does he desire to go ? — He desires to 
go as far as Rome. — How far does he dare (ciudeo) to go into the 
water ? — He dares to go (in) up to his chest. 



Lesson XXXVI. — pexsum tricesimum 

SEXTUM. 

OF APPOSITION. 

A. Rule. — A noun added to another noun for the 
sake of explanation is put in the same case, and, if its 
form admits of it, in the same gender and number. 
Kg. 



180 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 36. 

Taurus mans. Mount Taurus. 

Tlgrdnes, rex Arme'nius. Tigranes, the king of Armenia. 

JRegina pecunia. Queen money. 

Philosophia, inve'ntrix legum, met- Philosophy, the inventrix of laics, 

gisira morum et disciplinae . the mistress of morals and disci- 
pline. 

Athenae omnium doctrinarian in- Athens, the inventrix of all the 

ventrices. sciences. 

Remarks. 

1. The noun thus added to another, for the sake of characterizing 
or describing, is said to be in apposition with it. The explanatory 
noun is called the appositum, and is commonly placed last.* 

2. Apposition may take place in the oblique cases as well as in the 
nominative. E. g. Apud Herodotum^ patrem histuriae, In Herodotus, 
the father of history. Nero Senecae, jam tunc sena/ori, in disciphnam 
trad'dus est, Xero was put under the tuition of Seneca, then already 
senator. Quid enim dlcam de thesauro omnium, memortaf What shall 
I say in regard to memory, the treasure-house of all things? 

3. A pronoun, either expressed or implied in the verb, may stand 
in place of the first noun ; as, Nos consiiles desumus, We consuls are 
remiss. Post me quaestorem, After my being qiucstor. Hoc tibi ju- 
venilis Romano, indicimus helium (sc. nos), We, the young men of 
Rome, declare this war against you. PhilosopMae mull urn adole&cens 
iemporis tribui (sc. ego), In my youth I devoted much time to the 
study of philosophy. 

4. The appositum is often of a different gender or number; as, 
Tragoedia Thyestes 1 The tragedy Thyestes. Deticiae meae, Di<n>- 
archus, Dicaearehus, my favorite authority. Aborigines, genus homl- 
num agresie, The aborigines, an uncouth race of men. 

5. A noun in apposition with two or more nouns is commonly in 
the plural; as, Cupldo atque Ira, pessvmi consulta/urcs, Desire and 
passion, the worst of advisers. Ennius ferebal duo, quae maxima pu- 
tantur onera, paupertatem et senectutem, Ennius bore two burdens, 
which are deemed the greatest, poverty and old age. 

6. Two or more Roman pramomina (of brothers, &c.) arc followed 
by the common family name in the plural: as, Cn. et P. Scipwnes, 
Cneius and Publius Scipio. Tiber'to Drusoipie yerunibus, To Tiberius 
and Drusus Xero. 

7. The appositum sometimes agrees with a genitive implied in a 
possessive pronoun ; as, Stud'tum tuum, adolescentis, pcrspexi, I have 
witnessed your zeal as a young man. Tuum, hominis simpllcis, j)ectus 
vidimus, We have seen the heart of you, simple man. 

8. A noun denoting a whole, instead of being in the genitive, is 
sometimes put in apposition with its partitive. E. g. Milltes (= mill- 

* But sometimes emphatically first, as in the last example of Rem. 2. 



LESSON 36.] APPOSITION. 181 

turn), pars victoriae jiducid, pars ignomimae dolore ad omnem UcentXam 
processerant, The soldiers, some from the confidence of the victory 
and others from the pain of the disgrace, had plunged themselves into 
excesses of every kind. Facerent, quod se dignum quisque ductrtnt, 
They might do what every one deemed worthy of himself. 

9. Adjectives used substantively, especially those of the neuter 
gender, may likewise stand in apposition ; as, Propinquum nostrum, 
Crassum, ilium diintem, laudandum pu'o, Our relative, Crassus, the rich 
(man), ought in my opinion to be praised. Batavi maclunas etiam, in- 
solttum sibi, ausi, The Batavi even dared (to employ) the war-engine, 
a thing to which they were unaccustomed. 

10. The appositum may have reference to an entire sentence, and 
vice versa; e.g. Postremo deserunt tribunal, mdnus intentantes, causam 
discordiae et initium armurum, At last they desert the tribunal, stretch- 
ing out their hands, the cause of discord and the commencement of 
hostilities. Unum certdmen erat relictum, sententXa Vulcdtii, There was 
one subject of dispute left, namely, the opinion of Vulcatius. 

11. The genitive is sometimes put instead of the appositum; as, 
Arbor fici, The fig-tree. Oppidum Antioclriae, The city of Antioch. 
Amnis Erlddni, The river Eridanus. Nomen Mercurii, The name (of) 
Mercury. But this is not so common as jiumen Phenus, terra Gallia, 
mons Avenna, oppidum Gendbum, &c. 

12. The ablatives urbe, oppido, &c. are sometimes found in appo- 
sition with the name of a town in the genitive ; as, Corinthi, Achatae 
urbe, At Corinth, a city of Achaia. 

13. After expressions like est (dalur, inditur,impomtur) mild nomen, 
" I am called," u my name is," the proper name is sometimes by at- 
traction put in apposition with the dative of the pronoun (mihi, &c), 
rather than with nomen or cognomen; as, Scipio, cui postea Africano 
cognomen ex virtute f&it, Scipio, who afterwards was surnamed Afri- 
canus from his valor. Tibi nomen insdno posuere, They gave you the 
name of an insane man. But also Fonli nomen Arethusa est, The 
fountain's name is Arethusa, &c. 

14. The appositum is sometimes introduced by vt, velut, quasi, tan- 
quam (= " as," " as if," " like "), quami-is, or ceu ; e. g. Aegyptii canem 
et felon ut deos cdlunt, The Egyptians worship the dog and cat as 
divinities. Herodotus quasi sedatus amnis jlui!, Herodotus flows like 
a gentle stream. Filium suum, quamvis victdrem, occldit, He killed his 
own son, although victorious.* 

15. The appositum may be modified by an adverb; as, C. FlamX- 
ntus, consul iterum, C. Flaminius a second time consul. Poptilum late 
regem, A people ruling (lit. king) far and wide. 

* Pro victis, as conquered; legatdrum numero, as legate? ; praedae nomine, 
as booty, — occur in the same construction. So also^ro consule; as, {Ego) pro 
consiile Athenas veneram, 1 had come as proconsul to Athens. 

16 



182 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LES80X 36. 

C Vendo, ere, didi, dltum. 
To sell. < Divendo, &c. (in small quantities). 

( (alicui aliquid). 
_ „ < Dlco, ere, xi, ctum. 

To say, affirm. | Mq . inquam (defective). 

B. Obs. Aio (djo), I say, affirm, and dlco, I say, are op- 
posed to nego, I deny. Aio and inquam are defective verbs, 
and are chiefly used *in citing the language of another. They 
are thus inflected in the present : — 

Pres. Ixd. aio, ais, ait ; . , aiunt. 

Pres. Subj. , aias, aiat; , , aiant. 

Pres. Ixd. \ mc l Liam - - inquis, inquit ; inquimus, inqultis, inquiunt. 

Pres. Subj. . , inquiat ; , . . 

What do you say (think) ? Quid ais ? 

Do you say so ? Is it possible ? Ain' (= ai'sne)* ? Am' tu ? 

What do they say ? Quid aiunt ? 

They say that the city is occu- Aiunt (dicunt), urbem ab hostibus 

pied by the enemy. r teneri. 

I am delighted with Ennius, says Ennio delector, dit\ qui'splam .... 

one ; and I with Pecuvius, Peciivio, inquit alius. 



savs another. 



(Jubere (with ace. and infin.). 
Him ' 



I will tell him to do it. 



To tc!L order, direct. J Mando, are, avi. atiun. 

( (alicui aliquid or ut). 

Will you tell the servant to make Yin' jubere famulum accendere 

the fire? ignem ? 

( Jubere eum vdlo faeerc hoe. 

( Vdlo ei mandare. ut hoe faeiat. 

,,,..,, ,11,1 . i ( Vi'n' jubere fiimulum sedi)as emere? 

Will you tell the servant to buy ) y , . J ^^ ^^ ^ s 

a broom? } .^ , 

I Avill order him to buy one. Vdlo ei mandare, ut rinas emat. 

What do you desire to sell me ? Quid mini vendere cupis '? 

I wish to sell you a horse. Ciipio tibi vendere equum. 

The word. Vox, vocis, / ; voeabulum, i, n. ; 

verbum,J i, n. 

The favor. Oflicium, i, n.; gratum. 

The pleasure. Voluptas, atis.y! ; obleetatio, onis,/. 

* In familiar discourse the enclitic ne often loses its final e by Apocope. 
If the letter s precedes, this is likewise dropped, and the vowel of the syllable, 
if long, is shortened; as, jussin\ adeviV, cyon\ via (= visne), juben ( = jubcsnt), 
satin'' (= salisne), videri' (= videsne). 

f So also with ut; as ut ait, ut aiunt, as he says, Sec; ut Cicero ait, ditit, 
docet. 

X Vox is a word as spoken and heard; voeabulum, an isolated word or term; 
verbum is any part of speech, especially in connected discourse. 



LESSON 36.] CONSTRUCTION OF " OPUS EST." 183 

To give one pleasure. J Vdnpfitem afferre (alicui) . 

& L I Gratum* esse (alicui). 

( Officium praestare alicui. 
To do one a favor. •< Gratum facere alicui. 

(_ (aliqua re). 

Will you do me a favor ? Visne mihi gratum facere ? 

What one ? In what respect ? Qua re ? 

This gives me great pleasure. Hoc est mihi gratissimum. 

rr i • i. i vi (Nosco, ere, novi, notum. 

lo become acquainted with, ) n ' I '_ . 

Ll , / ' -< Lounosco, ere, novi, nitum. 

to learn to know. ) P \ 

( (aliquem, aliquid). 

To know, to be acquainted Nosse (= novisse) aliquem or ali- 

with any one or anything. quid. 

I know, thou knowest, lie knows. Novi, novisti (nosti), ndvit. 
We know, ye know, they know. Novimus, novistis, noverunt (no- 

runt). 

Do you know this man ? Novistine hnnc hdminem ? 

T t , i i • ( Eum non novi. 

1 do not know him. x -. , ,, • *, 

^ Aon est mini notus. 

Do you wish to become acquaint- Yin' eum ndscere (cogndscere) ? 

ed with him ? 

Yes, I desire to become acquaint- Ciipio vero eum ndscere (cognd- 

ed with him. scere). 

To want, need. Opus (n. indecl.) est mihi (res, 

re; aliquis, .aliquo). 

(Egeo aliqua re. 
To he in leant of. -' Indigeo alicujus, aliqua re. 

( (Cf. page 113, Obs. II) 

Do you want (need) this hat? Estne tibi opus hoc pileo (hicce 

pi'leus) ? 

C. Obs. Tlie phrase opus est, " there is need," is followed either 
by the nominative or the ablative of the person or object needed.f 

I do want (need) it. We are in ( Est mihi (eo) opus. 

want of it. { Ejus indigeo. 

w 4. / i\ i xst ( 6pus est nobis praeceptor (prae- 

A\ c want (need) a teacher. Ave: 1 ,. N l l V1 

e j. i S ceptore). 

are in want ot a teacher. ) T ,. K ' ... 

( Indigemus praeceptoris. 

Do you want as much coffee as Estne tibi opus tantum coffeae, 

sugar ? quantum saechari ? 

* This is the neuter of grains, agreeable, grateful. In phrases like these, the 
comparative and superlative, gratius, gratissimum (more agreeable, most agree- 
able), are often used. 

t In this rule is usually included iisns est, which is commonly followed by 
the ablative, but sometimes by the genitive or accusative; as. Si quid usvs sit, 
If anything j s wanting. Specula mihi usus eat, I want a looking-glass. Vims est 
hdminem astutum. 



184 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 35. 



I want more of the latter than of 

the former. 
Do you want oxen (cattle) ? 

We do not (want any). 
"We do need some (a few). 

Do you want (need) this mon- 
ey ? 
I do want (am in Avant of) it. 

I do not want it. 

Do you want (any) money ? 

I do want some (a little). 

I do not want any. 

Do you want (are you in want 

of) anything ? 

I do not want anything. 

Nor do I want anything. 
What do you want ? 
Whom are you in want of? 
I am in want of you, of him, of 

them. 
Is he in want of me ? 
He is not in want of you. 
Is he in want of his friends ? 
He is in want of them. 

Do you want these books ? 
I do want them. 

Late (adv.). 
Too late. 

Is it late ? 

Is it late in the day, in the night ? 

It is late. 

It is too late. 

What time is it ? 



Opus est mihi plus* hiijus quam 
illius. 

Num vdbis opus sunt Loves (opus 
est bobus) V 

Non sunt. 

Opus sunt nobis nonnulli (est non- 
nullis). 

Estne tibi opus hac pecunia ? 

Egesne hac pecunia ? 

Est. Egeo. 
j Non est mihi (ea) opus. 
( Ejus non indi'geo. 
\ Estne tibi opus pecunia ? 
\ Egesne pecunia. 
\ Est mihi opus aliquantulum. 
( Egeo vero aliquantula. 
j Non est mihi opus ulla. 
I Nulla egeo. 

j Num quid est tibi opus ? 
( Num aliqua re indiges ? 
j Opus est mihi nihil quidquam.f 
I Nihil indigeo. 

Neque mihi quidquam opus est. 

Quid (qua re) est tibi opus '? 

Cujiisnam indiges ? 

Indigeo tiii, ejus, illorum. 

Meine indiget ? 

Tiii non indiget. 

Indigetne amicorum suorum ? 

(Eorum) indiget. 
( Estne tibi opus his libris ? 
\ Egesne (egeV) his libris ? 
j Sunt mihi opus. 
( Egeo lis. 

Sero, serum. 

Sertus (neut. comp.), sero.% 

fetne sero ? Seriimne est ? 
Estne serum diei, ndctis ? 
Est serum (sero). 
Sero (serius) est. 
Quota hora est ? 



* Neuter adjectives or pronouns, such as tantiim, quantum, quid, hoc, Mud, 
&c. are always in the nominative after ojms. Both opus and usus are sometimes 
(though rarely) followed by the genitive or accusative; as, Temporis, cibuni ojms 
{usus) est, There is need of time, food. 

f " Nothing whatever,'' " nothing at all." 

j The adverbial ablative sero is frequently put for the comparative serius, 
too late. 



LESSON 36.] EXERCISES 65, G6. 185 

It is three o'clock. Ilora est tertia. 

It is twelve o'clock. Duodecima est h6ra. 

It is about noon. Sub (circiter) meridiem est. 

It is midnight. Media nox est. 

It is half past one. Ilora prima et dimidia est. 

It is a quarter past two. Qmidrans hdrae post seciindam est. 

It wants a quarter to three. Dddrans hdrae post seciindam est. 

Have you anything to sell ? Habesne aliquid, quod vendas (ad 

vendendum) ? 

I have nothing to sell. Nihil habeo, quod vendam. 

I have these things to sell. Haec habeo, quae vendam. 

Exercise Go. 

Will you do me a favor ? — Yes, sir ; what one ? — Will you tell 
your brother to sell me his horse ? — I will tell him to sell it you. — ■ 
Will you tell my servants to sweep my large rooms ? — I will tell 
them to sweep them. — Will you tell your son to come to my father ? 

— I will tell him to came to him. — Do you wish to tell me anything ? 
(Have you anything to tell me?) — I have nothing to tell you (Non 
habeo quod tibi dicam). — Have you anything to say to my father '? — ■ 
I have a word to say to him. — Do your brothers wish to sell their 
carriage ? — They do not wish to sell it. — John (Joannes) ! are you 
here ? — Yes, sir, I am here. — Wilt thou go to my hatter to tell him 
to mend my hat? — I will go to him. — Wilt thou go to the tailor 
to tell him to mend my coats? — I will go to him. — Art thou willing 
to go the market ? — I am willing to go thither. — What has the 
merchant to sell? — He has beautiful leather gloves, combs, and good 
cloth to sell. — Has he any shirts to sell ? — He has some to sell. — 
Does he wish to sell me his horses ? — He wishes to sell them to you. 

— Who can read the tragedy of Thyestes ? — I am unable to read it, 
but my brother desires to read it. — Who is reading my book ? — 
Your scholar, my brother, is reading it. — Who wishes to sell me a 
knife ? — His friend, the baker, wishes to sell you one. — Are you in 
want of any one ? — Yes ; I am in want of your father, the merchant. 

— Whom do they praise ? — They praise our enemy, the painter. 

Exercise 66. 

What are you in want of ? — I am in want of a good hat. — Are 
you in want of this knife ? — I am in want of it. — Do you w r ant 
money ? — I want some. — Does your brother want pepper ? — He 
does not want any. — Does he want some boots ? — He does not 
want any. — What does my brother want ? — He wants nothing. — 
AVho wants some sugar ? — Nobody wants any. — Does anybody 
want money ? — Nobody wants any. — Does your father want any- 
thing ? — He wants nothing. — What do I want ? — You want noth- 
ing. — Art thou in want of my book ? — I am in want of it. — Is 
thy father in want of it ? — He is not in want of it. — Does your 
friend want this stick ? — He wants it. — Does he want these or those 
corks? — He wants neither these nor those. — Are you in want of 
16* 



186 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSOX 37. 

me ? — I am in want of thee. — When do you want me ? — At pres- 
ent. — What have you (= do you wish) to say to me '? — I desire to 
tell you something new (novum). — AVhat do you want (Quid tibi 
vis) V — I wish to speak with you. — Is your son in want of us ? — He 
is in want of you and your brothers. — Are you in want of my ser- 
vants ? — I am in want of them. — Does any one want my brother ? 

— No one wants him. 

Exercise 6 7. 

Is it late ? — It is not late. — What o'clock is it ? — It is a quarter 
past twelve. — At what o'clock does your father wish to go out *? — 
He wishes to go out at a quarter to nine. — Will he sell this or that 
horse ? — He will sell neither this nor that. — Does he wish to buy 
this or that coat ? — He wishes to buy both. — Has he one horse 
more to sell ? — He has one more, but he does not wish to sell it. — 
Has he one carriage more to sell ? — He has not one more carriage 
to sell; but he has a few more oxen to sell. — AVhen will he sell 
them ? — He will sell them to-day. — Will he sell them in the morn- 
ing or in the evening ? — He will sell them this evening. — At what 
o'clock ? — At half past five. — Can you go to the baker ? — I cannot 
go to him; it is late. — How late is it? — It is midnight. — Do you 
wish to see that man ? — I wish to see him, in order to know him. — 
Does your father wish to see my brothers ? — He wishes to see them, 
in order to know them. — Does he wish to see my horse ? — He 
wishes to see it. — At what o'clock does he wish to see it ? — He 
wishes to see it at six o'clock. — Where does he wish to see it? — 
He wishes to see it in the great square. — Has the German much 
corn to sell ? — He has but little to sell. — What knives has the 
merchant to sell? — He has good knives to sell. — How many more 
knives has he? — He has six more. — Has the Irishman much more 
wine ? — He has not much more. — Hast thou wine enough to drink ? 

— I have not much, but enough. — Art thou able to drink much 
wine ? — I am able to drink much. — Canst thou drink some every 
day ? — I can drink some every morning and every evening. — Can 
thv brother drink as much as thou ? — He can drink more than I. 



Lesson XXXVII. — PENSUM TRICESIMUM 

SEPTBIOI. 

AGREEMENT OE ADJECTIVES. 

A. Rule. — An adjective, adjective pronoun, or par- 
ticiple agrees with its substantive in gender, number, 
and case. E. g. 

Amicus certus. A sure friend. 

Sprela gloria. Disdained glory. 



LESSON 37.] AGREEMENT OF ADJECTIVES. 187 

Gramen viride. The green grass. 

/ Te'rrae sitientis. Of the thirst// earth. 

Monies alii. High mountains. 

Columnas nitXdas. Shining columns. 

Malorum impendentium. Of impending evils. 

Diebus praeterltis. In dags past. 

Remarks. 

1. All adjectives may generally be employed in two distinct rela- 
tions, a) They are either directly connected with the substantive 
as its attributes ; as, vir Justus, dies praeteritae ; or, b) they are linked 
to it by the copula sum, and constitute the predicate ; as, vir est Justus, 
dies praeteritae sunt. The former of these relations is called the 
attributive and the latter the predicative. 

2. Adjectives* in the predicative relation have in general the same 
agreement as those in the attributive. (Cf. Less. XXXIV. B.) 

3. Personal pronouns may have adjectives in agreement with them, 
like nouns. The gender of the adjective is determined by that of the 
substantive represented. E.g. Ego solus, or fern. Ego sola, I alone. 
Tu carus omnibus expectatusque venies, You will be welcomed by all. 
Mis absentibus, They being absent. Dlcitur esse libera, She is said to 
be free. Miseri (fem. miserae) sumus, We are wretched. 

4. AVords not properly substantives, but employed as such (e. g. 
adverbs, infinitives, or entire clauses), may take an adjective of the 
neuter gender. Vide examples Less. XXXII. A. Rem. 3. 

5. The place of the adjective is sometimes supplied by a noun or 
adverb ; as, Victor exercitus, A victorious army. Contemptor animus, 
A contemptuous mind. Minime largltor, No profuse spender. Prae- 
clare facta, Distinguished deeds. 

6. The Romans sometimes employ an adjective in agreement with 
the subject of a sentence, where the English idiom requires an adverb 
in the predicate. E. g. Ego primus hanc orationem legi, I have read 
this oration first (= am the first that read it). Hannibal princeps 
in proelium ibat, ultimus conserto proelio excedebat, Hannibal al- 
ways was the first that entered into battle and the last that left it. 
Nullus dubito (= non dubito), I do not doubt. So chiefly domesticus 
(=domi), matutinus (==mane), nocturnus (== noctu), multus (==mul- 
tum), prior, primus, propior, proximus, solv.s, totus, ultimus, unus, &c, 
with many of which the adjective is regularly put instead of the 
corresponding adverb. 

7. When two or more adjectives, regarded as distinct, precede their 
noun, they are commonly connected by conjunctions ; but when they 
come after it, the conjunction is frequently omitted. E.g. Multi for- 
tissimi atque optimi viri, Many brave and excellent men. Unus et per- 
angustus aditus, One way of approach, and a narrow one. Oratio 

* In these remarks the term " adjective " includes adjective pronouns and 
participles. 



188 LATIX GRAMMAR. [LESSOX 37- 

composed, ornata, copiosa, An oration well arranged, elegant, and 
copious. 

8. But when one of the adjectives is so closely allied to the noun 
as to form one complex notion with it, the remaining adjectives are 
added without a conjunction. E.g. Festi dies anniversdrii, Anniver- 
sary festivals. Privata nobis onerdria maxima, A private carrying- 
ship of the largest size. Externos multos claros viros nomindrem, I 
might name many foreigners of distinction. 

9. A plural noun has sometimes two adjectives in the singular. 
E. g. Maria superum atque inferum, The upper and the lower seas 
(parts of the Mediterranean). 

10. An adjective belonging to two or more nouns is generally put 
in the plural ; as, Veneno absumpti sunt Hannibal et Philopoemen, 
Hannibal and Philopoemen were killed by poison. Liber et Libera 
Cerere nati, Bacchus and Libera born of Ceres. Xaturd inimica inter 
se sunt civitas et rex, The king and state are naturally the enemies 
of each other. Injustitiam et intemperantiam dicimus esse fugienda, 
We say that injustice and intemperance must be shunned. (On the 
sender of these adjectives, see Less. XXII. B. Compare also Less. 
XXXIV. B. 4.) 

11. A collective noun may have an adjective in the plural, which 
commonly assumes the gender of the individuals denoted by the noun. 
E. g. JIagna pars vulnerati aut occlsi, A large number killed or 
wounded. Cetera mullitudo sorte decimus quisque ad supplicium lecti 
sunt. Of the remaining multitude every tenth man was doomed to 
punishment by lot. 

12. Adjectives and pronouns are frequently put partitively in the 
neuter gender and followed by the genitive of their noun, instead of 
agreeing with it in case ; as, Multum operae. Much attention (study). 
Minus viae, Less of the journey. Dimidium pecuniae. Half the money. 
Hoc lilterarum, This letter. Hoc solatii, This consolation. Ad id lo- 
corum, To that time. Quid causae est?* "What is the reason? Also 
in the plural : Sublta belli, The surprises of war. Summa pectoris, 
The upper part of the chest. Occulta templi. The recesses of the 
temple. Strata viarum saxea, The stone pavement of the streets. 
(Compare Lessons XVIII. -XXffl.) 

13. An adjective used partitively and followed by the genitive plural 
of the genus or entire number commonly assumes the gender of that 
genitive ; as, Animalium alia ratione expertia sunt, alia ratione uientia, 
Of animals, some are destitute of reason and others enjoying it. Mul- 
tae istarum arboruin mea maiiu sunt sdtae, Many of these trees were 
planted by my hand. 

14. When a partitive is followed by the genitive singular of a col- 
lective noun, it takes the gender of the individuals implied in it ; as, 

* But this can only be done in the Xom. and Ace. In the remaining cases 
the adjective agrees with the noun: as, imdtd opera (Abl.), hide solatia, minore 
rid, harum lilterarum. (Compare Lesson XXXVIII. A. 6.) 



LESSON 37.] AGREEMENT OF ADJECTIVES. 



180 



Primus Romani generis, The first of the Roman nation. Ceteri nostri 
oi'dinis, The rest of our order. Nee est quisquam gentis ullius, Nor is 
there any one of any nation. 

15. Possessive pronouns, being considered the representatives of 
personal pronouns in the genitive, sometimes take another pronoun, 
adjective, or participle in the genitive ; as, Nostra ipsorum amicitia, 
Our own friendship. In unius mea salute, On my safety alone. 
Nomen meum absentis, My name while absent. Suo solius perlculo, 
At his own peril. Vestrae paucorum laudes, The praises of you 
few. 

16. In exclamations and addresses the adjective is sometimes in the 
vocative instead of the nominative, and vice versa : as, Quo moriture 
ruis ? Where are you rushing to, dying man ? Pufe, mihi fruslra 
credite amice! O Rufus ! in vain believed my friend. Projice tela 
manu, sanguis mens ! Cast away your weapons, my son ! Kovus anne, 
veni ! Come, new year, come ! 

17. Adjectives of the neuter gender, singular and plural, are some- 
times used as adverbs. E. g. Id multum j'aciebam, I practised that a 
good deal. Qui multa deos venerati sunt, Who besought the gods 
much and earnestly. Inde Pomam, recens condl/am, commigravit, He 
thence emigrated to Rome, then recently founded. Dormlvit altum, 
He slept profoundly. 



The pain, aclie. 
The violent pain. 

The evil, misfortune, 
Bad, wicked. 



Bad, sad (of circumstances'). 

Bad, sick, sore. 

The tooth. 

The ear. 

The neck. 

The throat (internally'). 

The elbow. 

The back. 

The knee. 

The headache. 

The toothache. 

The earache. 

The sore throat. 

A pain in one's back. 
Sore eyes. 
A sore finger. 
The sickness, disease. 



Dolor, oris, m., or pi. dolores. 
Crucidtus, its, m. 

Malum, i, n. 

Malus, pravus, a, um ; nequam (in- 

decl.). 
Malus, a, um ; tristis, e ; asper, era, 

erum. 
Infirmus, invalidus, a, um : aesro- 

. i _ ' . o 

tans, tis; ulcerosus, a, um. 
Dens, tis, m. 
Auris, is,/! 

Collum, i, n. ; cervix, Icis,/. 
Fauces, ium,f. pi. 
Cubitum, i, n. 
Dorsum, \, n. 
Genu, us, n. 
DSlor (dolores) capitis. 
Dolor dentium. 
Dolor aurium. 
Dolor (dolores) faucium; angina, 

ae,/. 
*Notalgia, ae,/. 
Oculi invalidi or aegrotantes. 
Digitus ulcerosus. 
Morbus, i, m. 



190 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 37. 



To suffer pain from anything \ Dolel* mild dliqua res. 

(anywhere). \ Doloribus laboro, are, dvi, &c. 

Vol ore or dolorlbus dffici. 
Aegroto, are, dci, citum. 

Minus valeo, ere, ui, . 

(aliqua re). 



To be affected with pain. 

To be sick, infirm {in any respect). 



Are you affected with any pain ? 
I am affected, sir. 



Ilav 



ou a sore 



rim 



Afliceri'sne aliquo dolore ? 

AffL-ior, vero quidem, ddmine. 
f Doletne tibi digitus ? 
{ Laborasne di'gito ? 

Ddlet. Laboro. 

Laboriitne puerculus trius faucium 
doloribus ? 

immo vero altero dculo aegrotat. 

Nos oculoruni infirniitate labora- 
mus. 

Altero pede aegrotat (minus valet). 
( Ddlent lis dentes. 
\ Dentium dolorlbus afficiuntur. 
^ Habesne capitis doldres V 
~! Doletne tibi caput V 
( Laborasne capitis doloribus ? 

Habeo. Ddlet. Laboro. 

Notalgia affieitur '? 

Ndn afficitur. 

veni, ventum. 
peri, pertum. 

B. Obs. Invenire is to find without any special effort or 
design ; reperire, on the other hand, involves the idea of labor, 
of difficulty and obscurity. 

Reperisne, quod quaeris ? 



I have (a sore finger) . 

Lias your little boy a sore throat ? 

No ; he has a sore eye. 

\Ye have sore eyes (suffer from 

weak eyes). 
He has a sore foot. 

They have the toothache. 

Have you the headache ? 

I have it. 

Has he a pain in his back ? 

He has none. 



To find. 



\ Invenio, ire, ve 
| Reperlo, ire, p\ 



Do you find what you are look- 
ing for '? 

I do find what I am looking for. 

He does not find what he is look- 
ing for. 

Do we find what we are looking 
for V 

You do not find what you are 
looking for. 

Have you what you want ? 

I have not what I want. 

I find what you are finding. 

To learn. 



It 



eperio, quod quaero. 
Rem, quam quaero, reperio. 
Xon reperit, quod quaerit. 



Reperinmsne quod quaerimus ? 

Non reperitis, quod quaeritis. 

Habesne quod tibi opus est ? 
Xon habeo, quod mihi opus est. 
Quod invenis, id et ego invenio. 
f Disco, ere, d'idici, disciturus f (ali- 

\ QUID AB Or DE ALIQUO). 



* From doleo. ere, ui. 

t The verbs discere and studere have no supine, but of the former a parti- 



ciple in urus exists. 



LESSON 37.] PHRASES AND EXERCISES. 



191 



rr, , , i , ,f. , C Studeo, ere, ui, (alicui rei). 

To study, to apply one s self to, ) ^^ ^re (alicui rei). J 



to learn (anything), 



15 



iscere (aliquid). 



rp , -. , ,, i ,- ( Operam dare littens. 

lo study letters, apply ones sell ) e , x ,_ ,„.,..,_. 

t ,., ^ L ' 1 *7, J ^ -< Studere optimis disciphnis atque 



to literature and the arts. 

To learn one's letters. 

I learn to read, write, speak. 

To learn a language. 

To know a language. 
The language. 
Latin. 
French. 

English. 
German. 

Are you learning Latin ? 
I am learning it, sir. 
How many languages does he 
know '? 

He knows all the languages. 

Do you know Latin, Greek, 

English ? 
Are you learning to speak Latin ? 
I am learning to read, write, and 

speak Latin. 
Do they desire to learn English ? 

They do not desire it. 

Who is studying letters ? 

The young men are studying the 

liberal arts and sciences. 
What are you doing ? 
I am studying the Latin language 

and literature. 
Can the boy read German ? 



Pie cannot do it yet, but he is 
learning it. 



( artibus. 

Primas litteras discere. 

Disco legere, scribere, loqui. 

Linguain liliquam discere (edi- 
scere*). 

Linguam scire ; linguae sciens esse. 

Lingua, ae, f.\ sermo, onis, m. 

Latlnus, a, um ; ado. Latine. 

Francogallicus, a, um ; ado. Fran- 
cogallice. 

Anglicus, a, um ; adv. Anglice. 

Germanlcus, a, um ; adv. Germa- 
nic e. 

Diseisne linguam Latinam ? 

Vero, ddmine, disco. 

Quam multas scit linguas ? 

6 nines linguas scit. 
Linguarum omnium sciens est. 
Scisne Latine, Graece, Anglice ? 

Diseisne loqui Latine ? 

Ego Latine legere, scribere atque 
loqui edisco. 

Cupiiintne discere linguam Angli- 
cam ? 

Ndn cupiunt. 

Quis operam dat litteris ? 

Adolescentuli optimis disciplinis 
atque artibus operam dant. 

Quid agis ? 

Litteris Latinis studeo (operam 
do). 

Potestne (scitne) piier legere Ger- 
man ice ? 

Ndndum potest, at discit. 



Exercise 68. 

Where is your father ? — He is at home. — Does he not go out ? — 
He is not able to go out : he has the headache. — Hast thou the head- 
ache ? — I have not the headache, but the earache. — What day of 



Ediscere is to learn thoroughly, to learn by heart. 



192 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 37. 

the month is it to-day ? — It is the twelfth to-day. — What day of the 
month is to-morrow ? — To-morrow is the thirteenth. — What teeth 
have you ? — I have good teeth. — What teeth has your brother ? — 
He has bad teeth. — Has the Englishman the toothache ? — He has 
not the toothache ; he has a sore eye. — Has the Italian a sore eye '? 

— He has not a sore eye, but a sore foot. — Have I a sore finger ? — 
You have no sore finger, but a sore knee. — Will you cut me some 
bread ? — I cannot cut you any ; I have sore fingers. — Will anybody 
cut me some cheese ? — Nobody will cut you any. — Are you looking- 
for any one ? — I am not looking for any one. — Has any one the 
earache ? — No one has the earache. — What is the painter looking 
for ? — He is not looking for anything. — Whom are you looking for ? 

— I am looking for your son. — Who is looking for me ? — No one 
is looking for you. — Dost thou find what thou art looking for ? — I 
do find what I am looking for; but the captain does not find what he 
is looking for. 

Exercise 69. 

Who has a sore throat ? — We have sore throats. — Has any one 
sore eyes ? — The Germans have sore eyes. — Does the tailor make 
my coat ? — He does not make it ; he has a pain in his back. — Docs 
the shoemaker make my shoes ? — He is unable to make them ; he 
has sore elbows. — Does the merchant bring us beautiful purses {mar- 
supia) ? — He cannot go out ; he has sore feet. — Does the Spaniard 
find the umbrella which he is looking for ? — He does find it. — Do 
the butchers find the sheep which they are looking for ? — They do 
find them. — Does the tailor find his thimble ? — He does not find it. 

— Dost thou find the paper which thou art looking for ? — I do not 
find it. — Do we find what we are looking for ? — We do not find 
what we are looking for. — What is the nobleman doing ? — He does 
what you are doing. — What is he doing in his room ? — He is read- 
ing. — How many languages does your brother know ? — He knows 
only one. — Do they find what they are looking for ? — They do not 
find (it). — Does our master suffer from weak eyes ? — He does suffer 
(from them). — Are you troubled with a pain in your back? — I am 
not troubled. 

Exercise 70. 

Art thou reading ? — I am not reading. — Do the sons of the noble- 
man study ? — They do study. — What are they studying? — They 
are studying German. — Art thou studying English? — I have no 
time to study it. — Are the Dutch looking for this or that ship? — 
They are looking for both. — Is the servant looking for this or that 
broom ? — He is neither looking for this nor that. — Who is learning 
German ? — The sons of the captains and those of the noblemen are 
learning it. — When does your friend study French ? — He studies it 
in the morning. — At what o'clock does he study it ? — He studies it 
at ten o'clock. — Does he study it every day ? — He studies it every 
morning and every evening. What are the children of the carpenter 
doing ? — They are reading. — Are they reading German ? — They 



LESSON 33.] ADJECTIVES USED SUBSTANTIVELY. 193 

are reading French; but we are reading English. — What books does 
your son read ? — He reads French books. — What book are you 
reading ? — I am reading a German book. — Do you read as much as 
I ? — I read more than you. — Does your father read the same book 
which I read ? — He is not reading that which you read, but that 
which I read. — Does he read as much as I ? — He reads less than 
you, but he learns more than you. — Do you lend me a book? — I 
do lend you one. — Do your friends lend you any books ? — They do 
lend me some. 



Lesson XXXVIII. — pensum duodequadra- 

GESIMUM. 

A. Bule. — Adjectives, adjective pronouns, and par- 
ticiples are often employed independently, especially in 
the plural, either with or without a noun understood. 
E.g. 

Bdni, mali, ddcti, diviies, pari- Tlie good, the bad, the learned, the 

peres ; amdntes. rich, the poor ; lovers. 

Mei, iui, sui, ndstri, vestri. My, thy, his, our, your friends, 

men, &c. 
Bdnum, malum, verum, justum. The good, the bad, the true, the 

just. 
Bona, mala, vera, falsa, acerba, Good, bad, true, false, bitter, un- 
indigna. worthy things. 

Remarks. 

1. With plurals denoting persons homines is commonly supplied.* 
So with omnes, pauci, plerique, nonnulli, &c. But the possessives mei, 
iui, &c. have reference to amici, milXtes (men, soldiers), cives (citi- 
zens). With immortales the word dii is understood. 

2. Adjectives of the singular number denoting persons usually have 
vir or homo expressed with them ; as, vir doctus, bonus, Justus ; homo 
pauper, dices, improbus, &c. They sometimes, however, appear alone 
in all the cases. E. g. Sapiens, dives, socius, nupta, a wise man, a rich 
man, an. ally, a married woman. Quid interest inter doctum et rudeml 
What is the difference between an educated and an ignorant man ? 
Quid minus libero dignum ? What can be more unworthy of a free 
man? 

3. With adjectives denoting objects, various words are understood ; 
as, Dextra, sinistra (sc. manus), the right hand, left hand. Ferina, 
agnlna,bubula, porclna (sc.caro), Venison, lamb, beef, pork. Callda, 

* And not unfrequently expressed, as in Homines Bomdni, Roman men. 
Homines adolescentuli, voung men, &c. 

M 17 



194 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 38. 

frigida (sc. aqua), Warm, cold water. Tertidna, quartdna (sc. febris), 
The tertian, quartan fever. Decumdna (sc. pars), The tenth part. 
Primae (sc. partes), The first part or role, lliberna, aestiva (sc. ca- 
stra), The winter, summer quarters. In Tuscula.no (sc. praedo), At 
the country-seat Tusculanum. Brevi (sc. tempore), In a short time ; 
and also ex quo, ex eo, ex Mo (sc. tempore, which is frequently un- 
derstood), &c, &c. 

4. Of adjectives used substantively, those of the neuter gender are 
the most common. The singular denotes either an abstract quality or 
an individual act or object ; as, bonum, malum, verum, the good, bad, 
true (or something good, bad, true) ; commune, dictum, factum, some- 
thing in common, something said, done (— a saying, deed). So the 
pronouns hoc, Mud, quid, aliquid ; and quantum, tantum, multum, &c. 

5. The plural of neuter adjectives used substantively indicates a 
diversity of things of the same quality ; as, bona, mala, vera, falsa, 
multa, omnia, reliqua, good, bad, true, false, many, all, the remaining 
things (the rest, remainder). Dicta, facia, things said, done, i. e. 
words uttered, actions. So also liaec, ilia, quae, aliqua, these, those, 
which, some things.* 

6. Neuter adjectives can thus be used substantively in the nomi- 
native and accusative only. In the remaining cases the feminine of 
the adjective with res is commonly employed, to prevent ambiguity. 

• Thus cujus rei, hac de re, alicui rei, ulla in re, bonarum rerum, omnibus 
in rebus,j &c. 

7. Adjectives used substantively may have other adjectives in 
agreement with them ; as, mens natalis (sc. dies), My birthday. 
Paternus inimlcus, A paternal enemy. Nova nupta, A newly married 
woman. Summum bonum, The chief good. Praecldrum respjonsum, 
A famous reply, Prdva facta,% Depraved actions. 

8. A number of words originally adjectives have acquired the rank 
of substantives; as, juvenis, adolescens, amicus, familiar is, comes, vict- 
ims, statudrius, artifex, index, particeps ; summa (a sum), confuens 
(junction of rivers) ; Grammatica, Rhetorica, Statudria (sc. ars), &c. 

9. Additional Examples of adjectives used as substantives are : — 
Fortes creantur forftbus et bonis, The brave are made for the brave 
and good. Plerlque vana mirantur, The majority of men are capti- 
vated by vanity. § Erubescunt pudiei etiam impudlca loqui, The 
chaste || blush even to utter unchaste things. Aiunt multum legendum 

* With many of these neuters the English words thing, tilings may he sup- 
plied. Sometimes, however, the sense requires other words, such as place, 
part, respect, property. &c. 

t This use of res extends to all the cases, and the Romans often say res ea, 
nulla res, rem aliquam, rem dijficilem, res bonae, malae, &c. 

t Participles of the neuter gender sometimes take an adverb instead of au 
adjective; as, bene, crudellter facta, acute responsa, facete dictum, &c. 

§ The plural of these neuter adjectives is frequently rendered by the sin- 
gular. 

|| In general propositions including both sexes, the adjective is always mas- 
culine; as here furies, pkinque, jrndici, &c. 



LESSON 38.] TATRIAL ADJECTIVES AND ADVERBS. 195 



esse non multa, They say that we ought to read much, not many 
things. Quis rem tarn veterem pro certo affirmet ? Who can assert a 
tiling so old as a certainty ? Idcirco abestis, ut in tuto sitis, You are 
absent in order to be safe. Amicorum omnia sunt communia, Friends 
have everything in common. Ita comprobabis divina praedicta, Thus 
you will confirm the divine prediction. Nihil addo de meo,* I add 
nothing of my own. 



The Pole. 
The Roman. 
The Greek. 
The Arab. 
The Athenian. 
The Syrian. 



Polonus, i, m. 
Roman us, i, m. 
Graecus, Grajus, i, m. 
Arabs, is, m. 
Atheniensis, is, in. 
Syrus, Syrlus, i, m. 



B. The patrials or gentiles of the Latin language are either 
derived from the proper names of countries, or else they are 
themselves the roots for the formation of the latter. 

1. The majority of patrials are primitives, from which the name of 
the country is formed by annexing ia to the root ;f as, Arabs — Arabia, 
Areas — Arcadia, Gallus — Gallia, Italus — Italia, Thrax — Thracia. 

2. The patrials derived from names of countries are generally ad- 
jectives, with one of the terminations anus, as (gen. atis), ensis (ien- 
sis), inus (enus),tcus (idcus, aicus), and ius. E. g. Boma — Romanus, 
Arpinam — Arpinas, Athenae — Atheniensis, Thebae — Thebaicus, 
Aegyptus — Aegyptiacus, Tarentum — Tarentinus, Cyprus — Cyprius. 

3. From patrial adjectives in us, a, urn, adverbs are formed, by 
changing that termination into e. The following may serve as ex- 
amples : — 

Adjective. Adverb. 

a - i ( Hispaniensis, ) TT . „ _ 

S P ams]l - illispanicus, J Hispanice. 

Italian. Italieus, Itallce. 

Polish. Polonicus, Polonice. 

Russian. Russicus, Russlce. 

Latin. Latinus, Latine. 

Greek. Graecus, --Graece. 

Arabic. Arabicus, Arabice. 

Syriac. Syriacus, Syriace. 

Persian. Persicus, Persice. 

Egyptian. Aegyptiacus, Aegyptiace. 



* The neuter singular of all the possessives (meum, fuum, swum, nostrum, ve- 
strum) is thus employed to denote possession, like the English " mine," " my 
own/' &c. 

t The root of a noun is found in the genitive singular by separating the 
case-termination; as Arabs, gen. Arab-is; Areas, gen. Arcad-is; Gallus, gen. 
Gall-i; Thrax, gen. Thrac-is, &c. 



196 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 33. 

****■ flanScus,} S — «,. 

Turkish. Turcicus,^ Turcice. 

Are you a Roman ? Esnc tu Romanus ? 

No, indeed, I am an American. Minime vero ; Americanus sum. 
Is he a shoemaker ? Suto'rne est file ? 

No, he is a tailor. Non vero ; sartor est. 

Are you mad ? Niim es insanus ? 

No, surely, no. Non hercle vero. 

Do you know Spanish ? S^isne Hispanice ? 

I do know it. I do not. Scio. Haud scio. 

The fool. (Homo) stultus, fatiius. 

The mouth. Os, gen. oris, n. ; dim. osculum, i, n. 

The memory. Memoria, ae,/ 

A good, excellent, weak memory. Memoria tenax (-aeis), singularis, 

infirma. 

To have a good memory. Valere* memoria. 

To have a bad memory. Parum (minus) valere memoria. 

To have an excellent memory. Multum valere memoria. 

Blue. Caeruleus, violaceus, glaucus, a, 

urn. 
Black. Ater, atra, atrum ; niger, gra, grum. 

To have, to be furnished or en- Praeditum, instruction, orndtum esse 
domed with anything. aliqua re. 

TT . n j. ( Memoria singulari praeditus est. 

He has an excellent memory. ^ ru , r ° K ._ 

J I Multum valet memoria. 

n{ t ii ( Oc.-ulis glaiicis drnata est. 

She has blue eves. ■< n n ± t 

J I Caeruleaf est. 

He has a small mouth (is a man j Ore parvulo instructus est. 

of small mouth). ( Vir est oris parvi. 

rr i o ( Valesne memoria ? 

Have you a good memory i A -r> ,.., ■. , _ , ._ 

J & I " raeditusne es bona memoria i 

T i n ' i S Multum valeo memoria. 

1 have an excellent memory. < c . i , • ,._.,. 

( Singulari memoria instructus sum. 

tvt T1 it/ i\ S framo vero parum valeo memoria. 

No, 1 have a bad (weak) memory. < ,«■ , . . ! r , 

v y ' ( Memoriae lnnrmae sum. 

To play, sport. Ludo, ere, usi, usum (neut.). 

To hear, listen. Audlre, auscidtare. 

[Loco, in locum alicujus. 
Instead of, in place or in lieu of) Vice, in vicem, vicem rei or ali- 
(any one). } cu.ius. 

I Pro, with the AW. 



* From valeo, ere, id,—, "I am sound, strong," with the ablative "with 
respect to." 

f Caeruleus, used substantively, a blue-eyed man, and the fem. here a 
woman. 



LESSON 38.] CONSTRUCTION OF "INSTEAD OF.' 



197 



Instead or in place of my father. Loco patris, in vicem patris, pro 

patre. 

Instead of salt, sugar, &c. Salis, sacchari vice. 

Instead of me, thee, us, you. Meam, tiiam, ndstram, restrain vi- 

cem. 

Instead of him, them. In locum (vicem) ejus, eorum. 

C. Obs. The English instead of, when it relates to persons 
or things in the sense of in lieu of, in the place of, is in Latin 
expressed by loco, vice, or pro ; but when it limits the meanino- 
of a verb, the formulas tantum abest ut .... at, non modo non 
.... sed etiam, magis (jtotius) quam, and quum debeam * must 
be employed. 

Do you play instead of studying f °^°*% ? d ° ™& (P° tius > 

Crather than stud v, when you 4 T v Vu • , ia 

ouirht to studw) ? J Ll ; (1 i sn ^' <l uum lltteris studere de ~ 



I study instead of playing. 

So far from playing, I am study- 
ing. 

I not only do not play, but I 
even study. 

This boy speaks instead of listen- 
ing (when he ought to listen) . 

This boy is so far from listening, 
that he even talks. 



To listen or attend to any one. 

To listen or attend to anything. 

Not to listen to (care for) any- 
thing. 

Whom are you hearing (listen- 
ing, to) ? 

I am listening to the speaker. 

Will you listen to (i. e. obey) 

mp '? 



6peram do litteris, po'tius quam 

ludo. 
Tantum abest, ut ludam, ut dperam 

de'm litteris. 
Non mddo non ludo, sed litteris 

etiam stiideo. 
Piier iste loquitur, quum auscultare 
debeat. 
f Tantum abest, ut piier iste aiidiat, 
) ut loquatur. 

] Piier iste non mddo non audit, sed 
[_ etiam loquitur. 

( Audlre aliquem. 
■1 Auscultare alicui.-\ 
( Alicui aures dare. 

Audlre aliquid. 

Observare aliquid. 

Non curare aliquid. 

Quem aiidis ? 

Cui das aiires ? 
( Oratorem audio. 
\ Aiires do oratdri. 

Visne mihi auscultare ? 



* Tantum abest, ut ... . tit, I am so far from .... that rather. Non modo 
non .... sed etiam, not only not .... but even. 3/agis (potius) .... quam, 
rather than. Quum (cum) debeam, when I ought. The student should notice 
that the ut of the first formula, and the quum of the last, require the subjunc- 
tive. See the examples. 

t Auscultare conveys the secondary notion of deference or obedience. 



17* 



198 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 38. 



Auclisne (observasne), quod (quae) 
praeceptor tibi dicat (imperet) ? 
Audio (observo). 
Mihi ausciiltat. 
Omnia quae ei dicam, observat. 

Id quod, ea quae. 
Quod, quae. 

Quae praeceptor ei imperat, non 
curat. 
( Emendo, are, avi, atum. 
< Corrigo, ere, rexi, rectum. 
( (aliquid). 

5 Sumo, ere, mpsi, mptum. 
Capio, ere, cepi, captum. 
(aliquid). 
( Aufero, ferre, abstuli, ablatum. 
■< Tollo, ere, sustuli, sublatum. 
( (aliquid). 
( Exuo, ere, ui, utum. 
( Detraho, ere, xi, ctum. 
\ Exuere se vestibus. 
( Detrahere sibi vestes. 
( Detrahere pedibus calceos. 
( Excalceare pedes. 
j Detrahere capiti pileum. 
( Nudare caput. 

Emendasne (comgisne) epistolam 

tiiam ? 
Sane quid em, earn emendo. 
( Exui'tne se vestibus ? 
( Detrahitne sibi vestes ? 
Exuit. Detrahit. 
Exiiimus nos vestibus. 
( !Exiio me toga. 
1 Detraho mihi tdgam. 
j Detrahisne tibi calceos ? 
( Excalceasne pedes ? 
No ; I am taking off my hat. Non vero ; pileum detraho capiti. 

What is the servant taking away ? Quid aiifert servus ? 
He is carrying away the chairs. Sellas (aufert). 
Do you wish me a good morning ( Jubesne me salvum esse (saUere) ? 

(good day, good evening). ( Salutasne me mane, ve'speri ? 
Good morning (day, evening). Salve ! * Plur. Salvete ! 

To salute any one, to bid or wish ( ^! utEre ali ^ uem - , ,-. 

one good morning, &c. j Ahquem salvum esse (salvere) 

° °' ( jubere. 



Do you listen to what the teacher 

tells you ? 
I do listen to it. 

He listens to what I tell him. 

That which. 

What (= that wliicli) . 

He does not listen to (observe) 
what the master tells him. 

To correct. 



To take. 

To take away. 

To take off, pull off. 

To take off one's clothes. 

To take off one's shoes. 

To take off one's hat. 

Are you correcting your letter ' 

Yes, I am correcting it. 

Does he take off his clothes ? 

He is taking them off. 

We are taking off our clothes. 

I am taking off my coat. 

Are you taking off your shoes ? 



* This was the common formula for any time of the day. 



LESSON 38.] EXERCISES 71, 72. 199 

Exercise 71. 

Do you speak Spanish ? — No, sir, I speak Italian. — Who speaks 
Polish ? — My brother speaks Polish. — Do our neighbors speak 
Russian ? — They do not speak Russian, but Arabic. — Do you speak 
Arabic ? — No, I speak Greek and Latin. — What knife have you ? 

— I have an English knife. — What money have you there ? — Is it 
Italian or Spanish money ? — It is Russian money. — Have you an 
Italian hat ? — No, I have a Spanish hat. — Are you a German ? — 
No, I am an Englishman. — Art thou a Greek ? — No, I am a Span- 
iard. — Are these men Poles ? — No, they are Russians. — Do the 
Russians speak Polish ? — They do not speak Polish, but Latin, 
Greek, and Arabic. — Is your brother a merchant ? — No, he is a 
joiner. — Are these men merchants '? — No, they are carpenters. — 
Are we boatmen ? — No, we are shoemakers. — Art thou a fool ? — 
I am not a fool. — What is that man ? — He is a tailor. — Do you 
wish* me anything ? — I wish you a good morning. — What does the 
young man wish me ? — He wishes you a good evening. — Whither 
must I go ? — Thou must go to our friends to wish them a good day. 

— Do your children come to me in order to wish me a good evening ? 

— They come to you in order to wish you a good morning. 

Exercise 72. 

Does the man listen to what you are telling him ? — He does listen 
to it. — Do the children of the physician listen to what we tell them ? 

— They do not listen to it. — Dost thou listen to what thy brother 
tells thee ? — I do listen to it. — Do you go to the theatre ? — I am 
going to the storehouse instead of going to the theatre. — Are you 
willing to listen to me ? — I am willing to listen to you, but I cannot ; 
I have the earache. — Does thy father correct my notes or thine ? — 
He corrects neither yours nor mine. — Which notes does he correct ? 

— He corrects those which he writes. — Does he listen to what you tell 
him ? — He does listen to it. — Do you take off your hat in order to 
speak to my father ? — I do take it off in order to speak to him. — 
Does thy brother listen to what our father tells him ? — He does listen 
to it. — Does our servant go for some beer ? — He goes for some vin- 
egar instead of going for some beer. — Do you correct my letter ? — 
I do not correct it ; I have sore eyes. — Does the servant take off his 
coat in order to make a fire ? — He does take it off. — Do you take 
off your gloves in order to give me money ? — I do take them off in 
order to give you some. — Does he take off his shoes in order to go 
to your house ? — He does not take them off. — Who takes away the 
tables and chairs ? — The servants take them away. — Will you take 
away this glass ? — I have no mind to take it away. — Is he wrong to 
take off his boots ? — He is right to take them off. — Dost thou take 
away anything ? — I do not take away anything. — Does anybody 
take off his hat ? — Nobody takes it off. 

* Precari (dep.) alicui aliquid, to wish any one anything. 



200 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 39. 

Exercise 73. 

Has the nobleman blue eves ? — He lias black eyes and a little 
mouth. — Hast thou a good memory ? — I have not a very good mem- 
ory (parum veiled), but my brother is endowed with an excellent one. 

— Can he write in place of his father ? — He cannot. — Do they send 
bread instead of salt ? — They send salt instead of bread. — Will you 
go to the ball in my stead '? — I cannot go in your stead. — What 
dost thou (do) instead of playing ? — I study instead of playing — 
Dost thou learn instead of writing ? — I write instead of learning. — 
What does the son of our bailiff (do) ? — He goes into the garden 
instead of going into the field. — Do the children of our neighbors 
read ? — They write instead of reading. — What does our cook (do) ? 

— He makes a fire instead of going to the market. — Does your father 
sell his ox ? — He sells his horse instead of selling his ox. — Do the 
physicians go out ? — They remain in their rooms instead of going 
out. — At what o'clock does our physician come to you ? — He comes 
every morning at a quarter to nine. — Does the son of the painter 
study English '? — He studies Greek instead of studying English. — 
Does the butcher kill oxen ? — He kills sheep instead of killing oxen. 

— Do you listen to me ? — I do listen to you. — Does your brother 
listen to me ? — He speaks instead of listening to you. — Do you lis- 
ten to what I am telling you ? — I do listen to what you are telling 
me. 



Lesson XXXIX. — pensum uxdequadrage- 

SIMUM. 

Or THE AGREEMENT OE RELATIVES. 

A. The relative qui, quae, quod agrees with its ante- 
cedent in gender and number, but its case depends upon 
the construction of the clause introduced by it. E. g. 

Ego, qui (quae) lego, scribo, loquor. I zclio read, write, speak. 

Tu, quern (qudni) diligo. Thou whom I cherish. 

Puer, quem vidisti, dequo audi- The boy whom you saw, of whom 

visti, cujus tutor es. you have heard, whose guardian 

you are. 
Pueri, quos vidisti, de quibus au- The hoys whom you saw, of whom 

divisti, quorum tutor es. you have heard, whose guardian 

you are. 
Flumen, quod appellcitur Tdmesis. The river which is called the Thames. 
Omnia, quae tibi dixi, vera sunt. All that 1 have told you is true. 



LESSON *39.] AGREEMENT OF RELATIVES. 201 

Remarks. 

1 . The word to which the relative refers, and which it serves to 
limit and explain, is called its Antecedent. This may be either a 
noun, a personal, determinative, demonstrative, or indefinite pronoun, 
or an entire sentence. 

2. The determinatives is and idem, and the demonstratives liic, Me, 
iste, &c, are called the correlatives of qui. They are either employed 
adjectively in agreement with the antecedent, or as substantives con- 
stituting the antecedent ; e. g. Loquimur de iis amicis, quos nocit vita 
communis, We are speaking of those friends, which occur in ordinary 
life. Nam cum, qui palam est ad versarius, facile cavendo vitare possis, 
For him, who is openly your adversary, you can easily avoid by being 
on your guard. 

3. The construction of the correlative pronominals tardus .... 
quantus, talis .... quails, and tot ... . quot, is the same as that of 
is ... . qui, and the remarks on the latter may in general be applied 
to them also. 

4. The relative qui may represent any one of the three persons of 
either number, and its verb agrees in person with the antecedent ; as, 
Ego, qui te confirmo, ipse me non possum, I, who am consoling you, 
am unable to console myself. Tic es is, qui me sepissime ornasti, You 
are the man who has honored me the oftenest. Nobis quidem, qui te 
amamus, erit gratum, To us at any rate, who love yon, it will be agree- 
able. Etiam is, qui omnia tenet, favet ingeniis, Even he, who now 
has the control of everything, favors genius. Eere libenter homines id, 
quod volunt, credunt, Men are always ready to believe what they de- 
sire. 

5. The clause of the antecedent commonly precedes that of the 
relative ; but this order is frequently inverted in Latin. E. g. Alale 
se res habet, cum, quod virtute ejfici debet, id tentatur pecunid, There is 
a bad state of things, when that which ought to be effected by virtue 
is attempted with money. Quam quisque norit artem, in hac se exer- 
ceat, Let every one practise the art he may have learnt. Hoc non 
concedo, ut, quibus rebus gloriemini in iwbis, easdem in aliis reprehen- 
datis, I do not concede to you the right of reprehending in others 
what you boast of in yourselves. 

6. The noun, to which the relative refers, is commonly expressed 
but once, and in the leading clause. Sometimes, however, it is re- 
peated with the relative, and agrees with it in gender, number, and 
case ; as, Tantum bellum, tarn diurnum, tarn longe lateque dispersum, 
quo bello omnes gentes premebantur, So great, so long, so wide-spread 
a war, by which all nations were oppressed. Caesar intellexit diem 
instare, quo die frumentum militibus metiri oporteret, Cassar understood 
that the day was approaching, on which the soldiers were to receive 
their allowance of corn. 

7. The noun is sometimes expressed with the relative only, and 
understood in the leading clause. This is especially the case when 
the logical order of the clauses is inverted, as in Rem. 5. E. g. Accu- 



202 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 39. 

sdtor non ferendus est is, qui, quod in altero vitium repreliendit, in eo 
ipso deprehenditur, He cannot be admitted as accuser who is himself 
caught in the very vice he reprehends in another. Bestiae, in quo 
loco natae sunt, ex eo se non commovent, Wild animals do not remove 
from the locality in which they were born. Quanta vi ciuitates liber- 
tatem expetunt, tanta regno, reges defendant, Kings defend monarchies 
with the same vehemence with which states seek their liberty. 

8. The antecedent is sometimes entirely suppressed, and the rela- 
tive qui, quod stands in the sense of " he who," " what." E. g. Qui 
(= is, qui) e nuce nucleum esse vult, frangit nucem, He who wishes the 
nut to become a kernel breaks the nut. Est profecto deus, qui, quae 
(= ea quae) nos gerimus, auditque et videt, There is certainly a God, 
who hears and sees whatever we are doing. Maximum ornamentum 
amicitiae tollit, qui (= is, qui) ex ea tolllt verecundiam, He robs friend- 
ship of its greatest ornament who robs it of decorum and respect. 
So, Sunt qui dicunt, There are those who say. Sunt quos juvat, 
There are men whom it delights. Nos imitamur, quos cuique visum est, 
We imkate whomsoever it pleases us. Non liabeo quod scribam, I 
have nothing to write.* 

9. The antecedent sometimes assumes the case of the relative, and 
vice versa. This is called attraction. E. g. Naucratem (= Naucratis) 
quern convenire volui, in navi non erat, Naucratis, whom I wanted to 
find, was not in the ship. Urbem (= urbs), quam statuo, vestra est, 
The city which I am building is yours. Hac, qua (= quam) diximus, 
aetate, At the age (of life) which we have mentioned. Video me de~ 
sertum, a quibus (= ab iis, quibus) minime conveniebat, I see myself 
deserted by those to whom it was least becoming (to desert me). 
Judice quo (= quern) nosti populo, With the people, which you know, 
for a judge. 

Wet, 7iioist. HumXdus, udus, madidus, a, um. 

( Madefdcio, ere, feci, factum. 
To wet, moisten. -1 Humecto, are, aui, alum. 

I (aliquid). 

To show, point out. Monstro, are, avi, atum (alicui 

aliquid). 
To show, let see. Ostendo, ere, ndi, nsum (alicui 

aliquid). 

Will you show me your gold Visne mihi ostendere taenias tiias 

ribbons ? aiireas ? 

I am willing to show them to Vero, vdlo tibi eas ostendere. 

you. 

Are ye willing to show us the Vultisne monstrare nobis viam ? 



* So also commonly quisquis and quicuvqne ; as, Quidquid non licet, nefas 
putare debemus, ^Ve ought to consider wrong whatever is unlawful. In qiias- 
cunque partes velint, prqficisci licet, They may go in whatever direction they 
please. 



LESSON 39.] 



PHRASES AND EXERCISES. 



203 



Certainly we are willing. Sane qm'dem, non ndlumus. 

Is the boy wetting anything ? Madefacitne piier aliquid ? 

He is not wetting anything ; he Nihil madefacit, humeotat dun- 
is only moistening the hand- taxat muccinium. 
kerchief. 



Brandy. 
Tobacco. 

Smoking tobacco. 

Snuff'. 

Flour. 

Cider. 

The fruit. 

The apple. 

The pear. 

The gardener. 

The relative. 

The cousin. 

The brother-in-law (= hus- 
band's brother, wife's bro- 
ther, sister's husband). 

The husband. 

The wife. 

The handkerchief. 

The valet, servant. 



*Vmum adustum, i, n. 

*Tabacum, i, n. ; herba nicotiana, 

ae,/. 
*Tabacum fumarium, i, n. 
*Tabacum sternutatorium. 

Farina, ae,/. 

Vinim ex malis confectum. 

Pomum, i, n. 

Malum, i, n., pomum malum. 

Pirum, i, n. 

Hortulanus, i, in. 

Cognatus, i, in. ; propinquus, i, m. 

Consobrinus, i, m. ; consobrina,* 
aej/ 

Levir, i, in. ; mariti frater;f uxoris 
frater ; marltus sororis. 

Maritus, i, m. ; conjux, ugis, m. 
Uxor, oris,/ ; conjux, ugis,/. 
Sudarium, i, n. ; muccinium, i, n. 
Famulus, servus, i, in. ; minister, 



Does the servant fetch us some 

tobacco ? 
He does fetch us a little. 
Will you call (go for) your 

cousin ? 
I am willing (am not unwilling) 

to go for him. 
Are you desirous of drinking 

some of my brandy ? 
No, I would rather drink pure 

water. 

To- intend, think of. 

Do you intend to go to the ball 

to-night ? 
I do intend to go, sir. 



Apportatne nobis servus tabacum ? 

Appdrtat vero nobis aliquantulum. 
Visne tuuni consobrinum arces- 

sere ? 
Arcessere cum non nolo. 

Cupidiisne es bibendi de vino meo 

adusto ? 
immo vero ciipidus sum bibendi 

aquam puram. 

Cocfilo, are, dri, atum (ali- 
quid facere). 

Cogitasne hddie vesperi saltatum 

ire ? 
Sic est, ddmine, cdonto. 



* The Roman subdivisions of cousinship ai*e: Patruelis, m. & f., the son or 
daughter of a paternal uncle. Amitlnus, i, m. (fem. -a), maternal uncle's or 
paternal aunt's child. Sobrlnus, i, m. (fem. -a), a second-cousin. 

f Levir = mariti frater, the husband's brother. 



204 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 39. 



What do they intend to do ? Quid facere cdgitant ? 

They are intending to write Epi'stolas eonscribere cdgitant. 
letters ? 



To know. 

Not to know (to be ignorant). 



Scto, ire, Ivi, Hum. 
Nescire, non (liaud) scire. 

m • \ No, nare, navi, . 

lo swim. 1 xt-1 ----*. 

I JNatoj are, avi, atum. 

To be able (to have the j Possum, posse, potui, . 

power or opportunity). ( Queo, ire, Ivi (ii), itum. 

B. Obs. Possum is to have the physical power, or the means or 
influence to do anything, and is used in sentences of every kind. 
Queo is to have the ability or qualifications, and is only put in sen- 
tences containing a negation (non queo, nequeo). Queo is anomalous, 
and its present tense is as follows : — 



Pres. Indic. 
Sing. Queo, quis, quit, 
Plur. Quimus, quitis, queunt. 



Does this boy know Latin ? 

He does not know it. 

Or can he read French ? 

He cannot. 

Can you write an English letter ? 

I can write one. 

I cannot (am not able) to do it. 



Can you swim (do 
how to swim) V 

I do not know how. 



to go 



Where do you intend 
(think of going) ? 

I think of going into the country. 

Does your cousin wet his hand- 
kerchief ? 

He does not wet it. 

He does wet it. 

Can you drink brandy ? 

I cannot. 



Pres. Subj. 
Sing. Queam, queas, queat, 
Plur. Queamus, queatis, queant. 

!Num piier iste scit Latine (linguam 

Latinam) ? 
Non scit. Haild scit. Nescit. 
An legere potest Francogallice ? 
Non potest. Nequit. 
Potesne (scisne) scribere epistolam 

Anglice ? 
Possum. Scio. 

Facere non possum (non queo, 
nequeo). 
know J Esne tu peritus nandi. 

I Habesne scientiam nandi ? 
j Non sum peritus. 
\ Scientiam non habeo. 
Quo ire cdgitas ? 



Pus ire cdgito. 

Humectatne consobrinus tiius su- 

darium (siium) ? 
Non humectat. 
Sic est, humectat. 
Potesne bibere vinum adustum ? 
Non (haud) possum. 



Exercise 74. 

Do you intend to study Arabic ? — I intend to study Arabic and 
Syriac. — Does the Englishman know Polish ? — He does not know 
it, but he intends learning it. — Do you know how to swim ? — I do 
not know how to swim, but how to play. — Does your cousin know 
how to make coats ? — He does not know how to make any ; he is no 



LESSON 39.] EXERCISES 75, 76. 205 

tailor. — Is he a merchant ? — He is not one. — What is he ? — He 
is a physician. — Whither are you going ? — I am going into my gar- 
den, in order to speak to the gardener. — What do you wish to tell 
him ? — I wish to tell him to open the window of his room. — Does 
your gardener listen to you ? — He does listen to me. — Do you wish 
to drink some cider ? — No, I have a mind to drink some beer ; have 
you any ? — I have none ; but I will send for some. — When will you 
send for some ? — Now. — Do you send for apples ? — I do send for 
some. — Have you a good deal of water ? — I have enough to wash 
my feet. — Has your brother water enough ? — He has only a little, 
but enough to moisten his pocket-handkerchief. — Do you know how 
to make tea ? — I know how to make some. — Does your cousin listen 
to what you tell him ? — He does listen to it. — Does he know how 
to swim ? — He does not know how to swim. — Where is he going to ? 

— He is going no whither ; he remains at home. 

Exercise 75. 

Dost thou go to fetch (arcessltum)* thy father ? — I do go to fetch 
him. — May I go to fetch my cousin ? — You may go to fetch him. — 
Does your valet find the man whom he is looking for ? — He does 
find him. — Do your sons find the friends whom they are looking for ? 

— They do not find them. — When do you intend going to the ball ? 

— I intend going thither this evening. — Do your cousins intend to go 
into the country ? — They intend to go thither. — When do they in- 
tend to go thither ? — They intend to go thither to-morrow. — At 
what o'clock ? — At half past nine. — What does the merchant wish 
to sell you ? — He wishes to sell me pocket-handkerchiefs. — Do you 
intend to buy some ? — I will not buy any. — Dost thou know any- 
thing ? — I do not know anything. — What does thy cousin know ? — 
He knows how to read and to write. — Does he know German ? — 
He does not know it. — Do you know Spanish ? — I do know it. — 
Do your brothers know Greek ? — They do not know it ; but they 
intend to learn it. — Do I know English? — You do not know it; 
but you intend to study it. — Do my children know how to read Ital- 
ian ? — They know how to read, but not how to speak it. 

Exercise 76. 

Do you desire to drink brandy ? — No, I wish to drink wine. — Do 
you sell brandy ? — I do not sell any ; but my neighbor the merchant 
sells some. — Will you fetch me some tobacco ? — I will fetch you 
some ; what tobacco do you wish (to have) ? — I wish to have some 
snuff; but my friend, the German, wishes to have some smoking- 
tobacco. — Does the merchant show you cloth ? — He does not show 
me any. — Does your valet go for some cider? — He does go for 
some. — Do you want anything else (amplius) ? — I want some flour; 
will you send for some for me ? — Does your friend buy apples ? — 
He does buy some. — Does he buy handkerchiefs ? — He buys tobac- 

* Compare Lesson XLVII. A. 

18 



206 LATIN GRAMMA.K. [LESSON 40. 

co instead of buying handkerchiefs. — Do you show me anything ? — 
I show you my gold and silver clothes. — Whither does your cousin 
go *? — He goes to the ball. — Do you go to the ball ? — I go to the 
theatre instead of going to the ball. — Does the gardener go into the 
garden ? — He goes to the market instead of going into the garden. 
— Do you send your servant to the shoemaker V — I send him to the 
tailor, instead of sending him to the shoemaker. 



Lesson XL. — PEXSTBI QUADRAGESEVIUM. 

THE AGREEMENT OE RELATIVES CONTINUED. 

A. 1. When the relative refers to two or more nouns, it 
stands in the plural, and assumes the gender of an adjective 
under similar circumstances (cf. Lesson XXII. B., and Lesson 
XXXVII. A. 10). E. g. 

Pater ejus et mater, qui mortui sunt, His father and mother, who are 
dead. Arbitrum habebimus Civilem et Veledam, apud quos pacta san- 
cientur, We shall have Civilis and Veleda (a woman) as arbitrators, 
in- whose presence the compact will be ratified. Farent pletati fideique 
dii, per quae* populus Romanus ad tantum fastigii vend, The gods 
bestow their favor upon piety and faith, by which the Roman people 
has attained such eminent distinction. Duilius delectabatur crebro fu- 
nali et tibicine, quae sibl nullo exemplo prwatus sumpserat. 

2. When the antecedent is a collective noun, the relative sometimes 
assumes the gender and number of the individuals composing it. 
E. g. Caesar equitatum omnem praemittit, qui vidcant, quas in paries 
Jiostes iter faciant, Caesar sends ahead all his cavalry, to see (lit. who 
may or might see) in what direction the enemy is pursuing his wav. 
Academia, a quibus nunquam dictum est, aut calorem, aut saporem, aut 
sonum nullum esse, The Academy, by which (i.e. by the persons com- 
posing it) it was never maintained, that either heat or smell or sound 
were nonentities. 

3. If the antecedent is a proper name in apposition with a generic 
term, the relative may agree with either. E. g. Helvet'd contlnentur 
fiumine Rheno, qui (i.e. PJtenus) agrum Helvetium a Germanis dividit, 

The Helvetii are bounded by the river Rhine, which divides the 
Helvetian territory from that of the Germans. Caesar ad flumen 
Scaldem, quod (sc.flumen) infiuit in Mosam, ire constituit, Caesar re- 
solved to advance towards the river Scheldt, which empties into the 
Moselle. 



* Cf. Lesson XXII. B. 3. 



LESSON 40.] AGREEMENT OF RELATIVES. 207 

4. If a noun descriptive of the antecedent is added to the relative, 
it agrees with that noun in preference to the antecedent. E. g. Eo- 
dem anno Cumcte, quam Graeci turn urbem tenebant, capiuntur, Cuma?, 
a city "which the Greeks then occupied, was taken in the same year. 
Accidit, ut luna plena esset, qui dies maritimos aestus maximos in Oceana 
efficere consuevit, It happened to be full moon, which day usually gave 
rise to the highest tide in the ocean. Oppius negotia procured Egnatii 
Rufi, quo ego uno equite Romano familiarissime utor, Oppius is man- 
aging the affairs of Egnatius Rufus, the only Roman knight with whom 
I am on terms of intimacy. 

5. An adjective, qualifying the antecedent, is sometimes joined to 
the relative, and agrees with it in preference to the antecedent. E. g. 
Verves mittit ad Anilochum regem, rogatwn vasa ea quae pulcherrima 
apud eum viderat, Verres sent to King Antiochus, to ask him for the 
handsomest vases which he had seen at his residence. Themistocles 
de servis suis quem Jtabuit fidelissimum, ad Xerxem misit, Themistocles 
sent to Xerxes one of his servants, whom he regarded the most faith- 
ful. Consul, qui unus supererat, moritur, The only surviving consul 
is on his death-bed. This is the common construction when the ad- 
jective is a superlative, a comparative, or a numeral. 

6. When, in connection with the verb sum, or a verb of naming, 
calling, esteeming,* &c, the relative clause contains a noun of a 
different gender from the antecedent, the relative may agree either 
with that noun or with the antecedent. E. g. Est genus quoddam 
liominum, quod Helotes vocatur, There is a class of men (which 
is) called the Helots. DomicUia conjuncta, quas urbes dicimus, As- 
semblages of dwelling-houses, which we call cities. Thebae ipsae, 
quod Boeotlae caput est, Thebes itself, which is the capital of Boeotia. 
Flumen, qui provinciae ejus finis erat, The river, which was the boun- 
dary line of that province. 

7. The relative sometimes agrees with an antecedent implied in 
a possessive pronoun, an adjective, or in the context generally. E. g. 
Scauri dicendi genus ad senatoiiam sententiam, cujus ille erat princeps, 
vel maxlme aptum ridebatur, Scaurus's style of oratory seemed to be 
most admirably adapted to senatorial speaking, of which (i. e. of the 
senate) he was the princeps. lllud quidem nostrum consilium jure 
laudandum est, qui .... noluerim, That plan of mine is justly entitled 
to praise, who was unwilling, &c. Veiens helium exortum, quibus f 
Sabini anna conjunxerant, The Veian war broke out, with whom the 
Sabines had united their arms. 

8. The neuters quod and quae sometimes refer to a noun of a 
different gender, especially to res. E. g. Sumptu ne parcas ulla in re, 
quod ad valetudinem opus sit, Do not spare expense in anything which 
may be necessary for your health. Otium et abundantia earum rerum, 
quae prima mortales ducunt, Leisure and an abundance of those things, 



* Cf. Lesson XXXTV. C. 

t I. e. with the Veil implied in the adjective Veiens. 



208 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSOX 40. 

which men deem of the first importance. In sermonibus, quae nee 
possunt scribi, nee scribenda sunt, In conversations, which are neither 
to be written, nor can be written. 

9. When the antecedent is an entire sentence, or part of one, the 
relative is the neuter quod or id quod. E.g. Conclamat omnis multi- 
tudo Gallorum .... quod facere in eo consuerunt, cujus orationem ap- 
probant, All the Gauls shouted, — a thing which they were accustomed 
to do to one, whose harangue they approved. Timoleon, id quod dijft- 
cilius putatur, multo sapientius tulit secundum, quam adversam fortu- 
nam, Timoleon (did) what is considered the more difficult of the two, 
— he bore prosperity with wiser moderation than adversity. Si nos, 
id quod maxime debet, nostra patria delectat, If our country, as it es- 
pecially ought to do, inspires us with delight. 

10. The relative is sometimes employed idiomatically to denote a 
quality or species, in the sense of the English such, as, in considera- 
tion of. &c. It is thus used either alone or in connection with is or 
idem. E. g. Quae tua est prudentia, or qua es prudentid, Such is your 
prudence (in consideration of your prudence).* Ego is in Dionysium 
sum. quern tu me esse vis, I am towards Dionysius as (or what) you 
wish me to be. Nbs ii sumus, qui esse debemus, id est, studio digni ac 
litieris nostris, We are such as (or what) we ought to be, that is, 
worthy of our zeal and letters. So also, Quae tua natura est. In con- 
sideration of your natural kindness. Quod tuum est judicium de 
hominibus, Such is your knowledge of human character. Qui illius 
in te amor fu it, In consideration of his regard for you. Qua est hu- 
manitate Caesar, Such is the humanity of Cresar. 

11. Relative adjectives and adverbs follow the construction of the 
relative pronoun. E. g. Non sunt tanti idla merita, quanta insoJentia 
hominis, quantumque fastidium, Xo merits are of so much account as 
(to counterbalance) the insolence and haughtiness of man. "Nemo 
orator tam multa scripsit, quam multa sunt nostra, Xo orator has 
written as much as I have. Quot oration urn genera esse diximus, 
totidem oratorum reperiuntur, There are (found) just as many of 
orators, as we have mentioned styles of oratory. Quales in repju'blica 
principes sunt, tales reliqui solent esse dues, As are the leaders of a 
republic, so are the rest of the citizens wont to bo. Quam diu ani- 
mus remanet in nobis, tam diu sensus et vita remanet. Sensation and 
life remain in us as long as the spirit remains. Crocodilus parit ova, 
quanta anseres, The crocodile lays eggs as large as geese. 

12. The Latin relative frequently assumes the force of a demon- 
strative, and becomes equivalent to the English and this (these), since 
this, although this. &c. ; as, Quae cum ita sint. Since these things are 
so. lies loquitur ipsa, quae semper valet plurimum. The thing speaks 
for itself, and this is always the most powerful argument. Magna 
vis est conscienf'tae, quam qui neglignnt. se ipsi indicant. Great is the 
power of conscience, hence those who disregard it, betray themselves. 



Equivalent to pro tua prudentia, which also occurs in the same sense. 



LESSON" 40.] PHRASES AND EXERCISES. 209 

Oculorum est in nobis sensus acerrimus, qulbus sapicntiam non cernimus, 
Our eyesight is the keenest of all our senses, and yet wisdom is not 
discerned by it. 

The intention, design. Consilium, i, n. ; propositum, i, n. 
It is my intention, I intend (to do Propositum est mild (fdcere dli- 

anything). quid). 

It is our intention to do this. Id facere nobis est propositum. 

Does your father intend to go Cogitatne pater tuus hddie mane in 

out this morning ? publicum prodire ? 

It is his intention to do so. Propositum est ei facere hoc. 

m /■ j7 • a ( Accipio, ere, cepi, centum. 

lo receive (ani/thina sent). A -n » ~ r \ 

v J J J I Recipere (aliquid ab aliquo). 

To receive (a guest, &c). Excipere, aceipere (aliquem). 

rr i,. . , -,i cc j.n ( Consequor, i, ciitus sum. 

lo obtain, get (with eiiort). -< A ~ e / \ 

' e v ' I Assequor, &c. (aliquid). 

Who obtains the preference ? Quis consequitur principatum (pri- 

dres partes) ? 

Our friend (obtains it). Amicus ndster. 

Does he receive money, letters, Accipitne peciiniam, epistolas, li- 

books ? bros ? 

He does not (receive any). Non aceipit. 

When do you receive (enter- Quo tempore familiares tiios ex- 
tain) your friends ? cipis ? 

I receive them in the evening. Excipio eos vespere. 

The preference. PrincXpdtus, us, m. ; priores paries, 

f. pi. 

The stable. Stabiilum, i, n. 

Blind. Caecus, a, um ; oculis captus, a, 

um. 

Sick, ill. Aeger, ra, rum; aegrotus, a, um. 

To be sick or ill. Aegrotum esse, aegrotare ; laborare 

morbo (abi). 

Poor, needy. Inops, is ; pauper, eris ; egenus, a, 

um. 

To take, conduct. Duco, ere, xi, ctum (aliquem ali- 

quo, ad aliquem). 

To guide, lead one by the j Manu ducere aliquem. 
hand. ( Dare mantis alicui. 

To extinguish, put out. Extinguo, ere, nxi, nctum. 

To light, kindle. Accendo, ere, i, sum. 

rr, £ S Saccendere (rem), 

lo set on fire. < T • c / i- • -s 

( Ignem mierre (alicui rei). 

To depart, set out on a jour- Projiciscor, i, -fectus sum (dep.). 

neiJ ' 

rr rr i ( Abeo, ire, ii (Ivi), itum. 

lo go on, leave. -J 1V _ \ I v '.' 

D ( Discedo, ere, cessi, cessum. 

N 18* 



210 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 40. 

T . , „ ( Ecquis aeorohis est ? 

Is any one sick ? j ^ qufe * mdrbo - lab6rat ? 

, T . . , \ Nemo est ae<irotus. 

No one is sick. j N ^ mQ mdrb( f lab6rat 

Do you conduct any one ? Dueisne aliquem ? 

1 am conducting my good little Diico vero nliolam me'am bdnam. 

daughter. 

-r. ,, , • i xi i r i ( Ducitne caecum piier mtinu ? (Les- 

Does the boy guide the blind ) KnXXXYJS l A Rem . ^ 

man ' ( Datne piier nianus caeco V 

He does guide him. Ducit. Dat manus. 

Do you extinguish the candle ? Extinguisne candelam ? 
No, I am (on the contrary) light- tmmo vero (earn) accendo. 

ing it. 

-i-i-L x c 4. *.-[ i o ^ Q"is succendit aedes ? 

vV ho sets fire to the house i - ,\ ■ . , e . ,^, « 

( Quis ignem intert aedibus ? 

The bad man sets fire to it. Homo nequam eas accendit. 

Do you design to leave ? Estne tibi propdsitum abire (disce- 

dere) ? 

It is my design. Est mini propdsitum. 

When do you think of setting Quo tempore cdgitas proficisci ? 

out ? 

To-morrow morning. Cras mane. 

Do I set out ? Egdne proficiscor ? 

You do not set out. Non proficisceris. 

Exercise 77. 

Do your brothers intend to go into the country ? — They do intend 
to go thither. — Do you intend to go to my cousin ? — I do intend to 
go to him. — Dost thou intend to do anything? — I intend to do 
nothing. — Do you intend to go to the theatre this evening '? — I do 
intend to go thither, but not this evening. — Dost thou receive any- 
thing ? — I receive money. — From vvhom dost thou receive some ? 

— I receive some from my father, my brother, and my cousin. — 
Does your son receive books ? — He does receive some. — From 
whom does he receive some V — He receives some from me, from his 
friends and neighbors. — Does the poor man receive money? — He 
does receive some ? — From whom does he receive some ? — He 
receives some from the rich. — Dost thou receive wine ? — I do not 
receive any. — Do I receive money ? — You do not receive any. — 
Does your servant receive clothes? — He does not receive any. — 
Do you receive the books which our friends receive ? — We do not 
receive the same which your friends receive ; but we receive others. 

— Does your friend receive the letters which you write to him ? — 
He does receive them. — Do you receive the apples which I send 
you? — I do not receive them. — Does the American receive as 
much brandy as cider ? — He receives as much of the one as of the 
other. — Do the Scotch receive as many books as letters ? — They 
receive as inanv of the one as of the other. 



LESSON 40.] EXERCISES 78, 79. 211 

Exercise 78. 

Does the Englishman obtain the preference ? — He does obtain it. 
— Does your cousin receive as much money as I ? — He receives 
more than you. — Does the Frenchman receive his letters? — He 
does receive them. — When does he receive them ? — He receives 
them in the evening. — When dost thou receive thy letters ? — I 
receive them in the morning. — At what o'clock ? — At a quarter to 
ten. — Dost thou receive as many letters as 1 *? — I receive more of 
them than thou. — Dost thou receive any to-day ? — I receive some 
to-day and to-morrow. — Does your father receive as many friends 
as ours (as our father) ? — He receives fewer of them than yours 
(than your father). — Does the Spaniard receive as many enemies as 
friends ? — He receives as many of the one as of the other. — Do 
you receive one more crown ? — I do receive one more. — Does your 
son receive one more book ? — He does receive one more. — What 
does the physician receive ? — He receives good tobacco, good snuff, 
and good pocket-handkerchiefs. — Does he receive brandy ? — He 
does receive some. 

Exercise 79. 

Do you intend to go to the theatre this evening ? — I intend to go 
there to-morrow. — Do you depart to-day ? — I depart now. — When 
do you intend to write to your friends ? — I intend to write to them 
to-day. — Do your friends answer your letters ? — - They do answer 
them. — Do you extinguish the fire? — I do not extinguish it? — 
Does your servant light the candle ? — He does light it. — Does this 
man intend to set your warehouse on fire ? — He does intend to set 
it on fire. — Does your servant receive shirts? — He does receive 
some. — Does he receive as many of them as my valet. — He re- 
ceives quite as many. — Do you receive anything to-day ? — I receive 
something every day. — Dost thou conduct anybody. — I conduct 
nobody. — Whom do you guide? — I guide my son. — Where are 
you conducting him to ? — I conduct him to my neighbors, in order 
to wish them a good morning. — What is your son ? — He is a phy- 
sician. — Does your servant guide any one ? — He guides my child. 
— Whom must I guide ? — Thou must guide the blind man. — Must 
he conduct the sick person ? — He must conduct him. — Whither 
must he conduct him ? — He must conduct him home. — Whither is 
he leading the horse ? — He is leading it into the stable. — Dost thou 
guide the child or the blind man ? — I guide both. — When does the 
foreigner intend to depart ? — He intends to depart this morning. — 
At what o'clock ? — At half past one. — Does he not wish to remain 
here ? — He does not wish to remain. 



212 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 41. 



Lesson XLl. — PENSUM UNUM ET QUADRAGE- 
SIMUM. 

OF THE COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 

A. The property or quality denoted by an adjective may be 
attributed to an object either absolutely or relatively. This 
difference has given rise to several distinct forms of one and the 
same adjective, called its Degrees of Comparison. 

1. That form of the adjective by which the quality denoted by it 
is attributed to an object or class of objects, without any reference to 
other objects possessed of the same quality, is called the Positive 
degree. E.g. Vir audax, a bold man ; mel dulce, the sweet honey ; 
montes alii, high mountains. This is to be regarded as its general 
and fundamental form. 

2. "When the quality denoted by an adjective is attributed to an 
object or class of objects in a greater degree than to another or to 
others, the form of the adjective expressing this relation is called the 
Comparative degree. E. g. Vir audacior, a bolder man ; mel dulcius, 
the sweeter honey ; montes altiores, higher mountains. 

3. When the quality inherent in a number of objects is attributed 
to one or more of them in a higher degree than to all the rest, the form 
of the adjective expressing this relation is said to be in the Superla- 
tive degree. E.g. Vir audacissimus, the boldest man (of a certain 
number of men) ; mel dulcissimum, the sweetest honey ; montes altissi- 
mi, the highest mountains. 

T\ r e have thus found three forms of adjectives : — the Positive, the 
Comparative, and the Superlative. 

B. Comparison in its widest sense comprehends the relations 
of equality and of inequality. The relation of inequality is sub- 
divided into that of inferiority or of superiority. 

1 . The relation of equality is in Latin expressed by the positive 
with tarn .... quam, aeque . . . . ac (at que), par iter . . . . ac, &c. ; as, 
Tarn felix, quam bonus, As happy as good. Duo montes aeque alii, 
Two mountains equally high. Aeque altus, atque longus, As high as 
long. 

2. The relation of inferiority is likewise expressed by the positive 
form of the adjective, which becomes comparative by minus .... 
quam, less .... than, and superlative by minime, least. E. g. Minus 
felix, quam bonus, Less happy than good. Minime felix, Least 
happy. 

3. The relation of superiority is sometimes indicated by magis .... 
quam, more .... than, and maxime, most ; as, Magis idoneus quam tu, 
More competent than you. Maxime idoneus, The most competent. 



LESSON 41.] COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 



213 



But it is more commonly expressed by those peculiar forms of the 
adjective already known as the Comparative and Superlative. 

REGULAR COMPARISON. 

C. The comparative degree is formed by adding the 
terminations wr, m. & f., and lus, n., to the root of the 
positive 



5 "•} 

; and the superlative by adding issimus, issima, 



issimum. 


Thus : — 




Positive. 


Comparative. 


Superlative. 


Longus, 


longior, 


longissimus ; 


Brevis, 


brevior, 


brevissimus ; 


Audax, 


audacior, 


audacissimus ; 


Felix, 


felicior, 


felicissimus ; 


Iners, 


inertior, 


inertissimus ; 


Diligens, 


diligentior, 


diligentissimus ; 


Doctus, 


doctior, 


doctissimus ; 



long, longer, longest. 
sho?i, shorter, shortest, 
bold, bolder, boldest, 
happy, happier, happiest, 
sluggish, more sluggish, &c. 
diligent, more diligent, &c. 
learned, more learned, &c. 



ANOMALOUS COMPARISON. 

-D. Some adjectives are irregular in their mode of 
comparison. 

1. Adjectives in er form their superlative by simply adding 



Acer, 

Celeber, 
Pauper, 
Pulcher, 
Vetus,f 
Nuperus, 



E. g. 

acrior, 
celebrior, 
pauperior, 
pulchrior, 



acerrimus ; sharp, sharper, sharpest* 

celeberrimus ; distinguished, more d., most dis. 

pauperrimus ; poor, poorer, poorest. 

pulcherrimus ; beautiful, more beautiful, mosi b. 

veterrimus ; old, older, oldest. 

nuperrimus ; recent, more recent, most recent. 

(lis form their superlative by adding 



easy, easier, easiest. 

slender, more slender, most slen. 

low, lower, lowest. 

feeble, feebler, feeblest. 

like, more like, most like. 



2. The following in 
limus to the root : — 
Facilis, facilior, facillimus ; 
Gracilis, gracilior, gracillimus ; 
Humilis, humilior, humillimus ; 
Imbecillis, imbecillior, imbecillimus ; 
Similis, similior, simillimusj; 

3. Compounds in dicus, ficas, and volus compare from a par- 
ticipial form in ens. As, — 

* This root is found from the genitive singular by dropping its case-tenni- 
nation ; as, longus — long-i, brevis — brev-is, audax — audac-is, felix — felic-is, 
iners — inert-is, diligens — diligent-is. 

t The original form of this was veter ; and the superlative of nuperus is de- 
rived from the adverb nuper. 

X So the compounds difficilis and dissimilis. But all other adjectives in ilia 
have issimus. 



214 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 41. 



Maledicus, maledicentior, maledicentisamiis ; slanderous, 
Muniflcus, munifieentior, munificentissimus ; munificent. 
Benevolus, benevolentior, benevolentissimus ; benevolent. 
So honorificus, magniftcus, maleficus, mirifteus ; malevolus. 

4. The following derive their comparatives and superlatives 
from a different root : — 

Bonus, melior, optimus ; 

Malus, p^jo r ) pessimus ; 

Magnus, major, maximus ; 

Parvus, minor, minimus ; 

Multus, plus* plurimus ; 

5. Several adjectives have an irregular superlative, and some 
a double form of the comparative or superlative : 



good, better, best 
bud, worse, worst, 
great, greater, <jr< atesL 
small, smaller, smallest, 
much, more, most. 



Dexter, 
Dives, 

Extera,/ 

Juvenis, 

Inferus, 
Postera, f. 
Superus, 



dexterior, 
( divitior, 

^ dirior, 

exterior, 

Cjuvenior, ) 

(junior, J 

interior, 

posterior, 

superior, 



dextimus ; 
di vitissimus ; 

ditimus; 
( extimus ; 
^ extremus : 

;t 

( infimus 
^ [mus ; 

< postremus ; | 
\ postumus : > 

< supreinus : >_ 
tus ; J 



1 



to the right 

rich. 

outward. 

young. 

hoc. 
hind. 

high. 



I summi 

G. The indeclinable nequam, bad, has nequior, nequissimus, 
and frugiy frugal, frugedior, frugalissimus. 



DEFECTIVE COMPARISON. 

E. The comparison of some adjectives is defective : 
i. e. they occur only in some of the forms of comparison. 

1. The following are not used in the positive, which is either 
entirely obsolete, or only represented by adverbs or preposi- 
tions : — 

Comparative. Superlative. 
Citerior, citimus, nearer; 

Deterior, deterrimus, worse : 

Interior, intlmus, inner; 

Oeior, ocissimus, faster ; 



Positive. 
crier, obs. citra, this side), 
(from deter, not used), 
(from intus, adv., within), 
(from the Greek wkvs). 



* This form is properly the neuter comparative of mullum. 

f This superlative is minimus natu, as that of senex, old, is maximus nntu 
(= the greatest by birth). So the comparatives minor natu and major nalu, 
instead of 'juvenior and senior. 



LESSON 41.] 



DEFECTIVE COMPARISON. 



215 



Potior, potissimus, preferable , 


(from 


pods, obsolete). 


Prior, primus, 


Jormer ; 


(from 


prae, prep., before). 


Propter, proximus, nearer : 


(from 


prope, adv., near). 


Ulterior, ultimus, 


farther ; 


(from 


ultra, adv., farther.) 


2. The comparative of the following 


adjectives and partici- 


pies seldom or never occurs : — 






Apricus, 


aprieissimus ; 




sunny. 


Bellus, 


bellissimus ; 




pretty. 


Comis, 


comissimus ; 




affable. 


Consultus, 


consultissimus ; 




proficu >iL 


Diversus, 


diversissimus ; 




different. 


Falsus, 


falsissimus ; 




false. 


Inclytus, 


inclytissimus; 




renowned. 


Invictus, 


invictissimus ; 




unconquerable. 


Invitus, 


invitissimus ; 




unwilling* 


Novus, 


novissimus ; 




ri( ir. 


Nuperus, 


nuperrlmus ; 




recent. 


Par, 


parissimus ; 




equal. 


Persuasus, 


persuasissimus 




pt rsuadegl 


Sacer, 


sacerrimus ; 




sac nd. 


Vetus, 


veterrimus ; 




old. 


3. The following 


want the supei 


lative 


: — 


Adolescens, 


adolescentior ■ 




young. 


Agrestis, 


agrestior ; 




rural. 


Alacer 


alacrior ; 




sprightly. 


Arcanus, 


arcanior; 




Si < -ret. 


Caecus, 


caecior ; 




blind. 


Declivis, 


declivior ; 




steep. 


Doses, 


desior ; 




sluggish. 


Diuturnus, 


diuturnior, 




long. 


Jejunus, 


je junior, 




fasting. 


Juvenis, 


junior; 




young. 


Longinquus, 


longinquior; 




distant. 


Opiums, 


opimior ; 




opuli nl . 


Proclivis, 


procllvior; 




sloping. 


Pronus, 


pronior; 




inclint d forward. 


PropiiKjuus, 


propinquior ; 




in a r. 


Salutans, 


saint arior ; 




salutary. 


Satis, 


satior ; * 




I>< tier. 


Satin*, 


saturior ; 




satt d. 


Senex, 


senior ; 




old. 


Secus, 


sequior ; 




inferior. 


Silvester, 


silvestrior ; 




woody. 


Sinister, 


sinisterior ; 




left. 


Supinus, 


suplnior ; 




supine. 



* Satior and sequior (ncut. sequins or secius) are isolated comparatives, 
which may be referred to the adverbs satis and secus. 



21C 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 41. 



4. The superlative is likewise wanting in the majority of verbal 
adjectives in bills, ills, alls, and in many of those in ills. 

F. The form of many adjectives does not admit of simple 
comparison, and these require magis, maxime. Such are : — 

1 . Those ending in us preceded by a vowel ; as idoneus, fit ; du- 
blus, doubtful ; vacuus, empty ; Comp. magls idoneus ; Sup. maxime 
idoneus.* 

2. Participles in dusj and verbals in bundus:% as amandus, mori- 
bundus, ready to die. 

3. Adjectives ending in icus, wus, inus, imus, drus, and many in 
osus and entus ;§ as, modicus, moderate ; fugillvus, fugitive ; matullnus, 
early ; legXttmus, lawful ; canorus, singing. 

4. The following, partly on account of their form, and partly 
on account of their signification : — 



Almus, 


gracious. 


Impos, 


not master of. 


Blaesus, 


lisping. 


Lacer, 


maimed. 


Balbus, 


stammering. 


Mancus, 


crippled. 


Cadiicus, 


falling. 


Medio.cris, 


inferior. 


Calvus, 


'bald. 


Memor, 


mindful. 


Canus, 


white. 


Mirus, 


wonderful. 


Cicur, 


tame. 


Mutilus, 


mutilated. 


Claudus, 


lame. 


Mutus, 


mute. 


Curvus, 


crooked. 


Nefastus, 


wrong. 


Compos, 


possessed of. 


Par, 


equal. 


Egenus, 


needy. 


Dispar, 


unequal. 


Ferus, 


wild. 


Sospes, 


safe. 


Guar us, 


expert. 


Trux, 


grim. 


Jejunus, 


hungry. 


Vulgaris, 


common. 



G. Many adjectives admit of no comparison of any kind, 
from the nature of their signification. Such are : — 

1. Those denoting the material of which anything is made, 
possession, or descent ; e. g. aureus, ferreus, ligneus ; Romanus, 
Atheniensis ; paternus, patrius. 

2. Those denoting a definite quantity or time ; e. g. unicus, 



* But not those ending in the monosyllabic qims and fjuis, which are regu- 
larly compared; as, antlquus, antlquior/aritiquissimus; pinguis, pingvior, pin- 
gicissimus. So also tenuis, tenuior, tenuissimus, and a few of those in uus and 
ius ; e. g. assiduus, exiguus, plus, strenuus 

t Of the participles in ns and tus, many are used adjectively^ and regularly 
compared; e. g. amans, amantior, amantissimus ; doctu's, doctissimus, &c. But 
these are frequently defective. 

| Except the two superlatives infandissimus, abominable; and nefandissimus, 
impious. 

§ Except dlv'inus, festivus, lascivus, rustievs, tempeslivus, and vicinus, of which 
some of the comparative forms occur; e. g. divlnior, diolnissiitius, &c. 



LESSON 41.] INFLECTION OF COMPARATIVES. 217 

single ; aesfivus, of the summer ; hestermcs, of yesterday ; hiber- 
nas, of the winter. 

3. Those already involving a comparison, such as compounds 
ofper,prae (== very), and sub (= somewhat) ; e. g. permagnus, 
very great ; praedives, very rich ; subdifficilis, somewhat diffi- 
cult.* 

4. Diminutives and other adjectives in lus ; as, parvulus, 
very little ; vetulus, a little old ; garrulus, talkative ; anhelus, 
out of breath, &c. 

5. Compound adjectives derived from nouns ;f as, versicolor, 
of various colors ; degener, degenerate. 

DECLENSION OF THE COMPARATIVE AND SUPERLATIVE. 

H. The superlative is declined like bonus, a, urn, and the 
comparative like an adjective of one termination (Lessons V. 
andXIIL). Thus: — 

Altior, m. &/., altius, n., higher. 

Singular. 

Masc. & Ftm. Neut. 

Nom. altior altius 

Gen. altioris altioris 

Dat. altioi'i altiori 

Ace. altlorem altius 

Voc. altior altius 

Abl. altiore or -i, altiore or -I, 

So decline pulclirior, venustlor, handsomer, prettier ; facilior, easier ; 

difficilior, more difficult; major, greater; longior, longer; brevlor, 

shorter ; rotundior, rounder ; divitior, richer, &c. 

Is your book as good as mine ? Estne liber tiius tarn bonus, quam 

me us (aeque bonus atque mens) ? 

It is better than yours. Melior est, quam tiius. 

T , • , -i ( Non est tam bonus, quam tiius. 

It is not as good as yours. ■{ , f . i. , , '? . , 

n J I Minus bonus est, quam tuus. 

Are the merchant's children as An liberi mercatoris tam bene sunt 

good (well-behaved) as ours ? morati, quam nostri ? 

They are better than ours. Melidres, quam nostri, sunt. 

r™ •, i ( Aeque bdni sunt ac nostri. 

1 hey are quite as cood as ours. •< A t- - u- ■ ' ■* - > L • 
J l & ( JS'on minus bom sunt quam nostri. 

Is my table as high as it is long ? Estne mensa mea tam alta, quam 

longa ? 

* Except praecldrus, -ior, -issimus ; praestans, -tior, -tissimus, eminent; and 
others derived from verbs, as praesens, prompt ; perturbdtus, troubled. 

f Except iners, inert; misericors, compassionate; perennis, perennial; and 
demens, crazy; which occur in the comparative, though derived from ars, cor, 
annus, mens. 

19 



Plural. 


fasc. & Fern. 


Neui. 


altiores 


altiora 


altiorum 


altiorum 


altioribus 


altioribu 


altiores 


altiora 


altiores 


altiora 


altioribus 


altioribii; 



218 



latin gka:.i:\iar. 



[LESSON 41. 



It is not as high as it is long. < 

It is higher than it is long. 

Is it higher than your tables ? 

It is the highest of them all. 

Whose umbrella is the largest ? 

This (of mine) is large, that (of 
yours) is larger, but that (of 
his) is the largest of all. 

Which hat is the smallest ? 

Mine is rather small, yours is 
even smaller, but that of our 
friend is the smallest of all. 
Whose ? 
It is. 

Whose book is this ? < 

It is the book of my brother. 

It is my brother's. 

Whose ribbon is the handsomest, 

yours or mine ? 
Yours is the handsomest (of the 

two) . 
Are the handkerchiefs of the 

Italians whiter than those of 

the Dutch ? 
They are not any whiter. 
They are whiter, but not as 

good. 
Is his coat as black as mine ? 

It is even blacker than yours. 
Do you read as well as I '? 

I read equally well. 
I read better than you. 
I do not read as well as you. 
Well, properly. 

Better. 

Light (not heavy). 

Heavy. 

Easv. 

Difficult. 

Great, large, big. -3 

Huge. 
Long. 
Short. 



Non est tam alta quam longa. 

Minus ldnga est quam alta. 

Altior est quam longior. 

Estne altior quam mensae tiiae ? 

Altissima est omnium. 

Ciijus umbraculum est majus? 

Hoc est magnum, istud majus e'st, 
illud vero omnium est maxi- 
mum. 

Qui's pileus est minimus ? 

Meus est parvulus, tiius etiam mi- 
nor est, sed amici nostri pileus 
omnium est minimus. 

Cujus ? 

Est. 

Ciijus liber est hoc ? 

Cujus est hie liber ? 

Liber est fratris mei. 

Fratris est. 

TJtra taeniarum pulchrior est, tuane 
an mea ? 

Tiia est pulchrior. 

Ecquid muccinia Italorum candi- 

diora sunt, quam ilia Batavo- 

rum ? 
Candidiora non sunt. 
Candidiora sunt vero, at non aeque 

bona. 
Estne toga ejus tam nigra quam 

mea (aeque nigra atque mea) ? 
Est etiam nigrior quam tiia est. 
Ecquid tu aeque bene legis atque 

ego ? 
Ego non minus bene lego quam tu. 
Ego melius lego quam tu. 
Minus scienter lego quam tii. 
Bene, belle ; scienter, commode 

{adv.). _ 
Melius, scientius. 
Levis, e. 
Gravis, e. 
Facilis, e. 
Difficilis, e. 
Magnus, a, um. 
Grandis, e. 
Ingens, tis. 
Longus, a, um. 
B re vis, e. 



LESSON 41.] EXERCISES 80, 81. 219 

Rather short (too short). Curtus, a, urn. 

Round. Rotimdus, a, um. 

Rich. Dives, itis. 

Exercise 80. 
Is your brother taller (grandis) than mine ? — He is not so tall, but 
better than yours. — Is thy hat as bad as that of thy father ? — It is 
better, but not so black as his. — Are the shirts of the Italians as white 
as those of the Irish ? — They are whiter, but not so good. — Are the 
sticks of our friends longer than ours ? — They are not longer, but 
heavier. — Who have the most beautiful gloves ? — The French have 
them. — "Whose horses are the finest ? — Mine are fine, yours are 
finer than mine ; but those of our friends are the finest of all. — Is 
your horse good '? — It is good, but yours is better, and that of the 
Englishman is the best of all the horses which we are acquainted with. 

— Have you pretty shoes ? — I have very pretty (ones) ; but my 
brother has prettier ones than I. — From whom (a quo) does he re- 
ceive them V — He receives them from his best friend. — Is your wine 
as good as mine ? — It is better. — Does your merchant sell good 
handkerchiefs ? — He sells the best handkerchiefs that I know. — 
Have we more books than the French ? — We have more of them 
than they ; but the Germans have more of them than we, and the 
English have the most of them. — Hast thou a finer garden than that 
of our physician? — I have a finer (one). — Has the American a 
finer house than thou ? — He has a finer (one). — Have we as fine 
children as our neighbors ? — We have finer (ones). 

Exercise 81. 
Is your coat as long as mine ? — It is shorter, but prettier than 
yours. — Do you go out to-day ? — I do not go out to-day. — When 
does your father go out ? — He goes out at a quarter past twelve. — 
Is this man older (grandior natu) than that (man) ? — He is older, 
but that (man) is healthier {robustus). — Which of these two children 
is the better ? — The one who studies is better than the one who 
plays. — Does your servant sweep as well as mine ? — He sweeps 
better than yours. — Does the German read as many bad books as 
good (ones) ? — He reads more good than bad (ones) . — Do the mer- 
chants sell more sugar than coffee ? — They sell more of the one than 
of the other. — Does your shoemaker make as many boots as shoes ? 

— He makes more of the one than of the other. — Can you swim as 
well as the son of the nobleman ? — I can swim better than he ; but 
he can speak German better than I. — Does he read as well as you ? 

— He reads better than I. — Have you the headache ? — No, I have 
the earache. — Does your cousin listen to what you tell him ? — He 
does not listen to it. — Does the son of your bailiff go into the forest ? 

— No, he remains at home ; he has sore feet. — Do you learn as well 
as our gardener's son ? — I learn better than he, but he works better 
than I. — Whose carriage is the finest ? — Yours is very fine, but that 
of the captain is still finer, and ours is the finest of all. — Has any one 
as fine apples as we ? — No one has such fine (ones). 



220 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 42. 



Lesson XLII. — pensum altesoi et quad- 

RAGESIMUM. 

OF THE COMPARISON OF ADVERBS. 

A. Adverbs derived from adjectives or participles, 
and ending in e, ter, or 6,* are compared like their prim- 
itives. 

The comparative of the adverb ends in ius, like the accusa- 
tive neuter of the adjective, and the superlative assumes the 
termination e. E. g. 



Positive. 


Comparative. 


Superlative. 




Longe, 


longius, 


longissime ; 


far. 


Pulchre, 


pulchrius, 


pulclierrime ; 


handsomely. 


Facile, 


facillus, 


facillime ; 


easily. 


Audacter, 


audaeius, 


audacissime ; 


boldly. 


Leviter, 


levius, 


levissime ; 


easily. 


Prudenter, 


prudentius, 


prudentissime ; 


prudently. 


Tuto, 


tutius, 


tutissiine ; 


safely. 


Raro, 


rarius. 


rarissime ; 


rarely. 


Hon orifice, 


honorificentius,f 


honorificentissime ; 


honorably. 


Saepe, 


saepius, 


saepissime ; 


often. 


Diu, 


diutiusjj 


diutissime ; 


long. 



B. Adverbs derived from adjectives of anomalous compari- 
son follow the anomalies of their primitives. E. g. 



Positive. 


Comparative. 


Superlative. 




Bene, 


melius, 


op time ; 


well. 


Male, 


pejus, 


pessirae ; 


bad. 


Parurn, 


minus, 


minime ; 


little. 


i 


magis, § 


maxime ; 


more. 


Multum, 


plus, 


pluriinum ; |j 


much 



C. The following list exhibits the adverbs of defective com- 
parison : — 

Positive. Comparative. Superlative. 

cleterrime ; worse. 

ocissime ; swifter. 



Comparative. 
deterius, 
ocius, 



* Many of those in o, however, are not compared. On the formation of ad- 
verbs generally, see Lesson LXX. 

f Compare Lesson XL. D. 3. 

% Diu and saepe have no corresponding adjectives. The root of the former 
seems to have been diutus. 

§ This is properly the comp. of magnum, which is not used adverbially. 
Instead of it, valde and magnopere are commonly employed. 

|| The superlative of adverbs sometimes ends in o or urn. So pr'mo or prl- 
mum, jiotissimum, meritissimo, &c. 



LESSON 42.] COMPARISON OF ADVERBS. 



221 



N5ve, 
Nuper, 
Paene, 
Penitus, 

Merito, 

Satis, 

Temper!, 

Valde, 

Secus, 



prius, 
uberlus, 



penitius, 
potius, 

■ ? 

satius, 

temperius, 

valdlus, 

seems, 



primum ; before, sooner. 

ubenime ; more copiously. 

novissime ; newly, lately. 

nuperrime ; recently. 

paenissime ; almost, entirely. 

; inwardly. 

potissimum ; * rather. 

meritissimo ; deservedly. 

; sufficiently. 

; seasonably. 

; greatly. 

; differently. 



The beginning. The end. 



To begin, commence. 



To end, finish, conclude. 



Will you begin to speak ? 

I am willing to begin. 

Is he beginning to speak (= 

discourse). 
He is beginning. 
No, he is finishing. 
Are you finishing your letter ? 
I am not concluding it. 



to 



Not yet. 
Already. 

Before. 



Do you speak before you listen ? 
I never speak before I listen. 

Do you take off your stockings 
before you take off your 
boots ? 

No, I take off my boots first. 



Initium, i, n. Finis, m. & f. 

Incipio, ere, cepi, ceptum. 

Exordior, iri, orsus sum (dep.) 
(aliquid facers). 

Initium facere (alicujus rei fa- 
ciendae). 

Finio, ire,ivi (ii),itum (aliquid). 

Finem facere (alicujus rei). 

Concludo, ere, usi, usum (ali- 
quid). 

Visne incipere ldqui ? 

Yisne initium facere loquendi ? 

Incipere non nolo. 

Incipi'tne (exorditiirne) dicere ? 

Facitne initium dicendi ? 

incipit. Facit initium. 

framo vero finem facit (dicendi). 

Concludisne epistolam tiiam ? 

Non concludo. 

Nondum, haud dum, adhuc non. 
Jam, jamjam, jam jamque (adv.). 
Prius quam (priusquam). 
Ante quam (antequam). 
Antea quam (anteaquam) . 
(Conj. ivith the ind. and subj.) 

Niim ldqueris prius quam aiidis 

(ausciiltas) ? 
!Ego niinquam ldquor ante quam 

audio. 
Num tibialia tua prius pedibus de- 

trahis quam caligas ? 

tmmo vero caligas prius detraho. 



* Also more rarely potissime. 

19* 



222 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSOX 42. 



Does your servant sweep the 
same room which I am sweep- 
ing '? 

He is not sweeping the same. 

Often, frequently. 

As often as you. 

As many times as you. 

Quite as often as you. 

Oftener than you. 
Not as often as you. 

Early (in the morning). 

Early (= in good time). 

Quite early (in the morning). 

Quite early (generally). 

Late. 

Quite late. 

Too. 

Too late. 

Too early (in the morning). 

Too early (generally). 

Too great. 

Too little (small). 

Too much. 

To breakfast. 
The breakfast. 
Do you breakfast as early as I ? 

I breakfast as early as you. 

I breakfast earlier, later than 
you. 



Everritne servus tiius ipsum con- 
clave, quod ego everro ? 

tdem non everrit. 

Saepe, frequenter, crebro* 

Tiini saepe quam tu. 

Tdties, qudties tu. 

Non minus saepe (frequenter) 

quam tu. 
Saepius (frequentius) quam tu. 
Non tarn saepe, quam tu. 
Mane (adv.), tempore matutmo. 
Mature (comp. maturius). 
Bene mane, prima luce. 
Admodum mature. 
Sero ; tarde. 
Sero admodum. 
Pervespeii (in the evening'). 

NimiSj nimium. 

Sero,f nimis sero ; post tempus. 

Nimis tarde, tardlus. % 

Nhnio mane. 

Nimis mature, maturius.J 

Praemature. 

Nimis magnus (grandis). 

Major, grandior (sc. aequo). 

Nimis parvulus ; perparvulus. 

Nimis, nimium (adv.). 

Nimius, a, urn. 

Plus aequo, plus justo. 

Jento, tire, cwi, citwn. 
Jentaculum sumere. 
Jentaculum, i, n. 

Jentasne (sumisne jentaculum) tarn 

bene mane quam ego ? 
Jento vero tarn bene mane quam tu. 
Jentaculum siimo ae'que mature 

atque tu. 
Ego jentaculum sumo maturius, se- 

rius quani tu. 



* These are regularly compared : crebrius, crelerrime, frequentius, fre- 
quentissime, &c. 

f Sero has often the sense of nunis sero. 

J With these neuter comparatives it is necessary to supply aequo, justo, or 
opinione ; i. e. " later than expected " = " too late," " earlier* than usual " == 
" too early," &c. (Cf. Lesson XLI1I. E. 2.) 



LESSON 42.] EXERCISES 82, 83. 223 

Does he breakfast before be Sumitne jentaculum, priiisquam 
begins to work ? opus facere incipit ? 

No, indeed, he works before he Minime vero ; initium flicit ope- 
breakfasts. randi, antea quam jentat. 

Do I come too early ? Venione praemature ? 

No, you come rather too late. Immo vero (nimis) sero venis. 

Do you speak too much ? Niim ldqueris nimis ? 

I do not speak enough. tmmo vero, ego non satis ldquor. 

Exercise 82. 

Do you begin to speak? — I begin to speak. — Does your brother 
begin to learn Italian ? — ■ He begins to learn it. — Can you already 
speak German? — Not yet, but I am beginning. — Do our friends 
begin to speak ? — They do not yet begin to speak, but to read — 
Does our father already begin his letter ? — He does not yet begin it. 

— Does the merchant begin to sell? — He does begin. — Can you 
swim already ? — Not yet, but I begin to learn. — Does your son speak 
before he listens ? — He listens before he speaks. — Does your brother 
listen to you before he speaks ? — He speaks before he listens to me. 

— Do your children read before they write ? — They write before 
they read. — Does your servant sweep the warehouse before he sweeps 
the room ? — He sweeps the room before he sweeps the warehouse. — 
Dost thou drink before thou goest out? — I go out before I drink. — 
Does your cousin wash his hands (manus) before he washes his feet? 

— He washes his feet before he washes his hands. — Do you extin- 
guish the fire before you extinguish the candle? — I extinguish nei- 
ther the fire nor the candle. — Do you intend to go out before you 
write your letters? — I intend writing my letters before I go out. — 
Does your son take off his boots before he takes off his coat ? — My 
son takes off neither his boots nor his coat. 

Exercise 83. 

Do you intend to depart soon ? — I intend to depart to-morrow. — 
Do you speak as often as I ? — I do not speak as often, but my brother 
speaks oftener than you. — Do I go out as often as your father ? — 
You do not go out as often as he ; but he drinks oftener than you. — 
Do you begin to know this man ? — I begin to know him. — Do you 
breakfast early ? — We breakfast at a quarter past nine. — Does your 
cousin breakfast earlier than you? — He breakfasts later than I. — 
At what o'clock does he breakfast ? — He breakfasts at eight o'clock, 
and I at half past six. — Do you not breakfast too early ? — I break- 
fast too late. — Does your father breakfast as early as you ? — He 
breakfasts later than I. — Does he finish his letters before he break- 
fasts ? — He breakfasts before he finishes them. — Is your hat too 
large? — It is neither too large nor too small. — Does our gardener 
breakfast before he goes into the garden ? — He goes into the garden 
before he breakfasts. — Do you read French as often as German ? — 
I read French oftener than German. — Does the physician speak too 
much ? — He does not speak enough. — Do the Germans drink too 



224 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 43. 



much wine ? — They do not drink enough of it. — Do they drink more 
beer than cider ? — They drink more of the one than of the other. — 
Have you much- money ? — We have not enough of it. — Have your 
cousins much corn ? — They have only a little, but enough. — Have 
you much more brand}' ? — We have not much more of it. — Have 
you as many tables as chairs ? — I have as many of the one as of the 
other. — Does your friend receive as many letters as notes? — He 
receives more of the latter than of the former. — Do vou finish before 



you begi 



I must begin before I finish. 



Lesson XLIII. — eensum quadragesimum 

TERTIUM. 
THE CONSTRUCTION OF THE COMPARATIVE. 



A. Rule. — When tw 
each other, and the first i 
the second is frequently 
quam. E. g. 

Tullius Hostilius ferdcior fiiit 116- 

mulo* 
Yilius est argentum aiiro, virtuti- 

bus aurum. 
Quid est in hdmine ratione divi- 

nius ? 
Quae figura, quae species liumd- 

na potest esse piilchrior ? 
Nihil est laudabilius, nihil magno 

et praecliiro viro dignius placa- 

bilildte atque dementia. 



Ldcruna nihil citiusf arescit. 
Ne longius trtduo ab castris libsit. 

Fortuna plus consiliis humdnis 
pdllet. 



o objects are compared with 
s the subject of the sentence, 
put in the ablative without 



Tullius Hostilius was more warlike 
than Romulus. 

Silver is inferior to gold, and gold 
to virtue. 

What is there in man diviner than 
reason ? 

What figure or form can be more 
beautiful than the human '? 

Nothing is more commendable, 
nothing more worthy of a great 
and distinguished man, than a 
forgiving disposition and clem- 
ency. 

Nothing dries faster than a tear. 

Not to be absent from the camp 
longer than three days. 

Fortune is stronger than human 
designs. 



* This = quam Romiilus (fuit). So the remaining ablatives of these exam- 
ples: — quam aurum (est), — quam virtutes sunt, — quam ratio est. — quam liu- 
mdna {figura seu species) est, — quam placabilitas atque dementia sunt, &c v and 
in general every ablative after a comparative. 

t This, and the two following examples, show that the same rule applies also 
to the comparative of adverbs. But this is only so when the comparison re- 
lates to the subject of the sentence. 



LESSON 43.] CONSTRUCTION OF THE COMPARATIVE. 225 

Neminem* Romanorum Cicerone In the opinion of the ancients, no 
eloquentiorem fuisse veteres Roman was more eloquent than 
judiearunt. Cicero. 

Remarks. 

1. Among the most common forms of the ablative after compara- 
tives are the neuter adjectives and participles aequo, necessario, nimio, 
credibili, vero, solito, justo, dicto, and the nouns spe, opinione, expecia- 
tione ; as, plus aequo, more than is fair ; longius necessario, further 
than is necessary; magis solito, more than usually ; dicto citius, sooner 
than the word was uttered ; opinione celerius, quicker than was ex- 
pected ; serins spe, later than was hoped ; plus nimio, more than too 
much. But these ablatives are often omitted. (Compare E. 2.) 

2. Quam is always put instead of the ablative, where the latter 
would give rise to ambiguity. E. g. Hibernia est dimidio minor, ut 
aestimatur, quam Britannia, Hibernia is supposed- to be smaller by one 
half than Britannia. 

3. The ablative after comparatives is the standard by which the 
object compared is measured with reference to the quality common to 
both. It may be considered an abridged proposition, and can be re- 
solved into quam est, &c. Hence quam may always be employed 
instead of the ablative, but not vice versa. E. g. 

Melior tutidrque est certa pax, A certain peace is better and safer 

quam sperdta victoria, f than an expected victory. 

t ta sentio, locupletiorem esse La- It is my opinion, that the Latin 

tinam linguam,J quam Grae- language is richer than the 

cam. Greek. 

Nullum est certius amicitiae vin- There is no surer bond of friend- 

culum, quam consensus et socie- ship than the harmony and com- 

tas consiiiorum et voluntatum. munity of plans and wishes. 

Pater Tarquinius potentior Rd- Tarquin the father was no more 

mae non fdit, quam filius Ga- powerful at Rome than was the 

biis.§ son at Gabii. 

B. Rule. — If the object compared with another is 
in an oblique case, and dependent on another word, the 
conjunction quam is used, and the second object is either 
in the. nominative with est,fuit,\\ &c, or in the same case 
with the first. E. g. 

* Neminem is here the subject of the infinitive fuisse, and consequently in- 
cluded in the rule. 

f In all these examples, est, fuit, esse is understood. 

X The subject accusative to esse. 

§ In this and in the preceding example the ablative is entirely inadmissible, 
as it would give rise to a confusion of cases. 

|| Or with the verb of the sentence understood. 

o 



226 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSOX 43. 

Flagitii magis nos piidet, qudm We are more asliamed of a dis- 

erroris.* graceful act than of an error. 

Neniini magis faveo, qudm tibi. There is no one whom I favor 

more than I do you. 

lEgo hdminem calidiorem vidi I have seen no shrewder man than 

neminem, qudm Plwrmionem. Phormio. 

Consilio majdres res geruntur, Greater things are accomplished by 

qudm fortitudine. deliberation, than by valor. 

Ab Hannibale majdres res gestae Greater exploits have been achieved 

sunt, qudm ab Hanrilcare. by Hannibal than by Hamilcar. 

Drusum Germanicum minorem He lost Drusus Germanicus, a 

natu, qudm ipse e'rat, fratrem brother younger than he him- 

amisit. self was. 

Haec verba sunt M. Varronis, These are the words of Marcus 

qudm fait Claudius, doctioris. Varro, a more learned man than 

Claudius was. 

Longinqua itinera sola diicis The long marches were mitigated 

patientia mitigabantur, eodem by the patience of the leader 

plum, qudm gregario milite, alone, — he himself enduring 

tolerante. more than a common soldier. 

Remarks. 

1. Instead of quam with an object accusative,! the ablative some- 
times occurs in prose and frequently in poetry. E. g. Est boni consu- 
lts suam salutem posteriorem salute commiini ducere, It is the duty of 
a consul to consider his own safety secondary to that of the common- 
wealth. Neminem LycurgoJ out majorem out utiliorem virum Lace- 
daemon genuit, Lacedasinon produced no man either greater or more 
useful than Lycurgus. Quid prius dicam solitis parentis laudibus ? 
What shall I say (sing) before the accustomed praises of our parent ? 

2. A relative or demonstrative pronoun is commonly in the abla- 
tive where we would expect the object accusative with quam. E. g. 
Hie Audio, quo § graviorem inimico non liabui, sororem suam in matri- 
monium dedit, He gave his sister in marriage to Attalus, than ichom I 
had no enemy more mortal. Hoc mihi gratius nihil facer e potes, You 
could not do me a greater favor than this. 

3. The comparative inferior is occasionally followed by the dative. 
E. g. Nulla arte cuiquam inferior est, He is-not inferior to any one in 
any art. But commonly by the ablative or quam ; as, Non inferior 
fuit, quam pater, He was not inferior to his father. 

4. The adjective alius has sometimes the force of a comparative ; 
as, Ne putes alium sapiente bonoque beatum, Do not consider any 
one but a wise and good man happy. Nee quidquam aliud libertate 

* In this and the following examples the ellipsis is quam nospudet, quam tibi 
faveo, quam Phormio est, quam geruntur, quam gestae sunt. 
t After transitive verbs. 

| Instead of quam Lycurgum or quam Lycurgus fuit. 
§ Better than quam quern. 



LESSON 43.] CONSTRUCTION OF THE COMPARATIVE. 227 

eommuni quaeswimus, Nor did we aim at anything else but our com- 
mon liberty. 

5. The prepositions ante, prae, praeter, and supi-a serve to impart 
a comparative force to the positive, and to enhance that of the com- 
parative or superlative. E. g. Felix ante alias virgo, A maiden fortu- 
nate before (= more fortunate than) others. Praeter alios doctus, 
Learned beyond others. Ante alios immanior omnes, More inhuman 
than all other men. Prae nobis beatus, Happier than ourselves. 

6. Magis, minus, and potius are sometimes put emphatically with a 
comparative, or with malo, praeopto (I would rather, I prefer), &c. 
E. g. Hoc enim magis est dulcius, This is much sweeter. Potius ma- 
luit, He preferred. Non minus admirabilior illius exitus belli, The 
issue of that war was no less wonderful. 

7. Quam pro frequently occurs after comparatives, and is equivalent 
to the English "than in proportion to," "than might be expected 
from." E. g. Minor, quam pro tumultu, caedes, Less of a massacre 
than one might have expected from the bustle. Species viri majoris, 
quam pro humano habitu, augustiorisque, The form of a man of greater 
than human size, and more majestic. 

8. The conjunction atque occasionally takes the place of quam. 
E. g. Amlcior mihi nullus vivit atque is est, I have no better friend 
alive than he is. But this does not occur in classical prose. 

9. The comparative is often negative, especially in the formulas 
non magis (non plus) .... quam, no more .... than (but rather less) ; 
non minus .... quam, no less .... than (but rather more) ; non me- 
lior .... quam, no better .... than (but rather worse) ; non deterior 
.... quam, no worse .... than (but rather better). E. g. Animus 
in aliquo morbo non magis est sanus, quam id corpus, quod in morbo est, 
In sickness the mind is no more (= as little) sound, than (as) the body 
in disease. P atria liominibus non minus cara esse debet, quam liber i, 
Their country ought to be no less dear (== equally dear) to men than 
(as) their children. Luctus non Romae major, quam per totam Hispa- 
niam fuit, There was as great a sorrow throughout entire Spain, as 
there was at Rome. 

C. After the comparatives plus, amplius, minus, and longius, 
the conjunction quam is frequently omitted without any change 
of case in the second object.* E. g. 
Non amplius erant quingenti. There were no more than (not 

over) five hundred. 
Plus tertia pars interfecta est. More than (over) one third of them 

were killed. 
Constabat non minus ducenfos It was manifest, that there were no 
Carthawiniensium equites fu- less than (at least) two hundred 
isse. horsemen among the Cartha- 

ginians, 

* There is generally a numeral expressed or understood in this construction. 
The case remains the same which it would be under the same conditions With- 
out plus, &c. 



228 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 43. 

Quintus tecum plus annum vixit. Quintus lived with } t ou more than 

(over) a year. 

Reversus est in Asiam nanus di- He returned into Asia in less than 

ebus triginta. thirty days. 

Spatium, quod non est dmplius A space of no more than (not over) 

pedum sexcentorum. six hundred ieet. 

Kon longius milia passuum oclo. No farther than eight miles. 

Remarks. 

1. Quam is likewise omitted after major and minor, when these 
words denote a definite age of life. E.g. Major* (quam) quinque 
annis naius, Older than five years. Minor (quam) decern annos nalus, 
Younger than ten years. 

2. Sometimes, however, these comparatives are regularly con- 
strued with quam or an ablative. E. g. Plus quam quatluor milia, 
More than four thousand. Amplius duobus milibus, More than two 
thousand. Minus tribus medimnis, Less than three medimni. Plus 
quam annum, For more than a year. 

D. When two qualities denoted by different adjectives are 
attributed to the same object in an unequal degree, the adjec- 
tives are either both positive with magis .... quam, or both 
comparative with quam simply. E. g. 

Celer tuns disertus magis est, Your friend Celer is rather elo- 

qudm sapiens. quent than wise* 

Artem juris habebitis, magis ma- You will have a science of law 

gnam atque ilberem, quam dii- more comprehensive and rich 

ficilem atque obscurant, than difficult and obscure. 

Pestilentia mindcior quam peri- A pestilence more menacing than 

culdsior. dangerous. 

Paiili Aenu'lii cdncio fiiit verier, The address of Paulus iEmilius 

quam grdtior populo. was not so acceptable to the 

people as it was true. 

impetus, non derior, quam pertir An assault as obstinate as it was 

ndcior. fierce. 

Remarks. 

1. The construction of adverbs is precisely the same: — Temcre 
magis, quam satis caute, Rather rashly than with sufficient caution. 
Magis honeste, quam vere, More for honor's sake than correctly. 
Foilius quam felici us, More bravely than successfully. Non conlume- 
liosius quam verius, No more contemptuously than truly, &c. 

2. Of these two constructions the double comparative with quam is 
the most common. Sometimes the second adverb is in the positive 

* I. e. More of an eloquent than of a vrh^ man, — be hris less prudence than 
eloquence. Disertior est, quam sujjitnliur, He litis considerable prudeuce, but 
yet more eloquence. 



LESSON 43.] CONSTRUCTION OF THE COMPARATIVE. 229 

degree ; as, Vehementius quam cautc, More impetuously than cautious- 
ly. But this is an exception to the general rule. 

E. The second member of a comparison is frequently sup- 
pressed. This happens, — 

1. When the comparative serves to distinguish two objects of the 
same kind. E. g. Graecia major, Gallia ulterior, ex duohus Jiliis 
major seu minor (== the elder or younger of two sons), major pars 
hominum. So, Uter est melior? Which is the better of the two? 
Respondeo priori prius, I reply first to the former (of two letters). 

2. When it is so general as to be readily understood from the con- 
text. E. g. Quam ceteri, solito, aequo, juslo,* &e. In these cases the 
comparative is commonly rendered by the positive with somewhat, 
rather, too, or quite. As, 

Si versus est syllaba una bre'vior If the verse is a syllable too short 

aut longior (sc. justo). or too long. 

Senectus est natiira loqudcior Old age is naturally somewhat lo- 

(sc. quam ceterae aetates). quacious. 

Themistocles liberius vivebat (sc. Thcmistocles lived rather too free- 

aequo). ly. 

Ocius omnes imperio laeti parent They all obey the command with 

(sc. dicto).f alacrity, sooner than it is uttered. 

Nihil fere quondam majoris rti, Scarcely any matter of importance 

nisi auspieato, gcrcbiitur. was formerly undertaken without 

auspices. 

Medici gravidribus raorbis peri- To the acuter diseases physicians 

culdsas curatidnes et ancipites are accustomed to apply danger- 

adhibere sdlent. ous and doubtful remedies. 

F. The comparative may be variously modified by other 
Avords : — 

1. By the intensive etiam or adhuc, "even," "yet," "still." E. g. 
Edam majores varietates, A still greater diversity. Multo etiam longius, 
Much further even. Punctum est, quod viriinus, et adhuc puncto mi- 
nus, Our Life is but a moment, and even less than one. 

2. By the ablative of the thing, in respect to which one object is su- 
perior to another. E. g. Quis Carthaginiensium plurisfuit Hannibale, 
consilio, virtute, rebus gestis? What Carthaginian was superior to 
Hannibal, in sagacity, in valor, or in exploits? Superior online, Su- 
perior in rank. Inferior Jbrtund, Inferior in fortune. 

3. By the ablative of the measure or quantity, by which the differ- 
ence is estimated. E. g. Dimidio minor. Smaller by one half. Decern 
annis minor, Younger by ten years. Uno die longiorem mensem aut 
biduo, A month longer by one day or by two days. Uno digito plus 

* Compare A. 1. 

I So plures (sc. quam unam) uxores habere, to have several wives. Diuiius 
morari, to remain too long. Plura lo'/ui, to talk too much, &c. 

20 



230 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON -13. 

habere, To have one finger too many. Altero tanto longlorem esse, 
To be as long again (twice as long). Sesqui esse major em, To be 
greater by one half. Sol multis partibus major atque amplior est, quam 
terra universa, The sun is man)- times as large as our entire globe. 

4. So generally by the neuter ablatives multo, by much, much; 
pairfo, parvo, a little ; aliquanto, somewhat, considerably ; quanto, by 
as much ; tanto, by so much ; quo, the (more, &c.) ; hoc, eo, the (more, 
&e.) ; altero, tanto, by as much again ; dimidio, by one half; sesqui, 
by one and a half; nihilo, by nothing. E. g. Paulo vehementius, A 
little more violently. Multo artificiosius, Much more skilfully. Ali- 
quanto atrocius, Considerably more atrocious. Quanto superiores 
sumus, tanto nos geramus submissius, The greater our superiority, 
the more humbly let us conduct ourselves. Quo plures eraiit, (hoc) 
major caedes fuit, The greater their number, the more bloody was the 
massacre. Quo major est in anirnis praestantia et dwinior, eo ma jure 
indigent diligentid, The greater and diviner the intellectual superior- 
ity, the greater is the necessity of application. Homines quo plura 
liabent, eo cupiunt ampliora, The more men possess, the more they 
desire. 

5. Instead of the ablatives tanto, quanto, aliquanto, the adverbial 
accusatives tanlum, quantum, aliquantum, are sometimes employed. 
E. g. Quantum domo inferior, tantum gloria superior evasit, He turned 
out as much superior in renown, as he was inferior by birth. 

Exercise 84. 

Is the English language richer than the French ? — It is richer. — 
Is it as rich (locuples) as the Greek ? — It is not as rich ; it is less 
rich and less flexible (fexibilis) than the Greek. — Which language 
is the richest of all '? — There is no language richer than the Greek. 

— Is there anything more valuable (j)raestantius) than gold ? — Vir- 
tues are far (multo or longe) more valuable. — Is there anything 
diviner in man than reason ? — There is nothing diviner or fairer 
(pel pulchrius). — Can any form be fairer than the human ? — !No fig- 
ure or form can be fairer. — What is more commendable in a great 
man than clemency? — There is nothing more commendable. — Is 
your friend more learned than his brother '? — He is far more learned, 
but not as good. — Is he more learned than our neighbor ? — He is 
not so learned. — Who of the Romans was (fuit) the most eloquent? — 
Cicero was the most eloquent of Roman orators. — Do you favor any 
one more than me ? — I favor no one more than you. — Are you 
loved as much by your father as by your friend ? — I am loved more 
by the former than by the latter. — Is that man inferior to the other ? 

— He is not inferior. — Do we seek anything else than liberty. — We 
seek nothing else. — Is our neighbor more fortunate than others ? — 
He is less fortunate. — Who is happier than we ? — Xo one. — Ought 
our country to be as dear to us as our children ? — It should be no less 
dear to us. — How much money have you left ? — I have more than 
one third left, — How much lias your brother left ? — He has less 
than ten dollars left. — How many are there of us ? — There are 
more than fifty of us. 



LESSON 44.] CONSTRUCTION OF THE SUPERLATIVE. 



231 



Lesson XLlV. — PENSUM QUADKAGESIMUM 
QUARTUM. 

CONSTRUCTION OE THE SUPERLATIVE. 

A. The Latin superlative serves to express two dis- 
tinct relations : — 

I. The quality denoted by it may be attributed to one of 
several objects in a higher degree than to any of the rest. This 
is called the Superlative of Comparison, and is translated by 
the English superlative, or by most. E. g. 

Epistolae mihi lino die tres siint Three letters were handed to me 

redditae. Rescrrpsi epistolae in one day. I replied to the 

mdximae. longest of them. 

Numitdri, qui stirpis mdximus He bequeathed his kingdom to 

erat, regnum legat. Numitor, the eldest of the line. 

Miltiades et gloria majorum et Miltiades enjoyed the very highest 



sua modestia unus omnium 
■ mdxime florebat. 

Pessima sit, milli non sua forma 
placet. 

Miser homo est, qui ipsi quod 
edit* quaerit, et id aegre in- 
venit ; sed ille est miserior, 
qui et aegre quaerit, et nihil 
invenit ; ille mise'rrimus est, 
qui, cum essef eupit, quod edit 
non habet. 



distinction, both for the glory of 
his ancestors and for his own 
modesty. 

Every one likes his own appearance, 
be it never so bad. 

The man is a wretched one, who 
has himself to seek his livelihood, 
and scarcely finds it ; but he is 
more wretched, who seeks it hard 
and finds none ; the most wretch- 
ed (of all) is he, who, when he 
desires to eat, has nothing. 



II. The quality denoted by the superlative may be attributed 
to an object simply in an eminent or uncommon degree. This 
is called the Superlative of Eminence, and is usually rendered 
by very, uncommonly, extremely, most, &c. As, 

Your letter was most (= extreme- 
ly) welcome to me. 

He is boasted of as the first man 
of his family, and a most (high- 
ly) honorable man. 

If you treat the Aurelii honorably 
and liberally, you will oblige 



Gratissimae mihi tiiae litterae 

fuerunt. 
Jactatur ddmi suae vir primus et 

homo Jionestissim us-X 

Si Aurelios honorifice liberaliter- 
que tractaris, et tibi gratissimos 



* For edat, " what he may eat." t For edere, to eat. 

X The superlative of eminence thus commonly occurs in titles and super- 
scriptions. E. g. Vivo fortissimo atque innocentissimo Sext. Peducaeo prattori. 
De vivo fortissimo et clarissimo L. Sulla, que?n honoris causa nomino, &c. 



232 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 44. 

optimosque adolescent.es ad- most agreeable and excellent 
junxeris, et mihi gratissimum young men, and do me a very 
feceris. great favor. 

Ego miserior siim, quam tii, quae I am more miserable than your- 
es miserrima.* self, "who are extremely ruiser- 

erable. 

B. The superlative singular frequently occurs with quisque, 
every one, and the plural with quique, all. But here the sin- 
gular is commonly translated by the plural. E. g. 

JDoctissimus quisque. Every one of tie most learned. 

Optimi qu\nue.\ The best men all (as a class). 

JExceUentissima quaeque. The most excellent tilings all (cis a 

class). 

Mars ipse ex aVie fortvssimum Mars himself is wont to elect the 

que'mque pigneniri sdlet. bravest of the battle-field. 

Peciinia semper amplissimo quo- Money was always despised by all 

que, clarissimoque contempta the greatest and most illustrious 

est. of men. 

Miilti mortiiles convenere, maxi- Many flocked together, especially 

me proximi quique. (all) the nearest neighbors. 

Notissimum quddque malum maxi- The most familiar evil is always f 

f me tolerabile est. the easiest to bear. 

Opiimus quisque maxime poste- The best man always serves pos- 

ritati servit. terity the most. 

Miltiades maxime nitebatur, ut Miltiades made special efforts to 

prima quoque tempore^ castra have the camp constructed at 

fie rent. the earliest moment possible. 

Mdximae cuique fominae mini- The greatest prosperity is always 

me credendum est. least to be trusted. 

C. The superlative is sometimes linked to another superla- 
tive of a separate clause, by means of ut . . . . ita, as .... so 
(the . . . . the).|| E. g. 

Ut quisquis dptime dicit, ita maxi- The better any one speaks, the 
me dicendi difficultatem per- more he dreads the difficulty of 
timescit. speaking. 

* The superlative of eminence alone may thus admit of a comparative. 

t Quisque designates distributively every individual possessed of the same 
quality in its highest degree, and quique the several classes to which that qual- 
ity is common. 

X When the predicate contains an additional superlative, a? in this instance, 
the quisque of the subject may be rendered by alien ys. So Optimum quidque 
rarissimum est, The best things are always the rarest. 

§ So also Priiiio quoque die, At the earliest possible day. And frequently in 
connection with an ordinal; as, Quinto r/uoqae anno, In every fifth year. Septi- 
mus quisque dies, Every seventh day. becimum quemque mUitem, Every tenth 
soldier. 

|| Here the superlative is rendered by the comparative, as will be perceived 
from the examples. 



LESSON 44.] CONSTRUCTION OF THE SUPERLATIVE. 



233 



lit quisque est vir dptimus, ita 
dijjicillime esse alios improbos 
siispicatur. . 



The better the man, the less easily 
-will he suspect others of being 
bad. 



D. The superlative often appears in connection with qitam, 
quantus, qui, tit qui,* to denote that the object admits of com- 
parison with the most eminent of its kind. E. g. 

I am as mild as the most lenient 
man (that ever lived). 

It will be as acceptable to me as 
anything ever was. 

You will oblioe me ureatlv, if you 



Tcim sum mitis, qudm qui lenissi- 

'lll us. 
Tain grfitum id mihi erit, qudm 

quod gratissimum. 
Gralissimum mihi feceris, si huic 

commendation i meae tantum 

tribiieris, quantum cut tribuisti 

plurimum. 
Grata da res, ut quae mdxime se- 

natui linquam, fiiit. 
Caesar sit pro praetore eo jure, 

quo qui Optimo. 



will attach as much importance 

to this recommendation of mine, 

as you ever did to any. 
That affair was as grateful, as any 

ever was to the senate. 
Caesar can be propraetor with as 

good a right, as any one ever 

was. 
The house is as much frequented, 

as it ever was. 
For many years already the mother 

has wished her son killed, and 

now more than ever. 



Do'mus celebratur ita, tit aim 

mdxime. 
Mater miiltos jam annos, et nunc 

cum mdxime, filium interfec- 

tum ciipit. 

E. The force of the superlative may be increased in sev- 
eral ways : — 

1. By the particles midto, longe (=by far), qitam, or vel (= even). 
E.g. Mulio maximum helium, By much the greatest war. Longe hu- 
manissimus, By far the most humane. Quant gratissimus, Extremely 
grateful. Vel minima. Even the smallest things. Quam brcrissimc, 
With the utmost possible brevity. 

2. By quam, quantus, qualis, or ut in connection with one of the 
forms of possum. E. g. 



Caesar qudm aequissimo loco po- 
test,] castra communit. 

Jugurtha qudm mdximas potest] 

cdpias armat. 
Tan t is tin inn eorporisque dolori- 

bus, qudnti in hdminem mdxi- 

mi cadere possunt. 
Sic Caesari te commendavi, ut 



Caasar fortifies his camp in the 

most favorable locality he can 

(find). 
Jugurtha equips the largest force 

he can. 
With as much suffering of mind 

and body as can possibly fall to 

the lot of man. 
I have recommended you to Ca?sar 



* Here the indefinite qui = " any one." 

t With possum in this construction the infinitive of the nearest A'erb is com- 
monly understood, as here communire, artnare. 
20* 



234 



LATIN GKAJDIAE. 



[LESSON 44. 



gravissime diligentissimeque po- 

lui. 



in the most earnest and urgent 
manner I could. 



3. Sometimes (though rarely) by maxime : as, Maxime gravissimum, 
By far the heaviest. Hi sunt vel maxime humanissimi. These arc by 
far the most humane. 

4. Quam with the positive, or quam (quantum) volo or possum, 
sometimes have superlative force. E. g. quam kite (= latissime), tar 
and wide; quam magnum = maximum ; quam potero dilucide atque 
perspicue, as clearly and perspicuously as I can. 



F. THE PERFECT TENSE OF 

Indicative. 



SUM. 



Singular. 
I have been fiii 

Thou hast been fiiistl 

He has been, fult, 

Singular. 



Plural. 
We have been fuimus 
Ye have 1>< < n fuistia 
They have been, fuerunt or fuere. 

Subjunctive. 

Plural. 

That I may have been fuerim That we may Jiavt been fuerlmus 
That thoumayst have been fueris That ye mini hurt been fueritls 

That he may hare been, fuerit, That they mag haw 1>< en, fucrint. 

In like manner are inflected all the compounds of sum ; as, altfui, 
I have been absent ; adfui and interfui, I have been present ; j>olui, 
I have been able. 



Evt r, at any time. 

Nc >■> r. 

Have you been at the market ? 
1 have been there. 
Have I been there ? 
You have been there. 
You have not been there. 
Has your father been there ? 
He has not been there ? 
Have we been there ? 
Yes, ye have been there. 
Have you been at the ball ? 
I have been there. 

Have they been there ? 

They have not been there. 
Have you ever been at the play ? 
I have never been there. 
You have never been there. 
He has never been there. 
Have you already been in the 
garden '? 



Nunquam, nulla ton pure. 

Fuistine in fdro ? 

Fiii. 

Egdn' ibi fiii '? 

Fuisti. 

(Ibi) non fuisti. 

Fuitne pater tiius lllic ? 

Non fiiit (lllic). 

An nos ibi fiiimus ? 

Sane quidem, niistis. 

Interfuistine saltatidni ? 

Interfui. 
( Niim illi interfuerunt ? 
I Illine interfuerunt 'i 

N6n interfuerunt. 

Interfuistine linquam spectaculo ? 

Ego vero niinquam interfui. 

Tu niinquam interfuistl 

tile niinquam interfuit. 

FuisLine jam in hortulo '! 



LESSON 44.] EXERCISES 85, 86. 235 

T , , , ,-, ( Nondum fiii. 

I have not yet been there. ■< -a m . , •, „,. 

^ ( Ego lbi nondum fin. 

You have not yet been there. Tu ibi nondum fuisti. 

Nor have they ever been there. Neque llli unquam ibi fuerunt. 

Have you already been at my Fuistine jam apud patrem rneam 

father's ? f (cum patre meo) ? 

I have not yet been there ? Ego apud eum (cum eo) nondum 

fiii. 

The play, spectacle. Spectaculum, i, n. 

Exercise 85. 

Where have you been ? — I have been at the market. — Have you 
been at the ball ? — I have been there. — Have I been at the play ? 

— You have been there. — Hast thou been there ? — I have not been 
there — Has your cousin ever been at the theatre ? — He has never 
been there. — Hast thou already been in the great square ? — I have 
never been there. — Do you intend to go thither ? — I intend to go 
thither — When will you go timber ? — I will go thither to-morrow. 

— At what o'clock ? — At twelve o'clock. — Has your son already 
been in my large garden ? — He has not yet been there. — Does he 
intend to see it? — He does intend to see it. — When will he go 
thither ? — He will go thither to-day. — Does he intend to go to the 
ball this evening ? — He does intend to go thither. — Have you al- 
ready been at the ball ? — I have not yet been there. — When do 
you intend to go thither ? — I intend to go thither to-morrow. — Have 
yon already been in the Englishman's room ? — I have not yet been 
in it. — Have you been in my rooms ? — 1 have been there. — When 
have you been there ? — I have been there this morning. — Have I 
been in your room or in that (an in Mo) of your friend ? — You have 
neither been in mine nor in that of my friend, but in that of the 
Italian. 

Exercise 8G. 

Has the Dutchman been in our storehouses or in those (in Ulis) of 
the English ? — He has neither been in ours nor in those of the Eng- 
lish, but in those of the Italians. — Hast thou already been at the 
market ? — I have not yet been there, but I intend to go thither. — 
Has the son of our bailiff been there ? — He has been there. — When 
has he been there ? — He has been there to-day. — Does the son of our 
neighbor intend to go to the market ? — He does intend to go thith- 
er. — What does lie wish to buy there ? — He wishes to buy some 
chickens, oxen, cheese, beer, and cider there. — Have you already 
been at my cousin's house ? — I have already been there. — Has your 
friend already been there ? — He has not yet been there. — Have we 
already been at our friends'? — We have not yet been there. — Have 
our friends ever been at our house ? — They have never been there. 

— Have you ever been at the theatre ? — I have never been there. 

— Have you a mind to write a letter? — I have a mind to write one. 

— To whom do you wish to write ? — I wish to write to my son. — 



236 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 45. 

Has your father already been in the country ? — He has not yet been 
there, but he intends to go thither. — Does he intend to go thither 
to-day? — He intends to go thither to-morrow. — At what o'clock 
will he depart ? — lie will depart at half past six. — Does he intend 
to depart before he breakfasts ? — He intends to breakfast before he 
departs. — Have you been anywhere ? — I have been nowhere. 



Lesson XLV. — PENSUM QUADRAGESIMUM 
QUINTUM. 

OF THE PERFECT TENSE. 

A. The perfect tense serves to represent an action 
or event as completed, either just now or at some in- 
definite past time. As, 

. _ . f I have loved (just now), or 
Amavi, | j loved £ onC6j yester day). 

„ . . ] I have written (and have now done writing), or 
bcnpsi, | j wrote £ at gome past t [ me y 

1. With the former of these significations it is called the perfect 
definite, and corresponds to the same tense in English. With the 
latter, it is called the perfect indefinite, and corresponds to the simple 
form of the English imperfect.* 

2. The perfect indefinite occurs most frequently as the tense of 
historical narration. E. g. Cato, quoad vixit, virtutum laude crevit, 
Cato increased in reputation for virtue, as long as he lived. Lepidus 
ad me lieri vesperi litteras misit, Lepidus sent me a letter last evening. 

3. Examples of the perfect definite are: — Filium unicum adoles- 
centulum habeo. Ah ! quid dixi, me habere ? imo habui, — I have an 
only son. Alas ! What, did I say " I have one " ? No, I have had 
one. Fuimus Troes, fuit Ilium, We Trojans have been, Ilium has ex- 
isted (but is now no longer). Ferus omnia Juppiter Argos transtulit, 
Cruel Jupiter has transferred everything to Argos (and it is there 
now) . 

FORMATION OF THE PERFECT ACTIVE. 

B. The terminations of the perfect tense for the re- 
spective conjugations are: 1. aw, 2. ui (evi), 3. i, 4. ivi 
(«)• E. g. 

* I. e. to the form I loved, wrote, &c, but not to I was loving, writing, which 
is the Latin Imperfect. 



LESSON 45.] THE PERFECT TENSE. 237 

1. Amavi, laboravi, apportavi, Ifivi (= lavavi). 

2. Monui, habui, studui, — delevi, complevi. 

3. Legi, scripsi, dilexi, attuli, misi. 

4. Audivi, scivi, Ivi, prodii, sitivi. 

Remarks. 

1. The perfect tense contains the second root of the verb, which 
serves as the basis for the formation of several other parts. (Cf. 
Lesson XXVIII. C. 1-5). 

2. The second root of the first, second, and fourth conjugations is 
formed from the first or general root (can, mon, aud), by adding, 
1. civ, 2. ev (w),* 4. Iv ; as «mav, delev (monu), audiv. 

3. The second root of the third conjugation is either the same as the 
first,f as leg, exit, bib, or is formed by adding s,% as scrips (== scrib 
-4- s), dix (— die -j- s), dux (== due -j- s). 

4. Some verbs of the second conjugation form their second root 
according to the analogy of the third, and, vice verm, several of the 
third assume id. E.g. augeo — auxi, fulgeo — fulsi, video — vldi:§ 
alo — alui, colo — colui, pono — posui, &c. 

5. Many verbs form their second root irregularly ; as, 1. Seco — 
seciii, lavo — lewi, veto — vetui, &c. 2. Jubeo — jussi, haereo — haesi, 
audeo — ausus sum, &c. 3. Arcesso — arcesswi, cresco — crevi, 
cupio — cuplvi, few — lull, mitto — misi, nosco — novi, quciero — 
quaeswi, sperno — sprevi, uro — ussi, verro (everro) — verri, &c. 
4. Aperio — aperui, farcio — far si, salio — scdiii, sarcio — sarsi, 
venio —■ veni, &c. A list of these is given at the end of the 
Grammar. 

6. A number of verbs reduplicate the initial consonant in the second 
root; as, do — dedi, sto — steli, \\ curro — cucurri, disco — didici, 
posco — poposci, mordeo — momordi, &c. 

7. Compounds generally form the second root like their simple 
verbs ; as, affero (adferd) — attuli (= ad -\- tuli), conficio — confeci, 
exaudio — exaudivi, &c. 

* Most verbs of the second conjugation have u, but the original termination 
was ev, which by dropping e becomes v or u. 

t Always the" same when the root ends in a vowel; as, minuo — minxd, actio, 
— acid, metuo — mettii, &c. 

| This s, preceded by c, g, h, or qu, gives rise to the compound consonant x ; 
as, dico — clixi, figo — fixi, traho — traxi, coquo — coxi. 

When preceded by i, the latter is changed into p ; as nubo — nupsi, scribo — 
scripsi, &c. 

When preceded by d, either d or s is dropped (most commonly the latter) ; 
as, edo — edi, defendo — defendi ; claudo — elaasi, ludo — lusi. 

An n in the first root is frequently dropped in the second, and the root-vowel 
prolonged; as, frango — fregi, fundo — fudi, vinco — vlci, relinquo — rellqui. 

§ The prolongation (and change) of the root-vowel is qnite frequent; as, 
capio — cepi, ago — egi, fdcio — feci, leqo — legi, venio — veni, &c. 

|| Sto and sp'ondeo drop the second 5: spopondi. This reduplication includes 
the vowel following the consonant, which sometimes, however, is changed into 
e; as folio — fefelli. 



238 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 45. 

8. The perfect subjunctive is formed from the perfect indicative, 
by changing i into trim , as, amdvi — amaverim, monui — monuerim, 
&c. 

INFLECTION OF THE PERFECT ACTIVE. 

C. The following paradigms exhibit the inflection 
of the perfect, indicative and subjunctive : — 

First Conjugation. 
Indicative. Subjunctive. 

Amavi. I loved, have loved. Amaverim, that I may have loved. 
Sing, amavi Sing, amaverim 

amavisti amaveris 

amavit, amaverit, 

Plur. amavimus Plur. amaverimiis 

amavistls amaveritis 

amaverunt or -re.* amaverint. 

Second Conjugation. 
Indicative. Subjunctive. 

Montii, I reminded, have re- Monuerim, that I may have 

min ded. rem inded. 

Sing, montii Sing, monuerim 

montiistl monueris 

monuit, monuerit, 

Plur. monuimiis Plur. monuerimus 

monuistis monueritls 

monuerunt or -re. monuerint. 

Third Conjugation. 
Indicative. Subjunctive. 

Legi, I read, have read. Legerim, that I may have read. 

Sing, leg! Sing, legerim 

legist! legeris 

legit, legerit, 

Plur. leglmus Plur. legerimus 

legistis learerltis 

legerunt or -re. legerint. 

Fourth Conjugation. 

Indicative. Subjunctive. 

Audivi, Iheard^ have heard. Audiverim, that I may have heard. 
Sing, audivi Sing, audiverim 

audivisti audiveris 

audivit, audiverit, 

* The form in trunt is the more common of the two. 



LESSON -15.] TERFKCT TENSE ACTIVE. 2-59 

Pluk. audivimiis Pluk. audiverimQs 

audivistis audlverltis 

audiverunt or -re. audiverint. 

So conjugate apportdvi, I have brought ; lavi, I have washed ; curdvT, 
I have ordered , — vldi, I have seen ; veni, I have come; habiii, I have 
had ; secui, I have cut ; jussi, I have commanded ; — feci, I have made ; 
refect, I have mended ; mlsi, I have sent ; valid and nolui, I have been 
willing, unwilling ; — cupwi, I have desired; wl (ezii,prodii),* I have 
gone (out, forth) ; quaeslvi, I have sought, &c. 

Remarks. . 

In the tenses derived from the second root, the syllables 
dvi, evi, Ivi are frequently contracted. 

«.) In the first conjugation, dvi followed by an s, and are followed 
by an r, are changed into d ; as, amdsti, amdstis, amassem, amas'se, for 
amavisti, amayistis, amavissem, amavisse, &c, and amarunt, amarim, 
amdrarn, amdro, instead of amaverunt, amdveram, amdvero, &c. 

b.) The same takes place with evi of the second and third conju- 
gations ; as, complesti, complesse, nesti, nestis, for complevisti, eomplc- 
visse, nevisti, nevistis, and deleram, consuerunt, nerunt, instead of dele- 
veram, consueverunt, neverunt. So decressem, decresse, quiessem siris, 
for decrevissem, &c. The termination dvi of novi and its compounds, 
and also of the compounds of moveo, suffers a similar contraction ; as, 
norunt, nvsse, cognuram, commossem, instead of noverunt, novisse, &c. 

c) In the fourth conjugation wi before s frequently experiences a 
similar change ; as, audtsti, audlssem, audisse, for audlvisti, audlvisscm, 
audlvisse, &c. But most verbs of this conjugation have a second form 
in ii, which sometimes occurs in poetry, and, when an r follows, aho 
in prose ; as, audut, impediit, abiisse, for audlvit, impedwit, ablvisse, and 
(more frequently) audieram, quaesierat, definierant, instead of aud'i- 
veram, &c. 

d.) The syllable is, when preceded by an s or x, is sometimes syn- 
copated in the perfect tense of the third conjugation ; as, dixti, sur- 
rexe, evasti, divisse, for dixisti, surrexisse, evasisti, divisisse, &c. But 
this contraction is antiquated, and used sometimes only by the poets. 

<?.) Antiquated forms of the perfect subjunctive are those in assim, 
essim, and sim (for averim, uerim, erim), which frequently occur in 
Plautus and Terence. E. g. imperassit, licessit, occlsit, instead of 
imperaverit, licuerit, occiserit. Among these forms are included faxit, 
faxint (for fecerit, fecerint),^ and ausim, ausit (for ausus sim, ausus 
sil), which have remained in use among the later writers. 

Have you had my coat ? Habuistine meam tdgam ? 

I have had it. Habui. 

* All the compos, of eo have ii rather than lei. 

t In invocations and wishes , as, Faxit Deus, God grant ! Dii immortelles 
faxint ! 



240 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 45. 



No, indeed, I have not had it. 

Have I had it ? 

Yes, you have had it. 
Has he had any wine ? 
He has had a little. 

He has had none. 

Have we had some books ? 
Yes, you have had some. 
Have they had anything ? 
They have had nothing. 
Has he been right or wrong ? 
He has been correct. 
He has never been either right 
or wrong. 



To take place. 

Does the ball take place this 

evening ? 
It does take place. 

When did the ball take place ? 

It took place yesterday. 

Yesterday. 

The day before yesterday. 
The first time, the second 

time, the third time, &c. 
The last time. 
This time. 
Another time. 
Many times. 

Several times. 

Time and airain. 



Non vero, ego earn non habui. 

An ego earn habui ? 

Egdn' earn habui ? 

Sane quidem, earn habuisti. 

Habuitne vinum ? 

Habuit vero aliquantulum. 
( Nullum habuit. 
( Non habuit. 

Habuimiisne aliquot li'bros ? 

Sane quidem, nonnullos habuistis. 

Num quid habuerunt '? 

Nihil habuerunt. 

Utrum vere locutus est, an erravit ? 

Vere locutus est. 

tile niinquam neque vere locutus 
est, neque erravit. 

( Locum habere. 

■I Locus est allcui rei. 

( Locus datur allcui rei. 

Datiirne (estne) locus saltatidni 



hddie vesperi 

Datur. Est. 
( Quando fuit locus saltatidni ? 
-} Quo tempore datus est locus salta- 
( tidni ? 

Heri. 

Heri ; hesterno die. 

Nudius tertius. 

Primum, iterum, tertium, quartum, 

&c. (adverbs). 
Postremum, ultimum. 
Nunc (adv.), hoc tempore. 
Alias (adv.), alio tempore. 
Saepius (adv. comp.), sexcenties. 
( Diversis temporibus. 
\ Non uno tempore. 
Iterum ac saepius, semel atque 

iterum. 

Quoties ? Quotiens f (adv.) 
Tottes, totiens. (adv.) 

As many times (as often) ( Quoties .... toties. 

.... as. | Toties .... quoties. 

Once, twice, three times, Semel, bis, ter, quater, quinqmes, 

four times, &c. (Cf. Les- sexies, &c. 

son XXI. F.) 
Sometimes. Interdum, nonnun 



How many times ? 
So (as) many times. 



Formerly, 



Antehac, olim, quondi 



iquam. (adv.) 



LESSON 43.] EXERCISES 87, 88. 241 

To be accustomed, ivont. Soleo, ere, so fit us sum (aliquid 

facerf). 
It is lawful, right. Licet, licuit, or Itcl'tum est (alicui 

ALIQUID FACERE). 

Are you accustomed to go to the Solesne ire interdum in forum ? 

market sometimes ? 

I am accustomed to go there Sdleo eo ire nonniinquam. 

sometimes. 

Have you ever gone to the ball ? Ivistine unquam saltatum ? 

I have gone there several times. Ego vero ivi diversis tempdribus. 

I have gone there time and tvi vero semel atque iterum (lte- 

again. r rum ac saepius) 

And I have never gone. Ego autem nunquam ivi 

Have I been wrong in buying Niim mihi libros emere non h'cuit ? 

books V 

You have not been wrong in Immo vero tibi quosdam emere 

buying. licuit. 

Exercise 87. 

Have you had my glove ? — I have had it. — Have you had my 
pocket-handkerchief? — I have not had it. — Hast thou had my um- 
brella ? — I have not had it. — Hast thou had my pretty knife ? — I 
have had it. — When hadst thou it ? — I had it yesterday. — Have I 
had thy gloves ? — You have had them. — Has your brother had my 
wooden hammer ? — He has had it. — Has he had my golden ribbon ? 

— He has not had it. — Have the English had my beautiful ship V — 
They have had it. — Who has had my thread stockings '? — Your ser- 
vants have had them. — Have we had the iron trunk of our good 
neighbor ? — We have had it. — Have we had his fine carriage ? — 
AVe have not had it. — Have we had the stone tables of the foreign- 
ers ? — We have not had them. — Have we had the wooden leg of 
the Irishman ? — We have not had it. — Has the American had my 
good work ? — Pie has had it. — Has he had my silver knife ? — He 
has not had it. — Has the young man had the first volume of my 
work ? — He has not had the first, but the second. — lias he had it ? 

— Yes, sir, he has had it — When has he had it ? — He has had it 
this morning. — Have you had sugar ? — I have had some. — Have I 
had good paper ? — You have had some. — Has the sailor had bran- 
dy ? — He has had some. — Have you had any ? — I have had none. 

— Have you had the headache ? — I have had the toothache. — Have 
you had anything good '? — I have had nothing bad. — Did the ball 
take place yesterday ? — It did take place. — When does the ball take 
place ? — It takes place this evening. 

Exercise 88. 

Has the German had good beer ? — He has had some. — Hast thou 

had large cakes ? — I have had some. — Has thy brother had any ? — ■ 

He has had none. — Has the son of our gardener had flour ? — He 

has had some. — Have the Poles had good tobacco V — They have had 

P 21 



242 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 45. 

some. — What tobacco have they had '? — They have had tobacco 
for smoking, and snuff. — Have the English had as much sugar as tea ? 

— They have had as much of the one as of the other. — Has the phy- 
sician been right ? — He has been wrong. — Has the Dutchman been 
right or wrong ? — He never has been either right or wrong ? — Have 
I been wrong in buying honey ? — You have been wrong in buying 
some. — What has your cousin had ? — He has had your boots and 
shoes. — Has he had my good biscuits ? — He has not had them. — 
What has the Spaniard had ? — He has had nothing. — Who has had 
courage? — The English have had some: — Have the English had 
many friends ? — They have had many of them. — Have we had 
many enemies ? — We have not had many of them. — Have we had 
more friends than enemies ? — We have had more of the latter than 
of the former. — Has your son had more wine than meat V — He has 
had more of the latter than of the fbi mer. — Has the Turk had more 
pepper than corn ? — He has had more of the one than of the other. 

— Has the painter had anything ? — He has had nothing. 

Exercise 89. 

How often have you read that book '? — T have read it twice. — 
Have you ever heard this man ? — I have never heard him. — Have 
you heard him sometimes ? — I have heard him sometimes. — Do you 
sometimes go to the theatre ? — I go thither sometimes. — Has your 
brother gone to the ball ? — He has (gone there). — Has he gone to 
the ball as often as you ? — He has gone (thither) oftener than I. — 
Do you sometimes go into the garden ? — I formerly went into it fre- 
quently. — Does your old cook ever go to the market? — He goes there 
frequently. — He went there the day before yesterday — Hast thou 
gone to the ball oftener than thy brothers ? — I have gone thither 
oftener than they — Has your cousin often been at the play ? — He 
has been there several times — Have you sometimes been hungry ? 
I have often been hungry. — Has your valet often been thirsty ? — 
He has never been either hungry or thirsty. — Have you gone to the 
play early ? — I have gone thither late. — Have I gone to the ball as 
early as you ? — You have gone thither earlier than I. — Has your 
brother gone thither too late ? — He has gone thither too early. — 
Have your brothers had anything ? — They have had nothing. — 
Who has had my purse and my money ? — Your servant has had both. 

— Has he had my stick and my hat ? — He has had both. — Hast 
thou had my horse or that of my brother ? — I have had neither yours 
nor that of your brother. — Have I had your note or that of the phy- 
sician ? — You have had both — What has the physician had? — He 
has had nothing — Has anybody had my golden candlestick ? — No- 
body has had it. — When hast thou been at the ball ? — I was (there) 
last evening. — Hast thou found any one there ? — I have found no 
one there. 



LESSON 46.] THE PERFECT PASSIVE. 243 



Lesson XLVI. — PENSUM QUADRAGESIMUM 
SEXTUM. 

OF THE PERFECT PASSIVE. 

A. The perfect tense of the passive voice is com- 
posed of the perfect participle and sum or fui. Thus : — 

Indicativ Subjunctive. 

Amatus sum or fui, I have been Amatus sim or fuerim, that I 

loved, or I was loved. may have been loved. 

Sing, amatus sum or fui Sing, amatus sim or fuerim 

amatus es or fuisti amatus sis or fueris 

amatus est or fuit, amatus sit or fuerit, 

Plur. amati sumus or fuimus Plur. amati simus or fuerimus 
amati estis or fuistis amati sitis or fuerftis 

amati sunt or fuerim t.* amati sint or fuerint. 

So inflect monitus sum, I have been admonished ; lectus sum, I have 
been read ; auditus sum, I have been heard. To these add lacerdtus 
sum, I have been torn ; lautus sum, I have been washed ; servatus 
sum, I have been preserved ; laudatus sum, I have been praised ; vitu- 
perdtus sum, I have been blamed ; orndtus sum, I have been adorned ; 
doctus sum, I have been taught ; habitus sum, I have been held ; jussus 
sum, I have been commanded; — dilectus sum, I have been cherished ; 
ductus sum, I have been led ; fractus sum, I have been broken ; mis- 
sus sum, I have been sent ; scriptus sum, I have been written ; subldtus 
sum, I have been taken away ; erudltus sum, I have been instructed ; 
munltus sum, I have been defended ; punltus sum, I have been pun- 
ished ; vestllus sum, I have been clothed. 

Remarks. 

1. The perfect participle employed in the formation of this tense is 
derived from the supine in um, which is usually termed the third root 
of the verb. (Cf. Lesson XXIV. C. Rem. 1.) 

2. The third root of the first, second, and fourth conjugations is de- 
rived from the first or general root (am,mon, aud) by annexing, 1. at, 
2. it (et), 4. it; as, amlitum, monitum (deletum), auditum. 

3. The third root of the third conjugation is formed by annexing t 
to the general root ; as, dictum, exutum, tectum. This t of the third 
root, like the s of the second (p. 237, note J), gives rise to several 
modifications of the consonants preceding it. Thus : — 

a.) When the first root ends in g, h, or qu, these letters are changed 
into c ; as, rego — rectum, traho — tractum, coquo — coctum. 

* So if the subject is feminine, Sing, amata sum, es, est; Plur. amatae sumus, 
estis, sunt; and when neuter, Sing, amcitum est; Plur. amata sunt. 



244 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 46. 



&.) B is changed into p ; as, scribo — scriptum, nubo — nuptum. 

c.) Sometimes the root is changed before the addition of t : as, 
colo — cultiim, frango — fraction, gero — gestum, rumpo — r upturn, 
sperno — spretum, sterno — stratum, uro — ustum, vinco — victum. 

d.) When the first root ends in d or t, the third adds s instead of 
t, and those letters are either dropped or converted into s ; as, edo — 
esum, defendo — defensum, ludo — lusum, discedo — discessum. 

e.) A number of other verbs add likewise s and modify the root ; 
as, excello — excelsum, folio — falsum, pello — pulswn, premo — pres- 
sum, spargo — sparsum, verro — versum. 

f) Some verbs in sco drop sc before the t of the third root ; as, 
cresco — crelum, nosco — nutum, quiesco — quletum, pasco — pastwn. 

g.) A number of verbs form their third root in it or it , as, blbo — 
bibitum, vomo — voimlum, pono — positum , arcesso — arcessltum, cu- 
plo — cupltum, quaero — quaesltum, &c. 

4. The reduplication (p. 237, Rem. 6) does not extend to the third 
root. E. g do — datum, sto — stdtum, curro — cursum, mordeo — 
morsum, &c. 

5. Verbs which are irregular in the second root are generally like- 
wise so in the third ; as, seco — sectum, lavo — lavatum (but lautus or 
Iotas'), fero — latum, aperio — apertum, mitto — rnissum, salio — sal- 
sum, venio — ventum, &c. 

6. Inceptive verbs in sco generally want the third root, and so many 
others. For these, and other irregularities of verbs, the student may 
consult the list of irregular verbs at the end of the book, or his lexicon . 



Have you been loved ? 
I have been loved. 
Has he been hated ? 
He was not hated. 

Has she been praised ? 

Yes, truly, she has been praised 
No, she has been blamed 

Has any one been punished ? 

No one has been punished. 

Who has been rewarded ? 

The young man has been re- 
warded. 

Have we been despised ? 

We have not been despised. 

Have they {fern.) been repre- 
hended ? 

They have been reprehended. 

Have ye been sent ? 
We have not been sent. 



Esne (fuistine) amutus ? 

Amatus sum. 

Fui'tne in ddio ? 

In ddio non fu.it. 
( Ecquid est laudata ? 
I Estne laudata ? 

Sane quidem, laudata est (fiiit). 

tmmo vero vituperate, est. 
( Ecquis est punitus ? 
( Niiinquis est poena affectus ? 
\ Nemo punitus est. 
I Nemo quisquam poena affectus est. 

Qui's est praemio or n at us ? 

Adolescentulus praemio ornatus est. 

Num nos contempti siimus ? 

Non siimus 

An l'llae reprehensae sunt ? 

Vero quidem, reprehensae sunt. 
( Estis missi ? 
I Num estis missi ? 

Missi non siimus. 



LESSON 46.] PERFECT OF DEPONENT VERBS. 



245 



PERFECT OF DEPONENT VERBS. 

B. . The perfect tense of deponent verbs is formed 
like that of the passive voice (cf. A.). Thus : — 

Indicative. Subjunctivk. 

Hortatus sum or fui, I have ex- Hortatus sim or fuerim, that I 

horted, I exhorted. may have exhorted. 

Sing, hortatus sum or fui Sing, hortatus sim or fuerim 

hortatus es or fuisti hortatus sis or fueris 

hortatus est or fuit, hortatus sit or fuerit, 

Plur. hortati sumus or fuimus Plur. hortati slmus or fuerimus 

hortati estis or fuistis hortati sitis or fueritis 

hortati sunt or fuerunt. hortati sint or fuerint. 

So veritus sum or fui, I have feared ; locutus sum or fui, I have 
spoken ; blandltus sum or fui, I have flattered. To these add arbi- 
tratus sum, I have thought ; comildtus sum, I have escorted ; moratus 
sum, I have delayed ; — meritus sum, I have earned ; miseritus sum, I 
have pitied ; tuitus sum, I have defended ; — lapsus sum, I have fallen ; 
oblltus sum, I have forgotten ; profectus sum, I have departed ; secutus 
sum, I have followed ; — expertus sum, I have experienced ; largltus 
sum, I have lavished, &c. (Cf. Lesson XXXV.) 



Have you ever spoken Latin ? 

I have never spoken it. 

Has he been accustomed to Avrite 
letters ? 

He has been accustomed (to do 
so). 

Who have obtained the prefer- 
ence ? 

Our friend (has obtained it). 

We have obtained it ourselves. 

Whom have they flattered ? 

They have flattered no one. 

Has he departed (for a journey) ? 

He has not yet left. 

Has she remained at home ? 

Yes, she has (remained). 

How much money has he lav- 
ished ? 

He has lavished more than was 
proper. 

Have you spent more money 
than I ? 



Locuiusne es unquam Latine ? 
Nunquam locutus sum. 
Solitusne est scribere epistolas ? 

Sane quidem, sdlitus est. 

Qui's principatum consecutus est ? 

Ndster amicus. 

Nosmet ipsi principatum conseciiti 

siimus. 
Cui * blanditi sunt ? 
Blanditi sunt nemini. 
Num est profectus ? 
Nondum profectus est. 
Moratane est ddmi ? 
Vero, morata est. 
Quantum pecuniae largitus est 

ille ? 
Largitus est plus (amplius) aequo. 

Largitusne es majorem pecuniam 
quam ego ? 



* Blandiri alicui is the usual construction. 

21* 



246 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 46. 

No, I have (on the contrary) tmmo vero minorem largitus sum. 
spent less. 

The king. Rex, regis, m. 

The successor. Successor, oris,* m. 

The lawyer, barrister, coun- Patronus (i, m.) causarum ; causi- 
sellor. dicus, i, m. ; jurisconsultus, i, in. 

The office, employment. ■ Miinus, eris, n. 

Learned. Doctus, eruditus, a, um. 

To succeed (one in office). Succedo, ere, cessi, cessum (in ali- 

' CUJDS LOCUM, REGNO). 

To grow sick, to be taken ( Aegresco, ere, , .f 

ill. \ Flo (fieri, factus sum) aegrotus. 

To fall sick. Incido (ere, cidi, casum) in morbum. 

To recover one's health, to ( Convalesco, ere, lui, . 

grow well. \ Flo (fieri, factus sum) sanus. 

TT77 . , 7 - , . o ( Quid ex eo factum est ? 

What has become of him ? < /{ -, , f , J , x *, . ,.* 

J I Quid eo (de eo) j actum est ? 

He has become a doctor, a law- Factus est medicus, patronus cau- 

yer, a king. sarum, rex. 

He has turned soldier. Factus est miles. 

He has enlisted. Ilelatus % est inter milites. 

Have you become a lawyer ? Factusne es considicus ? 

No, I have become a merchant. Non vero, factus sum mercator. 

AYhat becomes of children ? Quid fit ex liberis ? 

«, ., j ' , ( Liberi fmnt homines adiilti. 

Children become men. ■< -,-,. , ,,, . , , . ,,.,,. 

I rmnt ex liberis homines adulti. 

Has he fallen sick ? Inciditne in morbum ? 

He has fallen sick. . Vero quidem, incidit. 

TT t t v, r, ( Factusne es sanus? 

Have you recovered vour health i < n , 

J •> i Lonvaluistine i 



I have not recovered. 



I Convaluistine ex mdrbo ? 
Non factus sum. 
Non convalui. 
Whom has he succeeded (in j Cujus in locum successit ? 

office) ? I Cujus miineris factus est successor ? 

He has succeeded the king (to j In locum regis successit." 
the throne). \ Factus est successor regis. 

Exercise 90. 

Why has that child been praised '? — It has been praised because it 
has studied well. — Hast thou ever been praised? — I have often 
been praised. — Why has that other child been punished? — It has 
been punished because it has been naughty and idle. — Has this child 
been rewarded? — It has been rewarded, because it has worked well. 
— When was that man punished ? — He was punished day before 

* This word always requires the genitive of the office. 

f Compare A. Eem. 6. 

X From refei-o, -erre, -tfili, -latum. 



LESSON 46.] EXERCISES 90, 91. 247 

yesterday. — Why have we been esteemed ? — Because we have been 
studious and obedient. — Why have these people been hated ? — Be- 
cause they have been disobedient. — By whom has the room been 
swept ? — It has been swept by your servant. — How many times has 
it been swept ? — It has been swept twice. — Has your book been 
read as often as mine ? — It has been read oftener than yours. — Why 
has that book been burnt? — Because it was a worthless one. — Have 
you been commanded to write ? — I have not been commanded to 
write, but to speak. — Whither has the young man been sent ? — He 
has been sent into the country. — By whom have you been instruct- 
ed ? — I have been instructed by my parents and masters. — Has the 
book been torn by any one ? — It has been torn by our children. — 
Have our shirts been washed ? — They have not yet been washed. — 
When were our glasses broken ? — They were broken yesterday. — 
Have you been punished as severely (tarn severe) as I ? — I have 
been punished more severely than you. — By whom were these letters 
written ? — They were written by our enemies. — Has our friend 
been loved by his masters ? — He has been loved and praised by 
them, because he was studious and good ; but his brother has been 
despised by his, because he was naughty and idle. 

Exercise 91. 

What has become of your friend ? — He has become a lawyer. — 
What has become of your cousin ? — He has enlisted. — Was your 
uncle taken ill ? — He was taken ill, and I became his successor in 
his office. — Why did this man not work ? — He could not work, be- 
cause he was taken ill. — Has he recovered ? — He has recovered. — 
What has become of him ? — He has turned a merchant. — What has 
become of his children? — His children have become men. — What 
has become of your son ? — He has become a great man. — Has he 
become learned ? — He has become learned. — What has become of 
my book ? — I do not know (Hand scio) what has become of it. — 
Have you torn it ? — I have not torn it. — W r hat has become of our 
neighbor ? — I do not know what has become of him. — When did 
your father set out ? — He set out yesterday. — Have our friends 
already set out? — They have not yet set out. — With whom have 
you spoken ? — I have spoken with my neighbor. — Has any one 
spoken to those men ? — No one has spoken to them. — Whose money 
have they squandered ? — They have squandered their own. — Has 
any one exhorted you ? — My master has exhorted me. — Has your 
brother obtained the preference ? — He has not obtained it. — Have 
you flattered any one ? — I never flatter any one. — Do our enemies 
flatter us ? — They do flatter us. — Has your father remained at home ? 
— He has remained. — Did he remain at home yesterday ? — He did 
not remain at home. — Have you been accustomed to go to the the- 
atre? — I have not been accustomed to go. — Whom has your brother 
succeeded in office ? — He has become the successor of his father. 



248 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 47. 



Lesson XLVII. 



- PENSUM QUADRA GESIMUM 
SEPTIMUM. 



OF THE SUPINES. 

A. The supine in um always implies a purpose (to, 
in order to, for the purpose of), and is chiefly used after 
verbs of motion, such as eo, abeo, venio, mitto, missus 
sum, do, &c. As, 

Eo ciibitum, saltatum, venatum, I go to sleep, to dance, to hunt, to 

esum. eat. 

Abeo exulatum, patriarn defen 



sum, paeem petitum. 
Venio questuin, sciscitatum, gra- 

tulatum. 
Redeo spectatuui, obsecrfitum, 

hiematum. 
Missus sum bellatum, consiiltum. 

Do alicui aliquam niiptum. 



I go off into exile, to defend my 
country, to sue for peace. 

I come to complain, to inquire, to 
congratulate. 

I return to see, to beseech, to win- 
ter. 

I have been sent to wage war, to 
consult. 

I cive some one in marriaae. 



B. Rule. — Supines in um have an active sense, 
and govern the same cases as their verbs.* E. g. 



Diviti'acus Romam ad senatum 
venit, auxilium postulaium. 

Venerunt question injiirias, et ex 
foedere res repetltum. 

Non ego Graiis servltum mdtribus 

lbo. 
Hannibal invictus pdtriam defen- 

sum revocatus est. 
Coctum ego, non vapuldtum con- 

diictus siim. 
Missus est sciscitatum, quibus 

precibus suppliciisque deos 

pdssent placare. 



Divitiacus came to Rome to the 
senate, in order to ask for aid. 

They came to complain of injuries, 
and to demand restitution ac- 
cording to the treaty. 

I shall not go to serve Grecian 
matrons. 

Hannibal was recalled unconquered 
to defend his country. 

I was employed to cook, not to be 
flogged. 

He was sent to inquire by what 
prayers or offerings they might 
appease the gods. 



Remarks. 

1. The verb ire with the supine in um is sometimes equivalent to 
the English / will, I am about; as, Cur te is perditum? Why will you 



* The supines in um and u are, in point of form, nouns of the fourth declen- 
sion, the former in the accusative, the latter in the ablative or dative (when 
u = ui). Their construction, however, shows them to be parts of the verb. 



LESSON 47.] THE SUPINES. 249 

make yourself unhappy ? Fuere cives, qui seque remque publicam per- 
ditum irent, There were citizens, who were engaged in ruining both 
themselves and the republic. But ire with the supine is frequently 
nothing more than a circumlocution for the same tense of the verb ; 
as, ultum ire == ulcisci, to revenge ; raptum eunt = eripiunt, they plun- 
der; perditum eamus = per damns, we may ruin. 

2. The supine in um retains its active signification with a passive 
verb. E. g. Contumeliam mild per hujusce pctidantiam factum itur, 
They are insulting me with the petulance of this man. 

3. In connection with the passive infinitive iri, the supine in um 
serves to form the future infinitive passive ; as, amatum iri, to be about 
to be loved ; auditum iri,* to be about to be heard, &c. (Cf. Lesson 
XLVIII. B.) 

4. Many verbs want the supine in um. In these cases (and often 
also where the supine exists), the purpose implied in the verb of 
motion may be indicated by various other constructions ; as, Venio 
spectatum, ad spectandum, spectandi causa, spectaturus, ut spcclem, or 
spectdre, I come to see, for the sake of seeing, about to see, &c. In 
general, the use of the supine is not extensive, and the best writers 
more frequently prefer the gerund with ad or causa, or the future 
participle in urus. (Cf. Lesson XXX. D.) 

C. The supine in u is used in a passive sense after 
fas, nefas, opus, and after adjectives signifying good or 
bad, pleasant or unpleasant, worthy or unworthy, easy or 
difficult, and the like. E. g. 

Si hoc fas est dictu. If it is right to say so. 

Nefas est dictu. It is impiety to say so. 

Ita dictu opus est. Thus we must say. 

Honestum, di'gnum, tiirpe, mira- It is honorable, worthy, disgraceful, 

bile est dictu. wonderful to tell or to be told. 

Facile, difficile, melius, optimum It is easy, difficult, better, best, to 

est fdctu.-\ do or to be done. 

Quid est tarn jucundum cdfjnitu Is there anything so delightful to 

atque auditu, quam sapientibus know and to hear as a discourse 

sententiis gravibusque verbis replete with sage sentiments and 

ornata orario ? weighty arguments ? 

Sapiens vitdtu, quidque petitu sit The philosopher will render you 

melius, caiisas reddet tibi. an account of what it is best to 

avoid, and what best to seek. 

Hernici nihil lisquam dictu di- The Hernici never achieved any- 

gnum ausi sunt. thing worth mentioning anywhere. 



* The passive infinitive iri in this connection is used impersonally. 

f So likewise duke auditu, sweet to heai - ; mollissimum tactu, of the softest 
touch; facile inventu, easy to find, or to be found; speciosa dktu, plausible to 
be said; foedum inceptu, foul to be undertaken, &c. 



250 latin grammar. [lesson -17. 

Remarks. 

1. The supine in wdocs not govern any case, and is hence put with 
the passive voice. It is commonly rendered like the infinitive passive, 
but frequently better translated actively. The supines thus employed 
are not numerous. The principal are diclu, audita, cognitu, facta, 
inventu, memor.at u . 

2. The adjectives most frequently found in connection with this 
supine are bonus, parvus, magnus, dulcis, gravis, levis, fdus, durus, 
deformis, speciosus, digitus, indignus,proclivis, facilis, difficilis^ mirabilis, 
and others in lis : also varus, necessarius, acerbus, vehemens, lurpis, 
foedus, &c. 

3. The supine in u sometimes (though rarely) occurs with a verb; 
as, Pudet dictu, It is shameful to be said. Primus cubitu surgat, 
postremus cub'dwn eat, Let him (the steward) be the first to rise and 
the last to go to bed. Priusquam ego obsonatu redeo, Before I return 
from the purchase of food.* 

4. Instead of the supine in w, especially after fac'dls and difficilis, 
the following constructions frequently occur : — 

a) The infinitive present; as, FacUe est vincere non repugnantes, 
It is easy to conquer where there is no resistance. Id dicere obscoe- 
num est, It is obscene to say so. 

b.) The gerund with ad ; as, Facillimus ad concoquendum, The 
easiest to cook. Jucundum ad aiidiendum, Delightful to hear or to be 
heard. 

c.) The passive voice and the adjectives facile, difficile, &c. as 
adverbs. E. g. Non facile dijudicatur amor verus et fetus, Real love 
and feigned are not easily distinguished. 

d.) Sometimes the present participle, and more rarely a supine in 
urn ; as, Decemviri colloquentibus erant difficiles, The decemviri were 
difficult of access. Optimum factum, Best to do. 

e.) Quite frequently a verbal noun in the case required by the 
adjective; as, Justae causae facilis est defensio, The defense of a just 
cause is an easy one. Difficilis est animi, quid out qualis sit, intelli- 
gentia (= Difficile est intellectu, quid, &c), It is difficult to under- 
stand the nature of the mind. So jucunda polui (for po'u), Delightful 
to drink. Facilis divisui, Easy to divide. Erant rari aditus, They 
were rarely to be seen (rare of access). Cognitione dignum, AVorth 
knowing. 

Inf. Pkkf. Supine* f 
To do — done. Agere — egi, actum. 

To make (do) — made. Facere — feci, factum. 

To make (manufacture) — made. Conficere — confeci, confectum. 
To take off — taken off. Exuere — exui, exutum. 

* In these cases the supine appears really as the ablative of a verbal sub- 
stantive. But here the verbals in io are by far more common; e. g. a frumen- 
talione redire, to return from a foraging expedition. 

t The forms actum, factum, &c. may either be regarded as the supine "to 
act/' '"to do," or as the neuter of the perfect participle "acted." "done," &c. 



LESSON 47.] PHRASES AND EXERCISES. 



251 



To pull off— pulled off. 

To say — - said. 

To speak — spoken. 

To converse with — conversed 

with. 
To dare — dared. 
To cut — cut. 
To mow — mowed. 

To burn — burnt. 

To wash — washed. 

To pick up — picked up. 
To preserve — preserved. 
To tear — torn. 

What have you done ? 
I have done nothing. 
Has the tailor made my coat ? 
He has made it. 
He has not yet made it. 
Have you taken off your clothes ? 
I have taken them off. 
Have they taken off their boots ? 
They have not taken them off. 
Have we taken off our hats ? 
You have not taken off your hats. 
Has he told you that ? 
He has told me. 
Who has told him that ? 
I have told him myself. 
Are you the brother of my friend ? 
I am. 

With which man have you spo- 
ken ? 
I have spoken with that man. 
Have you spoken to your friend ? 

I have spoken to him. 

Which gloves have you picked 

up? 
I have picked up yours. 
Have you preserved my books ? 



I have not preserved them. 
Which books have you burnt ? 

I have burnt no books. 



Detrahere — detraxi, detractum. 
Dicere — dixi, dictum. 
Loqui — locutus sum. 
Colloqui — collociitus sum. 

Audere — ausus sum. 
Secare — secui, sectum. 
Metere — messiii, messum. 
Comburere — coinbussi, combu- 

stum. 
Concremare — avi, atum. 
Lavare — lavi, lavatum (lautus, 

lotus). 
Tollere — sustuli, sublatum. 
Servare — avi, atum. 
Seponere — posui, positum. 
Lacerare — avi, atum. 

Quid fecisti (egi'sti) ? 
Ego nihil feci. 

Confecitne sartor me'am tdgam ? 
Confecit vero. 
Earn ndndum confecit. 
Exuistine te vestibus ? 
Sic est, exui. 

Detraxeruntne sibi caligas pedibus ? 
Non detraxerunt. 
Niim nos capita nudavimus ? 
Vos capita non nudavistis. 
Dixitne tibi hoc ? 
Dixit vero. 

Qui's hoc (illud) e'i dixit ? 
Egdmet ipse. 

Esne tii frater amici mei ? 
Slim vero. 

Cum quo hdmine locutus es ? 
• > 

Collociitus sum cum hdmine illo. 
Locutiisne es amico tiio (ad ami- 

cum tiium) ? 
Locutus sum (ei, ad eum). 
Quae digitabula sustulisti ? 

(Sustuli) tiia. 

Servavistine (servastine) libros 

meos ? 
(Eos) non servavi. 
Quos libros combussisti ? 
Niillos (combiissi). 
Eiro non lillos libros combiissi. 



252 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON -17. 

Have you torn any shirts ? Lacerasti aiiqua indiisia ? 

I have torn some. Laeeravi nonmilla. 

Has he torn any ? Xiim quae laceravit ? 

Tj i . ( Non laceravit. 

±ie has torn none. •< x -t M1 , - ., 

I JMulla laceravit 

What have ye "washed ? Quid lavi'stis ? 

We have washed our white hand- Muccinia nostra Candida lavirnus. 

kerchiefs. 

"What have they cut ? Quid secuerunt ? 

They have cut our canes. Secuerunt bacula nostra. 

Exercise 92. 

Have you anything to do ? — I have nothing to do. — "What has 
your brother to do ? — He has to write letters. — What hast thou 
done ? — I have done nothing. — Have I done anything ? — You have 
torn my clothes. — What have your children done ? — They have 
torn their beautiful books. — What have we done ? — You have done 
nothing ; but your brothers have burnt my fine chairs. — Has the 
tailor already made your coat ? — He has not yet made it. — Has your 
shoemaker already made your boots ? — He has already made them. 

— Have you sometimes made a hat? — I have never made one. — 
Hast thou already made thy purse ? — I have not yet made it. — 
Have our neighbors ever made books ? — They made some formerly. 

— How many coats has your tailor made ? — He has made thirty or 
forty of them. — Has he made good or bad coats ? — He has made 
(both) good and bad (ones). — Has our father taken his hat off? — 
He has taken it off. — Have your brothers taken their coats off? — 
They have taken them off. — Has the physician taken his stockings 
or his shoes off? — He has taken off neither the one nor the other. — 
What has he taken away? — He has taken away nothing, but he has 
taken off his large hat. — Who has told you that ? — My servant has 
told it to me. — What has your cousin told you? — He has told me 
nothing. — Who has told it to your neighbor ? — The English have 
told it to him. — Are you the brother of that youth ? — 1 am. — Is 
that boy your son ? — He is. — How many children have you ? — I 
have . but two. — Has the bailiff gone to the market ? — He has not 
gone thither. — Is he ill ? — He is. — Am I ill ? — You are not. — 
Are you as tall as I ? — I am. — Are your friends as rich as they say ? 

— They are. — Art thou as fatigued as thy brother? — I am more 
(so) than he. 

Exercise 93. 

Did you come to complain ? — I did not come to complain ; I came 
to inquire and to congratulate. — Were they sent to see? — They 
were sent to see and to congratulate. — Did he return (Redivitne) to 
make war ? — No, he returned to sue for peace. — Have you spoken 
to my father ? — I have spoken to him. — When did you speak to 
him ? — I spoke to him the day before yesterday. — Have you some- 
times spoken with the Turk? — I have never spoken with him. — 
How many times have you spoken to the captain ? — I have sj>oken 



LESSON 48.] INFINITIVE MOOD. 253 

to him six times. — Has the nobleman ever spoken with you ? — He 
has never spoken with me. — Have you often spoken with his son ? — 
I have often spoken with him. — Have you spoken with him oftencr 
than we ? — I have not spoken with him so often as you (have). — 
To which son of the nobleman have you spoken ? — I have spoken to 
the youngest (minimus natu). — To which men has your brother spo- 
ken ? — He has spoken to these. — What has your gardener's son cut ? 
— He has cut trees. — Has he cut (inessuitne) corn ? — He has cut 
some. — Has he cut as much hay as corn ? — He has cut as much of 
the one as of the other. — Have you picked up my knife ? — I have 
picked it up. — What have you picked up ? — We have picked up 
nothing. — Have you burnt anything ? — We have burnt nothing. — 
Hast thou burnt my fine ribbons ? — I have not burnt them. — Which 
books has the Greek burnt ? — He has burnt his own . — Which ships 
have the Spaniards burnt ? — They have burnt no ships. — Have you 
burnt paper? — I have not burnt any. — Has the physician burnt 
notes ? — He has burnt none. — Have you had the courage to burn 
my hat ? — I have had the courage to burn it. — When did you burn 
it? — I burnt it yesterday. — Where have you burnt it? — I have 
burnt it in my room. — Who has torn your shirt ? — The ugly boy of 
our neighbor has torn it. — Has any one torn your books. — Nobody 
has torn them. — Is it right to do so ? — It is wrong. — Is it wonderful 
to be told ? — It is very wonderful (permirabile) . — What is best to 
be done ? — It is best to depart (set out). — Is there any so delight- 
ful to know and to hear as the Latin tongue? — There is nothing 
more delightful (jucundius). — What has he achieved? — It is not 
worth mentioning what he has achieved. 



Lesson XL VIII. — pensum duodequinqua- 

GESIMUM. 

OF THE INFINITIVE MOOD. 

A. The infinitive mood expresses the action of the 
verb in an indefinite or general manner, but at the same 
time represents it either as completed or uncompleted, 
i. e. as present, past, or future. 

Hence the infinitive of Latin verbs has three tenses : the 
present, perfect, and future. For each of these the active and 
the passive voices both have separate forms. They are : — 

1. The present infinitive active, derived from the first root of the 
verb ; as, anwe, monere, legere, audlre, to love, admonish, read, hear.* 

* Compare Lesson XXIV. B. C. 

22 



254 LATIN GRAMMAR, [LESSON 48. 

2. The present infinitive passive, likewise derived from the first 
root; as, aman', moneri, leg/, audin'j to be loved, admonished, read, 
heard.* 

3. The perfect infinitive active, formed from the second root by 
adding xsse ; as, amayisse (amasse),f monms.se, legisse audlWs.se (au- 
disse), to have loved, admonished, read, heard. 

4. The perfect infinitive passive, formed by combining esse or fuisse 
with the perfect participle; as, amatum (am, um)% esse or fuisse, to 
have been loved, &e. 

5. The future infinitive active, formed by adding esse to the future 
participle active; as, amaturum (am, um)§ esse, to be about to love, &c. 

6. The future infinitive passive, formed by adding the passive in- 
finitive of ire to the supine in um; as, amatum Iri, to be about to be 
loved, &c. 

B. The following paradigms exhibit all the forms of 
the infinitive mood, both active and passive. 

First Conjugation. 

Infinitive Active. Infinitive Passive. 

Pres. araare, to love. amari, to be loved. 

Perf. ama\isse (amasse), to amatum esse or fuisse, to have 

have loved. been loved. 

Fut. amaturum esse, to be amatum iri, to be about to be 
about to love. loved. 

Second Conjugation. 
Pres. monere, to remind. moneri, to be reminded. 

Perf. monuisse, to have re- monitum esse or fuisse, to have 

minded. been reminded. 

Fut. moniturum esse, to be monitum iri, to be about to be 
about to remind. reminded. 

Third Conjugation. 
Pres. legere, to read. legl, to be read. 

Perf. legisse, to have read. lectum esse or fuisse, to have 

been read. 
Fut. lecturum esse, to be lectum Iri, to be about to be 
about to read. read. 

Fourth Conjugation. 
Pres. audlre, to hear audlrl, to be heard. 

Perf. audlvisse (audisse), to audltum esse or fuisse, to have 

have heard. been heard. 

Fut. audlturum esse, to be audltum iri, to be about to be 
about to hear. heard. 



* Compare Lesson XXXIII. B. f See pnge 239, Remarks. 

% And when it occurs in the nominative, amatus (a, um) esse or fuisse, &c. 
§ And in the nominative amaturus (a, um) esse, &c. 



LESSON 43.] CONSTRUCTION OF "FORE, UT.' 



255 



Remarks. 

1. Instead of the future infinitive active or passive, the periphrastic 
forms fore,* ut, or futurum esse, ut, with the subjunctive, are often em- 
ployed, especially when the verb has no supine or participle in virus. 
E. g. Spero fore (or futurum esse), ut venias, for Spero te venturum esse, 
I hope that you will come. Credo fore ut epistola scribal ur, instead of 
Credo epistolam scriptum iri, I think that the letter will be written. 
So also in the past tenses : Sperdbam fore, ut venires, I hoped that you 
might come. Credebam fore, ut epistola scriberetur, I thought that the 
letter would be written. And of an act completed at some future 
time : Spero fore, ut veneris (perf. subj.), I hope that you will have 
come. Sperdbam fore, ut venisses, I hoped that you might have come. 
Credo (Credebam) epistolam scriptam fore, I think (thought) that the 
letter will be (would be) written. 

2. Neuter verbs (unless they are used impersonally) have gen- 
erally the infinitives of the active voice only. Many of this class want 
the supine and future participle, and have consequently fore at. 
E.o-. 



Ire, 

Venire, 
Esse, 
Posse, 
Velle, 



lvisse, 

venisse, 

fuisse, 

potuisse, 

voluisse, 



iturum esse, 
venturum esse, 
futurum esse. 
fore, ut possim. 
fore, ut velhn, &c. 



To drink — drink. 
To carry — carried. 



Inf. 

Bib ere 
Ferre 
Pvrtdre 



Pekf. 

— blbi, 

— lull, 

— avi, 



Supine. 



latum, 
dtum. 

Afferre — attuli, allatum. 

Apportare — avi, atum. 

Mittere — mi si, missum. 

Scribere — scripsi, scriptum. 

Discere — didici, . 

Videre — vidi, visum. 

Dare — dedi, datum. 

Commodare — avi, atum. 

Credere — credldi, creditum. 
To go — gone. Ire — ivi, itum. 

To come — come. Venire — veni, ventum. 

To know (to be acquainted ( Nosse — novi, notum. 

with) — known. ( Cognoscere — cognovi, cognitum. 

Did you drink some of my wine? Bibistine de vino meo ? 
I did" not drink (any of it). Non bibi. 

Has he brought me the book '? Apportavitne (attulitne) mihi li- 

brum ? 



To brino; — brought. 

To send — sent. 
To write — written. 
To learn — learnt. 
To see — seen. 
To give — given. 

To lend — lent. 



* This is the present infinitive of the obsolete fuo, I am; but generally = 
futurum esse. The only remaining forms of fuo in actual use are the imperf. 
subj. for em, fores, foret, , ,forent. 



25 G 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 48. 



He lias brought it. 

Did they send us letters ? 

They have sent none. 

Did we write notes ? 
We have written some. 
Have you seen the man ? 
We have not seen him. 
Have you seen my book ? 
Yes, we have seen it. 
Where have you seen it ? 
(We have seen it) in your room. 
Have you become acquainted 

with (do you know) those 

people ? 
I have become acquainted with 

them. 
Have you known these men ? 
I have not known them. 
Do you learn to write '? 
Yes, I am learning it. 
I am learning the art of writing. 
Have you learnt to read Latin ? 

I have learnt it. 
Of whom ? 
Of my master. 

When did you lend me that um- 
brella ? 

(I lent it to you) day before yes- 
terday. 

Did the man come to your father ? 

He did come. 

Did your brother go out into the 
fields ? 

He did go out. 

At what time did you come into 
the city ? 

(We came) yesterday evening. 

When did they come home ? 

They came this morning. 
Where have you seen my cou- 
sin ? 
I have seen him in the theatre. 



Apportavit (attiilit). 
j" Misenintne nobis litteras ? 
( Dederiintne litteras ad nos ? 
(»Xon miserunt. 
\ Dedcrunt niillas. 

Scripsimusne schedulas ? 

Scripsimus vero nonmillas. 

Vidistisne hominem ? 

(Eum) non vidimus. 

An vidistis librum meum ? 

Vero qui'dem, vidimus. 

ITbinam eum vidistis ? 

(Vidimus eum) in cubiculo tiio. 

Nostine (eongnovistine) homines 
illos ? 

Sane qui'dem, eiro eos ndvi (eogno- 

vi). 
Notine tibi fuerunt homines illi ? 
Non fuerunt. 
Discisne scribere ? 
Ita est, disco. 

Ego artem scribendi edisco. 
Didicistine legere Latine (litteras 

Latinas) ? 
Didici. 

Apud quern (a quo) ? 
Apud magistrum meum (a magi- 

stro meo). 
Quando mihi umbraculum illud 

commodavisti ? 
Nudius tertius. 

Ivitne homo ad piitrem tiium ? 

Ivit vero. 

Exiitne fraterculus tiius in agros ? 

Exiit. 

Quo tempore venistis in urban ? 

(Venimus) heri vesperi. 

Quando advenerunt (illi) ddmum 

siiam ? 
Advenerunt hddie mane. 
L T bi (quo loco) consobrinum meum 

vidisti (conspexisti) '? 
Ego eum in theatro vidi (conspexi). 



To get, order (anything to he \ Jubere — jussi, jussum. 
done). See page 170. | Curare — dvl, aturn. 



LESSON 48.] 



PHRASES AND EXERCISES. 



257 



To get anything mended. 
To get anything washed. 
To get anything made. 
Are you getting a coat made ? 
I am getting one made. 

I have ordered (got) one made. 

Has your brother had his shirt 
■washed ? 

He has (had it done). 

Have you ordered your stockings 
to be washed ? 

I have ordered them to be 
washed. 

Have vou had your shoes mend- 
ed?"' 

We have not had them mended. 
The cravat. 
To bind (a book). 

Have you sometimes had cravats 
mended ? 

I have had some mended some- 
times. 

Have you ordered your book to 
be bound ? 

I have ordered it to be bound. 

By whom have you had your 
books bound ? 

I have had them bound by our 
neighbor, the binder. 

The bookbinder. 



j" Aliquid reparari jubere. . 

[ Aliquid reficiendum curare. 

\ Aliquid lavari jubere. 

( Aliquid abluendum curare. 

j Aliquid confici jubere. 

( Aliquid confieiendum curare. 

( Jubesne tdgam confici ? 

( Curasne tibi tdgam conficiendam ? 

j Jiibeo vero unam confici. 

( Ciiro unam conficiendam. 

\ Jussi unam confici. 

\ Ego unam conficiendam curavi. 

Curavitne frater tiius indiisium 
siium lavandum ? 

Curavit id faciendum. 

Jussistine tu tibialia tiia lavari ? 

Jussi (ea lavari). 

Curavistisne calceos vestros refici- 

endos ? 
Reficiendos eos non curavimus. 
*Focale, is, n. 
Compingo, ere, pegi, pactum. 
Curavistine interdum foctilia refi- 

cienda ? 
Curavi vero interdum nonniilla 

reficienda. 
Jussistine librum tiium compingi ? 



Sane qui'dem, jussi eum compingi. 

Cui libros tiios compingendos cre- 

, didisti? 

Ego eos vicino ndstro, bibliopego, 
compingendos credidi. 
( *Bibliopegus, i, m. 
( *Librorum compactor, oris, m. 



Exercise 94. 

Have you drunk wine ? — I have drunk some. — Have you drunk 
much of it ? — I have drunk but little of it. — Hast thou drunk some 
beer ? — I have drunk some. — Has thy brother drunk much good 
cider ? — He has not drunk much of it, but enough. — When did you 
drink any wine ? — I drank some yesterday and to-day. — Has the 
servant carried the letter ? — He has carried it. — Where has he car- 
ried it to ? — Pie has carried it to your friend. — Have you brought 
us some apples V — We have brought you some. — How many apples 
have you brought us ? — We have brought you twenty-five of them. 
— When did you bring them ? — I brought them this morning. — At 
Q 22* 



'2^>$ LATIN GRAMMAR, [LESSON 48. 

what o'clock ? — At a quarter to eight. — Have you sent your little 
boy to the market ? — I have sent him thither. — When did you send 
him thither ? — This evening. — Have you written to your father? — 
I have written to him. — Has he answered you ? — He has not yet an- 
swered me. — Have you ever written to the physician ? — I have never 
written to him. — Has he sometimes written to you ? — He has often 
written to me. — What has he written to you ? — He has written to 
me something. — Have your friends ever written to you ? — They 
have often written to me. — How many times have they written to 
you ? — They have written to me more than thirty times. — Have 
you ever seen my son ? — I have never seen him. — Has he ever seen 
you? — He has often seen me. — Hast thou ever seen any Greeks ? 

— I have often seen some. — Have you already seen a Syrian ? — I 
have already seen one. — Where have you seen one ? — At the the- 
atre. — Have you given the book to my brother ? — I have given it 
to him. — Have you given money to the merchant ? — I have given 
some to him. — How much have you given to him? — I have given 
to him fifteen crowns. — Have you given gold ribbons to our good 
neighbors' children ? — I have given some to them. — Will you give 
some bread to the poor (man) ? — I have already given some to him. 

— Wilt thou give me some wine ? — I have already given you some. 

— When didst thou give me some ? — I gave you some formerly. — 
Wilt thou give me some now ? — I cannot give you any. 

Exercise 95. 

Has the American lent you money ? — He has lent me some. — 
Has he often lent you some ? — He has lent me some sometimes. — 
When did he lend you any ? — He lent me some formerly. — Has the 
Italian ever lent you money ? — He has never lent me any. — Is he 
poor ? — He is not poor ; he is richer than you. — Will you lend me 
a crown ? — I will lend you two of them. — Has your boy come to 
mine ? — He has come to him. — When ? — This morning. — At what 
time ? — Early. — Has he come earlier than I ? — At what o'clock 
did you come ? — I came at half past five. — He has come earlier 
than you. — AVhere did yojar brother go to ? — He went to the ball. 

— W r hen did he go thither ? — He went thither the day before yes- 
terday. — Has the ball taken place ? — It has taken place. — Has it 
taken place late ? — It has taken place early. — At what o'clock ? — 
At midnight. — Does your brother learn to write ? — He does learn 
it. — Does he already know how to read ? — He does not know how 
yet. — Have you ever learnt. German ? — I learnt it formerly, but I 
do not know it. — Has your father ever learnt French ? — He has 
never learnt it. — Does he learn it at present ? — He does learn it. 

— Do you know the Englishman whom I know ? — I do not know 
the one whom you know ; but I know another. — Does your friend 
know the same nobleman whom I know ? — He does not know the 
same ; but he knows others. — Have you known the same men whom 
I have known. — I have not known the same; but I have known 
others. — Have you ever had your coat mended? — 1 have sometimes 



LESSON 49.] TARTICIPLES. 259 

had it mended. — Hast thou already had thy boots mended ? — I have 
not yet had them mended. — Has your cousin sometimes had his 
stockings mended ? — He has several times had them mended. — Hast 
thou had thy hat or thy shoe mended ? — I have neither had the one 
nor the other mended. — Have you had my cravats or my shirts 
washed? — I have neither had the one nor the other washed. — What 
stockings have you had washed ? — I have had the thread stockings 
washed. — Has your father had a table made ? — He has had one 
made. — Have you had anything made V — I have had nothing made. 



Lesson XLIX. — pensum undequinquage- 

SIMUM. 
OF PARTICIPLES. 

A. Of the four participles of the Latin verb, the present active 
and the future passive are formed from the first root of the verb, and 
the future active and perfect passive from the third. (Cf. Lesson 
XXVIII. B. 8, 9, and D. 1, 2.) The terminations of these participles 
for the respective conjugations are : — 

Pres. Act. 1. ans, 2. ens, 3. ens (tens), 4. tens. 

Fut. Act. 1. aturus, 2. iturus, 3. turus, 4. iturus. 

Perf. Pass. 1. citus, 2. itus, 3. tus* 4. itus. 

Fut. Pass. 1. andus, 2. endus, 3. endus iiendus), 4. zendus. 

B. The following paradigms exhibit the participles 
of the several conjugations in regular order : — 
First Conjugation. 

ACTIVE. PASSIVE. 

Pres. amans, loving. Perf. amatus, a, um, loved. 

Fut. amaturus, a, um, about Fut. amandus, a, um, to be 

to love. loved. 

Second Conjugation. 
Pres. monens, reminding. Perf. monitus, a, \xm,reminded. 
Fut. monlturus, a, um,about Fut. monendus, a, um, to be 

to remind. reminded. 

Third Conjugation. 
Pres. legens, reading. Perf. lectus, a, um, read. 

Fut. lecturus, a, um, about Fut. legendus, a, um, to be 

to read. read. 

* On the irregularities of the third root of the second and third conjugations, 
see Lesson XLVI. A. Kem. 1-6. 



260 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 49. 

Pres. capiens, taking. Perf. captus, a, urn, taken. 

Fut. capturus, a, um, about Fut. capiendus, a, um, to be 

to take. taken. 

Fourth Conjugation. 

Pres. audiens, hearing. Perf. audltus, a, um, heard. 

Fut. audlturus, a, um, about Fut. audiendus, a, um, to be 

to hear. heard. 

C. Deponent verbs generally have all the participles. Of 

these the future in dus is passive, like that of other verbs, but 

the perfect participle in tus has commonly an active sense. 

E.g. 

Pres. hortans, verens, sequens, blandiens, exhorting, fear- 

ing, following, flattering. 

Perf. hortatus, veritus, secutus, blanditus, having exhort- 

ed, feared, followed, flattered. 

Fut. Act. hortaturus, veriturus, secturus, blandlturus, about 
to exhort, fear, follow, flatter. 

Fut. Pass, hortandus, verendus, sequendus, blandiendus, to be 
exhorted, feared, followed, flattered. 

Remarks. 

1. The present participle in ns is declined like an adjective of one 
termination (cf. page 21), and the participles in us, a, um, like bonus. 

2. Participles sometimes drop the distinction of time and assume the 
character of adjectives or nouns. E. g. avians, loving (in love), or a 
lover; doctus, learned ; natus, a son. When employed as adjectives, 
they become susceptible of comparison. (Cf. Lesson XLI. C. and F.) 

3. Neuter verbs generally have only the participles of the active 
voice. Of some, however, the future passive participle in dum is used 
impersonally.* Others again have also a perfect participle, which 
sometimes has a passive and sometimes an active sense. 

4. The perfect participle of deponent verbs is generally active. 
The following sometimes occur also in the passive sense : adeptus, 
comitatus, commentatus, complexus, confessus, contestCitus and detesldtus, 
populatus and depopuldtus, dimensus and emensus, effdtus, ementitus, 
emeritus, expertus and inexpertus, execratus, inter prctatus, meditdtus, 
metatus, moderatus, opintitus, pactus, partitus, perfunctus, periclita- 
tus, stipulatus, testdtus. E. g. Depopulatus agrum, Having devastated 
the field. Depopulation agrum, The devastated field. Partitus exerci- 
tum, Having divided the army. Partlto exercitu, The army having 
been divided. 

5. The following perfect participles, though from active verbs, are 
also employed in an active sense : juratus, having sworn ; pransus, 

* Compare page 118, note *. 



LESSON 49.] CONJUGATIO PERIPHRASTICA. 261 

having taken lunch; coenatus, having dined; potus, having drunk. 
To these add ausus, gavlsus, solitus, flsus, confisus ; exvsus, jierosus, 
and pertaesus. 

6. The English perfect participle active, of which Latin verbs gen- 
erally are destitute, is commonly rendered either by a separate clause, 
or by the ablative of the passive participle. E. g. " When he had ex- 
terminated the kings," is either Quum reges exterminasset, or passive, 
Regibus cxtermincitis, The kings having been exterminated. The lat- 
ter is called the Ablative Absolute, on -which see Lesson LXXIII. 

7. The genitive plural of participles in rus rarely occurs, except 
that of futurus. 

8. The present participle of the verb sum is wanting, the obsolete 
ens occurring only in the compounds absens, praesens, and potens. 
The present participle of eo, I go, is iens, gen. euntis. 

CONJUGATIO PERIPHRASTICA. 

D, The participles in rus and dus, with the auxiliary sum, 
give each of them rise to a new conjugation, called the conjuga- 
tio periphrastica. In this connection the participle in- rus de- 
notes an intention, and that in dus, necessity or propriety. (Cf. 
Lesson XXV. C. D.) E. g. 

1. Amaturus sum, lam about to love (on the point of loving).* 

Indicative. Subjunctive. 

Pres. amaturus sum amaturus sim 

Imp. amaturus cram amaturus essem 

Perf. amaturus fui amaturus fuerim 

Plup. amaturus fueram amaturus fuissem. 

Fut. amaturus ero.f 

Infinitive. 
Pres. amaturum esse. Perf. amaturum fuisse. 

2. Amandus sum, I am to be loved, or must be loved.% 





In 


DICATIVE. 


Subjunctive. 


Pres. 




amandus sum 


amandus sim 


Imp. 




amandus cram 


amandus essem 


Perf. 




amandus fui 


amandus fuerim 


Plup. 




amandus fueram 


amandus fuissem 


Fut. 




amandus ero 





Fut. Perf. amandus fuero. 

Infinitive. 
Pres. amandum esse. Perf. amandum fuisse. 

* And so in the remaining tenses, Indic. I teas, have been, had been, shall be, 
about to love. Subj. that I may be, might be, may have been, might have been, 
about to love. 

t The Future Perfect amatus fuero does not occur. 

\ And so in the remaining tenses : — Ind. I was to be loved, I shall have to be 
loved, &c, always with the agent in the dative. E. g. tibi, hominibus, nemini, 
by you, by men, by no one. See Lesson XXV. C. D. 



262 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 49. 



OF THE USE OF PARTICIPLES. 

E. Participles as such do not express any absolute determi- 
nation of time, and can only be said to be present, past, or fu- 
ture, with reference to the time of the action denoted by the 
verb of the sentence in which they stand. Hence the verb with 
which they are connected may itself be either present, past, or 
future. 

Participles have the agreement of adjectives. The noun 
with which they are in concord may be either in the nomina- 
tive, as the subject of the sentence, or in one of the oblique cases 
governed by another word. 

Participles govern the same cases as their verbs. E. g. 



Hie adolesce ntul us est (erat, erit) 

jiissis tiiis obedient. 
Abitiirae congregantur (congre- 

gabantur, congregabiintur) in 

loco certo. 

Caesar hdstem profligatum perse'- 
quitur (persecutus est, perse- 
quetur). 

Caesar pdntem in Aran facien- 
dum curat (curavit, curabit). 

Lex est recta ratio, imperans ho- 
nesta, prohibens contraria. 

Jacet corpus dormic'/itis, ut mdr- 

tui. 
Proditionis inshniddtus, ad omnia 

crimina respdndit. 

Brundiisium venimus, iisi tiia fe- 
licitate navigandi 

Magna pars hdminum est, quae 
navigatura de tempestate non 
edgitat. 

Magna pars peccatorum tdllitur, 
si peccatur is testis assistat. 



£quidem beatos piito, quibus De- 
orum miinere datum est, aut 
facere scribenda, aut scribere 
loquenda. 



This youth is (was, will be) obe- 
dient to your commands. 

When about to leave (just before 
leaving) they collect (did collect, 
will collect) together in a par- 
ticular place. 

Caesar pursues (has pursued, will 
pursue) the routed enemy. 

Caesar orders (did order, will or- 
der) a bridge to be constructed 
over the Arar. 

The law is plain reason, command- 
ing what is just, and prohibiting 
the contrary. 

The body of one sleeping (asleep) 
is like that of a dead man. 

Accused of treason, he replied to 
all the charges brought against 
him. 

Having had your own good luck 
on our voyage, we arrived at 
Brundusium. 

There are many men, who never 
think of the weather, when they 
are about to sail. 

A great many offences are pre- 
vented, if (where) there is a wit- 
ness near those (who are) about 
committing them. 

I consider those happy, to whom it 
is vouchsafed either to achieve 
things destined to be recorded, 
or to record events destined to 
be repeated. 



USE OF PARTICIPLES. 



2G< 



LESSON 49.] 

F. Participles are frequently employed instead of subordi- 
nate' clauses introduced by a relative pronoun, or by one of the 
conjunctions while, when, if because, although, &c. E. S . 



Plato scribens mdrtuus est. 

Dionysius, Syraciisis expiilsus, 
Corinthi piieros docebat. 

Tiberius, trajeclitrus Rhenuin, 
commeatum dmnem transmi- 
sit. 

Sunt divitiae eertae, in qua- 
ciinque sdrtis humanae levi- 
tate permansurae. 

Pisistratus primus Homeri libros, 
confmos antea, sic disposuisse 
dicitur, ut nunc habemus. 



Plato died while (in the act of) 
writing. 

Dionysius, after having been ex- 
pelled from Syracuse, was en- 
gaged in teaching at Corinth. 

Tiberius, when about crossing the 
Rhine, sent over all his sup- 
plies. 

There are certain riches, which vsill 
remain in every vicissitude of 
human fortune. 

Pisistratus is said to have first 
arranged the poems of Homer, 
which were confused before, in 
the order in which we have 



them now. 
Nihil affirmo, dubitans plenimque I do not positively affirm anything, 
et mihi ipse diffidens. 

Ut dculus, sic animus, se non vi- 
deos, alia cernit. 



Sdcratis mdrti illacrimare sdleo, 
Platonem legens. 

Epicurus non erubescens volu- 
ptates pcrsequitur dmncs no- 
mi natim. 



since I am myself uncertain and 

distrustful of myself. 
Although the mind, like the eye, 

does not see itself, it yet per- 
ceives other things. 
I always weep over the death of 

Socrates, as often as {whenever) 

I read Plato. 
Epicurus enumerates the entire 

catalogue of pleasures without 

Hushing.* 



Remarks. 

1 Participles emploved adjectively modify merely the noun, and 
not "the entire sentence. E. g. Terra sitiens, The thirsting earth. 
Bene tolerata pauperias, Poverty well borne. Metus magni malt im- 
pendent, The fear of a great impending evil. Poena* mentae re- 
misso, The remission of a merited punishment. 

2 The perfect and future passive participles often supply the place 
of a verbal substantive. E. g. Hoc litterae recitcMe The reading o 
this letter. Ab urbe conMa, Since the founding ot the city. 1 ost 
Christum natum, After the birth of Christ. Vro V u r Afncam deletam 
On account of the destruction of Africa Consilium urbis delendae, 
The design for the destruction of the city. 



* So also non loquem, without speaking, &c. But the English without (with 
verbs)l also expressed by the ablative of the perfect participle; as, non expec- 
lato auxilio, without expecting any help, &C. 



264 LATIN* GRAMMAR. [i.r.ssox 49. 

3. After verbs of seeing, hearing, or representing, the present par* 
tieiple may stand, as in English, instead of the infinitive. E. g. i&o- 
cratem audio dicentem, I hear Socrates say. Catonem vldi in biblich 
thecd sedentem, I saw Cato sitting in the library. Xenophon facii 
Socratem disputantem, Xenophon represents Socrates as maintaining. 

4. After habeo, teneo, possideo, and similar verbs, and also after volo, 
nolo, cupio,facio, oportet, do, reddo, and euro, the perfijel participle is 
used to designate a past event of which the result or consequences are 
still remaining. E-g- Cognttum liabeo, I (have learnt and still) know. 
('Ionium teneo, I keep shut. Mi excusdtum rein, I wish myself ex- 
cused. Perfidiam perspectam habebat, He perceived the perfidy. 
ExercUum coactum habebat, He kept the army subjected. Mtssos /o- 
ciant honores, Let them resign their claim to places of tru.st or honor. 
Inventum tibi curdbo, I '11 see him found for you. 

5. The participle in rus is used by the later writers of the language 
(instead oi the supine in urn ). after verbs of motion, to denote the pur- 
pose. E.g. ('oiil, mi ad exercitum prqficiscitur, signa illaturus urbi, 
Catiline goes to the army in order to invade the city. (Cf. I.. 
XXX. D. Obs.) The present participle is sometimes put in the Bame 
sense; as. Canes alium rogantes regem rn.ise.rt ad Jovem, The dogs Bent 
to Jupiter to a>k for another king. 

6. An intended effect or purpose is also indicated by the future 
participle in dus % after curdn (to order or get anything done), and 
also alter dan . traden . mitten . cona <l> re, /» rniitten , accipin . and svs- 
cipere, locare, conducere, and similar verbs. E.g. Conon muros diru- 
tos Athendrum reficiendos curdvit, Conon ordered the demolished 
walls of Athens to be repaired. Vita data est utenda, Life is given 
ns to be enjoyed. Fabius saucios mitltes curandos diuidit patribus, 
Fabius distributes the wounded soldiers to be provided for l>v the 
senators. Aedem Castbris P. Junius habuit tuendam, P. Junius had 
the temple of Castor to guard Patriam pel diriniendam r,l inflam- 
mandam retlquVmus, We have left our country cither to l>e plundered 
or destroyed by fire. 

EXKRCISI 

Are you about to love? — I am about to love. — Are they going 
to read (tectums') ? — They are not going to read : they are going to 
write (scripturus). — Are we going to learn (disciiurus) Latin ? — 
We are going to learn it. — Were you about to read the hook which 
T have lent you ? — 1 was about to read it. — Were they about open- 
ing (aperturus) the window? — They were on the point of opening 
it. — Is he about to sell (going to sell, vendUurus) his books?- — He 
is not going to Bell tb< m. Am 1 about going (iturus) to the theatre? 

— You are not going. — Was he going to give (daturus) you money? 

— He was about to give me some. — Was the physician about to come 
(venturus)? — He was on the point of coming.— Must you be loved 
(amandus) ? — 1 must be loved. — By whom (cui) is your little boy 
to be loved? — He must be loved by bis parents and teachers.— 
Must the letter be read (legendus) ?— It must be read. — By whom ? 



LESSON 49.] EXERCISE 97. '2tio 

— It must ho road by his friends and neighbors. — Most the fire be 
lighted? — It is not to be lighted (accendendus) ; it is to be extin- 
guished. — Must you set out on ajourney*V — I must set out. — 
When was he obliged to sot out? — IIo was obliged to sot out this 
morning. — Must you go (eundum) into the garden? — I am not 
obliged to go there. — Must we breakfast (jeniandum) now? — We 
are not to breakfast yet. — What is to be done by us? — We must 
speak Latin, and write letters to our friends. 

Exercise 7. 

Hare you seen any one writing ? — 1 have seen my father writing 
and reading by the fire. — Did they hear us speaking (loquentes) ? — 
They did not hear us. — Where have j ou seen our friend ? — I have 
seen him standing (stanteni) by the window. — Where was your little 
brother last evening V — He was in his room, reading (legt ns) the book 
which you gave bim. — I- our servant in the field ? — No, he is in 
the garden cutting (secans) trees. — Does he keep the window open 
(apertam) ? — No, la- keeps it .-hut. — Do you wish to be excused? 

— I do wish t<> I"' excused — Will you resign your claim (missos 
facere) to posts of honor ? - — I cannol resign it, — l)o you not per- 
ceive tin- t reachery ( / ■ rfidiam ) ? — I do perceive it. — Did In- gn e 
you the letter to read (to 1"- read = lem ndus) ? — He did give it (to 
me). — To whom did you ;_ r i\e the shirts to be washed V — I have 
given them to my servant — Di 1 they lend us the books to be torn 
(discindendus) ? — No; on the contrary, they have lent them to us 
to \>r re. id ami remembered {m> in<>ii<i t< m n<l<>s). — Will you send me 
your gloves to mend ( to he mended ) ? — I am unwilling to Bend them. 

— His the tailor received coats to mend? — He has received coats 
and Bhirts to mend {reficienda). — Where have you Kit your hat to 
be repaired V 1 have left it with (apud) the hatter. — Es the stran- 
ger coming to our house ? — He is coming in order to bring you Qibi 
allatwus) the tobacco you have bought of him. — Hid that happen 
(i r, nit) before (nn/< ) or after the building of the city? — It happened 
after (pout). -Did Socrates live (vixitm Socrates) after the oirth of 
Christ ? No. he lived before it. Was your brother rewarded? — 
\'o ; on the contrary, he Buffered {<ni'<rtiis est) a merited punishment. 

— Do you sec the sailors coming ? — I do not see them coming, but 
going away (abeuntes). — Where did you find your gloves ? I found 
them lying on the table. — Did you find your neighbor sitting by the. 
lire? No, I found him walking (ambulatUem) in hi- garden. 

* Prqfici* i ndurnni libi est ■ And so the rot, acconling to Lesson XXV. D. 



■>:) 



2G6 LATIX GRAMMAR. [l.ESSOX 50. 

Lesson L. — PENSUM QUIXQUAGESIMOI. 

OF THE IMPERFECT TENSE. 

A. The imperfect tense represents an action or state 
as incomplete, and going on at some past time. As, 



Amabam, 
Scribtbam, 



{ I was loving (was engaged in loving). 

"( I loved, did love.* 

j I was writing (was occupied with writing). 

I I wrote, did write. 

, _, (I was (being) loved. 

( I was the object of continued love. 

T . t ., _ 7 . \ A letter was beins: written. 

Lttterae scrweoanlur, ■{ c • , • ... , .. 

' ( borne one was engaged in writing a letter. 

B. The imperfect tense always involves a reference (either 
direct or indirect) to the time of another past action or event, 
which was either simultaneous with or antecedent to it. Hence, 
in narration, it frequently exchanges with the perfect indefinite, 
which, as the leading tense, then indicates the principal event, 
while the imperfect serves to point out the accessory circum- 
stances connected with it. In its grammatical construction, 
however, the imperfect may either stand a< the leading verb of 
an independent sentence, or subordinate in clauses introduced 
by a conjunction or a relative. It is thus used, — 

I. With direct reference to another past action or event si- 
multaneous with it. E. g. 

Quiim Caesar in Galliam vinit, al- When Caesar arrived in Gaul, the 

terms factidnis principes erant JEdui wereihe leaders of the one 

Aedui, alterius Sequani. party, and the Sequani of tin- 

other. 

Qua terapestate Carthaginienses At the time when the Carthaginians 

pleraeque Africae imperitdbant wert ruling nearly all Africa, the 

Cyrenenses quoque magni at- Cyrenians were also a great and 

<|ue opulenti/i/eire. opulent people. 

Cimon ecleriter ad principatam Cimon rapidly advanced to the 

pervenit. Habebat] enim sdtis highest office of the state. For 

eloquentiae, summam liberali- he had sufficient eloquence, the 

tatem, magnam prudentiam. highest degree of liberality, and 

great sagacity. 



* The Latin imperfect always implies duration or continuance of action (in 
the indicative at least), and has consequently the sense of the English I icns 
loving. Sometime-, however, it is convenient to render it like the perfect in- 
definite : J lorc'l, did love. 

t The imperfect here denotes a. permanent quality or characteristic, in oppo- 
sition to the momentary event indicated by the perfect pervenit. 



LESSON 50.] 



THE IMPERFECT TENSE. 



267 



Aequi se in dppida receperunt 
murisque se tenebant. 

Caesar Alesiam circumvallare in- 
stituit. Erat dppidum in cdlle 
siimmo, cujus radices dlio dua- 
bus ex parti bus fhimina sublu- 
ebant. Ante id dppidum plani- 
ties patebat : reliquis ex omni- 
bus partibus cdlles dppidum 
cingebant.* 



The iEqui retreated into their 
towns, and kept themselves with- 
in their walls. 

Csesar began to invest Alesia. The 
town was situate on the top of a 
hill, whose base was washed on 
two sides by two rivers. In 
front of this town a plain ex- 
tended ; on all the remaining 
sides the town was surrounded 
by hills. 



II. To denote frequently repeated past action, as exhibited 
either in individual habits, or in manners, customs, and usages. 
E.g. 

L. Cassius, in hearing causes, was 
accustomed to inquire frequently 
for whose advantage it had been. 

Hortensius was wont to speak 
better than he wrote. 

Our ancestors were accustomed to 
command their freedmen very 
nearly like slaves. 

It was customary at Rome to sup- 
port geese at public expense in 
the Capitol. 

Socrates was accustomed to say, 
that all men were eloquent 
enough in what they knew. 



L. Cassius identidem in caiisis 

quaerere solebat, cui bono 

fui'sset. 
Dicebat melius, quam scripsit, 

Hortensius. 
Majdres ndstri libertis ndn miilto 

secus ac servis impcrdbant. 

AnseresTvdmae publico alebdntur 
in Capitolio. 

Socrates dicebat (= dicerc sole- 
bed), dmnesin eo, quod scirent, 
satis esse eloquentes. 



III. To denote an event, in which the narrator participated 
as an eyewitness. E. g. 



1'no die sex proeliis fiiotis .... 
ad duorum millium niimero ex 
Pompejanis cecidisse rcperie- 
bamus.\ 

Eddem fere tempore pons in 
Jbero prdpe effectus nuntiabd- 
tur, et in Sicori vadum rcperi- 
ebcVur. 



Six battles having been fought in 
one day, we found that nearly 
two thousand of Pompey's party 
had been killed. 

About the same time it was re- 
ported (to us) that a bridge over 
the Ebro was nearly completed, 
and a ford over the Segre found. 



Remakes. 

1. The imperfect sometimes expresses merely a conalus, i.e. an 
attempt, effort, or intention. E. g. Consules sedabant tumultus, sedan- 



* The imperfect (erat, subluebant, &c.) of this example denotes permanent 
situation, in opposition to the comparatively momentary event indicated by the 
perfect instiiuit So the tenebant of the preceding example. 

f The language of Csesar, who was himself engaged in the events described. 



268 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 50. 

do mterdum movebant, The consuls were attempting to quell the in- 
surrection, but in doing so they sometimes only excited it. Cato pro 
lege, quae abrogabatur, ita disseruit, Cato spoke in favor of the law, 
which it Avas attempted to abolish, in the following manner. 

2. The imperfect is sometimes used to represent an action or con- 
dition as past, though still existing at the time of the narrator. E. g. 
Manus etiam daia est elephantis, quia propter magnitudmem corporis 
difficiles adltus habebant ad cibos, Elephants Ave re furnished Avith a 
trunk, because, oAving to the hugeness of their structure, they had (at 
the time they Avere thus furnished) a difficult access to their food. 

3. In epistolary correspondence, the Romans frequently employ 
the imperfect or the perfect Avhere in English Ave put the present. 
E. g. llaec scribebam media node, I Avrote (= I Avrite) this at midnight. 
Nboi nihil nunc erat apud nos. Quae ad earn diem, quum liaec scribe- 
barn, aud'weramus, inanis rumor videbatur, — There is at present noth- 
ing new Avith us. What AA r e had (have) heard up to the day I Avrote 
(write), appeared (appears) to be an empty rumor. 

4. Instead of the imperfect indicative, the historians frequently use 
the present infinitive, in order to impart animation to the narrative. 
Eg. Ne que post id locorum Jugurthae dies aut nox ulla quie'a fuere; 
neque loco neque mbrtali cuiquam aut tempori mtis credere ; cives, 
Jwstes juxta metuere ; circumspectare omnia et omni metu pavescere; 
alio atque alio loco saepe contra decus regium noctu requiescere, &c. 
Subsequently to that time Jugurtha had not a single quiet day or 
night ; nor did he exactly trust any place or occasion, or any of his 
felloAv-men : he dreaded citizens and enemies alike ; he suspected 
everything, and trembled under the influence of every species of ap- 
prehension, &c. This is called the Infinitums Historicus. 

5. The above remarks concerning the use of the imperfect apply 
to the indicative alone. On the sense of the imperfect subjunctive, 
see D. and E. of this Lesson. 

FORMATION OF THE IMPERFECT TENSES ACTIVE. 

C. The imperfect indicative active is formed from the root 
of the indicative present (am, mon, leg, and), by adding tbe ter- 
minations, 1. abam, 2. cbam, 3. ebam (lebam), 4. tebam ; and 
the imperfect subjunctive from the present infinitive, by adding 
m. E. g. 

1 | Ixd. amabam, lavabam, apportabam, dabam. 
( Sub j. amarem, lavarem, apportarem, darem. 

2 j Ind. monebam, habebam, studebam, egebam. 
( Subj. monerem, haberem, studerem, egerem. 

o f Ixd. legebam, scribebam, mittebam, faciebam. 
| Subj. legerem, scriberem, mitterem, facerem. 



4. 



j Ind. audiebam, sciebam, sitiebam, esuriebam. 
I Subj. audlrem, sclrem, sitirem, esurirem. 



LESSON 50.] THE IMPERFECT TENSE ACTIVE. 



209 



INFLECTION OF THE IMPERFECT ACTIVE. 

D. The inflection of the imperfect active is exhibited 
by the following paradigms : — 

First Conjugation. 



Indicative. 
Amfibam, I was loving. 

Sing, amiibam 

amabas 

amfibat, 
Plur. amabamtis 

timabatis 
amabant. 



Subjunctive. 
Amarem, that I might, could, 
would, should love. 
Sing, amarem 
amares 
amaret, 
Plur. amaremtis 
amaretis 
amarent. 
Second Conjugation. 
Indicative. Subjunctive. 

Monebam, I was reminding. Monerem, that I might, could, 

would, should remind. 
Sing, monebam Sing, monerem 

monebas moneres 

monebat, moneret, 

Plur. monebamns Plur. moneremus 

monebatis moneretis 

monebant. monerent. 

Third Conjugation. 



Indicative. 
(1.) Legebam, I ivas reading. 

Sing, legebam 

legebas 

legebat, 
Plur. legebamtis 

legebatis 

legebant. 

Faciebam, I was doing. 

Sing, faciebam 

faciebas 

faciebat, 
Plur. faciebamiis 

faciebatis 

faciebant. 
23* 



(20 



Subjunctive. 
Legerem, that I might, could, 
would, shoidd read. 
Sing, legerem 
legeres 
legeret, 
Plur. legeremus 
legeretis 
legerent. 

Facerem, that I might, could, 
would, should do. 
Sing, facerem 
faceres 
faceret, 
Plur. faceremus 
faceretis 
facerent. 



270 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 50. 

Fourth Conjugation. 

Indicative. Subjunctive. 

Audiebam, I was hearing. Audirem, that I might, could, 

would, should hear. 
Sing, audiebam Sing, audirem 

audiebas audlres 

audiebat, audiret, 

Plur. audiebamiis Plur. audlremus 

audiebatis audlretis 

audiebant. audirent. 

So conjugate, — 1. Apportabam.,1 was bringing; curabam, I was or- 
dering ; ddbam, I was giving ; lavabam, 1 was washing ; secabam, I was 
cutting. 2. Audebam, I was daring; egebam, I was needing; liabe- 
bam, I was having ; jubebam, I was commanding ; videbam, I was see- 
ing. 3. Arcessebam, I was calling (fetching) ; convalescebam, I was 
getting better ; diligebam, I was cherishing ; frangebam, I was break- 
ing ; mittebam, I was sending ; ponebam, I was placing ; scribebam, I 
was writing; — capiebam, I was taking ; cupiebam, I was desiring ; fu- 
giebam, I was fleeing. 4. Aperiebam, I was opening : esuriebam, I was 
desirous of eating ; scditbam, I was salting ; veniebam, I was coming, 
&c. 

E. The following are more or less irregular in the 
formation of the imperfect : — 

1. Eram, I was. — Essem, that I might be. 
Ind. S. eram, eras, erat ; P. eramus, eratis, erant. 
Subj. S. essem, esses, esset ; P. essemus, essetis, essent. 

2. Poteram, Iivas able. — Possem, that I might be able. 
Ind. S. poteram, poteras, poterat ; P. poteramus, poteratis, 

poterant. 
Subj. S. possem, posses, posset ; P. possemus, possetis, possent. 

So the remaining compounds of sum, viz. : aderam — adessem and 
intereram — interessem, I was present ; -proderam — prodessem (from 
prosuni), I was conducing; praeerat — praeessem, I was presiding 
over ; super eram — superessem, I was left, &c. 

3. Ibam, I teas going. — Irem, that I might go. 
Ind. S. ibam, ibas, ibat; P.ibamus, ibatis, ibant. 
Subj. S. irem, ires, iret ; P. iremus, iretis, Irent. 

So all the compounds of eo, viz. : adibam — adirem, I was approach- 
ing ; anteibam — anteirem, I was going before ; inibam — imrem, I 
was going in; praeterlbam — praetenrem, I was going by; sub'tbarn 
— sublrem, I was undergoing ; transibam — transirem, I was going 
beyond. The compound ambio has amblbam or ambitbam. 



LESSON 50.] IMPERFECT OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 271 

4. Vdlebam, I was willing. — Vellem, that I might be willing. 
Ind S. volebam, volebas, volebat ; P. volebamus, volcbatis, 

volebant. 
Ind. S. vellem, velles, vellet ; P. vellemiis, velletis, vellent. 

So the compounds of volo : malebam — mallem, I was preferring, 
and nolebam — nollem, I was unwilling. 

5. Ferebam, I was bearing. — Ferrem, that I might bear. 
Ind. S. ferebam, ferebas, ferebat ; P. ferebamiis, ferebatis, 

ferebant. 
Subj. S. ferrem, ferres, ferret; P. ferremtis, ferretis, ferrent. 

In like manner the compounds of fero : afferebam — afferrem, I was 
bringing ; auferebdm — auferrem, I was carrying off, &c. 

6. Fiebam, I was becoming. — Fierem, that I might become. 
Ind. S. fiebam, fiebas, fiebat ; P. fiebamiis, flebatis, fiebant. 
Subj. S. fierem, fleres, fieret ; P. fierem us, fieretis, fierent. 

So also the compounds of fio, viz.: calefltbam — calefterem, I was 
(being) warmed ; friyeflebam — frigefierem, I was made cold; labe- 
flebam — labefterem, I was shaken, &c. (Compare Lesson XXXIII. 
j^. Remark.) 

7. Edebam, I was eating. — Eclerem, that I might eat. 
Ind. S. edebam, edebas, edebat; P. edebamus, edebatis, ede- 

bant. 
Subj. S. ederem or essem, ederes or esses, ederet or esset ; P. 

ederemus or essemus, ederetis or essetzs, ederent or 

essent. 

8. The imperfect of queo, I can, and nequeo, I cannot, resembles 
that of a compound of eo. Thus, qutbam — quirem ; nequibam — 
nequlrem. Of uio, I say, the indicative only occurs, aiebam, as, at, 
&e. Inquam, I say, has only inquiebam (inqulbam) and inquiebant. 

9 . The preteritives odi, I hate ; memini, I remember ; novi, I know 
(am acquainted with) ; and consuevl, I am accustomed, having a present 
signification in the perfect, employ the pluperfect in the sense of the 
imperfect. Thus, 

Oderam — odissem,* I ivas hating. 
Memineram — meminissem, I was remembering. 
Noveram — novissem, I knew (was acquainted ivitJi). 
Consueveram — consuevissem, 1 was accustomed. 

Was I loving ? Egdne amabam V 

You were not loving. Xon amabas. 

What did he bring us ? Quid nobis apportabat ? 

p The pluperfect is inflected like the imperfect of sum. Thus Ind. oderam, 
as, at ; amus, alls, ant. Subj. odissem, es, et ; emus, His, ent. So the rest. 



272 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 50. 



He was bringing us wine, bread, 

and meat. 
Were ye opening the window ? 
We were opening it. 
Were they sending us anything ? 
They were sending (you) nothing 

(whatever). 

When, while (conjunction). 

Do you listen when (while) I 

speak ? 
Does he stay at home when his 

father goes out ? 
He does stay at home. 
Did you write when (while) I 

was reading? 
I w r as writing when you were 

reading (when you read). 



Apportabat nobis vinum, panem, et 

carnem. 
Aperiebatisne fenestram ? 
Aperiebamus. 
iSuimquid nobis mittebant ? 
(Vdbis) nihil quidquam mittebant. 

Quum, cum (c. Ind. and Subj.). 
Auscultasne, quiim ego ldquor ? 

Tenetne se ddmi, quiim pater ejus 

in publicum prodit ? 
Tenet se vero ddmi. 
Scripsistine (eo tempore), quiim 

ego legebam ? 
Ego vero scribebam, quiim tit le- 

gisti (legeres). 



F. Obs. The conjunction quum or cum, denoting a relation 
of time (in the sense eo tempore, quum, or turn, quum), is com- 
monly followed by the indicative ; but when the verb is in the 
imperfect or pluperfect, it may also stand in the subjunctive. 



Did he stay at home when you 

went out ? 
He did remain at home. 
Did they study when they were 

at Leipsic ? 
They did study. 
What was he doing when you 

returned home ? 
He was playing. 
Were you at Berlin when I 

was there ? 
I was not there then. 
Was our friend sleepy when he 

came home ? 

He was sleepy. 

What did your brother intend 

to do? 
He was intending to go into the 

countrv. 



Tenui'tne se ddmi, quiim tu in pu- 
blicum prodi'bas (prodires*)? 

Tenebat se ddmi. 

Dederiintne dperam litteris, quiim 
Lipsiae t degerent (degebant) ? 

Dederunt. 

Quid faciebat, quiim ddmum re- 
vertfsti ? 

Ludebat. 

Erasne Berolini eodem tempore, 
quum et ego ibi eram (essem) ? 

Ego ibi eo tempore non fiii. 

Cupidiisne sdmni erat amicus nd- 
ster, quiim domum venit (ve- 
neret) ? 

(Sdmni ciipidus) non erat. 

Quid facere frater tiius cogitabat ? 

Bus ire cogitabat. 



* But the imperfect subjunctive thus employed does not express duration or 
continuance of an action or state (as does the indicative), but a mere statement 
of what lias occurred (like the perfect indefinite). Compare B. Rem. 5, and 
also E. 

f On the genitives Lijjsiae, Berolini, Luietiae, Sec, see Lesson LVI. B. 



LESSON 50.] PHRASES AND EXERCISES. 27o 

Were they hearing what we said ? Num. ea, quae diximus, audiebant ? 

They were not hearing (them). Non audiebant. 

Where were those men going Quo ibant vi'ri llli, quos heri vidi- 

whom we saw yesterday ? mus ? 

They were going into the gar- Ibant in ho'rtos. 

den. 

Was he accustomed to write bet- Scribebatne melius quam locutus 

ter than he spoke f (Cf. B. II.) est ? 

He did not write as well. Scribebat non aeque bene. 

AVhat was Socrates wont to say ? Quid dicere solebat Socrates '? 

He was wont to say that we Dieebat, nos debere nosmet ipsos 

should know ourselves. cogndseere. 

Did our ancestors speak Latin ? Niim majdres nostri Latine loque- 

b;intur (ldqui solebant) ? 

No, they spoke English and Ger- Non ve'ro; Anglice et Germaniee 

man. loquebantur. 

Did you come in order to see ? Venistine, ut videres ? 

G. * Obs. When the perfect indefinite is followed by a clause 
introduced by the conjunction ut, or by a relative, the verb of 
that clause stands in the imperfect subjunctive.* 

I did come in order to see. Ego vero veni, ut viderem. 

Had he anything to eat ? Habuitne, quod ederet (esset) ? 

He had nothing either to eat or Non habuit, quod ederet aut bi- 

to drink ? beret. 

The boy fell from the roof, so as Puer de tecto decidit, ut crus fran- 

to break his leg. geret.f 

Exercise 98. 

Was he reading ? — He was reading. — At what time ? — He was 
reading this morning, between {inter) seven and eight o'clock. — 
Were you writing when I came home V — I was writing a letter to 
my brother. — Was he studying when I went out ? — He was not 
studying when you went out, but when you were at the theatre. — 
Were you working while I was playing V — No, I was playing while 
you were working. — When was he writing the letter ? — He was 
(engaged in) writing it at midnight. — Was he getting better when 
you saw him ? — He was not getting (any) better. — Where were 
you, when I was calling the physician ? — I was in my garden. — 
Were you opening the window when I was passing (praeteribam) ? — 
I was opening it. — Were the children breaking our glasses ? — They 
were not breaking them. — What did you do when I was going home ? 
— I was reading the book which our friend has lent me. — What did 
your brother say when you entered his room ? — He said nothing. — 

* Not by the perfect subjunctive, which is generally used only with refer- 
ence to an"action just completed (with the perfect definite). 

t The perfect fregerit would convert this into a statement of what has just 
occurred : — " The boy has (just now) fallen from the roof, so that he lias 
broken his leg." 

R 



274 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 51. 

Were you present at the ball.? — I was not present. — Was the boy- 
diligent V — He was both diligent and well behaved. — Was he able 
to walk out this morning ? — He was not able. — Were you at home 
when I received my money ? — I was not at home. — Did he desire 
to see his father ? — He was desiring to see him very much (valde) . 

— AVas the coffee (being) warmed ? — It was not being warmed. — 
Was he willing to learn Latin ? — He was unwilling to do so. — Who 
was eating ? — Our neighbor was eating and drinking. — Did he come 
to see you ? — He came in order to see me, and to give me a new 
book. — Had you anything to write to your friend, when you were in 
the country '? — I had many things to write to him. — Have you noth- 
ing to eat this morning ? — I have nothing. — Were they accustomed 
to write as well as they spoke ? — They were accustomed to write 
better. — Did you speak French when you were in Paris (Lutetiae) ? 

— I spoke French and Latin. 



Lesson LI. — pensum unum et quinouage- 

SIMUM. 
OF THE IMPERFECT PASSIVE AND DEPONENT. 

A. The imperfect tense of the passive voice is formed 
from the active, by changing m into r. E. g. 

1 ( Ind. amabar, lavabar, apportabar, dabar. 
\ Scjbj. amarer, lavarer, apportarer, darer. 

2 ( Ind. monebar, habebar, jubebar, delebar. 
I Subj. monerer, haberer, juberer, delerer. 

o j Ind. legebar, scribebar, mittebar, capiebar. 

^ Subj. legerer, scriberer, mitterer, capcrer. 
. \ Ind. audiebar, aperiebar, erudiebar, puniebar. 

\ Subj. audirer, aperirer, erudirer, punirer. 

B. The inflection of the imperfect passive is exhib- 
ited by the following paradigms : — 

First Conjugation. 
Indicative. Subjunctive. 

Amabar, / was loved. Amarer. that I might be loved. 

Sing, amabar Sing, amarer 

amabaris or -re amarere or -ris * 

amabat ur, amaret ur, 



Compare page 162, note *.' 



LESSON 51.] 



THE IMPERFECT PASSIVE. 



275 



Pluk. amabamiir Plur. amaremtir 

amabamini amaremini 

amabantur. amarentur. 

Second Conjugation. 



Indicative. 
Monebar, / was reminded. 



Sing, monebar 

monebaris or 
monebatur, 

Plur. monebamtir 
monebamini 
monebantur. 



a-) 



(2.) 



Subjunctive. 
Monerer, that I might be re- 
minded. 
Sing, monerer 

monerere or -ris 
moneretiir, 
Plur. moneremur 
monereminl 
monerenttir. 



Third Conjugation. 



Indicative. 
Legebar, I ivas read. 
Sing, legebar 

legebaris or -re 
legebatur, 
Tlur. legebamur 
legebamini 
lesebantur. 



Subjunctive. 
Legerer, that I might be read. 
Sing, legerer 

legerere or -ris 
legeretur, 
Plur. legeremur 
legeremmi 
legerentur. 



Capiebar, I ivas taken. 
Sing, capiebar 

capiebfiris or -re 

eapiebatur, 

capiebamur 

capiebaminl 

capiebantur. 



Plur. 



Caperer, that I might be taken. 
Sing, caperer 

caperere or -ris 
caperetiir, 
Plur. caperemur 
caperemini 
caperentur. 
Fourth Conjugation. 
Indicative. Subjunctive. 

Audiebar, I was heard. Audirer, that I might be heard. 



Sing, audiebar 

audiebaris or -re 
audiebatur, 

Plur. audiebamur 
aucliebaminl 
audiebantur. 



Sing, audirer 

audirere or 
audlretur, 

Plur. audlremur 
audiremini 
audlrentur. 



■ris 



So conjugate, — 1 . Apportabar, I was brought ; dcibar, I was given ; 
lavabar, I was washed ; secabar, I was cut. 2. Habtbar, I was held 
(considered) ; deltbar, I was destroyed ; jubebar, I was commanded ; 
vldebar, I was seen (I seemed). 3. yircessebar, I was called ; dilige- 



276 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 51. 

bar, I was cherished ; frangebar, I was broken ; mittebar, I was sent ; 
jwnebar, I was put; scribtbar, I was written. 4. Aperiebar, I was 
opened ; erudiebar, 1 was instructed ; puniehar, I was punished, &c. 

Remark. — Of the irregular verbs given on pp. 270 and 271, s-um, 
possum, volo, and their compounds, have no passive voice. Of eo, the 
third person singular ibatur, Iretur oecurs impersonally.* Few and 
its compounds have ferebar — ferrer regularly. The compounds of 
facio, which change the radical a into i, have a regular, imperfect ; as, 
■interficlebar — interftcerer, while those which retain a generally take 
flebam — fierem; as, caleflebam — calefierem. Edo has edebar — 
ederer regularly, except in the third person singular subjunctive, 
where essetur may stand for ederetur. 

Was I (being loved) ? Egdne amabar ? 

You were not loved, but your Tu non amabaris, sed frater tuus. 

brother. 

Were you and he loved ? An tu atque ille amabamini ? 

We were not loved. Non amabamur. 

Were they despised ? iEequid illi despicatui habebantur ? 

They were despised. Sane quidem, habebantur. 

Was the book (being) read ? Legebatiirne liber ? 

It was read. Sic est ; legebfitur. 

Did they give you the book to Dederuntne tibi librum, ut legere- 

be read 5? tur ? 

No, they gave it to me to be tmmo vero mihi eum dederunt, ut 

torn. laceraretur. 

Was the bread brought to be Apportatiisne est panis, ut ederetur 

eaten ? (essetur) V 

Did ye speak in order to be Estisne locuti, ut audiremini ? 

heard ? 

No, we spoke in order to be un- Non ve'ro ; locuti suinus, ut intelli- 

derstood. geremur. 

Were they (being) killed ? Niim illi interficiebantur ? 

They were (being) killed. Non interficiebantur. 

Was the coifee (being) warmed ? Calefiebatne eotTea ? 

It was done. Factum est vero. 

IMPERFECT OF DEPONENT VERBS. 

C. The imperfect of deponent verbs follows the 
analogy of the imperfect passive. Thus : — 

Indicative. Subjunctive. 
1st Conj. Arbitrabar — arbitrager, I was thinking. 
Comitabar — comitarer, / was escorting. 
Dominabar — dominarer, 1 was ruling. 
Hortabar — hortarer, / was exhorting. 
Morabar — morarer, i" ivas staying. 

* But the transitive compounds odeo, anteo, ineo, praetereo, subeo, and tran- 
seo, have a regular passive voice ; as, ad'ibar — adirer, &c. 






LESSON 51.] IMPERFECT- OF DEPONENT VERBS. 



277 



2d Conj. Fatebar — faterer, I was confessing. 
Merebar — mererer, J was earning. 
Miserebar — misererer, / was pitying. 
Tuebar — tuerer, / was defending. 
Yerebar — vererer, 1 was fearing. 

3d Conj. Fungebar — fungerer, / was performing. 
Labebar — laborer, I was falling. 
Loquebar — loquerer, / was speaking. 
Obliviscebar — obliviscerer, I was forgetting. 
Sequebar — sequerer, I was following . 

4th Conj. Blandiebar — blandlrer, I was flattering. 

Expeiiebar — experirer, / was experiencing. 
Largiebar — largirer, / was lavishing. 
Mentieoar — mentirer, / was lying. 
Partiebar — partirer, I was dividing. 

Remark. — All these are inflected precisely like the examples 
furnished under B. The following phrases will illustrate them still 
further. 



Whom were you exhorting ? 
I Avas exhorting my son. 
Was he escorting his friend ? 

He did not escort him. 

Where were ye staying ? 

We were staying in Paris. 

Were you earning (gaining) any 
good ? 

No, I was acquiring less favor 
than hatred. 

Were we defending your broth- 
er '? 

Ye were defending him really. 

When did they speak to the 
tailor ? 

They spoke to him last evening. 

Did ye follow any one ? 

AVe did not follow any one. 

Were you flattering any one ? 

I was flattering no one. 
AVere those men lying ? 
Not at all, they were not lying. 
Did he come in order to talk 

with us ? 
No, he rather came to flatter us. 

Did he say when he would come ? 
He did say so. 

24 



Quem hortabaris ? 
!Ego meum filium hortabar. 
Num ille amicum siium comitaba- 
, tur? 

Eum non comitabatur. 
TJbi morabamini ? 
Morabamur Lutetiae. 
Merebarisne quidquam bdni ? 

Irnmo vero minus ego favoris quam 

ddii merebar. 
Ecquid nos fratrem tuum tueba- 

mur ? 
Yds eum tuebamini profecto. 
Quo tempore cum sartore colloque- 

bantur ? 
Loquebantur cum eo heri vesperi. 
Num quem (aliquem) sequebamini '? 
Nullum (neminem) sequebamur. 
iEcquid alicui (cuiquam) blandie- 

baris ? 
Blandiebar ne'mini (niilli). 
Niim viri llli mentiebantur ? 
Non vero ; minime mentiebantur. 
Num ille venit, lit nobiscum loque- 

retur ? 
fmmo vero venit, ut nobis blandi- 

retur. 
Dixitne, quo tempore veniret ? 
Dixit vero. 



278 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[lesson 51. 



Atjirst, in the beginning. 
Afterwards, then. 

Hereupon, upon this. 

Did he say yes or no ? 

At first he said yes, afterwards 
no. 

At first he worked, but after- 
wards he played. 

He came afterwards. 

Upon this (then) he said. 

Here is your book, and there 
your paper. 

Now you must work. 

To-day I do not go out. 

Yesterday my father departed. 
As soon as (conj.). 

I am accustomed to drink as soon 

as I have eaten. 
As soon as I have taken off my 

shoes, I take off my stockings. 
As soon as he heard this, lie 

departed. 
What do you usually do after 

supper ? 
Afterwards I sleep. 

To sleep. 
To live ; to be alive. 



Is your father yet alive ? 

He is yet (still) alive. 

He is no longer alive. 

Is our cousin still sleeping (yet 

asleep) ? 
He does still sleep. 

To give away. 
To cut off. 



Primum ; primo, a primo, in primo. 
Deincle, post, postea. 

Deinde, dein ; exinde, exin (adv.'). 

"Utrum dixit e'tiam an non ? 
A primo dixit etiam, post non. 

Primum laboravit, deinde autem 

lusit. 
Tenit (advenit) postea. 
Deinde (exinde) dixit. 
Hie est liber tiius, illic charta 

tiia. 
Nunc est tibi laborandum. 
Hddie ego in publicum non prd- 

deo. 
Heri pater ineus profectus est. 
Simul ac (atque), simul ut. 
Ubi, quum primum. 

(With the Perf. Indie.) 
Ego, simul atque edi, bibere sdleo. 

Simul lit me excalceavi, tibialia de- 
traho pedibus. 

Quum primum haec audivit, pro- 
fectus est. 

Quid post cibum vespertinuin fa- 
cere soles ? 

Deinde (postea) ddrmio. 

Dormio, ire, wi (u), Hum. 

Vivo, ere, xi, ctum. 

In vita esse. Vita friior (friii, fru- 
itus or fructus sum). 

yivitne pater tiius etiamnunc ? 

Estne pater tiius in vita etiam- 
nunc ? 

Est in vita etiamnunc. 

Vita fniitur etiamnunc. 

In vita est non jam. 

Vita fniitur non amplius. 

Dormitne ndster consobrinus eti- 
amnunc ? 

Ddrmit vero etiamnunc. 

Abalieno, are, avi, atum. 

Bono (dat.) dare (alicui aliquid). 

Amputo, are, avi, atum. 

Abscido, ere, idi, isum. 

Also, praecidere, desecare, &c. 



LESSON 51.] PHRASES AND EXERCISES. 



279 



To cut off one's head. 

To cut one's throat. 
To cut off one's ears. 

To cut one's (own) nails. 

What (injury) have they done 

to him ? 
They have cut off his ears. 
Have they cropped the dog's 

ears '? 
They have cropped them. 
They have cut off his head. 
They have cut his throat. 
Were you cutting your nails ? 
I was not cutting them. 

Has he given away anything ? 

He has not given away anything. 
He has given away his coat. 

To arrive. 

To go away, to go off (from 
a place). 

At length, at last. 

Without (prep.). 

Without money, books, friends. 
Without any danger. 
Without any doubt. 

Without speaking. 

Without saying a word. 
Without having said a word. 
He went away without saying a 

word. 
Has he arrived at last ? 
He has arrived. 
He has not yet arrived. 
Are they coming at last ? 
They are coming. 

Loud (adv.). 

Does your master speak loud ? 



Alicui caput amputare. 

Caput abscldere cervicibus alicu- 

jus._ 
Jugulare aliquem. 
Jugulum alicui praecldere. 
Abscidere (praecldere) alicui au- 

res. 
Resecare (-secui, -sectum) ungues. 

Quid injiiriae ei intulerunt ? 

Abscide'runt ei aiires. 
Praecideriintne aiires cani ? 

Praeciderunt. 

Amputaverunt ei caput. 

Praeciderunt ei jugulum. 

Kesecabasne tibi ungues ? 

Non reseeabam. 

Num quid abalienavit ? 

Niim aliquid ddno dedit ? 
( Nihil abalienavit. 
\ Ddno dedit nihil. 

Abalienavit (ddno dedit) siiam td- 
gam. 

Advenio, ire, eni, entum. 
[ Abeo, ire, ivi (ii), itum. 
j Discedo, ere, essi, essum. 
j (ab aliquo, ab or ex aliquo 

t LOCO.) 

Tandem, denique, postremo (adv.y. 
Sine (prep, cum abl.). 

Sine pecunia, libris, amicis. 

Sine xillo periculo. 

Sine xilla dubitatione. 
f Nihil dicens, tacens. 
( Verbum non faciens. 

Ne iinum quidem verbum faciens. 

Verbo omnino millo facto. 

Abiit verbum omnino nullum fa- 
ciens (verbo niillo facto). 

Advenitne tandem ? 

Advenit vero. 

Ndndum advenit. 

Tandenme veniunt ? 

Factum est. 

CI fire (adv.), clara voce. 
Ma^isterne tiius clare loquitur ? 



2g0 LATIN GRAMMAll. [LESSON 51. 

lie docs speak loud. Loquitur vero clare. _ 

You must read louder. Leiiendum est tibi clarius (voce 

claridre). 
In order to learn Latin, one must Si quis Latine ediscere vult, nc- 
speak loud. cesse est elara voce toqmttur. 

Exercise 09. 

Did you intend to learn English ? — I did intend to learn it, but I 
could not find a good master. — Did your brother intend to buy a 
carriage?— He was intending to buy one, but In- had no more money. 

— Wny did you work ? — I worked in order to learn Latin. — \\ by 
did you love that man ? — I Loved him because he bved me. — Have 
you already seen the son of the captain V — I have already seen him. 

— Did he speak English? — No, he spoke Latin and Greek.— W here. 
were von at that time ? — I was in Italy. — \\ hum was the master 
exhorting? — He was exhorting his scholars.— Were they not con- 
sidered Thabebantur) diligent ? — No, they were considered lazy and 
naughty. — Were jrou ordered (juben) to go into the country. -~ I 
was' not ordered to go there. — When was the letter (bein^ sent ?— 
It was sent yesterdav.— Was the window (being) opened when we 
were passing ?— It "was (being) opened. — Was the master heard 
when he spoke ? — He was heard, when he spoke loud. — \\ hy was 
the boy punished 1 - He was punished because he was negligent and 
bad.— Were you able to defend (ttte'ri) your friends? — 1 was not able 
to defend them.— Were they accustomed to flatter you?— They were 
accustomed to flatter me. —"Did you com.- in order to flatter me ? — 
\ () . [came in order to talk to you. — Is your friend's brother still 
alive? — He is still alive. — Are your parents -till alive? — They 
are no longer alive. — Was your brother Btill alive, when you were 
i„ Germany?— He was no longer alive. — Were you yet asleep 
(sleeping), when I came this morning?— I was asleep no longer. — 
Was your master accustomed to speak loud ? — 1 h- was. — Are you 
accustomed to Bpeak loud, when you Btudy Latin? — I am not accus- 
tomed (to do so).— Has your cousin at last arrived ? — He has ar- 
rived at last- - Are you at last learning French? — ! am learning it 
a t last. — What do you do after breakfast? — As soon as I have 
breakfasted, I begin to write my letters. — I take off my clothi 
soon as I have taken oil' my hat — Do you drink as Boon as you have 
eaten? — I do. — What did they do alter BUpper? — They slept 
alter wards. 



LESSON 52.] USE OF THE INFINITIVE. 281 



Lesson LTL — PENSXJM ALTERtM ET QUIX- 
QUAGESIMUM. 

OF THE USE OF THE INFINITIVE. 

A. The infinitive may be regarded as a verbal substantive 
of the neuter gender singular number, and may as such stand 
either a> the subject of a finite verb in the nominative, or as its 
object in the accusative. 

Rem vrk. — The infinitive differs from regular verbal substantives, 
a) by admitting after it the case of the finite verb, and l>) by indicat- 
ing, at the same time, the completion or non-completion of the action 
denoted by the verb, i. e. by representing it as present, past, or 
future. 

I. The infinitive Is in the nominative, when ii stands 
as the subject of an Intransitive predicate. E. g. 

Bene senfire rectwjue fdcere siitia Good sentiments and correct con- 

e*st ad bene beatcque viven- duel Bufficc to constitute a well- 

limn. ulated and a happy life. 

Hoc exitiosius erat quam Vespa- This was more pernicious than to 

siamiin - have despised Vespasian. 

Apud Persas siiimna laus est put- Among the Persians, t<> excel in 

chn vendri. hunting is a matter of the high- 
est praise. 

Invidire (= invidia) non ctfdit Envy is below the character of a 

in sapientem. philosopher. 

Tgnd&cere muni) humanum est. To pardon one's friend is human. 

Nihil est aliud, /'•'" et be.dii vi- To live well and happily is tanta- 

vere, nisi hon iU etrtcU vivere. mounl to living honorably and 

correctly. 

1 L The infinitive stands as the objeci accusative after 
transitive or auxiliary verb-, and sometimes after prepo- 
Bitions. E. is. 

]'tiir, acis, Lliinnibal, ulctdria You know how to conquer, Hanni- 

liii nereis. bal, bul not how to use your 

victory. 

Cupio te cdnsulem videre. I desire to see yon consul. 

Miiltum interest interddre el era- There isa great difference between 

ctpere. giving and receiving. 

Qudd crimen dicis, praeter amds- What charge have von to make, 



se, mi nut : 



A (iraecis (ialli lirbes moc'nilms The Gauls learnt the art of BUr- 

cinyere didicerunt. rounding their cities with walls 

24 ■ 



besides my h,i\ ing lo\ ed ■ 
he Gauls learnt t 
rounding their ci 
from the Greeks. 



282 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 52. 

Solent dm cocjildre dmnes, qui All who wish to accomplish great 
magna negdtia volunt dgere. objects, are accustomed to de- 

liberate long. 
Stios quisque debet tue'ri. Every one is bound to defend his 

own (friends, &c). 
Sallustius stdtuit res ge'stas pdpuli Sallust resolved to write the ex- 
Romani perscribere. ploits (history) of the Roman 

people. 
Pompeium et hortdri et orore et "YVe do not cease to exhort and to 
tnonere .... ndn desistimus. beseech and to admonish Pom- 

pey. 
Amicos neque armis cogere, ne- You can neither make friends by 
que aiiro parare qut'as ; officio force of arms, nor procure them 
et fide pariuntur. with gold ; they are made by 

an obliging disposition and by 
fidelity. 

Observations. 

1. The verbs most commonly followed by the simple infini- 
tive are those signifying, — 

a.) Willingness or unwillingness, desire, and the like; as, 
volo, nolo, malo. cupio, studeo, opto, &c. 

b.) Ability or inability, knowledge or ignorance ; as. pos- 
sum, queo, nequeo ; scio, nescio ; valeo ; to which add disco and debeo. 

c.) Courage or fear; as, audeo ; dubxto, metvo, paveo t timeo, 
vereor. 

d.) Habit or custom ; as, assuesco, consuesco, insuesco, soleo. 

c.) To begin, continue, cease, or refrain : as coepi, incipio ; 
pergo, perseve.ro ; desino, desisio : intermitto, praetermitto ; recuso, &c. 

/.) Purpose or endeavor: as, euro, cogito, decerno, constitvo, 
instituo, staluo, pearo : aggredior, conor, contendo, muturo, nitor, tendo, 
ten to, &c. 

g.) Passive verbs signifying to be said, reported, considered, 
believed. &c : as, audior, credor, dicor, existimor, feror, uegor, nun- 
tior, perhibeor, puior, trador, &c. ; also cogor, jubeor, videor. 

Remark. — Many of the verbs here enumerated are also followed 
by the subjunctive, with one of the conjunctions ut, ne, quo. quomXnits, 
&c. With some of them the latter construction is even the most com- 
mon. (Cf. Lesson LIV.) 

2. The infinitive is sometimes put after certain nouns, adjec- 
tives, and verbs, instead of an oblique case of the gerund. This 
construction occurs. — 

a.) After nouns like tempus, consilium, studium, animus, ars, &c. 
(Cf. page 116.) E. g. Tempus est mojora conari (= conandi), It is 
time to make greater attempts. Consilium erat hiemando continuare 



LESSON 52.] USE OF THE INFINITIVE. 283 

(= continuandi) helium, The design was to continue the war by going 
into winter quarters. Fuerat animus Cheruscis juvare (= juvandi) 
Cattos, The Cherusci had the intention of aiding the Catti. 

b.) After the adjectives paratus, insuetus, contentus, and some 
others.* E.g. Paratus audire, Prepared to hear. Vinci insuetus, Un- 
accustomed to be conquered. Contentus retinere, Content to retain. 

c.) After the verbs habere] dare, and ministrdre, in expressions like 
Nihil habeo ad te scribere, I have nothing to write to you. Ut bibere 
sibi juberet dari, That (something) should be given them to drink. 
Ut Joui bibere ministraret, That he might give Jove to drink. 

3. After the auxiliary verbs volo, malo, nolo, cupio, incipio, and 
others enumerated under Obs. 1, the noun or adjective of the predi- 
cate is in the nominative, when the quality denoted by it is regarded 
as already existing in the subject ; but when the quality is not pres- 
ent, or missing, the infinitive following these verbs has a subject of its 
own in the accusative,! and the noun or adjective is likewise in the 
accusative. E. g. Volo et esse et Jiaberi c/ratus, It is my wish both to 
be grateful and to be considered so. Vos liberi esse non curatis ? Do 
you not care to be free ? Judicem me esse, non doctort m, volo, I wish 
myself to be a judge, and not a teacher. Ego me Phidiam esse mallem, 
quam vel optimum fabrum tir/narium, I would rather be a Phidias, than 
the best joiner in the world. Timoleon maluit se di/igi, quam metui, 
Timoleon wanted himself to be loved rather than feared. Gratum se 
videri studet, He strives to have the appearance of being grateful. 

4. In historical narration, the infinitive is sometimes used instead of 
the imperfect indicative. (Cf. Lesson L. B., Rem. 4.) 

The coin. Nummus, i, m. 

The copper coin. Nummus cupreus, i, m. 

The silver coin. Nummus argenteus, i, m. 

The gold coin. (Nummus) aureus seu aureolus, 

i, m. 

The as (a copper coin). As, gen. assis, m. 

The sesterce (silver). Sestertius, i, m. 

The denarius (silver). Denarius, i, m. 

The aureus (gold). Aureus, i, m. 

The obole (Greek coin). Obolus, i, m. 

The drachma " Drachma, B6,f. 

The inina " Mina, ae, f. 

The talent J " Taientum, i, n. 

lloman, Greek, English Pecunia Eomanorum, Graecorum, 

money. Anglorum signo signata. 

* Chiefly in imitation of the Greeks; as, Dignus eligi, Worthy of being 
chosen. Perltiis obsequi, Skilled in the art of yielding. Utilis aspirare et 
adesse, Useful to join and assist. 

t Compare Lesson L. A. 

% The obolus — taientum are Greek money, and the as — aureus Eoman 
proper. On the full enumeration and value of these, see the Table of Coins 
in the Lexicon. 



284 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[lesson 52. 



To contain, consist of. 

To be worth, to have the 

value of. 
To estimate, reckon. 

An as is estimated the fourth 
part of a sesterce. 

The denarius contains four ses- 
tertii or sixteen asses. 

The aureus consists of twenty- 
five denarii, or one hundred 
sesterces. 

A drachma has the value of six 
obolcs. 

A hundred drachmas make a 
mina. 

A talent contains sixty minas. 

How many groshes are there in 
a crown ? 

Twenty-four. 

The grosh (modern). 
To receive — received. 

How much money have you re- 
ceived ? 

I have received thirty talents of 
gold. 

We have received a hundred 
sestertii. 

Have you received letters ? 

I have received some. 



To projnise. 

Have I promised you anything ? 
You have promised me nothing. 

Do you promise to come to me ? 

I do promise it. 

Can he give us what he has 

promised ? 
He can give you all that he has 

promised you. 

To call. 



Contineo, ere, nui, tentum (ali- 
quid). 
Efficior, i, -fectus sum (ex re). 

Valeo, ere, ui, (aliqua re) * 

Valorem habere (alicujus rei). 
Aestimo, are, avi, atuni. 

As quarta pars sestertii aestimatur. 

Denarius quattuor sestertios vel 

sedecim asses cdntinet. 
Aureus (minimus) efficitur ex 

quinque et viginti denariis vel 

centum sestertiis. 
Una drachma valorem habet sex 

obolorum. 
Centum drachmae minam unam 

efffciimt. 
Talentum valet sexaginta minis. 
Ex qudt grdssis efficitur thalerus ? 

Ex quattuor et viginti. 
Grossus, i, m. 

Accipere — accepi, acceptum. 
Quantam peciiniam accepisti ? 

Accepi triginta talenta aiiri. 

Kos centum sestertios accepimus. 

£cquid epistolas accepisti ? 
Accepi vero nonmillas. 

Promilto, ere, mlsi, missum. 
Polliceor, eri, citus sum. 

(alicui aliquid or infin.) 

Promisine tibi aliquid (quidquam) ? 
Tu mihi nihil rei promisisti (polli- 

citus es). 
Pollicerisne te ad me venturum ? 
Sane quidem, polliceor. 
Potestne nobis dtire quod promisit ? 

Potest vdbis dare omnia, quae pro- 
misit. 
Voco, are, avi, atum (aliquem). 
Arcesso, ere, ivi, itum (aliquem). 



* Verbs of valuing are followed by the Ablative. 



LESSON 52.] PHRASES AND EXERCISES. 



285 



To wear out. 

To spell. 

How ? In what way or man- 
ner? 
Thus. 
In this manner. 

Well. 

Badly. 

So so, indifferently. 

Does lie already know how to 

spell ? 
He does know how. 
How (in what manner) did you 

learn Latin ? 
I have learnt it so. 
How did I write my letters ? 

You have written them so so. 
Has she washed the shirt well ? 
She has washed it not badly. 
Whom do you call ? 
I am calling my little brother. 
How (who) are you called ? 

I am called a learner. 

Has he worn out his coat ? 

To lie, to be placed. 



To lay place, put. 



To dry (neuter). 
To dry, make dry. 
To put out to dry. 

Where did you put the book ? 
I have placed it upon the table. 
Where have they put my gloves ? 



Detero, ere, trivi, tritum (altquid). 
Usu conterere, trivi, tritum. 
Ordinare syllabas litterarum. 
Qudmodo, quo pacta, quemadmodum, 

qui* 
Sic, ltd (adv.). 
Hoc modo, ad hunc modum, hoc 

pacto. 
Bene, recte (adv.). 
Male, nequiter (adv.). 
Sic satis, mediocrlter, utcunque. 

Scitne (didicitne) jam syllabas lit- 
terarum ordinare ? 

Scit vero. Didicit. 

Quemadmodum didicisti linguam 
Latin am V 

Di'dici earn hoc pacto. 

Qudmodo scripsi ego epistolas 
meas ? 

Scripsisti eas sic satis. 

Lavitne ilia indusium bene ? 

Lavit id non male. 

Quern vdcas (citas) ? 

Fraterculum meum vdco (cito). 

Qudmodo (quis) vocaris ? 

Vdcor discipulus. 

Audio discipulus. 

Detrivi'tne siiam tdgam ? 

Jdceo, ere, ui, itum. 
Positum or situm esse. 

(IN Or SUPER ALIQUA RE). 

Pono, ere, posui, positum. 
Imponere, reponere. f 
Colloco, are, avi, citum. 

(ALIQUID IN Or SUPER RE.) 

Siccesco, ere, , . 

Sicco, are, avi, atum. 
Exponere aliquid in sole siccandi 
causa (ut siccescat). 

"Ubi (quo loco) h'brum imposuisti? 
Impdsui eum mensae (in mensam). % 
LJbi posuerunt mea digi tabula ? 



* An old ablative for quo. 

t And various other compounds; as, adponere, to place near; deponere, to 
put down ; disponere, to place apart ; exponere, to spread out ; reponere, suppo- 
nere, to place under. 

X The construction of imponere is alicui bei, in kem ; or in re. 



286 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 52. 

They have placed them (in or- Colloeaverunt ea in sella. 

der) upon the chair. 

Where lies the book '? Ubi est pdsitus liber ? 

It lies upon the table. Pdsitus est in (super) mensa. 

It has lain upon the table. Pdsitus erat in (super) mensa. 

Have you put wood upon the Reposuistine lignum super fdco ? 

hearth ? 

I have put a little upon it. Repdsui vero aliquantulum. 

Do you put out your coat to Exponisne tuam tdgam in sole, ut 

dry ? sicceseat ? 

I do put it out. f ta est, expdno. 

Have they put their stockings to Ecquid in sole exposuerunt tibi- 

dry ? alia sua, ut siccescerent ? 

They have not. Non exposuerunt. 

Exercise 100. 

Hast thou promised anything ? — I have promised nothing. — Do 
you give me what you have promised me ? — I do give it to you. — 
Have you received much money ? — I have received but little. — 
How much have you received of it ? — I have received but one crown. 

— When have you received your letter ? — I have received it to-day. 

— Hast thou received anything ? — I have received nothing. — What 
have we received ? — AVe have received long letters. — Do you prom- 
ise me to come to the ball '? — I do promise you to come to it. — Does 
your ball take place to-night? — It does take place. — How much 
money have you given to my son ? — I have given him fifteen crowns. 

— Have you not promised him more ? — I have given him what I 
have promised him. — Have our enemies received their money ? — 
They have not received it. — Have you Roman money ? — I have 
some. — What kind of money (quid nummorum) have you ? — I have 
asses, sesterces, denarii, and aurei. — How many asses are there in a 
sesterce ? — There are four. — What is the value of an aureus ? — 
An aureus is worth a hundred sesterces. — Have you any German 
money? — I have crowns, florins, kreuzers, groshes, and deniers. — 
How many groshes are there in a florin ? — A florin contains sixteen 
groshes, or sixty kreuzers. — Have you any oboles ? — I have a few 
of them. — How many oboles are there in a drachma ? — A drachma 
contains six oboles. — The silver mina (mina argenti) of the Greeks 
had the same value as the Roman denarius. — How many minas are 
there in a talent ? — The talent contains sixty minas. — Will you lend 
your coat to me V — I will lend it to you ; but it is worn out. — Are 
your shoes worn out? — They are not worn out. — Will you lend 
them to my brother ? — I will lend them to him. — To whom have 
you lent your hat ? — I have not lent it ; I have given it to somebody. 

— To whom have you given it ? — I have given it to a pauper. 

Exercise 101. 

Does your little brother already know how to spell ? — He does 
know. — Does he spell well ? — He does spell well. — How has your 



LESSON; 53.] ACCUSATIVUS CUM INFINITIVO. 287 

little boy spelt? — He has spelt so so. — How have your children 
written their letters ? — They have written them badly. — Do you 
know Spanish? — I do know it. — Does your cousin speak Italian ? — 
He speaks it well. — How do your friends speak ? — They do not 
speak badly {non male). — Do they listen to what you tell them? — 
They do listen to it. — How hast thou learnt English? — I have 
learnt it in this manner. — Have you called me ? — I have not called 
you, but your brother. — Is he come ? — Not yet. — Where have you 
wet your clothes ? — I have wet them in the country. — Will you put 
them to dry ? — I will put them to dry. — Where have you put my 
hat ? — I have put it upon the table. — Hast thou seen my book ? — 
I have seen it. — Where is it ? — It lies upon your brother's trunk. 
— Does my handkerchief lie upon the chair ? — It does lie upon it. — 
When have you been in the country ? — I was there the day before 
yesterday. — Have you found your father there? — I have found 
him there. — What has he said ? — He has said nothing. — What 
have you been doing in the country ? — I have been doing nothing 
there. 



Lesson LIII. — pensum quixquagesimum 

TERTIUM. 

OF THE ACCUSATIVUS CUM INEINITIVO. 

A. The infinitive may have a subject of its own in 
the accusative, but is then rendered into English by a 
separate clause introduced by the conjunction " that." 
E.g. 

Orpheum poefam ddcet Aristdte- Aristotle informs us, that the poet 

les niinquam fuisse. Orpheus never existed. 

An nesciebam vitae bre'vem esse Or was I not aware, that the career 

cursum, gldriae sempiternum ? of life is short, and that of glory 

eternal ? 

Spero nostram amicitiam non ege- I hope, that our friendship does not 

re testibus. stand in need of any witnesses. 

Egdne me audit- isse illiquid et di- May I not rejoice, that I have heard 

dicisse non gaiideam ? and learnt something ? 

B. The accusativus cum infinitivo may, like the simple in- 
finitive, stand either as the subject of a finite verb in the nomi- 
native, or as its object in the accusative. 

I. The accusative with the infinitive stands as the subject of 
a sentence, when the predicate is an impersonal verb, or the 
copula est, fuit, &c. with a noun or adjective. E. g. 



288 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 53. 

Legem brecem esse oportet, quo A law should be brief, so that it 

facilius ab impen'tis teneatur. may be more easily remembered 

by the uneducated. 
Omnibus bonis expedit sdlvam It is for the advantage of all good 

esse rempublicam. citizens, that the republic should 

be safe. 
Facinus est, vinciri civem Roma- It is audacity to have a Roman 

num; scelus, verberdri ; prope citizen bound;* it is a crime to 

parricidium, necdri. have him beaten ; it is almost 

parricide to have him killed. 
Tempus est, nos de ilia perpetua It is time that we should already 

jam, non de hue exigua vita, think of that perpetual life, and 

cogitdre. not of this brief one. 

Aliud est iraciindum esse, aliud It is one thing to be irascible, and 

irdtum. another to be angry. 

Nccesse est legem habtri in rebus The law must be reckoned among 

dptimis. our best possessions. 

Victor em pdrcere victis aequum It is just that the conqueror should 

est. spare the conquered. 

Constat profecto ad salutem civi- It is manifest, that the laws were 

um inventus esse leges. invented solely for the safety of 

the citizens. 

Remarks. 

1. The accusative, with the infinitive thus used as the subject of a 
sentence, is equivalent to a noun in the nominative case, and may 
sometimes be converted into one. E. g. Saluam esse rai/jniblicam = 
salus reipublicae. Legem brevem esse oportet = legum brevitas necessa- 
ria est, &c. 

2. The predicates most frequently employed in this construction 
are: — apertum, consentaneum, acquum, justum, rcrishnile, &c. est, it 
is manifest, proper, fair, just, probable (i. e. that such a thing should 
happen or be done); — tempus, mos, facinus, fas, &c. est, it is time, 
customary, a crime, right, &c. ; — the impersonal verbs apparet, it is 
apparent; constat, it is agreed ; licet, it is lawful ; oportet, it behooves ; 
opus est, there is need ; necesse est, it is necessary ; — or the third per- 
son singular of passive verbs, as intelligitur, it is understood ; perspi- 
citur, it is perceived, &c. 

II. The accusations cum infinitivo stands as the object- 
accusative after the following classes of verbs : — 

1. As the object of a sensation, perception, or emotion, after 
verbs signifying to see, hear, feel, perceive, understand, think, 



* Literally, " That a Roman citizen should be bound," &c. But in this 
construction it is often preferable to use the active infinitive in English: to 
bind a Roman, &c. 



LESSON 53.] THE ACCUSATIYUS CUM INFINITIVO. 



289 



know, believe, hope, and the like,* and also those denoting joy, 
sorrow, shame, anxiety, and wonder. E. g. 



Vides nos, si ita sit, privdri spe 
beatioris vitae. 



Sent it animus se sua vi, 
ena, moveri. 



ali- 



Pompe'ios desedisse terrae mdtu 

audivimus. 
£urn te essefinge, qui ego sum. 



!Ego ilium periisse diico, cui periit 

piidor. 
Sperant, se maximum friictum 

esse captures. 
Cdnscius mini eram, nihil a me 

commissum esse, quod bdni cu- 

jiisquam offenderet animum. 
Meuni factum probdri abs te tri- 

umplio gaudio. 
Doleo, non me tills litteris certi- 

orem fieri. 
Minime mirdmur, te tills prae- 

claris operibus laetdri. 

2. As the object of a volition, after verbs signifying to wish, 
desire, resolve, permit, command, compel, prohibit, or prevent. E. g. 

Tibi favemus, te tua frui virtute We favor you, and desire you to 



You see that, if that is so, we are 

deprived of the hope of a better 

life. 
The mind feels that it is moved by 

its own energy, and not by an 

extraneous one. 
We have heard that Pompeii was 

destroyed by an earthquake. 
Imagine yourself to be the person, 

which I am. 
I consider him lost, whose shame is 

gone. 
They hope that they will get the 

greatest advantage. 
I was conscious that nothing had 

been done by me to offend the 

mind of any honorable man. 
I triumph with joy that my deed is 

approved by you. 
I am sorry that I am not informed 

by your letter. 
We do not at all wonder that you 

exult in your distinguished deeds. 



cupinius. 

"Utrum corporis, an tibi mattes 
vires ingenii ddri ? 

Rem ad arma deduct studebat. 

Posluldbimus nobis Mud concedi. 

Jubet nos Pythius Apollo noscere 

nosmet ipsos. 
Germani vin um ad se omnino im- 

portdri non sinunt. 

Aristdteles versum in oratione ve- 
tat e'sse, numerum jubet. 



enjoy your virtue. 
Which would you prefer (to be 

given you), strength of body or 

of intellect ? 
It was his endeavor that the matter 

should be decided by force. 
We will demand that that should 

be conceded to us. 
Pythian Apollo commands us to 

know ourselves. 
The Germans do not allow, on any 

account, the importation of wine 

among them. 
Aristotle prohibits the use of verse 

in a discourse, but commands 

the rhythm. 



* As, for example, audio, video, sentio, animadrerto, cor/nosco, inteUigo, per- 
eipio, disco, scio, dnco, statuo, memini, recordor, obliviscor, and in general all the 
verba sensuum et ajjfectuttm. 

S 25 



200 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 53. 



3. After verba declarandi, or those signifying to sat/, ivrite, 
report, confess, deny, pretend, promise, prove, convince, <fcc* 



Tliales Milesius dquam dixit esse 

initium rerum. 
Herodotus scrlbit Croesi fitium, 

cum esset infans, locutum (sc. 

esse). 

Solon sefdrere simulant. 
Confi/eor, me abs te cupisse lau- 

dari. 
Dicaearchus vult efficere, dniinos 

esse mortales. 
PoUicetur Piso, sese ad Cae'sarern 

it drum (sc. esse). 
Magnum solem esse phildsophus 

probdbit, quantus sit, mathema- 

ticus. 



Isocratem Plato 
a Sdcrate. 



lauddri fecit 



Tliales, the Milesian, said that water 
was the first principle of things. 

Herodotus writes that the son of 
Croesus spoke when he was an 
infant. 

Solon pretended to be a madman. 

I confess that I desired to be praised 
by you. 

Dicasarchus wants to make out that 
souls are mortal. 

Piso promises that he will go to 
Caesar. 

The philosopher will prove that 
the sun is large, but the mathe- 
matician (will show) how large 
it is. 

Plato represents Isocrates as com- 
mended by Socrates. 






C The infinitive, either with or without a subject accusa- 
tive, may stand as the apposition of a noun, adjective, or demon- 
strative pronoun. E. g. 



Haec benignitas etiam re'i publi- 
cae est litilis, re'dimi e servitu- 
dine cdptos, locupletdri tenui- 
dres. 

In cognitione et scie'ntia exce'llere, 
r pulclirum putamus. 

Mud sdleo mirari, non me tdties 
aceipere tiias litteras, qudties a 
fratre meo afferantur. 

Id injustissimum ipsum est, justi- 
tiae mercedem quatrere. 



This is also a bounty of advantage 
to the commonwealth : to redeem 
captives from servitude, and to 
enrich the poorer classes. 

"We consider it honorable to excel 
in knowledge and learning. 

I am accustomed to wonder at it 
(at this), that I should not hear 
as often from you, as I do from 
my brother. 

It is the highest degree of injustice 
to make a trade of justice. 



D. In impassioned exclamations and interrogations the ac- 
cusative with the infinitive sometimes stands independently as 
the object of the emotion or passion expressed by it. E. g. 

Mene incepto desistere victum ? Shall /, vanquished, desist from my 

purpose ? 



* The principal verbs of this class are dieo, trado,prodo, seribo, re fern, mintio, 
confirmo, nego, osiendo, demonstro, perhibeo, polliceor, promitto, spondeo, &c. To 
these add face re, " to represent," and ej/icere, " to make out or prove." 



LESSON 5o.] THE ACCUSATIVUS CUM INFINITIVO. 291 

Me non cum bonis esse ? I not among the good and patri- 
otic ! 

Tune hoc, Atti, dicere, tali prii- You say this, Attius, a man of pru- 

dentia praeditum ? dence like your own ! 

spectaeulum miserum atquc O wretched and mortifying sight ! 
acerbum ! Ludibrio esse urbis The glory of the city, the name 
gloriam et pdpuli Komani no- of the Roman people, an object 
men ! of derision ! 

Remarks. 

1. After verbs of seeing and hearing, the present participle* or ut 
("how"), with the subjunctive, is sometimes put instead of an infin- 
itive, and the verbs of joy, sorrow, &c. are also followed by the sub- 
junctive, with quod ("that" or " because ").f 

2. After verbs of seeing and hearing, the present infinitive may 
frequently be rendered into English by the present participle. E. g. 
Mugire (= mugientem) videbis sub pedibus terrain, You will perceive 
the earth quaking beneath your feet. Majores natu audivi dicere 
(= dicentes), I have heard those older than myself say. Incustodltam 
lente videt ire (= euntein) juvencam, He sees the untended heifer 
walking slowly. 

3. After one of the past tenses, the accusative with the present in- 
finitive is equivalent to the English imperfect, and the accusative with 
the perfect infinitive to the English pluperfect. E. g. Vldi te scribere, 

1 saw that you were writing. Vldi te scripsisse, I saw that you had 
written. Dixit Cajum laudari, He said that Cajus was (then) praised. 
Dixit Cajum laudatwn esse, He said that Cajus had been praised. 

4. The verb memini, " I remember," is commonly followed by the 
present infinitive, even when the act denoted by the latter is already 
completed. E. g. Memini PampMlum mihi narrare, I remember 
Pamphilus telling me (that Pamphilus told me). Memini Catonem 
mecum disserrere, I remember Cato discussing the question with me 
(to have discussed, &c.). — But also by the perfect: Meministis me 
ita distribuisse initio causam, You remember that in the beginning I 
have made this distribution of my argument. 

5. After the expressions satis mihi est, satis habeo, contentus sum, 
and also after me juvat, me pudet, melius erit, volo caveo, &c, the per- 
fect infinitive is put to denote the result and estimate of a completed 
action, where the English idiom more commonly has the present. 
E. g. Contend simus, id unum dixisse, Let us be content to have said 
(to say) this one thing. Melius erit guiesse, It will be better to have 
rested (= to rest). Simt qid nolint tetigisse, There are those who 
are unwilling to have touched (= to touch) . Commisisse cavet, He 
bewares to commit, &c. 

6. The present infinitive is sometimes put instead of the future. 
E. g. Nervii, quae imperarentur, facere % dixerunt, The Nervii said, that 

* See Lesson XLIX. F. Rem. 3. % Instead of se faciuros {esse). 

t Cf. Lesson LIV. H. 



292 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 53. 

they would do whatever they were commanded. Cato affirmat,^ se 
vivo Pontinium non triumpJiare* Cato affirms that, while he is alive, 
Pontinius shall not triumph. 

7. The infinitive passive of neuter verbs may stand impersonally 
without a subject, precisely like the third person singular passive of 
that class of verbs. E. g. His persuaderi non poterat, They could not 
be persuaded. Quum posses jam suspicari, tibi esse successum, When 
you might already suspect that you had been supplanted. 

8. When, instead of the future infinitive, the formula Juturtm esse, 
ut, or fore, ulj is employed, the perfect and imperfect subjunctive 
following the ut represent the future action as incomplete or going on, 
while the perfect and pluperfect represent it as completed. E. g. 
Credo fore, ut scribas, I think that you will write. Credebam fore, 
ut scriberes, I thought that you would be writing. Credo fore, ut 
scripseris, I think you will have written. Credebam fore, ut scripsis- 
ses, I thought you would have written. 

9. The majority of the verba sentiendi et declarandi (cf. B. II. 1 
and 3), which in the active voice are followed by the accusativus cum 
infinitl'vo, are in the passive voice followed by the infinitive alone, 
with the subject accusative in the nominative. But when they are 
employed impersonally, the subject accusative remains as in the 
active. E. g. Active: Dlco te esse patrem patriae. Passive: (Tu) 
dlceris esse pater patriae. Pass. Impers : Dicitur, te esse patrem pa- 
triae (It is said, that you are the father of your country). Pass. Per- 
sonal : Numa Pythagorae auditor fuisse credttur (Numa is supposed to 
have been a hearer of Pythagoras). Impers. : Creditur,% Pythagorae 
auditorem fuisse Numam (It is supposed that, &c). 

10. When the infinitive, preceded by a subject-accusative, is fol- 
lowed by another accusative of the object, it is liable to give rise to an 
ambiguity, which may be avoided by converting the infinitive active 
into the passive. Thus the oracular Aio, te Romdnos vincere posse (I 
say, that you can conquer the Romans, or that they can conquer you), 
loses its ambiguity in Aio, te a Romanis vinci posse, or Aio, Romanos a 
te vinci posse. 

11. The infinitive esse is frequently left unexpressed, especiallv in 
the compound infinitives am'atum, amaturum, and amandum esse. (Cf. 
Lesson XLVIII. A. and B.) E. g. Lycurgus auctorem (sc. esse) le- 
gum Apollinem Delphicum fingit, Lycurgus makes Delphic Apollo the 
inventor of laws. 

12. The pronominal subject accusatives me, te, se, eum, nos, vos, eos, 
and the indefinite aliquem, are frequently omitted when they can be 
readily understood from the context. E. g. Ea, quae dicam, non de 
memetipso, sed de oratore dicere (= me dicere) putetis, I wish you to 

* Non triumphaturum. 

t Compare Lesson XLVIII. B. Rem. 1. 

% The verbs of this class thus used impersonally are comparatively few. 
The most conspicuous of them are nuntiatur, traditur, creditur, intelliyitur ; 
dicitur, narrator, fertur, proditur, memoratur, cernitur, vid'tur. 



LESSON 53.] EXERCISES 102, 103. 203 

tliink, that what I have to say I do not say -with reference to mvself, 
but with reference to the orator. Subdue cibvm unum diem atMetae, 
ferre non posse (= se non posse) clamablt, Deprive an athlete of his 
usual food for a single day, and he will declare that he cannot endure 
it. Negctio sane, si voles, pecuniam accepisse (= te accepisse), Deny 
then, if you will, that you have received money. Hos clam Xerxi 
remisit, simulans ex vlnculis publicis effugisse (= eos effugisse), These 
he sent back to Xerxes, under the pretence that they had escaped 
from prison. 

Exercise 102. 

Is it just that I should write (for me to write) ? — It is just. — It 
is not proper that you do this. — It is manifest that he has written the 
letter. — Is it probable (yerisimile) that he has sent us the book ? — 
It is not. probable. — Is it time that we should leave (abire) ? — It is 
not yet time to leave ; it is time to breakfast. — Is it right for me to 
go to the ball ? — It is not right. — Was it a crime to have a Roman 
citizen bound ? — It was a most audacious (audacissimum) crime. — Is 
it apparent that he was wrong (erracisse) ? — It is not apparent. — It 
is agreed (constat) that you have been wrong, and I right. — Did it be- 
hoove you to work '? — It did not behoove me to work, but it behooved 
you to write. — Is it necessary for us to learn Latin ? — It is neces- 
sary. — Is it lawful for us to go the theatre ? — It is now lawful. — Is 
it understood that he has arrived (advenisse) ? — It is understood that 
he arrived the day before yesterday. — It is understood that he will 
arrive (cidventurum esse) to-morrow. — Is it necessary for me to write ? 
— It is necessary, but -our letter should be brief. 

Exercise 103. 
Do you see that I am writing '? — I do see (it) . — Did he see that 
we were coming ? — He did not see it. — Did they hear that I was 
reading (me reading) ? — They did not hear you. — Does he hear 
that I have written to you ? — He does hear (it) . — Do you wonder 
that I should exult in your deeds *? — I do not wonder at all. — Does 
he feel that he is mortal (mortdlis) ? — He does feel it. — Does he 
hope that you will come ? — He hopes that I will remain at home. — 
Do you believe that he will read your book ? — I do not believe that 
he will read it. — Do you know that that is so (rem ita se habere) '? — 
I do not know it positively (non eerie), but I believe it to be so. — 
Are you glad that he has recovered his health ? — I am very glad (of 
it) . — I am sorry that he is ill. — Does he desire you to send him the 
book ? — He does not desire me to send the book, but the paper. — 
Do you wish me to go off (abire) into the country ? — X o, I wish you 
to remain in the city (in urbe) . — Does he command us to write ? — 
He does not command us to write, but to read the books which he has 
lent us. — Does he forbid you (retdtne te) to go to the theatre ? — He 
does not forbid me. — Do you command me to know myself? — I do 
command (you) . — Did he say that he was ill V — He said that he 
was thirsty. — Do they write that we have arrived ? — They do not 
write (it). — Do vou deny (negdsne) that I am riaht ? — I do not wish 
25* 



294 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 54. 

to deny it. — Do you confess that you were wrong ? — I deny that I 
was wrong. — Did he pretend to be asleep (se dormire) ? — He did 
pretend (it). — Did he promise to come (se venturum) ? — He could 
not promise (it). 



Lesson LIV. — PENSUM QUINQUAGESIMTJM 
QUARTUM. 

VERBS WITH THE INFINITIVE OR SUBJUNCTIVE. 

A. Many Latin verbs admit of a double construction, being some- 
times followed by the accusativus cum infinitlvo, and sometimes by the 
subjunctive, with one of the conjunctions ut (uti), ne, or quod, &c. 
With some of these the subjunctive is the rule and the infinitive the 
exception ; with others the reverse is true. The construction of these 
verbs is elucidated in the following rules : — 

B. Of the verbs signifying willingness, desire, or permis- 
sion, volo, nolo, malo, patior, and sino are commonly followed 
by the accusative with the infinitive, and sometimes only by ut ; 
but opto, concedo, and permitto may have either the infinitive or 
ut. Verbs of demanding or compelling (posco, postulo, jlagito, 
and cogo) are more frequently construed with ut. E. g. 

Volo, uti mihi respondeas (instead I wish you to reply to me. 

of Vdlo te mihi respondere). 

6pto, te hoc facere, or ut hoc fa- I desire you to do this. 

cias. 

Augustus cldminum se appelldri Augustus did not suffer it, even 

ne a liberis qui&em pdssus est. from his children, to be called 

master. 

Tribuni plebis postulant, ut sacro- The tribunes demand the privilege 

sancti habedntur. of being regarded sacrosanct. 

Senatus P. Lentulum, ut se abdi- The senate compelled Publius Len- 

cdret praetura, coegit. tulus to resign his praetorship. 

Remark. — Volo ut and malo ut may thus be employed instead of 
the infinitive ; but nolo ut is never said. The verb recusare, to refuse, 
(the opposite of concedo,} may have either the infinitive or ne. 

C. Verbs denoting a resolve or endeavor to accomplish or 
prevent anything, are followed by the subjunctive with ut or ne, 
when a new subject is introduced; but when the subject remains 
the same, they generally have the infinitive, and sometimes 
only ut or ne. 



LESSON 54.] THE INFINITIVE OR " UT " AND " NE.' 



295 



Verbs of this class are statuo, constituo, decerno, tento, paro, meditor, 
euro, nitor, contendo, and the expressions consilium capio, in animum 
duco or arihnum induco. But operam do, I endeavor ; id {hoc, Mud) 
ago, I aim at, strive; nihil antiqinus habeo (or duco), quam, I have 
(consider) nothing more important than ; and video, in the sense of 
euro, have commonly ut only. E. g. 



He resolves to write to you. 

He resolves that his son shall reply 
to you. 

Let those who wish to be called 
philosophers make up their minds 
to despise wealth, honors, and 
influence. 

It should be our study to employ 
the most familiar and (at the 
same time) the most suitable 
terms. 

Every animal loves itself, and as 
soon as it is born aims at the 
preservation of itself. 

It has been your endeavor, that 
your character should be like 
your appearance. 

We must see to it, that the liber- 
ality we indulge in be such, as 
will be a benefit to our friends 
and an injury to no one. 

D. Verbs of requesting, exhorting, persuading, and com- 
manding generally have the subjunctive with ut or ne ; but 
sometimes also the infinitive. 

The most common of these verbs are rogo, oro,precor, peto ; moneo, 
admoneo, commoneo, hortor, adhortor, cohortor, exhorior ; suadeo, per- 
suadeo, impello, perpello, ezcito, incilo, impero. So also nuntio, dlco, 
scribo, when they imply an order or command. E. g. 

Te et dro et hortor ut dfligens I beseech and exhort you to be 
sis. diligent. 

I advise you to consider every day 
that passion must be resisted. 



Statuit ad te litteras dare (or ut 
litteras ad te det). 

Statuit, ut fi'lius ejus tibi respon- 
deat . 

Qui sapientes appellari vdlunt, 
inducant animum divitias, ho- 
ndres, opes contemnere. 

Opera ddnda est, ut verbis utd- 
mur quam usitatissimis et quam 
maxime aptis. 

6mne animal se ipsum diligit, ac 
simul lit drtum est, id dgit, ut 
se conservet. 

Id studuisti, isti fdrmae ut mores 
conshniles forent. 

Videndum est lgitur, ut ea libera- 
litate utdmur, quae prosit ami- 
cis, ndceat nemini. 



Te lllud admoneo, ut quotidie 

meditere, resistendum esse ira- 

ciindiae. 
Moneo obtestorque, uti hds, qui 

tibi genere propinqui sunt, 

caros habeas. 
Senatus imperdvit decemviris, ut 

libros Sibyllinos inspicerent. 

Caesar Dolabellae dixit, ut ad me 



remind and 
cherish those 
vou by birth. 



conjure you to 
who are akin to 



The senate ordered the committee 
of ten to inspect the Sibylline 
records. 

Caesar told Dolabella to write to 



20G LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 54. 

scrtberet, ut in Italiam quam me (requesting me) to come to 
primum venirem. Italy as soon as possible. 

Themfetoclesj0ersuas#pdpulo,td Themistocles prevailed upon the 
peciinia piiblica classis centum people to construct a fleet of a 
navium aedificaretur. hundred ships at the expense of 

the public treasury. 

Remarks. 

1. With the verbs of this class, the longer construction with ut is 
preferred by the prosaists of the best period, but later writers have 
more frequently the briefer infinitive. 

2. Moneo, admoneo, and persuadeo, when they signify " to remind or 
to persuade that something is so" (and not -that something should be 
done") have the Ace. cam Inf. 

3. The verbs of commanding (i.e. imperare, mandare, praescribare, 
edlcere, decernere, &c.) that anything should be done, have generally 
ut according to the rule. The only exceptions are jubeo and 
which are commonly followed by the accusative with the infinitive 
(either active or passive). E. g. Jubeo te scfu\ r< , I command you to 
write. Vetateum attire, He tells him not to leave. Ubrum legijussit, 
He ordered the book to be read (i. e. that it should be read). Vetuit 
castra muniri, He prohibited that the camp should be fortified.* 

E. Verbs signifying to effect, cause, or bring about, an 
ularly followed by the subjunctive with »t or i . 

Such are facio, efficio, perficio, evinco, pervinco, impetro, assequor, 
and consequor. E. g. 

Facito ut Bciam. Lei me know. 

JSol efficit, ut 6vama.fidreant. The bud causes all things to flour- 
ish. 

Epamindndas perfecit ut auxilio Epaminondas caused the Laced»- 

sociorum Lacedaemdnii priva- monians to be deprived of the 

rentur. aid of the allies. 

A solo impctrat, u* alienas arbores He prevails upon the soil to grow 

dial. exotic trees. 

Qua in re nihil aliud assequeris, By which you will gain nothing 

nisi ut ab dmnibus audacia tiia else, except that your audacity 

co^noscatur. will be known by all. 

Remarks. 

1. The expression facere ut is sometimes a mere circumlocution 
for the same tense of the verb following it. E.g. Fecit, ut dunitlerct 
milttes, instead ofdimisit mitttes, He dismissed his men. 

2. Fac, in the sense of " imagine " or " suppose," and efficere, " to 



* Yet jubeo ut hoc facias (or without the ut: — jubeo tibi hoc facias) and veto 
ne hoc facias likewise occur in harmony with the general rule. 



LESSON 54.] '' UT " AFTER IMPERSONAL VERBS. 297 

make out " or " to prove," have the Aec. eum Inf.* But efficttur, 
" it follows," has sometimes ut ; as, Ex quo efficitur, ut. From which 
it follows that, &c. Facere, " to represent," is usually connected 
with the present participle or the infinitive passive. f 

F. Among the verbs regularly followed by the subjunctive 
with ut, are a number of impersonal expressions. They are, — 

1. Those signifying "it remains," "it follows"; as,restat, relinquitur, 
superesf, reliquum (proxunum, prope, extremwn, futurum) est, and sequi- 
tur. To these may be added acctdit ut* " add to this, that." 

2. Those signifying '-it happens," "it comes to pass"; as, accidit, 
inctdit, fit, fieri non potest, evenit, usu vt/tit, occurrit, contingit, est) "it is 
the case," and esto, "grant it, that." 

Restat, ut his respdndeam. It remains now for me to reply to 

these. 

Si hacc enuntiatio non vera est, If this proposition is not true, it 

sequitur, ut falsa sit. follows that it is false. 

Relinquitur, ut, si vi'ncimur in If we are vanquished in Spain, the 

Ilispania, quiescanius. only thing left us is to keep 

quiet. 

Forte evenit, ut in Privernate es- It so happened that we were on 

semus. the Privernan estate 1 . 

Fieri nun potest, ut quia Rtfmae It is not possible for any one to be 

sit, qmnn est Athenis. at Rome when he is at Athens. 

Quando fuit, ut, quod licet, nun "When was it the ease, that that 

liceret ? which is lawful was unlawful ? 

Remarks. 

1. Like reliquum est, ut, we sometimes find other expressions with 
nt. Such arc novum est, rarum, naturale, minim, singulare, usitatum, 
necesse est, ut ; verisimile, verum,falsum est, ut; aequum, rectum, utile 
i.-t. ut. But the majority of these are more commonly construed 
with the infinitive, (('t'. Lesson LIU />'. I.) 

2. Mos or moris est, and consuetudo est, " it is customary," "it usu- 
ally happens," are often followed by ut, like accidit, &c. 

3. Contingit not unfrequently occurs with the infinitive, sometimes 
even with the dative of the predicate. E.g. Mihi fratrique meo desti- 
nari praetoribus contXgit, I and my brother happened to be chosen 
praetors. 

G. Verba denoting willingness, unwillingness, or permission, 
and also those of asking, demanding, advising, and reminding, 

are sometimes followed by the subjunctive "WITHOUT ut or ue. 

Such arc volo, nolo, malo, prrmitto, licet ; oro, precor, quaeso, rogo, 
peto, postulo ; suadeo, censeo, moneo, admoneo, hortor. To these add 
euro, decerno, jubeo, mando; the imperatives foe, "see that," and 
cave, "beware," and the impersonal oportet and necesse est. 

* Compare page 290. t Compare page 290, note. 



298 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 54. 



Ve'lim fieri posset, lit, &c. 
Malo, te sapiens hdstis me'tuat, 
quam stiilti cives laudent. 

Sine, te exorem, mi pater. 

A te peto, me absentem dillgas 

atque defendas. 
Pdstulo, Appi, etiam atque etiam 

considered. 
Suddeo videas, tanquam si tiia 

res agatur. 
Herus me jussit Pamphylum hd- 

die observdn m. 
Fdc sciam (= facito ut sciam). 
Cdce credos. 
Fremont dnmes licet 
Philosdphiae servias oportet, ut 

tibi contingat vera libertas. 
Virtus voluptatis aditus inU rclur 

dot neecsse est. 



I wish it -were possible that, &c. 

I prefer an intelligent enemy fear- 
ing you to stupid citizens prais- 
ing you. 

Allow me to entreat you, my 
father. 

I ask of you to love and to defend 
me in my absence. 

I beseech you, Appius, to consider 
again and again. 

I advise you to look, as if your own 
interests -were at stake. 

My master commanded to -watch 
Pamphylus to-day. 

Pray let me know (inform me). 

Do not beliei «•. 

Every one is allowed to murmur. 

You should serve philosophy in 
order to acquire true liberty. 

Virtue necessarily prevents the ac- 
cess of pleasure. 



IL Verba signifying joy, sorrow, surprise, or wonder are 
followed cither by the accusative with the inlinhivc, or by quod 
(•• that" or "because") with the indicative or subjunctive. 

Such verbs are gaudeo, detector, doleo, succt nst o, angor, poentiet ; 
rriiror, 
E. e. 



admlror, glorior, gratulor, gratlas ago, queror, indignor, Sec. 



Gaudeo, quod te interpeUavi. 

Dolebam, quod consdrtem gloridsi 

laboris amiseram. 
Mirdri se aiebat, quod n6n rideret 

hanispex. 

Tibi ago f/r<iii<is. quod me dmni 

molestia lib( ras. 
Grdtulor tibi, quod ex provi'ncia 

salvum te ad trios recepisti. 

Quereris super hoc etiam, quod 
expectata tibi non mittam car- 
mina. 



I am glad that I have interrupted 

you. 
I was sorry to have lost the sharer 

of the glorious enterprise. 

J Ic was accustomed to express his 
surprise, that the soothsayer did 
not laugh. 

1 thank you for liberating me from 
inconvenience of every kind. 

I congratulate you for having safe- 
ly returned from the province to 
your friends. 

You also complain of this, that I 
do not send you the expected 
poems. 



REMARKS. 

1. Quod is chiefly employed in connection -with past tenses. Quod 
with the indicative denotes a, fact, and with the subjunctive a supposi- 
tion or the opinion of another. 



LESSON 54.] THE CONSTRUCTION OF " QUOD." 299 

2. Quod is also frequently employed instead of the Aec. cum Inf. 
after substantives, and after expressions like " it is pleasant " or " un- 
pleasant," " it pleases " or " displeases," magnum est, accedit (= " add 
to this"), &c. It is thus frequently preceded by one of the pronouns 
hoc, id, Mud, and is often equivalent to the English " the fact or cir- 
cumstance that." E. g. Augebat iras, quod soli Judaei non cessissent, 
The fact (or circumstance) that the Jews alone had not surrendered, 
augmented the indignation. Inter causas malorum nostrorum est, quod 
virhnus ad exempla, Among the causes of our miseries is the fact that 
we are living after the examples of others. Quod victor victis pe- 
percit, magnum est, That the conqueror spared the conquered is great. 
In Caesare mitis est clemensque natura. Accedit, quod mirifce ingeniis 
excellen/ibus delectatur, Caesar is of a gentle and mild nature. Add to 
this, that (in addition to this) he takes the greatest delight in intel- 
lectual pre-ftninence. 

3. Quod is always put, instead of the Ace. cum Inf. or id, in explan- 
atory or periphrastic clauses, which (generally) refer to an oblique case 
of the demonstratives hoc, id, ilhid, or istud. E.g. Hoc uno prae- 
stamus vet maxime feris, quod colloquimur inter nos, et quod exprx- 
mere dicendo sensa possumus, We excel the brutes chiefly in this, 
that we converse with each other, and are able to express our sensa- 
tions in language. Phot-ion non in eo solum offenderat, quod patriae 
male consult rat, sed etiam quod amicitiae fidem non praestiterat, Pho- 
cion had not only given offence by the fact that he had mismanaged 
the interests of his country, but also because he had exhibited a want 
of faith in friendship. 

4. Quod stands also in expressions like aelele, quod, or adde hue, 
quod (add to this that, besides), and after facere in connection with 
an adverb like bene, male, &c. E.g. Bene facis, quod me mones, You 
do well to remind me. llumaniter fecit, quod ad me venit, lie acted 
humanely by coming to me. 

5. Quod, stands with several different senses in constructions like 
the following: — 

a.) At the beginning of a sentence, in the sense of " as to," " with 
respect to." E.g. Quod scribis ie velle scire, qui sit reipublicae status, 
summa dissentio est, As regards your expressing a desire to know the 
state of the republic, (I have to report) the greatest dissension. Quod 
mild de nostra s/u/u eratularis, minime miramur te luo opere laetdri, As 
to your congratulating me on my present condition, I am not at all 
surprised that you rejoice in your own work. 

b.) In the sense of "as far as." E. g. Tu, quod poteris, ut adhuc 
fecisti, nos consiliis jurdbis, Do you assist us, as few as you can, and as 
you have done heretofore, with your advice and influence. Epicurus 
se unus, quod scieim, sapientem profiteri est eiusus, Epicurus is the 
only one, as Jar as I know, who has dared to profess himself a sage. 

c.) Instead of ex quo or quum, "since." E.g. Tertius dies est, quod 
audh'i, &c, It is now three days since I have heard, &c. To these may 
be added tantum quod, " scarcely." E. g. Tantum quod ex Arpinati 
vencram, quum mihi litterae a te reeldltae sunt, I had but just returned 
from Arpinum, when a letter from you was handed to me. 



300 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 5J. 

Exercise 104. 

Do you wish me to go to the theatre -with you ? — I do not wish 
you, but your brother, to go with me. — Do you desire me to write to 
your father ? — I do wish that you would write to him. — Do you 
allow (sinisne) me to go to the ball? — I do not allow you to go 
there. — Does he suffer (pcititur) letters to be written by us ? — lie 
does not suffer it. — Did they compel you to resign your office (?nu- 
nere) ? — They were not able to compel me (me cogere). — Did he 
urge (fiagitavitne) you to go out with him ? — He did urge me. — 
Does he refuse to come to us ? — He does refuse. — Have you deter- 
mined to learn Latin ? — I have not determined (to do so). — Has 
he resolved (decrevitne) to study French ? — He has resolved (to do 
so). — What is he aiming at (Quid dgit) ? — He is exerting himself 
(Id agit ut) to commit this book to memory. — Do you endeavor 
(studesne) to become diligent ? — I do strive to be diligent and good. 

— Must we see to it, that we love our neighbor ? — We must see to 
it by all means (quam maxime) . 

Exercise 105. 

Do you ask me to remain at home ? — No ; on the contrary, I be- 
seech and exhort you to go out. — Did he exhort you to go into the 
country? — No, he exhorted me to write a letter. — Do you advise 
me to resist passion (ut iracundiae resistarn). — I do advise you. — I 
remind and conjure you to cherish those who love you. — Did he re- 
mind you that that was so (rem ita se habuisse) ? — He reminded and 
persuaded me (mild) that that was really (re vera) so. — Did they 
order any one to be killed ? — They ordered the soldier to be killed. 

— Does he prohibit (vetatne) the reading of the book? — He does, on 
the contrary, order it to be read. — Did your father write you to come 
home ? — He, on the contrary, wrote me to remain in the country. — 
Did you tell your servant to bring you the book ? — I did tell him. — 
Does your master command you to attend to your studies ? — He does 
command me. — Did you persuade him to read my book ? — I could 
not persuade him. — Can it be that I am wrong ? — It is not possible 
that you are wrong. — When was it the case that I was wrong ? — 
Allow me to entreat you to write. — Pray let me know when you are 
coming. — Do not believe that he is your friend. — Are you glad that 
I have written to your friend ? — I am delighted (detector) that you 
have done it. — Are you sorry that you have lost your book ? — I 
am very sorry that I have lost it. — Is he surprised that I did not 
bring the doctor ? — He is surprised that he does not come. — Do 
you thank me for having liberated you from trouble (molestid) ? — I 
do thank you with all my heart (ioto pectore) . — Do you congratulate 
me for having recovered ? — I do congratulate you. — Why does his 
master complain ? — He complains of this, that he is negligent and 
idle. 



LESSON 55.] IMPERSONAL VERBS. 301" 



Lesson LV. — pensum QUINQUAGesimum 

QUINTUM. 

OE IMPERSONAL VERBS. 

A. Impersonal verbs are those which are used in the third 
person singular only, and without reference to any definite sub- 
ject. They are in English commonly introduced by the pro- 
noun it. E. g. Tonat, it thunders ; pluit, it rains ; oportet, it 
behooves. 

Remarks. 

1. Impersonal verbs thus occur in all the conjugations, and in all 
the moods and tenses of complete verbs. E. g. 1. Constat, it is mani- 
fest ; 2. nocet, it is hurtful; 3. accldit, it happens; 4. convenit, it is 
agreed upon. — Constdre, to be manifest ; tonuit, it thundered ; ?ioceat, 
let it be hurtful, &c. 

2. The majority of the impersonal verbs of the Latin language are 
also used personally, but generally with a modified or different signi- 
fication. Many again admit a subject of the neuter gender, such as 
an infinitive (either with or without a subject accusative) or a clause 
used substantively, and sometimes a pronoun of the neuter gender. 
(Cf. Lesson LII. A. 1 ; LIU. B.) 

3. Impersonal verbs generally want the imperative, except licet, 
which has liceto (let it be lawful). The rest employ the present 
subjunctive imperatively ; as, Tonet, Let it thunder ! Pudeat te, Be 
ashamed of yourself ! 

4. The majority want also the participles, gerunds, and gerundives. 
The only exceptions are the following, of which some, however, have 
acquired the force of adjectives: — decern, becoming; libens, willing; 
licens, free, bold; poenitens, penitent; — liciturus, poeniturus % puditd- 
rus, about to be lawful, to repent, to be ashamed ; — pigendus, pudcn- 
dw, poenitendus, to be regretted, ashamed of, repented of. To these 
add the gerunds poenitendi, pudendo, ad pigendum. 

B. Impersonal verbs may be divided into several 
classes. They are : — 

I. Those serving to designate the ordinary phenomena of na- 
ture, or the state of the weather. As, — 



Present. 


Perfect.* 


Infinitive. 




Dlluculat, 


diluculavit, 


diluculare, 


it daicns. 


Fulgurat, 


. fulguravit, 


fulgurare, 


it lightens. 


Fulmlnat, 


fulminavit, 


fulminare, 


it thunders. 


Gelat, 


gelavit, 


gelare, 


it freezes. 


Grandinat, 


grandinavit, 


grandinare, 


it hails. 



* Of some of these verbs the second root is not used. 
26 



302 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 55. 



Peffect. 
j lapidavit, 
I lapidatum est, 

lux it, 
illuxit, 

ninxit, 



5 pluvit, > 
(pluit, [ 

regclavit, 

roravit, 

toniiit, 

vesperavit, 

advesperavit, 



it rains stones. 



it grows light. 

it snows. 

it grows dark. 

it rains. 

it thaws. 

it <l< ws, dew falls, 

it thunders. 

it becomes evening. 



Present. 

Lapidat, 

Lucescit, 

Luciscit, 

Illucescit, 

Ningit, 

Noetescit, 

Pluit, 

Regelat, 

Rorat, 

Tonat, 

Vesperascit, 

Advesperascit, 

Remark. — These verbs sometimes (though rarely) occur in con- 
nection with a, personal subject. E. g. Jupiter tonat <t fulgurat. Dies 
or caelum vesperascit. Lapides pluunt. Lapidibus pluit Sanguinem 
pluit, &c. But this use is chiefly confined to the third person, and 
rather the exception than the rule. It is consequently unnecessary 
to supply a personal subject (e. g. Jupiter, Coelum, &c.) to account 
for the ordinary construction of these verbs. 

II. The following verbs, denoting an affection of the mind, an 
obligation, or permission : — 
Perfect. 
( miseruit (rarely) 
-- mlseritum est, 
( mlsertum est, 



INFINITIVE. 

lapidure, 

lucescere, 
luciscere, 
illucescere, 
ningere, 

noctescere, 

pluere, 

regelare, 

rorare, 
tonare, 
vesperare, ) 

advesperare, ) 



Present. 
Mlscret (me), 



Pi get (me), 
Poenitet (me), 

Pudet (me), 

Taedet (me), 
Oportet (me), 
Libet (lubct), 

Licet (mihi), 

Decet (me), 
Dedeeet (me), 
Li(j[uet (mihi), 



J piguil or, 1 
( plgitum est. j 
poenituit, 

( puduit, or \ 
( puditum est, \ 
j taeduit (rare///), ) 
| pertaesum est, | 

oportuit, 
( libuit, or > 
( libitum est, ) 
< liciiit, or \ 
\ licitum est, j 

decuit, 

dedecuit, 

licuit, 



Infinitive. 

_v w _ ( if mores mo to nitn. 
- miserere, - , , I Jj 

( 1 nave pity. 



plgere, it chagrins, iris. 

poemtere, it r< pt nts me, I re- 
pent. 

< it sham ps nte, I am 
( ashamed. 

it wearies, disgusts. 

it behooves. 



pudcrc, 

taedere, 

oportcre, 

libere, 



llcere, 

decere, 

dedecere, 

liquere, 

R F.MARKS. 



it pleases. 

if is lawful, allowed. 

it becomes, 
it misbecomes, 
it is manifest. 



1. The subject of the emotion denoted by some of the foregoing- 
verbs is put in the accusative ; as, Miseret me, te, ilium, It moves \nv, 



LESSON 55.] 



IMPERSONAL VERBS. 



303 



you, him, to pity (i.e. I pity, you pity, &c). Pudet nos,vos,illos, 
We, you, they are ashamed. So also oportet me, ie, ilium; decet (de- 
decei) nos, vos, &c. But libet and licet are followed by the dative 
(jnilii, tibi, &c.). 

2. The verbs libet, licet, decet, dedecet, and liquet sometimes occur 
in the third person plural, and assume a personal subject. 

III. The third person singular of a number of complete verbs, 
which is frequently employed impersonally, but in a sense more 
or less different from the ordinary signification of these verbs. 
Thus : — 



Present. 


Perfect. 


Infinitive. 




Accidit, 


accidit, 


accidere, ") 




Contingit, 


contigit, 


contingere, ! 


it happens, occurs, 


Evenit, 


evenit, 


cvenire, j 


comes to pass. 


Fit, 


factum est, 


fieri, J 




Attinet, 


attlnuit, 


attinere, ) 


it belongs to, per- 


Pert I net, 


pertinuit, 


pertmere, \ 


tains. 


Accedit, 


accessit, 


accedere, 


there is to be added. 


Conducit, 


conduxit, 


conducere, 


it conduces. 


Constat, 


constitit, 


constare, 


it is evidt nt. 


Convenit, 


convenit, 


convenire, 


it is agreed on. 


Debet, 


dcbuit, 


debere, 


it ought. 


Displicet, 


( (lisplicuit, 

( (lisplieitumest, 


f- displlcere, 


it displeases. 


Dolet, 


doluit, 


dole re, 


it pains (grieves). 


Est (= licet), 


fiiit, 


esse, 


U is lawful, one mag. 


Expedit, 


expedivit, 


expcdlre, 7 


it is expedit nt, ad- 


Prodest, 


] not nit, 


prodesse, ) 


vantageous. 


Fallit (mo), 


fefellit (me), 


fallere, \ 




Fugit (me), 


fugit (me), 


fugere, > 


it escapes my notice. 


Praeterit (me), 


praeteriit (me 


), praeterire, ) 




Incipit, 


mcepit, 


mcipere, 


it begins. 


Interest, 


interfuit, 


interesse, 7 




Refert, 


re tul it, 


rcferre, ) 


it concerns. 


Juvat, 
Delectat, 


juvit, 
delectavit, 


juvare, \ 

deleetare, ) 


it delights. 


Nocet, 
Obest, 


nocuit, 
obfuit, 


nocere, ) 
obesse, £ 


it hurts. 


Patet, 


pat nit, 


patere, 


it is clear. 


Placet, 


j pliicuit, 7 
I placitum est, £ 


plaecre, 


it pleases. 


Praestat, 


pracstitit, 


praestare, 


it is preferable, bet- 
ter, 
it remains. 


Restat, 


restitit, 


restare, 


Solet, 


soli turn est, 


sol ere, 7 


it is usual. 


Assolet, 


assolitum est, 


assolere, j 


Stat, 


stetit, 


stare, 


it is resolved. 


Succurrit, 


succurrit, 


succurrere, 


it suggests itself. 



30-4 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 55. 

Present. Perfect. Infinitive. 

Sufricit, suffecit, sufficere, it suffices. 

Suppetit, suppetivit, suppetere, there is on hand (left). 

Vacat, vacavit, vacare, there is leisure ; it pleases. 

Remark. — The subject of these A'erbs thus used impersonally can 
only be an infinitive (either with or without a subject accusative) or 
an entire clause, but sometimes also the nominative of a neuter pro- 
noun. (Cf. Lessons L1L, LIIL, LIV.) 

IV. The third person singular passive, especially of intran- 
sitive verbs denoting motion, and which otherwise do not admit 
of the passive voice. E. g. 

Curritur, there is running. Dlcitur. it is said. 

Itur, there is going. Trad it ur. it is related. 

Aditur, there is approaching. Scribitur, it is writtt 

Ventum est, some one has come. Pugnatur, then is fighting. 
Clamatur, there is calling. itur, there is sinning. 

Favetur, there is favoring. Persuadetur, th re is persuading. 

Fletur, then is weeping. Certatur, it is contended. 

Ridetur, there is laughing. Sentitur, it is pera wed. 
Bibitur, there is drinking. 

Remarks. 

1. The agent, by which the activity denoted by these verbs is exer- 
cised, is cither left indefinite, or expressed by the ablative with a or 
ah (e. g. ab aliquo, a rm . U . nobis, ab hominibus, 6cc). It is most fre- 
quently to he inferred from the context. Tims: Ubi eo ventum est 
(sc. ab iis), When they had come there. His persuaderi non proterat 
(sc. ab aliquo), They could not be persuaded (by any one). Curri- 
tur ad praetorium (sc. a mUitibus), There is a rush towards the gen- 
eral's tent (on the pari of the soldiers). Pugnatur omnibus locis, 
There is a general battle. 

2. Among the verbs employed impersonally we must include the 
neuter of the future passive participle with est,erat, full, erit, &c; as, 
amandum est, there must be loving (some one must love, it is neces- 
sary to love) : scribendum fuit, it was necessary to write ; currendum 
erit, it will be necessary to run. That this construction requires the 
dative of the agent (e. 2. allcui, mihi, tibi, hominibus, &c.) is already 
known from Lesson XXV. 

Does it thunder? Toiuitne ? 

It does thunder and lighten. Ita est. tdnat atque fulgurat. 

Does it not hail ? Ndnne grandinat ? 

It does hail. Grandinat vera. 

Does it rain ? Niiui pluit ? 

It does not rain ; it snows. Xon pluit ; ninjiit. 

Did it rain or snow ? tJtrum phlvit an ninxit ? 

It rained very hard. Phlvit vehementer. 

Is it growing light or dark ? Lucescitne an advespcrascit ? 



LESSON 55.] PHRASES AND EXERCISES. 



305 



It is growing dark. 

Is it hailing out of doors ? 

It is hailing hard. 

Did it freeze last night ? 

It did not freeze. 

Is it foggy ? 

It is (foggy). 

Does the sun shine ? 

It does shine. 

AVe have (enjoy) sunshine. 

The sun does not shine. 

The sun is in (is blinding) my 

eyes. 



Yesperascit. 

Ecquid fdris grandinat ? 
Sic est, valde grandinat. 
Gelavitne ndcte proxima? 
Non gelavit. 

Estne coelum nebulosum ? 
Est (nebulosum). 
Lucetne sol ? 
Lucet. 

Utimur solis liimine. 
Sol non lucet. 
Solis liimine non utimur. 
Sol mini dculos ndcet. 
Lumen solis mini oculorum liciem 
praestringit. 



The weather. 




TempestaSj alls, f. ; coelum, i, n. 


Good, fine, bad, 


very bad 


Tempestaa bona, serena, mala, de- 


weather. 




terrhna. 


The face, countenance. 


Faeies, ei, f. ; os, oris, m.; vultus, 






us, m. 


The eyes ; the ey 


esight 


Oculi, drum, m. ; acies (ei,/.) ocu- 
lorum. 


The thunder. 




Tonitrus, us, m. 


The thunderbolt. 




Fulmen, inis, n. 


The snow. 




Nix, gen. nivis,/!, or pi. nives. 


The hail. 




Grando, inis,/.' 


The fog, mist. 




Nebula, ae,/ 


The rain. 




Pluvia, ae, /.; imber, ris, m.,or pi. 
imbres. 


The sunshine. 




Lumen solis, or simply sol, sol cali- 
dus. 


The parasol. 




Umbclla, ae, /. 


Foggy. 




Nebulosus, a, um. 


Hard, violently. 




Valde, vehementer (adv.*). 


To have (use, enj 


oy). 


Utor, uti, usus sum (aliqua re, 
ALIQUO). 


To shine. 




Luceo, ere, luxi, . 


To shine brightly. 




f Fulgeo, ere, fulsi, . 

^ Splendeo, ere, ui, . 


The wind. 




Ventus, i, m. 


To blow. 




Flo, are, avi, atum. 


To cease (rest). 




Quiesco, ere, evi, etum. 


To rise. 




Orior, iri, ortus sum. 


Windy. 




Ventosus, a, um. 


Stormy. 




Nimbosus, a, um; ])roccllosus, a, um. 


Srong, vehement. 




Veheniens, lis, adj. 


Is it windy ? Does 


the wind 


f Estne tempestaa ventdsa? 


blow ? 

T 


2G* 


( FUitne ^ entus V 



306 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 55. 



It is windy. The wind does 

blow. 
Has the wind risen ? 
No, it has ceased. 
It is not stormy. 

It is very windy. 

The spring. 
The autumn. 

In the spring, summer, au- 
tumn, winter. 

To travel. 



To ride in a carriage. 

To ride on horseback. 

To ride up, away, around. 
To go (come, travel) on 

foot. 
To travel (make a tour) on 

foot. 

To like, take pleasure in. 

Do you like riding in a car- 
riage i 

No, I prefer riding on horse- 
back. 

Where did our friend ride to 
(on horseback) ? 

He has ridden into the forest. 

It is good (pleasant), bad (un- 
pleasant') to da anything. 

Is it pleasant to go on foot. 

It is very pleasant. 
Did he go on foot or in a car- 
riage ? 
No, he went on horseback. 



( Est tempestas ventosa. 
\ Flat vero ventus. 

Ortiisne est ventus ? 

tmmo vero quievit. 

Coelum non est procellosum. 
J Tempestas valde ventosa est. 
( Valde flat ventus. 

Ver, gen. veris, n. 

Auctumnus, i, m. 

Vere, aestate, auctumno, hieme. 

Iter, or itinera facere ; peregrinari 
(abroad) . 
( Vehor, vehi, vectus sum. 
( Invehi (ctjrru, in rheda). 
( Vehi (invehi) equo. 
\ Equito, are, avi, atum. 

Advehi, abvehi, circumvehi. 

Pedlbus or pedes* Ire (venire, iter 
facere). 

Iter pedestre facere or conficere. 

Delector, dri, dtus sum (aliquid 

facere). 
Delectarisne in vehi ciirru (in 

rheda) ? 
Non vero ; equo vehi malo. 

Quo equitavit amicus ndster ? 

Equitavit in silvam. 

Jucundum, injucundum est aliquid 

facere. 

Estne jucundum ire pedibus (pe- 
. des) ? 

Est profecto perjucundum. 
Utrum ivit pedibus an curru vec- 
tus est ? 
tmmo vectus est equo. 



Exercise 106. 

Are you going out to-day ? — I never go out when it is raining. — 
Did it rain yesterday ? — It did not rain. — Has it snowed ? — It has 
snowed. — Why do you not go to the market '? — I do not go there, 
because it snows. — Do you wish (to have) an umbrella ? — If (si) 



* Pedes, -itis, ?«., one who goes on foot. 



LESSON 55.] EXERCISES 106, 107. 307 

you have one. — Will you lend me an umbrella ? — I am not un- 
willing to lend you one-. — What sort of weather is it ? — It thun- 
ders and lightens. — Does the sun shine ? — The sun does not 
shine; it is foggy. — Do you hear the thunder? — I do not hear it. 

— How long (quam diu) did you hear the thunder ? — I heard it 
until (usque ad) four o'clock in the morning. — Is it fine weather 
now ? — It is not ; the wind blows hard, and it thunders much. — 
Does it rain ? — It does rain very fast. — Do you not go into the 
country ? — How (quo modo) can I go into the country ? do you not 
see how (quam vehementer) it lightens ? — Does it snow ? — It does 
not snow, but it hails. — Did it hail yesterday ? — It did not hail, but 
it thundered very much. — Have you a parasol ? — I have one. — 
Will you lend it to me ? — I will lend it to you. — Have we sunshine ? 

— We have ; the sun is in my eyes. — Is it fine weather ? — It is very 
bad weather; it is dark. — We have no sunshine. — How is the 
weather to-day ? — The weather is very bad. — Is it windy ? — It is 
very windy. — Was it stormy yesterday ? — It was stormy. — Why 
did you not go into the country ? — I did not go because it was stormy. 

— Do you go to the marked this morning ? — I intend to go there, if 
it is not (si non est) stormy. — Do you intend to breakfast with me 
this morning ? — I intend breakfasting with you, if (si) I am hungry. 

Exercise 107. 

Does the Pole intend to drink some of this wine? — He does intend 
to drink some of it, if he is thirsty. — Do you like to go on foot when 
you are travelling (iter faciens) V — I do not like to travel on foot. — 
Did you travel to Italy (in Italiain) on foot ? — I did not go on foot, 
because the roads (viae) were too bad (nimis lutulentae). — Do you 
like to ride in a carriage ? — I like to ride on horseback. — Has your 
cousin ever gone on horseback ? — He has never gone on horseback. 

— Did you ride on horseback the day before yesterday ? — I rode on 
horseback to-day. — Does your brother ride on horseback as often as 
you ? — He rides oftener than I. — Hast thou sometimes ridden on 
horseback ? — I have never ridden on horseback. — Will you go (in 
a carriage) into the country to-day ? — I will ride thither. — Do you 
like travelling ? — I do not like (it). — Does your father like travel- 
ling in the winter ? -— He does not like travelling (to travel) in the 
winter; he likes travelling in the spring and summer. — Is it good 
travelling (pleasant to travel) in the spring? — It is good travelling 
in the spring and autumn, but it is bad travelling in the winter and 
in the summer. — Have you sometimes travelled in the winter ? — I 
have often travelled both in the winter and in the summer. — Does 
your brother travel often ? — He travels no longer ; but he formerly 
(quondam) travelled much. — When do you like to ride on horseback ? 

— I like riding on horseback in the morning, after breakfast. — Is it 
good travelling in the country? — It is good travelling there. — 
Whither are they running ( Quorsum curritur) ? — They are run- 
ning to the forum. — Have they (has any one) come (ventumne es\) 
into the house ? — They have not yet come. — Was there laughii g 



308 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 56. 

(ridebaturne) in the theatre ? — There was laughing and shouting 
(clamabdtur) there. — Is it said that he has arrived (eum advenisse) ? 

— No, it is said that has remained in the country. — Is it pleasant 
to go on foot to-day ? — It is not pleasant. — When did the wind rise? 

— It rose at four o'clock this inornins:. 



Lesson LVL — pexsum quixquagesimum 

SEXTUM. 

CONSTRUCTION OF NAMES OF PLACES. 

A. In answer to the question Wldther ? the name 
of the place is put in the Accusative with in or ad; but 
before the proper names of cities, these prepositions are 
commonly omitted. E. g. 

In hortos, in theatrum, ad locum To go into the garden, into the 

publicum, ad urbem ire. theatre, to the public square, to- 
wards the city. 

In Italiam, in Germaniam, in To set out for Italy, for Germany, 

Americam, Lesbum proficisci. for America, for Lesbus. 

Roman, Lutctiam, Londinum, To be on one's way to Rome, to 

Carthiiginem, Athenas conten- Paris, London, Carthage, Athens. 

dere. 

B. Rule. — In answer to the question Where? "the 
name of the place is put in the Ablative with in; but 
if the place is a city, the name, when of the first or 
second declension and singular number, stands in the 
Genitive ; and when of the third declension or plural 
number, in the Ablative without a preposition. E. g. 

In hdrtis, in thedtro, in loco pu- To be in the garden, in the theatre, 

blico, in urbe esse. in the public square, in the city. 

In Italia, in Germania, in Africa To stay in Italy, in Germany, in 

demorari. Africa. 

Rdmae, Lutetiae, Londini, Bero- To live at Rome, in Paris, London, 

lini, Lesbi vivere. Berlin, on Lesbus. 

Athenis, Syraciisis, Carthagine, To be born at Athens, in Syracuse, 

Neapoli natum esse. Carthage, Naples. 

C. In answer to the question Whence ? the name of 
the place is put in the Ablative with ex or ab, but be- 
fore the proper names of cities the preposition is com- 
n only omitted. E. g. 



LESSON 56.] NAMES OF PLACES. 309 

Ex hdrtis, ex theatro, a loco pii- To come out of the garden, out 

blico, ab lirbe venire. of the theatre, from the public 

square, from the city. 

Ex Italia, ex Asia, ab Africa fii- To flee out of Italy, out of Asia, 

gere. from Africa. 

Roma, Lutetia, Athenis, Cartha- To be banished from Rome, Paris, 

gine expulsum esse. Athens, Carthage. 

Remarks. 

1 . The names of cities sometimes occur -with the prepositions in, ex, 
or ab, and the names of countries without them.* E. g. Ab Epheso 
in Sgriam profectus, Having started from Ephesus for Syria. Ab 
Epidauro Piraeum advectus, Conveyed from Epidaurus into the Pi- 
raeus. But this is an exception to the general rule. 

2. The preposition ad may stand before names of cities only in the 
sense of "towards" or "in the vicinity of." E. g. Iter dirigere ad 
Mutinam, To direct one's course towards Modena. Tres viae sunt ad 
Mutinam, There are three roads to Modena. Pugna ad TrebXam, The 
battle of (= near) Trevi. Istos Ubros legit ad Misenum, He read 
these books near Misenum. 

3. The names of countries rarely occur in the genitive, instead of 
in the ablative with in. E. g. Graeciae, Lucdniae = in Graecia, in 
Lucania. Romac Numidiaeque = et Romae et in Numidia. 

4. If the name of the city has an adjective or an appositum 
connected with it, then the Romans put 

a.) In answer to the question Whither? and Whence ? the accusa- 
tive and ablative with and without the usual prepositions. E. g. 
Doctas Athenas or ad doctas Athenas, To learned Athens. (In) Car- 
thaginem Novam, To New Carthage. Ipsa Samo, From Samos itself. 
De vitiferd Vienna, From vine-bearing Yienne. 

b.) In answer to the question Where ? the ablative with in, where 
the genitive would otherwise be required, and the ablative without in 
in all other cases. E. g. In ipsa Alexandria, In Alexandria itself. In 
Alba Helvia. f But without in : — Athenis tuis, In your Athens. 
CarthagXne Nova, in New Carthage. 

c.) When one of the words oppidum, urbs, locus, &c. stands in ap- 
position with the proper name of the town, it is commonly preceded 
by the preposition ; but in answer to the question Where f these 

* The in, however, is regularly omitted in connections like the following: — 
Terra marlque, " by land and by sea." and before loco and locis, when these 
words occur in the sense of " state " or " situation " ; as, hoc loco, multis locis, 
meliore loco, &c. So likewise before toto or totd, " the entire or whole " ; as 
totd urbe, toto mari, totis campis, and never in iota, &c. Hoc libro, primo libro, 
&c. are said when the entire book is meant; but in hoc (prlmo, &c.) libro, when 
a' particular passage is referred to. 

t And never Albae Helvia e ; rather without in, simply Alba Helvia like the 
Alba Longd of Virg. Aen. VI. v. 766. Hence also In Novo Ebordco, or simply 
Novo Eboraco, and not Novi Eboraci, New York, which is as unusual as the 
Teani Apicli of Cic. pro Cluent. 9. 



310 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 56. 

words are always in the Ablative. E. g. Tarquinios, in urbem Etru- 
riae florentissimam, To Tarquinii, the most nourishing city of Etruria. 
Neapoli, in celeberrimo oppic/o, At Naples, a most celebrated town. 
But Antiochiae natus est, celebri quondam urbe et copiosa, He was born 
at Antioch, a city formerly celebrated and wealthy. 

d.) If the word urbs or oppidum precedes the name of the city, the 
preposition is always put, and the proper name stands as apposition in 
the same case. E. g. Ad urbem Romam ex oppido Thermis, in urbe 
Roma (not Romae), in oppido Adrumeto (not Adrumeti). 

5. The poets frequently answer the inquiry Whither? by the sim- 
ple accusative, where in prose a preposition is required. E. g. Ttaliam 
Lavlnaque venit litora (sc. in), He came to Italy and the Lavinian 
coast. Speluncam eandem (sc. in) deveniunt, They come into the 
same cave. Verba refers aures (= ad aures) non pervenientia nostras, 
You utter words which do not reach our ears. 

So likewise the question Where ? by the ablative without in. E. g. 
Silvisque agrisque viisque corpora foeda jacent, The foul bodies lie 
scattered through the woods, and in the fields and on the ways. This 
poetical license is imitated by the prose writers of the silver age, who 
frequently omit the in ; as, medio agro, Gabind via, regione for in re- 
gione, &c. 

6. The construction of the names of cities is adopted, — 

a.) By the names of the smaller islands, of which some have cities 
of the same name. E. g. Rhodi, Cypri, Corcyrae, in Rhodes, Cyprus, 
Corcyra. Rhodum, Cyprum, Corcyram, to Rhodes, Cyprus, Corcyra. 
Thus also, Chersonesum redire, To return into the Chersonesus. Cher- 
sonesi habitdre, To live in the Chersonesus. To these add Delos, 
Samos, Lesbos, and Ithaca. But the larger islands (e. g. Britannia, 
Creta, Euboea, Sardinia, and Sicilia) are commonly construed like 
names of countries. 

b.) By domus and rus, on the construction of which see page 132 
and page 157. 

c.) By the words humus, bellum and militia, which, in answer to the 
question Where ? stand in the genitive. Thus, humi, on the ground.* 
But belli and militiae (in war, in the field) occur thus only in connec- 
tion with domi ; e. g. belli domique, in war and at home; domi mili- 
tiaeque, at home and in the field ; nee belli nee domi, neither in the 
field nor at home. To these add vicimae for in vicinia, in the neigh- 
borhood ; foras and foris, out of doors ; the last of which, however, 
have assumed the character of adverbs. 

Almost, nearly. Fere, ferme; prope, propemodum. 

(Adverbs.) 
About. Circiter, circa ; ferme. 

Scarcely, hardly. Vix, paene. (Adverbs.) 

* But in connection with a verb of motion, in humum, never hiimum, but 
rather humi instead of in humum. Sumo occurs in the sense of from the 
ground. So also in bellum, ex hello. 



LESSON 56.] PHRASES AND EXERCISES. 



311 



How old are }'ou (What is your 
age) V 

I am ten years old. 

How old is your brother ? 

He is six years old. 

He is scarcely two years old. 

To be born. . 
The year. 
Older, younger. 
The oldest, youngest. 

Are you older than your sister ? 

Yes, I am much older. 
How old are you ? 

I am almost twenty years old. 

How old is your sister ? 

She is about twelve years old. 

She is scarcely eight years old. 4 

Of what age would you take me 

to be ? 
You seem to be about thirty. 

To seem, appear. 
The age (of life). 

I am over twenty years old (older \ 
than twenty years). 

He is under thirty-three years 
old (younger than thirty-three < 
years). I 

To understand, comprehend, J 
seize. j 



Quotum annum agis ? 

Qudt annos habes ? 

Decimum annum ago. 

Decern annos habeo. 

Quotum annum agit fratereulus 

tiius ? 
Sextum annum agit. 
Annos sex habet. 
Vix duo annorum natus est. 

Nascor, i, natus sum. 
Annus, i, m. 

Major natu,* minor natu. 
Maximus, minimus natu. 

£sne major natu quam soror tiia 

(sorore tiia) ? 
Sum vero rmilto major natu. 
Qudt annos natus es ? (Cf. Less. 

LVIL A. Rem. 2.) 
Viginti fere annos natus sum. 
Quotum annum habet sdror tua ? 
Duddecim circiter annos habet 

(natus est). 
Vix dcto annos habet. 
6cto paene annos nata est. 
Quid aetatis tibi videor ? 

Videris esse annorum circiter tri- 

ginta. 
Videor, eri, visus sum. 
Aetas, atis, /. 

Major (quam) viginti annos natus 
sum. 

Major (quam) annorum f viginti 
sum. 

Minor (quam) tres et triginta an- 
nos natus est. 

Minor (quam) annorum trium et 
triginta est. 

Accipio, ere, cepi, ceptum. 
Intelligo, ere, lexi, lectum. 
Comprehendo, ere, di, sum. 
Cdpio, ere, cepi, captum.% 



* Lit. " greater by or with respect to birth." So also grandior, either with 
or without natu. 

t This is literally / am older than a man of twenty years. Instead of the 
genitive, the ablative may also be put, with or without quam. E. g. Major (or 
minor) quam decern annis, Over (or under) ten years of age. Major tribu's annis, 
Over three years old. 

X Accipereis " to hear and understand," more or less perfectly; it 



312 



LATIX GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 56. 



Do you understand me (i. e. what 

I say) ? 
I do not understand you. 

Have you understood the man ? 
Yes, I have understood him. 
Do you comprehend that man. 

(i. e. his motives, &c.) ? 
I comprehend him but little. 
I hear you, but I do not under- 
stand you. 

The noise. 

The wind. 

To bark. 

The barking. 

To hear, perceive. 

Do you perceive the noise of the 

wind ? 
I do perceive it. 
Have you heard the barking of 

the dogs ? 
I have heard it. 
Have they heard what we have 

said ? 
They have not heard them. 
Do you seize my opinion ? 
I do seize it. 
Whose dog is this ? 
It is the Englishman's. 
To read. 
To read through. 

To remain, stay. 
To stay, abide. 

To take. 



To beat, inflict blows upon. 

To strike. 

To lose. j 



!Num intellisis, quid dicam ? (Les- 
son XXX. C. 2.) 

Xon intelligo (comprehendo), quid 
dicas. 

Intellexistine, id quod dixit homo ? 

Sane quidem, intellexi. 

Intelligisne istum hdminem ? 

Parum (minus) intelligo. 

Accipio quidem ea quae dicis, sed 

minus comprehendo. 
Strepitus, us, m. 
Ventus, i, m. 
Latro, are, avi, atum. 
Latratus, us, m. ; gannitio, onis, /. 
Audire, percipere, excipere auri- 

bus (aliquid). 
Percipisne ventorum strepitum ? 

Ego vero percipio. 
Audivistine latratum canum ? 

Audi'vi. 

Niim exceperunt, quae nos dixi- 

mus ? 
Non exceperunt. 
Capisne meam sententiam ? 
Capio vero. 
Ciijus est canis hicce ? 
Canis est Angli. 
Lego, ere, legi, lectum. 
Perlego, ere, legi, lectum. 
Maneo, ere, nsi, nsum. 
Permuneo, ere, nsi, nsum. 
Aloror, ari, atus sum. 
Demorari, commorari. 
Sumo, ere, mpsi, mptum .* 
Capio, ere, cepi, captum. 
Accipio, ere, cepi, ceptum. 
Verbero, are, avi, atum. 
Percutio, ere, cussi, cussum. 

Ferio, ire, , . 

Amitto, ere, amisi, amissum. 
Perdo, ere, didi, ditum. 



nnd compreliendere, " to understand or comprehend" anything said or done; 
ccqyere, "to seize, take, comprehend clearly." All these have aliquid. — 
Jntdligere aliquem is to comprehend one's character, motives, style, meaning, 
&c, generally. 

* Sumere = " to take up " anything from its place of rest; capeve,, " to lay 
hold of, grasp, seize " ; accipere, u to take " something offered. 



LESSON 56.] PHRASES AND EXERCISES. 



313 



To lose at play. 

To know (anything). 

To take away. 



Perdere aliquid alea.* 

Scio, Ire, ivi, Itum. 

Didici (== I know, have learnt). 
( Aufero, erre, abstuli, ablatum. 
■< Demo, ere, mpsi, mpturn. 
( Tollo, ere, sustuli, sublatum. 



D. Obs. Auferre aliquid in general is " to carry away or off," either 
in a good or bad sense, f With alicui or ab aliquo it signifies " to take 
away from," or u to deprive of." Demere aliquid alicui or de (ex, ab) 
aliqua re = " to take away or to abstract from." Tollere aliquid or 
aliquem, " to remove out of the way," and sometimes secondarily " to 
destroy." 



Has this man carried away any- 
thing ? 

He has not carried away any- 
thing at all. 

Have I taken away anything 
from you ? 

You have taken away my book. 

Has he taken away some of our 
bread ? 

He has not taken any of it. 

What has the servant taken 
away ? 

He has taken away the wine from 
the table. 

Did you order the table to be 
cleared off? 

I have not yet done it. 

Will you take away these books ? 

I will. 

Has he read through the book 
which you lent him ? 

Did he stay at his home, or at 
his father's ? 

lie remained at his father's. 

Did they take what you gave 
them ? 

They were unwilling to take it. 

Who has beaten our dog ? 

No one has beaten him. 
Have you lost anything ? 
We have lost nothing. 



Niim homo iste quidquam abstu- 

lit? 
Non vero ; nihil quidquam abstu- 

lit. 
Abstuline tibi aliquid? 

Abstulisti vero mini li'brum. 
Dempsitne (ille) aliquid de pane 

nostra ? 
Nihil dempsit. 
Quid sustulit servus ? 

Vinum de mensa sustulit. 

Jussistine mensam tdlli ? 

Nondum jiissi. 

Ecquid vis tollere hos libros ? 

Non vdlo. 

Perlegitne librum, quern ei com- 

modasti ? 
Suaene ddmi moratus est, an in 

paterna ? 
Permansit in paterna. 
Num acceperunt, quod eis dedisti ? 

Accipere noluerunt. 

Quis canem nostrum verberavit 

(perciissit) ? 
Nemo eum verberavit. 
Niimquid amisistis ? 
Nihil amisimus. 



* Aha, lit. in the game of dice; here, by any game of chance generally. 
t Also with persons ; as, Aufer U hinc, Get yourself gone ! Aufer te domum, 



Be off home ! 



27 



114 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 56. 



How much money did lie lose at 

play ? 
He has lost a large amount. 
Is he not unhappy ? 
He is quite unhappy. 

Do you know Latin f 

I do not know it yet. 

Do you know as much as this 

man *? 
I do not know as much. 
Did you know that ? 
I did not know it. 
How many books has your cous- 
in already read ? 
He has already read five of them, 

and at present he is reading 

the sixth. 
Where did our friends remain ? 
They have remained at home. 
They have kept themselves at 

home. 
Will (does it please) your father 

give me anything to do ? 
He desires to give you something 

to do. 



Quantum pecuniae amicus tiius 

alea perdidit ? 
Perdidit peeuniam grandem. 
Konne est infelix ? 
!Est admodum infelix. 

Sclsne (didicistlne) sermonem Latl- 

num-f 
Nondum didici. 

Esne tu aeque ddctus atque hicce 

homo ? 
Non aeque ddctus sum. 
Fuitne hoc tibi notum ? 
!Non fuit. 
Quam multos h'bros consobrinus 

tiius jam perlegit ? 
Perlegit jam qumque, et nunc sex- 

tum legit. 

"Ubi amici ndstri commorati sunt ? 
Commorati sunt ddmi. 
Tenuerunt se ddmi. 

Placetne patri tiio mandare milii 

aliquid faciendum ? 
Ciipit vero tibi quiddam faciendum 

mandare. 



Exercise 108. 

Will you lend my brother a book ? — I have lent him one already. 

— Will you lend him one more ? — I will lend him two more. — 
Have you given anything to the poor ? — I have given them money. 

— How much money has my cousin given you ? — He has given me 
only a little ; he has given me only two crowns. — How old is your 
brother ? — He is twenty years old. — Are you as old as he ? — I am 
not so old. — How old are you V — I am hardly eighteen years old. — 
How old art thou ? — I am about twelve years old. — Am I younger 
than you ? — I do not know. — How old is our neighbor ? — He is 
not quite thirty years old. — Are our friends as young as we (ejusdem 
aetatis nobiscimi) ? — They are older than we. — How old are they ? 

— The one (alter) is nineteen, and the other (alter) twenty years old. 

— Is your father as old as mine ? — He is older than yours. — Have 
you read my book ? — I have not quite read it yet. — Has your friend 
finished his book ? — He has almost finished it. — Do you understand 
me ? — I do understand you. — Does the Englishman understand us ? 

— He does understand us. — Do you understand what we are telling 
you ? — We do understand it. — Dost thou understand German ? — 
I do not understand it yet, but I am learning it. — Do we understand 
the English ? — We do not understand them. — Do the Germans un- 



LESSON 57.] CONSTRUCTION OF TIME. 315 

derstand us ? — They do understand us. — Do we understand them ? 

— We hardly understand them. — Do you hear any noise ? — I hear 
nothing. — Have you heard the roaring of the wind V — I have heard 
it. — What do you hear ? — I hear the barking of the dogs. — Whose 
dog is this ? — It is the dog of the Scotchman. 

Exercise 109. 

Where is your brother ? — He is at London. — Was he not at Ber- 
lin ? — No, he was at Carthage. — Have you ever been at Syracuse ? 

— I have never been at Syracuse, but at Rome. — Is our friend at 
New York ? — No, he is at Athens. — Do you intend to set out for 
Italy ? — I intend to set out for Rome and Athens. — Where is your 
son studying ? — He is studying at Paris. — Has he returned (Rcver- 
tdtne) from Asia ? — He has not yet returned. — Where did he come 
from ? — He came from Paris to London. — And I came from Ger- 
many to America. — Have you lost your stick ? — I have not lost it. 

— Has your servant lost my note ? — He has lost it. — Where have 
you remained ? — I have remained at home. — Has your father lost 
(at play) as much money as I ? — He has lost more of it than you. — 
How much have I lost ? — You have hardly lost a crown. — Where 
has thy brother remained ? — He has remained at home. — Have 
your friends remained in the country ? — They have remained there. 

— Do you know as much as the English physician ? — I do not know 
as much as he. — Does the French physician know as much as you ? 

— He knows more than I. — Does any one know more than the 
French physicians ? — No one knows more than they. — Have your 
brothers read my books ? — They have not quite read them. — How 
many of them have they read ? — They have hardly read two of them. 
Has the son of my gardener taken anything from you ? — He has 
taken my books from me. — What hast thou taken from him ? — I 
have taken nothing from him. — Has he taken money from you ? — 
He has taken some from me. — How much money has he taken from 
you ? — He has taken from me almost two crowns. 



Lesson LVIL — pensum quinquagesimum 

SEPTIMUM. 

OF THE CONSTRUCTION OF TIME. 

A. In answer to the question Hoiv long ? the noun 
denoting the duration of time is put in the Accusative, 
sometimes with the preposition per, " through." E. g. 



316 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 57. 



TJnum tantiim diem vivere. 
Duas hebdomades, ires menses in 

urbe demorari. 
Tres hdras, sex menses, per trien- 

nium cum aliquo habitare. 

N6ct.es diesque alicui assidere. 
Annum jam tertium et vicesimum 

regnat. 
Malta saecula viguit Pythagore- 

drum nomen. 
"Urbs Veji decern aestdtes himes- 

que continuas circumsessa est. 



To live for one day only. 

To stay in the city for two "weeks, 
three months. 

To live with any one three hours, 
six months, for three (entire) 
years. 

To sit by one's side night and day. 

He is already reigning the twen- 
tieth year. 

The name of the Pythagoreans was 
in vogue for many centuries. 

The city of Veji was besieged for 
ten successive summers and win- 
ters. 



Kemarks. 

1. Duration of time is sometimes also expressed by the Ablative. 
E. g. Triginta annis vixisse, To have lived for thirty years. Quattu- 
ordecim annis exilium tolerdre, To suffer exile for fourteen years. But 
this is rather an exception peculiar to writers of the silver age. 

2. The question How old ? is commonly answered by natus, " born," 
with the accusative of the time elapsed since the birth of the individ- 
ual in question. E. g. Unum tantum mensem natus est, He is but one 
month old. Decern annos natus sum, I am ten years old. On these 
expressions, compare page 311. 

B. In answer to the question When? the point or 
period of time is expressed by the Ablative, without the 
preposition in. E. g. 

This day, this year, this hour, this 

week. 
In the 



Hoc die, hoc anno, hac hdra, hac 

hebddmade. 
Vere, aestate, auctumno, hieme. 



Die, ndcte, vesperi (vespere). 
Anno post Christum natum mile- 

shno octingesimo quadragesimo 

septimo. 
Pyrrhi temporibus jam Apollo 

versus facere desierat. 

Timdleon proelia maxima natdll 
die siio fecit omnia. 



spring, summer, autumn, 
winter. 

By day, at night, in the evening. 

In the year one thousand eight 
hundred and forty-seven after 
the birth of Christ. 

In the times of Pyrrhus, Apollo 
had already ceased to make 
verses. 

Timoleon won all his greatest vic- 
tories on his birthday. 



Remarks. 
1. In before the ablatives anno, die, hord, &c. rarely occurs. In 
tempore can only be said when tempus has the sense of " emergency "; 
as, hoc in tempore, in this emergency ; in tali tempore, under such cir- 
cumstances. The English " betimes " (" in time," " in season ") is 
in Latin either tempore or in tempore. In this sense the adverbial 



LESSON 57.] CONSTRUCTION OF TIME. 317 

tempori and temperi are also used, from which the comparative tempe- 
rius, more seasonably, earlier. 

2. The English " by day," " in the night," may also be expressed 
by interdiu and noctu, especially in connections like die ac noctu or 
die noctuque, by day and by night ; node et interdiu, by night and by 
day. 

3. Substantives which do not of themselves denote any division of 
time, but are still used to express that relation, are put in the ablative 
partly with in, but frequently without it. So initio and principio, in 
the beginning ; (in) coiyiitiis, at the time of the election ; (in) tumultu, 
in an insurrection ; (in) bello,* in the war ; ejus adventu or discessu, 
at the time of his arrival or departure. So also ludis (without in) for 
tempore ludorum, at the time of the public games ; and Saturnalibus, 
gladiator ibus, Latlnis (sc. ludis), at the time of the Saturnalian, gladi- 
atorial, and Latin exhibitions. 

0. The time within which anything is done is expressed by 
the Ablative, generally without in, and sometimes by the Accu- 
sative with intra. E. g. 

Tjrbes Africae dnnis prope quin- The cities of Africa had not seen 

quaginta nullum Romanum a Roman army in nearly fifty 

exercitum viderant. years. 

Quattuor tragoedias sexdecim You have finished four tragedies 

diebus absolvisti. in sixteen days. 

Fretum Euripi septies die red- He makes the sound of Eurlpus 

procat. ebb seven times a day. 

7nf Iwrd saepe ducentos versus He frequently dictated two hun- 

dictabat. dred verses in an hour. 

Intra decimum diem, quam (= Within ten days after his arrival. 

postquam) venerat. 

D. The question Hoiv long ago ? is answered by the Accu- 
sative or Ablative, with abhinc, ie before this time," and some- 
times by the Accusative with ante and the pronoun hie. E. g. 

Abhinc dies tres. ) T1 , /r™ -, , 

Abhinc tribus diebus. C Tl \ ree p S a §£ (J hre * da >' S b( T 

A . j* , « -,, ( tore this. 1 hese three days ago.) 

Ante hos tres dies. ) i j j 

Abhinc annos sex Six years ago. 

Abhinc viginti hdras. Twenty hours ago. 

Ante hos sex menses. These six months a^o. 



* But when bello has an adjective, or a noun in the genitive, connected with 
it, the in is never put. E. g. bello Punico secundo, in the second Punic war; 
bello Latinorum, in the war of the Latins. So Senensi proelio, pugna Canensi, 
without in. Thus also in pueritia, in boyhood, but pueritia extremd, towards 
the end of boyhood; ineunte adolescentid, at the beginning of youth. 

t The preposition in is sometimes put in answer to the question How much 
or hoio often in a given time f But even in this instance the ablative may stand 
without it. 

27* 



318 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 57. 

Remark. — The question How long ago f is sometimes also an- 
swered by the simple ablative ; e. g. paucis his diebus, a few days aoo, 
within a few days before this time. 

E. In answer to the questions How long before ? and How 
long after ? the time is expressed either by the Accusative or 
Ablative, with ante, " before," and post, " after." E. g. 

Ante sex menses. 7 c . ±\. x. * / • ,n 

Sex mensibus tote. \ SlX m0nths before 0^ g lven CTent )- 

Q^rrbufpS. } *» d ^ ^ (** «-n t). 

Note. — The words ante and />os£ are usually put before the Accu- 
sative and after the Ablative. But they may also stand between the 
numeral and noun. The numeral may be either a cardinal or an 
ordinal. Thus the English " Three days before," and " Ten years 
after," may be expressed as follows : — 

Accusative. Ablative. 

Ante tres dies. Tribus diebus ante. 

Ante tertuum diem. Tertio die ante. 

Tres ante dies. Tribus ante diebus. 

Tertium ante diem. Tertio ante die. 

Post decern annos. Decern annis post. 

Post decimum annum. Deciino anno post. 

Decern post annos. Decern post annis. 

Decimum post annum. Decimo post anno. 

F.ibius tertio anno ante consul Fabius had been consul three years 

fiierat. before. 

M. Ydlscius Fictor ante aliquot A few years before that time Mar- 

dnnos tribunus plebis fiierat. cus Volscins Fictor had been 

tribune of the people. 

Keque ita miilto post Seleucus a But a short time after that, Seleu- 

Ptolemaeo ddlo interfeetus est. cus was treacherously killed by 

Ptolemagus. 

ITomerus annis miiltis fiiit ante Homer lived many years before 

Iidmulum.* Romulus. 

Consul factus est annis post Ro- He was made consul three hundred 

mam cdnditam trecentis duode- and eighty years after the found- 

nonaginta. ing of Rome. 

Remarks. 

1 . Post and ante are usually put after their ablatives, or behveen 
them, as above. Sometimes, however, they occupy the first place ; 

* This and the next following examples show that ante and post may (as 
prepositions) be followed by an accusative, indicative of the time before or after 
which the event has taken' place. When this is the case, the preposition usu- 
ally comes after the words diebus, annis, &c. 



LESSON 57.] "QUAM" AFTER "ANTE," "POST," ETC. 319 

as, ante annis octo, post paucis diebus. So also post aliquanto, some 
time afterwards ; post non mullo, shortly after ; postpaulo, a little while 
after that ; ante paulo, a little while before ; instead of the more com- 
mon aliquanto post, &c. 

2. The word ante may also stand in the sense abhinc, " ago," " be- 
fore the present time" (cf. D.), but not vice versa. 

3. Ante and post, followed by quam with a verb, give rise to the 
same variety of expression. E.g. Anno ipso, antequam natus est 
Ennius, An entire year before Ennius was born. Numa rex annis 
permultis ante fait, quam Pythagoras, Numa was king many years be- 
fore the time of Pythagoras. Non multo post, quam tu a me discessisti, 
Shortly after you left me. Nona anno postquam in Hispaniam vene- 
rat, Nine years after his arrival in Spain. Cimon post annum quin- 
tum, quam expulsus erat, in patriam revocatus est, Cimon was recalled 
into his country five years after he had been expelled from it.* 

4. After the ablative of time, and also after pridie and postridie, 
the words ante and post are sometimes omitted, especially before quam. 
Thus : Quemadmddum tertio anno rapuere (sc. ante), As they had 
plundered three years before. Anno trecentesimo altero, quam (= 
postquam) condita erat Roma, Three hundred and two years after the 
founding of Rome. Pridie quam (= antequam) occideretur, The day 
before he was killed. Postridie ad me venit, quam (= postquam) ex- 
pectaram, He came to me the day after I had expected him.f 

5. The point of time at which anything begins is expressed by the 
ablative, with a.b or ex. Thus : ah urbe condita, from the foundation of 
the city ; ab adolescentia, from youth up ; ex eo tempore, from (since) 
that time ; ex Metello consule (= ex consuldtu Metelli), since the time 
of Metellus's consulship. 

6. Relations of time are also expressed by ad or usque ad, " until " ; 
m (cum Ace), "till"; de, "at," or "during"; and sub, which cum. 
Ace. = " towards," or " about," but cum. Abl. " at," " by," " during." 
E.g. Ab Jiora octavd usque ad vesperam collocuti sumus, We conversed 
from the eighth hour until evening. De nocte surgere, To rise during 
the night. De multci nocte vigilare, To watch late at night. Sub lu- 
cem, Towards daylight. Sub luce, By daylight. Sub exitu anni, At 
the close of the year. Sub iempus edendi, Towards (near) dinner- 
time. 

m r , , 7 7 7V ( Mordeo, ere, momordi, morsum. 

lo bite, to wound bi bitinq. A -. T ' 7 I _ . ' x 

J I Morsu vulnerare (aliquem). 

Why ? on what account ? Cur ? quamobrem ? quapropter ? 

qua de causa ? 

* Thus the English " Two hours before (or after) he had died," may in 
Latin be expressed as follows: Duabus horis antequam (postquam) decesse- 
rat = Ante (post) duas horas, quam decesserat = Altera hord antequam (post- 
quam) decesserat = Ante (post) alteram horam, quam decesserat 

f Instead of quam, ex quo and quum, "since," may also be used, with post 
omitted; e. g. Triduo, quum has dabam lilteras, Three days after writing this. 
So also the mere ablative of the relative ; e. g. Octo diebus, quibus has Utleras 
dabam, Eight days after the date of this. 



320 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 57. 



What is the reason that ? 

Why not ? 

Because. 

For the reason — that (== 
because). 

Why do you beat the dog ? 

I beat him because he has bitten 



Why do you not call for the 

doctor ? 
I do not call for him, because I 

do not need him. 
Why do they not read my book ? 

They do not read it, because 
they cannot comprehend it. 

Do you know the man who has 

lent me his cane ? 
I do know him. 
Do you breakfast before you go 

out? 
Does the tailor show you the 

coat which he is mending ? 
He does show it. 
Do you see the man who is in 

the garden ? 
I do not see him. 



To wait, remain. 



To wait for any one. 

To expect any one or any- 
thing. 
To wait for anything. 

Are you waiting for your letters ? 

I am waiting for them. 

Is he waiting for his brother ? 

Is the servant waiting for his 

master ? 
He is not waiting for him. 



Quid est, cur ? (cum. subj) 

Quid (causae) est, quod ? 

Cur non V quin ? 

Quod, quia (cum ind. and subj.). 

Qui, quippe qui (cum subj.). 

Ob earn causam or propterea — 

quod. 
Ideo, idcirco, propterea — quia. 
Quaprdpter canem verberas ? 
Ego euin verbero, quod me momdr- 
t dit. 
Ego eum conditio, quippe qui me 

mdrsu vulneraverit. 
Ciir non (quin) medicum arcessis ? 

Eum non arcesso propterea, quia 

ejus non indi'geo. 
Ciir non librum meum legunt ? 
Xon legunt, quippe qui eiim intelli- 

gere non pdssint. 
Eum ob hoc non legunt, quia intel- 

ligere non pdssunt. 
Novistine hdminem, qui mihi bacu- 

lum siium commodavit ? 
!Novi, vero. 
Sumisne jentaculum priusquam in 

publicum prddis ? 
Ostenditne tibi sartor tdgam, quam 

reficit ? 
Sane qui'dem, ostendit. 
!Num vides hdminem, qui est in 

hdrtulo ? 
Eum non video. 

f Opperior, iri, peritus or pertus sum. 
] Maneo, ere, nsi, nsum. 
"] Expccto, are, aci, citum. 
[_ Praestolor, ari, atus sum. 
( Opperiri or manere aliquem. 
I Praestolari alicui. 
Expectare aliquem or aliquid. 

Opperiri aliquid. 

Opperirisne epi'stolas tiias ? 
Ego vero (eas) opperior. 
Manetne (opperitiirne) suam fru- 

trem ? 
Num servus hero siio praestolatur ? 

(Ei) non praestolatur. 



LESSON 57.] PHRASES AND EXERCISES. 



321 



Do you expect your friends ? 
I do not expect them. 
What are they expecting ? 
They are expecting the money 
which you owe them. 
To owe. 

Do you owe any one anything? 
I owe not a penny to any one. 
How much do you oAve me ? 
I owe you a hundred crowns. 
Do I owe as much as you ? 

You owe more money than I do. 

Did they owe us anything ? 
They owed us nothing. 
I am indebted to you for many 
things. 

The master. 

The shilling. 

The pound. 

Five pounds of gold. 
To return, come back. 
From (any place). 
Hence, from there. 

At what o'clock do you usually 

return from the market ? 
I am accustomed to return thence 

at twelve. 
Has he come back from home ? 
He has not yet come back from 

there. 
Does the servant return early 

thence ? 
He is wont to return thence at 

ten o'clock in the morning. 
Did they return before noon ? 
They did return at eleven o'clock. 
At nine in the morning. 



Ecquid amicos tuos expeetas ? 

(Eos) ndn expecto. 

Quid expectant V 

Quam iis debes pecuniam expec- 
tant. 

Debeo, ere, iii, itum (alicui ali- 
quid). 

Debesne alicui aliquid ? 

Ego nummum debeo nemini. 

Quantam mini debes pecuniam ? 

Debeo tibi centum thaleros. 

Debeone tantam pecuniam quan- 
tam tu ? 

Majorem tu debes pecuniam quam 
ego. ;.• 

Num nobis quidquam debuerunt ? 

Nobis nihil debuerunt. 

Debeo tibi multa. 

Herus, i, m. 
*Shillingus, i, m. 

Libra (ae, /.) pondo ; or simply 
pondo (indeclr). 

Auri quinque pondo. 
(Redeo, ire, ti (ivi), itum. 
< Reverter, i, rsus sum.* 
( (aliquo, ad aliquem). 

De, a (ab), ex (Prep, cum Abl.). 

( Inde, illinc istinc (adv). 
( De (a, ex) eo (illo) loco. 
Qua hdra de fdro reverti soles ? 

Sdleo reverti illinc hdra duode- 

cima. 
Rcdiitne (revertitne) ddmo ? f 
Nondum inde revertit. 

Revertitiirne servus illinc bene 

mane ? 
Reverti inde sdlet hdra decima 

mane. 
Reverteruntne ante meridiem ? 
Reverterunt vero hdra undecima. 
Nona, mane (sc. hdra). 



* This verb is crenerally reverter in the present; but in the perfect reverti 
(from the active reverto), more frequently than reversus sum. 
| iSee Lesson LVI. C. 

u 



322 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 57. 



At eight in the evening. 
Towards five o'clock in the 

morning (evening). 
Towards noon, evening. 

How long ? 

Long, for a great ivhile 

Longer. 

Longer than a year. 

During, for (throughout). 

During the summer. 

For an entire year. 

During (within) the few 
days. 

During dinner-time (while 
at dinner). 

During play-time (while 
playing). 

For the space of two, three, 
four days. 

(For) three entire days. 

For three months. 

During twenty days. 

For many years. 

Kow for the third year (al- 
ready three years). 

(Within) these twenty years. 

Within the next three years. 

A minute. 

A day. 
A year. 
A month. 
The summer. 
The winter. 
The age. 
The century. 
Whole, entire. 

How long did you speak with 
the man ? 

I spoke with him three hours. 

How long did your brother re- 
main in the country ? 

He stayed there the entire sum- 
mer. 



Octava vesperi (sc. hora). 
Sub horam quintam mane (ves- 
peri). 
Sub meridiem, sub vesperam. 

Quam dm ? 

Dm (Adv.) ; longwn tempus ; per- 
diu (= very long). 

Longius, diutius. 

Plus (amplius) anno ; anno longi- 
us ; amplius annum. 

Per ; inter ; super (Prep, cum 
Ace.) ; in (cum Abl.). 

Per aestatem. 

Per annum integrum. 

In diebus paucis. 

Inter (super) coenam. 

Inter ludendum. 

Biduum, triduum, quatriduum 

(Ace.) 
Universum (totum) triduum (Ace). 
Tres menses. 
Dies viginti. 
Multos annos. 
Tertium jam annum. 

His annis viginti. 
Proximo triennio.. 

*Horae sexagesima (sc. pars) ; mo- 
mentum, i, n. 

Dies, m. &f. (Lesson YIH. B.) 

Annus, i, in. 

Mensis, is, m. 

Aestas, atis,/. 

Hiems, emis,y! 

Aetas, atis,/ 

Saeculum, i, n. 

Totus, a, um ; integer, gra, grum ; 
universus, a, um. 

Quam diu cum hdmine collocii- 

tus es ? 
Collociitus sum cum eo tres hdras. 
Qiic4m diu frater tiius riire per- 

mansit ? 
Permansit ibi (per) aestatem inte- 

gram. 



LESSON 57.] EXERCISES 110, 111. 323 

Did you stay long in the city ? Moratdsne es dm m urbe ? 

I stayed there for a great while. Moratus sum ibi ldngum tempus. 

How long do you wish to stay Quam diu commorari vis nobis- 

with us ? cum ? 

I desire to remain with you an Cupio vobiscum commorari unam 

hour, a month, a year. horam, unum mensem, annum. 

Exercise 110. 

Why do you love that man ? — I love him because he is good. — 
Why does your neighbor beat his dog ? — Because it has bitten his 
little boy. — Why does our father love me ? — He loves you because 
you are good. — Do your friends love us ? — They love us because 
we are good. — Why do you bring me wine '? — 1 bring you some 
because you are thirsty. — Why does the hatter drink V — He drinks 
because he is thirsty. — Do you see the sailor who is in the ship ? — I 
do not see the one who is in the ship, but the one who is in the square. 
— Do you read the books which my father has given you? — I do read 
them. — Do you know the Italians whom we know ? — We do not 
know those whom you know, but we know others. — Do you buy the 
horse which we have seen ? — I do not buy that which we have seen, 
but another. — Do you seek what you have lost V — I do seek it. — 
Do you find the man whom you have looked for ? — I do not find 
him. — Does the butcher kill the ox which he has bought in the mar- 
ket ? — He does kill it. — Do our cooks kill the chickens which they 
have bought V — They do kill them. — Does the hatter rnend the hat 
which I have sent him ? — He does mend it. — Does the shoemaker 
mend the boots which you have sent him ? — He does not mend them, 
because they are worn out. — Does your coat lie upon the chair ? — 
It does lie upon it. — Does it lie upon the chair upon which I placed 
it ? — No, it lies upon another. — Where is my hat ? — It is in the 
room in which you have been . — Do you wait for any one ? — I wait 
for no one. — Do you wait for the man whom I have seen this morn- 
ing ? — I do wait for him. — Art thou waiting for thy book ? — I am 
waiting for it. — Do you expect your father this evening ? — I do ex- 
pect him. — At what o'clock has he gone to the theatre ? — He has 
gone thither at seven o'clock. — At what o'clock does he return from 
there ? — He returns from there at eleven o'clock. — Has your bailiff 
returned from the market ? — He has not yet returned from it. — At 
what o'clock has your brother returned from the country V — He has 
returned from there at ten o'clock in the evening. 

Exercise 111. 

At what o'clock hast thou come back from thy friend ? — I have 
come back from him at eleven o'clock in the morning. — Hast thou 
remained long with him ? — I have remained with him about an hour. 
— How long do you intend to remain at the ball ? — I intend to re- 
main there a few minutes. — How long has the Englishman remained 
with you ? — He has remained with me for two hours. — Do you in- 
tend to remain long in the country ? — I intend to remain there dur- 



324 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 58. 

ing the summer. — How long have your brothers remained in town 
(inurbe)'! — They have remained there during the winter. — How 
much do I owe you ? — You do not owe me much. — How much do 
you owe your tailor ? — I only owe him fifty crowns. — How much 
dost thou owe thy shoemaker ? — I owe him already seventy crowns. 

— Do I owe you anything ? — You owe me nothing. — How much 
does the Frenchman owe you ? — He owes me more than you. — Do 
the English owe you as much as the Spaniards ? — Not quite so much. 

— Do I owe you as much as my brother ? — You owe me more than 
he. - — Do our friends owe you as much as we V — You owe me less 
than they. — Why do you give money to the merchant ? — I give him 
some because he has sold me handkerchiefs. — Why do you not drink ? 

— I do not drink because I am not thirsty ? — Why do you pick up 
this ribbon ? — I pick it up because I want it. — Why do you lend 
this man money ? — I lent him some because he is in want of some. — 
Why does your brother study ? — He studies because he desires to 
learn Latin. — Are you thirsty ? — I am not thirsty, because (quippe 
qui) I have drunk. — Has your cousin already drunk ? — Not yet ; he 
is not yet thirsty. — Does the servant show you the room which he is 
sweeping ? — He does not show me that which he is sweeping now, 
but that which he swept yesterday. — Do you breakfast before you 
go out? — I go out before I breakfast. — What does your brother do 
before he writes his letters? — He buys paper, ink (atr amentum), and 
pens, before he writes them. 



Lesson LVIII. — pensum duodesexage- 

SIMUM. 

SYNTAX OF THE ACCUSATIVE. 

A. The accusative serves to designate the direct ob- 
ject of transitive verbs, active or deponent, and stands 
in answer to the question Whom? or Wliat? (Cf. Les- 
son XXIV. G.) E. g. 

Filius patrem dmdt. The son loves the father. 

De'us miindum uedificavit. God created the world. 

Miltiades Athenas totamque Miltiades liberated Athens and en- 

Graeciam Uberavit. tire Greece. 

Gloria virtutem tdnquam umbra Glory follows valor like a shade. 

sequitur. 

Remarks. 

1. When the verb is changed into the passive voice, the object- 
accusative becomes the subject of the verb. E. g. Pater ajilio amd- 



LESSON 53.] SYNTAX OF THE ACCUSATIVE. 325 

tar. — Mundus a Deo aedlficd'air. — Atlienae totdque Graecia a Milti- 
ade Uberdlae sunt. This conversion into the passive voice may always 
take place without any material alteration of the sense. 

2. In addition to the accusative of the immediate object, many ac- 
tive verbs admit of another noun in the Genitive, Dative, or Abla- 
tive. These verbs are then said to govern two cases. E. g. Pater 
jilio (dat.) librum dedit. — Me civitatis morum piget taedetque, I am 
weary of, and disgusted with, the morals of the city. Democrttus ocu- 
lis (abl.) se privavit, Democritus deprived himself of his eyes. Cf. 
Lessons LXL, LXVIL, LXXI. 

3. The object of an active verb is frequently an infinitive, with or 
without a subject-accusative, or a clause introduced by a relative or 
one of the conjunctions ut, ne, quo, &c. (Cf. Lessons LIL, LIII, 
LIY.) E. g. Ennius deos esse censet, Ennius is of opinion that the 
gods exist. Ante senectutem curavi, ut bene vlverem, Before old age, 
my aim was to lead a good life. 

4. The accusative after transitive verbs is sometimes entirely 
suppressed. This is the case, — 

a.) When the object is designedly left indefinite, in order to render 
the act alone conspicuous. E. g. Ego semper amavi, et si quid faciam 
nunc quoque quaeris, amo, I have always loved, and if you inquire 
what I am doing now, my answer is, "I love." Non sine summo do- 
lore scribo, I write with the deepest sorrow. Tarquinius Delplws mit- 
tere stafuif, Tarquin resolves to send to Delphi. 

b.) When it has already been expressed, and can easily be under- 
stood from the context. E. g. Complexus Coriolanus suos dimlsit, se. 
eos, Coriolanus, having embraced his family, dismissed them. Et scribo 
cdiquid et lego ; sed cum lego, ex comparatione sentio, quam male scri- 
bam, I write and read something at the same time ; but when I read, 
I perceive from the comparison how badly I write. So frequently 
the pronouns me, te, se, eum, nos, &c. 

c.) In certain technical expressions, such as movere, sc. castra, to 
decamp ; appellere, conscendere, solvere, sc. navem, to land, embark, 
set sail ; ductre, sc. exercitum, to march (an army) ; mertre, sc. stipen- 
tlia, to serve as a soldier ; olnre, sc. diem supremum, to die ; agere, sc. 
vllam, to live. In the same manner the object-infinitive is often omit- 
ted ; as, In Pompejdnum statim cogito, sc. prqficisci, I contemplate 
going to my estate near Pompeii immediately, lit solet, sc. fieri, As 
it commonly happens. 

5. The verb itself is sometimes omitted. This occurs, — 

a.) In expressions like Quidmulta ? (See page 154.) Quid? quod 
.... for quid dicam de eo, quod, What shall I say to the fact that. 
Quae cum dixisset Cotla, finem, sc. fecit, When Cotta had said this, 
he concluded his speech. Sus Minervam, sc. docet, The dunce in- 
structs the sage. 

b.) After the formulas nihil aliud (amplius or minus') quam, " only," 
" nothing more or less than," " nothing but," where one of the tenses 
28 



32G LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 5S. 

of facere may be supplied. Nihil aliud (sc. fecit) quam helium com- 
paravit, His only thought was the preparation of a war. Ilia nocte 
nihil aliud (sc. factum est) quam vigilatum in urbe, That night there 
was nothing but watching in the city (i. e. every one kept awake). 

c.) In a'sentence left unfinished by aposiopesis.* E. g. Quos ego 
.... Whom I will .... 

6. A transitive verb with its object may frequently be converted 
into a single verb denoting the same thing. E. g. opus facere = 
operari ; auxilium ferre = auxiliari; lachrimas fundere = lachrimari ; 
navem agere = navigare, &c. 

7. The accusative sometimes depends upon a verbal noun or 
adjective, as the case governed by the verbs from which they 
are derived. Such are, — 

«.) A few verbal nouns in Ho : as, domum itio or reditio, a going or 
returning home. Quid tibi kanc curatio est rem? What is this busi- 
ness to vou ? But this usage is confined to Plautus. 

b.) Verbal adjectives in bundus. E. g. Populabundus agros ad 
oppidum pervenit, Pillaging the fields, he came into the vicinity of the 
city. Mirabundi velut sonmii vanam speciem, As if wondering at the 
fleeting visions of a dream. Sometimes also those in lus ; as, Facta 
consultaque ejus aemulus erat. 

c.) The verbals osus, exosns, and perosus, " hating," " detesting," 
and pertaesus, " weary of," " disgusted with." E. g. Quum exosus 
arma in otio ageret, When, from a dislike for war, he lived in retire- 
ment. Pertaesus ignaviam suam, Weary of his own want of energy. 

B. A number of neuter verbs are sometimes followed by an 
object-accusative derived from the same root, and of a significa- 
tion similar to their own. 

Such are cursum currere, dolurem dolere, furorem furere, gaudium 
gaudere, jusjurandum jurare, insaniam insariire, pugnam (or proelimn) 
jiugnare, rlsum ridere, somnium somnidre, saporem sapere, vltam vlvere. 
In all these instances, however, the object-accusative has generally an 
adjective connected with it, or is otherwise modified. E. g. 

Mirum somniavi somnium. I had a singular dream. 

Juravi verissimum pulcherrimum- I have sworn most conscientiously 

que jusjurandum. and honorably. 

Siccius Dentatus triumphavit Siccius Dentatus, with his generals, 

cum imperatdribus siiis trium- was honored with nine triumphs. 

phos novem. 

Remark. — Instead of a noun of the same root with the verb, one 
of kindred signification merely is often put. E. g. Proelia pugnare, to 

* A rhetorical figure employed in abrupt transitions, as in the example, 
given. The more frequent grammatical omissions of verbs or objects (in all 
the preceding instances) are called ellipsis. 



LESSON 58.] ACCUSATIVE AFTER NEUTER VERBS. 327 

fight battles ; aleam ludere, to play at dice ; saltare Turnum or Cyclo- 
pa, to dance the Turnus or the Cyclops ; Bacchanalia vivere, to lead 
a Bacchanalian life ; O/ympia vincere or corondri, to conquer, to be 
crowned at the Olympic games ; judicium vincere, to gain one's case. 

C. Many verbs, though commonly neuter, are sometimes 
employed transitively in a different sense, and then admit an 
object in the accusative. Such are, — 

1 . A number of verbs expressive of emotions, as of joy, sorrow, 
fear, shame. E. g. dolere, erubescere, jlere, gaudere, gemere, horrere, 
lameniare, lacrimdre, lugere, moerere, plorcire, queri, &c, which, when 
followed by aliquem or aliquid, then signify " to be grieved or to 
rejoice at" "to lament or weep over." Thus: Flere necem JUii, To 
weep over the death of a son. Doleo casum luctumque luum, I am 
pained by your calamity and sorrow. 

2. Certain verbs of sensation, such as olere, redolere, sapefe, and 
resipere, when they signify " to smell of," " to taste after." E. g. 
Olet unguenta, He smells of ointment. Piscis ipsum mare s'apit. The 
fish tastes as salt as the sea itself, lledolet antiquitatem. — So also 
anhelcire crudelitatem, to breathe cruelty ; sitlre sanguinem, to thirst 
after blood ; sondre quiddam peregrlnum, to emit a strange sound. 

3. A variety of others, of which the following are the most com- 
mon : — ambulare, to walk, act. to walk upon ; dormlre, to sleep, act. 
to spend in sleep ; fastidire, to be haughty, act. to disdain ; festinare 
and proper 'are, to make haste, act. to hasten or accelerate ; ludere, to 
play (sport), act. to play a game, or to act;- manere, to remain, act. to 
wait for ; navigdre, to sail, act. to navigate ; ridere, to laugh, act. to 
deride ; vigildre, to watch, act. to spend in watching ; vivere, to live, 
act. to live = to spend. 

4. The poets also say pallere, pavere, tremere, trepidare aliquid, 
instead of timere aliquid, "to dread anything"; and ardire, calere, 
tepere, perire, deperlre aliquam, instead of amdre aliquam, "to be 
in love with one." 

Remark. — Many neuter verbs admit of the accusative of a pro- 
noun or adjective (of the neuter gender), without ever occurring with 
that of a substantive. E. g. Hoc laetor, I am rejoiced at it. Id tibi 
succenseo, I am displeased with you on this account. Hoc laboro, id , 
operam do, It is my endeavor or aim. Hoc non dubito, I have no 
doubt about it. Mud tibi non assentior, On this point I do not agree 
with you. Unum omnes student, They all are aiming at one thing. 
On these accusatives, compare Lesson LIX. D. Remark 2. 

To live, reside (in any place). Habitdre, or Domicxlium habere 

(aliquo loco). 
To inhabit. Incolo, ere, iii, cultum (aliquam 

TERRAM, URBEM). 

To live on or near (a street, Accolere (viam, flumen). 
river) . 



128 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 53. 



Where do you live ? 

I live in the Via Sacra, number 

fifty. 
What country did your father 

live in ? 
He lived between the Rhine and 

the Alps. 
What street do you live on ? 
I live on Frederick Street, num- 
ber one hundred and twenty- 
five. 

To live with or at the house 

of any one. 
To stay (as guest) with any 
one. 
Did you ever live in the coun- 
try ? 
No, I always lived in the city. 

Do you live with your cousin ? 

I do not live with him, but with 

my father. 
Does your friend still live where 

I have lived ? 
He lives no longer where you 
have lived ; he lives now on 
the great square. 
The street. 
The number. 

How long? Up to what time ? 

Till, until (Prep.). j 

Until noon, evening, morn- 
ing. 
Till to-morrow. 

Till the day after to-morrow. 
Until late at night. 
Till daylight. 
Until this day. 
Till the next day. 

Until this moment. 
Until now, hitherto. 
Up to that time. 



"Ubi habitas ? 
Domicilium habco in 



S;'u 



numero qmnquagesimo. 
Quam terrain pater tiius incdliiit ? 

Incdluit inter Rhenum Alpesquc. 

Quiim viam accolis ? 
Accolo viam Fredericanam, nume- 
ro centesimo vicesimo quinto. 

Apud aliquem {in domo alicujus) 

haoitare. 
In alicujus domo (apud aliquem) 

deversari. 
Habitavistine linquam ruri ? 

immo vero semper in lirbe habi- 
tavi. 

Habitasne apud consobrinum (tii- 
um) ? 

Apud patrem, non apud ilium lui- 
bito. 

Habitatne amicus tiius etiam mine 
eodem loci, ubi ego habitavi ? 

Quo loco tii habitavisti, n6n ampli- 
us habitat; accolit vero hdc tem- 
pore campum nuignum. 

Via, ae, f. ; vicus,* i, m. 

Numerus, i, m. 

Quam diu ? Quo usque ? 
Ad, usque ad (cum Ace). 
In, usque in " 

Usque ad meridiem, vesperam, 
mane (tempus matutinum). 

Usque ad diem crastinum ; in cra- 
stinuin. 

Usque ad diem perendlnum. 

Ad multam noctcm. 

Ad lucem. 

Usque ad hunc diem. 

Usque ad diem posterum (sequen- 
tem). 

Usque ad momentum praesens. 

Adhuc, adhuc usque. 

Ad id tempus ; ad id locorum. 



* Vtcus is a street lined with houses. 



LESSON 58.] PHRASES AND EXERCISES. 



329 



Up to a certain time. 

To this place, hither, thus 

far, as far as here. 
To that place, as far as 

there, so far, thither. 

The week. 

Sunday. 

Monday. 

Tuesday. 

Wednesday. 

Thursday. 

Friday. 

Saturday. 
Does your friend still live with 

you ? 
No, he lives with me no longer. 

How long (till when) did he live 

with you ? 
He lived with rne no longer than 

a year. 
How long Avere you at the ball ? 
(I was there) until midnight. 

How long did you stay with my 

father? 
I stayed with him till eleven at 

night. 

Till, until (conj.). 

Until I return. 

Until I bring you the book. 

Until my brother returns. 

To be willing, to wish — 

been willing, wished. 
To wish, desire — wished, 

desired. 
To be able, can — been able, 
could. 
Has he been willing to go for 

the physician V 
He has not been willing to go 

for him. 
Did he wish to go out this 

morning ? 
He did not wish (to go out). 
28* 



Ad tempus quoddam. 

Hucusque, hactenus (Adv.) ; ad 

hunc usque locum. 
Eo usque, istuc (illuc) usque ; ad 
ilium usque locum. 
*Hebdomas, adis, f, or hebdomada, 

ae, /. 
*Dies solis ; dies dorninicus. 
*Dies lunae. 
*Dies Martis. 
*Dies Mercurii. 
*Dies Jdvis. 
*Dies Veneris. 
*Dies Saturni. 
Niim amicus tuus apud te etiam 

nunc (hddie etiam) habitat ? 
Xon vero ; apud me non amplius 

habitat. 
Quo usque apud te (ddmi tiiae) 

habi.ta.vit ? 
Ilabitavit apud me non amplius 

annum. 
Q.uam dm interfuisti saltatidni ? 
Ad mediam ndctem. (Cf. Lesson 

XXXV. B.) 
Quiim diu (quo xisque) apud pa- 

trem meum moratus es ? 
Commorutus siim apud eum usque 
ad undecimam ndctis. 

Dum, usque dum; donee; quoad 

(cum Ind. & Subj.) 
Dum (donee) redeo or redeam. 
Dum (quoad) tibi librum iitfero or 

dfieram. 
Diim (donee) frater revertitur. 

Yelle — vdlui, . 

( Cupere — cuplvi, cupitum. 
( Optare — avi, atum. 

\ Posse — potui, . 

| Quire — Ivi, Itum. 
Voluitne arcessere medicum ? 

Arcessere eum ndluit. 

Cupivitne hddie miine in publicum 

prodire ? 
Non cupivit. 



330 LATIX GRAMMAR. [LESSON 58. 

Have they been ■willing to do Nuin hoc facere voluerunt ? 

this ? 

They have not been -willing. !Non voluerunt (noluerunt). 

Could the book be found ? Potuitnc liber inveniri ? 

It could (be found). Ycro, pdtuit. 

It could not be found. Keperiri non pdtuit. 

One, people, they, any one (the Quis, aliquis ; homines. 
French on). 

D. Obs. General assertions, in which in English we employ 
the indefinite one, people, they, some one, &c, may in Latin be 
expressed in several ways : — 

1. By the Passive Voice, either personally or impersonally* as, 
Dicitur esse venturus, or Dicitur eum esse venturum, They say that he 
will come, It is said that he will come. 

2. By the third person plural of the active voice ; as, Dicunt eum 
esse mortuum, They (people) say that he is dead. 

3. By the first person plural ; as, Si cogitamus, If we reflect (if one 
reflects). 

4. By the second person singular; as, Pulchrum est direre, quod 
scias, It is handsome to say what one knows (what you know). 

5. By quis or aliquis; as, Si quis dicat, If any one should say. 

6. By the impersonal licet; as, Licet videre, One can sec (we may 
see). 

7. By the neuter of the participle in dus ; as, In villam revertendum 
est, It is necessary to return to the villa. 

Have they brought my shoes ? Calceine mei apportati sunt ? 
They have not yet brought them. Nondum apport&ti sunt. 
AVhat have they said ? Quid dixerunt? 

They have said nothing. Nihil dixerunt. 

AVhat have they done ? Quid factum est ? 

They have done nothing. Nihil factum est. 

What news do they bring ? ( Quid ndvi affertur ? 

(What is there new ?) \ Quid tandem ndvi ? 

They say nothing new. \ Nihil ndvi affertur. 

(There is nothing new.) \ Nihil ndvi est. 

Is there anything new ? Niim quidnam ndvi ? 

Have you anything new ? Habesne aliquid ndvi ? 

I have something new. Iiabeo vero quiddam ndvi. 

I have nothing new to write you. Ndvi, quod ad te scriberem, nihil 

erat. 
New. Novus, a, um ; recens, tis. 

My new garment. Testis mea recens or nova.* 

His new clothes. Yestimenta sua (ejus) recentia 

(nova). 

* Recens, not yet worn out, and nova, just made, or after the latest fashion. 



LESSON 58.] PHRASES AND EXERCISES. 331 

My new friend. Amicus meus novus. 

The new soldiers. Milites novi. 

The new law. Lex recens ac nova. 

The brush. Penicillus or penlculus, i, m. 

To brush. Perucillo extergere or detergtre 

(-te)-si, -tersuni). 

Have you brushed my new coat ? Extersistine (penicillo) tdgam me- 

am ndvam ? 
No, I have not yet brushed it. Non ; ego earn nondum extersi. 
Will you not brush your hat ? Ndnne pi'leum tuuui peniculo de- 

tergere vis ? 
I have no time to brush it. Deest mihi tempus ad eum deter- 

gendum. 

Exercise 112. 

Where do you live? — I live in the large street (in plated) . — 
Where does your father live ? — He lives at his friend's house. — 
Where do your brothers live ? — They live in the large street, num- 
ber one hundred and twenty. — Dost thou live at thy cousin's ? — I 
do live at his house. — Do you still live where you did live '? — I live 
there still. — Does your friend still live where he did live ? — lie no 
longer lives where he did live. — Where does he live at present '? — 
He lives in William Street (in via WUhelmiana), number one hundred 
and fifteen. — Where is your brother ? — He is in the garden. — 
Where is your cousin gone to ? — He is gone into the garden. — Did 
you go to the play yesterday ? — I did go thither. — Have you seen 
my friend ? — I have seen him. — When did you see him ? — I saw 
him this morning. — Where has he gone to V — I do not know. — lias 
the servant brushed my clothes ? — He has brushed them. — Has he 
swept my room? — He has swept it. — How long did he remain here ? 

— Till noon. — How long have you been writing? — I have been 
writing until midnight. — How long did I work ? — You worked until 
four o'clock in the morning. — How long did my brother remain with 
you ? — He remained with me until evening. — How long hast thou 
been working? — 1 have been working till now. — Hast thou still 
long to write ? — I have to write till the day after to-morrow. — lias 
the physician still long to work ? — lie has to work till to-morrow. — 
Must I remain long here ? — You must remain here till Sunday. — 
Must my brother remain long with you ? — lie must remain with us 
till Monday ? — How long must I work ? — You must work till the 
day after to-morrow. — Have you still long to speak ? — I have still 
an hour to speak. — Did you speak long ? — I spoke till the next day. 

— Have you remained long in my room ? — I have remained in it 
till this moment. — Have you still long to live in this house ? — I have 
still long to live in it. — How long have you still to live in it ? — Till 
Sunday. — How many triumphs did Dentatus celebrate ? — He cele- 
brated nine. — What sort of a life docs your father live (vivere) ? — 
He lives a retired (otiosus) and a tranquil (tranquUlus) one. — Who 
was wont to dance the Turnus ? — The Romans were wont to dance it. 



332 latin grammar. [lesson "". 

Exercise 113. 

Does your friend still live with you ? — IT.- lives with me no I 

— How Long has he lived with you? — 1I«' has lived with me only a 
year. — How long did you remain at the ball? — I remained there 
till midnight — How long have you remained in the carriage? — I 
have remained an hour in it. — Have you remained in the garden till 
now? — I have remained there till now. — Has the captain eome as 
far as lure ? — II«- has come as for as here. — How far has the mer- 
chant come ? — 1I«' has come as &r as the end of the road. — Has the 
Turk come as far as the end of the forest ? — He has come m far as 
there. — What do you do in the morning ? — I read. — And what <lo 
you do thru ? — I breakfast and work. — Do you breakfast before you 
read ? — No, Sir, I read before I breakfast — Dost thou play instead 
of working? — I work instead of playing. — Does thy brother go to 
the play instead of going into the garden ? — 1I»- does not bo to the 
play. — What do you do in the evening? — I work. — \\ hat bast 
thou done thi< evening? — I have brushed your clothes, and have 

to the theatre. — Didst thou remain Long at the theatre? — I re- 
mained there but a few minutes. — Are you willing t<> wait here ? — 
How long must [wait? — Sou must wait till my father returns. — 
Has anybody come? — S me. — What have they 

wanted? — They have wanted to speak to you. — Have they not 
been willing to wait ? — They have not been willing to w dt — What 
do von say to that man? — I tell him to wait lli\<- you waited ti»r 
me long '.' — I have waited for you an hour. Have you been able to 
read my letter ? - ■ I have been al I it. — Have yon under- 

lit? — [ have understood it — Have you shown it to am one? 

— I have shown it to no one. — Have they brought my clothes'.' — 
They have not brought them yet — Have they Bwept my room and 
brushed my clothes ? — They have i ret 



Lesson LIX. — PENSUM QXDESEXAGESIMDM. 

ACCUSATIVE AFTEB VERBS. — Contmmed. 

A. Many neuter verbs, especially those denoting 
motion, become transitive by composition with one of 
the prepositions ad, ante, circum, con, in, inter, oh. j>< ,-. 
praeter, sub, svbter, super, supra, or trans, and take an 
object in the accusative. 

Such are ire, meare, currere, ambuUx . 

lore, fiuere, labi, scemdere, tabre, vaga . 8ic.fi akofogvt, 



LESSON" 59.] ACCUSATIVE AFTER COMPOUND VERBS. 



333 



lairare, vigUare, and a few denoting rest or situation : as, /accre, stare, 
sedere, &c. The following may serve as specimens : — 

Active. ^eutek. 



adire, 

alloqui, 

antegredi, 

eircumsedere, 

increpare, 

irridere, 

interjaeere, 

ohire, 

obsidere, 

percurrere, 

praeflucre, 

praetervolare, 

subire, 

Bubterlabi, 

supereminere, 

Buprascandere, 

transcendere, 

fcransvolare, 



to approach, 
to address, 
to precede, 
to surround) 
to chide, 

to '/' ride, 

to be situate between, 

to undi rgo, 

to !>■ - ■ 

to run ( pass) through, 

to flow be/t 

to hurry by, 

to undi rgo, 

i ■'' r, 
to <"■• 

,1, (,.-, ,-, 
tn CT( 

to fly (pass) over, 

Ex AMPLES. 



rom ire, 


to rjn. 


" loqui, 
" gradi, 


to speak. 

to ir<rfl\ 


dere, 


to Sit. 


" crepare, 


to clatter. 


" rid ere, 

" jatere, 


to laugh. 

to li> . 


11 ire, 
•• sedere, 


to go. 

to sit. 


currere, 


to run. 


fluere, 


to flow. 


" volare, 


tofly. 


" iff, 
" labi, 


t<> go. 


" eminere, 
Bcandere, 


to j>roj< r(. 
to climb. 



tofly. 



7" nunc dUoquor, A fricane. 
Cato allatrdre Scipionis magnitur 

duo m Bdlitus e"rat. 
Saguntum Carthaginidnse 

riiinsi ih nt . 

Annus yndre inftuxit. 

Euphrates Babyloniam me'diam 

/" i no of. 

Populus Bdlet nonnumquam dig- 
not prat '" i ■'/■' . 
Qui ve*nit hie fluctus, flucius 

( ACC. pi. ) sojx fi 'iiiim I i 

Niim tiiuin ndmen ?el < aucasum 
transcendi re pdtuit, \ el ( ran- 
gem iransnatart t 



1 address you now. Africanus. 

( ato had been in the habit of de» 

trading from Scipio's greatness. 
The Carthaginians are besieging 

S iguntum. 
The ri\ er emptied into the sea. 
The Euphrates flows through the 

heart of Bab} Ionia. 
The people sometimes slight the 

meritoi bus. 
The wave, which now approaches, 

■ >\ ertops all others, 
[las 3 <>ur name passed beyond the 

I lucasus, or Bwum beyond the 



Rem irks. 



1. Of the verbs above enumerated, those compounded with circum, 
per, praeter, trans, and super alum' are regularly transitive, and oi cur 
also in the passive. The rest arc only bo when used in a secondary 
or figurative sense. E. g. Grcumsedemw, We are besieged. Tame- 
sis transiri potest, The Thames can be passed. Fossa transilltur, The 
ditch is leaped over. Societas intiur, A society is formed. Mors pro 
patria obUur, Death is suffered for the fatherland. 

l\ Those compounded with ad, ante, in, n ft, ob, prae, sub, super, 
and supra may Btand as transitive verbs, lml the} remain more iom- 



334 LATIN GRAMMAR [LESSOR 59. 

monly neuter, and are followed either by the dative (according to 
page 157, G.) or by the accusative, with the preposition repeated.* 
E. g. In spem libertatis ingredior, I indulge the hope of liberty. Ad 
me adire quosdam memini, I remember certain persons coming to me. 
Aqua subit in coelum, The water rises into the atmosphere. 

3. To the neuter verbs, which sometimes become transitive, must 
be added those compounded with the prepositions a, ab. cum, c, and 
ex. E. g. Colloquium abnuere, to decline an interview: societatem 
colre, to enter into association with : edormvre crapulam, to sleep off 
the effects of drinking ; egredi r> riia < m. to go beyond the limits of' the 
truth; convenlre aliquem, to inert any one (speak with one); altUudi- 
nem excedere, to exceed a certain height, ,\ . 

4. Transitive verb-, compounded with the prepositions ad, circum, 
praelcr, and trans, arc sometimes followed by two a ;cusatives, of which 
one depends upon the verb and the other on the preposition. E. L r . 
Corcyram peditum milk secum advexerunt, They brought along with 
them a thousand infantry to Corcyra. omnia sua praesidia 
circumduxib He led all his forces around the Allobroges. Argesilaus 
Hellespohtum <-"j)i<i* trajecit, Agesilaus sent his troops across the Hel- 
lespont. 

B. The impersonal verb- j»>< mtet, piget, pudet, taedet, mtse- 
rct. and verttum est are followed by the accusative of the person 
affected by the emotions denoted by them. 1.. . 

Poenltet me" (tS, e*um). I am (yon are. he is) Borrj.f 

Pfeei me* (te, eum). I am (you are, he is) chagrined. 

Pudet no- (vds, We (ye, thei ) are ashamed. 

1 ). We (you, thev) are disgusttd. 

Miseret me (te, eum). I (you) pity, be nil 

Yentum est m€. I have been afraid. 

Remark. — The object of the emotion denoted by these verbs 

stands in the <_r i • 1 1 i 1 1 \ ■ •. E. g. Sapientiam nunquam <\\\ poeniteL — M< 
tmpudet. — T> alidrum miseret. (See Lesson LXVIL C) 

('. Tho impersonal verbs jurat, delectat, faMit, fugit, prae~ 
terit, decet, latet, and oportet are likewise followed by the accu- 
sative of the person. 1 

Jtivat or delectat me, t£, nos. Jt delights me, you, us (I am de- 

lighted, &c.). ' 

* The preposition, however, is al-o frequently a different nno; as, mi nodes 
arc til' re, ad urbi m subire, ad auresprat cedere. Hence many of these verbt 
susceptible of several different constructions; i yum, to submit to the 

yoke; subire moniem or ad moniem, to come up (t<>) the mountain; subire in 
coebtm, to rise up into the ab rubirt muro or murum, to come up i 

to the wall. 

■ This may literally be rendered by It moves mt to regret, chagrin, sk 
disgust, pity, fear. 



LESSON 59.] ACCUSATIVE IN THE SENSE OF "AS TO." 335 

Fallit, fugit, praeterit me. It escapes my memory or notice, I 

do not know. 

Mr non fugit, praeterit. I know very well. 

Ne'minem vestrum praeterit. Every one of you is aware. 

Te hilari ammo esse, valde me I am delighted that you are in good 

juvat. spirits. 

Nos, nisi me fdllit, jacebimus. Unless I am mistaken, we shall fail. 

Ndn me fugit, Vetera exempla I know very well, that the exam- 
pro fictis fabulis jam haberi. pies of antiquity are now regard- 
ed a> fictions. 

Non me praeterit* usum esse dpti- I am aware, that practice is the 

mum dicendi magistrum. best teacher of oratory. 

Quos non verlium est in voluptate Who were not afraid to assert 

Bummum bdnum ponere. pleasure to be the highest good 

Remarks. 

1. The impersonal verbs of tin-; class differ from those of B by 
sometimes admitting a subject nominative, although never a personal 
one. E. g. Candida pax homines, trux decet ira feras t Gentle peace 
becomes men, ruthless ferocity wild beasts. 

2. J)>r</, " it becomes," with its compounds, '., dedecet, inde- 
ed, and oporti t. never occur with the accusative alone, but always with 
an infinitn e or with tin- Ace. cum Inf., and oport* i sometimes with the 
subjunctive. E. g. Decet verecundum es»i adolescentem* 1\ \< proper 
for a young man to he respectful. Oratorem simuldn non dedecet, It 
is no t improper for an orator to dissemble. Eum oportet amnem quae- 
/■'/■' ></'>, lie must Beek a river. M- ipsum ames oportet, non mxi, 
You must love me, and not my possessions. Suis U oportet ilk ct bris 
ipsa virtus trahat ml venti ■ . Virtue herself must attract you with 
her own charms to real honor. 

:;. Decet ami latet are sometimes construed with the dative, hut 
only by the older writers. Thus, /'•/ nobis decet, Thus it become> us. 
Latet mi/ii, I am ignorant of the fact. 

I). After verbs, participles, and adjectives, the accusative i^ 
sometimes put instead of the ablative, to mark the relation ex- 
pressed by ih<- English in, as to, with respect to* I 

Equus micat aiiribus el tremit The horse moves its ears and trem- 

drtus. bles in its limits. 

Pontificem praeire jiissil verba. He ordered the pontifex to say the 

words before him.* 

Ingdnium placida moUimur ab Our mind is rendered pliable and 

arte. soft by placid art f 

Virgo ini'irifiir teneras rubdre The maiden's tender cheeks are 

(/>' suffused with blushes.} 

* Lit. togobefori (or Jirst) as to i need. 

t hit. We ail n //■■'. as to '"if mi 

I Lit. The maidi u is .<wm,>. <i as (<• ht r < keeks. 



336 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 59. 

Adver sum femur tragula graviter He fell, heavily wounded in the 

ictus ceeiuit. front of liis thigh by a javelin. 

Tacita ciira dnimum incensus. His mind inflamed with silent anx- 

iety. 
Nudae brdcMa ac lacertos. Bare as to their arms and shoulders. 

Remarks. 

1 . This construction is of Greek origin, and occurs chiefly in po- 
etry. It is called synecdoche. 

2. Among the accusatives thus representing other cases, and ren- 
dered by in, for, of as to, with respect to, are included, — 

a.) The following, which frequently occur in prose even : mag- 
n am partem, in a great measure, mostly; maximam partem, for the 
most part ; partim (= partem), in part, partly; vicem (= vice), in- 
stead of; id genus (for ejus generis), of that kind; omne genus (for 
omnis generis), of every kind ; summum, at the utmost ; minimum, at 
least ; cetera, in other respects ; reliqua, as for the rest. 

b.) The neuter accusatives hoc, id, illud, quid, quod, aliquid, ndiil, 
and nonnihil, in expressions like hoc, id, illud aetatis (= hujus, ejus, 
illlus aetatis), of this, that age ; id temporis or id locorum (for eo tem- 
pore), at that time ; id auctoritdtis (for ea auctoritate), of that author- 
ity. So, Valde id (= in eo) laborandum est, We must seriously aim at 
this. Nihil ego te accusavi, I have accused you in no respect. Quad 
(= cujus) nos poeniteret, Of which it might repent us. A me consili- 
um petis, quid (= cujus) tibi auctor sim, You ask my advice as to 
what plan I would recommend to you. Thebani nihil mod sunt, quan- 
qnam nonnihil succensebant Romanis, The Thebans were moved in no 
respect, although they were somewhat displeased with the Romans. 



To 
from) 



[Furor, ari, atus sum (Dep.). 

steed (pilfer, abstract) fepo,ere,clepsi,cleptum. 
riA ^r J ' \ burrqno, ere, xpui, eptum. 

(alicui aliquid or aliquid 

AB ALIQUO). 

To commit a theft. Furtum faeere (alicujus rei ; alicui 

= on any one). 

E. Obs. Furari is to steal deliberately and maliciously ; chpere, 
to take away clandestinely and meanly, to filch ; surripere, to take 
away secretly, or to abstract. 

Has any one committed a theft Niimquis furtum fecit alicui ? 

on any one ? 

No one has stolen anything from Xemo cuiquam furtum fecit aliquod. 

any one. 

What have they stolen from us ? Quid a nobis furati siint ? 

They have stolen our hay. Furati sunt a nobis foenum. 

Has any one stolen your hat ? Ecquid tibi pi'leum clepsit aliquis ? 

Some one has stolen it. Clepsit eum vero aliquis. 

What have they stolen from you ? Quid est tibi surreptuin ? 

They have stolen nothing from me. Surreptum est mihi nihil. 



LESSON 59.] " OMNIS," " CUNCTUS," " UNIVERSUS.' 



337 



All. Omnis, e ; cunctus, a, um ; univer- 

sus, a, um. 

F. Obs. Omnis signifies " all," " the whole of," and sometimes 
" every." Cunctus generally appears only in connection with a col- 
lective noun, or in the plural, in the sense "all together," or as many 
as there are of a certain class or number. Universus (== unus and 
versus) is " all collectively," " the whole," " entire." 

Omnis ejus (sua) pecunia. 
Omne hdcce vinum. 
Omnes hi liberi. 
Omnes hi liberi bdni. 
Cunctus pdpulus. 
Ciincti cives. 
Familia universa. 



All his money. 

All this wine. 

All these children. 

All these good children. 

The entire people. 

All the citizens (as a body). 

The whole of the (the entire) 

family. 
For three entire days. 
All as a mass, without exception. 
All men. 

Everything which ; all that. 

All the good wine. 
All the good water. 
All the good children. 

To dye, color. 
To color, paint. 
To get anything dyed. 



Black — white. 

Green — red. 
Yellow — gray. 
Brown — blue. 
To dye anything black, 
white, green, &c. 
What color do you wish to dye 

your coat ? 
I wish to dye it black. 
Do you dye your cloth green ? 

No ; I am dying it red. 

Did he get his hat dyed blue ? 



No ; he has got it dyed white. 



29 



Triduum universum. 

Omnes universi. 

6mnes homines ; universi (hdmi- 

a DeS )' 

Omne quod (quodciinque) ; omnia 

quae (quaeciinque). 
6mne vinum bdnum. 
Omnis aqua bona. 
Liberi bdni omnes (ciincti, uni- 
versi). 
( Tingo, ere, nxi, nctum. 
( Colore inficere (feci, fectuni). 

Coldro, are, avi, atum. 
TAliquid colore aliquo inficiendum 
X curare. 

( Aliquid colore aliquo tingi jubere. 
j Ater, atra, atrum — albus, a, um. 
( Niger, ra, rum — candidus, a, um. 
Yiridis, e — ruber, rubra, rubrum. 
Flavus, a, um — canus, a, um. 
Fuscus, a, um — caeriileus, a, um. 
Aliquid colore atro, albo, viridi, 

&c. inficcre. 
Quo colore tdgam tiiam inficerc 

vis ? 
Ciipio eum inficere colore atro. 
Tingisne ptinnum tiium colore 

viridi ? 
Non vero ; tingo eum colore riibro. 
Curavitne pileum siium caenilco 

colore inficiendum ? 
immo vero eum colore albo tingi 
jussit. 



338 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 59. 



The color. 
The dyer. 
The word. 
The speech. 
How is this word written ? 

It is written thus. 

How is his name written ? 

It is written with a z. 

Germany. 

Holland. \ 

England. 

Spain. 

Italy. 

France. 

America. 

The Old TTorld. 

The New World. 

The world. 

The country, land. 

The globe. 

The United States of Amer- 
ica. 

Switzerland. 

Prussia. 

Turkey. 

Rus>ia. 

London. 

Paris. 

New York. 

Rome. 
As far as my brother's. 
As far as England, Switzerland, 

America. 
As far as London, Paris, New 

York. 
As far as the vicinity of Rome. 

To travel; to male (under- 
take) a journey. 

To be on a journey, to be abroad. 

To set out ; to travel towards a 
place. 



Color, oris, 'in. 

Tinctor, oris, in. 

Yerbum, i, n. ; vocabulum, i, n. 

Sermo, onis, m. 

Qudmodo scribitur hdcce vocabu- 
lum ? 

Scribitur hoc piicto. 

Q#dinodo scribitur nomen ejus ? 

Scribitur littera ~. 

Germania ; Alemannia, ae,/ 

Terra (ae,/.) Batavorum. 
*Ho!landia, ae,/. 
♦Anglia, ae,/. : Britannia, ae,/ 

Hispania, ae./ 

Italia, ae,/ 
*Francogaliia, ae,/ 
♦America, ae,/ 
*Orbis antiquus. 
*Orbis novus. 

Mundus, i, m. 

Terra, ae,/ 

Orbk is. ///. ; orbis terrarum. 

Civitates Americae foederatae. 

Helvetia, ae./. 
♦Bornssia, ae,/ 
•Turcia, ae,/ 
*Russia. ae,/ : Ruthenia, ae,/ 

Londimun. i. //. 

Lutetia. ae,/ (Parisii). 
*N6vum Eboracum, i, n. 

Roma, ae,/ 

Usque in do'mum mei fratris. 

Usque in Angliam, Helvetian!, 
Aniericam. 

Usque* Londinum, Lutetiam, Ebo- 
racum Novum. 

Usque ad Romam. 
(Iter facere — / ci, factum. 
< Peregrinaliones su.<cijjtre — susce- 
( pi, susceptum. 
( Peregrinor, ari, atus sum. 
| Peregrinatum abesse — abfui. 

JProficiscor, i, feet us sum. 
Tendo, ere, tetendi, tensum. 
Contendere (aliquo). 



* The ad of usque ad is commonly omitted before the names of towns, unless 
it is intended to express mere approximation. 



LESSON 59.] EXERCISES 114, 115. 339 

When do you intend to start for Quo tempore in Angliam proficisci 

England ? edgitas ? 

I intend to start next summer. Aestate proximo, proficisci edgito. 

In what country is he abroad ? Qua in terra peregrinatur ? 

He is travelling in Holland. Peregrinatur in terra Batavorum. 

How far did he travel ? Quo usque fecit iter ? 

He has travelled across the At- Iter per mare Atlanticum fecit 

Ian tic as far as America. usque in Americam. 

Whither are you bound ? Quo tendis ? 

I am travelling to my brother, Tendo ad fratrem, in Italiam, Lon- 

to Italy, to London. dinum. 

Exercise 114. 

Have they stolen anything from you (has anything been stolen from 
you) ? — They have stolen all the good wine from me. — Have they 
stolen anything from your father? — They have stolen all his good 
books from him — Dost thou steal anything ? — I steal nothing. — 
Hast thou ever stolen anything ? — I have never stolen anything. — 
Have they stolen your apples from you ? — They have stolen them 
from me. — What have they stolen from me? — They have stolen 
from you all the good books. — When did they steal the carriage from 
you ? — They stole it from me the day before yesterday. — Have they 
ever stolen anything from us? — They have never stolen anything 
from us. — Has the carpenter drunk all the -wine ? — He has drunk 
it. — Has your little boy torn all his books ? — He has torn them all. 
— Why has he torn them ? — Because he does not wish to study. — 
How much have you lost (at play) ? — I have lost all my money — 
Do you know where my father is ? — I do not know. — Have you 
not seen my book ? — I have not seen it. — Do you know how this 
word is written ? — It is written thus. — Do you dye anything ? — I 
dye my hat. — What color do you dye it ? — I dye it black. — What 
color do you dye your clothes ? — We dye them yellow. — Are you 
sorry? — I am not sorry. — Is he chagrined? — He is very much 
(vedde) chagrined. — Are they not ashamed? — They are ashamed 
and disgusted. — Are you delighted that your brother has come ? — 
I am very much delighted. — Do you know that your book has been 
stolen? — It has not escaped my notice that it has been stolen. — Are 
you addressing me ? — I am not addressing you, but the stranger (who 
is) standing by your side. 

Exercise 115. 

Do you get your trunk dyed ? — I get it dyed. — What color do 
you get it dyed ? — I get it dyed green. — What color dost thou get 
thy thread stockings dyed ? — I get them dyed white. — Does your 
cousin get his handkerchief dyed ? — He does get it dyed. — Does he 
get it dyed red ? — He gets it dyed gray. — What color have your 
friends got their coats dyed ? — They "have got them dyed green. — 
What color have the Italians had their carriages dyed ? — They have 
had them dyed blue. — What hat has the nobleman ? — He has two 
hats, a white one and a black one. — Have I a hat ? — You have sev- 



340 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 60. 

eral. — Has your dyer already dyed your cravat ? — He Las dyed it. 

— What color has he dyed it ? — He has dyed it yellow. — l)o you 
travel sometimes ? — I travel often. — Where do you intend to go to 
this summer ? — I intend to go to Germany — Do you not go to 
Italy ? — I do go thither. — Hast thou sometimes travelled ? — I have 
never travelled. — Have your friends the intention to go to Holland ? 

— They have the intention to go thither. — When do they intend to 
depart V — They intend to depart the day after to-morrow. — Has 
your brother already gone to Spain ? — He has not yet gone thither. 

— Have you travelled in Spain ? — I have travelled there. — When 
do you depart ? — I depart to-morrow. — At what o'clock V — At five 
o'clock in the morning. — Have you worn out all your boots i — I 
have worn them all out. — What have the Turks done '/ — They have 
burnt all our good ships. — Have you finished all your letters ? — I 
have finished them all. — How far have you travelled? — I have 
travelled as far as Germany. — Has he travelled as far as Italy ? — 
He has travelled as far as America. — How far have the Spaniards 
gone ? — They have gone as far as London. — How far has this poor 
man come ? — He has come as far as here. — lias he come as far as 
your house '? — lie has come as far as my father's. 



Lesson LX. — PENSUM SEXAGESIMUM. 

YI.UBS FOLLOWED BY TWO ACCUSATIVES. 

A. The verb docere^ lt to teach," with its compounds 
edocere and dedocere, and celdre, "to conceal," admit 
of two accusatives, one designating the person and the 
other the thing taught or concealed. E. g. 

Qui's musicam docuit Epaminon- Who taught Epaminondas music ? 

dam f 
Catilina juvt ntutem, quam illexe- Catiline was instructing the young 
rat mala facinora edocebat men. whom he seduced, in per- 

nicious crimes. 
Demdcritus Polyaenum geome- Democritus wanted to make Folv- 

trimn vol ait dedoeere. a?nus unlearn geometry. 

2son te celavi sermonem Appii. I have not concealed from you the 

language of Appius. 
Antigonus iter 6/nnes celat. Antiironus concealed his route from 

every one. 

Remarks. 

1. These verbs occur frequently with one accusative only, and do- 
cere sometimes without any case, like the English " to teach," " to 



LESSON 60.] VERBS WITH TWO ACCUSATIVES. 341 

instruct." Thus: docere edocere, celdre aliquem, allquid or aliquem 
aliquid : — dedocere aliquem, or aliquem aliquid. 

2. ^Vhen docere and edocere signify " to inform," the thing is ex- 
pressed by the ablative with de. E. g. De ilinere hostium senatum 
edocet, He informed the senate of the enemy's route. Sulla de Ids re- 
bus docetur, Sulla is informed of these things. So also celdre aliquem 
de re. 

3. An infinitive may take the place of the accusative of the thing. 
E. g. Dionysius tondere Jilias suas docuit, Dionysius taught his daugh- 
ters to shave. 

4. When the construction becomes passive, the accusative of the 
person is changed into the nominative, and that of the thing either 
remains or is changed into the ablative, with or without de. E. g. 
Onirics militiae artes edoctus, Schooled in all the arts of war. Et 
Graecis ductus litteris et Latlnis, Learned both in Greek and Latin 
literature. Per legates cuncla edoctus. Informed of everything by his 
agents. Hoc, id, Hind celabar, I was kept ignorant of that. Non est 
vrofecto de illo veneno celata mater, The mother was surely not kept 
ignorant of that poison. 

5. Other verbs signifying " to instruct" (such as erudio, insiruo, 
instituo, and informd) do not admit an accusative of the thing, but 
have either the ablative or in. L. g. His in rebus jam te usus ipse 
erudlcit, In these things experience itself has already taught you. 
Jphicrates exercitum omni discipline militari erudivit, Iphicrates in- 
structed the army in every military discipline. 

B. Verbs signifying to inquire, to ask, or demand, 
likewise admit of two accusatives: one of the person, 
and the other of the thing. 

Such verbs are rogo, oro, exoro ; posco, reposco, flagito ; interrogo, 
exqulro, consul o, percontor, &c. E. g. 

Moo jure te hoc beneftcium rogo. I ask you for this favor, as one to 

which I am entitled. 
Nunquam deos divit ias rogdvi. I have never asked the gods for 

riches. 
Orationes me duas pdstulas. You are demanding two orations of 

me. 
Pacem ie dmnes poscimus. We all ask (siu?) you for peace. 

Caesar Ae'duos frumentum quo- Caesar was dunning the JEtmi every 

tidie flagitabat day for supplies of corn. 

Ibo et crfnsulam hanc rem ami- I will go and consult my friends 

cos. about this thing. 

Sunt, quae te voluinus percon- There are matters, about which Ave 
tari. wish to question (examine) you. 

Remarks. 

j . Verbs of asking or demanding sometimes have also aliquid ab 
atiquo, and those of asking or inquiring aliquem de aliqua re. E. g. 
2Q * 



3-42 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 60. 



Quid acta Uia vita, quid stucUa, quid artes a tejlagitent, tu videbis, See 
yourself, what your past life, your studies and science demand of you. 
Visne, ut te eisdem de rebus Latlne interrogem ? Do you wish me to 
ask you about the same things in Latin V So also te oro, te rogo, ut, 
&c. 

2. After peto, I ask (beseech), and quaero, I ask or inquire, the 
double accusative never occurs, but the construction of those verbs is 
petere aliquid ab aliquo, or petere ab aliquo, ut or ne, and quaerere 
aliquid ab (de, ex) aliquo. E. g. Quod ne facias peto a te, Which I 
beseech you not to do. Eadem secreto ab aliis quaerit, He makes the 
same inquiry secretly of others. 

C. Verbs signifying to name or call, to esteem, con- 
sider, learn or find, to make, render, constitute, choose, 
and the like, are followed by two accusatives, of which 
one constitutes the object and the other a part of the 
predicate. 

Such are dlco, voco, appello, nomino, nuncupo, I call, name, nomi- 
nate ; — duco, habeo, judlco, existuno, puto, arbltror, I hold, esteem, 
consider, think ; — intelllgo, agnosco, reperio, invenio, I perceive, learn, 
find ; — fcicio, reddo, creo, detigo, designo, declaro, I make, render, 
create, choose, designate, declare ; — me praebeo, me exhibeo, me prae- 
sto, I show or prove myself, and others of similar import. E. g. 

Jram bene Ennlus initlum insa- Ennius has correctly called anger 
niae dixit. the beginning of madness. 

The stars which the Greeks call 
comets, are called long-hairs 
among us. 
His adherents hailed Octavius as 



Quds Stellas Graeci cometas, nd- 
stri crinitas vocant. 



Octdvium sui Catsarem saluta- 
bant. 

Epamindndas philosdphiae prae- 
ceptorem habuit Lysim. 

Fulmen sinistrum auspicium opti- 
mum habemus. 

Socrates totius miindi se incolam 
et clvem arbitrabatur. 

L. Muraenam cdnsulem renunti- 
avi. 

Ancum Mdrcium regem pdpulus 
creavit. 

Ciceronem universa civitas cdnsu- 
lem declaravit. 

Caesar Cavdrium regem constitu- 
erat. 

Ponrpeius se auctorem meae salutis 
exhibuit. 



emperor. 

Epaminondas had Lysis as an in- 
structor in philosophy. 

We consider thunder from the left 
as the most auspicious omen. 

Socrates considered himself an in- 
habitant and citizen of the entire 
world . 

I announced Lucius Muraena as 
consul. 

The people created Ancus Marcius 
king. 

The entire state declared Cicero 
consul. 

Caesar had appointed Cavarius 
king. 

Pompey has shown himself the 
author of my safety. 



lesson 60.] accusative after particles. 313 

Remarks. 

1. In the passive construction of these verbs, the accusatives arc 
both converted into nominatives, of which one stands as the subject, 
and the other as part of the predicate. E. g. Ira bene ab Ennio ini- 
tium insaidae dictum est. — Oetavius a suis Caesar salutabatur. — 
Ancus Marcius rex a populo creatus est, &c. (Cf. Lesson XXXIV. C.) 

2. An adjective or participle may supply the place of the second 
accusative. E. g. Bene de me mentis gratum me praebeo, I show my- 
self grateful to those who have done me favors. Scytharum [/ens anti- 
quissima semper habita est, The Scythian nation has always been con- 
sidered the most ancient. So also the common expression aliquem 
certiurem facere, to inform any one (of anything, alicujus ret or de 
aliqua re), in the passive certior /actus sum, I am informed ; and red- 
dere aliquem irdtum, placid urn, mcliorem, to make any one angry, calm, 
better, &c. 

3. Instead of a second accusative, the verbs habere and picture, " to 
consider," frequently have^ro with an ablative, or loco, numc.ro or in 
numero with the genitive. E. g. Aliquem pro amico, pro hoste habere, 
To regard any one as a friend, as an enemy. Aliquid pro certo, pro 
nilrilo putdre or habere, To consider anything as certain, as of no ac- 
count. Aliquem in numero deorum habere, To consider one a divinity. 
Aliquid benejicii loco numerdre, To regard anything as a kindness. So 
also ad, " as " : Trecentos armdtos ad cuslodiam corporis habuit, lie had 
a body-guard of three hundred men. 

4. The accusatives are sometimes connected by esse, E. g. Patriae 
sanctiorajura quam hospitii esse duxit, He considered the rights of his 
country more sacred than those of hospitality. 

D. THE ACCUSATIVE AFTER PARTICLES. 

I. In exclamations the accusative is put after the interjections 
o, hen, elieu, ecce, en, Item, pro, bene, and frequently also without 
them. E. g. 

lieu (elieu) me miserum ! or Me Alas ! Wo is me ! 

miser um! 

O hdminem fortundtum 1 O fortunate man ! 

Popiilum vero praecldrum ! O people truly great and noble ! 

Ecce me ! En miserum hominem ! Here I am ! Behold an unhappy 

man ! 

Pro deorum atque hdminum fi- For heaven and mercy's sake ! 

dem ! 

Hem Ddvum tibi ! There 's Davus now for you ! 

Et bene nos I bene te ! And our health ! your health !* 

Remarks. 
1. All these interjections may likewise be followed by the vocative. 

* An expression used in drinking. Ovid. Fast. 2. 637. 



344 LA.TIH GRAMMAR. [LESSON* CO. 

Vae and lici are commonly put -with the dative. E. g. Vae mihl mtse- 
ru ! Ah ! wretched me ! Hei mite .' Wo is me ! 

2. En and ecce are more frequently put with the nominative. E. g. 
Eccehomo! Behold the man ! Eccetuat litterae! Here is your letter 1 
En ego ! ilere I am ! But in comedy usually eca me, eccum (= ecce 
cum), eccos, eccillum, eccillam, eccistam. (Cf. page o7, Rem. 2.) 

II. The prepositions ad, apud, ante, adversus and adversum, 
cis and citra, circa and circum, circtter, contra, erga, extra, in- 
fra, inter, intra, juxta, ob, penes, per, pone, post, praeter, prope, 
propter, secundum, supra, trans, versus, and ukra, arc invariably 
followed by the accusative ; in and sub only in answer to the 
question Wkitherf 

Remarks. 

1. These prepositions generally precede words governed by them, 
except versus, which i> commonly put after. E. g. Brundusium versus, 
Towards Brundusium. Ad oceanwn versus, Towards the ocean* 

2. Super and subter commonly take likewise tli<' accusative, but 
sometimes also the ablative. (Cf. Lesson LXX1I. h. Rem.) ( 'him, 
" without the knowledge of," has commonly the ablative, but some- 
times also the accusative or genitive. E.g. Clam vobis. Clam pa- 
trim atque omnes. < lam patns. 

Up, above : in the upper part, ( Supra : super (adv.). 

on tin top (Best). ( Tnsummo,* ir. superiSri parte. 

Up, upwards (Motion). Sursum (adv.); adsummum. 

Below, down, in On lower C Infra % subter (adv.). 

jiurt (Rest). ( /" mi", in inferibri pa 

Down, dowmcards (Motion). Deorsum (adv.); adltnum. 

, ■ , , ( I » . • rm (adv. ). 

From abovi down. - , , ' , . v J 

( I >, sup nun loco. 

From top to bottom. A sammo ad imum. 

From the foot (bottom) to the Ab imo ad summum, 
top. 

O.i . r.i i mi ( 1" Biirnmo cdlle. 

u the toil of the lull. . . . .... 

1 , lu superior] parte coins. 

In the lower part (basement) of J lu unaddmo. 

the house. ( lu inferidri parte don 

At the foot of the mountain. Bub radfcibua mdnns. 

ri' t ] . e (1 i -11 * Ad summum collem. 

lo till' top ot till' lull. - T ... 

1 ( In supenorem partem coins. 

Into the lower part of the house. ( ^ ,m;u " ddmum : . . 

1 ( In intenorem partem domus. 

To be up, below. < Su™(insummo) 

^ Intra (in imo; esse. 



erally summo, a, o, in aureomcnt with the noun; as, in sammo mmitc, 
in gumma urlOrc So also h,n:s, a, urn, 176.) 



LESSOX 60.] " CIS," " CITRA," " TRANS," " ULTRA." 345 



To go upward?, downward. 
To come from above. 

To go up, to ascend. 

To come down, to descend. 

To ascend (no up) a mountain. 
To mount a horse, to embark in 

a ship. 

:end (rise) to dignify, to 

honors. 
To L f «-t into a carriage, npon the 

mast 
To descend from a more elevated 

ion into the plains. 
To ascend, descend a river 

Where is your father L r <>ii)<_ r t<> ? 
lie is ascending tin- mountain. 
Has the boy ascended the tree ? 
1 [e li i- ascended it. 
Does he not wish to come < 
down ? ( 

Yes, he docs wish it 

Arc \ou on the top of the house ? 

Xo. I am in the basement 

On this snh (Rest). 

To this suit ( Motion). 

On that sidt . h yond ( Resi ) 

lb that snh .h i, nnil ( M< »tion ). 

To live (to be Bituate) on this, 
on the other Bide of the Rhine. 

To conic to tin-; Bide ot' ilie river 

i i to that Bide (beyond, 
across) the hill. 

Js he on tlii- side or on that ? 

lie is bevond. 



Hither, in this direction. 
Thither, in thai direction. 



Siirsum, dedrsum ire. 
Desuper, superne venire. 

Ascendo* trc, di, sum. 
Escendo, ere, di, sum. 

(MONTEM, IN, AD LOCUM). 

Descendere (ab, de, ex loco — in, 

ad li»- urn) 
Ascendere mo'ntcm. 
Ascendere in equum, in ml vim. 

Ascendere gradum dignitatis, ad 

honores. 
Escendere vehiculum, in malum. 

Ex superidribua Idcis in planitiem 

descendere. 
Adverso flumine, Becundo fliimine 

velii. 

Qud tendit pater tiius ? 
adit (in) mdntem, 
Escenditne piier (in) arborem? 
Escendit \t'-ro. 
NTdnne descendere cupit ? 
NTdnne dedrsum venire Nult'.-' 
fta dst, eupit. 
Esne in summa ddmo ? 

Iinino \ i-ro in una slim. 

i ( Prep, ct Adv.). 
( 'is, citra ( Prep. cum Ace). 
Trans, rrep. et Adv.). 

Trans, ultra (Prep, cum Ace). 

Cis, trans Rhdnum incdlere (situm 

■t 
( is (citra) tinmen ventre. 
Trans (ultra) cdllem abire. 

tjtrum est citra an ultra ? 

I'ltra est 

I luc ; horsum (ado,). 

In hunc Idcum. 

Illuc; illorsum, istorsum (adv ). 



* Compounded of ad+ senndo (T climb). So etcendo = ex -\- senndo ; <t>- 
sci ndo = de -+- scando. The first and Becond of these verba may be used either 
transitively with the accusative, or intransitively with the preposition in, "'/, 
&c. The last of them [descendere) is always neuter. 

t This is sometimes expressed by a compound of cm; as cisnlpinvs, cttrher- 
n&mu, cismontaniu, living or situate on this Bide u( the Alps, Bhine, mountain. 
And again transalpinus, transmarinvs, &c. 



346 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 60. 



The hill, the mountain. 
The river, stream. 

The present, gift. < 

The new-year's present. 
To make one a present of 



anything {To present one 
with anything). 

To receive something as a 
present from any one. 

To give back again, to re- \ 
turn, restore. 

Did he return you your book 

again ? 
Pie has returned it. 
From whom did your brother 

receive a new-year's present 

this year ? 
He received one from his father. 
Did he ever make you a pres- f 

ent ? \ 

He has already made many \ 

presents. ( 

Will you return (restore) me 

my little presents ? 
I am not willing. 
Have you already commenced 

your letter ? 
I have not yet begun it. 
Must our presents be returned ? 

They are not to be returned. 
Must I ascend the hill ? 
It must be ascended. 

Whence ? Where from ? 
Out of (an enclosed place). 

Where do you come from ? 
I come from the garden. 
Where did your brother come 

from this evening ? 
He came from the theatre. 
Where are those men coming 

from ? 



Collis, is, m. ; mons, tis, m. 

Amnis, is, m.; flumen, inis, n. 

Fluvius, i, m. 

Donum, i, n. • miinus, eris, n. 

Miinusculum, i, n. 

Strena, ae,/! 

Dcire alicui aliquid dono (muneri).* 
Aliquem aliqua re dondre. 
Alicui aliquid dondre. 

Dono (muneri) accipere aliquid ab 

aliquo. 
Reddo, ere, didi, ditum. 
Restltuo, ere, ui, utum. 

(alicui aliquid). 

Eeddiditne (restituitne) tibi librum 

ilium ? 
Reddidit vero. Restifcuit. 
A quo accepit hocce anno frater 

tiius strenam ? 

Accepit unam a patre. 
Deditne tibi linquam aliquid dono ? 
Donavitne te linquam aliqua re ? 
Dedit mihi jam multa muneri. 
Donavit mihi vero jam multa. 
Xiim vis milii muniiscula mea re- 

stitiiere ? 
Non vdlo. Kdlo. 
Fecistine jam initium epistolae scri- 

bendae ? 
Ndndum feci. 
Niimquid miinera nostra restitu- 

enda siint ? 
Restituenda non siint. 
Estne mihi collis ascendendus ? 
Est vero ascendendus. 

TJnde ? Ex (a) quo loco f 
Ex, e (Prep, cum Abl.). 

"Unde venis ? 

Venio ex hdrtulo. 

Unde (ex quo loco) venit frater 

tiius hddie vesperi ? 
Ye nit a theatre 
Unde homines llli veniunt ? 



* On this second dative (" for or as a present"), compare Lesson LXIII. B. 



LESSON 60.] PHRASES AND EXERCISES. 



347 



They have descended from the 
mountain. 

To be worth. 

To be worth so much, how 
(as) much, more, less. 

To be worth ten sesterces, two 
hundred pounds of gold. 

To be worth much, very much, 
most, little, least, nothing. 

How much may that horse be 

worth ? 
It is worth about a hundred 

crowns. 
This is worth more, less than 

that one. 
The one is not worth so much 

as the other. 

How much is this thing worth ? 

This is not worth much. 

That is worth nothing. 

You are not worth it. 

To be better or worth more 
(To excel). 

Am I not as good as my brother ? 

You are better (worth more) 

than he. 
I am not as good as you. 
This is preferable (better). 
He excels all his fellow-students. 



Descenderunt de mdnte. 
( Valeo, ere, ui, itum (aliquo pre- 

•} TIO). 

[ Allcajus pretii esse. 
Tanti, quant i, pluris, minoris (sc. 
pretii), valere.* 

Decern sestertiis, ducentisf pondo 
auri valere. 

Magno, permagno, plurimo, parvo, 
minimo, nihllo (sc. pretio) va- 
lere. 
(, Quanti circiter pretii iste equus est ? 
\ Quanti fortiisse valet iste equus ? 

Centum circiter thalerum est. 

Valet fortasse centum thaleris. 

Hie pluris, minoris valet quam ille. 

file (alter) non tanti valet, quanti 
alter. 

Quanti pretii haec res est ? 

Quanti haec res valet ? 
j Haec res parvi pretii est. 
( Haec res parvo valet. 
( Hoc nullius pretii est. 
( Hoc nihllo valet. 

Tanti non es. 

Meliorem or praeferendum esse. 
Praestare, antecellere (alicui). 

Ndnne ego tanti sum, quanti frater 

meus ? 
I mmo vero melior (pluris) es. 

Tanti non sum ego, quanti tu. 
Hoc praestat (preferendum e'st). 
Commilitdnibus suis omnibus ante- 
cellit. 



Exercise 116. 

Do you call me ? — I do call you. — Where are you ? — I am on 
the mountain ; are you coming up ? — I am not coming up. — Where 
are you ? — I am at the foot of the mountain ; will you come down ? 
— I cannot come down. — Why can you not come down ? — Because 



* And so also iantldem, just so much; quanttvis and quanUcunque, whatever. 
But never magni, parvi, &c. (Cf. Lesson LXVII. A.) 

t And so always the ablative, when the value is definitely given by a sub- 
stantive, or by magno, permagno, &c. (Cf. Lesson LXXI. A.) 



348 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 60. 

I have sore feet. — Where does your cousin live ? — He lives on this 
side of the river. — Where is the mountain ? — It is on that side of 
the river. — Where stands the house of our friend ? — It stands on 
that side of the mountain. — Is the garden of your friend on this or 
that side of the wood ? — It is on that side. — Is our storehouse not 
on that side of the road ? — It is on this side. — Where have you been 
this morning ? — I have been on the great mountain. — How many 
times have you gone up the mountain ? — I have gone up three times. 

— Is our father below or above ? — He is above. — Have the neigh- 
bor's boys given you your books back again ? — They have given 
them to me back again. — When did they give them back again to 
you ? — They gave them back again to me yesterday. — To whom 
have you given your stick ? — I have given it to the nobleman. — To 
whom have the noblemen given their gloves ? — . They have given 
them to Englishmen. — To which Englishmen have they given them ? 

— To those whom you have seen this morning at my house. — To 
Avhich people do you give money ? — I give some to those to whom 
you give some. — Do you give any one money? — I give some to 
those who want any. — Who has taught you music? — No one; I 
have never learned music. — Did your brother conceal his purpose 
(consilium) from you ? — He did not conceal it from me. — Did he 
ask you for anything ? — He asked me for some money. — What did 
the stranger question you about ? — He questioned me about the 
way. — Whom did you have for a master ? — I had an Englishman 
and a German for masters (praeceptures) . 

Exercise 117. 

Have you received presents? — I have received some. — What 
presents have you received ? — I have received fine presents. — Has 
your little brother received a present ? — He has received several. — 
From whom has he received any ? — He has received some from my 
father and from yours. — Do you come out of the garden ? — I do not 
come out of the garden, but out of the house. — Where are you going 
to ? — I am going into the garden. — Whence comes the Irishman ? 

— He comes from the garden. — Does he come from the same garden 
from which you come ? — He does not come from the same. — From 
which garden does he come ? — He comes from that of our old friend. 

— W hence comes your boy ? — He comes from the play. ■ — How 
much is that carriage worth ? — It is worth five hundred crowns. — Is 
this book worth as much as that ? — It is worth more. — How much 
is my horse worth ? — It is worth as much as that of your friend. — 
Are your horses worth as much as those of the French ? — They are 
not worth so much. — How much is that knife worth ? — It is worth 
nothing. — Is your servant as good as mine ? — He is better than 
yours. — Are you as good as your brother ? — He is better than I. — 
Art thou as good as thy cousin ? — I am as good as he. — Are we as 
good as our neighbors ? — We are better than they ? — Is your um- 
brella as good as mine ? — It is not worth so much. — Why is it not 
worth so much as mine ? — Because it is not so fine (iion aeque ele- 



LESSON 61.] 



SYNTAX OF THE DATIVE. 



349 



gans) as yours. — Do you wish to sell your horse ? — I do wish to sell 
it. — How much is it worth '? — It is worth two hundred florins. — Do 
you wish to buy it ? — I have bought one already. — Does your father 
intend to buy a horse ? — He does intend to buy one, but not 
yours. 



Lesson LXL — pensum unum et sexagesi- 
mal 

SYNTAX OF THE D ATI YE. 

A. The dative is the case of the remote object, and serves to desig- 
nate that for or with respect to which, or the person for whose benefit 
or detriment* the agent acts, or that with reference to which it is 
possessed of certain attributes Hence the predicate, with which the 
dative is connected, may be either a transitive verb, a neuter verb, an 
adjective, or an adverb. 

B. The dative after transitive verbs denotes the per- 
son or object, with reference to which an action is per- 
formed, and stands in answer to the question To whom ? 
or For whom ? E. g. 

The father gave his son a book. 

Give bread to the poor. 

Pisistratus conquered the Mega- 
renses for his own benefit, and 
not for that of his country. 

By sacrificing your personal enmi- 
ties to the common weal, you 
have won a conquest over your- 
self. 

Many have left us records of the 
wars of Hannibal. 

Zaleucus and Charondas wrote 
laws for the benefit of their 
states. 

As to the extent of the concessions 
we are expected to make to cus- 
tom and to fame, let that be de- 
termined by the living. 

Remarks. 
1. The accusative is often omitted, or its place supplied by an 
entire clause. E.g. Tibi aras, tibi occas, tibi seris, tibi eidem metis, 



Pater filio li'brum dedit. 
Date ip'dnem pauper ibus . 
Pisistratus sibi, non patriae Me- 
garenses vicit. 

Tu tiias inimicitias ut reipublicae 
dondres te vicisti. 



Hannibalis bella gesta miilti me- 
moriae prodiderunt. 

Zaleucus et Charondas leges civi- 
tdtibus suis conscripse'runt. 

Quantum consuetudini famaeque 
ddndum sit, id curent vivi. 



* In this dense it is commonly called the Datlvus commodi vel incommodi. 

30 



350 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 61. 

• 
You plough, harrow, and sow for yourself, and for your benefit you 
also reap. Promilto tibi, tegulam ilium in Italia nullam reliclurum, I 
assure you he will not leave a tile on a roof in Italy. 

2. When the verb becomes passive, the dative remains as before. 
E. g. Liber filio a patre ddtus, A book given by a father to his son. 
Dalor pdnis pauperlbus, Let bread be given to the poor. Megarenses 
a Pisistrato ipsi, non patriae victi sunt. 

C. The dative after neuter verbs represents the person 
with reference to whom, or for whose benefit, anything is done 
or exists. E. g. 

Mihi quidem esurio, non tibi. I am hungry on my own account, 

and not on yours. 
Non solum nobis divites esse vd- We desire to be rich, not only for 
lumus, sed liber is, propinquis, our own benefit, but for that 
amicis, maximeque reipublicae. of our children, relations, and 

friends, and especially for that 
of the republic. 
Civitas Romana parum olim va- The Roman nation formerly had 
cabat liberdlibus disc'qjlinis. but little leisure for the liberal 

arts and sciences. 
Plures in Asia miilieres singulis In Asia several women are accus- 
viris sdlent nubere. tomed to get married to one 

husband. 
Neque Cae'sari solum sed etiam Nor will I supplicate Caesar alone, 
amicis ejus omnibus supp>licdbo.* but all his friends besides. 

Remarks. 

1. The pronominal datives mihi, tibi, sibi, nobis, and vobis often imply 
merely a remote interest or curiosity on the part of the speaker. 
E. g. Quid mihi Celsus agit ? What, pray, is Celsus after ? Quid tibi 
vis, insane ? What do you want, insensate man ? Quid sibi velit, non 
intelligo, I do not understand what he is after. Quid ait tandem 
nobis Sannio ? What has Sannio to say for himself? 

2. After the verbs esse, fore, suppetere, deesse, and defit, the dative 
denotes the person in possession or in want of the object designated 
by the nominative. E. g. Sunt mihi libri, I have books. Est homini 
cum Deo similitudo, Man has a resemblance to the Deity. An nescis, 
longas regibus esse manus ? Or are you not aware, that kings have long 
hands ? Si cauda mihi foret, If I had a tail. Si vita (mihi) suppetet, 
If I have life left (if life remains). Lac mihi novum non aestate, non 
frigore defit, I have no lack of fresh milk either in summer or in 
winter. Cui res non suppetat, (ei) verba non desint, (The orator) who 
has a poor subject, should have words at his command. 

* The verb supplicare = supplux esse. The nubere of the preceding example 
properly signifies " to put on the veil," and with alicui viro, " to put on the 
marriage-veil for a man," i. e. to marry him. 



LESSON 61.] DATIVE AFTER ADJECTIVES. 351 



DATIVE AFTER ADJECTIVES. 

_D. The dative stands after adjectives and adverbs 
as the end or object for or against which the quality de- 
noted by them is represented as existing in the subject. 
E. g. 

Cunctis esto bemgnus, nullis blan- You should be kind to every one, 

dus, paucis familiaris, omnibus a flatterer of no one, intimate 

aequus. with few, just towards all men. 

Piiblius dictator leges secundissi- Publius, the dictator, promulgated 

mas plebi, adversas nobilitdti laws in favor of the people and 

tul it. opposed to the nobility. 

The adjectives thus followed by the dative are quite numer- 
ous. They are those signifying, — 

1. Like or unlike, similar or dissimilar: — par, impar, dis- 
par, aequalis; similis, assimilis, consimilis, dissimilis, absimXlis, discolor. 
E. g. Canis lupo similis est, The dog resembles the wolf. Proximo 
regi dissimilis, Unlike the preceding king. Ennio aequalis fuit Liuius, 
Livy was contemporary with Ennius.* 

2. Useful or Injurious : — utilis, bonus, saluber, salutaris, fruc- 
tuosus ; inutilis, noxius, funestus, pestifer. damnosus, perniciosus, &c. 
E. g. SalubrXor meliorque inopi, quam potenti, More salutary, and 
better for poor than for rich men. Ratio pestifer a multis, admodum 
paucis salutaris est, Reason is destructive to many, and advantageous 
to few. Universae Graeciae utilis, f Useful to entire Greece. 

3. Pleasant or Unpleasant : — gratus, acceptus, dulcis, jucun- 
dus, laetus, suavis ; ingrdtus, injucundus, molestus, gravis, acerbus, tri- 
stis, &c. E. g. Scientiae suavitate nihil est hominibus jucundius, Noth- 
ing is more agreeable to men than the sweetness of knowledge. 
Romulus mullitudini gratior fuit, quam patribus, Romulus was more 
acceptable to the masses than to the senate. Verebdris, ne mihi gravis 
esses, You were afraid of becoming troublesome to me. 

4. Inclined, friendly, dear, and their opposites averse, hos- 
tile : — amicus, benevolus, carus, familiaris, aequus, fldus, fdelis, 
propensus, propitius, secundus ; adversus, alienus, inimlcus, contrarius, 
infensus, &c. E. g. Non fortunae, sed hominibus amicus, Friendly 
(= a friend) % to men and not to fortune. Uni aequus virtuti atque 



* The' adjectives similis, dissimilis, par, and impar are also followed by the 
genitive, especially when they denote similarity of character or intellect. E. g; 
mei, tui, sid, nostri, vestri similis, like me, you, &c, or my, your, &c. equal. 
Dispar sui, unlike itself. Cnjus paucos pares haec civitas tulit, Like whom this 
state has produced but few. — Aequalis, in the sense of "contemporary," is 
more commonly followed by the genitive ; as, ejus aequalis. Also substantive- 
ly with an adjective; as, meus aequalis. 

t But also' utilis or inutilis ad aliquid. E. g. Homo ad nullam rem utilis, a 
man fit for nothing. - 

X Amicus, inimlcus, and familiaris are properly adjectives, and stand as such 



352 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 61. 

ejus amicis, Friendly to virtue alone, and to its friends. Antonius 
Galliam sibi infestani inimicamque cognovit, Antonius learnt that Gaul 
was hostile to him. Illi causae maxime est alienum* It is entirely 
irrelevant to that case. 

5. Near or adjoining : — viclnus, Jinitimus, confinis, contcrminus, 
propior, proximus. E. g, Proximus sum egomet mihi, I am my nearest 
neighbor. AetJiiopia Aegypto est contermina, ^Ethiopia is contermi- 
nous with Egypt. Mala sunt viclna\ bonis, Adversity is next door 
neighbor to prosperity. 

6. Belonging to one's self or to another: — ajfinis, cog- 
ndtus, propinquus, proprius, peculiaris, communis, sacer ; alienus, con- 
trarius, &c. E. g. Nobis propria est mentis agitatio atque sollertia, 
There is peculiar to us a certain agitation and sagacity of mind. 
Omni aetati mors est communis, Death is common to every age. Huic 
afflnes J sceleri fuerunt, They were accomplices of this crime. 

7. Known or unknown : — notus, certus, ignotus, obscurus, incertus, 
dubtus, insolilus, &c. E. g. Magis historicis quam vulgo notus, Known 
rather to the historians than to the vulgar. Certius tibi est quam mihi, 
It is a matter of greater certainty to you than to me. Novum et mori- 
bus veterum insolttum, New and unknown (unusual) to the manners 
of the ancients. 

8. Fit or unfit, suitable or unsuitable: — aptus, idoneus, 
accommodatus, commodus, necessarius, paratus, promptus, procllvis ; — ■ 
conveniens, congruens, consentaneus, decorus, lionestus ; iurpis, foedus, 
indecorus, absonus, absurdus. E. g. Aptum esse consentane unique 
tempori et personae, To be fit and suitable for the occasion and per- 
son. Tibi erunt parata verba, You will have words ready for you. 
Castris idoneus locus, A suitable site for a camp. Congruens et con- 
veniens decretis ejus, Consistent with his avowed principles. Ralioni 
consentaneus, In harmony with reason. Absonum Jidei, At variance 
with credibility. § 

9. Easy or difficult: — facXlis, expedltus, commodus; difficilis, 



in every degree of comparison ; as, Amlcior libertati quam suae dominalioni. — 
Homo mild amicissimus, mild familia7-isslmus. But they frequently occur as 
substantives with a genitive or an adjective. E.g. Amicus patris, — Noster 
amicus. So also the superlative amicissimus or familianssimus meus, A very 
great or most intimate friend of mine. Inimicissimus tuus. Your mortal foe. 
Amicissimus nostrovum hominum, A warm friend of our men (our party). 

* The construction of alienus is either alicui rei, alicujus rei, re or a re. 
Thus, alienum nostra amicitid, a dignitate med, incompatible with our friendship, 
with my dignity. Several of these adjectives take also erga, ad or in ; as, be- 
nevolus, benignus erga aliquem ; — propensus ad or in aliquem. 

t Viclnus and vicina are also used substantively, and then followed by the 
genitive or adjective; as, viclnus ejus, meus. 

X But affinis in this sense also has the genitive; as, afflnis hujus suspicionis, 
ajfinis rei capitdlis. So silso proprium oratoris, peculiar to the orator; and mea, 
tua propria, peculiar to me, to you. 

§ But also ad naturam aptus or accommodatus ; ad causam idoneus ; paratus 
ad usum ; promptus ad mortem, ad aliquem morbum proclivis ; — conveniens, con- 
gruens, consentaneus cum re ; absonus, absurdus a re. 



LESSON 61.] DATIVE AFTER ADJECTIVES. 



353 



arduus, invius. E. g. Juvenis caecus, contumeliae opportunity, facilis 
injuriae, A blind youth, exposed to contumelies and to injuries. Id 
si tibi erit commodum, If that will be convenient to you. Inula virtuti 
nulla est via, No way is impassable to virtue. 

10. Verbals in bills, and compounds like obnoxlus, obiius, sup- 
plex, superstes, &c. E. g. Mors mihi non est terribllis, Death is not 
terrible to me. E. g. Obvium esse alicui, To meet any one. Suppii- 
cem esse alicui, To be a suppliant to (to supplicate) any one. Super- 
stitem esse alicui, To survive any one.* 

( Affirmo, are, avi, arum. 
■} Contendo, ere, di, turn. 
( (cum Acc. et Infix.) 
Nego, are, avi, atum. 

Quid ais ? 

Aio, te tenere meum h'brum.f 

Nego, me tenere librum tuum. 

Ego tibi affirmo, me eum non te- 
nere. 

Ndnne eum tenuisti ? 

Tenui vera, sed (eum) teneo non 
amplius. 

Contendisne, te vere locutum 
(esse) ? 

Nego, me vere locutum. 

Affirmo, te erravisse. 

Non jam (or jam non) . Non am- 
pllus. 

Diligisne fratrem etiam mine ? 

Diligo eum non amplius. 

Ubi pennam posuisti ? 

Impdsui earn mensae (in mensa). 
( Sitane est super mensa ? 
\ Inpositane est mensae ? 

Sita est. Impdsita est. 

Jacetne hurni etiam nunc ? 
f tbi non jam jacet. 
\ Jacet ibi non amplius. 

Allquantulum, paululum, pauxillum. 

Possisne mihi dare aliquantulum 
dquae ? 

!fego tibi aliquantulum dare possum. 

Necesse est, me oportet, &c. (Cf. 
Lesson XXXIV. D.) 

* Also supplex and superstes alicujus, which among the later writers is even 
more common than thexlative. 
t Compare page 290. 

W 30* 



To affirm, contend. 

To deny. 

What do you say ? 

I say that you have my book. 

I say that I have not it. 

I assure you, that I have it not. 

Have you not had it ? 

I have had it, but I have it no 

longer. 
Do you contend that you have 

been correct ? 
I say that I have not been correct. 
I affirm that you have been 

wrong. 

No more, no longer. 

Do you still love your brother ? 
I love him no longer. 
Where have you put the pen ? 
I have laid it upon the table. 

Does it lie upon the table ? 

It does lie upon it. 

Is he still lying upon the ground ? 

He is lving there no longer. 

Some, a little. 
Could you give me a little water ? 

I can give you some. 

It is necessary, I must. 



354 



LATIN GRAMMAR, 



[LESSOX 61. 



It was necessary, I was 
obliged. 

Is it necessary (for some one) 

to go to the market ? 
It is necessary (for some one) to 

go there. 
What must one do in order to 

learn Latin ? 



Necesse fuit, me oportuit, &c. 



5 



One must be very diligent. 

What must he do ? 
He must go for a book. 

What must I do ? 

You must sit still. 

To sit. 
Still, quiet. 
Silent, still. 

The livelihood, subsistence, 
competency. 

To have enough to live on, 
to have a competency. 

Not to have enough to live 
on. 

Have you a (comfortable) sub- 
sistence ? 
I have a comfortable one. 
I have not a competency 
I have scarcely anything to live 
upon. 

To live. 
The expense. 
Beef. 
Mutton. 
Yeal. 
Pork. 
Ham. 
A piece of ham, &c. 



Eundumne est in forum ? 

Necessene est ire in forum ? 

Eiindum est vero. 

Necesse est. 

Quid nos faciamus necesse est, ut 

linguam Latinam ediscamus ? 
Opdrtet nos simus imprimis dili- 

gentes. 
6pus est multa industria et dili- 

gentia. 
Quid eum facere opdrtet ? 
Necesse est librum appdrtet. 
Opus est eum.apportare librum. 
Quid facere mini opus est ? 
Quid opdrtet faciam ? 
Opus est, lit sedeas quietus. 
Necesse est tibi sedere quiete. 

Sedeo, ere, sedi, sessum. 

Quietus, a, um. 

Tacitus, a, um ; silens, tis 

Victus, lis, m. ; copia victus ; id, 
quod suppeditat ad victum cul- 
tumque. 

Habere ad sumptum. 
Habere unde aliquis vivat. 
Non laborare de victu cultuque. 
Deest alicui in sumptum. 
Yix habere unde aliquis vivat. 

Habesne ad sumptum ? 
Habesne unde commode vivas ? 
Ego de victu cultuque non labdro. 
De'est mihi in sumptum. 
Yix habeo unde vivam. 

Vivo, ere, vixi, victum. 
Sumptus, us, ?n. 
Bubiila,* ae,/. 
Yervecina, ae,/. 
Yitulina, ae,/. 
Porcina, ae,/. 
Perna, ae,/. 
Erustum pernae, &c. 



* With bubiila — porcina, the word caro, 
sometimes expressed. 



flesh, meat, is understood, and 



LESSON 61.] PHRASES AND EXERCISES. 



355 



What must I buy ? 
You must buy some beef. 
What must (should) I do ? 
You must (ought) to work. 

What ought we to have done ? 

We ought to have attended to 

our studies. 
What do you wish ? 

I want some money. 

Do you want much ? 

I do want a large amount. 

How much do you want (need) 
I only want a crown. 



| Quid mini emendum est ? 
\ Quid opus est, ut emam ? 
j Emenda est tibi biibula. 
(- Opus est, ut emas biibulam 
( Quid me facere opdrtet ? 
{ Quid opdrtet faciam ? 
j Opdrtet te operari. 
( Opdrtet tu operere.* 
j Quid nos facere opdrtuit ? 
\ Quid nos feceremus opdrtuit ?f 
Opdrtuit nos dperam dare studiis. 

Quid vis ? Quid cupis ? 
( ()pus est mihi pecunia. 
( Egeo pecunia, 

Estne tibi opus magna. 

Opus est mihi vero cdpi'a magna. 



( Quanta e'ges ? 



Quanta est tibi opus ? 
( Opus est mihi non nisi unus thale- 
1 ^ rus. 
( Uno tantum thalero egeo. 

Non est tibi opus nisi hoc ? 

Non est mihi opus nisi hoc. 

Non est tibi opus majore (pecunia) ? 

Majore non indigeo. 

Quid (qua. re) indiget ? 

Toga nova indiget. 

Habesne quod tibi opus sit ? 

Habeo vero, quod mihi opus est ? 

Habentne quod iis opus est ? 

Habent vero. 

Fuitne tibi magni laboris,J sermo- 
nem Latinum ediscere ? 

Fuit prdrsus permagni laboris. 



Is that all you want ? 

That is all I want. 

Do you not want more (money) ? 

I do not need any more. 

What does he (want) need ? 

He needs a new coat. 

Have you what you want ? 

I have what I want. 

Have they what they want ? 

They have so. 

Have you been obliged to work 

much to learn Latin V 
I have been obliged to work very 

hard. 

Exercise 118. 

Were you yesterday at the physician's ? — I was at his house. — 
What does he say ? — He says that he cannot come. — Why does he 
not send his son V — His son does not go out. — Why does he not go 
out ? — Because he is ill. — Hast thou had my purse V — I tell you 
that I have not had it. — Hast thou seen it ? — I have seen it. — 
Where is it ? — It lies upon the chair. — Have you had my knife ? — 
I tell you that I have had it. — Where have you placed it? — I have 
placed it upon the table. — Will you look for it ? — I have already 



* See page 162, note, 
t Lit. " Was it a matter of great labor? 
Lesson LXVIII. B. 



&c. 



See page 273, G. 

On this genitive compare 



356 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSOX G2. 

looked for it. — Have you found it ? — I have not found it. — Have 
you looked for my gloves ? — I have looked for them, but I have not 
found them. — Has your servant my hat ? — He has had it, but lie 
has it no longer. — Has he brushed it V — He has brushed it, — Are 
my books upon your table ? — They are (lie) upon it. — Have you 
any vine ? — I have but little, but I will give you what I have. — 
"Will you give me some water ? — I will give you some. — Have you 
much wine? — I have much. — Will you give me some? — I will 
give you some. — How much do I owe you ? — You owe me nothing. 

— You are too kind. — Must I go for some wine ? — You must go for 
some. — Shall I go to the ball? — You must go thither. — When 
must I go thither? — You must go thither this evening? — Must I 
go for the carpenter ? — You must go for him. — Is it necessary to go 
to the market ? — It is necessary to go thither — "What must one do 
in order to learn Russian ? — One must study much (opus est mulla 
diligentia). — Must one study much to learn German? — One must 
study much. — What shall I do? — You must buy a good book. — 
"What is he to do ? — He must sit still. — What are we to do ? — You 
must work. — Must you work much, in order to learn the Arabic ? — 
I must work much to learn it. — Does your brother not work ? — He 
does not want to work. — Has he wherewithal to live ? — He has. — 
Why must I go to the market ? — You must go thither to buy some 
beef. — Why must I work ? — You must work in order to get a com- 
petency. — What do you want, Sir? — I want some cloth. — How 
much is that hat worth ? — It is worth three crowns. — Do you want 
any stockings? — I want some. — How much are those stockings 
worth ? — They are worth twelve kreutzers. — Is that all you want ? 

— That is all. — Do you not want shoes? — I do not want any — 
Dost thou want much money? — I want much. — How much must 
thou have ? — I must have six crowns. — I low much does your broth- 
er want ? — He wants but six groshes. — Does he not want more ? — 
He does not want more. — Docs your cousin want more ? — lie does 
not want so much as I. — What do you want? — I want money and 
boots. — Have you now what you want ? — I have what I want. — 
Has your brother what he wants ? — lie has what he wants. 



Lesson LXIL — PENSUM ALTERUM ET SEX- 
AGESIMAL 

DATIVE AFTER VERBS Continued. 

A. The dative also follows intransitive verbs signi- 
fying to benefit, favor, please, trust, and their opposites, 
and those signifying to command, obey, serve, or resist, 
to approach, menace, and to be angry. 



LESSON 62.] 



DATIVE AFTER VERBS. 



357 



Such are prosum, auxilior, adminicular, opitittor, patrocmor, subve- 
nio, succurro, medeor ; noceo, obsum, officio, incommodo, insidto, insi- 
dior. — Fareo, gratificor, indulgeo, ignosco, studeo, parco, adulor, 
blandXor, lenocinor, pcdpo, assentlor, assentor, respondto : adversor, re- 
fragor, obsto, renilor, repugno, resisto, invideo, aemulor, obtrecto, convi- 
cior, maledko. Placeo, arrideo, displiceo. — Doniinor, impero ; pareo, 
cedo, ausculto, obedto, obsequor, obtempero, morigeror (== morem gero), 
audiens sum, servio, inservio, ministro, famulor, ancidor, praestolor. — 
Credo, fldo, confido, diffldo. — Immineo, propinquo, appropinquo, 
impcndeo, occurro. — Minor, commlnor, irascor, stomachor, succenseo. 
The impersonal verbs conducit, conli.ngit, expedite licet, placet^ &c. 
Examples : — 

Jpsi patriae conducit, pios cf 
habere in parentes. 



vires corporis 



Nihil Numantinis 
auxilidtae sunt. 

Non licet siii cdmmodi causa, no- 
cere dlteri. 



Efficit hoc philosdphia : medelur 

dnimis. 
Germani ab parvulis labori ac 

dur'diae student. 

Trebatium objurgavi, quod pa- 
rum valetudini pdrceret. 

Alii Sudanis, alii Cinndnis pdrti- 

bus favebant. 
Nimium illi, Menedeme, indulges 

Prdbus invidct ne'mini. 

Alioruin /audi atque gldriae miixi- 

me in rider i sdlet. 
Nemo alterius, qui suae confidit, 

virtuti invidet. 

Miindus Deo pdret, et hulc obe- 
diunt maria terraequc. 

Sto expectans, si quid mild inhe- 
rent. 

Onmino irdsci amicis non temcre 
sdleo. 



It is advantageous to the state itself, 

to have its citizens respectful to- 
wards their parents. 
Their physical strength was of no 

service to the Numantians. 
It is not lawful to injure another 

for the sake of personal advan- 
tage. 
Philosophy produces this effect : 

it cures the mind. 
The Germans apply themselves to 

toil and hardships from their 

infancy. 
I eluded Trebatius for sparing his 

health too little. 
Some favored Sulla's party, others 

that of China. 
You indulge him too much, Mene- 

demus. 
The honest man envies no one. 
The reputation and glory of others 

are generally the object of envy. 
No one envies the excellence of 

another, who has any confidence 

in his own. 
The world is subject to God, and 

to him the seas and lands render 

obedience. 
I stand waiting to see whether they 

have any commands for me. 
I am not accustomed to be rashly 

angry with my friends 



Remarks. 

1. Some of these verbs sometimes occur with a transitive force. 
E. g. Imperdre alicui aliquid, To demand anything of any one ; cre- 
dere alicui aliquid, to entrust anything to any one ; mindri or commi- 



358 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 62. 

ndri alicui aliquid, to menace any one "with anything. But most of 
them are always neuter, and only admit of an impersonal construction 
in the passive. E. g. Milii parcitur, invidetur, obtrectatur, I am spared, 
envied, traduced. Tibi incommoddtur, maledlcitur, You are incom- 
moded, reviled. 

2. Jubeo is an exception to verbs of commanding, and occurs only 
with the Ace. cum Inf. (Lesson LLTI. B. II. 2.) Sojuvo and adjuvo, 
" 1 aid, assist," always have aliquem, and not aliciri, like auxilior, &c. 

3. Benedlcere, "to bless," generally has alicui (like maledicere), 
but sometimes aliquem. So medicari alicui (like mederi), to heal, 
cure, but medicari aliquid, to prepare chemically. The construction 
of invidere (to envy) is generally alicui or alicui rei, but may also be 
alicui rem or aliquem aliqud re (one on account of anything). E. g. 
Honorem tibi invidet, He envies you your honor. 

4. A number of other verbs sometimes take the accusative or abla- 
tive instead of the dative. E. g. Obtrectdre (to produce) alicui, alicui 
rei or rem. Auscultare (to 'listen to) and praestolari (to wait for) 
alicui or aliquem. Dominari (to rule over) alicui, in aliquem or in 
civitate. Fidtre and confldere (to trust, confide) alicui, alicui rei or 
aliquci re. Cedo tibi, concedo tibi, "I yield, concede to you," are 
followed by an accusative or ablative of the thing ; as, cedo tibi locum, 
cedo tibi agri possessione ; and concedo tibi libertdtem, loco, de victoria, 
I concede to you your liberty, my place, the victory. Res mild conve- 
nit, the thing suits or becomes me ; but impersonally convtnit mild 
tecum de aliquci re, I agree with you about something. 

5. Several verbs have either the accusative or dative, but with a 
difference of signification. E. g. Caveo te, I beware of you ; caveo 
tibi, I am security for you ; caveo a te, I take (require) security from 
you. Consulo te, I consult you, and consulo tibi, I provide for you. 
Cupio or volo te, I desire you, and cupio or volo tibi (or tud causa), I 
wish for you (on your account). Prospicio and promdeo te, I see you 
before, but tibi, I provide for you. Tcmpero and moderor aliquid, I 
arrange in proper order, and mild or rei, I moderate. 

B. Among the verbs followed by the dative are included 
those compounded with the adverbs satis, bene, and male, and 
with the prepositions ad, ante, con, in, inter, ob, post, prae, sub, 
and super. (Cf. Lesson XXXII. G.) Some of these verbs 
are transitive, and have also an accusative of the direct object ; 
others are intransitive, and have the dative only. The follow- 
ing lists exhibit the most important of them : — 

1. Transitive compounds, with the dative of the remote ob- 
ject. 

Addo, I add to. Adjicio, I add to. 

Affero, I bring to. Adjungo, I join to. 

Afflgo, / attach to. Admoveo, / bring near to. 

Adhibeo, I employ towards. Alligo, 1 tie io - 



LESSON 62.] DATIVE AFTER COMPOUND VERBS. 



359 



Applico, I attach to. 
Circumjicio, I cast around. 
Comparo, I provide for, 
Compono, I put together. 
Confero, I unite to. 
Conjungo, I link to. 
Immisceo, I mix with. 
Iuipono, I place upon. 
Imprimo, I print upon. 
Includo, I include. 
Incido, I cut into. 
Inf ero, / carry into. 
Ingero, I put or pour into . 
Injlceo, / throw into. 

2. Intransitive compounds, 

Accedo, I draw near to. 
Acquiesco, / acquiesce in. 
Adhaereo, I adhere to. 
Alludo, / allude to. 
Annuo, I assent to. 
Arrepo, 1 creep to. 
Assideo, I sit near to. 
Aspiro, I breathe upon. 
Antecello, I excel, surpass. 
Colludo, I play with. 
Congriio, / agree with. 
Consentio, i" accord with. 
Consono, I harmonize with. 
Excello, I excel. 
Incido, I fall upon (into). 



Incurnbo, 
Inciibo, 



(sit) upon. 



Insero, I implant. 
Inuro, I brand, imprint upon. 
Interjicio, / cast among. 
Interpono, / interpose. 
Objicio, I throw before (to). 
Offundo, I pour out to. 
Oppono, I place against. 
Posthabeo, 1 esteem less than. 
Postpono, I value less than. 
Praef ero, / bear before ; I prefer. 
Praeficio, / set over. 
Praepono, I place before. 
Suppono, 1 place beneath. 
Substerno, I spread under. 

with the dative only. 

Inhaero, / inhere in. 
Inhio, I gape at. 
Immorior, / die in (upon). 
Immoror, I linger in. 
Innascor, / am born in. 
Insisto, I tread upon. 
Interjaceo, I am situate between. 
Intervenio, I fall in with. 
Obrepo, I steal upon. 
Obstrepo, I make a noise at. 
Obversor, I move before. 
Praemineo, I surpass. 
Praestideo, I preside over. 
Praevuleo, I am stronger than. 
Succumbo, I yield to. 
Supersto, / stand upon. 
Supervivo, I survive. 



Indormio, / nod over, 

3. To these add the compounds of sum : — adesse, to be present ; 
inesse, to be in ; interesse, to be among ; praesse, to be before (at the 
head of) ; subesse, to be beneath ; superesse, to remain over (left). 

4. The compounds of satis, bene, and male are satisdare, satisfacere 
(alicui), to give one bail or satisfaction ; maledicere, benedicere (alwui), 
to praise or bless, to revile, asperse one; malefacere (alicui), to injure 
one. 

Examples. 



Natiira sensibus rationem ad- 

junxit. 
Sthenius est is, qui nobis assidet. 

Quis potest iniquos acquis, im- 
pios religiosis anteferre ? 



Nature has given us reason in ad- 
dition to our senses. 

He who is sitting by our side is 
Sthenius. 

Who can prefer the unjust to the 
just, the impious to the religious ? 



360 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 62. 



Natura vi rationis hdininem con- 

ciliat hdmini. 
Parva mdgnis saepe rectissime 

conferuntur. 
Magnus terror incidit Pompeii 

exercitui. 
Cut sermdni nos intervemmus ? 

Non citius adolescentiae senectus, 
quam pueritiae adolescentia 
obrepit. 

Hannibal Alexdndro Mdgno non 
postponendus est. 

Deus anirnum praefecit corpori. 

Judicis est, innoce'ntiae subve- 

nire. 
Neque deesse, neque super esse 

reipiiblicae vdlo. 

Cut Gellius benedixit unquam 

bono ? 
Satisfdcere omnibus non possum. 

Til verbis solves niinquam, quod 
ml (== rrahi) malefeceris. 



Nature conciliates man to man by 

force of reason. 
Small things are often correctly 

compared with great things. 
Great terror befell the army of 

Pompey. 
What conversation did we fall in 

with? 
Old age steals no faster upon youth 

than youth does upon boyhood. 

Hannibal cannot be put below 
Alexander the Great. 

The Deity has put the mind over 
the body. 

It is the duty of a judge to help 
(protect) innocence. 

I desire neither to be remiss to- 
wards the republic, nor to be 
above it. 

What patriotic man did Gellius 
ever speak well of? 

I am not able to satisfy every one. 

You will never compensate with 
words the injuries you have 
done me. 



Remarks. 

1. Many verbs compounded with prepositions, especially those with 
ad, con, and in, are also followed by the case of the preposition, which 
is frequently repeated. E. g. Sludium adhibere ad disciptinas, To 
apply one's self to the study of the sciences. Consilia sita mecum 
communicavit, He communicated his designs to me. In omnium ani- 
mis dei notionem impressit ipsa natfira, Nature herself has imprinted 
the idea of a divinity upon the minds of all. 

2. Verbs compounded with the prepositions ab, do, or ex, are com- 
monly followed by the ablative, but sometimes by the dative. E. g. 
Alicui Uberiutem abjudicdre, to take away one's liberty ; alicui impe- 
rium abrogdre, to deprive one of his command. Alicui aliquid dero- 
gdre, dctruhcre, to derogate, to detract from. Alicui virginem dc^jxm- 
dere, to betroth a maiden to any one. Eripere alicui aliquidj to snatch 
away anything from any one. (Cf. Lesson LXXII. E.) 

3. Many neuter verbs of motion, compounded with prepositions, 
acquire an active sense, and admit an object in the accusative. (Cf. 
Lesson LIX A. Rem. 1.) 

f Posco, ere, poposci, . 

To ask, demand (anything! Posluio are, dci, Citum. 
of any one). 1 Peto, ere, wi, Hum. 

[_ (ALIQUID Ali ALIQUO.) 



LESSON 62.] PHRASES AND EXERCISES. 



361 



To ask, request (as a favor) 

To ask (or demand) money of 

any one. 
To ask (entreat) any one for 

money. 
To beg money of any one 
To ask any to come (to write, to 

hear, &c). 
To entreat any one by letter to 

come. 
To request, beseech any one to 

come. 
I request you most earnestly to 

do so. 
I ask and beseech you most ear- 
nestly to help him. 

What do you ask (want) of me ? 

I do not ask (you for) anything. 
Nor do I ask you for anything. 

Did he ask (beg) you for (some) 

money V 
He did ask (me for some). 
Did he beg some bread of us ? 
lie begged and entreated us for 

a little bread. 
Do you ask (beg) him for some 

money ? 
I ask (beg) him for some. 

Do you ask me for anything ? 

I ask you for my book. 

Do they ask us for the hat ? 
They do not ask us for it. 

To speak of any one or anij- 
thing. 

Do they speak of this man. 
They are speaking of him. 
They do not speak of him. 
Do ye speak of my book '? 
We do speak (of it) . 
Do people speak of it ? 



Rogo, are, avi, atum. 
Oro, are, avi, atum. 

(aliquem aliquid.)* 
Pecuniam ab aliquo petere (pdsce- 

re, postulare). 
Aliquem pecuniam rogare, orare. 

Aliquem pecuniam mendicare. 

Petere ab aliquo, ut veniat, ut scri- 
bat, ut aiidiat. (Cf. page 295.) 

Petere precibus per litteras ab ali- 
quo, ut veniat. 

Rogfire, orare aliquem, ut veniat. 

Id ut facias, te etiam atque etiam 
rogo. 

Etiam atque etiam te rogo atque 
dro, lit eum j lives. 

Quid a me pdstulas (petis) ? 

Quid me faeere vis ? 

Nihil pdstulo. 

Neque ego abs to quidquam pdstu- 
lo (peto). 

Rogavitne te pecuniam ? 

Rogavit. 

Mendicavitne panem a nobis ? 
Nos aliquantulum panis etiam at- 
que etiam rogavit atque oravit. 
Rogasne eum peciiniani ? 

Rogo eum aliquantulum. 
Petisne aliquid a m§ ? 
Rogasne me aliquid ? 

Peto a te librum. 

Rogo te librum. 

Num pi'leum a nobis postulant ? 

Kon postulant. 

De aliquo seu aliqua re loqui, col- 
loqui. 

Loquuntiirnc hoc de viro ? 

Loquiintur (de do). 

(De eo) non loquiintur. 

Ldquiminine de libro me'o ? 

Sic est. Ldquimur. 

Ecquid de eo homines loquiintur ? 



* On the government of these verbs see Lesson LX. B. 

31 



362 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 62. 



They speak much of it. 
What do you say to it ? 
I say that it is a good book. 



To judge, think (say). 

Is it your opinion that he was 

right ? 
No, I think he was wrong. 

Content, satisfied. 

To be contented (satisfied) 
with anything. 

To be content with any one. 

Are you satisfied with your new 

umbrella ? 
I am contented with it. 
I am not (at all) satisfied with it. 
Of what do they speak ? 
They speak of peace, of war, of 

your book. 

With what are you contented ? < 

I am contented with my new 
coat. 

Are you satisfied with your mas- 
ter? 

I am quite satisfied with him. 

Are ye satisfied with him ? 

Are you satisfied with this man ? 
I am satisfied. 



To study — studied. 

To correct — corrected. \ 
To ask, interrogate. 

To inquire (carefully and ( 
minutely). \ 

Have you asked him about the 

play ? 
I have not asked him. 
Did he inquire who I am ? 
Do you inquire after the price 

of this book ? 



Loquiintur de eo multum. 
Quid tu de eo censes (jiidicas) ? 
Ego eum librum bdnum esse cen- 

seo (jiidico). 
Judico, are, avi, atum. 
Censeo, ere, iii, . 

(ALIQUID DE ALIQUO.) 

Censesne, eum vere locutum (es- 
se) ? 
tmmo vero eum erravisse censeo. 

Contentus, a, um. 

Aliqua, re contentum esse. 

In aliqua re acquiescere (-evi, 

etum). 
Aliquem probare, approbare. 

JSsne umbraculo tiio novo conten- 
tus? 

Sum eo contentus. 

Haud siim eo contentus. 

Qua de re loquiintur ? 

Loquiintur de pace, de belio, de 
libro tiio. 

Qua re es contentus ? 

Qua in re acquiescis ? 

Contentus sum toga mea nova. 

Ecquid magistrum tuum prdbas ? 

Prdbo vero eum valde. 
Satin' vdbis probatur ? 
Niim vdbis satisfacit ? 
Satisfacitne tibi hicce homo ? 
Sic est ; mi'hi satisfacit. 

Studere, studiii, . 

Operant dare (alicui rei). 

Emendare — avi, atum (aliquid). 
Corrigere — rexi, rectum. 
Interrogo, are, avi, atum (aliquem 

ALIQUID, DE ALIQUA RE). 

Sciscitor, ari, atus sum. 
Percunctor, ari, atus sum. 

Niim eum de spectaculo interroga- 

visti ? 
turn non interrogavi. 
Sciscitatiisne est, quis sim ? 
Percunctarisne de pretio Hbri ? 



LESSON 62.] 



PHRASES AND EXERCISES. 



363 



Does your brother study litera- 
ture ? 

He does study it. 
Do you study to become a doc- 
tor ? 



( Dat frater tiius dperam litteris ? 
■} Sequitiirne frater tiius stiidium lit- 
( r teraruin ? 

Operam dat. Sequitur. 

Niim dperam das fieri medicus ? 



To pay. 

To pay any one (in gen- 
eral). 

To pay for anything. 

To pay any one for any- 
thing. 

To pay money to creditors. 
To pay a debt. 

To be able to pay, solvent. 

I have paid him. 

They have not yet paid for the 

book. 
How much have you paid for 

your horse ? 
I have paid two hundred crowns 

for it. 
Did he pay the tailor for the 

coat ? 
He has not paid him (for it). 
Do you pay the shoemaker for 

the shoes ? 
I do pay him. 
What did they pay you for the 

knives ? 
They paid me a large sum for 

them. 
They have nothing for them. 
Have you paid for your book ? 
I have paid (for it) . 
1 have not yet paid for it. 
Can you pay what you owe ? 

I cannot pay what I owe. 
Did we pay our debts ? 

We have paid them entirely. 

Entirely, wholly . 
Entirely or for the most part. 



( Solvo, ere, i, solutum. 
\ Numero, are, avi, atum. 

Aliqueni solvere, alicui satisfacere. 

Solvere (aliquid) pro aliqua re. 
Solvere alicui pretium rei. 

Solvere peciinias creditdribus. 
Aes alienum (peciiniam debitam) 

solvere vel dissdlvere. 
^sse solvendo (Dat.), ad solven- 

dum. 
[Ego eum sdlvi (ei satisfeci). 
Pro libro nondum solverunt. 

Qu an tarn peciiniam pro equo sol- 

visti ? 
(Sdlvi pro eo) ducentos thaleros. 

Niimquid sartdri pretium vestis 

^solvit ? 
(Ei) non solvit. 
Solvisne sutdri pretium calceo- 

rum V 
Ego vero sdlvo. 
Quid tibi pro ciiltris solverunt ? 

Solverunt mini (pro lis) peciiniam 

grandem. 
Nihil pro iis solverunt. 
Solvistine pro libro tiio ? 
Sdlvi. 

Ego pro eo ndndum sdlvi. 
Potesne solvere, quod debes (or 

debitum, debita) ? 
Solvere debita haud possum. 
Solvimiisne aes alienum (debita 

nostra) ? 
Id (ea) plane (omnino) dissdlvi- 

mus. 

Prorsus, omnino, plane (adv.). 
Omnino aut magna ex parte. 



364 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 62. 



The uncle. 

The wages, fee. 

The honorarium ; salary. 

The lesson (to be learnt). 

The exercise, task (to be 
written) . 

The exercise, practice, e. g. 
in writing, speaking, &c. 

To do (write) one's exer- 
cises. 

The lecture or lesson (given 
by the teacher). 

To deliver a lecture on any 
subject. 

To be present at the lectures 
of any one. 

To attend or frequent lec- 
tures. 

The teacher, preceptor. 

The scholar, pupil. 

The gentlemen, lord, sir. 

Have you (written) your exer- 
cises '? 
I have not yet done them. 

To receive a present from 
any one. 



Patruus, i. m. ; avunculus, i, m. 
Merces, edis,/!; pretmmoperae,i,n. 
*Honorarium, i, n. ; salarium, i, n. 
Pensum, i, n. ; discenda, n-pl. 
Pensum imperatum, i, n. ; exerci- 

tlum, i, n. 
Exercitatio (onis,/.) scribendi, di- 

cendi, &c. 
Pensum imperatum absolvere (ab- 

solvi, absolutum). 
Schola, ae,y. 

SchSlam habere de aliqua re. 

Scholis aliciijus interesse. 

Doctdres auditionesque obire (-Ivi, 

Ituin). 
Doctor, praeceptor, oris, m. ; ma- 

gister, ri, m. 
Discipulus, alumnus, i, m. 
Dominus, i, m. ; vir amplissimus, il- 
lustrissimus, &c. (in addresses, &c.) 
Absolvistine tua pensa imperata V 

(Ea) nondum absdlvi. 
( Accipere aliquid ab aliquo in mu- 
-} nere. 
( Donum ab ahquo accipere. 



Exercise 119. 

Have we what we want ? — We have not what we want. — What 
do we want ? — We want a fine house, a large garden, a beautiful 
carriage, pretty horses, several servants, and much money. — Is that 
all we want V — That is all we want. — What must I do ? — You 
must write a letter. — To whom must I write ? — You must write to 
your friend. — Shall I go to the market? — You may go there. — 
Will you tell your father that I am waiting for him here ? — I will 
tell him so. — What will you tell your father ? — I will tell him that 
you are waiting for him here. — What wilt thou say to my servant ? 
— I will say to him that you have finished your letter. — Have you 
paid (for) your table ? — I have paid (for) it. — Has your uncle paid 
for the book V — He has paid for it. — Have I paid the tailor for the 
clothes '? — You have paid him for them. — Hast thou paid the mer- 
chant for the horse ? — I have not yet paid him for it. — Have we 
paid for our gloves V — We have paid for them. — Has your cousin 
already paid for his boots ? — He has not yet paid for them. — Does 
my brother pay you what he owes you ? — He does pay it me. — Do 
you pay what you owe ? — I do pay what I owe. — Have you paid 



LESSON 63.] DATIVE AFTER PARTICIPLES IN " DUS." 365 

(with the dative) the baker ? — I have paid him. — Has your uncle 
paid the butcher for the meat ? — He has paid him for it. — Have 
you paid your servant his wages ? — I have paid them to him. — Has 
your master paid you your wages ? — He has paid them to me. — 
When did he pay them to you ? — He paid them to me the day be- 
fore yesterday. — What do you ask this man for ? — I ask him for 
my book. — What does this boy beg of me ? — He begs of you some 
money. — Do you ask me for anything ? — I ask you for a crown. — 
Do you ask me for the bread ? — I ask you for it. — Do the poor beg 
money of you ? — They beg some of me. — Which man do you ask 
for money ? — I ask him for some whom you ask for some. 

Exercise 120. 

Whom have you asked for some sugar ? — I have asked the mer- 
chant for some. — Of whom have the poor begged some money ? — 
They have begged some of the noblemen. — Of which noblemen have 
they begged some ? — They have begged some of those whom } r ou 
know. — Whom do you pay for the meat ? — I pay the butchers for 
it. — Whom does your brother pay for his boots ? — He pays the 
shoemaker for them. — Whom have we paid for the bread ? — We 
have paid our baker for it. — Of whom have they spoken ? — They 
have spoken of our friend. — Do men speak of my book ? — They do 
speak of it. — Of what do we speak ? — We speak of war (de hello). 
— Do you not speak of peace ? — We do not speak of it. — Are you 
content with your scholars ? — I am content with them. — How old 
are you ? — I am not quite ten years old. — Does your brother know 
Latin ? — He does not know it. — Why does he not know it V — Be- 
cause he has not learned it. — Why has he not learned it ? — Because 
he has not had time. — Is your father at home ? — No, he is gone to 
England. — Do you intend going to Italy this summer ? — I do intend 
going thither. — Have you the intention of staying there long ? — I 
have the intention of staying there during the summer. — How long- 
does your brother remain at home ? — Till twelve o'clock. — Have 
you had your gloves dyed ? — I have had them dyed. — What have 
you had them dyed? — I have had them dyed brown. — Will you 
tell your father that I have been here ? — I will tell him so. — Will 
you not wait until he comes back again ? — I cannot wait. 



Lesson LXIIL — pensum sexagesxmum tek- 

TIUM. 

DATIVE AETER, THE PARTICIPLE IN "DUS." 

A. After the participle in dus the agent is common- 
ly expressed by the dative.* E. g. 

* Compare Lesson XXV. D. 

31* 



3CG LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 63. 

Legendus mild sae'pius est Cato I must read Cato the elder oftener. 

uuijor. 

Nflul esS hdmini tarn timcndum, Nothing is to be feared by men so 

quam invidia. much as envy. 

N6n pardnda nobis solum, sed Wisdom should not only be ae- 

frue'nda etiam sapientia erf. quired by us. but also enjoyed. 

.fiecfo ft'&i invictdque moriendum You must die firm and uneon- 

est. quered. 

Ut tibi ambuMndum et ungen- As you must walk and anoint 

dum, sic mihi dormiendum est yourself, so I must sleep. 

Rem auks. 

1. Instead of the dative, the ablative with a or ab sometimes occurs, 
as after passive verbs. E.g. Eros a te colendus est, Eros must be 
worshipped by you. Non maj i venerandos a uobis putdtisf 
Do you not think that our ancestors are to be venerated by us? 

2. The dative is frequently omitted, and the agent left indefinite. 
E.g. Graecis utendum erii litteris, h will be necessary to use Greek 
Letters. Consensio omnium gentium by naturae />>i!<i,,<l<t est. The eon- 
sent of all the races of men is to be considered the law of nature. 
Orandum est (s "' sii mens sana w corport sano, "We should 
pray for a healthy mind in a healthy body. 

3. Passive verba sometimes have the dative of the agent instead of 
the usual ablative with a or nh. E.g. Auditus est nobis (= a nobis) 
Laeliae saept sermo, We have often heard the conversation of Lading. 
Alii,; (—same) consilium captum jam diu est, The plan has been 
formed long ago by me. Barbarus />«■ ego sum, quia non inteiligftw 
u ]lj (=abullo), t am a barbarian hen . 1 am not underwood 
b) any one. 

VERBS POLLOWED BY TWO DATIVES. 

B. The verbs sum, foreni^fw, do, vento, mid a num- 
ber of others, are sometimes followed by two datives, of 
which one designates the person and the other the end 
or object 

Such are (A*, accipio, habeo, relinouo, deltgo, mitto, eo, pemo, and 
others of similar import. Also <l>tm, largior, tribuo, and w tic. E. g. 
Hoc est mihi curae. I take care of this (It is my care, 

I attend to it). 
Est tibi hondrl It is an honor to you. 

Nobis est voluptdtL It ia a pleasure to us. 

Est argume'nto.] It serves as an argument 

Ampla ddmus dedecori domino An ample mansion often becomes 



aepe/w. 



a di-honor to its master. 



* The dative thus suppressed is generally mihi, tSn, nobis, vobis, komimbiu, 
&c., and easily supplied from the context, 
t bee Remark 1. 



LESSON 63.] VERBS WITH TWO DATIVES. 



307 



Attains regnum siium Romdnis 

dono (Jed it. 
Caesar qui'nque cohortes edstris 

praesidio reh'nquit. 
Pausanias venit Alt ids auxilio. 

Virtus sola neque ddiur dono, 

neque accipitur. 
Nunia fiducia calamitdli sdlet i ss* . 

Incdmbite, ut et vdbis Jumdri, et 
arnicis utilitdii et r< ipublicae 
emolumehto esse possitis. 



Attains gave his kingdom to the 

Romans as a present. 
Caesar leaves five cohorts as a 

guard for the camp. 
Pausanias came to the assistance of 

the Athenians. 
Virtue alone can neither be offered 

nor received as a gift. 
Too much confidence is wont to be 

a source of calamity. 
Exert yourselves, so that you may 

be able to become an honor to 

yourselves, useful to your friends, 

and a source of profit to the 

commonwealth. 



Remakes. 

1. The dative of the person is frequently left indefinite, and that 
of the end or object alone expressed. E. g. Hoc est honori, laudi, 
This is an honor, laudable. Vitam rusttcam tu probro et crimini putas 
esse, You consider rural life a reproach and crime (sc. to any one). 
So several of the above examples. 

2. Datives ot* this description are very frequent The mosl com- 
mon are dare aliquid muneri, dono, prat mio ; — r< linquen aliquid custo- 
diae, praesidio i — aliquid est or putatur vUio, crimXni, probro, oppro- 
brio, /audi, salmi, utilitati, emolunu nto : — aliquid est curae, cordi, <l< ri- 
sui, usui. So also canere receplui, to Bound the retreat; opponere 
pigndri, to pledge or pawn. In this connection the verb sum fre- 
quently has the Bense of the English it affords, serves, brings, &c. 

3. Instead of the dative of the end or object, the nominative or accu- 
sative may also be put, and sometimes the preposition ad or in. E. g. 
// - ■ argumentum, indicium > st, This is proor, an indication (ei idencc ). 
Dedit inilii aliquid donum (for dono), Exercitum ad praesidium (for 
praesidio) retiquit. Dan ali fuid in dolem, To give anything as a 
dowry. So also j>r<> argurm nto est. 

C. After expressions like mihi est nomen or cognomen^ the 
name of the individual is either in the nominative or dative, bat 

E. g. 

My name is Balbus. 



sometimes in the genitive 



fest nrihi ndmen Balbus, Btflbo,* 

or Balbi. 

Ndmina his Lacumo atque Aruns The names of these (sons) were 

fuerunt. Lacumo and Aruns. 

Cat pdstea Appio Claudia ftiit Whose name was afterwards Appi- 

ndmen. US Claudius. 



* The dative stands by attraction in the same sense as the pronoun mihi 
(ad, alien, Sec). 



368 LATIN GBAMMAB. [LESSON C3. 

Quorum (Uteri Capildni fuit co One of whom was surnamed Capita 

gnomen. 
Ndmen Mercurii mihi est. My name is Mercury. 

Remark. — After the expressions dare, addere, indere, dicere, 
ponere, imponere or tribuere alicui nomen or cognomen, the name is 
commonly in the dative, but may also stand in the accusative. K. g. 
Dare alicui cognomen tardo ac pingui, To surname (nickname) one 
i l the slow and the dull." Cui Ascanium part n U s dixere nomt n. Whom 
the parents called Ascanius. And in the passive : — Qiubus norm a 
histrionibus inditum est, "Who have received the name of bistrions. 
Cui cor/nomen superbo ex monbus datum, AVho was surnamed " the 
proud," from his manners. 

D. The verbs aspcrgo and inspergo, circumdo and circum- 

fundo, (hum and iiiijx rtio } induo and exuo, are con-trued either 

wirh the dative of the person and the accusative of the thing 

(alicui aliquid), or with the accusative of the person and the 

ablative of the thing (aliquem aliqua /■<"). E. 

Aspergit dram sdnguim (or dra* He besprinkles (stain:-) the altar 

sdnguim m). with blood. 

I)eusdnimumcircumded\tc6rp(>re Tin- Deity surrounded the soul 

(or corpus dnitno circiimdedit). with a body. 

I )on<> tibi pecui '-"1:1. i - I make you a present of money. 

nid). 

Terentia - Ten atia sends you greeting. 
. 

im- ( tho pres nts bis best compli- 

pe"rtil Gnatho. ments to Parmeno. 

fnuuit (cxuit) sibi vestem. lie puts on (takes off) his d: 

Caesar hd armts exuit Caesar deprived all his enemii 

their aims. 

Remarks. 

1. So also intercludere alicui aliquid or aliquem ali</>i<l rt and ah 
aliqua re. to cut one off from anything; and interdlctre alicui aliquid 
or alicui (but not aliquem) aliqua re. E. _. / cludit hosllbus Jugam, 
mitites intinert en- ah exercitu, lie prevents the enemy's escape, pre- 
vents the march of the soldiers, cuts them off from the army. 1 
lius accusatori aqua atqu< -dixit, Vitellius forbade the accuser 
the use of water and fire (i. e. exiled him). 

2. In the passive the dative or ablative remain, and the accusative 
becomes the nominative. E. L r . Ara aspergttur sanguine or sanguis 
arae aspergXtur. — Duabus quasi a naturd induii sumus . We 
are by nature furnished as it were with two persons. Doctrinis a 
puer i <h!»t s The age of boyhood ought to be furnished with 
instruction. Interdicdmur aqua tt igni, Let us be prohibited from the 
use of water and fire. 



LESSON 63.] DATIVE AFTER PARTICLES. 



3G9 



DATIVE AFTER PARTICLES. 

E. The dative is also put after certain particles. Such- 
are : — 

1 . Adverbs, especially those derived from adjectives which covern 
the dative. As propius, proxime, cominus, obirfam, praesto ; conveni- 
enter, congruenter, constanter, amice, &c. E. g. Propius Tiberi, quam 
%kermopylis, Nearer to the Tiber than to Thermopylae. Quam prox- 
wie kostium castris, As close to the enemy's camp as possible. Obviam 
ire alicui, To go to meet anyone. Convenienter naturae mvere, To 
live agreeably to nature. Bene mihi, bote vobis, bote omnibus, Health 
to me, to you, to all (in drinking). 

2. The interjections vae and hei, and others. E. g. Vae metis est! 
— Hei misero mihi ! — Ecce tibi ' * — Hem tibi talentum auri ! There 
is a talent of gold for vou ! 



To eat, to tale food. 



( Edo, ere, edi, is 
J QHbum sumere < 
(^ manducare. 



urn. 

(capere, capessere'), 



Pees. Ind. 



(CARNE, LACTE, 



Sing, edo, etlis or es, edit or C->t ; f 

Plur. edimus, editis or estis, edunt 

Pres. Subj. Sing, edam or edim, edas or edis, edat or edit ; 

Flue, edamus or edimus, edatis or editis, edant or edint. 

To eat or to consume any- Edere, manducare alrquid. 

thing as food (/runs.). 
To taste (anything as food Gusto, are, avi, atom (aliquid). 
or drink). 

Vescor, i 

&c.). 
Jentaculum, i, n. 
Prandium, i, n. 
( loena, ae, f. 
Cibus vespertinus, i, in. 
JentO, arc. a\ i. alum. 

Prandco, ere, prandi, pransum. 

('(•cno, arc. a\ i. iituin. 

Cibum vespertinum sumere. 

Quota (sc. h(ira) coenas ? 
no. 



To feed or live upon. 

The breakfast. 

The lunch. 
The dinner. 
The supper. 
To breakfast 
To eat a lunch. 
To dine. 
To sup. 

At what time do vou dine ? 



I dine at five. 

Have you already dined ? 
I have dined loniz airo. 



( Quinta cocik 

( libra quinta coeno. 

Ecquid jam coenavisti ? 

Coenavi profectojam dudum. 



* Sop page 3 l ). 

I Several ether syncopated forms of this verb resemble those of esse, but 
have c long by nature. K. g. edere or ess( ; ediiur or estur; ederem or essem 
(Imperf. Subj.); e~ue, edtte or es, este (Imperat.), ^c. The teuses derived from 

the second and third roots arc regular. 



370 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSOX G?,. 



I have dined earlier than yon. 
Will you take a lunch with me ? 

I cannot ; I have already eaten 

my lunch. 
Do you sup late ? 
I sup later than you. 

Before me, you, him, us, &c. 
After me, you, him, us, &c. 
Did you breakfast before your 

brother or after him? 
I breakfasted after him. 
Do you wish to taste our wine ? 
I do not wish to taste it. 
On what do they live ? 
They live upon bread and milk. 

To try, to make an attempt. 

To try, endeavor (to do 
anything). 
Will you try (see) what you can 

do ? 
To try the fortunes of war. 

Does your brother try to write 

a letter ? 
He is trying. 

Are ye endeavoring to see ? 
We are not endeavoring. 
Will you try to do this i 

I have already tried (endeavored) 

to do it. 
You must try to do it better. 

Have you tried (i. e. tasted) this 

wine ? 
I have tasted it. 
Whom are you looking for ? 
I am looking for one of my 

brothers. 
An uncle of mine. 
A neighbor of ours. 
A relation of yours. 
(Some) one of his cousins. 
(Some) one of their friends. 
A certain friend of ours. 



Ego matiirius coenavi qiuim tii. 
Yisne prandium siimere apud me 

(mecum) ? 
Non possum ; jam dm prandi. 

Sumisne cibum vespertmum sero ? 
Ego cibum vespertinum sumo seri- 

us quam tu. 
Ante me, te, eum, nos, &c. 
Post me, te, eum, nos, &c. 
TJtrurn jentavisti ante an post fni- 

trem tiium ? 
Post eum jentavi. 
Niim vis vinum nostrum gustare ? 
Gustare non ciipio. 
Quo cibo vesciintur ? 
Yescuntur pane atque liicte. 

j" Tcnto, are, avi, alum. 
[Experior, lri,pertus sum. 
Conor, ari, atus sum (aliquid fa- 
cere). 

Yisne tentare (experiri), quid pds- 
sis? 

Fortunam belli tentare seu expe- 
riri. 

f Tentatne frater tuns epistolam scri- 
( bere (or ut epistolam seribat) ? 
Tentat vero. 

Numquid spectare conamini ? 
!N6n conamur. 
Yisne tentare hoc facere (lit hoc 

facias) ? 
Id facere jam tentavi (conatus 

sum). 
Tentandum est, ut rem melius 

facias. 
Gustavistine istud vinum ? 

Gustavi. 

Quern quaeris ? 

IJnum ex meis fratribus (quaero). 

Unus ex (de) meis pdtruis. 
Linus ex_(de) nostris viclnis. 
Unus ex (de) tuis cognatis. 
Acquis ex (de) ejus consobrinis. 
Aliquis ex (de) eorum amicis. 
Quidam ex nostris amicis. 



LESSON 63.] THRASES AND EXERCISES. 



371 



To inquire or look after 

some one. 
To inquire after something. 

Do they inquire after any one ? 
They are inquiring after one of 

our relations. 
"Whom are ye looking for ? 
We are looking for one of your 

friends. 
Are you looking for anything V 
I am inquiring for the way. 

Does he try to see me ? 

He is trying to see you. 

The parents. 

The acquaintance. 

A piece of bread. 

A glass of water. 

A sheet of paper. 

The piece, fragment, bit. 

The small piece, bit. 

The little book. 

The little house. 

The little heart. 

The little picture. 

The little child, the baby. 

The little boy. 

The suckling. 

The favorite, darling. 



The apprentice. 



Quaero, ere, quaeslvi, quaesltum 

aliquem. 
Quaerere sen exquirere aliquid 

(de aliqua re). 

Quaeruntne aliquem ? 

Quaerunt vero (mum ex cognatis 
ndstris. 

Quern quaeritis ? 

Quaerimus aliquem (quendam) de 
familiaribus triis. 

Quaerisne aliquid ? 

Quaero (exquiro, rdgo) viam (iter). 
f Tentatne me videre ? 
\ Ecquid me visere ten tat ? 

Sane, te videre (visere) tentat. 

Parentes, um, m. pi. 

Notus, i, m. : amicus, i, m. 

Segmentum (frustum) panis. 

Scyphus aquae. 

Plagula (ae,/.) chartae. 
( Fragmentum, i, n. (broken off). 
-< Segmentum, i, n. (cut off). 
( Frustum, i, n. (bit). 

Frustiilum, i, n.* 

Libellus, i, m. 

Domuncula, aediciila, ae,/. 

Corculum, i, n. 

Imagiuncula, ae,/. 

Infantiilus, i, n. 

Puerculus, pupulus, i, m. 

(Infans) lactcns, tis, m. 

Deliciae, arum, pi. / ; amores, um, f 
pi. m. 

Tiro, onis, m. ; discipulus (artifl- 
cis), i, vi. 



Exercise 121. 



Have you already dined ? — Not yet. — At what o'clock do you 
dine ? — I dine at six o'clock. — At whose house (apud queni) do you 
dine ? — I dine at the house of a friend of mine. — With whom did 
you dine yesterday ? — I dined with a relation of mine. — What have 
you eaten ? — We have eaten good bread, beef, apples, and cakes. — 
What have you drunk ? — We have drunk good wine, good beer, 
and good cider. — Where does your uncle dine to-day ? — lie dines 
with us. — At what o'clock does your father eat supper ? — He eats 
supper at nine o'clock. — Do you eat supj:>er earlier than he V — I eat 



* On these diminutives compare page 89. 
f On these pluralia ionium see page 70. 



372 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 63. 

supper later than lie. — At what o'clock do you breakfast ? — I break- 
fast at ten o'clock. — At what o'clock did you eat supper yesterday ? 

— A Ye ate supper late. — What did you eat ? — We ate only a little 
meat and a small piece of bread. — When did your brother sup ? — 
He supped after my father. — Where are you going to ? — I am going 
to a relation of mine, in order to breakfast with him. — Do you dine 
early ? — We dine late. — Art thou willing to hold my gloves ? — I 
am willing to hold them. — Who has held your hat? — My servant 
has held it. — Will you try to speak ? — I will try. — Has your little 
brother ever tried to do exercises ? — He has tried. — Have you ever 
tried to make a hat ? — I have never tried to make one. — Have we 
tasted that beer? — We have not tasted it yet. — Which wine do you 
wish to taste ? — I wish to taste that which you have tasted. — Have 
the Poles tasted that brandy ? — They have tasted it. — Have they 
drunk much of it ? — They have not drunk much of it. — Will you 
taste this tobacco ? — I have tasted it already. — How do you find it ? 

— I find it good. — Why do you not taste that cider ? — Because I 
am not thirsty. — What is your name ? — My name is Charles ( Card- 
itis'). — What is the name of your father? — His name is William 
(Wilhehnus) . — Is his name not Frederic (Fredericus)'! — No, it is 
James (Jacubus). — Is this an honor to you ? — No, it is a disgrace. 

Exercise 122. 

Whom are you looking for ? — I am looking for the man who has 
sold a horse to me. — Is your relation looking for any one ? — He is 
looking for an acquaintance of his. — Are we looking for any one ? — 
We are looking for a neighbor of ours. — Whom dost thou look for ? 

— I look for a friend of ours. — Are you looking for a servant of 
mine? — No, I am looking for one of mine. — Have you tried to 
speak to your uncle ? — I have tried to speak to him. — Have you 
tried to see my father ? — I have tried to see him. — Have you been 
able to see him ? — I have not been able to see him. — After whom 
do you inquire ? — I inquire after your father. — After whom dost 
thou inquire ? — I inquire after the tailor. — Does this man inquire 
after any one ? — He inquires after you. — Do they inquire after 
you? — They do inquire after me. — Do they inquire after me ? — 
They do not inquire after you, but after a friend of yours. — Do you 
inquire after the physician ? — I do inquire after him. — What do 
you ask me for ? — I ask you for some meat. — What does your little 
brother ask me for ? — He asks you for some wine and some water. 

— Do you ask me for a sheet of paper ? — I do ask you for one. — 
How many sheets of paper does your friend ask for ? — He asks for 
two. — Dost thou ask me for the little book ? — I do ask you for it. — 
What has your cousin asked for ? — He has asked for a few apples 
and a small piece of bread. — Has he not breakfasted yet ? — He has 
breakfasted, but he is still hungry. — What does your uncle ask for ? 

— He asks for a glass of wine. —What does the Pole ask for ? — He 
asks for a small glass (scypMlus) of brandy. — Has he not already 
drunk ? — He has already drunk, but he is still thirsty. 



LESSON 64.] SYNTAX OF THE GENITIVE. 373 



Lesson LXIV. — pensum sexagesimum 

QUARTUM. 

SYNTAX OF THE GENITIVE. 

A. A noun determining another noun is pat in the 
genitive, in answer to the question Whose ? Of whom? 
Of what? E.g. 

Ddmus Cae'saris. Arbores silvd- The house of Ctesar. The trees 
?'um. Belli calamitas. Fliimi- of the forests. The calamity of 
na nectaris. war. Rivers of nectar. 

Amor virtutis. Lectio Ubrorum. The love of virtue. The reading 
Desideriuin otii. Spes salutis. of books. The desire of ease. 

The hope of safety. 

Custos virtutum omnium vereciin- Reverence is the guardian of every 
dia est. virtue. 

Singulorum facultates et cdpiae The property and resources of in- 
divitiae sunt civitdtis. dividuals constitute the wealth 

of the state. 

Numa divini aiictor juris fiiit, Numa was the institutor of divine 
Servius cdnditor omnis in civi- law, Servius the founder of all 
tate discriminis ordinumque. the distinctions and orders in 

the state. 

Yita mortuum in memdria vivo- The life of the dead depends upon 
rum est pdsita. the memory of the living. 

Remarks. 

1. The genitive serves to express a variety of relations, such as 
origin or source, cause and effect, quantity, quality, measure, time, 
character, the whole of a given mass or number, the object of an 
activity, the material of which anything is made, &c. 

2. The genitive thus depending on a noun may represent either the 
subject or the object of the activity or state implied in this relation, 
and is hence called either subjective or objective. Thus pater amat 
gives rise to the subjective amor patris, the father's love (towards the 
son) ; but (pater) amat flium, to the objective amorjilii, the (father's) 
love of (i. e. towards) his son. So also hominum facta, the deeds of 
men, and lux solis, the light of the sun (subjective) ; but remedium 
doloris, the remedy against pain ; taedium laburis, disgust for labor.* 
Sometimes, though rarely, both these genitives occur in the same con- 
struction ; as, Caesaris transldtio pecuniarum, Csesar's transfer of the 
funds. Attici memor officii, Mindful of the favor of Atticus. Mulia 
Theophrasti orationis ornamenta, Many of the ornaments of Theo- 

* The relation expressed by the subjective genitive is in English indicated 
bv the possessive case, or by "of"; that of the objective by "of," "for," 
"towards," " against," and similar prepositions. 



374 LATIX GRAMMAR. [LESSON 64. 

plirastus's style. InexplebXlis konoruni Marii fames, Marius's insatia- 
ble desire of honors. 

3. Sometimes the context alone can determine whether a genitive 
is subjective or objective. Thus nietus regis may be either the fear 
entertained by the king, or the fear of the king entertained by some 
one else. To prevent ambiguity, the Romans commonly put, instead 
of the objective genitive, the accusative or ablative, with one of the 
prepositions in or erga, towards ; in or adversus, against ; cum, with ; 
ab or ex, from, on the part of, &c. E. g. Amor mens erga or in te, My 
affection for (towards) you. Metus ab hoste, Fear from the enemy. 
Odium in or adversus aliquem, Hatred against any one. Amicitia 
cum allquo, Friendship for any one. Cura de republlcd, Anxiety for 
the commonwealth. 

4. The objective genitive is sometimes a personal pronoun. E. g. 
Accusator mei, My accuser. Commendatio tui, The recommendation 
of you. Ratio sui, Regard for one's self. Misericordia vestri, Com- 
passion on you. Cura nostri, Care for ourselves. But the subjective 
jrenitive is commonly represented by the possessive pronoun ; as, liber 
mens, tuus, noster,* &c. 

5. The genitive is sometimes put instead of an appositum. So fre- 
quently after vox, nomen, verbum, and vocabulum; as, Haec vox volu- 
ntatis, This word " pleasure." Appellatio domini, patris, The appella- 
tion " master," " father." Ex amore nomen amicitlae ductum est, The 
name of friendship is derived from love. Triste est nomen ipsum 
carendi, The very name of " want" is painful. Thus also Arbor fici, 
The fig-tree. Promontorium Miseni, The promontory Alisenurn. 

6. An adjective sometimes supplies the place of the genitive. E. g. 
Aliena (= aliurum) vita, The life of others. Venus Praxitelia (= 
Praxitelis), The Venus of Praxiteles. Hercules Xenophonteus (= 
Xenophontis) , The Hercules delineated by Xenophon. Vis hiemCdis 
(== Jiiemis'), The severity of winter. Hostilis (= hostis) libido, The 
wantonness of the enemy. 

7. The dative sometimes expresses a relation similar to that of the 
genitive, and stands in place of it. E. g. Casfris praefectus, The com- 
mander of the camp. Munimentum libertdti, A bulwark of (to) liberty. 
Legatus Jratri, The lieutenant of his brother. Caput Latio, the capital 
of Latium. Ego huic causae patronus exstiti, I have come out as the 
defender of this cause. Natura tu illi pater es, consiliis ego, You are 
his father by nature, and I by advice. 

8. The noun on which the genitive depends is sometimes omitted. 
This takes place, — 

* Yet this rule is sometimes reversed, the possessive pronoun being put in- 
stead of the genitive, and the latter for the former. E. g. Orlgo sui (= sua), 
His origin. Conspectus vestri (= Tester) venerabilis, Your venerable aspect. 
And on the other hand, invidia, fiducia tua (for tui), Envy towards, confidence 
in you. Injuriae meae (for mei), Injuries done to me. So always mea, tua, 
sua, nostra, vestrd causa (never mei causa, like honunis causa), For my (your, 
iScc.) sake, on my account. 



LESSON 64.] GENITIVE OF QUALITY. 375 

a.) When it has already been expressed, and can easily be supplied 
from the context. E. g. Julius quaestor Albucii fuerat, ut tu Verris. 
Julius had been quaestor to Albucius, as you to Verres. Animi linea- 
mcnta sunt pulchriora, quam corporis, The features of the mind are 
fairer than those of the body. In portion, qui Menelai vocatur, Into 
the port which is called the port of Menelaus. 

b.) When it is one of the words aedes, homo, civis, servus, libcrtus, 
uxor, films, filia, discipulus, sententia, or the ablative causa. E. g. 
Ad Vestae, Jovis Statoris (sc. aedem), To the temple of Vesta, of Ju- 
piter Stator. Verania Pisonis (sc. uxor), Verania, the wife of Piso. 
Hasdrubal Gisgonis (sc. Jilius). Caecilia Metelli (sc. Jilia). Hujus 
video Byrrhiam (sc. servum). Flaccus Claudii (sc. Ubertus). Vitan- 
dae suspicionis (sc. causa), For the sake of avoiding suspicion. Con- 
tra Philonis (sc. sententiani), Against the opinion of Philo. 

THE GENITIVE OF QUALITY AND MEASURE. 

B. In connection with an adjective or numeral, the 
genitive frequently expresses the relations of property, 
quality, character, age, time, measure, or number. E. g. 

Vir et consilii mdgni et virtutis. A man of great judgment and 

virtue. 
Oppidum mdximae auctoritdtis. A town of distinguished authority. 
Piier decern annorum. A boy often years. 

Fossa quindecim pedum. A ditch of fifteen feet. 

Classis septuaginta ndvium. A fleet of seventy ships. 

Claudius erat somni brevissimi, sc. Claudius was a man of very little 

homo. sleep. 

De lingua Latina securi es animi. You are unconcerned about the 

Latin language. 
Juvenisevasitvere indolisregiae. He turned out really a youth of 

royal disposition. 
Classis mille et ducentarum nd- The fleet consisted of a thousand 
vium longdrum fiiit. and two hundred galleys. 

Remarks. 

1. The quality may also be expressed by the ablative with praedi- 
tus, instructus, or ornatus understood, and the extent of time or space 
by the ' accusative, with natus, latus, or longus expressed. E. g. Vir 
summo ingemo (sc. praedxtus), A man of (endowed with) the highest 
genius. Fossa quindecim pedes lata, A ditch fifteen feet wide. Puer 
decern annos natus, A boy twelve years of age. 

2. The accusatives secus, genus, pondo, and libram (or pi. libras), 
occur instead of the genitive in expressions like liberi virile secus, 
Male children. Aliquid id genus (== ejus generis), Something of that 
kind. Arcs omne genus (= omnis generis), Birds of every species. 
Corona aureq lib ram pondo, A golden crown of a pound in weight. 



376 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 64. 



Willingly (gladly, with fond- 
ness). 
More -willingly (eagerly, 

t gladly). 
Very (or most) willingly, &c. 
Unwillingly, with reluc- 
tance. 
To do anything willingly (to like 
to do it) . 

To like, take pleasure in any- 
thing. 

To love, to be fond of anything. 

I like to see (look on). 
I like to have (possess). 

I like to study (am fond of my 
studies). 

I like to eat, drink. 

I like to be called diligent. 

Do you like (are you fond of) 

wine ? 
I do like it. I am very fond 

of it. 

Is he fond of fish ? 

He is fond of them. 

Do you like a large hat ? 

No, I like a small (a tight) 

one. 
Do you like to hear my brother ? 

I do like to hear him. 

I do not like to hear him. 

I am extremely fond of hearing 

him. 
I am extremely anxious to see 

him. 
Do they like to do it ? 
They do not dislike to do it. 
Chicken. 
Fowl. 



(" Cupide, libenter, libenti ammo. 
\ Lubens, tis ; non invltus, a, um. 
Libentms, potlus ; libentiori ammo. 

Libentissime, libentissimo ammo. 
( Invito amino, gravate. 
\ Invitus, a, um. 

Facere aliquid libenter, libenti ani- 
mo, lubens, &c. 
( Delector, ari, atus sum. 
■} Gaudeo, ere, gavisus sum. 
( (aliqua re.) 
j Amare aliquid. 
\ Appetere (-Ivi, Itum) aliquid. 
j Delector spectare. 
\ Jiivat* me spectare. 

Delector (me juvat) habere (pos- 
sidere). 
( Gaudeo studiis litterarum. 
( Ego litteris studere delector. 
( Juvat me edere, bibere. 
( Delector edere, bibere. 

Amo vocari diligens. 
5 Delectarisne bibere vinum ? 
\ Appetisne vinum ? 

Delector vero. Maxime appeto. 



f Juvatne eum comedere pisces ? 
\ Appetitne pisces ? 

Jtivat. Appetit. 

Niini pileo aniplo delectaris (gaii- 
des) ? 

Immo vero arcto gaudeo (delector). 

Ecquid fratrem meum aiidis libenti 

animo ? 
Audio eum non invitus. 
Ego eum invito animo audio. 
Audio eum libentissime. 

Flagro cupiditate ejus videndi. 

Faciiintne id (hoc) libenter ? 
Id non inviti faciunt. 
(Caro) gallinacea. 
Altiles,}^/?/. or altilia, n.p>l. 



* An impersonal verb : " It pleases, delights me.' 
eum, &c. 



Perfect: Juvit mc, te, 



LESSON 64.] 



PHRASES AND EXERCISES. 



177 



Fish. 
Pike. 
Salmon. 
Trout. 

Do you like (are you fond of) 

chicken, fowl, pike ? 
I like all these things very well. 

I do not like them. 



By heart ; from memory. 
To learn by heart, to commit 
to memory. 

To commit verbally, in part. 

To know by heart. 

Have you learnt your exercises 

by heart ? 
We have learnt them. 
We have faithfully committed 

them to memory. 
Do you know them by heart ? 
I do not know them. 
Do your scholars like to learn 

by heart ? 
They do not like it. 
Does he learn his lesson by 

heart ? 
Pie does commit it word for 
word. 

How often ? How many 

times f 
Six times a day, a month, a 

year. 
Once, twice, three, four, five 
times a week. (C£ page 
317, note f.) 
How many times do you eat a 

day ? 
I eat three times a day. 
Does he eat as often as I ? 

He eats oftener ; he eats five 

times a day. 
What time (of the day) do you 

go out V 

32* 



Pisces, ium (pi. o/piscis, is, m.). 

Esoces, pi. of esox, ocis, m. 
- Salmones, pi. o/salmo, onis, m. 
*Truttae, pi. q/*trutta, cte,f. 

Delectarisne comedere gallinace- 
am, alti'lia, esoces ? 

Ea omnia maxime appeto. 
( Comedere non delector. 
} Omnia haec non comedo nisi invi- 
(_ tus. 

Memoriier (Adv.) ; ex memorial. 

Edisco, ere, edullci, . 

Memoriae mandare, or committere 
(aliquid). 

Ediscere aliquid ad verbum, per 
partes. 

Memoria tenere, in memoria ha- 
bere (aliquid). 

Edidicistisne pensa imperata ? 

Edidicimus profecto. 

Memoriae ea fideliter mandavimus 
(commisimus). 

Tenesne ea memoria? 

Non teneo. 

Ecquid discipuli tiii memoriae com- 
mittere delectantur ? 

Non delectantur. 

Ediscitne j^ensum siium ? 

Ediscit vero ad verbum. 



Quam saepe f Quoties ? QuotXens 1 

SexXes in die, in mense, in anno. 

Semel, bis, ter, quater, quinquies 
in hebdomade. 

Quoties in die cibum siimere soles ? 

Ego ter in die cibum ciipere sdleo. 
Editne (estne) tiim saepe quam 

ego ? 
Saepius edit quam tu ; cibum siimit 

quinquies in die. 
Quo tempore in publicum prdditis ? 



373 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 64. 



We go out early in the morning. 

If (conjunction). 

I intend to pay what I owe you, 

if I receive my money. 
Do you intend to buy wood ? 
I do intend to buy some, if they 

pay me what they owe me. 
Do you reply, if (when) you are 

asked (questioned). 
I do reply. 

TJie weather (= s%, state 
of the weather). 

Good, clear, favorable weath- 
er. 

Bad, windy, unfavorable 
weather. 

Warm, cold, very cold 
weather. 

Severe, stormy, cloudy 
weather. 

Dark, moist, dirty, rainy 
weather. 

Steady, excellent weather. 

A dry state of the atmos- 
phere. 

A fine, clear, serene sky 
(weather). 

Changeable, inconstant 

weather. 

What sort of weather is it ? 
How is the weather'? 

It is fine weather at present. 

What sort of weather was it yes- 
terday ? 

The weather was bad yesterday. 

How is the weather to-day ? 

It is fine, clear weather to-day. 

It is neither very cold nor very 

warm to-day. 
Is the weather damp (moist) ? 

The weather is too dry. •] 

Dark, obscure. 1 



Prodimus in publicum prima luce 
mane. 

Si (cum Indie. & Subj.). 

Ego quod tibi debeo solvere edgito, 
si pecuniam meam acci'pio. 

Cogitasne emere lignum V 

Cdgito vero aliquantum emere, si 
mihi pecunias debitas sdlvunt. 

Respondesne, si (cum) interroga- 
ns ? 

Respdndeo. 

Tempestas, atis, f. ; coelum, i, n. ; 
coeli status, its, m. 

Tempestas bona, serena, opportuna. 
Tempestas mala, ventosa, adversa. 

Tempestas calida, frigida, perfri- 

gida. 
Tempestas vehemens, turbulenta, 

nebulosa. 
Tempestas turbida, humida, spurca, 

pluvidsa. 
Tempestas certa, egregia. 
Sicca coeli qualitas ; siccitas, at\s,f 

Sudum coelum ; coelum serenum. 

Yarium coelum ; varietas coeli. 

Qualis tempestas est ? Quae est 
coeli qualitas ? 

Tempestas mine est bona (serena). 

Qualis erat tempestas hesterna 
(heri) ? 

Malus erat coeli status heri. 

Qualis est coeli status hodiernus ? 

Sudum (serenum) hddie est coe- 
lum. 

Tempestas hodierna neque perfri- 
gida neque praecalida est. 

Estne coeli status lividus ? 

Nimia est siccitas. 

Coeli qualitas nimis sicca est. 

Tenebricdsus, a, um. 
Coecus, a, um. 
Caliginosus, a, um. 



LESSON 64.] 



PHRASES AND EXERCISES. 



379 



Obscure, dusky, gloomy. 

Clear, light. 

Dry. 

Is it gloomy in your room ? 
It is somewhat gloomy in it. 
No, it is quite light in it. 

Is the night a dark one ? 
Is it moonlight ? 

It is. 

There is no moonlight to-night. 
We have too much sun. 
We have no rain. 



( Obscurus, a, um. 
{ Subobscurus, a, um. 
J Clarus, a, um. 
| Illustris, is, e. 
Siccus, a, um. 

Estne cubiculum tiium obscurum ? 

Est vero subobscurum. 

tmmo vero admodum est clurum 
(illustre). 

Estne ndx caliginosa ? 
j" Estne lumen lunae ? 
( Lucetne luna ? 

Est. Lucet vero. 

Ndx est illunis. Luna silet. 

Nimis est solis. 

Terra est expers imbrium. 



To perceive (to notice, mark, ( (OoUl^percipio, ere cepi, ceptum. 
1 v v < Lenio, ere, crevi, cretum. 

' l^Notdre. V id ere. Observdre. 

Ecquem (num quem) notavisti ? 
Nullum (neminem) notavi. 
Cerm'sne milites lllos hdrreum in- 
troeiintes (qui in horreum ine- 
unt) V 
Cerno vero eos, qui intro eunt. 
Ego infantulum ludentem video. 



Have you perceived any one ? 
I have perceived no one. 
Do you perceive the soldiers who 
are going into the storehouse ? 

I perceive those who are going in. 
I see the child which plays 

(played). 
I see the man who has my money. 

I perceive him, who is coming. 
I see also him, who owes me 
money. 

The soldier. 
Also (likewise). 



qui pecumam 



Video hdmincm, 

meam tenet. 
Ego eum, qui venit, percipio. 
Video et eum (eum qudque), qui 

mihi peciiniam debet. 

Miles, itis, m. 

Qudque (jjut after the emphatic 
icord), et, etiam. 

Exercise 123. 

Do you perceive the man who is coming ? — I do not perceive him. 

— What do you perceive ? — I perceive a great mountain and a small 
house. — Do you not perceive the wood ? — I perceive it also. — Do 
you perceive the men who are going into the garden? — I do not 
perceive those who are going into the garden, but those who are going 
to the market. — Do you see the man to whom I have lent money ? 

— I do not see the one to whom you have lent, but the one who has 
lent you some. — Have you perceived the house of my parents ? — I 
have perceived it. — Do you like a large hat ? — I do not like a large 
hat, but a large umbrella. — What do you like to do V — I like to 
write. — Do you like to see those little boys ? — I do like to see them. 



380 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 6U 

— Do you like beer ? — I like it. — Does your brother like eider ? — 
lie does not like it. — What do the soldiers like ? — They like wine 
and water. — Dost thou like wine or water ? — I like both. — Do 
these children like to study ? — They like to study and to play. — Do 
you like to read and to write ? — I like to read and to write. — How 
many times do you eat a day ? — Four times. — How often do your 
children drink a day ? — They drink several times a day. — Do you 
drink as often as they ? — I drink oftener. — How many times a year 
does your cousin go to the ball ? — He goes thither twice a year. — 
Do you go thither as often as he ? — I never go thither. — Does your 
cook often go to the market ? — He goes thither every morning. — 
Do you often go to my uncle's ? — I go to him six times a year. — Do 
you like fowl ? — I do like fowl, but I do not like fish. — What do 
you like ? — I like a piece of bread and a glass of wine. — What fish 
does your brother like ? — He likes pike. — Do you learn by heart '? 

— I do not like learning by heart. — Do your pupils like to learn by 
heart ? — They like to study, but they do not like learning by heart. 

— How many exercises do they do a day ? — They only do two, but 
they do them well. — Do you like coffee or tea? — I like both. — 
Do you read the letter which I have written to you ? — I do read it. 

— Do you understand it ? — I do understand it. — Do you under- 
stand the man who speaks to you ? — I do not understand him '? — 
"Why do you not understand him '? — I do not understand him because 
he speaks too badly. — Have you received a letter ? — I have received 
one. — Will you answer it ? — I am going to answer it (RescripWrus 
sum). 

Exercise 124. 

Do you intend going to the theatre this evening? — I do intend 
going thither, if you go. — Has your father the intention to buy that 
horse ? — He has the intention to buy it, if he receives his money. — 
Has your cousin the intention to go to England He has the inten- 
tion to go thither, if they pay him what they owe him. — Do you in- 
tend going to the ball ? — I do intend going thither, if my friend goes. 

— Does your brother intend to study German ? — He does intend to 
study it, if he finds a good master. — How is the weather to-day ? — 
It is very fine weather. — Was it fine weather yesterday ? — It was 
bad weather yesterday. — How was the weather this morning ? — It 
was bad weather, but now it is fine weather. — Is it warm ? — It is 
very warm. — Is it not cold ? — It is not cold. — Is it warm or cold ? 

— It is neither warm nor cold. — Did you go to the country the day 
before yesterday ? — I did not go thither." — Why did you not go 
thither V — I did not go thither, because it was bad weather. — Do 
you intend going into the country to-morrow '? — I do intend going 
thither, if the weather is fine. — Is it light in your room ? — It is not 
light in it. — Do you wish to work in mine ? — I do wish to work in 
it. — Is it light there ? — It is very light there. — Can you work in 
your small room. — I cannot work there. — "Why can you not work 
there? — I cannot work there because it is too dark. — Where is it 
too dark? — In my small room. — Is it light in that hole? — It is 



LESSON 65.] GENITIVE OF THE WHOLE. 381 

dark there. — Is it dry in the street? — It is damp there. — Is the 
•weather damp ? — The weather is not damp. — Is the weather dry ? 

— It is too dry. — Is it moonlight V — It is not moonlight ; it is very 
damp. — Why is the weather dry ? — Because we have too much sun 
and no rain. — When do you go into the country ? — I intend going 
thither to-morrow, if the weather is fine, and if we have no rain. — ■ 
Of what does your uncle speak ? — He speaks of the fine weather. 

— Do you speak of the rain ? — We do speak of it. — Of what do 
those men speak ? — They speak of fair and bad weather. — Do they 
not speak of the wind ? — They do also speak of it. — Dost thou 
speak of my uncle ? — I do not speak of him. — Of whom dost thou 
speak ? — I speak of thee and thy parents. — Do you inquire after 
any one ? — I inquire after your uncle ; is he at home ? — No, he is 
at his best friend's. 



Lesson LXV. — pensum sexagesimum quin- 

TUM. 

THE GENITIVE OF THE WHOLE. 

A. Nouns denoting a measure or weight, and adjec- 
tives or pronouns of the neuter gender denoting a part, 
are followed by the genitive of the whole. 

The principal words of this class are : — 

1. Substantives denoting, — «.) Definite measure; as, medimnum, 
modais, concha ; amphora, congXus ; sextarius, hemina ; jugerum (of 
land) ; punctum, vestigium (of time), b.) Definite weight; as, as, 
libra, pondo, uncia, mina, talentum. c.) Quantity or number in gen- 
eral ; as, mensura, modus, vis, copia, multitude, acervus, numerus, grex, 
globus, &c, and negatively nihil. 

2. The nominative and accusative of the neuter adjectives* tantum, 
quantum, aliquantum, multum, plus, amplius, plurlmum, parum, minus, 
minimum, nimium, dimidium, reUquum, aliud. 

3. The nominative and accusative of the neuter pronouns hoc, id, 
illud, idem, quod, quid, with their compounds aliquid, quidquam, quid- 
dam, quidquid, &c. 

4. The adverbs sat, satis, abunde, affdtim, parum, partim, and minis. 

Examples. 

Conon pecuniae quinquaginta ta- Conon made his fellow-citizens a 

lenta civibus siiis donavit. present of fifty talents. 

Caesar pdpulo praeter frumenti In addition to ten measures of corn 

* Which in this construction are, however, always employed substantively. 



382 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSOX 6.5. 

de'nos modios ac tdtidem dleili- and a? many libras of oil, Caesar 

bras, trecenos qudque niimmos also divided among the people 

viritim divi-it. three hundred sesterces to each. 

Injtigere Leontinidgrimedimnum At Leontini nearly a mcdhnnuin 

fere tritici seritur. of wheat is usually sown on an 

acre of land. 

Flumina jam lactis, jam flumina Now streams of milk, now streams 

nectaris ibant. of nectar flowed. 

Justi'tia nihil expetit^jrefcu. Justice seeks no reward. 

L'ndique ad inferos tantundem The distance to the other world is 

vide est. the same from every place. 

Romani ab sole orto in multum The Romans stood in battle array 

diet stetere in aeie. from sunrise till late in the day. 

Galli hoc sibi soldt'd proponebant The Gauls proposed this consola- 
tion to themselves. 

/'/ tantum ho'stium, quod ex ad- He saw only so much of the enemy 

verso erat, conspexit. as was in front of him. 

Ti'bi idem consUii do. quod mi- I give you the same advice as I do 

himet ipsL to myself. 

Quid causae est, cur philosophos What is the reason why they do 

nonlegant? not read the philosophi 

Remarks. 

1. After the neuter pronouns and adjectives hoc, id, Ulud^aliqwd, 
quid ? quantum, &c the genitive is sometimes again a neuter adjective 
used substantively; a<. aliquid boni, quiddam mali, quid unci? &c 
This construction is, however, confined to adjectives of the second 
declension. Those of the third, and comparatives in us, generally 
remain adjectives in agreement with the pronoun : as, aliquid turpe\ 
mi morabUe ; * uu Uus ahquid . quid gravius f 

2. The genitives gentium, terrdrum, loci, and locorum after the ad- 
verbs ubi, ubique, ubicunque, usquam, nusquam, unde, hie, hue, 
eodem, quo, quocunque, quoquo, aliquo, and longt serve to add empha- 
sis to the expression. E. g. Ubi gentium? Ubi terrdrum? Where in 
the world V Aliquo terrdrum, Somewhere, in some place or another. 
Quo loci for quo loco ; eodem loci for eodem loco. To these add the 
expressions of time, ad id focorum, up to that time : adhuc locurum,jxp 
to this time ; interea loci, meanwhile : postea loci, afterwards. 

3. The adverbs hue, eo, and quo, in the sense of "degree" or "ex- 
tent." are also put with a genitive. E. g. Hue arrogantiae, To this 
degree of arrogance. Eo insolendae, To that extent of insolence. 
Quo amentioi ? To what degree (extent) of folly? 

4. Other adverbs construed with the genitive are pridie and / - 
tridie, and, among the later writers, turn or tunc. E. L r . Pridie > 

* But in connection with one of the second declension, sometime* nho the 
genitive; as, aUqtddnovi ac memorabiHs; gtadquam, turn dico lir'U.*. ted hum 

So, on the other hand, adjectives of the second declension are often in agree- 
ment with the pronoun; as, aliquid bonum, novum, equally correct. 



LESSON 65.] GENITIVE AFTER PARTITIVES. 383 

diei, on the day before (thai); postridie ejus diei, on the following 
day ; * turn (tunc) temporis, at that time, then. 

5. Neuter adjectives in general, both singular and plural, are often 
employed substantively with a genitive by the poets aud the prose- 
writers of a later date. J E. g. Ad summuni montis, To the top of the 
mountain. ReUquum noctis, The rest of the night. Medium and se- 
rum diei, The middle of, late in, the day. In medio aedium, In the 
midst of the house. Extremo aestatis, In the latter part of the sum- 
mer. Summa (= summae partes) pectoris. The upper parts of the 
chest. Cujusque artis difficilima, The most difficult parts of every art. 
In occuliis reconditisque templi, In the secret recesses of the temple. 
SubXla belli, The surprises of war. Incerta casuum, The uncertainties 
of chance. Infrequentissima urbis, The most unfrequented parts of 
the city. 

G. "When the adverbs of quantity sat, satis, aliunde, ajjfatim, parum % 
partim, and mmis arc followed by the genitive, they may be regarded 
as substantives of the neuter gender. E. g. Satis honorum, satis su- 
perque vitae erat, There were honors enough, there was life enough, 
and even more than enough. Potentiae gloriaeque abunde, An abun- 
dance of power and glory. - [ffatim < st homXnum, There is a sufficiency 
of men. Lepuris parum, But Little wit. Nimis insidiarum, Too many 
stratagems. Eorum partim in jxatipa, partim in acie illustres t sse eo/u- 
crunt, Some of them wished to distinguish themselves by their display, 
and others on the battle-field. 

7. The demonstratives id and tantum are sometimes omitted when 
rptod or quantum follows. E. g. M'd~t<<> mercedis quantum £ poscet, 
promitti jubeto, Let the doctor l»e promised as large a lee as he de- 
mands. JRomdnus exercttus, quod inter Palatinum Capitolinumque 
c<>!h in campi§ est, compleverat, The Roman army had filled the space 
included between the Palatine and Capitoline hills. 

8. The genitive also occurs before the preposition tenus, "up to," 
and sometimes after interjections. E.g. J'<>-!nris tenus, Up to the 
chest. mihi nuntii beati! () blessed harbinger to me! Foederis 
heu tac'tfi.' Alas tor the tacit alliance ! 

GENITIVE AFTER PARTITIVES. 

B. Partitives, including nouns, adjectives, pronouns, 
numerals, and adverbs, denoting a number, division, or 

part of a plurality, arc followed by the genitive plural 
of the whole. 

The partitives susceptible of this construction are, — 

* But more frequently with the accusative; as pridU or postridie i urn <litm. 
f By Cicero ana Caesar rarely except in the plural. By Livy and Tacitus 
frequently in both numbers. 
\ Tantum mercedis, quantum. 
\ For id campi, quod. 



384 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 65. 



1. Substantives denoting a certain number of countable objects, 
such as centurm, leglo, cdhors, manipulus ; also p> ars i dectma or de- 
cuma, nihil, &c. 

2. The pronouns uter, alter, neuter, utcrqite cdteruter, alius, sola*, 
nullus, nemo, ille, hie, quls, qui, and their compounds quieunque, quis- 
qms, ediquis, &c. So also multi, plunmi, plerique, pauci, quol, quot- 
cunrjue, quotus, quotas quisque, aliquot, tot, ceteri, and reliqui. 

3. Comparatives and superlatives, inclusive of a few adjectives of 
superlative signification, like iinus (the only one), medius, princeps. 

4. Numerals, both cardinal and ordinal. Examples of all these 



Servius Tullius e'quitum duddecim 

scripsit centiirieis. 
jVi/di omnium rerum melius, quam 

dmnis miindus administrator. 
Piscium feminae majdres quam 

mares sunt. 
Promulgavere legem, ut cdnsulum 

alter ex plebe crearetur. 

Animdlium dliei rationis cxpertia 
sunt, alia ratione utentia. 

U/erque nostrum ad siium stiidium 

libellos evolvebat. 
Cum niillo hdstium linquam con- 

grc>ssus est. 
Nemo mortdlium omnibus hdris 

sapit. 
Multae, ceterae istarum drborvm. 
Par cuilibet superidrum regum. 

Quotus rjuisque pJiilosophorwn ? 

~N eque stult or um quisquqm beatus, 

neque sapieniium non beatus. 
Prior Itorum in proelio cecidit. 

Major Xeronum. Senidres Pa- 

trum. 
Gedlnrum omnium fortissimi sunt 

Belgae. 
Aristides unus omnium justissi- 

mus fuisse traditur. 

Quorum qudttuor cdnsules, duo 
dictator ac magister equltum 
fuerunt. 



Servius Tullius enrolled twelve 
squadrons of horse. 

Of all things nothing is better reg- 
ulated than the entire universe. 

Female fishes are larger than the 
males. 

They promulgated a law, that one 
of the consuls should be chosen 
from among the people. 

Some animals are destitute of rea- 
son, and others endowed with 
it. 

Both of us were unfolding manu- 
scripts for our respective studies. 

He never fought with any of his 
enemies. 

No man is wise at all times. 

Many, the rest of these trees. 

Equal to any one of the preceding 
kings. 

How many among the philoso- 
phers l i 

Xot a single fool was ever a happy 
man, nor a wise man not happy. 

The former of these fell on the 
battle-field. 

The elder of the Xeros. The 
senior senators. 

The bravest of all the Gauls are 
the Belgae. 

Ari>tides is said to have been the 
most just of all (his contempo- 
raries). 

Of whom four were consuls, and 
two dictator and lieutenant-dic- 
tator. 



LESSON 65.] GENITIVE AFTER PARTITIVES. 385 

Remarks. 

1 . The genitive singular of a collective may take the place of the 
genitive plural. E. g. Ceteri nostri ordinis, The rest of our order. 
Primus Romdni generis, The first of the Roman nation. Tonus inju- 
stitiae nulla, Of all the instances of injustice, none, &c. 

2. Poets (and sometimes other writers) extend this construction to 
adjectives of the positive degree, and to substantives denoting a part 
of a genus. E. g. Nigrae landrum, Black wool. Veleres Romanorum 
ducum, The older Roman generals. Degeneres canum. Dogs of de- 
generate breed. Penna/orum an'nnalXum bubo et otus, Of the winged 
animals the owl and the horn-owl. — So also the perfect participle: 
Delectl eqiiitum, The select of the horsemen. Expediti militum, The 
light-armed portion of the army. — To these add omnes and cuncti, 
when they are used in the sense of singuli. E. g. Omnes Tarquinii 
generis, Every one of the family of Tarquin. Cunctae provinciarum, 
All of the provinces. 

3. The partitive (pronoun or adjective) commonly takes the gen- 
der of its genitive (as in all the above examples), but sometimes also 
that of another noun expressed or implied in its connection. E. g. 
Indus omnium flununum maxXmus, The Lulus the largest of all rivers. 
Hordeum frugum omnium molissimum* est, Barley is the softest of all 
grain. (Ego), qui plurima mala omnium Graecorum in domum tuam 
intuit, I who of all the Greeks have done your house the greatest 
injury. 

4. An adverb may take the place of the partitive. E. g. Caesar 
omnium fere oratorum Latlne loquitur elegantissime, Caesar speaks the 
most elegant Latin of nearly all the orators. Gallus maxim e omnium 
nobilium Graecis litteris studuit, Of all the Roman nobles Gallus paid 
most attention to the literature of Greece. 

5. The noun denoting the whole is sometimes put in the same case 
with the partitive. E. g. Duae filiae (= duarum Jiliarum) harum, 
altera occlsa, altera capta est, Of their two daughters, the one was 
killed and the other taken prisoner. This is done chiefly by poets 
and historians. 

G. Instead of the genitive, the prepositions ex, d<\ inU r. in, and ante 
arc sometimes used, especially after superlatives, numerals, and unus. 
E. g. Acerrlmus ex omul hut nostri* sensibus, The acutest of all our 
senses. Unus ex (or do) multis, One out of many. Acerrimus inter 
recusantes, The most violent among those refusing. Sapientissimus in 
septem, The wisest among the seven (sages of Greece). Ex quibus 
(sc.Jiliis) rellquit duos, Of which (i. e. number of sons) she has left 
two. 

7. When the partitive denotes the entire number referred to, it 
stands in the same case with its noun. E. g. (Xos) trecenti conjuror 
vlmus, Three hundred of us have conspired. Numerate, quot ipsi silis, 

* Superlatives thus frequently prefer the gender of the noun in agreement 
With them. 

Y 33 



38G 



LATIN GTIAMMAK. 



[lessox G.">. 



Count how many there are of you in all. Nostri (posa. pronS) septu- 
aginta cecidtrunt, Our men, seventy in number, it'll. Neque hi udmo- 
(him sunt multi, Kor does the (entire) number of these amount to 
many. (Cf. Lesson XVIII. G.) 

8. When the pronouns and adjectives above enumerated as parti- 
tives do not denote parts of a whole, they stand adjectively in agree- 
ment with their nouns.* E. g. Alter consul, doctissimus Romanus, 
multi, pauci, aliquot homines, tot annos, quot habet, &c. In this respect 
the English is generally a safe guide. 



To speak of anything to any 
one. 

Do you see the man, of whom I 

have spoken to you ? 
I do not see the paper, of which 

you speak. 
I have purchased the horse, of 

which you have spoken to me. 
Has your father the books, of 

which I am speaking ? 
I see the boy whose brother has 

killed my dog V 
I see the child, whose father set 

out yesterday. 
I see the man, whose dog you 

have killed. 
Do you see the people, whose 

horse I have bought ? 
I have seen the merchants, whose 

shop you have taken. 



De attqua re loqui (sermimem ha- 
bere, <■< rim facere) cum aliquo 
{<i<l aliquem). 

Videsne hdminem, de quo ego te- 
cum locurus sum ? 

Ego cluirtain, de qua ldqueris, non 
video. 

Ego equum, de quo mecum Bermo- 
nem habuisti, peciinia eomparavi. 

Habetne pater tiius Iibros, de quibus 
ldquor ? 

Vid€snepiierum,ci(/usfratercdriem 
nieum neC£U it ? 

Video infantem, ciijus pater heri 
profectus est. 

Video hdminem, ciijus ciinem ne- 
cavisti. 

Videsne homines, quorum equum 
ego emi. 

Vidi mercatdres, quorum tabernam 
conduxisti. 



To take (hire, rent). Conduco, ere, duxi, ductum. 

To burn down (to be de- \ Deflagro, are, avi, alum. 
stroyed by fire). < Igni absumere. Flamma deteri. 

Do you wish to take (rent) my Visne meas aedes condiicere ? 



house ? 
I do not wish to take it. 
Do you see the man. whose house 

(home) is burnt down ? 

I do see him. 

I have had a talk with the man, 
whose library has been burned. 

Have you read the book, which I 
have lent you. 



ciijus domus 

absiimpta or 



Nolo eas condiicere. 
Videsne hdminem, 

deflagravit (igni 

deleta est) ? 
Video. 
Ego cum hdmine, cujus bibliotheca 

nammis deleta est, colloquium 

haljui. 
Legistine librum, quern tibi commo- 

davi? 



* Except ttterque, which is always Itorwn, illorum, quorum uttrque. But also 
(piod lit r unique exemplum, both of which examples. 



LESSON 65.] PHRASES AND EXERCISES. 



387 



I have read it. 

Have you the paper which you 

want (need) '! 
I have that which I want (need). 
I have what I want (need). 
"Which book have you ? 
I have that which I want. 
Which nails has the man ? 
He has those which he needs. 

Which gloves has he ? 

He has those of his brother. 

I see the children to whom you 

gave apples. 
Of which men do you speak. 
I speak of those whose children 

have been assiduous. 
Towards (to). 
Towards the south. 
Towards Italy. 
Towards Dresden, Rome. 
The way to Berlin. 
The way from Berlin to Dresden. 

To take the way (to direct ) 
one's course towards). ~) 

To enter upon (to take) a 
way (road). 
Which way has he taken ? 

He has taken the way to Lcip- j 
sic . ( 

Which way will you take ? -) 

I will take (enter upon) this way. 
And I that one. 

So that. 
I have lost my money, so that 

I cannot pay you. 
He is sick, so that he cannot go 

out. 
He was also eloquent, so that no 

one excelled him in eloquence. 

So (to such an extent or de- 
gree) — that. 



Factum est. 

Habesne chartam, quae tibl opus 

est? 
Habeo quae mi'hi opus est. 
Habeo quod mihi opus est. 
Quern librum habes ? 
Earn, quae mihi opus est. 
Quos elavos homo habet ? 
Eos, quibus indiget (qui ei opus 

sunt). 
Quae digitabula habet ? 
Digitabula fratris habet. 
Video liberos, quibus mala dedisti. 

De quibus hominibus loqueris ? 

Loquor de lis, quorum liberi dili- 
gentes fuerunt. 

Te?*sus (prep.). 

Ad meridiem versus. 

In Italiam versus. 

Dresdam, Romam versus.* 

Via (iter) Berolinum (versus). 

Via (iter) a Berolmo Dresdam ver- 
sus (or ad Dresdam). 

Iter d/h/uo movere (nmvi, mdium). 

( 'iirsuiii suum dliquo dirigere (rexi, 
r< c/itiu). 

Viam or Iter iriire or ingredi. 

Qudrsum iter movit (ciirsum suum 
dircxit). 

Iter movit Lipsiam versus. 

Ciirsum suum Lipsiam direxit. 

Qudrsum iter movere vis? 

Quam viam inire vis ? 

fcgo hanc inire (ingredi) cogito. 

Et ego illam. 

/ 7 (eonj. with the subj.). 

Peciiniam meam perdidi, ut tibi 
sdlvere non pdssim (non queam). 

Aegrotus est, ut in publicum pro- 
dire non pdssit. 

Fiiit et disertus, ut nemo ei par 
esset eloquentia. 

Ita (sic, tam, eo, adeo, usque to) — 
id (with the subj.). 



* Compare Lesson LVI. B. and C. 



388 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 65. 



He loved him so much, that he 
was commonly regarded as 
his son. 

Was he so stupid as to consider 
that life ? 

For (conjunct.). 

I cannot pay you ; for I have no 

money. 
He cannot come to your house ; 

for he has no time. 
Advice is difficult, I see ; for I 

am alone. 

Or (disjunctive conj). 
Either — or. 



Eum sic diligebat, ut is ejus viilgo 
haberetur fi'lius. 

Adeone erat stiiltus, itt illam vitam 
esse arbitraretur ? 

Nam: enim (with the indie). 

Ego tibi debitum solvere nequeo. 

Nam pecunia careo. 
Ddmum tiiam venire non potest. 

Nam dtium ei deest. 
Video difficile esse consilium. Sum 

culm* solus. 

A ut, vel, -ve. 
.lut — out. 
T r el — vel. 
Sice — sice. 



C. Obs. The disjunctive ant implies essential difference, 
and a mutual exclusion of things. Vel and the enclitic ve, a 
mere verbal difference. E. g. 

Am I slave to you, or you to Tibi ego, aut tu mihi servus sum ? 



Enough of our affairs, or (and) 
even too much. 

I maintain that things which can 
be seen or touched are real. 

Either no one was ever a wise 
man, or if any one, Cato was. 

Every body is either water, or 
air, or fire, or earth, or some 
mixture of these, or a part of 
them. 

The poets were recognized or 
received by the Romans at a 
comparatively late period. f 

The laws of the Cretans, which 
either Jove or Minos estab- 
lished, inured their youth to 
hardships. 



De ndstris rebus satis, vel etiam ni- 

mium miilta. 
Esse ea dico, quae cerni tangire 

pdssunt. 
Ant nemo, aut, si quisquam, Cuto 

sapiens fiiit 
Oinne corpus aut aqua, aut :U : r, 

aut ignis, aut terra est, ant ali- 

quid, quod est concretum ex his, 

aut ex aliqua parte eorum. 
Serius a Romanis poetae vel cd- 

gniti vel recepti sunt. 

Cretum leges, quas sive Jupiter, 
sice Minos sanxit,J labdribus erii- 
diunt juventutem. 



* Enim rarely stands in the first of the clause; nam, on the other hand, 
always. 

t L e. It was comparatively late before the Roman? e/^er recognized (knew) 
or received poets among them. Here vel is used, because the notion of recog- 
nizing and receiving do not exclude or contradict each other. 

| Sive — sive express complete indifference, and are hence often rendered 
by whether — or. " Whether Jove or Minos, no matter which of the two," or 
"Either Jove or Minos, as you may choose to have it." 



LESSON 65.] EXERCISES 125, 126. 389 

Exercise 125. 

Did your cousin learn German ? — He was taken ill, so that he 
could not learn it. — Has your brother learnt it ? — He had not a 
good master, so that he could not learn it. — Do you go to the ball 
this evening ? — I have sore feet, so that I cannot go to it. — Did you 
understand that Englishman ? — I do not know English, so that I 
could not understand him. — Have you bought that horse? — I had 
no money, so that I could not buy it. — Do you go into the country 
on foot ? — I have no carriage, so that I must go thither on foot. — 
Have you seen the man from whom I received a present ? — I have 
not seen him. — Have you seen the fine horse of which I spoke to 
you ? — I have seen it. — Has your uncle seen the books of which 
you spoke to him ? — He has seen them. — Hast thou seen the man 
whose children have been punished ? — I have not seen him. — To 
whom were you speaking when you were in the theatre? — I was 
speaking to the man whose brother has killed my fine clog. — Have 
you seen the little boy whose father has become a lawyer? — I have 
seen him. — Whom have you seen at the ball ? — I have seen the 
people there whose horses and those whose carriage you bought. — 
Whom do you see now ? — I see the man whose servant has broken 
my looking-glass. — Have you heard the man whose friend has lent 
me money ? — I have not heard him. — Whom have you heard ? — I 
have heard the French captain whose son is my friend. — Hast thou 
brushed the coat of which I spoke to you ? — I have not yet brushed 
it. — Have you received the money which you were wanting ? — I 
have received it. — Have I the paper of which I have need ? — You 
have it. — Has your brother the books which he was wanting ? — He 
has them. — Have you spoken to the merchants whose shop we have 
taken ? — We have spoken to them. — Have you spoken to the phy- 
sician whose son has studied German? — I have spoken to him. — 
Hast thou seen the poor people whose houses have been burnt ? — I 
have seen them. — Have you read the books which we lent to you ? 

— AVe have read them. — What do you say of them ? — We say that 
they are very fine. — Have your children what they want ? — They 
have what they want. 

Exercise 126. 

Of which man do you speak ? — I speak of the one whose brother 
has turned soldier. — Of which children did you speak ? — I spoke of 
those whose parents are learned. — Which book have you read ? — I 
have read that of which I spoke to you yesterday. — Which paper has 
your cousin ? — He has that of which he has need — Which fishes 
has he eaten ? — He has eaten those which you do not like. — Of 
which books are you in want ? — I am in want of those of which you 
have spoken to me. — Are you not in want of those which I am read- 
ing ? — I am not in want of them. — Is any one in want of the coats 
of which my tailor has spoken to me ? — No one is in want of them. 

— Do you see the children to whom I have given cakes ? — I do not 
see them. — To which children must one give cakes ? — One must give 

33* 



390 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 66. 

some to those who learn well, and who are obedient and good. — To 
whom do you give to eat and to drink ? — To those who are hungry 
and thirsty. — Which way has he taken ? — He has taken the way to 
Vienna (Vindobonam). — Where did you reside when I was at Ber- 
lin ? — I resided at Munich (Monaci). — Where was your father when 
you were at Bale (Basiliae) ? — He was at Strasburg (Argent or ali). 

— Were you in Spain when I was there? — I was not there at 
that time ; I was in Italy. — At what time did you breakfast when 
you were in Germany ? — I breakfasted when my father breakfasted. 

— Can the physician come to-day ? — He cannot come, for he is him- 
self sick. — Is it true that every man is either good or bad ? — It is 
true. — This lesson must either be written or learnt by heart. — We 
should never praise those who are (either, vel) bad or idle. — Did he 
come to your house last evening ? — He had the headache, so that he 
could not come. 



Lesson LXVI. — pensum sexagesimum sex- 

TUM. 

OF THE GENITIVE AFTEK ADJECTIVES. 

A. Many adjectives, especially those signifying an 
affection or activity of the mind, such as desire or dis- 
gust, knowledge or ignorance, and many of those de- 
noting likeness, equality, community, property, plenty, 
and their opposites, are followed by the genitive of the 
object. E. g. 
Graeciili sunt contentions cupidi- The paltry imitators of the Greeks 

ores, quam veritdtis. are fonder of contention than of 

the truth. 
Graecarum litterdrum Ciito per- Cato was very much devoted to 

studiosus fuit. the study of Greek literature. 

Cdnscia mens recti famae menda- A mind conscious of rectitude 

cia ridet. laughs at the false reports of 

fame. 
Cato et reipublicae peritus et ju- Cato was experienced in public 

ris consultus fuit. affairs and learned in the law. 

Omnes immemorem benficii ode- Every one hates the man who is 

runt. forgetful of benefits received. 

Cyri et Alexdndri similis esse He wished to be like Cyrus and 

vdluit. Alexander. 

Viri propria est maxime forti- Courage is pre-eminently character- 

ttido. istic of man. 

Memdria communis est multarum Memory is common to many arts. 

drtium. 



LESSON 66.] GENITIVE AFTER ADJECTIVES. 391 

Galli sunt homines insueti labo- The Gauls are men unaccustomed 

ris. to labor. 

tJtinam te, frater, non solum vi- Would that I had left you, my 

tae, sed etiam dignitatis meae brother, a survivor not only of 

superstitem reliquissem ! my life, but also of my rank ! 

Refe'rta quondam Italia Pythago- Italy was formerly full of Pythago- 

i reorum fiiit. reans. 

Jnops scnatus auxilii Jiumdni ad Destitute of human help, the sen- 
dees pdpulum ac vota vertit. ate directed the people and its 

prayers to the gods. 

The adjectives thus followed by the genitive are those signi- 
fying* — 

1. Desire or disgust : — avidus, cupidus, studiosus, fasfklidsus. 
So also aejnulus, amicus, inimicus, invidus, which sometimes, however, 
have the dative.* E. g. Cupidus, avidus contentionis, Fond of conten- 
tion. Amicus, inimicus veritdtis, Friendly, hostile towards the truth. 
Aemiilus, invidus laudis, Emulous, envious of praise. Litterdrum La- 
tindrum fastidiosus, Averse to Latin literature. 

2. Knowledge, skill, or ignoeance : — conscius, gnarus, cer- 
tus, consultus, perltus, memor, provldus, prudens ; — insclus, nescius, 
igndrus, imperltus, imprudens, rudis, immemor. E. g. Ejus rei consci- 
us, gnarus, certlor, Conscious of, acquainted with, informed of, that 
thing. Consilii cert ior f actus, Informed of the design. Juris consultus, 
prudens or perltus, Learned, skilled, experienced in the law. Memor, 
immemor benejicii, Mindful, forgetful of kindness. Imprudens legis, 
Ignorant of the law. Imperltus belli, Unskilled in warfare. Rudis 
artium, Ignorant of the arts.f 

3. Likeness or unlikeness of mind, disposition, or character % : — 
similis, consimilis, dissimilis, aequalis, par, dispar ; proprius, publicus, 
sacer, afflnis, communis, soclus, viclnus, alienus, insuetus ; to which 
add superstes and supplex. (All these also with the dative.) — E. g. 
Sinillis homtnis, Like man (in character). Dissimilis Alexandri, Un- 
like Alexander. Par, dispar alicujus, Equal, unequal to any one. 
Aequalis temporum illorum, Contemporary with those times. Proprium 
Romani generis, Peculiar to the Roman nation. Insula eorum deorum 
sacra, An island sacred to those gods. Communis xdriusque nostrum, 
Common to both of us. Afflnis alicujus culpae, An accomplice to 
some crime. Alienum suae dignitatis, Foreign to his dignity. Super- 
stes aliurum, Surviving others. Supplex Dei, Supplicating God. 

4. Plenty or want : — plenus, referlus, fertilis, inops, indnis, jeju- 

* Compare page 351. 

t Perltus consultus and rudis also occur with the ablative. E. g. Omni genere 
litterarum perltus, Familiar with every kind of literature. Jureperiius or con- 
sultus instead of juris p&ritus, &c. The adjective conscius may have either the 
genitive or dative of the thing, but the person is always in the dative. E. g. 
conscius facinoris or facinori, privy to a crime; but alicui conscium essefaci- 
noris, to be in the secret of a crime with any one. Sibi conscium esse alicujus 
rei, to be conscious of anything. 

% Compare page 351. 



392 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON C6. 

nus ; compos, particeps, expers, exheres ; potens, impotens, condors, 
princeps, many of "which are also construed with the ablative.* E. g. 
Plenus meius, Full of fear. Referta negotiator um, Full of merchants. 
Fertllis frugum Jiominvmque, Abounding in produce and in men. 
Inops auxilii, Destitute of help. Virtutis, mentis compos, Possessed of 
virtue, master of one's intellect. Rationis particeps, expers, A par- 
taker of reason, destitute of it. Paternorum bonorum exheres, Disin- 
herited of one's patrimony. Sui potens, Master of one's self. Consors 
imperii, Sharing command. Eloquentiae princeps, The first in elo- 
quence. 

Remarks. 

1. Poets, and their imitators in prose, extend this construction to 
many other adjectives, especially to those denoting an affection of the 
mind. E. g. Ambiguus consilii, auxius futuri, benignus vini, certus 
sceleris, dubius viae, impiger militiae, integer vitae, interrltus leti, in- 
cautus futuri, incertus sententiae, laetus laboris, modlcus voluptatum, 
pervicax irae, piger periculi, securus futuri, segnis occasionum, socors 
futuri, timidus lueis, &c, in all of which the genitive stands instead of 
the more usual ablative or accusative, with de, in, or ad. So after 
adjectives generally, the genitive is sometimes employed (by the same 
class of authors) instead of the ablative, to express the relation " with 
respect to," " in regard to," " in " ; as, Diveisus morum, Different in 
respect to manners. Integer vitae, Irreproachable in life. 

2. The genitive animi frequently serves as a sort of complement to 
adjectives of every kind, especially in the prose of a later date. E. g. 
aeger, anxlus animi, sick, anxious in mind ; atrox, caecus an'tmi, of a 
ferocious, blind mind ; confusus, incertus animi, &c. 

3. Some of the adjectives enumerated under this rule occur also 
with prepositions. E. g. Prude us, rudis injure civlli. — Rudis adjpe- 
destria bella. — Mihi in publico, re socius, in privatis omnibus conscius 
esse soles. 

GENITIVE AFTER PARTICIPLES IN " NS." 

B. Participles in ns sometimes assume the character 
of adjectives, and then take the genitive instead of the 
case of their verbs. 

The participles most frequently thus employed are amans, appetens, 
colens, fugiens, intelligent, metuens, negligens, observans, retlnens, tole- 
rans, patlens and impatlens, temperans and intemptrans, &c. 

Examples are : Amans patriae, Attached to one's country. Aman- 
tisslmus fratris, Most affectionate towards his brother. Religionis 
colens, negligens, contemnens, An observer, neglecter, contemner of 
religion. Patiens or impatiens mediae, frigoris, Capable or incapable 

* Potens, impotens, consors, and princeps never occur with the ablative; 
annpnfi, particeps, expers, exheres, rarely. Of the rest (re fains, plenus, &eJ, 
some have the ablative even more frequently than the genitive. L\ g. Insula 
referta divitiis, an island abounding in wealth. 



LESSON 66.'] GENITIVE AFTER PARTICIPLES IN " NS.' 



393 



of enduring hunger, cold. Appetens laudis, Eager for praise. Sui 
despicXens, Despising one's self. Deorum metuens, Fearing the gods. 
Sitiens virtulis, Thirsting after virtue. Jmminentium intelligent, Aware 
of coming events. Omnium rerum abundans, Abounding in all things. 
Jnsolens belli, Unaccustomed to warfare. 



Quis famulus amdntior do'mini, 

quam canis ? 
Sumus natiira appetentissimi ho- 

nestdtis. 
Virtutem ob earn rem laudarunt, 

quod efficiens esset voluptdlis. 

Eques Romanus est, sui negotii 
bene qe'rens. 



Is there any servant more attached 
to his master than the dog V 

We are by nature covetous of 
honor. 

They lauded virtue merely because 
they considered it productive of 
pleasure. 

He is a Roman knight, who man- 
ages his business well. 

Remarks. 

1. Participles in ns, when used as such, are followed by the case 
of the verb to which they belong.* E. g. patiens frlgus, laborem, 
(actually) enduring cold, hardship ; but patiens frigdris, laboris, capa- 
ble of enduring cold, hardship. (As participles proper, they denote 
a transient condition with reference to some particular time ; as adjec- 
tives, a permanent capacity or quality.) 

2. Verbals in ax likewise govern the genitive. E. g. Capax imperii, 
Capable of command. Justitiae tenax, Tenacious of justice. Terra 
ferax arbdrum, A land abounding in trees. Tempus edax rerum, 
Time, the destroyer of things. Vir cibi vinique capacissvnus, A man 
capable of holding a large quantity of ibod and wine. So also a few 
participles in tus, as completus, consult us ; but these have already 
been included among the adjectives of A. 

Curro, ere, cucurri, cursum. 



To run. 

To run up (to), down, out, 
through, forth, &c. 

To run away (flee). 

Behind. 

Behind the door. 
Behind the stove. 
Behind the ear. 
Behind one's back. 
To stand behind the door. 
To run behind the house. 
Where is he running to ? 

He is running behind the stove. 



Cursu tendere (aliquo). 

Accurrere, decurrere, excurrere, 
pcrcurrere, procurrere, &c. 

Aufugio, ere, fiigi, . 

Profugio, ere, fugi, . 

Post, pone (Prep, cum Ace.}. 

Post (pone) fores. 

Post (pone) fornacem. 

Post (secundum) f aurem. 

Post tergum, post, &c. 

Pone fores assistere. 

Post aedes currere. 

Quo ciirrit ? Qudrsum cursu ten- 
dit ? 

(Tendit, currit) post (pone) forna- 
cem. 



* Cf. Lesson LXIX. E. 

t Stcundum = "close behind," "next to. 



304 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 66. 



Where did they run to ? 

They ran behind the house into 
the woods. 

Did they run away behind (to- 
wards) the trees ? 

They did not run away. 

AVhere was he sitting V 

He was sitting behind the stove. 

The stove. 
The fireplace. 
The oven. 
The blow, knock. 

The push ; the kick. 

The stab. 
The sting. 

The blow with a stick. 

The stab with a knife. 

The fisticutf". 

The sword stab. 

The sword. 

The broadsword, spade. 

The sabre. 

The point of a sword. 

To draw the sword. 

To sheath (put up) the 

sword. 
To be begirt with a sword, 

spade, sabre, &c. 

To push (any one with any- 
thing). 

To push, shove (any one out ( 
of doors, &c). \ 



To strike. 

To beat. 

To give one a beating. 



To castigate, punish one 
with a lashinof. 



verber, oris, n. , 
ictus calcis seu pe- 



Qudrsum cueurrerunt (eiirsu con- 

tenderunt) ? 
Cueurrerunt pone aedes in si'lvam. 

Niim pone versus arbores aufugie- 

bant ? 
Non aufugiebant. 
Ubi sedebat (considebat) ? 
Sedebat post (ad) fornacem. 

Fornax, acis,/.; camlnus, i, m. 
Focus, i, m. 
Furnus, i, m. 
Ictus, us, in. 

plaga,_ae,/. 
Pulsus, us, m. 

dis. 
Ictus, us, m. : plaga, ae, /. 
Punctum, i, n. 

Ictus baculi or fustis. 
Ictus cultri (cultelli). 
Pugni ictus ; colaphus, i, m. 
Ictus gladii or ensis. 
Gladlus, i, m. ; ensis, is, m. 
Spatha, ae,/. 
Acinaces, is, m. 
INiucro, onis, m. 
Ensem (e vagina) educere. 
Gladium stringere (stnnxi, 

ctum). 
Gladium (ensem) in vaginam re- 

condere (-condidi, conditum). 
Gladlo, ense, spatha, acinuce suc- 

cinctum esse. 
OfFendo, ere, di, sum. 
Fodlo, ere, fodi, fossum. 

(aliquem aliqua re.) 
Trudo, ere, si, sum. 
Protrudere (aliquem foras, 
&c). 

Ferio, Ire, , . 

Percutio, ere, ussi, ussum. 
Pulso, are, avi, atum. 
Caedo, ere, cecidi, caesum. 
Verbero, are, avi, atum. 
Aliquem verberare, pulsare, or 

verberibus caedere. 
Aliquem verberibus castigare. 
Verberibus in aliquem animadver- 
tere (-ti, -sum). 



stn- 



LESSON 66.'] 



PHRASES AND EXERCISES. 



395 



To give one a blow, Inflict 
a blow upon one. 

To give one a blow with 
the fist. 

To strike one into the face. 

To strike one with fisticuffs. 

To beat one with a stick. 
To beat one with lashes 

(whip one). 
To beat one to death. 

To be beaten, punished with 
a beating. 

To wound one with a sword- 
cut. 

To wound one with a sword- 
stab. 

To stab one. 

To stab one to one's heart. 
To give one a kick. 

Did you give this man a blow ? 



I did give him one. 



Did that boy strike his fellow 
with the flat of the hand ? 

No, he struck him with the fist. 

He gave each of them ten fisti- 
cuffs. 

Did they punish him with stripes 

He did punish him (It is he that 

was punished). 
What was beaten ? 
The soldier was beaten with a 

stick. 
Was he beaten hard ? 
Yes, he was beaten to death. 

Were you wounded with the 

point of the sword ? 
No ; I was wounded with the 

edge. 



Plagam alicui inferre or infilgere 

(-xi, ctum). 
Alicui pugnum or colaphum im- 

pingere (-pegi, pactum). 
Alicui alapam ducere. 
Aliquem pugnis caedere (colaphis 

pulsare). 
Aliquem fusti verberare. 
Aliquem verberibus pulsare (per- 

cutere). 
Aliquem usque ad mortem mulcare. 
( Vapulo, are, avi, atum.* 
} Tergo plector. 
( Pulsari et verberari. 
Gladio aliquem caesim vulnerare. 

( Gladio aliquem punctim vulnerare. 
( Gladii ictu aliquem vulnerare. 

Ictum alicujus corpori infigere 
(-fixi, -fixum). 

Alicujus pectus ictu confodere). 

Pedis verbere aliquem ferire. 

Calce aliquem percutere(castigare). 

Inflixistine (intulistine) hdmini isti 

plagam ? 
Sane quidem ; ego ei tinam inflixi 

(intuli). 
Duxitne piier ille condiscipulo siio 

alapam ? 
Non vero ; impegit ei cdltiphum. 
Impegit eis denos cdlaphos. 

( Eiimne verberibus castigabant ? 
■< In eiimne animadvertebant verbe- 
( f ribus ? 
Eum. In eum. 

Quis vapulavit (verberatus est) ? 
Verberatus est miles fiisti. 

Pulsatiisne est acerbe ? 
Verberatus est vero usque ad mor- 
tem. 
Vulnerabarisne gladio punctim ? 

Ndn vero ; vulnerabar caesim. 



* On vapulo, see Lesson XXXIII. A. Rem. 3. 



!96 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSOX 66. 



Did they kick him ? 

They did not kick him. 

The (military) officer. 
The firelock. 
The gun. 
The rifle. 
The cannon. 



The pistol. 

The powder. 
The ball, bullet. 
The cannon-ball 
The shot; the 

firelock. 
The shot of a 

cannon. &c. 
The thunder-cl 



ap. 
To load a gun. 
To load a cannon. 



To shoot, jire 
arms). 



Percusseruntne eum calce (pedis 

verberibus) ? 
!Non percusserunt. 

Praefectus militaris. 
*Telum (i, n.) igniferum. 
*Sclopetum, i, n. 
*Bombarda, ae,/. 
*Tormentum (i, n.) bellicum. 
*Sclopetum minoris modi. 
*Sclopetus minor. 
*Pulvis (-eris, m ) pyrius. 
*Glans, -dis,/'. 

*GIobus (i, m.) tormentis missus. 
Ictus, lis, m. ; fragor (oris, ?n.) teli 

igniferi. 
Ictus sclopeti, sclopeti minoris, tor- 

menti, &c. 
Fulminis ictus, or simply fulrnen, 

inis, n. 
Pulverem cum glande in sclopetum 

indere (didi, dltum). 
Pulverum cum globo in tormentum 
indere. 

/■ -,-l j: ( Emittere icfum telo ianifero. 

(mth fire- U j~ .. J _■ N ,_ 7 . . 

v < oonum eclere (tnsonare) telo igni- 

l fi ro - 



report of a 
gun, pistol, 



To shoot with a mm. 



f Glandes e sclopeto mittere. 

( Plumbum mittere. 
To shoot with a pistol (for Sonum edere (insonare) sclopeto 

pleasure). minoris modi. 

To fire with cannons. Tela tormentis mittere. 

To shoot or discharge ar- JSarrittas mittere. 



To shoot at (some one or 
something). 

To fire at some one or some- 
thing. 

To hurl a number of weap- 
ons (missiles) at one. 

Are you firing at any one ? 

I am firing at a bird. 

How many times did he fire at 

that bird ? 
He fired at it several times. 

How many times did the boy 
fire ? 



Peto, ere, ivi, itum (aliquem seu 

ALIQUID TELO). 

Telo ignifero pelere aliquem seu 
aliquid. 

Tela conjecere (-jeci, -jeetum) in 
aliquem. 

Petisne aliquem telo ignifero *? 

Vero, vdlucrem peto. 

Qudties ilium vdlucrem sclopeto 

petivit ? 
Petivit eum pliiribus tempdri- 

bus. 
Qudties sdnum pxier edi<Jit telo 

ignifero '1 



LESSON 66.] PHRASES AND EXERCISES. 



107 



He has fired twice with a pistol. 

He has fired five times with a 
gun. 

Did you shoot with a gun ? 

No, I fired with a cannon. 

Did you ever shoot with arrows ? 

I have shot with them several 
times. 

They have discharged all their 
missiles on him. 

Do you hear the report of a 
gun ? 

No ; but I hear the report of a 
cannon. 

Did ye hear the report of thun- 
der ? 

It is so ; we heard a thunder-clap. 

What are they doing ? 

They are bombarding the city 

with cannons. 
Why are you pushing him ? 
I push him because he has pushed 

me. 
Did you push him out of doors ? 
I did not push him out. 



Sdnum bis edidit sclopeto minoris 

modi. 
Sdnum edidit (insdnuit) quinquies 

sclopeto. 
Mittebasne glandes e sclopeto ? 
t mmo vero tela mittebam tormento. 
Misistine unquam sagittas ? 
Misi vero diversis tempdribus. 

Tela in eum omnia conjecerunt. 

Audisne fragorem sclopeti ? 

Ndn vero ; audio autem fragorem 

tormenti bellici. 
Audivistisne fragorem fulminis ? 

Ita est ; fulmen (fulminis ictum) 

audivimus. 
Quid agunt '? 
tJrbem tormentis bellicis verberant. 

Ciir eum offendis (fddis) ? 

Ego eum ob earn rem offendo (£6- 

dio), quod me offendit (fodit). 
Trudistine eum fdras ? 
(Eum) non protriisi. 



Exercise 127. 

Do you intend buying a carriage ? — I cannot buy one, for I have 
not yet received my money. — Must I go to the theatre ? — You must 
not go thither, for it is very bad Aveather. — Why do you not go to 
my brother ? — I cannot go to him, for I cannot yet pay him what I 
owe him. — Why does this officer give this man a stab with his sword ? 

— He gives him a stab with his sword, because the man has given 
him a blow with the fist. — Which of these two pupils begins to speak ? 

— The one who is studious begins to speak. — What does the other 
do, who is not so ? — He also begins to speak, but he is neither able 
to write nor to read. — Does he not listen to what you tell him ? — 
He does not listen to it, if I do not give him a beating. — What does 
he do when you speak to him ? — He sits behind the oven without 
saying a word. — Where does that dog run to ? — It runs behind the 
house. — What did it do when you gave it a beating ? — It barked, 
and ran behind the oven. — Why does your uncle kick that poor 
(mXser*) dog ? — Because it has bitten his little boy. — Why has your 
servant run away ? — I gave him a beating, so that he has run away. 

— Why do those children not work ? — Their master has given them 
blows with the fist, so that they will not work. — Why has he given 
them blows with the fist ? — Because they have been disobedient. — 

34 



398 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 67. 

Have you fired a gun ? — I have fired three times. — At whom did 
you fire ? — I fired at a bird which sat on a tree. — Have you fired 
a gun at that man ? — I have fired a pistol at him. — Why have you 
fired a pistol at him ? — Because he gave me a stab with his sword. — 
Are you fond of contention ? — I am not fond of it. — I am very 
much devoted to the study of Latin literature. — Why does your 
brother not work ? — Because he is not accustomed (insuetus) to la- 
bor. — Do you wish to be like that man ? — I do not wish to be like 
him. — Was Cyrus the equal (par) of Alexander? — He was not his 
equal. — Is your father skilled in the law '(Juris perltus) ? — He is not 
skilled in it. — Is the city full of (referta) strangers ? — It is full of 
them. — Who was the first in eloquence among the Romans (quis 
Romanorum) ? — Cicero was the first. — Are you attached to your 
country ? — I am very much attached to it. — Can you endure hun- 
ger and cold ? — I cannot endure (them). — Is he eager for praise ? 
— He is excessively eager (appententissimus) for it. — What does it 
behoove us to be '? — It behooves us to be thirsting after knowledge 
(intelligentia) and virtue. 



Lesson LXVII. — PENSUM SEXAGESIMUM SEP- 
TIMUM. 

OF THE GENITIVE AFTER VERBS. 

A. After verbs of valuing or esteeming, and also 
after those of buying and selling, hiring and letting, the 
indefinite price or value is expressed by the genitive. 

Such verbs are aesttmo, facto, pendo, duco, piito, 7iabeo ; aestfmor, 
flo, pendor, and sum ; — emo, mercor, vendo, veneo, liceo, taxo ; stare, 
constdre, &c. 

The genitives representing the indefinite price or value are, — a) 
Substantives like nihili, " (for) nothing"; Jlocci, nauci, pill, pensi, te- 
runcii, assis, " for a trifle," " a mere song." b) The neuter adjectives 
magni, highly ; permagni, very highly ; pluris, more highly ; plurimi, 
very highly, or the most ; parvi, but little (of little account) ; minoris, 
less; minimi, very little or least; and so 'tanti, tanfidem, quanti, quan- 
tivis, quanticunque, so much, just so much, as much, &c. Sometimes 
with pretii expressed. Examples are : — 

Cdmmii regis auctdritas mdgni The authority of King Commius 
habebdtur. was held in high esteem. 

Nulla vis aiiri et argenti pluris, No amount of gold or silver should 
quam virtus aestimdnda est. be estimated higher than virtue. 

Siimmum bdnum plurimi aesti- We must (should) attach the high- 
mdndum est. est value to the summum bonum. 



LESSON 67.] GENITIVE AFTER VERBS, 399 

Pravi homines siia pdrvl pendere, Bad men are accustomed to under- 

aliena ciipere solent. value their own possessions and 

to covet those of others. 

Noli spectare, qudnti homo sit ; Never mind how much the man is 

pdrvl enim pretii est, qui jam worth, for he is worth but little 

A nihili sit. who is already worthless. 

Emit Canius hdrtos tdnti, qudnti Canius has bought the garden for 

Pythius vdluit. the price which Pythius de- 
manded. 

Ve'ndo meum frumentum non I sell my grain no higher than 

pluris, quam ceteri. others. 

Tdnti quddque malum est, qudnti Every misfortune is of as much 

l'llud taxavimus. account as we have rated that. 

Nulla pestis humano generi plu- No pest has cost the human family 

ris stetit, quam ira. more than resentment. 

De Driisi hdrtis qudnti Ucuisse With reference to Drusus's garden 

tu scribis. you write, how much it was of- 
fered for. 

^go a meis me ainari et mdgni I want myself to be loved and es- 

pendi pdstulo. teemed by my friends. 

Remarks. 

1 . The definite value or price after the above verbs is expressed by 
a substantive in the ablative ; as, aestimare aliquid pecunia, tribus 
denariis ; vendere aliquid quinquaginta talentis, &c. (Cf. Lesson 
LXXI. A.) 

2. To the genitives of the price or value add hujus, boni, and aequi 
bomqne in expressions like Rem hujus non facto, I do not care that * tor 
it. Rem boni facto, or rem aequi bonique facio (or consulo), I con- 
sider it just and proper, I acquiesce in it (let it be so). 

3. The verbs coeno and habtto likewise occur with the genitive of 
the price. E. g. Quanti habitas ? What do you pay for your lodg- 
ings V Tantine coenas, quanti habitas ? Do you pay as much for your 
dinner as you do for your lodgings ? 

4. Aestimare also admits the ablatives magno, permagno, plurimo, 
parvo, minimo, and nihilo ; and after the verbs of buying and selling, 
these six ablatives are always put instead of their respective genitives. 
Pro nilulo may stand instead of niMli after pulare, ducere, and esse. 
E. g. Aliquid magni or magno (nihili, nihilo or nihil) aestimare ; — 
emere or vendere aliqidd magno, parvo, plurimo, minimo (pretio) ; — 
aliquid pro nihilo ducere, putare, to consider anything of no account. 

5. The price or value may also be expressed by an adverb ; as care, 
bene, male, gratis, &c. E. g. Hoc mihi gratis (= nihilo) constat, This 
costs me nothing. Aves pingues care veneunt, Fat birds fetch a high 
price. 

B. Verbs of reminding, remembering, and forgetting 

* I. e. A straw, rush. This was accompanied by a gesture on the stage. 



400 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 67. 



are followed by the genitive of the person, and by the 
genitive or accusative of the object, remembered or for- 
gotten. 

Such verbs are moneo, admoneo, commoneo, commonefacio, aliquem;* 
— memini, reminiscor, recordor, obliviscor. 



The physician did not cease to re- 
mind the king, now of his mother 
and sisters, now of the magni- 
tude of the approaching victory. 
He exhorted his soldiers to remem- 
ber their prowess exhibited on 
former occasions, nor to forget 
their wives and children. 
We remind the philologians of their 

duty. 
I remind learners of one thing 
only, which is, that they should 
love their teachers as they do 
their studies. 

Somno animus meminit praeteri- In sleep the mind recalls the past, 
torum, praesentia cernit, futu- beholds things present, and fore- 
sees the future. 
I mention living authorities ; never- 
theless, Epicurus must not be 
forgotten. 
They are good citizens, who are 
mindful of the benefits of their 
country. 
Homines interdum res praecla- Men sometimes forget the most 

rissimas obliviscuntur. remarkable things. 

Niinquam liberos meos adspicio, I never look at my children but 
quin Planch merltum in me what I call to mind my obliga- 
recdrder. tions to Plancus. 

Remarks. 

1. Neuter pronouns and adjectives (e. g. hoc, id, Mud, quod, quid, 
quae, multa, &c.) are invariably in the accusative after all the above 
verbs. E. g. Id unum te admoneo, I remind you of this one thing. 
Multa admonemur, We are reminded of many things. But the accu- 
sative of substantives occurs only after verbs of reminding or forget- 
ting ; as, beneficia, manddta lua memini or oblltus sum. 

2. Memini (in the sense of " I think of," or " I make mention "), 
recordor, and moneo, with its compounds, also take the ablative with 
de. E. g. De homine importunissimo ne meminisse quidem volo, I do 
not even wish to mention the importunate man. De Her ode et de 

* Verbs of reminding have thus also an accusative of the person reminded. 
(Lesson LX. C.) 



Medicus regem mddo matris so- 
rorumque, mddo tdntae victd- 
riae appropinqudntis admonere 
non destitit. 

Milites hortatus est, ut reminisce- 
rentur pristinae virtutis suae, 
neve mulierum liberumque obli- 
viscerentur . 

Grammaticos officii sui commone- 
mus. 

Discfpiilos id unum moneo, ut 
praeceptdres siios non minus, 
quam ipsa studia anient. 



ra praevidet. 
Vivorum memini, nee tamen Epi- 
curi licet oblivisci. 

Bdni stint cives, qui patriae bene- 
ficia meminerunt. 



LESSON 67.] GENITIVE AFTER VERBS. 401 

Mettio meminero, I will bear in mind Herod and Mettius. Velim scire, 
quid de te recordere, I should like to know what you recollect with 
reference to yourself. Terentiam monedtis de testamento, Remind Te- 
rentia of the will. 

3. The accusative of the person (reminded of, remembered or for- 
gotten) rarely occurs, except after memini, when used in the sense of 
"I still remember or recollect" (a person seen or known before). 
E. g. Antipdter, quern tu probe meministi, Antipater, of whom you have 
an honorable recollection. Cinnam memini, vldi Sidlam, I remember 
China, I have seen Sulla. But memento mei, nostri, Remember me, 
us. 

4. In this construction is included the expression venit milii in men- 
tem (cdiquid or alicujus rei), " something occurs to me." Thus, Venit 
mini Platonis in mentem. — Tibi tuarum virtutum veniat in mentem. 
But also, Res milii in mentem veniebat. — Omnia mihi in mentem 
venerunt. 

C. The impersonal verbs poenitet, jnget, pudet, taedet, 
miscret, ventum est, miseretur, and miserescit are followed 
by the genitive of the object by which the emotion is 
excited, and by the accusative of the person affected.* 
E.g. 

Sapie'ntiam\ niinquam sui poenitet. Wisdom never repents of itself. 
Me civitatis morum piget taedet- I am wearied and disgusted with 

que. the morals of the state. 

Sunt homines, quos libidinis in/a- There are men who are neither 

miaeque suae neque pmdeat, ashamed nor disgusted by their 

neque taedeat. own licentiousness and disgrace. 

Niinquam Atticum susce'pti ne- Atticus never grows weary of an 

gdtii pertaesum e'st. undertaking once begun. 

Miserette alidrum,tui nee misei^et, You pity others, but for yourself 

nee pudet. you have neither compassion nor 

shame. 
Cave tefrdtrum, pro fnltris salute Beware of being moved to pity by 

obsecrdntium, miseredtur. the brothers beseeching you for 

the safety of their brother. 
inopis mine te miserescat me'i. Let my poverty now move you to 

pity. 

Mhilne te pdpuli veretur, qui vo- Are you not afraid of the people, 
ciferare in via ? for vociferating in the street ? 

Remarks. 

1. The personal verbs misereor and miseresco, " I pity," adopt the 
construction of miseret ; but miserdri and commiserari are followed by 
the accusative. E. g. Nihil nostri miserere 1 Have you no compassion 

* Compare page 334, f Wisdom is here personified. 

Z 34* 



402 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 67. 



for us ? Miser escite regis, Pity the king. Commiseratus est fortunam 
Iraeciae, He commiserated the fate of Greece. 

2. The accusative of neuter pronouns may stand instead of the gen- 
itive. E. g. Sapientis est proprium, nihil, quod (= cujus) poenitere 
possit, facere, It is characteristic of a "wise man to do nothing which 
he may have to repent of. 

3. The object of the emotion may also be an infinitive, or a clause 
introduced by quod. E. g. Me non pudet fateri nesclre, quod nesciam, 
I am not ashamed to confess, that I am ignorant of what I do not 
know. Quintwn poemtet, quod anlmuni tuum ojfendit, Quintus is sorry 
that he has offended you. Non poenitet me vixisse, I do not regret 
having lived. 

4. The genitive after piidet sometimes signifies "before any one," 
and the accusative (me, te, &c.) is often omitted. E. g. Me tui, mi 
pciter, pudet, I am ashamed before you, my father. Pudet deorum Jio- 
mmumque, It is a shame in the eyes of gods and men. Nonne te hujus 
templi, non urbis, non vltae, non liicis pudet ? Are you not ashamed 
before this temple ? &c. 

5. These impersonal verbs sometimes (though rarely) occur per- 
sonally (i. e. in the plural, and with a subject nominative). E. g. Nm 
te liaec (nom.) pudent ? 



To forget. 

You forget — he forgets. 
Ye forget — they forget. 
Is he forgetting me, thee, us, 

them ? 
He is not forgetting thee, me, 

us, them. 
Are you forgetting anything ? 

I am forgetting my pen, my pa- 
per, my book. 

Has he forgotten to bring you 

the book ? 
He has forgotten to bring it to 

me. 
Have you forgotten that he has 

arrived ? 
I have not forgotten it. 
Can you forget that day ? 
I can never "forget it. 

Must the offences be forgotten ? 
They are to be forgotten entirely. 
Has he forgotten what I have 
told him V 



Obliviscor, i, obhtus sum (altcujus, 

ALICUJUS REI Or ALIQUID). 
Oblivisceris — obliviscitur. 
Obliviscimmi — obliviscuntur. 
Ecquid mei, tiii, nostri, illorum 

obliviscitur ? 
Tui, mei, nostri, illorum non obli- 
viscitur. 
Obliviscerisne aliquid (alicujus 

rei) ? 
Obliviscor vero meam pennam, 

chartam, librum (or meae pen- 

nae, chartae, libri). 
Oblltusne est tibi librum appor- 

tare ? 
Vero ; eum mihi apportare oblitus 

est. 
Oblitiisne es, eum advenisse ? 

Non oblitus sum. 
Potesne oblivisci diei illius ? 
!Ego ejus nunquam oblivisci pos- 
sum. 
Obliviscendumne est offensarum ? 
Obliviscendum est prdrsus. 
Oblitiisne est, quod (quae) ei dixi ? 



LESSON 67.] PHRASES AND EXERCISES. 



403 



He "has by no means forgotten it. 
You have forgotten to write to 

me. 
You are forgetting to speak to 

him. 

To belong to (any one). 1 

Does this horse belong to your 

brother ? 
It does belong to him. 
To whom does that table belong? 
It belongs to us, to you, to them. 
To whom do these gloves belong ? 
They belong to me, to you, to 

him. 
They belong to the captains. 
Whose book is this ? 
It is mine. 

Whose shoes are these ? 
They are ours. 



To Jit {suit, become). 
These shoes fit very well. 

Do these boots fit those men ? 
They do not fit them. 
Does this garment fit me ? 

It fits (suits) you very well. 

How does this hat sit ? 
It sits very well. 
It becomes you very well. 
See, whether this dress becomes 
me. 

To suit, please (any one). 

Does that cloth suit (please) 

your brother ? 
It does suit him. 
Do these boots suit (please) your 

friends ? 



Non vero ; minime oblitus est. 
Litteras ad me dure oblitus es. 

Cdlloqui cum eo oblivfsceris. 

Est aliquid alicujus. 
Est mens, tuus, ejus, &c. 

Estne hie equus fratris tiii ? 

Est ejus. 

Ciijus est ilia mensa ? 

Nostra, vestra, illorum (mensa) est. 

Cujus sunt haec digitabula ? 

Mea, tiia, ejus (illius) sunt. 

Centurionum (digitabula) sunt. 

Cujus est hie liber ? 

Meus est. 

Cujus sunt hi calcei ? 

Ndstri sunt. 

' Aptum (am, um) esse. 
Bene convenlre (-veni, -ventum). 

(alicui, alicui rei, ad ali- 
quid.) 
Hi calcei ad pedes (pedibus) &d- 

modum apti sunt (ad pedes dpti- 

me conveniunt). 
Aptaene sunt illis viris istae ca- 

ligae ? 
Non aptae sunt, lis non bene 

conveniunt. 
Vestisne haec mihi apta est (bene 

cdnvenit) ? 
Tibi ut quae optissima est. 
Tibi quam dptime cdnvenit. 
Qudmodo hie pileus sedet ? 
Admodum bene sedet. 
Te quam dptime decet. 
Contempla, satin' haec me vestis 

deceat. 
Convenire alicui. 
Placere (-cui, -cltum) alicui. 
Probari alicui. 

Convenitne (placetne) fratri txio 

iste pannus ? 
Placet. Probatur. 
Eequid hae caligae amieis tuis pla- 

cent (conveniunt) ? 



404 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 67. 



They do suit them. 

They do not suit them. a 

Does it suit you to do this V 
It does suit me to do it. 



r 

To become (jnoralhj). \ 

It becomes, is morally proper. j 

Does it become you to do this ? 
It does not become me to do it. 

Did it become him to write ? < 

It did become him. 

Does it become you to go on 

foot? 
It does not become me. 
It does not become an orator to 

be angry. 

It is proper, just. 

Is it proper for him to say so ? 

It is proper, just. 
It is not proper. 

To please, to be one 's pleas- J 
ure (It pleases). 

Does it please your brother to 

accompany us ? 
Does it suit your brother to go 

along with us ? 
It does not please him to go with 

you. 
It does not suit him to go with 

you. 
Did it please him to write to 

you ? 
It did please him. 
What is your pleasure ? 
What do you wish ? 
I wish you to bring me the 

book ? 
Do you want anything ? 



Placent. Probantur. 
(fis) minus placent. 
Non probantur (lis). 
Convenitne tibi hoc facere ? 
Id facere mihi cdnvenit. 

Decet, decuit, clecere (Impers.). 

(aliquem facere a liquid). 
Est alicujus, est meum, tuum, &e. 

(aliquid facere). 

Decetne te hoc facere ? 
Tuunme est hoc agere ? 
id facere me non decet (me de- 

decet) . 
Eumne scrfbere decebat (decuit) ? 
Ejusne erat scribere ? 
Decebat. Erat ejus. 
Decetne te (tuunme est) ire pe- 

dibus ? 
Me non decet. Meum non est. 
Oratorem irasci minime decet. 

Par est, justum est (aliquem fa- 
cere aliquid). 
!Estne par (justum), eum hoc di- 

cere ? 
Par est. Justum est. 
Par non est. Nefas est. 
Libet, libitum est, libere. 
Collibet, collibitum est, &c. 
Placet, placuit, placere. 

(alicui facere aliquid.) 
Libetne (collibetne) fratri tuo sequi 

(comitari) nos ? 
Convenitne fratri tuo nobiscum 

una simul ire ? 
Ei non placet (libet) vobiscum una 

ire. 
Simul (una) vobiscum ire ei non 

cdnvenit. 
Collibitiimne (placitiimne) est.ei 

litteras dare ad te ? 
Collibitum est. 
Quid tibi collibet ? 
Quid vis (imperas) ? 
Vdlo, te mihi apportare librum. 



Niim quid 
peras ? 



Niim quid im- 



LESSON 67.] 



PHRASES AND EXERCISES. 



405 



Do you want anything else ? 

As you please. 

But concerning the republic, it 

does not please me to write 

any more. 

To please (to like). 

Does this book please you (do 
you like this book) ? 

I like it very much. 

I dislike it extremely (it dis- 
pleases me very much). 

Do you dislike these books ? 

They do not displease me (I do 
not dislike them). 

I do not like them very well. 

How do you like it here (i. e. 

this place) ? 
I like it very well. 

I like this place extremely. 

It is my delight. 

To displease (to dislike). 

Heady money, cash. 
To pay down (cash). 

To buy anything for cash. 
To sell anything for cash. 
On credit. 

To buy, sell anything on credit. 

Do you wish to buy on credit ? 

No, I wish to buy for cash. 

I prefer to buy for cash. 

Does it suit you to sell me on 

credit ? 
It does not suit me. 

To succeed, prosper, turn 
out well (of things). 



Num quid ceterum vis ? 
Ut placet. Ut jiibes. 
Sed de republica non mihi h'bet 
plura scribere. 

(Pldceo, ere, ui, itum. 

•< Pro bo?' t ari, atus sum. 

( Amdeo, ere, isi, isum (alicui) . 

Probatiirne (placetne) tibi hicce 

liber ? 
Perplacet. Valde mini probatur. 
Vehementer mihi displicet. 
Ab eo abhdrreo. 
Niim libri illi tibi displicent ? 
Mihi non displicent (non impro- 
bantur) . 
( Minus mihi probantur. 
\ Minus mihi arrident. 
Qudmodo hie locus tibi placet 

(probatur) ? 
Hie locus mihi arridet (mihi valde 

placet, probatur). 
Hie locus mihi praeter dmnes arri- 
det. 
£st in deliciis meis. 
( Displiceo, ere, ui, itum. 
( Improbor, ari, atus sum. 

Pecunia ipraese?is seu numerdta. 

Solvere pecuniam praese?item (nu- 
merdtam). 

£mere aliquid pecunia numerata 
(die oculata). 

Vendere aliquid pecunia praesenti 
(die oculata). 

Pecunia non praesenti seu nume- 
rata. Die caeca. 

Emere, vendere aliquid pecunia 
non praesenti seu die caeca. 

Visne emere pecunia non prae- 
senti (die caeca) ? 

Immo vero pecunia numerata eme- 
re ciipio. 

Die oculata emere malo. 

Convenitne tibi vendere mihi pe- 
cunia non praesenti (die caeca) ? 

Non cdnvenit. 
( Cedo, ere, cessi, cessum. 
\ Procedure. Succedere. 



406 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 67. 



To succeed (in an attempt, 
of persons) . 

The thing succeeds well, is very 

successful. 
My undertaking succeeded, was 

successful. 
My designs were not succeeding 

very well. 

Do you succeed in learning 
Latin ? 

I do succeed (in it). 

I do not succeed in learning it. 

Did those men succeed in selling 

their horses ? 
They did not succeed. 

If my attempts should succeed. 

He succeeded in liberating his 
country from slavery. 
There is. There are. 
He is here, present, at hand. 
There are here, present, at hand. 
Is there any wine ? 
There is some. 

There is none. 

Are there any apples ? 

There are some. 

There are none. 

Are there any men (here) ? 

There are some. 

Is any one present ? 

There is no one. 

Was there any one here ? 

There was some one here. 

Were there many there ? 

There were a great many there. 

Are there men who will not 
study ? 



C Procedit, -ccssit, -cedere. 

) Contingit, contigit, contingere. 

( (MIHI, UT . . . . SUBJ.) 

ifea res cedit (procedit, succedit) 
bene, prdspere, feliciter, faiiste. 

Inceptum mihi bene cessit, proces- 
sit, successit. 

Consilia mihi minus (parum) cede- 
bant (procedebant succedebant). 
f Proceditne tibi, ut linguam Lati- 
■} nam disc as ? 
(^ Procedisne in lingua Latina ? 
( Procedit vero feliciter. 
I Procedo vero prdspere. 
(Mihi non contingit, ut earn edi- 
■} scam. 
( Parum (minus) procedo. 

Contigitne viris illis, ut equos siios 
venderent ? 

Non contigit. 
( Si inceptis succederet.* 
I Si incepta mihi succederent. 

Huic contigit, ut patriam ex servi- 
tude in libertatem vindicaret. 

Est. Sunt. 

Adest. Ad mdnum est. 

Adsunt. Ad mdnum sunt. 

iEstne (adestne) vinum ? 

^st. Adest. Ad manum est ali- 
quantulum. 

Non est. Nullum adest. 

Adsuntne mala ? 

Sunt (adsunt) aliquot. 

Non sunt. Nulla adsunt. 

Adsuntne homines ? 

Adsunt nonniilli. 

Adestne aliquis (quisquam) ? 

Nemo adest. 

Adfuitne aliquis? 

Adfuit vero non nemo. 

Aderantne miilti (homines) ? 
TAderant permiilti. 
< Aderat vis (cdpia, multitiido) ma- 
( gna. 

Siintne homines, qui litteris stu- 
dere ndlunt (ndlint) ? 



* On the personal and impersonal use of these verbs, compare Lesson 
LV. B. III. 



LESSON 67.] PHRASES AND EXERCISES. 



407 



There are many who will nei- 
ther work nor study. 

There are those whom it delights 
to cultivate the arts and sci- 
ences . 

There are many who are fond 
of beino; engaged in the liberal 



arts and sciences. 
To keep, retain. 

To clean, cleanse. 

Directly, immediately. 
This instant. 

Clean. 

The inkstand. 

Instantly, in a moment, sud- 
denly. 
Will you keep the horse V 
I will (keep it) 
I do not desire to keep it. 

You must not keep my money. 

Will you clean my inkstand ? 

I will clean it. 



Permiilti sunt, qui neve laborare 
neve litteris studere vdlunt (ve- 
lint). 

Sunt quos artes studiaque cdlere 
jiivat. 

Multi sunt, qui in artibus ingenuis 
versari delectantur. 

( Teneo, ere, ui, ntum. 
I Retineo, ere, ui, ntum. 
\ Mundo, are, avi, atum. 
\ Mundum facere, emundare. 

Stdtim, e vestigio, actutum. 

E vestigio, hoc in vestigio tempo- 
ris, confestim. 

Mundus, a, um. 
*Atramentarmm, i, n. 

Puncto (momento) temporis ; ex- 
templo. 

Visne retinere equum ? 

Vdlo. 

Retinere eum non ciipio. 
( Pecunia mea tibi non retinenda est. 
-< Pecuniam meam tenere te non 
( opdrtet. 

Visne mihi emundare atramenta- 
rium? 

Facere non nolo. 



Exercise 128. 

Have you brought me the book which you promised me ? — I have 
forgotten it. — Has your uncle brought you the handkerchiefs which 
he promised you ? — He has forgotten to bring me them. — Have you 
already written to your friend ? — I have not yet had time to write to 
him. — Have you forgotten to write to your parents ? — I have not 
forgotten to write to them. — To whom does this house belong ? — It 
belongs to the English captain whose son has written a letter to us. — ■ 
Does this money belong to thee? — It does belong to me. — From 
whom hast thou received it ? — I have received it from the men whose 
children you have seen. — To whom do those woods belong V — They 
belong to the king. — Whose horses are those ? — They are ours. — 
Have you told your brother that I am waiting for him here ? — I have 
forgotten to tell him so. — Is that your son ? — He is not mine ; he is 
my friend's. — Where is yours ? — He is at Dresden. — Does this 
cloth suit you ? — It does not suit me ; have you no other ? — I have 
some other, but it is dearer than this. — Will you show it to me ? — I 
will show it to you. — Do these boots suit your uncle ? — They do 
not suit him, because they are too dear (nimis carus). — Are these 



408 LATIN GRAMMAR. [ LESSON 68. 

the boots of which you have spoken to us ? — They are the same. — 
Does it suit you to go with us V — It does not suit me. — Does it be- 
come you to go to the market ? — It does become me to go thither. — 
Did you go on foot into the country ? — It does not become me to go 
on foot, so that I went thither in a carriage. 

Exercise 129. 

What is your pleasure, Sir ? — I am inquiring after your father. — 
Is he at home ? — No, Sir, he is gone out. — What is your pleasure ? 

— I tell you that he is gone out. — Will you wait till he comes back 
again ? — I have no time to wait. — Does this merchant sell on credit ? 

— He does sell on credit. — Does it suit you to buy for cash V — It 
does not suit me. — Where have you bought these pretty knives ? — 
I have bought them at the merchant's whose shop you saw yesterday. 

— Has he sold them to you on credit ? — He has sold them to me for 
cash. — Do you often buy for cash ? — Not so often as you. — Have 
you forgotten anything here ? — I have forgotten nothing. — Does it 
suit you to learn this by heart ? — I have not a good memory, so that 
it does not suit me to learn by heart. — Have you succeeded in writ- 
ing a letter ? — I have succeeded in it. — Have those merchants suc- 
ceeded in selling their horses ? — They have not succeeded therein. 

— Have you tried to clean my inkstand? — I have tried, but have 
not succeeded in it. — Do your children succeed in learning the Eng- 
lish ? — They do succeed in it. — Is there any wine in this cask V — 
There is some in it. — Is there any brandy in this glass ? — There is 
none in it. — Is wine or water in it ? — There is (incst) neither Avine 
nor water in it. — What is there in it ? — There is vinegar in it. — 
Are there any men in your room ? — There are some there. — Is 
there any one in the storehouse ? — There is no one there. — Were 
there many people in the theatre ? — There were many there. — Are 
there many children that will not play ? — There are many that will 
not study, but few that will not play. — Hast thou cleaned my trunk V 

— I have tried to do it, but I have not succeeded. — Do you intend 
buying an umbrella ? — I intend buying one, if the merchant sells it 
me on credit. — Do you intend keeping mine? — I intend giving it 
back again to you, if I buy one. 



Lesson LXVIII. — PENSUM DUODESEPTUAGE- 
SLMUM. 

GENITIVE AFTER VERBS. — Continued. 

A. After verbs of accusing, convicting, condemning, 
acquitting, and the like, the name of the crime is put in 
1he genitive. 



LESSON GR.] GENITlVft AFTER VERBS. 10'.) 

Such verbs are argutre, coafgutire, insimUldre,increpdre,increpttdre, 
itrgere, to charge (accuse) ; - - aocusdre, incusdre, age~re, deferre ; ar~ 
cessere, postuldre, to accuse, arraign ; summon;- vnterrogdre, to call 
to' an" account ; — se alligdre, se adstringere, to become guilty of; 
ieneri, obstringi, obligdn, to be guilty of; — convincere, captdre, to 
convict ; — judicdre, damndre, condemndre^ to condemn ; — absolm re, 
solvere, liberdre, purgdre, to acquit, absolve. E. g. 
Cicero Verrem avariliae nimiae Cicero charged Verres with excos- 

counjYdi. sive avarice. 

Cannensem qufsquam exeVcitUm Gan any one accuse the army, 

figae aut pavoris insimuldre which fought at Canna, of (light 

pot( 'st, ? or cowardice ? 

Galba etiam saevitiae pdpulum Galba, in an edict, reproved the 

increpftit edicto. people for cruelty even. 

Miltfades accusdtus estproditionis. Mutiades was accused of treason. 
Qui alteram incusat prabri, cum lie who charges another with dis- 

fpsum sc int.ueri opdrtet. honor should look into his own 

breast. 
Caesar Dolabellam repetunddr Caesar arraigned Dolabella on the 

rum * postuldoit. charge of extortion. 

Furti se obligavit. He was guilty of theft. 

Themistocles absens proditidnis Themistocles, in his absence, was 

est damndtus. condemned for treason. 

Judex cum injuriarum dbsdlvit. The judge acquitted him of the 

charge of personal injury. 
SenAlus nee liberdvit ('jus cdlpae The senate neither absolved the 

regem, neque drguit. king from that charge, nor ac- 

cused him of it. 

Remarks. 

1. The genitive of the crime may be explained by crimine or no- 
■iiunc] understood. These ablatives are sometimes actually put. E.g. 
Ne absens invidiae crimine accusaretur. — Nomine sceleris conjura- 

tionisque damnati sunt. 

2. Genitives of the crime arc pecedti^ maleficii, sceleris, caedis, furti, 
veneficii, parricidii, peculdtus, falsi, injuriarum, repetunddrum, prodi- 
tidnis, majesta/is ; — probri, avaritiae, audaciae, temeritdtis, ignaviae, 
impietdtis, and others. 

3. Instead of the genitive, the ablative with de or in is sometimes 
put. E. g. De pecuniis repctundis accusatus est. — Rosctum de luxu- 
ria purgCwlt. — In crimine incendii convicti sunt. — In manifesto pec- 
cato tenebdtur. So also : Inter sicarios damndtus est, lie was con- 
demned as an assassin. 

4. The punishment or fine to which any one is condemned, is like- 
wise expressed by the genitive ; more rarely by the ablative. % Thus 



* Be. pecmi&rum, of money to be reclaimed, i. e. extorted. 
t On the charge or accusation of, under the title of. 

\ But always the ablative when a definite sum is named. E.g. Quindecim 
m'dlibui gravis atria til damndtus. 

35 



410 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 6S. 



mortis, capitis, multae, pecuniae, quadrupli, octupli, or morte, capite, 
multa, pecunia damnari. Sometimes also by ad or in; as, ad poenam, 
ad bestias, ad metalla, in metallum, in expensas damnari. E. g. Mil- 
tiades capitis absolutus,* pecunia multatus est. — Tertia parte agri 
damnaii sunt. — Multos ad metalla, aut ad bestias damncwit. The 
poets put also the dative ; as, morti damnatus. 

5. The construction of the above verbs extends to several adjec- 
tives ; as reus, compertus, noxius, innoxius, insons, manifestus, &c. 
E. g. Reus est injuridrum, He is accused of trespass. Manifestus 
rerum capitalium, Clearly convicted of a capital offence. Noxius con- 
jurationis, Guilty of conspiracy. Sacrilegii compertus, Found guilty 
of sacrilege. 

B. After esse and fieri the genitive often stands elliptically, 
res, negotium, munus, officium, proprium, or some other word 
signifying part, business, duty, office, property, &c., being under- 
stood. E. g. 



Neque hoc tdnti laboris est, qudnti 

videtur (sc. esse). 
Estjudicis, non quid ipse velit, 

sed quid lex et religio cogat, 

cogitare. 

Est adolescentis, majdres natu 

vereri. 
Hoc doctoris intelligentis est, vi- 

dere, quo ferat natura sua 

quemque. 
Tdrdi ingenii est, riviilos con- 

sectari, fdntes rerum non 

videre. 
Cujiisvis liominis est errare ; nul- 

lius, nisi insipientis, in errore 

perseverare. 
Ars ecirum rerum est, quae sci- 

lintur. 

Petulantia magis est adolescen- 

tium, quam senum. 
Omnia, quae mulieris fuerunt, viri 

fiunt. 

Thebae populi Romdni jure belli 
fdctae sunt. 



Nor is this a matter of as much dif- 
ficulty as it seems to be. 

It is the business (duty) of a judge 
to consider, not that which he 
himself may desire, but what the 
law and religion enforce. 

It belongs to a young man to re- 
spect those older than himself. 

It is the part of an intelligent in- 
structor, to examine the natural 
aptitude of every one. 

It is the sign (characteristic) of a 
dull head, to follow the course of 
things, and not to see their causes. 

Every man is liable to err, but 
none but a fool will persevere in 
error. 

Science relates to those things 
which are the objects of cogni- 
tion. 

Petulance is characteristic rather of 
young than of old men. 

Everything, which belonged to the 
woman, becomes the property of 
the husband. 

Thebes became the property of the 
Romans by right of war. 



* " Eeleased from capital punishment." Thus also capitis accusdre or ar- 
cessere, to arraign one on a capital charge; capitis or capite anquirere, damnare, 
condemnare, to doom or condemn one to death. A similar idiom is voti or voto- 
rum damnari, to have one's wish fulfilled or granted (lit. to be condemned to 
redeem one's vow). 



LESSON 68.] GENITIVE AFTER VERBS. 411 

Jam me Pompeii tdtum esse scis. You know that I am already en- 
tirely for Pompey. 

Eamilia pecuniaque agnatorum The slaves and money shall become 
gentiliumque e'sto . the property of the relations and 

members of the gens. 

Remarks. 

1. The ellipsis of negotium, &c, which is commonly assumed to ex- 
plain this construction, is sometimes expressed. E. g. Non liorum tem- 
porum negotium est. — Sapientis est proprium * — Id judlcis, vin, 
praeceptoris munus est. — Officium liberi esse hominis puto. In all of 
which examples the omission of these words would leave the sense 
unaltered. 

2. The genitive of the personal pronoun is never put, but instead 
of it the neuter of the corresponding possessive. Hence meum, tuum, 
suum, nostrum, vestrum est, and not mei, tui, &c. est. E. g. Non est 
mentlri meum, Lying is not rny business (not characteristic of me). 
Est tuum, videre, quid agatur, It is your part (it belongs to you) to 
see what is at stake. Fuit meum jam pridem patriam lugere, It was 
long ago my lot to mourn over my country .f 

3. This rule extends also to verbs of esteeming, believing, and to 
passives of appearing, seeming, &c, generally with esse understood. 
E. g. Tutelae nostrae duximus, sc. esse, We considered it a matter 
subject to our intervention. Duri hominis videtur, sc. esse, It seems 
to betray a cruel man. Tempori cedere, semper sapientis est habitum, 
To yield to circumstances has always been considered characteristic 
of a prudent man. 

4. When the genitive has a gerundive connected with it, esse stands 
in the sense of "to contribute or conduce to." E. g. Regium impe- 
rium initio conservandae libertatis atque augendae rei publicae fuit, 
At first the royal government contributed to the preservation of lib- 
erty, and to the advancement of the common weal. 

5. In this construction are included the expressions moris est (= est 
in more, est in more positum), or consuetudinis est, It is a characteristic 
feature of the manners and customs (e. g. of the Greeks, &c.) ; est 
operae (= est operae pretiwn), it is worth while, &c. ; instead of which 
mos est, consuetudo est (e. g. Gallorum, Graecdruni), may also be em- 
ployed. 

O. The impersonal verbs interest and refert are followed 
by the genitive of the person interested or concerned, but where 
a personal pronoun is required, by the possessives med, tua, sua, 
nostra, vestra, and cuja. % E. g. 

* Compare page 352, note J. 

t So also other adjectives in place of the genitive. E. g. Eocpatrium (= pa- 
iris) est. — Et agere etpati fortia Romanum est, &c. 

\ With these ablatives causa or re may be supplied. According to some 
grammarians, these pronouns are neut. ace. pi. with commoda understood. 
The quantity of the final a, however, and the testimony of Priscian, decide in 
favor of the ablative. 



412 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 68. 

Magni interest Ciceronis, vel mea It is a matter of great importance * 
pdtius, vel mehercle utrkisgue. to Cicero, or rather to me, or, by 

Hercules, to both of us. 
Quis e'st hddie, ciijus intersit, Who is there to-day (= now) that 
istam legem manere ? is at all concerned in the perma- 

nence of this law ? 
Ve'stra, judices, hoc maxime in- This is a matter of the highest im- 

terest. portance to you, judges. 

Non adscripsi, quod tua nihil re- I have not added what does not 

ferebat. concern you. 

Humanitatis plurlmum refert. It is a matter of the highest mo- 

ment to humanity. 

Remarks. 

1. The degree of importance is expressed either by genitives like 
magni, permagni, parol, pluris, tanti, and quanti, &c, or by adverbs or 
neuter accusatives used adverbially ; as, multum, plus, magis, maxime, 
parum, paulum, minus, minime, valde, magnupere, niliil, &c. The gen- 
itive of the person is often omitted. E. g. Magni refert, hie quod 
velit, It is a question of great consequence what this man wants. Quod 
permagni interest, pro necessario habetur, That which is of great im- 
portance is often deemed a matter of necessity. Hoc non pluris refert, 
quam si imbrem in cribrum geras, This is of no more consequence than 
if you were to pour water into a sieve. 

2. The matter or thing of consequence or importance is expressed, 
«) by the infinitive (with or without a subject accusative) ; b) by a 
clause introduced by ut (uti), ne, or an interrogative (qui, qualis, 
quam, &c.) ; and c) sometimes by the neuter pronouns hoc illud, &c. ; 
but never by a substantive. E. g. Interest omnium recte facere, It 
concerns all to do right. Quid nostra refert, victum esse Antonium f 
What do we care for the defeat of Antonius ? Reipubttcae interest, 
uti salvus esset, It is important to the commonwealth that he should be 
safe. Kon refert, quam multos libros, sed quam bonos habeas, It mat- 
ters not how many books you have, but how good they are. 

3. In the sense of " it profits, it conduces to," these verbs also take 
the dative or the accusative with ad. E. g. Cui rei id te assimuldre 
relidit 1 What advantage was it to you to pretend that ? Magni ad 
honorem nostrum interest, It contributes greatly to our honor. 

( Jacio, ere, jeci, jactum. 
To cast, throw. < Jacto, are, dvi, dtum. 

{^Mitto, ere, mlsi, missum. 
To cast or throw at, upon, Adjicere, conjicere, injicere, pro- 

in, forth, &c. jicere, &c. 

To throw stones at some Lapldes mittere or conjicere in 
one. aliquem. 

Petere aliquem lapidibus. 

* Interest = " it concerns, it imports, it is of importance to." Refert = " it 
concerns, serves, profits, is the interest of." 



LESSON 6S.] THRASES AND EXERCISES. 



413 



To cast an eye upon some 

one or something. 
To cast one into prison 

(chains). 
To throw the blame upon 

some one. 
To throw (prostrate) one's 

self at the feet of some one. 

Have you thrown a stone into 

the river ? 
I have thrown one in. 
Does he throw the blame upon 

me ? 
He does not throw it upon you. 
Did you cast an eye upon that 

book ? 
I did (cast an eye upon it). 
Was he casting a glance at the 

o ° ° 

paper i 
He was not. 
Were they throwing stones at 

you ? 
They were not. 
Did he throw himself at the feet 

of the king ? 
He did not prostrate himself. 

Was he thrown into prison ? 

He was. 

Where does the stone lie now ? 

It lies in the river. 

Where did the book lie ? 

It was lying on the table. 

To draw, pull. 

To drag ; to seize (hurry off). 

To draw the wagon. 

To draw the sword. 

To drag one into the street. 
To drag one into servitude. 
To drag one to punishment, 

to death. 
To hurry one off into prison, 

chains. 



Oculos in aliquem or aliquid con- 
jicere. 
( Aliquem in carcerem eonjieere. 
( Dare aliquem in vincula. 
Culpam in aliquem conjieere or 

conferre. 
Projicere (sternere)* se ad pedes 
alicujus. 

Injecistine lapidem in flumen ? 

Injeci vero linum aliquem. 

Num culpam in me cdnjicit (con- 

fert)? 
Non in te cdnjicit (ednfert). 
Conjecistine oculos ilium in librum ? 

Conjeci profecto. 

Adjiciebatne oculos ad chartam (or 

chartae) ? 
Non adjiciebat. 
Niimquid lapides in te jactabant 

(conjiciebant) ? 
Non jactabant. 
Projecitne (prostravitne), se ad 

pedes regis ? 
Se non prostravit. 
j Conjectusne est in carcerem ? 
( Datusne est in vincula ? 
Factum est. 
tJbi mine jacet lapis ? 
In fliiinine. 
TJbi jacuit liber ? 

Jacebat super mensam (in mensa). 
( Traho, ere, xi, ctum. 
I Duco, ere, xi, ctum. 
X Traho, ere, xi, ctum. 
( Rapio, ere, put, plum. 
Currum trahere (or when slowly or 

gently, ducere). 
Gladium (e vagina) educere or 

distringere. 
Extrahere aliquem in publicum. 
Abstrahere aliquem in servitudinem. 
Rapere aliquem ad supplicium, ad 

mortem. 
Abripere aliquem in carcerem, in 

vincula. 



* Stemo, ere, 

35* 



stravi, stratum. 



414 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[lesson 68. 



"Where did they drag him to ? 

They dragged (hurried^ him into 
prison. 

Did they not drag (hurry) him 
into slavery ? 

They did. 

Does the liorse draw the car- 
riage ? 

The horse does it. 

The pain (of body or mind). 

The evil, ill. _ 

The trouble, inconvenience. 

The injury (injustice). 

The detriment, loss. 

The loss. 

To pain (bodily or mentally 
— of things). 

To cause pain, to hurt (of 
things). 

To pain, hurt one (of per- 
sons). 

To injure (hurt) one. 

To offer violence to one. 

To offer violence to one's 

self. 
To molest any one. 
To injure one's interest, 

(cause injury or loss). 
To be a loss or injury to 

one. 
To suffer or sustain loss by 

anything. 

Does this pain you ? 

It does pain me. 

That pains (grieves) me very 

much. 
Does anything pain you ? 

My finger pains me. 
It pains me, when I am whipped. 
My feet and head pain me. 
Have you hurt any one ? 

1 have hurt no one. 



Quo eum rapuerunt ? 
Abripuerunt eum in carcerem (in 

vincula). 
Ndnne eum in servitudineni ab- 

straxerunt ? 
Factum est vero. 
Equiisne trahit (ducit) ciirrum ? 

iEquus. 

Dolor, oris, m. 
Malum, i, n. 
Molest la, ae,/. 
Injuria, ae,/! 

Detrimentum, damnum, i, n. 
Jactura, ae,/. 

Ddlet, doluit, dolere (mihi ali- 
quid). 

! Dolorem facere or efficere alicui 
(bodily). 
Dolorem afferre alicui (mentally). 
('Alicui dolorem fac.ere or efficere 
< (mentally and physically). 
( Aegre facere alicui (mentally). 
\ Injuriam alicui inferre. 
\ Noceo, ere, cui, citum (alicui). 
( Viol are aliquem. 
\ Alicui vim afferre. 
Vim (nianus) sibi inferre. 

Alicui molestiam exhibere. 

Damnum (detrimentum) alicui in- 
ferre (afferre). 

Dam no or detrimento (dat.) esse 
alicui. 

Damnum (jacturam) facere aliqua 
re. 

Doletne tibi hoc ? 

Ddlet mihi profecto. 
( Id mihi magnum dolorem affert. 
\ Ddlet mihi magndpere. 

Facitne (efficitne) tibi aliquid 
dolorem ? 

Dolorem mihi efhcit digitus. 

Mihi ddlet, quum ego vapulo. 

Ddlent mihi pedes atque caput. 

Niim cuiquam aliquid dolores fe- 
cisti (effecisti) '? 

Esro dolorem feci nemini. 



LESSON 68.] 



PHRASES AND EXERCISES. 



415 



tt -i i , /• r o S Aegrene tibi fecit ? 

Has lie hurt your feelings ? j ^^ m ^^ ? 

He has not only hurt my feelings, Is mihi non solum dolorem, sed vim 



but my person even. 
Has any one injured you ? 

No one (has injured me). 
Were they molesting any one ? 
They were molesting no one 



Was that a loss to 



you 



Yes, I sustained a heavy loss by it. 
Have I ever done you any harm 

(injury) ? 
No, on the contrary, you have 

done me good. 

No, on the contrary 



To do one good, to slioiv 
one kindness. 

To overload me with bene- 
fits or kindness. 
To show one civilities, at- 
tentions. 
On the contrary, you have shown 

me nothing but civilities. 
You have on the contrary over- 
loaded me with many and 
great benefits. 
It is a pity. 

His death is to be lamented. 
It is a pity, that he is not alive. 
It is a pity, they did not come 
sooner. 

To be useful (to any one). 

To be wholesome, good for 
one's health, to do one 
good. 

Does this do you good ? 

It does do me good. 

This is excellent for me (does 

me much good). 
What is the servant doing with 

his broom ? 



etiam attulit. 
Niimquis tibi ndcuit (injuriam 111- 

tulit) ? 
Nemo. 

Eccui molestias exhibebant ? 
Nemini (milli). 

Fuitne tibi illud damno (detrimen- 
, to) ? 

Ego vero damnum eo feci magnum. 
Egdne tibi linquam quidquam in- 

jiiriae intuli V 
fmmo vero mihi beneficia tribuisti. 

Immo, immo vero, immo potXus, im- 

mo enim vero. 
'Beneficia alicui dare or tribuere 

(-but, butuni). 
Beneficiis aliquem afftcere or or- 

nare. 
Beneficiis aliquem cumulare. 

OfTit-ia alicui tribuere. 
OrFieia in aliquem conferre. 
Immo enim vero mihi non nisi offi- 

cia tribuisti. 
Immo pdtius me multis et magnis 

beneficiis cumulasti. 

Dolendum est. 

Mors ejus dolenda est. 

Dolendum est, quod non in vita est. 

Dolendum est, quod non matiirius 
venerunt. 
j Utilem (e) esse (alicui). 
{ Usui esse (alicui). 
f Prqdest, profuit, prodesse. 
J Conducit, conduxit, conducere. 
| Salutdrem (salilti) esse. 
\_ (All with alicui.) 
j Conducitne tibi hoc ? 
\ Estne tibi hoc saliiti ? 

Conducit. Saliiti est profecto. 

Hoc mihi maxime conducit. 

Quid scdpis siiis facit (inceptat) 
servus V 



416 



LATIX GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 68. 



Piirgat (iis) cubieulum. 
Quid hoc ex ligno facere vis ? 

Ego ex eo nihil quidquam facere 

eiipio. 
Xumquid de eo (e'i) fecerunt ? 

Xihil fecerunt. 

Praeterire, translre (aliquem, ali- 

QUEM LOCUM). 

Praetergredlor, di, gressus sum. 

Praetervehor, i, vectus sum (ali- 
quem, ALIQUEM LOCUM). 

Quando ddmum meam praeteri- 
visti? ( 

Praeterivi earn nudius tertius. 



He sweeps the room with it. 
What do you wish to make out 

of this wood ? 
I wish to make nothing at all out 

of it. 
Have they done anything with 

him ? 
They have done nothing. 

To pa.s-s by or. before (any 

one or any place). 
To walk by or before. 
To ride by or before. 

"When did you pass by my house. 

I passed it on the day before 
yesterday. 

What place were they passing ? 

They were passing by the public 
square of the city. 

"Was it my brother whom you 
passed ? 

It was your brother. 

"Who is passing by us ? 

Our tailor with his son is pass- 
ing us. 

Who is driving by the theatre ? 

(It is) the doctor." 

To throw away. 
To lavish, squander. 

Did they throw away anything ? 

They threw away all their arms 
and weapons. 

How much money has he squan- 
dered ? 

He has squandered his entire 
fortune. 

I have thrown away (lost) an 
entire hour. 

Exercise 130. 

How many times have you shot at that bird ? — I have shot at it 
twice. — Have you killed it ? — I have killed it at the second shot. — 
Have you killed that bird at the first shot ? — I have killed it at the 
fourth. — Do you shoot at the birds which you (see) upon the houses, 
or at those which you see in the gardens ? — I shoot neither at those 
which I (sec) upon the houses, nor at those which I sec in the gar- 
dens, but at those which I perceive upon the trees. — How many 



Quern locum praeteribant V 
Praeteribant (transibant) locum lir- 

bis publicum. 
Fratremne meum praeteribas ? 

Yero, fnitrem tuum. 
Quis nos praeterit ? 
Sartor ndster cum filio nos p>raeter- 

eunt. 
Quis theatram praetervehitur ? 
Medicus. 

Abjicio, ere, jeci, jectinn. 
( Eifundo, ere, fudi, fusion. 
( Dilapido, are, dci, atum. 

Abjiriebiintnc illiquid ? 

Abjieiebant vero arma atque 
sua omnia. 

Quantam pecuniam dilapidavit i 



tela 



Facilitates siias dmnes profudit. 
Perdidi tdtam horam. 



LESSON 69.] SYNTAX OF THE ABLATIVE. 417 

times have the enemies fired at us ? — They have fired at us several 
times. — Have they killed any one ? — They have killed no one. — 
Have you a wish to shoot at that bird ? — I have a desire to shoot at 
it. — Why do you not shoot at those birds ? — I cannot, for I have no 
powder. — How many birds have you shot at ? — I have shot at all 
that I have perceived, but I have killed none, for my powder was not 
good. — Have you cast an eye upon that man ? — I have cast an eye 
upon him. — Has your uncle seen you ? — I have passed by the side 
of him, and he has not seen me, for he has sore eyes. — Has that man 
hurt you ? — No, sir, he has not hurt me. — What must one do in 
order to be loved ? — One must do good to those that have done us 
harm. — Have we ever done you harm ? — No, you have on the 
contrary done us good. — Do you do harm to any one ? — I do no 
one any harm. — Why have you hurt these children? — I have not 
hurt them. — Have I hurt you ? — You have not hurt me, but your 
children (have). — W T hat have they done to you? — They dragged 
me into your garden in order to beat me. — Have they beaten you ? 

— They have not beaten me, for I ran away. — Is it your brother 
who has hurt my son ? — No, sir, it is not my brother, for he has 
never hurt any one. — Have you drunk of that wine ? — I have 
drunk of it, and it has done me good. — What have you done with 
my book ? — I have placed it on the table. — Where does it lie now ? 

— It lies upon the table. — Where are my gloves ? — They are lying 
upon the chair. — Where is my stick ? — It has been thrown into the 
river. — Who has thrown it into it ? — Was he accused of any crime ? 
He was not accused of a crime, but of avarice. — Are they guilty 
(ppligantne se) of treason ? — They are guilty of treason and impiety. 

— Did the judge absolve them from guilt (culpae) ? — He did not 
absolve them. — Did the book become yours (turn) ? — No, it became 
(/actus est) the property of my brother. — Is it important to you, 
that I should write (me litteras dare) to your friend ? — It is a matter 
of the highest importance to humanity, that you should write to him. — 
Who is liable (cujus) est to err ? — Every man is liable to err. — Is 
it my duty to do what is right ? — It is the duty of every man to do 
what is right. 



Lesson LXIX. — PENSUM UNDESEPTUAGESI- 
MUM. 

SYNTAX OF THE ABLATIVE. 

A. The ablative serves to express a variety of relations, of which 
the most important are those of cause, condition, modality, 

QUALITY, TLACE, TIME, DIFFERENCE, and NUMBER. AH these 

relations are in English indicated by means of prepositions, such as 
2A 



418 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 69. 



by, witli,from, of, on account of, with respect to. The Ablative of Time 
lias already been considered in Lesson LYLT., that of Place in Lesson 
LVL, and the Ablative after Comparatives in Lesson XLHL, q. v. 



THE ABLATIVE OF CAUSE. 

B. After verbs passive and neuter, and sometimes 
also after transitive verbs and adjectives, the ablative 
serves to indicate the cause, occasion, ground, or reason 
of the action or state expressed by them.* E. g. 

Mdri supero inferoque Italia insu- Italy is bounded by the upper and 

the lower sea, like an island. 

What house is there so firm, that 
could not be destroyed to its 
very foundation by hatred and 
dissension ? 

The spells of excessive heat are 
moderated by the Etesian winds. 

Darius died from the effects of old 
age. 

We should be sorry, for the fault 
and rejoice at its correction. 

By concord small things increase 
and prosper, but by discord the 
greatest are reduced to ruin. 

We suffer punishment for negli- 
gence in many tilings. 

Mfltiad.es was sick from the wounds, 
wliich, &c. 

The Minturnenscs rcinvigorated 
Marius, who had been exhausted 
by fasting and the effects of the 
sea. 

If we will cultivate friendship on 
account of its advantages and 
emoluments, &c. 

They are culpable, who neglect 
their duties from want of firm- 
ness. 

The Roman state suffered from two 
opposite vices, from avarice and 
luxury. 



lae mddo cingitur. 
Quae ddmus tarn stabilis est, quae 
non o'diis atque dissid'ds fundi- 
tus pdssit everti ? 

Etesianun/2a7u nimii temperdntur 

caldres. 
Darius senectute diem obiit supre- 

mum. 
Delicto dolere, correctione gau- 

dere nos opdrtet. 
Concordia res parvae crescunt^ 

discdrdid muximae dilabuntur. 

Miilris in rebus negligentid] ple- 
ctimur. 

Miltiades aeger drat vulne'ribus, 
quae, &c. 

Minturnenses Murium fessum ind- 
did fuclibusque reerearunt. 



Si fructibus et emolumentis% ami- 
citias colcmus. 

In culpa sunt, qui officia dese- 
runt mollitia animi. 

Diverse duobus vitiis, avaritia et 
luxuria, civitas Romuna labo- 
rabat.§ 



* These relations are in English expressed by the prepositions by, from, of, 
on account of, for. 

■propter neglitjentiam. 



J = propter f nidus et enwlumenta, or fructuum et emolumentomm gratia. 
See note 5. 

\ Compare note 2. 



LESSON 69.] ABLATIVE OF THE INSTRUMENT. 419 

Remarks. 

1. After passive verbs, the impersonal cause alone stands in the 
ablative without a preposition, and the personal agent requires the 
preposition a or ah. (Cf. page 165.) 

2. The adjectives and neuter verbs, thus followed by the ablative 
of the cause, are generally resolvable into a passive verb akin to them 
in sense. E. g. Fessus longd standi mora, Weary (i. e. having been 
made weary) from long standing. Interiit fame = consumptus est 
fame, He died of hunger. Gaudeo tuo lionore = delector tuo honore, 
I rejoice in your honor. Expectatio rumor e crevit = aucta est rumor e, 
The expectation increased with the report. 

3. In many of the above-mentioned cases the cause or occasion may 
also be expressed by prepositions ; as by oh, propter, and per with the 
accusative, or by ah, de, ex, andprae with the ablative. E. g. Ob me- 
rita sua cams, Beloved on account of his merit. Propter metum, prae 
lacrimis non scribere possum, I am unable to write from fear, on ac- 
count of the tears I shed. Per valetudlnem id helium exsequi nequierat, 
He had been unable to finish that war, on account of his health.* Ex 
intestinis, expedibus lahorare, To suffer from the diarrhoea, from the gout. 

4. The accusative vicem, " on account of," often occurs in connec- 
tion with a genitive, or the possessives meam, tuam, &c, instead of the 
ablative vice. E. g. Tuam vicem doleo, I am grieved on your account. 
Maeslus non suam vicem, sed propter ipsum periclitanttum fratrum (sc. 
vicem), Sad not on his own account, but on account of his brothers in 
danger on his account. 

5. After transitive verbs the cause, ground, or reason is sometimes 
expressed by the ablative alone, f but more commonly by propter with 
the accusative, or by causa, gratia, ergo, or nomine, with the genitive. 
E. g. Multi ex urhe amicitiae causa (= propter amicitiam) Caesdrem 
seciiti erant, Many from the city had followed Caesar out of friendship. 
Corona aured donatus est virtiitis ergo benevolentiaeque, He was pre- 
sented with a crown of gold on account of his valor and benevolence. 

6. When the cause is an intention or purpose, it is expressed by 

hac mente, hoc consilio, ut , and the motive by amure, ird, odio, lae- 

titid, &c, in connection with some participles like ductus, adductus, 
incensus, incitatus, motus, &c. E. g. ird incensus, from feelings of re- 
venge ; inopid adductus, induced by want; coactus metu, driven by 
fear. Classem ea mente compardvit, ut ltaliam peteret, He raised a 
fleet with the intention of invading Italy. 

THE ABLATIVE OF THE MEANS OR INSTRUMENT. 

C. After verbs of every kind, the ablative serves to 
indicate the means or instrument by or with which any- 
thing is effected or realized. 

* Per and propter may also have an accusative of the person. E. g. Si per 
me licuisset, If I had given permission. Propter quos vlcit, Through whom he 
lives. But the mere ablative of the person never occurs in any of these relations. 

f As in the two examples preceding the last under the rule, page 418. 



420 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 69. 



The corresponding English prepositions are with, by, by means of 
through. E. g. 

Lycurgus established his laws by 
the authority of Delphic Apollo. 

Bulls defend themselves with their 
horns, boars with their tusks, 
lions with their jaws. 

It is disgraceful to solicit the favor 
of the people by means of flat- 
tery. 

You may drive out nature with a 
pitchfork, yet it will incessantly 
return again. 

The Britons of the interior live on 
milk and flesh. 

Hannibal took Saguntum by force. 

Injustice is done in two ways, 
either by violence or fraud. 



Lycurgus leges suas auctoritdte 
Apdllmis Delphici confrmdvit. 

Cor nib us tauri, apri dentibus, 
morsu lednes se tutdntur. 

Benevolentiam ci'vium blanditiis 
colligere turpe est. 

Katuram expe'llas furca, tamen 
usque reeiirret. 

Britanni interidres lacte et came 

vivuni. 
Hannibal Saguntum n expugndvit. 
Injuria fit duobus mddis, aut vi, 

aut fraude. 



Remarks. 

1. The ablative is rarely employed, when the means or instrument 
has reference to & person, but generally either per with the accusative, 
or the periphrasis alicujus opera, benefieio, consilio, culpa, &c. E. g. 
Per te salvus sum, I am safe through your instrumentality. Delrimenta 
per homines eloquentissimos importdta, Evils introduced by the most 
eloquent men. Quorum opera (= per quos) plebem concitdtam existi- 
mdbcint, By whom they supposed the people to have been roused. 
Eqiiitem Homanum benefieio tuo conservdvi, I have saved a Roman 
knight through your kindness. Cujus indicio (= per quos) haec 
cognoverant, Through whom they had become informed of this. 

2. Per with the accusative is often put instead of the ablative of the 
means, especially when reference is had to external circumstances. 
E. g. Per vim ei bona eripuit, He robbed him of his property by main 
force (by forcible measures). Per litteras aliquem certiorem facere, 
To inform any one by letter. Per simulationem amicitiae me perdidc- 
runt, They have ruined me under the pretence of friendship. But the 
material instrument is always expressed by the ablative. E. g. Vul- 
nerare aliquem gladio, cultro, sagittis, To wound any one with the 
sword, with a knife, with arrows. 

{Ago, ere, egi, actum. 
To spend, consume (time in J Consumo, ere, mpsi, mptum. 



anything). 

To devote time to anything. 
To spend impereeptibly, to 
beguile time with any- 
thing. 
WJiat do you spend your time 
in? 



Contero, ere, trlvi, trxtum. 

(TEMPI'S (in) ALIQUA RE). 

Tempus ponere in aliqua re. 
Fallo, ere, fefelli, falsum (tempus 

ALIQUA RE). 

Qua in re te'mpus consumis (cdn- 
teris) ? 



LESSON 69.] 



PHRASES AND EXERCISES. 



421 



I spend my time in studying (in 

studies). 
How has he spent his life ? 

He has spent his life in perpetual 

travelling. 
He has spent his life uselessly in 

idleness and feasting. 
He was in the habit of spending 

entire days by the fireside. 
He was in the habit of wearing 

out entire nights in reading 

and writing. 
Is he spending a pleasant life ? 
On the contrary, he is having a 

hard life of it. 
How did he spend the night ? 

He was beguiling the hours with 

pleasant conversation. 
He has spent the livelong night 

in banqueting. 
Where did he spend his vacation ? 
He spent them in the country, in 

the city, at home. 
Does it behoove us to spend this 

day pleasantly ? 
By all means. 

The vacation. 
Travelling. 
The banquet. 

To miss anything. -< 

To miss (not find) any one. - 



To miss one's aim. 

To miss one's turn. 

Has the blow missed ? 

It has missed. 

Are you missing your way ? 

I am not missing it. 

I have missed (not found) him. 

You have missed your turn. 

He has missed his aim. 
36 



Tempus in stiidiis litterarum cdn- 

tero (consiimo). 
Qudmodo vitam (aetatem) siiam 

consumpsit ? 
Aetatem siiam in perpetua pere- 

grinatione consiimpsit. 
Vitam in dtio et conviviis absiimp- 

sit. 
Tdtos dies juxta fdcum atque ignem 

agebat (= agere solebat). 
Tdtas ndctes legendo et scribendo 

conterebat (= conterere solebat) . 

Agitne vitam juciinde (hilare) ? 
Immo pdtius p.arce ac diiriter agit 

vitam. 
Qudmodo contrivit (consiimpsit) 

ndctem ? 
Hdras fallebat jucundis sermdnibus. 

Fefellit spatiosam ndctem convi- 
viis. 
tJbi (quo loco) ferias siias exigebat ? 
Exigebat eas riiri, in urbe, ddmi. 

Oportetne nos hiinc diem hilare 

consumamus ? 
Maxime opdrtet. 
Feriae, arum, f. 
Peregrinatio, onis, f. 
Convivium, i, n. 
Amittere rem aliquam. 
Deerrare aliqua re. 
' Allquem non invenlre. 
Ab aliquo deerrare or aberrdre (on 

the road). 
Propositum non assequi (-cutus 

sum). 

Fine excidere (-cidi, ). 

Ordinem non servare. 
Suis partibus deesse. 
Deeravitne ictus ? 
Factum est. 
Deerrasne itinere ? 
Non deerro. 
Eum non inveni. 
Ordinem non servasti. 
Defuisti tiiis partibus. 
Fine excidit. 



422 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 69. 



The turn (part, role). 
In turn, in order. 
It is my, thy, his, our, &c. turn. 
To take one's turn. 

To fail, neglect (to do any- 
thing). 

The merchant has failed to send 

me the money due (me). 
You have failed to come to me 

tliis morning. 
You have neglected to perform 

your duties and obligations. 
Am I neglecting any one ? 

To hear anything of (con- 
cerning) any one. 
To hear anything from any 

one 
To receive news from (con- 
cerning) any one. 
Have you heard from your 

friend ? 
I have heard. 

Have you heard (learnt) any- 
thing new ? 
I have heard nothing at all. 
Of whom have you heard 

(news) ? 
I have heard from my father. 
I hear (learn) that your brother 
has arrived. 

To assure (one of any- 
thing) . 
To persuade. 

I assure you sacredly of this. 
I wish you to be persuaded of this. 

I assure you (be assured). 

I assure you of my assistance (in 
your plans). 

Did he assure you of his assist- 
ance ? 



Ordo, inis, m. : partes, ium, f. pi. ; 

vicis, gen.f. 
Ex ordine, ordine, per ordlnem. 
( Ordo me, te, eum, nos vdcat. 
{ Meae, tuae, ejus, ndstrae partes sunt. 
( Ex ordine (per ordlnem) aliquid 
( agere. 
Praelermitto, ere, mlsi, missum. 
Negligo, ere, lexi, ledum. 
(aliquid facere). 
Mercator mini pecuniam debitam 

mittere praetermisit. 
Venire ad me hddie mane neslex- 

IStl. 

Offi'cia tiia etmunera obire praeter- 

misisti. 
Niim ego quenquam negligo ? 
Aliquid de aliquo audire, accipere. 

Aliquid ah (ex) aliquo audire, acci- 

pere, cognoscere (-novi, nitum). 
Nuntium acclpere ab (de) aliquo. 

Accepistine nuntium ab amico tiio ? 

Accepi. 

Num. quidquam ndvi cogndvisti ? 

Nihil quidquam audivi (accepi). 
De quo cognovisti (nuntium acce- 

pisti) ? 
Nuntium accepi a patre. 
Accipio (audio, disco), tiium fra- 

trem advenisse. 
Confrmo, are, avi, atum. 
Affirmdre (alicui, aliquid). 
Persuddeo, ere, si, sum (alicui 

DE ALIQUA RE). 

Hoc tibi sancte affirmo. 

Hac de re tibi persuaderi velim. 

Persuadeas tibi vdlo (velim). 

Persuasum tibi sit. 

Persuadeas tibi velim, me tuis con- 

siliis non defuturum. 
Volmtne tibi persuaderi, se tuis 

consiliis non defuturum? 



To happen, occur, take place § Fio, fieri, f actus sum. 
(generally). \ Evenio, Ire, veni, ventum. 



LESSON 69.] 



PHRASES AND EXERCISES. 



423 



To happen to one (to meet 
with) . 

A most serious calamity has hap- 
pened. 

He has met with a great misfor- 
tune. 
I have met with a most serious 

injustice. 
I have (meet with) the good for- 
tune. 

The good fortune ; happi- 
ness. 
The bad fortune, misfor- 
tune; calamity. 
To meet (any one by 
chance). 

Did you meet with any one ? -j 

I have met with your brother. 
I met a large number of men. 

To be, to exist, to be found. 

There, in that place. 
Not even. 
Not even a book. 
Not even one (not a single one). 
Not even once. 
Not even the people. 
The village. 

Are there many horses in this] 
village ? 1 

There are a good many (here). 

There is not a single good horse 

(to be found) there. 
Is there much wine this year ? 
There is an abundance of it. 
There are no apples this year. 

Are there many learned men in 

France ? 
There are a great many there. 

To be of use (good, useful). 



Accido, ere, cidi, . 

Contingo, ere, tigi, tactum. 

(mihi, tibi, sibi ALICUI.) 

Facta est (accidit) calamitas gra- 

vissima. 
Ees pessimae acciderunt. 
Accidit ei malum pessimum. 
Magnam in calamitatem incidit. 
Facta est mihi injuria gravissima. 

Contingit mihi felicitas. 

Fortuna secunda ; casus secundus ; 

felicitas, atis,/. 
Fortuna adversa ; malum, i, n. ; ca- 
lamitas, atis, f. 
Occurro, are, ri, sum. 
Obviam venire (alicui). 
Occurristine alicui ? 
Yenistine alicui obviam ? 
6bviam veni fratri tiio. 
Obviam veniebam multitiidini hd- 

minum. 
Esse, inveniri, repeiiri. 
Ibi, illic ; ibidem (adv.). 
Ne — quidem. 
Ne liber quidem. 
Ne unus quidem. 
Ne semel quidem. 
Ne pdpulus quidem. 
Vicus, pagus, i, m. 
Siintne (inveniuntiirne) miilti equi 

hoc in vico ? 
Estne (invenitiirne) cdpia equorum 

hoc in vico ? 
Inveniiintur (sunt) vero miilti (per- 

miilti) . 
Ne unum quidem equum bdnum 

ibidem invenias. 
^festne hoc anno cdpia vini ? 
ifest ejus vero cdpia magna. 
Poma hoc anno nulla sunt (reperi- 

lintur) . 
Inveniuntiirne miilti ddcti in Fran- 

cogallia ? 
Inveniiintur (reperiuntur) ibi per- 

miilti. 
Utilem or bonum esse (alicui rei, ad 

rem) usui esse ad rem. 



424 LATIX GRAMMAR. [LESSOX 69. 

Of what use is that ? Cui usui est hoc ? 

It is good to eat. "Tsui est ad vescendum. 

It is useful against bodily pain. Utile est contra doldres corporis. 

It is of no use (worth nothing). Nihili est. Nullius pretii est. 

This is of no use (entirely use- Hoc niilli usui est (plane inutile 

less) . est) . 

What is this man good for ? Quarn ad rem xitilis (iddneus) est 

hicce ? 

He is not fit for anything. "LTtilis (iddneus) est ad millam rem. 

TT . -, ,, ,-■ • n n ( Homo est neqm'ssimus. 

He is a Kood-ior-notninw fellow. 4 „ c ,,.,. x , 

~ (! Homo nihili est. 

Are there any faults in his little Reperiuntiirne vitia in ejus libello ? 

book ? 

There are none in it. Reperiiintur nulla. 

Is the stuff, which you have Estne textum, quod emisti, bdnum ? 

bought, good ? 

No, it is good for nothing. Xon ve'ro ;' inutile est (nullius pre- 
tii est). 

The fault, defect. Yitlum, i, n. 

The material, stuff. Textum, i, ».; pannus, i, m. 

Exercise 131. 

I do not see my gloves ; where are they ? — They are lying in the 
river. — Who has thrown them into it V — Your servant, because they 
were no longer good for anything. — "What have you done with your 
money ? — I have bought a house with it. — What has the joiner 
done with that wood ? — He has made a table and two chairs of it. — 
What has the tailor done with the cloth which you gave him ? — He 
has made clothes of it for (Dative) your children and mine. — What 
has the baker done with the flour which you sold him ? — He has 
made bread of it for you and me. — Have the horses been found ? — 
They have been found. — Where have they been found ? — They 
have been found behind the wood, on this side of the river. — Have 
you been seen by anybody ? — I have been seen by nobody. — Have 
you passed by anybody ? — I passed by the side of you, and you did 
not see me. — Has any one passed by the side of you '? — Xo one has 
passed by the side of me. — By what is the field surrounded (cingi- 
tur) ? — It is surrounded by trees. — Of what disease (morbus) did 
he die {mortuus est) ? — He did not die of any disease, but from old 
age. — Have they been punished for negligence V — They have been 
punished. — Is your brother sick from the wounds he has received ? 
— Xo, he is sick from the headache. — Do you cut your meat with a 
knife ? — I cut it with a knife and fork. — Were you injured by vio- 
lence or by fraud ? — I was injured both by violence and by fraud. 

Exercise 132. 

Do you expect any one ? — I do expect my cousin, the officer. — 
Have you not seen him ? — I have seen him this morning ; he has 
passed before my house. — What does this young man wait for ? — 



LESSON 70.] ABLATIVE OF MODE OR MANNER. 425 

lie waits for money. — Art thou waiting for anything ? — I am wait- 
ing for my book. — Is this young man waiting for his money V — JIc 
is waiting for it. — Has the king passed (in the carriage) here? — 
lie has not passed here, but betbre the theatre. — Has he not passed 
before the new fountain V — lie has passed there; but I have not 
seen him. — A\ r hat do you spend your time in? — I spend my time in 
studying. — What does your brother spend his time in V — Pie spends 
his time in reading and playing. — Does this man spend his time in 
Avorking ? — He is a good-for-nothing fellow ; he spends his time in 
drinking and playing. — What did you spend your time in, when you 
were at Berlin V — When I was at Berlin, I spent my time in study- 
ing, and riding on horseback. — AVhat do your children spend their 
time in? — They spend their time in learning. — Can you pay me 
what you owe me V — I cannot pay it to you, for our bailiff has failed 
to bring me my money. — Why have you breakfasted without me ? — 
You failed to come at nine o'clock, so that we have breakfasted with- 
out you. — Has the merchant brought you the stuff which you bought 
at his house '? — He has failed to bring it to me. — Has he sold it to 
you on credit ? — He has sold it to me, on the contrary, for cash. — 
I)o you know those men V — I do not know them ; but I think that 
they are good-for-nothing fellows, for they spend their time in playing. 
— Why did you fail to come to my father this morning ? — The tailor 
did not bring me the coat which he promised me, so that I could not 
go to him. 



Lesson LXX. — PENSUM SEPTUAGESIMUM. 

THE ABLATIVE OE MODE OR MANNER. 

A. A substantive, denoting the mode or manner in 
which anything is done, is put in the ablative with cum ; 
but when it has an adjective or adjective pronoun con- 
nected with it, the preposition may be omitted. E. g. 

Litterae cum curd ddigentiaque A letter written with care and dili- 

scriptae. gence. 

Cum dignitdte pdtius cadere, We should rather fall with honor, 

quam cum ignominia servire than serve with dishonor, 
nos opdftet. 

Cum if a nihil recte fieri potest. Nothing can be done properly with 

anger. 

Cum clamore in forum curritur. There is a rush towards the forum 

with clamors. 

Cum silentio auditi sunt. They were heard in silence. 

Ipse magna cum curd et diligenlid He himself has written with great 

scripsit. care and diligence. 
36* 



426 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 70. 

Id aequo dnimo non feret civi- The state will not submit to that 

tas. patiently. 

Sidera cursus siios conficiunt The stars perform their revolutions 

maxima celeritdte. with the utmost celerity. 

Cum maxima offensione Patrum He resigned his consulship to the 

consulatii abiit. great dissatisfaction of the senate. 

Deos semper piira, Integra, in- Let us always venerate the gods 

corrupla et mente et voce ve- with pure, entire, uncorrupted 

neremur. heart and voice. 

Remarks. 

1 . The ablative of manner has adverbial force, and may often be 
resolved into an adverb. E. g. cum curd, i. e. diligenter : cum silcn- 
tio, i. e. tacite, clam ; cum fide, i. e.fdeliter; cum voluptate, i. e. liben- 
ter : cum bona gratia, i. e. benigne, &c. 

2. In certain expressions the ablative of nouns appears also without 
cum, even though no adjective is added. E. g. Aliquid sponte, volun- 
tate, jure, injuria facere, To do anything of one's own accord, willing- 
ly, justly, unjustly. Aliquid recte et ordine, modo et ratione, ratione 
et ordine facere, To do anything properly, and in order, &c. Lege 
agere, To proceed according to the law. Silentio praeterire, To pass 
over in silence. And so always without " cum " : — hoc modo, quo 
modo, eodem animo, ecidem ratione, &c. 

3. Cum with the ablative also denotes that which is simultaneous or 
concomitant. E. g. Cum occasu solis copias educere, To lead out one's 
forces at sunset. Cum nuntio exire, To go out as soon as the message 
arrived. Cum exercitu, cum copiis, cum militibus, &c. iter facere, To 
march with one's army, forces, soldiers, &e. llomam cum fehri veni, 
I came to Rome with a fever. But also without lk cum " ; as, Egressus 
omnibus copiis, Having marched forth with all the forces. Ingenti 
exercitu ab urbe profectus, Having left the city with a large army. 
Duumvir decern navlbus venit, The duumvir came with ten ships, &c. 
Castra clamore invadunt, They invade the camp with a clamor.* 

B. After nouns, adjectives, and verbs, the ablative 
often expresses the relations indicated by the English 
ivith respect to, by, in, or in point of. E. g. 

Natione Medus est. With respect to his nationality he 

is a Mede. 

Hamilcar cogndmme Bdrcas. Hamilcar surnamed Barcas. 

Domo Carthaginie'nses sunt. They are Carthaginians (inhabi- 

tants of Carthage). 

Paiici (centum, mille) numero ho- But few (a hundred, thousand) men 
mines. in number. 

* The participles junctus and conjunclus sometimes thus appear wiiliout 
"cum." E. g. Belluin miserrima fuga junctum, A war attended with a most 
wretched flight. Nefaria libido dedecore, scelt-re conjuncta, Nefarious licen- 
tiousness connected with dishonor, with crime, &c. 



LESSON 70.] ABLATIVE OF QUALITY. 427 

Grdndis ndtu,* aetdte provectus He is of full age, advanced in life. 

est. 
Quieti, aldcres dnimo sumus.f We are calm, cheerful in mind (= 

of a calm, cheerful mind). 
Membris omnibus cdptus ac debt- He is nerveless and feeble in every 

Us est. limb. 

Scelere par est illi, industrid infe- He is equal to him in crime, 

rior. inferior to him in industry. 

Agesilaus fuit claudus altero pede Agesilaus was lame in one of his feet. 
Socrates ldnge lepore et humani- Socrates was far superior to every 

idle omnibus prae'stitit. one in point of wit and humanity. 

Pericles et Themistocles grdndes Pericles and Themistocles were 

erant verbis, crebri sente'ntiis, grand in the use of words, 

compreliensione rerum breves. abounding in apothegms, and 

brief in the comprehension of 
things. 
Non solum comwoveor dnimo, sed I am not only troubled in mind, but 

e*tiani toto cdrpdre perhorresco. ' I shiver with horror in every limb. 

Remarks. 

1. This ablative serves to restrict, limit, or define more particularly 
the words with which it is connected, and occurs in a great variety of 
expressions. E. g. med sententid, med opinione, meo judicio, in my 
opinion or judgment ; re, in reality, in fact ; nomine, in (or by) name ; 
genere, by birth ; domo, by residence ; eloquentid, in eloquence, &c. 

2. Instead of this ablative of limitation or more particular definition, 
the poets and their imitators sometimes employ the accusative. E. g. 
Fractus membra (= membris) labore, Disabled in his limbs from labor. 
Humeros (= humeris) oleo perfusis, Anointed as to his shoulders with 
oil. Vile caput (= capite) tegitur, He is covered as to his head with 
vine-leaves. Tremit artus (= artibus), He trembles in his limbs. Os 
humerosque deo shndis, In countenance and shoulders like a divinity \ 
So also in ordinary 7 " prose even, id tempdris for eo tempore ; id aetdtis 
for ed aetale ; cetera and reliqua for ceteris and reliquis rebus, &c. On 
this accusative compare Lesson XL VIII. D. 

THE ABLATIVE OF QUALITY. 

C. A noun and an adjective denoting a quality, 
character, or condition are put in the ablative with 

* So also major, minor ncitu ; and maximns, minimus natu. 

| This differs very little from the genitive or ablative of quality: — quit'ti, 
alacris anvni sumus ; quieto, alacri ammo sumus. 

X So passive verbs of clothing and divesting frequently have an accusative of 
the thing put on or taken off, instead of the more regular ablative. E. g. 
Induor vestem (= veste), I am (being) clothed in a garment. Induiturfudem 
vultumque Dianae, He puts on the form and countenance of Diana. Inutile 
J'errum cingitur, He begirds himself with the useless sword. Pueri laevo su- 
spensi loculos tabulamque lacei'to, Boys with their little box of counters and 
their writing-tablet suspended from their left shoulder. 



428 



LATIX GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 70. 



some tense of esse, e.eislcre, or inveriiri, expressed or un- 
derstood. E. g. 

Agesilaus statura fait lahnlVi et 

cdrpore exiguo. 
Res est insigni infdmia. 
Murena mediocri ingenio, sed 

mdgno studio rerum veterum, 

miiltae indiistriae et magni la- 
bo ris^/i/if. 
Theophrastus aiictor est, ebur 

fossile cdndido et n'ujro colore 

inr, nvru 
In recentidre Academia exstiiit 

■ divinS quadam ceieritate ingenii 

Carneades. 
Mdgno timore sum : sed bene 

sperSmus. 

So also without esse: — 

Fiiit quidam, summo ingenio vir, 
Zeno.* 

Pompeium, prat stantissimO, curta- 
te virum {(tr<\). 

Est spelunca qua&dam, infinite 
altitudtne. 

Difficili transitu flumen, ripusque 
prat ruptis. 

Remarks 

1. The ablative of quality may be explained by inMructus, praedttus % 
orndtus, "furnished, endowed, adorned with." (Cf. Lessons LXXI. 
B. and LXXI I. B.) 

2. This ablative differs upon the whole but little from the genitive 
ofquality.f except that the latter expresses rather natural than ac- 
quired qualities, while the former is applied to both. The genitive of 
quality, moreover, seldom occurs in the plural, and comprises also de- 
terminations of measure which are never indicated by the ablative. 
Sometimes the genitive ami ablative both occur in the same eonstruc- 

Muri na mediocri ingenio^ «S:e. 

( ( >u<ini longum (tempos) ?% 
^ Quam diu t Quam dudum t 

Din. tongum tempos. 

Perdiu, longissime. 

a great Jam din, jam pridem. 



Agesilaus was of low stature and of 
a small body. 

It is an affair of signal disgrace. 

Murena was a man of but moder- 
ate talent, but of great zeal for 
antiquities, of much industry and 
great perseverance. 

Theophrastus informs us, that fossil 
ivory is found of a white and 
black color. 

In the later academy Cameades 
shone as a man of almost a di- 
vine quickness of intellect. 

I am in great fear, but we hope for 
the best 

There was a certain Zeno, a man 
of the highest order of intellect. 

Pompey, a man of the most dis- 
tinguished virtue. 

There is a certain rave of immense 

dimensions. 
A river, difficult to cros^, and of 

rugged banks. 



tion, as in the example 



IIoic long . ? 

Long, a long time. 
Very long. 
Tor a long time, 
while (past). 



* These examples may be explained by a relative with est, fiat, &c, or by 
the hypothecial ens ( M being"). E. g. Zeno, qui vir erat summo ingenio. Spe- 
lunca, ens or quae est infinite allitudint, &c. 

t Compare Lesson LYU. A. 



\ See Lesson LYII. A. 



LESSON 70.] PHRASES AND EXERCISES. 429 

For some time (past) . Jam dudum. 

Longer (than, I, you, we, Longms,dIutius(quainego,tu,n6s). 

( Qudm longum est, ex quo ? 
How long is it since? -j Qudm diu est, quiim (or ex quo, sc. 

( tempore) ? 

It is {already) lone, since. i J T c ' nn f« u J n ^x quo. 

v JJ J I Jam diu est, quum (ex quo). 

It is now some time since. Jam dudum est, ex qu6 (or quum). 

It is not long since. Kon longum (hand diu, haud dii- 

dum) est, ex quo. 

Is it long since you have break- ( Estn U am lull - um ' ex V* i enta " 

fasted? * IrV i- 

( Estne jam diu, quum jentavish ? 

It is not long since I have break- Haud longum est, ex quo (quiim) 

fasted. jentavi. 

It is some time since I have Jam dudum e*st, ex quo (quum) 

breakfasted. jentavi. 

It is a great while since I break- Jam perdiu e*st, ex quo* tempore 

fasted. jentavi. 

It is an hour since I have break- Tdta jam hora est, ex quo 4 jentavi. 

fasted. 

I breakfasted an hour ago. Jentaculum sumpsi abhinc hdraxn 

(una htira. abhinc). 

r r 7 /■,;•>; » ^ AbhinC (''/'IS h'THS. 

liro hours chid (irithtn tiro hours). ,, .. ... ,, , . 

J v y ( Lhtaous nons ahlnnc 

Three years ago (within three \ Abhinc tres dnnos. 
years). ( Tribus dm, is abhinc* 

A i i , ,.. * Abhinc sesquihoram. 

An hour and a halt ago. So -i -i i • 

° , Sesquinora abhinc. 

^ , , , ,.. i Diii> abhinc hdras ct dimidlam. 

I wo hours and a halt ago. , > , , -• ., , • . ,. .,._ 

I Duabus nons abhinc et uiiuidia. 

{ Estne tempus Idngum, ex quo 1 eum 

Is it long since you saw him ? -' vidisti ? 

( Estne jam dm, cum eum nun vides? 

T . • , ., I Tempus jam est Idngum. 

It is a great while. - i - - ' • ~ 

° ( Jam perdiu est. 

Hi ... • ( Quamdiu est, ex quo cum vidisti ? 

ow long is it since you saw > ,\ . , ' . 

, . . , ° J - Quam lon<_ r mn e>t tempus, cum cum 

( non vidisti . 
I saw him a year ago (within a Ego eum vidi Abhinc annum (lino 

year). anno abhinc). 

Is it long since you are living in ( Estne jam Idngum tempus, ex quo 

this country ? \ hac in terra ddgis V 

Have you lived long in this Degi'sne jam dm hac in ten aV 

country ? 

* See Lesson LVII. D. 



430 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 70. 



I have lived here for three years. 

I have lived at Rome these three 
years. 

He has lived in America these 
twenty years. 

How long is it since he was here ? 

He was here a fortnight ago. 

It is but a year since you were 
in these parts. 

It is more than a year since. 

It is scarcelv six months since. 



It is nearly three years since. < 

It is now almost a year since. 
Almost, nearly. 
Scarcely. 

A few hours ago. 
Half an hour ago. 
A quarter of an hour ago. 

I have been living; in this region 

these ten years. 
How long have you had the 

horse V 
I have had it nearly these five 

years. 
It is now a year since I have 

seen him. 
It is more than a year since you 

have seen your brother. 
How often have you heard him ? 
I have heard him more than 

twenty times. 
I have seen them more than a 

hundred times. 



Annus jam est tertius, ex quo 
(quiim) hie dego. 
fTres anni sunt, ex quo Rdmae 
J habito. 

1 Tertius jam annus est, ex quo 
(_ (quiim) Rdmae habito. 
f Vigmti anni sunt, ex quo in Ame- 
J rica mcolit. 

1 Yicesimus jam annus est, cum in 
[_ America incolit. 
Quam dm est, ex quo tempore 

aderat ? 
Aderat (adfuit) hac regione abhinc 

quindecim dies. 
Xon amplius anno est (annus tan- 
tum est), ex quo hac regione 
aderas. 

Amplius jam anno (annum) est, ex 

quo or quiim. 
Yix sex menses sunt, ex quo or 
qmim (cum). 
fTres prdpe anni sunt, ex quo or 
quiun. 
Tertius prdpe annus est, ex quo or 
[_ cum . 
Jam fere annus est, ex quo or cum. 
Prope, fere, paene (adv.). 
Yix (adc). 
( Abhinc aliquot hdras. 
( Aliquot hdris abhinc. 
( Abhinc semihoram. 
( Dimidia hdra abhinc. 
J Abhinc quadrtintem hdrae. 
| Quadrante hdrae abhinc. 
Decern jain anni sunt, ex quo hac 

regione habito. 
Quamdiu (quam longum tempus) 

equuin habuisti '? 
Quintus paene dnnus est, ex quo 

eum habeo. 
U nus, jam est annus, cum eum non 

vi'di. 
Amplius anno (annum) est, ex quo 

fratrem tuum non vidisti. 
Quam saepe eum audivisti ? 
£go eum saepius quam vicies au- 

divi. 
Yidi eum saepius quam centies. 



LESSON 70.] PHRASES AND EXERCISES. 431 

How long f since what time f Ex quo tempore ? Ex quo ? Quam 

diu 1 
Since childhood. A pueritia, a piiero. 

Since the memory of man. Post hdminmn memdriam. 

From time indefinite. Infinito ex tempore. 

How long has he been dead ? Ex quo tempore (quam dm) mdr- 

tuus est ? 
He has been dead this great Mdrtuus est jam diu (jam pridem). 

while. 
He has been dead (for) these Mdrtuus est jam decern annos (de- 
ten years, cennium). 
These three days (for three Tres dies. 

days). 
This month (for a month). Unum mensem. 

These two years. Duos annos, biennium. 

How long is it since you are Quam ldngum tempus est, ciim hie 

here ? ades ? 

It is three days since I am ( Tertius jam dies est, cum adsum. 

here. ( Tres dies adsum. 

I am here since yesterday. Adsum ex hesterno die. 

How long is it since he is at Ex quo tempore ddmi est ? 

home ? 
Since this morning. Ex mane hodierno- 

This long time. Ex longo tempore (longissime). 

It is already a month since he is Unus jam est mensis, cum hie est 

here. (adest). 

C Sto, stare, steti, statum . 
To cost, < Consto, are, stiti, statum. 

I (alicui aliqua re.) 

How much does this book cost Quanti * hie liber tibi stat ? 

you ? 
It costs me three dollars and a Stat mihi tribus thaleris et dimidio. 

half. 
It costs me five shillings and a Cdnstitit mihi quinque shillingis et 

quarter. quadrante. 

Did it cost you any more than Stetitne tibi pluris, quam meus ? 

mine ? 
It cost me as much as yours did Cdnstitit mihi tanfci, quanti tibi tiius. 

you. 
It cost me a high price, not Cdnstitit mihi magno, parvo, nihilo 

much, nothing. (sc. pretio).f 

(Emo, ere, emi, emptum. 
To purchase, buy. < Cotmere (several things together). 

( Compdro, are, av'i, atum. 
What have you purchased to-day ? Quid emisti (comparasti) hddie ? 

* On this genitive of the price, see Lesson LXVII. A. 
f On the ablative of the price, see Lesson LXXI. A. 



432 



LATIN GRA^IMAE. 



[LESSON 70. 



I have purchased three pairs of 
shoes and two pairs of boots. 



Did you purchase anything yes- 
terday ? 

I brought three quires of paper 
and a picture. 

The pound (weight). 

The half-pound. 

The dozen. 

The foot (measure). 

The inch. 

The quire (of paper). 

The regiment (of soldiers). 

The ring. 
The picture. 

The small picture. 

The pair. 

A pair of doves. 

A pair of gloves. 

Two pail's of gloves. 

A noble pair of brothers. 

A pair of oxen, horses. 

A pound of sugar. 
Five pounds of sugar. 
A bowl consisting of five pounds 
of gold. 

How many pounds of meat did 

you buy ? 
I have bought (purchased) ten 

pounds of meat, five pounds of 

tobacco, and twenty quires of 

paper. 
I have bought tAvo dozen pens. 
I cave them each a dozen books. 



Ego tria paria calceorum et dlio 
paria caligarum coemi (compa- 
ravi). 

Comparavistine aliquid hesterno 

, die? 

Ego tres scapos chartae cum tabula 
picta coemi (comparavi). 

Libra, ae,/! : libra pondo, or simply 
pondo (inclccL). 

Selibra, ae,/. ; selibra pondo. 

Duodecim (as numeral). 

Pes, gen. pedis, in. 

Digitus, i, m. 

Seapus, i, m. (chartae). 
*Legio, onis,/ (of foul). 
*Turma, ae,/! (of horse). 

Anulus, i, m. 

Tabula picta. ae. f: imago (-inis) 
picta ; pictura, ae,/. 

Tabella picta, ae,/*. 
f Par, gen. pans, n. 
^ Bini, ae, a. 

Par columbarum. 
( IVir digital )ulorum. 
( Bina digitibula. 

Diio ]»aiia digitabulorum. 

Par ndbile fratrum. 

Jiigum bdum, equdrum. 

(Libra) pondo sacchari. 

Quinque pondo sacchari. 

Patera ex quinque aiiri pondo. 

Quam miilta comparasti pondo car- 

nis ? 
Ego ciirnis pondo decern, tabaci 
pondo quinque, chartae scapos 
viginti comparavi. 

Ego bis duodenas pennas coemi. 
Dedi eis duodenos libros. 



Exercise 133. 

Have you ever been in this village ? — I have been there several 
times. — Are there good horses in it? — There is not a single one in 
it. — Have you ever "been in that country? — I have been there once. 
— Are there many learned men there ? — There are many there, but 
they spend their time in reading? — Are there many studious chil- 
dren in that village? — There are some, but there are also others 
who will not study. — Are the peasants of this village able to read 



LESSON 70.] EXERCISES 133, 134. 433 

and write ? — Some are able to read, others to write and not to read, 
and many both to read and to write ; there are a few who are 
neither able to read nor to write. — Have you done the exercises ? — 
We have done them. — Are there any faults in them ? — There are 
no faults in them, for we have been very assiduous. — Has your 
friend many children ? — He has only one, but he is a good-for- 
nothing fellow, for he will not study. — In what does he spend his 
time ? — He spends his time in playing and running. — Why does 
his father not punish him ? — He has not the courage to punish him. 

— What have you done with the stuff which you bought? — I have 
thrown it away, for it was good for nothing. — How has your son 
written his letter ? — He has written it with great care and diligence. 

— He has written it with extreme negligence (negligentissime). — 
Have you heard your little brother spell ? — I have heard him pa- 
tiently and in silence. — Is your friend an Englishman ? — No, he is 
a Frenchman by birth. — Are you an American by birth ? — No, I am 
a German. — Are they Romans ? — No, they are Russians. — How 
many are there of them? — They are a hundred in number. — Are 
they equal to us in industry ? — They are not our equals. — Do they 
not excel us in humanity ? — They do not excel us. — We are not 
inferior to them in diligence. — Is our friend a man of much talent 
(ingenio) V — He is a man of high talent and of the most distinguished 
virtue. — They are men of low stature, of small talent, and of no virtue. 

Exercise 134. 

Have you been long in Paris ? — These four years. — Has your 
brother been long in London '? — He has been there these ten years. 

— Is it long since you dined ? — It is long since I dined, but not 
long since I supped. — How long is it since you supped ? — It is 
two hours and a half. — Is it long since you received a letter from 
your father V — It is not long since 1 received one. — How long is it 
since you received a letter from your friend who is in Germany? — 
It is three months since I received one. — Is it long since you spoke 
to the man whose son has lent you money ? — It is not long since I 
spoke to him. — Is it long since you saw your parents ? — It is a great 
while since I saw them. — Has the son of my friend been living long 
in your house ? — He has been living there a fortnight. — How long 
have you had these books? — I have had them these three months. — 
How long is it since your cousin set out ? — It is more than a month 
since he set out, — What is become of the man who spoke English so 
well ? — I do not know what is become of him, for it is a great while 
since I saw him. — Is it long since you heard of the officer who gave 
your friend a stab with his sword? — It is more than a year since I 
heard of him. — How long have you been learning German ? — I 
have been learning it only these three months. — Are you already 
able to speak it ? — You see that I am beginning to speak it. — Have 
the children of the French noblemen been learning it long? — They 
have been learning it these five years, and they do not yet beoin to 
speak. — Why can they not speak it? — They cannot speak it, be- 

2B 37 



434 LATIN GRAMMAB. [lf.SSOX 71. 

cause they are learning It badly (mode). — How long is it since these 
children drank ? — They drank a quarter of an hour ago. — How 
long has yonr friend been in Spain ? — He has been there "this month. 
— AVhen did you meet my brother? — I met him a fortnight {<]uat- 
tuordceim dies) ago. — Are there many soldiers in your country ? — 
There is a regiment of three thousand men there. — How long have I 
kept your cousin's money V — You have kept it almost a year. 



Lesson LXXI. — PEXSUM UNUM ET SEPTr.Y- 
GESIMUM. 

THE ABLATIVE AFTER VERBS. 

A. After verbs of buying, selling, valuing, estimat- 
ing, and the like, the noun denoting the price or value 
is put in the ablative. E. g. 

Spem praetio ndn emo. I do not purchase hope with money. 

Viginti talentis unam orationem Isocrates sold one of his orations for 

Isdcrates ve'ndidit. twenty talents. 

Lis ejus aestimdtur centum talen- lli< line was estimated at a hun- 

tis. dreel talents. 

Qtu'nta civium classis undecim The fifth class of citizens was rated 

mUlibus assinm censebatur. at eleven thousand asses each. 

Scnipulum aiiri valebal sestertiis A scruple of gold was worth twen- 

trict /lis. ty sester 

Multo sanguine et ruZneW&u* Po£< The victory cost the Carthaginians 

nis victoria stetiL much blood and many wounds. 

Quod ndn opus est, asse carom What one does not need is (to.,) 

est. dear for a penny. 

Magnoe homines virtute mefimur, We measure great men by their 

non fortuna. moral worth, and not by their 

fortune. 

JIaecre, non verbis ponderdniur. These things are judged of from the 

reality, and not from words. 

Quod rectum est, nee magnitude That which is morally right La .— 

tip aeslimatur, nee mimero, nee timated neither by* size, nor bv 

U mpore. number, nor by time. 

Remarks. 

1. Verbs of buying and selling are also followed by the ablatives 
mar/no, pcrmar/no, plurtmo, parvo, minima («■. pretio)^ but other verbs 
of this class more commonly take the geiu'tives magni, permagni, &c. 
(Cf. Lesson LXV1I. A.) 

2. The ablative of price occurs in connection with many other verbs, 
besides those of buying and selling. E. g. Triginta miltbus (sesiertium), 



LESSON 71.] 



ABLATIVE AFTER VERBS. 



435 



Jiabitat, He pays thirty thousand sesterces for a house (lodgings). Docet 
talento, He charges a talent for his instruction. Yix drachmis est obso- 
natus decern, He purchased provisions for scarcely ten drachmas. 
Parvo acre mereo, I serve for small pay. Lav or quadrante, I am 
"washed (I bathe) for a quadrans. So est in the sense of " it is worth " ; 
as, Sal in Italia est sex tattle, In Italy salt is worth (sells for) a sextans. 

B. Verbs of plenty or want, and corresponding tran- 
sitive verbs, signifying to fill, endue, enrich, or to de- 
prive, and the like, are followed by the ablative. 

Verbs of plenty and want are abundo, affluo, circumjluo, florco, 
red undo, scateo, v'ujeo ; careo, egeo, indigeo, vaco, &c. 

Verbs of filling, enduing, depriving, &c. are compleo, expleo and 
impleo, cumulo, imbuo, refercio, satio and exsatio, saturo, stipo and con- 
stipo; officio, dono, remuneror, locupleto, onto, dugeo ; — privo, spolio, 
orbo, fraudo and defraudo, nudo, exuo, &c. E. g. 

The kingdoms of Asia always 
abounded in sold. 



Abundiirimt semper aaro regna 

Asiae. 
Antioehia erudit issim is h am (nib us, 

liberalissimisque studies uylu- 

ebat. 
Regno carebat Tarquinius, guum 

regno esset expulsus. 

Miilier abundat auddcia, consilio 
et ratione deficitur, 

Vacare culpa magnum est sola- 
tium. 

Dens Itonis omnibus* explevii 
miindum. 

Templum Junonis egre'giis pictu- 
res locupleldre voluerunt. 

Natura German iam decoravit al- 
tissimorum hdminum exercili- 
bus, 

Demdcritus dicitur dculis se pri- 

V (ls.SC. 

Consilio et auctoritate ndn inddo 
ndn orbdri, sed etiam augeri 
senectus solet. 



The city of Antioch abounded in 
learned men and libera] pursuits 

of the highest order. 

Tarquin was without royal authori- 
ty when he had been expelled 
from his realm. 

Woman has an abundance of au- 
dacity, but is deficient in de- 
liberation and method. 

To be free from guilt is a great 
consolation. 

God has filled the world with good 
things of every kind. 

Tiny wanted to enrich the temple 
of Juno with choice paintings. 

Nature has adorned ( ierinama with 
armies of the tallest men. 

Democritus is said to have deprived 
himself of his eyes. 

Old age is commonly not only not 
deprived of counsel and authori- 
ty, but even advanced in it. 



Remarks. 

1. The verbs egeo, indigeo, compleo, and impleo sometimes take the 

genitive instead of the ablative. E. g. Aliquem temeritatis implere, To 



* After verbs of filling, and others of this class, the ablative may also be put 
as the means or instrument. Cf. Lesson LXIX. C. 



436 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 71. 

fill any one with temerity. Completes jam mercatorum career est, 
The prison is already full of merchants.* 

2. To this construction belong afficere and remunerari, in expres- 
sions like afficere aliquem beneficio, honore, praemm, to bestow a kind- 
ness, an honor, a reward upon any one; afficere aliquem ignominia, 
injuria, poena, morte, to inflict a dishonor, an injury, punishment, 
death upon any one ; remunerari aliquem praemio, to requite any one 
with a reward. 

3. To this rule may also be referred the adjectives orbus, helpless, 
bereaved ; vacuus, empty ; and refertus, full, replete. E. g. Orbus 
Uteris, Bereaved of children. Mare portubus orbum, A sea without 
ports. Vacuae vites fructu, Vines without fruit. Insula referta divitiis, 
An island full of riches.f 

4. Opus est, " there is need," is either used impersonally with the 
ablative, or personally (as opus est, opus sunt) with the nominative. 
The person is then always in the dative. E. g. Opus est mihi libris. — 
Multa tibi opus sunt. — Dux nobis et auctor opus est. — Auctoritdte tud 
nobis opus est, et consilio. — The thing needed is sometimes also ex- 
pressed by the genitive, by an infinitive or supine in u, or by the abla- 
lative of a perfect participle. E. g. Temporis opus est, There is need 
of time. Quid opus est plura (sc. proferre) ? What need is thereof 
saying more ? Nunc opus est te animo valere, Now you must be strong 
in mind. Longius, quam quod scitu opus est, Farther than is necessary 
to know. Hoc facto, maturate opus est, This must be done, hastened. 
To these add Mihi opus est, ut lavem, It is necessary that I should wash.f 

5. The construction of usus est, " it is necessary," is the same as 
that of opus est. E. g. Nunc manibus rapidis usus est. — An cuiquam 
est usus komini, se ut cruciet ? Does any man need tormenting him- 
self? 

C. Verbs signifying to remove, to expel, to deter, to 
free, and others denoting separation, difference, or dis- 
tance, are frequently followed by the ablative, without 
the prepositions ab, de, or ex. 

The principal verbs of this class are pello, depello and expello, ejicio, 
abterreo and dcterreo, moveo, amoveo, demoveo, remoceo ; abeo, exeo, 
cedo, decedo, discedo, desisto, evado, abstineo ; libero, expedio, solco, 
exsolvo, exonero, and levo ; — alieno and abalieno, distingo, discerno, 
secerno, differo, discrejw, dissideo, disto, abhorreo, &c. E. g. 

Censdres dmnes, quos (de) sendtu All the censors, whom they have 

moce'runt. removed from the senate. 

Ne opiflces qui'dem se (ati) drli- Not even the artisans withdrew 

bus suis removerunt. from their trades. 

* On egeo and indigeo compare page 113. 

t But also mare vacuum ab hostibus. — Referta Gallia negociatorum, accord- 
ing to Lesson LXVI. A. 

\ Compare pages 183 and 288. 



LESSON 71.] 



ABLATIVE AFTER VERBS. 



437 



Apud Germanos quemciinque 

mortalium arcere (a) te'cto ne- 

fas habetur. 
Pdpulus Atheniensis Phocionem 

pdtrid pepulit. 
Usu lirbis prohibere peregrinos 

inhuinanum est. 
Brutus civitatern domindtu re'gio 

liberdvit. 
Petiit Flaccus, ut legibus solver e- 

tur. 
Exonera civitatern vdno fdrsitan 

metu. 
Levdmur super stitione, llberdmur 

mortis metu. 

Sol ex aequo meta distdbat utrd- 
que. 



Among the Germans it was consid- 
ered wrong to drive away any- 
human being from a roof. 

The Athenian people expelled Pho- 
cion from his country. 

It is inhuman to prevent strangers 
from the use of the city. 

Brutus delivered the country from 
royal domination. 

Flaccus petitioned to be released 
from the laws. 

Release the state from perhaps a 
groundless apprehension. 

We are relieved from superstition, 
Ave are delivered from the fear 
of death. 

The sun was equally distant from 
the east and west. 

Remarks. 

1. The verbs exsolvere, exonerare, and levdre are always followed 
by the ablative, while liber are, expedlre, solvere, and the adjective liber, 
may have either aliqud re or ab aliqua re. 

2. The verbs alienare, abalienare, distinguere, &c. commonly have 
ab, and the ablative only among the poets. But differre, discrepare, 
&c, and the adjective diversus, sometimes have the dative instead Of ab. 

3. The verb separare commonly takes ab. The construction of 
prohibere and defendere is aliquem re, ab re or ab aliquo. That of 
inter dicere, alicui aliqua re, as in the formula alicui aqua et igni inter- 
dicere, to banish one. 

4. In imitation of the Greeks, the poets sometimes put the genitive 
instead of the ablative after verbs and adjectives of separation. E. g. 
Me omnium jam laburum levas, You release me now from all my labors. 
Liber labOrum, Free from labors. Purus sceleris, Pure from guilt. 

Hospes, itis, m. ; caupo, onis, m. 
Facultates,/i pi. ; bona, orum, n. ; 

res familiaris. 
Patrimonium, i, n. 
( Totus, a, um. 
■< Integer, gra, grum. 
( Omnis, is, e. 
Expendo, ere, di, sum. 
To draw and spend (out of ( Erogo, are, avi, atum. 

the public treasury). ( Depromo, ere, mpsi, mptum. 

To squander. 



The host, inn-keeper. 
The property, fortune. 

The patrimony. 

The entire, whole : all. 

To spend, expend. 



j Diffundo, ere, fudi, fusum. 
( Dilapido, are, avi, atum. 



To spend, consume (in eat- ( g m6do ' gre ' ^ di ' ^ sum ' 
ing, &c). 



37 



nsumo, ere, mpsi, mptum. 
( Conflcio, ere, feci, fectum. 



438 



LATIX GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 71. 



How much have you spent to- 
day ? 

I have spent only ten dollars. 

Have I spent more money than 
you ? 

You have, on the contrary, spent 
less than I. 

How much am I to pay ? ("What 
expense have I made ?) 

You have spent nearly a hun- 
dred dollars. 

How much has he spent at the 
inn ? 

He has spent nearly all the 
money he has. 

Has he much property (large 
means) ? 

He has nothing more, for he has 
squandered his entire patri- 
mony. 

Did he squander what he had ? 

He has squandered both his own 
and other people's money. 
Just now. 

The infant just born. 
The stranger just arrived. 

The men, who have just arrived. 

He just now writes. 

Have you just come ? 

He has just written. 

I have just now seen your brother. 

What countryman are you ? 

I am an American, an English- 
man, a Russian. 

"Where do you come from ? 

I am from London, Rome, Leip- 
sic, Paris. 

I am a Londoner, Roman, from 
Leipsic, a Parisian. 

From Sparta. 
From Athens. 
From Venice. 
From Dresden. 
From Berlin. 



Quantam pecuniam hddie expen- 

disti ? 
Decern tantum thaleros expendi. 
Egdne majorem pecuniam expendi 

quam tii *? 
Immo pdtius minorem, quam ego, 
expendisti. 
( Quantum (pecuniae) comedi ? 
< Quid siimptus feci ? 
( Quantum tibi debeo ? 
Ad centum thaleros consumpsisti. 

Quid pecuniae confecit (quid sum- 
ptus fecit) apud hrispitem ? 

Pecunias suas fere dmnes consiim- 
psit et confecit. 

Tenetne facultates magnas ? 

Kon amplius ; nam patrimdnium 
siiuni integrum dilapidavit. 

Profuditne suum ? 

Profudit ve'ro et suum et aliena. 

Jluilo, commodum ; jwoxime (adv.) ; 

rccens, tis, adj. 
Infans modo natus (recens a natu). 
Recens ad vena. 
Homines, qui modo (prdxime) ad- 

venerunt. 
iSlodo scribit. 
Advenis modo ? 
Scripsit modo. 

Ego fratrem tiium modo videbam. 
Cujas (cujdtis) e's ? 
Americanus, Anglus, Russus sum. 

"Cnde venis ? 

Yenio Londino, Roma, Lipsia, Lu- 

tetia Parisiorum. (Cf. Lesson 

LYI. C.) 
Ddmo Londinensis, Romanus, Li- 

psiensis, Parisiensis sum. (Cf. 

page 195.) 
Spartanus, i, m. (a. ae./.). 
Atheniensis, is, m. 8c f. 
Yenetus, i, m. 
*Dresdensis, is, in. & f. 
*Berohnensis 3 is, m. kf. 



LESSON 71.] PHRASES AND EXERCISES. 



439 



From Vienna. 

From New York. 

From Cambridge. 
Are you from Athens ? 
No, I am from Venice (a Vene- 
tian) . 

To serve (any one). 

To wait upon, attend on 
one. 

To attend one professionally. 

To be in one's service. 



Was he in your service ? 

He was in my service twenty 

years. 
Does he serve (attend on you) 

well (promptly) ? 
He does serve me very well. 

Did the doctor attend you to-day ? 
No, he has neglected to attend 
me to-day. 

To spoil, damage, corrupt. 

To soil. 
He has soiled his handkerchief. 
Has any one spoiled your hat ? 

No one (has spoiled it). 

Is your dress spoiled ? 

My dress is not spoiled, but my 

book is. 
Is the sugar spoiled (damaged) ? 

It is It is not. 

To dress, clothe. 

To dress, fit, become (any 
one) 

Most beautifully, charmingly. 

Admirably. 
This coat fits you very well. 
How does this hat fit (become) 

me ? 
It fits you charmingly, admirably. 



*Vindobonensis, is, m. &/. 
*Neo-Eboracensis, is, m. tkf. 
*Cantabrigiensis, is, m. &cf. 

Niim ddmo Atheniensis es ? 

Non vero ; ego Venetus sum. 

Servio, ire, ivi (11), itum (alicui). 
( Ministrare alicui. 
( Apparere alicui (officially). 

Operam dare (adesse) alicui. 

In famulatu esse apud aliquem. 

In ministerio alicujus esse. 

Servire apud allquem. 

Eratne in ministerio tiio (in famu- 
latu apud te) ? 

Erat apud me in famulatu viginti 
ann os. 

Ministratne tibi bene (parate) ? 

Ministrat mini vero admodum bene 
(parate). 

Deditne tibi operam hddie medicus ? 

Non ; operam mihi dare hddie prae- 
termisit. 
( Perdo, ero, didi, ditum. 
J. Corrumpo, ere, rupi, ruptum. 
( Vitio, are, avi, atum. 

Inquino, are, avi, atum. 

Muccinium siium inquinavit. 

Ecquis (niimquis) pileum tiium 
perdidit ? 

Nemo. 

Vestisne tiia vitiata est ? 

Non vestis mea, sed liber vitiatus 
est. 

^Estne saccharum vitiatum (corrii- 
ptum) ? 

fet profecto. Non est 
( Vestes parare alicui. 
\ Vestio, ire, ivi, itum. 
f Con venire (alicui). 
-I Decere (aliquem). 
( Dignum esse (aliquo). 

Pulcherrime, optlme. 

Mirifice. 

Haec toga tibi dptime cdnvenit. 

Qudmodo mihi sedet (cdnvenit) 
hicce pileus ? 

Sedet tibi pulcherrime, mirifice. 



440 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 71. 



It does not become you very we] 
It misbecomes you. 



Ti'bi minus cdnvenit. 

Te non est dignus. 

Te dedecet. 
That garment becomes him ad- Testis ilia eum decet minfice (eo 

mirably. dignissima est). 

Does the father clothe his chil- ( Yesti'tne pater liberos siios ? 



dren ? 
He does clothe them. 
Does your father clothe you ? 
He does. 
God himself is said to clothe the 

needy. 
How was the boy clothed ? 
He was dressed in green. 
The girl Avas dressed in blue. 
To be dressed in. 



\ Paratne pater vestes liberis ? 
Ye'stit. Parat. 

Paterae ti'bi vestes novas parat ? 
Pater. 
Deus ipse egenos vestire dicitur. 



Quemadmodum erat piier vestitus ? 

Indutus erat veste viridi. 

Puella induta erat veste caeriilea. 

Indutum (am, um) esse (veste ali- 
qua). 
( Quam magnus, a, um ? 
( Quantus, a, um ? 
} Quam altus (celsus), a, um ? 
\ Ciijus magnitudinis ? 
I Quam altus, a, um ? 
-} Quam profundus, a, um ? 
( Cujus profunditatis ? 

Ciijus altitiidinis est ejus ddmus ? 
( Alta est circitcr triginta pedes (ace). 
} Est pedum circiter triginta. (Cf. 
( Lesson LXIV. B.) 

D. Obs. In answer to the questions, How far ? How long 
(high, deep, wide, thick) ? the noun denoting the extent of space 
is generally put in the accusative without a preposition, but 
sometimes in the ablative.* 



How large, of what size ? 
How high ? 

How deep ? 
How high is his house ? 
It is about thirty feet hii 



h. 



How deep is the well ? 

It is twenty feet deep. 

He had two ditches made, fifteen 

feet deep. Behind these he 

constructed a rampart of 

twelve feet. 
"We have not gone a foot beyond. 
The plain of Marathon is about 

ten thousand paces (ten miles) 

from Athens. 
The army was about a three days' 

journey from the river Tenais. 
He encamped three miles from 

the city. 



Quam altus (profundus) piiteus est? 
Altus (profundus) est viginti pedes. 
Diias fdssas quindecim pedes latas 

perdiixit. Post eas vallum dud- 

decim pedum exstriixit. 

Pe'dem non egressi siimus. 
Campus Marathon ab Athenis cir- 
citer milia passiium decern abest. 

Exercitus tridui itinere abfuit ab 

anine Tenai. 
Tria milia passuum ab lirbe castra 

pdsuit. 



* This construction is consequently the same as that of Time, in answer to 
How long?, on which compare LessonLVII. A. 



LESSON 71.] PHRASES AND EXERCISES. 



441 



He established himself about six 

miles from Ceesar's camp. 
True. 
True virtue, friendship, religion. 
A true and sincere (genuine) 

friend. 
A true scholar. 
Is it true ? 
It is true. It is so. 
Is it not so ? 

I do not deny it. I grant it. 
Is it true that his house has been 

burnt? 
Is it true that he has lost his 

house by fire ? 
It is really so. 

It is not true. It is false. 

Is it not true that you are squan- 
dering your patrimony ? 
I do not deny that it is so. 

As sure as I live, I know it to be 

so. 
As sure as I live, I do not know 
whether it is so. 

The philosopher. 
The key. 
The lock (bolt). 
The door. 
The locksmith. 



The saddle. ■< 

The saddler. 
Has he a comfortable income ? 
He has. He has not. 
How large is his income ? 
He has an annual income of a 

thousand aurei. 
He has fifty crowns per month 

to live upon. 
May I offer you (do you choose) 

some of this (dish) ? 
I should like some of it. 
I do not like it. 
It does not agree with me. 
That will not do for me. 
The income (of money, &c). 
The annual income (pension, &c.) 



Milibus passuum sex a Caesaris 

castris consedit. 
Verus, a, am. 

Vera virtus, amicitia, religio. 
Verus et sincerus amicus. 

Vir vere ddctus. 

Yerumne est ? Estne verum ? 

Verum est. Res ita (sic) se habet. 

Ndnne ? Ain' tu ? 

Non nego. Concede 

Verumne est, domum ejus defla- 
gratam dsse ? 

Estne verum, eum ddmum siiam 
vi flammarum amisisse ? 

Res prdrsus ita se habet. 

Non verum est. 

Falsum est. 

!Ndnne verum est, te patrimdnium 
dilapidare ? 

Rem ita se habere non ne'go. 
(Lesson LIH. B. 3.) 

fta vivam, ut scio, rem sic se ha- 
bere. 

!Ne vivam, si scio, an verum sit 
(ita se habeat). 

PhilosSphus, i, m. 

Clavis, is,/! 

Claustrum, i, n. 

Ostium, i. n. 

Faber (ri, in.') claustrarius. 

Sella equaria, ae,/*. 
*EphippIum, i, n. 

Ephippiorum artifex (icis, m.). 

Habetne, linde commode vivat ? 

Habet. Non habet. 

Quantus est ei reditus pecuniae ? 

Annua habet mille aureorum. 

Reditum menstruum habet quin- 

quaginta thalerum. 
Visne (optasne) aliquantulum do 

hoc (cibo) ? 
Opto vero aliquantulum. 
Mihi non libet. 
INlihi non prddest. 
Hoc mihi non usui est. 
Reditus, us, in. (reditus pecuniae). 
Annuum, i, »., or j)l. annua, orum. 



442 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 71. 

Annual. Annuus, a, um. 

Monthly. Menstruus, a, um. 

rr i l / -a. \ ( Alor, ali, alitus* sum (ab aliquo). 

To board (with an v one). ■{ A1 . '. ' . . _. -> - 1 J 
v (. Alicujus victu utor, uti, usus sum. 

-r,. -, , ■■ •,, i • o ( Alebarisne ab illo ? 

Did vou board with him t < TT , , ,• < , 

^ I Ususne es ejus victu i 

I did board with him. Alebar. Usus sum. 

Exercise 135. 

Who is the man who has just spoken to you ? — He is a learned 
man. — What has the shoemaker just brought? — He has brought the 
boots and shoes which he has made us. — Who are the men that 
have just arrived ? — They are philosophers. — Of what country are 
they ? — They are from London. — Who is the man who has just 
started ? — He is an Englishman who has squandered away all his 
fortune in France. — What countryman are you ? — I am a Spaniard, 
and my friend is an Italian. — Wilt thou go for the locksmith? — 
Why must I go for the locksmith ? — He must make me a key, for I 
have lost the one belonging to my room. — Where did your uncle 
dine yesterday? — He dined at the innkeeper's. — How much did 
he spend ? — He spent three florins. — How much has he a month to 
live upon ? — He has tw r o hundred florins a month to live upon. — 
Must I go for the saddler ? — You must go for him, for he must mend 
the saddle. — Have you seen any one at the market ? — I have seen 
a good many people there. — How were they dressed ? — Some were 
dressed in blue, some in green, some in yellow, and several in red. — 
How much (quant i) did you buy your horse for ? — I bought it for 
twenty pounds of gold. — Did he sell his house for a high price 
(magna) ? — He sold it for a very high price (permagno) ; he sold it 
for ten thousand talents. — Did your books cost you as much as 
mine ? — They cost me just as much (tantideni) ; they cost me a 
thousand aurei. — How much do your lodgings cost you ? — They 
cost me ten dollars (crowns) per month. — How much do you pay 
for instruction (quanti doceris) ? — I pay fifty crowns for it. — How 
much is corn worth in this region (regio) ? — A medimnus of corn is 
worth only half a dollar in this region. 

Exercise 133. 

Who are those men ? — The one who is dressed in gray is my 
neighbor, and the one with the black coat the physician, whose son 
has given my neighbor a blow with a stick. — Who is the man with 
the green coat ? — He is one of my relations. — Are you from Ber- 
lin ? — No, I am from Dresden. — How much money have your chil- 
dren spent to-day ? — They have spent but little ; they have spent 
but one florin. — Does that man serve you well ? — He does serve 
me well ; but he spends too much. — Are you willing to take this 
servant ? — I am willing to take him if he will serve me. — Can I 

* From ah, ere, alui, alltum or altum, to nourish, support. 



LESSON 72.] ABLATIVE AFTEIl VKRBS. 443 

take this servant ? — You can take him, for he has served me very 
well. — IIow long is it since he (first) served you? — It is but two 
months since. — lias he served you long ? — He has served me (for) 
six years. — How much did you give him a year ? — I gave him a 
hundred crowns. — Did he board with you V — He did board with 
me. — What did you give him to eat ? — I gave him whatever I ate. 
Were you pleased with him V — I was much pleased with him. — Is 
he free from (vacatne) guilt? — He is entirely (prorsm) free from it. 

— Does this country abound in gold ? — It does not abound (in it). 
Has he filled his glass with wine ? — He has filled it with pure wine 
Qneruni). — Does he adorn his house with pictures ? — He is adorn- 
ing it. — Will you release us from fear (metu) ? — I cannot release 
you (from it). — Were they expelled (exjndsus) from their country ? 

— They were not expelled. 



Lesson LXXII. — PENSUM ALTERUM ET SEP- 
TUAGESIMUM. 

ABLATIVE AFTER VERBS AND ADJECTIVES. 

A. The deponent verbs utor, fruor, fungor, potior, 
vescor, dignor, laetor, glorior, nitor, and the compounds 
abator, perfruor, defungor, and perfungor are generally 
followed by the ablative. E. g. 

Niivis dptime cursum cdnficit ea, That ship makes the best passage 

quae scientissimo gubeniatore which has the most skilful 

iitXtur. helmsman, 

id est cujiisque prdprium, quo The property of every one is that 

quisque fruilur atque utitur. which he enjoys and uses. 

Qui adipisci veram gldriam vo- Let him, who desires to acquire 

let, justitiae fungdtur officiis. real distinction, attend to the re- 

quirements of justice. 
Defuncti hello Punico, Romani Released from the Punic war, the 

arma Maceddniae intulerunt. Romans directed their arms 

against Macedonia. 
Eadem pericula, quibus nos per- The same dangers which we have 

fiincti sumus. undergone. 

Impedimentis castrisque ndstri Our soldiers made themselves mas- 

potili sunt. ters of the baggage and the camp. 

Helvetiis persuasit, perfacile esse, He persuaded the Helvetii, that it 

totius Galliae impe'rio p>otiri. was very easy to get possession 

of entire Gaul. 
Numidae pleriimque lacte et fe- The Numidians subsisted princi- 

rina came vescebdntur. pally upon milk and the flesh of 

wild beasts. 



444 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 72. 



Omne, quo mscuntur homines, 

penus est. 
Haiid equidem/a'u me dignor 7w~ 

it ore. 
Nulla re tarn laetdri sdleo, quam 

meorum officiorum conscientia. 

Nulla re niti decet sapientem, 
nisi virtute animique consci- 
entia. 



Everything, which men live upon, 
is food (provisions). 

I do not consider myself worthy of 
such an honor. 

There is nothing in which I am 
wont to take so much delight, as 
in the consciousness of my duties. 

The philosopher ought to rely on 
nothing, except on virtue and 
the consciousness of intellect. 



Eemarks. 

1. The verbs iitor, friior, fungor, potior, and vescor sometimes also 
occur with the accusative. E. g. Rem medici utuntur. — Argentum 
abator. — Frui ingenmm. — Militare munus fungens. — Potlri admi- 
nistrationem regni. — Absinthium vescuntur. 

2. Potior also governs the genitive; as, potlri rerum, imperii, domi- 
nationis, to obtain the chief command. The construction of glorior is 
either re, de re, or in re; that of nltor and innltor, re, in re, ad or 
in rem. E. g. In virtute jure gloridmur, We justly seek our honor in 
virtue. Pompeii in vita nitebatur salus civitatis, The salvation of the 
state depended upon the life of Pompey. Ad immortalitatem gloriae 
nitttur, He is striving after an immortality of glory. 

3. Fldo and confldo either take the ablative, like nitor, or the da- 
tive. E. g. Nemo alterius, qui suae confldit, virtuti invidet, No one 
envies the virtue of another, who has any confidence in his own. 
Nemo potest fortunae stabilitate confldere, No one can rely upon the 
stability of fortune. — Stare, " to abide by," has either the ablative or 
in ; as, Stant sententid, They abide by their opinion. Stare in fide, 
To remain true, faithful. 

B. The preceding rule includes the adjectives dignus, in- 
dignus, fretus, alienas, praeditus, and contentus, which are like- 
wise followed by the ablative. E. g. 



Natus siim ad agendum semper 
aliquid dignum viro. 

Excellentium civium virtus imi- 
tatione, non invidia digna est. 

Quam miilti luce indigni sunt, et 
tamen dies oritur. 

Haec ad te scripsi liberius,/rei!ws 
conscientia officii mei. 

Pi'i sunt benefici, neque hoc ali- 
enum diicunt majestdte sua. 

Epicurus confirmat, de'os mem- 
bi'is liumdnis esse praeditos. 



I am born for the constant per- 
formance of something worthy of 
the character of man. 

The virtue of eminent citizens de- 
serves imitation, and not envy. 

How many are unworthy of the 
light of day, and yet it rises ! 

I have written you this somewhat 
frankly, relying on my conscious- 
ness of duty. 

The gods are beneficent, nor do 
they consider this attribute at 
variance with their majesty. 

Epicurus asserts, that the gods are 
possessed of human limbs. 



LESSON 72.] ABLATIVE AFTER PREPOSITIONS. 445 

Mens est prae'dita mdtu sempi- The mind Is endued with eternal 

te'rno. motion. 

Pdrvo est natura contenta. Nature is content with little. 

Quod cuique temporis ad viven- Every one ought to be contented 

dum datur, eo debet esse con- with the space of time given him 

tentus. to live in. 

Remarks. 

1. Alienus, in the sense of " averse or hostile to," has commonly 
either ab or the dative ; but in the sense of " unsuitable, incompati- 
ble," it has either the ablative or ab, and sometimes the genitive. E. g. 
Homo alienus a litteris, A man averse (or a stranger) to letters. Am- 
bitloni alienus, Averse to ambition. Alienum a vita mea, Foreign to 
(inconsistent with) my life. Aliarum rerum aliena, Not reconcilable 
with other things, unexampled. 

2. Dignus sometimes (though rarely) occurs with the genitive. 
When connected with a verb, it takes either the infinitive, or the sub- 
junctive with qui. E. g. Dignus salutis. — Dignus, qui imperet, Worthy 
to command. Horatius fere solus legi dignus, Horace almost the only 
one worth reading. So also contentus scripsisse, satisfied to have 
written. 

0. The participles ndtus, progndtus, genitus, stilus, editus, 
and ortus are sometimes followed by the ablative without the 
preposition ex or a. 

Such ablatives are generally loco, genere, stirpe, familid, parentibus, 
frequently in connection with an adjective. 

Yir siimmo loco ndtus. A man of high rank by birth. 

Yirgines hdnesto drtae loco. Maidens of respectable descent. 

Adolescentes amplissima familia Young men of illustrious descent. 

ndti. 
Archias ndtus est loco ndbili. Archias was of noble origin. 

Iliinc Fauno et nympha genitum The tradition is, that he was engen- 

accepimus. dered by Faunus and a nymph. 

Non sanguine humdno, sed stirpe Not begotten of human blood, but 

divina sdtus. of divine pedigree. 

Qualis tibi ille videtur, Tdntalo What sort of a man do you con- 

progndtus, Pelope ndtus ? sider that descendant of Tanta- 

lus, the son of Pelops ? 

Remark. — When connected with an adjective, this ablative may 
be regarded as that of quality, and always stands without a preposition. 
But when no adjective is added, the prepositions ex or a are frequent- 
ly employed. E. g. Natus ex Penelopa. — Belgae ab Germanis orti, &c. 

THE ABLATIVE AFTER PREPOSITIONS. 

D. The ablative is also governed by the prepositions 
#, ab (abs), absque, clam, coram, cum, de, e, ex, in, prae, 
pro, sine, sub, subter, and tenus. (Cf. Lesson XCIV.) 

38 



446 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 72. 



Remark. — In and sub take the ablative only in answer to the 
question Where ? Super only when it stands for r7e, " with respect 
to," " with reference to." Subter is more commonly construed with 
the accusative. 

E. Verbs compounded with the prepositions a, de, or ex are 
followed by the ablative in a local sense, sometimes with the 
preposition repeated.* E. g. 
Tu ea me abe'sse urbe miraris, in 

qua summum sit odium hdmi- 

num ? 

Decddere provincia praetor jussus 

est. 
Ad eos, qui vita excesserunt, re- 

vertamur. 
Amicitia niillo loco excluditur. 

Neminem a congre'ssu me'o jani- 
tor meus absterruit. 

Ut ex his regionibus Barbarorum 
praesidia depelleret. 

Res e memdria, de mdnibus ela- 
biintur. 



Do you wonder at my being absent 
from a city, in which the hatred 
of men is carried to the utmost 
extremes V 

The prastor was ordered to leave 
the province. 

Let us now return to those who are 
already dead. 

Friendship is excluded from no 
place. 

My porter never deterred any one 
from meeting me. 

That he might expel the troops of 
the Barbarians from these re- 
gions. 

Things slip out of our memory, 
away from our hands. 
Remark. — The majority of these convey the idea of separation, 
and are consequently already included in Lesson LXXI. C. 

F. Verbs of placing, putting, standing, sitting, and some 
others, are commonly followed by the ablative with in, but verbs 
of motion in general by the accusative with in. 

Such verbs are pono, loco, colloco, statiio, eonstitiio, consido, habeo, 
duco, numero, deflgo, mergo, incido, insculpo, inscrlbo, &c. Verbs of 
motion : eo, venio, advenio, advenlo, and many others. E. g. 



Plato rationem in cdplte, velut 

in dree pdsuit ; iram in pectore 

loeavit. 
Cdnon nunquam in ho'rtis suis 

custodem impdsuit. 
Stellas in deorum numero reposu- 

erunt. 
Dolor in mdximis mails diicitur. 



Plato has put the reason in the 
head, as in a citadel, and passion 
in the heart. 
Conon never set a watch over his 

garden. 
They put the stars among the num- 
ber of the gods. 
Pain is considered one of the great- 
est of evils. 
AvesquaedamsemTwa'nmergunt. Some birds dive into the sea. 
Legati in vultu regis defixerunt The ambassadors fixed their eyes 
duillos. upon the countenance of the king. 

* This preposition, however, is not always the same, but one of kindred sig- 
nification, as in Example 6. 



LESSON 72.] 



PIIUASES AND EXERCISES. 



41 



Decemviri le*ges in duddecim hi- The decemviri wrote the laws upon 

butts scripserunt. twelve tables. 

In Italiam, in provinciam advenit. He arrived in Italy, in the prov- 
ince. 
Profectua est Romam, Ddlphos.* lie has gone to Rome, to Delphi. 

Remark. — Imponere, insculpere, inscribere, inserere, arc also fol- 
lowed by the dative (aliquid alicui rei, according to Lesson JLXII. J!.), 
and most of the above verbs frequently have in rem or re simply, in- 
stead of the in re of the rule. E. g. imponere illiquid in rem ; inscutr 
pare illiquid aliqua re, &e. 

f MXseror, Gri, at us sum. 

j ( 'omm'tsrrari (ALIQUEM, ALIQUID). 

] Me mtseret (nuseruit, miserllum est) 

I ALICUJUS.f 

( Denloro, are. Cici, dlwn. 
weep } n -v - - • ' 
1 -I Defied, ere, evi, elum. 

( (ALIQUEM, ALIQUID.) 

Ex ammo, toto pectore (ammo). 

( Commiserarisne me, ilium, nos, eosV 
you pity me, liim, us, them? -< Miseretne te mei, illius, nostri, eo- 
( rum ? 

f Ego ve'ro te (ilium, yds, eos) ex ani- 
I do pity tliec (him, you, them) J mo commiseror. 

with all my heart. ] Me vero tiii (illius, vestri, corum) 

[_ miseret tdto peetore. 



To pity, commiserate. 



To lament, 
over. 



mourn or 



"With all one's heart. 



Do 



Do ye commiserate this man ? 
We commiserate him very much. 
I have pitied your misfortunes. 

I have lamented over lost hope. 
I have wept over his untimely 
death. 



Miseraminine hiinc hdminem ? 
Commiseramur eum vehementer. 
Me miseritum est tuaruin fortuna- 
rum. 

Dcploravi spem perditam. 
Deilevi mortem ejus praematiiram. 



C Fldo, ere,flsus sum. 
To confide or trust in (or rely \ Confidere (alicui, alicui rei). 
on any one or thing). 1 Fretum (am) esse (aliquo, ali- 
[_ qua re). 

To trust with, intrust, commit ( ^ d \f^ dtdi > dUwn ' 

(anything to any one), ] Concredere, committere mandare. 

v J ° ( (ALICUI ALIQUID.) 

To confide (commit) anything to ( Comittere (permittere) aliquid fi- 
the care of any one). 

To intrust one's plans, one's se- 
crets, to one. 

To commit (unbosom) one's self Se (animum suum) alicui credere, 
to one. 



alicuji 



-\ Ufl cUlLUJUS. 

( Tnidere aliquid in alicujus fidem. 
Consilia, occulta siia alicui credere. 



* On these accusatives with unci without in, compare Lesson LVT. A. 
t On the government of this verb, see Lesson LXVII. C. 



448 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 72. 



To intrust one's self to the pro- 
tection of one. 

To give one's self up to one. 

To give one's self up entirely to 
one. 

Did he intrust you with any- 
thing ? 

He intrusted his monev to me. 



In alicujus fidem se tradere, per- 

mittere. 
Se (hire (dedere) alicui. 
Tdtum se dedere alicui. 



He has deposited his money with 
me (for safe-keeping). 



Crediditne (commisitne) tibi ali- 

quid ? 
Credidit (commisit) mihi peciinias 
suas. 
( Pecunias suas apud me depdsuit. 

Peciinias suas mihi mandavit (de- 
( mandavit). 
What have you intrusted (com- Quid in ejus fidem tradidisti ? 

mitted) to his protection ? 
I have intrusted my only son to 

his protection. 
I have intrusted all my sons to 

the care of one master. 
He trusted him with all his plans 

and secrets. 
He has unbosomed himself to me. 
He has surrendered himself en- 
tirely to me. 
Do you confide in me, him, us, 

them '? 
Do you rely on me, him. us. them ? 
I do trust, rely on. 
The plan. 
The secret. 
Secrets. 
The mystery. 
To keep anything secret. 



To keep still (silent) about 

anything. 
To conceal (anything from 

any one). 
To publish, divulge. 
Did he conceal the mystery 

from you V 
Xo. on the contrary, he commu- 
nicated it to me. 

Did you keep the matter secret ? 

Xo, I imprudently divulged it. 

To offer. 



Fidei ejus filium meum linicum 

commisi. 
Ego filios meos dmnes unius ma- 

gistri ciirae demandavi. 
Credebat ei consilia atque occulta 

sria omnia. 
Se (an i mum siium) mihi credidit. 
Tdtum se mihi dedidit. 

Confidisne mihi, ei, nobis, illis ? 

Fretusne es me, eo, nobis, illis ? 

Confido. Fretus sum. 

Consilium, i. n. 

Res secreta. occulta, arcana, /. sing. 

Occulta, arcana, secreta, drum. n.jJ. 

Mysterium, i, n. 

Aliquid taciturn (occultum) tencre, 

or habere. 
Reticeo, ere, ciii (aliquid, de 

ALIQUA RF.). 
Celo, arc. avi, atum (aliquem 

ALIQUID* DE ALIQUA RE). 

Palam facere aliquid. 
Celavitne te mysterium ? 

immo pdtius id mecum communi- 
cavit. 
( Tenuistine rem occiiltam ? 
^ Reticuistine rem (de re) ? 
Xdn vero : rem palam feci ego in- 
considenitus. 
< Qtf' r ro,ferre, obtiili, oblatum. 
\I)eferre (alicui aliquid). 



* Cf. Lesson LX. A. 



LESSON 72.] PHRASES AND EXERCISES. 



449 



To offer (promise) one's services 

to one. 
To offer one's self to one. 
Did he offer you his services (as- 
sistance) ? 
He has offered himself to me. 
I offer and promise you all in 

my power. 
The gods have offered (granted) 

you all you desired. 
He offered him all his influence 

for the accomplishment of this 

end. 
Did he offer (proffer) us his help 

in the matter ? 
He has offered us his services of 

his own accord. 

Voluntarily, of one's own ac- 
cord. 
Unwillingly. 
Did he leave unwillingly ? 
No, he left of his own accord. 

The Roman citizen. 

The American citizen. 

The citizen (inhabitant) of 
London, Paris, New York. 

The Hamburg merchant. 

The Strasburg beer. 

The student of Leipsic, 
Paris, Cambridge. 

The inhabitant of a city. 

The inhabitant of the coun- 
try. 

To take care of, to he care- J 
ful of anything. ] 

Does he take care of his clothes ? 

He does take care of them. 
Do you take care of your hat ? 
I do not. 

Do ye take care of your health? 

We do take care of our health 

and property both. 
Did he regard his own interest ? 

2 C 38 * 



Alicui dperam siiam offerre or polli- 

ceri. 
Se (semetipsum) alicui offerre. 
Obtulitne (pollicitiisne est) tibi 

dperam suam ? 
Is semetipsum mihi dbtulit. 
Quidquid possum, tibi polliceor ac 

defero. 
Dii tibi omnia optata detulerunt. 

6mnem ei suam auctoritatem ad 

hoc negdtium conficiendum de- 

tulit. 
Num dperam suam ad rem pro- 

fessus est ? 
Operam suam nobis ultro dbtulit 

(pollicitus est). 
Ultro (adv.), sua (tua, &c.) sponte, 

sponte et ultro. 
Invitus, a, um. 
Discessitne invitus ? 
Non vero ; sua sponte et ultro dis- 

cessit. 

Ciyis Romanus. 

Civis Americanus. 

Incola (ae, m.) Londini, Lutetiae, 

Eboraci Novi. 
Mercator Hamburgensis. 
Cervisia Argentoratensis. 
Civis academiae Lipsiensis, Parisi- 

ensis, Cantabrigiensis. 
Oppidanus, i, m. 
Rusticus, rusticanus, i, m. 

Curare or sibi curae (dat.) habere 
aliquid. 

Rationem alicujus rei habere. 

Resjncere (spexi, spectum) aliquid. 

Curatne vestem suam ? 

Habetne sibi curae vestem ? 

Curat. Habet. 

Habesne tibi curae pileum ? 

Non habeo. 

Curatisne valetiidinem ? 

Habetisne rationem valetiidinis ? 

Hebemus vero rationem et valetii- 
dinis et rei familiaris. 

Niim cdmmoda sua ipsius respici- 
ebat ? 



450 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 72. 

He regarded his own advantage Sua ipsius edmmoda minus, quam 

less than that of others. aliena respiciebat. 

To take care of provide for, ( Curare (aliquem aliquid). 

attend to. \ Providere or consulere (ui, turn) 

(alicui). 

-nT-.n , , r -i o ( Visne meum equum curare ? 

Will you take care of my horse .M v , , , ^ . ,. 

J J \ V isne meo equo providere r 

I will (am not unwilling). Yolo. Providere ei non nolo. 

He is providing for his life and Yitae suae salutique quam dptime 

health in the best possible cdnsulit et prdvidet. ' 

manner. 

Exercise 137. 

How long has your brother been absent from the city ? — He has 
been absent these twelve months. — Has he been ordered to leave his 
country (patrid) ? — He has been ordered. — Are there many phi- 
losophers in your country ? — There are as many there as in yours. 

— How does this hat fit me ? — It fits you very well. — How docs 
this hat fit your brother ? — It fits him admirably. — Is your brother 
as tall as you ? — He is taller than I, but 1 am older than he. — How 
high is this man ? — He is five feet four inches high. — How high is 
the house of our landlord? — It is sixty feet high. — Is your well 
deep ? — Yes, sir, for it is fifty feet deep. — How long have those 
men been in your father's service ? — They have been in his service 
already more than three years ? — Has your cousin been long at 
Paris ? — He has been there nearly six years. — Who has spoiled my 
knife ? — Nobody has spoiled it, for it was spoiled when we were in 
want of it. — Is it true that your uncle has arrived ? — I assure you 
that he has arrived. — Is it true that he has assured you of his assist- 
ance? — I assure you that it is true. — Is it true that the six thou- 
sand men, whom we were expecting, have arrived ? — 1 have heard 
so. — Will you dine with us? — I cannot dine with you, fori have 
just eaten. — Do you throw away your hat ? — I do not throw it 
away, for it fits me admirably. — Does your friend sell his coat? — 
He does not sell it, for it fits him most beautifully. — There are many 
learned men in Berlin, are there not (nonne) ? asked Cuvier a man 
from Berlin. Not as many as when you were there, answered the 
man from Berlin. 

Exercise 138. 

Why do you pity that man ? — I pity him, because he has trusted 
a merchant of Hamburg with his money, and the man will not return 
it to him. — Do you trust this citizen with anything? — I do not 
trust him with anything. — Has he already kept anything from you ? 

— I have never trusted him with anything, so that he has never kept 
anything from me. — Will you trust my father with your money ? — 
I will trust him with it. — What secret has my son intrusted you 
with ? — I cannot intrust you with that with which he has intrusted 
me, for he has desired me to keep it secret. — Whom do you intrust 
with your secrets ? — I intrust nobody with them, so that nobody 



LESSON 73.] ABLATIVE ABSOLUTE. 451 

knows them. — Has your brother been rewarded ? — He has, on the 
contrary, been punished ; but I beg you to keep it secret, for no one 
knows it. — What has happened to him ? — I will tell you what has 
happened to him, if you promise me to keep it secret. — Do you 
promise me to keep it secret ? — I promise you, for I pity him with 
all my heart. — Do you consider (ducisne) that at variance (alienum) 
with your dignity (dignitas) V — I do not consider (it so). — Does he 
attend to (fungiturne) the duties of justice ? — He does attend to 
them. — Have you experienced (perfunctus) the same dangers which 
I have experienced? — I have not experienced the same. — What do 
they live upon ? — They live upon fish and milk. — Who has taken 
possession (poteri) of the baggage ? — The soldiers have made them- 
selves masters of it. — What do you rejoice in (laetari) V — I rejoice 
in the consciousness of virtue. — Is his virtue worthy of imitation ? — 
It is not worthy of it. 



Lesson LXXIII. — PENSUM SEPTUAGESIMUM 
TERTIUM. 

OF THE ABLATIVE ABSOLUTE. 

A. A noun and a participle in the ablative are often put indepen- 
dently of the rest of the proposition in which they occur, and serve as 
an abridged form of a clause introduced by the conjunctions quum, 
dum, si, quod, quamquam, quamvis, &c. Thus, Sole oriente (= quum 
sol oritur), The sun rising, i. e. when the sun rises. Servio Tullio 
regnante (== dum Servius Tullius regnobal), Servius Tullius reigning, 
i. e. while he was reigning, during his reign.* Sole orto (= quum sol 
orlus esset), The sun having risen, i. e, when (offer) it had risen. Cijro 
mortuo (= quum Cyrus mortuus esset), Cyrus being dead, i. e. when 
he was dead, after his death. This construction is called the Ablative 
Absolute. It most commonly designates the time or concomitant of an 
action or event, but frequently also a cause, reason, condition, or 

CONCESSION. 

B. When the ablative absolute indicates the Time of 
an action or event, it is rendered into English by when, 
while, during, after. E. g. 

Criistino die, oriente sole, redite To-morrow, when the sun rises, re- 
in pugnam. turn to the encounter. 

* In this construction the present participle always refers to the time of the 
action denoted by the verb of the sentence, which may be either present, past, 
or future. The perfect participle indicates an action or event anterior to that 
expressed by the verb. (Compare Lesson XLIX. E.) 



452 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 73. 

Jove tondnte, cum pdpulo agi non When Jove thunders, it is not right 

est fas. to address the people. 

Quaeritur, litrum mtindus terra The question is, whether the heav- 

stdnte circiimeat, an mundo ens revolve while the earth 

stdnte terra vertatur. stands still, or whether the earth 

turns and the heavens stand still. 
Solon et Pisistratus Se'rvio Tullio Solon and Pisistratus flourished 

regndnte viguerunt. during the reign of Servius Tul- 

lius. 
Videmus aquam spumare, igni We observe that water foams 

subjecto. whenever fire is put under it. 

Diane interfe'cto. Dionysius rursus After the murder of Dion, Dio- 

Syracusarum potitus est. nysius again took possession of 

Syracuse. 
Re'glbus exdctis, cdnsules creati After the expulsion of the kings, 

sunt. consuls were created. 

Remarks. 

1. The noun entering into the construction of the ablative absolute 
always denotes a different person or object from those contained in 
the sentence; but pronouns sometimes constitute an exception to tin's 
rule. E. g. Ego percussOrcm jiieum securum ambidare potior me solli- 
cito ? Shall I allow my murderer to walk secure, while I am anxious ? 
Gallium Italiamque tentari se absente nolebat. He was not willing that 
Italy should be invaded in his absence. Invisosemel princIpe seubene 
seu male facta (sc. cum) premunt, When a prince is once hated, then 
all his actions, whether good or bad, are construed against him. 

2. The participle of the ablative absolute is generally either the 
present or tin' perfect Instances of the future active are less frequent, 
and the future passive rarely occurs. E. g. Rex apum nisi migraturo 
agmine foras non procedU, The king of the bees never comes out, un- 
less the hive is about to migrate. Ituro in Armeniam majore filio, The 
elder son being about to go into Armenia. Tanquam non transitfiris 
in Asiam Romanis, As it' the Romans were not on the point of passing 
into Asia. Quis est, qui, nullis oflk-ii praeceptis tradendis, pk'dosophum 
se aw/eat dicere ? Will any one dare to call himself a philosopher, 
without having moral precepts to impart? 

3. The perfect passive participle of the ablative absolute may fre- 
quently be rendered by the perfect active participle, which, in Latin, 
does not exist except in deponent verbs. E. g. Po?npeiuSj captis 
Iiierosolymis, victor ex illo fano nihil tettgit, Pompey, having taken 
Jerusalem (lit. Jerusalem having been taken), did not touch anything 
out of that temple.* 



* The ablative absolute, in instances like this, manifestly arises from the 
want of a perfect active participle in Latin. The construction of deponent 
participles, on the other hand, is precisely like the English. E. g. Hostes, hanc 
adepti victoriam (= hdc victoria adeptd),in perpetuum se fore victores confide- 

bant, The enemy, after having won this victory, was confident of remaining 
victorious perpetually. (Compare Lesson XLIX. A. Rem. 4.) 



LESSON 73.] 



ABLATIYE ABSOLUTE. 



453 



4. When the perfect participle of deponent verbs is used in a pas- 
sive sense,* it may stand in the ablative absolute, like that of transitive 
verbs. So likewise when the deponent is a neuter verb. E. g. Par- 
tilis copiis, The forces having been divided. Periculo perfuncto, The 
danger being overcome. Adcpta libertate, Liberty having been ob- 
tained. Profecto ex Italia Valerio, Valerius having left Italy. Sole 
orto, The sun having risen, &c. 

C. "When the ablative absolute denotes a cause, condition, 
or concession, it is rendered by the English since, because, in 
consequence of, if, although. E. g. 

Artes innumerabiles 



repertae 
sunt, docente natura. 

Anxnr brevi receptum est, ne- 
glectis die festo custddiis urbis. 



Flaminium Caelius reiufione ne- 
fflecta cecidisse apud Trasime- 
num scribit. 



The arts are innumerable, since 
nature teaches them. 

Anxur was retaken in a short time, 
the watch of the city having 
been neglected on the day of a 
festival. 

Caelius writes that Flaminius fell 
near Trasimenum in conse- 
quence of having neglected f the 



usual religious rites. 
Natura reluctdnte, irritus labor est. EiT'ort is fruitless, if nature opposes. 
Quae potest esse juciinditas vi 

tae, subldtis amicitiisf 
Quaenam sollicitiido vexaret i'm- 



pios, subldto suppl 



iciorum in 



eta? 



Perdttis rebus omnibus, tamen ipsa 
virtus se sustentare potest. 

Propdslta inridia, poena, morte, 
qui nihilo secius rempiiblicam 
defendit, is vir vere punindus 
est. 



"What pleasure can life possess, if 
friendship is banished from it ? 

AVhat anxiety would harass the 
wicked, if the fear of punishment 
were removed V 

Though everything be lost, yet vir- 
tue is all-sufficient to sustain her- 
self. 

He who, in spite of odium, punish- 
ment, or death before him, J nev- 
ertheless defends the common in- 
terest, must be considered really 
a man. 



Remark. — The ablative absolute thus employed is sometimes 
linked to the preceding clause by one of the conjunctions ut, velut, 
tanquam, elsi, quamquam, or quamvis. E. g. Velut Diis quoque shnul 
cum patrid relictis, As if the gods had been relinquished together with 
their country. Tanquam non translturis in Asiam Romanis, As if the 
Romans were not on the point of passing into Asia. Quamvis capite 
defectionis sublato, Although the chief of the revolt had been removed. 

D. The ablative absolute frequently consists merely of a 



* A list of such participles is given in Lesson XLIX. A. Rem. 4. 

t I. e. because he had neglected. 

X I. e. although hatred, punishment, or death be placed before him. 



454 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 73. 

noun in apposition with another noun, or of a noun and an ad- 
jective, with the participle of esse understood.* E. g. 

Natura dike, errari millo pacto Where nature guides, it is impos- 

pdtest. sible to err. 

Belluoi Gallicum C. Caesare im- The Gallic war was carried on un- 

peratore gestum est. der the command of Csesar. 

Natus est Augustus M. Tullio Ci- Augustus was born during the con- 

cerone et Antonio consulibus. sulship of M. Tullius Cicero and 

Anton)*. 

Ascanius Creiisa matre, lllio in- Ascanius was born of Creusa, 

cdliimi, natus est. when Troy was still uninjured. 

Romani, Hanmbdle vivo, niin- The Romans thought that they 

quam se sine insidiis futures never would be exempt from 

existimabant. snares while Hannibal was alive. 

Caesare igna.ro magister equitum He was made master of horse with- 

constitutus est. out the knowledge of Caesar. 

Lupus mag no consectdntium tu- The wolf escaped amid the great 

multu evasit. commotion of those in pursuit of 

him. 

Secundis rebus suis volet etiam He will even desire to die, though 

mdri. in prosperity. 

Remarks. 

1. The substantives, which most commonly thus take the place of 
the participle in the ablative absolute are: — a) Certain nouns denoting 
the action of a verb ; as adjutor, adjutrix, auctor, comes, dux, inlerpres, 
judex, magister, magistrix, praeceptor, praeceptrix, testis,] &c. b) The 
names of certain offices or dignities, such as consul, imperdtor, praetor, 
rex, domlnus, magistrdtus, &c. E. g. Eo adjutdre, With his assistance. 
Licinio quodam auctore, At the instigation of a certain Lieinius. Se 
duce, Under his own conduct. Me rege, With me for a king. His 
magistratUms, Under the administration of these consuls. So also, 
Puero Cicerone, When Cicero was a boy. Nobis pueris, When I was 
one. 

2. Additional examples of adjectives are : — Deo propitio, If God is 
propitious. Invito, Minerva, Against the will of Minerva, i. e. with 
bad success. Sereno coelo, The sky being clear, lis invltis, They 
being unwilling (i. e. against their will). TacXtis nobis, When (while) 
we are silent, lllis consciis, They being accessories,^ &c. 

3. This construction is sometimes represented by an adjective alone. 

* Such a participle does not exist in Latin, but is usually supplied in Eng- 
lish. E. g. Natura duce, nature being our guide; Caesare imperatore, Caesar 
being commander; lllio incolumi, Illium being yet safe, &c. 

t Substantives of this class may frequently be resolved into a participle; 
as, Eo adjutore, i. e. adjuvante. — Natura luce, i. e. ducente. — Fortund comite, 
i. e. comitante. — Polybio judice, i. e. judicante, Sec. 

X But sometimes these ablatives absolute may also be referred to the abla- 
tive of mode or manner. E. g. Bono gubernatore. The pilot being good. i. e. 
with a good pilot. Probo navigio, With a proper vessel (ship). 



LESSON 73.] ABLATIVE ABSOLUTE. 455 

E. g. Sereno per totum diem, The sky being serene all day lono\ 
Tranquillo pervectus Chalcidem, Conveyed to Chalcis while the sea 
was calm.* 

E. The ablative absolute is sometimes represented by the 
perfect participle alone, its subject being an entire clause. 
E.g. 

Caesar temeritatem militum re- Csesar, after having explained what 
prehendit, exposito quid iniqui- the disadvantage of the ground 
tas loci posset. might lead to, reprehended the 

rashness of his soldiers. 

Alexander, audito Dareum ap- Alexander, having heard that Da- 
propinqudre cum exercitu, 6b- rius was approaching with an 
viam ire constituit. army, resolved to meet him. 

Excepto quod non simul esses, Happy in every respect, except 
cetera laetus. that you were not present. 

Hannibal, cdgnilo insidias sibi Hannibal, having learned that plots 
pardri, fuga salutem quaesivit. were on foot against him, sought 

his safety in flight. 

Remarks. 

1. The participles thus employed are but few. The principal one 
audito, cogmto, comperto, edicto, explorato, desperato, nuntiato. All 
these are passive, " it being heard, learned, found," &c. ; but are gen- 
erally rendered by the perfect active : " Caesar having heard, learnt, 
found, given orders," &c. 

2. An adjective sometimes supplies the place of this participle abso- 
lute. E. g. Multi, incerto (=quum incertum esset) prae tenebris quid 
peterent aut vitdrent, foede interierunt, Many, uncertain,! on account 
of the darkness of the night, what to seek or to avoid, perished dis- 
gracefully. 

3. The participle absolute sometimes, though rarely, occurs without 
any subject whatever. E. g. In cujus amnis transgressu, multum cer- 
tato, pervlcit Bardanes, In passing which river, Bardanes conquered 
after a severe engagement. Quum, nondum palam facto, vivi mortu- 
ique promiscue complorarentur, AVhen, the matter being yet unpub- 
lished, the living and the dead were bewailed indiscriminately.^: 

Every (one'), each. Quisque, quaeque, quodque or quid- 

que, gen. cujusque. 
C Quivis, quaevis, quodvis or quidvis, 

Any (one') vou please J £ en ' cu J usvis - 

J \ J -J -f J Quil)bet,quaelXbet,quodlibet oy quid- 

[_ Ubet, gen. cujuslibet. 

* These may be resolved into Quum coelum sercnum, mare Iranquillam 
Juisset. 

f Lit. "It being uncertain (a matter of uncertainty and doubt)." 

X 111 these examples multum certato and palam facto staud impersonally. 



456 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 73. 



Every one, everybody. 

Every man. 
Every child. 
Everything. 

Every month, year. 



All the world. 
Every one knows. 
Every one sees. ■] 

It is in the mouth of every one 
(of all). 

He knows (can do) everything. 

I have seen everything. 

Let every one keep what has 

fallen to his lot. 
A man's mind is the man himself. 
I give him any name I please. 
At all times (at any time you 

please). 
I myself) as well as any one of 

you. 
A pleasure tour to Corinth is not 

everybody's privilege. 
It belongs to a great judge to 

decide what every one should 

render to every one (i. e. to 

his neighbor). 
He is fit for anything (every- 

thing). 

Every one, who; everything 
which (whoever, whatever;* 
whosoever, whatsoever) . 

"Whoever (whosoever) he is \ 
(may be). \ 

Whoever you are (may be). 

However that may be. 

Whatever there is of gain (= all 
the gain). 



Unusquisque, gen. unluscuj usque. 

Singuli (each individually). 

Nemo (nullus) non, unus quillbet. 

Omnes. 

Omnis homo, omnes. 

Omnis infans. 

Omnia, ium, n. pi., nihil non. 

Singulis mensibus, annis. 

In singulos menses, annos. 

Quot mensibus, annis. 

Omnes homines. 

Nemo non scit. Omnes sciunt. 

Nemo non videt. 

Nemo est, quin (but ichat) videat. 

Hoc in ore omnium est. 

file omnia potest. 

Nihil non potest. 

Ego omnia vidi. 

Nihil est, quod non viderim. 

Quod cuique dbtigit, id quisque te- 

neat. 
Mens cujiisque, is est quisque. 
Do nomen quddlibet illi. 
Quibiislibet tempdribus. 

Ego non minus, quam vestrum qui- 
vis. 

Non cuivis hdmini cdntingit, adire 
Corinthum. 

Magni est jiidicis statiiere, quid 
quemque cuique praesture de- 
beat. 

Iddneus est arti cuilibet. 

Omnium horarum homo est. 

Quisquis, quaequae, quodquod or 
quidquid, gen. cujuscujus. 

Qulcpimque, quaecumque, quodcwn- 
que or quidcumque, gen. ciijus- 
cumque. (Cf. Lesson XII. C.) 

Quisquis ille est. 

Quicumque is est.* 

Quisquis es. 

Qudquo mddo res se habet (habeat). 

Quodciimque liicri est. 



Quisquis and quicumque are generally put with the indicative in Latin. 



LESSON 73.] PHRASES AND EXERCISES. 



457 



Whatever benefit (= all the Quidquid beneficii 

benefit). 
Whatsoever we (may) write (all 

that we write). 
In whatsoever place one may be. 
He can do whatsoever (anything) 

he pleases. 



Omnia, quaecumque scribimus. 

Quocumque* in loco quisquis est. 
Quodciimque velit, licet facere. 



The whole, entire. 

The full (entire, complete), 
The entire (unbroken). 

A whole (entire) year. 

A whole number. 

A full (and entire) year. 

Full (complete) liberty, joy. 

The whole (entire) city. 

The entire society. 

His entire property. 

The whole of his patrimony. 

The whole (of this) world. 

The universe. 

For three entire years. 

An entire boar, ox. 

The walk, promenade (act). 

The short walk. 

The walk, promenade 
(ground). 
To take a walk. 
To be on the walk (promenade). 



The concert. 



To go to the concert. 

To be (present) at a concert. 

To give a concert. 

The concert-room. 
Has he gone to the concert ? 
Were there many at the con- 
cert ? 
There was a large crowd there. 
Did you find many out walking ? 



Integer, gra, grum. 

Totus, a, um, gen. tofius. 

Universus, a, um. 

Plenus, a, um. 

Solidus, a, um. 

Annus integer. 

Niimerus integer (plenus). 

Plenus annus atque integer. 

Libertas sdlida ; gaiidium sdlidum. 

Uni versa ci vitas. 

Universitas urbis. 

Universa societas. 

Facilitates siias (ejus) dmnes. 

Patrimdnium siium (ejus) integrum. 

Mundus hie tdtus (dmnis). 

Universitas rerum. 
C Tdtos tres annos. 
-< Tres ipsos annos. 
( Tdtum triennium. 

Solidus aper, bos. 

Ambulatio, deambulatio, onis, f. ; 

spatium, i, n. 
Ambulatiuncula, ae, f. 
Ambulacrum, i, n. ; spatium, am- 
bulatio. 
Ambulationem conficere. 
In ambulacra esse. 
*Concentus, us, m. 
*Symphonia, ae,/". 
Concentum obire (ivi, itum). 
Concentui (symphdniae) aclesse. 
Concentum edere (didi, ditum). 
*Odeum, i, n. 
Obivitne concentum ? 
Aderantne miilti (homines) con- 
centui ? 
Aderat vero vis hdminum magna. 
Invenistine miiltos in ambulacro 
(ambulantes) ? 



* So also sometimes separately cum quibus erat cumque; qua re cumque. 

3d 



458 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 73. 



I found but a few. 
To cut, wound. 
To cut off. 

To cut into (make an in- 
cision). 
Entirely. 

He has cut off his finger. 

He has had his finger cut off 

(amputated). 
Have you cut (wounded) his 

finger ? 
I have not cut (wounded) his 

finger, but his foot. 
He has cut my leg. 

Alone (all alone). 

To bring (carry) along. 

To bring (lead) along. 

To bring along (by convey- 
ance). 

Have you come quite alone ? 
No, I have brought all my friends 

with me. 
He has brought all his men 

along. 
Does he bring anvthing new with 

him? 
He brings nothing. 
They have brought us some grain 

along. 
Did you bring your brother 

along ? 
I have brought him. 
To fall. 
To fall gliding, to slip. 

To fall down, out, in. 

To slip down, out, in. 

To let fall, drop (inadver- 
tently) anything out one's 
hands. 



Invent non nisi paiicos. 

Seccire, vulnerare. 
( Abscldo, ere, scldi, scisum. 
I Amputo, are, ad, alum. 

Incido, ere, cldi, clsum (aliquid). 

Omnino, prorsus, plane. 

Digitum ejus amputavit. 

Is digitum siiuni amputandum cu- 

ravit. 
lEcquid digitum ejus vulnerasti ? 

£go non digitum, sed pedem ejus 

vulneravi. 
Crus meum secuit (incidit). 

( Solus, a, urn, gen. sollus. 

< Unus, a, um, gen. unlus. 
( Unus solus. 

(Secum) afferre, apportare (ali- 
quid ALICUI Or AD ALIQUEM). 

( Secum ducere (duxi, ductum). 
-< Secum adducere, deducere. 
( (aliquem ad aliquem.) 
Adveho, ere, vexi, vectum (ali- 
quid ad aliquem). 

Venistine unus solus ? 

Xon vero ; amicos ineos dmnes 

lucrum dediixi. 
Omnes siios secum addiixit. 

Affertne secum aliquid ndvi ? 

Nihil affert. 

Frumentum nobis secum advexe- 

runt. 
Duxistine tecum fratrem ? 

Diixi. 

Cado, ere, cecidi, casum. 
Labor, Icdji, lapsus sum. 

Decidere, excidere, incidere (-cidi, 

-casum). 
Delabi, elabi, Ulabi. 

(Exctdit mild aliquid manu or de 

< manibus. 

( DelabXtur mild aliquid de manibus. 



LESSON 73.] PHRASES AND EXERCISES. 



459 



To drop (from negligence). 

To drop (Intentionally). 
Has he fallen ? 
Yes, he has fallen into the well. 

He has fallen from the horse. 

The fruit falls from the trees. 

Has he dropped anything ? 

Yes, he has dropped his pen. 

He has dropped his ring. 

The ring dropped of its own ac- 
cord from my finger. 

You have dropped your gloves. 

She is dropping her handker- 
chief. 

Near, close by. 
Near (not far from) . 

Near me, you, him. 
Near the fire, by the fire. 
Near (not far from) his castle. 

Near that spot. 

AVhat are you doing by the fire ? 
I am engaged in writing and 

thinking. 
Where do you live? 
I live close by the castle. 
He lived not far from the king's 

residence. 
He fell not far from the river. 

The groom. 
Did you tell the groom to bring 

me the horse ? 
I have told him. 
I have ordered him to do so. 



To prevent, hinder. 



To hinder (prevent) any one 
from sleeping, writing. 



Amittere aliquid de manu (or ma- 
nibus). 

Dimittere aliquid de manibus. 

Ceciditne ? Lapsiisne est ? 

1 ncidit vero in puteum. 

Lapsus est ex equo. 

Ex equo deeidit. 

Poma ex arbdribus cadunt, deci- 
dunt. 

Amisitne aliquid de manibus ? 

Dimisit vero pennam de manibus. 

ifixcidit ei anulus de manu. 

Anulus mini sua spdnte de digito 
delapsus est. 

Exciderunt tibi de manu digitabula. 

Muccinium ei de manibus delabitur. 

Apud, juxta, prope (Prep. c. Ace). 

Nun longe, Jiaud prociil (allquoloco, 
ab aliquo loco). 

Juxta me, te, ilium. 
( Ad (apud, juxta) fdcum. 
I Apud (prope) carbdnes. 

Non ldnge (haud prdcul) ab ejus 
castello. 
( Prope ilium locum. 
( Prope ab illo loco. 

Quid agis apud carbdnes ? 

In scribendo et cogitando occupatus 
sum. 

t T bi habitas ? 

Juxta (prope) castellum habito. 

Habitabat non ldnge a ddmo regia. 

Cccidit hand prdcul (a) fliivio. 

Stabularius, i, m. ; agaso, onis, m. 

Dixistine stabulario, ut addiiceret 
mihi equum ? 

Factumst (= factum est). 

Jussi cum facere hoc. 
f Impedio, Ire, ivi (il), itam (aliquem 
J (ab) aliqua re). 
I Retardo, are, avi, alum (aliquem 

[ IN ALIQUA RE). 

flmpedire aliquem qudminus (or 

ne) ddrmiat, scribat. 
I Petardare aliquem a dormiendo, 

scribendo (or ad donniendum, 
^ scribendum). 



460 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 73. 

f Retardatne te a legendo (ad le- 
Does he prevent you from read- J gendum) ? 

ing ? 1 Irnpeditne te, qudminus (or ne) 

[_ legas ? 
He does prevent me. Betardat. tmpedit. 

f An ego te ad dormiendum retar- 
Or did I prevent you from] davi ? 

sleeping ? ] An ego te impedivi, qudminus dor- 

[_ mires ? 
You have not prevented me. Me non retardasti (impedisti). 

Was he hindering him from Impediebatne (retardabatne) e'um 

flight ? a fiiga ? _ 

He was not. Ison impediebat. 

Exercise 139. 

Whom do you pity ? — I pity your friend. — Why do you pity 
him? — I pity him because he is ill. — Do the merchants of Berlin 
pity anybody '? — They pity nobody. — Do you offer me anything? 

— I offer you a gold ring. — What has my father offered you ? — He 
has offered me a fine book. — To whom do you offer those fine 
horses ? — I offer them to the French officer. — Do you offer that 
fine carriage to my uncle ? — I do offer it to him. — Dost thou offer 
thy pretty little dog to these good children ? — I do offer it to them, 
for I love them with all my heart. — What have the citizens of Stras- 
burg offered you ? — They have offered me good beer and salt meat. 

— To whom do you offer money ? — I offer some to those Parisian 
citizens, who have assured me of their assistance. — Will you take 
care of my clothes ? — I will take care of them. — Wilt thou take 
care of my hat ? — I will take care of it. — Are you taking care of 
the book which I lent you ? — I am taking care of it. — Will this man 
take care of my horse ? — He will take care of it. — Who will take 
care of my servant ? — The landlord will take care of him. — Does 
your servant take care of your horses ? — He does take care of them. 

— Is he taking care of your clothes ? — He is taking care of them, 
for he brushes them every morning. — Have you ever drunk Stras- 
burg beer ? — I have never drunk any. — Is it long since you ate 
Leipsic bread ? — It is almost three years since I ate any. — Does he 
think himself (ducitne se) out of danger (sine periculd) ? — He never 
can consider himself out of danger while his enemy is alive (his ene- 
my being alive). — Is the republic safe (salvus)? — How can it be 
safe under the administration of consuls like these (his magistrati- 
uus) ? 

Exercise 140. 

Have you hurt my brother-in-law ? — I have not hurt him ; but he 
has cut my finger. — What has he cut your finger with ? — With tho 
knife which you had lent him. — Why have you given that boy a 
blow with your fist ? — Because he hindered me from sleeping. — 
Has anybody hindered you from writing ? — Nobody has hinJered 
me from writing; but I have hindered somebody from hurting your 



LESSON 74.] THE PLUPERFECT TENSE. 461 

cousin. — Has your father arrived ? — Everybody says that he has 
arrived ; but I have not seen him yet. — Has the physician hurt your 
son ? — He has hurt him, for he has cut his finger. — Have they 
cut off this man's leg ? — They have cut it off entirely. — Are you 
pleased with your servant ? — I am much pleased with him, for he is 
fit for anything. — What does he know ? — He knows everything. — 
Can he ride on horseback ? — He can . — Has your brother returned 
at last from Germany ? — He has returned thence, and has brought 
you a fine horse. — Has he told his groom to bring it to me ? — He 
has told him to bring it to you. — What do you think of that horse ? 
— I think that it is a fine and good one, and (I) beg you to lead it 
into the stable. — In what did you spend your time yesterday ? — 
I went to the public walk, and afterwards to the concert. — Were 
there many people in the public walk ? — There were many people 
there. — When did your brother return home ? — He returned at 
sunrise. — $Vhen was Augustus born ? — He was born during the 
consulship of Cicero. — Do you desire to learn Latin? — I am not 
unwilling to learn, with you for a guide and instructor. — Having 
heard (audito) that our friend was about to arrive, I immediately re- 
solved to go to meet him. — Why were these men punished ? — 
They were punished on account of neglected duties (pfficiis neglectis). 



Lesson LXXIV. — pensum septuagesimum 

QUARTUM. 
OF THE PLUPERFECT TENSE. 

A. The pluperfect tense serves to represent a past 
action as entirely completed with reference to another 
past action just commencing or going on. It sustains 
the same relation to the imperfect, as the perfect does 
to the present. E. g. 

Jtriierant Danai, et tectum dmne The Greeks had forced their way 
tenebant. in, and were in possession of the 

entire house. 
Pausanias eodem loco sepultus Pausanias was buried in the very 
est, xibi vitam posiierat. spot on which he had lost his life. 

Quum ddmum intrdsset, dixit When he had entered the house, 

amico suo. he said to his friend. 

Cum ver esse coeperat, diibat se After the commencement of spring 
laLJri atoue itineribus. . he was wont to enter upon his la- 

bors and his journeys. 
30* 



4G2 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 74. 

Remark. — The Romans always observe the distinction indicated 
by the pluperfect, and put this tense even where the English idiom 
substitutes the perfect. E. g. " When he arrived (i. e. had amved) 
in the city, he perceived," Quum in urbem advenisset, animadvertit. 
" When he saw (i. e had seen) the boy, he exclaimed," Quum pue- 
rum conspexisset, exclamavit. 

B. FORMATION OF THE PLUPERFECT TENSE. 

1. The pluperfect active is formed from the perfect by chan- 
ging the final i into, Indie, eram, Subj. issem. As, — - 

1. Amavi — amaveram, amavissem, I had loved. 

2. Monui — monueram, monuissem, I had reminded. 

3. Legi — legeram, legissem, I had read. 

4. Audlvi — audlveram, auclivissem, I had heard.* 

2. The pluperfect passive is formed from the perfect parti- 
ciple, by adding, Indie, eram or fueram, Subj. essem or fuissem. 
As, — 

Lndic. Amatus, monitus, lectus, auditus eram or fueram, i" had been 

loved, reminded, read, heard. 
Subj. Amatus, monitus, lectus, auditus essem or fuissem, that I might 

have been loved, reminded, read, heard. 

3. The pluperfect of deponent verbs is formed like that of 
the passive voice. As, — 

Indic. Hortatus, veritus, seciitus, blanditus eram or fueram, / had 

exhorted, feared, followed, flattered. 
Subj. Hortatus, veritus, secutus, blanditus essem or fuissem, that I 

might have exhorted, feared, followed, flattered. 

INFLECTION OF THE PLUPERFECT ACTIVE. 

C. The inflection of the pluperfect active is exhibit- 
ed by the following paradigms : — 

Indicative. Subjunctive. 

Amaveram, I had loved. Amavissem, that I might have 

loved. 
Sing, amaveram Sing, amavissem 

amaveras amavisses 

amaverat, amavisset, 

Plur. amaveramus Plur. amavissemiis 

amaveratis amavissetis 

amaverant. amavissent. 



* Subj. that I might have loved, reminded, read, hnurd. 






LESSON 74.] THE PLUPERFECT ACTIVE. 4G3 

So conjugate monueram — monuissem, legeram — legissem, audivt- 
ram — audlvissem. To these add apporlaveram, I had brought ; labor 
rdveram, I had labored ; Icweram, I had washed ; dederam, I had 
given ; steteram, I had stood ; — habueram, I had had ; studueram, I 
had studied ; jusseram, I had commanded ; secueram, I had cut; vide- 
ram, I had seen ; — attulerum, I had brought ; dilexeram, I had cher- 
ished ; miseram, I had sent ; arcesslveram, I had called ; cupweram, I 
had desired ; quaesweram, I had sought ; usseram, I had burned ; — 
aperueram, I had opened ; weram, I had gone ; scweram, I had known ; 
sit'weram, I had been thirsty ; veneram, I had come ; — volueram, I 
had wished ; nolueram, I had been unwilling. 

The verb sum has regularly fueram — fuissem. And so its com- 
pounds, abfueram — abfuissem ; adfueram — adfuissem ; interfueram 
interfuissem ; profueram — prqfuissem, &c. 

Remarks. 

1. Verbs of the fourth conjugation (and generally those whose per- 
fect ends in Ivi) frequently reject the v before the final eram of the 
pluperfect indicative ; as, audieram, prodieram, quaesieram,* &c, and 
Ivissem is sometimes contracted into issem ; as, audissem, prodissem, 
quaesissem, for audlvissem, &c. (Compare page 239, Remarks.) 

2. Oderam, I hated ; memineram, I remembered ; noveram, I knew, 
was acquainted with ; consueveram, I was wont, have the force of the 
imperfect, as odi, memini, &c. that of the present. 

Had I loved ? Egon' amaveram ? 

By no means ; you had not loved. Mmime gentium ; non amaveras. 

Had we given you a book ? Niim nos tibi h'brum dederamus ? 

You had not given me one. Non dedenltis. 

Had he stood by the fire ? Steteratne apud carbdnes ? 

He did. He had stood there, j ^l ua f <= faCtum est > 

( oteterat. 

Had you called the physician ? Arcessiverasne medicum ? 

Yes, I had called him. Sane, eum arcessiveram. 

Had they seen our friend ? Nostnimne amicum viderant ? 

They had not seen ours, but their Non nostrum, sed suiimmet vide- 

own ? rant. 

When I had found the letter. Quum litteras invenissem. 

If we had studied our lesson, Si penso imperato dperam dedisse- 

would you not have rewarded mus, ndnne nos praemiis affe- 

us ? cisses ? 

I should have done so. Factum esset. 

What did he say when he en- Quid dixit, quum ddmum tuam in- 

tered your house ? trasset (= intravisset) ? 

He wished me a good morning. Me salvum esse jiissit. 

* These, however, may be referred to the secondary form in u, as audii, 
prodii, &c. 



4G4 



LATIN" GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 74. 



THE PLUPERFECT PASSIVE. 



_D. The Pluperfect Passive is thus inflected : 



Indicative. 
Amatus eram or fueram, I had 

been loved. 
Sixg. amatus eram or fueram 
amatus eras or fueras 
amatus erat or fuerat, 
Plur. amati erainus or fuera- 
mus 
amati eratis or fuerat is 
amati erant or fuerant.* 



Subjunctive. 
Amatus essem or fuissem, that 

I might have been loved. 
Sing, amatus essem or fuissem 
amatus esses or fuisses 
amatus esset or fuisset, 
Plur. amati essemus or fuisse- 
mus 
amati essetis or fuissetis 
amati essent or fuissent. 



So conjugate monitus, lectus, audltus eram or fueram, I had been 
reminded, read, heard ; Subj. monitus, lectus, audltus essem or fuissem, 
that I might have been reminded, read, heard. To these add allatus, 
ddtus, dilectus, habitus, jussus, missus, quaesltus, ustus eram or fueram, 
I had been brought, given, cherished, considered, commanded, sent, 

sought, burned ; and Subj. essem or fuissem, that I might have 

been brought, given, cherished, &c. 



Had you been admonished ? 
I had been admonished. 
Had the philosopher been heard ? 
He had not been heard. 
Had you been sent ? 
"We had not been sent. 
Had a ribbon been given you ? 
]\one had been given me. 
Had the letters been read ? 
They had been read. 
If the book had been read. 
"When the letter had been deliv- 
ered. 
Would that we had been sent ! 



Because they 
chosen. 



had not been 



Erasne (fu erasne) monitus ? 

Factumst. Monitus eram (fueram). 

Auditusne erat sapiens ? 

Auditus non erat. 

Kiini vos missi eratis (fueratis) ? 

Kos non missi erainus (fueramus). 

Datane tibi fuerat taenia ? 

Data non fuerat. 

Erantne epistolae lectae V 

Factum est. Erant. 

Si liber lectus esset (fuisset) . 

Quum litterae tnidltae essent (fu- 
issent) . 

tJtlnam nos missi essemus (fuisse- 
mus) ! 

Quod non delecti essent (fuissent) 



PLUPERFECT OF DEPOXEXT VERBS. . 

E. The pluperfect of deponent verbs is inflected like 
that of the passive voice. Thus : — 

* When the subject is feminine, then: amCita eram or fuera a, Plur. awatue 
erainus or fueramus ; Subj. Sing, amiita essem or fuissem, Plur. amdtae essemus 
or fuiss'mus. When it is neuter: amdtum erat or fuerat, Plur. amain erant or 
fuerant; Suisj. Sing, amdtum esset or fuisset, Plur. amiita eszcnt or fuissent. 



LESSON 74.] PLUPERFECT OF DEPONENT VERBS. 4.65 

Indicative. Subjunctive. 

Iiortatus eram or fueram, / Hortatus essem or fuissem, 

had exhorted. that I might have exhorted. 

Sing. Iiortatus eram or fu eram Sing, hortatus essem or fuissem 

hortatus eras or fueras hortatus esses or fuisses 

hortatus erat or fuerat, hortatus esset or fuisset, 

Plur. hortati eramus or fue- Plur. hortati essemus or fuis- 

ramus semQs 

hortati eratis or fueratis hortati essetis or fuissetis 

hortati erant or fuerant.* hortati essent or fuissent. 

So conjugate verltus, secutus, blandltiis eram or fueram, I had feared, 

followed, flattered ; Subj. veritus, secutus, blandltus essem or fuissem, 

that I might have feared, followed, flattered. To these add arbitratus, 

comitcdus, moratus, locutus, oblitus, profectus, larg'dus, experlus eram or 

fueram, I had thought, escorted, delayed, spoken, forgotten, departed, 

squandered, experienced; and Subj. essem or fuissem, that I 

might have thought, &c. 

Had you escorted any one ? Comitatiisne eras aliquem ? 

I had escorted no one. 6go neminem comitatus eram. 

Had they not lavished their Pecunias siias nonne largiti erant ? 
money ? 

It is, as you say. fta est, ut dicis. 

Had he flattered you ? Tibine blanditus e'rat ? 

He had certainly not. Non hercle vero. 

Had we left when you arrived ? An te adveniente profecti eramus ? 

It is clearly so. ita plane. 

Would you have remained at Ecquid te ddmi tenuisses, si pro- 
home if he had left ? t fectus esset file ? 

I should certainly have done so. tta em'mvero. 

After having read the book (= ( Quum librum perlegissem. 
When 1 had read the book, -1 Postquam (ut) librum perle'gi. 
The book having been read). ( Libro perlecto. 

, .1 i i ( Quum panem secuisset. 

After haying cut the bread, ) pdst £ m (libi nt) anem sdcuit< 

(when he had cut, &c). | pane in frusta dissecto. 

,„,'*. , , ( Cum manducavissemus. 

After having eaten (when we ) pdst (l ibi, ut, simul ac) man- 

had eaten). } ducavimus. 

. . it,. f Quum te ciiltro vulneravisses. 

After (when) you had cut your- Post m (ubi ut) t g Cliltr0 vmne . 
self (after having cut your-j ravl ' s ti. 
self )- • [ (Tu) ciiltro vulneratus. 

r Quum vdbis vestem induissetis. 
After dressing yourselves (when) Postquam (ubi, ut) vdbis vestem 
you had dressed yourselves), j induistis. 

l^(Vos) veste indiiti. 

* And when the subject is feminine: amcita — amdtae ; when neuter; ama- 
tum — ftmnfff. 2 T) 



466 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 74. 

After -withdrawing from the fire ( Quum a fdco discessisset. 

(when he had withdrawn, &c.). { Pdstquam (ubi, tit) a fdco discessit. 

f Quum tibi barbain totondisses. 

After (when) thou hadst shaved. J P °^ am (ubi ' Ut) ***** t0t0 "- 

[_ Barba tua tonsa. 

f Quum corpus calefecisset (refovis- 

After (when) he had warmed ^J p ^ uam (ubi) cd calefMt 

hunselL | (refovit). 

^Cdrpore ejus calefacto (refdto). 

,-rr, , . , , ,, ( Quum acta piiblica leijissem (actis 

When I had read the newspaper, ) ^ , U1 . .,/.... f, , v , 

TTt i Vf 1 ) pubhcis lectis), jentacuhmi sum- 

( psi. 
. , , c ( Simul ac mihi vestem ihdui (= 

As soon as I had dressed myself, 3 ^ Qr v ^m indutus), in 

I cutout. ( publicum prodivi. ; 

When he had read the letter, he Litteris recitatis (lectis), dixit. 

said. 
When he had cut the bread, he Quum panem secmsset, carnem 

cut the meat. secuit. 

What did he do when he had Quid egit (fecit) ille, quum mandu- 

eaten ? cavisset ? 

He went to bed. tvit ciibitum. 

J Antequam (priusquam) profiscar ; 
Before I set out. \ or simply profecturus. 

F. Obs. Antequam and piusquam, when they relate to a 
future action or event, are commonly followed by the present 
subjunctive. 

Before I depart, I wish to see my Priusquam proficiscar, liberos meos 

children once more. iterum mine videre ciipio. 

The storm threatens, before it Tempestas minatur, antequam siir- 
rises. gat. 

The newspaper. Acta diurna or publica, n. pi. 

The accident Casus, us, m. 

The death. Mors, tis, f. 

To go to sleep. Cubitum Ire. 

To rise, get up. (E lecto) surgo, ere, surrexi, sur- 

rectum. 
TMorior, Iri, mortuus sum. 
To die. < Diem suum (or supremum) obire 

[ (or simply obire). 

To be afflicted or grieved ( Dolgo ' gre ' ™> itum (^UQUA re 

at (anything). h 1 ^^7°^"^ i i- • 

v J ° y ( Ahquid est mihi dolori. 

Are you afflicted at the death of Dolesne amici ndstri mdrte ? 

our friend ? fTk /, , .r. ,, 

I am very much afflicted at it. { ^oleo vero yehementer. 

J I Est mi hi prorsus permagno dolori. 



LESSON 74.] 



PHRASES AND EXERCISES. 



467 



At what is your father afflicted ? 

He is afflicted because he has 
lost his dearest friend. 

To complain of some one or 
something. 

To wonder, to be astonished 
or surprised at. 

AVhom do you complain of? 
I complain of my friend. 

Of what does your brother com- 
plain ? 

He complains of your not sending 
the book. 

They complained of their brother. 

Let them not complain of having 
been deserted. 

He complained of the injustice of 
his adversaries. 

We have no right to complain of 
everything that afflicts us. 

At what are you surprised ? 

I am surprised that you have ar- 
rived. 

I wonder what may have been 
the cause. 

I am surprised that you should 
have despised this. 

We wondered why you should 
prefer the Stoics to us. 

I was surprised that ' you should 
have written with your own 
hand. 

Do you wonder at what I have 
done ? 

I do wonder at it. 

Your fortune (lot) is to be pitied. 



To be glad. 
To be sorry. 



Quam ob rem vir dptimus, prfter 

tiius, in dolore est V 
Doldre affectus est, quod hdminem 

sui amicissimum perdidit. 
Queror, i, questus sum. 
Conqueri (aliquem, de aliquo, 

REM, DE RE, QUOD, &C.) 

Miror, an, dtus sum. 

Demirari (aliquem, rem, Acc. 

cum Inf. or quod).* 
Quern (de quo) quereris ? 
!Ego amicum meum (de ainico meo) 

queror). 
Quid (qua de re) queritur frater 

tiius ? 
Queritur super hoc, quod non 

mittas h'brum. 
Fratrem suum conquerebantur. 
Ne querantur, se relfctos esse. 

De injuriis adversariorum questus 

est. 
Non omnia, quae dolemus, eodem 

jure queri pdssihnus. 
Quid miraris ? 
Miror te advenisse (quod adve- 

nisti). 
Miror, quid causae fiierit. 

Miror, te haec sprevisse. 

Admirati siimus, quid esset, cur 
nobis Stdicos anteferres. 

Admiratus (miratus) sum, quod 
tiia manu scripsisses. 

Demirarisne factum meum ? 

Prdrsus demiror. 
Fortuna tua querenda est. 
' Gaudeo, ere, gavlsus sum. 
Laetor, ari, dtus sum. 
(re, de re, in re, Acc. cum 

Inf. or quod). 
Dolere (re, Acc. cum Inf. or quod). 
Dolet, piget, poenitet, miseret (me 

ALICUJUS REI, HOMINIS).f 



* Compare Lesson LIV. H. 

t On the construction of these verbs, see pages 289 and 298. 



4G8 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 74. 



Gaiideo hoc. Hoc est mihi juciin- 
dum. Optimo est. 
( Molestum est. Male dicis. 
I Ddleo, quod ita est. 

Kline te conspicio libens. 

Nihil vidi quidquam laetius. 

Ddleo tiium casum. 

Miseret me tiii. 

Pfgetne te hiijus injiiriae '? 

Piget me vero. 

Dolebasne, cum amicum tiium mdr- 
tuum conspiceres ? 

Dolebam ex intimis sensibus. 
f Patris tiii valetiidinem cogndscere 
J gaiideo. 

I Gaiideo, me de valetudine patris 
(_ tiii certidrem fieri. 

C Comperio, ire, peri, pertum. 
To hear (learn, understand). 4 Cognoscere (aliquid). 

( Certiorem fieri (de aliqua re). 
„ < EnuncXo, are, avi, dtum. 

To pronounce. j Effero,ferre, extuli, datum. 

Potestne piier verba haec enunci- 

are (efferre) ? 
Kondum potest. 
Eectene litteras enunciavit ? 



I am glad of it. 

I am sorry for it. 

I am glad to see you. 

I never was more rejoiced to see 

any one. 
I am sorry for your misfortune. 
I am sorry for you. 
Are you sorry for this injustice ? 
I am sorry for it. 
Were you grieved at the death 

of your friend ? 
I was grieved in my inmost soul. 

I am glad to hear that your fa- 
ther is well. 



Can the boy pronounce these 
words ? 

He cannot do it yet. 

Did he pronounce the letters cor- 
rectly ? 

No, he pronounced them very 
badly. 

Could the Austrian pronounce 
my name ? 

He could not. 

There are several words which 
are pronounced alike in the 
same cases. 

Dear. 

Grateful, acceptable. 

Sad, sorrowful. 

Disagreeable. 

The prince. 

The count. 

The baron. 

The Saxon. 

The Prussian. 

The Austrian. 

The Christian. 

The Jew. 



immo perperam enunciavit. 

Potuitne Austriacus nomen meum 

efferre ? 
Non pdtuit. 
Plura sunt verba, quae similiter 

iisdem casibus efferiintur. 

Carus, a, um. 

Gratus, acceptus, jucundus, a, um. 

Tristis, is, e ; moestus, a, um. 

Injucundus, ingratus, a, um. 

Princeps, cipis, m. 

Cdmes, itis, m. 

Baro, dnis, m. 

Saxo, dnis, m. 

Borussus (Prussus), i, m. 

Austriacus, i, m. 

Christianus, i, m. 

Judaeus, i, m. 



LESSON 75.] REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS. 469 

The negro, Moor. Homo niger, gen. nigri, m. ; Aethi- 

OpS, 6pis, 711. 

The Indian. Indus, i, m. 

The Aborigines. Autochthones, um, pi. m. 

Exercise 141. 
What did you do when you had finished your letter ? — I went to 
my brother, who took me to the theatre, where I found one of my 
friends whom I had not seen for many years. — What did you do 
when you had breakfasted this morning ? — When I had read the 
letter of the Polish count, I went out to see the theatre of the prince, 
which I had not seen before. — What did your father do after getting 
up this morning ? — He breakfasted and went out. — What did your 
friend do after he had read the paper. — He went to the baron. — Did 
he cut the meat after he had cut the bread V — He cut the bread af- 
ter he had cut the meat. — When do you set out ? — I set out to- 
morrow ; but before I leave, I wish to see my friends once more. — 
What did your children do when they had breakfasted V — They went 
out with their dear preceptor. — Where did your uncle go after he 
had dined ? — He went nowhere ; he stayed at home and wrote his 
letters. — What are you accustomed to do when you have supped ? 
— I usually go to bed. — At what o'clock did you rise this morning ? 

— I rose at five o'clock. — What did your cousin do, when he (had) 
heard of the death of his friend? — He was much (valde) afflicted, 
and went to bed without saying a word (non verbum faciens). — Did 
you read before you breakfasted ? — I read when I had breakfasted. 

— Did you go to bed when you had eatei^supper ? — When I had 
eaten supper, I wrote my letters, and then went to bed. — Are you 
afflicted at the death of your relation ? — I am much afflicted at it. — 
When did your friend die ? — He died last month. — Of what do you 
complain? — I complain of your boy. — Why do you complain of 
him ? — Because he has killed the pretty dog, which I had received 
from one of my friends. — Of what has your uncle complained ? — 
He has complained of what you have done. — Has he complained of 
the letter which I wrote to him ? — He has complained of it. 



Lesson LXXV. — pensum septuagesimum 

QUINTUM. 

OF THE REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS. 

A. When, in one and the same sentence, a subject of the 
third person becomes itself the object of the verb, or otherwise 
a member of the predicate, its person (whether singular or plu- 
ral) is expressed by the personal reflexives sui, sibi, se, and its 
property by the possessive reflexive suns, a, um. 
40 



470 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 75. 

Ipse se quisque dfligit, quod per 'Every one cherishes himself, bc- 
se sibi quisque* carus est. cause every one is naturally dear 

to himself. 
Tliemistoclcs domicilium Magne- Themistocles fixed his abode at 

siae sibi constituit. Magnesia. 

Justitia propter sese colenda est. Justice should be cultivated on its 

own account. 
Lento gnidu ad vindictam sui Divine indignation advances slowly 
divina procedit ira. (with slow step) to its own de- 

fence. 
Etiam ferae sibi injecto terrore Wild beasts even shrink with hor- 
mdrtis horrescunt. ror when subjected to the fear 

of death. 
Suum quisque ingenium ndscat. Every one should make himself 

acquainted with his own abilities. 
Verres solus cum sua cohdrte re- Verres alone is left with his cohort. 

h'nquitur. 
Bellum est, sua vitia nosse.f It is proper to know one's own faults. 

Bestiis homines liti ad utilitatem Men may use animals for their 
suam pdssunt sine injuria. own convenience, without any 

injustice. 

Remark. — The reflexives can thus be put only when the subject 
remains the same. If another sentence with a new subject, or a new 
subject representing one, is added, then the demonstrative is takes the 
place of sid, &c, and the genitives ejus, eorum, that of suits. E. g. 
Tiberius Gracchus ejusque frater occisi sunt,% Tiberius Gracchus and 
his brother were killed. Hannibal quamdiu in Italia fuit, nemo ei in 
acie restitit, nemo adversus eum in campo castra posuit, As long as 
Hannibal was in Italy, no one opposed him on the battle-ground, no 
one pitched a tent against him in the field. Athenienses urban suam 
aede Minervae omaverunt, eorumque magnificentiam mirata est posterX- 
tas, The Athenians adorned their city with the temple of Minerva, 
and posterity has admired their magnificence. 

B. The reflexives sui, sibi, se, and situs, a, um, belong to an 
oblique case of the same sentence, when they determine the 
subject-nominative itself, or when from a difference of person 
or number, or from the sense of the predicate, they cannot be 
referred to the nominative. 

Hannibcilem sui cives e civitate Hannibal was banished by his own 

ejecerunt. countrymen. 

Cae'scirem sua natura mitiorem His natural disposition makes Cae- 

facit. sar more humane. 

* When quisque is thus connected with the reflexive, the latter commonly 

precedes; as, se quisque, sibi quisque, suum cuique, &c. 

t I. e. allquem nosse, " that one should know his own faults." 

j This may be resolved into Tiberius Gracchus occlsas est, ejusque frater 

occisus est. So also, Antigonus et hujus^fo'ws Demetrius, &c. 



LESSON 75.] 



REFLEXIVE TRONOUNS, 



471 



Siii claque mores fingunt fortu- 

nam. 
Recte dici potest seientiam suam 

cujusque art is esse. 
Conserva tuts suos. 

Jpibus fructum restituo suum. 

Volatcrrdnos in sua possessione 

retinebam. 
Ratio et oratio conciliat inter se 

homines. 
Justitia suum culque tribuit. 
Co'nsules ho'stem in sua sede in 

Algklo inveniunt. 
Miilta sunt civibus inter se com- 

nninia. 
Quid est aliud, dliis sua eripere, 

alns dare aliena ? 



Every man's lot in life is shaped by 

his own character. 
Every art may correctly be said to 

have a science of its own. 
Preserve the lives and happiness of 

those dear to your friends. 
I return (restore) their produce to 

the bees. 
I kept the Volaterrani in the pos- 
session of their own. 
Reason and language conciliate 

men among themselves. 
Justice gives (to) every one his own. 
I he consuls found the enemy in 

his own residence at Algidum. 
Citizens have many things in com- 
mon with each other. 
What else is giving to others what 
is not one's own, but robbing 
p others of their own ? 

Kemark. — When a new sentence is added, or a word representing 

Z:ito!JX7 nSt T Ve ?■ beC °? ieS necessa ^ as-in A. Rem Eg! 
A "xand,! 1 m dlSC r{fnue ejus* I omit Isocrates and his disciple! 
Alexander momens anulum suum dederat Perdiccae ■ ex quo omm>« 
conjecerant, eum return ei commendasse, quoad Mer! ^us iTsuanZ 
tdampervemssent, The dying Alexander had given his ring to Perd iccas 

taEnSrf S7 ° • ° Y^t^* that he had commended the %7 
eminent of his empire to his charge, until his children might become 

o * 

O- In dependent clauses, in which the languase, thoughts 
sentiments, or purpose of the leading subject are expressed^ 

W ^I eS 7'- OT t'- Se \ and mus refer t0 that abject, and nit to 
the one contained in the dependent clause. 

rlthJzTJ™ !n ' wUlced b 7. t^ Ace. cum Inf., by interrogates, ' 
relatives, and conjunctions, especially by ut, ne, quo, qui, si, &c? E. «. 

Xn^^r qUl 5e "-, Dem °" N ooneisanorator W I,oisunwill- 

stnems similem esse noht. 

Homerum Colopho'nii civem esse 
dicunt suum, Smyrnaei ve'ro 
suum esse confirmant. 

Me'us me oravit filius, ut tiiam 

sororem po'scerem uxorem sibi. 
Paetus dmnes h'bros, quos frater 

suus reliquisset, mihi donavit. 



mg to be like Demosthenes. 
The inhabitants of Colophon say, 

that Homer is their citizen, but 

those of Smyrna prove him to be 

theirs. 
My son has charged me to demand 

your sister in marriage for him. 
Paetus has made me a present of 

all the books which his brother 

had left him. 



* This may be resolved into Onutto Isocratem, discipulosque ejus omitu 



472 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LRSSOX 75. 

Quid est am are, nisi velle bonis What is love, but a desire that an- 
aliquem affici quam maximis, other might enjoy the highest 
etkhnsi ad se nihil ex his re- possible good, even though no 
cleat ? advantage to one's self should re- 

sult from it ? 

D. If in this construction the person of the speaker comes 
in collision with another subject nominative, the sense of the 
predicate must determine to which of the two the reflexive 
refers. E. g. 

Agrippa Atticum orabat, ut se Agrippa besought Atticus to save 
sibi suisque* reservaret. himself for himself and his 

friends. 
Scythae petebant ab Alexandra, The Scythians besought Alexander 
ut regis sui filiam matrimdnio to unite himself in marriage to 
sibi-\ jiingeret. the daughter of their king. 

Quod sibi Caesar denuntiaret, se With respect to Cassar's message 
Aeduorum injurias non ne- to him, that he (i. e. Caesar) 
glecturum; neminem secum would not overlook the injuries 
sine sua % pernicie contendisse. of the Aedui,(Ariovistus replied.) 

that no one had ever contended 
with him, except for his own 
destruction. 

Remarks. 

1. The reflexive is always put when a given person is to be con- 
trasted with another, or its property with that of another (i. e. himself, 
Ms own, as opposed to alius, alitnus). It is thus often put, even where 
w r e might expect the weaker demonstrative is, ejus, — 

a.) When the oblique case, to which it relates, can easily be inferred 
from what has gone before. E. g. Ei sunt ndti fid geimni duo, ita 
forma simili pueri, uti mater sua {for eorum) non inter nosse posset, se. 
<?o.<?, He had two twin boys, so like each other, that their own mother 
could not distinguish them. Placetne a Carthaginiensibus captivos 
nostros, redditis suis (sc. Us), recuperari ? Is it your pleasure to recover 
our captives from the Carthaginians, after returning (to them) their 
own ? 

b.) When the construction admits of it, and the connection requires 
a more emphatic indication of the subject. E. g. Cimon incidit in 
candem invidiam, quam pater suits (== ejus), Cimon incurred the same 
odium which his father had incurred. Non a te emit rex, sed p>rius 
quam tu suum sibi venderes, ipse possedit, The king has not purchased 
of you, but has himself possessed it, before you could sell his own to 
him. 

* In this sentence se, sibi, and suis all refer to the new subject Atticus. 
t Here sui belongs to Scythae, and sibi to Ahxandro. 

% Sibi and secum refer to the speaker Ariovistus (expressed hi a preceding 
sentence), se to Caesar, and sua to neminem. 






LESSOX 75.] IS, EJUS, IPSE, irsius. 473 

2. Is and ejus, on the other hand, are employed where no such 
opposition of persons or property is intended, but where the subject 
is merely pointed out (i. e. the English him, his). They are thus put, — 

a.) With reference to an oblique case of the same sentence, some- 
times merely to prevent ambiguity. E. g. Pisonem nostrum merito 
ejus amo plurimum, I love Piso clearly, as he deserves. Ackaei Mace- 
donum regem suspiedtum habebant pro ejus crudelitate, The Achaeans 
suspected the king of the Macedonians on account of his cruelty. 
Oratio principis per quaestorem ejus audita est, The speech of the 
prince was heard by his quaestor. 

b.) In dependent clauses, when a noun different from the subject is 
referred to; frequently also instead of the more emphatic se. E. g. 
Judaei jussi a Caesdre, effigiem ejus in templo locctre, arma poiius sum- 
sere, When the Jews were commanded by Caasar to place his image 
in their temple, they preferred to resort to arms. A Curidne mihi 
nuntidtum est, eum ad me venire,* A message was sent me by Curio, 
that he was coming to me. 

3. Instead of is and ejus the intensive ipse and ipslus are often used, 
especially when it becomes necessary to distinguish subjects different 
from those represented by is or sui. E. g. Aedui contendunt, ut ipsis 
summa imperii transddtur, The iEdui beg that the chief command 
might be transferred to themselves. Parvi de eo, quod ipsis supererat, 
aliis gratificari volunt, Children wish to gratify others with what they 
themselves do not want. Caesar milites suos incusavit : cur de sua 
virtute, aut de ipslus diligentid desperdrent, Cresar blamed his soldiers 
(by asking them), why they despaired of their own valor or his per- 
sonal assiduity. 

Far distant I Lon ff us ^ longinquus, a, urn (adj.). 

\Longe, procul (adv.). 

A long way or journey. Longa via ; longum iter. 

From afar. Procul, e longinquo, eminus (adv.). 

How far ? Quam longe V Quousque ? 

To be far or distant from Longe or procul ab aliquo loco 

anyplace. abesse. 

To be far apart. Multum distare. 

To be equally far apart. Paribus intervallis distare. 

To be equally far. Tantundem viae esse. 

To be farther. Longius esse or abesse. 

How far is it from here to the Quam longe est hinc in urbem ? 

city ? 

It is very far. Perldnge est. 

It is not far. Non est longe (ldngule). 

It is ten miles. Longe est milia passuum decern. 

Is it far from here to Berlin ? !Estne longe hinc Berolinum ? 

It is not far. Hand longe est. 

How many miles is it ? Qudt milia passuum sunt ? 

* Instead of Curio mihi nuntiavit, se ad me venire. 
40* 



474 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



['• 



ESSON 75. 



It is twenty miles. 

How many miles is it from Bos- 
ton to New York ? 

It is about two hundred and fifty 
miles. 

It is nearly a hundred miles from 
Berlin to Vienna. 

How far did the boy go ? 

He went three steps. 

He went about far and wide. 

He said, that he had been two 
hundred miles from the city. 

Did he advance too far ? 

Not as far as you. 
How far has your brother ad- 
vanced in his studies ? 
He has not advanced very far. 
The distance. 
The mile. 

The step, pace. 



To prefer, like better. 



Do you like to write better than 

to speak ? 
I like to speak better than to 

write. 

Does he like to play better than 
to study ? 

He likes to do both. 

Do you like bread better than 

cheese ? 
I like both, neither equally well. 

Do you like tea as well as cof- 
fee ? 
I like coffee better. 
He likes beer better than wine. 



I prefer beef to veal. 



Vigfnti circiter milia passuum sunt. 
Qudt milia passuum a Bostdnia 

abest Novum Eboraeum ? 
Abest (distat) milia passuum circi- 
ter ducenta et quinquagi'nta. 
Yindobona a Berolino circiter mi- 
lia passuum centum abest. 
Quam longe ivit piier ? 
Ivit ldnge tres passus. 
Perambulavit ldnge lateque. 
Dixit, se ab lirbe abfui'sse milia 

passuum ducenta. 
Estne progressus nfmis ldnge (or 

ldngius) ? 
Ndn tarn ldnge, quam til. 
Quoiisque fratcr tuns in doctri'na 

processit ? 
Haud perldnge proce'ssit. 
Distantia, ae,/.; intervallum, i, n. 
Mille passuum (pi. milia passuum), 

miliaiium, i, n. 
Passus, us, m. 

' ' Mcdo, malle, malm (cum Inf.). 
Anteponere, anteferrc, praeferre 

(rem rei). 
Aliquid libentius (potius) facerc, 

quam. 
Mavisne scribere qnam loqui ? 
Scribisne libentius quam ldqueris? 
Malo (pdtius) loqui quam scribere. 
I Ego libentius ldquor quam scribo. 
fLuditne libentius quam dperam dat 
J stiidiis ? 

] Maviiltne liidere (pdtius) quiim 
(^ dperam dare stiidiis ? 
Utriimque libenti animo facere 

sdlet. 
Mavisne edere pancm quam ca- 

seum ? 
£go utriimque, neiitrum pdritcr 

amo. 
Bibisne theam aeque libenter quam 

coffeam V 
!M;ilo coffeam. 

Cervisiam libentius quam vinum 
r bibit. 
Ego biibulam vituh'nae antefero, 

antepdno, &c. 
Ego biibulam vitulina potiorem 
(_ habeo. 



LESSON 75.] PHRASES AND EXERCISES. 



475 



I prefer reading to writing. 

The calf. 

Quick, fast. 

Sloiu, slowly. 
Do you learn as fast as I ? 
I learn faster than you. 
He eats faster, slower than I. 
I do not understand you, because 
you speak too fast. 

He arrived sooner than was ex- 
pected. 

Can you answer slowly ? 

I can. 

Does he sail as slowly as I ? 

He sails slower. 

I trust that you will be strong 
soon. 

Advance slowly ! 



Cheap. 



Dear. 

Does the merchant sell as dear 

as IV 
He does not sell as dear. 
He sells dearer than you. 
Did you buy the horse cheap ? 
I have bought it quite cheap. 
He has bought the book at the 

lowest possible price. 
I have bought my hat cheaper 

than you yours. 
This man sells everything so 

dear, that no one can buy any- 
thing of him. 
I do not know what you wish to 

say. 
You speak so fast, that I cannot 

understand you. 
I assure you that he wishes to 

speak with you. 



Praedpto legere pdtius quam 

scribere. 
Vitulus, i, m. ; vitula, ae, f. 
Celeriter, cXto, feslinanter (adv.). 
Tarde, lente (adv.). 
Discisne tarn celeriter, quam ego ? 
Ego citius (facilius) disco, quam tii. 
Manducat citius, lentius, quam ego. 
Verba tiia non intelligo, propterea, 

quod nimis celeriter (celerius) 

ldqueris. 
Advenit celerius opinione. 

Potesne respondere lente ? 

Possum. 

Navigatne tarn tarde quam ego ? 

Tardius navigat. 

Confido, cito te firmum fore. 

Procede lente ! 
Festina lente ! 
' Adj. VUis, parvi pretii ; non ma- 

gno parabllis. 
Adv. Parvo pretto, acre pauco ; 

parvo sumptu. 
Adj. Cdi'us, a, um; marjni prtlii. 
Adv. Care, macjno (pretio). 
Venditne mercator tarn care, quam 

ego? 
Minus care vendit. 
Carius vendit quam tii. 
Emistine cquumv ili (parvo pretio)? 
Ego eum acre pauco emi. 
Libruin quam niinimo pretio emit. 

Pileum meura ego minoris emi, 

quam tiium tii. 
Hie vir omnia tam care venderc 

sdlet, ut nemo ab do quidquam 

emere j)6z$it.* 
Haud scio (nescio), quid tibi velis. 

Tam celeriter ldqueris, ut intelligerc 

non po'ssim. 
Affirmo tibi, eum tecum colloquendi 

cupidum esse. 



* Ut preceded by tam, talis, tantus, &c, requires the subjunctive. (Cf. 
Lesson LXXXVIII. A. I.) 



476 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 75. 

Be so good as to speak a little Sis tarn benignus, ut aliquanto len- 

slower. tius loquaris. 

Will you be kind enough to give Yisne esse tarn benignus, ut mihi 

rne the book ? librum des ? 

Exercise 142. 

How far is it from Paris to London ? — It is nearly a hundred 
miles from Paris to London. — Is it far from here to Hamburg ? — It 
is far. — Is it far from here to Vienna ? — It is almost a hundred and 
forty miles from here to Vienna. — Is it farther from Berlin to Dres- 
den than from Leipzic to Berlin ? — It is farther from Berlin to Dres- 
den than from Leipzic to Berlin. — How far is it from Paris to 
Berlin '? — It is almost a hundred and thirty miles from here to Ber- 
lin. — Do you intend to go to Berlin soon ? — I do intend to go 
thither soon. — Why do you wish to go this time V — In order to buy 
good books and a good horse there ; and to see my good friends. — 
Is it long since you were there ? — It is nearly two years since I was 
there. — Do you not go to Vienna this year ? — I do not go thither, 
for it is too far from here to Vienna. — Is it long since you saw your 
Hamburg friend ? — I saw him but a fortnight ago. — Do your schol- 
ars like to learn by heart ? — They do not like to learn by heart ; 
they like reading and writing better than learning by heart. — Do 
you like beer better than cider ? — I like cider better than beer. — 
Does your brother like to play ? — He likes to study better than to 
play. — Do you like meat better than bread ? — I like the latter bet- 
ter than the former. — Do you like to drink better than to eat ? — I 
like to eat better than to drink ; but my uncle likes to drink better 
than to eat. — Does your brother-in-law like meat better than fish ? 

— He likes fish better than meat. — Do you like to write better than 
to speak ? — I like to do both. — Do you like fowl better than fish ? 

— Do you like good honey better than sugar ? — I like neither. 

Exercise 143. 

Does your father like coffee better than tea ? — He likes neither. 

— What do you drink in the morning ? — I drink a glass of water 
with a little sugar ; my father drinks good coffee, my younger brother 
good tea, and my brother-in-law a glass of good wine. — Can you un- 
derstand me ? — Ko, sir, for you speak too fast. — Will you be kind 
enough not to speak so fast V — I will not speak so fast if you will 
listen to me. — Can you understand what my brother tells you ? — 
He speaks so fast that I cannot understand him. — Can your pupils 
understand you ? — They understand me when I speak slowly ; for in 
order to be understood one must speak slowly. — Why do you not 
buy anything of that merchant ? — I had a mind to buy several dozen 
of handkerchiefs, some cravats, and a white hat of him ; but he sells 
so dear, that I cannot buy anything of him. — Will you take me to 
another ? — I will take you to the son of the one whom you bought of 
last year. — Does he sell as dear as this (one) ? — He sells cheaper. 

— Do you like going to the theatre better than going to the concert ? 






LESSON 76.] REFLEXIVE VERBS. 477 

— I do like going to the concert as well as going to the theatre : but 
I do not like going to the public walk, for there are too many people 
there. — Do your children like learning Italian better than Spanish '? 

— They do not like to learn either ; they only like to learn German. 

— Do they like to speak better than to write V — They like to do 
neither. — Do you like mutton ? — I like beef better than mutton. — 
Do your children like cake better than bread ? — They like both. — 
Has he read all the books which he bought ? — He bought so many 
of them, that he cannot read them all. — Do you wish to write some 
letters V — I have written so many of them, that I cannot write any 
more. 



Lesson LXXVI. — pensum septuagesimum 

SEXTUM. 
REFLEXIVE VEKBS. 

A. Reflexive verbs are those of which the action 
terminates in the agent himself. 

Verbs of a reflexive sense in Latin are, — 

1. Transitive and neuter verbs in connection with the accusative or 
dative of the reflexive pronouns me, te, se, nos, vos, se, mihi, tibi, sibi, 
nobis, vobis, sibi. E. g. Se amare, to love one's self; sibi nocere, to 
hurt one's self; sese fugcie mandare, to betake one's self to flight, &c. 

2. A number of passive and deponent verbs, which exhibit more 
or less of a reflexive sense. E. g. crucior, I am tormented, I torment 
myself; proficiscor, I get myself under way ; laetor, I rejoice ; vchor, I 
ride, &c. 

3. The impersonal verbs me taedet, piget, pudet, poenltet, miserei, It 
moves me to disgust, chagrin, shame, regret, pity, &c. 

B. The following passive and deponent verbs may be re- 
garded as reflexive : — 

Crucior, I torment myself {I am tormented). 

Delector, I am delighted. 

Fallor, I deceive myself (I am deceived). 

Feror, I am impelled. 

Gravor, I hesitate. 

Inclinor, I am inclined. 

Lavor, 7 wash myself, 1 bathe. 

Laetor, I rejoice. 

Moveor, ) T 7 -i ? 

^ ' « y I am moved, excited. 

Lommovcor, \ 

Mutor, I change, am changed. 

Pascor, I support myself by, I feed upon. 



478 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 76. 



Proficiscor, I get myself under icay. 
Yehor, I am conveyed, I ride. 
Yescor, I live upon, eat. 

C Alienam formam capere. 
To disguise one's self. ■< Larvam sibi aptdre. 

I Mentiri. 

m ± L » ii? /i. (Proponere sibi (aliquid). 

To represent to one s self (to \ Co ^ tRthnQ ^[^ere. 
imagine, suppose). } A ^ mQ concip ~ re ^qhld. 

Laetor, ari, atus sura. 
Gaudeo, ere, gavlsus sum. 

(re, de re, in re, quod). 
Pudet (ere, puduit) me, te, eum. 

(alicujus rei). 
Blandiri alicui ; adulari aliquem. 
Sibi ipsi blandiri. 

Spem habere or in spe esse (cum 
Ace. et Inf.). 

f Timeo, ere, ui, . 

j Metuo, ere, lii, . 

] Vereor, eri, veritus sum. 
[ (altquem, rem, ke, ut, &c.) 
To look back or behind Kespicio, ere, spexi, spectum (ad 
one's self. aliquem, rem). 






To rejoice. 
To be ashamed. 
To flatter any one. 
To flatter one's self. 

To fear, to feel afraid of. 



Dost thou see thyself? 

I do not see myself. 

Have you cut yourselves ? 

We have cut ourselves. 

Do we flatter ourselves ? 

We do not. 

Does he not disguise himself? 

He does do it. 

Of whom are you afraid ? 

I am not afraid of any one. 

I am not afraid of him. 

We must fear (reverence) the 

deity. 
I am afraid of hurting myself. 
He is afraid of cutting his finger. 
We were afraid that you would 

not come. 
You were afraid that I would not 

write. 
We are not afraid. 



Yidesne te ? 

Ego me non video. 

Yulneravistisne vos ciiltro ? 

Yero, nos vulneravimus. 

Niimquid nobis ipsi blandimur ? 

Non blandimur. 

Ndnne sibi larvam aptat ? 

Factum est. 

Que'ui metuis (times) ? 

Xeminem metuo. 

Ego eum non timeo. 

Deuni nos vereamur opdrtct. 

Timeo, ne nu'hi noceam. 
Metuit, ne sibi digitum vulneret. 
Metiiinius, ne non (or ut) * venires. 

Timebas, ut scriberem. 

Sine timore siimus. 



* After verbs of fearing;, '« that " or " lest " is expressed by ne, and " that 
not" bv ne non or ut. The verb must be in the subjunctive. (See Lesson 
LXXX'YIH. A. III.) 



LESSON 76.] 



PHRASES AND EXERCISES. 



479 



To pass away the time (in 

any tJdng). 
To enjoy something, to amuse 

o?ie > s self with anything. 

The pastime, diversion. 



In what do you amuse yourself? 

I amuse myself in reading, in 
conversation. 

He diverts him with playing, 
with writing. 

They amused themselves in ban- 
queting and feasting. 

Each, each one; every, every 
one. 

Each one of you. 
Each of you two. 

Every one spends his time as he 

pleases. 
Every one amuses himself in the 

best way he can. 

Everybody speaks of it. 

Every one knows. 
Everybody thinks. 

Every man is liable to err. 

I have nothing to amuse myself 
with. 

It is for amusement, for pas- 
time. 

The taste. 



A man of taste, of none . 
To have taste. 

To have no taste. 

To mistake, to be mistaken. 

To soil, stain. 

To deceive, cheat. 

To cheat, defraud any one 
of anything. 



j" Tempus (ottwri) traducere, consu- 
l mere, or terere (aliqua re). 
Tempus or horas fallere (fefelli, 
Jhlsum) aliqua re. 

Lucius, i, m. ; oblectatio, onis, /. ; 
oblectamentum, i, n. 

Qua re tempus fallis ? 

Qua re taedium temporis minuis ? 

Hdras fallo legendo, sermdnibus. 

Tempus (dtium) fallit ludendo, scri- 

bendo. 
Otium conviviis commissationibus- 

que inter se terebant. 

Quisque, unusquisque ; omnes, nemo 
non. . 

Quisque or unusquisque vestrum. 
Quisque or uterque vestrum. 

Tempus suum quisque terit, ut 

sibi placeat. 
6tium suum quisque fallit quam 

optime potest. 
6mnes de re loquuntur. 
In ore omnium est. 
Nemo est, qui nesciat. 
Nemo est ; quin (= qui non) exi'sti- 

met. 
j Nemo non errat. 
\ HumSnum est errare. 
Non hdbeo, quo fiillam tempus. 

Est ad tempus fallendum. 
Est animi caiisa. 

Gustus (gustatus), us, m. ; se?isus, 
us, m. ; judicium, i, n. 

Homo elegans, inelegans. 

Esse intelligentem ; esse praedi- 

tum sapore. 
Esse inelegantem, non sapere. 
Erro, are, avi, atum. 
Fallor, i, falsus sum. 
Inquino, are, avi, atum. 
Maculo, are, avi, atum. 
Fallo, ere, fefelli, falsum. 
Decipio, ere, cepi, ceptum. 
Fraudare or defraudare aliquem 

aliqua re or rem. 



480 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 76. 



To believe. 



To believe anything or any 
one. 

To believe in dreams. 

To believe in ghosts. 

To believe one's eyes rather 

than one's ears. 
To believe in God. 
The God. 



The liar, the story-teller. 
Do you believe that man ? 

I do not believe him. 

Do yon believe what I am telling 
yon ? 

I do believe it. 

Am I mistaken ? 

You are not mistaken. 

Did he cheat you out of any- 
thing ? 

He has cheated me out of my pay. 

Do you believe that he has soiled 
your book ? 

I clo not believe it. 

Is he a man of taste ? 

He is not (a man of taste). 

Every man has his taste. 

My taste is (= I like) to study 
and to ride on horseback. 
To rejoice at anything. 

I rejoice at your happiness. 

At what does your uncle rejoice ? 

He is delighted and rejoiced at 

my recovery. 
I am greatly rejoiced at your 

diligence and industry. 
To go to bed. 

To get up, rise. 

The bed. 
Sunrise. 



Credo, ere, didi, d'itum. 

Arbitror, an, atus sum. 

Puto, are, avi, alum. 
( Alicui rei or alicui credere. 
■} Alicui or alicui rei fldem habere or 
I tribuere. 

Somniis credere or fidem tribuere. 

Credere de umbris. 

Oculis magis quam auribus credere. 

Deum esse credere ; Deum putare. 

Deus, i, m. : numen, inis, n. 
{ Mentior, iri, Itns sum. 
( Mendacium dicere. 

Mendax, acis, m. & f. 

Credi'sne (tribuisne fidem) l'lli hd- 
mini ? 

Non credo. Fidem non tribuo. 

Putasne veruni, quod tibi dico ? 

Puto. 

Egdne ftillor ? 
Kon falleris. 
Fraudavitne te aliqua re ? 

Vero, me honorario fraudavit. 
Credisne eura librum tiium inqui- 

navisse ? 
Minimi credo. 
Praeditiisne est sapore ? 
Non sapit. Homo elegans non est. 
( Siium cuique judicium est. 
^ De giistibus non disputandum est. 
Ego dperam litteris dare atque 

equitare delector. 
Gaudere, laetari aliqua re, de or in 

aliqua re. 
Gaiideo tiia felicitute. 
Qua re patruus tuus laetatur ? 
Gaudet vehementerque laetatur 

valetudlne mea confirmata. 
Magnae laetitiae mini est diligentia 

tiia et indiistria. 
Culntum ire: dure se somno : con- 

ferre se in ledum. 
(E lectd) surgo, ere, surrexi, sur- 

rectum. 
Lectus, lectulus, i, m. 
Ortus solis, sol oriens, prima lux. 



LESSON 76.] PHRASES AND EXERCISES. 



481 



Sunset. 

Early (in the morning). 

Late (at night). 

At midnight. 

At a quarter past eleven. 



Do you rise early ? 

I rise at sunrise. 

At what time do you go to bed ? 

I usually go to bed at midnight. 
He goes to bed at sunset. 

At what time did you go to bed 

last night ? 
I went to bed at ten. 
Did he rise earlier than you. 
No, he rose later. 

The hair (of the head). 

To cut one's hair. 

To pull out any one's hair. 
He is pulling out his hair. 
He has cut his hair. 

I have had my hair cut. 



Nothing but. 
He drinks nothim 



but water. 



He has nothing but enemies. 

I saw no one but him. 

To run away, flee. 

Are you afraid to remain ? 

I am not afraid. 

Is he afraid to write to you ? 

He is not afraid. 



Occasus solis, sol occidens. 

Bene mane, matutme, mature. 
Sero, tarde ; multa nocte. 

Media nocte. 

Ci'rciter quadrantem hdrae post 
undecimam. 
( Surgisne bene mane ? 
-} Solesne bene mane e lecto siir- 
( ; gere ? 

Ego sole oriente siirgere sdleo. 

E lecto siirgo cum ortu solis. 

Qua hdra te das sdmno (te in le- 
ctum confers) ? 

Ego media ndcte cubitum ire sdleo. 

Lectulum se cdnfert cum occasu 
solis. 

Quo tempore sdmno te dedisti heri 
vesperi ? 

In lectum me contiili hdra deciina. 

Surrexitne maturius quam tu ? 

framo vero tardius surrexit. 

P'dus, i, m. ; or pi. plli ; crlnes, pi. 
( Pilos recidere (cidi, cisum). 
\ Pilos tondere (totondi, tonsum). 

Alicui pilos evellere (velli, vulsum). 

Pilos sibi evellit. 

Pilos sibi recidit (totdndit). 
( Ego mihi pilos recidendos curavi. 
( Pili mihi tdnsi sunt, 
j" Nihil praeter (cum Ace). 
\ Non nisi. 

Nihil praeter aquam bibet (bibere 
sdlet) . 
( Neminem nisi sibi inimieum habet. 
\ Praeter inimicos habet neminem. 

Praeter ilium vidi neminem. 

Aufugio, ere, fugi. 

Profugere (aliquo). 

Timesne manere ? 

Non timeo. 

Timetne (metuitne) litteras diire 
ad te? 

Non timet. 



Exercise 144. 
Have you written long or short letters ? — I have written (both) 
long and short ones. — Have you many apples ? — I have so many 
of tliem that I do not knoAV which to eat. — Do you wish to give any- 
thing to these children ? — They have studied so badly, that I do not 
2E 41 



482 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 76. 

wish to give them anything. — What dost thou rejoice at ? — I rejoice 
at the good fortune that has happened to you. — What do your chil- 
dren rejoice at ? — They rejoice at seeing you. — Do you rejoice at 
the happiness of my father ? — I do rejoice at it. — Do you flatter my 
brother V — I do not flatter him. — Does this master flatter his pupils ? 

— He does not flatter them. — Is he pleased with them ? — He is 
much pleased (contentus) with them when they learn well ; but he is 
not pleased with them when they do not learn well. — Do you flatter 
me ? — I do not flatter you, for I love you. — Do you see yourself in 
that looking-glass ? — I do see myself in it. — Why do you not remain 
near the fire ? — Because I am afraid of burning myself. — Does this 
man make his fire ? — Do you fear those ugly men ? — I do not fear 
them, for they hurt nobody. — Why do those children run away ? — 
They run away, because they are afraid of you. — Do you run away 
from your enemies ? — I do not run away from them, for I do not fear 
them. — Can you write a Latin letter without an error ? — I can write 
one. — Does any one correct your letters ? — No one corrects them. 

— How many letters have you already written '? — I have already 
written a dozen. — Have you hurt yourself? — I have not hurt my- 
self. — Who has hurt himself? — My brother has hurt himself; for he 
has cut his finger. — Is he still ill ? — He is better. — I rejoice to 
hear that he is no longer ill ; for I love him, and I pitied him from 
my heart. — Why does your cousin pull out his hair ? — Because he 
cannot pay what he owes. — Have you cut your hair ? — I have not 
cut it myself, but I have had it cut. 

Exercise 145. 
In what do your children amuse themselves ? — They amuse them- 
selves in studying, writing, and playing. — In what do you amuse 
yourself? — I amuse myself in the best way I can, for I read good 
books, and I write to my friends. — Every man has his taste ; what is 
yours ? — I like to study, to read a good book, to go to the concert, 
and the public walk, and to ride on horseback. — Has that physician 
done any harm to your child ? — He has cut his finger, but he has 
not done him any harm. — Why do you listen to that man ? — I lis- 
ten to him, but I do not believe him ; for I know that he is a story- 
teller. — Why does your cousin not brush his hat ? — He does not 
brush it, because he is afraid of soiling his fingers. — What does my 
neighbor tell you ? — He tells me that you wish to buy his horse ; but 
I know that he is mistaken, for you have no money to buy it, — What 
do they say at the market ? — They say that the enemy is beaten. — 
Do you believe it ? — I do believe it, because every one says so. — 
Do you go to bed early ? — I go to bed late ; for I cannot sleep, if I 
go to bed early. — At what o'clock did you go to bed yesterday ? — 
Yesterday I went to bed at a quarter past eleven. — At what o'clock 
do your children go to bed ? — They go to bed at sunset. — Do they 
rise early ? — They rise at sunrise. — At what o'clock did you rise 
to-day ? — To-day I rose late ; for I went to bed late last evening. — 
Does your son rise late ? — He must rise early, for he never goes to 
bed late. — What does he do when he gets up ? — He studies and 
then breakfasts. 



LESSON 77.] GENDER OF SUBSTANTIVES. 483 



Lesson LXXVII. — pensum septuagesimum 

SEPTIMUM. 
OF THE GENDER OF SUBSTANTIVES. 

A. Gender originally depends upon the signification 
of words, and is in so far called natural gender or sex. 

1. In substantives denoting living beings, i. e. men or animals, the 
natural gender is either masculine or feminine, according to the sex. 
Inanimate objects do not properly admit of any distinction of sex, and 
are hence said to be of the neuter gender. 

2. The Latin language, however, attributes life to many inanimate 
objects^ and extends the distinction of sex to them, i. e. represents 
them likewise as masculine or feminine. E. g. hie mons, liaec arbor. 

3. When the gender of a substantive is not, already determined by 
its signification, it is indicated by its form (or termination). This is 
called the grammatical gender, and is either masculine, feminine, or 
neuter. E. g. hie liber, haec mensa, hoc umbraculum. 

NATURAL GENDER. 

B. The natural gender of substantives denoting living beings 
(i. e. men or animals) coincides with the sex of the individual 
designated. Hence, names and appellations of male beings are 
masculine, and those of females feminine. E. g. Caesar, Cleo- 
patra, vir, mutter, pater, mater. 

Remarks. 

1. Patrials and gentiles of the plural number are considered mascu- 
line ; as, Romdni, Carthaginienses, &c. So also lemures, ghosts, and 
manes, departed spirits. 

2. The names of women are feminine, even where the termination 
is neuter. E. g. mea Glgcerium, tua Phanium. 

3. The only exception to this law are certain secondary appella- 
tions of men, which retain their original grammatical gender as deter- 
mined by their form. Such are: Fem. copiae, military forces ; deli- 
ciae, favorite, darling ; operae, operatives ; vigiliae, excubiae, watch, 
sentinels. Neut. auxilia, auxiliary troops ; servitia, servants ; ?nanci- 
pium, a slave ; acroama, a jester.* 

C. The natural gender of living beings of the same species 
is indicated in three different ways : — 

I. There is a separate word for each gender. E. g. vir — 

* But optio, a lieutenant, is masculine, though derived from oplio, f., choice. 



484 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 77. 

midier, pater — mater, frdter — soror, patruus — amita, ma- 
ritus — uxor, taurus — vacca.. Instances of this kind are 
comparatively few. 

II. The noun is of the same root, but has a separate termi- 
nation for each gender. E. g. films — film, amicus — arnica, 
magister — magistra, servus — serva, praeceptor — praeceptrix, 
lupus — lupa. 

Remark. — Substantives thus admitting of two terminations are 
called mobilia, and are most commonly of the first and second declen- 
sions (Masc. er or us, Fem. a). Mobilia of the third declension form 
their feminines in a, trix, ina, issa, and is ; as, caupo — caupona, inn- 
keeper, hostess ; leno — lena, pander, procuress ; leo — leaena, lion, 
lioness ; tiblcen — tiblctna, flute-player (male and female) ; cantor — 
eantrix, singer ; rex — regina, king, queen ; g alius — galllna, cock, 
hen; Threx — Thre'issa (or Thressa), a Thracian (man and woman) ; 
nepos — neptis, grandson, granddaughter. 

III. One and the same noun is indifferently applied to both 
sexes, without any change of termination, and the gender is 
determined by the context (i. e. by the adjective in agreement 
with it, &c.) ; as, hie or haec civis, this citizen (male or female) ; 
hie or haec heres, this heir (man or woman). Nouns of this 
class are said to be of the common gender (or communia).* 
Such are 

1. The following names of persons : — 

Antistes, priest (or -ess). Incola, inhabitant. 

Artifex, artist. Index, informer. 

Auctor, author. Judex, judge. 

Augur, augur. Martyr, icitness. 

Civis, citizen. Miles, soldier. 

Comes, companion. Municeps, burgess. 

Conjux, spouse. Parens, parent. 

Custos, keeper. Praesul, chief priest. 

Dux, leader. Sacerdos, priest (or -ess). 

Exul, exile. Satelles, attendant. 

Haeres, heir. Testis, witness. 

Hospes, guest. Vates, prophet (or -ess). 

Hostis, enemy. Vindex, avenger. 

Among these are included adjectives of one termination used sub- 
stantively; as, adolescens, afflnis, juvenis, patruelis, princeps, &c. 

2. Many names of animals ; as, 

Anser, goslin or goose. Canis, dog or bitch. 

Bos, ox or cow. Elephantus, elephant. 

* Names of inanimate objects, which are sometimes of one gender and some- 
times of another, are said to be of the doubtful gender ; as, finis, m. & f. 



LESSON 77.] GENDER OF NAMES OF INANIMATE OBJECTS. 485 

Grus, crane. Perdix, partridge. 

Lepus, hare. Serpens, snake. 

Limax, snail Sus, swine. 

Mus, mouse. Thynnus, tunny-jish. 

Ovis, sheep or ram. Vespertilio, bat. 

Remarks. 

1. Some nouns of the common gender are mobilia at the same time. 
E. g. antistes — antistita, cliens — clienta, liospes — hospxta. 

2. From the nouns of the common gender we must distinguish, 

f a) Masculine appellations of entire classes of persons in the plural, 
including also the other sex. E. g. hi liberi, children ; filli, sons and 
daughters ; fratres, brothers and sisters ; reges, the royal family ; pa- 
rentes, parents. 

b) Epicoena, or those which, though including both sexes, are al- 
ways of the same grammatical gender (i. e. always either masculine or 
feminine). Such are: Masc. corvus, the raven; milvus, the kite; 
passer, the swallow; turdus, the thrush. F em. alauda, the lark; 
aquila, the eagle ; felis, the cat; rana, the frog ; vulpes, the fox * &c. 

3. The communia and mobilia occur most frequently as masculine 
nouns; as, hie amicus, equus, canis, civis, &c. Exceptions are sus, 
grus, serpens, Umax and perdix, which are more commonly feminine. 

4. Amona the general names of animals, animans, in the sense of 
"rational animal," or "man," is masculine, and when applied to other 
animals, feminine or neuter. Quadrupes is generally feminine, some- 
times neuter or masculine. Ales and volucris, "bird," is commonly 
feminine (always so in the plural) ; sometimes, however, masculine. 

GENDER OF NAMES OF INANIMATE OBJECTS. 

D. Besides the substantives which designate living beings, 
there are many others whose grammatical gender is likewfse 
determined by their signification (cf. A. 2). Such are : 

I. Masculines. — The names of the winds and months, and 

generally also those of rivers and mountains, are masculine.f E. g. 

Aquilo, Auster, Boreas, Etesiae, The north wind, south wind, north- 

N6tus - east wind, the Etesian winds, 

south wind. 
Januarius, Aprilis, Julius, No- January, April, July, November. 

vember. 
Euphrates, Ister, Tamesis, Tigris. The Euphrates, the Danube, the 

Thames, the Tigris. 
Athos, Eryx, Helicon, Pangaeus. Mount Athos, Eryx, Helicon, 

Pangseus. 

* When it becomes important to distinguish sex, it is customarv to add mas 
or masculus and femina ; as,fehs mas, vulpes mascula, porcus femina. 

t Because the generic terms venius, mensis, Jluvius (amnis), and mons are of 
that gender. " 

41* 



486 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 77. 

Exceptions. 

1. Of the names of rivers, Albula, Allia, Duria, Matrdna, Sagra, 
Sura, Styx, and Lethe are feminine ; Eldver, Jader, Muthul, and others 
of barbarous origin, neuter. 

2. Of the names of mountains, Aetna, Alpis, Calpe, Carambis. O/l- 
lene, Ida, Oeta, BJiodope, are feminine ; and Pelion and Soracte, neuter. 

II. Femixixes. — The names of countries, islands, cities, 
trees and plants are generally feminine.* E. g. 

Aegyptus. Gallia. Persis, Troas. Egypt, Gaul, Persia. Troas. 

Delos, Rhodus, Salamis, Sicilla. The island of Delos, Rhodes, Sala- 

mis, Sicily. 

Carthago, Corinthus, Pylos, Ro- The city of Carthage, Corinth, Pr- 
ima, Troezen. los. Rome, Troezen. 

Abies, pirus, quercus, papyrus, The fir-tree, pear-tree, the oak, the 

rosa. papyrus, the rose. 

Exceptions. 

1. Of the names of countries and islands, Pontus, Hellespontus, 
Bosporus, Isthmus, and Sason (island) are masculine. Those in tan, 
and plurals in a, are neuter; as, Latium, Samnium, Bactra, &c. So 
the islands Dianium and Delta. 

2. Of the names of cities, those in us, antis, plurals in i, and some 
of those in us, i. in o and on, are masculine ; as, Sellnus, Delphi, Cano- 
pus, Croto, Marathon, &c. Those in um, on, e, ar, and plurals in a, 
are neuter; as, Tarentum, Iilion, Praeneste, Tibur, Arbtla, &c. So 
are also a number of indeclinable barbarous names ; as, Geidir, HU- 
pal, Xepet, &c. 

3. Of the names of trees and plants, oleaster, pinaster, styrax ; acan- 
thus, asparagus, asphodtlus, calamus, carduus, heUeborus, intubus, jun- 
cus, rhamnus, and scirpus are masculine; amardcus, ci/tisus, lapathus, 
raphanus, rutms, spin us, larix, vepres, and sentis, common. All of the 
second declension ending in wn, and those of the third in er, are 
neuter; as, balsdmum, ligustrum; acer, papdver, piper, siser, tuber, 
robur, &c. 

III. Neuters. — The gender of all substantives denoting 
inanimate objects, and not included in Case I. or II. of this 
rule, is not determined by their signification, but by their ter- 
mination. (Cf. Lesson LXXVUI. A.) Among these, how- 
ever, there are several classes of words which are invariably 
neuter. Such are, — 

1. All indeclinable nouns, whether singular or plural. E. g-fas, 
nefas, nihil, cornu, gummi, Tempe,pondo.\ (Cf. page 61.) 

2. All words and expressions used as substantives, without properly 

* Because the generic terms terra, insi'da. urbs, arbor, are so. 

I With the exception of indeclinable names of persons; as, Adam, Ruth, &c. 



LESSON 77.] 



PHRASES AND EXERCISES. 



487 



being such, and linked to an adjective or pronoun of the neuter gen- 
der. E. g. A longum ; ultimum vale ; eras hesternum ; illud nosce te 
ipsum ; scire tuum ; pater.est dissyllabum (^4 long ; the last farewell ; 
yesterday, which once was called "to-morrow"; the injunction, 
" Know thyself" ; thy knowledge ; the word "father" is a dissyllable). 



To take a walk. 

To go out to take a walk. 
To take any one a walking. 
To take a drive out of the 

city. 
To take a ride on horseback 
through the city, into the 
country. 
To take a pleasure excur- 
sion into the country. 
Do you wish to take a walk with 

me ? 
I am not willing to go with you. 
I would rather take a drive out 

of the city with you. 
Where was your master accus- 
tomed to walk ? 
He was accustomed to walk in 
the garden every morning be- 
fore breakfast. 
Do you often walk ? 
I take a walk every morning. 



your children a 
walking every 



Do you take 
walking ? 

I take them a 
evening. 

He takes a walk every day. 

Is he taking a drive or a ride ? 

He is taking a drive. 

Where do you intend to go to- 
morrow morning ? 

I intend to take an excursion 
into the country. 

Do you wish to see your brother 
work ? 

I do. 

When do you take a walk ? 

I take a walk whenever I have 
nothing to do at home. 

To teach. 



( Spdtior, dii, atus sum. 
\ Ambulcire, deambulare. 

Ire or abire deambulatum. 

Aliquem deambulatum ducere. 

Vehiculo extra urbem vectari. 

Equo per urbem, rus vectari. 



Excurrere rus animi causa. 

Visne mecum deambulatum ire ? 

Nolo tecum abire. 

Ego tecum vehiculo extra lirbem 

vectari malim. 
Quo loco magister tiius spatiari so- 

lebat ? 
Quotidie mane ante jentaculum in 

hdrtulo deambulare solebat. 

Ambulasne saepe ? 

Ego vero quotidie mane ambulatum 

abeo. 
Ducisne liberos tiios ambulatum ? 

Diico eos ambulatum quotidie ve- 

speri. 
Nuilo non die spatiatur. 
tltrum carpento vectatur an equo ? 
Carpento. 
Quo ire eras mane edgitas? 

Excurrere rus edgito. 

Cupisne videre fratrem tuum ope- 

rari ? 
Ciipio. 

Quo tempore abis ambulatum ? 
Ambulatum ego ire sdleo, quando- 

ciinque ddmi nihil faciendum 

invenio. 
Doceo, ere, id, doctum (aliquem 

aliquid). 



488 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 77. 



To instruct (any one in 
anything). 

To give one lessons (in an 

art). 
To take lessons, to receive 
instruction (from any one). 
What does your master teach 

you. ? 
He teaches me to read and to 

write. 
Did he teach you the Latin lan- 
guage ? 
He did teach me. 
Do you give lessons in dancing ? 
!No, on the contrary, I give les- 
sons in writing. 
Who is instructing your little 

brother ? 
His master, the Englishman, is in- 
structing him in the liberal arts. 
He is taught grammar, the art 

of dancing. 
Are you taking lessons in elo- 
cution ? 
I am not taking any. 
The instruction. 
The art, science. 
To dance. 
To reckon, cipher. 
Ciphering (act of). 
Arithmetic. 
The Latin master. 

The dancing-master. 
The clergyman. 
The scholar, savant. 

To remember, recollect. 

To remember, recollect (any 

one). 
To remember or recollect 

anything. 



Erudio, Ire, ivi, iturn. 
Instituo, ere, ui, utum. 

(aliquem aliqua re).* 
Trado, ere, didi, ditum (alicui 

ALIQUAM ARTEM). 

Doceri, erudiri, institui (ab ali- 
QUO). 

Quid te magister ddcet ? 

Ddcet me legere et scribere. 

Docuitne te linguam Latinam ? 

Ddcuit. 

Tradisne tu artem saltandi ? 

Immo pdtius scribendi artem trado. 

Quis fraterculum tuum instituit ? 

ifcjus magister, Anglus, eum artibus 
liberalibus instituit atque erudit, 

Docetur grammaticam, artem sal- 
tandi. 

Instituerisne arte dicendi ? 

JSTon instituor. 

Institutio, onis, / ; disciplina, ae, f. 
Ars, gen. artis, f. 
Saltare, saltationem agere. 
Ratiocinari ; numeros tractare. 
Ratiocinatio, onis,/! 
Ars ratiocinandi, arithmetica, ae,/! 
Linguae Latinae doctor sen ma- 
gister. 
Magister saltandi. 
Clericus, ecclesiasticus, i, m. 
(Vir) eruditus, doctus. 
Memini, meminisse. 
Recorder, ari, atus sum. 

Reminiscor, i, . 

Meminisse alicujus or aliquem.f 

Meminisse, recordari or reminisci 
alicujus rei or l-em.J 



* On the government of these verbs, see Lesson LX. A. 

f On fheconstruction of these verbs, compare Lesson LXVII. B. 

\ Meminisse is " to have still in one's memory," reminisci, " to i*ecollect 
upon reflection what had already been supplanted "in the memory," recordari, 
" to remember or think of with interest and sympathy." 



LESSON 77.] PHRASES AND EXERCISES. 



489 



To remember (recollect) 
anything very well. 

Something occurs to me, comes 

to my mind. 
Do you still remember that man '? 

I still remember him very well. 
Does he recollect his promise ? 

He does not recollect them. 

I remember my reading, seeing 
hearing. 

I remember having suffered the 
same. 

I wish to know, whether you re- 
member anything concerning 
yourself ? 

Remember me. 

Do you recollect that ? 

1 do not remember it. 

I remember you. 

I remember them very well. 

He recollects us. 

I have remembered him. 

One must love and praise one's 

friend. 
Whom must we despise and 

punish ? 



( Commeminisse alicujus rei. 

< Bene, praeclare meminisse alicujus 

( rei. 

Venit mihi in mentem alicujus rei 

or res. 
Meministine ilium hdminem (illius 

hdminis) ? 
Memini eum bene. 
Rocordatiirne sua promissa (sud- 

runi promissorum) ? 
Ea (eorum) ndn recordatur (remi- 

ni'scitur). 
Memini me legere, videre, audire. 

Recdrdor me eadem perpessum. 

Velim scire, ecquid de te recor- 
dere ? 

\ Memineris mei. 

[ Facito, ut me memineris. 

Reminiscerisne hoc ? 

Hand reminiscor. 

Memini te or tiii. 

Praeclare eos memini. 

Ndstri reminiscitur. 

Recordatus sum (memini) ejus. 

Amicus siius cuique amandus atque 
laudtindus est. 

Quern nos dispiciamus atque puni- 
amus opdrtet V 



Exercise 146. 

Do you call me? — I do call you. — What is your pleasure? — 
lou must rise, for it is already late. — What do you want me for? 

— I have lost all my money at plav, and I come to be^ you to lend 
me some. — What o'clock is it? — It is already a quarter past six, 
and you have slept long enough.— Is it long since you rose? — It 
is an hour and a half since I rose. — Do you often go a walkino- ? _ 
I go a walking when I have nothing to do at home. — Do you wish to 
take a walk ? — I cannot take a walk, for I have too much to do. — 
Has your brother taken a ride on horseback ? — He has taken an 
airing in a carriage. — Do your children often go a walking ? — They 
go a walking every morning after breakfast. — Do you take a walk 
after dinner ?— After dinner I drink tea, and then I take a walk.— 
Do you often take your children a walking ? — I take them a walking 
every morning and every evening.— Can you go along with me? 

— I cannot go along with you, for I must take my little brother out 
a walking. — Where do you walk ? — We walk in our uncle's garden 



490 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 77. 

and fields. — Do you like walking ? — I like walking better than eat- 
ing and drinking. — Does your father like to take a ride on horse- 
back ? — He likes to take a ride in a carriage better than on horse- 
back. — Must one love children who are not good ? — One ought, on 
the contrary, to punish and despise them. — Who has taught you to 
read ? — I have learnt it of (ab or apud) a French master. — Has he 
also taught you to write ? — He has taught me to read and to write. — 
"Who has taught your brother arithmetic ? — A German master has 
taught it him. — Do you wish to take a walk with us ? — I cannot go 
a walking, for I am waiting for my German master. — Does your 
brother wish to take a walk ? — He cannot, for he is taking lessons 
in dancing. 

Exercise 147. 

Have you an English master ? — We have one. — Does he also 
give you lessons in Italian ? — He does not know Italian ; but we 
have an Italian and Spanish master. — What has become of your 
old writing-master ? — He has taken orders (has become a clergy- 
man). — What has become of the learned man whom I saAv at your 
house last winter '? — He has set up for a merchant. — And Avhat has 
become of his son ? — He has turned a soldier. — Do you still recol- 
lect my old dancing-master ? — I do still recollect him ; what has 
become of him ? — He is here, and you can see him if you like (si 
placet, si commodum est). Hast thou a German master ? — I have a 
very good (one), for it is my father, who gives me lessons in German 
and in English. — Does your father also know Polish ? — He does 
not know it yet, but he intends to learn it this summer. — Do you 
remember your promise ? — I do remember it. — What did you 
promise me ? — I promised to give you lessons in German ; and I will 
do it. — Will you begin this morning ? — I will begin this evening, if 
you please (si tibi llbet or colUbet). — Do you recollect the man whose 
son taught us dancing ? — I no longer recollect him. — Do you still 
recollect my brothers ? — I do recollect them very well ; for when I 
was studying at Berlin, I saw them every day. — Does your uncle 
still recollect me ? — I assure you that he still recollects you. — Do 
you speak German better than my cousin ? — I do not speak it as 
well as he, for he speaks it better than many Germans. — Which of 
your pupils speaks it the best ? — The one that was walking with me 
yesterday speaks it the best of them all. — Is your uncle's house as 
high as ours ? — Yours is higher than my uncle's, but my cousin's is 
the highest house that I have ever seen . — Has your friend as many 
books as I ? — You have more of them than he ; but my brother has 
more of them than both of you together. — W Inch of us has the most 
money ? — You have the most, for I have but thirty crowns, my friend 
has but ten, and you have five hundred. 



LESSON 78.] GENDER OF SUBSTANTIVES. 491 



Lesson LXX V.JJLL — PENSUM DUODEOCTOGE- 
SIMUM. 

GENDER OF SUBSTANTIVES AS DETERMINED BY THEIR 
TERMINATION AND DECLENSION. 

A. First Declension. — Substantives of the first declen- 
sion ending in a or e are feminine, and those in us and es mas- 
culine. 

E. g. Aula, a hall; stella, a star; aloll, aloes; epitome, an abridg- 
ment ; tiaras, a turban ; dynastcs, a ruler. 

Exceptions are damn, m. & f., a doc, deer ; lalpa, f. & m., a mole. ; 
lludna, m., the Adriatic Sea; and jplanetae, m. pi., the planets. ] ) an- 
dectae, plural, is feminine, but the singular, pandecles, is masculine. 
Manna, in the sense of " grain " or "crumb," is regularly feminine, 
but the manna of the Israelites indeclinable neuter. 

B. Second Declension. — Of the nouns of the second 
declension, those ending in us (os, os, us) and er are masculine, 
and those in urn and on * neuter. 

E.g. animus, the mind; scorpios, a scorpion; Athos, a mountain; 
perljilus, circumnavigation ; ager, a field ; — antrum, a cave ; colon, 
the colon. 

Exceptions. 

1. Feminine are alvus, carbdsus, coins, domus, humus, and vannus. 
So also the Greek aretus, apostroplius, dialect us, diametrus,dip>hfhou(/us, 
exodus, methodus (and other compounds of r) odos), lecyihus, miltus, and 
paragraph us. 

2. Common, but more frequently feminine, are atdmus, an atom ; 
barbltus, a lute ; f'lcus, the fig ; grossus, an unripe fig ; lotus, the lotus- 
flute ; phdrus, a lighthouse. Sometimes also faselus, a sort of boat, 
and pampinus, a vine-shoot. Haec melius signifies the apple-tree, and 
hie mdlus, the mast. Hie epbdus is a shorter verse ; haec epbdus, an 
epode. 

3. Neuters are peldgus, the sea ; virus, juice, poison ; and vulgus, 
the vulgar.f 

C. Third Declension. — The third declension exhibits 
the greatest variety of terminations, and includes nouns of every 
gender. 

I. Nouns of the third declension ending in o, or, os, er, or n 
are masculine. 

* Those in 6s, 6s, us, and on are Greek nouns. 
| But vulgus is sometimes also masculine. 



492 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 78. 

E. g. sermo, speech ; honor, honor ; jios, a flower ; career, a prison ; 
pecten, a comb; canon, a rule, canon. 

Exceptions. 

1. Feminines in o are, — a) caro, echo; Argo, and those in do and 
go, except ordo, cardo, ligo, harpdgo, and margo ; b) abstract and 
collective terms in io ; as, actio, lectio, portio, legio, &c. Pondo, a 
pound, is an indeclinable neuter. 

2. Of those in or, arbor is feminine. Cor, marmor, and aequor are 
neuter. Ador is commonly indeclinable. 

3. Of those in os, cos and dos are feminine ; os, oi*is and os, osshs 
are neuter. So are also the Greek nouns cetos, chaos, epos, and melos. 

4. Of those in er, cadaver, iter, spinther, tuber, ube.r, ver, and the 
plural verbera are neuter. Linter is more frequently feminine than 
masculine. 

5. Of those in n, aedon, halcyon, sindon, and icon are feminine. 
Gluten, inguen, unguen, sanguen, carmen, and others in men, are neuter. 

II. Nouns of the third declension ending in as, es, is, mis, ys, 
x, and s preceded by a consonant, are feminine. 

E. g. pietas, piety ; rupes, is, a rock ; quies, etis, rest ; iris, the rain- 
bow; laus, praise; chelys, a cithern; pax, peace; hiems, winter; pars, 
part. 

Exceptions. 

1. Of those in as, the name of the Roman pound, as (gen. assis) is 
masculine.* So are also Greek nouns in as, antis; as, elephas, &c. 
Neuter are vas (gen. vasis), fas, nefas, and Greek nouns in as, atis ; 
as, e?'ysipelas, &c. 

2. Nouns in es, ids, and Greek nouns in es, etis, are masculine ; as, 
limes, limitis, a cross-road ;f lebes, lebefis, a caldron. So are also 
acindces, coles, gausapes, paries, pes, and praes (surety). Palumbes 
is f. or m., and ales, m. or f. Neuters are aes and Greek nouns, as 
cynosarges. 

3. Masculines in is are amnis, assis, axis, caulis, collis, crinis, ensis, 
fustis, ignis, mensis, orbis, panis, piscis, sanguis, unguis, vomis, and 
others. Common are aqucdis, clunis, corbis, and {pollen} pollinis. 
More commonly masculine are anguis, callis, ca?ialis, earns, cinis,Jinis, 
funis, lapis, pedis, pulvis, scrobis (scrobs), tigris, and torquis ; more 
rarely clunis, scobis (scobs), and volucris. 

4. Masculines in x are Greek nouns in ax, and many in ex ; as, 
thorax, judex, pontifex, rex, &c. So also calix, fornix, phoenix, saurix, 
varix ; diox, esox, volvox, calyx, coccyx, and oryx. Common are im- 
brex, obex, and bombyx. More frequently masculine are grex, irpex, 
latex, and tradux. More frequently feminine, lodix, hystrix, perdix, 
natrix, sandyx, and calx (the heel, and lime). 

* Masculine are also all the parts of this weight; as, sextans, quadrans, tri- 
ens, quincunx, semis, &c. 

t But merges, Ms, " a sheaf," is feminine. 



LESSON 78.] GRAMMATICAL GENDER. 403 

5. Of those ending in s preceded by a consonant, dens, fans-, mons, 
pons, chalybs, and hydrops are masculine. So are the Greek names 
of animals ; as, gryps, epops, &c. Common are adeps, seps, lens, from, 
forceps, scobs, stiips, and serpens. Neuters are the philosophical terms 
ens, accidens, antecedens, consequens, animans. 

III. Nouns of the third declension ending in a, e, i, y, or in 
c, I, t, ar, ur, us, are neuter. 

E.g. diadema, a crown; sedlle, a seat; hydromeli, mead; misy, 
mushroom; lac, milk; mel, honey; caput, the head; par, a pair; 
fulgur, lightning ; corpus, a body. 

Exceptions. — Masculine are sol, mugd, sal ; furfur, turtur, vul- 
tur ; lepus, mus, tripus, and other compounds of ttovs. Feminine are 
those in us, gen. udis or utis ; as, palus, fulls ; salus, utis ; to which 
add tellus, uris ; and pecus, udis. The feminine of the common nouns 
grus and sus is the gender of the species. 

D. Fourth Declension. — Nouns of the fourth declen- 
sion ending in us are masculine, those in u neuter. 

E. g. fructus, fruit ; cantus, a song ; cornu, a horn ; gelu, ice. 

Exceptions. — Feminine are acus, manus, portions, tribus, and 
the plurals Idus and Quinqudtrus. Common are penus and specus. 
The obsolete genus (for genii), secus (for sexus, m.), and specus occur 
as neuters only in the Nominative and Accusative. 

E. Fifth Declension. — Substantives of the fifth de- 
clension are feminine. 

E. g. res, a thing ; acies, an edge ; spes, hope ; fides, faith. 

Except meridies, which is masculine. On the gender of dies, m. & 
f., compare Lesson VIII. B. 

(Frigeo, ere,frixl, . 

To be cold, to feel cold. ■} Algeo, ere, alsi, . 

( Frlgus potior. 

, T ~ , , , t , ( Frigeo pedibus, manibus. 

My feet, hands, are cold. ir>'P v - -\- c ■ *. 

J • ' ' ( Pedes, manus mi hi fngent. 

To be warm, to feel warm, ( Caleo, ere, id, . 

hot. \ Aestum sentio, aestudre (to be hot). 

The cold. Frlgus, oris, n. 

The heat. Aestus, us, ?n. 

F. Obs. Calere, " to be warm," is opposed to frigti^c, " to 
be cold"; and aestudre, "to feel warm, hot," to algere, "to 
feel cold." 

Are you cold ? Frigesne (algesne) ? 

I am very cold. Vero, valde algeo. 

I am not at all cold. Nihil frigoris patior. 

Was your father cold ? Alsitne pater tiius 5* 
42 



494 



LATIN GRAMMAR, 



[lesson 78. 



He was not cold. 

Is he warm ? 

He is warm. (He feels warm, hot.) 

Are they warm or cold ? 

Thev are neither warm nor cold. 

Who is (feels) cold ? 

My brother is (feels) cold. 

My hands are cold. 

His ears are cold. 

My fingers are warm. < 

Your boy felt warm. 

Who was cold (felt cold) ? 

Tlie shoemaker was cold. 

They instruct their youth in 
hunting, running, in suffering 
hunger, thirst, cold, and heat. 

To make use of, to use. -j 

Do you use my book ? 

I am using it. 

Has your father used it ? 

He has not used it. 

May I use your horse for riding 
into the city ? 

You may use it. 

Did he use your books for read- 
ing ? 

He did not use them. 

He has frequently used my ink, 
pen, and paper for writing. 



To approach, draw near. 



To withdraw, 

from. 



or go aw 



"I 

my [ 



Do you come to the fire ? 

1 do come to it. 

He has approached the fire. 

They have withdrawn from the 

fire. 
Why does that man go away 

from the fire ? 
He goes away from it because he 

is not cold. 



Ndn alsit. 

Cale'tne (aestuatne) ? 

Calet. (Aestuat.) 

"Utrum aestuant an frigent ? 

Neque aestuant neque frigent 

Quis alget ? 

Frater mens alget. 

Mtinus mini frigent. 

Aiires ei frigent. 

Di'giti mi'hi calent. 

Caleo digitis. 

Piier tii us aestuabat. 

Quis frixit (alsit) '? 

Sutor frixit (alsit). 

Enidiunt juventutem veniindo, cur- 

rendo, esuriendo, sitiendo, algen- 

do, aestuando. 
Utor, uti, usus sum (re).* 
Usitdri (re), usurpare (rem). 
Uterisne meo libro ? 
trtor. 

Usiisne est eo pater tiius ? 
Non usus est. 
Licetne mihiequum tiium usurpare 

ad equitandum in lirbemV 
Licet. 
Usurpavitne tiios h'bros ad legen- 

dum? 
Non usurpavit. 
Atramento, penna atque cluirta 

meis ad sen bend una usitabatur. 
Prope accedo, ere, cessi, cessum 

(rem, ad rem). 
Appropinquare (rei, ad rem). 
Discedo, ere, cessi, cessum (re, de 

RE, EX LOCO). 

AJnre (ab aliquo, a re, ex 

loco). 
Accedisne ad fdcum (ad carbdnes) ? 
Accedo. 

Appropinquavit fdeo (ad fdcum). 
De loco discesserunt. 

Quamobrem vir file a fdeo disc-edit 

(abit) ? 
De fd,-o disc-edit propterea, quod 

non aliret. 



* On the government of utor, see Lesson LXXII. A. 



LESSON 78.] PHRASES AND EXERCISES. 



495 



What do you recollect ? 
I recollect nothing.- 

For what ? Whereto ? For 
what purpose ? 

What am I to do with so much 

money ? 
For what purpose do I engage in 

this discussion ? 
What do you want (need) money 

for? 
I want it for buying a carriage. 
What do you wish wine for r 
(I want some) to drink, to sell. 
What does this horse serve you 

for V 
I make use of it for riding. 
What use is it to philosophize 

about the matter V 
Man>- things arc not applied to 

the use for which they were 

intended. 
A quill docs not subserve the 

purpose of a knife. 
To employ, use (for a certain 

purpose). 

To ride out. 



To drive out. 



Quid recordaris ? 

Nihil recdrdor. 

Quo ? Quorsum ? (Ad) quid ? 

Ad quamnam rem ? Culnam 

rei ? 
Quo mihi tiintam pecuniam ? 

Quorsum lgitur haec dispute ? 

Quid (cuinam re'i) tibi opus est 

pecunia ? 
Opus est mihi ad eme'ndam rhedam. 
Ad quid vis vinum V 
Ad bibendum, ad vendendum. 
Ad quid (cui lisui) est tibi hicce 

eqiius? 
Adhibco eum ad equitandum. 
Quid opus est in hoc philosophiiri ? 

Miilta non ad eum iisum adhibentur, 
cui destinata sunt. 

Cui lisui ciilter, ei non est penna. 

Adhibeo, ere, ui, itum (aliquid 
ad rem). 

Avehi or evehi equo. 
Equo vectari extra urbem. 
Carpento (vehiculo) vectari or ge- 
stari. Excurrere. 



Exercise 148. 



Which is the nearest way (via prpxima or brevisstma) to go to your 
uncle's castle V — This way is shorter than the one we took yester- 
day ; but my father knows one which is the nearest of all. — Do you 
use my carnage V — 1 do use it. — Has your father used my horse V — 
lie has used it. — What does this horse serve you for? — It serves 
me to ride out upon. — Do you use the books which I lent you '? — 
I do use them. — May I (licetne mihi) use your knife? — Thou 
ma vest use it, but thou must not cut thyself. — May my brothers use 
your books ? — They may use them, but they must not tear them. — 
May Ave use your stone table ? — You may use it, but you must not 
spoil it. — For what purpose do your brothers want money V — They 
want some to live upon. — What does this knife serve us for V — It 
serves us to cut our bread, our meat, and our cheese with. — Is it cold 
to-day ? — It is very cold. — Will you draw near the fire V — I can- 
not draw near it, for I am afraid of burning myself. — Why does your 
friend go away from the fire V — He goes away from it because he is 
afraid of burning himself. — Art thou coming near the fire V — I am 



40 C 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSOX 79. 



coming near it, because I am very cold. — Are thy hands cold ? — 
My hands are not cold, but my feet are. — Do you go away from the 
fire ? — I do go away from it. — Why do you go away from it ? — 
Because I am not cold. — Are you cold or warm? — I am neither 
cold nor warm. — Why do your children approach the fire ? — They 
approach it, because they are cold. — Is anybody cold ? — Somebody 
is cold. — "Who is cold ? — The little boy, whose father has lent you a 
horse, is cold. — Why does he not warm himself '? — Because his fa- 
ther has no money to buy wood. — AVill you tell him to come to me to 
warm himself? — I will tell him so. — l)o you remember anything ? 
— I remember nothing. — What does your uncle recollect ? He rec- 
ollects your promise. — What have I promised him? — You have 
promised him to go to Germany with him next winter. — I intend to 
do so if it is not too cold. — Are your hands often cold ? — My hands 
are scarcely ever (nunquam fere) cold, but my feet are often so. — 
Why do you withdraw from the fire ? — I have been sitting near the 
fire this hour and a half, so that I am no longer cold. — Does your 
friend not like to sit near the fire ? — lie likes, on the contrary, much 
to sit near the fire, but only when he is cold. — May one approach 
your uncle ? — One may approach him, for he excludes nobody 
( jan ua neminem proMbef) . 



Lesson LXXIX. — PENSUM UXDEOCTOGESI- 
MUM. 

DECLENSION OF GREEK NOUNS. 

A. Many substantives of the Latin language are derived from the 
Greek. They consist partly of general terms (or common nouns), 
and partly of proper names of persons and places. These Greek 
nouns generally retain more or less of their original inflection, but are 
nevertheless referred to the first, second, and third declensions of 
Latin nouns. 

B. First Declexsiox. — Greek nouns of the first declen- 
sion end in e feminine, and in as, es masculine. In the plural 
they are inflected like Latin nouns, but in the singular they 
deviate according to the following paradigms : — 

Crambe, cabbage./ ; Boreas, the north-wind, in. ; dynasles, a rider, m. 



Nom 


crambo 


Boreas 


dvnastes 


Gen*. 


crambes 


Boreae 


dynastae 


Dat. 


crambae 


Boreae 


dynastae 


Ace. 


cramben 


Boream or -an 


dynasten 


Voc. 


crambe 


Borea 


dynaste 


Abl. 


crambe. 


Borea. 


dynaste. 



LESSON 79.] 



DECLENSION OF GREEK NOUNS. 



497 



Like crambe, decline aloe, aloes ; epitome, an abridgment ; and the 
proper names Circe, Danae, PJwenice ; — like Boreas : tiaras, a turban 

and the proper names Aeneas, Andreas, Midas, Perdiccas ; like 

chjnastes : cometes, the comet ; pyrites, a species of stone ; satrapes, a 
satrap ; and the proper names Anchlses, Thersltes, &c. 

Remarks. 

1. The majority of these words are proper names. Many of them 
have a Greek and Latin termination at the same time. E. &. musica 
or musice, Europa or Europe, Marsyas or Marsya, Sophisles or So- 
phista.* 

2. The genitive es (from the nom. e) belongs especially to proper 
names; as, Araclines, Penelopes. So also musices, rhetorXces. But 
with common nouns the genitive in ae is more frequent. 

3. The accusative of those in as is sometimes an instead of the more 
common am : as, Aenean, Pythagdrdn. So that of nouns in e and es 
is occasionally am instead of en ; as, Andromacham, Anchisam, &c. 

4. The vocative of proper names and patronymics in es is sometimes 
(though rarely) a instead of e; as, Ancldsa. Sometimes also the 
Latin termination a ; as, Atridd, Polydectd. 

5. The ablative of words in e and es is sometimes a instead of e. 
E. g. Semeld, Anchisa. 

G. Geographical names sometimes form their genitive plural in on 
(instead of arum) ; as, Aduliton. — Patronymics often have um instead 
of drum; as, Ausonidum, Dardanidum. 

7. Many nouns in es, especially those which were originally patro- 
nymics, pass over into the third declension ; as, Alcibiades, Euripides, 
Miltiades (gen. is), &c. 

C. Second Declension. — Greek nouns of the second 
declension end in os or as masculine, and in on neuter. They 
are thus declined : — 

Scorpios, m., a scorpion ; Athus, m., Mount Athos ; symposYon, n., 
a banquet. 



Singular. 



Plural 



Athos 
Atho 
Atho 

Athon or -o 
Athos 
Atho. 

So decline barbi/os, a lute ; phaselos, the phasel (bean) ; and the 
proper names Andros, Paros, Tityds : Ceos, Teds: Illon, PeUon, &c. 



Nom. 


scorpios 


Gkx. 


scorpn 


DAT. 


scorpio 


Acc. 


scorpion 


A oc. 


scorpi 


Abl. 


scorpio. 



symposion 

symposii 

symposio 

symposion 

symposion 

symposio, 



symposia 

symposion 

symposiis 

symposia 

symposia 

symposiis. 



* The older Roman authors, Cicero included, prefer the Latin form of the 
most current of these words. E. g. gramimatica, dialectlca, rhetorica ; Hecuba, 
Supkista, Philodela. Yet Cicero has also Archias, Epaminondas, Pythagoras, 
J'trsit, mid ISc<jtit(_6. The Greek forms Europe, Helene, Pehelqpe, rather belong 
to noetrv. 

. 2 F 42 * 



498 latin grammar. [lesson 79. 

Remarks. 

1. Many of the Greek nouns become Latinized, and assume the 
regular terminations us and urn. E. g. caminus, cycnus ; tKeatrum, 
antrum ; Aeschylus, Codrus, Homerus, &c. The Greek ros is often 
changed into er ; as, Alexander, Menander, Teucer, instead of Alexan- 
dras, &c. 

2. Among the poets the accusative is often on, even in words which 
have assumed the Latin us ; as, Menelaon, Noton, instead of Mene- 
laum, &c. 

3. The genitive plural of these nouns is generally the Greek an, 
which sometimes occurs even in those otherwise inflected like Latin 
words. E. g. Epodon, Georgtcbn, Satyricon, &c. The genitive singu- 
lar sometimes ends in u, and the nominative plural in oe ; as, Me- 
nandru (== Menandri) ; Canephoroe (= Canephori). 

4. Greek nouns in us generally retain this os, but sometimes change 
it into its : as, Athos, Androgens, or Androgens, Tyndareiis (gen. i and 
the remaining cases regular). Sometimes they pass over into the 
third declension ; as, Athos, Androgens, gen. onis. 

5. Nouns, which in the original have oos, contracted olts, have in 
Latin sometimes mis and sometimes us; as, Alcinous, Panthus, peri- 
plils. Hence the vocative Panthu of Virgil. 

6. Nouns in eus are often inflected according to the second declen- 
sion (as if they ended in the dissyllable eus) ; as, Orpheus, i, o, tun, eu, 
o. But words of this class also belong to the third declension. (Cf. D.) 

D. Third Declension. — 1. Greek nouns of the third de- 
clension are all those ending in ma, i, an, in, on, er, y, yn, yr, 
ys, eus, yx, inx, ynx, and plurals in e. 

E. g. poema, a poem ; hydromeli, mead ; Paean, Apollo; delphln, a 
dolphin ; agon, a contest ; crater, a basin ; misy, vitriol ; Phorcyn ; 
martyr, a witness ; chldmys, a cloak ; Orpheus ; calyx, a cup ; syrinx, 
a reed; lynx, a lynx; cete, pi., a sea-monster. 

2. Greek nouns are also many of those ending in the Latin 
terminations as, es, is, ds, o, and en. 

E. g. lampas, a torch ; Demosthenes ; basis, a pedestal ; Minds ; 
rhinoceros ; echo ; attagen, a woodcock. 

3. The majority of these words follow the declension of those 
of Latin origin. E. g. canon, canonis ; calyx, calycis ;' chlamys, 
chlamydis ; poema, po ematis ; * gigas, gigantis, &c. 

4. Many, however, retain their original terminations in some 
of the cases, especially among the poets. The following may 
serve as examples of their declension : — 

* The dative and ablative plural of this word is more frequently poematis 
than poematibus. 



LESSON 71).] DECLENSION OF GREEK NOUNS. 



499 



Nom 
Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 
Voc. 

AliL. 



Lampas,/., a torch; lamp. 

Singular. Plural. 

lampas lampades 

( lampadis ) •> ~ , 
< , ^ , y lampadum 
( lampados ) l 

lampadi lampadibus 

( lampadem ( lampades 

I lampada ( lampadas 

lampas lampades 

lampade, lampadibus. 

Chelys,/, a cithern. 





lleros, m., a 


hero. 




Singular. 


Plukal. 


Nom. 


lieros 


heroes 


Gen. 


herois 


hero am 


Dat. 


heroi 


herolbus 


Ace. 


( heroem 


( heroes 


\ heroa 


\ heroas 


Voc. 


heros 


heroes 


Abl. 


heroe, 


heroibus. 





Singular. 


Plural. 








Nom. 


ehelys chalyes 


poesis 




Gen. 


( chelyis } ■, ,^ 
■I » ,i y chalyum 
( chelyos j 


poesis 1 
poeseos ) 




Dat. 


chelyi c 


halybus 


poesi 




Ace. 


( chelym ( chalyes 
\ chelyn ( chalyas 


poesim 7 
poesin j 




Voc. 


chely c 


halyes 


poesi 




Abl. 


{tt} chal ^ bus - 


poesi. 






Achilles, m. 


Orpheus, m. 


Chremes, m. 


Nom. 


Achilles 


Orpheus 


Chremes 


Gen. 


( Achillis 


( Orpheos 


( Chremis 


/ Achilleos 


\ Orphei or i 


I Chremetis 


Dat. 


Achilli 


Orphei or o 


Chremi or eti 


Ace. 


( Achillem or en 


( Orphea 


( Chremem or en 


j Achillea 


j Orpheum 


) Chemetemorta 


Voc. 


Achilles or e 


Orpheu 


Chremes or e 


Abl. 


Achille or i. 


Orpheo.* 




Chreme or eU 





Poesis, /., poetry. \ Aer, m., the air 



aer 

aeris 

aeri 

aera 

aer 

aere. 

Dido, /. 
Dido 
Didus 
Didonis 
Dido or oni 
Dido 
Didonem 
Dido 
Dido or one. 



Remarks. 



1. The genitive in os belongs chiefly to roots in d, y, and i; as, 
Pallddos, Tethyos, baseos, matheseos. But it occurs far less frequently 
than the Greek accusative, and rather in poetry than in prose. With 
roots in o the os of the genitive becomes us ; as, Echus, Clius, Didus, 
Sapphus, from echo, &c. A number of proper names in es form their 
genitive in is or i ; as, Demosthenis or i, Neoclis or i, Periclis or i, from 
Demosthenes, &c. So also Achilli, Ulyxi. 

2. The Greek accusative singular exhibits the terminations a, in, yn, 
en, instead of the common Latin em or im. 

a) The accusative in a occurs in the words aer — aera, aether — 
aethera, and in proper names; as, Pan — Pana, &c. Some words 
have either a or em : as, Babylona or Babylonem. 

b) The terminations in, yn, and en are often used by the poets, to 



Proper names in eus frequently pass over into the second declension. 



500 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 79. 

avoid a hiatus ; as, basin, Halyn, Zeuxin, instead of basim, Halym, &c. 
Some nouns in is, idos have im or idem, and feminines also ida : as, 
Pans — Parim or Paridem , Duns — Durim, DorXdem, or Dor'ida. 

c) The termination en belongs to nouns in es , as, Aeschinen, 
Achdlen, Demoslhcnen, most of which also admit the Latin em. 

3. The vocative singular of nouns in s differs from the nominative 
as follows: — a) Those in as, anils have a; as, Palla, Atla, Caleha, 
from Padas, &c b) Those in is and ys have i and y, as, Phidi, 
Tiphy, from Phillis, Tiphys. c) Those in eus have eu ; as, Orplieu, 
from Orpheus, d) Those in es have e ; as, Achdle, Socrate, Pylade. 

4. In the ablative singular roots in i generally have i : as, basi, Ne- 
apoli , those in id have ide, and sometimes i ; as, Adonide, Parlde ; 
Osiri, from Adonis, Mis, &c. 

5. The nominative plural of neuters in os is e ; as, melos — mele ; 
epos — epe. To which add the indeclinable plural Tempo. 

6. The genitive plural in on occurs only in names of nations and 
titles of books ; as, Chalybon, metamorphosedn libri. 

7. The termination si and sin, for the dative and ablative plural, 
rarely occurs, and only in the poets ; as, Charlsin, Lemnidsi, from the 
nominative Charlies, Lemniddes. 

8. The accusative plural in as (instead of es) is often used in poetry, 
sometimes also in prose ; as, phalangas, Macedonas, AUobrogas, &c. 

m 7 7 /r r ( Rado, ere, si, sum. 

To shave, shave off (any ) ™ ,1 _' ' 7 . . 

ones beard). £ (alicujus barbam).* 

To shave one's self. Barbam radere or tondere ; barbam 

p5nere. 
To get shaved (by any one). Radi, tonderi (ab aliquo). 
To get shaved commonly. Tonsori operam dare. 
To shave every day. Faciem quotidie rasitare. 

When is your father in the habit Quo tempore barbam abradere sd- 

of shaving ? let pater tiius ? 

He shaves every morning, as Barbam ponit quotidie mane, simul 

soon as he gets out of bed. ac surgit. 

Do you get shaved by the bar- Tonderisne a tonsore ? 

ber? 

No, I am in the habit of shaving Non vero ; ego ipse barbam tondere 

myself. consuevi. 

The razor. Novacula, ae,/. ; culter tonsorius. 

The barber's shears. Forfex, icis,/. 

To dress, put on clothes. \ T ; i ff e S i or ali ^ em vesRbus ' - 
1 I Inauere sibi or alicui vestes. 

To undress, put off clothes. Exuere sibi or alicui vestes. 

* Radere or abradere is "to shave with the novacula or razor," or "to 
shave," in the mudem sense; tondere is "to take oil" the beard witli tbeforftx 

or shears." 



LESSON 79.] PHRASES AND EXERCISES. 



501 



To wake, wake up (anyone). 



To awake (out of sleep). 

Have you dressed yourself? 
1 have not yet dressed myself. 
Who has dressed the child ? 
Its mother has dressed it. 
When do you undress ? 
I undress before I go to bed. 

Have you waked up your brother 
this morning ? 

I did not wake him up. 

At what time do you wake up in 
the morning ? 

I wake up at daybreak. 

Did I wake up earlier than you 
this morning ? 

You woke up later than I. 

Were you waked at eight ? 

I was. 

I wake up at seven every morn- 
ing. 

Do not wake me up so early ! 

Stop making a noise, lest you 
wake me out of sleep ! 
To behave, conduct one's self. 



To behave like, to show or 
prove one's self (a man, &c). 

Towards. 

How does he behave (conduct 
himself) ? 

He behaves well, respectably. 

They behave badly, very badly, 
impudently. 

Did the boy behave well towards 
his master ? 

No, on the contrary, he behaved 
very badly. 

How did he behave to his fellow- 
scholars ? 

He did not behave any better. 

He behaved too impudently. 



( Expcrgofacio, ore, feci, factum. 
■} Excito, are, avi, atum. 
( (aliquem e somxo). 

JExpergefio, fieri, factus sum. 
Expergiscor, i, experreetus sum. 
Somno solvor, solvi, solutus sum. 
Induistine tibi vestes (te vestibus) ? 
jNdndum l'ndui. 
Quis infanti vestes induit ? 
Mater ejus ei vestes induit. 
Quo tempore tibi vestes exuis ? 
Vestes mihi exuo, ante quam me 

in lectum cdnfero. 
Expergefecistine fratrem tuum hd- 

die mane ? 
Eum ndn expergefeci. 
Quo tempore mane expergisceris ? 

~kgo prima luce expergiscor. 
Experrectusne sum ego hodie mane 

matiirius quam tu ? 
f mmo vero tardius experreetus es. 
Expergefactiisne es hdra octava ? 
Factum est. 
Ego quotidie mane sdmno solvor 

hdra septima. 
Ne me tarn bene mane excites e 

sdmno ! 
Desiste tumultuari, ne me experge- 

faceres ! 
Gei'o, ere, gessi, gestum (se bene, 

male, &c.). 
C Praebeo, ere, ui, ltum. 
< Praesto, are, stiti, stitum. 

( (SE VERUM, PROBUM, &C.) 

Erga, in, adversus. (Prep. c. Ace.) 
( Qudmodo se gerit ? 
I Qualem se praebet ? 
Bene, honeste se gerit. 
Male, perperam, contumaciter se 

gerunt. 
Gessitne se piier honeste erga prae- 

ceptdrem '? 
imino pdtius perperam se gessit. 

Qudmodo se gerebat adversus con- 

discipulos ? 
Gerebat se ndn melius. 
Gerebat se contumacius. 



502 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 79. 



He conducts himself like a citi- Se pro cive gerit. 



zen. 
He showed himself a man. 
He has shown himself a scholar. 

To come down, to descend. 
To ascend, mount, embark, &?c. 

To alight, dismount from a 
horse. 

To alight from a carriage. 

To disembark. 

To descend (sail down) the 

river. 
To come down the hill. 
To ascend the hill. 
To embark. 
To mount a horse. 
To mount the rostrum. 

The dream. 

The beard. 
A long, large beard. 
A rough, grisly beard. 
To have a strong beard. 

The garret. 

"Where is your brother ? 

He is in the garret. 

Will you ask him to come down ? 

"Who has ascended the walls ? 

The soldiers have ascended 

(scaled) them with ladders. 
Did you ever go on board ship ? 
I have never gone on board. 
Do you not wish to get upon the 

horse ? 
It is so. 

You must ascend (rise) higher. 
He can rise to the highest honors 

of the state. 
Let us go down to our boats. 
Did your cousin go down into 

the well ? 
He did not do it 
What time was your father in the 

habit of going down to the 

market ? 
He usually went down there at 

eleven o'clock. 



Praebuit se virum. 
Praestitit se do'ctum. 

Descend ere (de or ex aliquo loco). 

Ascend ere (locum, in or ad locum). 
( Descendere ex equo. 
< Ex equo desilire (-silui or silii, 
( sultum) . 
( Descendere ex curru. 
I Degredi ad pedes. 

Descendere or egredi e nave. 

Devehi nave per fluvium. 

Descendere de colle. 

Ascendere collem, in collern. 

Ascendere navem, in navem. 

Ascendere (in) equum. 

Escendere in rostra. 

Somnium, i, n. 

Barba, ae, /. 

Barba longa, promissa, magna. 

Barba horrida, hirsuta. 

Bene barbatum esse. 

Tabulatum supremum ; coenacu- 

lum, i, n. 
tJbi est frater tiius ? 
In coenaculo est. 

Yisne eum rogare, ut descendat ? 
Quis muros ascendit ? 
Milites eos scalis ascenderunt. 

Ascendistine unquam in navem ? 

Xunquam ascendi. 

Ndnne in equum ascendere vis ? 

Ita est. 

Te ad majora ascendere opdrtet. 

In summum locum civitatis ascen- 
dere potest. 

Descendamus ad nostras navi'culas. 

Xiim patruelis tiius in puteum de- 
scendit ? 

Non factum est. 

Quo tempore ad forum descende- 
bat pater tuus ? 

Descendere solebat hdra undecima. 



LESSOX 79.] PHRASES AND EXERCISES. 503 

They dismounted. Ex equis deseende'runt. 

The queen dismounted from her Ab equo regina desiluit. 

charger. 
From heaven descended the in- Ex coelo descendit ndsce te ipsum. 

junction, " Know thyself." 

To be worth ivMle, i f s f °^ ae P retXum ' 

( Jbst pretium. 

It is better. Melius or sathis est, praestat. 

Is it worth while to do this ? Estne dperae pretium hoc facere ? 

It is not worth while. Non est dperae pretium. 

Is it worth while to write to him ? Estne pretium dare litteras ad eum ? 

It is. Est. 

Is it better ? Estne melius ? Satiusne est V Prae- 

stiitne ? 
It is better. [Est melius, &c. 

It is better to do this than that. Melius (satius) est facere hoc, quam 

illud. 
It is better to stay here than to Praestat hie mane re, quam ambula- 
go a walking. turn ire. 

Exercise 149. 

Have you shaved to-day ? — I have shaved. — Has your brother 
shaved ? — He has not shaved himself, but has got shaved. — Do 
you shave often ? — I shave every morning, and sometimes also in 
the evening. — When do you shave in the evening ? — When I do 
not dine at home. — How many times a day does your father 
shave? — He shaves only once a day, but my brother has such a 
strong beard, that he is obliged to shave twice a day. — Does your 
uncle shave often ? — He shaves only every other day (tertio quoque 
die) for his beard is not strong. — At what o'clock do you dress in 
the morning? — I dress as soon as I have breakfasted, and I break- 
fast every day at eight o'clock, or at a quarter past eight. — Does 
your neighbor dress before he breakfasts ? — He breakfasts before he 
dresses. — At what o'clock in the evening dost thou undress? — I 
undress as soon as I return from the theatre. — Dost thou go to the 
theatre every evening ? — I do not go every evening, for it is better 
to study than to go to the theatre. — At what o'clock dost thou un- 
dress when thou dost not go to the theatre ? — I then undress as soon 
as I have supped, and go to bed at ten o'clock. — Have you already 
dressed the child ? — I have not dressed it yet, for it is still asleep. — 
At what o'clock does it get up ? — It gets up as soon as it is waked. — 
Do you rise as early as I ? — I do not know at what o'clock you rise, 
but I rise as soon as I awake. — Will you tell my servant to wake me 
to-morrow at four o'clock ? — I will tell him. — Why have you risen 
so early ? — My children have made such a noise that they wakened 
me. — Have you slept well ? — I have not slept well, for you made 
too much noise. — At what o'clock must I wake you ? — To-morrow 
thou mayest wake me at six o'clock. — At what o'clock did the good 
captain awake ? — He awoke at a quarter past five in the morning. 



501 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 80. 

Exercise 150. 

"When did this man go down into the well ? — He went down into 
it this morning. — Has he come up again ? — He came up an hour 
ago. — "Where is your brother ? — He is in his room. — Will you tell 
him to come down *? — I will tell him so ; but he is not dressed yet. — 
Is your friend still on the mountain ? — He has already come down. 
— Did you go down or up this river ? — "We went down it. — Has 
your brother dined already ? — He dined as soon as he had alighted 
from his horse. — Is your uncle already asleep ? — I believe that he 
is asleep, for he went to bed as soon as he had alighted. — Did my 
cousin speak to you before he started ? — He spoke to me before he 
got into the coach. — Have you seen my brother? — I saw him be- 
fore I went on board the ship. — How did my child behave ? — He 
did behave very well. — How did my brother behave towards you ? 
He behaved very well towards me, for he behaves well towards every- 
body. — Is it worth while to write to that man ? — It is not worth 
while to write to him. — Is it worth while to alight in order to buy a 
cake ? — It is not worth while, for it is not long since we ate. — Js it 
worth while to dismount from my horse in order to give something to 
that poor man ? — Yes, for he seems to want it; but you can give 
him something without dismounting from your horse. — Is it better 
to go to the theatre than to study V — It is better to do the latter 
than the former. — Is it better to go to bed than to go a walking V — 
It is better to do the latter than the former. — Is it better to get into 
a coach than to go on board the ship ? — It is not worth while to get 
into a coach or to go on board the ship when one has no wish to 
travel. 



Lesson LXXX. — PENSUM OCTOGESIMUM. 
DERIVATION OF ADJECTIVES. 

A. Adjectives are either primitive or derivative ; as, bonus, wialus ; 
puerllis, amabUis. Derivatives are formed from verbs (verbals), from 
nouns (denominatives), from other adjectives, and sometimes from 
adverbs (adverbials) and prepositions (prepositional*). All these are 
subdivided into various classes, and characterized by peculiar termi- 
natirms. 

B. Adjectives derived from verbs end in bundas, cundus, 
tdus, uus, ilis, bills, ax, and ulus. 

1. Those in bundus are formed chiefly from verbs of the first con- 
jugation, and generally agree in sense with the present participle. 
Sometimes, however, they convey the accessory notion of fulness or 
abundance. E. g. errabundus, pojndabun/lus, wandering, pillaging 



LESSON 80.] DERIVATION OF ADJECTIVES. 505 

(from crrare, populuri). So also hesltabundus, lacrimal fundus, mlra- 
bundus, full of hesitation, of tears, of wonder. A few verbs in cundus 
have a similar sense ; as, rubicundus, ruddy ; Iracundus, given to 
anger ; verccundus, bashful, respectful. 

2. Those in idus are generally from intransitive verbs, and simply 
express the quality implied in the verb. E. g. ealidus, warm ; alc/ulw, 
cold ; rub td us, red, reddish ; rapidus, rapid (from calere, algere, ruber e, 
rapere). A few in uus have a similar signification ; as, asdduus, con- 
f/ruus, nocuus (from assldere, congruere, nocere). But those in uus 
from transitive verbs have a passive sense ; as, consplcuus, visible ; in- 
dlclduus, indivisible. 

3. Those in ilis and bills have a passive sense, and denote possibility 
or capacity. E. g. facills, easy (to be done) ; fragills, fragile ; ama- 
bllls, amiable ; delebtlls, easy to destroy ; placabilis, easily appeased. 
Some of them, however, are active ; as, IwrribXUs, tenibilis, fer fills, &c. 

4. Those in ax denote an inclination or propensity, frequently a 
vicious one. E. g. edax and vorax, voracious ; furax, thievish ; audax, 
audacious; rapax, rapacious (from edere, vorare, &c). The few in 
ulus are analogous ; as, blbulus, given to drinking ; credulus, credulous ; 
querulus, querulous. 

0. The substantives from which derivative adjectives are 
formed are either common nouns or proper names of men and 
places. 

1. Adjectives derived from common nouns end in eus, icus, 
ills, ciceits or ictus, alis, atilis, nis, inus (inus), cirius, osus 
(nosus),lentus, wus, emus, urnus, itimus, ster, citus, itus, and 
utus. 

1. The termination eus designates the material of which anything 
consists or is made, and sometimes also resemblance. E. g. aureus, 
ferreus, plumbeus, made of gold, iron, lead; igneus, vkreus, igneous, 
glassy. Some of this class end either in neus or nus ; as, eburneus or 
eburnus, of ivory ; quemeus or quernus, of oak. 

2. Those in icus and ills signify " belonging or relating to," the for- 
mer in a general, the latter in a moral sense. E. g. aullcus, bellicus, 
rust icus, relating to the court, to war, to the country ; puerdls, senilis, 
vlrllls, belonging (peculiar) to the age of boyhood, old age, manhood. 
Sometimes both from the same noun ; as, clincus and clvllls, hosficus 
or hoslilis, 

3. The terminations aceus and ictus sometimes denote the material, 
and sometimes descent. E. g. chartaceus, membranaceus, cementlcnis, 
made of paper, membrane, cement ; patnclus, trlbuniclus, patrician, 
tribunitial. 

4. Those in alis, drls, and atills are formed not only from nouns in 
a, but also from those of other terminations. E. g. ancortdis, relating 
to an anchor ; convivCdls, convivial ;. regalls, royal, regal ; vlrglncdls, 

43 



>0G LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 80. 



virginal.* The termination oris is generally put when the letter I 
precedes ; as, considaris, puellaris, vulgaris, Apollinaris ; — Stilts con- 
veys the sense of fitness ; as, aqudtiUs, volutilis. 

5. The termination ius belongs principally to substantives in or: as, 
amatorlus, censorius, imperatortus, pertaining to love (or lovers), to the 
censor, to a commander. Sometimes also to other substantives ; as, 
reglus, patrius, royal, fatherly. 

C. Adjectives in Inus are chiefly derived from names of animals, 
especially to denote the flesh of the same. E. g. anallnus, anserlnus, 
asininus, canlnus, equlnus, ferlnus, taurlnus, of a duck, goose, ass, dog, 
horse, wild beast, bull.f Sometimes also from names of other beings ; 
as, mascullnus, femlnlnus, divlnus, libertlnus. Those in inus are de- 
rived either from names of plants or minerals, or from words denoting 
time ; as, cedrlnus, faginus, adamantlnus, of cedar, beech, adamant ; 
crasllnus, annotmus, hornotinus, of to-morrow, of last year, of this year. 

7. Those in arms properly denote a trade or profession, sometimes 
also a more general relation. E. g. carbonarius, coriarius, ostiarius, 
statuarlus, a collier, tanner, porter, statuary; J aeranus, argentarius, 
relating to copper, to silver (or money). 

8. The terminations osus and lentus express fulness or abundance. 
E. g. aerumnosus, artificiosus, tenebricosus, full of misfortune, of skill, 
of darkness ; corpulentus, fraudulently, pulverulenlus, &c. Nouns of 
the fourth declension commonly have uosus ; as, actuosus, full of ac- 
tion ; portuosus, saltuosus, abounding in ports, in woods. 

9. The terminations Ivus, emus, urnus, itimus, and ster denote qual- 
ity, manner, descent, time, place, &c. E. g. furtivus, aesllvus, natlvus, 
secret, of the summer, native; externus, maternus, paternus, external, 
maternal, paternal ; diurnus, noctunius, hibernus, vermis, of the day, 
night, winter, spring: — legitimus, maritimus, legitimate, maritime; — 
campester, of the plain; pedester, pedestrian. 

10. An extensive class of adjectives, ending in dtus (sometimes itus 
or fttus) s have the form and sense of the perfect participle, but are 
derived from nouns. Eg. barbdtus, denfatus, galedtus, falcatus, fur- 
nished with a beard, with teeth, with a helmet, with scythes ; aurltus, 
provided with ears ; pelliius, covered with skins; cornutus, horned; 
nasutus, having a large (or acute) nose. 

11. The adjectives derived from proper names may be divid- 
ed into those formed from, — a) names of individuals ; b) names 
of cities ; c) names of nations ; d) names of countries. 

1. Adjectives derived from names of men end in ianus, anus, eus, 
and Inus; as, Caesaridnus, Catonidnus, Ciceronianus ; Cinndnus, Sul- 
lanus ; Caesareus, Herculeus ; JugurOunus, Plautlnus, &c. The last 

* So also from proper names; as, Augustcdis, Flavialis, Trojandlis, &c. 

f When these adjectives denote the flesh of animals, the feminine is used 
with caro understood; as, anserlna, anat'ma, ferlna, taur'ina, &c. 

X In this sense they stand substantively; but as adjectives proper they sig- 
nify "relating to charcoal, leather, a door or doors, statuary." 



LESSON 80.] DERIVATION OF ADJECTIVES. 507 

of these terminations belongs more especially to derivative family 
names ; as, Paulinus, Rufinus, Agnppina, Planclna, &c. 

To these add the adjectives in eus, ius, icus, and mews, derived from 
Greek names of men. E. g. Achilleus, Sophocleus ; Antiochlus, Ari- 
stotelius ; Homericus, Isocraticus ; Archiacus. Sometimes there are 
two of them (one in eus, the other in icus) from the same noun ; as, 
Philippeus and Philippicus, Pythagoreus and Pytliagoricus. 

2. Adjectives derived from names of cities end in ensis, Inns, as, 
and anus. E. g. Cannae — Canensis, Antiocliia — Antiocliensis ; Flo- 
rentia — Florentlnus, Latium — Lallnus ; Arplnum — Arpinas, Pri- 
vernum — Pnvernas ; Roma — Romdnus, Sparta — Spartdnits. To 
these add those in ws and aeus derived from Greek names of cities ; 
as, Corinlhus — Coriniliius, Ephesus — Ephcsius ; Larissa — Laris- 
saens, Smyrna — Smyrnaeus. 

3. Primitive names of nations give rise to adjectives in tens and ius. 
E.g. Afer — Afrlcus, G alius — Galticus, Seytlia — Scytlncus ; Sy- 
rus — Syrius, Tkrax — Thracius, &c. Some of them are patrial 
substantives and adjectives at the same time ; as, Graecus, Etruscus, 
Sardus. 

4. The names of countries are generally themselves derivatives; as, 
Gallia, Italia, Thracia (from Gallus, lights, Thrax). Some of these, 
however, give rise to adjectives in ensis and cuius ; as, Graeciensis, 
Ilispaniensis ; Africdnus, Germanicdnus, &c. To these add two in 
iacus : Aegyptiacus, Syridcus. 

D. Derivatives from other adjectives end in ulus, olus, cu- 
ius, ellus, and emeus. 

1. All of these except those in aneus are diminutives. E. g. par- 
vulus, primulus ; pauperciilus, leviculus ; novellus, pulchellus ; some 
have even a double diminutive ; as, paucus — paulus and paululus 
(pauxillus and pauxil 'lulus) , bonus — bellus, belliilus. 

2. Those in aneus are formed from adjectives in us, and denote 
•similarity of quality. E.g. rejectaneus, to be rejected; collecta?ieus, 

collected ; subitaneus, sudden. And after the analogy of* these, con- 
sentaneus, praecidaneus, succidaneus. 

( Conduco, ere, duxi, ductum. 
To hire, rent. 1 Mercede conducere (aliquid ab 

( aliquo). 
To hire a house, a room. Domicilium, conclave (mercede) 

conducere. 
To live in a hired house. In conducto habitare. 

The rent. Pretium conducti, pretium habita- 

tionis. 
To let, rent. Locare, elocare (alicui aliquid). 

To part with any one or any Demittere, missum facere, vendere 

thing. aliquem or aliquid. 

To get rid of any one. Absolvere, dimittere aliquem. 



508 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[lesson 80. 



To get rid of anything. 

To get rid of debts. 

Have you already hired a room ? 

Yes, I have hired one. 

Does he live in a hired house ? 

He does not. 

Have they paid their rent ? 

They have not yet paid it. 

Have you a room to let ? 

I have none. 

Do you intend to part "with your 

horses ? 
I have already parted with them. 

He has parted with his carriage. 

We have parted with our ser- 
vant. 

Did you get rid of your damaged 
sugar ? 

I did get rid of it. 

Did he get rid of his old horse ? 

He did not get rid of it. 

To hope, expect. 

I hope. 
As I hope. 
To wait, tarry. 

Do you expect (hope) to find 

him there ? 
I do expect it. 

I hope that my father will come 

Our brother will come, I hope. 

I hope that our friendship will 
last for ever. 



I hope that I may meet you. 

Do vou put your trust in God ? 

I do. [ ' 

I hope no longer. 

You have no reason to hope. 

To change. 

To exchange, change. 



Extrudere (trusi, triisum) aliquid ; 

vendere. 
Debita dissolvere. 
Conduxistine jam conclave ? 
Vero, conduxi unum. 
Nrini in conducto habitat ? 
Non in conducto habitat. - 

Solveriintne pretium habitationis ? 
Nondum solverunt. 
Habesne cubiculum ad locandum ? 
Non habeo. 
Cogitasne submovere (vendere) 

equos '? 
Ego eos jam pridem submdvi (ven- 

didi). 
Pilentum suum dimisit (vendidit). 
Servum nostrum missum feclmus. 

Extrusistine saccharum tuum de- 

perditum ? 
Extriisi. 

Vendiditne equum suum vetulum ? 
Non vendidit. 

Sperare, spem habere, in spe esse. 

Spero, spes me tenet. 
Ut spero, spero. 

Exspectare ; spem ponere (in ali- 
quo or in aliqua re). 

Sperasne, te eum ibi invenire (in- 
venturum esse) ? 

Spero. Spes me tenet. 
( Spero, patrem esse venturum. 
( Spero, fore, ut pater veniat. « 

Frater, ut spero, veniet. 

Frater, spero, veniet. 

Spero, aeternam inter nos amiciti- 
am fore. 

Spero, fore, ut ego tibi dbviam 
veniam. 

Spero, me tibi dbviam venire (ven- 
turum esse). 

Ponisne spem in Deo ? 

Pdno. 

Spero non amplius. 

Xon est, quod speres. 

Miilo, are, del, alum. 
Commutare, permutare. 



LESSON 80.] PHRASES AND EXERCISES. 



oOO 



To change, exchange one 
thing for another. 

To exchange (mutually). 
To change masters. 
To exchange names. 
t To change one's clothes, 
one's hat, &c. 

To change one's horse. 

To change (draught-) horses. 
To change money. 



To exchange letters, to cor- 
respond with any one. 

To put on one's hat. 

To put on linen. 

To put on a cravat. 

The linen. 

The cravat, neckcloth. 

Will you change your clothes ? 
I do not wish to change them. 
Has he changed his linen, hat, 

cravat V 
He has changed it. 
Must I change my shirt ? 
It is proper that you should do 

so. 
Have they exchanged anything ? 
They have exchanged wine for 

oil, and oil for wine. 
They have exchanged a correct 

state of the republic for a 

false one. 
They are bartering away honor 

and religion for money. 
Do you wish to change hats with 

me? 
I am not unwilling. 
They have exchanged gloves. 
Can you change me an aureus? 
I cannot. 
I have exchanged a florin for 

sixty kreutzers. 
The color has changed from 

black to white. 

43* 



!' Mutare or permutare aliquid (cum) 
aliqua re. 
Commutare aliquid cum aliqua re. 
Res inter se mutare or permutare. 
Dominos permutare. 
Nomina inter se permutare. 
Mutare vestem, pileum, &c. 

( Mutare equum. 
( Alteri equo injici. 

Jumenta mutare. 

Pecuniam (nummum) permutare. 

f Litteras dare et accipere. 

\ Litterarum commercio u/L 

j Per litteras cum aliquo colloqui or 

(^ agere. 

j Pileum imponere capiti. 

( Caput tegere (texi, tectum) pileo. 

Incluere sibi lintea (se linteis). 

Induere collum focali. 

Circumligare collum focali. 

Lintea, n. pi. 

Focale, is, n. ; pannus colaris. 

Visne mutare vestem ? 
Nolo mutare. 

Mutavitne sua lintea, pileum, fo- 
cale ? 
Mutavit. 

Oportetne me mutare indiisium ? 
Opdrtet tu hoc facias. 

Commutaveriintne aliquid ? 
Commutaverunt vinum pro dleo et 

oleum pro vino. 
Commutaverunt statum reipiiblicae 

ex vero in falsum. 

Fidem et religionem peciinia com- 

miitant. 
Visne pileos mecum permutare ? 

Non nolo. 

Digitabula inter se permutaverunt 

Potesne mi'hi permutare aureum ? 

Non possum. 

Ego florenum sexaginta kreiitzeris 

permutavi. 
E nigro color ejus mutatus est in 

album. 



510 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 80. 



Everything undergoes change. 

Has he changed his horse ? 

He has not changed it. 
Do you exchange letters (corre- 
spond) with your friend ? 
I do correspond with him. 
I correspond with all my friends. 



To mix, mingle. 

To mix or mingle among 

men. 
To mix, meddle with any- 
thing. 
Not to meddle with, to re- 
frain from anything. 
Does he meddle with your af- 
fairs ? 
He never meddles with other 

people's affairs. 
Have you mixed much, among 

men ? 
I have mixed much and often 

among them. 
He mixes with the soldiers. 



Omnia mutantur. 
( Mutavitne equum ? 
( Injectiisne est alteri equo ? 

Xon mutavit. 

Agisne (colloquerisne) per h'tteras 
cum amico tiio ? 

Yero, ago (cdlloquor). 

!Ego litterarum commercio cum 
amicis mei's omnibus utor. 
(Misceo, ere, viiscui, mistum or mix- 
■} turn. 
( Insero, ere, ui, rlum. 

Se immiscere or inserere homini- 

bus {(kit.). 
Se admiscere or interponere ali- 

cui rei. 
Abesse or se abstinere ab aliqua re. 

Admiscetne se negdtiis tiiis ? 

Niinquam ille se negdtiis alienis 

admiscet (interponit). 
Immiscuistine te miiltum honu'ni- 

bus ? 
Ita est, me miiltum ac saepe im- 

miscui. 
Miscet se mih'tibus. 



rr 7 7 7 ( Recoqnosco, ere, non, ndum. 

lo recognize ; to acknoidedqe. <. . u ~ ; . 

J ' ( Agnoscere (ALiQUE^r, rem). 



Do you recognize this man ? 
It is so long since I saw him, 

that I do not recollect him. 
TVe ought to recognize God 

from his works. 
I acknowledge my error. 



Recognoscisne hiinc hdminem ? 
Tarn dm est, ex quo eum non vidi, 

ut (eum) non recogndscam. 
Kos Deuin ex operibus suis agnd- 

scere opdrtet 
Errorem meum ajindsco. 



Exercise 151. 

Have you already hired a room ? — I have already hired one. — 
Where have you hired it ? — I have hired it in William Street, 
number one hundred and fifty-one. — At whose house have you hired 
it '? — At the house of the man whose son has sold you a horse. — For 
whom has your father hired a room ? — He has hired one for his son 
who has just arrived from Germany. — Did you at last get rid of that 
man ? — I did get rid of him. — Why has your father parted with his 
horses ? — Because he did not Avant them any more. — Have you dis- 
charged your servant ? — I have discharged him, because he served 
me no more well. — Why have you parted with your carriage? — 
Because I do not travel any more. — Has vour merchant succeeded 



LESSON 81.] THE FUTURE TENSE. 511 

at last in getting rid of his damaged sugar ? — He has succeeded in 
getting rid of it. — Has he sold it on credit ? — He was able to sell it 
for cash, so that he did not sell it on credit. — Do you hope to arrive 
early in Paris ? — I hope to arrive there at a quarter past eight, for 
my father is waiting for me this evening. — For what have you ex- 
changed your carriage which you no longer made use of? — I have 
exchanged it for a fine Arabian horse. — Do you wish to exchange 
your book for mine ? — I cannot, for I want it to study German with. 
Why do you take your hat oiF ? — I take it off, because I see my old 
writing-master coming. — Do you put on another hat to go to the 
market ? — I do not put on another to go to the market, but to go to 
the great concert. 

Exercise 152. 

Why does your father put on other clothes ? — He is going to the 
king, so that he must put on others. — Have you put on another hat 
to go to the English captain ? — I have put on another, but I have 
not put on another coat or other boots. — How many tildes a day 
dost thou put on other clothes ? — I put on others to dine and to go 
to the theatre. — Do you often put on a clean shirt (change your 
shirt)? — 'I put on a clean one every morning. — When does your 
father put on a clean shirt ? — He puts it on when he goes to the 
ball. — Does he put on a clean cravat (change his cravat) as often as 
you ? — He puts one on ofcener than I, for he does so six times a day. 

— Did you often take fresh horses when you went to Vienna ? — I 
took fresh ones every three hours. — Will you change me this gold 
coin V — I am going to change it for you ; what money (Quid nwn- 
moruni) do you wish for it ? — I wish to have crowns, florins, and 
kreutzers. — Do you correspond with my friend ? — I do correspond 
with him. — How long have you been corresponding with my brother ? 

— I have been corresponding with him these six years almost. — Why 
do you mix among those people ? — I mix among them in order to 
know what they say of me. — Have you recognized your father? — 
I had not seen him for such a long time, thatl did not recognize him. 

— Do you still speak Latin ? — It is so long since I spoke it, that I 
have nearly (fere) forgotten it all (omnlno). 



Lesson LXXXI. — pensum unum et octo- 
GESIMUM. 

OF THE FUTURE TENSE. 

A. The future tense represents an action or event 
that will take place hereafter. This action may be con- 
sidered either as incomplete or going on at some time 



512 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 81. 

to come (First or Simple Future), or as completed 
(Future Perfect). E. g. 

Seribam, / shall write (shall be engaged in writing). 
Amabitur, He will be loved (will be the object of love). 
Scripsero, I shall have written. 
Amfitus erit, lie will have been loved. 

B. FORMATION OF THE FIRST FUTURE. 

1. The first future active is formed from the present indica- 
tive by changing, 1. o, 2. eo, 3. o {to), 4. to, into, 1. dbo, 2. ebo, 
3. am (lam), 4. mm. As, 

1. amo — amabo, I shall or loill love. 

2. moneo — monebo, / shall or will remind. 

3. lego — legam, I shall or will read. 
(3.) capio — capiam, I shall or will take. 

4. audio — audiam, 1 shall or will hear. 

2. The first future passive is formed from the active, by 
changing the final m into r. As, 

1. amabo — amabor, I shall or ivill be loved. 

2. monebo — monebor, 1 shall or will be reminded. 

3. legam — legar, / shall or will be read. 
(3.) capiam — capiar, / shall or will be taken. 

4. audiam — audiar, I shall or will be heard. 

3. The future of deponent verbs follows the analogy of the 
passive. As, 

1. hortor — hortabor, I shall or will exhort. 

2. vereor — verebor, I shall or will fear. 

3. loquor — loquar, I shall or ivill speak. 

4. blandior — blaudlar, I shall or ivill flatter. 

Remark. — The subjunctive mood wants both the future tenses. 
On the manner of indicating future contingent action, see F. 

INFLECTION OF THE FIRST FUTURE. 

C. The following paradigms exhibit the inflection 
of the first future, active and passive. 

Active. Passive. 

First Conjugation. 

Amabo, I shall or will love. Amabor, I shall or ivill be loved. 

Sing, amabo Sing, amabor 

amabts . amfiberis or -re 

amabit, timabitur, 



LESSON 81.] INFLECTION OF THE FIRST FUTURE. 513 

Active. Passive. 

Plur. amfibimus Plur. amablmur 

amabitis amabimini 

amabunt. amabuntur. 

Second Conjugation 1 ". 
Monebo, I shall or will remind. Monebor, / shall or will be 

reminded. 
Sing, monebo Sing, monebor 

monebis moneberis or -re 

monebit, monebitur, 

Plur. monebimtis Plur. monebhniir 

monebitis monebimmi 

monebunt. monebimttir. 

Third Conjugation. 
Legam, I shall or will read. Legar, I shall or will be read. 
Sing, legam Sing, legar 

leges legeris or -re 

leget, legetur, 

Plur. legemus Plur. legemur 

legetis legemini 

legent. legentur. 

Fourth Conjugation. 
Audiam, I shall or will hear. Audiaf, I shall or ivill be heard. 
Sing, audiam Sing, audiar 

audles audieris or -re 

audiet, audiet ur, 

Plur. audiemus Plur. audiemur 

audietis audiemini 

audient. audientur. 

So conjugate apportdbo, I shall bring; curabo, I shall order; dabo, 
I shall give; laudabo, I shall praise; lavabo, I shall wash; regnabo, I 
shall rule ; secabo, I shall cut ; stabo, I shall stand ; vocabo, I shall call ; 
— audebo, I shall dare ; docebo, I shall teach ; gaudebo, I shall rejoice ; 
habebo, I shall have ; jiibebo, I shall command ; studebo, I shall study ; 
tenebo, I shall hold ; — again, I shall act (do) ; facutm, I shall make 
(do) ; mittam, I shall send ; pmam, I shall place (put) ; scrlbam, I 
shall write; sumam, I shall take ; — aperlam, I shall open ; Jiniam, I 
shall finish ; puniam, I shall punish ; reperiam, I shall find ; sentiam, I 
shall feel ; veniam, I shall come ; inveniam, I shall find, &c. 

To the above add the impersonal futures : constabit, fulgurdbit, 
gelabit, grandinabit, juvcibit, praestabit, restabit ; — apparebit, attinebit, 
debebit, dolebit, nocebit, pertinebit, placebit, solebit , — accidet, incipiet, 
lucescet, ninget, pluet, referet , — conveniet, expediet, &e. (Cf. Les- 
son LV.) 

2G 



514 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 81. 

FUTURE OF DEPONENT VERBS. 

D. The future of deponent verbs is inflected like that of the 
passive voice. Thus : — ■ 

Hor tabor, I shall or will exhort. Loquar, I shall or will speak. 

Sing, hortabor Sing, loquar 

hortabens or -re loqneris or -re 

hortabitur, loquetur, 

Plur. hortabimur Plur. loquemiir 

hortabimini loqueniini 

hortabuntur. loquentur. 

"Verebor, I shall or will fear. Blandiar, I shall or will flatter. 

Sing, verebor Sing, blandiar 

vereberis or -re blandieris or -re 

verebltfir, blandietiir, 

Plur. verebimur Plur. blandiemur 
verebiniini blandiemini 

verebuntur. blandientiir. 

So arbitrator, I shall think ; comitabor, I shall escort ; morabor, I 
shall delay ; — merebor, I shall earn ; miserebor, I shall pity ; tuebof, I 
shall defend ; — labar, I shall glide (fall) ; obliviscar, 1 shall forget ; 
prqficiscar, I shall depart ; sequar, I shall follow ; — experiar, I shall 
experience ; larguir, I shall lavish, &c. 

FUTURE OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 

E. The future of sum is irregular ; volo, fero, edo, and fio 
follow the analogy of the third conjugation, eo and queo that of 
the fourth. E. g. 

1. Ero, I shall or icill be. 

Sing, ero, eris, erit; Plur. erimus, eritis, erunt. 
So adero, I shall be present ; potero, (from possum), I shall be able, 
and all the remaining compounds of sum. 

2. Volam, I shall wish or be willing. 

Sixg. volam, voles, volet ; Plur. volemiis, voletis, volent. 
So malcim, I shall prefer, and nblam, I shall be unwilling. 

3. Feram, 1 shall bear (camy), edam, I shall eat, and flam, I shall 
become, are regularly inflected like legam. So also their compounds ; 
as, afferam, corned am, calefiam, &c. 

4. Ibo, I shall or will go. 

Sing. Ibo, ibis, ibit; Plur. ibimus, ibitis, Ibunt. 
So all its compounds ; as, adibo, iriibo, praeterlbo, sublbo, translbo, 
&c. And in the passive impersonally ibttur, inlbitur, &c. 

5. The future of queo and nequeo is defective, qulbo, qiabunt, and 
nequibunt being the only persons in use. 



LESSON 81.] 



FUTURE SUBJUNCTIVE. 



515 



Shall you love ? 

I shall not love. 

Will he have money ? 

He will not have any. 

Shall you command him to 

leave ? 
I shall command him. 
Shall you send me the book ? 
I shall send it. 
Shall ye write letters ? 
We shall write some. 
Will they come or go away ? 
They will come. 
Will he be contented ? 
He will. 

They will not be contented. 
Will it rain or snow to-day ? 
Shall you exhort him to speak ? 
I shall exhort him. 
Will he defend us ? 
He will not defend us. 
Will they forget their duty ? 
He will not forget them. 
Shall ye squander any money ? 
We shall not squander any at all. 
Will we be loved ? 
You will not be loved. 
Will our books be read ? 
They will certainly be read. 



Amabisne ? Num amabis ? 
Non amabo. 
Habebitne peciiniam ? 
Non habebit. 
Jubebisne eum abire ? 

Jubebo. 

Mittesne mini librum ? 

Mittam. 

Scribetisne epistolas ? 

Vero, scribemus nonniillas. 

IJtrum illi venient an abibunt ? 

Venient. 

Eritne contentus ? 

Erit. 

Non erunt contenti. 

Pluetne hddie an ninget ? 

Hortaberisne eum, ut verba faciat ? 

Hortabor. 

Num nos tuebitur ? 

Nos non tuebitur. 

Obliviscentiirne officia sua ? 

Non obliviscentur. 

Niimquid pecuniae largiemini ? 

Nullam omnino largiemur. 

Amabimiirne ? Nosne amabimur ? 

Non amabimini. 

Legenturne li'bri ndstri ? 

Leo-entur sine lilla dubitatione. 



FUTURE SUBJUNCTIVE. 

F. Latin verbs have no special form for the future subjunc- 
tive. When, in dependent clauses, it becomes necessary to 
express future contingent action, the Romans proceed as fol- 
lows : — 

I. If the main clause contains a verb of the future tense, the 
present or imperfect subjunctive supplies the place of the first 
future subjunctive in the dependent clause. E. g. 
Aifirmo tibi, si hoc beneficiam If you will do me this favor, I as- 



mihi tribuas. me 



gaoisurum. 
Amrmubam tibi 



magnopere 



si lllud benefi- 
cium mihi iribueres, magnopere 
me gavisurum. 
Afifirmo tibi, si hoc beneficium 
mihi tribudtur, me magnopere 
savisurum. 



sure you that I shall be greatly 
delighted. 

I assured you that I should be 
greatly delighted, if you would 
do me that favor. 

I assure you, that, if this favor is 
done me, I shall be greatly de- 
lighted. 



516 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[lesson 81. 



He said that he (i. e. the son) 
would be unfortunate, unless he 
obeyed his father. 

One of these is reported to have 
said, that Rome would in a short 
time be taken by the Gauls. 

If you perchance shall write me, I 
will see that you shall not think 
that you have written to uo pur- 
pose. 

II. "When no verb of the future tense precedes, and the con- 
struction still requires a future subjunctive, the participle in 
rus, with sim or essem, is employed. E. g. 

I do not doubt but that he will 

return. 
I did not doubt but that he would 

return. 
I wish you to write to me, what 

you intend to do about these 

matters. 
You should not doubt but that you 

will be what you ought to be. 
I do not doubt but he will be 

praised. 
Many were convinced (did not 

doubt) 



Eum, ni pdreat patri, habiliirum 
infortunium esse dixit. 

Ex his quidam dixisse dicltur, 

fore, ut brevi a Gallis Roma 

caper etur. 
Tu si quid forte ad me scripseris, 

perficiam, ne te friistra scri- 

psi'sse arbitrere. 



Kon dubito, quin rediturus sit. 

!Non dubitabam, qiun rediturus 

esset. 
His de rebus, quid acturus sis, 

reseribas mi'hi velim. 



Kon debes dubitare, quin sis fu- 

turus, qui esse debes. 
Kon dubito, quinftdurum sit, ut 

laudetur. 
Miilti non dubitabant, quin futu- 

rum esset, ut Caesar a Pompejo 

vinceretur. 
jSTescio, num fuiurwn sit, ut eras 

hoc ipso tempore jam redierit. 



The dust; the mud : the 
smoke. 

Dustv. 

Muddy. 

Smoky. 
Is it dusty ? 
It is dusty. 
It is very dusty. 

Is it muddy out of doors ? 
It is very muddy. 

Does it smoke ? 

It is quite smoky (it smokes 

much). 
It is too smoky (it smokes too 

much). 



that Cffisar would be 

conquered by Pompey. 

I do not know whether he will 

have returned to-morrow at this 

time. 

Pulvis, eris, m. ; lutum, i, n. ; Junius, 

i, m. 
Pulverulentus. a, urn. 
Lutosus, lutulentus, a, um. 
Fumosus, a. um. 
Ortiisne est pulvis ? 
Ortus est. 

Vis piilveris magna est. 
( Eequid est fdris lutum ? 
\ Siintne viae lutdsae ? 
( Sunt vero admodum lutdsae. 
Vis liiti permagna est. 
Ortusne est fumus V 
( Fumatne ddmus ? 
Orta est vis fiimi magna. 



Est 



fiimi. 



LESSON 81.] THRASES AND EXERCISES. 



517 



To go in or into 
place) . 

To enter. 
To sit. 



(any 



To sit down, to take a seat. -I 



To sit down by the side of 

any one. 
To be seated by the side of 

any one. 
To sit still, keep one's seat. 

To be over, left. 
To have left. 

It remains (sc. that I should 
do this). 

To Jill. 

Shall you go in ? 

I shall not go in. 

I shall sit down upon this chair. 

Will you sit down by my side ? 

Let me sit down upon the 

ground. 
Will you please to sit down in 

the chair ? 
No, I have no time to sit down. 
Where is your scholar sitting ? 
He is sitting over his books in 

school. 
We sat down in the library. 
Will you sit down by the fire ? 
No, I am not cold. 
Will your boy come into the 

house ? 
He will (shall) come in immedi- 
ately. 
Shall you go into the city with 

me ? 
I shall not go. 
How much money have you 

left? 
I have three florins left. 
I have but one florin left. 

44 



Imre, introire, ingredi (ingressus 

Sum) (IN, AD LOCUM, LOCUM). 

Intrare, introire (locum). 
( Sedeo, ere, sedi, sessum (in re, 

( AD REM). 

f Assido, ere, sedi, sessum. 
Consido, ere, sedi, sessum. 
Residere, subsidere. 

(in sella, humi, &c.) 
Assidere aliquem. 

Assidere alicui. 

Residere, quietum sedere, non sur- 

gere (surrexi, surrectum). 
Restare, relinqui, reliquum esse. 
Reliquum habere. 
Restat, reliquum est, ut hoc faciam. 

Impleo, ere, evi, etum. 
Complere, explere, replere. 

(ALIQUID ALIQUA RE.) 

Ibi'sne intro ? 

Non lbo. 

Ego hac in sella assidam. 

Visne me assidere ? 

Considamus hiimo. 

Placetne tibi assidere in sella ? 

Non, dtio ad assidendum careo. 
XJbi sedet discipulus tiius ? 
Assidet libris in schdla. 

In bibliotheca consedimus. 
Visne assidere apud carbdnes ? 
Nolo ; nam non algeo. 
Venietne piier tiius intro ? 

Sane, veniet intro e vestigio. 

Inibisne mecum in lirbem ? 

Non in lbo. 

Quanta tibi pecunia reliqua est ? 

Reliqui sunt milii tres floreni. 
Unum tantum florenum reliquum 
habeo. 



518 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 81. 

If I pay Mm, I have but little SI illi debitum sdlvam, reliquum 
left. non habebo nisi parum. 

G. Obs. The conjunction si, " if," and nisi, " if not," or 
" unless," is followed either by the indicative or subjunctive, 
according to the sense to be conveyed. (Cf. Lessons LXXXIV. 
and LXXXVI.) 

If he comes, I shall speak to him. Si veniet (venit or veniat), cum eo 

cdlloquar. 

If the weather is fine to-morrow, Si tempestas crastina est (== erit) 

I shall take a walk. bona, lbo ambulatum. 

I shall pay you, if I receive my Sdlvam tibi debita, si pecunias meas 

money. accipiam. 

If he addresses (speaks to) me, I Si me alloquetur, respondebo. 

shall answer him. 

If you will promise me to keep it Si mihi polliceberis rem tacere, te- 

secret, I shall tell it to you. cum communicabo. 

I have spent all my money, so Pecuniam meam dmnem expendi, 

that I have none left. ut nulla relinquatur. 

Do you fill your goblet with Implesne pdculum tuum vino ? 



wine 



I do fill it with pure wine. fmpleo id mero. 

Did he fill his purse with money? Explevitne marsiipium siium pecii- 

nia? 

He was not able to fill it. Explore non pdtuit. 

Shall you fill the bottle with !Ecquid lagenam implebis vino ? 

wine? 

No, I shall fill it with pure wa- f mmo pdtius earn aqua piira im- 

ter. plebo. 

Exercise 153. 

Will your father go out to-day ? — He will go out if it is fine 
weather. — Will your sister go out ? — She will go out, if it is not 
windy. — Will you love my brother ? — I shall love him with all my 
heart, if he is as good as you. — Will your parents go into the 
country to-morrow ? — They will not go, for it is too dusty. — Shall 
we take a walk to-day ? — We will not take a walk, for it is too 
muddy out of doors. — Do you see the castle of my relation behind 
yonder mountain ? — I do see it. — Shall we go in ? — We will go in, 
if you like. — Will you go into that room ? — I shall not go into it, 
for it is smoky. — I wish you a good morning, madam. — AVill you 
not come in ? — Will you not sit down ? — I will sit down upon that 
large chair. — Will you tell me what has become of your brother ? — 
I will tell you. — Here is the chair upon which he sat often. — When 
did he die ? — He died two years ago. — I am very much (vehemen- 
ter) afflicted at it. — Hast thou spent all thy money ? — I have not 
spent all. — How much hast thou left of it ? — I have not much left 
of it ; I have but one florin left. — How much money have thy sisters 
left ? — They have but three crowns left. — Have you money enough 



LESSON 82.] THE FUTURE PERFECT. 519 

left to pay your tailor ? — I have enough of it left to pay him ; but if 
1 pay him, I shall have but little left. — How much money will your 
brothers have left ? — They will have a hundred crowns left. — Will 
you speak to my uncle if you see him ? If I see him, I shall speak to 
him. — Will you take a walk to-morrow ? — If it is fine weather, I 
shall take a walk ; but if it is bad weather, I shall stay at home. — 
Will you pay your shoemaker ? — I shall pay him, if I receive my 
money to-morrow. — Why do you wish to go ? — If your father comes, 
I shall not go; but if he does not come, I must go. — Why do you 
not sit down ? — If you will stay with me, I will sit down ; but if you 
go, I shall go along with you. — Will you love my children ? — If they 
are good and assiduous, I shall love them ; but if they are idle and 
naughty, I shall despise and punish them. — Am I right in speaking 
thus ? — You are not wrong. 



Lesson LXXXII. — pensum alterum et 

OCTOGESIMUM. 

OF THE FUTURE PERFECT. 

A. I. The future perfect of the active voice is formed from 
the perfect indicative by changing i into ero. E. g. 

1. amavi — amavero, I shall have loved. 

2. monui — monuero, I shall have reminded. 

3. legi — legero, I shall have read. 

4. audlvi — audivero, I shall have heard. 

II. The future perfect passive is compounded of the perfect 
participle and ero, " I shall be." E. g. 

1. amatus ero or fuero, I shall have been loved. 

2. monitus ero or fuero, I shall have been reminded. 

3. lectus ero or fuero, I shall have been read. 

4. auditus ero or fuero, I shall have been heard. 

INFLECTION OF THE FUTURE PERFECT. 

B. The inflection of the future perfect, active and 

passive, is exhibited by the following paradigms : — 

Active. Passive. 

First Conjugation. 

Amavero, I shall have loved. Amatus ero, I shall have been 

loved. 

Sing, amavero Sing, amatus ero or fuero 

amaveris amatus eris or fueris 

amaverit, amatus erit or fuerit, 



520 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 82. 

Active. > Passive. 

Plur. amaverimtis Plur. amati erimus or fuerimus 

amaveritis * amati eritis or fueritis 

amaverint. amati erunt or fuerint. 

Second Conjugation. 
Monuero, I shall have reminded. Monitus ero, I shall have been 

reminded. 
Sing, monuero Sing, monitus ero or fuero 

monueris monitus eris or fueris 

monuerlt, monitus erit or fuerit, 

Plur. monuerimus Plur. moniti erimus or fuerimus 

monueritis moniti eritis or fueritis 

monuerint. moniti erunt or fuerint. 

Third Conjugation. 
Le^ero, I shall have read. Lectus ero, I shall have been read. 
Sing, legero Sing, lectus ero or fuero 

legeris lectus erit or fueris 

legerit, lectus erit or fuerit, 

Plur. legerimus Plur. lecti erimus or fuerimus 

legeritis lecti eritis or fueritis 

legerint. lecti erunt or fuerint. 

Fourth Conjugation. 
Audivero, I shall have heard. Auditus ero, I shall have been heard. 
Sing, audivero Sing, auditus ero or fuero 

audiveris auditus eris or fueris 

audlverit, auditus erit or fuerit, 

Plur. audlverimus Plur. audlti erimus or fuerimus 

audlverftis audlti eritis or fueritis 

audlverint. audlti erunt or fuerint. 

So conjugate apportavero, I shall have brought ; curavero, I shall 
have ordered ; laudavero, I shall have praised ; vocdvero, I shall have 
called ; dedero, I shall have given ; secuero, I shall have cut ; stetero, 
I shall have stood ; — docuero, I shall have taught ; habuero, I shall 
have had ; jussero, I shall have commanded ; tenuero, I shall have 
held ; egero, I shall have acted ; fecero, I shall have done (made) ; 
m'isero, I shall have sent ; posuero, I shall have put ; scripsero, I shall 
have written ; sumpsero, I shall have taken ; — finwero, I shall have 
finished ; punlvero, I shall have punished ; sitlvero, I shall have thirsted ; 
€iperuero, I shall have opened ; reperero, I shall have found ; vmero, I 
shall have come, &c. 



* The i of the imits and ids of this tense (as of the perfect subjunctive) 
ither long or short, perhaps more frequently long. The is of the second perse 



LESSON 82.] FUTURE PERFECT OF DEPONENT VERBS. 521 



To these add the irregular verbs fuero, I shall have been ; poiuero, 
I shall have been able ; voluero (noluero, maluero), I shall have been 
willing (unwilling, more willing) ; tulero, I shall have carried ; Ivero 
(ciblvero, prodlcero, &c.), I shall have gone (gone away, gone out). 

Remark. — The future perfect active is liable to syncopation, like 
the perfect (cf. page 239). E. g. amaro, delero, consuero, instead of 
amavero, delevero, consuevero. That of the fourth conjugation is 
frequently derived from the secondary perfect in ti; as, audiero, fini- 
ero, puniero, prodiero, &c. 



Will you have loved ? 

I shall have loved. 

If you and I shall have loved. 

Will you have reminded ? 

AVe will not have reminded. 

Will they have read the book ? 

He will have read it. 

Shall we have heard ? 

You will not have heard. 

Shall I have been loved ? 

You will not have been loved. 

Shall Ave have been punished ? 

You will not have been punished. 

Will the letters have been written ? 

They will not have been written. 



Amaverisne '? 

Vero, amavero. 

Si ego et tu amaverimus. 

Niim vos monueritis ? 

Nos non monuerimus. 

Legerintne librum ? 

Legerint. 

Audiverimiisne ? 

Non audiveritis. 

Egon' ero amatus ? 

Non eris amatus. 

Erimiisne puniti ? 

Puniti non eritis. 

Scriptaene erunt epistolae ? 

Non erunt scriptae. 



FUTURE PERFECT OF DEPONENT VERBS. 

C. The future perfect of deponent verbs is the same as that 
of the passive voice. E. g. 



Hortatus ero, I shall have ex- 
horted. 
Sing, hortatus ero or fuero 
hortatus eris or fueris 
hortatus erit or fuerit, 
Plur. hortati ermiusorfuerimus 

hortati eritis or fueritis 
hortati erunt or fuerint. 



Blanditus ero, I shall have flat- 
tered. 
Sing, blanditus ero or fuero 
blanditus eris or fueris 
blanditus erit or fuerit, 
Plur. blanditi erlinus or fue- 
rimus 
blanditi eritis or fueritis 
blanditi erunt or fuerint. 

So, 2. veritus ero, I shall have feared ; 3. locutus ero, I shall have 
spoken. To these add, according to the respective conjugations : 
arbitratus ero., I shall have thought ; comitatus ero, I shall have es- 
corted; moratus ero, I shall have delayed ; — meritus ero, I shall have 
earned ; miseritus ero, I shall have pitied ; tuitus ero, I shall have 
defended ; lapsus ero, I shall have glided ; oblitus ero, I shall have 
forgotten ; profectus ero, I shall have departed ; secutus ero, I shall 
have followed ; — expertus ero, I shall have experienced ; largltus erOj 
I shall have lavished. 

44* 



522 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[lesson 82. 



Will lie Lave exhorted ? 
He will not have exhorted. 
Will you have departed ? 
Yes, I shall have departed. 
Shall we have flattered ? 
You will not have flattered. 
Will they have forgotten their 

duties ? 
They will not have forgotten 

them. 



Eritne hortatus ? 

!Non erit hortatus. 

Erfsne profectus ? 

Ve'ro, profectus ero. 

Niim nos blandfti erimus ? 

Blanditi non eritis. 

Oblitine erunt officiorum suoruni ? 

(Eorum) non dbliti erunt. 



ON THE USE OF THE FUTURE PERFECT. 

D. The future perfeet declares that an action or event will 
be completed at or before the time of another future action or 
event. Hence it can only be used in connection with another 
future verb, with an imperative, or with a verb involving the 
notion of futurity. E. g. 

If I am (shall have been) innocent 
in everything, what harm can 
enmity inflict on me ? 

I shall not cease to be afraid of 
Carthage, until I shall have heard 
of its destruction. 

We shall be better men, when we 
shall have learnt what nature 
requires of us. 

Reply to what I ask (shall have 
asked) with reference to your- 
self. 

Grant me this one point, and you 
will have cut off the best part of 
your defence. 

I do not (shall not) think of the 
sale of my villa, unless I shall 
have found something that can 
afford me greater pleasure. 



Si in omnibus innocens fiiero, 
quid mini inimicitiae nocehunt $ 

De Carthagine vereri non ante 
desmam, quaui illam excisam 
cognovero. 

Morati melius erimus, quum didi- 
cerlmus, quae natura desideret. 

Respondeto ad ea, quae de te ipso 
rogdro. 

Da mini hoc, jam tibi max imam 
partem defensionis praecideris. 

Ego de venditione villae meae 
nihil cogito, nisi quid, quod 
magis me delectet, invenero. 



Remarks. 

1. The distinction expressed by the future perfect is always ob- 
served in Latin, and is frequently put where the English idiom sub- 
stitutes the first future, the present, or the perfect. E. g. Ut sementem 
feceris, ita metes, As you have (shall have) sown, so you will reap. 
Si invenero, tecum communicabo, If I find it (shall have found it), I 
will communicate it to you. And so frequently in conditional clauses, 
where the result is dependent on the previous fulfilment of a condition ; 
as, si voluero, si potuero, si licuerit, si placuerit, si otium habuero, where 
in English we commonly put the present or first future. 

2. The future perfect is often elegantly put for the simple future, 



LESSON 82.] SUBJUNCTIVE OF THE FUTURE PERFECT. 523 



in order to impart an air of rapidity or certainty to the event. E. g; 
Ah, si pergis, abiero, If you proceed, I am off. Quid inventum sit, paulo 
post videro, I shall see presently what has been found. Respiraro, si 
le videro, I shall breathe again, if I have seen you. Pergratum mild 
feceris, si dederis operam, ut, &c, You will oblige me very much, if 
you see to it that, &c. Qui Antonium oppresserit, is hoc helium teter- 
rimum confecerit, He who puts down (shall first have put down) An- 
tonius, will put an end to this destructive war.* 

SUBJUNCTIVE OF THE FUTURE PERFECT. 

E. The subjunctive of the future perfect, like that of the 
simple future, is wanting. (Cf. Lesson LXXXI. F.) Its place 
is supplied by the perfect and pluperfect subjunctive. E. g. 



Aflfirmo tibi, si hoc beneficium 
mihi tribueris, me quamciinque 
pdssini gratiam tibi relaturum. 

Affirmabat mihi, si illud benefi- 
cium ipsi tribuissem, se quam- 
ciinque posset gratiam mihi 
relaturum. 

Quis hoc non perspicit, praeclare 
nobiscum actum iri, si pdpulus 
Romanus istius unius supplicio 
contentus fuerit ? 

De Rosciorum audacia turn me 
dicturum pollicitus sum, quum 
Enicii crimlna diluissem. 



I shall have written my letters 

before you return. 
When I shall have paid for 

my horse, I shall have but ten 

florins left. 
What will you do when you shall 

have dined ? 
I shall go out. 
When I shall have spoken to 

your brother, I shall know 

what I have to do. 
Before {sooner). 
Not until, not before. 

Sooner (rather) than. 



I assure you, that, if you shall have 
done me this favor, I shall ren- 
der you all the thanks in my 
power. 

I assured you, that, if you should 
have done me that favor, I would 
render you all the thanks in my 
power. 

Who does not see, that we shall 
fare nobly, if the Roman people 
shall have been contented by the 
punishment of this one individual. 

I have promised to discourse on the 
audacity of the Roscii, as soon as 
I shall have refuted the charges 
preferred against Erucius. 

Epistolas meas, antequam redibis, 

scripsero. 
Quum equi pretium persdlvero, 

decern tantum florenos re'liquos 

habebo. 
Quid facies, quum coenaveris ? 

In publicum prodibo. 

Quum ad fratrem tuum lociitus ero, 

turn sciam, quid mihi faciendum 

sit. 
Priusquam, antequam, antea quam. 
Non prius quam, non ante (antea) 

quam. 
Potius quam. 



* Thus frequently, when another clause already contains a future perfect, 
as in several of the examples given. — The future perfect videro appears in the 
same sense in expressions like mox, post, alias, alio loco videro, I shall see (or 
examine) presently, hereafter, elsewhere, in another place. 



524 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 82. 



I shall not do it, before you tell 

me (shall have told me). 
I shall not see him, until I go 

(shall have gone) thither. 
Did you see him before he left ? 
I did see him. 

Outside of, out of, without. 
Outside of the town, city. 
The church stands outside the 

city. 
I shall wait for you before the 
city gate. 

The city gate. 
To go out. 
To come out. 
Seldom, rarely. 

To continue, proceed with. 

Will you continue as you began ? 

I will. 

He continues (proceeds) with 

his speech, with his inquiry. 
You must continue to speak loud. 

The appetite. 

A keen appetite. 

A want of appetite. 

To have an appetite. 

To have a good appetite. 
To have no appetite. 

Have you an appetite ? 

I have one. 

He had no appetite at all. 

The narrative, tale. 

The shore (coast). 
The bank, shore. 
On the bank, shore. 

Is he still sitting under the tree 

by the sea-shore ? 
He is sitting there no longer. 

The same. 

The very same. 



Id non prius fuciam, quam jiisse- 
r ris.* 
Eum non videbo, antequam l'lluc 

l'ero. 
Vidistine eum, antequam discessit ? 
Factum (est). 
Extra (Prep, cum Ace). 
Extra dppidum (urbem). 
Templum extra urbis miiros si'tum 

est. 
Te extra urbis pdrtam exspectabo. 

Porta, ae, f {so. urbis, oppidi). 
( Exire, egredi (e.g. per portam), 
( foras Ire. 

Exire, egredi, prodire. 
( Raro, non saepe ; perraro (very 
I rarely). 
( Pergo, ere, perrexi, perrectum (in 

< EE, FACERE REM). 

(Persequi, continuare (rem). 
Yisne pergere, ut coepisti ? 
Yolo. 
Persequitur dicendo, quaerendo. 

Clara voce ldqui pergas opdrtet. 

Cibi appetentia o?-cupiditas (atis,/.). 

Edacitas, atis, f 

Fastidium, i, n. 
\ Cibum appetere. 
\ Alicui cibi cupiditas est. 

Cibum libenter sumere, libenter 

Cibum fastidire. [coenare. 

( Appetisne cibum ? 
i Esne appetens edundi ? 

Appeto. Appetens sum cibi. 

Cibum fastidivit. 

Narratio, onis, f; expositio, onis, 
/. ; fabella, ae,/*. 

Litus, oris, n. 

Ripa, ae,/. 

Juxta ripam, ad (apud, juxta) litus. 

Residetne etiam mine sub arbore 

juxta litus ? 
Residet ibi non amplius. 
Idem, eadem, idem. 
Idem ipse, is ipse, eadem ipsa, &c. 



* Compare Lesson LXXXIX. A. vn. 



LESSON 82.] PHRASES AND EXERCISES. 



525 



One and the same. 
The same thing, things. 
Of the same kind. 
Of the same color. 
To be the same (to make no dif- 
ference). 
It is all one (the same). 
It is all one (makes no differ- 
ence) to me. 
It makes no difference, whether 

yon go or stay. 
I am constantly obliged to hear 

the same thing. 
He is constantly driving at the 
same thing. 
Such. 
Such a man, woman, child. 

Such men deserve esteem. 

There is — there are. 

Here is — here are. 

Here I am ! 
Here he is. 
Here is your letter. 
Here they are. 
Here is my book. 
Therefore, for that reason, on 
that account. 

For which reason, on which ac- 
count. 

For the reason, that ; because. 

Why do you complain ? 
This is the reason why I com- 
plain. 
You see the reason why he left. 
Here is the reason why he has 

changed his opinion. 
Therefore I say so. 

/ have cause for laugh- 
ing, weeping, %c. 



Unus et idem. 
Idem ; eadem. 
Ejusdem generis. 
Ejusdem coloris. 
(Nihil differre. 
\ Nihil interesse. 
Nihil interest (differt). 
Mea nihil interest, refert. (Cf. 

page 411, C.) 
Nihil interest, lilrum abeas an mo- 
re ris. 
Semper ista audire eadem coactus 

sum. 
tJno dpere eandem inciidem diem 

noctemque tiindit. 
Tcdis, e ; hujusmodi, ejusmodi. 
Talis homo, mulier, infans, homo 

hujusmodi, &c. 
Tales homines (homines ejusmodi) 
observantia digni sunt. 
( lbi (istic, illic) est — ibi sunt ; en, 
\ ecce (cum Nom. or Ace). 
( Hie est, adest — hie sunt, adsunt ; 
\ en, ecce (cum Nom. or Ace). 



Adsi 



£c< 



Eccum* adest. En hie est ille. 

^Ecce tuae litterae. 

!Eccos adsunt. En hie sunt illi. 

En tibi liber me us. 

Eo, ea re, ob earn rem, ob earn 

causam. 
Ideo, idcirco, proptcrea. 
Quocirca, quapropter. 

( Eo, quod ; ideo, quod ; proptcrea, 
I quod. 

Quid est igitur, cur querarc ? 

Haec est causa, cur (propter quam) 
queror. 

Quamobrem abierit, causam vides. 

En causa, cur sententiam mutavit. 

lta de causa hoc dico. 
f Est quod rid earn, fleam. 
\ Est mihi causa ridendi, fiendi. 



* Compare pages 37, Rem. 2, and 344. 



526 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LKSSON 82. 

The father has no cause for weep- Non est, quod pater fleat. 
ing. 

, r . , , , , , ( Sdror mea alget manibus. 

My sister s hands are cold. j Frfgent ^^ m6dQ milnus> 

Tr . » . , , ( Alget pedibus. 

His feet are cold. j Pedes ejus frigent. 

To hunt. Venari, in venatione esse. 

To go a hunting. Venatum ire. 

To send back. Remitto, ere, misi, missum. 

m , ( Relego, ere, le^i, lectum. 

To read again. ^ Rnn j^ it g rum c leggre< 

Again (once more), a sec- llursus (rursum), iteruni, denuo, 

ond time, anew. de integro. 

The mistake, error. Mendum, erratum, peccatum, viti- 

um, i, n. 

m l • . i • ( Pecco, are, avi, atum. 

To make a mistake or mis- ) Qffend d[ 

takes (in anything). } (m ^ JQ ^ ' re } 

Full of errors. Mcndosus, vitiosus, a, um. 

Free from errors. Vitiis carens, vitio purus, a, um. 

To be free from mistakes Vitiis care re ; sine "vitiis esse. 
or errors. 

Exercise 154. 

When will you go to Italy ? — I shall go as soon as I have learnt 
Italian. — When will your brothers go to Germany ? — They will go 
thither as soon as they know German. — When will they learn it ? — 
They will learn it when they have found a good master. — How much 
money shall we have left when we have paid for our horse ? — When 
we have paid for it we shall have only a hundred crowns left. — Have 
you told my brother that I have been obliged to sell the carriage ? — 
I have told him so. — Have you written to the same man to whom 
my father wrote ? — I have not written to the same, but to another. 

— Have they already answered you V — Not yet, but I hope to re- 
ceive a letter next week — Have you ever seen such a person ? — I 
have never seen such a one. — Have you already seen our church ? 

— I have not seen it yet. — Where does it stand ? — It stands out- 
side the town. — If you wish to see it, I will go with you in order to 
show it to you. — Who is there ? — It is I. — Who are those men ? 
They are foreigners who wish to speak to you. — Of what country 
are they ? — They are Americans. — Where have you been since I 
saw you ? — ■ We sojourned long on the sea-shore, until a ship ar- 
rived, which brought us to France. — Will you continue your narra- 
tive? — Scarcely had we arrived in France when we were taken to 
the king, who received us very well (nos benigne excepit), and sent 
us back to our country. — Whom are you looking for ? — I am look- 
ing for my little brother. — If you wish to find him, you must go into 
the garden, for he is there. — The garden is large, and I shall not be 
able to find him, if you do not tell me in which part (qua in parte) of 
the garden he is. — He is sitting under the large tree under which we 
were sitting yesterdav. — Now I shall find him. 



LESSON 83.] THE CONSECUTIO TEMPOKUM. 527 

Exercise 155. 

Why do your children not live in France ? — They wish to learn 
English, that is the reason why they live in England. — Why do you 
sit near the fire V — My hands and feet are cold, that is the reason 
why I sit near the fire. — What do the people live upon that live on 
the sea-shore ? — They live upon fish alone. — Why will you not go 
a hunting any more V — I hunted yesterday the whole day, and I 
killed nothing but an ugly bird, that is the reason why I shall not go 
a hunting any more. — Why do you not eat ? — I shall not eat belbre 
I have a good appetite. — Why does jour brother eat so much ? — 
lie has a good appetite, that is the reason he eats so much. — If you 
have read the books which I lent you, why do you not return them to 
me '? — I intend reading them once more, that is the reason why I 
have not yet returned them to you ; but I shall return them to you as 
soon as I have read them a second time. — Why did you not bring me 
my clothes V — They were not made, therefore I did not bring them ; 
but I bring them to you now; here they are. — You have learnt your 
lesson ; why has your sister not learnt hers ? — She has taken a walk 
with my mother, that is the reason why she has not. learnt it ; but she 
will learn it to-morrow. — When will you correct my exercises ? — I 
will correct them when you bring me those of your sister. — Do you 
think you have made mistakes in them ? — I do not know. — If you 
have made mistakes, you have not studied your lessons well ; for the 
lessons must be learnt well, if you wish to have them free from er- 
rors. — It is all the same, if you do not correct them (for) me to-day, 
I shall not learn them before to-morrow (ante diem onstinum non 
discani) . — You must make no mistakes in your exercises, for you 
have all you want to write them without any errors. 



Lesson LXXXIII. — PENSUM OCTOGESIMUM 
TERTIUM. 

OF THE CONSECUTIO TEMPORUM. 

A. The tenses of the indicative mood may be connected 
with each other, according to the requirements of the speaker, 
and are subject to no limitation. E. g. Ego, qui lieri ludebam, 
hodie scribo, eras mane autem, qiium litteras ad te dedero, in 
urbem proficiscar. But in dependent clauses, introduced by a 
conjunction or a pronoun, the tense of the subjunctive is always 
determined by that of the verb in the leading clause. This 
order or connection of tenses is called consecutio tempo rum, and 
is subject to the following laws : — 



528 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 83. 



I. The Present, the Perfect Definite, and the Future Tenses 
of the leading clause, are followed by the Present or Perfect 
Subjunctive in the dependent clause. E. g. 
Video (vidi, videbo, videro), quid 

clgas or quid egeris. 



Die mihi, quiddgat or quid egerit. 

Rdgo (rogavi, rogabo, rogavero), 

ut scribas. 
Hoc ideo facio (feci, faciam, fe- 

cero), ut intelttgas. 

Nemo ita eaecus est (fiiit, erit, 
fue'rit), ut non intelligat or in- 

tellcxerit. 

Nemo est (fiiit, erit, fiierit), qui 

non intelligat or intellexerit. 

Nemo est, qui noniniellectiirus sit. 



I see (have seen, shall see, shall 
have seen) what you are doing, 
or what you have done. 

Tell me what he is doing, or what 
he has done. 

I beg you (have begged, shall beg, 
shall have begged yon) to write. 

I do (have done, shall do, shall 
have done) this, in order that 
you may understand. 

No one is (has been, will be, will 
have been) so blind, as not to 
comprehend or to have compre- 
hended. 

There is (has been, will be, will have 
been) no one, but what compre- 
hends or has comprehended. 

There is no one, but what will com- 
prehend. 



II. The Imperfect, the Perfect Indefinite, and the Pluperfect 
of the leading clause, are followed by the Imperfect or Pluper- 
fect Subjunctive in the dependent clause. E. g. 

Videbam (vidi, vide ram), quid 



ageret or egisset. 
Rogabam (rogavi, rogaveram), ut 

scriberes. 
Hoc ideo faciebam (feci, fece- 

ram), ut intelligeret. 
Nemo ita eaecus erat (fiiit, fue- 

rat), ut non intelligeret or in- 

iellexisset. 
Nemo erat (fuit, fiierat), qui non 

intelligeret or intellexisset. 

Nemo erat, qui non intellecturus 
e'sset. 



I w r as seeing (I saw, had seen), 
what he did, what he had done. 

I begged (did beg, had begged) 
you to write. 

I was doing (I did, had done) this, 
that you might understand. 

No one was (had been) so blind, 
as not to comprehend or to have 
comprehended. 

There was (had been) no one, but 
what comprehended or had com- 
prehended. 

There w r as no one, but what would 



comprehend. 

Note. — The dependent clauses in which this construction occurs 
are, — a) those containing an indirect question ; b) those introduced 
by ut or ne : c) those introduced by a relative pronoun, or by one of 
the relative conjunctions quo, quin, quominus, &c. The following 
examples will illustrate this still further : — 

Quaeritur, Corinthiis bellum in- The question is, whether we shall 
dicdmus, an nun. declare war against the Corin- 

thians, or not. 



LESSON 83.] THE CONSECUTIO TEMPORU3I. 



529 



Quaesivi, e'cquis esset venturus. 



I inquired, whether any one was 
about to come. 

It is difficult to say, whether his 
enemies dreaded his valor more 
in battle, than they cherished his 
clemency after being conquered. 

I exhort you to read my orations 
carefully. 

I beseech you to attend diligently. 



Difficile dictu est, iitrum hdstes 

magis virtutem ejus pugnantes 

timiierint, an mansuetiidinem 

yicti dilexerint. 
Te hdrtor, ut oratidnes meas stu- 

didse le'r/as. 
Obsecro vos, ut diligenter atten- 

ddlis. 
Mihi opus est, ut Idvem. 
Equidem vellem, ut aliquando re- 

dires . 
In eo erat, ut in miiros evdderet 

miles. 
Me dbsecras, ne obliviscar vigi- 

lare. 
Timdleon oravit dmnes, ne ilfd- 

eerent. 
Decrevit senatus, ut consul vide- 

ret, ne quid respublica detri- 
ment! cdperet. 
Ex his delecti Delphos delibera- 

tam missi sunt, qui consulerent 

Apdllinem. 
Stiilti siimus, qui Drusum cum 

Clddio conferre audedmus. 
Teneri non pdtui, quln declard- 

rem. 
Nihil impedit, quo minus id, quod 

maxime pldceat, facere jmssl- 

mus. 

Eemarks. 

1. The tenses, which may thus enter into connection with each 
other, are called similar tenses. Similar are, — a) the present, the 
peifect definite, the futures, and the periphrastic tenses in sim and 
fuerim ; b) the imperfect, the perfect indefinite, the pluperfect, and the 
periphrastic tenses in essem and fuissem. Tenses, of which one be- 
longs to the first, and the other to the second of these classes, are called 
dissimilar ; as, the present and the imperfect, &c. 

2. When, in historical narration, the present tense is used instead 
of the perfect indefinite, it is sometimes followed by the present and 
sometimes by the imperfect or pluperfect subjunctive. E. g. Scribit 
(= scripsit) ad quosdam Melitenses, ut ea vasa perquirant, He writes 
(wrote) to certain inhabitants of Malta, to inquire after those vases. 
Nulli, quid scriptum esset, enunciat (= enuntiavit), He discloses (dis- 
closed) to no one what had been written. Ad propinquum suum scri- 
l>it (= scripsit), ut Us, qui a Verre venissent, responderet, He writes to 
his relative to reply to those who had come from Verres. 



It is necessary for me to wash. 

I could wish, that you might return 
at last. 

The soldier was on the point of 
escaping within the walls. 

You conjure me, not to forget to 
watch. 

Timoleon requested them all, not 
to do that. 

The senate decreed, that the con- 
sul should see that the republic 
sustained no injury. 

A select number of these were sent 
to Delphi, for the purpose of 
consulting Apollo. 

We are fools for venturing to com- 
pare Drusus with Clodius. 

I could not be prevented from de- 
claring. 

Nothing prevents us from being 
able to do what we like best. 



II 



45 



530 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 83. 

3. The present indicative is followed by the imperfect subjunctive, 
when it is intended to convey the idea of duration in the past. E. g. 
Hujus praecepti tanta vis, tarda sententia est, ut ea non homini cuipiam, 
sect Delphico deo tribueretur. The force and moral weight of this in- 
junction are so great, that it teas attributed not to any man, but to the 
Delphic deity. Scitote, oppidum esse in Sicilia nullum, quo in oppido 
non isti delecta mulier ad libidinem esset, Know, then, that there is not 
a town in Sicily in which this fellow had not an object of his lust. 

4. The imperfect or pluperfect indicative may be followed by the 
perfect subjunctive, when the result of a past action is represented as 
extending into the present. E. g. Ardebat autem Hortensius cupidi- 
tctte dicendi sic, ut in nullo unquam flagrantius sludium viderim, Hor- 
tensius was so fond of speaking, that (up to this time) I have never 
witnessed a more ardent passion in any one. 

5. The perfect definite requires the imperfect subjunctive, when- 
ever it is intended to represent the action as in operation, and not 
merely as a result. E. g. Quoniam, quae subsidia novitatis haberes, et 
habere posses, exposui, nunc de magnitudine petitionis dlcam, Having 
shown what resources you have, or can have, I will now speak of the 
importance of the demand. Adduxi enim hominem, in quo satisfacere 
exteris nation'ibus possetis, I have produced a man, through whom you 
can satisfy the demands of foreign nations. 

6. The imperfect and perfect indefinite are sometimes followed by 
the present subjunctive, to denote that the contents of the dependent 
clause are not limited to the time of the leading verb, but universally 
applicable. E. g. Nesciebat, quid sit philosophid, He did not know 
what philosophy is (i. e. was and still is). Ad priores conditiones nihil 
additum (est), " African o praedicante, neque Romanis, si vincantur, ani- 
mos minui, neque, si vincant, secundis rebus insolescere, No additions 
were made to the former conditions, Africanus declaring, that the 
Romans neither lost their courage when conquered, nor ever grew 
insolent in their success when victorious. 

7. When the verb of a subordinate clause depends upon an infinitive, 
its tense is determined as follows : — 

«) The present infinitive is followed by the tense required by the 
verb, on which the infinitive depends. E. g. Incipite deinde mirari, cur 
panel jam vestram suscipiant causam, Begin then to wonder why so 
few now defend your cause. Ipse metuere incipies, ne innoccnti peri- 
culum facesseris, You will you rself begin to be afraid of having accused 
an innocent man. Praedixerat his, ut parati essent facere, quod ipsum 
vidissent, He had directed them beforehand to be ready to do what- 
ever they might see himself do. 

b) The perfect infinitive is commonly followed by the imperfect or 
pluperfect subjunctive, but when it represents the perfect definite, 
sometimes also by the present or perfect. E. g. Satis mild multa verba 
fecisse videof, quare esset hoc beflum necessarium, I think I have said 
enough to show why this war is necessary. Nisi docet, ifa se posse- 
disse, ut nee vi, nee clam, nee precario possederit, Unless he shows that 



LESSON 83.] 



PHRASES AND EXERCISES. 



531 



he has taken possession in such a manner, as to have employed neither 
force nor secrecy nor entreaty. 

8. Dissimilar tenses sometimes occur in the same construction, with 
different shades of signification. E. g. Summa difficultate rei frumcn- 
tarii affecto exercitu .... usque eo, ut co?nplures dies milites frumento 
caruerint, et extremam famem sustentarent, nulla tamen vox est ab 
iis audita^ Although the army labored under the greatest difficulty in 
procuring its necessary supplies, to such an extent, that for several days 
the soldiers had no corn and were famishing, yet not a word of dis- 
content was heard from them. 



To find one's self, to he (well 
or ill). 

Plow do you do ? 

I am very well. 

How was your cousin ? 

He was not very well. 

Is your father well ? 

No, he is in bad health. 

How goes it with him, her ? 
It goes badly with 
All is well with me. 



him. 



To stay, sojourn 
with any one) . 

At present, now. 



To censure, criticise, carp 
at (any one or anything). 

To laugh at, deride, ridicule 
any one. 



Did you stay long in Vienna ? 
No. I stayed there only three 

days. 
Where is your brother staying 



Se habere, valere ; agere. 

Qudmodo te habes ? 

Qudmodo vales ? 

Ego me admodum bene habeo. 

Qudmodo patruelis tuus se habebat? 
j" Male se habebat. 
I Parum vale bat. 

Habetne se pater tuus bene ? 
j" Non ; mala conditione est. 
^-Conditio ejus mala est. 

Quid agitur cum eo, cum ea ? 

Male agitur cum eo. 

Bc'ne agitur mecum. 

(in any place, Morari, commorari, deversari, habi- 
tare (aliquo loco, apud ali- 
quem). 
Nunc, in praesenti. 
f Carpo, ere, carpsi, carptum (ali- 
quem). 
Cavillari aliquem or aliquid ; — 
vellicare aliquem. 
f Illudo, ere, lusi, lusum (rem, rei, 

ALIQUEM, IN ALIQUEM). 

Deridere aliquem ; — aliquem ludi- 

brio habere. 
Moratiisne es diu Vindobo'nae ? 
Immo tres tantum dies moratus 



He is staying in London at pres- 
ent. 

How long did you remain with 
your uncle in New York ? 

I stayed with him for two years. 

Did he censure (carp at) any one ? 



"Ubi in praesenti deversatur frater 

tuus ? 
Deversatur mine Londini. 

Quam diu apud patruum tiium No- 
vo in Ebonico commorabaris V 

Commorabar apud eum per bi- 
ennium. 

Carpebatne aliquem ? 



.32 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 83. 



He carped at no one. 

Why do you not deride this man 

a little ? 
I have already laughed at him 

enough. 
Are we derided by our accusers ? 
We are not. 
Was he accustomed to make 

light of the precepts of his 

master ? 
He was not. 
You derided what I said. 



Nullum carpebat. 

Cur non istum aliquantisper ludis 

r (illudis)? 



To gain, win. 



To earn, get. 
To procure, get. 

To earn one's bread, get one's 
living by. 

How does he get his living ? 

He supports himself poorly by 
working. 

They supported themselves by 
writing. 

Has your brother earned any- 
thing ? 

He has earned a large sum of 
money. 

He has won immortality. 



Eum jam liisi jocose 



satis. 



To spill, j)° ur out- 

To stand, to be standing. •] 
Ready. 

To make ready, to prepare. 
To prepare one's self, get 

one's self ready. 
To keep one's self ready. 
What did he spill ? 
He spilt wine upon the table. 
His father was shedding tears. 
Our servant is spilling water un- 
der the table. 
The Ganges empties into the 
Eastern Ocean. 



Illudimurne ab accusatdribus ? 
Non illudimur. 

Solebatne illudere praecepta ma- 
gistri ? 

Facere non solebat. 
Illuseras id, quod dixeram. 
r Lucrumov quaestum facere (ex he). 
Lucrdri, lucrifacere (rem). 
Consequi, naucisci (nactus sum) 

ALIQUID. 

Mereo, ere, Hi, itum (rem). 
Mereor, eri, Itus sum. 
Parare, comparare (aliquid). 
Victum sibi parare or quaeritare 

(aliqua re facienda). 
Qua re sibi victum parat ? 
Victum sibi aegre queritat labo- 

rando. 
Victum sibi scribendo quaeritave- 

runt. 
Meruitne frater tiius aliquid ? 

Grandem peciiniam meruit. 

Immortalitatem meruit (meritus 

est). 
Effundo, ere, fudi, fdsum. 
Profundere (aliquid). 
Sto, stare, steti, statum esse (ali- 

QUO). 

Paratus, promptus, a, um (ad rem, 

in rem, re). 
Parare, praeparare (aliquid). 
Se parare (rei, ad rem). 

Se tenere paratum (ad rem). 
Quid effudit ? 

Vinum super mensam effudit. 
Pater ejus lachrimas profundebat. 
Pamulus ndster aquas sub mensas 

profiindit. 
Ganges se in Eoum oceanum ef- 

fiindit. 



LESSON 83.] PHRASES AND EXERCISES. 



533 



Is there any wine on the table ? 

There is none. 

Is he preparing to speak ? 

He is preparing. 

They prepared themselves for 

battle and for death. 
Is he preparing war against any 

one ? 
He is preparing to command all 

Russia. 
Are you getting ready to set 

out ? 
I am preparing to go into the 

woods. 
Is he ready to depart ? 
He is ready. 
I am ready for every emergency, 

to undergo every danger. 

To split, cleave. 
To pierce, transfix. 

To break any one's heart. 
To hang, suspend. 
To hang any one. 
To hang one's self. 

To hang, to be suspended. 

The thief. 

The robber, highwayman. 
The patient. 
Tolerably well. 

It is rather late. 

He is rather severe. 

She is rather tall. 

It is rather far. 

Was my hat hanging on the 

nail ? 
It was hanging on it. 
Who has hung the basket on the 

tree. 
No one. 
The thief has been hanged. 

45 * 



Estne vinum super mensam ? 

Non est. 

Paratne se ad dicendum ? 

Parat. 

Paraverunt se proelio et mdrti. 

Paratne bellum alicui ? 

Parat imperare o'mni Eussiae. 

Parasne proficisci ? 

Ego in silvam ire paro. 

Estne paratus ad proficiscendum ? 
Paratus est. 

Ego ad omnem eventum, ad omnia 
pericula subeiinda paratus sum. 

( Findo, ere, fidi, Jissum. 
I Diffindere (aliquid). 

Transflgo, ere, fixi, jfixum. 

Transfodio, ere,fodi,fossum (ali- 

QUEM, REM). 

Pectus or animum alicujus vulne- 

rare, percutere. 
Suspendo, ere, di, sum (aliquid 

rei or de re). 
AfFigere aliquem patibiilo. 
Suspendere aliquem arbori infelici. 
Se suspendere, induere se in. la- 

queam. 
Pendeo, ere, pependi, (ab, 

ex, IN, DE re). 
Fur, gen. fiiris, m. 
Praedo, onis, m., latro, onis, m. 
Aeger, gen. aegri, m., agrotus, i, m. 
Mediocriter, modlce, sic satis. 

Sero, serius est. 

Severior est. 

Grandiiiscula est. . 

Longiiisculum est. 

Pendebatne de clavo pileus meus ? 

Sane quidem, pendebat. 

Qui's cdrbem suspendit arbori (de 
arbore) ? 

Nemo. 

Fur est patibulo aff ixus (arbori in- 
felici suspensus est). 



534 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 84. 

I hang my coat on the nail. Ego tdgam nicam clavo (de clavo) 

suspendo. 
You are breaking this man's Pectus hujusce viilneras. 

heart. 
The basket. Corbis, is, f. & m. ; dim. corbula, 

ae,/. 

Exercise 156. 

How is your father ? — Ho is only so so. — How is your patient ? 

— He is a little better to-day than yesterday. — Is it long since you 
saw your brothers ? — I saw them two days ago. — How were they '? 

— They were very well. — How art thou V — I am tolerably well. — 
How long has your brother been learning German ? — He has been 
learning it only three months. — Does he already speak it ? — He 
already speaks, reads, and writes it better than your cousin, who has 
been learning it these five years. — Is it long since you heard of my 
uncle ? — It is hardly three months since I heard of him. — Where 
was he staying then ? — He was staying at Berlin, but now he is in 
London. — Do you like to speak to my uncle ? — I do like very much 
to speak to him, but I do not like him to laugh at me. — Why does 
he laugh at you ? — He laughs at me, because I speak badly. — Why 
has your brother no friends ? — He has none, because he criticises 
everybody. — What do you get your livelihood by ? — I get my live- 
lihood by working. — Does your friend get his livelihood by writing ? 

— He gets it by speaking and writing. — Do these gentlemen get 
their livelihood by working ? — They do not get it by doing any- 
thing, for they are too idle to work. — Do you see what he has done ? 

— I do see it. — Did he know that you had arrived ? — He did not 
know it. — Have I advised you to write ? — You have not asked 
me. — Is any one so blind, as not to understand that ? — No one is 
so blind. — Did he exhort us to read his book ? — He did exhort us 
to read it diligently. — Was he on the point of (in eo, at) escaping ? 

— He was not. — He could not be prevented from escaping (euadere). 

— Nothing could prevent him from escaping. 



Lesson LXXXIY.— PENSUM OCTOGESIMUM 
QUARTUM. 

OF THE INDICATIVE MOOD. 

A. By the Indicative Mood the speaker asserts the action 
or state expressed by the verb as an absolute existence or a 
positive fact. Hence this mood is used, — 

I. In leading and subordinate clauses, to denote that some- 



LESSON 84.] 



THE INDICATIVE MOOD. 



535 



thing really takes place, has taken place, or will take place 
hereafter. E. 2f. 



Nothing is worthier of esteem than 
virtue. 

Everything changes; nothing is 
lost. 

I shall be what you desire me to 
be. 

Shall we imagine, that the laws, 
which Cassar has read, proclaim- 
ed, and enacted, are to be abol- 
ished ? 

Behold the rainbow drinks (draws 
up the water), I think it will 
rain to-day. 

How easy the practice of virtue is ! 

How often the most distinguished 
talents lie buried in obscurity ! 

II. In direct questions, i. e. in those which require an imme- 
diate answer. E. g. 

Whose book is this ? — Mine. 

Who are you ? — I am Paniphi- 
lus. 

From what place was Cinna ex- 
pelled ? — Out of the city. 

Who does not love Aristides, though 
dead ? — No one. 



Nihil est amabilius virtute. 

Omnia mutdntur ; nihil interit. 

Ut voles me esse, ita e'ro. 

£as leges, quas Caesar recitdvit, 
pronuntidvit, tiilit, nos everten- 
das putdbimus ? 

iEcce bibit arcus ; pluet, credo, hd- 
die. 

Quam non est facilis virtus ! 
Ut saepe siimma ingenia in oc- 
culta latent ! 



Ciijus hie liber est ? — Meus. 
Quis homo est — Ego sum Pain- 

philus. 
tJnde dejectus est Cinna ? — Ex 

lirbe. 
Quis Aristidem non mdrtuum 

diligit f — Nemo. 

Remark. — In indirect questions, on the other hand, the verb is in 
the subjunctive. E. g. Die mi hi, cujus hie liber sit, Tell me whose 
book this is. Nescio, quis homo sis, I do not know who you are. (Cf. 
Lesson LXXXVII. D.) 

III. In conditional clauses, when the case is asserted as a 
real, and not as a hypothetical or doubtful one. E. g. 
Poma ex arbdribus, si cruda Unripe fruit is plucked from the 

sunt, vi auelluntur ; si matura trees by force ; if ripe and mel- 



et edeta, decidunt. 
Si quis oriente Canicula ndtus 

est, in mari non morietur. 
Ista Veritas, etidmsi jucunda non 

est, mihi tamen grata est. 

Qui possum putare me restitu- 
tum, si distrahor ab iis, per 
quos restitutus sum V 

Nulla alia in civitate, nisi in qua 
jidpuli potestas siimma est, lil- 
lum domicilium hdbet libertas. 



low, it falls of its Own accord. 

If any one is born when the dog- 
star rises, he will not die at sea. 

This truth, although it is not a 
pleasant one, is nevertheless 
agreeable to me. 

How can I consider myself restored, 
if I am distracted by those through 
whom I was restored ? 

Liberty can have no abode in any 
state, except where the power 
of the people is supreme. 



536 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 84. 



£go, ni piigna restituitur, fortu- Unless the contest is renewed, I 
nam cum omnibus, infamiam shall feel our misfortune in corn- 
solus sentiam. mon with all, and the disgrace 

alone. 
Remark. — When the condition expressed by si and nisi is not a 

real, but merely a hypothetical one, the verb is in the subjunctive, on 

which see Lesson LXXXYI.) 

PECULIAR USE OF THE INDICATIVE. 

B. The Romans sometimes use the indicative in construc- 
tions in which the English idiom requires the subjunctive. 

I. With verbs and expressions denoting ability, permission, 
duty, necessity, and the like, the present indicative is commonly- 
put instead of the imperfect subjunctive, and the imperfect, the 
perfect indefinite, and the pluperfect indicative instead of the 
pluperfect subjunctive. 

Such verbs are p> ossum -> licet, debeo, decet, oportet, necesse est ; Ion- 
gum, aequum, par, consentaneum, satis, satius, melius, optimum est, erat, 
fuit,fuerat, and the like. So also the participle in dus with sum, eram, 
&c. In all these cases the present is rendered by the English might, 
could, would,, or sliould, and the past tenses by might, could, icould, or 
should have. E. g. 
Possum persequi nrulta oblecta- 

menta re rum rusticarum, sed 

&c. 
O quam facile erat drbis impe- 



num occupare 



Perturbatidnes animorum po'te- 
ram ego mdrbos appellare ; 
sed non conveniret ad omnia. 

Oh, regem me esse opdrtuit. 
Jeci fundamenta reipiiblicae, se- 
rius omnino, quam decidt. 

Liberos tuos institiiere atque eru- 

dire debuisti. 
Hoc faeere debebas. 
Ldnge utilius fait, angiistias adi- 

tus occupare. 
Haec via tibi erat ingredienda. 

Non Asiae nomen objiciendum 
Murenae fait, ex qua laus fa- 
lmliae constituta est. 



I could enumerate the many pleas- 
ures of agriculture, but, &c. 

how easy it icould have been to 
obtain the command of the en- 
tire world ! 

1 might have called the disorders of 
the mind diseases, but the name 
would not have been applicable 
to all cases. 

I ought to have been king. 

I have laid the foundation of the 

republic, later doubtless, than I 

should have done. 
You ought to have instructed and 

educated your children. 
You should have done this. 
It would have been far better to 

occupy the defile. 
You should have entered upon this 

road. 
Murena ought not to have been 

taunted with the name of Asia, 

from which the glory of his 

family is derived. 



LESSON 84.] PECULIAR USE OF THE INDICATIVE. 537 

Remarks. 

1. In condititional sentences the historians sometimes likewise em- 
ploy one of the past tenses of the indicative, instead of the more usual 
pluperfect subjunctive, to denote that something would have taken place 
under certain conditions. E. g. Jam James quam pestilentia tristior 
erat (= fuisset), ni annonae foret subvention, The famine would have 
been a sadder calamity than the pestilence, unless additional supplies 
had been procured. Temere fecerat (= fecisset) Nerva, si adoplasset 
alium, Nerva would have acted inconsiderately, if he had adopted 
another. 

2. In like manner, the imperfect indicative sometimes (though less 
frequently) stands instead of the imperfect subjunctive, when the verb 
of the conditional clause is of the same tense. E. g. IStultum erat 
(= esset) monere, nisi fieret, It would be folly to admonish, unless 
your advice were heeded. Omnlno supervacua erat (= esset) doclrl- 
na, si natura sufficeret. 

II. In general relative expressions, i. e. in those introduced 
by quisquis, quotquot, quicwique, quantiiscunque, quantulus- 
cunque, utut, utcunque, and other compounds of cunquc, the verb 
is more commonly in the indicative than in the subjunctive. 
E.g. 

Quidquid id est. Whatever that may be. 

Quoquo mddo res se lidbct; or However that may be. 

Utcunque se luibet res. 
Quicwique is est. Whoever he may be. 

Quidquid liabuit, quantumciinque Whatever property or greatness he 

fuif, illud totum habuit ex (lis- possessed, he owed it all to his 

ciplina. discipline and skill. 

Quern sdrs dierum cunque dcibit, Mark as clear gain, whatever day 

lucro appone. your destiny may grant you. 

Quidquid id est, tiraeo Danaos et Whatever that may be, I dread the 

dona ferentes. Greeks, even when they offer 

presents. 
Homines benevolos, qucdescunque It is hard to pursue benevolent 

sunt, grave est insequi contu- men of any description with in- 

melia. suits. 

Utcunque sese res lidbet, tua est However that may be, the fault is 

culpa. yours. 

Remark. — The words above enumerated are sometimes also fol- 
lowed by the subjunctive, especially among the later Roman authors. 
E. g. Quibuscunque verbis uti velis, Whatever words you may wish to 
employ. In quacunque parte sit tiiubatum, In whatever part there 
may have been a failure. 

III. In clauses introduced by sive — sive, the verb is gener- 
ally likewise in the indicative. E. g. 

Sive tacebis 1 sive Idqueris, mihi Whether you are silent, or whether 
periude est. you speak, it is all the same to me. 



538 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 84. 



S'tve verum est, sive falsum, mihi 
quideni ita renuntiatuni est. 

Veniet teuipus mortis, et quidem 
celeriter, et sive retractdbis, 
sive properabis. 



"Whether it is time or false, it has 

been so reported to me. 
The time of death will come, and 

that quickly, whether you resist 

it or accelerate it. , 



Remark. — Instances of the subjunctive also occur. E. g. Nam 
sive ilia defensione uti voluisses, sive hdc, qua uteris, condemneris nc- 
cesse est, For, whether you had intended to use that defence or the 
one you are using now, you must be condemned. 



To doubt, to be uncertain. 
To doubt, question any- 

thing. 
I doubt whether. 



I doubt, whether .... or. 

I do not doubt, that (but 
that). 

Do you doubt that ? 

I do not doubt it. 

It is not to be doubted. 

What do you doubt ? 

I doubt what that man has told 

me. 
I doubt whether he has arrived. 
AY ho doubts that mv father has 

left? 
I do not doubt but that he will 

come. 
lie is sure that he will not come. 
AYho doubts that man is mortal ? 

Xo one can question it. 

It is doubtful whether the judges 
or the lawyers are to blame. 
/ am inclined to, perhaps, 
probably. 

I am inclined to give him the 
first place. 

A man of consummate wisdom, 
and perhaps the most distin- 
guished of them all. 

It is perhaps enough. 

To agree or consent to a 
thing. 



Dubitare, dubium or in dubio esse. 
j Dubitare de aliqua re or aliquid. 
( Rem in dubium vocare. 

Dubito, in dubio sum, num (with 
the subj.). 
J Dubito, utrum .... an (with the 
i subj.). 

Xon dubito, quin (with the subj.). 

j Dubitasne hoc ? 

"( Vo iSsne re'm in dubium ? 

\ Non dubito. 

( Rem in dubium non vdco. 

Dubinin non potest. 

Quid dubitas I 

In dubium vdco id, quod llle mihi. 

narravit. 
Dubito, num advenerit. 
Quis dubitat, quia pater meus pro- 

fectus sit ? 
( Xon dubito, quin venturus sit. 
\ Xon diibito, eum venturum esse. 
Xon dubitat, quin non venturus sit. 
Quis dubitat, hdminem mortalem 

esse? 
Xemo rem in dubium vocare possit. 
Dubium est, utrum judiccs an juris- 

consiilti vituperandi sint. 
Dubito an, hand scio an, nescio 

an (with the subj.). 

Dubito an hiinc primum omnium 

ponam. 
Yir sapientissimus atque haiid scio 

an omnium praestantissimus. 

Haud scio (nescio') an satis sit. 
Consentio, ire, sensi, sensum. 
Convenit mihi (cum aliquo DE 

ALIQUA RE). 



LESSON 84.] PHRASES AND EXERCISES. 



539 



To disagree, differ. 

We agree. 

Peace has been agreed 
upon. 

To admit, confess. 

To concede, grant. 

To agree, or to compose a 
difference. 

To become reconciled to one. 
To consent (to do any- 
thing). 

Did you agree about the price ? 

We did agree. 

What did you agree upon ? 
We were agreed upon the safety 

of the republic. 
Did you agree in praising him ? 

We did not agree. 

The age of Homer is not agreed 

upon. 
Do you consent to my doing 

that ? 
I do consent. 
Do you confess (admit) that to 

be a fault ? 
I admit it. 

Do you confess your error ? 
I do confess it. 
How much did you pay for that 

hat ? 
I paid three dollars for it. 
At Avhat price did he buy the 

horse ? 
He bought it for* five hundred 

dollars. 
Did they compose their differ- 
ence ? 
They have composed it. 
They have become reconciled. 
He has become reconciled to me. 



Discrepare, dissentire. 
5 Cdnvenit inter nos. 
( Nos convenimus. 

Piix cdnvenit. 

Fateor, eri, fessus sum. 

Confiteri (aliquid alicui). 

Concedo, ere, cessi, cessum (ali- 
cui aliquid). 
( Componere. In gratiam redire. 
4 De controversiis transigere (egi, 
( actum). 

Cum aliquo in gratiam redire. 

Consentlre, assentiri (facere, 

REM FIERI, UT FIAT). 

Convenitne tibi eum eo de pre'tio ? 

Convenitne tibi pretium ? 
( Convenit mini cum eo. 
( Convenit pretium. 

Qua de re consensistis inter vos ? 

De reipiiblicae salute consensimus. 

Yds in illo laudando consensistis ? 
( Non consensimus. 
\ 1 mmo vero dissensimus. 

Super Homeri aetate non consen- 
titur. 

Consentisne, ut hoc faciam ? 

Kon dissentio. 

Faterisne illud esse vitium ? 

Fateor. 

Confiterisne tiium errorem ? 

Confiteor. 

Quantam peciiniam isto pro pileo 

solvisti ? 
Tres thaleros. 
Quanti emit llle equum ? 

(Emit eum) quingentis thaleris. 

Transegeriintne de controversiis ? 

Composuerunt et transegerunt. 
In gratiam inter se redierunt. 
In «;ratiam mecum rediit. 



* " For " with the price is not expressed, according to Lesson LXXI. A. 



.40 



LATIN GRAMMAS. 



[lkssox si 



( (i~r<>. ere, o> -.<!. gestttm. 
To vrar (clothes^ a ring, §"c). - Gesi - . . m. anulum, &c). 

( Tnduium i ss< >■< $u . & •. 

Amictum ease togg, pallio. 

Cinctum esse gladio. 

It nun vestem gerebat nigram an 
candidam ? 

C&ndidam gerebat 

Cahgisne an ealceis indutus erat? 

Indutus erat ealceis. 

Gestabat ge'mmam dirfto. 



To wear a coat, a cloak. 

To wear a sword. 

Did he wear black or white 

clothes ? 
lie wore white ones. 
IIa<l he boots or shoes on ? 
He had shoes on. 
He habitually wore a gem on his 

finger. 

77<e custom, habit 



Against my custom. 
It is against my custom. 

It is customary. 



As is customary. 
According to custom. 
To observe, take no 
jii ret "•' soiTu thing. 
Do you perceive that ? 
I do perceii e it. 
1 Hd \ Dii take notice of that ? 
I did not observe it. 
1 >id you notice what he did ? 
I d'nl notice it. 

T i i rpect, ho 

Do you expect to receive a let- 
ter from your uncle ? 

I do expect it. 
Did Ave expect it V 
YVe did not expect it. 

To procure, get 

To acquire (procure). 
Can you L r ct me some money ? 
I cannot do it. 
lias he been able to procure the 

necessaries of life V 
He has been able. 
I cannot get anything to cat. 
lie lias acquired wealth, honor, 

and influence. 



Consuetudo, inis, f. ; rods, gen. mora, 
m. 

Contra meam consuetudfnem. 

Non est liie.ie consuetiidinis. 
( Aids est Est moria (m ... .). 

Consuetudo obtinet (faciendi ali- 
i quid). 

J I t est nioris (consuetiidinis), ut 
tflet 

Pro (ex) consuetiidlne, ex more. 

17'/. /•*. cernere, animadvertere, <>h- 
servare, perspicert (aliquld). 

I '■ ^picfene b< 

\ < .'i. perspicio. 

Obeervastine (perspexistSne) hoc? 

Ndn observavi (perspexi). 

Animadvertistine, quod /lie fceeril ? 

Aniniadw'-iti. 

Exspect8re,*perare(AUQUif>,Ai i . 

cum 1m ). 
fExspectasne li'tteras a p;itruo tiio? 
- Sperasne fdre, ut littcras a patruo 
( accipii 
Exspecto (spero). 
Niim nda exspect&vimtu ? 
Non exspectavimus (mfnime ape- 

ravimus). 
Parti r> -. comparare (sibi, alicui 

ajliquid). 
Acquiro, ere, Hvi, sUttm (axiquid). 
Potesne mihi parare peciiniam? 

e non possum. 
Potuitne acquirere, quod ad vitae 

Qsum pertineat ? 
Pdtuit 

K,L r o. quod edam, comparare nequeo. 
Divitias. honores, auctoritatcniquc 

acquisivit. 



LESSON 85.] POEM OF SENTENCES. 541 

Exercise 157. 

"What have you gained that money by ? — I have pained it by 
working. — What have you done with your wine? — I have spilt it 
on the table. — Where is yours ? — It is on the large table in my little 
room; but you must not drink any of it, for I must keep it for my 
father who is ill. — Are you ready to depart with me ? — I am so. — 
Why are you laughing at that man? — I do not intend to laugh at 
him. — I beg of you not to do it. for you will break his heart it' you 
laugh at him. — Why have they hanged that man? — They have 
hanged him, because helms killed somebody. — Have they hanged 
the man who stole a horse (from) your brother? — They have pun- 
ished him, but they have not hanged him : they only hang highway- 
men in our country. — Where have you found my coat ? — I found 
it in the blue room; it was hanging on a nail. — Will you hang my 
hit on the tree ? — I will hang it thereon ? — Do you doubt what I 
am telling you ? — I do not doubt it. — 1 )o you doubt what that man 
has told you ? — I do doubt it, tor lu- has often told me what was not 
true. — VVhy have you not kept your promise? — I know no more 
what I promised you. — Did you not promise us to take us to tin' con- 
cert (on) Thursday ? — 1 confess tint I promised you ; but the concert 
d'nl not take place. — Dors your brother confess his fault ? — lie does 
confess it. — What does your uncle say to that letter ? — He says that 
it is written very well ; but he admits that he has been wrong in send- 
ing it to the captain. — Do you confess your fault now? — I confess it 
to be a fault — Have you at last bought the horse which you wished 
to buy? — How could I buy the horse, if 1 am unable to procure 
money ? — tnle-s you pay me what you owe me, I shall not be able, 
to go. — Ought I to have gone into the country yesterday ? — You 
Ought to have done it. — You ought to have educated and instruct- 
ed your son. — This letter ought to have been written by you. 

— () how easy it would have been to learn your lesson! — It would 
have been far better to remain at home. — Do you know that man ? 

— Whoever he may be, I do not wish to know him. — However that 
may be, you have not done your duty (officium tuum non Serva- 
risti). — Whether you go or stay, it, is all the same to me. — I shall 
have to write, whether 1 am sick or well. 



Lesson LXXXV. — PENSUM OCTOGESIMUM 
QUINTUM. 

OF THE FORM OF SENTENCES. 

A. In respect to their form, sentences are cither absolute or con- 
ditioned, positive, negative, or interrogative. (Cf. Lessons LXXXIY, 
and LXXXYI.) 

4C 



542 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 85. 



I. A positive or affirmative proposition asserts the existence 
of a state in a given subject as present, past, or future by means 
of a finite verb only. Its force may be augmented by an 
adverb. 

Adverbs of this class are called adverbia asserendi. The principal 
are nae, surely ; sane, profecto, really ; utique, to be sure ; vero, in 
truth, truly ; to which add the (generally) ironical scilicet, videlicet, 
nimirum, nempe, and quippe, of course, certainly, forsooth. E. g. 



Nae l'lli vehementer errant, si ll- 

lam meam pristinam lenitatem 

perpetuam sperant futuram. 
Terra profecto lniindi pars est. 

Estne ipsus an non est ? — 1 s 
est, eerie is est, is est profecto. 

tllud scire utique ciipio. 

Ego vero ciipio, te ad me venire. 

Ego istius pecudis consilio scili- 
cet aut praesidio uti volebam ? 

Hie de ndstris verbis errat vide- 
licet. 

Demosthenes apud alios ldqui 
videlicet didieerat, non miil- 
tum ipse seeum. 

Non omnia nimirum eidem dii 
dedere. 

Quos ego drno ? — Nempe eos, 
qui ipsi sunt ornamenta rei 
piiblieae. 

Sol Demdcrito magnus videtur, 
quippe hdmini erudito, in geo- 
metriaque perfecto. 

II. A negative sentence asserts the non-existence of a state 
in the subject, and is thus directly opposed to an affirmative one. 

Negative sentences are formed by means of the adverbs non, not ; 
hand, not at all ; minime, by no means ; ne, lest, that not. Also by 
nemo, nullus, nihil, nunquam, nondum, nee, neque, &c. To these add 
the negative verbs nescio, nolo, necjo, and veto. E. g. 



They are certainly very much mis- 
taken , if they expect that former 
lenity of mine to be perpetual. 

The earth is doubtless a part of the 
universe. 

Is it he himself or not ? — It is he, 
certainly it is, it is the very man. 

I desire to know that at all events. 

I certainly wish you to come to me. 

Did I forsooth desire to use the ad- 
vice or help of a beast like this ? 

He is manifestly mistaken about 
our language. 

Demosthenes had learnt to speak 
with others, I suppose, not much 
by personal effort privately. 

The gods have certainly not grant- 
ed everything to one man. 

Whom do I honor ? Those cer- 
tainly who are themselves the 
ornaments of the republic. 

The sun seems large to Democri- 
tus, he being a learned man and 
perfect in geometry. 



Nives in alto mari non cadunt. 

Pausanias 7/aud ita magna manu 

Graecia fugatus est. 
Potestis eff'ieere, ut male mdri- 

ar : ne mdriar, non potestis. 



tta siim afflictus, ut 
quam. 



nemo un- 



Snow does not fall on the main 

sea. 
Pausanias was put to flight by not 

so very large a Grecian band. 
You can make me die a cruel 

death, but you cannot prevent 

my dying. 
I am so distressed as no one ever 

was before. 



LESSON 85.] 



INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 



54; 



Non unquam alias ante tantus 

terror senatum invasit. 
Nemo vir magnus sine aliquo af- 

flatti divmo unquam fiiit. 
Epicurus liiyat, lillum esse tem- 

pus, quo sapiens non beatus 

sit. 
Fletum duddecim tabulae in fu- 

neribus adhiberi vetuerunt. 



Never at any time before did such 
a terror invade the senate. 

There never was a great man with- 
out a certain divine enthusiasm. 

Epicurus denies that there is any 
time at which a wise man is 
not happy. 

The twelve tables prohibited the 
practice of wailing at funerals. 



III. When two negations occur in the same sentence, the 
first or emphatic one generally destroys the second. 

Such are non nemo, some one ; non nihil, something ; non nunquam, 
sometimes ; non nisi, not except, i. e. only ; non icjnoro, I know very 
well; non possum non loqui, I cannot but speak. So also nemo noli, 
every one ; nihil non, everything ; nullus non, each, every ; nunquam 
non, always ; nusquam non, everywhere. E. g. 



Hdstis est in urbe, in fo'ro ; non 
nemo etiam in 1II0 sacrario rei 
piiblicae, in ipsa, inquam, cu- 
ria non nemo hdstis est. 

Milii liber esse non videtur, qui 
non aliquando nihil agit. 

Non sum ne'scius, quanto pericu- 
lo vivam in tanta multitudine 
improborum. 

Non ii nemini, sed non semper 
ilni parere voluerunt. 

Qui mortem in malis ponit, non 
potest earn non timere. 

Ne'mo potest non beatissimus esse, 
qui in se lino sua ponit omnia. 



Athenienses Alcibiadem nihil non 
efFicere posse ducebant. 

Nihil agere animus non potest. 

Alexandra nullius piignae non 
seciinda fortiina fiiit. 

Diiitius nesclre non possum. 

Nusquam esse non pdssunt. 



The enemy is in the city, in the 
forum; there is an enemy v e veil 
in the sanctuary of the republic ; 
in the senate-house itself, I say, 
there is an enemy. 

He does not seem to me to be a 
free man, who is not sometimes 
disengaged from business. 

I am not unaware of the great dan- 
ger in which J live, in the midst 
of such a multitude of rascals. 

It was not their wish to obey no 
one, but not perpetually the same 
individual. 

He who considers death an evil 
cannot avoid fearing it. 

No one can avoid being the happi- 
est man in the world, who makes 
everything depend upon himself 
alone. 

The Athenians thought that Alci- 
biades could do everything. 

The mind cannot be inactive. 

Alexander had fortune in his favor 
in every battle fought by him. 

I can be ignorant no longer. 

They cannot be nowhere (— they 
must be somewhere). 



INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 



B. A sentence becomes interrogative, when the speaker asks an- 
other person for information, for instruction, or assent to his opinion. 
A sentence of this kind is complete only in connection with the answer. 



544 



LATIN T GRAMMAR. 



[lesson s; 



I. If the inquiry is made merely for information, the emphatic 
■word is put at the beginning, and the expected answer is " yes " 
or "no." If assent is required, then the answer to a positive 
inquiry is " no," and to a negative one " yes." E. g. 

Sets Appium censorem hie omen- 
ta faeere ? 
Non patrem ego te ndminem, iibi 



tu tiiain me appelles filiam 
TZn unquam cuiquam contumeli- 

dsius audistis lactam injuriam, 

quam haec est mi'hi ? 
Quid ? Si te rogavero illiquid, 

non respondebis ? 
Infc'Iix est Fabricius, quod rus 

suum fodit ? — Non. 
Non vdbis videor cum aliquo de- 

clamatore disputare ? — Edam. 



Do you know that Appius, the cen- 
sor, is doing wonders here '? 

Shall I not call you father, when 
you call me your daughter ? 

Did ye ever hear of an injustice 
practised upon any one more in- 
solently, than this is upon me? 

What? If I have asked you any- 
thing, will you not reply ? 

Is Fabricius unhappy, because he 
digs his farm ? — No. 

Do I not seem to you to be disputing 
with some declaimer V — Yes. 



II. Questions requiring a more definite explanation or assent 
are introduced by interrogative pronoun-;, adjectives, and adverbs. 

Such are quis, qiti, who ? quid, quod, what ? quantus, how great ? 
quot, how many ? quotas, which, what (of a certain number) ? qufdis, 
what kind of? qnoties, how many times V quam, ut, how? quondo, 
when ? ubi, where ? quo, whither ? qua, which way ? wide, whence ? 
To these add cur, why ? qucire, wherefore ? qui, or quomodo, how ? 
quni, quidni, why not? &c. E. g. 



Quia homo est ? — Ego sum Piim- 

philus. 
Qui status, quod discrimen, quae 

fiierit in re publico, tempestas 

ilia, quis nescit ? 

Ileus, acquis in villa est ? Ecquis 
hoc rccludit ? 

Qualis est istorum onitio ? 

Qua/ is oratoris et qudnti hdminis 
in dicendo putas esse, histori- 
an* scribere ? 

Unde iste amor tarn improvisus 

ac tarn repentinus ? 
Cur Africa num domestic! parie- 

tes non texerunt ? 
Deus falli qui potest ? 
Qubi, quod est ferendum, fers ? 

Quidni pdssim ? 



T 



Pam- 



Who is the man 
philus. 

"Who does not know, what a state 
of things, what a danger, what a 
stormy time that was in the re- 
public ? 

Holla! Is there any one in the 
house ? Is any one opening the 
door ? 

What is the character of the lan- 
guage used by these ? 

"What sort of an orator, and how 
great a man in the use of lan- 
guage, do you suppose it requires 
to write a history ? 

Whence this love of yours so un- 
expected and so sudden ? 

Why did his domestic Avails not 
protect Africanus ? 

How can the Deity be deceived ? 

Why do you not bear what has to 
be borne ? 

Why should I not be able ? 



LESSON 85.] INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 



545 



III. Questions in Latin are frequently modified by particles; 
such as ne, perhaps ? then ? nonne, not ? is it not so ? num, 
numne, then ? an, or perhaps ? anne, annon, or not ? 

To nonne and annon the expected answer is always " yes " ; to num 
and an, commonly " no." The enclitic ne is always subjoined to the 
emphatic word. When this word is the verb of the sentence, the 
answer may be "yes" or "no"; when another word, it is commonly 
"no.'' E.g. 
Pergisne earn artem illiidere, in 

qua excellis ipse ? 
"Ubi ant qualis sit tiia mens? 

Potesne chcere ? 
Quam rem agis ? — Egone ? Ar- 

gentum ciido, quod ti'bi dem. 
Satisne est, nobis vos timendos 

esse ? 
AirC tu ? — Men' rdgas 

(sc. est) ? 
Quid nunc ? Qua spe aut quo 

consilio hue imus ? Quid coe- 

ptas, Thraso ? — Egone ? 



Nonne animadvertis ? 
Num qui'dnam, inquam, ndvi? 
Num negfire aiides ? 
Numquid diias habetis patrias ? 
Ecquid * sentitis, in qiuinto con- 

te'mtu vivatis ? 
Quid ? Deuni ipsum numne vi- 

disti ? 
An quiscpiam potest sine pert 

baticme mentis inlsci ? 
An est lillum nuijus malum tur- 

. pitiidine ? 
Anne est l'ritus Piimphilus ? 
An von di'xi esse hoc futiirum ? 
An non est dmnis metus servitus? 



Do you persist in deriding the very 
art in which you yourself excel ? 

Where or what is the nature of 
your mind ? Can you tell ? 

What are you driving at ? — I ? 
I am coining silver, to give to you. 

Is it not true, that you are to be 
feared by us ? 
Itdne Do you really say so ? — Do you 
ask me ? — Is it so V 

What now ? With what expecta- 
tion or for what purpose do we 
come hither ? What are you 
after, Thraso ? — I ? 

Do ye not perceive ? 

Is there anything new, I say? 

Do you dare to deny it ? 

Have you two native countries ? 

Do you perceive iu what contempt 
you live ? 

What? Hast thou beheld the 
Deity himself? 

Can any one be angry without 
agitation of the mind ? 

Is there any greater evil than dis- 
honor ? 

Pamphilus is not in the house, is he ? 

Did I not say that this would be so ? 



Is not fear of every kind servitude ? 

IV. Questions, to which a mere u yes " or " no " is expected, 
may be answered, — 

1. By the repetition of the emphatic word of the question, with or 
without the addition of an intensive word. 

2. " Yes," by sane, etiam, verum, vero, ita, ita est, ita enim vero. 

3. " No," by non, non vera, inhume, minime vero, nihil nanus. E. g. 
ifestne pdpulus Collatinus in sua Is the people of Collatia master of 

potestate ? — Est. itself ? — It is. 

* After numquid and ecqtiid the answer is generally "no"; after ecquid, 
sometimes "yes." 

21 46* 



546 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[lf.SSOX So. 



Dasne hoc nobis ? — Do sane. 
Tune negas ? — Nego he'rcle ve'ro. 
ro. — Meas '? — 



Virtiites n; 

Tims. 
Abiit Clitipho. — Solus ? 

lus. 



Sn- 



2Sun irata es 



Aon sum irala. 



Estne frater intus ? — Non est. 
2son existiinas. eadere in sapien- 

tem aegritiidinem ? — Prorsus 

nun drbitror. 

Haeceme tiia ddmus est ? — Ita, 

inquam. 
Facies ? — Veram. 
Yisne sermdni reliouo denius 

dperam sedentes? — Seine qui- 

dem. 
Cur non introeo in ndstrani dd- 

mum ? — ^uid doinun ve- 

strarn ? — It a enim 
Die mihi. eiijum peeus ? an Moe- 

liboei ? — Non, veruni Aegd- 

nis. 
2son opus est ? — Non he'rcle 

ve'ro. 
An tu hoc non credis V — M 'mi- 
me ve'ro. 
An Gallos existimfitis hie versari 

aniino demisso atque hiimili ? 

— NOiil ixro mi us. 



Do vou concede this to us? — I 

do. 
Do you deny it ? — I verily deny 

it.' 
I report virtues. — Mine ? — Yours. 

Clitipho has left. — Alone? — 
Alone. 

Are you not angry ? — I am not 
angry. 

Is your brother in ? — He is not. 

You do not suppose that a philos- 
opher can be affected by misfor- 
tune ? — I do not think it possi- 
ble. 

Is this your house ? — It is. 

Shall you do it ? — Yes. 
Is it your wi>h that we attend to 
the rest of the discussion sitting? 

— Certainly. 

Why do I not go into our house ? 

— What, into your house ? — 
Ay. to be sure. 

Tell me, -whose flock this is ? that 

of Mcelibceus ? — 2so, but of 

iEgon. 
It is not necessary? — Xo, by my 

troth, no. 
Or do you not believe this ? — By 

no means. 
Do you think the Gauls remain 

here humble and submissive ? — 

Far from it. 



Remarks. 

1. Becte and optime are either "yes" or "no." according to the 
nature of the question. Scilicet, -doubtless." "to be sure," affirms 
ironically. E. g. Satin salve ? die mihi. — Recte. Are you very well ? 
tell me. — I am. Quid estt — NUiU, recte perge. What is it? — 
Nothing. Thucgdidem, inquit, imilamur. — Optime. "We imitate Thu- 
cydides, he says. — Very well. Ego tihi irascerert tibi ego possem 
irasci 1 — Scilicet ! I angry -with you ? Could I be angry with you ? 
— Forsooth ! 

2. Tmo or immo always corrects the preceding question, and either 
raises doubt or opposes something else to it (sometimes the very oppo- 
site). Hence it is sometimes "yes,'' "to be sure," and sometimes 
"no." "O no." E.g. Credisne ? — Tmo certe (Ay, to be sure). — 
Non patria praestat omnibus officii? $ — Immo vera (certainly). — 7". - 
naxne est ? — Imo pertinax (Nay, even pertinacious). — Sdtbkne Jiltus ? 



LESSON 85.] DISJUNCTIVE QUESTIONS. 547 

Immo vera (on the contrary) obsecrabit patron, ne faciat. — Die, me 
orare, ut veniat. — Ad te ? — Imo ad Philumenam (No, but to Phi- 
lumena). 

3. If the answer is given with a noun, adjective, or pronoun, its 
case must be the one required by the verb of the question. E. g. 
Cujus liber est ? — Caesaris. — Mene vis ? — Te. Quanti emisti ? — 
Parvo. 

DISJUNCTIVE QUESTIONS. 

C. I. An interrogative sentence may be composed of two 
or more members, in such a manner that one excludes the other. 
Such questions are called disjunctive or double, and are of two 
kinds, viz. : — 

1. The second member is simply the negation of the first. E. g. Is 
ambition a virtue, or none (i. e. or is it not a virtue) ? 

2. The second member contains another question opposed to the 
first. E. g. Has he conquered, or you (i. e. or have you conquered) ? 
If, in the answer to a double question, one of the cases is affirmed, the 
other is denied, and vice versa. E. g. It is not a virtue. He has con- 
quered, and not you. 

II. The particles employed in such disjunctive questions are 
as follows : — 

1. The first member is either introduced by utrum, num, — ne, or 
stands without any particle. 

2. The " or" of the second member is generally an, but when the 
first member is without a particle, the enclitic ne may take the place 
of an. When the question contains more than two members, the for- 
mula is utrum, &c an ... . an, &c. 

3. The " or not" of the second member is annon (or an non), and 
more rarely necne. 

The use of these particles gives rise to five different formulas for 
disjunctive questions. They are as follows : — 



utrum, 


utrumne 





an, 


anne, 


annon. 


num, 


numquid 





an, 


annon. 




— no 







an, 


annon. 












an, 


annon. 












— ne, 


necne. 








Examples. 







Num tabulas habet, annon ? Has he the pictures, or not ? 

Utrum animos sociorum ab re Did you alienate the minds of our 

publica abaliemibas, an non ? allies from the republic, or not '? 

ts?ie est, quern quaero, annon ? Is it he whom I am looking for, or 

not? 

Siint haec tiia verba, necne ? Are these your words, or not ? 

Dicam huic, an non dicam ? Shall I tell him, or shall I not tell ? 



548 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSOS 65. 

Utrum igitur has corporis, an Which would you then rather have, 
Pythagorae tibi nialis vires in- physical strength like this, or the 
o-dnii dari ? intellectual powers of Pythago- 



ras i 



Ulrum tandem pcrspicuis??e dii- Are doubtful things elucidated by 

bia aperiiintur, an diibiis per- those that are clear, or are the 

spicua tolluntur? clear corrected by the doubtful? 

Numquid duas habetis patrias, an Have you two countries, or is that 

est ilia patria communis ? your common country ? 

Aristdteles ipse^e errat, an alios h Aristotle himself mistaken, or 

viilt errfirc ? does he wish others to be so ? 

Recto itinere duxi'sti exercitum Did you march the army directly 

ad hdstes, an per anfractus against the enemy, or by a cir- 

viarum ? cuitons route ? 

Utrum hoc tu parum commemi- Do you r.ot recollect this very well, 

nisti, an ego non satis intel- or did I not sufficiently compre- 

lexi, cm mutasti sententiam ? hend it. or have you changed 

your opinion ? 

Eomamne venio, an hie rnaneo, Shall I go to Home, or remain here, 

an Arpimun fiigio ? or flee to Arpinum ? 

Remarks. 

1. Utrum indicates at the very outset that a second question is to 
follow. In flu-ret double questions beginning with num, the first mem- 
ber is expected to be denied, and the second affirmed. (Cf. Lesson 
LXXXV. B. in.) In double questions otherwise introduced, either 
member may be affirmed or denied. 

2. The ne of the second member is almost entirely confined to indi- 
rect questions. £. g. Sine sciam. capfiva materne in castris tuis sun, I 
wish to know whether I am a captive or your mother in your camp. 
Albus a/erne fueris, ignorat, lie knows not whether you were white 
or black. On the use of these particles in indirect disjunctive ques- 
tions generally, see Lesson LXXXYII. J>. 

3. When "or" introduces no second question, but only another 
word of the same question, it is expressed by am. E. g. Tibi ego aut 
tu mild servus es ? — Volupias melioremne cjjicit aut laudabtliorem 
virion ? 

4. If the second member of a double question is introduced by the 
English " and not," the Romans put simply non. E. g. Ergo hislrio 
hoc videbit in scena, non videbit vir sapiens in vita ? Will the actor 
see this on the stage, and the philosopher not in life ? I [it jus vos 
animi monumenta retinebis, corporis in Italia nullum sepulcrum esse 
patiemini ? Will you retain the monuments of his genius, and not suffer 
a sepulchre for his body in Italy ? 

The form, figure. Forma, figura, ae, f. Species, ci, f. 

The woman Femina, ae,/: mulier, eris,/ 

The wife. Conjux, ugis. f. : uxor, oris,/ 

The married woman. Nupta, marita, ae,/. 



LESSON 85.] PHRASES AND EXERCISES. 



549 



The lad}' of the house, mis- 
tress. 
The mother. 
The daughter. 
The girl. 
The door. 
The bottle. 
The phial. 
The fork. 
The spoon. 
The plate. 

The cup. 
The saucer. 

The towel. 

The napkin. 

The soup. 

The butter. 

The dessert. 

To serve the dessert. 
To eat (sip) soup. 

To wipe. 

To speak through the nose. 
The nose. 

The silk. 

Made of silk. 

The silk stuff. 

The silk stocking, cravat, &c. 

My good linen. 

His beautiful linen shirts. 

The room (parlor). 

The sleeping-room. 

The eloset, chamber. 

The wardrobe. 

The dining-room. 

The front-room. 

The back-room. 

The study. 

To live in, occupy. 

To live in the front (or first 

part of the house). 
The sister. 

The young lady (virgin). 
The tongue. 
The lammase. 



Materfamilias, /. : hera, domina, 
ae,/. 

Mater, tris,/ 

Filia, nata, ae,/. 

Puella, ae,/. 

Ostium, i, n. ; janiia, ae,/ 

Lagena, ae,/ 

Ampulla, ae,/ 

Furca, ae,/ 

Cochlear, is, ??. 

Catillus, i, m. {pi. catilla, n.) ; di- 
scus, i, m. {large pla(e). 

Pocilluni ansfitum (i, n.). 

Scutella, ae,/ 

Mantele, is, n.; mantelium, i, n. 

Mappa, mappula, ae,/ 

Jusculum, i, n. 

Butyrum, i, n. 

Mensa secuiida (ae, /) ; bellaria, 
orum, 7i. 

Meiisam secundam apponere. 

Jusculum sorbere (-biii). 
( Tergeo, ere, tersi, tersuin. 
( Extergere (aliquam rem). 

I)e naiibus loqui. 

Nasus, i, m. ; nares, ium,/ pi. {nos- 
trils). 

Bombyx, ycis, m. ; serica, orum, n. 

Sericus, bombycimis, a, urn. 

Serica, bombyclna, orum, n. 

Tibiale sericum, focale bombycl- 
num. 

Lintea mea bona {pi ). 

Indusia ejus lintea pulchra. 

Diaeta, ae,/ 

Cubiculum, i, n. 

Conclave, is, n. 

Conclave vestiarium. 

Coenaciilum, triclinium, i, n. 

Cubiculum anticum. 

Cubiculum posticum. 

Museum, i, n. ; bibliotheca, ae,/ 
( Habitare (in) aliquo loco. 
I Ten ere locum. 

Primum locum aedium tenere. 

Soror, oris,/ 
Virgo, inis,/ 
Lingua, ae,/ 
Lingua, ae,/; sermo, onis, m. 



5 >0 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON S3. 

The street. Via, via publica (ae, f.) ; platea, 

ae,/. (wide street). 

The city, town. Urbs, gen. urbis,/ ; oppidum, i, n. ; 

civltas, atis,/. (inhabitants). 

The hand. Manus, us,/. 

The right hand. Dextra, ae, /. 

The left hand. Sinistra, laeva, ae,/ 

The nut. Nux, gen. nucis,/ 

The father and his son or his Pater et ejus filius vel fi'lia. 

daughter. 

The mother with her son or Mater cum ejus fi'lio seu fi'lia 

daughter. (nata). 

The child and its brother or its Infans ejiisque frater sive sdror. 

sister. 

To take into one's hand. In manum sumere. 

To hold in one's hand. (In) inanu tenere. 

To write with one's own hand. Manu propria seribere. 

He thinks he will be praised. Credit, se laudatum iri. 

I hope that I shall be loved. Spero, me amutum iri. 

Exercise 158. 

Are you not surprised at what my friend has done ? — I am much 
surprised at it. — At what is your son surprised V — He is surprised 
at your courage. — Are you sorry for having written to my uncle ? — 
I am, on the contrary, glad of it. — At what art thou afflicted ? — I 
am not afflicted at the happiness of my enemy, but at the death of my 
friend. — How are your brothers V — They have been very well for 
these few days. — Are you glad of it ? — I am glad to hear that they 
are well. — Are you a Saxon ? — No, I am a Prussian. — Do the Prus- 
sians like to learn French ? — They do like to learn it. — Do the Prus- 
sians speak German as well as the Saxons ? — The Saxons and the 
Prussians speak German well ; but the Austrians do not pronounce it 
very well. — Which day of the week do the Turks celebrate (agere or 
festum habere) ? — They celebrate Friday ; but the Christians cele- 
brate Sunday, the Jews Saturday, and the negroes their birthday 
(natalis, sc. dies). — Has your sister my gold ribbon? — She has it 
not. — Who has my large bottle V — Your sister has it. — Do you 
sometimes see your mother ? — I see her often. — AVhen did you see 
your sister V — I saw her three months and a half ago. — Who has my 
fine nuts ? — Your good sister has them. — Has she also my silver 
forks ? — She has them not. — Why does your brother complain ? — 
He complains because his right hand aches. — Which bottle has your 
little sister broken ? — She broke the one which my mother bought 
yesterday. — Have you eaten of my soup or of my mother's ? — I have 
eaten neither of yours nor your mother's, but of that of my good sis- 
ter. — Have you seen the woman that was with me this morning ? — 
I have not seen her. — Has your mother hurt herself. — She has not 
hurt herself. — Have you a sore nose ? — I have not a sore nose, but 
a sore hand. — Have you cut your finger V — No, my lady, I have 



LESSON 86.] THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 551 

cut my hand. — Will you give me a pen ? — I will give you one. — 
Will you (have) this (one) or that (one) ? — I will (have) neither. — 
Which (one) do you wish to have ? — I wish to have that which your 
sister has. — Can you write with this pen V — I can write with it. — 
Shall you remain at home, or ride out or drive out ? — I shall remain 
at home. — Has he washed his hands or his feet ? — He had done 
both. — Has he learnt his lesson or not ? — He has learnt it. — He has 
not learnt it. — You certainly are mistaken, if you suppose that you 
will be praised, unless you are assiduous. 



Lesson LXXXVI. — PENSUM OCTOGESIMUM 
SEXTUM. 

OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

A. By the subjunctive mood the speaker does not absolutely 
assert the existence of an action or state, but represents it as he 
conceives it, as dependent upon other circumstances, and as pos- 
sible only in consequence of them. Hence this mood serves to 
express that which is contingent, conditional, or hypothetical ; 
or, in general, that which may, can, might, could, ivould, or should 
be or be done. 

The subjunctive is used more extensively in Latin than in English, 
and is often put where the latter idiom requires or prefers the indica- 
tive It most commonly occurs in subjoined or dependent clauses, as 
its name implies, but frequently also as the leading verb of an inde- 
pendent clause. 

THE SUBJUNCTIVE IN HYPOTHETICAL PROPOSITIONS. 

B. An hypothetical sentence is composed of two members, called 
the protasis and apodosis. The former contains the condition, and is 
commonly introduced by one of the conjunctions si, nisi, etsi, etiamsi, 
or tametsi ; the latter denotes the inference or conclusion. The sub- 
junctive may occur in both these members of an hypothetical propo- 
sition, and represents an action or state as the possible consequence of 
other circumstances; in other words, that something would take place 
or would have taken ]Mtc.f s if or unless something else were so or had 
been so. In this use of the subjunctive (as conditionalis), the Latin 
language makes an important distinction between the present and the 
past tenses of that mood. 

I. In the protasis of a hypothetical proposition, the imperfect 
and pluperfect subjunctive imply that the fact or reality does 



Oo2 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[lrsson sg. 



not or cannot correspond Avith the supposition made, and in the 
apodosis that something would be or would /tare been, if the fact 
supposed were or had been a real one. E. g. 

Si semper optima ten ere posse- 
m us, baud sane consilio miil- 
tum egeremus. 



Non possem vivere, nisi In h'tteris 
viverem. 

Si Neptunus, quod Theseo pro- 
mi'serat, non fecisset, Theseus 
filio Hippolyto 7t6/i orbdlus 4s- 
sel. 

Aiirum et argentum, aes, fe'rrum 
fnistra natura divina genuis- 
set, nisi e*adem docuisst i. quem- 
admodum ad eorum venas per- 
veniretur. 

!Nec tu, si Atheniensis esses, cla- 
rus unquamfuisst s. 

Id, nisi hie in tiio regno essemus, 
non tulissem. 

N6n, si redisset fdius, ei pifter 

veniam dan t ? 
Hade, si, bis bina qudt essent, 

didicisset, eerte non diceret. 



If we were always able to keep 
what is best, Ave surely would 
1 Mind in need of much de- 
liberation. 

I could not live, unless 1 lived in 
letters. 

If Neptune had not done what he 
had promised Theseus, Theseus 
would not have lost his son Ilip- 
polytus. 

])i\ ine Nature would have produced 
gold and silver, brass, iron, to no 
purpose, unless she at the same 
time had taught us how to get 
at their veins. 

Nor would you ever have been a 
distinguished man, if you had 
been an Athenian. 

We would not have submitted to 
that, unless we were here in your 
kingdom. 

If the son had returned, would not 
his father give him leave ? 

If he knew how much twice two 
are, he would certainly not say 
this. 



Remarks. 

1. The protasis and apodosis both generally contain either the im- 
perfect or the pluperfect subjunctive. The imperfect, however, fre- 
quently takes the plaee of the pluperfect in one of the clauses, as in 
several of the preceding examples. When thus used, it serves to 
transfer a past action, partly at least, into the present time. E. g. 
Quod ccrte non fecisset, si suum numerum nautarum naves habererit 
(= habuisseyU), Which he would certainly not have done, if the ships 
had had (lit. were then possessed of ) their usual complement of men. 
And in the apodosis : Cimbri si statim infesto agmine urban petisscnt, 
f/rande discrimen esset (== fuisset), If the Cimbri had at once invaded 
the city, there icould have been a desperate struggle. 

2. The mood of the verb in the apodosis is sometimes the indicative 
instead of the subjunctive. (Cf. Lesson LXXXIV. A. III.) E.g. 
Quern hominem, si qui pudor in te fuisset, sine supplicio dimitlere non 
debuisti, If there had been any shame left in you, you ought not to 
have dismissed the man without punishment. Q uod si Pompeius pri- 
viVus esset hue tempore, tamen erat mittendus, Even if Poaipey were at 



LESSON 86.] 



THE SUUJl'XCTIVE 3IOOD. 



this time a private man, it would still be necessary to send him. 
Jamque caslra exscindere parabant (= paravissent), ni Mucianus sex- 
tant ler/ionem opposuisset, And now they "would have already begun 
to destroy the camp, unless Mucianus had opposed the sixth legion to 
them. Praeclare viceramus (= vicissemus), nisi Lcpidus reeipisset 
Antonium, AVe would have won a signal victory, unless Lepidus has 
received Antony. This usage is confined chiefly to the pluperfect. 

II. The present and perfect subjunctive in the protasis indi- 
cate that the reality either does, or at any rate may, correspond 
with the supposition made. The apodosis to such a clause then 
contains, either one of the same tenses of the subjunctive, or a 
tense of the indicative mood. E. £. 



Meindria minuitur, nisi earn cx- 



Aequabilitatem vitae servare non 
possis, si aliorum virtutem inn- 
tans oinittus tiiara. 

Dies deficiat, si velim numerare, 
quibus bonis male evenerit. 

*S7 injuriae non sint, baud saepe 
auxilii ('yeas. 

Si exsuttat hddie ab inferia Lyciir- 

gus, gaudeat murdrum Sp&rtae 

minis. 
Sua impnidens, si plus postidem, 

quam hdmini a rerum natiira 

tii'bui potest. 

Thucydidis oratidnes ego laudarc 

., • ... . ° > ■ 

soleo ; imitare netpie possim, 

si velim, nee velim fortasse, si 

possim. 

Si scieris aspidem occiilte latere 

lispiam, improbe feceris, nisi 

monueris alterum, ne assideat. 



Nemo do nobis unus exeellat ; 
tin quis cxslilcrit, alio in loco 



et apud alios sit. 

St a corona relictus 
que'am dicere. 



sim, non 



47 



Your memory grows weaker, un- 
less you exercise it, or if you by 
nature are somewhat slow of 
comprehension. 

You cannot preserve consistency 
of life, if while imitating the vir- 
tues of others you neglect your 
own. 

The day would fail me, if I wished 
to enumerate the good men that 
have suffered evil. 

If there were no injuries (inflicted), 
you would not otten stand in 
need of help. 

If Lyeurgus were to-day to rise 
from the dead, he might rejoice 
in the ruins of the walls of Sparta. 

I would be imprudent, if I de- 
manded more than can be con- 
ceded to man from the nature of 
things. 

I am accustomed to praise the ora- 
tions of Thucydides, but imitate 
them I neither could, if I would, 
nor would I perhaps, if I could. 

If (for example) you should know 
of an asp lying concealed any- 
where, you would do wrong, if 
you did not caution another not 
to sit down there. 

Let no one of our number excel 
alone ; but if any one has won 
distinction, let him be among 
others and in another place. 

If I am deserted by my audience, 
I cannot speak. 



554 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 86. 

Remarks. 

1. From the above examples it will be perceived, that in con- 
ditional clauses the present and perfect subjunctive may generally be 
rendered by the corresponding tenses of the indicative, from which 
they differ but little. Sometimes, however, it is better to translate 
them by the imperfect or pluperfect subjunctive. In Latin, however, 
the distinctions, already laid down, respecting the different tenses of 
the subjunctive, are never disregarded, and the present tenses (i. e. 
the present and perfect) always imply the reality or possibility of the 
fact supposed, while the past tenses (i. e. the imperfect and pluperfect) 
represent it as wanting or impossible. E. g. Haec si tecum patria lo- 
quatur, nonne impetrare debeat ? If your country should thus talk to 
you (an event which the speaker considers possible), ought it not to 
obtain what it requires of you ? But, Si universa provincia loqui 
posset, liac voce uteretur, If the entire province could speak (an event 
which the srjeaker deems impossible), it would use this language to- 
wards you. And so in every instance of the kind. 

2. When the clause introduced by nisi, nisi forte, or nisi vero stands 
as a correction of what has gone before, its verb is commonly in the 
indicative. E. g. Nemo fere saltat sobrius, nisi forte insanit, No one 
scarcely ever dances when he is sober, unless perchance he is insane. 
Erat autem nihil novi, quod scriberem, nisi forte hoc ad te putas perti- 
nere, I have nothing new to write you, unless perhaps you consider 
this of importance to you. — On the Indicative after si, ?iisi, &c, gen- 
erally, see Lesson LXXXIV. A. in. 

If (conj.). Si (cum Ind. or Subj.). 

If not, unless. Nisi, ni : si non. 

But if. Sin, sin autem, si vero. 

But if not. Si non, si minus, si aliter. 

If indeed. Si quidem. 

If (unless) perchance. Si (nisi) forte. 

If any one. Si quis (or aliquis). 

If anything. Si quid (aliquid). 

If at any time. Si quando (aliquando). 

If I had money. i f. mM ¥ et £ e ™ nia - 

J (Si pecumam haberem. 

Tf I saw him. Si eum viderem. 

If I were not. Nisi ego essem. 

If he should do this. Si hoc (or hoc si) faceret (faciat). 

If any one should say this. Si quis hoc cheat (di'ceret). 

If perchance he were to lose his Si pecuniam siiam forte perdat 

money. (percleret). 

Were he at any time to beat his Si aliquando ennera siiam perciite- 

dog. ret (perciitiat). 

If you were rich. Si tu dives esses. 

If he is not ill, why does he send Si aeger non est, quid causae est, 

for the physician ? cur medicum accessat ? 



LESSON 86.] 



PHRASES AND EXERCISES. 



00O 



Should you (= if you should) still 
receive my letter to-day, I beg 
you to call on me instantly. 

Should he (= if he should) be 
hungry, something must be 
given him to eat. 

I should do it. 

He would have done it. 

We would go thither. 

They would have gone thither. 

They would have written to us. 

You would thank me once. 



I would buy this, if I had money. 

Had I money enough > I would 

pay for it. 
Had I money, I would give you 

some of it. 
If I went thither, I should see 

him. 
If I should give this to him, he 

would keep it. 
If I should give that to him, he 

would not return it. 
If you had come a little sooner, 

you would have met my broth- 
er. 
If he knew what you have done, 

he would scold you. 
If there was any wood, he would 

make a fire. 
If I had received my money, 

I would have bought a new 

pair of shoes. 
Would you learn Latin, if I 

learnt it? 
I would learn it, if you learnt it. 
Would you have learnt English, 

if I had learnt it ? 
I would have learnt it, if you 

had learnt it. 
Would you go to Germany, if I 

should go there with you ? 
I should go there, if you would 

go with me. 
Would you have gone to Italy, 

if I had gone there ? , 

I would have cone. 



Litteras meas si hddie etiam acci- 
piqs, a te quac'so et peto, ut sta- 
tim ad me venias. 

Si esuriat, dandum est ei aliquid 
ad manducanduin. 

Facerem. 

Fecisset. 

Nos eo iremus. 

Eo ivissent. 

Litteras ad nos dedissent. 

Gratias mihi aliquando ageres 
(agas). 

Emerem hoc, si peciinia mihi es- 
set 

Si mihi esset peciinia, emerem hoc. 

Si peciinia mihi sufl'iceret, sdlve- 
rem pro hoc. 

Si mihi esset peciinia, tibi de ea 
darem. 

Si eo irem (earn), eum viderem 
(videam). 

Hoc, si ei darem, teneret. 

f stud, si e'i darem, mihi non resti- 

tiieret. 
Si aliquantulo matiirius venisses, 

fratrem meum convenisses. 

llle si sciret factum tiium, tibi in- 

creparet. 
Si lignum adesset, ignem accende- 

ret. 
Ego, si pecuniam mihi debitam ac- 

cepissem, novum calceorum par 

eniissem. 
Disceresne sermonem Latinum, si 

ego discerem ? 
Discerem, si tu disceres. 
Didicissesne Ansli^e, si c;io didicis- 

sem i 
Didicissem, si tu didicisses. 



Faceresne iter in Germaniam, &i 
ego tecum proficiscerer ? 

Facerem sane, si tu mecum profi- 
ciscereris. 

Fecissesne iter in Italiam, si ego 
profectus essem ? 

Vero, fecissem. 



556 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 86. 



Would you write a note, if I had 

written a letter ? 
I should write a book, if you had 

written a letter. 
Would you remain at home, if I 

went out ? 
I should remain at home. 

The (pair of) spectacles. 

The old man. 

Optics. 

The optician. 

The son-in-law. 

The daughter-in-law. 

The step. 

To make a step. 

The progress. 

To make progress (in anything). 



passus, us, m. 
progessio, onis, 



To progress in virtue. 

To make great progress. 
To make but little progress. 
Does he make progress in learn- 
ing Latin ? 
Really. 

Once, at some future time. 
I should like to know. 
Would you have the goodness ? 

Would you be so good '? 

A Vould you do me the favor ? 

He might fall. 

He might do it. 

To ask any one about 

thing. 
To keep one's bed. 

Perhaps you are mistaken. 



any- 



Scriberesne schedulani, si ego lit- 
teras scripsissem ? 

Scriberem ego librum, si tu h'tteras 
scripsisses. 

Teneresne te ddmi, si ego in publi- 
cum prodirem ? 

Sane, tenerem me ddmi. 
*Perspicillum, i, n. 

Senex, gen. senis, m. 

Optice, es,/! 

Optices gnarus. 

Gener, eri, m. 

Nurus, iis,/ 

Gradus, us, m. ; 

Gradum facere. 

Progressus, us, m. 

/• 

Procedure. Progredi. Proficisre. 
Progressus facere. (in aliqua 

RE.) 

( Progressionem facere ad virtutem. 
\ Procedere et progredi in virtute. 

Multum proficere (in aliqua re). 

Parum proficere. 

Proficitne in lingua Latina edi- 
scenda ? 

Vere (adv.~) ; re vera, re. 

Aliquando, olim (af/<;.). 

Scire velim. 

Velisne esse ea benignitate 
(tat . . 

Velisne 
(ut . . 

Velisne mihi dare (tribuere) hoc ? 
( Cadat (caderet). 
( Fieri potest, ut cadat. 

Facere hoc pdssit. 

Interrogare aliquem aliquid or de 
aliqua re. 

Lecto teneri, lecto affixum esse. 
( Nescio (dubito) an erres. 
( Fortasse erras. 



esse 

0? 

esse 

v v 



tarn bem'crnus 



Exercise 159. 

Would you have money, if your father were here ? — I should 
have some, if he were here. — Would you have been pleased, if I 
had had some books ? — I should have been much pleased, if you had 
had some. — Would you have praised my little brother, if he had 
been good? — If he had been good, I should certainly not only have 



LESSON 87.] SUP.JUNCTIVE IN INDEPENDENT PROPOSITIONS. 557 

praised, but also loved, honored, and rewarded hirii'. — Should -\ve 
be praised, if we did our exercises ? — If you did them without a 
fault, you would be praised and rewarded. — Would my brother not 
have been punished, if he had done his exercises ? — He would not 
have been punished, if he had done them. — Would your sister have 
been praised, if she had not been skilful ? — She would certainly not 
have been praised, if she had not been very skilful, and if she had not 
worked from morning until evening. — AVould you give me some- 
thing, if I were very good ? — If you were very good, and if you 
worked well, I would give you a fine book. — Would you have writ- 
ten to your sister, if I had gone to Dresden ? — I would have written 
and sent her something handsome, if you had gone thither. — Would 
you speak, if I listened to you ? — I would speak, if you listened to 
me, and if you would answer me. — Would you have spoken to my 
mother, if you had seen her ? — I would have spoken to her, and 
have begged of her to send you a handsome gold watch if I had seen 
her. — If the men should come, you would be obliged to give them 
something to drink. — If he could do this, he would do that. — A 
peasant having seen that old men used spectacles to read, went to an 
optician and asked for a pair. The peasant then took a book, and 
having opened it, said the spectacles were not good. The optician 
put another pair of the best which he could find in his shop upon his 
nose ; but the peasant being still unable to read, the merchant said to 
him: " My friend, perhaps you cannot read at all ? " " If I could," 
said the peasant, "I should not want your spectacles.'' — I have 
always flattered myself, my dear brother, that you loved me as much 
as I love you ; but I now see, that I have been mistaken. I should 
like to know why you went a walking without me ? — I have heard, 
my dear sister, that you are angry with me, because I went a walking 
without you. — I assure you that, had I known that you were not ill, 
I should have come for you ; but I inquired at your physiciau's about 
your health, and he told me that you had been keeping your bed the 
last eight days. 



Lesson LXXXVII. — PENSUM OCTOGESIMUM 
SEPTIMUM. 

THE SUBJUNCTIVE IN INDEPENDENT PROPOSITIONS. 

A. The present and perfect subjunctive are frequently used 
independently in a potential sense, and rendered by the English 
may, can, &c. In this construction the perfect is generally 
equivalent to the present. E. g. 

Fdrsltan quacmtis. You may perhaps inquire. 

Quis dubXlet ? Who can doubt V 

47* 



558 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[lesson 87. 



Velim (nolim, malbii) sic existi- 
nies. 

Nemo istud ti'bi conceded. 

Fdrsitan temere fecerim. 

Hie quaerat quispiam, cujiisnam 

causa tanta reruin molitio facta 

sit. 
Ita facillime sine invidia laudem 

invenias et amicos pares. 

Fdveas tu lidsti ? bonorum spe'm 
virtutemque debilltes ? et te 
consularem, aut senatoreni, 
aut denique civem pules ? 



At non histdria cesserlm Graecis, 
ncc oppdnere Thucydidi Sal- 
liistiuin ve'rear. 

Hoc sine dubitatione confirmdve- 

rim, eloquentiam rem esse 
omnium difficillimam. 



I wish you to (I do not wish you 
to, I would rather you would) 
think so. 

No one can concede this to you. 

I may perhaps have acted rashly. 

Here some one may inquire, on 
whose account so great exertions 
were made. 

You may thus easily win glory 
without any envy, and gain 
friends. 

Can you favor the enemy? Can 
you deject the hope and courage 
of the patriotic ? and still con- 
sider yourself a man of consular 
rank, or a senator, or even a 
citizen ? 

But still I cannot surrender the 
palm in history to the Greeks, 
nor am I afraid to oppose Sallust 
to Thucydides. - 

I can assert this without any hes- 
itation, that eloquence is the 
most difficult of all things. 



Remarks. 

1. The use of the present subjunctive instead of the perfect is an 
energetic expression, by which an unfinished action is represented as 
already completed. It is confined chiefly to the active form of verbs, 
but sometimes also occurs in the passive. E. g. Ne iUi quidem se no- 
bis mcrito praetulerint gloriatique sint, Not even they can justly call 
themselves better than us, and glory in it. 

2. The imperfect subjunctive is rarely used in this potential sense, 
except where the idea of unreality or impossibility is to be conveyed. 
Thus of wishes to which no fulfilment is (or can be) expected : Vellem, 
I could wish ; noUem, I should be unwilling ; mallem, I should rather 
wish. To these add the second and third persons singular of dico, 
piito, credo, video, cerno, and discerno, which frequently occur in a 
potential sense, instead of the pluperfect subjunctive. E. g. Reos di- 
ceres, You would have called them guilty (i. e. if you had seen them). 
Signum datum crederes, ut vasa colligerent, You would have supposed 
that a signal had been given to collect vases. Haud faci/e disccreres, 
You could not have easily distinguished. Quis unquam crederet (or 
arbitraretur') ? Who could ever have believed (or supposed) ? 

B. The present and perfect subjunctive are often used in 
independent clauses to express a wish, an asseveration, a re- 
quest, command, or exhortation, and also a concession or per- 
mission. E. g. 



LESSON 87.] 



THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



559 



With the subjunctive thus used, the English "not" is expressed 
by ne, and not by non. When a wish or request is conveyed, one 
of the verbs velim. suadeo, or censeo is often added. 



Dii bene verlant ! 

Dii prohibeant a nobis impias 

mentes ! 
Vdleant cives mei, vdleant; sint 

incdl times, sint florentes, sint 

beati ! 

Ste'l haec xirbs praeclara, mihi- 
que patria carissima ! 

Ne salvus sim* si aliter scribo, 

ac se'ntio. 
Velim mi'hi irjndscas. 
Quidquid veniat in mentem, 

scribas velim. 
^ssediim aliquod suadeo cdpias. 



Treviros vites, censeo 
pitales esse. 



audio ca- 



Fdcias. Rclinquas. Ad nos ve- 
in as. 
Aiidiat, videat. Desinant. 



Hoc ne feet 



Nihil ignoveris. 



Miserico'rdia ne commotus sis. 
Nihil incdmmodo valetudinis 

/ tuae feceris. 
JZmas, non quod opus est, sed 

quod necesse est. ■ 
Immitemus ndstros Briitos, Cii- 

millos, Decios ; amemus patri- 

am, pareamus senatui, consu- 

lamus bdnis.f 
Meminerlmus etiam adversus m- 

fimos justitiam esse servan- 

dara. 
Ne desperemus ; a legibus non 

receddmus. 



]\Iay the gods grant success to it ! 
May the gods defend us against 

impious minds ! 
Farewell to my fellow-citizens, 
farewell ! May they be safe, 
may they be prosperous, may 
they be happy ! 
Let this noble city remain un- 
shaken, and my dearest father- 
land ! 
Let me perish, if I write differently 

from what I think. 
I wish you to pardon (or excuse) me. 
I want you to write whatever comes 

into your mind. 
I advise you to take some travel- 
ling conveyance. 
I think you should avoid the Tre- 
viri ; I hear that they are mortal 
against us. 
Do so. Relinquish. Come to see 

us. 
Let him hear, let him see. Let 

them cease. 
Do not do this. Do not pardon 

anything. 
Do not be moved by compassion. 
Do not do anything to the detri- 
ment of your health. 
Buy not what you want, but what 

is absolutely necessary. 
Let us imitate our Brutuses, onr 
Camilli, our Decii ; let us cher- 
ish our country, obey the senate, 
and provide for the patriotic. 
Let us remember, that the require- 
ments of justice must be observed 
towards the humblest even. 
Let us not despair ; let us not 
swerve from the laws. 



Remarks. 
1. The subjunctive instead of the imperative is especially frequent 
in the third person ; as, dicat, faciat, scribant, let him say, let him do, 



* So also moriar, inteream, peream, Let me die, perish (if that is so). 
| In exhortations the subjunctive is commonly in the plural. 



5G0 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON S7. 

let them write. The second person thus used is commonly connected 
with a negative, and the perfect is put in the sense of the present ; as, 
ne dixeris, ne hoc fecerltis, do not say, do (ye) not do this. The sub- 
junctive implies a gentleness of command, which is sometimes in- 
creased by the addition of words like quaeso, oro, I beseech you ; dum, 
now, pray ; and sis (= si vis), please. E. g. Quaeso, parens mihi, I 
beg you to spare me. Taceas (lace), sis, Please be silent. 

2. In prescriptions which relate to the past, the imperfect and plu- 
perfect subjunctive are employed. E.g. Pater ejus fortasse aliquan- 
do iniquior erat', pateretur, His father was perhaps at times unjust; 
he was obliged to bear it. Forsi/an non nemo vir fortis dixrrit. resti- 
tisses, A brave man may say, perhaps, you ought to have resisted. 

3. In exhortations non is sometimes used instead of ne. E. g. Non 
(for ne) despertmus, Let us not despair. 

C. The subjunctive is also used in doubtful questions, to 
which no positive answer is expected, and which imply the idea 
of the contrary. 

These negative questions are commonly rendered by can, shall, 
could, &c. The subjunctive of this connection is called the dubitative. 

Qaidfdclamt Quo cam? "What can I do? AVhere can I 

so V 
Qxridfdcerem ? Quo xreni ? "What could I do ? AVhere could I 

go ? 
Quid fdciamf rdge r, anne ro'gem? "What shall I do ? Shall I ask or 

be asked ? 
Quern te appe'llem ? What shall I call you? 

Qaidfdceret aliud ? What else could he do? 

Cur forturiam periclitaretur ? "Why should he try his fortune ? 

Nam, quern ferret, si parentem "Who could he bear, if he could 

non ferret siium ? not bear his own parent ? 

Cum tempestate pugnem perieu- Shall I fight with the storm at my 
lose pdtius, quam illi oblempc- own peril, rather than yield to 
rem et pdrtam f and obey it ? 

Apud exercitum mihi fiieris, in- You have been with the army, said 
quit, tot annos ? forum non he, for so many years ? You 
attigeris? abfuerls tamdiu ? have not come in contact with 

the forum ? You have been ab- 
sent so long ? 
Remark. — In these questions the answer implied is eonnnonly 
the opposite. E. g. Quis possil, "Who can (could) ? — Xo one. Quis 
non possit ? "Who could not ? — Every one could. Hoc non noceat ? 
This is not hurtful ? — It is certainly so. 

SUBJUNCTIVE IN INDIRECT QUESTIONS. 

D. When a question is stated indirectly, or merely 
quoted, its verb is in the subjunctive. 



LESSON 87.] SUBJUNCTIVE IN INDIRECT QUESTIONS. 



561 



A clause containing an indirect question is generally dependent 
upon another verb. The verbs on which an indirect question may- 
depend are not only those of asking, but many others, especially those 
requiring the accusative with the infinitive. (Cf. Lesson LIII.) 

All the words and particles used in direct questions may also intro- 
duce an indirect one. They are quis, quid ; qui, quae, quod: quot, 
quantus, quam, uhi, unde, quare, cur,uter, quo, quomodo ; utrum, an, 
— ne, num. (Cf. Lesson LXXXV. B. u.) 

When the question is double, it follows the construction of direct 
questions of the same class. (Cf. Lesson LXXXV.) 

Examples. 

Quaeritur, quid faciendum sit. 
Mors ipsa quid sit, primurn est 

videndum. is. 

Qudlis sit animus, ipse animus The mind itself is ignorant of what 
nescit. mind is. 

Learn what it is to live. 
It is uncertain what every night 
or day may bring. 



The question is, what is to be done. 
We must first see what death itself 



Disce, quid sit vivere. 

Quid quacque ndx aut diesfe'rat, 
incertum est. 

Quaeritur, cur doctissimi homi- 
nes de maximis rebus disstnti- 
ant. 

Difficile dictu est, quaenam cau- 
sa sit. 

!N6n, quantum quisque possit, sed 
quanti quisque sit, ponderan- 
dum est. 

Non est, cur spes eorum infrin- 
gdtur. 

Yidcamus piimum, deoruimze 
providentia miindus regdtur. 

Inter se rogitabant, num* quern 
plebei consuls poeniteret. 

Antigonus ndndum statiierat, 
conservdret Eiimenem, nee ne. 



Deliberat senatus, captivos 
hdstibus rtdimat, an non. 



ab 



Ipse qui sit, utrum sit, an non sit, 

id qudque nescit. 
Quod nescire malum est, agite- 

nius, utrumne divitiis homines, 

an sint virtute beati. 



The question is, why the most 
learned differ on the most im- 
portant points. 

It is difficult to say, what the rea- 
son is. 

We are not to consider what any 
one can do, but what he is mor- 
ally worth. 

There is no reason why their hope 
should be dejected. 

Let us see first, whether the world 
is governed by the providence 
of the gods. 

They inquired of each other, 
whether any one was tired of 
the plebeian consul. 

Antigonus had not yet determined 
whether he would save Eumenes 
or not. 

The senate is deliberating, whether 
to redeem the cajDtives from the 
enemy, or not. 

He himself does not know what he 
is, nor whether he is or is not. 

Let us discuss what it is a misfor- 
tune not to know : whether men 
are made happy by riches, or by 
virtue. 



* The particle num in indirect questions does not imply a negative answer, 
; in direct questions. 2 J 



562 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 87. 



Eemarks. 

1. "When the question is regarded as direct, the indicative is some- 
times used, especially after imperatives like die, vide. E. g. Die, 
quacso, num te ilia terrent? Pray tell me, whether those things 
frighten you ? Quaerdmus, ubi maleficium est (for sit), Let us in- 
quire where the mischief is. But instances like these are compara- 
tively rare. 

2. The expressions nescio quis, nescio quid, in the sense of aliquis 
or quidam, aliquid or quiddam, are not linked to any particular mood 
of the verb. E. g. Nescio quid (— paululum) turbatus esse mihi 
vidtris, You seem to me to be somewhat agitated. 



To propose. 

I have made up my mind to do 

this. 
I propose going on that journey. 
I have made up my mind to 

leave here. 
He proposes to write. 



To endeavor, strive. 

To make great effort. 
To make a fruitless effort. 

I wish you would endeavor to 

do this. 
I shall endeavor to accomplish it. 

Take care of your health. 

I endeavor to succeed in it. 

To aspire after (any- 
thing). 

To aspire after honors, riches, 

pleasure. 
To aspire after praise, after one's 
money. 

The honor. 
Places of honor. 
For the sake of honor (hon- 
orary). 
The riches. 



( Animum inducere (ut ....). 
( Cogitdre (facere aliquid). 

Stat mihi sententia (or simply stat 
mihi) facere hoc. 

fter lllud facere edgito. 

Stat mihi abire hinc. 

Animum inducit scribere or ut 
scribat. 
f Operam dare or navdre. 
J Nui or eniti (nisus sum). 
1 Labordre, contendere. 
I (.111 with ut ) 

j" Omnibus viribus contendere. 
\ Omnibus nervis conniti. 

Operam et oleum perdere ; frustra 
nlti. 

Operam des velim, ut hoc facias. 

Id ut perficiam, enitar et conten- 
dam. 

Da operam, ut valeas. 
( Rem eo perdiicere labdro. 
■< Ego, ut rem prdspere agam, con- 
( tendo. 

( Niti, annlti, or aspirare (ad rem). 
I Pet ere or appetere (rem). 

Petere honorcs, divitias, volupta- 
tem. 

Ad laudem, ad alicujus pecuniam 
aspirare. 

Honor, oris, m. 

Honores, munera honorifica. 

Honoris causa. 

Divitiae, arum,/. 



LESSON S7-] PHRASES AND EXERCISES. 



563 



The title. 



Appellatio, onis,/; nonien, inis, n.; 

dignitas, atis,/. 
Existimatio, onis,/ ; dignitas. 
Honori esse alicui. 



The reputation. 
To be for (redound to) 
one's honor or reputation. 

mre any one. { ^ 0C ~ ere ( c ^*™0 alicui. 

J I Damnum infcrre ahem. 

To be an injury to any one. Damno seu detrimento esse alicui. 

Praecipitare, dejicere (aliquem 

DE LOCO, IN LOCUM). 

Dejicere aliquem in mare. 



To inj\ 

) be an 

To plunge, precipitate. 

To throw any one into the 



sea. 
To plunge any one into a 

pit, into destruction, into 

misery. 
To tie, bind. 
To tie a handkerchief a- 

round the neck. 
To tie the horse to the tree. 



Praecipitare aliquem in foveam, in 
exitium, in mala (miserias). 

Ligare ; alligare, deligare, illigare. 
Sudarium ligare circum collum. 

Equum ad arborem alligare. 
'Alligare or obligare (sibi ali- 
quem). 
Obstringo, ere, nxi, ctum. 
Devincio, ire, vinxi, vinctum. 

(sibi aliquem aliqua re.) 
Obligare or obstringere aliquem 

officiis. 
Perforatum seu gratissimum facere 

alicui. 
Aliquem sibi in perpetuum devin- 

cire. 
Gratum facere alicui ; officia alicui 

praestare. 
Omcium, i, n. 
Usus, us, m. 
Gratissimum mini fades, hoc si 

beneficium mini tribuas. 
Hoc si mihi officium praestes, me 

tibi in perpetuum devincies. 

Qudniam felix es, quid, quaeso, 

quereris ? 
Nihil de eo, quod fecerit, conque- 

stus essem, si mihi soli nocuisset, 

sed hoc faciens miiltas familias 

in mala praecipitavit. 



To oblige (any one), to lay 
one under obligations. 

To oblige any one by kind 

offices. 
To oblige any one greatly. 

To lay one under perpetual 

obligations. 
To render a service to any 

one. 
The obligation (duty). 
The use. 
You would oblige me very much, 
if you would do me this favor. 
If you would render me this ser- 
vice, you would lay me under 
lasting obligations. 
Since you are happy, why, pray, 

do you complain ? 
I should not have complained of 
what he has done, if he had 
injured me alone ; but in do- 
ing it, he plunged many fami- 
lies into misery. 
What do you wish to say with < Quidnam hoc dicis ? 

this (= what do you mean) ? \ Quidnam hoc vis intelligi ? 
Since you have nothing to tell Qudniam, quod ei niinties, non ha- 



564 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 87. 



him, •why then do you wish to 
see him ? 

Who of them has made the best 
use of his money ? 

I should do it, if it were possible. 

Were I in your place. ' 

If I were in your place. ( 

Had he (= if he had) the treas- 
ures of Croesus. 

That man would be happier, if 
he left off gambling. 

He would have been happier, if 
he had left off gambling. 

He would not have done it, had 
he (= if he had) foreseen the 
result. 

I should think myself ungrateful, 
did I not (= if I did not) con- 
sider you as my benefactor. 

The French would not have 
gained the battle, if they had 
not had superior forces. 

I wish you would do this. 

I wish you would go there. 

I wish you had done it. 

I wish you had gone there. 

I should have wished to see him, 
had it been possible. 

I should like to read, if I had 
only leisure. 

If I could, I would do it. 

If she were amiable, he would 
marry her. 

You would have been a philoso- 
pher, if you had observed 
silence. 
Polite. 

Impolite. 
Deaf. 

Timid, bashful. 
Carefully. 
The occasion 
Opportunity. 

I have occasion, the oppor- 
tunity for doing anything. 
The insensibility. 
The supplication, request. 
The career (in life). 



bes, cur tamen eum convenire 

vis ? 
Quis eorum peciinia sua usus est 

sapientissime. 
Facerem hoc, si fieri posset. 
Si tiio loco esseni. 
Si e'go essem, qui tu es. 
Croesi divitiae si mihi essent. 

Felicior esset ille, si missam faceret 

aleam. 
Felicior fuisset, si missam fecisset 

aleam. 
Id non fecisset, si exitum praevidis- 

set. 

Ingratum me putarem esse, nisi te 

mihi benefieiorurn auctorem ju- 

dicarem. 
Francogalli in proelio non vicis- 

sent, ni hdstibus niimero superid- 

res fuissent. 
Velim, ut hoc facias. 
Velim, ut llluc eas. 
Vellem, ut illud fecisses. 
Vellem, ut eo ivisses. 
Convenire eum voluissem, si fieri 

potuisset. 
Legerem ego libentissime, si mddo 

mihi dtium esset. 
Facerem hoc, si pdssem. 
Illam, si amabilis esset, uxorem sibi 

sumeret. 
Si tacuisses, phildsoj)hus fuisses. 



Urbanus ; modestus ; benignus, a, 

um. 
Inurbanus, a, um. 
Surdus, a, um. 
Timidus, a, um. 

Cum cura ; accurate, diligenter. 
Occasio, onis,/. ; locus, i, m. 
Opportunitas, potestas, atis,/. 
Est mihi occasio, potestas faciendi 

aliquid. 
Inhumanitas, immanitas, atis,y. 
Preces, pi. ; nagitatio, onis,/! 
Vitae curriculum. 



LESSON 87.] EXERCISE 160. 505 

To follow one's advice. J ^ ui . aUcujiis consilium. 

( Ahcujus consiho temperare. 
To experience misery. In miseria esse or versari. 

Exercise 160. 

Well, does your sister make any progress ? — She would make 
some, if she were as assiduous as you. — You flatter me. — Not at all ; 
I assure you that I should be highly (piagnopere) satisfied, if all my 
pupils worked like you. — Why do you not go out to-day ? — I would 
go out if it were fine weather. — Shall I have the pleasure of seeing 
you to-morrow ? — If you wish it, I will come. — Shall I still be here 
when you arrive ? — Will you have occasion to go to town this even- 
ing ? — I do not know, but I would go now if I had an opportunity. 

— You would not have so much pleasure, and you would not be so 
happy, if you had not friends and books. — Man would not experi- 
ence so much misery in his career, and he would not be so unhappy, 
were he not so blind. — You would not have that insensibility towards 
the poor, and you would not be so deaf to their supplication, if you 
had been yourself in misery for some time. — You would not say that, 
if you knew me well. — Why has your sister not done her exercises ? 

— She would have done them, if she had not been prevented. — If 
you worked more, and spoke oftener, you would speak better. — I as- 
sure you, sir, that I should learn better, if I had more time. — I do not 
complain of you, but of your sister. — You would have had no reason 
to complain of her, had she had time to do what you gave her to do. — 
What has my brother told you ? — He has told me that he would be 
the happiest man in the world, if he knew the Latin language, the 
most beautiful of all languages. — I should like to know why I can- 
not speak as well as you. — I will tell you: you would speak quite 
as well as I, if you were not so bashful. But if you had studied your 
lessons more carefully, you would not be afraid to speak ; for, in order 
to speak well, one must learn ; and it is very natural, that (necesse or 
par est, ut) he who does not know well what he has learnt should be 
timid. — You would not be so timid as you are, if you were sure to 
make no mistakes. — There are some people who laugh when I speak. 

— Those are impolite people; you have only to laugh also, and they 
will no longer laugh at you. If you did as I (do), you would speak 
well. — You must study a little every day, and you will soon be no 
longer afraid to speak. — I will endeavor to follow your advice, for I 
have resolved to rise every morning at six o'clock, to study till ten 
o'clock, and go to bed early. — I wish your son would be more assidu- 
ous. — Let us be more diligent. — Let them listen to the advice of 
their friend, and not be deaf to the words of wisdom. — Let us imitate 
the best and wisest among men. — Do you know what that is V — I 
do not know what it is. — I do not know whether he will go out or 
remain at home. — Do you know whether he has finished his letter 
or not ? — I do not know. — I beg you not to write. — Please be 
silent. 

48 



566 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[lesson 88. 



Lesson LXXX VJJJ. — PENSUM DUODEXOXA- 
GESIMUM. 

THE SUBJUNCTIVE AETER CONJUNCTIONS. 



A. Dependent clauses denoting an intention, purpose, object, or 
result are put in the subjunctive. These clauses are commonly in- 
troduced by the conjunctions ut, ne, quo, quin, and quominus. The 
tense of the subjunctive is determined by that of the leading verb, 
according to Lesson LXXXIII. 

I. Ut or uti, " that," " in order that," " so that," indicates 
the purpose, object, consequence, or effect of another action. 
When it expresses a result, it is commonly preceded by one of 
the words sic, ita, tarn, talis, tantus, ejusmodi, Sec. E. g. 

Legum idcirco servi sumus, ut li- We are therefore the servants of 

the law, that we may be able to 
be free. 

You should eat to live, and not 
live to eat. 

The Romans called him from the 
plough, that he might be dic- 
tator. 

Since you are a Pylades, will you 
say that you are Orestes, in or- 
der to die for your friend ? 

If the doctor has done everything 
(he could) to cure, he has per- 
formed his duty. 

Let us treat with Antonius in such 
a manner, that he may see that 
I will be entirely in his favor. 

Verres has harassed Sicily to such 
an extent, that it cannot by any 
means be restored to its former 
condition. 

Your demands are so reasonable, 
that it was necessary to accede 
to them voluntarily. 

Pompey's valor and success is such, 
that he has always been able to 
accomplish what no one else 
could. 

We should observe such an order 
of our actions, that everything 
in life may be harmonious and 
consistent. 



beri esse jjosslmus. 

Esse opdrtet ut vivas, non vivere, 

ut e'das. 
Romani euni ab aratro abduxe- 

runt, ut dictator esset. 

Pylades quum sis, dices te esse 
Orestem, ut moridre pro ami- 
co? 

Si omnia fecit, ut sandret, peregit 
medicus partes siias. 

Cum Antonio sic agemus, ut per- 

sjriciat, tdtum me futurum sii- 

um. 
Siciliam Verres it a vexavit, ut 

ea restitui in pristinum stdtum 

nullo mddo possit. 

Adeo aequa postulatis, ut liltro 
vdbis deferenda fuerint. 

Pompeius ea est virtiite ac for- 
tiina, ut ea potuerit semper, 
quae nemo praeter ilium. 

Talis est drdo actionum adhi- 
bendus, ut in vita omnia sint 
apta inter se et convenientia. 



LESSON 88.] SUBJUNCTIVE AFTER CONJUNCTIONS. 567 

Remarks. 

1. The adverbs ita, sic, tarn before the verbs and adjectives preced- 
ing ut are sometimes omitted, and the latter then is rendered by so 
that. (See examples on page 387.) 

2. Ut is originally an adverb of manner and the correlative of ita, 
so — as. E. g. Uti initium, sic finis est. In this sense it is not fol- 
lowed by any particular mood, but has either the indicative or sub- 
junctive, as the construction may require. When, in the sense of as 
soon as, it indicates a relation of time, it generally takes the indicative 
perfect. E. g. Ut primum loqui posse coepi, As soon as I could speak. 
— On ut with the sense of would that and supposing that, see Lesson 
LXXXIX. 

II. Ne always implies a purpose or intended effect, and is 
equivalent to the English " lest," or " that not." E. g. 

Ciira, ne deniio in mdrbum met- See that you do not fall sick again. 

das. 

Eificio, ne cui molesti suit. I see to it, that they do not become 

troublesome to any one. 

Ne id fieri posset, obsidione fie- The possibility of that was pre- 

bat. vented by the blockade. 

Timdleon oravit dmnes, ne id fa- Timoleon begged them all not to 

cerent. do that. 

Me dbsecras, ne obliviscar vigi- You beseech me not to forget to 

lare. watch. 

Hortatur eos, ne animo deficiant. He exhorts them not to lose their 

courage. 

Quod potuisti prohibere, ne fie- Which you could have prevented 

ret. from being done. 

Remarks. 

1. Ut non is used instead of ne, when no intended effect, but a 
mere consequence, is to be expressed (in the sense of so that not), and 
also when the negation does not relate to the entire sentence, but only 
to a particular word of it. E. g. Turn forte aegroiabam, ut ad nuptias 
tuas venire non possem, I happened to be sick then, so that I could not 
come to your wedding. Confer te ad Manlium, ut a me non ejectus ad 
alienos, sed invitatus ad tuos isse videaris, Go to Manlius, so that you 
may not have the appearance of having been cast out among strangers 
by me, but of having gone invited to your friends. 

2. As a continuation of ut and ne in negative sentences the particle 
neve is used, which after ne stands in the sense of aut ne, " or lest," 
" or that not," and after ut in the sense of et ne, " and that not." 
E. g. Legem tulit, ne quis ante actarum rerum accusaretur neve mul- 
taretur, He enacted a law, that no one should be accused of past 
offences, nor (or) punished for them.* 

* Instead of neve preceded by ut, neque (or nee) is not unfrequently em- 
ployed. E. g. Persuadent, ut pater entur, nee ultima experiri velltnt, Tiiey 
exhort them to suffer it, and not to attempt to resort to extremes. 



568 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[lesson" 88. 



3. Instead of ne, the double conjunction ut ne is also used, especially 
in legal language. E.g. Operam dant, ut judicia nejS 'ant, They are 
endeavoring to" prevent judgment. Ut hie, qui intervenit, ne ignoret, 
quae res agcitur, That he who happens to come in may not be ignorant 
of what is coins on. 

III. After verbs denoting fear or apprehension, ne is equiva- 
lent to the English ' ; that," or ' ; lest," and ut or ne non to 
<• that not." E. &. 



Timeo, ne phiat. 
Timeo, ut phial. 
Timeo, ne non * phiat. 
Yereor, ut apte dicam. 
Vereop, ut mature ve'nias. 



,} 



Metuo, ne fhistra laborem susce- 

peris. 
Timebam, ne evenirent ea, quae 

acciderunt. 

Verendum est, ne brevi tempore 
fames in lirbe sit 

6mnes labdres te exeipere video. 
Timeo, ut sustineas. 



"Veretur Hiempsal, tit satis 
mum sit (foedus) et ratum. 



fiV- 



Yerebamini. ne non id fucerem, 
quod recepissem semel. 

Metuebat scilicet, ne indicdrent, 
ne dolorem ferre n6n possent. 

Pavor ceperat milites, ne morti- 
ferum csset vulnus Scipionis. 



I am afraid that it will rain. 
I am afraid that it will not rain. 

I fear I do not speak correctly. 

I fear you will not come in proper 
time. 

I am afraid that you have worked 
in vain. 

I was afraid that that would come 
to pass, which (actually) has oc- 
curred. 

It is to be feared that in a short 
time there will be a famine in 
the city. 

I perceive that you are undertak- 
ing the whole of the labor. I 
am afraid that you will not hold 
out. 

Hiempsal was afraid that the com- 
pact would not be sufficiently 
firm and safe. 

Ye were afraid that I would not 
perform what I had undertaken. 

He was afraid perhaps they might 
declare, that they would be un- 
able to endure the pain. 

The terror had invaded the sol- 
diers, that Scipio's wound might 
be mortal. 



Remarks 

1. This construction includes also substantives denoting fear, appre- 
hension, or danger (as the pavor of the last example). So also the 
causative verbs terrere. conterrtre, and deterrere. To these add carere, 
to beware, and videre and obscrvare, in the sense of " to see, reflect, 
consider." E. g. Cavendum est, ne assentatoribus patefacidmus aures, 
^Ve should guard against opening our ears to flatterers. Yidendum 
est, ne qiris nervus laedatur, We must see, that no nerve is hurt.f 



* Ne non in this construction is equivalent to ut. 

t In this sense, Vide ne = " See whether not or that,'' and Vide ne non 



LESSON 88.] SUBJUNCTIVE AFTER " QUO " AND " QUIN." 5G9 

2. When verbs of fearing do not imply a wish (that something 
might or might not take place), but merely an emotion of the mind, 
they take the infinitive. E. g. Vereor dicere, I am afraid to speak. 
Metuit tangi, He is afraid of being touched. 

IV. Quo generally occurs only in connection with a compar- 
ative, and is equivalent to ut eo, " that," " so that," " in order 
that." Non quo, followed by sed, is equivalent to non quod, 
" not that," " not as if." E. g. 

Ager non semel aratur, sed no- The land is not ploughed once 
vutur et iterfitur, quo melidres only, but a second and a third 
fetus pdssit et grandiores edere. time, in order that it may pro- 
duce better and larger crops. 
Cohortarer vds, quo dnimo ford- I should exhort you to be more 

ore essetis. resolute in mind. 

Legem brevem esse oportet, quo A law should be brief, in order 
facilius ab impends tenedtur. that it may be the more easily 

remembered by the simple. 

Ad te litteras dedi, non quo ha- I have written to you, not that I 

herein magndpere, quod serf- had anything particular to eom- 

berem, sed ut loquerer tecum municate, but in order that in 

absens. my absence I might converse 

with you. 

Remarks. 

1. Quo with the subjunctive always denotes a purpose. In the 
sense of et eo, " and by this means," and in the formula quo — eo or 
hoc (with comparatives), it has the indicative. E. g. Quo plures 
eraht, (hoi') major caedes fuit, The larger their number, the greater 
the massacre. 

2. Instead of non quo in the sense given above, it is more common 
to say non quod, non eo quod, non ideo quod, non quia, and negatively 
non quin. E. g. Non quod sola ornent, sed quod excellant, Not that 
they are the only ornaments, but because they excel as such. Non 
quin pari virtule et voluntdte alii fuerint, sed, &c, Not as if others 
were not his peers in virtue and resolution, but, &c. 

V. Quin (= qui -f- non) is used after negative propositions, 
or after general questions involving a negation, and may gener- 
ally be resolved either into qui non or into ut non. 

1. In the sense of qui (quae, quod) non, it occurs principally after 
expressions like nemo (nullus, nihil, vix, aegre) est, reperitur, quin, &c, 
and after general questions introduced by qids or quid. E. g. Quis 
est, quin inteUigat? Who is there (or is there any one), that does not 
comprehend? Nemo vend, quin videret, No one came who did not 
see (without seeing). 

" See whether or that not." E. g. Vide ne hoc tibi obsit, See whether this does 
not hurt you. Vide ne non satis sit, See whether this is enough. 

48* 



570 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[lesson 88. 



2. In the sense of ut non it occurs after expressions like facere non 
possum, quin ; fieri non potest, quin ; nulla causa or nihil causae est, 
quin, &c. E. g. Facere non possum, quin miltam, I cannot but send 
(cannot do otherwise than send). Nulla causa est, quin hoc faciam, 
There is no reason why I should not do this (I am authorized to do it). 

3. It is moreover used, in the sense of the English but that or that, 
after verbs and expressions signifying doubt, distance, prevention, or 
omission, such as non dubdo, non est dubium, non ambigo, quin ; non 
abest, nihil (or paucum, non procul, hand multum) abest, quin ; non 
(vix, aegre) abstineo, quin ; temperdre mild (or tcnere me) non possum, 
quin ; non impedio, non recuso, non or nihil praetermitto, quin, &c. 
E. g. Non dublto, quin profectus sit, I do not doubt that he has left 
(his having left). Nihil abest, quin mise'rrimus sim, I lack nothing of 
being a most unhappy man. 

4'. Additional examples of all these constructions of quin are 
the following : — 



Nihil est, quin possit depravari. 

Quis est, quin cernat, quanta vis 
sit in sensibus ? 

Nihil tarn difficile est, quin quae- 
rendo investigari poasit. 

Nulla mora fuit, quin decern e- 

rent be'llum. 
Facere non pdtui, quin tibi sen- 

tentiam meam declardrem. 
!N6n diibito, quin ddmi sit. 

Non est dubium, quin Helvetii 
plurimum pdssi)it. 

Haiid multum dbfuit, qiun ab 
exiilibus interficeretur. 

Teneri non jritui, quin (hoc) tibi 
declardrem. 

Impediri non potest, quin progre- 
didtur. 

Non pdssumus, quin alii a nobis 
dissentiant, recusdre. 

Dubitdndum non est, quin nun- 
quam pdssit uti'litas cum hone- 
state contendere. 



There is nothing but what can be 
corrupted. 

Who is there that does not per- 
ceive what a power there is in 
our senses ? 

There is nothing so difficult that 
cannot be investigated by exam- 
ination. 

There was no delay about their 
finishing the war. 

I could not refrain from declaring 
to you my opinion. 

I do not doubt but that he is at 
home. 

There is no doubt but that the 
Helvetii are the most powerful 
and influential. 

He had a narrow escape from be- 
ing murdered by the exiles. 

I could not refrain from declaring 
this to you. 

He cannot be prevented from ad- 
vancing. 

"We cannot refuse to allow others 
to dissent from us. 

It is not to be doubted, that utility 
can neAer pretend to compete 
with honor. 



Remarks. 

1. Quin in the sense of qui, quae, quod non commonly is used only 
for the nominative ; and where it seems to stand for quo non or cid 
non, it may be resolved into ut non. Yet it is also found for quod non 



LESSON 88.] SUBJUNCTIVE AFTER CONJUNCTIONS. 571 

acc. E. g. Nego in Sicilia quidquam fuisse, quin (= quod non) 
conquisierit, I maintain that there was nothing in Sicily which he has 
not tried to rake together. 

2. Qui non frequently occurs instead of quin ; and so likewise ut 
non. E. g. Quis est, qui hoc non seniiat ? Who is there that does not 
feel sensible of this? Fieri non potest, ut eum tu in tua provincia non 
cognoris, It is not possible that you should not have made his ac- 
quaintance in your own province.* 

3. After non dubito, " I doubt not," the Acc. cum Inf. is sometimes 
put instead of quin. E. g. Pompeius non dubitat, ea, quae de repu- 
blics nunc sentiat, mihi valde probari, Pompey doubts not but that his 
present sentiments with reference to the republic are acceptable to 
me. Dubito and non dubito, in the sense of " I hesitate," are com- 
monly followed by the infinitive, but sometimes also by quin. E. g. 
Non dubito respondere, I do not hesitate to reply. Non dubito. ci, id 
a te per litteras petere, I did not hesitate (or scruple) to ask that of 
you by letter. Dubitdtis, judices, quin hunc vindicetis, Do you hesi- 
tate, judges, to defend this man ? 

4. The English "I doubt whether" is expressed by dubito sitne, 
dubXto num or numquid, or in double sentences by dubito sitne — an, 
dubito utrum — ■ an. But the expressions dubito an, dubium est an, 
have (like nescio an, page 538) the affirmative sense, " I am inclined 
to." E. g. Dubitat an turpe non sit, He is inclined to consider it no 
disgrace. 

5. Quin in the sense of why not ? has the indicative ; sometimes also, 
with a similar force, the imperative or the first person plural of the 
subjunctive. E.g. Quin conscendimus equos ? Why not mount our 
horses immediately ? Quin uno verbo die, Say it in one word ! Quin 
experiamur, Let us make the attempt at once ! 

VI. Quommus (= ut eo minus, " that not ") is generally put 
only after verbs denoting prevention or hinderan.ee, and which 
may likewise be followed by ne, or, where a negative precedes, 
by quin. 

The principal verbs of this class are defendere, deterrere, impedire, 
intercedere, obsisiere, obstare, ojjicere, prohibere, recusare. To these 
add stat or fit per me, quonunus ; non pugno, nihil moror, non con- 
lineo, quonunus, and many others. E. g. : — 

Aetas non impedit, quo minus lit- Age does not prevent us from ad- 

terarum stiidia teneamus, us- hering to the study of letters, 

que ad uitimum tempus se- even to the very end of our lite, 
nectutis. 

Rebus terrenis mxilta externa, Many external circumstances can 

* Qui non and ut non, instead of quin. are necessary when no negation pre- 
cedes, or when non belongs not to the leading verb, but to some other word of 
the sentence. E. g. Non adeo imper'dus sum, ut nesciatn, I am not so ignorant 
as not to know (where non belongs to imjwitus). 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 88. 



qudmlnus perjicidntur, pdssunt 
obsistere. 

Quid obstat, quominus dens sit 
beatus ? 

Epamindndas non recusdvit, quo- 
minus legis poenam subirct. 

Caesar cognovit, per Afrdnium 
stare, quo minus proe'lio dimi- 

t cdrent. 

Ego tecum in eo non pur/nabo, 
quominus, utrum velis, eligas. 



act as obstacles to the accom- 
plishment of earthly things. 

"What prevents God from bein<r 
happy i 

Epaminondas did not refuse to 
submit to the penalty of the law. 

Caesar was informed, that it was 
owing to Afranius, that they did 
not engage in battle. 

I will not oppose your choosing 
whichever of the two you please. 



Remarks. 

1. After the verbs impedio, dctcrreo, proJiibco, and recuso, the in- 
finitive is sometimes used instead of quominus. E. g. Pudor impedit 
exquirere, Shame prevents further inquiry. ] i rohibmtur exire, They 
are prohibited from going out. Quae facere ipse rccuso, Which I my- 
self refuse to do. 

2. Quo secius may take the place of quominus. E. g. Impedimento 
est, quo secius lex feratur, It prevents the bill from passing. 



The kitchen. 
The church. 

Divine service. 
The school. 
The high school. 
The university. 
The dancing-school. 
The fencing-school. 
The play, comedy. 
The drama. 
The opera. 
The exchange. 
The bank. 

To go to church. 
To be at church. 

To go to school. 

To be at school. 
To go to the play. 

To be at the play. 

To be fond of the play. 

To act a play. 

To go to the opera. 

To be at the opera. 

To go a fishing. 



Cullna, ae,/. 

Aedes, is, /. ; tempi um, i, n. ; ec- 
clesia, ae,/. {the assembly). 

Sacra publica, n. pi. 

Schola, ae,/. ; ludus, i, jr. 

Academia, ae, /. : gymnasium, i, n. 

Universltas litterarum. 

Ludus saltatorius. 

Ludus pugnatorius. 

Comoedia, ae,/. ; fabula, 

Drama, atis, n. 

Drama musicum. 

Curia mercatoruin. 

Aerarlum publicum. 
( In templum ire. 
\ Sacra publica adire. 



ae,/ 



j In templo esse. 



Sacris publlcis adesse. 
^ In ludum litterarum ire or itare. 
\ Scholam frequentare. 

In ludo (schola) esse. 

Ire spectatum comoediam (fabii- 
lam). 

Fabulae adesse. 

Libenter fabulam spectare. 

Fabiilam agere (dare). 

Drama musicum auditum ire. 

Dramati musico adesse. 

Piscatum ire, piscari. 



LESSON 88.] 



PHRASES AND EXERCISES. 



573 



Fishing. 
Where is the wife of the tailor ? 
She is in the kitchen. 
Whose school did he go to ? 
He frequented the public school. 
Will ) ou go to the opera ? 
I am not disinclined to go. 
Were you at church this morn- 
ing ? 
I was not present. 
Are you fond of hunting ? 
I am not. 

The entire day, all day. 

The whole year. 

An entire week. 

The whole morning. 

The whole evening. 

The whole night, all night. 

Three entire days. 

Six entire months. 
The whole society. 

This week. 
This year. 
Next week. 
Last week. 

The person (individual). 

The belly-ache. 

The stomach-ache. 

The fruit. 

The peach. 

The cherry. 

The strawberry. 

The plum. 

The pear. 

The potato. 

Vegetables. 

Pulse. 

Pastry. 

The tart. 
The dish. 
The small dish. 
The table-cloth. 
The maid-servant. 
The aunt. 



Piscatio, onis,/. ; piscatus, us, m. 

IJbi est sartdris uxor? 

In culm a est. 

Ciijus schdlam frequentabat? 

Sehdlam piibllcam frequentabat. 

Visne audit um ire drama miislcum? 

Auditum ire ndn nolo. 

Adfuistine hddie mane sacris pii- 

blicis ? 
Non adfui. 

Delectarisne venatidnibus ? 
Non delector. 

Totum diem {Ace.) 

Annum integrum. 

Hebdomadem integram. 

Totum mane. 

Totum vesperum. 

Totam noctem. 

Totos tres dies, tres ipsos dies, to- 
tum triduum. 

Totos sex menses. 

Tdtus (universus) conventus or 
circillus. 

Hac hebdomade. 

Hoc anno. 

Hebdomade proxima. 

Hebdomade praeterita or proximo 
elapsa. 

Persona, ae,y. 

Tormina, drum, n. pi. 

Dolor stomachi. 

Poma, drum, n. 

Malum Persicum. 

Cerasum, i, n. 

Fragum, i, n. 

Prunum, i, n. 

Plrum, i, n. 

Bulbus (i, m.) solani. 

Olus, eris, n., or pi. olera. 

Legumen, inis, n. 
( Opus piston um. 
( Crustula, drum, n pi. 

Scnbhta, ae,/. 

Patina, ae,/. ; lanx, gen. lancis,y! 

Patella, scutula, ae,/. 

Mantele, is, n. 

Ancilla, ae, f. 

Cognata ; amita (paternal) ; ma- 
tertera (maternal), a.e,f. 



574 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 88. 



The cousin. 

The niece. 

The neighbor (female). 

The actor. 

The actress. 

The countess. 

The country woman. 

The cook. 

The foolish woman. 

The sister-in-law. 

The merchandise, goods. 

The power, might. 

The gazette, newspaper. 

The cold (in the head). 

To have a cold. 

To take a cold. 

To have a cough. 

To make one sick. 

This makes me sick. 

The cough. 

Violent. 

Violently. 

All at once, suddenly. 

At once, immediately. 



Amitina; consobrlna, ae,/. 

Fratris (or sororis) filia. 

Vicina, ae,/. 

Histrio, onis, m. ; actor scemcus. 

Scenica, ae,/. 
*Coinitissa, ae,/. 

llustica, ae,/. 

Coqua, ae,/. 

Stulta, inepta, ae,/. 

Aff inis, is, / ; glos, gen. gloris, /. 

Merx, gen. mercis,/ ; pi. merces. 

Potentia, ae, / ; potestas, atis, / 

Acta publica or diurna, orum, n. 

Gravedo, inis,/ 

Gravedme laborare. 

Gravedlne aifici. 

Laborare tussi. 
( Morbum alicui afferre. 
( Aliquem valetudlne tentare. 
( Hoc mini affert morbmn. 
\ Hoc me dolore afficit. 

Tussis, is,/ (ace. im). 

Gravis, is, e. 

Valde, graviter. 

Subito, repentino, derepentlne 
(adv.). 

Statim, illico, e vestigio. 



Exercise 161. 

Where is your cousin ? — He is in the kitchen. — Where is your 
mother ? — She is at church. — Is your sister gone to school ? — She 
is gone thither. — Does your mother often go to church ? — She goes 
thither every morning and every evening. — She goes thither as soon 
as she gets up. — At what o'clock does she get up '? — She gets up at 
sunrise. — Dost thou go to school to-day ? — I do go thither. — AVhat 
dost thou learn at school ? — I learn to read, write, and speak there. 

— Where is your aunt ? — She is gone to the play with my little sis- 
ter. — Do your sisters go this evening to the opera ? — No, madam, 
they go to the dancing-school ? — Is your father gone a hunting ? — 
He has not been able to go a hunting, for he has a cold. — Do you 
like to 2:0 a hunting ? — I like to go a fishing better than a hunting. — 
Is your father still in the country ? — Yes, madam, he is still there. — 
What does he do there ? — He goes a hunting and a fishing there. — 
Did you hunt when you were in the country ? — I hunted the whole 
day. — How long have you stayed with (apud) my mother. — I stayed 
with her the whole evening. — Is it long since you were at the 
castle ? — I was there last week. — Did you find many people there ? 

— I found only three persons there. — Who were those three per- 
sons ? — They were the count, the countess, and their daughter. — 



LESSON 89.] SUBJUNCTIVE AFTER CONJUNCTIONS. 575 

Are these girls as good as their brothers ? — They are better than 
they. — Can your sisters speak German ? — They cannot, but they 
are learning it. — Have you brought anything to your mother ? — I 
brought her good fruits and a fine tart. — What has your niece 
brought you ? — She has brought us good cherries, good strawberries, 
and good peaches. — Do you like peaches ? — I do like them much. — 
How many peaches has your neighbor (fern.) given you ? — She has 
given me more than twenty of them. — Have you eaten many 
cherries this year? — I have eaten many of them. — Were there 
many pears last year ? — There were not many. — Have you read the 
newspaper to-day ? — I have read it. — Is there anything new in it ? 

— I have not read anything new in it. — Does he eat to live, or does 
he live to eat ? — He lives to eat. — AVhy do you study Latin ? — I 
study it, in order that I may read, speak, and write it. — Is he so bad, 
that he must be punished ? — He is. — Did your father exhort you 
not to go to the play V — He begged and conjured me not to go there. 

— He was sick yesterday so that he could not come to the lesson (ad 
scholani). — Are you afraid that it will rain to-day? — I am rather 
afraid that it will not rain. — Is your brother afraid to speak Latin ? 

— He is afraid ; for he is as yet ignorant of the language. — He 
should be more diligent, in order that he may be able to speak more 
readily (facilius). — I give you this advice, not that I think you need 
it, but in order to encourage (animum alicui addere) you. — I cannot 
refrain from writing to you. — There is no doubt but that you are cor- 
rect. — I do not doubt but that he will arrive to-morrow. — Can he 
prevent you from advancing ? — He cannot prevent me. — He could 
refrain from weeping, when he heard that you were so unfortu- 
nate and unhappy. — What can prevent us from being happy ? — 
Nothing can prevent us from being as happy as any one ever was. 



Lesson LXXXIX. — PENSUM UNDENONAGE- 
SIMUM. 

SUBJUNCTIVE AFTER CONJUNCTIONS. — Continued. 

A. The subjunctive is put after various other particles, besides 
those already considered in the preceding Lesson. 

I. After particles denoting a wish, such as utinam, utinam 
ne, ut or uti, o or o si, " O that," " would that," the verb is 
always in the subjunctive. 

In this construction the present and perfect subjunctives are used 
of things considered as possible, the imperfect and pluperfect when the 
wish is regarded as a vain or impossible one. E. g. 
Utinam lidbeam ! Utinam habu- O that I may have ! I wish that 

erit ! he may have had ! 



576 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 89. 



Would that I had ! O that he had 

had! 
May I but be able to accomplish 

my endeavors ! 
O that Jupiter may restore to me 

my past years ! 
Would to God that what I have 

written were no reality ! 
O that we had been less desirous 
of preserving life ! 
Ut te di'i perduint! May the gods destroy you ! 

Remark. — The particle is sometimes omitted. E. g. Tecum ludere 
sicut ipsa possem ! 

II. After the particles of comparison quasi, quam si, and 
after tamquam, lit, velut, similiter ac, idem ac, aeque ac, perinde 
ac, proinde ac, with or without si, and ceu, "as if," "just as if," 
the verb is always in the subjunctive. E. g. 
Sed quid ego his testibus utor, But why do I use witnesses like 



Utinam hdberem ! Utinam liabu- 
t issel ! 
Utinam mddo conata efficere 

possim ! 
O mihi praeteritos referat si 

Jiippiter annos ! 
lllud utinam ne vere scriberem I 

Utinam minus vitae ciipidi fuis- 
semus ! 



quasi res diibia aut obscura 
sit? 
Quaestor est factus, quam si es- 
set siimmo loco natus. 

JParvi primo drtu sic jacent, tdn- 
quam omnino sine amino suit. 

Crudelitatem ejus, velut si coram 

adesset, horrebant. 
Similiter facis, ac si me rdges. 

Deleta est Ausonum gens, per- 
inde ac si internecivo bello 
certdsset. 



these, as if the case were a doubt- 
ful or an obscure one ? 

He was made questor, as if he had 
been of the highest rank by 
birth. 

Infants, when they are just born, 
lie as if they were entirely with- 
out life. 

They shrunk from his cruelty, as 
if he were present before them. 

You act just as if you were asking 
me. 

The Ausonian nation has become 
extinct, as if it had engaged in 
internecine warfare. 



III. The particles non quod, non eo quod, non ideo quod, and 
non quia, " not because," non quo, " not as if," and non quin, 
"not but that," are followed by the subjunctive, but the sed 
quod or sed quia of the subsequent clause requires the indica- 
tive. E. g. 

I had given up the acquaintance 
of certain friends, not because I 
was angry with them, but be- 
cause I was somewhat ashamed 
of them. 

Not that I have ever dealt in words 
rather than in substance, but be- 
cause I had become accustomed 
to military minds. 



Non idcirco quorundam amico- 
rum usum dimiseram, quod lis 
succenseretn, sed quod eorum 
me suppudebat. 

Non quo verba unquam pdtius, 
quam res, exercuerim, sed quia 
assueveram militaribus inge- 
nus. 



LKSSON 89.] SUBJUNCTIVE AFTER CONJUNCTIONS 

I 



57 



Crasso commendationem non 
sum polh'citus, non quln earn 
valituram apud te arbitrdrer, 
sed {quod) nn'hi egere com- 
mendatione non vklebdtur. 



did not promise Crassiis any 
recommendation, not because I 
thought that it would have no 
effect with you, but because he 
did not seem to me to need any 
recommendation. 



IV. The subjunctive is likewise put after the conjugations 
dum, modo or dummodo, " provided," and dum ne, modo ne or 
dummodo ne, " provided not." So also after ut and ne, when 
they signify "although," "although not," and after nedum or 
ne, " not to say," " much less," " much more." E. g. 

Nor did he have a regard for any- 
thing, provided he might win 
royal authority. 

Cicero disregarded everything, pro- 
vided he might obey the instruc- 
tions of his father. 

So long as you are not what I do 
not wish to be, you ma}' be what 
you please, for aught I care. 

Although the strength be wanting, 
yet the wish is to be commended. 

Though this be not so, it may 
nevertheless save the republic. 

Although pain is not the greatest 
evil, it is still unquestionably an 
evil. 

He never can defray his expenses, 
much less can you. 

The cold can scarcely be avoided 
in the houses themselves ; much 
less easy it is to be exempt from 
the ill effects of the season at 
sea and on the roads. 

Since prosperity tries the minds of 
the wise even, much less could 
they who are men of corrupt 
morals restrain themselves from 
an abuse of the victory. 

V. Quamvis (quantumvis, quantumlibet) , "however," and 
licet, "although," commonly take the subjunctive; but utut, 
" however," and quamquam, " although," have more frequently 
the indicative. E. g. 

Licet strenuum metum pules esse, 
veldcior tamen spes est. 



Neque, dum sibi regnum pararet. 
quidquam pensi habebat. 

Cicero omnia postpdsuit, dummo- 
do praeceptis ptitris pareret. 

Dum ille ne si's, quern ego esse 
nolo, sis mea causa, qui lubet. 

Ut de'sint vires, tamen est laudan- 

da voluntas. 
Ye rum id hoc non sit, tamen ser- 

vet rempiiblicam. 
Ne sit siimmum malum dolor, 

malum certe est. 

Nunquam sufferre ejus sumptus 
queat, nedum tu. jjdss'is. 

Vix in ipsis tectis Frigus vitatur, 
nedum in mari et in via sit fa- 
cile abesse ab injuria temporis. 



Quippe seciindae res sapientium 
animos f itigant ; ne llli corru- 
ptis mdribus victdriae tempera- 
rent. 



2K 



49 



Although you may consider fear 
rapid in its operation, yet hope 
is quicker. 



578 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 89. 



Although it be true, that we dedi- 
cate shrines to the Intellect, to 
Virtue, and to Faith, Ave never- 
theless perceive that they reside 
in ourselves. 

That which is morally disgraceful, 
however it may be concealed, 
can never by any means become 
honorable. 

The vices of the mind, however 
small they may be, increase and 
spread. 

However these things may be, I 
shall nevertheless do it. 

Although he was noted for his mod- 
eration, he yet was punished 
with an exile of ten years. 



Quamvis licet Mc'nti delubra et. 
Virtiiti-et Ffdei consecremus, 
tamen haec in nobis ipsis sita 
videnms. 

Quod tiirpe est, id, qudmuis oc- 
culleliir, tiimen honestum fieri 
millo mddo potest. 

Vitia mentis, qudntumvh, exigua 
suit, in miijus exceiunt. 

Utut haec sunt, tumen hoc fa- 

ciam. 
Qudmquam excellebat abstinen- 

tia, tiimen exsilio decern anno- 

rum mul tutus est. 

Remark. — Tacitus uses the subjunctive after qiiamqxiam as after 
quamvis. Cicero only occasionally. Later authors reverse the rule, 
and put quamquam with the subjunctive, and quamvis with the indic- 
ative. 

VI. Dum, donee, and quoad, in the sense of " as long as," or 
"while," require the indicative; but when they signify "until," 
they may have either the indicative or subjunctive. E. g. 



Aegrdto dum uninia est, spes esse 

dicitur. 
Cato quoad vixit, virtutum laude 

crevit. 
Delibera hoc, dum ego redeo. 
De comitiis, donee redid Mar- 

eellus, silentium fiiit. 

Expectfite, dum consul aut dicta- 
tor fiat Kaeso. 

Quoad perventum sit eo, quo 
siimpta nuvis est. 



As long as the patient keeps up his 
spirits, there is said to be hope. 

Cato advanced in renown for virtue 
as long as he lived. 

Think this over until I return. 

Respecting the election, there was 
nothing said until Marcellus re- 
turned. 

"Wait, until Kaeso becomes consul 
or dictator. 

Until they may have arrived at the 
spot for which the ship was 
taken. 



VII. Antequam and priusquctm are commonly followed by 
the present subjunctive, when they imply a reference to the 
future, and by the imperfect or pluperfect subjunctive when 
they imply a causal connection between two past events. But 
when these conjunctions express merely a relation of time, the 
verb is in the indicative. E. 2. 



Tragoedi quotidie, antequam pro- 
mintient, voceni sensim exci- 
tant. 



Tragic actors gradually tune their 
voice every day, before they 
beinn to declaim. 



LESSON 89.] 



CONSTRUCTION OF " QUUM.' 



579 



Ante videmus fulgurationem, 
quam sdnum audidmus. 

In omnibus negdtiis prius, quam 
aggredidre, adhibenda est prae- 

panitio diligens. 
Caesar ad Pompeii castra per- 

venit prills, quam Pompeius 

sentire posset. 
Saepe magna indoles virtutis, 

priiisqaam rei piiblicae pro- 

desse potuisset, exstineta fuit. 

Dabo dperam, ut istuc veniam 
ante, quam plane ex trio ani- 
mo effluo. 

Membris utimur p7*ius, quam di- 
dicimus, ciijus ea utilitatis cau- 
sa habeainus.* 



We perceive the lightning before 
we hear its voice. 

You should make diligent prepara- 
tions in every transaction, before 
you set to work at it. 

Ca?sar arrived at Pompey's camp 
before Pompey could perceive it. 

It has often been the case, that a 
great natural capacity for virtue 
was lost, before it could become 
an advantage to the republic. 

I shall endeavor to come to your 
place, before I am entirely for- 
gotten by you. 

We use our limbs, before we have 
learnt the end for which we have 
them. 



B. Quum or cum expresses either a relation of time, and is equiv- 
alent to turn quum, eo tempore quum, or ex eo tempore quum, " then 
when," "when," "while," "after," or "since"; or it denotes the 
relation of cause and effect, and is equivalent to the English " since," 
" although," " because." The former is called the quum temporede, 
and is generally followed b)fthe indicative, the latter the quum cqusale, 
and is followed by the subjunctive. 

I. The clause introduced by quum temporede may either be 
the leading or a subordinate one, and the verb may be in any 
tense of the indicative. 



Facile dmnes, quum valcmus, 
recta consilia aegrdtis damus. 

Ager quum nuiltos annos quievit, 
uberidres eflerre friictus sdlet. 

Qui non defendit injiiriam, ne- 
que propiilsat a sviis, quum po- 
test, injiiste facit. 

Quum haec in Hispania gercbdn- 
tur, eornitidrum jam appete- 
bat dies. 

Yds turn paruistis, quum pdruit 
nemo, qui ndluit. 



When we are well, we all of us 
can easily give advice to those 
who are sick. 

When land has been left fallow for 
many years, it usually yields 
more abundant crops. 

lie who does not repel injustice, 
nor protect his friends against it, 
when he can, acts unjustly. 

While these things were carried on 
in Spain, the day of the elec- 
tions was approaching. 

You obeyed at a time when no one 
obeyed, that was not disposed to 
do so. 



* In the ]ast two of these examples, these conjunetions express merely a 
relation of time. 



580 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 89. 



Quum inimi'ci ndstri venire di- 
centur, turn in Epirum ibo. 

Jam ver appetebat, quum Han- 
nibal ex hibernis movit. 

Vix annus intercesserat, quum 

Sulpicius accusauit C. Norba- 

num. 
Miilti anni sunt, quum Fabius in 

acre meo est.* 
Trigmta dies erant ipsi, quum 

has dabam h'tteras. 



When our enemies will be reported 

as coming, then I shall go into 

Epirus. 
Spring was already approaching, 

when Hannibal moved out of his 

winter-quarters. 
A year had scarcely elapsed when 

Sulpicius preferred an accusation 

against Norbanus. 
It is many years since Fabius is my 

debtor. 
There were thirty entire days, 

since the date of this letter. 



Remark. — On the imperfect and pluperfect subjunctive after 
quum temporale, see III. 

II. Quum causcde is rendered by the English since, because, 
although, and is followed by the subjunctive. E. g. 



Since these things are so. 

Since I know, though I knew. 

Since I have understood, had un- 
derstood. 

Plato in his writings has bequeathed 
us an immortal record of the 
genius and various discourses of 
So.-rates, though Socrates him- 
self had not left a syllable. 

Dionysius was in the habit of ha- 
ranguing the people from a high 
tower, as he did not dare to stand 
upon the usual platforms. 

Daylight has sometimes been dark- 
ened, even under a clear sky, on 
account of the moon having passed 
beneath the orbit of the sun. 

The (river) Durance, although it 
carries a large quantity of water, 
is yet unfit for navigation. 

I know that I have often the ap- 
pearance of saying new thing.;, 
when (i. e. although) I say some- 
thing that is quite old. 

Phocion was perpetually poor, when 
(1. e. although) he might have 
been very rich. 

III. In narration quum is commonly followed by the imper- 
fect and pluperfect subjunctive, though generally rendered by 
the English when or after. E. jr. 



Quae cum ita sint. 
Quum sciam, s'cirem. 

Quum intellexerim, intellextssem. 

Socratis ingenium variosque ser- 
mones immortalitati scriptis 
suis tradidit Plato, quum h't- 
teram Socrates niillam reli- 
qulsset. 

Dionysius quum in communibus 
suggestis consi'stere non aude- 
ret, concionari ex turre alta 
solebat. 

Coclo sereno interdiu obscurata 
liix est, quum luna sub drbem 
solis subisset. 

Druentia, quum aquae vim ve- 

hat inge ntem, non tamen na- 

vium patiens est. 
Ego me saepe nova videri di'cere 

intelligo, quum pervetera di- 

cam. 

Phocion fuit perpetuo pauper, 
quum divitissimus esse jwssct. 



On this use of quum, compare Lesson LVII. 



LESSON 89.] CONSTRUCTION OF " QUUM." 



581 



Zendncm, quum Athenis e'ssem, 

audiebam frequenter. 
Fiiit tempus, quum rura c6lerent 

homines, neque * urbeni habe- 

rent. 
tbi eum quiim Caesar vidisset, 

nihil aspere, nihil acerbe dixit. 



I frequently heard Zeno's discours- 
es, when I was at Athens. 

There was a time when men in- 
habited the country, and had no 
cities. 

When Caesar saw him there, he 
said nothing that was harsh, noth- 
ing that was bitter. 

Thucydides is said to have written 
his books after he had been re- 
moved from public life and 
driven into exile. 



Thucydides libros suos turn scri- 
psisse dicitur, quum a repii- 
blica remotus atque in exsili- 
um pulsus e'sset. 

Remarks. 

1. The subjunctive sometimes stands after quum where we might 
expect the indicative. E. g. Si tibi turn, quum peteres consulatum, 
affui, If I assisted you at the time you were a candidate for the con- 
sulate, &c. But in most such cases there are generally other rea- 
sons for the subjunctive. E. g. Qui dies est, quae nox, quum ego non 
ex istorum insidiis divino consilio eripiar ? f What day is there, what 
night, in which I was not saved from the wiles of these wretches, by a 
Divine Providence ? 

2. In Livy and Tacitus quum is sometimes also followed by the his- 
torical infinitive. E. g. Nee multum erat ])rogressa navis, quum dato 
sir/no mere tectum loci, Nor had the ship advanced far, when at the 



jxiven signal the deck fell in. 
To march. 

To walk, to go on foot. 
To step. 
To advance. 

To travel. 

To travel abroad. 

To travel through a place. 

To travel or pass by a place. 

To go (leave for) abroad. 

The traveller. 

The wanderer (traveller on 

foot). 
To travel a mile. 

To make a step. 
To take a step (i. e. meas- 
ures) . 



( Ambulare, incedere. 
< Castra movere, movere. 
[iter Jacere. 

Incedere, pedibus Ire, ambulare 

Gradior, i, gressus sum. 

Progredi, pergere. 
( Proficisci, iter facere. 
I Tendere, contendere (ad locum). 

Peregrinari. 

Transire, iter facere per locum. 

Aliquem locum praetergredi, prae- 
tervehi, non attingere. 

Abire, discedere, proficisci. 

Peregrinator, peregrinus. 

Viator, oris, in. 

Mille passuum emetiri (emensus 

sum) or conficere. 
Gradum or passum facere. 
Agere et moliri ; consilium inire. 



* Neque here, as frequently, = et non. 

f The subjunctive here depends upon the indefinite general question. 
49* 



582 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 89. 



To enter on a journey. 

To make or deliver a 

speech. 
To transact business. 

Business, a piece of busi- 
ness, an affair. 
To be engaged in anything. 
To be at leisure. 
TVhere is the traveller going to ? 
He is going towards Vienna. 
Is the merchant occupied with 

business ? 
He is very much occupied (with 

*).■ 

He is distracted with business. 

How many miles did he travel ? 
He has travelled twenty. 
Did the clergyman speak ? 
He did not. 

Hid I transact the business well ? 
You have transacted it in the 

best possible manner. 
Was the master at leisure ? 
He was not at leisure. 

To salt, season with salt. 

Salt meat. 
Salt fish. 
Fresh meat. 
The food, victuals. 

The dish, mess. 

The milk. 

The milk-food. 

Milk soup. 

Salt meats. 

To partake of food, to eat. 

To attract. 



To allure, entice. 
To excite, to delight. 

To charm, enchant. 
To enrapture, ravish. 



Se dare in viam ; proficisci. 
Verba facere ; orationein habere ; 

dlcere. 
Hem gerere ; negotiari, mercatu- 

ram facere. 
Negotium, i, n. ; res, rei,y!; opus, 

eris, n. 
Oecupatum esse aliqua re. 
Otiosum esse, vacare. 
Quo tendit viator ? 
Vindobdnam versus tendit. 
Occupatiisne est mereator nejid- 
- tiis ? 
Est vero occupatissimus. 

Distentus est nego'tiis. 

Qudt milia passuum eme'nsus est ? 

Viginti. 

Fecitne verba clericus ? 

Xon fecit. 

Gessine rem be'ne? 

Sane, earn quam dptime gessisti. 

Vacavitne praeeeptor ? 

Kon vacavit. 

Satire, sale condlre (rem). 

Salem aspergere (rei). 

Caro sale condita. 

Salsamenta, 5rum, n. 

Caro recens {gen. carnis recentis). 

Cibus, i, m. : esca, ae, /. ; cibaria, 

5mm, n. 
Cibus, i, m. ; ferculum, i, n. 
Lac, gen. lactis, n. 
Cibus lactens ; lactentia, iuin, n. pi. 
Jus lactens. 
Cibaria salsa, n. pi. 
Cibum capere or sumcre. 
Altralitre, trax'i, traction. 
Ad se trahere (aliquid, at.i- 

quem.) 
Allicio, ere, lexi, lectum. 
Allectare (aliquem ad se). 
Delectare ; oblectare. 
Uapio, ere, pui, ptum. 
Permulceo, ere, si, sum. 
Admiratione afficcre. 
Suavissime afficere. 
Voluptate perfundere. 



LESSON 89.] 



PHRASES AND EXERCISES. 



583 



The beauty. 

The harmony. 

The voice. 

The power, force. 

The power, authority. 

To have power (influence) 

over ony one. 
To occupy one's self with 

anything. 
To meddle with anything. 

To trouble one's head about 

anything. 
The quarrel, contest. 
The commerce, traffic. 
I do not meddle with other peo- 
ple's business. 
It is strange. 
The art of painting. 

Chemistry. 

The chemist. 

The art. 

To look at some one. 



To concern (some one). 



"What is that to me ? 
What is that to you ? 

I have nothing to do with that. 

As far as I am concerned. 

This concerns (has reference to) 
you. 

What has that to do with the 
matter ? 

I do not like to meddle with 
things that do not concern me. 

Did the song of the maiden at- 
tract you ? 

It truly enchanted me. 

The magnet attracts iron. 

Is he engaged in the art of paint- 
ing ? 

No, "he occupies himself with 
chemistry. 



Pulchritudo, inis, f. 

Harmonia, ae,/; concentus, us, m. 

Vox, gen. vocis,/ 

Vis, plur. vires, f. 

Potestas, atis,/ 

Multum (or plurimum) apud ali- 

quem posse or valere. 
Versari or occupari in aliqua re. 

Se immisCere (tii, mixtum or mi- 
stum) alicui rei. 

Curare rein ; laborare de re ; se 
immiscere rei. 

Lis, gen. litis,/. ; rixa, ae,/. 

Mercatiira, ae,/. ; negotia, oruin, n. 

Ego me alienis negdtiis non imrai- 
sceo. 

Minibile dictu est. 

Ars pingendi, ars pictoria. 

Chymica, ae,f. 

Chymicus, i, in. 

Ars, arris,/! 

Adspicere, adspectrire, intueri ali- 

quem. 
Attingo, ere, tigi, tactum (ali- 

quem). 
Pertinere (ad aliquem or rem). 
Spectare ad rem. 
Quid ad me ? 

Quid id mea refert or interest ? 
Quid tibi cum ilia re ? 
Quid id tiia refert ? 
Id nihil ad me attinet. 
Id mea nihil interest. 
Quod ad me attinet. 
Res ad te spectat. 
De te fabula narratur. 
Quid hoc ad rem ? 

Ego me alienis litibus non nisi in- 

vitus immisceo. 
Allexitne te cantus puellae ? 

fmmo me suavissime affecit. 
Magnes ferrum ad se allicit et trahit. 
Versaturne in arte pingendi ? 

Non ; in chymica versatur. 



584 



LATIN" GRAlfMAPi. 



[lesson S9. 



The singing (song). 

To repeat. 

The repetition. 

The beginning, commence- 

inent. 
The wisdom. 
The study, application to 

letters. 
The goddess. 
The nightingale. 
The Lord. 
The Creator. 
To create. 

The creation. 

The heaven. 
The earth. 
The solitude. 
The goodness. 

The cleanliness. 
The uneleanliness. 
The government. 

Sensible, reasonable. 

For my. thy, our sake ; on 
my, thine own account. 

On his, on the father's ac- 
count. 

Not only — hut alio. 

Not only not — hut not even. 

lie was not only unlike the pre- 
ceding king, but even more 
cruel than Romulus. 

Such a man will never venture 
not only to do, but not even 
to think, anything that is not 
honorable. 



Cantus, m. 

Rcpeto, ere. wi (w), Mum. 

Itcrare, retractare (aliquid). 

Repetitio, iteratio, onis. f. 
Initiiun ; principium, i, n. 

Sapientia, ae. f. 

Tractiitio litterarum. 

Litterarum studia, orum, n. 

Dea, diva, ae,/! 

Luscinia, ae./. 

Domlnus, Deus, i, in. 

Creator, auctor, oris, m. 

Creare. efficere. 
(Creatio, onis, f. (act.y. 
4 Mundus, i, m. ; rerun) natura (rf- 
I fict). . 

Coelum, i. n. 

Terra, ae./.' 

Solitudo, inis,/! 

Benignitas, humanitas, at is,/'. 

Munditia, ae, /!, or mundities, ei, f. 

Immunditia, ae, f. 

Magistratus, us, ///., or pi. magistra- 
tus; senatus, us, m. 

Sanus, piiidens, modestus. 

Mea, tua. nostra causa or gratia. 



Ejus 



causa, patris causa or gratia. 



Non modo — sed (or verum) etieim. 
Non tantum — sed etiam. 
Non solum — sed etiam. 

Non modo (non) * sed ne 

quidem'. 
Non solum proximo regi dissimilis, 

sed ferdcior etiam Rdmulo iiiit. 

Talis vir non modo face re, sed ne 
cogitare quidem quidquam «uc/c- 
bil, quod non honestum sit. 



* In this construction the first non is generally omitte<l, when both members 
of the sentence have a common predicate, as in the second of the following 
examples, where audtbit is the common verb, and ne — quidem equivalent to 
etiam non. 



LESSON 89.] EXERCISES 1C2, 163. 585 

Exercise 1G2. 
Will you dine ■with us to-day ? — AYith much pleasure. — What 
have you for dinner'? We have good soup, some fresh and salt meat, 
and some milk-food. — Do you like milk-food ? — I like it better than 
all other food. — Are you ready to dine? — I am ready. — Do you 
intend to set out soon ? — I intend setting out next week. — Do you 
travel alone ? — No, madam, I travel with my uncle. — Do you travel 
on foot or in a carriage ? — We travel in a carriage. — Did you meet 
any one in your last journey (idtuno in itinere tao ad) to Berlin ? — 
We met many wanderers. — What do you intend to spend your time 
in this summer ? — I intend to take a short journey. — Did you walk 
much in your last journey ? — I like very much to walk, but my uncle 
likes to go in a carriage. — Did he not wish to walk V — He wished to 
walk at first, but after having taken a few steps, he wished to get into 
the carriage, so that I did not walk much. — What have you been 
doing at school to-day ? — We have been listening to our teacher, 
who made a long speech on the (qui verba faciebat midta de) goodness 
of God. — What did he say ? — After saying, " God is the creator of 
heaven and earth; the fear of the Lord is the beginning of all wis- 
dom"; he said, " Repetition is the mother of studies, and a good mem- 
ory is a great benefit of God." — Why did you not stay longer in 
Holland ? — When I was there, the living was so dear that I had not 
money enough to stay there any longer. — What sort of weather was 
it when you were on the way to Vienna V — It was very bad weather; 
for it was stormy, and snowed, and rained very heavily. — May I have 
leisure to read through the book ? — Would that I had an opportunity 
to do (faciendi) what you have done ! — O that he had never writ- 
ten that letter ! — You act as if you were sad ; what is the matter with 
you (quid tristis es) ? 

Exercise 1G3. 

What are you doing all the day in this garden ? — I am walking in 
it. — What is there in it that attracts you? — The singing of the birds 
attracts me. — Are there any nightingales in it? — There are some 
in it, and the harmony of their singing enchants me. — What does 
your niece amuse herself with in her solitude ? — She reads a good 
deal and writes letters to her mother. — What does your uncle amuse 
himself with in his solitude ? — He employs himself in painting and 
chemistry. — Does he no longer do any business ? — He no longer 
does any, for he is too old to do it. — Why does he meddle with your 
business ? — He does not generally meddle with other people's busi- 
ness (alienis negpiiis se immiscere non assolel) ; but he meddles with 
mine, because he loves me. — Has your master made you repeat your 
lesson to-day ? — He has made me repeat it. — Did you know it ? — 
I did know it pretty well. — Have you also done some exercises ? — 
I have done some, but what is that to you, I beg ? — I do not gener- 
ally meddle with things that do not concern me ; but I love you so 
much (tantopere), that I concern myself much about what you are 
doing. — Does any one trouble his head about you ? — No one trou- 
bles his head about me ; for I am not worth the trouble. — Not only 



58G LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSOX 90. 

for the sake of cleanliness, but also for the sake of health, prudent 
people avoid (vitare) uncleanliness, and wash themselves often. — 
Shall you buy that horse ? — I shall buy it, although it is not an 
English one. — Though he is my cousin, he nevertheless does not 
come to see me. - — Although they are not rich, they are nevertheless 
very benevolent. — I do not know, whether he is at home or not. — 
The question is (quaeritw), whether he will do it or not. 



Lesson XC — PEXSUM XOXAGESIMUM. 
SUBJUNCTIVE AFTER RELATIVES. 

A. Relative pronouns and adverbs are followed by the subjunc- 
tive, when the clause introduced by them contains the consequence or 
result, or the cause, reason, purpose, or j/wtice of what has gone before. 

B. When the relative is preceded by is, hie, ille, talis, tan- 
tus, ejusmodi, hujusmodi, adeo or lam, so as to denote a conse- 
quence or result, its verb is in the subjunctive. 

In this construction qui becomes equivalent to ut ego, tu, ille, &c. ; — 
cuius to ut mei, tui, sui, Ulius, ejus ; — cui to ut mihi, iibi, sibi, ei, Mi, 
and so through all the cases. E. g. 

Ego is sum, qui nihil tinquam My character is such, that I have 
mea pdtius, quam meorum ci- never done anything on my own 
viura causa fee e rim. account rather than on that of 

my fellow-citizens. 
Ea est Romana (jens, quae victa Such is the character of the Roman 
quiescere nesciat. race, that it cannot rest when 

conquered. 
Non tu is fa, qui, qui sis, nescias. You are not such a man as to be 

ignorant of what you are. 
iVon ego sum ille ferreus, qui fra- I am not so heartless a man as not 
tris moerore non movear. to be moved by the sorrow of 

my brother. 
Innocentia est affectio talis ani- Innocence is that disposition of the 
mi, quae noceat nemini. mind which does nobody any 

harm. 
Est hujiismodi reus, in quo hdmi- He is so guilty, that there is noth- 
ne nihil sit, praeter siimma ing in the man but the most cul- 
peccata. pable otfences. 

In cdrpore si quid ejusmodi est, If there is anything in our body of 
quod reliquo cdrpori noceat, such a character as to injure the 
liri secarique patlmur. remaining parts of it, we suffer 

it to be burnt or cut. 



LESSON 90.] SUBJUNCTIVE AFTER RELATIVES. 587 

Nulla gens tdmfera, nemo dmni- There is no race so savage, no man 
urn tdm immdnis est, ciijus so monstrous, whose mind is not 
mentein non imbuerit deorum imbued with the idea of a God. 
opinio. 

Remarks. 

1. The demonstrative to which the relative refers is sometimes to 
"be supplied. E. g. Nunc diets aliquid (sc. ejusmodi), quod ad rem 
pertineat, Now you say something to the point. 

2. This rule includes relative expressions containing a limitation or 
restriction. Such are, — Quod sciam or intelligam, As far as I know 
or understand. Quod commodo tuojiat, So far as it can be done with- 
out inconvenience to you. Quod sine alterius injuria fiat or jieret, As 
far as it can be done without injury to another. Quod salvo, Jide jjos- 
sirn, So far as I can honorably.* 

3. When a comparative precedes, the clause introduced by quam 
qui (quam cujus, cui, quorum, &c.) requires the subjunctive. E. g. 
Major sum, quam cui possit fortuna nocere, I am superior to the inju- 
ries of fortune. Majura dcliquerant, quam quibus ignosci posset, They 
had been guilty of too grave offences to be pardoned, f 

O. When the relative is preceded by an indefinite expres- 
sion, positive or negative, or by an indefinite question involving 
a negation, its verb is in the subjunctive. 

Such expressions are est, su?it, existunt, inveniuntur, reperiuntur 
(with homines understood) ; — nemo, nullus, nihil est ; — quis est ? quid 
est ? qui, quae, quod (sc. negotium, &c.) est f quantum est ? quotusquis- 
que est? &c. E. g. 
Sunt, qui dicant, censeant. There are those who say, those 

who suppose. 
Sunt, qui dixerint, viderint. There are those who have heard, 

those who have seen. 
Inventus est, qui flammis impdne- There was one found who put his 

ret manum. hand into the flames. 

Fuerunt, qui dicerent. There were those who said. 

Est aliquid, quod non opdrteat, There is something which does not 

etiiimsi licet. behoove us, although not un- 

lawful. 
Multi erunt, quibus recte litteras There will be those whom you can 

dare pdssis. properly trust with letters. 

Nemo est orator, qui se Demo- There is no orator who is unwilling 

sthenis si'milem esse nolit. to be like Demosthenes. 

Non dderunt, qui Cassii et Briiti There will not be wanting those who 

meminerint. remember Cassius and Brutus. 

* So frequently with quidem ; as, Quos quidem aut invenerim aut lec/erim, 
As far at least as I have been able to find or read. But quantum in this con- 
struction has the indicative; as, Quantum possum, As much as (as far as) I can. 

f For the same reason quam, even without a relative, is sometimes followed 
by the subjunctive. E. g. In his litteris lonyiorfui, quam aut vellem (instead 
of velle), aut quam meputdvi fore. 



588 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 90. 

Helvetiis ddmi nihil erat, quo fii- The Ilelvctii had nothing at homo, 
mem tolerdrent. wherewith to still their hunger. 

Quis est, qui util'ia, fiigiat ? Who is there that seeks to avoid 

the useful V 

Quo'tus quvtqiie est, qui volupta- How many are there among men, 
tern nc'get esse bdnum ? that deny pleasure to be a good? 

Plures auetdres invenio,* qui Ro- I find several authors who call the 
manos Horatios vocent. Horatii Romans. 

Kiim amplius quid desideras, There is nothing else that you de- 
quod respondeat ? sire to reply V 

Nihil habebain ndvi, quod post I have nothing new to communi- 
accidisset, quam dedissem ad cate, that occurred after my 
te litteras. writing this to you. 

Remarks. 

1. This rule includes also the expressions non est quod, nihil est 
quod (quare or cur), u there is no ground or reason why " ; and est ut 
(when it = est cur), " there is ground, reason." E. g. Est quod gau- 
deas, You have reason to rejoice. Non est, quod te pudeat, You need 
not be ashamed. Nihil est, quod pertimescat, He has no cause to 
dread. Non est, cur eorum spes infringdtur, There is no reason why 
they should be dejected. I lie erat ut odisset defensorem salutis meae, 
He had reason to hate the defender of my safety. Non est igltur ut 
mirandum sit, There is consequently nothing to be wondered at. Quid 
est, cur virtus ipsa per se non efficiat beatos ? What is the reason that 
virtue of herself does not make men happy ? 

2. The subjunctive also follows habeo quod, non liabeo quod. E. g. 
Non habeo, quod dicam, I have nothing to say. Quid habes, quod re- 
prehendas f What fault have you to find ? Non habeo, qui (— qua re) 
utar, I have nothing to live on. Quo se verteret, non habebat, He 
knew not where to turn to. f 

3. When, in connection with the expressions sunt qui, a particular 
and determinate subject is expressed, the verb is in the indicative. 
E. g. Sunt autem bestiae quaedam, in quibus inest aliquid simile virlutis, 
There are certain animals in which there is something that resembles 
virtue. But when the subject is merely a general one, such as multi, 
pauci, nemo, &c, or is entirely suppressed, the subjunctive is the com- 
mon construction, and the indicative in these cases is generally em- 
ployed by poets only. 

D. When the relative clause denotes the purpose, object, or 
motive of what has gone before, it may be resolved into a clause 
with ut, and the verb is in the subjunctive. 

* This rule extends to the active verbs liabeo, reperio, ihvenio, nanciseor] 
desidero, quaero. and relinquo, after all of which the relative may take the sub- 
junctive. Cf. note 2. 

t But this last example more properly belongs to Lesson LXXXVIi. D. 
So likewise, Non habeo quid dicam, I know not what to say. Quid facerct, non 
habtbat, lie knew not what to do. These are indirect questious. 



LESSOX 90.] SUBJUNCTIVE AETEll RELATIVES. 58'J 

fl T» e n 0l ? tIve ' S thcn eIther V 1 ' 1 in the sense of «* &i or m„>, « In order 
that (before a comparative), or qua, ubi, wide, » where," « whence " 
in the sense of "in order that there, or thence." 

The verbs on which such clauses depend are especially those of 

or. nrriprino- Joi^f,'™™ 0.^,1: • • 1 , J . . 



choot 



devoting, sending-, coming, going, and receiving 



Litterae posteritatis causa repe'r- 

tae sunt, quae subsidio obli- 

vio'ni esse pdssent. 
Dolabella. venerat ipse, qui e'sset 

in consi'lio, et primus senten- 

tiam dicer et. 

Sunt nnilti, qui eripiunt tiliis, 
quod aliis largldntur. 

Cohortarer vos, ^oanirno/wY/o- 
re essetis. 

Darius po'ntem fecit in fstro flu- 
mine, qua co'pias traductret. 

Themistocli Artaxerxes Lampsa- 
cum lirbem donarat, wide vi- 
num sumeret. 



Letters were invented for the ben- 
efk of posterity, as a protection 
against oblivion. 

Dolabella had appeared in person, 
so that he might take a part in 
the deliberation, and gave his 



opinion first 
There are many who rob some of 
that which they wish to lavish 
upon others. 
I should exhort you to be more 

resolute. 
Darius constructed a bridge over 
the Danube, over which he hn'o-ht 
lead his forces. 
Artaxerxes made Themistocles a 
present of the city of Lampsa- 
cum^froni which he might o-et 
his wine. 

E. When the clause introduced by the relative contains the 
ground or reason of what has gone before, the verb is in the 
subjunctive. 

The relative is then either qui, rendered by " that " " because " or 
"since," or quippe qui, ut qui, utpote qui, « as one who," ''Inasmuch 
as ne, ccc. \h. «\ 

The great fault of Pel ops is, that 
he did not educate his son, nor 
teach him to what extent to car- 
ry everything. 

We preferred to start from Actium 
on foot, because we had had a 



Magna e'st ^ Pe'lSpis culpa, qui 
non erudierit filium, nee docii- 
errt, quatenus esset quidque 
curandum. 

Actio maliihnus iter facere pedi- 
bus, qui incommode nauigaxxS- 
mus. 

Solis candor illustrior est, quippe 
qui in imme'nso miindo tam 
ldnge lateque colluceat. 

Sunt homines natiira curidsi, ut 

qui sernninculis etiam fabelh's- 

que ducdntur. 
A Catilina Antdnius non procul 

aberat, utpote qui in fugii seque- 

7'ctur. 

50 



bad passage at sea. 

The light of the sun is brighter 
(than any other), inasmuch^ it 
shines so far and wide in the im- 
mensity of the universe. 

Men are naturally curious, since 
they are influenced even by idle 
talk and fables. 

Antonius was not far from Catiline 
as he pursued him in his flight. 



590 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 90. 



fortunate adoleseens, qui tiiae 
virtutis Homerum praeconem 
inue'neris I 

Me infelicem, qui per tot annos 
te videre non potuerim ! * 



O lucky young man, for having 

found a* Homer to proclaim thy 

valor ! 
How unfortunate I am, that I have 

not been able to see you for so 

many years ! 

F. After the adjectives dignus, indignus, aptus, and idoneus, 
the question for what ? is answered by the relative with the 
subjunctive, and sometimes by a simple infinitive. 
Dignus, indignus est, qui ametur. 



He is worthy, unworthy of being 
loved. 

He is competent to command. 

He who modestly obeys seems to 
be worthy of commanding at 
some future time. 

The dramas of Livy are scarcely 
worth reading a second time- 

They held that the intellect alone 
was fit to be relied upon. 

There seemed to be no person bet- 
ter qualified to discourse on old 
age. 

Of the lyrical poets Horace is^ al- 
most the only one worth reading. 
They both were men of the first 
order; and worthy the one to 
be chosen, and the other to 
choose. 

G. In narration, the imperfect and pluperfect subjunctive 
are sometimes put after relative pronouns and adverbs, when a 
repeated action is spoken of. E. g. 

The elephants formed a safe pro- 



Iddneus est, qui imperet. 

Qui modeste paret, videtur, qui 

aliquando imperet, dignus esse. 

Livianae tabulae non satis dignae 
sunt, quae iterum legdntur. 

(Mentem) solam censebant ido- 
n earn (esse), cui crederetur. 

Nulla videbatur dptior persona, 
quae de aetate loquerelur. 

Lyricorum Horatius fere solus 

le'gi dignus est. 
Uterque' dptimus erat, dignusque 

alter eligl alter e'ugere. 



Elephanti tutum ab hdstibus, 
quacumque incederent, agmen 
praebebant. 

Domitianus, qudties dtium e'sset, 
alea se oblectabat. 



tection against the enemy, wher- 
ever they might march. 

Domitian amused himself with dice- 
playing, whenever he was at 
leisure. 

Socrates was confessedly the first 
in everything to which he had 
applied himself. 

Nor could any one stand against 
Pyrrhus, where he had charged 
upon the enemy. 
The subjunctive is thus sometimes put after quum, 



Socrates quam se cunque in par- 
tem dedisset, dmniuni facile 
fiiit princeps. 

Nee quisquam Pyrrhum, qua tu- 
lisset impetum, sustinere va- 
luit. 
Remark. 



* In this and the preceding example, the student should notice the person 
of the verh, which adapts itself to that of the antecedent of the relative. 



LESSON 90.] 



PHRASES AND EXERCISES. 



591 



" when " ; ubi and ut, in the sense of " as soon as," and after si. E. g. 
Id ubi dixisset, liastam in fines eorum emittebat, When (or as soon as) 
he had said that, he sent the javelin within their limits. But in all 
the cases of this rule, the indicative is even more frequently used than 
the subjunctive. 



To die of a disease. 

The small-pox. 
The fever. 

The intermittent, tertian, 
quartan, continual fever. 
To get the fever. 

To haA r e the fever. 

An attack of fever ; a fit. 

The fever comes on. 

The fever stops. 

The apoplexy. 

To be struck with apoplexy. 

To open (active). ■] 

To unlock, unbolt. ■] 

To open, be open (iieut). -j 

To stand or lie open. 

To close, shut (act). •] 

To cover (shut). 
To shut, close (neut.). 
To sell well, readily (o/| 
goods). I 

Of what disease did your sister 

die? 
She died of the small-pox. 
Did you ever get the fever ? 
Yes, I had the tertian fever 

once. 
Was the old man struck with 

apoplexy ? 
He was struck. 
Did the wine sell well last year ? 

I do not know how it sold. 
Will you shut the door ? 
No, I will open it (wide). 



MorXor (inori, mortuus suni) aliquo 
morbo. 

Variolae, arum,/)?. 

Febris, \s,f. 

Febris remittens, tertiana, quarta- 
na, quotidiana. 

In febrim incidere (incidi, inca- 
sum). 

Febri laborare, febrim habere. 

Accessus febris; motus febriculo- 
sus. 

Febris accedit. 

Febris decedit. 

Apoplexia, ae,/. 

Corripior (i, reptus sum) apo- 
plexia. 

Aperio, ire, eriti, crtum. 

Patefacio, ere, feci, factum. 

Recludo, ere, si, sum. 

Kesero, are, avi, atum. 

Aperior, Iri, ertus sum. 

Recludi, reserari. 

Pateo, ere, patiii, . 

Claudo, ere, si, sum. 

Obsero, are, avi, atum. 

Operio, Ire, iii, rtum. 

Claudi, obserari ; operlri. 

Vendibllem (or -bile) esse. 

Emptores facile invenire. 

Quo morbo mdrtua est sdror tiia ? 

Mortua est variolis. 
lncidistine linquam in febrim ? 
Sane ; in febrim tertianam quon- 
dam incidi. 
Correptusne est senex apoplexia ? 

Correptus est. 

Invenitne vinum facile emptores 

anno prdxime elapso ? 
Haud sci'o, qudmodo venderetur. 
Visne ostium claiidere ? 
finmo id potius patefiicerc malo. 



592 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[lesson 90. 



Has he already locked (bolted) 
the door ? 

He has not yet bolted it. 

The key opens the door (fits the 
lock)" 

The door opens easily. 

The door does not shut. 

The window shuts well. 

The window does not shut easily. 

The door of the temple stood 
open. 

Nature opened the way. 

They opened their ears to flat- 
terers. 

Letters can either be lost, or 
opened, or intercepted. 
From afar, afar off. 

Summer clothes. 

To conceive, comprehend. 

That is not said. 

That cannot be comprehended. 

It is evident, manifest, clear. 



According to the circumstan- 
ces of the case. 
According to circumstances. 
Under these circumstances. 
To proceed according to circum- 
stances. 

According as, as. 
As the circumstances admitted. 
As the case may demand. 
As far as the difficulty of the case 

admitted. 
As far as I can. 

According as I deserve. 
It depends upon circumstances. 
Everything depends upon you 
alone. 

It all depends on this. 

To put, place, lag, set. 



Obseravitnc jam ostium ? 

Xondum obseravit. 
Clavis ostium aperit. 

Ostium facile aperitur. 
Fores hi'ant. 

Fenestra ex to'to claiisa est. 
Fenestra non facile operitur. 
Janua templi patebat. 

Natura iter patefecit. 

Aiires sxias assentatdribus patefece- 
runt. 

Litterae aut interire, aut aperiri, 
aut intercipi pdssunt. 

E longinquo ; procul ; eminus. 

Testes aestlvae. 
f Comprehendo, ere, di, sum. 
^Mente complector (i, plexus sum). 

Hoc non dicitur. 
( Hoc comprehendi non potest. 
\ Hoc in intelligentiam non cadit. 

Est planum, evidens, manifestum, 
in aperto. 

Constat, liicet, liquet.* 

Pro re, pro re nald. 

Ex tempore, pro tempore. 
His rebus ; quae cum ita sint. 
Ex re consulere (ui, turn). 

Pro eo ut, proat (cum Indie). 
Prdut facilitates hourinis ferebant 
Pro ut res postal at. 
Fro eo ut difficiiltas temporis tiilit. 

Quantum in me si'tum est. Ut pd- 

tero. 
Pro eo ut mereor. 
Hoc ex re et ex tempore pendet. 
In te uno pdsita sunt omnia. 

Hoc caput rei est. 

Omnia hlic redeunt. 

Punere, locdre, statuere (aliqtjid 

IN ALIQUO LOCO). 



* On the construction of these expressions, see Lesson LIII. D. Rem. 2. 



LESSON 90.] phrases AM) EXERCISES. . r >93 

To put anything before the fire. Apponcre or propdnere aliquid 

igni (ad ignein). 

rr l ( Imponere aliquem or aliquid in rem. 

10 put, or place upon. -{ ,, , r • i • 1 

111 I ( olio; arc, aliquid in re. 

To put anything in its proper Aliquid sub loco ponere. 

place. 
To put (seat) the boy upon the Imponere puerum in equum. 

horse. 

To set the glass upon the table. Seyphum in mensa statuere (ui, 

utura). 

To put back anything to its place. Aliquid suo loco repdnere. 

( Infigo, erc,fixi,jixum. 

To slick; fix, insert. ■< Insero, ere, serui, scrlum. 

( (aliquid REI or in REM.) 

To insert the thread into the Inserere ilium in acum. 

needle. 

To put the ring on the finger. Anulum digito inserere. 

The javelin sticks fast in the gate. Ilasta infigltur portae. 

Do not j)ut the glass upon the Ne scyphuin in mensa statuas. 

table ; for it will break. Nam frangetur. 

( Irascor, i, ircttus sum. 

To be angry (at some one). ■< Succenseo, ere, ui, sum. 

lira/urn esse (alicui). 

To be angry (about any- Gravlter or moleste ferre (ali- 

thing). quid). 

To pretend to be angry with any Se annulare alicui iratum. 

one. 

What are you angry about? Quid suecenscs (inisceris) ? 

I am angry with you, for having Tibi succenseo, quod mihi librum 

earned away my book. abstulisti. 

He has done nothing for you to Nihil fecit, quod succenseas. 

be angry about. 

I am angry that he did not Iratus siim, eum non venisse (or 

come. quod non venit).* 

» n i • i •■ o ( Poenitetne te facti ? 

Are you sorry lor having done it i \ ^ ., ,, , A . . c , 
J ° ( roenitetne te hoc tecisse i 

T r v Ud me poenitet. 

1 am sorry for it. i -r-k -w i • -n 

J I Dolet mihi valdc. 

I do not regret having lived. Non poenitet me vixisse. 

Are the women handsome ? Suntne mulieres formo'sae ? 

They are so. Sunt vero. 

The}- are well-bred and hand- Et bene moriitae et formdsae stint. 

some. 

"What countrywoman is she? 1 r*T H * "r? 

c, • c -n \ Ddino Francoaalla est. 

She is from I ranee. < ^ ^ M f_ . ■. 

( Lx h rancogalha venit. 

* On the government of these verbs, see Lesson LIV. //. 
2 L 50 * 



594 LATIN GRAMMAR, [LESSON 90. 

What sort of a pen have you Qualem pennam (quid pennae) 

lost ? amisisti ? 

A gold one. Aiiream. 

What sort of pens has your sis- Quales pennas fidit sdror tiia ? 

ter made ? 
Good ones. Bdnas. 

To cut a pen. Pennam or calamum findere (fidi, 

fissum). 
To mend a pen. Pennam or calamum temperare. 

To put pen to paper. Calamum sumere ; se ad scriben- 

dum conferre. 
Happy. Felix, icis ; beatus, a, urn. 

Unhappy, miserable. Infelix, icis ; miser, a, um. 

Polite, courteous. Urbanus, benignus, modestus, a, 

um. 
Impolite, uncivil. Inurbanus, a, um ; rusticus, a, um. 

Exercise 164. 
Of what illness did your sister die ? — She died of the fever — 
How is your brother? — My brother is no longer living. He died 
three months ago. — I am surprised at it, for he was very well last 
summer when I was in the country. — Of what did he die ? — He 
died of apoplexy. — How is the mother of your friend ? — She is not 
well ; she had an attack of ague the day before yesterday, and this 
morning the fever has returned. — Has she the intermitting fever ? — 
I do not know, but she often has cold fits. — What has become of 
the woman whom I saw at your mother's ? — She died this morning 
of apoplexy. — Did the wine sell well last year ? — It did not sell 
very well ; but it will sell better next year, for there will be a great 
deal of it, and it will not be dear. — Why do you open the door ? — 
Do you not see how it smokes here ? — I do not see it ; but you must 
open the window instead of opening the door. — The window does 
not open easily ; that is the reason why I open the door. — When will 
you shut it ? — I will shut it as soon as there is no more smoke. — 
Why do you not put those beautiful glasses on the small table (men- 
sulci) ? — If I put them upon that little table they will break. — Did 
you often go a fishing when you were in that country ? — We often 
went a fishing and a hunting. — If you will go with us into the coun- 
try, you will see the castle of my father. — You are very polite, sir; 
but I have seen that castle already. — Are you such a man, as to be 
capable of doing that (hoc facade possis) ? — I am by no means so 
heartless ; nor are you such a man as not to know who I am. — Such is 
our character, that we cannot be contented with anything but liberty. 

— Are there any who affirm that this is not true ? — There are none. 

— Is there any one who does not understand ? — There is no one. — 
There were many who said that you were mistaken. — Had your 
brother anything new to write to you V — He had many things to 
write to me. — Are you not fortunate for having found such a book ? 

— I am as happy as any man in the world (for it). — Did he begin to 
write this morning? — He could not begin, because he had no ink. — 



LESSON 91.] SUBJUNCTIVE IN INTERJECTED CLAUSES. 595 

Is your brother competent (idoneiis) to teach ? — He is not competent 
to teach, but to write. — Is lie worthy to command ? — He is as wor- 
thy as any one. — Did your teacher often go out walking ? — He took 
a walk as often as he was at leisure. — Has my son been diligent ? — 
He was confessedly the first in everything to which he applied himself. 



Lesson XCL — pensum unum et nona- 

GESIMUM. 
OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE IN INTERJECTED CLAUSES. 

A. Interjected clauses, in which the language or thoughts of 
the person spoken of are conveyed, or which are essential to 
the definition of what has gone before, have a verb in the sub- 
junctive. 

Clauses of this kind always occur in sentences, which are themselves 
dependent upon another proposition ; e. g. in the construction of the 
Ace. cum Inf., or in sentences dependent on a conjunction, &c. They 
are commonly introduced either by a relative (pronoun or adverb), or 
by a conjunction. E. g. 

Thales, qui sapientissimus in se- Thales, who was the wisest of the 

ptem fuit, homines existimare seven sages, said that men ought 

dixit oportere, omnia, quae cer- to consider all things beheld by 

nerentur, deorum esse plena. our senses as full of divinities. 

Caesar hortatus est milites, ne Caesar exhorted his soldiers not to 

ea, quae accidlssent, grdviter be chagrined at ivliat had hap- 

fe'rrent. pened. 

Rkmark. — Sentences, in which the language or sentiments of 
another (or of one's self) are stated indirectly, are said to be in the 
oratio obllqua, in contradistinction to the oratio directa, in which they 
are quoted as they were uttered. Thus the above clauses stated in 
the oratio directa are : " Omnia, quae cernuntur, deorum plena sunt." — - 
u Ne ea, quae acciderunt, ferte graviter " (Do not be chagrined at what 
has happened).* Thus also in English: I wrote, him, " I shall come 
to-morrow " (oratio directa) ; and : / wrote him that I would come to- 
morrow (oratio obi i qua). And in the third person : He said, "I have 
conquered"; and indirectly: He said that he had conquered. — The 
following rules will elucidate these cases more fully. 

B. When an interjected clause occurs in the construction of 
the accusativus cum infinilivo, either as an expression of the 

* The student will notice here the change of mood and tense in the direct 
statement: quae acciderunt instead of quae accidlssent ; quae cernuntur instead 
of quae cernerenlur, and the imperative ne — ferte instead of ne — ferentur. 



596 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 91. 

language or sentiments of the person spoken of, or otherwise as 
an essential part of that which is advanced in the statement, 
the verb of that clause is in the subjunctive. E. g. 

Mos est Athenis, lauddri in con- It is customary at Athens to de- 

cione eos, qui sint in proeliis liver public eulogies on those 

interfecti. who have fallen in battle. 

Socrates dicere solebat, omnes in Socrates was in the habit of say- 

eo, quod scirent, satis esse elo- ing, that all men were eloquent 

quentes. enough in what they knew. 

Eleus Hippias, quum Olympiam Hippias of Elis, having come to 

venisset, gloriatus est, nihil Olympia, boasted, that there was 

esse ulla in arte re rum dmni- nothing in any one of all the 

urn, quod ipse nesclret; nee arts, which he himself did not 

solum has artes, quibus libera- understand ; and that these arts 

les doctrinae atque ingenuae were not only those, in which the 

continere'ntur ; sed anulum, liberal sciences were contained, 

quern haberet, pallium, quo but that he himself had manufac- 

amictus, sdecos, quibus indutus tured with his own hand the ring 

esset, se sua nianu confecisse. which he wore, the cloak which 

he had on, and the shoes that 
were on his feet. 

Prmcipes Aeduorum, non dubi- The leaders of the Aedui said, that 
lure se, dkebant, quln, si Hel- they had no doubt but that, if 
vetios superdverint Romani, the Romans conquered the II el- 
tin a cum reliqua Gallia Aedu- vetii, they would deprive the 
is hbertatem sint ereptu.ru Aedii, together Avith all the rest 

of Gaul, of their liberties. 

Remarks. 

1. When the interjected clause is an addition of the speaker or 
writer himself, and not the language or sentiments of the subject 
spoken of, the verb is in the indicative. E. g. Cave tibi am'icos esse 
credas, quos vicisti, Beware of regarding those whom you have con- 
quered as your friends. 

2. If the interjected relative clause is merely explanatory of a fact, 
or a circumlocution for a noun or adjective, its verb is sometimes in 
the indicative. E. g. Caesar per exploratores certior /actus est, ex eti 
parte vici, quam Gallis concesserat, omnes noctu discessisse, Csesar was 
informed by his scouts, that during the night all had left that section 
of the village which he had conceded to the Gauls. Aam sic habetdte, 
mqgistratihus iisque, qui praesunt, rempublicam contineri, For these shall 
be your sentiments, that the republic is maintained by its magistrates 
and by those who are at the head of it. 

C. "When the interjected clause occurs in a sentence intro- 
duced by a conjunction, as an essential part of the purpose, re- 
quest, precept, command, or supposition cf the same, the verb 
of that clause is in the subjunctive. E. g. 



LESSON 91.] SUBJUNCTIVE IN INTERJECTED CLAUSES. 



597 



TJbii orabant, ut si'bi Caesar au- 
xilium ferret ; vel, si id facere 
prohiberttur, excrcitum inddo 
Rhenum transportdret. 

Rex imperavit, ut, quae bello 
opus essent, pararentur. 



Eo simus animo, ut nihil in malis 
ducamus, quod sit vel a deo 
immortali vel a natiira consti- 
tution. 



The Ubii besought Caesar to come 
to their assistance, or, if he was 
prevented from doing so, to bring 
at least his army across the Rhine. 

The king ordered such prepara- 
tions to be made, as might be ne- 
cessary for the war. 

Let us be so disposed, as to con- 
sider nothing an evil, that may 
have been appointed either by 
the immortal God or by nature. 

Remarks. 

1. When the subjunctive clause introduced by ut does not denote a 
piupose, command, &c, but merely a result or definition (as after 
tarn, ita, talis,* &c), the verb of the interjected clause is in the indica- 
tive. E. g. Eloquendi vis efficit, ut ea, quae ignoramus, discere, et ea, 
quae schnus, alios docere posslmus, The power of speech enables us to 
learn the things we are ignorant of, and to teach others what we know. 
Asia tarn opima est et fertilis, ut muliitudine earum rerum, quae expor- 
tantur, facile omnibus terris antecellat, Asia is so rich and fertile, that 
in the multiplicity of exportable products it easily excels all other 
countries. 

2. The verb of the interjected clause is sometimes in the indicative, 
when the speaker adds it on his own account. E. g. Xerxem litteris 
certiorem feci, id agi, ut pons, quern in Hellesponto fecerat, dissolvere- 
tur, I informed Xerxes by letter, that a plan was on foot to destroy 
the bridge ivhich he had constructed over the Hellespont. 

D. Dependent clauses generally, introduced by relatives or 
conjunctions, take a verb in the subjunctive, when they convey 
the sentiments of the person or party spoken of, and not of the 
speaker himself. E. g. 

Ennius does not think that death 
is to be regretted, which (in his 
opinion) is followed by immor- 
tality. 

Socrates was impeached, because 
(as his enemies alleged) he cor- 
rupted the youth, and introduced 
new superstitions. 

Themistocles was in the habit of 
walking abroad at night, because 
(he said that) he could not get 
any sleep. 

Pliny the elder considered all the 
time lost which (he said) was not 
devoted to his studies. 



[Ennius non censet, lugendam 
esse mortem, qicam immortali- 
tas consequdtur. 

Socrates accusatus est, quod cor- 
ruinperet juventutem et novas 
superstitidnes induceret. 

Ndctu ambulabat in publico The- 
mistocles, quod somnum capere 
non jidsset. 



Plmius major perire dmne tem- 
pus arbitrabatur, quod stiidiis 
non impertiretur. 



Compare Lesson LXXXVIII. 



598 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 91. 



Aristi'des ndnne ob cam caiisam Was not Aristidcs expelled from 
expiilsus est patria, quod prae- his country, because (it was al- 
ter mddum Justus esset ? leged) that he was too just '? 

Remarks. 

1. In all the above examples the writer himself does not indorse or 
positively affirm the opinion advanced in the dependent clause ; if he 
did, the verb ■would be in the indicative. 

2. On the use of the reflexives se, sui, sibi, and suus in this con- 
struction, see Lesson LXXV. C. 

3. Instead of the subjunctive of the verb itself, the expressions quod 
diceret, quod arbitraretur, " because he said," " because he thought," 
are sometimes put, and the verb is made dependent upon these. E. g. 
Ab Atheniensibus, locum scpulturae intra urban ut dtlrent, impelfdre 
non potui, quod religione se impediri dicerent,* I could not prevail 
upon the Athenians to grant me a burial-place within the limits of the 
city, because they said that they "were prevented from doing so by 
religious scruples. 

Utditas, (itis f. ; usus, us, m. 
Commodum, emolumenlum, lucrum, 
?', m. 
["Utilitatem or usuni afferre (ali- 

J T C F X > 

J Usui esse, prodesse, conduccre 
L (alicui). 
Magnam utilitatem afferre ; valde 

or plurimum prodesse ; magnae 

utilitati esse (alicui). 
Parum utilitatis afferre ; parvae 

esse utilitati ; parum (non mul- 

tum) prodesse (alicui). 
Xihil prodesse (alicui) ; longe 

abesse (ab aliquo). 
Utilitatem, fructum, commodum ca- 

pere or percipere ex aliqua re. 
Aliqua re uti ; aliquid in rem suam 

convertere ; lucri facere aliquid. 
Omnia ad suam utilitatem referre. 



The utility, use. 
Tlie adcantage. 



To be of use. 



To be of areat use. 



To be of little use. 



To be of no use. 



To profit by, derive profit from 
anything. 

To turn anything to one's advan- 
tage or profit. 

To turn everything to one's own 
profit. 

To look to one's own advan- 
tage. 

To benefit (be useful) to any 
one. 

Of what use is this ? 



Commodis suis consulere or servire. 

Alicujus commodis consulere or 
servire. 
< Cm usui est hoc ? 
( Quid refert ? Quid prddest ? 



* Instead of the quod religione se impedirctur of the rule, or the quod re- 
ligione se impediri dicebant, when the speaker himself is the authority for the 
truth of the assertion. This construction, although grammatically incorrect, 
is not uncommon. ■» 



LESSON 91.] PHRASES AND EXERCISES. 



500 



That is of no use. 

It is of use to me ; it is to my ad- 
vantage. 

It is for the advantage of the 
state. 

Of use, of advantage. 

Useful ; advantageous. 

Useless ; of no use. 

It is well, right, fair, just, 
proper (to do anything). 

It is not well, unjust, wrong (to 
(do anything). 

I consider it proper, right, fair. 

Is it right to do this ? 

It is not right ; it is wrong. 

Is it useful to write much ? 

It is very useful, of great use. 

Did he derive much advantage 

from his books ? 
He derived not much from them. 
Is it for your advantage ? 
It is not ; it is for my father. 

AVhat is your name ? 

My name is Charles. 

AVhat do you call this (how is 

this called) in Latin ? 
AVhat does this signify in 

French? 
This signifies parler in French. 

It is not easy to tell. 
Do they call him king, philoso- 
pher, Frederic ? 
They do. 
To name, call. 

To give one a name. 

The name, appellation (of a per- 
son or object). 



( Hoc est milli usui. 
( Hoc nihil prtidest. 

Hoc mihi prddest (mini utile est). 

Est e re mea; est in rem meam. 

Hoc est e re publico. 

Ex usu, e re, in rem (alicujus). 

Utilis ; salutaris ; fructuosus. 

In uti lis; sine utilitate; carens fructu. 

Aequum, par, jus, fas est (aliquid 
facere). 

Injustum, imquum, nefas est (ali- 
quid facere). 

Aequum esse censeo (e. g. te hoc 
facere, &c). 

Aequiiinne est facere hoc ? 

Non aequum est ; nefas est. 

Estne utile . (prodestne) miiltum 
scribere ? 
J fet sane maxime utile. 
( Plurimum prddest. 

Cepitne multum fructum ex libris 
siiis ? 

Immo ei non miiltum profuerunt. 

Estne e re tua ? 

Non est ; est e re patris. 
( Quod est tibi nomen ? 
[ Ciuinam vocaris ? 
TEst mihi nomen Carolus (Cardli, 
} Cardlo).* 
( Appellor Carolus. 

Quid est (dicitur, vocatur) hoc 
Latin e ? 

Quid est (sdnat, significat) hoc 
Francogallice ? 

Hoc Francogallice parler est (sd- 
nat, significat). 

Non facile est dictu. 

Appellantne eum regem, phildso- 
phum, Fredericum V 

Factum. 

Nominare, appellare, vocare, di- 
cere. 

Nomen alicui dare (indere, impo- 
nei-e). 

Nomen | ; aj^pcllatio ; vocabulum. 



* Compare page 3G7. 

t The nomen is properly the middle of the three names of a free Roman citi- 



600 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 91. 



The name of emperor. 
Called William; William by 
name. 

William. 

Francis. 

James. 

Elizabeth. 

Eleanor. 

Wilhelmine. 

Schiller. 

Goethe. 

Euripides. 

Plato. 

George the Third. 

Henry the Fourth. 

Charles the Great. 

Louis the Fourteenth. 
To speak a language. 
Fluently, with facility. 

He speaks Latin fluently. 

Charles the Fifth spoke several 
European languages fluently. 

Have you ever heard such a 

thing ? 
Never. 
I have never seen or heard such 

a thing. 
Such a thing. 
The army. 
The camp. 
Europe. — European. 

The works (of an author). 
Sooner — than. 
Bather — than. 
He arrived sooner than. 
I will rather pay him than go 

thither. 
I will rather burn the coat than 

wear it. 
Rather than squander my money, 

I will throw it into the river. 



Komen imperatoris. 

Qui dicitur (voeatur) Guilielmus. 

Xdmine Guilielmus. 

Wilhehnus (Guilielmus), i, m. 

Franciscus, i, m. 

Jacobus, i, m. 

Elisabetha, ae,/. 

Leonora, ae,/. 

Wilhelmina, ze,/. 

Schillerus, i, m. 

Goethius, i, ?m.* 

Euripides, is, m. 

Plato, onis, m. 

Georgius Tertius. 

Henricus Quartus. 

Carolus Magnus. 

Ludovicus Quartus Decimus. 

Aliqua lingua loqui or uti. 

Expedite, facile ; profluente celeri- 
tate. 

Lingua Latina facile loquitur. 

Linguae Latinae peritus est. 

Carolus Quintus linguarum Euro- 
pensium pluribus profluente ce- 
leritate utebatur (loquebatur). 

Audivistine unquam tale quid V 

Nunquam. 

Xunquam ego aliquid tale neque 

vidi neque audivi. 
Aliquid tale, tale quid. 
Exercitus, us, m. 
Castra, orum }> n. 
Europa, ae, f. — Europensis, e ; 

Europaeus, a, mn. 
Opera ; scripta, orum, n. 
Prim (citius, ante) — quam. 
Prim (potius, citius) — quam. 
Citius, quam ego, advenit. 
Debitum ei solvere pdtius, quam 

eo ire, malo. 
Comburam pdtius, quam gestiibo, 

vestem. 
In fliivium conjicere pracdpto, 

quam dilapidare peciiniam. 



zen. who had a praenomen, nvmen, and cognomen (family name). Sometimes, 
however, it stands generally for any one of these names. 

; - Modern proper names are either indeclinable without any change (e. g. 
Schiller, Goethe), or they assume analogous Latin terminations. 



LESSON 91.] PHRASES AND EXERCISES. 



601 



Sure, certain. 
To be sure of a thing. 

Are you quite sure of it ? 
I am sure of it. 
I am sure that he has arrived. 
To repair (or go) to any 
place. 
To withdraw, retire anywhere. 
I went to my room. 
He repaired to that town. 
He repaired to his army. 
I repaired to that place. 
lie retired into the country to 

live. 
Go where you please. 
To go to any one, to meet any 

one. 



Certus, exploratus, a, urn. 
( Rem exploratam habere. 
< Certo or pro certo scire. 
( Exploratum mi hi est. 

Satin' hoc tibi exploratum 'st ? 

Exploratum habeo. 

Pro certo sci'o hoc. 

Hoc certo scio, eum ad\enisse. 

Se conferre aliquo. 

Ire, projicisci aliquo. 

Concedere aliquo. 

Ego me in conclave meura cdntuli. 

XJrbeoi in lllam se cdntulit. 

Ad exercitum siium profectus est. 

In locum ilium profectus siim. 

Rus habitatum concessit. 

I, quo tibi collibeat. 

Accedere, se conferre ad aliquem. 

Adire, convenire aliquem. 



Exercise 165. 

When did you see my father's castle ? — I saw it when I was 
travelling last year. It is one of the finest castles that I have ever 
seen ; it is seen far off. — How is that said ? — That is not said. 
That cannot be comprehended. — Cannot everything be expressed in 
your language ? — Everything can be expressed, but not as in yours. 

— Will you rise early to-morrow ? — It will depend upon circumstan- 
ces ; if 1 go to bed early, I shall rise early, but if I go to bed late, I 
shall rise late. — Will you love my children? — If they are good, I 
shall love them. — Will you dine with us to-morrow ? — If you will 
get ready (si vis apparare) the food I like, I shall dine with you. — 
Have you already read the letter which you received this morning ? 

— I have not opened it yet. — When will you read it ? — I shall read 
it as soon as I have time. — Of what use is that ? — It is of no use. — ■ 
Why have you picked it up? — I have picked it up, in order to show 
it to you. — Can you tell me what it is ? — I cannot tell you, for I do 
not know ; but I shall ask my brother, who will tell you. — Where 
have you found it ? — I have found it on the bank of the river, near 
the wood. — Did you perceive it from afar? — I did not want to per- 
ceive it from afar, for I passed by the side of the river. — Have you 
ever seen such a thing ? — Never. — Is it useful to speak much ? — 
If one wishes to learn a foreign language, it is useful to speak a great 
deal. — Is it as useful to write as to speak ? — It is more useful to 
speak than to write ; but in order to learn a foreign language, one 
must do both. — Is it useful to write all that one says ? — That is use- 
less. — Does your uncle walk often ? — He walks every morning be- 
fore breakfast, because (he says) it is wholesome (sahrfare). — Why 
was he expelled from the academy ? — He was expelled from it, be- 

51 



602 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 92. 

cause (it was alleged that) he was sick. — What did he boast of? — 
He boasted that he had not only learnt all the lessons which are 
contained in this book, but that he himself had with his own hand 
written all the exercises, belonging to every one of them. — What did 
your master command you to do ? — He commanded me to bring him 
the book which he had lent me. 

Exercise 166. 

"Where did you take this book from ? — I took it out of the room 
of your friend (fern.). — Is it right to take the books of other people ? 

— It is not right, I know ; but I wanted it, and I hope that your 
friend will not be displeased ; for I will return it to her as soon as I 
have read it. — What is your name ? — My name is William. — What 
is your sister's name ? — Her name is Eleanor. — Why does Charles 
complain of his sister ? — Because she has taken his pens. — Of whom 
do those children complain ? — Francis complains of Eleanor, and 
Eleanor of Francis. — Who is right ? — They are both wrong ; for 
Eleanor wishes to take Francis's books and Francis Eleanor's. — To 
whom have you lent Schiller's works ? — I have lent the first volume 
to William and the second to Elizabeth. — How is that said in French? 

— That is not said in French. — How is that said in German ? — It 
is said thus. — Has the tailor already brought you your new coat ? — 
He has brought it to me, but it does not fit me well. — Will he make 
you another ? — He must make me another ; for rather than wear it, 
I will give it away. — Will you use that horse ? — I shall not use it. — 
Why will you not use it ? — Because it does not suit me. — Will you 
pay for it ? — I will rather pay for it than use it. — To whom do those 
fine books belong ? — They belong to William. — Who has given them 
to him ? — His good father. — Will he read them ? — He will tear 
them rather than read them. — Are you sure that he will not read 
them? — I am sure of it, for he has told me so. 



Lesson XCII. — pexsum alterum et nona- 

GESIMUM. 

OF THE IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

A. The imperative of Latin verbs has two forms, called the 
imperative present and the imperative future. Both of these 
serve to express a command, sometimes also a ivish, an advice 
or exhortation, that something should be done. But the impera- 
tive present requires the immediate performance of an injunc- 
tion, whereas the future implies that something should be done in 
connection with (i. e. in consequence of, after, or simultaneously 
with) some other act. E. g. Pres. Discede ! Leave (be off) ! 



LESSON 92.] THE IMPERATIVE MOOD. 603 

Discedite ! Leave ye ! Fut. Quum legeris, turn discedtto ! 
Leave, after you have read ! 

Note. — The second action, on which the imperative future de- 
pends, is not always expressed, but may generally be supplied from 
the context. — Compare F. II. 

B. FORMATION OF THE IMPERATIVE. 

1. The imperative present active is formed from the present 
infinitive, by dropping the termination " re." As, — 

1. amare — ama, love tliou. 

2. monere — mone, remind iliou. 

3. legere — lege, read thou. 
(3.) capere — cape, tale thou. 

4. audire — audi, hear thou. 

2. The imperative present passive has the same form as the 
present infinitive active in all the conjugations. As, — 

1. amare, be thou loved. 

2. monere, be thou reminded. 

3. legere, be thou read. 
(3.) capere, be thou taken. 

4. audire, be thou heard. 

3. The imperative future active is formed from the present 
by changing, 1. a, 2. e, 3. e, 4. ?, into, 1. cito, 2. eto, 3. ito, 4. 
ito, and the passive, by adding r to these terminations of the 
active As, — 

1. ama — amato, amator, thou shalt love, be loved. 

2. mone — moneto, mone tor, thou shalt remind, be reminded. 

3. lege — legito, legitor, thou shalt read, be read. 
(3.) cape — capito, capitor, thou shalt take, be taken. 

4. audi — audito, auditor, thou shalt hear, be heard. 

INFLECTION OF THE IMPERATIVE. 

C. The following paradigms exhibit the inflection 
of the imperative, active and passive. 

First Conjugation. 
Active. Passive. 

Present. Present. 



S. ama, love (thou). 
P. amate, love ye. 

Future. 
S. 2. amato, thou shalt love. 
S. 3. amato, let him love. 
P. 2. amatote, ye shall love. 
P. 3. amanto, let them love. 



S. amare, be thou loved. 
P. amamini, be ye loved. 

Future. 

S. 2. amator, thou shalt be loved. 
S. 3. amator, let him be loved. 
P. 2. amiiminor, ye shall be loved. 
P. 3. amantor, let them be loved. 



604 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 92. 



Second Conjugation. 



Passive. 

Present. 

S. monere, be thou reminded. 

P. monemini, be ye reminded. 

Future. 
S. 2. monetor, thou shalt be re- 
minded. 
S, 3. monetor, let him be re- 
minded. 
P. 2. monetote, ye shall remind. P. 2. monemmor, ye shall be re- 
minded. 
P. 3. monento, let them remind. P. 3. monentor, let them be re- 
minded. 



Active. 

Present. 
S. mone, remind (thou). 
P. monete, remind ye. 

Future. 

S. 2. moneto, thou shalt remind. 
S. 3. moneto, let him remind. 



Third Conjugation. 



S. 
P. 



Present. 
lege, read (thou). 
legite, read ye. 
Future. 
S. 2. legito, thou shalt read. 
S. 3. legito, let him read. 
P. 2. legitote, ye shall read. 
P. 3. legunto, let them read. 



Present. 
S. legere, be thou read. 
P. legimlni, be ye read. 

Future. 

S. 2. legitor, thou shalt be read. 
S. 3. legitor, let him be read. 
P. 2. legimmor, ye shall be read. 
P. 3. leguntor, let them be read. 



Fourth Conjugation. 



Present. 
S. audire, be thou heard. 
P. audimini, be ye heard. 

Future. 
S. 2. auditor, thou shalt be heard. 
S. 3. auditor, let him be heard. 
P. 2. audiniinor, ye shall be 

heard. 
P. 3. audiuntor, let them be 

heard. 

So conjugate apporta, bring ; da, give ; lauda, praise ; recjna, rule ; 
— aade, dare ; gaude, rejoice ; habe, have ; jube, command ; stude, 
strive ; — age, come on (stir) ; mitte, send ; pone, put ; scribe, write ; 
sume, take ; — aperl, open ; purii, punish ; reperl, find ; senti, feel ; 
vera, come. 



Present. 
S. audi, hear (thou). 
P. audite, A ear ye. 

Future. 
S. 2. audito, thou shalt hear. 
S. 3. audito, /e£ Aim Aear. 
P. 2. audito te, ye s/2a/£ hear. 

P. 3. audiunto, fe£ them hear. 



imperative of deponent verbs. 

D. The imperative of deponent verbs follows the analogy 
of the passive voice. Thus : — 



LESSON 92.] IMPERATIVE OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 



005 



First Conjugation. 

Present. 
S. hortare, exliort (thou). 
P. hortamini, exhort ye. 

Future. 
S. 2. liortator, thou shalt exhort. 
S. 3. liortator, let him exhort. 
P. 2. hortaminor, ye shall exhort. 
P. 3. hortantor, let them exhort. 

Second Conjugation. 

Present. 
S. verere, fear (thou). 
P. vercmini, fear ye. 

Future. 
S. 2. veretor, thou shalt fear. 
S. 3. veretor, let him fear. 
P. 2. vereminor, ye shall fear. 
P. 3. verentor, let them fear. 



Third Conjugation. 

Present. 
S. loquere, speak (thou). 
P. loquimini, speak ye. 

Future. 
S. 2. loquitor, ^om shalt speak. 
S. 3. loquitor, let him speak. 
P. 2. loquiminor, ye shall speak. 
P. 3. loquuntor, let them speak. 

Fourth Conjugation. 

Present. 
S. blandire, flatter (thou). 
P. blandimini, fatter ye. 

Future. 
S. 2. blanditor, thou shalt fatter. 
S. 3. blanditor, let him flatter. 
P. 2. blandimmor, ye shall flatter. 
P. 3. blandiuntor, let them flatter. 



So inflect comitare, escort ; morare, delay (stay) ; laetdre, rejoice ; 
recorddre, remember ; — merere, earn ; miserere, pity ; tuere, defend ; 
— fruere, enjoy ; morere, die ; obliviscere, forget; ulciscere, revenge ; 
utere, use ; — experire, experience (try) ; largire, spend ; opperlre, wait 
for (expect) ; ordlre, begin ; partire, divide. 

IMPERATIVE OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 

E. Of the irregular verbs, possum, volo, malo, qneo, nequeo, 
and jio want the imperative mood. That of the rest is as 
follows : — 

1. Esse, to be. — Pres. es — este, be thou, be ye. Fut. 2. esto — 
estote, thou shalt be, ye shall be ; 3. esto — sunto, let him be, let them be. 

So the compounds abes, ades, dees, &c. Some of which, however, 
like possum, do not admit of an imperative. 

2. Edere, to eat. — Pres. ede or es — edite or este. Fut. 2. 
edito or esto — editote or estote ; 3. edlto or esto — edunto. 

So the compounds adede, ambede, comede, &c. 

3. Ferre, to bear. — Act. Pres. fer — ferte. Fut. 2. ferto — 
fertote ; 3. ferto — ferunto. — Pass. Pres. ferre — ferimini. Fut. 
2. fertor — feriminor ; 3. fertor — feruntor. 

So also affer, confer, perfer, &c. 

4. Nolle, to be unwilling. Pres. noli — nolite. Fut. 2. nolito — 
nolitote ; 3. nolito — nolunto. 

5. Ire, to go. — Pres. 1 — ite. Fut. 2. ito — itote ; 3. ito — eunto. 
So the compounds abi, exi, peri, prodi, rcdi, &c. 

6. Inquam, I say. — Pres. inque — inquite. Fut. inquito. — The 
rest is wanting. That of aio, I say, is ai, but obsolete. 

51* 



GOG LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 92. 

7. Memini, I remember, has only the forms memento — mementote, 
remember thou, ye. 

8. A few verbs occur in the imperative alone. They are apcige, 
away, begone ! ave, hail ! salve, hail (good morning, &c.) ; vale, fare- 
well ; and cedo, say, tell me, let see. The remaining forms of these 
are avete, aveto ; salvete, salveto ; valete, valeto. 

Remarks. 

1. The verbs dlco, duco, facio, and fe.ro drop the final e of the im- 
perative present singular, and have die, duc,fac,fer. So also the com- 
pounds of those verbs; as, educ, calefac, ejfer, perfer, &c. The only 
exceptions are the compounds of facio, which change the radical a 
into i; as, conflce, perfxee, &c. — Of the verb scire, it is customary to 
say sclto — scitote instead of sci — scite. 

2. In an imperative clause, the English "not" is always ne instead 
of non, and the English "nor" neve instead of neque. E. g. Ne cru- 
cia te, Do not torment yourself. Ne saevi tantopere, Do not be so 
fierce. Ne audeto accedere neve loqultor, Let him not venture to ap- 
proach nor speak. 

3. Instead of the simple imperative, it is not uncommon to employ 
the formulas cura (or curdto) ut, fac ut (or fac without ut), with the 
present subjunctive. E. g. Cura, ut quam primum venias, Try to come 
as soon as you can. Fac (ut) ammo forti magndque sis, Be brave 
(strive to be brave) and magnanimous. So also in prohibitions, fac 
ne, cave ne (or cave without ne), with the subjunctive, and noli with 
the infinitive. E. g. Fac ne venire praetermittas, Do not fail to come. 
Cave (ne) putes, Do not suppose (Beware of supposing). Noli existi- 
mclre, Do not think. Nolitote dubitare, Be unwilling to doubt. 

4. Instead of the imperative, the Romans frequently employ 
certain tenses of the indicative and subjunctive. They are, — 

a) The first future indicative ; as, Fades (=fac w ito), ut sciam, Let 
me know. Sed valebis (= vale), meaque negotia videbis (= vide), 
But farewell, and attend to my interests. Tu non cessdbis (== ne cessa) 
nosque diltges (= dihge), Do you not cease from your efforts, and 
preserve your regard for us. 

b) The second person of the present subjunctive. E. g. Quum te 
bene confrmdris, ad nos venias (= venlto), When you shall have 
properly established your health again, you must come to see us. 
Tud quod nihil refert, ne cures (= ne cura), Do not meddle with 
things that do not concern you. Quod boni datur, fruare (=fruere), 
dum licet, Enjoy the proffered good while it is lawful. 

c) The third person of the present subjunctive. E. g. Audiat, Let 
him hear. Videat, Let him see. DesXnant furere. Let them cease to 
rage. Donis impii ne placare audeant deos, The impious shall not 
dare to appease the gods with presents.* 

* The subjunctive for this person is even more common than the imperative 
proper. Compare Lesson LXXXVII. B. Eem. 



LESSON 92.] 



USE OF TIIK IMI'KRATIVF. 



C<>7 



d) The second person of the perfect subjunctive, chiefly in negative 
commands with ne. E.g. Hoc ne feceris (= ne factto), You shall 
not do this. Nihil ignoveris (= ignoscito). Do not pardon anything. 
Mm /-icon/id commdius ne ittSi Do not be moved with compassion. 



r. of the use of the imperative. 

I. The imperative present and its equivalents (cf. F,. Rem. 
8, 1) are used in direct commands or prohibitions, addressed by 
the speaker himself, and on his own authority. E. g. 



Servo, obsecro, haee nobis bona. 

Justitiam cole et pietatem. 
Subvenite misero ; lie obviam in- 

jiiriae. 
Procul, o prdcul este, totoque ab- 

sktlte h'u-o ! 
Nimium ne crede eoldri. 
Quaeso, anlmum ne desponde. 

Ciira, id vdleas. 

Magnum fdc animum habeas et 

spem bdnam. 
Fdc, tie quid aliud cures, nisi lit 

quam coniniodisshne convale- 

seas. 
Care, si me amas, existimes, me 

abjeci'sse curam reipublicae. 

Noli te oblioisci Ciceronem esse. 
Nol'ite id vclle, quod fieri 11611 

potest. 
Tit nihil invita dices faciesve 

Minerva. 
Si certum est face re, fdc ia s: ve- 

rum ne post ciilpam cdnferas 

in me. 
Ne (/uae'ras ; ejferant, quae se- 

cum hue attulerunt. 

Quod diibltas, ne feceris. 



Preserve these blessings unto us, I 
pray thee. 

Cultivate justice and piety. 

Come ye to the rescue of an un- 
happy man; face the injustice 1 . 

Away ! away ! Keep oil' from the 
entire grove ! 

Do not trust beauty too much. 

Do not, I pray you, give up your 
courage. 

Farewell ! 

Keep up your courage and hope. 

See that you attend to nothing else, 
except the most suitable recov- 
ery of your health. 

Beware, I beseech you, of suppos- 
ing that 1 have thrown aside the 
cares of public life. 

Do not forget that you are Cicero. 

Do not desire that which is impos- 
sible. 

Say or do nothing but what you 
are fit for. 

If you are determined to do it, do 
so; but do not afterwards cast 
the blame on me. 

Do not ask me ; let them take away 
what they have brought here 
with them. 

Do not perform what you are in 
doubt about. 



II. The imperative future is used in indirect commands or 
prohibitions, especially in contracts, laws, and wills, but also as 
the form of a request, demand, advice, or moral precept. E. g. 

Amicitia his legibus esto : — Ex- There shall be peace on these con- 
ce'dito urbibus, agris, vi'eis, ca- ditions : let him evacuate the 



608 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 92. 



stellis cis Taurum usque ad 
Tanairn aninem. 

Regio imperio diio siinto, iique 
Cdnsules appelldntor, militiae 
siimmura jus liabe'nto, nemini 
parento ; l'llis salus pdpuli su- 
prema lex tsto. 



tmpius ne aude'to placare ddnis 
iram deorum. 

Hdmlnem mdrtuum in lirbe ne 

sepelito, neve unto. 
Non satis est pulchra esse po- 

emata; diilcia suhto, et quo- 

ciinque vdlunt, animum audi- 

toris agunlo. 
Coelestia semper spectdto, ilia 

humana conlannXto. 

Quum valetudini tuae eonsulue- 
ris, turn consultto uavigatidni. 

Ubi nos laverimus, si voles, la- 

vdtOt 
Pythio Apdllini .... ddnum 

miittto'e, lasciviam a vdbis pro- 

hibetote. 
Si quo hie gradietur, pariter 

progrediminor. 
Jacta alea c-sto (= Jacta sit alea) ! 



To obey, to render obedience. 

To obey any one. 

To obey any one's commands. 

To obey any one's precepts. 

To comfort, console any one. 

To offend any one. 

To borrow (anything of any 
one). 



cities, fields, villages, and forts 
on this side of the Taurus as far 
as the river Don. 

There shall be two persons of royal 
authority, and they shall be called 
Consuls ; they shall have the 
chief command in war, shall be 
obedient to no one ; the welfare 
of the peoj>le shall be their high- 
est law. 

No impious man shall dare to aj>- 
pease the anger of the gods with 
presents. 

Thou shalt bury or burn a dead 
man in the city. 

It is not enough that poems be 
beautiful; they must be sweet, 
and must carry the minds of the 
hearer wherever they list. 

You should always observe celes- 
tial things, and despise the things 
of earth. 

When you shall have provided for 
your health, then provide for 
your voyage. 

You shall wash, if you choose, 
where we have washed. 

Send a gift to Pythian Apollo, 
guard against insolence. 

If this man advances anywhere, 

proceed ye at the same time. 
Let the die be cast ! 

( Parco, ere, id. 

< Obedio, Ire, u, Hum. 

( Oblemperdre (alicui). 

Alieui parere, obtemperare. 

Alicui parere atque imperata fa- 
cere. 

Alicui dicto audientem esse. 

Alicujus praeceptis parere or obe- 
dlre. 
( Consolari aliquem. 
( Solatium alieui praebere or afferre. 
j Aliquem injuria aflicere. 
( Aliquem olfendere, laedere. 

Mutuari, mutuum sumere (ali- 

QUID Ali ALIQUO). 



LESSON 92.] PHRASES AND EXERCISES. 



GOO 



To lend (anything to any one) . 

To lend money to any one (on 

interest). 
To borrow money (of any one). 

The patience. 
The impatience. 
To have patience. 
Have patience ! 
Be patient (wait) ! 
Be attentive ! (pi) 
Go thither ! 
Give it to me ! 
Lend me the book ! 
Lend me some money ! 
Be (ye) good. 
Know (ye) it. 

Obey your instructors and never 
give them any trouble. 

Pay what you owe, comfort the 
afflicted, and do good to those 
that have offended you. 

Love God, and thy neighbor as 

thyself.- 
Let us always love and practise 

virtue ; and we shall be happy 

both in this life and in the 

next. 
Let us see which of us (two) can 

shoot the best. 

Sadness. 
The creditor. 
The watch. 
The snuffbox. 

To add. 



To build, construct. 

To embark, to go on board ship. 

I embark for Europe. 

To set sail. 

2M 



Mutiium dare, comrnodare (alicui 

aliquid). 
Pecuniam alicui foenori dure. 

Pecuniam mutuam sumere, pecuni- 
am petere (ab aliquo). 

Patientia, ae,f.; aequus animus. 

Impatientia morae or spei. 

Patientia uti ; aequo amino esse. 

Aequo sis ammo ! 

Exspecta ! Mane ! 

Attendite ! Adestote dnimis ! 

I l'llo ! Ite illdrsum ! 

Da mihi hoc ! 

Cdmmoda mihi librum ! 

Da* mihi miituam pecuniam ! 

Este bdni. 

Scitote hoc. 

Praeceptdribus vestris parctote, ne- 
que lis unquam molestiam exhi- 
bctote. 

Debita solves, eos, qui aegri ani- 
mi sint, consolaberis, ii'sque, qui 
te injiiriis affecerint, benigne lii- 
cies. 

Dcum ama, proximiimquc tiium 
tamquam temetipsnm. 

Virtiitem semper colamus et cxer- 
citemus; haec quum fiunt, beati 
erimus ct in hue et ilia in vera 
vita. 

Videamus, liter nostrum scientius 
mi l tat sagittas. 

Tristitia, moestitia, ao,f. 
Creditor, oris, m. 
Horologium portabile. 
Pyxis, Idis,/ 
Addo, ere, didi, ditum. 
Adjicio, ere, jeci, jeetum. 

(aliquid rei, ad rem.) 

Aedifico, are, avi, atum. 
Exstruo, ere, xi, ctum. 
Conscendere navem (or simply 

conscendere). 
Conscendo, ut in Europam trans- 

mittam. 
In Europam conscendo. 
Velum in altum dare. 
Solvere (i, solutum), sc. navem. 



610 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 92. 



To set sail for any place. 

He is sailing for America. 

To sail with full sails. 

He embarked on the sixteenth 

of last month. 
He set sail on the third instant. 
I am out of danger. 
Flee with thy utmost speed ! 
We must do our utmost to avoid 

that. 

To execute a commission. 



To give one a commission. 

I have executed your commis- 
sion. 
To do (or fulfil) one's duty. 

To neglect one's duty. 
To set one a task. 

To do (or perform) one's task. 

It is my duty. 

I deemed it my duty. 

This man always fulfils his duty. 

He never swerves from his duty. 

Have you done your task ? 
Kot vet. 



Vela (navem, cursum) dirigere ali- 

quo. 
Xavigare ad locum. 
Cursum in Americam dirigit. 
Plenissimis velis navigare or vehi. 
jSavem conscendit sexto deciino 

mensis prdximi. 
Tela dedit tertio hiijus mensis. 
In pdrtu navigo. 
Remigio veloque fuge ! 
Res remis veh'sque fugienda est. 

Mandatum exsequi or perseqid (se- 

cutus sum). 
Alandare alicui aliquid. 
Alicui negotium dare. 
Mandatuni tiium fideliter executus 

sum. 
Officium facere. Officio fungi. 
Officio suo non deesse. 
( Officio suo deesse. 
■} Officium praetermittere or negli- 
( gere. 
Pensum alicui praescribere or im- 
perare. 
( Opus suum facere (conficere). 
■< Pensum imperatum absolvere or 
( peragere. 

( 3.1eum oificium (or miinus) est 
( Meum est. 
Meum esse putavi. 
Hie vir officium siium semper ex- 
sequi tur. 
Ab officio minquam discedit (rece- 

dit). 
Absolvistine pensum imperatum ? 
Xoudum absdlvi. 



m 7 7 7 ( Fldo. ere, fisus sum 

To rely or depend upon some- ) p L jr / 

Juno. 1 -,~ n J l 5 ?e .' 



tli 



ng. 



Relying or depending upon any- 
thing. 

I rely upon you. 

I rely upon your humanity. 

You may rely upon him. 
He relies upon it. 



x ALICUI, REI Or RE). 

( Nitor, i, nixus sum (re). 
Fretus or nixus aliqua re. 

Confido tibi. 

In fide tiia requiesco. 

In humanitate tiia causam meam 
repdno. 
| Confidere ei pdssis. 
| In ejus fide requiescere tibi licet. 

Coniidit hoc. 



LESSON 92.] 



PHRASES AND EXERCISES. 



611 



You may depend upon it. 

To suffice, to be sufficient. 



Ne dubita. Factum piita. 
Satis esse. Suffice re, feci, fectum. 
(ad rem, quod . . . .) 
To be contented with something. Contentum esse aliqua re ; nihil 

ultra desiderare. 
Hoc mihi satis est (siiffieit). 
C Mihi abiinde est. 
\ Mihi abiinde siifficit. 
Sufficietne l'lli pecunia haec ? 



It is sufficient for me. 

It is abundantly sufficient for 

me. 
Will this money be sufficient for 

that man ? 
It will. 
Has this sum been sufficient for 

him ? 
It was not. 

He was contented with it. 

He would be contented, if you 

only add a few imperials. 
Little wealth suffices for the 

wise. 

That is to say (i. <?.). 

And so on, and so forth (#"(?.). 

Say on, go on. 
Otherwise, differently. 

In another manner. 

Else, otherwise. 

If not. 

What else ? 

Have you anything else to say ? 

If I knew that, I should behave 

differently. 
If I had known that, I should 

have behaved differently. 
I cannot do it otherwise. 
Mend, else you will be punished. 
If you go, very well ; if not, I shall 

command you. 

To mend, reform. 
A man polite towards every one. 

A father who loves his children 
most affectionately. 

You have to learn the twentieth 
lesson, and to translate the 
exercises belonging: to it. 



Sufficiet. Satis erit. 

Num haec suuima ei suffecit ? 

Non suffecit. 
( Fiiit e'a contentus. 
| Nihil ultra desiderabat. 
Contentus esset, si paucos tantum 

adderes imperiales. 
Parvo (paucis) sapiens contentus 

est. 
Hoc est ; id est ; scilicet, nempe. 
Et cetera, cetera ; et sic de ceteris. 

Age ! Perge ! 

Aliter, secus (followed by ac, atque, 

quam). 
Alio modo, aliter. 
Aliter, aut ; alioqui. 
Sin aliter, sin minus. 
Quid aliud ? Quid praeterea ? 
Num quid praeterea ti'bi dicendum 

est? 
fd si scirem, me alia ratione (alio 

mddo) gererem. 
Id si cdgnitum habuissem, me aliter 

gessissem. 
Alia ratione facere hoc non possum. 
Resipisce, sin minus, punieris. 
Si abis, bene est; sin minus, ti'bi 

mandabo. 
( Resipisco, ere, pui (plvi). 
\ In meliorem frugem redlre. 

Homo erga omnes humanus (offici- 

osus). 
Pater filiorum suorum amantissi- 

mus. 
Ediscendum est ti'bi pensum vice- 

simum, et vertenda sunt Latme 

ad id pertinentia dictata. 



612 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LKSSON 92. 

I have received with the great- Litteras, quas sexto hiijus me'nsis 

est pleasure the letter which ad me dedi'sti, cum maxima vo- 

you addressed to me, dated luptate accepi. 

the 6th instant. 

I think he must have been sick, Credo eum aegrotum fuisse, alio- 

otherwise he would not look quin speciem tarn pallidam non 

so pale. praeberet. 

To translate. Vertere, convertere, reddere.* 

Exercise 167. 

Have you executed my commission ? — I have executed it. — Has 
your brother executed the commission which I gave him ? — He has 
executed it. — Would you execute a commission for me ? — I am 
under so many obligations to you, that I will always execute your 
commissions when it shall please you to give me any. — Ask the horse- 
dealer {mango, onis) whether he can let me have the horse at the 
price which I have offered him. — I am sure that he would be satis- 
fied, if you would add a few florins more. — I will not add anything. 
If he can let me have it at that price, let him do so; if not, let him 
keep it. — Good morning, my children ! Have you done your task ? 
— You well know that we always do it ; for we must be ill not to do 
it. — What do you give us to do to-day V — I give you the ninety- 
third lesson to study, and the exercises belonging to it to do, — that 
is to say, the 168th and 169th. Endeavor to commit no errors. — Is 
this bread sufficient for you ? — It would be sufficient for me, if I was 
not very hungry. — When did your brother embark for America ? — 
He sailed on the thirtieth of last month. — Do you promise me to 
speak to your brother ? — I do promise you, you may depend upon it. 
— I rely upon you. — Will you work harder for next lesson than you 
have done for this? — I will work harder. — May I (licctne milii) 
rely upon it V — You may. — Have patience, my dear friend, and be 
not sad ; for sadness alters nothing (nihil emendaf). — Be not afraid 
of your creditors ; be sure that they will do you no harm. — You must 
have patience: I will pay all that you have advanced me {mutuuni 
dedisti). — Do not believe that I have forgotten it, for I think of it 
every day (in animo verso quotidie). — Do not believe that I have 
had your gold watch, or that Miss Wilhelmine has had your silver 
snuffbox, for I saw both in the hands of your sister when you were 
at the concert. — What a beautiful inkstand you have there ! pray, 
lend it to me. — What do you wish to do with it V — I wish to show it 
to my sister. — Take it, but take care of it, and do not break it. — 
Do not fear. — What do you want of my brother ? — I want to bor- 
row some money of him. — Borrow some of somebody else. — If he 
will not lend me any, I will borrow some of somebody else. — You 
will do well. — Do not wish (for) what you cannot have, but be con- 
tented with what Providence (prouidentia divlna) has given you, and 

* Thus, in Latinum convertere, Latine reddere, ex -Gi'aeco in Lat'aium sermo- 
nem convertere, &c. 



LESSON 93.] ADVERBS. 613 

consider (et repula) that there are many men who have not what you 
have. — Life being short, let us endeavor to make it as agreeable as 
possible. — Have you done your exercises ? — I could not do them, 
because my brother was not at home. — You must not get your exer- 
cises done by your brother, but you must do them yourself. 



Lesson XCXXL — pensum nonagesimum 

TERTIUM. 
ADVERBS. 

A. Adverbs are indeclinable particles, which serve 
to qualify verbs, nouns, adjectives, participles, and 
other adverbs. E. g. 

Bene, recle, egregie dixisii. You have spoken well, correctly, 

nobly. 

Natura ratioque cavet, ne quid Nature and reason enjoin that man 

homo indecore effeminateque should do nothing that is unbe- 

fdciat. coming or effeminate. 

C. Flaminius, consul iterum. C. Flaminius, a second time consul. 

Nunis mi'dla. Vdlde mdgnus. Too many things. Very great. 

]\fdxime idoneus. Most competent. 

In odium adducentur adversarii, Our adversaries will incur odium, 

si quod eorum superbe, crude- if anything haughty, cruel, or 

liter, malitidse factum profere- malicious shall be alleged of 

tur. them. 

Nimis fcrdciter lcgatos ndstros They are too ferocious in their 

increpant. clamors against our ambassadors. 

B. Adverbs are divided into various classes, ac- 
cording to their signification. The principal relations 
expressed by them are those of space, time, quantity, 
quality, measure, number, degree, manner, &c. 

I. Adverbs expressing determinations of space may be di- 
vided into those denoting, — 

1. Place. E.g. Inc, here ; ibi, istic, illlc, there; ubl, where (for 
a complete list of these see IV.) ; — intus, within ; subtus, below ; 
alibi, elsewhere ; — in/ro, in, into the house ; retro, backwards ; 
porro, farther; 2 )ro ^ nus '> forward; sursum, upwards ; recta, right on; 
ultro citrbque, up and down ; — desuper, down, from above ; indXdcm, 
from the same place ; atrimque, from both sides ; — prope, near ; longe, 
procul, far ; passim, here and there ; praesto, at hand ; — usplam, 
usquam, somewhere ; nusquam, nowhere. 
52 



CI 4 LATIN GRAMMAS. [LESSON 93. 

2. Quantity, Dimension, or Measure. E. g. multum, much ; 
paulum, little ; parum, but little, too little ; minis, nimium, too much ; 
satis, enough ; — longe, long ; late, wide ; alte, high ; c?-asse, thick ; arte, 
tight ; — modlce, moderately ; largiter, abundantly ; breviter, shortly. 

3. Order or Rank. E. g. prlmo, secundo, tertio, quarto, &c, in 
the first, second, third, fourth, &c. place;* postrtmo, in the last place; 
deinceps, one after another. 

II. Adverbs expressing determinations of time may be di- 
vided into those denoting, — 

1. Time proper. E. g. dlu, long ; paidisper, parumper, for a lit- 
tle while; usque, incessantly; — jam, now; nuper, lately; prldem, long 
ago ; heri, yesterday ; eras, to-morrow ; olim, once ; quondam, at some 
time, once ; nondum, not yet ; alias, at another tune ; ante, antea, 
before ; post, postea, afterwards ; interdum, sometimes; interim, interea, 
meanwhile; dudum, long since; unauam, ever ; nunqaam, never, &c. 
To these add the correlatives of IV. 

2. Multitude or Number. E.g. saepe, often ; quotidie, daily; 
idenfidem, repeatedly ; deinde, after that ; subinde, directly after that ; 
denique, finally, briefly; — semel, once; bis, twice; ter, quater, quin- 
ques, sexies, &c, three, four, five, six, &c. tunes. (On these numeral 
adverbs see Lesson XXI. E.) 

3. Order or Division. E. g. primum, iterum, tertXum, quartum, 
postrcmum, for the first, second, third, fourth, last time ;* — dupliclter, 
doubly ; bifariam, in two parts, on two sides ; trifariam, threefold, on 
three sides ; quadrifariam, fourfold, on four sides ; multifariam, pluri- 
fariam, omnifariam, on many, on several, on all sides; — bipartite, 
tripartlto, quadripartito, in two, three, four parts, twofold, &c, &c. 

III. Adverbs of quality may be subdivided into those denot- 
ing, — 

1. Quality proper. E.g. bene, well; male, badly; perperam, 
incorrectly; frustra, in vain; gratis, for nothing; sedalo, busily; subi- 
to, suddenly ; tuto, safely ; cerio, certainly ; raro, seldom ; crebro, fre- 
quently; vulgo, generally; plerumque, for the most part, &c. 

2. Manner. E. g. facile, easily; docte, learnedly ; eleganter, ele- 
gantly ; gregatim, in flocks \felicXter, happily ; prudenter, prudently, &c. 

3. Limitation or Degree. E.g. prope, propemodum, nearly; 
paene, almost ; fere, ferme, almost, about ; praesertbn, particularly ; 
precipue, especially ; saltern, at least ; dumtaxat, only ; vix, scarcely ; 
quidem, indeed, at least ; ne — quidem, not even ; prorsus, entirely ; 
omnlno, altogether, wholly. 

4. Comparison or Similitude. E. g. sicut, as, just as ; perinde, 
just as if; aliter, sec us, otherwise ; aeque, equally; — divinXtus, from 
God, divinely ; humanXtus, after the manner of men (and others in 
Xtus) ; — simul, una, together. 

5. Assent, Affirmation, or Negation. E. g. ita, etiam, yes ; 

* And so on from all the ordinals. 



LESSON 93.] 



ADVERBS. 



615 



non, no ; hand, not at all ; nae, surely ; sane, profecto (— pro facto) , 
really, indeed; utique, undoubtedly; vero, truly, really ; nimirum, sci- 
licet, videlicet, nempe, of course, certainly, forsooth, namely ; quippe, 
indeed, to wit; alidquln, otherwise, if not; imo (immo), nay, rather; 
nequaquam, haudquaquam, by no means ; neutiquam, minime, not at all. 

6. Interrogation. E. g. num, whether ? an, perhaps ? -ne, 
then ? cur, why ? quln, quidni, why not ? 

7. Possibility, Reality, Necessity. E. g. forte, by chance, 
perchance ; forsan, fortan, forsitan, forlassis, fortasse, perhaps ; utuiam, 
would that ! certo, certainly ; necesse, necessarily. 

IV. A number of adverbs are correlative, i. e. they have a 
certain mutual relation and correspondence of form and signifi- 
cation. 

Correlatives correspond with each other as demonstratives, relatives, 
interrogatives, indefinites, and generals, and denote either a place, time, 
quality, or degree. The following is a list of the most important of 
them : — 



ic,| 



Demonst. 
hie, ibi, istic 

illic 
hue, eo, istuc, 

illuc 
hac, ea, istac, 

iliac 
hinc, inde, 

istinc, illinc 
turn, tunc, 

dum, etiam- 

nunc, nunc 
toties 



Relat. 

ubi 



quo 
qua 
unde 

quum 
quoties 



Lnterr. 

ubi? 

quo? 



tarn (dam, nam) quam 
ita, sic ut, uti 



qua? 



unde ? 

quando ? 

quoties ? 

quam ? 
ut? 



Tndef. 
sicubi, necubi, ali- 

cubi 
siquo, nequo, ali- 

quo 
siqua, nequa, ali- ) 

qua f 

sicunde, necunde, ) 

alicunde | 

siquando, nequan- 
do, aliquando 

aliquoties 
aliquam 



General. 
ubicunque, 
ubiubi 

quocunque, 

quoquo 
quacunque, 

quaqua. 
undecunque, 

undeunde 
quandoque, 

quandocun- 

que 
quotiescun- 

que 

qnamquam 
utcunque, 

utut. 



Remarks. 

1. The relation denoted by adverbs may frequently be expressed 
by cases with or without prepositions. E. g. cum euro, = diligenter, 
carefully, with care ; cum fide = f del iter, faithfully ; cam voluptdte = 
lihenter, with pleasure ; eo tempore = turn, at that time, then ; hoc loco 
= Mc, in this place, here, &c. 

2. Adverbs of quality ending in e or ter (vide C. 1), and many of 
those in o (C 6), are susceptible of comparison like adjectives. E. g. 
docte, doctius, doctissime ; fortiter, fortius, fortissime ; into, tutius, tutis- 
sime. (See Lesson XLII.) Among comparatives may be included a 
few diminutives ; as, longe — longule, somewhat far off' ; sacpe — saepi- 
cule, saepiuscule, somewhat often, oftener; melius — meliusculc, a little 
better; primum — primule, first, firstly. 



GIG LATIN GRAMMAR. [lKSSON 93. 



DERIVATION OF ADVERBS. 

C. Adverbs are either primitive or derivative, simple 
or compound. 

Primitive adverbs are irregular in form, and have conse- 
quently no definite terminations. E. g. jam, nunc, turn, bis, 
semcl, vix, sic, non, &c. 

Derivative adverbs, on the other hand, assume regular termi- 
nations, such as e, ter, um, e, itus, tirn, sim, &c. 

Derivatives are formed either from nouns, adjectives, pro- 
nouns, or participles. They are as follows : — 

1. Adverbs in e denote a quality, and are formed from adjectives 
and participles of the first and second declensions. Those in ten de- 
note manner, and are formed from adjectives and participles of the 
third declension. E. g. alte, high ; late, wide ; longe, long, far ; Mere, 
freely ; docte, learnedly ; libenter, willingly ; eleganter, elegantly ; jide- 
Uter, faithfully; prudenter, prudently, &c. Hence redundant adjec- 
tives give rise to adverbs of both these terminations. E. g. hilare and 
liilariter, from liilarus and Inldris ; — luculente, opulente, turbulente, and 
luculenter, opidenter, iurbulenter, from luculentus and luculens, &c. So 
also humane and humaniter, Jirme and Jirmiter,* &c. 

Irregular are bene, male (with short e), and omnl.no, from bonus, 
malus, and omnis. 

2. Adverbs in um and e are derived from neuter adjectives of the 
second and third declensions, without any change of form. E. g. mul- 
ttim, paulum, parvum (from parvus), primum, secundum, &c. ; — im- 
jnme, sublime, facile, difficile (instead of the more common facill'cr, 
diffiicillter), &c. So those in a from neuters plural; as, crebrd, fre- 
quently ; acerba, fiercely. 

3. Adverbs in itus convey the notion of origin, source, or manner, 
and are derived from nouns and adjectives. E. g. fundVus, radicitus, 
slirpltus, from the foundation, by the root, root and branch ; dirindus, 
from God, divinely ; humandus, after the manner of men, human ; 
antiquXtus, of old, anciently ; pemtus, from or in the inmost part, 
inwardly.f 

4. Adverbs in tim and sim denote the manner of a condition or 
state distributivehj, and are derived from supines, adjectives, and 
nouns. E. g. conjunctim, inclsim, ordindtim, separdtim, strictim, con- 
jointly, in short clauses, in regular order, separately, closely (briefly) ; 
— gregddm, in flocks ; acervdlim, in heaps ; furlim, stealthily ; virilim, 

* Only a few adjectives in us, a, um have thus a double adverb, like tbose 
which are redundant. 

f So, after the analogy of these, cominus, close at hand; eminus, from a dis- 
tance; intus, within; subtus, below, from below; to which add extrinsecus, in- 
trinsecus, and vwrdicua. 



LESSON 93.] DERIVATION OF ADVERBS. 617 

man by man ; singulatim, singly ; pauldtim, by degrees ; privatim, pri- 
vately. So also statim, at once; raptim, rapidly; cautim, cautiously ; 
carptim, by parts or bits ; caeslm, with the edge (opposed to punctim, 
"with the point) ; divlsim, separately; sensim, gradually, &c. 

5. An extensive class of adverbs are accusatives (singular or plu- 
ral) of nouns, pronouns, adjectives, and participles. E. g. bifariam, 
omnifariam (sc. partem), in two parts, on all sides; partim (= par- 
tem), partly, in part; examussim, exactly; affdtim, abundantly ; — foras, 
(—fores), out of doors (motion); alias, elsewhere ; — versum (or -ws), 
towards, in that direction ; rursum (or -us), again.* Pronominals are 
June, islinc, Mine, hence, thence; hue, istuc, illuc, hither, thither; 
ulrimque, on both sides ; interim, meanwhile ; quam, how, how much ; 
quin, quidni, why not '? nequidquam, in vain, to no purpose. 

6. Others again are ablatives (singular or plural) of nouns, pro- 
nouns, &c. E. g. forte (from fors), perchance, perhaps ; pridie (from 
pris — dies), postridie, perendie, on the day before, the day after, the 
day after to-morrow ; fieri, yesterday ; luci, by day ; temperi, in time ; 
rite (== ritu), properly ; frustra, in vain; dextrd (sc. manu), on the 
right hand; laevci, sinistra, on the left ; certo, with certainty; crebro, 
repeatedly ; oppido, very, exceedingly ; merito, deservedly, &c. Pro- 
nominal ablatives are hie, istic, illic, here, there ; ibi, there ; alibi, else- 
where ; ubi, where ; ublque, everywhere ; utrobique, on both sides ; 
qui, how ? f 

7. Adverbs derived from verbs are dumtaxat (= dum -\- taxed), 
merely, at least ; scilicet (= scire -\~ licet), it is plain, verily ; and vide- 
licet (= videre -f- IXcet), you can see, plainly. To these add mordi- 
cus, with the teeth, tooth and nail (from mordeo). 

8. Many adverbs of the Latin language are compounds. 
These are formed, — 

a) By the union of two adverbs, or of an adverb and another part 
of speech. E. g. sicut, velut, tamquam, as if; quousque, how far? 
jamdudum, long ago ; — alicubi, elsewhere ; nequaquam, by no means ; 
— undel Ibet, from any place you please ; ublvis, wherever you please ; 
adltuc, thus far; deinde, thence, then ; necubi, lest anywhere. 

b) By the union of other parts of speech. E. g. liodie, to-day ; 
postridie, the day after; quomodo, how; denuo (== de novo), again; 
scilicet, forsooth ; poslea, afterwards ; alioqui, otherwise, &c. 

Dulcis, e ; saCwis, e. Adv. dulclter, 

suavlter. 
Lenis, mitis, mollis, e ; placidus, a, 
Mild, soft, gentle, placid. -\ um. 

Adv. leniter, molliter ; placide. 

* To these may be added jnidlum, tantum, solum, primUni, secundum, and all 
those enumerated in Case 2. 

f Similar to these are the old datives of motion, eo, thither; eodem, to the 
same place; hoc, isto, istoc, Mo, hither, thither; quo, whither; al'upio, some- 
where; alio, in another direction. '* 

52* 



Sweet. | 



618 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[lesson 93. 



Agreeable, grateful. 

Sweet wine, honey. 

A sweet song ; a sweet voice ; 

sweet flowers. 
A mild air, breeze. 
A gentle zephyr. 
A soft (placid) sleep. 

Sow, acid. 

Nothing can make life more a- 
greeable than the society of and 
intercourse with our friends. 



To cry, scream, shriek. 

To raise a great clamor. 
To cry out for help. 

To help, aid (any one in any- 
thing). 

To help, succor (any one in dis- 
tress) . 

To assist one in doin<r anything. 

I will help you to do it. 
lie assists me in writing. 
Shall I help you to work ? 

To inquire after some one. 

To reach, hand (anything to any 
one). 



To offer (proffer). 
Complaisant, pleasing. 

To be so good, as, . . . 

Be so good as to hand me that 

plate. 
Will you be so good as to come 

early in the morning ? 



Gratus, jucundus, a, um; suavis. 

Adv. jucunde, suavlter. 

Ylnum, mel dulcc. 

Suavis cantus ; suavis vox ; suavae 

flores. 
Aer mollis; ventus lenis; aura, a.e,f. 
Zephyrus (i, ???.) mollis. 
Somnus placidus (suavis) 
Ac id us ; acerbus, a, um. 
Acididus (= sourish). 
Yitae ndstrae suavitati melius con- 

sulere nihil pdssit, quam usus 

consuetudocme cum amicis no- 

stris. 
Clamdre : conclamare (of several). 
Clamorem edere or lollcre. 
Yociferdri. 

Altum clamorem tollere. 
Maxima voce clamare (clamitare). 
Yoeare aliquem in auxilium. 
Juvo, are, jiivi, jutum. 
Adju rare, opil uldri. 

(ALIQUEM IX ALIQUA KE.) 

Succurrere (curri, cursum). 
Subvenire, praesidio venire (ali- 

cui). 
Operam suam alicui commodare or 

praebere (ad rem, ix re fa- 

ciexda). 
Adjuvabo te facere hoc (hoc in 

faciendo). 
6peram siiam mihi praebet in scri- 

bendo. 
Adjuvabone te in laborando (labo- 

rare) ? 
Quaerere percontdri, seise ittiri de 

aliquo. 
Porrigere, rexi, rectum. 
Praebere, ui, ltmn. 

(alicui aliquid.) 
Offero, erre, obtuli, oblatum. 
Deferre (alicui aliquid). 
Benignus, officiosus, liberaiis, hu- 

manus. 
Esse tarn benignum, ut . . . . 
Sis tana benignus, ut mihi scutulam 

illam pdrrigas. 
Vis (visne) esse tarn benignus, ut 

bene mane venias ? 



LESSON 93.] PHRASES AND EXERCISES. 



619 



Do me the favor to write, as soon 

as you can. 
Please return as soon as you can. 
Please band me the book. 
Be pleased to spare me. 
If you please. 

As you please. j 

I ask, beseech you (= please) . 



To knock at the door. 

Somebody is knocking at the 
door. 

To come to pass, to occur, hap- 
pen. 

To happen, to befall (any one). 

It came to pass, happened by 
chance, that, &c. 

It commonly happens, that, &c. -j 

Did anything happen ? 

Nothing (has happened). 
A great misfortune has happened. 
A misfortune has happened to 
him. 

I had a misfortune. ] 



One misfortune happened after 
another. 

If anything serious should hap- 
pen to me (to you, to him), 
what will you do ? 

If my life should be spared. 

We have now more leisure than 
we have had for a great while. 

Is any one knocking at the door? 

No one is knocking. 

To pour. 

To pour into. 

To pour away *, to shed. 



To fill one's cup. 



Da mini hoc, ut quam primum po- 

tes scribas. 
Quam primum pdtes redeas quaeso. 
Quaeso mihi des libruin. 
Quaeso, parcas mihi. 
Si tibi placet; sis (= si vis). 
Prout tibi libet. 
Ex tiia voluntate. 
A ie quaeso, a te quaeso et peto, 

peto quaesoque (ut, or subj. 

without ut). 
Pulsare januam (fores, ostium) 
Pulsantur fores. 

Evenio, ire, veni, ventum. 

Accido, ere, idi, . 

Contingo, ere, tigi, tactum. 

(alicui aliquid; ut, ne.) 
Forte evenit, ut . . . . 

Plenimque evenit, ut . . . . 
Usu venire sdlet, ut . . . . 
Acciditne aliquid ? Nuinquid ac- 

cidit ? 
Nihil. 

Accidit (evenit) magna calamitas. 
Accidit ei malum. 

Accidit mihi malum. 
Accepi calamitatem. 
Accidebat aliud ex alio malo. 

Si mihi (tibi, ei) aliquid humanitus 
accidat, quid facies ? 

Si mihi vita contigerit. 

Tan turn habemus dtii, quantum 

jam diu nobis non contigit. 
Pulsatne allquis ostium ? 
Nemo piilsat. 
Fundo, ere,fudi, fusum (rem ex 

RE, IN REM). 

Infundere (aliquid rei). 
Effundere, profundere (sc. aquam, 

sanguinem). 
Poculum alicui infundere. 
Poculum alicui temperare, vino im- 

plere. 



G20 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 93. 



To shed tears ; to weep. 

With tears in one's eyes. 
I cannot refrain from tears. 
What are you pouring into the 

cup ? 
Wine. 
He was pouring grain into the 

sack. 
Will you fill my glass ? 

Yes, I shall (will) fill it with 

pure wine. 
I pour away the wine ; for it is 

good for nothing. 
Who is crying ? 
The mother has been crying all 

day long. 

Full (of anything). 

Full, entire, whole. 

A full glass of wine. 

A book full of errors. 

To taste, to have a certain taste 
or relish. 

To have a pleasant taste. 

To have a bitter taste. 

Not to taste well. 

To like, relish anything. 

To dislike (the taste of) any- 
thing. 
How does this wine taste ? 7 
How do you like this wine ? ) 

I like it very well. 

It tastes bitter. 

I never tasted any better. 

He dislikes cheese. 

I have no relish for food or drink. 

He knows what is good. 

The lady, mistress. 

The means. 

To have the means, to be able, 
to afford. 



< Lacrimas eflundere. 
^ Lacrimare, flere. 

Lacrimans ; ociilis lacrimantibus. 

Lacrimas tenere non possum. 

Quid fundis in pdculum V 

Yinum. 
1 Frumentum sacco infundebat. 

Yisne mini poculum temperare 

(infundere) V 
Sane, id me'ro implebo. 

Yinum eifundo. Nam nihili est. 

Qui's lacrimat ? 

Mater tdtum diem lacrimas effudit. 

( Plenus (alicujus rei or re). 
\ Repletus (aliqua re). 

Plenus, integer, tStus. 
( Scyphus vini plenus. 
( Integer scyphus vini. 

Liber scatens vitiis. 

Scipw, ere, ivi (li). 
Aliquo sapor e esse. 

Jucunde sapere. 

Suavi esse sapore. 

Amaro esse sapore. 

Yoluptate carere. 

Libenter sumere (edere, bibere) 

aliquid ; appetere. 
Aliquid fastidire. 

Qudmodo hoc vinum sapit ? 

Jucundissime (sapit). 

Suavissimo est sapore. 

Amaro sapore est. 

Ego minquam juciindius bibi. 

Caseum fastidit. 

Cibum potiimque fastidio. 

Sapit ei palatum. 

Domina, hera, ae,/. 

Facilitates, ura,/. 

Habere facilitates. Sunt mihi fa- 
cilitates (ad aliquid terfi- 
ciexdum). 



LESSON 93.] PHRASES AND EXERCISES. 



621 



I have not the means (I cannot 

afford). 
Can you afford to buy a horse ? 

I cannot. 

I have the means to live. 

He has not the means to live. 

To laugh (at anything). 
To laugh at, deride any one. 

I am laughed at. 

They are laughing at something. 

You are laughed at. 

Do you laugh at that ? 

I do. 

"What are you laughing at ? 

I am laughing at you. 

To meet with, meet ; to find. 

To meet with any one (by 
chance) . 

To find or catch any one in any- 
thing. 

He was caught in theft. 

"When have you met him ? 

I met him in the market. 

We met them going to church. 

I do not know what to do. 

I do not know where to go. 

He does not know what to an- 
swer. 

We do not know what to buy. 



Facultates mihi desunt. 

Suntne tibi facultates ad e'quum 

companindum ? 
Non sunt. 
Habeo linde vivam. 
Non habet linde vivat. 

Rldeo, ere, rlsi, visum (aliquid, 

DE RE). 

Ridere, deridere, irridere ; rlsum 
habere aliquem. 

Rideor. Risui sum. 

Ridetur aliquid. 

Rideris. 

Ridesne hoc ? 

Rideo. 

Quid rides ? 

Te irrideo. 
( Ojfendo, ere, di, sum. 

■} Inculo, ere, di, . 

( Invenire, reperlre. 

Off'endere aliquem ; incidere in ali- 
quem. 

Deprehendere aliquem in aliqua 
re. 



In fiirto deprehensus est. 
Ubi eura offendisti ? 



To trust one. 

To confide, rely on any one. 

To unbosom one's self to any 

one. 
To distrust, mistrust any one. 
Bo you trust this man ? 
I do not trust him. 
He trusts me. 
We must not trust everybody. 

Let this be said in confidence ! 



In fd ro in eum incidi. 

Offendimus eos ad templum exintes. 

Nescio, quod faciam. 

Nescio, quo me convertam. 

Nescit (non habet), quod respon- 
deat. 

Nescimus (non habemus), quod 
emamus. 
( Fido, ere, fisus sum. 
I Confidere (alicui). 

( Fiduciam j^onere in aliquo. 
\ F re turn esse aliquo. 
( Se totum alicui committere. 
\ Omnia consilia alicui credere. 

Diffidere alicui. 

Confidisne huic hdmini ? 

Non confido. 

Mihi confidit. 

Non cuivis confidere licet. 
< Hoc tibi soli dictum puta ! 
( Hoc lapidi dixerim ! 



622 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 93. 

A word with you in confidence. Tribus verbis te vdlo. 

As to, as for, with respect to. Quod attinet ad. 
As to me, you, him, the book. Quod ad me, ad te, ad ilium, ad 

li'brum attinet. 
With respect to the book which Quod ad librura, quern pdscis, litti- 

you demand, I do not know net, non habeo quod tibi scribam. 

what to write you. 
To speak Hungarian, Bohemian, llungarice, Bohemice loqui 
The goose. Anser, eris, m. 

The devil. *Diabolus, i, m. 

Exercise 168. 

Do your scholars learn their exercises by heart ? — They will rath- 
er tear them than learn them by heart. — What does this man ask 
me for ? — He asks you for the money which you owe him. — If he 
will repair to-morrow morning to my house, I will pay him what I owe 
him. — He will rather lose his money than repair thither. — Charles 
the Fifth, who spoke fluently several European languages, said that 
we should speak Spanish with the gods, Italian with our mistress (ami- 
cida), French with our friend, German with soldiers, English with 
geese, Hungarian with horses, and Bohemian with the Devil. — Why 
does the mother of our old servant shed tears ? What has happened 
to her ? — She sheds tears because the old clergyman, her friend, who 
was so very good to her (qui ei tarn multa benejicia tribuerat), died a 
few days ago. — Of what illness did he die ? — He was struck with 
apoplexy. — Have you helped your father to write his letters ? — I 
have helped him. — Will you help me to work when we go to town ? 

— I will help you to work, if you will help me to get a livelihood. — 
Have you inquired after the merchant who sells so cheap ? — I have 
inquired after him ; but nobody could tell me what has become of 
him. — Where did he live when you were here three years ago? — 
He lived then in Charles Street, No. 55. — How do you like this wine ? 

— I like it very well ; but it is a little sour. — Have you already re- 
ceived the works of Csesar and Cicero? — I have received Caesar's 
only ; as for those of Cicero, I expect to receive them next week. — 
How does your sister like those apples ? — She likes them very well ; 
but she says that they are a little too sweet. — Will you have the 
goodness to pass that plate to me ? — With much pleasure. — Do you 
wish me to pass these fishes to you ? — I will thank you to pass them 
to me. — Shall I pass the bread to your sister ? — You will oblige me 
by passing it to her. — How does your mother like our food ? — She 
likes it very well ; but she says that she has eaten enough. — AVhat 
dost thou ask me for ? — Will you be kind enough to give me a little 
bit of that mutton ? — Will you pass me the bottle, if you please ? — 
Have you not drunk enough ? — Not yet ; for I am still thirsty. — 
Shall I pour out some wine for you? — No, I like cider better. — 
Why do you not eat ? — I do not know what to eat. — Who knocks 
at the door ? — It is a foreigner. — Why does he cry ? — He cries be- 
cause a great misfortune has happened to him. — What has happened 



LESSON 94.] PREPOSITIONS. G?3 

to you ? -- Nothing has happened to me. — Where will you go to tins 
evening ? — I don't know where to go to. — Where will your brothers 
go to i — I do not know where they will go to ; as for me, I shall o- 
to the theatre. — Why do you go to town ? — I go thither in order 1o 
purchase some books.— Will you go thither with me? — I will <r 
with you ; but I do not know what to do there. — Must I sell to that 
man on credit ? — You may sell to him, but not on credit; you must 
not trust him, for he will not pay you. — Has he already deceived any- 
body •''—-lie has already deceived several merchants who have trusted 
him. — - Must I trust those ladies ? — You may trust them ; but as for 
me, 1 shall not trust them; for I have often been deceived by the wo- 
men and that is the reason why I say, we must not trust everybody 
— Do those merchants trust you? — They do trust me, and I trust 
them.— A\hy do those people laugh at us ? — They laugh at us be- 
cause we speak badly. — What are you laughing at ? — I am lau-hino- 
at your hat. ° ° 



Lesson XOIY. — pensum nqnagesimum 

QUARTUM. 

PREPOSITIONS. 

A. Prepositions are particles, placed before certain 
cases of nouns or pronouns, in order to point out their 
relation to some other word of the sentence. 

Prepositions primarily express either motion or a certain direction 
towards or from a place or object, in answer to the questions whither * 
icnence ? or else rest or motion in a place or object, in answer to the 
question ichere ? 

These purely local determinations are, however, frequently trans- 
ferred to other ideas, and prepositions also express relations of time 
and causal relations. 

B. Some Latin prepositions govern the accusative, others 
the ablative. Several are followed by either, according to the 
sense to be conveyed. 

I. The prepositions which govern the accusative are, — 

ad, to, towards; at, near. c is, citra, on this side. 

adversus, adversum, towards, contra, against, opposite. 

against. er ^ towards, in respect to. 

ante, before. extra, without, beyond. 

apud, at, with, in, near. infra, below. 

circa, circum, around, about. intra, within. 

circiter, about, towards. inter, between, among. 



C24 LATIN GRAMMAR, [lesson 94* 

juxta, near, close by. prope, near, clone by. 

ob, for, on account of. propter, near; on account of. 

penes, icith, in the power of. seeundum, along, next to ; accord- 

per, through, by, during. ing to. 

pone, behind. supra, above, over, upon 

post, after, behind. trans, beyond, over. 

praeter, beyond, by, before, except, ultra, beyond. 

II. The prepositions which govern the ablative are, — 

a, ab, abs, from, from the part of. prae, before, for, on account of 

absque, without. pro, before, for ; in the place of: in 
coram, before, in the presence of. consideration of, according to. 

cum, with, together with, beside. sine, without. 

de,fro?n, down from, concerning, tenus, as far as, up to (after its 
e, ex, out of, from, after, since. case). 

III. The prepositions, which sometimes govern the accusa- 
tive, and sometimes the ablative, are, — 

in, in, into, toicards, upon. subter, under, beneath. 

sub, under, near, towards. super, upon, above. 

Remarks. 

1. Prepositions generally precede the cases governed by them, ex- 
cept tenus, which is placed after them.* 

2. A is put before consonants only, ab before vowels and sometimes 
also before consonants. The same rule applies to e and ex. — Abs 
is seldom used except in composition and before words beginning 
with c, t, q. E. g. abscindo, abstrdho, absque. 

3. Compound prepositions either retain the case of the second com- 
ponent, or are converted into adverbs. E. g. in ante diem, until the 
day before ; ex ante diem, from the day before ; ex adversum Athenas, 
opposite to Athens. But adverbs are circum circa, all around; de- 
super, from above ; insuper, above, besides ; praeter propter, about, 
more or less ; protinus, onward, further on. 

4. Prope is the only preposition compared, and retains its case 
after the comparative and superlative. E. g. propius urbem, nearer 
the city ; proxime Italiam, nearest to Italy. But the adverb prope is 
followed by the dative ; as, propius Tibcri, nearer to the Tiber. 

5. A number of the above prepositions are originally adverbs, and 
still used as such without a case. Such are ante, before, in front ; 
circum or circa, around ; citra, on this side ; contra, on the opposite 
side ; extra, on the outside ; intra, within ; infra, below ; juxta, close 
by ; post or pone, behind ; prope, near. E. g. Ante et post moveri, To 
be moved forward and backward. Ingredi ante, non retro, To enter 
forward, and not backward. Prope, propius accedere, To approach 
near, nearer. Ut supra, infra scripsi, As I have shown above (i. e. 
before), below. Juxta consistere, To stand near. 

* On the exceptions to this rule, see Lesson XCVII. B. vn. 



LESSON 94.] PREPOSITIONS IN COMPOSITION. 625 

6. Poets and later prose-writers employ also the adverbs clam, pa- 
lam., simul, and procul as prepositions with the ablative. E. g. Clam 
vobis, Without your knowledge. Palam populo, Before the eyes of 
the people. Simul his, Together with these. Procul urbe, Far from 
the city. Procul dubio, Without any doubt. 

PREPOSITIONS IN COMPOSITION. 

C. Prepositions are frequently compounded with 
other parts of speech, especially with verbs. 

The regular prepositions thus employed are called separable, in 
contradistinction to others which occur in composition only, and are 
hence called inseparable. In composition, the final consonant of prep- 
ositions frequently is assimilated or otherwise modified. (Cf. Lesson 
XXVII. A. Rem. 2.) 

Prepositions generally add their proper signification to that of the 
word to which they are prefixed. Not unfrequently, however, they 
impart other shades, and sometimes even a different sense, to the 
original word. 

I. The separable prepositions used in composition are, — 

1 . The following, which also occur either as adverbs or with cases : 
ad, to, towards, at, near, by; ante, before; circum, around, about, all 
around ; post, after, behind ; prae, before, very (with adjectives) ; 
praeter, past, by, beyond, besides ; super, above, over, left, remaining ; 
subter, beneath, under, privately. E. g. advenio, I arrive ; adduco, 
I fetch, adduce ; antepono, I prefer ; circumduco, I lead around ; post- 
liabeo, I esteem less ; praecedo, I go before ; praecldrus, very cele- 
brated ; praetervehor, I ride by ; praeterquam, besides ; superjacio, 
I throw over or upon ; subterjacio, I throw beneath. (Cf. Lessons 
LIX. A. and LXII. B.) 

2. The following, which also occur separately, but with cases only: 
a, ab, abs, away, from, down, un-; de, away, from, off, down, entirely ; 
e, ex, out, forth, upward, very, completely ; in, in, on, at, into, against; 
inter, between, among; ob, towards, against, before, around; per, 
through, much, very, thoroughly ; pro, before, forth, for ; sub, under, 
from below, secretly, somewhat, rather ; trans, beyond, over, across. 
E. g. abeo, I go away; abjungo, I unyoke; abscldo, I cut off; depello, 
I drive down, away ; descendo, I descend ; defungor, I discharge, get 
rid of; edormio, I sleep away or out; effero, I carry forth or out; 
exhaurio, I draw out, exhaust ; ineo, I go in (into) ; impicio, I look 
into, inspect; intercalo, I interpose, insert between; intersfo, I stand 
between or among ; obtendo, I spread before or against ; obturo, I stop 
or close up ; occumbo, I sink down, fall into ; perfero, I carry through ; 
perficio, I accomplish, carry to an end ; procedo, I go forth ; prodlco, 
I foretell ; proconsul, a proconsul; subeo, I undergo ; surrlgo (or sur- 
go), I lift or raise up ; subrfifus, somewhat red, reddish; transcendo, 
I pass over, I cross ; transversim, across, crosswise ; and many others. 

2N 53 



C2G LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 91. 

3. The following, which are compounded with adjectives only : 
cis, on this side ; extra, outside, beyond ; intra, within, on the inside ; 
ultra, beyond, on the other side. E. g. cisalplnus, on this side of the 
Alps, Cisalpine ; extraordinarius, extraordinary ; intramurdnus, within 
the walls ; ultramunddnus, ultramundane. 

II. The inseparable prepositions, employed in composition 

only, are, — 

1. Ambi (amb, an), around, about, on both sides. E. g. ambifariam, 
double ; ambigo, I drive about ; amplector, I embrace ; anqulro, I send 
after ; anfractus, a bend (in a road) . 

2. Dis (or di), asunder. E. g. discedo, I leave ; dissipo, I scatter, 
disperse ; dlmitto, I dismiss ; dirlmo, I part, separate. 

3. Re (red), re-, again, back. E. g. redeo, revertor, I return ; re- 
cludo, I unlock, unbolt ; rejicio, I reject ; remitto, I send back again. 

4. Se (for sine), aside, apart. E. g. secedo, I step aside, retire; 
seduco, I lead aside, astray ; sepdno, I lay aside or apart ; securus, se- 
cure, without care. 

5. Sus, upward. E. g. suscipio, I undertake ; suscito, I raise up, 
I rouse ; suspendo, I hang up ; sustineo, I hold up, sustain. 

6. To these may be added ve, which denotes a faulty excess or de- 
ficiency (—male). E. g. vegrandis, ill-grown, diminutive; vecors, 
heartless ; vesdnus, insane, frantic. So also the negative prefixes ne 
and in, in compounds like nefas, not right, wrong ; inhumdnus, inhu- 
man, ill-bred. 

Wlio is here ? Quis hie est ? Quis ddest ? 

It is I. Ego sum. 

Is it you ? Tun' es ? Numquid tu es ? 

It is not I. Non ego sum. 

T ., T o ( Numquid ego sum ? 

Is ; tI? JE, ? dnesum^ 

It is you. Dixisti : tu es. 

It is he, she. ts est, ea est. 

It is they. Hi (ii, illi) sunt. 

Are they your brothers ? Siintne illi fratres tiii ? 

They are. Sunt. 

Are these your books ? Niim hi libri tiii sunt ? 

They are not. Kon sunt. 

Is this my father ? fist hicce pater meus ? 

It is. Est. 

Is it he, or not ? Is est, an non dst ? 

Are you the man, pray ? Quaeso, an tu is es ? 

I am the man. Is sum enimvero. 

Are you the man who is called Esne tu is, qui medlcus appellaris ? 

doctor ? 
You are the man who has hon- Tu es is, qui me saepissime ornfi- 

ored me most frequently. sti. 



LESSON 94.] 



PHRASES AND EXERCISES. 



027 



I am the same that I was as an 
infant, as a boy, and as a young 
man. 

It will be agreeable to us at least, 
who love you. 

Is it you who laugh ? 

It is you who have done this. 

It is you, gentlemen, who have 
said that. 

It is I who speak. 

Is it they who speak ? 

I have done this, who was a 
companion. 

I am towards him what you wish 
me to be. 

Do you give me that advice ? 

We are not of the number of 
those who hold to no truth. 

Nor are you such a man as not 
to know who you are. 

I and my brother are going to 
write letters. 

You and your sister were at 
church. 

You and I have written this. 

Lycurgus, the Spartan legisla- 
tor. 

Religion, that daughter of heaven, 
is the most faithful companion 
of men. 

The duty of a father, as the 
natural tutor of his children, 
is to provide for them. 

This honor is due to my friend, 
who is a brave man. 

I gave the father, the honest old 
man, the model of his family, 
that advice. 

That happened under Constan- 
tine the Great, the first Chris- 
tian emperor. 

It concerns my friend, the Coun- 
sellor N. 

I have been well acquainted with 
him, who was the father of his 
country. 

To thee, my dearest friend, I 
give this ring. 

Of me, who am his nearest rela- 



Ego idem sum, qui et infans fiii, et 
pxier, et adolescens. 

Nobis quidem, qui te amamus, erit 

grfitum. 
Tun' (is) es, qui rides ? 
Tu es is, qui hoc fecisti. 
Vos estis li, viri ndbiles, qui haec 

dixistis. 
Ego sum is, qui ldquor. 
Niimquid li sunt, qui loquiintur ? 
Haec is feci, qui sodalis eram. 

Is in ilium sum, quern tu me esse 

vis. 
f dne estis auctdres mini ? 
Non suinus ii, quibus nihil verum 

videatur. 
Neque tu is es, qui, quia sis, ne- 

scias. 
Ego et frater meus litteras daturi 

siimus. 
Tu et sdror tiia sacris piiblicis ad- 

fuistis. 
Ego et tu haec scripsimus. 
Lycurgus, Spartanorum legum 

sanctor. 
Coeloilla nata, religio, hdminum est 

comes fidelissima. 

Officium patris est, quippe tutoris 

filiorum naturalis, saluti suorum 

consiilere. 
Hie hdnos amico meo, viro egre- 

gio, debetur (tribuendus est). 
Dedi hoc consilii ptitri, seni illi 

probissimo, familiaeque suae ex- 

emplari egregio. 
Evenerunt haec sub Constantino 

Magno, Christianorum illo im- 

peratore primo. 
Kefert (interest) familiaris mei, 

consildrii N. 
Ego illo, qui patriae siiae pater fuit, 

familiariter usus sum. 

Tibi, amico milii carissimo, hiinc 

ego anulum tribuo. 
A me, qui propinquissima ei cogna- 

tione conjiinctus siim, nihil pd- 

stiilat. 



628 



LATIX GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 94. 



O philosophy, thou guide of our 
life, that leads us to virtue, 
delivers us from vice. 
TJie duty ; part. 

This is your duty, your part. 

The companion. 

The guardian. 
The model. 

A model of a man. 

A model of a woman. 

An example of moderation and 

prudence. 
A model of every virtue. 

The family. 

The people (nation). 

Honest. 

True, faithful. 

A faithful servant. 

Faithful children. 
A true picture. 

To hole like, to appear. 



O vitae philosdphia dux, virtutis 
indagatrix, expultrixque vitio- 
rum. 

Officium, i, n. ; partes, ium, t pi. ; 
munus, eris, n. 

Tuum hoc est munus, tiiae partes. 
( Comes, itis, m. tiff. ; socius, i, m. ; 
\ socia, ae,/. 

Tutor, oris, m. 

Exemplum, i, n ; exemplar, aris, n. ; 
specimen, Inis, n. 

Yir recti exempli. 

Uxor singultiris exempli. 

Temperantiae jjrudentiaeque spe- 
cimen. 

Auctor (exemplar) omnium virtu- 
tum. 

Familia, ae,/!; domus, us,^ 

Katio, onis./!; genus, eris, n. ; po- 
pulus, i, m. 

Probus, bonus, a, urn. 

Fidelis, fideli animo. 

Servus fidelis domino. 

Filii pi'i (officii memores). 

Pictura veritati similis. 
CAliquam (alicujus) spectem habere, 
J praebere or prae se ferre. 



, Aliquot specie esse. 

(_ Alicujus (or alicui) similcm esse. 
Albo, nigro, rubro, pallldo esse co- 
lore. 
Plenum et speciosum et coloratum 
esse. 
To look respectable (in dress, <" Decoro habitu esse. 

I Forma esse honesta et liberali. 
j Quali est specie ? 
\ Quam fdrmam prae se fert ? 
Speciem hilaris, tristis, contenti 

praebet. 
Modestiam prae se fei't. 
Virginis 6s habltiimque gerit. 
Terribili es facie. 
Apparet hiinc servum esse. 
Speciem praefers medici. 
Speciem viri bdni prae se fert. 



To look white, black, red, pale. 
To look well (healthy). 



&c). 

How does he look ? 

He looks gay, sad, contented 



He looks modest. 

He looks like a girl. 

You look terribly. 

He looks like a slave. 

You look like a doctor. 

He has the appearance of an 

honest man. 
You are more stupid than you 

look. 
This beer looks like water. 



Praeter speciem stultus es. 
Cerevisia haec aquae similis 6^,1 



LESSON 94.] PHRASES AND EXERCISES. 



629 



My (his, our) equals. 

One of our number. 
He has not bis equal. 

To resemble any one. 

To resemble one in features. 
To resemble one in manners. 

Each other ; mutually. 



They love each other. 

They chided each other. 
We love each other. 

They assist each other. 

They look at each other. 
They quarrel with each other. 

You struck each other. 

Neither party could see the 

other. 
He resembles me. 
I resemble your brother. 
You resemble me. 
They resemble each other. 
We resemble each other. 
He resembles him, as one egg 

does the other. 
The brother and the sister love 

each other. 
Are you pleased with each 

other ? 
We are so. 



To drink to any one. 



To drink anything to any one. 

To drink to any one's health. 
53* 



'Homines mei (sui, nostr'i) generis or 

ordinis. 
Homines meae (suae, nostrae) fa~ 

rinae. 

Aequi et pares mei (sui, nostri). 
Unus e nobis. 
Parern habet neminem. 

Similem (consimileni) esse alicui or 
alien jus. 
( Facie alicujus similem esse. 
( Os vultumque alicujus referre. 

Mores alicujus referre. 
C Alius alii or alium. 
J Alter alteri or alterum. 
J Inter se ; inter ipsos. 
l^Invlcem ; muluo. 
( Alter alterum amat. 
( Inter se amant. 

Alius alium increpabant. 

Amamus inter nos. 
^ Alter alterum adjiivat. 
\ Alius alii subsidium ferunt. 

Inter se aspieiebant. 

Inter se (invlcem, miituo) dissen- 
tiunt. 

Alter alterum verberibus caecldi- 
stis. 

Neiitri iilteros cernebant. 

Facie mini similis est. 

Eo;o fratri tiio similis sum. 

Tu mihi similis es. 

Inter se consimiles sunt. 

Inter nos consimiles sumus. 

!N6n ovum tarn simile dvo, quam 

hie ill I est. 
Frater et sdror inter se amant. 

Estisne inter vos contend ? 

Siimus. 
( Proplnare alicui. 

■< Provocdre aliquem bibendo (or ad 
( bibendum). 

T Proplnare (or praebibere) alicui 
1 aliquid. 
( Poculum alicui tradere. 

Alicui salutem propinare. 



630 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 94. 



I drink to your health. 
He drank a cup to him. 
He challenged him repeatedly 
to drink. 

To make the acquaintance 
of any one. 

To have made any one's ac- 
quaintance ; to know one. 

To know any one very well, in- 
timately. 

To know each other. 

To have (or enjoy) the acquaint- 
ance of any one. 

I have made his acquaintance. 
I was glad to make his acquaint- 
ance. 
They know each other. 
They know each other very well. 
He knows himself thoroughly. 
To know any one by sight. 

Not to know any one. 

Do you know him ? 

I do not know him. 

I am intimately acquainted with 

him. 
He is an acquaintance of mine. 
He is an old acquaintance of 

mine. 
He is not a friend, he is but an 

acquaintance. 
She is an acquaintance of mine. 
The acquaintance (knowledge 

of each other). 
Our acquaintance is quite re- 
cent. 

Again, once more. 
Since, seeing that, as. 
Since you have not done your 

exercises well, you must do 

them again. 
As he did not come, I sent for 

him. 
As it is already night, go ye to 

your homes. 



Salutem tibi propi'no. 
Calicem siiam ei propinavit. 
Crebris eum propinatidnibus laces- 

sivit. 
Nosco, ere, novi, notum. 
Cognosco, ere, ovi, itum. 

(aliquem.) 
Aliquem nosse, cognosse, vidisse. 

Aliquem bene, probe, pulchre, opti- 
me, penltus nosse or cognosse. 

Se inter se nosse. 
f Usus mihi et consuetudo est (inter- 
j cedit) cum aliquo. 
1 Familiaritas mihi intercedit cum 
^ r aliquo. 

Ego eum cogndvi (vidi). 

Perlibenter eum vidi, eum cogndvi. 

Ndti sunt inter se. 

Notissimi sunt inter se. 

Penltus ipsum se novit. 

Aliquem de facie nosse. 
( Aliquem non nosse {or ignorare). 
\ Aliquis mihi est ignotus. 

Novistine eum ? 

Eum igndro. 

Est milii ignotus. 

Familiaritas mihi cum eo intercedit. 
\ Utor eo farniliariter. 

Notus est mihi. 

Usus mihi vetus et consuetudo cum 
eo intercedit. 

Notus tantum, non amicus, est. 

Nota est mihi. 
( Notitia ; usus, us, m. 
\ Consuetudo, inis,y. 

Notitia inter nos nuper ddmodum 
est. 

Iterum, denuo, rursus (adv.). 

Quoniam (conj. c. Ind. or Subj.). 

Qudniam pensa tua perperam ab- 
solvisti, absolvenda sunt tibi ite- 
rum. 

Qudniam non venerat, eum arces- 
sivi. 

Yds, qudniam jam ndx est, in ve- 
stra tecta discedite. 



it 



LESSON 94.] EXERCISE 169. G31 

Exercise 1G9. 

Where have you become acquainted with that lady ? — I have be- 
come acquainted with her at the house of one of my relations. — Is 
it thou, Charles, who hast soiled my book ? — It is not I, it is your 
little sister who has soiled it. — Who has broken my fine inkstand? 

— It is I who have broken it. — Is it you who have spoken of me ? — ■ 
It is we who have spoken of you, but we have said of you nothing but 
good (nihil nisi bonwri). — Why does your cousin ask me for money 
and books? — Because he is a fool; of me, who am his nearest rela- 
tion and best friend, he asks nothing. — Why did you not come to 
dinner? — I have been hindered, but you have been able to dine 
without me. — Do you think that we shall not dine, if you cannot 
come ? — How long did you wait for me ? — We waited for you till 
a quarter past seven, and as you did not come, we dined without you. 

— Have you drunk my health ? — We have drunk yours and that of 
your parents. — A certain man was very fond of wine, but he found 
in it two bad qualities (qualitates). " If I put water to it," said he, 
" I spoil it, and if I do not put any to it, it spoils me." — How does 
your uncle look ? — He looks very gay ; for he is much pleased with 
his children. — Do his friends look as gay as he ? — They, on the 
contrary, look sad, because they are discontented. — My uncle has 
no money, and is very contented, and his friends, who have a great 
deal of it, are scarcely ever so. — Do you like your sister ? — I like 
her much, and as she is very complaisant towards me, I am so towards 
her ; but how do you like yours ? — We love each other, because we 
are pleased with each other. — Does your cousin resemble you ? — 
He does resemble me. — Do your sisters resemble each other ? — 
They do not resemble each other ; for the eldest is idle and naughty, 
and the youngest assiduous and complaisant towards everybody. — 
Who knocks at the door ? — It is I ; will you open it ? — What do 
you want? — I come to ask you for the money which you owe me, 
and the books which I lent you. — If you will have the goodness to 
come to-morrow, I will return both to you. — Do you perceive yonder 
house ? — I do perceive it, what house is it ? — It is an inn (deverso- 
rium) ; if you like, we will go into it to drink a glass of wine ; for I 
am very thirsty. — You are always thirsty when you see an inn. — If 
we enter it, I shall drink your health. — Rather than go into an inn, 
I will not drink. — When will you pay what you owe me ? — When 
I have money ; it is useless to ask me for some to-day, for you know 
very well that there is nothing to be had of him who has nothing. — 
When do you think you will have money ? — I think I shall have 
some next year. — Will you do what I shall tell you ? — I will do it, 
if it is not too difficult. — Why do you laugh at me ? — I do not laugh 
at you, but at your coat. — Does it not look like yours ? — It does not 
look like it ; for mine is short and yours is too long, mine is black and 
yours is green. 



C32 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 95. 



L8SS0I1 XCV. — PENSUM NONAGESIMUM QUIN- 

TUM. 

CONJUNCTIONS. 

A. Conjunctions are particles, which serve to des- 
ignate the relation between one predicate and another, 
and to effect the connection of sentences. 

The relation of one predicate to another may be either equal or 
unequal. Hence there are two kinds of conjunctions, of which one 
connects similar sentences, or, when the repetition of the predicate is 
unnecessary, similar parts of a sentence, and the other dissimilar sen- 
tences. 

The connection of dissimilar sentences is either a possible, real, or 
necessary one. 

I. The following classes of conjunctions connect similar sen- 
tences or parts of them : — 

1. Copulatives, or those which join or unite: — et, ac, afque, 
-que (enclitic), and ; et, etiam, quoque, also ; nee, neque, and not, nor. 

2. Disjunctives, or those which separate or disjoin: — aut, vel, 
~ve (enclitic), sive, seu, or ; aut — aut, either — or; neve — neve, neu 
— neu, neither — nor. 

3. Adversatives, or those which indicate opposition: — at, ast, 
verum, vero, enimvero, autem, sed, but, however ; at qui, but yet. 

II. The conjunctions connecting dissimilar sentences are as 
follows : — 

1. Conditionals, or those which express a condition : — si, if; sin, 
but if; ni, nisi, if not, unless; modo, dummodo, provided, so that; 
dumne, dummodo ne, provided that not. 

2. Causals, or those which indicate a cause, ground, or reason : — 
nam, namque, enim, etenim, for ; quia, because ; quod, that, because ; 
quando, quandoquidem, quoniam, quum or cum, siquulem, since. 

3. Finals, or those denoting an object, end, or purpose : — ut, uti, 
that, in order that ; quo, that, that the (with comparatives) ; ne, that 
not, lest ; neve, neu, and that not, nor that ; quominus, that not. 

4. Consecutives, or those which denote a consequence : — ut, 
that, so that ; ut non, that not, so that not ; quin, that not, but what. 

5. Concessives, or those which denote a concession : — etsi, tam- 
etsi, etiamsi, even though, although; quanquam, quamvis, although, 
however ; and their corresponding adversatives, tdmen, yet, still ; attd- 
men, veruntdmen, yet, nevertheless. 

6. Illatives, or those which denote an inference or conclusion : — 
ergo, igitur, itaque, therefore ; ideo, idcirco, proinde, propterea, there- 
fore, on that account ; quare, quocirca, quapropter, wherefore, on which 
account. 



LESSON 95.] THE USE OF CONJUNCTIONS. C33 

7. Among conjunctions may also be included a number of 
particles denoting a relation of time, and others used in ques- 
tions or comparisons. Such are, — 

a) The temporal conjunctions quum, ut, ubi, when ; quum primum, 
ut prlmum, simulac, simulatque (or simply simul), as soon as ; postquain, 
after; antequam and priusquam, before ; quando, when, at what time; 
dum, usque dum, donee, and quoad, until. 

b) The interrogative conjunctions num, utrum, an, and the enclitic 
ne. To these may be added ec and en in words like ecquid, ecquando, 
and en unquam, and also numquid, when it stands for num. 

c) The comparative conjunctions ut or uti, sicut, velut, proid, praeid, 
the poetical ceu, quam, tamquam (with or without si), quasi, ut si, ac si, 
ac, and atque, all of which are rendered by the English as, just as, 
as if. 

OF THE USE OF CONJUNCTIONS. 

B. Copulative, disjunctive, and adversative conjunctions 
generally connect the same cases of nouns, pronouns, and adjec- 
tives, the same moods of verbs, and particles belonging to the 
same word. E. g. 

Mater tua et sdror a me diligitur. Your mother and sister are loved 

by me. 
Cur tibi fasces ac secures, et tan- Why do you suppose the fasces 
tarn vim imperii tantdque orna- and the axes,* and such great 
menta data censes ? power of office, with so many 

marks of honor, were given you ? 

!Ea esse dico, quae cerni tdngive I maintain the existence of those 

pdssunt. things, which can be seen or 

touched. 
Vive dm ac feliciter. Live long and happily. 

Non mddo prmceps, sed et solus He was not only the principal man 
bellum indi'xit. that declared the war, but even 

the only one. 
Peteres vel potius rogdres, stupo- You might ask or rather entreat 
rem hominis vel dicam pecudis us ; look at the stupidity of the 
videte. man, or I should rather say of 

the brute. 

Eemarks. 

1. This rule extends also to comparative conjunctions, and to all 
such as introduce clauses which are not subordinate or dependent on 
the preceding sentence, but co-ordinate or in the same construction 
with it. 

2. The words connected with these conjunctions need not always 
be in the same case or mood, provided they sustain the same relation 

* These were the emblems of office of the Eoman consuls, &c. 



634 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 95. 



to the general construction of the sentence. E. g. Mea et patris causa. 
— Tua iwn magis quam reipublicae refert. — Veniebat quotidie, etfre- 
queniius etiam venisset, nisi, &c. 

3. The conjunction is often emphatically omitted. E. g. Velim 
nolim, Willing or unwilling. Ire red-ire, To go backward and forward. 
Qui indicabantur, eos vocari, custodlri, ad sendtum addaci jussi, Those 
who were indicated I ordered to be summoned, put into custody, (and) 
brought before the senate. 

4. On the construction of the remaining conjunctions, which intro- 
duce subordinate or dependent clauses, compare Lessons LXXXVI. - 
LXXXIX. 

DOUBLE CONJUNCTIONS. 

C. Copulative and disjunctive conjunctions are frequently 
doubled, i. e. expressed in both members of the sentence, so as 
to connect them more emphatically. Such combinations are, — 



et que, 


both — and, as well — as, at once 


-que — et, 


and. 


-que que.* J 




nee — nee, ~\ 




neque — neque, 1 
neque — nee, 


neither — nor. 


nee — neque. f J 
et — nee (neque). 


both — and not. 


neque (nee) — et, > 
nee (neque) — -que. j" 
aut — aut, Y 
vel — vel. ) 


not only not — but even (also), 
either — or. 


sive — sive, ) 
seu — seu. j 


either — or, whether — or. 



Te et mdneo et hdrtor. 

Et mari et terra. 

Officia et servata praetermissa- 

que. 
MiHtiae(jwe diomique. 
Non possum reliqua nee cogitare 

nee scribere. 
Et rem agndscit, nee hdminem 

ignorat. 

Nee miror et gaudeo. 

Nee tu interfmsti, et ego id egi. 



Examples. 

I (both) admonish and exhort you. 

Both by sea and by land. 

Duties both observed and omitted. 



Both abroad and at home. 

The rest I can neither think of nor 
write. 

He not only knows the thing, but 
is besides not ignorant of the 
man. 

I not only do not wonder, but re- 
joice. 

Nor had you anything to do with 
the affair, but I did it. 



* In poetry only. 



f Rarely used. 






LESSON 95.] 



DOUBLE CONJUNCTIONS. 



035 



Aut disce aut discede. 

Vel imperatore vel milite me uti- 

mini. 
Sive casu sive consilio deorum. 



Either learn or leave (one of the 
two) . 

Use me either as your commander 
or as a soldier (as you please). 

Either by chance or by divine ap- 
pointment (I know not which) * 

D. Adverbs are sometimes doubled in the same way, and 
used to connect words or clauses like conjunctions. Such are, — 

modo — modo, \ now — now, now — then again, at one time — 
at another, 
partly — partly. 

both — and, as well — as. 

both — and ; at one time — at another. 

as — so especially ; not only — but especially. 

Examples. 



partim 
simul - 
qua — 
turn — 


— part 

— simul 
qua. 
turn. 


im 


quum • 


— turn. 





Modo hoc, modo lllud dicit. 

Modo hue, modo llluc vdlat. 
Nunc singulos provocat, nunc 
dmnes increpat. 

Simul sui purgandi causa, simul 
ut, si quid pdssent, de induciis 
impetrarent. 

Partim me amici deseruerunt, 

partim prodiderunt. 
Qua ddminus, qua advocati sibi- 

lis conscissi. 
Turn Graece turn Latine. 
Fortuna quum in reliquis rebus, 

turn praecipue in bello, pluri- 

mum potest. 



He at one moment says one thing, 
and then again another. 

He now flies hither, now thither. 

He sometimes challenges them in- 
dividually, and sometimes pro- 
vokes them as a mass. 

Both in order to excuse themselves, 
and that they might, if possible, 
obtain some concessions respect- 
ing an armistice. 

My friends have partly deserted 
and partly betrayed me. 

Both the master and the advocates 
were put down with hisses. 

Both Greek and Latin. 

The power of fortune is supreme, 
as in other things, so more espe- 
cially in war. 



E. Two conjunctions of different classes are sometimes 
placed in correlation with each other, or a conjunction with an 
adverb. E. g. 

etsi, tametsi, etiametsi, ut, quam- ^ 

quam, quamvis — tamen, atta- > although — yet, nevertheless. 

men, veruntamen, nihilominus. ) 

non modo, non solum, non tan- } . 7 , , , 

j , . , • >■ not only — out also. 

turn — sed etiam, verum etiam. j •* 

non dicam (or dico) — sed. I will not say — but only. 



* The student will notice here the distinction between the words aut, vel, 
and sive. Cf. page 388. 



G3G 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 95. 



non modo (non) — sed 

— quidem. 
non modo — sed vix. 
non minus — quain. 
non magis — quana. 



>■ not only not — hut not even. 

not only not — but scarcely, 
no less — than ; as much — as. 
no more — than; as much — as. 

Examples. 



Tametsi vicisse debeo, tcimcn 
meo jure dec e dam. 



do 



Although 
quered, 



Ui desint vires, tdmen est laudan- 
da voluntas. 

Tullus Hostilius non solum proxi- 
mo regi dissimilis, sed ferdcior 
etiam Rdmulo fiiit. 

£go non modo tibi non iraseor, 
sed ne reprehendo quidem fa- 
ctum tiium. 

Verum haec genera virtutum 
non solum* in mdribus ndstris, 
sed vix jam in libris reperiiin- 
tur. 

Quid est enim minus non dico 
oratoris, sed hdminis ? 

Alexander non ducis mdgis quam 
milltis miinia exequebatur. 



I ought to have con- 
I will nevertheless sur- 
render part of my right. 

Though the ability be wanting, yet 
the will is to be commended. 

Tullus Hostilius was not only un- 
like the preceding king, but even 
more warlike than Romulus. 

I am not only not angry with you, 
but I do not even reprehend 
what you have done. 

But virtues of this description are 
not only not found in our prac- 
tice, but scarcely now in books. 



For what is less 

not say to an orator, but 



becoming, I 



To get into a scrape. 



To bring or get one into a scrape. 

To be involved in a scrape. 

To get out of a scrape (any one, 

one's self). 
The quarrel, scrape. 
The snare. 
Always, perpetually. 

I have got out of the scrape. 

He is getting into a scrape. 

He is in a bad scrape. 

That man perpetually gets into 
bad scrapes ; but he always 
helps himself out again. 



will 

to a 

man ? 

Alexander was wont to perform 

the duties of a soldier, no less 

than those of a commander. 

( Jurgia cum aliquo incejjtdre. 

< Rixas in se con flare. 

{In anguslum venire. 

( Aliquem jurgiis (or rixis) implicare 

4 or illaqueare. 

( Ad incitas redigere. 

Rixis implicari or illigari. 

Expedire, extricare (aliquem, se) 
angustiis. 

Jurgium, i, n. ; rixa, ae,/. 

Laqueus, i, m. 

Semper, perpetuo. 
( Me expedivi. 
\ Salvus evasi. 

Rixas in se cdnflat. 

Ad incitas redactus est. 

Homo llle perpetuo fere jurgiis se 
implicat, semper tamen se nirsus 
expedit. 



* Instead of non solum non. Cf. page 584. 



LESSON 95.] PHRASES AND EXERCISES. 



637 



Between. 
There is a difference between. 
The appearance, form, aspect. 

The face, sight. 
The mien, look. 

The countenance, physiognomy. 

To have the appearance, to ap- 
pear, seem. 

To look, appear. 

To look well (healthy). 

To look sad. 
To look ugly. 

To look good. 

To look angry, contented, 

pleased. 
To look pleased with one. 
To look cross at one. 
To receive one kindly. 

A good-looking man. 
A bad-looking man. 
Bad-looking people. 

You look very well. 

He looks angry 

She appears to be angry. 

They appear to be contented. 

They look pleased. 

When I go to see that man, in- 
stead of receiving me with 
pleasure, he looks displeased. 

The man whom you see appears 
desirous of approaching us. 

To visit, to go to see some one 
to pay one a visit. 

To visit one on business. 
To frequent, visit (a place). 



To visit a sick person. 



54 



Inter (Prep, cum Ace). 

Est (intercedit) discrlmen inter. . . . 

Aspectus, visus, us, m., species, ei, 

/. ; forma, ae, f. 
Os, oris, m. 
Vultus, us, m. 
Oris habitus or lineamenta. 
Os vultusque. 
Videor, eri, visus sum. 

f Speciem aliquam habere, praebere 
J or pre se ferre. 
| Aliqua specie or forma esse. Vi- 
(^ deri. 

< Vigoris speciem prae se ferre. 
I Valetudinem vultu prodere. 

Tristi esse vultu. 

Deformem habere aspectum. 
( Videri esse bonum, benignum. 
I Speciem boni viri prae se ferre. 

Speciem irati, contenti, hilaris prae 
se ferre. 

Arridere alicui. 

Torvis oculis aliquem intueri. 

Accipere (excipere) aliquem hu- 
maniter, counter, benigne. 

Vir forma honesta (specie insigni). 

Homo specie teniii. 

Homines specie tenui (or humili). 

< Speciem bdnam praebes. 
\ Vigoris speciem prodis. 

Viiltum iratum prae se fert. 
Videtur esse irata. 
Contenti esse videntur. 
Vultu hilari atque laeto stint. 
Cum istum visito, tantum abest, ut 

benigne me excipiat, ut torvis 

oculis me intueri sdleat. 
file, quern vides, nos adire velle 

videtur. 

( Aliquem vlsere (si, sum). 
■< Invlsere, visitdre aliquem. 
(Ad aliquem Ire vlsere (ire et vlsere'). 

Aliquem adire or con venire. 

Obire, adire, frequentare, cele- 
brare. 

( Aegrotum vise re (or visitare). 
\ Ad aegrurn Ire visere. 



038 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 95. 



To frequent any one's house. 

To frequent a society. 
The society ; assembly. 

To be in society. 

We have society to-day. 



To associate with some one. 



To imagine. 

He imagines that you will not 
come. 

Does he often visit you ? 

He visits me every day. 

Did you ever associate with that 
man ? 

Yes, I have associated much 
with him. 

Did you frequent society, when 
you were in the city ? 

I did frequent it. 

He is perpetually in society 
(among men). 

It is all over with me ! I am un- 
done! 

It is all over ! 

It is too late to consult to-day 
about what was done yester- 
day. 

The spite, displeasure. 
The grief, sorrow. 



Alicujus domum frequent are or ce- 

lebrare. 
Conventum (circiilum) celebrare. 
Conventus, us, m. ; circulus, i, m. 
( Circulos frequentare. 
\ Multum inter homines esse. 
Conventus visitantium (salutanti- 
um) apud nos est hddie. 
f Aliquo multum or familiariter iiti 
-j (usus sum). 

(Est mihi cum aliquo consuetudo 
(familiarltas) . 
Opinari, putare ; in opinionem ve- 
nire. 
In opinionem venit, fore, ut non 

venias. 
Venitne saepe ad te visere ? 
Immo me quotidie visitat 
Fuitne tibi cum lllo linquam con- 
suetiido ? 
Sane ; eo multum et familiariter 

usus siim. 
Celebrabasne conventus (circulos), 

quum in lirbe esses ? 
Yero, celebrabam. 
Perpetuo fere inter homines est. 

Actum est de me ! Perii ! 

Actum est ! Actum jam de isto 

est! 
Factum fieri infectum non potest. 



To vex, spite, irritate one. 



To hurt any one's feelings. 

To wound any one's feelings. 
To hurt any one's honor. 
To detract from any one's repu- 
tation. 

To feel hurt. 



Stomcichus, i, m. ; molestia, ae, f. 
( Dolor, oris, m. ; aegritudo, mis, f. ; 
\ sollicitudo, mis, f. 

TMolestiam exhibere alicui. 

< Stomachum alicui movere. 

( Yexare, irritare aliquem. 

( Aegre facere alicui. 

-j Aliquem (or alicujus animum) of- 

( fendere (in aliqua re). 

Aliquem mordere. 

Alicujus existimationem offendere. 

De fama ahcujus detrahere. 

5 Dolere, in maerore esse. 

( Aegre or moleste ferre (aliquid). 



LESSON 95.] PHRASES AND EXERCISES. 



639 



j Hoc nn'hi aegre est. 
| Hoc me mdrdet. 

Molestiam exhibuisti illi. 

Virum istum offendisti. 



This hurts my feelings. 

You have vexed that man. 
You have hurt that man's feel- 
ings. 

Y honor e d6traCted fr ° m hIs { ExIs timationem ejus offendisti. 
Tnn W« jit • , * dignitatem ejus labefactavisti. 

words timwith Tu eum voce vulneravisti. 

I did not wish to offend you. { ^ offensum no'lui. 
TT * V "'"■'*. •11 ', i -^ ace tu ^ dixerim. 

come 68 7 ° U did n0t Adgre f6rt ' td n6n veni ' sse ' 

Yo a U n " £ ever off f K d a S ainst Nihil ex cujusquam dignitate, nihil 
any one s honor or liberty. ex libertate decerpslris. 



To swim. 

The art of swimming 

A good (fit) place for swimming. 

I know a good place for swim- 
ming. 

To experience. 
To suffer, endure. 

To feel (experience). 

To suffer, experience pain. 

I have experienced (suffered) a 
great deal. 

I have experienced a great many 
misfortunes. 

He endures and suffers every- 
thing easily. 

His sick mind can neither suffer 
nor endure these things. 

We can endure neither our 
vices nor their remedies. 

I know this rather from experi- 
ence than from instruction. 

I had the misfortune to fall. 

He had the misfortune to lose all 
his children. 



( No, m 
X NatOj 



ndre, navi, . 

, are, avi, atum. 
Ars nandi. 

Locus ad nandum idoneus (or op- 
portune) . 
Locum ad nandum iddneum co'o-ni- 
tum habeo. 

Expenor, iri, pertus or perltus sum. 



( Potior, pad, passus sum. 
-j Perpetior, i, pessus sum. 
(Perferre, tolerare (aliquid). 

Sentio, Ire, si, sum. 

Dolere, sentire clolorem. 

Miilta ego expe'rtus sum. 

Mala e'go permiilta perpe'ssus sum. 
Perfert et patitur omnia facile. 

Animus ejus aeger haec ne'que piiti, 

neque pe'rpeti po'test. 
Nee vitia nostra, nee remedia pati 

pdssumus. 
Hoc magis experiendo quam di- 

scendo cogndvi. 
Accidit mihi, ut edderem. 
Accidit ei, ut liberos siios dmnes 

amitteret. 



ns 
1 feel a pain in my head, in my ( Ddlet mihi caput, pe 
heart i Capite, pede labdro. 

m . (Non curare (aliquid). 

10 m lecL ] Necjltgo, ere, lean, ledum (aliquid, 

( eacere aliquid). 



C40 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 95. 



Nedifere, praetennittere (rem, 
opportunitatem, &c.). 

Omittere, praetermittere, praeter- 
Ire (ALIQUID). 

Promissa tua neglexisti. 

In seholam venire neglexisti (prao- 

termisisti). 
Nihil tinquam negligit, nee prae- 

termittit. 
Numqnid occaadnem siii defea- 

dendi praetermisit ? 
Tantum BDest, ut praeternn'serit, lit 

avidi»ime amplexns Bit 
Cedo, >"/v. cessi, cessum (alicot 

de be). 
Cedere, morem gcrere, obsequi 

alicui (aliqui re). 
( re loco or ex loca 
Cedere rei; Be accoinmodSre rei ; 

acquiescere (evi, etum) re, in re. 
issitati parere (cedere). 
" ( Veniam dare necessitatL 
<ea in consilium verl 
Cedendum est necessitatL 
Niim frater ejus fortdna sua acquic- 

vit? 
Ndn acquievit; nihilcmlnus vem- 

ain necessitati dare statuit 

Omisitne transcriptor aliquid ? 
Pauca tantum verba omi.-it (prae- 
teriit). 

Exercise L70. 

Is it right to laugh thus at everybody ? — If I laugh at your coat I 
do not laugh at everybodv. — Does your son resemble anyone?*- 
He resembles no one. — Why do you not drink?— I do not know 
what to drink ; for 1 like good wine, and yours looks like vinegar. — 
If you wish to have some other, 1 shall go down into the cellar (dolia- 
rium) to fetch you some. — You are too polite, sir; I shall drink no 
more to-day. — Have you known my father long?—! have known 
him lon», for I made his acquaintance when I was yet at school (quum 
scJiolam adhuc frequentdbam). — We often worked for one another, 
and we loved each other like brothers. — I believe it. for you resem- 
ble each other. — When I had not done my exercises, he did them 
for me, and when he had not done his. I did them for him.— \\ hv 
does your father send tor the physician ? — He is ill, and as the physi- 
cian does not come, he sends for him. —Is that man angry with you ? 



To miss (neglect). 
To omit. 

You have neglected your prom- 
ise. 

You have neglected to come to 
your lesson. 

He never neglects or omits any- 
thing. 

Did he neglect the opportunity 
of defending himself? 

So far from neglecting it, he has 
sei/ed it eagerly. 

To yu Id. 
To yield to any one. 

To yield, give up one's place. 
To yield to something ; to acqui- 
esce in it. 

To yield to necessity. 

To make a virtue of necessity. 

We musl ) ield to necessity. 

J)id his brother acquiesce in his 
fate? 

lie did not acquiesce ; but he 
has resolved to yield to neces- 
sity. 

Did the copyist omit anything? 

lie has omitted only a few words. 



LESSON 96.] INTERJECTIONS. Gil 

— I think he is angry with mc, because I do not go to see him ; but I 
do not like to go to his house : for when I go to him, instead of re- 
ceiving me with pleasure, he looks displeased. — You must not believe 
that he is angry with you. for he is not so bad as he looks. lie is the. 
best man in the world (homo omnium praestantissimus) ; but one must 
know him in order to appreciate him (diligere carumque habere). — 
There is a great difference between you and him : you look pleased 
with all those who come to Bee you, and he looks cross at them. — 
Why do you associate (uteris) with those people? — I associate with 
them because they are useful to me. — It" you continue to associate 
with them you will get into bad scrapes, for they have many ene- 
mies. — How docs your cousin conduct himself? — lie docs not con- 
duct himself very well ; lor he is always getting into some bad scrape. 

— Do you not son I into bad scrapes? — It is time that I 
sometimes get into them, but I always get out of them again. — Do 
you see those men who seem de-iron- of approaching us? — I do 
them, but I do not tear them : for they hurt nobody. — We must go 
away, for I do not like to mix with people whom I do not know. — I 
beg of you not to be afraid of them, tor I perceive my uncle among 
them. — Do you know a good place to >wim in ? — I do know one. 
Where is it ? — On that side Of the river, behind the wood, near the 
high-road (viapubtica). — When -hill we go to swim? — This even- 
ing, if you like. — Will VOU wait tor me before the city-gite ? — I 
shall wait for you there: but I begofyou not to forget it. — You know 
that I never forget my promises. — Have you reminded your brother 
not to write to-day ? — I have both reminded and exhorted him. — 
Who has conquered ( j» mrii) ? — Caesar has conquered both by sea 
and by land. — lie has not only conquered, but even triumphed (iri- 
umphdre). — Docs he speak Latin? — He speaks both Greek and 
Latin. — Can he write a letter'.'' — lie not only cannot write a letter, 
but he can scarcely read one. 



Lesson XCVI. — PENS1 M NONAGESIMUJJ SEX- 

TUM. 

INTERJECTIONS. 

A. Interjections are particles denoting natural 
sounds, expressive of certain emotions of the mind. 

The nature of these emotions, and their degree of intensity, are 
indicated by the tone or force with which this natural utterance is 
effected. Interjections thus take the place of an entire sentence, in 
which the verb would express the emotion, and an adverb its degree 
of intensity. 

20 54* 



642 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 96. 

B. Interjections are classified according to the character of 
the emotion expressed by them. They denote, — 

1. Delight ; as, io, iu, oh ! ah ! euax or evax, euoe or evoe, hurrah ! 
huzzah ! 

2. Laughter ; as, ha ha, ha ha he, ha! ha ! 

3. Grief, pain; as, ah, ah ! alas! aw, hold! stop! hei, heu, eheu, 
hoi, vae, alas ! woe ! o, oh, proh, oh ! alas ! 

4. Surprise; as, aha, aha! atat, attate, strange! ha! hem, ehem, 
ho ! Io ! how ? there ! hui, ha ! ho ! away ! papae, strange ! indeed ! 
tatae, strange ! wonderful ! vah, hah ! zounds ! 

5. Derision ; as, hem, ha ! there ! bravo ! vah, vaha, iohia, ha ! 
bravo ! 

6. Praise, applause ; as, euge, eagepae, heia, well done ! 

7. Encouragement ; as, ela, up ! come ! on ! and the imperatives 
age, agedum, pi. agtte, come on ! come now ! 

8. Calling ; as, heus, eho, ehodum, ho ! soho ! hark you (ye) ! 

9. Answering ; as, hem* ehem, well ! very well ! 

10. Imprecation; as, vae, woe ! 

11. Directing attention; as, en, ecce, lo! behold! 

12. Aversion ; as, apage (an imperative), begone ! away ! fie ! tush ! 

13. Silencing ; as, 'st, hush ! 

Remarks. 

1. A number of substantives, adjectives, adverbs, and verbs are 
sometimes used like interjections. Such are : Pax, peace ! be still ! 
Malum, indignum, nefas, infandam, miserum, miserablle ! as expres- 
sions of disgust or impatient astonishment. Made, pi. macti, bravely ! 
prosper ! Nae profecto, surely ! certainly ! So apage, begone ! cedo, 
give here ! fetch hither (and also, pray tell me !) ; sis (= si vis), hear ! 
do you hear? agesis, agedum, agitedum, come on ! well ! sodes (= si 
audies), do you hear ? hark you ! To these add rjuaeso, precor, obse- 
cro (sc. ie or vos), I pray, I beg, prithee ! pray ! and amabo (sc. le and 
= si me amas), I pray you ! pray do ! 

2. Among interjections may also be included the invocations of the 
deities, which frequently appear intercalated between the regular 
parts of a sentence. Such are mehercule, hercule, mehercle, hercle, 
mehercules, hercules, by Hercules ! so help me Hercules ! pro Juppiier, 
per Jovem, by Jupiter ! pol, edepol, by Pollux ! ecastor, mecaslor, by 
Castor ! medius fidius, by my faith ! so help me God ! pro deumjidcm, 
per jidem, by my faith ! faith !f &c. 

* Some interjections, like hem! vah ! &c, are used to express several differ- 
ent emotions. 

f The expi'essions mecastor and meliercules may be resolved into, Ita me Cas- 
tor or Hercules juvet, So help me Castor or Hercules ! and mehercule into, Ita me 
Ilercule (vocative) juves, So help thou me, Hercules! 



LKSSON »6.] USE OF THE VOCATIVE CASE. 



t;i; 



C. Interjections cither stand alone, or are followed by the 
nominative, genitive, dative, accusative, or vocative. 

With the nominative, en, ecce, (cf. page 344). 

With the accusative, 0, ah, heu, en, Item, pro, bene (cf. page 343.) 

With the dative, rue, hci, lieu, ecce. (cf. page 869). 

With the genitive, o, //< it, proh, ike. (cf. page 383, Rem. 8). 

With the vocative, see 1>. 



Sed eece nuntii, ecce Utterae I 

En dexlra Jidesque ! 

Ofortundta mors, quae pro patria 

est potissimum reddita ! 
En miserum homlnem! 
Efteu me miserum ! 

hdminem forlunatum, qui ejiis- 

niodi niintios habeat ! 
Sed bene Messalam ! sua quisque 

ad pdcula dicat. 
Hei (or vae) misero mihi! 
Vac victis esse ! 
mihi nuntii bead (gen.) ! 
paterni generis oblite (voc.) ! 



Behold the messengers ! See tin. 

letter ! 
There is 01 



>ht hand and our 



plighted faith 



Happy the death incurred espe- 
cially for one's fatherland! 

Lo there a wretched man ! 

Wretch that I am ! 

O lucky man, to have messengers 
like those ! 

The health of Messala ! Let each 
one say so to his cup ! 

Woe is me ! 

Woe to the conquered ! 

O blessed harbinger to me ! 

O thou forgetful of thy ancestry ! 



OF THE USE OF THE VOCATIVE CASE. 

_D. The vocative case is the special form for calling 
or invoking the person or object addressed. 

The vocative constitutes in itself an entire sentence, like an inter- 
jection, and frequently occurs in connection with one. But if the 
sentence in which the vocative occurs contains a finite verb or an 
imperative, these must agree with it in number and person. E. g. 



dii bo'ni! quid est in hdminis 

vita dm ? 
Quae res linquam, pro sancte 

Juppiter ! non mddo in hac 

lirbe, sed in omnibus terris est 

gesta major ? 
Vmcere sets, Hannibal; victoria, 

lid ne'scis ! 
£quo ne credite, Teucri ! 
Quinctili Vare, legidnes redde ! 

tlrbem, lirbem, ml Rufe, cole et 

in ista luce vlve ! 
Jlufe, mihi frustra ac nequid- 

quam credite amice ! 



Good gods ! What can be said to 
last in human life ? 

What greater exploit, O holy Ju- 
piter ! was ever achieved, not 
only in this citv, but in any 
land ? 

You know how to conquer, Hanni- 
bal, but not to use your victory ! 

Do not trust the horse, Trojans ! 

Return the legions, Quinctilius Va- 
rus. 

Keep to the city, my Rufus, to the 
city, and live in that sun of yours ! 

O Rufus, in vain and to no pur- 
pose called my friend ! 



644 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LES50N 96. 



Primus note meo nomine 



puer : 

primus omnium parens pa- 
triae appellate : primus in toga 
triiimphum linguaeque laure- 
ain merit e ! 



son, the first boy, called by my 
name ! 

Hail first of all called parent of thy 
country : the first, who in the 
toga earned a triumph and the 
wreath of eloquence ! 

Remarks. 

1. Participles sometimes occur alone in the vocative, but only in 
poetry-. E. g. Proud, dicte inihi. sum ma dicende Camena. (O tliou) 
sung in my first ode, to be sung in my last ! And the two last of the 
above examples. 

2. Poets, in imitation of the Greeks, thus frequently put the voca- 
tive of participles and adjectives where we might expect the nomina- 
tive. E. g. Quo moriture mis f Whither art thou hastening so precip- 
itately, ready to perish? Sfc venias hodierne ! Thus may you come 
to-day ! So the common expression : Macte virtute esto .' Success to 
you ! Go on and prosper ! 

3. The nominative, on the other hand, sometimes occurs instead of 
the vocative, especially in poetry. E.g. I > popuhts! Ode- 
generate people ! S irbis genius ! Hail, genius of the city ! 

novus anne, veni! Come Janus, come new year, come ! 



What a Joy 

What a man ! 

How well you have done ! 

How wretched the man is ! 



Qui dolor .' Quod gaudium ! 
Qui vir! Quantus (quulis) vir! 
Quani bene fecisti ! 
Quain miser e'?t homo ! 



E. Ob*. In exclamation*, the Latin qui. quae. quod, or quid corre- 
sponds to the English " what a ! n or - what ! " Quomodo, ut or quam 
(with verbs and adjectives), to the English '-how!" Sentences of 
this kind may also be introduced by quantus. qttalus, quo-'.-. &c 



What men ! 

How many men ! 

What a fine book ! 

What fine weather ! 

What good people they are ! 

What a happiness ! 

How fortunate (how lucky) I 

How good you are ! 

How stupid she is ! 

How rich this man is ! 

How handsome that woman is ! 

How kind you are to me ! 

How happy you are ! 

What an affliction to my mind ! 

What language, what precepts, 
what a knowledge of antiquity ! 

How many, how great, how in- 
credible misfortunes he has un- 
dergone ! 



Qui homines ! 
Quid hominuni ! 
Quam piilcher liber ! 

Quam illi stint benevoli ! 

Quanta felicitas ! 

Quam fe'lix ! Quam fortunutus ! 

Quam boons - 

Quam stiilta 

Quam dives iste est ! 

Quam fonndsa e'st mtilier ilia ! 

Quam es erga me benevolus ! 

Quam felix es ! 

Qui moeror afnigit animum meum ! 

Qui sermo. quae praecepta, quanta 

notitia antiquitatis ! 
Qudt. quantus. quam incredibiles 

hausit calaniitates ! 



LESSON 96.] 



PHRASES AND EXERCISES. 



645 



To what a friend I have in- 
trusted my property ! 

How much is conveyed in so 
few words ! 

How insignificant man is ! 

How really troublesome the af- 
fair is ! 

How minute you are in impart- 
ing advice ! 

How changed ! 

How much she wept on the bo- 
som of her daughter ! 

Plow those who are fond of praise 
are unwilling to accuse them- 
selves ! 

How blind I was not to see that 
before ! 

How much I am indebted to you ! 

How much I am obliged to you ! 

How many obligations I am un- 
der to you ! 

See how the matter has changed ! 

You remember how popular the 
law seemed. 

Think of the shortness of life ! 

How valuable knowledge is ! 

To run up to or towards (any 
one). 



To hasten up. 

To run to the assistance of any 

one. 
To save, preserve. 
To deliver, rescue. 

To liberate, free, save any one 

from anything. 
To try to save one's self. 

To wish any one safe. 
To hasten, hurry. 

To plunder, rob. < 

Deliver us from misery ! 
Save me from danger, from death ! < 
Hurry slowly ! 



Qualine amico mea commendavi 

bona ! 
Quam miilta quam paiicis ! 

Quam nihil est tdtus homiincio ! 
Quam vero molesta est res ! 

Quam nihil praetermittis in con- 

silio dando ! 
Quantum mutatus ! 
Quantum in smu filiae flevit ! 

Ut se accusare no'lunt, qui eiipiunt 
laudari ! 

Me caecum, qui haec iintea non 

viderim ! 
Quam miilta tibi debeo ! 
Quantum tibi sum devinctus ! 
Quam miiltis beneficii vinculis tibi 

sum devinctus ! 
Vide, quam conversa res est ! 
Meministis, quam popularis lex vi- 

debatur. 
Vita quam sit brevis, cdgita ! 
Quanti est sapere ! 

Accurro, ere, accurri (or accucur- 
ri), accursum (ad aliquem, in 
locum). 

Approperare, advolare (ad ali- 
quem, in locum). 

In alicujus auxilium accurrere, ap- 
properare, advolare. 

Servare, conservare. 

Eripio, ere, pui, eptum (aliquem 

A RE, EX RE). 

Liberare aliquem ab aliqua re. 

Salutem petere ; saluti suae consu- 

lere. 
Aliquem salvum esse velle. 
Festinare, properare, maturare 

(rem, or NEUT.). 
Praedari (in general). 
Pilare, expilare (aliquem, rem). 
Eripite nos ex miseriis ! 
Eripe me a periculo ! 
Serva me a mdrte ! 
Festina lente ! 



646 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 96. 



He desires you to be safe. 

They sought their safety in flight. 

Many people had hastened up ; 
but instead of extinguishing 
the fire, the wretches set them- 
selves to plundering. 



To set about something. 



Te salvum esse viilt. 

Salutem siiam fuga petiverunt. 

Miilti advolaverant ; flammas vero 

perditi non mddo non extinxe- 

runt, sed praeduri etiarn coepe- 

rant. 

(Incipere, coepisse, inchoare (ali- 
Tobegin, commence (anything). ■< quid). 

( Initium facere (rei) . 
Aggredior, i, gressus sum (rem, 

ad rem, facere rem.) 
Incipio (coepi) laborare. 
Initium fecit scribendi. 
Aggressus est ad scribendum. 
Dicere aggredior. 
Num extingui potuerunt fliimraae ? 



I begin to work. 

He has commenced to write. 

He has set himself to writing. 

I am beginning to speak. 

Have they been able to extin- 
guish the fire V 

Have they succeeded in extin- 
guishing the fire ? 

They have not succeeded. 
To indicate, show. 

To quarrel (with any one, with 

each other). 
To chide, reprove (any one). 



To scold one. 

To dispute, contend about any- 
thing. 

The quarrel, dispute. 

Did your master ever scold you ? 



Contigitne lis, ut flummas exti'n- 

guerent V 
Non cdntigit. 
Lid iccire, ostendere, signijicdre. 

Rixari, jurgare ; altercdri : litigare 

(cum aeiquo, inter se). 
Objurgare, reprehendere (ali- 
quem). 
( Inerepare aliquem. 
■< Aliquem asperioribus verbis casti- 
( gare. 
Certare, disputare, dimicare, con- 
tendere (cum aliquo, inter 

SE DE RE. 

Kixa, ae,f. ; jurgium, i, n. ; lis, li- 

tis,/. 
Num te magister tuus unquam in- 

crepuit ? 
Niinquain. 
Quiim ob rem inter se rixantur ? 



Never. 

What are they quarrelling a- 

bout? 
They are quarrelling about a 

slave. 
They are disputing about who 

shall go first. 

By all means, obstinately. j 0h ^° anXl7U >> P**™**** P™~ 

By every means in one's power, Omni vl ; summa ope ; marubus pe- 
ivith might and main. dlbusque. 

To pursue (any one). Persequi, insequi ; consectari, in- 

sectari (aliquem). 



De servo inter se rixantur. 

Disputant, quis eorum primus ire 
debeat. 



LESSON 96.] 



PHRASES AXD EXERCISES. 



647 



To follow (any one, or neut.'). 
To come next in order. 
The following words. 
It follows from this, that, &c. 



To lose one's wits. 



The proverb. 
The difference. 



There is a difference between. 

What a difference ! 
The officer. 
The ass. 
The hare. 

To accept anything from any 
one. 

To our disgrace. 

To my misfortune (ill luck). 



Sequi, consequi (aliquem). 

Sequi, excij>ere (rem). 

Haec verba. 

Hinc sequitur (or consequitur), 
ut . . . . 
(Mente capior (captus sum). 
-} De mentis potestate exire. 
( Insanum fieri. 

Verbum, proverbium, adagium, i, n. 

Discrlmen, inis, n. ; differentia, 

( Aliquid interest (or differt) inter — 
\ Est quod differat inter .... 

Quantum differt ! 

Praefectus militaris. 

Asinus, i, m. 

Lepus, oris, m. 

Accipere (cepi, ceptum) aliquid ab 
aliquo. 

Cum ignominia nostra. 

Cum meCi calamitdte (or pernicie). 



Exercise 171. 

Ah, it is all over with me ! — But, bless me ! ( pro Juppiter ! ) why 
do you cry thus? — I have been robbed of my gold rings, my best 
clothes, and all my money : that is the reason why I cry. — Do not 
make so much noise, for it is we who have taken them all in order to 
teach you to take better care of your things (tud), and to shut the 
door of your room when you go out. — Why do you look so sad ? — 
I have experienced great misfortunes : after having lost all my money, 
I was beaten by bad-looking men ; and to my still greater ill-luck I 
hear that my good uncle, whom I love so much, has been struck with 
apoplexy. — You must not afflict yourself so much, for we must yield 
to necessity ; and you know well the proverb : " It is too late to con- 
sult to-day about what was done yesterday." — Can you not get rid 
of that man ? — I cannot get rid of him, for he will absolutely (utique) 
follow me. — He must have lost his wits. — What does he ask you for ? 

— He wishes to sell me a horse, which I do not want. — Whose houses 
are these ? — They are mine. — Do those pens belong to you ? — .No, 
they belong to my sister. — Are those the pens with which she writes 
so well ? — They are the same. — Which is the man of whom you 
complain? — It is he who wears a red coat. — "What is the differ- 
ence between a watch and me ? " inquired a lady (of) a young officer. 

— " My lady," replied he, " a watch marks the hours, and near you one 
forgets them." — A Russian peasant, who had never seen asses, see- 
ing several in Germany, said: "Lord (mehercule) , what large hares 
there are in this country!" — How many obligations I am under to 
you, my dear friend ! you have saved my life ! without you I had been 



lost. — Have those miserable men hurt 



— They have beaten 



G48 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 97. 

and robbed me ; and when you ran to my assistance they were about 
to strip (exuere) and kill me. — I am happy to have delivered you 
from the hands of those robbers. — How good you are! — Will you 
go to your friend's to-night? — I shall perhaps go. — And will your 
sisters go ? — They will perhaps. — Was you pleased at the concert 
yesterday ? — I was not pleased there, for there was such a multitude 
of people there that one could hardly get in. — I bring you a pretty 
present with which you will be much pleased. — What is it '? — It is a 
silk cravat. — Where is it? — I have it in my pocket. — Does it 
please you ? — It pleases me much, and I thank you for it with all 
my heart. — I hope that you will at last accept something of me. — 
What do you intend to give me ? — I will not tell you yet, for if I do 
tell you, you will find no pleasure when I give it to you. — Why do 
those men quarrel ? — They quarrel because they do not know what 
to do. — Have they succeeded in extinguishing the fire ? — They have 
at last succeeded in it ; but it is said that several houses have been 
burnt. — Have they not been able to save anything? — They have 
not been able to save anything ; for, instead of extinguishing the fire, 
the wretches who had come up set themselves to plundering. — Why 
did our friend set out without me ? — They waited for you till twelve 
o'clock, and seeing that you did not come, they left without you. 



Lesson XCVII. — pensum nonagesimum 

SEPTIMUM. 

OE THE ORDER OF WORDS IN SENTENCES. 

A. The order or succession of words in Latin sentences is deter- 
mined by their degree of relative importance, which depends upon 
the intention of the speaker. The general principle of this order is, 
that the most important word should occupy the first place, and that 
those modifying, expanding, or defining it should follow each other in 
regular succession, according to their relative weight in the construc- 
tion. This is called the natural order. 

B. In unconnected sentences, the word which the speaker 
intends to make prominent is placed at the beginning. But 
words limiting or defining others are placed after them. E. g. 

Ratio praeest, appetltus obtem- Reason commands, desire obeys. 

perat. 

Hdbet res publica adolescentes The republic has noble young men, 

nobili'ssimos, paratos defensd- ready for its defence. 

res. 

Semper oratorum eloquentiae The intelligence of the audience 

moderatrix fait auditorum has always been the regulator of 

prudentia. the eloquence of orators. 



LESSON 97.] ORDER OF WORDS IN SENTENCES. 



649 



Lacedaemone fiiit honestissimum 
domicilium senectutis. 

Be Hum socidle. Senatus popu- 
lusque Romdnus. 

D. Brutus Imperdtor, Consul desi- 
gndtus, S. Dv* Ciceroni. 

Jus gentium. Lex naturae. Pe- 
ri tus rei militdris. Paratus ad 
periculum. 

Divina natura dedit dgros, ars 
humana aedificavit urbes. 



At Lacedaemon there was the most 
honorable home for old age. 

The social war. The senate and 
people of Rome. 

D. Brutus commander, consul elect, 
to Cicero greeting. 

The law of nations. The law of 
nature. Skilled in military af- 
fairs. Ready for danger. 

Divine nature gave us our lands, 
and human art has built our 
cities. 

I. According to the natural order, the subject precedes the 
predicate. The oblique cases, and other words serving to ex- 
pand the predicate, are commonly put before the verb, which 
then occupies the last place in the sentence. E. g. 



There had never been any consuls; 
they were created after the ex- 
pulsion of the kings. 

I saw Cato sitting in the library. 

They believe that Apollo cures dis- 
eases, that Jupiter is the ruler of 
the gods, that Mars presides over 
battles. 
Nature has not only endowed man 
with quickness of intellect, but 
has also furnished him with the 
senses as its satellites and mes- 
sengers, and given him a suita- 
ble bodily form, adapted to the 
human mind. 

Remark. — The copula sum is put either at the end or between 
the subject and the predicate. E. g. Haec vita mors est. — Numa 
Pompilius rex creatus est. — Patres there auctores. — Claudius erat 
somni brevissimi. — Facta diciis sunt exaequanda. 

II. An adjective denoting a quality is commonly put after 
its noun ; but when that quality is represented as the leading 
or distinctive characteristic, it precedes it. 

The same applies to the genitive, which may either follow the word 
limited by it, or, as the emphatic word, precede it. E. g. 



Cdnsules niinquam f iterant; re- 
gibus exdctis creati sunt. 

Vidi Catonem in bibliotheca se- 
de'ntem. 

Habent opinionem, Apdllinem 
mdrbos depe'llere, Jdvem im- 
perium coelestium tenere, 
Martem bella re'gere. 

Hdminem natura non solum ce- 
leritate mentis orndvit, sed 
etiam sensus tanquam satelli- 
tes attribuit ac mintios, figu- 
ramque corporis habilem et 
aptam ingenio humano dedit. 



* I. e. Salutem dicit, Sends greeting. In superscriptions to letters, the name 
of the writer usually comes first. The abbreviation S. D. then either precedes 
or follows the person addressed, which is always in the dative. Thus equally- 
correct: Cicero Trebatio S. D. Among the later writers, however, the order is 
reversed, and the person addressed is put first. 

55 



650 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 97. 



Yir dptimus. Civis bonus. Poe- 
na me'rita. Dii immortdles. 
Jiippiter Optimus Mdxbnus. 

Magister e'quitum. 

Curatdres viarum* 

Ornamentuni civitdtis. 

Auditor Platonis. 

Bonus vir or civis. Siinvna res 
piiblica. Tuum consilium. 
Atlieniensis Demosthenes. 

Sendtus consiiltum. Persarum 
rex Darius. Euddxus, Plato- 
nis auditor. Miltiades, Cimo- 
nls filius. 



A most excellent man. A good 
citizen. Merited punishment. 
The immortal gods. Jupiter 
the Supreme. 

The master of cavalry. 

The inspectors of roads. 

The ornament of the state. 

A hearer of Plato. 

A good man, citizen. f The whole 
state, lour advice. The Athe- 
nian Demosthenes.' 

A decree of the senate. The king 
of the Persians, Darius. Eudox- 
us, the hearer of Plato. Mil- 
tiades, the son of Cimou. 

Remarks. 

1. An adjective or noun limiting the meaning of two or more nouns 
is placed either before or after them. E. g. Nostro incommodo detrimen- 
taque doleCunus, Let us lament over our misfortune and loss. Zeno 
non tarn reruni inventor fuit, quam verborum novdrum, Zeno "was not 
so much an inventor of new things, as of new words. 

2. When an adjective is limited by other words, it is put first, and 
separated from its noun by the words thus limiting it. E. g. Tua erga 
me benifjnitas, Your kindness towards me. Maxima post hominum 
memoriam classis, The largest fleet since the memory of man. Bre- 
vissimus in Britanniam trajectus, The shortest crossing into Britannia. 

III. A demonstrative pronoun before its noun directs the 
attention to the latter ; but when placed after it, it merely 
points out its relation to the predicate. E. g. 



Hie vir. Haec mensa. Hoc ba- 
culum. Ilia princi'pia et Id 
recentes rerum exitus. 

Haec est mea et hujus frdtris 
mei germana patria. 

Virginem ego lidnc sum ducturus. 

Caedem hdnc ipsam contra rem- 
publicam senatus factam esse 
decrevit. 

Tumulus is ipse, in quo cdndita 
lirbs est. 



This man. This table. This staff. 
Those beginnings and this re- 
cent issue of things. 

This is my proper country and 
that of this brother of mine. 

I am going to marry this virgin. 

The senate has declared, that this 
very carnage was made against 
the republic. 

The very hill on which the city 
was built. 



IV. Quisque is commonly put after sibi, suus, superlatives, or 
ordinals. E. g. 



* In titles the genitive is thus commonly put last, 
t I. e. one whose leading trait is goodness. Vir bonus 
posed to malus. 



only in genei-al op- 



LESSON 97.] ORDER OF WORDS IN SENTENCES. 



651 



Sua cinque virtiiti laus propria 

debetur. 
Sua cujusque animantis natura 

est. 
Mini me sibi quisque notus est, et 

difficillime de se quisque sentit. 



Every virtue is entitled to its prop- 
er praise. 

Every animal Las its peculiar na- 
ture. 

Every one knows least of himself, 
and every one experiences the 
greatest difficulty in observing 
himself. 

The wisest men all despise the 
Epicureans. 

Every tenth man was beaten to 
death. 

The best men have all sought in- 
struction from me. 



Epicureos doctissimus quisque 

contemnit. 
Decimus quisque fusti necatur. 

Optimi quique expetebant a me 
doctrinam. 

Remark. — Sibi and suus before quisque thus acquire a distribu- 
tive signification. When the distribution is already contained in other 
words of the sentence, quisque precedes the reflexive. E. g. Quanti 
quisque se ipse facit, tanti fat ab amicis. — Gallos Hannibal . ... in 
civitates quemque suas dimxsit. — The same order is observed in alius 
ullus ; e. g. Neque alia uM&fuit causa. 

V. Adverbs before the words qualified by them denote that 
which is distinctive or characteristic ; after them they merely 
limit or restrict their si jrnifi cation. 



Bene facta male locata male facta 

arbitror. 
Accidit, ut reliquae (sc. naves) 

fere dmnes rejicerentur. 

Flumen Dubis paene tdtum dp- 

pidum cingit. 
Histdria exiguo tempore absdlvi 

non potest. 
Laelius semper fere cum Scipio- 

ne solebat rusticari. 
Legem eisdem prope verbis in 

decimam tabulam conjccerunt. 

Quddsi Cneus Italiam relinquet, 
faciei omnino male. 



I consider ill-bestowed acts of kind- 
ness injuries. 
It happened that nearly all the 

rest of the ships were driven 

back. 
The river Dubis surrounds nearly 

the entire town. 
History cannot be despatched in a 

short time. 
Laelius generally was accustomed 

to rusticate with Scipio. 
They have expressed the law in 

nearly the same words in the 

twelfth table. 
But if Cneus will leave Italy, he 

will act very unwisely. 



VI. The same applies to the oblique cases determining the 
predicate ; before the verb they indicate the sense in which it 
is to be taken, after it they only specify or limit it (cf. I.). E. g. 

Medici ex quibusdam rebus et ad- Physicians understand both ap- 

venientes et crescentes morbos proaching and growing diseases 

intelligunt. from certain symptoms. 

Epedorix et Viriddmarus, insi- Epedorix and Viridomarus, having 



G5 2 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 97. 

muliiti proditionis ah Roma- been accused of treason, were 

nis indicia causa interfecti killed by the Romans without 

sunt. any trial. 

Ingenia humana sunt ad suam Men are naturally too eloquent in 

cutque levdndam culpam nimio palliating every one his own 

plus faciinda. guilt. 

VII. Prepositions, as their name implies, are generally 
placed before the cases governed by them. Tenus and versus 
alone follow them. So also cum in mecum, tecum, secum, nobis- 
cum, vobiscum, quocum, quibuscum. E. g. 

Ab hdste dtium fvi.it. There was rest from the enemy. 

Manum de tabula! Hands off from the picture ! 

Germani statim e somno lavantur. The Germans bathe immediately 

after sleep. 
Vix sum apud me. I am scarcely in my senses. 

Post mdntem se occultavit. He concealed himself behind the 

mountain. 
Antiochus Tailro tenus regnare Antiochus was commanded to rule 

jiissus est. as far as the Taurus. 

A Pompeio dissidebat, quocum He was at variance with Pompey, 
junctissime vixerat. with whom he had been on terms 

of intimacy. 
Curandum est, ut eos, quibuscum We must endeavor to have the 
sermonem eonferemus, et ve- appearance of respecting and 
reri et diligere videamur. cherishing those with whom we 

engage in conversation. 

Remarks. 

1 . An adjective or relative pronoun is often emphatically put be- 
fore the preposition, so that the latter stands between it and its noun. 
E. g. Mac/no cum metu. — Qua in urbe. — Hanc ob causam. — Quern 
ad modum. — Nulla in re. 

2. Relatives, and sometimes also the demonstrative Jiic, are fre- 
quently put before their preposition, although no substantive follows. 
E. g. Socii putandi, quos inter (= inter quos) res communicata est. — 
Res, causa, qua de (= de qua) agttur. So also : Hunc adversus ; 
hunc circum; \\x\no, juxta ; quern penes ; quam super ; quern ultra, &c* 

3. Prepositions are sometimes separated from their cases, generally 
by an attributive genitive or an adverb, sometimes also by some other 
word. E. g. Post vero Sullae victoriam. — Post autem Alexandra 
Magni mortem. — Propter vel gratiam, vel dignitatem. — Ilonore 
dir/ni cum ignominid dignis non sunt comparandi. — In suum cuique 
tribuendo.f 

* Poets and later prose-writers extend this transposition to personal pro- 
nouns and to substantives. E.g. Se erga ; te propter ; me penes; te sine; 
Scythas inter ; Misenum apud et Eavennam; thalamo svb fluminis. 

f Poets extend this liberty much further. E. g. Per ego te deos oi*o. — Vis 
animi pervlcit et extra processil longe flammantia moenia mundi, &c. 



LESSON 97.] ORDER OF WORDS IN SENTENCES. 653 

VIII. When two terms arc opposed to or contrasted with 
each other, they are placed as near together as possible. 

A word may thus be opposed to itself in a different form, or to one 
of kindred signification; as, Manns manurn lavat. — Aliis aliunde est 
periculum.* Or else two different terms may form an antithesis to 
each other; as, Fragile corpus animns sempiternus movet. 

Homines hominibus m;ixime liti- Men can become eminently ser- 
/ les esse pdssunt. viceable to each other. 

Anna drmis propulsantur. Arms are repelled by arms. 

Nihil est unum uni tarn simile, Nothing resembles another so close- 
tarn par, quam dmnes inter ly as we all do each other. 
nosmetipsos siimus. 

No'xii ambo, alter in dlterum Both mortal, they cast the blame 
causam ednferunt. U])on each other. 

Ute'rque ulrique est cdrdi. They like each other. 

Aliud aliis videtur optimum. One thing seems best to one, an- 

other to another. 

Ties fratres videre video): It seems to me as if I saw three 

brothers. 

Quae me moverunt, movissent ea- The same things which affected me 
dem te profecto. would certainly have affected 

you. 

Mortdli immortalitatem. non arbi- I do not think that immortality 
tror contemnendam. should be despised by a mortal. 

Ratio nostra conscntit, piignat Our reason assents, but language 
o ratio. opposes. 

Est genus hdminum falliicium, There is a class of deceitful men, 
ad voluntdtem loquentium 6m- who always speak as others 
nia, nihil ad veritdtem. would have them, and never ac- 

cording to the truth. 
REMARK. — This rule includes formulas like Dii deaeque. — Dies 

noctesque. — Die ac node. — Domi bellique. — Domi militiaeque. — 

Terra marique. — Ultro citroque, &c. 

C. I. In sentences containing two or more connected clauses, 
the connecting word generally occupies the first place in the 
clause introduced by it. 

The connecting word may be either a relative, a demonstrative 
pronoun or adverb, or a conjunction. Sometimes also another word, 
and always the one which bears the closest relation to what has gone 
before. 

If the connective refers to a particular word of the preceding clause 
(e. g. a relative to its antecedent), the latter stands as near to it as 
possible. 

Correlatives (e. g. tantus — quantus, &c.) occupy the same relative 
position in their respective clauses. 

* I. e. " To some there is danger from one quarter, to others from another." 



654 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 97. 



The conjunctions usually put at the beginning of their clause are : 
et, ac, at que ; sed, at, verum ; vel,.aut; nam, namque, and etenim. 
Generally also itaque. E. g. 



We speak of such friends as are 

known in ordinary life. 
The only surviving consul dies. 

Hannibal raised three very large 
armies. One of these he sent 
into Africa. 

You should assign to another no 
more than what you can per- 
form yourself. 

No orator has written as much as 
my writings amount to. 

The philosopher is susceptible of 
rage, but not of madness. But 
that is another question. 

The republic is not in the walls of 
our homes, but upon our hearths 
and altars. 

Alcibiades was fit for every Kind 
of business, and full of sagacity; 
for he was the commander-in- 
chief by sea and land. 

I ask of you not to be too rash 
about sailing. It is the custom 
of seafaring men to hurry for 
the sake of gain. 

Pausanias changed not only the 
established customs of his coun- 
try, but also his entire mode of 
life. He kept up the state of a 
king and wore a Persian drcs.-;. 
Medes and Egyptians consti- 
tuted his retinue; he dined af- 
ter the fashion of the Persians ; 
his replies were haughty ; his 
commands cruel. He was un- 
willing to return to Sparta. 

II. The conjunctions quoque, autem, vero, enirn, quidem, and 
the enclitics que, ne, and re, always follow the emphatic word of 
the sentence. So frequently etiam, igitur, tamen, ergo, deinde, 
and praeterea ; sometimes also itaque and idcirco. 

These words then generally occupy the second or third place in the 
clause. When the copula est or a verb is the emphatic word, then 
auiem, enim, igitur, and ergo often stand in the third, fourth, or fifth 
place. E. g. 



Ldquimur de lis amicis, quos no- 

vit vita communis. 
Consul, qui unus supererat, md- 

ritur. 
Hannibal tres exercifus mdximos 

comparavit. Ex his unum in 

Africam misit. 
Tdntum cuique tribuendum, 

quantum ipse efficere pdssis. 

Nemo orator tarn mvlta scripsit, 
quam midta nostra sunt. 

Furor in sapientem cadere po- 
test, non potest insania. Sed 
haec alia quaestio est. 

Non est in parietibus res piibli- 
ca, at in aris et fdcis. 

Alcibiades ad dmnes res iiptus 
consiliique pi en us. Namque 
imperator fiiit siimmus mari et 
terra. 

A te peto, ne temcre ndvir/es. 
Solent naiitae festinare questus 
sui causa. 

Pausanias non mores patrios so- 
lum, sed etiam cultum vestitum- 
que mutivit. Appardtu regio 
utebatur, veste Media ; satelli- 
tes Medi et Aegyptii seque- 
bantur ; ejndabdtur more Per- 
sarum .... superbe rcsponde- 
bat et crudeliter imperabat. 
Spdrtam redire nolebat. 



LESSON 97.] ORDER OF WORDS IN SENTENCES. 



655 



Gyges a niillo videbatur ; ipse 

autem omnia videbat. 
Quid est enim libertas ? Potestas 

vivendi, ut velis. 
Sensit in se iri Brutus. Avide 

itaque se certamini dffert. 



Gyges was not visible to any one. 
But he himself saw everything. 

For what is liberty ? The power 
of living as you please. 

Brutus perceived that he was as- 
sailed. Hence he at once of- 
fered to engage in the contest. 

God is therefore obedient or sub- 
ject to no nature. 

Will you then spare this man, O 
judges, whose crimes are so 
great ? 

We know that, according to our 
manners, music is incompatible 
with the character of our prince, 
and that dancing is considered a 
vice in him. 

I should like to know what your 
plans are, and what you think of 
the entire business. 

What can be superior to the phi- 
losopher, when he enjoys so 
many and such a variety of vir- 
tues ? 

Our bodies undergo perpetual 
change, nor will we be to-mor- 
row what we have been or arc 
at present. 

III. In quotations, the formulas inquam, aio, dico, nego, 
quaeso, obsecro, ccnseo, credo, spero, opinor, existimor, and arbi- 
tror are placed after the emphatic words. So also the vocative. 

E. rr. 



Nulli est ir/itur naturae obediens 

aut subjectus Deus. 
Ilulc liomini parcetis icjitur, jiidi- 

ces, ciijus tanta peccata sunt ? 

Scimus musicen ndstris mdribus 
abe.?se a prmcipis persona •, 
salture vero in vitio pdni. 



Scire velim, quid cdgites, de totd- 
que re quid existimes. 

Quid sipiente pdssit esse prae- 
stiintius, quum utatur tot, tarn 
variisque virtutibus ? 

Nostra corpora vertiintur, nee 
quod fi'dmusve, sumusve, eras 
e'rimus. 



Caesar, prolapsus in egressu na- 

vis, Tcneo te, inquit, Africa ! 
Virtus, virtus, inquam, Cdii Fdn- 

ni, et conciliat amicitias, et 

conscrvat. 
Vide, quaeso, satisne rectum sit, 

nos in istis ldcis esse. 

Attica me'a, obsecro te, quid agit ? 

In edsdem solitiidines tu ipse, dr~ 
bitror, venies, in quibus nos 
consedisse aiidies 



Caesar, advancing from the ship, 
exclaimed : Africa, I have you ! 

Virtue, virtue, I say, Cains Fanni- 
us, is at once the conciliator and 
the preserver of friendships. 

Pray see whether it is exactly 
right, that we should be in pla- 
ces like these. 

Pray tell me, what is my Attica 
doing ? 

You will, I think, get into the same 
retirement, in which you will 
hear that we have settled down. 



IV. Conjunctions, relatives, interrogatives, and interjections 
which commonly occupy the first place of a clause, are some- 
times supplanted by the emphatic word. E. g. 



656 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[LESSON 97. 



Nemo est, tibi qui suadere, sapi- 
entius pdssit te ipso. 

Ndn queo, Vetera ilia populi Ro- 
mdni gaudia quanta fiierint, 
judicare. 

Quid ? liberdlitas gratidtdne est, 
an mercenaria ? 

Sic profecto res se habet, nullum 
ut sit vitae tempus, in quo 
ndn deceat leporem humani- 
tatemque versari. 

Tu quum ipse tantum librdrum 
habeas, quos hie tandem re- 
quiris ? — Commentdrios quos- 
dam, inquam, Aristotelios, quos 
hie sciebam esse, veni ut aufer- 
rem, quos legerem, dum essem 
otidsus. 



There is no one that can give 3-ou 
better advice than you yourself. 

I am unable to judge how great 
those former pleasures of the Ro- 
man people were. 

What ? Is liberality gratuitous or 
mercenary ? 

It is really so, that there can be no 
time of life, in which pleasantry 
and urbanity cannot be indulged 
in. 

As you yourself have so many 
books, which, pray, are you 
searching for here ? — I came to 
take off certain commentaries of 
Aristotle, which I knew were 
here, in order that I might read 
them while I am at leisure. 



Remark. — So frequently quod si, quod etsi, quod nisi, quod quoni- 
am, quod quia, quod quum, &c. E. g. Sunt qui dicant, a me in exsilium 
ejectum esse Catilinam. Quod ego si verbo assequi possem, istos ipsos 
ejicerem qui haec loquuntur. 

Y. Words properly belonging together according to the natu- 
ral arrangement, are frequently separated by others, to which 
the speaker attaches greater importance. 

Words thus crowded out of the first place in the sentence are often 
emphatically put at the end. E. g. 
Justitia est una omnium ddmina Justice is pre-eminently the queen 



et regina mrlutum. 
Aedui equites ad Caesarem dmnes 

revertiintur. 
In licic sunt insula domicilia Ae- 

gyptiorum. 
Recepto Caesar Orxco, nulla in- 

terpdsita mora, Apolldniam 

proficiscitur. 
Cimon barbarorum lino conciirsu 

mdximam vim prostravit. 
Insula est Melita satis lato ab 

Sicilia ?ndii, periculosoque dis- 

jiincta. 
Sit hoc a principio persuasum 

civibus, dominos esse omnium 

rerum ac moderatores deos. 

Quis potidne uti aut cibo diilci 

diutius potest 1 
Hanc perfectam philosdphiam 



and mistress of all the virtues. 

The cavalry of the Aedui all re- 
turn to Cassar. 

This island contains abodes of 
Egyptians. 

After retaking Oncum, Cassar, 
without any delay, advances into 
Apollonia. 

Cimon defeated in one engagement 
a very large force of Barbarians. 

The island of Malta is separated 
from Sicily by a tolerably deep 
and dangerous sea. 

Let the citizens first of all be per- 
suaded of this, that the gods are 
the masters and governors of all 
things. 

Who can use drink or sweet food 
any longer ? 

I have alwavs considered that to 



LESSON 97.] ARRANGEMENT OF SENTENCES, ETC. 



G5' 



semper judiciivi, quae de maxi- 
mis quaestidnibus copidse pos- 
set, ornateque dicere. 

Hoc melius, quam tu, facere po- 
test nemo. 

Hoc tempore data est Eumeni 
Cappaddcia. 

Propterea quod aliud iter habe- 
rent nullum. 

Omnes miindi partes lindique 
medium locum capessentes ni- 
tuntur aequdliter. 



be perfect philosophy which can 
discourse with copiousness and 
elegance on questions of the 
highest interest. 

No one could do this better than 
you can. 

At this time Cappadocia was given 
to Eumenes. 

Because they had no other road. 

All parts of the world tend from 
every direction towards the cen- 
tral spot with equal forces. 



ARRANGEMENT OF SENTENCES AND CLAUSES. 

D. Clauses which mutually determine each other follow an ar- 
rangement similar to that of the words composing them. 

I. Periphrastic clauses, or such as represent a noun, adjec- 
tive, or adverb, occupy precisely the place in which the word 
for which they stand would be. 

Clauses of this kind generally commence with a relative. But they 
include also those containing an infinitive with a case, and participial 
clauses. 



Homines imperiti facilius, quod 
stulte dixeris, reprehendere, 
quam, quod sapienter tacueris. 
laudare pdssunt. 

Lauddre eloque'ntiam, et, quanta 
vis sit ejus, exprdmere, quan- 
tctmque lis, qui suit earn conse- 
cuti, dignitatem dfferat, neque 
propdsitum nobis est hoc loco, 
neque necessarium. 

Profecto stiidia nihil prdsunt 
perveniendi aliquo, nisi lllud, 
quod eo, quo inte'ndas,fe'rat d.e- 
duedtque, cognoris. 



Ignorant men can more easily find 
fault with a foolish remark of 
yours, than they can praise the 
wisdom of your silence. 

To praise eloquence, and to show 
the greatness of its force, and the 
dignity it bestow's on those who 
have followed it, is neither our 
purpose in this place, nor is it 
necessary. 

Your studies are of no avail in ar- 
riving at any result, unless you 
have become acquainted with 
that which carries and guides 



carries 
where you intend to go. 

II. Relative clauses precede those of their antecedents when 
they contain the leading idea of the proposition ; but when they 
merely expand or explain, they follow them. The same ap- 
plies to clauses containing a comparison or an indirect question. 
E.g. 

Non fecissem hdminis paene in- I should not even mention the 
fimi mentionem, nisi judica- well-nigh lowest man, unless I 
rem, qui suspiciosius aut crimi- thought that I had never heard 
2P 



658 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[lesson 97. 



ndsius dicer et, audivisse me 
neminem. 

Tempus est hujusmodi, ut, ubi 
quisque est, ibi esse minime 
relit. 

Frater iuus qudnti me fciciat 
semperque fecerit, esse hdmi- 
nem, qui ignorat, arbitror ne- 
minem. 

Quemddmodum coram qui ad nos 
intempestive ddeunt, molesti 
saepe sunt, sic epistolae offen- 



Quo major est in dnimls praestdn- 
iia et divinior, eo majore indi- 
gent diligentia. 

Verres ita se gessit in his rebus, 
quasi reus nunquam esset futu- 
rus. 



any one that spoke more suspi- 
ciously and criminally. 

The times are such now, that every 
one wishes to be least where he 
happens to be. 

I believe there is no one who does 
not know how much your brother 
thinks of me, and has always 
thought of me ! 

As those who come into our pres- 
ence at improper seasons are 
often troublesome, so letters are 
offensive to us, that are not de- 
livered at the proper time. 

The greater and diviner the supe- 
riority of intellect, the greater 
diligence it stands in need of. 

Verres has conducted himself in 
this business, as if he never were 
going to be impeached. 



III. Clauses containing a determination of time or place, and 
those denoting a cause, condition, or concession, occupy the first 
place, when they contain the conditions necessary to produce 
the given result ; but if they merely limit or explain, they are 
put last. E. g. 



Alexander, quum interemisset 
Clitum, familiarem siium, vix 
a se manus abstinuit. 

Cogitare debebas, ubicunque es- 
ses, te fore *m ejus ipsius, 
quern fugis, potestate. 



Ut consuetudinem dicendi mutd- 

rem, ea causa mihi in Asiam 

proficiscendi fuit. 
Fabula etiam nonnunquam, etsi 

est incredtbilis, tamen homines 

cdmmovet. 
Contendi cum Clddio, quum ego 

pilblicam causam, tile suam de- 

fenderet. 
Scipidni erat magna gloria pro- 

pdsita,* si Hannibalem in Afri- 

cam relraxisset. 



When Alexander had killed Cli- 
tus, his friend, he could scarcely 
refrain from violence to himself. 

You should have considered, that, 
wherever you might be, you 
would be in the power of the 
very man from whom you en- 
deavor to escape. 

The cause of my going into Asia 
was, that I might change my 
manner of speaking. 

A fiction even sometimes affects 
men, although it be an incredi- 
ble one. 

I fought with Clodius when I de- 
fended the cause of the public 
and his own. 

Scipio would have had great glory 
before him, if he could have 
drawn Hannibal back into Af- 
rica. 



On this erat proposita , compare Lesson LXXXIV. A. 



LESSON 97.] ARRANGEMENT OF SENTENCES, ETC. 



659 



IV. The union of several clauses, harmoniously joined to- 
gether, so as to express a complete thought, is called a, period. 

Periods are divided into several kinds, according to the style of 
composition to which they belong. The principal are the historical, 
the didactic, the epistolary, and the oratorical. Of these the epistolary 
is characterized by the greatest ease, freedom from restraint, and 
naturalness, while the oratorical aims at the severest symmetry, 
euphony, and harmony of all its members. E. g. 
De mea in te voluntate sic velim With respect to my disposition to- 
wards you, I wish you to think, 



jiidices, me, quibusciinque re- 
bus opus esse intelligam, quan- 
quam videam, qui sim hoc 
tempore et quid pdssim, opera 
tamen et consilio, studio qui- 
dem certe, rei, famae, saluti 
tuae praesto futurum. 

The witness. 

An important witness. 

The guest (host). 

The intimate friend. 
The tub. 
The bath. 

To depart this life. 

To recommend any one. 

To recommend any one ear- 
nestly. 

The recommendation. 

To report anything to any one. 

It has been so reported to me. 

To hold, possess. - 

To hold openly or publicly. 

Under another name. 

To esteem or think much of any 
one. 

To treat any one generously. 

To write more fully and more 
frequently. 

To be affected by anything. 

I think I shall come to Rome. 

I suppose you are aware. 

See that you take proper care of. 

Take care of your health. 

Out of respect for me. 

You will do me a very great favor. 

I most earnestly request you. 

Adieu. 



that although I am aware what I 
am at present, and how little I 
can do, I shall nevertheless be 
ready to defend your interest, 
your reputation, and your welfare 
with my assistance and advice, 
at any rate with my endeavors. 

Testis, is, m. 
Testis gravis. 
Hospes, itis, m. 
Necessarius, i, m. 
Labrum, i, n. 
Balneum, i, n. 
A vita discedere. 
Aliquem commendare (alicui). 
Aliquem in majorem modum com- 
mendare. 
Commendatio, onis,/! 
Alicui aliquid deferre. 
Ita ad me delata res est. 
Possideo, ere, edi, essum. 
Publice possidere (aliquid). 
Alieno nomine. 
Aliquem magni facere. 

Aliquem liberaliter tractare. 

Et pluribus verbis et saepius scri- 

bere. 
Affectum esse aliqua re. 
In Romam me venturum piito. 
Te scire arbltror. 
Fac, ut cures (cum Ace). 
Da dperam, ut valeas. 
Honoris meae causa. 
Id mihi vehementer gratum erit. 
Te vehementer etiam atque etiam 

rdgo. 
Vale. 



660 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 97. 

Exercise 172. — (Letters.) 

1. Marcus Tullius Cicero to * * * greeting.* 

I am deprived of an important witness of my high regard (amoris 
summi) for you, — of your father, of distinguished memory (clarissimo 
viro), who with his honors (laudibus), and especially with a son like 
you (turn vera te flio), would have overcome the destiny of (us) all 
(superasset omnium fortunam), if he had been so fortunate as to see 
you before he departed this life. But I hope that our friendship does 
not stand in need of any witnesses. May the gods prosper (fortunare) 
your patrimony ! You will at any rate {eerie) have me (as one), to 
whom you may be as dear and agreeable (jucundus) as you were to 
your father. Adieu. 

2. M. T. Cicero to * * # greeting. 

I hope you are very well (si vales, bene est) ; I am well. "We have 
thus far no reliable information (quidquam certi) either (neque) con- 
cerning Csesar's arrival or (neque) concerning the letter, which Philo- 
tinus is said to have. If there is anything certain (si quid erit certi), I 
shall let you know (certiorem face re) immediately. See that you take 
good care of your health. Adieu. 

3. M. T. Cicero to * * * greeting. 

I think that we shall come to Tusculanum either by the Nones 
(Nonis).-f or on the day after (postridie). Let everything be (id 
sint) ready (for us) there. Perhaps there will be several with us, and 
we shall, I think, remain there for some length of time (diutius). If 
the tub is not in the bath, let it be (put) there (ut sit) . So also what- 
ever else may be (Item cetera, quae sunt) necessary for life (ad virtum) 
and health. Adieu. 

4. M. T. Cicero to * * * greeting. 

I earnestly recommend to you Hippias, the son of Philoxenus, of 
Calacta (Calactlnus) , my guest and intimate friend. His property 
(bona), as (quemadmoduni) the matter has been reported to me, is 
publicly held under another name, contrary to the laws of the Calac- 
tini. If this is so, the case itself (res ipsa) ought to prevail on your 
sense of justice (ab aequitate tud . . . impetrare debet), that you 
should help (subvenlre) him. But however that may be, I ask of you 
to relieve him (expedlre) out of respect for me, and to render him 
such assistance (tantumque ei commodes), both in this matter and in 
other respects (et in ceteris), as (quantum) your honor (fides) and 
dignity will admit (patietur). You will do me a very great favor. 



* For greeting put either 8. D., i. e. Salfitem dlcit, or S. P. D., Sah'dem plu- 
rimam dlcit. The name of the person addressed in the dative. E. g. Planco, 
Trebatio, Metello, Curioni, Terentiae suae. 

f The Romans called the fifth day of the month Nonae, arum. In March, 
May, July, and October, this was the seventh day. Consult Lexicon. 



LESSON 97.] EXERCISE 172. 661 

5. M. T. Cicero to * * * greeting. 

I think you are aware how greatly I esteemed Cams Avianus Flac- 
cus ; and I had learned from himself (ex ipso audieram), (who was) a 
most excellent and agreeable (gratus) man, how generously he had 
been treated by you. The sons of this (man), worthy in every re- 
spect (dignissimos) of that father, and my intimate friends, whom I 
greatly cherish (unice diligo), I recommend to you as earnestly (sic) 
as I can recommend any one (ut majore studio nullos commendare pos- 
sim). Caius Avianus is in Sicily. Marcus is with us. My desire is 
(te rogo), that you should honor (ornare) the merit (dignitas) of the 
one present with you (illlus praesentis), and defend the interest (rem) 
of both (of them). You can do nothing in that province (that will 
be) more agreeable to me. I most earnestly request you to do so. 

6. M. T. Cicero to * * * greeting. 

I hope you are very well ; I am well. If I had anything to write 
to you, I should do (so) in more words and more frequently. You 
see how matters stand at present (nunc quae sint negotia). As to how 
I am personally (ego autem quomodo) affected, you will be able to as- 
certain (cognoscere) from Leptas and Trebatius. See that you take 
proper care of (Tufac ut . . . cures) your health and that of Tullia. 
Adieu. 

7. M. T. Cicero to * * * greeting. 

I have read your letter ; from which I understand that Caesar con- 
siders you very learned in the law. You have reason to rejoice, that 
you have come to those places where you might have the appearance 
(ubi viderere) of knowing something (aliquid sapere). But if (quodsi) 
you had also gone into Britannia, there certainly would have been no 
one in that great island more experienced (peritior) than you. And 
yet (verum tameri) I envy you somewhat (subinvideo), for having been 
called, of his own accord (ultro), by one to whom others cannot even 
aspire (aspirare), not on account of his pride, but on account of his 
occupation. But in that letter of yours you have written me nothing 
about your affairs, which, I assure you (mehercule), are no less an 
object of concern to me (mild non minori curae sunt) than my own. 
I am very much afraid of your feeling cold in your winter-quarters 
(in hibernis) ; on which account I advise you to keep up (utendum 
censeo) a good fire (camino luculento). Mucius and Manilius are of 
the same opinion (idem placebat with the dat), especially as you are 
but sparingly supplied with military cloaks (qui sagis non abundares). 
I hear however (quamquam audio) that you feel warm enough where 
you are (istic) ; on account of which intelligence (quo quidem nuntio) 
I was, I assure you, very much concerned about you (de te timueram). 
But you are more cautious in military affairs than in the law (in ad- 
vocationibus), since you desired neither to swim in the ocean, (though) 
extremely fond (studiosissimus homo) of swimming, nor to see the esse- 
56 



662 LATIN GRAMMAR. [LESSON 97. 

darii,* (though the man), -whom before we could not even cheat blind- 
folded {quern antea ne andabatam quidem\ defraudare poteramus). But 
jesting aside {jam satis jocati sumus), you yourself know how earnest- 
ly (diligenter) I have written to Caesar about you ; how often (I have 
done so), I (myself know). But I had already ceased to do so {jam 
intermiseram) , lest I might seem to distrust the disposition {voluntas) 
of a man most generous and affectionate towards me. And yet {sed 
tamen) I thought that it was necessary to remind the man {esse liomi- 
nem commonendum) in the letter (dat.) which I sent him last. I 
accordingly did so {Id feci). I wish you to inform me of the result 
{quid profecerim) ; and, at the same time, of your entire condition {de 
ioto statu tuo) and of all your plans. For I am anxious {cupio) to 
know what you are doing, what you expect, (and) how long you 
suppose this absence of yours from us {islum tuum discessum a nobis) 
will be (i. e. last). For I assure you, that it is one consolation to me, 
which enables me to bear more easily {quare facilius possim pati) 
your absentment from us {te esse sine nobis), if it is an advantage to 
you (to be so) ; but if it is none, (then) nothing can exceed the folly 
of both of us (nihil duobus nobis est stultius) ; of me, for not drawing 

you to Rome ; of you, for not flying hither (at once) Let me 

know therefore {quare at the beginning of the sentence) about all 
(these) matters, as soon as you can. I shall certainly help you ( ju- 
vero), either with my sympathy {consolando), or with advice, or with 
substantial assistance {re). 

* An essedni-ius was either a soldier or a gladiator, that fought from a war- 
chariot or essedum. 

f An andabata was a sort of gladiator, who wore a helmet without visors, 
and thus fought like a blind man. 



LATIN VERBS. 



A. Paradigms to the regular Conjugations op Latin 

Verbs. 

B. Anomalous Verbs. 

C. Defective Verbs. 

D. Verbs Irregular in the Formation of the Perfect 

and Supine. 

I. First Conjugation. 
IE. Second Conjugation. 
ITJ. Third Conjugation. 
IV. Fourth Conjugation. 

E. Deponent Verbs. 

F. Inchoative Verbs. 



664 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



A. 



PARADIGMS TO THE REGULAR CONJUGATIONS OF 
LATIN VERBS. 

(To Lesson XXVLU. A-E.) 



Active Voice. 





Pees. 


INFIN. 


Perf. 


Supine. 




1. 

2. 
3. 

4. 


Amo, 
Moneo, 
Lego, 
Audio, 


amare, 
monere, 
legere, 
audire, 


amavi, 
monui, 
legi, 
audivi, 


amatum, 
monitum 
lectum, 
auditum, 


to love, 
to admonish, 
to read, 
to hear. 



Indicative Mood. 
Present, I love, admonish, read, hear. 

1. S. ara-o, as, at ; P. amus, atis, ant. 

2. S. mon-eo, es, et ; P. emus, etis, 

ent. 

3. S. leg-o, is, it; P. imus, itis, unt. 

4. S. aud-io, is, it ; P. imus, itis, iunt. 

Imperfect, / loved, admonished, read, 
heard. 

1. S. am-abam, aba«, iibat; P. abamus, 

abatis, abant. 

2. S. mon-ebam, ebas, ebat ; P. eba- 

mua, ebatis, ebant. 

3. S. K-g ebam, ebas, ebat; P. ebamns, 

ebatis, ebant. 

4. S. aud-iebam, iebas, iebat; P. ieba- 

mus, iebatis, iebant. 

Perfect, / have loved, admonished, 
read, heard. 



1. S. amav- 2. monvi 
3. leg- 4. audiv- 



Pluperfect, / had loved, admonished, 
read, heard. 



1. S. amav- 2. monu- 
3. leg- 4. audiv- 



ii, isti, it ; P 
imus, istis, e 
runt or ere. 

ved, admonished 
rd. 

Seram, eras,erat; 
P. eramus, era- 
tis, erant. I 



Subjunctive Mood. 

Present, that I may love, admonish, 
read, hear. 
S. am-em, es, et; P. emus, etis, ent. 
S. mon-eam, eas, eat; P. eamus, eatis, 

eant. 
S. leg-am, as, at; P. amus, atis, ant. 
S. aud-iam, ias, iat; P. iamus, iatis, 
iant. 

Imperfect, that I might love, admon- 
ish, read, hear. 
S. am-arem, ares, aret; P. aremus, are- 

tis, arent. 
S. mon-erem, eres, eret ; P. eremus, 

eretis, erent. 
S. leg-erem, eres, eret ; P. eremus, 

eretis, erent. 
S. aud-Irem, ires, iret; P. iremus, ire- 

tis, irent. 

Perfect, that I may have loved, admon- 
ished, read, heard. 



Serim, eris,erit; 
P. erimus, e- 
ritis, erint. 



1. S. amav- 2. monu- 
3. leg- 4. audiv- 



Pluperfect, that Imirjht have loved, 
admonished, read, heard. 

fissem, isses, is- 
set ; P. isse- 
mus, issetis, 
issent. 



Future Tenses Indicative. 

Future L, I shall love, admonish, read, hear. 

1. S. am-abo, abis, abit; P. abimus, abitis, abunt. 

2. S. mon-ebo, ebis, ebit; P. ebimus, ebitis, ebunt. 

3. S. leg-am, es, et; P. emus, etis, ent. 

4. S. aud-iam, ies, iet; P. iemus, ietis, ient 

Future II., I shall have loved, admonished, read, heard. 
I S^- W 4. auSv-"" j gr0 ' gris ' 6rit 5 P ' erimus > eritis > grint 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 

Active Voice. — Continued. 

Imperative Mood. 

Present. 

1. S. am-a; P. ate, love thou, love ye. 

2. S. mon-e ; P. ete, admonish thou, admonish ye. 

3. S. leg-e; P. ite, read thou, read ye. 

4. S. aud-I; P. ite, hear thou, hear ye. 

Future. 

1. S. am-ato, ato, thou shalt, let him, love. 
P. am-atote, anto, ye shall, let them, love. 

2. S. mon-eto, eto, thou shalt, let him, admonish. 
P. mon-etote, ento, ye shall, let them, admonish. 

3. S. lt'g-ito, ito, thou shalt, let him, read. 
P. leg-itote, unto, ye shall, let them, read. 

4. S. aud-ito, Ito, thou shalt, let him, hear. 

P. aud-Itote, lunto, ye shall, let them, hear. 



664* 



Present. 

1. am-are, to love. 

2. mon-ere, to admonish. 

3. leg-ere, to read. 

4. aud-Ire, to hear. 



Infinitive Mood. 

Perfect. 

1. amav-isse, to have loved. 

2. monu-isse, to have admonished. 

3. leg-isse, to have read. 

4. audlv-isse, to have heard. 

Future. 



1. amat-urum esse, to be about to love. 

2. momt-urum esse, to be about to admonish. 

3. lect-iirum esse, to be about to read. 

4. audlt-urum esse, to be about to hear. 

Participles. 

Present. 

1. am-ans, loving. 3. leg-ens, reading. 

2. mon-ens, admonishing. 4. aud-Iens, hearing. 

Future. 

1. amat-urus, about to love. 3. lect-urus, about to read. 

2. monlt-urus, about to admonish. 4. audlt-urus, about to hear. 

Gerunds. 

1. am-andi, of loving. 3. leg-endi, of reading. 

2. mon-endi, of admonishing. 4. aud-iendi, of hearing. 

Supines. 

1. amat-um, to love. 3. lect-um, to read. 

2. monit-um, to admonish. s 4. audlt-um, to hear. 



665 



REGULAR CONJUGATIONS OF VERBS. 



Passive Voice. 





Pees. 


Infin. 


Perfect. 




1. 

2. 
3. 

4. 


Amor, 
Moneor, 
Legor, 
Audior, 


amari, 
moneri, 
legi, 
audiri, 


amatus sum, 
monitus sum 
lectus sum, 
auditus sum, 


to he loved, 
to be admonished, 
to be read, 
to he heard. 



Indicative Mood. 

Present, I am loved, admonished, read, 
heard. 

1. S. am-or, aris or re, atur; P. amar, 

amini, antur. 

2. S. mon-eor, eris or re, etur; P. emur, 

emini, entur. 

3. S. leg-or, eris or re, itur; P. imur, 

imini, untur. 

4. S. aud-Ior, Iris or re, Itur; P. Imur, 

Imini, luntur. 

Imperfect, I was loved, admonished, 
read, heard. 

1. S. am-abar, abaris or re, abatur; P. 

abamur, abamini, abantur. 

2. S. mon-ebar, ebaris or re, ebatur; 

P. ebamur, ebamini, ebantur. 

3. S. leg-ebar, ebaris or re, ebatur; P. 

ebamur, ebamini, ebantur. 

4. S. aud-iebar, iebaris or re, iebatur; 

P. iebamur, lebamlni, leban- 
tur. 

Perfect, I have been loved, admonished, 
read, heard. 

{sum or fui, es 
or fuisti, est 
or fuit, &c. 
(Cf. p. 243.) 

Pluperfect, 2" had been loved, admon- 
ished, read, heard. 

feram or fue 
1. amatus, 2. monitus, I £g^ gr \^ 
3. lectus, 4. auditus, \ ^^at, &c! 
(Cf. p. 464.) 



Subjunctive Mood. 

Present, that I may he loved, admon- 
ished, read, heard. 
S. am-er, ere or ris, etur ; P. emur, 

emini, entur. 
S. mon-ear, eare or ris, eatur ; P. 

eamur, eamini, eantur. 
S. leg-ar, are or ris, atur ; P. amur, 

amini, antur. 
S. aud-iar, lare or ris, latur; P. lamur, 

lamini, lantur. 

Imperfect, that I mirjht be loved, ad- 
monished, read, heard. 

S. am-arer, arere or ris, aretur ; P. 

aremur, aremini, arentur. 
S. mon-erer, erere or ris, eretur ; P. 

eremur, eremini, erentur. 
S. leg-erer, erere or ris, eretur ; P. 

eremur, eremini, erentur. 
S. aud-Irer, Irere or ris, Iretur; P. Ire- 

mur, Iremini, Irentur. 

Perfect, that I may have been loved, 
admonished, read, heard. 

fsim or fuerim, 
1. amatus, 2. monitus, I sis or fueris, 
3. lectus, 4. auditus, j sit or fuerit, 

[ &c. 

Pluperfect, that I might have been 
loved, admonished, read, heard. 

Tessem or fuis- 
1. amatus, 2. monitus, I sem, esses or 
3. lectus, 4. auditus, J fuisses, esset 

(^ or fuisset, &c. 



Future Tenses Indicative. 

Future I., I shall he loved, admonished, read, heard. 

1. S. am-abor, aberis or re, abitur; P. abimur, abimini, abuntur. 

2. S. mon-ebor, eberis or re, ebitur; P. ebimur, ebimini, ebuntur. 

3. S. leg-ar, eris or re, etur; P. emur, emini, entur. 

4. S. aud-iar, leris or re, letur; P. lemur, lemini, lentar. 

Future II., I shall have been loved, admonished, read, heard. 
1. amatus, 2. monitus, ( Sro or fuero, eris or fueris, erit or fuerit, &c 
3. lectus., 4. auditus, ( (Cf. p. 519.) 

56* 



REGULAR CONJUGATIONS OF VERBS. 



665* 



Passive Voice. — Continued. 

Imperative Mood. 

Present. 

1. S. am-are; P. amini, be thou, be ye, loved. 

2. S. mon-ere ; P. emini, be thou, be ye, admonished. 

3. S. leg-ere; P. imini, be thou, be ye, read. 

4. S. aud-ire; P. imini, be thou, be ye, heard. 

Future. 

1. S. am-ator, ator, thou shalt, let him, be loved. 

P. am-aminor, an tor, ye shall, let them, be loved. 

2. S. m5n-etor, etor, thou shalt, let him, be admonished. 

P. mon-emlnor, entor, ye shall, let them, be admonished. 

3. S. leg-itor, itor, thou shalt, let him, be read. 

P. leg-iminor, untor, ye shall, let them, be read. 

4. S. aud-itor, itor, thou shalt, let him, be heard. 

P. aud-iminor, iuntor, ye shall, let them, be heard. 



Infinitive Mood. 



Present. 

1. am-ari, to be loved. 

2. mon-eri, to be admonished. 

3. leg-i, to be read. 

4. aud-iri, to be heard. 



Perfect. 

1. amat-um esse, to have been loved. 

2. monit-um esse, to have been admonished. 

3. lect-um esse, to have been read. 

4. audit-um esse, to have been heard. 



Future. 



1. amat-um iri, to be about to be loved. 

2. monit-um iri, to be about to be admonished. 

3. lect-um iri, to be about to be read. 

4. audit-um iri, to be about to be heard. 



Participles. 



Perfect. 



1. amat-us, loved. 

2. monit-us, admonished. 



3. lect-us, read. 

4. audit-us, heard. 



Future. 

1. am-andus, to be loved. 3. leg-endus, to be read. 

2. mon-endus, to be admonished. 4. aud-iendus, to be heard. 

Supines. 



1. amat-u, to be loved. 

2. monlt-u, to be admonished. 



3. lect-u, to be read. 

4. audit-u, to be heard. 



666 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



B. ANOMALOUS VERBS. 



The anomalous verbs of the Latin language are sum, possum, 
volo, nolo, mdlo, edo,fero,fio, eo, queo, and negueo. 

1. Sum, esse, fui, futurus, to be. 



Indicative. 

Sing, sum, Tarn 

es, thou art 

est, he is, 
Plur. sumus, we are 

estis, ye are 

sunt, they are. 

Sing, eram, Iicas 

eras, thou icast 
erat, he was, 

Plur. eramus, we were 
erat is, ye were 
erant, they were. 

Sing, fui, I have been 

fuisti, thou hast been 
fuit, he has been, 

Pluk. fuimus, we have been 
fuistis, ye have been 



fuerunt (fuere), they have been. fuerint 

Pluperfect. 



Subjunctive. 
Present. 

Sing, sim, that I may be 

sis, that thou mayst be 
sit, that he may be, 

Plur. simus, that we may be 
sitis, that ye may be 
sint,* that they may be. 
Imperfect. 

Sing, essem, that I might be 

esses, that thou mightst be 
esset, that he might be, 

Plur. essemus, that we might be 
essetis, that ye might be 
essent,t that they might be. 

Perfect. 

Sing, fuerim, that I may have been 

fueris, that thou ?nayst have been 
fuerit, thai he may have been, 

Plur. fuerimus, that we may have been 
fueritis, that ye may have been 



that they may have been. 



Sing, fueram, I had been 

fueras, thou hadst been 
fuerat, he had been, 

Plur. fueramus, we had been 
fueratis, ye had been 
fuerant, they had been. 



Sing, fuissem, that I might have been 

fuisses, that thou mightst have been 
fuisset, that he might have been, 

Plur. fuissemus, that we might have been 
fuissetis, that ye might have been 
fuissent, that they might have been. 



Future Tenses Indicative. 



Future I. 

Sing, ero, 1 shall be 

eris, thou icilt be 
erit, he will be, 

Plur. eriraus, we shall be, 
eritis, ye will be 
evunt,' they will be. 



Present. Sing, es, be thou. 
este, be ye. 



Future II. 

Sing, fuero, / shall have been 

fueris, thou wilt have been 
fuerit, he will have been, 

Plur. fuerimus, we shall have been 
fueritis, ye will have been 
fuerint, they will have been. 

Imperative. 

Plur. Future. Sing, esto, thou shalt be; 
esto, let him be. Plur. estote, ye 
shall be ; sunto, let them be. 



* Obsolete forms are siem, sies, siet, sient, and fuam, fuas, fuat, fuant. 
f Another form for the imperfect subjunctive is for em, fores, f&ret, &c. 



ANOMALOUS VERBS. 667 

Infinitive. 
Present, esse, to be. Perfect, fuisse, to have been. Future, futurum 
(am, urn) esse or simply fore, to be about to be. 

Participles. 
Present, (ens), being. Future, futurus, a, urn, about to be. 

Remarks. 

1. The participle ens is not used except as a substantive (the philosophical 
" being," " entity"), and in the compounds absens and praesens. 

2. Like sum are conjugated the compounds absum, adsum, desum, insum, inter- 
sum, obsum, praesum, subsum, and supersum. The preposition pro of prosum 
becomes prod when an e follows; as, prodes, prodest, proderam, prode.ro, prodes, 
&c. 

2. Possum, posse, potui, I am able, lean. 

Indicative. Subjunctive. 

Present. 

S. possum, potes, potest; S. possim, possls, possit; 

P. possumus, potestis, possunt. P. posslmus, possltis, possint. 

Imperfect. 

S. potSram, poteras, poterat,' S. possem, posses, posset; 

P. poteramus, poteratis, poterant. P. possemus, possetis, possent. 

Perfect. 

S. potui, potuisti, potuit; S. potuerim, potueris, potuerit; 

P. potulmus, potuistis, potuerunt. P. potuerimus, potueritis, potuerint. 

Pluperfect. 

S. potueram, potueras, potuerat; S. potuissem, potuisses, potuisset; 

P. potueramus, potueratis, potuerant. P. potuissemus, potuissetis, potuissent. 

Future Tenses Indicative. 
Future I. Future II. 

S. potero, poteris, potent; S. potuero, potueris, potuerit; 

P. poterimus, poteritis, poterunt. P. potuerimus, potueritis, potuerint. 

Imperative (wanting). Infinitive. 

Pres. posse. Perf. potuisse. 
Participle Pres. potens {only used adjectivehj). 

3. Volo, velle, volui, I am willing, I wish. 

4. Nolo, nolle, nolui, I am unwilling. 

5. Malo, malle, malui, I would rather, I prefer. 

Indicative Mood. 

Present. 

S. volo, vis, vult; nolo, non vis, non vult; malo, mavis, mavult; 

P. volumuS, vultis, volunt. nolumus, non vultis, nolunt. malumus, mavultis, 

malunt. 

Imperfect. 

S. volebam, as, at; nolebam,as, at; malebam, as, at; 

P. volebamus, &c. nolebamus, &c. malebamus, &c. 



cos 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



S. volui, isti, it; 
P. voluimus, &c. 



S. volueram, as, at; 
P. volueramus, &c. 



S. volam, es, et; 
P. volemus, &c. 



S. voluero, is, it; 
P. voluerlinus, &c. 



S. velim, is, it; 



S. vellem, es, et; 
P. vellemus, &c. 



S. voluerim, is, it; 
P. voluerimus, &c. 



S. voluissem, es, et; 
P. voluissemus, &c. 



( Wanting.) 



Pres. velle 
Pkkf voluisse. 



volens. 



volendi 
volendo. 



Perfect. 

nolui, isti, it; 
noluimus, &c. 

Pluperfect. 
nolueram, as, at; 
nolueriimus, &c. 

Future I. 

nolam, es, et; 
nolemus, &c. 

Future II. 
noluero, is, it; 
noluerlmus, &c. 

Subjunctive Mood. 

Present. 

nolim, 5?, it; 
nollmus, itis, int. 

Imperfect. 
nollem, es, et; 
nollemus, &c. 

Perfect. 
noluerim, is, it; 
noluerlmus, &c. 

Pluperfect. 

noluissem. es, et; 
noluissemus, &c. 

Imperative Mood. 



malui, isti, it; 
malulmus, &c. 



malueram, as, at; 
maluerainus, &c. 



malam, es, et; 
malemus, &c. 



maluero, is, it; 
maluerimus, &c. 



malim, Is, it; 



mallem, es, et; 
mallemus, &c. 



maluerim, is, it; 
maluerimus, &c. 



maluissem, es, et; 
maluissemus, &c. 



noli — nolite 
noil to — nolitote 
nollto — noluuto. 


( Wanting.' 


Infinitive Mood. 




nolle 
noluisse. 


malle 
maluisse. 


Participle. 




nolens. 


( Wanting.) 


Gerund. 




nolendi. 


( Wanting.) 



6. Edo, ere or esse, edi, esum, leaf. 

Pres. Ixdic. S. edo, edis or es, edit or est; P. edimus, editis orestis, edunt. 
Imperf. Subj. S. ederem or essem, ederes or esses, ederet or esset; P. ede- 

remus or essemus, ederetis or essetis, ederent or essent. 
Imperat. Pres. S. edeores; P. edite or este. 

Lmperat. Fut. S. edlto or esto, editooresto; P. editote or estote, edunto. 
Infix, edere or esse. Passive Forms, edltur or estur ; — 

ederetur or essetur. 

The remaining tenses of this verb are regular. 

The compounds of edo, inflected like it, are adedo, ambedo, comedo, exedo, 
peredo. 



ANOMALOUS VERBS. 669 

7. Fero, ferre, tuli, latum, I carry, hear. 

Active Yoice. Passive Yoice. 

Indicative. 
Fres. S. fero, fers, fert; S. feror, ferris or re, fertur; 

P. feiimus, fertis, ferunt. P. ferimur, ferimini, feruntur. 

Imperf. ferebam, as, at, &c. ferebar, axis or re, atur, &c. 

Perf. tuli, isti, it, &c. latus sum or fui, &c. 

Pluperf. tuleram, as, at, &c. latus eram or fueram, &c. 

Fut. I. feram, es, et, &c. ferar, eris or re, etur, &c. 

Fut. II. tulero, is, it, &c. latus ero or fuero. 

Subjunctive. 
Pres. feram, as, at, &c. ferar, are or ris, atur, &c. 

Imperf. ferrem, es, et, &c. ferrer, ere or ris, etur, &c. 

Perf. tulerim, is, it, &c. latus sim or fuerim, &c. 

Pluperf. tulissem, es, et, &c. latus essem or fuissem, &c. 

Imperative. 
Pres. S. fer; P. ferte. S. ferre; P. ferimini. 

Fut. S. ferto, ferto; P. fertote, fe- S. fertor, fertor; P. feriminor, ferun- 
runto. tor. 

Infinitive. 
Pres. ferre. Perf. tulisse. Pres. ferri. Perf. latum esse or 

Fut. laturum esse. fuisse. Fut. latum Iri. 

Participles. 
Pres. ferens. Fut. laturus. Perf. latus. Fut. ferendus. 

Gerund. Supines. 

ferendi, do, dum, do. latum. — latu. 

So also the compounds ctffero, antefero, an fero (= ah + fero), circumfero, 
conferd, clef ero, diffefo, &c. — Instead of susiuli, the proper perfect of suffero, 
the form sustima (from sustineo) is commonly employed, and sustiili, as well as 
the supine subldtum, are considered parts of the verb tollo, I pick up, take away. 

<. 

8. Flo, fieri, factus sum, I become, am made. 

Indicative. Subjunctive. 

Present. 
S. flo, fis, fit; S. flam, fias, flat; 

P. ilmus, fitis, fiunt. P. fiamus, fiatis, fiant. 

Imperfect. 
S. fiebam, as, at; S. fierem, es, et; 

P. fiebamus, atis, ant. P. fieremus, etis, ent. 

Future. Infinitive. 

S. flam, es, et; Pres. fieri. Perf. factum esse. 

P. fiemus, etis, ent. Fut. factum Iri. 

The remaining parts of this verb are from facere. Such are factus, facien- 
dus, factus sum, eram, ero, &c 

Among the compounds of fo are the defective infit, he begins; deft (defunt, 
clef at, deferi), there is wanting, and conft (conferi), there is made. 

9. Eo, Ire, ivi (li), itum, I go. 

Indicative. Subjunctive. 

Present. 

S. eo, Is, it; S. earn, eas,_eat; 

P. Imus, Itis, eunt. P. eamus, eatis, eant. 



G70 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



S. Ibam, Ibas, ibat; 

P. ibamus, ibatis, Ibant. 

S. Ivi, ivisti, ivit; 
P. iviruus, &c. 



S. Iveram (ieram), as, at; 
P. iveramus, &c. 

Future 
Future I. 

S. Ibo, Ibis, Ibit; 

P. ibimus, Ibitis, Ibunt. 

Imperative. 
Pres. S. I — P. Ite. 
Fr _ $ S. Ito — P. itote 
r _j S. Ito — P. euuto. 

Gerund. 

eundi, do, dum, do. 



IMPERFECT. 

S. Irern, Ires, Iret; 
P. iremus, iretis, Irent. 
Perfect. 

S. Iverim (ierim), iveris, &c. 
P. iverimus, &c. 
Pluperfect. 

S. ivissem, ivisses, ivisset; 
P. ivissemus, &c. 

Tenses Indicative. 

Future II. 
S. ivero, iveris, iverit; 
P. iverimus, &c. 

Infinitive. 

Pres. Ire. 

Perf. ivisse or isse. 

Fut. iturum (am, um), esse. 

Participles. 

Pres. iens, gen. euntis. 
Fut. iturus, a, um. 

Supines. 

Pass. Itu. 



Act. Itum, 

So the compounds abeo, adeo, coeo, exeo, ineo.intereo, pereo, praetereo, prodeo, 
redeo. But all these have generally ii instead of Ivi in the perfect; as, abi i, 
exii, pern, prodii, &c. To these add veneo (= venum + eo), I am sold. Ambio, 
I go around, is the only compound regularly conjugated like audio, and has 
consequently ambiebam, ambiens, ambiendi, &c. 

The only passive forms of eo are the impersonal Uur and Hum est. But the 
compounds of eo which have acquired a transitive sense have a regular passive 
voice; as, adeo,ineo, praetereo. 

A future in earn, ies, let, ient (instead of ibo, ibis, &c), occurs only in later 
authors, and is confined to the compounds. 

10. Queo, quire, quivi, quitum, I can. 

11. ISequeo, nequire, nequivi (neqirii), nequitum, I cannot. 

Present Indicative. 



S. queo, qui*, quit; 

P. qulmus, quids, qucunt. 



quibam, as, at; 
quibamus, &c. 



qui vi — quivit; 
— — qmverunt. 



S. nequeo, nequls, nequit; 
P. nequimus, nequitis, nequeunt. 
Imperfect. 

S. nequibam, as, at; 
P. nequibiimus, &c. 
Perfect. 

S. nequivi, nequisti, nequivit (nequiit) ; 
— nequiverunt (nequierunt). 



S. quibo — — ; 

P. — — quibunt. 



P. 
Pluperfect. 

S. — — 
P. — — 
Future. 

S. — — 
P. - — 
Present Subjunctive 



nequierat. 
nequitrant. 



nequlbunt. 



S. queam, queas, queat; 

P. queamus, queiitis, queant. 



nequeam, nequeas, nequeat; 
nequeamus, &c. 






DEFECTIVE VERBS. 071 

Imperfect. 

S. quirem — qulret; S. nequlrem — nequlret; 

*• — quirent. P. nequiremus — nequlrent. 

Perfect. 

S- — — quiverit. S. nequiverim - - nequierit; 



Pluperfect. 



nequiermt. 



£• — ? S. — — nequisset; 

1 . — — nequissent. p. _ _ nequissent. 

Infinitive. 

Pres. quire. Terf. quivisse Pres. nequire. Perf. nequivisse 

(quisse). (nequisse). 

Participle. 
Pres. quiens, gen. queuntis. Pres. nequiens, gen. nequeun.tis. 

These verbs are both conjugated like eo. Many of the forms, however, are 
seldom used, except those of the present. Nepos and Caesar never employ 
any of them. Instead of nequeo Cicero frequentlv puts rum queo. 



1 assive forms are quitur, nequltur, guila est, nequUum est, but 
used, and only in connection with an infinitive passive. E. 
non quita est, The form could not be distinguished. 



these are rarelv 



C. DEFECTIVE VERBS. 

Defective verbs are those which occur only in certain forms 
and connections. 

The principal verbs of this class are aio and inquam, I say ; fori, 
to speak ; the prapteritives coepi, I have begun ; memini, I remember; 
novi, I know ; odi, I hate ; the imperatives "~apage, ave, salve, and vale. 
So also cedo, quaeso, axidforem. 

1. Aio, I say. 

Indic. Pres. aio, ais, ait; P. — — aiunt. 

" Imperf. aiebam, as, at; P. aiebamus, atis, ant. 

" Perfect. — — ait. 
Subj. Pres. — aias, aiat; P. — — aiant. 
Imper. ai {obsolete). Part, aiens (only as adject). 

Instead of the interrogative aisne the contracted am' frequently occurs. 

2. Inquam, I say. 

Indic. Pres. inquam, inquis, inquit; P. inquimus, inquitis, inquiunt. 
Imperf. inquiebam, &c. P. inquiebamus, &o. 

" Perf. — inquisti, inquit; P. — inquistis, — . 

" Future. — inquies. inquiet; P. — — — . 
Subj. Pres. — inquias, inquiat; P. — inquiatis, inquiant. 
Imperat. S. inque, inquito; P. inquite. 

The present inquam sometimes supplies the place of the first person perfect 
which is wanting. ' 

3. Fari, to speak, say. 

Indic. Pres. — — fatur; P. — — fantur. 

Imperat. fare. Part, fatus, a, urn. Ger. fando. 

So the compound forms affdmur, affarMni, affabar, efdbor, efabcris. This 
verb rarely occurs except in poetry. The first person for, and" the subj. fer, 
jctur, are never used. 

2Q 57 



G72 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



4. Coepi, coepisse. coepturns, I have begun. 



5. 


Memini, meminisse. , I remember. 




6. 


Xovi, novis 


se 


, II- now. 




7. 


Odi, odisse, 


Of 


urns, I hate. 

Indicative Perfect. 




s. 


coepi 




memini nGvi 


odi 




coepisti, 




meministi novisti (nosti) 


odisti 




coepit, 




merainit, novit, 


odit, 


p. 


coeplmus 




meminimus novimus 


odimus 




coepistis 




meminisl - novistis (nostis) 


odistis 




coeperunt. 




meminerunt. noverunt (norunt). 
Pluperfect. 


ode runt. 




coeperam, 




memineram, noveram (noram), 


oderam. 




as, at, &c. 




as, at, Sec. as, at, See. 

FUTURE. 


as, at, Sec. 




coepero, 




meminero, novero, 


odero, 




is, it, &c. 




is, it, &c. is, it. Sec. 
SuBjuwcnvB Perfect. 


is, it, Szc. 




coeperim, 




merainerim, novt-rim (nurim). 


oderim, 




is, it, Sec 




is, it, Sec. is, it, Sec. 
Pluperfect. 


is, it. Sec. 




coepissem, 




meminissem, novis«em (nossem, 


odissem. 




es, et, Sec. 




es, et, & 3. es, et, Sec. 


es, et, &c 



Imperative. 
( Wanting.) S. memento, 
P. mementute. 

Infinitive, 



( Wanting.) 



coepisse. 
Perf. Pass, coeptus. — 



odisse. 



memimsse. novisse. 

Participles. 

— perusu?, exr^us 

[active}. 
Fit. Act. coepturus. — — osuros. 

Of the above verbs memini. no'-i, and rrli have a present signification. TTenee 
the pluperfect has the sense of the imperfect, and the second future that of the 
first 

Instead of coepi the passive coeptus est is al-o used, especially in connection 
-with the infinitive passive. E. g. Oppugndri coeptum ett oppkhtm, The town 
began to be besieged. 

8. Apfige, away! Ave, Salve, hail. Yale, farewell. 

.: t has sometimes an accusative after it : as, Apage te, Away with you! 
also occurs in the present indie, salveo. Vale and are are regular 
imperatives of the verbs raleo, I am well, and aven, I am desirous, and are 
defective only in consequence of the change of signification. 

All of these imperatives have also a plural and a future form; as, 
S. ave. F. av-7to. P. avete. 
S. salve. F. salveto. P. salvete. 
S. vale. F. valeto. P. valete. 

Future forms with the imperative force are salc'.bis, val'bis. 
Infinitives are solvere, valere. 

9. Cede... give me, or say, tell. 

Th!^ verb may stand either as the singular or plural. Special plural forms 
are cedite and cette. Its sense is similar to that of the French ienez. 



VERBS IRREGULAR IN THE PERFECT AND SUPINE. C73 

10. Quaeso, I pray, pray. 

This verb is most commonly interjected in the sentence, like the English 
"pray," "please." Its plural is quaesumus. 

11. Forem, I might be. 

From the obsolete root fuo, and contracted for fuerem. It is otherwise regu- 
laiyand the infinitive is, fore, "to be about to be." (Cf. page 666.) 



D. VERBS WHICH ARE IRREGULAR IN THE FORMATION 
OF THE PERFECT AND SUPINE. 

Many Latin verbs are irregular in the formation of the second and 
third roots, "which frequently assume the characteristics of another 
conjugation. These will be enumerated and examined in the follow- 
ing lists, according to their respective conjugations. 

I. First Conjugation. 

Regular verbs of the first conjugation end in o, are, avi, 
citztm. E. g. 

Ambiilo, ambullire, ambulavi, ambulfitum, to walk. 
Celo, celare, celavi, celatum, to conceal. 
Impero, imperare, imperavi, imperatum, to command. 
Vulnero, vulnerare, vulneravi, vulneratum, to wound. 

Several verbs of the first conjugation follow the analogy of 
the second, and form their perfect in ul and the supine in itum. 
A few more are otherwise irregular in these parts. They are : — 

Crcpo, are, creptii, crepitum, to Frico, are, fricui, fricatum or fri- 

ring, clatter, resound. ctum, to rub. 

Compounds are concrepdre, discre- So the compos, defricdre, infricdre, 

pare, and increpare. j)erfricdre, and refricdre. 

Cubo, are, cubui, cubitum, to lie, Jtivo, are, jiivi, jutum, juvaturus, 

recline. to assist, help. 

So the compounds acciibo, excubo, So also adjuvdre, adjuvi, adjutum, 

in cubo, seciibo, and others. But the adjutants or adjuoatums. 

compos, of cubo which take an m T «■ - ^ i- • i„ -. i . 

before b are of the third conjugation Luv0 ' 7 ; ire ' laV1 ' ^atum, lautum, 

(c. g. diseumbere). — The regular per- and lotum, to wash: 

fects cubdvi and incubdvi also occur. An infinitive lavcre occurs in the 

x>._ -.^ j -j- I-. . • older Latinitv and in poetrv. 

Do, dare, dedi, datum, to give. _•.„.• J 

So circumdare, pessunddre, satisdd- ALico, are, micui, , to glitter, 

re, and venunddre. But the remaining shine. 

compos, belong to the third conjuga- So emico, ore, emieui, emiedtum. But 

tion; as, addi're, condere, reddere, &c. dimico, I contend, fight, has the regu- 

— Obsolete forms of the pres. subj. Jar perfect dimicdvi. 

a.re€kdm,dui S ,duit, from the second*. m a av j at f m - 
ry duo. 



regular, but the 

Domo, are, domui, domitum, to Compos, enecdre has am, alum and 
tame, curb. enecui, enectum. The participle is com- 

So the compos, edomdre and perdu- monly enectus ; internecdre has inter- 
mare. needtus. 



674 LATIN GRAMMAR. 

PIico, are, avi and ui, atum and compounds have Ui in the perfect; 

ltum to fold as ' ^ st ^ re i constdre, perf. adstiti, con- 

So the compos". qpBcfire, ampfefl- **J S °^™' Sf^Sf^ffi 

re, explicdre, and implicdre. But rfa- ™"f> P™**™'^ ana res«a e. borne 

pica, multiplico, and no**, which of these compounds want the supine. 

ire derived" fn/m. adjectives in ^, gSSS^^ffitaff^S^fflS 

have regularly aw. d^m. .rroestare nas (in later autnors oni\ ) 

& _/. ' sup. praeslitum, but very frequently 

Poto, are, avi, potatum ana more •praestaturus. 

commonly potum, to drink. T6no? ^re, tonui, (tonitum,) to 

The participle is /><5<hs, which is both thunder 

passive, "drunk," and active, "having c ', "_ , , ««»'■■* 

drunk." The compos, op/tfte is ac- _ So attonare ( V ^rt. attmitm), into- 

tive, "having drunk sufficiently"; ^«re (part mtomv/» S ); but c»ru«to- 

an? epotus, passive, "emptied "by ^e wants the third root, 

drinking." "V eto, are, vetiii, vetitum, to jaro- 

Seeo, are, secui, sectuin, secatu- hibit, forbid. 

rus, to ci^. , . , . . 

Compos, desecare, dissecare, perse- a 05^ Among the irregularities of the 

care. But praesecdre and resecdre first conjugation maybe included the 

have cdtum or ctum in the supine. P 6 ^ Participles of the verbs coenare 

„. ■ _ and j ware, which are used in an 

bono, are, sonui, sonitum, sonatu- ac tiv*e sense ; — coendtus, " having 

rus, to sound. dined" ; jwdtus, " having sworn." So 

So consondre, dissondre, persondre, the compounds conjwdtus, " having 

resondre. conspired," and in jwdtus, "one who 

Sto, stare, steti, statum, to stand. has notfrorn." f m0 " g Jater authors 

c ' . ' - 1 .. ' . , .. conspiratus is used activelv like co«;«- 

So an^^^re, circujnstare, mterstare, ' ^ fa ^ same ^ 



and superstore. But the remaining 

II. Second Conjugation. 
Regular verbs of the second conjugation end in eo, ere, ui, 
itum. E. g. 

Debeo, debere, debui, debitum, to owe. 
Habeo, habere, habui, habitum, to have. 
Mereo, merere, merui, meritum, to earn. 
Taceo, tacere, tacui, taciturn, to be silent. 
The verbs of the second conjugation, which deviate from the forms 
exhibited in these examples, may be divided into, — 

1. Those which are irregular or defective in the formation of the 
perfect or supine roots, but yet remain within the limits of the conju- 
gation. 

2. Those which follow the analogy of the third conjugation in the 
formation of those parts. 

3. Those which want the second and third roots entirely. 

4. Semideponentia. 

1. The verbs of the second conjugation which are irregular 
or defective in the second or third root, but still do not tran- 
scend the limits of the conjugation, are, — 

a) Those which have vi instead of vui, or evi instead of ui, 
in the perfect. 
Caveo, ere, cavi, cautum, to beware. Conniveo, ere, nivi and nixi, , 

So praecavere. to close the eyes, to wink. 



VERBS IRREGULAR IN THE PERFECT AND SUPINE. G75 



Deleo, ere, delevi, deletum, to ex- 
tinguish, destroy. 
Faveo, ere, favi, fautum, to favor. 
Ferveo, ere, fervi and ferbui, 

, to glow, to be hot. 

Obsolete are the forms fervit,fervat, 
fervere, according to trie third conj. 
The double perfect (in vi and bui) ex- 
tends also to the inchoatives defer- 
vescere, effervescere, and refervescere. 
But confervescere has generally con- 
fer bui. 

Fleo, flere, flevi, fletum, to weep. 
Foveo, fovere, fovi, fotum, to 

cherish. 
Moveo, ere, movi, motum, to move. 

So the compos, amovere, admovere, 
commovere, permovere, &c. 

The root ol, to grow, gives rise 
to the compos, aboleo, I abolish ; 

b) Those which have turn 
supine. 

Censeo, ere, censui, censum, to 

suppose, think. 

The participle census occurs with an 
active sense. So also census sum, from 
a deponent censeor. Percenseo wants 
the supine. Accenseo has accensus ; 
succtnseo, successurus ; and recenseo, 
two supines recensum and recensitum. 

Doceo, ere, dociii, doctum, to teach. 
So the compos, dedocere, edocere, 
and perdocere. 

Misceo, ere, miscui, mistum or 

mixtum, to mix. Torreo, ere, torriii, tostum, to roast. 

c) Those which have ui in the perfect regularly, but no 
supine. 



abolesco, I cease ; adoleo and 

adolesco, I grow up ; exoleo or 

exolesco and obsoleo or obsolesco, 

I grow out of use ; all of which 

have em in the perfect. 

The supine of aboleo is abolitum. The 

rest want this part entirely, but have 

given rise to the adjectives adultus, 

exoletus, and obsoletus. 

Paveo, ere, pavi, , to fear, 

tremble. 

From this the inchoative expavesco, 
ere, expcivi, of which the perfect is 
especially frequent. 

The root ple, to fill, gives rise 
to the compos, compleo, expleo, 
and impleo, I fill, fill up 5 all of 
which have evi, etum. 

Voveo, ere, vovi, votum, to vow. 
So the compos, devovere, to curse. 

or sum instead of itum in the 



The supine mixtum is the more com- 
mon and correct. Compos, are ad- 
misccre, commiscere, immiscere, ptr- 
miscere. 

Teneo, ere, tenui, (tentum,) to 

hold. 

Compos, absfmcre, allincre, contine- 
re, detinere, distinere, retinere, and 
siistinfre, all of which have tentum in 
the supine. Pertinere wants the su- 
pine, and the simple tentum rarely oc- 
curs. 



Arceo, ere, arcui, to drive away. 

But the compos, coercere and exer- 
cere have a supine in itum. 

Calleo, ere, callui, to be callous. 
Candeo, ere, candui, to shine, to 

glow. 
Egeo, ere, egui, to ivant, need. 

Compos, indigere. 
Emineo, ere, eminiii, to project, 

rise aloft. 
Floreo,ere,florui, to bloom, flourish. 
Frondeo, ere, frondui (and effron- 

dui), to have leaves. 

57* 



Horreo, ere, horriii, to shiver, 

shudder. 

So abhorrere and a number of in- 
choatives. 

Langueo, ere, langiii, to languish. 
Luteo, ere, lutui, to be concealed, 

to be hid. 

Compos, mterlatere, perlatere, and 
svblatere. 

Madeo, ere, madiii, to be wet. 
Niteo, ere, nitiii, to shine. 

Compos, enitere, internitcre, and 
praenitt re. 



676 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



Oleo, ere, oliii, to smell. 

Compos, obolire, redolere, and sub- 
olere. 

Palleo, ere, palliii, to be pale. 
Pateo, ere, patui, to stand open. 
Pigeo, ere, rigui, to be stiff. 
Rubeo, ere, rubui, to be red. 
Sileo, ere, silui, to be silent. 
Sorbeo, ere, sorbui, to sip. 

The perfect sorpsi rarely occurs. 
Compos, are absorbere and exsorbere. 



Splendeo, ere, splendiii, to sliine. 

Studeo, ere, studui, to strive. 

Stupeo, ere, stupui, to be aston- 
ished, amazed. 

Timeo, ere, timui, to be afraid. 

Torpeo, ere, torpui, to be torpid. 

Tumeo, ere, tumui, to be tumid, to 
swell. 

Yigeo, ere, vigui, to be lively, 
strong. 

Vireo, ere, virui, to be green. 



Sordeo, ere, sordui, to be filthy. 

Remark. — Besides the verbs here enumerated, there are a number of 
others, derived from adjectives. But these occur more rarely in the form here 
presented, and are generally inchoatives. Cf. F. 

2. The verbs of the second conjugation which form the per- 
fect and supine after the analogy of the third, are as follows : — 

a) Those which have i in the perfect and sum in the supine. 

Mordeo, ere, momordi, morsum, Strideo, ere, stridi, , to hiss. 



to bite. 
Pendeo, ere, pependi, pensum, to 

hang. 

The compos, dependeo and impendeo 
lose the reduplication: dependi, impen- 
di. 
Prandeo, ere, prandi, pransum, to 

dine. 

The participle pransus has an active 
sense, " having dined." 

Sedeo, ere, sedi, sessum, to sit. 

So the compos. assldPre, circumse- 
dcre or circumsidere, desidere, insid<~re, 
obsidere, possidere, and supersedere. 
But dissidere and pratsidcre want the 
supine. 



This verb wants the supine. In 
poetry the infinitive is often stridere. 

Spondeo, ere, spopondi, sponsum, 

to vow, promise. 

Compounds drop the reduplication; 
as, despondeo, desponsi ; respondeo, re- 
sponse. 
Tondeo, ere, totondi, tonsum, to 

shave. 

Compounds without reduplication 
are attondeo, attondi ; detondeo, dttun- 
di. 

Video, ere, vidi, visum, to see. 

So the compos, inrid're, pervidcre, 
praevidere, and providere. 



b) Those which have si in the perfect and sum in the supine. 



Ardeo, ere, arsi, arsum, to be on 
fire, to burn. 

Denseo, ere, densi, densus (ad- 
jective), to thicken. 

Haereo, ere, haesi, haesum, to ad- 
here, stick. 
Compos, are adhaerere, cohaerere, 

inhaerere. 

Jubeo, ere, jussi, jussura, to com- 
mand, bid. 
Maneo, ere, mansi, mansum, to 

remain. 

Compos, permancre, remanere. 



Mulceo, ere, mulsi, mulsum, to 
soothe, caress. 
Compos, demulcere and permulcere. 

The participle permulelus for permul- 
sus is doubtful. 

Mnlgeo, ere, mulsi, mulsum, to 
milk. 
Comp. part, emulsus. 

Rideo, ere, risi, risum, to laugh 4 
Compos, arridtre, deridere, irridtre, 

subridere. 

Suadeo, ere, suasi, suasum, to ad- 
vise. 
Compos, dissuadtre, persuade re. 



VERBS IRREGULAR IN THE PERFECT AND SUPINE. G77 

Tergeo, ere, tersi, tersum, to wipe, the compos, abstergere, detergere, ex- 
This verb is even more frequently of tergere, are more commonly of the 
the third conj., iergo, ere, si, sum. But second. 

c) Those which have si or xi in the perfect, and turn in the 
supine, or supine wanting. 

Augeo, ere, auxi, auctum, to in- Luceo, ere, luxi, , to shine. 

crease. Lugeo, ere, luxi, , to mourn. 

Frigeo, ere, frixi, , to be Torqueo, ere, torsi, tortum, to 

cold. turn, twist. 

Indulgeo, ere, indulsi, indultum, Compos, contorquere, distorqucre, 

to indulge. extorqucre. 

d) Those which have si in the perfect, but no supine. 

Algeo, ere, alsi, to be cold. Turgeo, ere, tursi (rarely), to 

The supine is wanting, but an ad- swell. 

jective alms, a, urn, coo^cold, exists. Urgeo ( urgueo ), ere, ursi, to urge, 

Fulgeo, ere (in poetry also fulge- impel. 

re), fulsi, to glitter. 

3. Those which have neither perfect nor supine. 
Aveo, ere, to desire. (Cf. p. 672.) Flaveo, ere, to be yellow. 
Calveo, ere, to be bald. Foeteo, ere, to stink: 
Caneo, ere, to be gray. Hebeo, ere, to be dull. 
Cieo, ciere, to move, rouse. Humeo, ere, to be moist. 

An obsolete form of this verb is eio, Llveo, ere, to be livid, 

cire. Both have the common perfect Mlneo, ere, to hang over. 

elm, supine citum (from cteo) and citum Com imm inere, prominere. 

(from cio). Compos, are concieo, ex- ^ »■* 

cieo, incieo, per cieo. Participles in use Moereo^ere, to mourn, to be sad. 

are concitus, excitus, moved, excited; Polleo, ere, to have power. 

but excitus, called out. So incitus and Renldeo, ere, to shine ; to smile, 

percitusm the sense of "to move '; ^ M - (sometimes scat ere), to 

but accire, to call, has only acettus. ^ ' A /' 

From citum the frequentative citdre, swarm with. 

and the compos, excitare, incildre, and Squaleo, ere, to be filthy, 

suscitdre. Yegeo, ere, to be active. 

4. The following semideponentia. (Cf. page 161, Rem. 4.) 
Audeo, ere, ausus sum, to dare, Gaudeo, ere, gavisus sum (Part. 

venture. Fut. gavisurus), to rejoice. 

An obsolete perfect is ausi, from Soleo, ere, solitus sum, to be ac~ 

which the future subjunctive ausim, customed, 

ausis, ausit, ausint. The poets use the Compos, impers. assolet. 

participle ausus and mausus m a pas- x r 
sive sense. 

TIL Third Conjugation. 

The verbs of the third conjugation exhibit the greatest diversity in 
the formation of their perfect and supine. The regular formation of 
the perfect has already been explained on page 23 7, Rem. 3, notes f 
and J, and that of the supine on page 246, Rem. 3. For the sake of 
clearness on this point, we will here enumerate the different classes of 
regular verbs, arranged according to the termination of their first root, 



678 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



and then add to each class the verbs which deviate from the estab- 
lished rule. 

1. Verbs which have a vowel or a v before the final o of the 
present, form their perfect in i and the supine in turn. E. g. 

Acuo,ere,acui,acutum, to sharpen. Pluo, ere, pliii, generally impcr- 



Compos. exacuere, peracuere, and 
praeacuere. 

Arguo, ere, argiii, argutum, to 

accuse. 

Compos, coarguere, redarc/uere. The 
perf. part, is commonly convictus. 
Congruo, ere, congrui, , to 

agree. 

Supine wanting. So also ingruere 
(primitive root not in use). 

Imbuo, ere, inibui, imbutum, to 

dip, steep. 
Induo, ere, indui, indutum, to put 

on. 

So also exuere. 
Luo, ere, lui, lutum (luiturus), to 

pay, atone for. 

From another luo, I wash, are de- 
rived the compos, abluere, eluere, dilu- 
ere, and polluere, all of which have 
a supine in lutum. 

Metuo, ere, metiii, , to fear. 

The supine metutum rarely occurs. 
Minuo, ere, minui, minutum, to 

diminish. 

Compos, eomminuere, deminuere, cli- 
minuere, and imminuere. 

(Nuo, to beckon, is not used.) 

Compos, abnuo, ere, abnui, abniiiurus, 
to deny, refuse. Others are annuere, 
innueve, and renuere, all without su- 
pine. 



sonal pluit, it rains. 

Compos, compluere, impluere, and 
perpluere, commonly likewise imper- 
sonal and without supine. 

Ruo, ere, riii, ruiturus, to fall. 
Compos, have supine in rfdum ; as, 

diruere, obruere, and prortiere. But 

corruere and irruere want the supine. 

Solvo, ere, solvi, solutum, to loos- 
en, untie. 
Compos, absolvere, dissolvere, exsoV- 

vere,j)er solvere. 

Spuo, ere, spui, sputum, to spit. 

Compos, conspuere and despuere. 
Statuo, ere, statui, statutum, to 

place, establish. 

Compos, constitucre, desfitvere, insti- 
tuere, restituere, and substituere. 

Sternuo, ere, sternui, , to 

sneeze. 

From this the frequentative sternu- 
tdre. 
Suo, ere, siii, sutum, to seiv. 

Compos, consuere, dissuere, and re- 
suere. 
Tribuo, ere, tribiii, tributum, to 

bestow, impart. 

Compos, attribuere, contribuere, and 
distribuere. 

Yolvo, ere, volvi, voliitum, to roll. 

Compos, evohere, involvere, and^er- 
volvere. Frequentative votutare. 



Irregular verbs of this class are, 



Capio, ere, cepi, captum, to take. 

So antecapere. But other compounds 
change a into i, and the supine a into 
e ; as, accipere, excipere, deciper.e, per- 
cipere, praecipere, recipere, suscipere, 
all of which have ceplum in the supine. 

Cupio, ere, cupivi, cupitum, to 

desire. 

An imperf. subj. cuplret occurs. 
Compos, discupere and percupere. 
Facio, ere, feci, factum, to do, 

make. 

Sonref'icere, calefacere, consueface- 
re, frigefacere, labefacere, patefacere, 



satisfacere, and tepefacere, all of which 
have fio, fieri, f actus sum in the pas- 
sive. Other compounds change a into 
i, and have a passive in icior, supine 
in ectum ; as, officio, afficior, affectum. 
So also con fi cere, de fie ere, interficere, 
officere, perficere, proficere, and refi- 
cere. 
Fluo, ere, fluxi, fluxum, to flow. 

Compos, affluere, conjiuere, effluere, 
inter -fluere. 

Fodio, ere, fodi, fossum, to dig. 
Compos, eonfodeve, effodere, perfo- 

dere, suffodere. 



IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION. 679 



Fiigio, ere, fugi, fugitum, to flee. 

Compos, aufugere, confugere, effu- 
gere, and perfugere. 

Jacio, ere, jeei, jactum, to throw. 

So superjacere, which however has 
also superjectam. Other compounds 
change a into i, and in the supine into 
e ; as, abjicio, abjeci, abjectum. So also 
adjiccre, dejicere, ejicere, injicere, ob- 
jicere, rejicere, iransjicere, or trajicere. 



Compos, conditio, for,, ejtssi, cussum. 
So discutio, excutio, incutio, percutio, 
reperculio. 

Rapio, ere, rapui, raptum, to seize, 
rob. 

Compos, arripio, arripfd, arveptum. 
So abripere, deripere, eripere, surripere. 

Sapio, ere, sapivi and sapid, , 

to taste ; to be ivise. 



So resipere, to smell after. But de- 
(Laeio, frequentat. lactare, I at- s ipere has no perfect. 
hire, obsolete.) Specio, ere, spexi, spectum, to see. 

Compos, in use are alUcio.ere, allexi. Compos, aspicio, spexi, spectum. So 



aUectum, to allnre; and so ilficere and 
pellicere. But elicio has elicui, elicitum. 

Pario, ere, peperi, partum (but 
pariturus), to bring forth. 
An infinitive pariri instead of pari 

occurs. 

Quatio, ere, , quassum, to 

shake. 



also completive, despicere, dispicere, in- 
spiceve, perspicere, respiceve, and suspi- 
ceve. 

Struo, ere, struxi, structural, to 

build. 

So construere, exstruere, destruere, 
and instruere. 

Vivo, ere, vixi, victum, to live. 

2. Verbs ending in bo or po form their perfect in psi and 
the supine in ptam. E. g. 



Carpo, ere, carpsi, carptum, to 

pluck. 

Compos, concerpo, concerpsi. concer- 
ptum. So decerpere and discerpere. 
Glubo, ere, glupsi, gluptum, to 

peel. 
Nubo, ere, nupsi, nuptum, to veil, 

to marry. 

Compos, obnubcre. 

Repo, ere, repsi, reptum, to creep. 

Compos, adrepi're, ivrepere, obrepe- 
re,2>rorepere, and subvepere. 



Scalpo, ere, scalpsi, scalptum, to 

carve, engrave. 
Scrlbo, ere, scripsi, scriptum, to 

ivrite. 

So the compos, adscribere, describe- 
re, inscribere, and praescvibere. 

Sculpo, ere, sculpsi, sculptum, to 

cut, sculpture. 

Compos, exsculpere and insculpere. 
Serpo, ere, serpsi, serptum, to 

creep. 

So inserpere, proserpere. 



Irregular verbs of this class are, — 



Accumbo, ere, cubui, cubitum, to 

recline. 

So all the compounds of citbdre, 
which assume an m; as, discumbere, 
ineumbere, occumbere, procuinbere, and 
succiunbore. 
Bibo, ere, bibi, bibitum, to drink. 

Compos, ebibere, imbibere. 
Lambo, ere, Iambi, lambitum, to 



Rumpo, ere, rupi, ruptum, to 

burst, break. 

Compos, abrtnnprre, cormimpeve, e- 
rvmpere, iriterrumpere, irrumpere, per- 
rumpcre, prorumpere. 

Scabo, ere, scabi, , to scratch, 

rub. 
Strepo, ere, strepui, strepitum, to 

rumble, rattle. 



lick. 

3. Verbs ending in do or to form their perfect in si and the 

supine in sum. E. g. 

Claudo, ere, clausi, clausum, to The compos are derived from an 
7 . otlior form, dado; as, concludere, ex- 

s,ult - cludere, includere, secludcre. 



680 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



Divido, ere, divisi, divlsum, to di- 
vide. 

Laedo, ere, laesi, laesum, to hurt, 
injure. 
Compos, all'idere, collidere, elldere, 

illldere. 

Ludo, ere, liisi, lusum, to play. 
Compos, alludcre, colludere, deludere, 

eludere, and illudere. 



Eado, ere, rasi, rasum, to scrape. 

So abradere, circumradere, corra- 
dere, deradere, and eradere. 
Eodo, ere, rosi, rosum, to gnaiv. 

Compos, abrodere, arrodcve, circum- 
rodere, derodere, and perrodere. 

Trudo, ere, trusi, trusum, to push. 
Compos, detrudere, extrudere, pro- 
trudere. 

Plaudo, ere, plausi, plausum, to Vado, ere, , , to go, icalk. 

Perfect and supine wanting. But 
evado, evasi, evdsum. So also mvadere 
and pervadere. 



clap, beat. 
So applandei 



The remaining com- 



pos, have odo, osi, osum; as, coinplo- 
dere, exploder e, supplodere. 



The irregular verbs of this class are, — 
a) Those which form their perfect in di and the supine in 



sum. E. g. 

Accendo, ere, accendi, accensum, 

to set on fire. 

So incendere and succendere. 
Ciido, ere, cudi, cusum, to pound, 

forge. 

Compos, excudere, procudere. 
Defendo, ere, di, sum, to defend. 
Edo, ere, edi, esum, to eat. 

So exedere and comedere, edi, esum 
(hut also comestus). 
Fundo, ere, fudi, fusum, to pour. 

Compos, are affundere, confundi're, 
diffundere, ejf'nndere, infundere, off'un- 
dire, and profundere. 



Mando, ere, mansi, (rarely} man- 
sum, to chew, masticate. 

OfTendo, ere, di, sum, to offend. 

Prehendo (prendo), ere, di, sum, 
to lay hold of. 
Compos, apprehendere, comprehen- 

dere, deprehendere, and repi^ehendere. 

Scando, ere, di, sum, to climb. 

So ascendere, conscendere, descende- 
re, inscendere. 

Strido (also strideo), ere, strldi, 
, to creak, grate. 



b) Those which have reduplicated perfect. E. g. 



Cado, ere, cecidi, casum, to fall. 

Compos, ineido, inchli, incasum. So 
occtdere and reeidere. But the remain- 
ing compos, want the supine; as, acci- 
dit, concido, decido, and excido. 
Caedo, ere, cecidi, caesum, to cut. 

Compos, absc'ido, abscidi, absclsum. 
So conc'tdrre, decldert, excldere, incl- 
dere, occ'tdere, praec'tdere, &c. 

Condo, ere, coudidi, conditum, to 

construct. 

So the remaining compos, of dare, 
except those mentioned on page 673 ; 
as, abdtre, adder e, dedere, edere, perde- 
re, reddere, tradere, and vendire. But 
abscondere has generally perf. abseondi 
instead of abscondidi; and instead of 
the passive vendi, it is common to say 
venire. 



Credo, ere, credidi, creditum, to 

believe. 

So accredere, accredidi. 
Pedo, ere, pepedi, peditum, to 

break wind. 
Pendo, ere, pependi, pensum, to 

weigh. 

Compos, appendo, appendi,appcnsum. 
So likewise without reduplication de- 
pendere, expcndere, impendere, perpen- 
dere, susp>endere. 

Tendo, ere, tetendi, tensum or 

tentum, to stretch. 

Compos, extendo, extendi, externum 
and extentum; and so with hoth su- 
pines detendere, ostendere, protendere, 
and reiendire. The rest have supine 
\n tuni on\x ; as, attendere, contendere, 



IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION. GS1 



Compos, have only tusum, and no 
reduplication ; as, contundo, contftdi, 
cpntusum. So extundere, obtundere, and 
retundere. 



distendere, intendere, obtendere, prae- 
tendere, and subtendiire. ( But more 
commonly extent um, protentum, and 
vice versa ostensum.) 

Tundo, ere, tutudi, tunsum and 
tusum, to beat, strike. 

c) Those which have ss in the supine, or are otherwise 
Irregular. 



Cedo, ere, cessi, cessum, to give 

place, to retire. 

So the compos, abscedo, accedo, ante- 
cedo, concedo, decedo, discedq, excedo, 
incedo, intercedo, recedo, and succedo. 

Fido, ere, fisus sum, to trust. 



Compos, are appcto, compete, expeto, 
oppeto, and repeto. 

Scindo, ere, scidi, scissum, to split, 

to tear. 

Compos, conscindo, eonscidi, conscis- 
sum. So also diseindere, inter sc hide re, 



So confldere, diffldere ; but these perseindcre, proscindere, and rescinde- 

have sometimes perf. confkli, diffkli, re. But abscindo has only abscindere, 

instead of conflsus sum, &c. abscidi, and exscindo only exscindere. 

Findo, ere, fidi, fissum, to cleave, Sido, ere, sidi or sedi, sessum, to 



split. 

So diffindere, diffldi. 
Frendo, ere, , fressum and 

fresum, to crush, grind. 

Instead of this 'Ahofrtndere,frendui. 
Meto, ere, messui, messum, to reap. 

Compos, demetere. Instead of rnessui 
and demessui more commonly messem 
feci. 

Mitto, ere, mlsi, missum, to send. 

So the compos, admitto, amitto, com- 
mitted demitte, dimitto, emitto, immitto, 
omitto, permitto, praetermitte, promitto, 
reviiltOfiLiid submitto. 

Pando, ere, pandi, passum {more 
rarely pansum), to lay open, set 
open. 
Expandere has expansum and expas- 

sum ; but dispandere, only dispansum. 

Peto, ere, petivi or petli, petitum, 
to ask. 



take a seat, sit down. 

Perfect and supine commonly from 
sedcre. Compos, consldo, consedi, con- 
sessum. So assldere, desldere, ins'idere, 
resldere, and subsldere. 

Sisto, ere, stiti (obsolete), statum, 

to put, set. 

But sisto in the sense of " to stand 
still" has steti, statum. The compos. 
are all intransitive and have stiti, sti- 
tum ; as, consisto, constiti, constitum. 
So adsisto, desisto, existo, insisto, obsisto, 
persisto, and resisto. Circumsto has 
either circumstlti or circumsteti. 

Sterto, ere, stertiii (obsolete sterti), 

, to snore, snort. 

Verto, ere, ti, sum, to turn. 

So the compos, adverto, animadverto, 
averto, converto, everto, perverto, and 
subverto. — Divertere, praevertcre, and 
revertere are more frequently depo- 



nents in the present and imperfect. 

4. Verbs ending in go, co, cto, quo, and guo form their per- 
fect in xi and the supine in ctum. E. g. 
Cingo, ere, cinxi, cinctum, to gird, So the compos, abducere, addfuere, 

surround. cireumducere, conducere, and a num- 

Compos. accine/ere and discingere. ber of otners - 
Coquo, ere, coxi, coctum, to cook. Fligo, ere, flixi, flictum, to strike 

So concoquere and decoquere. (obsolete) . 

Dlco, ere, dixi, dictum, to say. Compos, affligere, confiigere, infilgc- 

So the compos, addieo, contradlco, T e ' ? ut P™fW™ is of the first cou " 
edico, ind'ico, interdlco, and praedico. j ligation. 

Diico, ere, duxi, ductum, to lead, Fligo, ere, frixi, frietum (rarely 
conduct. frixum), to roast. 



682 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



Jungo, ere, junxi, junctum, to stinguo, which have regularly inxi, in- 

join together. 

So compos, adjungo, conjungo, dis- 
jungo, sejungo, and subjungo. 

Lingo, ere, linxi, linctum, to lick. 
Mungo, ere, mimxi, munctum, to 

blow the nose. 

Compos, emungere. 
Plango, ere, planxi, planctum, to 

strike ; to lament. 
Rego, ere, rexi, rectum, to guide, 

direct. 

Compos, arrigere, corrigere, dirige- 
re, erigere, porrigere. To these add 
pergo (tor per ri go), perrexi,perrei turn, 
and surgo (for surrigo), surrexi, surre- 
ctum. Compos, of surgo are assurgo, 
consurgo, exsurgo, and insurgo. 

Stinguo, 6re, , , to ex- 
tinguish (rarely used). 
Compos, in use are extinguo and re- 



ctum. So also distinguo and iusiinguo, 
but from another root. 

Sugo, ere, suxi, suctum, to suck. 
Tego, ere, texi, tectum, to cover. 

Compos, contegere, detegere, obtege- 
re,protegere, and retegere. 

Tingo (tinguo), ere, xi, ctum, to 

dip in, moisten. 
Traho, ere,traxi, tractum, to draw. 

So compos, attrdho, contralto, detru- 
7(0, ext raho, ])ertruho,prolrdho, retrdho, 
and subtrciho. 

Ungo (or unguo), ere, unxi, tin- 

ctum, to anoint. 

Compos. perungere and inungere. 
Velio, ere, vexi, vectum (frequent. 

vecto), to carry, convey. 

So advehere, invehere. — The passive 
is vehor, vehi, rectus sum, to drive, ride. 
So circumcihur, invehor, praetervehor. 



The irregular verbs of this class are, — 
a) Those which reject the n before ctum in the supine, or 
assume xum. 
Ango, ere, anxi, , to choke. Xingo, ere, uinxi, , to snow 

(Supine wanting.) (commonly impers. ningit, Sec.). 

Clango, ere, , , to sound. Pecto, ere, pexi, pexum, to comb. 

Flgo, ere, fixi, fixum, to fx or Pingo, ere, pinxi, pictum, to paint. 

fasten in. Compos, appingere, depingere, and 

So afflgere, transfigere. expingere. 
Fingo, ere, finxi, fictum, to form, Plecto, ere, ■ , , (commonly 

fashion. only passive plector,) to punish. 

Compos. ajfingere,conJingere,eJinge- Another plecto, to braid, is obsolete, 



but exists in the deponents amplector 
and complector, plexus sum. 

Stringo, ere, strinxi, strictum, to 

drain tight. 

Compos, adstringere, const ring? re, 
distringere, obslringere, and pertstrin- 
gere. 



re, and refingere 

Flecto, ere, flexi, flexum, to bend. 

Compos, inflective. 
Mingo (or me jo), ere, minxi, mi- 

ctum, to make water. 
Necto, ere, nexi or nexui, nexum, 

to tie, bind. 

b) Those which do not change the characteristic consonant 
in the perfect. 

Ago, ere, egi, actum, to drive; to do. Frango, ere,fregi, fractum, to break. 

Compos, cogo (for codgo), cdegi, co- Compos, con fringe re, effringere, per- 

actum. So also abigire, adigere, exi- fringere, and r ef ringer e. ^ 

gere, perdgere, redigere, subigere, and IeO (or ieio), ere, lei, ictum, to 

transigere. — Prodigere wants the su- s/r ^- e • to ma £ e r e „ foedus, 

pine; ambi gere and salagere have nei- WenUi\ 

ther perfect nor supine. T " " C J m Jk . , 

w . -L/eijo, ere, legi, lectum, to read. 

DegO, ere, degi, , to pass, So compos, perlegere, praelegrre, 

spend (vitam, life, fyc). and with i in the root colligere, d'ellge- 



IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION. 683 



re, eligere, and seligere. But diligo, 
intelligo, and negligo have lexi in the 
perfect. 

Linquo, ere, liqui, , to leave. 

(Poetical.) 

Compos, relinquo, reliqui, relictum. 



So also delinquere and derelinque- 
re. 

Vinco, ere, vici, victum, to con- 
quer, vanquish. 
Compos, convincere, devincere, and 

evincere. 



c) Those which reduplicate in the perfect. 
Pango, ere, pepigi, pactum, to the supine parcitum uncertain. Com- 

make a compact. P os - compareere. 

But pango, I set or fix in, has panxi Pungo, ere, pupugi, punctum, to 
or pegi, panctum. The compos, com- 
pingo, impingo have pegi, pactum. So 
also oppango, oppegi. But depango 
and repango have no perfect. 

Parco, ere, peperci, parsum, to 
spare, save. 
The perfect parsi is obsolete, and 



stab. 

Compos, compungo, punxi, punctum. 
So dispungere and interpungere. 

Tango, ere, tetigi, tactum, to touch. 
Compos, attingo, attlgi, attactum. So 
contingo, contigi, and the impersonals 
contingit, contlgit ; obtingit, obtigit. 



d) Those which form their perfect in si and the supine in sum. 

Mergo, ere, mersi, mersum, to im- 
merse, dip. 
So demergere, emergere, immergere, 

submergere. 

Spargo, ere, sparsi, sparsum, to 
scatter. 
Compos, adspergere, conspergere, ex- 

5. Verbs ending in lo, mo, no, and ro are mostly irregular, 

The following in mo may be regarded as regular : — - 

Como, ere, cornpsi, comptum, to Sumo, ere, sumpsi,sumptum,tota£e 



spergere, and respergcre, all with sper- 
si, spersum. 

Tergo, ere, tersi, tersum, to wipe. 

But also tergeo, ere (compare p. 677). 
Yergo, ere, , , to incline 

or turn. 



Compos, absumere, adsumere, consa- 
mere, aesumere. 

Temno, ere, , , to despise. 

(Poetical.) 

Compos, contemnere, contempsi, con- 
temptum. 



adorn. 
Demo, ere, dempsi, demptum, to 

take away. 
Promo, ere, prompsi, promptum, 

to take out, to draw. 

So compos, deprdmere, expromere. 

The irregular verbs of this class are, — 

a) Those which have vi in the perfect. 

Ccrno, ere, crevi, cretum, to sift. sero have either set 

In the sense of" to see," the perfect 
and supine do not occur. Compos. 
decerno, decrevi, decretum ; and so 
discernere, excernere, and secernere. 
Lino, ere, levi (or livi), litum, to 

smear on, daub on. 

So compos, collino, illino, oblino (part. 
oblitus), and perlino. Other compos, 
are of the fourth conj., as allinlre, cir- 
cumlinlre, and illinlre. 

Sero, ere, sevi, satum, to soiv. 

But sero, I join, connect, has seriii, 
sertum. The compos, consero and in- 

58 



si turn or serui, 
sertum, according to the sense. De- 
sero, dissero, and exsero have serui, 
sertum only. 

Smo, ere, sivi, situm, to allow, 

permit. 

From this perhaps also situs, situate. 
Compos, desino, desii, desitum. Instead 
of perf. also desitus est. 

Sperno, ere, sprevi, spretum, to 

disdain. 
Sterno, ere, stravi, stratum, to 

prostrate. 



684 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



So compos, eonsterno, insterno, and 
prosterno. 

Tero, ere, trlvi, tritum, to rub. 

b) Those which reduplicate in the perfect. 
Cano, ere, cecini, cantuni, to sing, 

sound. 

Compos, succino, succinui, succentum. 
So also oca.no or occdno. But accino, 
inter cino, and recino (or reca.no) want 
the perf. and supine. 

Curro, ere, cucurri, cursum, to 



So conterere. But attero has either 
ottrivi or atterui. 



ro have more frequently curri than cu- 
curri in the perfect. 

Fallo, ere, fefelli, falsum, to deceive. 
Compos, reftllo, refelli without su- 



ere, cucurri, cursum, 
run. 

The compos, accurro, decurro, ex- 
curro, incurro, percurro, and praecur- 



Pello, ere, pepuli, pulsum, to drive 

away. 

Compos, appello, appiili, appuhum. 
So the rest, compeUo, depello, expello, 
impello,perpello f 2>roj)ello, and repello. 



;) Those which follow the analogy of the second conjugation. 



Alo, ere, alui, alltum or altum, to 

nourish. 

Altus in Cicero and Sallust, ciliius 
in later writers. 

Cello (not in wse), but 

Compos, antecello, excello, and prae- 

cello, I excel, perf. celtid, supine want- 
ing. But percello, perculi, percuhum, 

to strike down. 

Colo, ere, coliii, cultum, to cultivate. 
So excolere, incolere, mwa percolire. 

Consulo, ere, ui, ultum, to consult. 

Gemo, ere, ui, itum, to sigh, 
groan. 
Compos, congrmo or congemisco, in- 

gemo or ingemisco, perf. ui, supine 

wanting. 

Gigno, ere, genui, genitum, to be- 
get, produce. 

d) Those which are otherwise irregular in the perfect and 
supine. 



Perf. and supine from the obsolete 
geno. So ingigncre and progignt re. 

Molo, ere, ui, Itum, to grind (in a 

mill). 
Occulo, ere, iii, ultum, to conceal, 

hide. 
Pono, ere, posiii, positum, to lay, 

place. 

Obsolete perf. poslvi. Compos, ante- 
pono, appdno, compono, depdno, dispono, 
expono, oppono, praepbno, postpono, and 
sepono. \ 

Tremo, ere, ui, , to tremble. 

Compos, coniremere. 
Yomo, ere, ui, itum, to vomit. 

Compos, tvomere, revomere. 



Emo, ere, emi, emptum, to buy. 

Compos, adimo, adcmi, ademtum. 
So coetnere, dirimere, eximere, inleri- 
mere, perimere, and redimere. 
Fero, ferre, tuli, latum, to bear, 

carry. (Cf. page 669.) 
(Furo), furere, , , to rage. 

Perf. and supine wanting. So also 
first person singular. For the perf. 
commonly insanlvi. 
Gero, ere, gessi, gestum, to carry, 

bear ; perform. 

Compos, congerere, digerere, and in- 
gerere. 



Premo, ere, pressi, pressum, to 

press. 

Compos, comprimere, deprimere, ex- 
primere, opprimere, and suppri?nere. 

Psallo, ere, psalli, , to play on 

a stringed instrument. 
Quaero, ere, quaesivi, quaesitum, 

to inquire, to seek. 

So compos, acqulro, conqulro, exqu'i- 
ro, inqu'iro, perqulro, and requlro. 

Uro, ere, ussi, ustum, to burn. 

So adurere, comburere, exurere, and 
inurere. 



IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 685 



Yello, ere, velli or vulsi, vulsum, 

to pluck, pick. . 

So nvello, evello, and revello. But 
convello and divtllo have only velli in 
the perfect. 

6. Verbs in so and rro are, — 
Depso, ere, depsui, depsitum and 

depstum, to knead. 
Pinso, ere, pinsui or pinsi, pinsi- 

tum or pisturn, to pound, grind. 
Texo, ere, texui, textum, to weave. 

Compos, are attexo, contexo, obtexo, 
pertexo,p>raetexo, and relexo. 

Some of this class follow the analogy of the fourth conjuga- 
tion : — 



Verro, ere, verri, versum, to 
sweep. 
Compos, everrere. 



Viso, ere, visi, , to go to see, 

to visit. 

A supine visum is borrowed from 
viclere. 



Arcesso (or accerso), ere, arcessl- 

vi, arcessltum, to send for. 
Capesso, ere, capesslvi, capessi- 

tum, to take up, lay hold of. 
Facesso, ere, facessivi, facessltum, 

to perforin, accomplish. 

7. Verbs in sco form their perfect and supine as follows : 



Incesso, ere, incesslvi (or incessi), 

, to attack, assail. 

Lacesso, ere, lacessivi (or ii) , la- 

cessituni, to provoke. 



Compesco, ere, compescui, to curb, 

restrain. 
Cresco, ere, crevi, cretum, to grow. 

So the compos, concresco, decresco, 
and excresco. But accresco, incresco, 
and succresco want the supine. 

Disco, ere, didici, (disclturus), to 

learn. 

Compos, addisco, addidici. So also 
ediscere and dediscere. 
Dispesco, ere, dispesciii, , to 

divide, separate. 
Glisco, ere, , , to begin, 

spread. 
Hisco, ere, , , to yawn ; 

to mutter. 
Nosco (gnosco), ere, novi, notum, 

to become acquainted with. 



So iynosco and diynosco. But ayno- 
sco, coynosco, and rtcoynosco have su- 
pine aynitum, coynUum, and recnyni- 
lum. 

Pasco, ere, pavi, pastuni, to pas- 
ture, feed. 
Posco, ere, poposci, , to de- 
mand, ask. 

So deposco, exposco, both with popo- 
sci, and reposco without perfect. 

Quiesco, ere, quievi, quietum, to 
rest. 
Compos, acquiescere, conquiescere, 

and requiescere. 

Suesco, ere, suevi, suetum, to ac- 
custom one's self. 
Part, suetus, accustomed. Compos. 

c.ssuesco, consuesco, desuesco, and in- 

suesco. 



IV. Fourth Conjugation. 

Regular verbs of this conjugation form their perfect in ivi or 
ti, and the supine in itum. E. g. 

Audio, audire, audlvi or audii, audltum, to hear. 
Erudlo, erudlre, erudivi or erudii, erudltum, to instruct. 
Munio, munire, munlvi or munli, munitura, to fortify. 
Yestio, vestire, vestivi or vestii, vestitum, to clothe. 



686 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



Irregular in one or both of the characteristic parts are the 
ictum, to 



following : — 
Amicio, ire, iciii or ixi 

clothe, put on. 

The pert", amicui, amixi, and amiclvi 
scarcely ever occurs. 

Aperio, Ire, aperui, apertum, to 

open. 

So operio and cooperio. But com- 
perlo and reperio have peri, pertum. 

Cio, Ire, clvi, cltum, to move, excite. 

This is the old and regular form for 

cieo, clvi, cltum, on which see p. 677. 3. 

Eo, Ire, Ivi, ltum, to go. (See 

page 669.) 
Farcio,Ire, farsi, fartum (farctum), 

to stuff. 

Supine more rarely farsum. Com- 
pos, confercio and refercio, fersi, fer- 
lum. Others are infercio and effercio. 

Ferio, Ire, , , to strike. 

In the perf. active percussi, and in 
the passive ictus sum, are commonly 
used. 

Ferocio, Ire, , , to be in- 

- solent, wild. 

Fulcio, Ire, fulsi, fultum, to prop. 

The perfect of fulcio has the same 
form as that of fulgeo. 

Haurio, Ire, hausi, haustuni, to 

draw. 

Supine more rarely Jiausum; but 
frequently hausurus. 

Punio, Ire, Ivi or n, itum, to punish. 

Remark. — Desiderative verbs in urio generally have neither perfect nor, 
supine ; as, dormiturio, Ire, I desire to sleep; coenaturio, Ire, I desire to dine. 
The only exceptions are esurio, esurlvi, esuriturus, I am hungry ; nupturio, 
nupturlvi, I wish to get married, and parturio, parturlvi, I wish to bring forth. 



Regular, except that its passive 
forms sometimes occur in a deponent 
sense. 
Queo, quire, quivi or quii, quitum, 

to be able. (Cf. page 6 70.) 
Raucio, Ire, rausi, rausum, to be 

hoarse. 

Compos, irraucio. 
Salio, Ire, salui or salii, saltum, to 

spring, leap. 

Compos, desitire, exsillre, insil'ire, 
&c, generally perf. sih'd, rather than 
silii or sillvi. But satire, to salt, is 
regular. 

Sancio, Ire, sanxi, sanctum and 
sancltum, to o?rlain, appoint. 
Sancltus is generally participle, and 

sanctus adjective. 

Sarcio, Ire, sarsi, sartum, to patch, 

mend. 

Compos, resarclre. 
Sentio, Ire, sensi, sensum, to feel, 

think. 

So consentlre, dissentlre, and prae- 
sent'ire. But instead of assentio, com- 
monly assentior deponent. 
Sepelio, Ire, Ivi, sepultum, to bury. 
Sepio, Ire, sepsi, septum, to hedge in. 
Venio, Ire, veni, ventum, to come. 

Compos, advenlre, convenlre, inve- 
nire, obvenlre, and pemenlre. 

Yincio, Ire, vinxi, vinctum, to bind. 
So compos, devinclre. 



E. DEPONENT VERBS. 

I. Deponent verbs of the first conjugation are all regular, 
and conjugated like hortor (page 173, A). E. g. 



Adverser, ari, atus sum, to oppose, re- 
sist. 

Arbitror, ari, atus sum, to suppose, 
think. 

Aspernor, ari, atus sum, to despise. 

Auxilior, ari, atus sum, to help. 

Calumnior, ari, atus sum, to calumni- 
ate. 



Criminor, ari, atus sum, io accuse. 
Cunctor, ari, atus sum, to hesitate. 
Dominor, ari, atus sum, to rule. 
Epiilor, ari, atus sum, to feast. 
Feneror, ari, atus sum, to lend on in- 
terest. 
Glorior, ari, atus sum, to boast. 
Hospitor, ari, atus sum, to be a 



DKI'ONKNT VERBS. 



087 



Iimtor, ari, atns sum, to imitate. 

Jaoiilor, ari, attis sum, to throw. 

Licltor, ari, atus sum, to bid. 

Luctor, ari, atus sum, to struggle. 

Medlcor, ari, atUS sum, to heal. 

Moderor, ari, atus sum, to moderate. 

Negotior, ari, atus sum, to do business. 

Odoror, ari, atus sum, to sun U. 

Osculor, ari, atus sum, to itass. 

Parasltor, ari, atus sum, to «(■< ^e 
parasite. 

Philosophor, ari, atus sum, to philoso- 
phize. 

Proelior, ari, atus sum, tofiyht. 

To the above might be added many others equally regular. 

The following occur only in certain authors as deponent, and more com- 
monly as active verbs : communicor, commurmuror, Jluctuor,fruticor, lacrimor, 
luxurior, nictor, and velificor. 

Cicero employs adt'dor, drbitror, criminor, and dignor both as deponent and 
as passive verbs. 

II. The deponent verbs of the second conjugation are, — 



Katiocinor, ari, atus sum, to reason, 

compute. 
Bustieor, ari, atus sum, to rusticate. 
Sciscitor, ari, atus sum, to inquire into. 
Stipulor, ari, atus sum, to stipulate. 
Susplcor, ari, atus sum, to suspect. 
Testit'jcor, ari, atus sum, to loitness, 

attest. 
Tutor, ari, atus sum, to protect. 
Urluor, ari, atus sum, to dive. 
Yiigor, ari, atus sum, to ramble. 
YeiuTor, ari, fitus sum, to venerate. 
Vooiferor, ari, atus sum, to vociferate. 



Fatcor, eri, fassns sum, to confess. 
Compos, coufteor, confessus sum; 
])ro/ilt'or, professus sum. But dijfiteor 
-wants the participle. 

Liccor, eri, licitus sum, to offer a 

hid. 

So compos, polliceri. 
Medeor, eri, , to heal. 



Misereor, eri, miseritus or miser- 
tus sum, to pity. 

Frequently impersonally miseretur 
or miser et me. 

Heor, reri, ratus sum, to suppose. 
Tueor, eri, tuitus sum, to guard, 

protect. 

An obsolete form of this is tuor of 



Participle commonly mediedtus from the third conjugation, from which the 

medicari. adjective tutus. Compos, are contueri 

Mereor, eri, meritus sum, to merit, and intueri. 

earn. Vereor, eri, veritus sum, to fear. 

Compos, commereri, demereri, and Compos, revereri and subvereri. 
j)romereri. 

III. The deponent verbs of the third conjugation are, — 
Apiscor, apisci, aptus sum, to gain, pergefactus. But the verb expergere, 

acquire. (Obsolete.) 

Compos, adipiscor, adept us sum, and 
indipiscor, indeptus sum, with the same 
sense. 



Divertor, to turn aside; praever- 

tor, to outstrip ; and reverter, to 

return. 

The perfect of these verbs is derived 
from the active form verto ; hence com- 
monly reverti, reverteram, &c, for re- 
vei*sus sum. The part, reversus, how- 
ever, has an active sense, "having re- 
turned." 
Expergiscor, expergisci, experre- 

ctus sum, to awake. 

From this expergefacere, part, ex- 

2 R 58 * 



part, txpergitus, is obsolete. 

Fruor, fnii, fruitus or fructus sum, 

to enjoy. 

Compos, perfruor, perfructus sum. 

Fungor, fungi, functus sum, to 

perform. 

Compos, defungi, perfungi. 
Gradior, gradi, gressus sum, to 

step, icalk. 

Compos, aggredior, aggredi, aggres- 
sus sum. So also congredi, digredi, 
egredi, ingredi, progredi, and regre- 

Invehor, invehi, invectus sum, to 
inveigh against. 



688 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



Irascor, irasci, , to he angry. 

(Inchoative.) 

lratus sum has the sense of the pres- 
ent, "I am angry." For the perf. suc- 
censui is used. 

Labor, labi, lapsus sum, to glide, 

slip, fall. 

Compos, collubi, delubi, dildbi, p>rold- 
hi, and reldbi. 
Loquor, loqui, locutus sum, to 

speak. 

Compos, aMqui, colldqui, eloqui, in- 
terloqui, obluqui. 
Miniscor {not used). 

From it the compos, eomminkcor, 
comminisci, comment us sum, to devise, 
imagine ; and reminhcor, reminisci, 
with the perf. recordatus sum, to re- 
member. — The part, comim it/as has a 
passive sense, '• devised," "invented." 

jVIorior, mori, mortuus sum, fut. 

part, moriturus, to die. 

Obsolete infinitive mortru Compos. 
common, demori, and emori. 

Nanciscor, nanrisci, nactus sum, 
to obtain. 
Fart, sometimes written nanctus. 

Nascor, nasci, natua sum, to be 

horn. 

Original form gnascor, which still 
exists in agnatus and cognatus. Com- 
pos, enascor, innascor, and renascor. 

Nltor, niti, nlsus or nixus sum, to 

strive, to rely upon. 

Compos, adnlti, conriiti, eniti, and oft- 
niti. 

IV. The deponent verbs of 

Adsentior, adsentiii, adsensus sura, 
to assent. 

Also active, in the same sense, nd~ 
sent in, adsensi, adsensum; but more 

commonly deponent. 

Blandior, blandiri, blandltus sum, 

to flatter. 
Experior, experiri, expertus sum, 

to experience. 

But comperior, I learn, am informed, 
is only used in the present; perf. cum- 
peri from compt rio. 

Largior, largiri, largitus sum, to 
lavish. 

Compos, dtlaryior. 



Obliviscor, oblivlsci, oblitus sum, 

to forget. 
Paciscor, paclsci, pactus sum, to 

bargain, stipulate. 

Compos, compacisci or compecisci, de- 
pacisci or depecisci, all with pactus sum. 

Pascor, pasci, pastus sum, to feed, 

graze. 
Patior, pati, passus sum, to suffer. 

Compos, perpetior, perpeti,perpe&ta 

sum. 

Pleeto, plectere, to plait, braid, 

gives rise to the 

Compos, amplecior and complcclnr, 
compleams sum, to embrace. 

Proficiscor, proficisci, profectus 
sum, to travel, to depart. 

Queror, queri, questus sum, to com- 
plain. 

Compos, conqueri. 

Ringor, ringi, , to show ones 

teeth ; to chafe. 

Sequor, sequi, secutus sura, to fol- 
low. 
Compos, assiqtd, consiqui, exsiqui, 

insAqui, obsiqui, per sequi, prosequi, and 

Sul>.<~qui. 

Ulciscor, ulcisci, ultus sum, to re- 

r< ni//\ punish. 
Utor, uti, Qsus sum, to use, enjoy. 

( lompos. abuti, deuti. 
Vescor, vesci, , to eat, feed 

upon. 

The place of a perfect is supplied 
by edi. 

the fourth conjugation are, — 

Mentior, mentiri, mentltus sum, 

to lie, to tell falsehoods'. 
Metior, metiri, mensus sum, to 

measure. 

Compos, dimetlri, emetiri, andjper- 
iin fin", 
Molior, mollri, molitus sum, to 

labor, strive, toil. 

Compos, amollri and demollri. 

Opperior, opperiri, opportus or 
opperitus sum, to wait for, ex-t 
peci. 

Ordior, ordiri, orsus sum, to begin, 
commence. 



INCHOATIVE VERBS. 



G89 



Compos, exordlri and redordiri. 
Orior, oriri, ortus sum (Jut- part. 

oriturus), to rise. 

The Pres. Indie, follows the third 
conjug. oreris, oritur, orimur. But 
imperfect either or'irer or orerer. So 
the compos, coorior and exorior. But 
ddorlor has commonly adorlris and 
adortiiir, instead of adoreris and adori- 
tur. — The fut. part, oriundus has the 
peculiar sense "sprung or descended 
from." 

Partior, partlri, partltus sum, to 
divide. 
Compos, dispertior, dispertitus sum. 



So also impertior or imparlior. All 
these also active, pariio, dispertio, and 

impertio. 

Potior, potlri, potitus sum, to take 

possession of. 

The Pres. and Imperf. Subj. some- 
times follow the third conjugation, po- 
iitur, potimur, poteretur, poteremur. 

Punior, puniri, punitus sum, (in- 
stead of the active punio,) to 
punish 

Sortior, sortlri, sortltus sum, to 
draw lots. 



F. INCHOATIVE VERBS. 

Inchoative verbs end in sco, and arc formed either from 
nouns or adjectives, or from other verbs. 

The verbs from which inchoatives are formed are commonly of the 
second conjugation, but the inchoatives themselves are invariably of 
the third. 

The inchoatives derived from verbs generally have the perfect, and 
sometimes also the supine, of their primitives. 

The inchoatives derived from nouns or adjectives cither want the 
perfect entirely, or assume ui, like those derived from verbs. 

The following lists exhibit the most important verbs of this class. 

1. Inchoatives derived from verbs, with the perfect and su- 
pine of their primitives : — 



Abolesco (nleo), ere, abolevi, abolc- 

tuin, to be annihilated* 
Adolesco (oho), ere, adolevi, adul- 

tum, to grow up. 
Coalesco («/o), ere, coalui, coalltum, 

to coalesce. 
Concupisco (eupio), ere, concuplvi, 

concupitum, to desire. 
Convalesco (valeo), ere, convalui, con- 

valitum, to convalesce. 
Exardesco (ar'dca), ere, exarsi, ex- 

arsuni, to grow hot, to become in- 

jlamed. 



Exolesco (olco), ero, exolevi, exole- 

tum, to grow out of use. 
Indolesco (doleo), ere, indolui, indoll- 

tum, to feel pain. 
Inveteraseo (///re A'/-o), Ore, invcteravi, 

atum, to grow old. 
Obdormisco (dormio), ere, obdormivi, 

Itum, to fall asleep. (So also edor- 

misco, to take one's I'd I of sleep.) 
Revivisco (vivo), ere, revixi, revictuin, 

to revive, came to life again. 
Scisco (scio), ere, sclvi, scltum, to 

decree, ordain. 



2. Inchoatives derived from verbs, with the perfect of their 
primitives : — 

Acesco (acco), ere, ami, to grow sour. 

So also coacesco and peracesco. 
Alhesco and exalbcsco (albeo), ere, 

exalbui, to grow white. 
Aresco (areo), ere, arui, to become 

dry. 



Calosoo (caleo), ere, calui, to grow 
wa rm. 

Canesco (caneo), ere, canui, to turn 
gray. 

Conticesco (taceo), ere, couticui, to be- 
come silent. 



GOO 



LATIN GKAM3UR. 



Coniremipco (tremn), ere, contremui, 
to begin to tremble. 

Defervesco (J'erveo), ere, deferbui, to 
cease fermenting. 

Delitesco (lateo), ere, delitui, to be con- 
cealed. 

Effervesce* (ferveo), ere, efferbui, to be- 
gin to boil. 

Excandesco (candeo), ere, excandui, 
to grow hot. 

Extimesco and pertimesco (iimeo), ere, 
extimui, to become frightened. 

Floresco and de- or effloresce- ( floreo), 
ere, efflorui, to begin to blossom. 

Haeresco and ad- or inhaeresco (hae- 
reo), ere, inhaesi, to adhere to, to in- 
here. 

Horresco and ex- or perborresco (hor- 
reo), ere, exhorrui, to be terrified. 

Ingemisco (gemo), ere, ingemui, to be- 
gin to sigh. 

Intumesco (tumeo), ere, intumui, to 
begin to swell. 

Irraucisco (raucio), ere, irrausi, to 
grow hoarse. 

Languesco and e- or relanguesco (lan- 
gueo), ere, elangui, to become languid. 

3. Inchoatives derived from nouns and adjectives, without a 
perfect : — 



Liquesco (liqueo), ere, licui, to begin to 
melt. 

Madesco (madeo), ere, madui, to be- 
come wet. 

Marcesco and com- or emarcesco (mar- 
ceo), ere, emarcui, to decay, wither. 

Occallesco (calleo), ere, occalui, to be- 
come callous. 

Pallesco and expallesco (palleo), ere, 
pallui, to turn pale. 

Putresco (putreo), ere, putrui, to decay. 

Resipisco (sajrio), ere, resipui, to re- 
cover one's senses again. 

Rubesco and erubesco (rubeo), ere, 
erubui, to become red, to redden. 

Senesco and consenesco (seneo), ere, 
consenui, to grow old. 

Stupesco and obstupesco (stupeo), ere, 
obstupui, to become astonished. 

Tabesco (tabeo), ere, tabui, to wither; 
pass away. 

Tepesco {tepeo), ere, tepui, to become 
tepid. 

Viresco and con-, e-, or reviresco (vi- 
reo), virui, to turn green. 



Aegresco (aeger), ere, tofallsich. 
Ditesco (dives), ere, to become rich. 
Dulcesco (dulcis), ere, to turn sweet. 
Grandesco (grandis), ex*e, to grow up. 
Gravesco and ingravesco (gravis), ere, 

to become heavy ; to grow icorse. 
Incurvesco (curvus), ere, to become 

crooked. 
Integrasco (integer), ere, to begin anew 

or afresh. 
Juvenesco (juvenis), ere, to grow young 

again. 

4. Inchoatives derived from nouns or adjectives, with a per- 
fect in id : — 



Mitesco (mitis), ere, to grow gentle. 

Mollesco (mollis), ere, to become soft. 

Pinguesco (pinguis), ere, to become fat. 

Plumesco (pluma), ere, to become 
fledged. 

Puerasco and repuerasco (puer), ere, 
to grow up to be a boy. 

Sterilesco (sterilis), ere, to become ster- 
ile. 

Teneresco and tenerasco (tener), ere, 
to become tender. 



Crebresco and in- or percrebresco (cre- 
ber). ere, crebrui, to increase, to 
grow frequent. 

Duresco and obduresco (durus), ere, 
durui, to grow hard. 

Evanesco (vanus), fire, evanui, to van- 
ish. 

Innotesco (notus), ere, innotui, to be- 
come known. 

Macresco (macer), ere, macrui, to be- 
come lean. 

Mansuesco (mansuetus), ere, mansue- 
xi, to grow gentle. 



Matnresco (maturtis), ere, maturni, to 

become ripe. 
Nigresco (niger), ere, nigral, to turn 

black. 
Obmutesco (mutus), ere, obmutui, to 

become dumb or mute. 
Obsurdesco (surdus), ere, obsurdui, to 

become deaf. 
Recrudesco (crudus), ere, recrudui, to 

break open afresh (of wounds). 
Vilesco and evilesco (vilis), ere, evilui, 

to become low, of trifling value. 



INDEX 



N. B. The figures of this Index refer to the pages of the hook ; the letters or figures 
after the page-reference, to the divisions or remarks of the lesson contained on that 

page. The dash indicates the repetition of the word at the head of the article. 

The abbreviation constr. stands for construction of ; id. for the same page. 



A, ab, abs, how used, 624, Eem. 2. 
With passive verbs. 165, II. 

ab adoleseentia, 319, Rem. 5. 

abest, in the expressions iantum abest 
ut . . . ut, 197, C, and non mullum 
abest quin, 570. 

abhinc, how used, 317, D. 

Ablative, terminations of, 50, C; of 

gerunds, 116, d ; after compara- 

atives, 224-225 ; of place : 

where? 308,7?; whence, id. C; 

of time : when'! ■ 316, B ; within what 

timet 317, C; of cause, 418, B 

of the means or instrument, 419 

C; of mode or manner, 425, A 

signifying with respect to, in 

point of, 426, B; of quality, 427, C 
of the price or value, 434, A ; after 
verbs of plenty or want, 435, B 
after verbs denoting separation, dif- 
ference, or distance, 436, C; after 
utor, fruor, fungor, &c, 443, A 
after dignns, indignus, contentus, &c. 

444, B ; after natus, prognatus, &c 

445, C; after prepositions, id. D 
after verbs compounded with a, de, 
or ex, 446, E ; after verbs of placing. 

putting, sitting, &c, 446, F. Abla 

tive Absolute, 451 - 455. Ablat. of the 
perf. part, used absolutely, 455, E. 

absolvere, with the gen., 40 8 ; A. 
Abstract Nouns, 88. 3. 
abundare, constr., 435, B. 
abunde, with the gen., 381, A. 4. 
-abus, ablative pi. in, 46, note f . 
accedit ut, 297, F. 1 ; accedit 
299, Rem. 2. 
Accents, 5, I. 
Accentuation, 6, I. 1-6. 
accidit ut, 297, F. 2. 
accusare, with the gen., 408, A. 



Accusative, terminations of, 50, C; of 
gerunds, 116, c ; of place, 308, A, and 
309-310; of time, 315, A ; denoting 
extent of space, 440, D; after transi- 
tive verbs, .324, A ; omitted, 325, 
Rem. 4 ; after verbals, 326, Rem. 7 ; 
after neuter verbs, 326, B and 327, 
C; after compound verbs, 332, A ; 
after impersonal verbs, 334, B and C; 
in the sense of as to, with respect to, 
335, D ; after interjections and in ex- 
clamations, 343, D; after prepositions, 
344, II. ; — as the subject of an infini- 
tive, 287, A; omitted, 292, Rem. 12. 

Accusatives, two, after docere and ce- 
lare, 340, A ; after verbs of asking, 
inquiring, and demanding, 341, B; 
after verbs of naming, calling, es- 
teeming, &c, 342, C. 

Accusations cum Infinitivo, as the sub- 
ject of a finite verb, 287, B; as the 

object of a finite verb, after verba 
sensuum et affectuum, 288, II. 1 ; as 
the object of a volition, 289. 2 ; after 
verba declarandi, 290. 3 ; as the ap- 
posiium of a noun, &c, 290, C; in 
impassioned exclamations, 290, D; 

exchanging with ut, 294 and 

295 ; Avith quod,^298, H. 

ac si, with the subj., 576, II. 

Active voice, 110 ; regular conjuga- 
tion of, 664-665. 

ad, constr., 156, note f . 

adeo, followed by ut, 566. 

aclhuc locorum, 382, Rem. 2. 

adesse, constr., 157. 

Adjectives, declined, singular, 18 and 

21 ; plural, 49 and 50 ; agreement 

of, 186-189; used instead of adverbs, 
187, Rem. 6 ; belonging to two or more 
nouns, 188, Rem. 10 ; to a collective 



G92 



INDEX. 



noun, 188, Rem. 11 ; used substan- 
tively, 193 ; in the neuter gender, 
194, 'Rem. 4 ; used partitively, 188, 
Rem. 12 ; instead of the genitive of 

nouns, 374, Rem. 6 ; derivation of, 

504-507; used adverbially, 616, C. 2, 

and 617. 6 ; comparison of, 212- 

217. Adjectives followed by the da- 
tive, 351-353; by the genitive, 390- 
393; by the ablative, 444-445; by an 
infinitive, 283, C; in the con- 
struction of the ablative absolute, 
453, D ; place in the sentence, 649, II. 

ad id locorum, 382, Rem. 2. 

admonere, with Ace. cum Inf. or tit, 
295, D; with the gen. 399, B. 

adspergere, constr. 368, D. 

Adverbs, 613, A ; of place, 613, B. 1 ; 
of time, number, and order, 614, II.; 
of quality, manner, &c, 614, III.; 

correlative, 615, IV.; numeral 

adverbs, 94, F ; ordinal adverbs, 614. 

3 (of I.) and 3 (of II.); with the 

genitive, 383, Rem. 6, and 385, Rem. 
4; used as prepositions, ^624, Rem. 5; 
comparison of, 220-221. 

Adverbs, derivation of, 616, in e and 
ier, id. 1 ; in um and e, id. 2; in Has, 

id. 3 ; in lim ami sim, id. 4 ; 

formed from the accusative of nouns, 
&c, 617. 5 ; from ablatives, id. 6 ; 
from verbs, id. 7 ; compounds, id. 8. 

aedes, omitted, 375, b. 

aequaliSj constr., 351. 1. 

aeque etc, 212, B. 1. 

aestimare } with the genitive, 398, A. 

affatim, with the gen. 383, Rem. 6. 

affinis, constr., 352. 6. 

Agent, after passive verbs, expressed 
by the ablative with a or ah, 165, II; 
by the dative, 117, D and 365, A. 

Agreement, 149, F ; of verbs, 153, A ; 
of adjectives, adjective pronouns, and 
participles, 186-189; of relatives, 200 
-202 and 206-208. 

airC for aisne, 182. 

aio, inflected, 671, C. 1. 

olii-nare, constr., 437, Rem. 2. 

alienus, constr. 352, note *. 

aliquantum, with the gen., 66, Rem. 6. 

illiquid with the gen. 22, C; distinct 
from aliquod, 65, Rem. 1. 

aliquis, declined, 34 and 64. 

aliquo, adverb, 138. 

-alls, adjectives in, 505, C, 4. 

atius and alter, difference between, 92, 
B. 

alius — alium, alter — alteram, with 
verb in the plural, 154, B, Rem. 2 ; 
place of, 653, VIII. 

alter, declined; 92. 



anibi, inseparable preposition, 626, II. 

ambire, conjugated, 670, Remarks. 

ambo, declined and defined, 97. 

arnicas, constr., 351, note f. 

Amplificatives, 89. 8. 

amplius, with quam omitted, 105, E. 

an, in disjunctive questions, 547, II. 2. 

animans, gender of, 485, Rem. 4. 

animi for animo, 392, Rem. 2. 

an non, how used, 547, II. 3. 

Anomalous, comparison, 213 ; verbs, 
666-671. 

Answers to questions, how expressed, 
545, IV. 

ante, denoting relations of time, 318, E. 

Antecedent, 201, Rem. 1; commonly 
precedes the relative, id. Rem. 5 ; 
understood, id. Rem. 7; entirely sup- 
pressed, 202, Rem. 8 ; attracted into 
the case of the relative, id. Rem. 9; 
double antecedent, 206, A, 1. 

Antepenult, 6 ; its accent, 6. 3. 

anteguam and prvusquam, constr., 578. 

-anus, adjectives in, 506, II. 1. 

apage, 606. 8. 

Apodosis, 551, B. 

Aposiopesis, 326. 

oj>j>< lb ire, with two accusatives, 342, C. 

appetens, with the genitive, 392, B. 

Apposition, 179, A ; in the oblique 
cases, 180, Rem. 2; of a pronoun and 
a noun, id. 3 ; between nouns of dif- 
ferent genders, id. 4 ; to two or more 
nouns, id. 5 ; between adjectives, 181, 
Rem. 9 ; to an entire clause, itl. Rem. 
10; genitive instead of, id. Rem. 11 ; 
between a genitive and an ablative, 
id. Rem. 12. 

ap1>it, constr. 352. 8 ; aptus qui, with 
the subjunctive, 590, F. 

apud, 157. 

aqua, understood, 193, Rem. 3. 

-a/-, nouns in, 13, note \. 

arguere, with the genit., 408, A. 

-arias, adjectives in, 506, 7. 

-as, nouns in, 16. 8 ; Greek ace. plur. 
in, 500, Rem. 8 ; adjectives in as and 
a?ius, 507. 2. 

Assimilation of consonants in compo- 
sition, 124, Rem. 2. 

" At home " and " home," how ex- 
pressed, 132, G. 

Alhos, declined, 497. 

at'jue, 76, U. 

Attraction, 202, Rem. 9 ; 169. 6 ; 367, 
note. 

-atus, participles in, 259, A; adjectives 
in, 506. 10. 

auscultare, 197, note j. 

ausim for ausus sim, 239, e. 

aut and vel, defined, 388, C. 



INDEX. 



093 



aut — aut, 388 and 634. 

aviem, place of, 38, B. 

avarus and avidus, with the genit., 

391. 1. 
are, 606. 8. 
-ax, verbals in, with the genit., 393, 

Rem. 2. 



B. 



helium, construed like names of towns, 

310, b, c. 
bene te, 343, note. 

benedicere, with the dat., 358, Rem. 3. 
biduum, triduum, 322. 
-bills, adjectives in, 505; with the dat., 
353. 10 ; with the supine in u, 250, 

Rem. 2. 
bonifacio or consulo, 399, Rem. 2. 
bos, declined, 16, note ||. 
brevi, with tempore understood, 194, 

Rem. 3. 
-bundus, verbal adjectives in, 504, B. 



C. 



C, sound of, Z,E.l. 

canere recej)tui, to sound a retreat, 

367, Rem. 2. 

capitis or capita damnare, 410, note. 
Cardinal numbers, 73, B ; list of, 76 - 

78. 
caro, omitted, 193, Rem. 3. 
Cases of nouns, 7, K. 
Cause, ablative of, 418 ; various other 

modes of expressing, 419, Rem. 1-6. 
causa and gratia, with mea, iua, sua, 

584; omitted, 375, b. 
cave, form of imperative, 606, Rem. 3; 

with the subjunct. without ne, 297, G. 
-ce and -cine, enclitic, 37, Rem. 1. 
cedo, imperative, 672. 9. 
celare, with two accus., 340, A. 
ceu, with the subjunctive, 576, II. 

Ch, sound of, 3, E. 2. 
cio or cieo, 677. 3 and 686. 
circumdare and circumfundere, constr., 

368, D. 

cis, citra, 345. 

clam, adv. and prep., 625, Rem. 6. 

Clauses, co-ordinate and subordinate, 

149, E; arrangement of, 657, D. 
coenare and habitare, with the genit., 

399, Rem. 2. 
coepi, conjugated, 672. 4. 
Collective nouns, 88, E. 2 ; with a 

plural verb, 154, B. 
collibet or coltibitum est, 404. 
com, for cum, in composition with 

verbs, 125, note 4. 



commiscrari, constr., 401, Rem. 1. 

communis, with dative, 352. 6. 

Comparative degree, 212, A. 3 ; forma- 
tion of, 213, C; expressed by minus, 
magis, 212, B. 2, 3 ; by ante, prae, 

praeter, and supra, 227, Rem. 5 ; 
rendered emphatic by magis, minus, 
poiius, id. Rem. 6. 

Comparatives, inflected, 217, A ; 

construction of: with the ablative, 224, 
A ; with ablative omitted, 225, Rem. 
1 ; with quam. 225, B ; with quam 
omitted, 227, C; two comparatives 
connected bv quam, 228, D ; modified 
by adverbs/229, F. 

Comparison, of adjectives, 212-217; 
regular, 213, C; anomalous, 213, D; 
defective, 214, E; by aeque — ac, 
minus — quam, 212, B ; by magis, 

maxime, 216, F; adjectives 

which admit of none, 216, G. 

Comparison, of adverbs, regular, 220, 
A ; anomalous, id. B ; defective, id. 
C. 

compertus, with the genitive, 410, 
Rem. 5. 

complere, constr. 435, B, and Rem. 1. 

complttres, declined, 104, C; sense of, 
107. 

compos, with the genitive, 391. 4. 

Compound, substantives, (50, D; verbs, 
124-126; adverbs, 617. 8 ; • sub- 
ject, 148, D ; predicate, id.; sen- 
tences, 149, D; words, how divided, 
5, </. 

conducit, with the dative, 356, A. 

confidere, constr., 358, Rem. 4. 

Gmjugatio Peiiphrastua, 261, D. 

Conjugation of verbs, 110, B; of reg- 
ular verbs, 664-665; of anomalous 
verbs, 666-671 ; of defective verbs, 
671-673 ; of impersonal verbs, 371 ; 

verbs of the four conjugations 

alphabetically arranged, 673-689. 

Conjunctions, classified, 632-633; cop- 
ulative, disjunctive, and adversative, 
how used, 633; double, 634, C; omit- 
ted, id. Rem. 3 ; in correlation with 
each other, 635, E; adverbs repeated 
like conjunctions, id. D ; place of in 
sentences, 653, C, and 654, II. 

conjunctus, with the ablat., 426, note. 

conscius, constr., 391, note f . 
Consecutio Temporum, 527 - 531. 

consentaneiim est, 288, Rem. 2. 

consenlire, constr., 359 and 538-539. 

considere, constr., 446, F. 

Consonants, sounds of, 2-3. 
Constructio ad syne sin, 168, Rem. 2. 

Construction, of sentences, 147-150; 
of the comparative, 224 - 230 ; of the 



GO t 



INDEX. 



superlative, 231 - 234 : of names of 

place?, 308-310; of time, 315-319. 
consulere, constr., 358, Rem. 5. 
cendentus, with the ablat., 441, B. 
contingit ut, 297, F. 2. 
Contracted syllables, their quantity, 

5, //. 2. 
Contraction of the second root of 

verb?, 239. _ 
ctmxen.it mild, constr., 358, Rem. 4. 
Correlatives 201, hem. 3, and 208. 11; 

adverbs, G15, IV. 
credere s, you would have supposed, 

558, Rem. 2. 
Crime, expressed bv the genit., after 

verbs, 408, A. 
crimine, omitted, 409, Rem. 1. 
cujus, a, urn, 41, Rem. 4. 
-cuius, a, vm, diminutives in, 89. 7. 
cum, with tbe abl., 133; annexed to 

pronouns, id. note; place of, 052, VII. 
-cunque, pronoun in, 41, C; adverbs, 

615. 
cupere, constr., 128, note. 
cupidus, with the gen., 391. 1. 
cum ut, for the imper., 606, l!em. 3. 
curare, constr., 256-257, and 294, C. 



D. 



damnare, constr., 408, A. 

dare, with a short, 111, note \ , con- 
struction of, 113, G. 

Dative, terminations of, 50, C; of 
gerunds, 11G, b ; as the remote ob- 
ject of transitive verbs, 349 ; alter 
neuter verb-, 350, C; denoting pos- 
session or want with esse or aeesse, 
350, Rem. 2 ; after adjectives, 351- 
353; after various intransitive verbs, 
356, A ; after verbs componnded with 
satis, bene, and nude, or with certain 

prepositions, 358-360; dative of 

the agent, after participles in dus, 
3G5, A ; after passive verbs, 366, 
Rem. 3 ; after adverbs and in- 
terjections, 369, F; used instead of 
the genit., 374, Rem. 7 ; construc- 
tions instead of, 368, D. 

Datives, two, after sum, fin, do. Szc, 
366, B; by attraction with mild est 
nomen, 367", C; by attraction with 
licet esse, 169, Rem. 6. 

debebat, indie, instead of the subjunc- 
tive, 536. 

deed and dedecet, constr., 335, Rem. 2. 

Declension of nouns, first, 7-8 ; see- 
on 1, 10-11 ; third, 12-13 ; genitive 
of the third, 15-17; fourth, 24; fifth, 
2G ; of adjectives, first and sec- 



ond, 17-18; third. 21-22 ; de- 
clension of the plural of nouns and 

adjectives, 44-51; declension of 

Greek nouns, 496-500. 

dedocere, constr.. 340, A. 

dt , gse, with the dat., 350, Rem. 2. 

Defective, nouns, 61, 67, and 70-72 ; 

adjectives, 62. 7 and 72, C; 

verbs, 671-673. 

defii, with the dat., 350, Rem. 2. 

dtfungiy constr., 443. A. 

Decrees of comparison, explained, 212. 

delectari, constr., 298, //, and 37G. 

dehetnl me, 334, C. 

Demonstrative pronouns, 36-37; plu- 
ral of, 54; used as determinatives be- 
fore relatives, 201, Rem. 2; as parti- 
ives, 381, A. 3 ; in the ace. after 
neuter verbs, 327, Rem. ; for reflex- 
ives, 473. 2; omitted, 22, I), and 153, 
Rem. 1; place of, 650, III. ' 

Denominative, verbs, 137, C; adjec- 
tives, 5<J4, .1. 

Dependent clauses, 149, ]■'; containing 
an indirect question, 5G1 : containing 
the opinion of another, 5'j7, D. 

Deponent verbs, 110. 3; present, 173- 
174 ; perfect, 245 ; imperfect, 270- 
277; pluperfect, 464, E; first future, 
514; second future, 521 ; imperative, 
G04-GU5; infinitive, 253-254; parti- 
ciples, 260, C; lists of, 686- 

Derivation, of substantives, 88-89; of 
verbs, 130-137 ; of adjectives, 504- 
507; of adverbs 61G-017. 

Desi lenitives, 130, B. 2, and 6& 

designare, with two accusative-. 

Determinative pronouns, 42 and 54- 
." 5 . 

<i. U rrere with quominus and ne, 571, 

die, imperative, Gno, Rem. 1. 

diiin, omitted, 154, Rem. 5. 

dicitur, constr., 292, Rem. 9. 

dii s, gendec of, 20, A. 

Difference, degree of, expressed bv 

the abl., 229, Rem. 3 and 4. 
dij'uilis, with supines, 249, C ; with 

the inf. or ad, 250, Rem. 4. 
dignari, with the abl., 443, ,1. 
diynus, with the abl., 444, B ; with 

supine?, 249, C; with qui and subj., 

590, F. 
Diminutive, nouns, 89. 7 : verb?, 137. 

4: adjectives, 507, I). 
Diphthongs, 1, C; quantity of, 5, II. 2. 
dis or di, prefix to verbs, 125, B. 
distare, constr., 43G, C, and 473. 
Distributive numerals, 74, D • use of, 

id. K; list of, 76-78. 
doctre, constr., 340, A, and Remarks. 



IXDF.X. 



095 



dolere, how used, 190, and 298, 77. 
dotnus, declined, 24, A ; construction 

of, 132. 
dona re, constr., 368, D. 
dunce, constr., 578, D. 
Doubtful gender, 484, note. 
dubito, constr., 571, Rem. 4; non dubito, 

570. 3, and 571, Rem. 3 ; dubito an, 

571, Rem. 4. 

due, imperative, 606, Rem. 1. 

duim, for dem, 141, Rem. 

dum and dummodo, with the subj., 577, 

duum, for duorum, 73, Rem. 2. 
(/?/", declined, 73, B. 
-dus, participles in, 117. 



161, note f ; thrown out in the past 

tenses, 239, e. 
-ere for -erunt, 238, note. 
-errimus, superlative in, 213, D. 1. 
esse, omitted, 292, Rem. 11. 
est qui, est quod, est ut, with the subj., 

587, C, and 588, Rem. 1. 
et — et, et — neque, &e, 634, C. 
etiamnum, 100. 
-ens, adjectives in, 505, C. 1. 
evenit ut, 295, F. 2. 
expedire, constr., 437, Rem. 1. 
cxpe7-s, with the genit., 391. 4. 
ex quo (tempore), 429 and 431. 
exuere, constr., 368, D. 



E. 



E, nouns in, 12, A ; Greek nouns in 
e, 496, B; adverbs in, 616. 1. 

e or ex, use of, 14, K. 

ec<e, with Nom. and Ace, 343, D. T. ; 
in pronouns like cecum, ecciUum, &C., 
37, Rem. 2. 

ecquid in questions, 8, note. 

tcquis, declined, 64 ; sense of, 65, Rem. 
3. 

edepol, 642, Rem. 2. 

edim for edam, 141, Rem. 

editus, with the abl., 545, C. 

cdo, conjugated, 668. 

ej/iccre ut] 296, E. 

eaere, constr., 113, 77. 

e/'its for suus, 470, Rem., 473, Rem. 2. 

Elision, 4, F. 

Ellipsis, of nouns, 193, Rem. 3 ; of 
subject, 153, Hem. 1 and 2 ; of the 
pronominal subject ace, 292, Rem. 
12 ; of the verb, 154, Rem. 5, and 
325, 5; of the object of verbs, 325, 4; 
of is, en, id, 14, D ; of nnn, 584, note; 
of conjunctions, 634, Rem. 8. 

Emphatic word, in sentences, 648, A 
and B. 

Enclitics, their influence on the ac- 
cent, 6, Rom. 5. 

emere, constr., 398, A, and 434, A. 

en, interjection with the nom., 344. 

-end/is and -undus, participles in, 117, 
Rem. 

enim and nam, place of, 388 and 654. 

emmverd, in answers, 545, IV. 

-ensis, adjectives in, 507. 2. 

-enfissimus, superlative in, 213, D. 3. 

eo, with comparatives, 230, Rem. 4 ; 
with the genit., 382, Rem. 3. 

eo (to go), conjugated, 609. 9. 

Equality, comparison of, 212, B. 

-ev, annexed to the infinitive passive, 

59 



F. 



fae, imperative, 606, Rem. 1 ; with 
the subj., id. Rem. 3. 

facere, passive of, 163, F. 

facer*, eertiovem, 343, Rem. 2. 

fact re ui, 2.92, A', and Bern. 1. 

j' a His, with supines, 24'J, C; with the 
infin. or ad, 250, Rem. 4. 

fallit me, 334, C. 

fari, defective, 671. 3. 

fas, with supines, 249, C; with the 
infin., 27, note f . 

ftxo,faxim, 239, E. 

febris, omitted, 393, Rem. 3. 

Feminine, gender, 4^3 ; nouns, 486, 
U.; 491, A and B, Except. 1 and 2; 
492, II. ; 493, E. 

fcr, imperative, 606, Rem. 1. 

j'ri-nx, with the genit., 393, Rem. 2. 

;*( ro, conjugated, 66 ( J. 7. 

ftrtilis, with the genit., 391. 4. 

Jidcre, constr., 444, Rem. 3. 

Jicri non potest quin, 570, Rem. 2. 

'jilitis and filio., omitted, 375, b. 

Jio, conjugated, 669. 8; with the genit., 
410, B. 

fl'xjitare, with two accusatives, 341, B. 

Jlneci habere, 398, A. 

fonts and foris, 152. 

forem, 666, note. 

fore ut, how used, 255, Rem. 1, and 
292, Rem. 8. 

Frequentative verbs, 136, B. 1. 

fretus, with the abl., 444, B. 

frui, with the abl., 443, A. 

fwjit me, 334, C. 

fungi, with the abl., 443, A. 

Future tense, first, 511-514; subjunc- 
tive, 515-516 ; second or per- 
fect, 519-523; subjunctive, 523. 

futnruni esse ut, 255 ; Rem. 1, and 292, 
Rem. 8. 



006 



INDEX. 



G, sound of, 3, E. 3. 
gaudeo, 161, Rem. 4 ; with the abb, 
419, Hem. 2; with Ace. cum Inf. or 
quod, 298, H. 

Gender, 483, A ; natural render, 

of living beings, 483, B and C; mo- 
hdta, 484, II. ; communia, III. ; epi- 
coena, 485,6 ; of inanimate ob- 
jects, masculines 485, I. ; feminines, 
486, II. ; neuters, id. III. ; gram- 
matical gender, first decl., 491, A ; 
second dec!., id. B; third decl., id. C; 
fourth decl., 493. D ; fifth deed., id. E. 
Genitive, terminations of, 50, C; sin- 
gular of the third declension, 15-17 ; 
plural, of the 2d decl. contract- 
ed, 47, note; of the 3d decl., 4S, Rem. 

2; after nouns. 373 ; subjective 

and objective, id. Kern. 2; oY pro- 
nouns,/-/. Rem 4; adjective used in- 
stead of, id Rem. 0; the noun before 
it omitted, id. Hem. S ; of qual- 
ity and measure, 375, B ; of the 
whole, 381, J,- of neuter adjectives 
after hoc, id, aUqtdd, Sic., 282, Rem. 
1; after neater adjec Rem. 
5; after adverbs, id. Rem. <"., and 282, 
Rem. 2-4 ; after tenia and interjec- 
tions, 383, Rem. 8; plural, after 

partitives, : after nouns de- 

noting a part of a genus, 886, Rem. 2: 
its place supplied by ex, de. int< r, id. 
Rem. 6 ; genitive, after adjec- 
tives, 390-392; after participles in 
ns, 392-393; of the price or value, 
898-399; after verba of reminding, 
remembering, .and forgetting, 
4ul ; after poenitet, piget, &c., 401; 
of the crime, 408-410; after esse and 
Jieri with resor negotinm understood, 
410-411 ; after referi and interest. 
411-412: place of, 849, II. 

gt nitus, with the abl., 445, I '. 

gentium, after ubi, &c., 382, Rem. 2. 

^entu for generis, 375, Rem. 2. 

Gerundives, constr., 118, E; genit. sin- 
gular of, in agreement with a plural. 
119, F. ' 

Gerunds, 115, A ; constr., id. B; cases 
of, how- used, 116. 

ghriari, constr., 444. Hem. 2. 

gnarus, with genit., 391. 2. 

Grammatical gender, 483 and 491- 
493. 

gratia and c<7?/.s-7, with the genit., 419, 
Rem. 5 ; with the genit. of gerunds, 
116, a; omitted, 375, h. 

(/rating agere, with quod, 298, //. 

<//■«//<>• constare, 399, Rem. 5. 



graium or j)crgratum facere, 504. 
Greek nouns, 496 ; 1st declension, /</. 

.5; 2d decl., 497, C; 3d decl., 498, 

D : gender of, 4U 1-493. 
Gutturals, 2, D. 



II. 



H, sound of, 3, E. 4. 

habere, with two accusatives, 342. (7; 
with the genit., 398, A; with two da- 
tive. 366, if. 

%0&eo or won habto quod, with the subf.. 
588, Rem. 2. 

7<"W scib an, 538. 

ftef with the dat., 369, 77. 2. 

//e« with the ace, 343, D. 

Hiatus 4, E. 

hie and iUe, declined, 30 and 54 ; dis- 
tinguished, 37. Rem. 3. 

Historical, infinitive, 268, 4 ; pe- 
riod, 659, IV. 

hoc with the gen., 381, _•!. 3; hdc, with 
comparative-. 230, Hem. 4. 

hnna and homines omitted, 193, J, 
Rem. 1 and 2. 

hortor with ut, 295, D. 

hortus and horti, 71, l>. 

ha- witli the gen.. 882, Hem. 3. 

hujus nonfacio, phrase, :;'.:», linn. 2. 

humus, constr., 810. 6. c 

Hypothetical propositions, 5:, 1-554. 



I. 



I, sound of. 2; nouns in, 13; vocative 

in, 1 . 
-icus. adject 

/'/ witli the genit., 881, J. 3. 
?'</«-/, to*w, 836, /;. 
id agere ></, 294, C 
idem, declined, 42, /", and 55, r; ,• with 

the genit., SSI, A. 3; Wewi — qui, ac t 

atom , < inn. 4-;. /•'. 
idoneus with the dat., 352. 8; with qui 

and the subj., 5:<ij, E. 
id /> ii<]><>n.<, 338, 6. 
-/'A/.-;, adjectives in, 504. B. 
i</itur, place of. 654, II. 
ignarus. with the genit., 391 2. 
-J/ta and t&s, adjectives in, 504, B, and 

505, a 
iUe, declined, 36 ami 54; sense of, 37, 

Hem. 2. 
-itlimus, superlative in, 213, D. 2. 
titud with the gen., 31 1, A. 3. 
4m, adverbs in, 616 4. 
immo, sen-^e of, 540. Hem. 2. 
impatiens, with the gem, 392, B. 



INDEX. 



GOT 



impedire, constr., 571, VI. and "Rem. 1. 

imperare, constr., 292, Rem. 3. 

Imperative mood, formation and in- 
flection of, 602-605 ; various formu- 
las for, 606, Rem. 3 ; its place sup- 
plied by other moods, id. Rem. 4 ; 

use of imp. present, 607, I. ; 

future, id. II. 

Imperfect tense, formation and inflec- 
tion of, active, 268-271 ; passive, 

274-276; deponent, 276-277; 

its use, 266-268. 

imperitus, with the gen., 391 

Impersonal verbs, defined and classi- 
fied, 301-304; with the ace, 334, B 
and C; with the dat., 356, A ; with 
the gen., 401, C and 411, C; with 
the abl., 411, C 

i in ]>i -r(ire, constr., 368, D. 

imponere, constr., 447. Rem. 

' k I must," "I am obliged," how ex- 
pressed, 171, D. 

in, constr., 151, 7/. 

Inceptive or 

Inchoative verbs, 136, B. 3 ; lists of 
them, 689-690. 

Indeclinable, nouns, 61, E; adjec- 
tives, id. E. 7. 

Indefinite, pronouns, 34 and 64 ; ad- 
verbs, 615, IV. 

Independent sentences, 149, E. 

Indicative mood, u^cd in absolute as- 
sertions, 534, 1. ; in direct questions. 
535, II. ; in conditional clauses, id. 
III.; peculiar use of, 536, B , in gen- 
eral relative expressions, 537, II. ; 
with site — sire. id. III. ; in inter- 
jected clauses, 596, Rem. 1 and 2 ; 
597, Rem. 1 and 2. 

indigere, constr^ 113, IF. 

indignus, with the ablat., 444, B ; with 
qui and the 9UDJ., BIO, F. 

Indirect, questions, 500,/); discourse, 
595, Rem. 

induere, constr., 368, D. 

Inferiority, expressed by minus, — quam 
and minimi-, 212, B. 2. 

Infinitive, different forms and tenses 
of, 253-255 ; future expressed by 

fore ut, 255, Rem. 1, and 292, Rem. 
8 ; used substantively, 61, Rem. 6 ; 
historical, 268, Rem. 4 ; instead of 
tit, 296, Rem. 1 ; as the subject of a 
verb, 281, I.; as the object of what 
verbs, id. II. and 282, Remarks; with 
a subject in the ace, 287, A ; used 
after certain nouns, adjectives, and 
verbs, instead of the gerund, 282, 

Rem. 2. Infin. present instead 

of the participle, 291, Rem. 2 ; in the 
sense of the imperfect, id. Rem. 3 j in 



the sense of the perfect, id. Rem. 4 ; 

instead of the future, id. Rem. 6. 

Infin. perf. in the sense of the 

pluperf., 291, Rem. 3 ; in the sense of 

the present, id. Rem. 5. Infin. 

passive used impersonally, 292, Rem. 

7 ; esse omitted, id. Rem. 11. 
Inflection, 7, K. 
inimicus with the dat., 351. 4. 
" In order to," " for the purpose of," 

how expressed, 143, D and 248, A ; 

249, Rem. 4. 
inquam, inquit, conjugated, 671, C. 2; 

place of, 655, III. 
inscius with the genit., 391. 2. 
inscribere, constr., 447, Rem. 
insolitus, with the dat., 352. 7. 
inspergere, constr., 368, D. 
'•Instead of," how expressed, 197, C. 
Instrument, ablat. of the means and, 

419, C; expressed bv per, opera, Sec, 

420, Rem. 1 and 2. 
insuetus, with the gen.. 391. 3. 
Intensive, pronoun {ipse), 29, D ; used 

for the (lemonst. is, 473, Rem. 3 ; 
verbs, 137. 5. 

inter with the gerund, 116, c. 

inti rdicere, constr., 438, Rem. 4. 

interea luti. 382, Rem. 2. 

interesse, with the dat., 157 and 358, 
B. 

interest, constr., 411, C. 

Interjected clauses, in the subjunct., 
595-597; in the indie, 596, Rem. 1 
ami 2, and 597, Rem. 1 and 2. 

Interjections, 642-644; construction 
of, 643. 

inti rrof/'tre, constr., 341, A. 

Interrogative, pronouns, 39-41; ad- 
verbs, 644, II. and 015 ; sentences, 
543-548. 

Intransitive verb*, with the ace. of 
kindred signification, W>, 11; with 
the ace. generally, 327, C; with the 
dat., 850,CV made transitive by com- 
position, 332. A. 

-tnus, adjectives in, 506. 6. 

inn niu/i/ur qui, with the subj., 587, C. 

-io, verbals in, 89. 9. 

ipse, declined, 30 and 53 ; used for the 
reflexive, 473- 3. 

irasci, with the dat., 356, -1. 

ire, with the supine, 248, Rem. 1. 

iri, in the fut. infin. passive, 132. 7, 
and 249, Rem. 3. 

is, declined, 36, A, and 54, D ; for the 
reflexive, 473. 2 ; omitted, 31, note, 
and 292, Rem. 12. 

is — qui. 42, J), and 55, G. 

-is for -ibw, 48, Rem. 3 ; -'is for -es, ace. 
pi., id. Rem. 4. 



698 



INDEX. 



isle, declined, 36, A and 54, D; de- 
fined, 37, Kern. 4. 
isllc and illic, 37, Kern. 6. 
istu/1, with the gen. 381, A. 3. 
itaque, place of, 654, II. 
zVe/ 1 , gen. itineris, 16, note §. 
-fter, adverbs in, 616, C 1. 
-«««, adverbs in, 616, C. 3. 
-liis, genitives in, 40, note J. 



J. 



J, value of, 3, K 5. 
jamdudtm^jampridem^ 428 and 429. 
_/i ( ///•, gen.jt i tin trtSf 16, note §. 
jubere, constr., 296, Bern. 3. 
juctmdvs, with the dat., 351. 3, and 

248, C 

jvgerwn, 47, note #. 
junctus, with the abl., 426, note. 
Jujmiter, gen. Jopm, 16, note §. 
y»ni consoltus, 891, not.- f. 
ju.<)Hraii<lniii, declined, 60* 
'///('•'/ //// . constr.. :;::i. C 
juxta, prep., 628, i>'. 1 ; adv., 624, 
Bern. 5. 



K. 



K, power and use of, 3. /.'. 6. 



L. 



Labials, 2, D. 
lo&orare, constr., 190. 

la.tnri, with the :iM., -I I 

lai, i m, ormihi, 834, C and ■>■>■>, liera. 3. 

tourm, declined, 81, /. 2. 

Leading sentences, i-t'.». /.'. 

-I< it/ii.<, adjectives in, 606. B. 

Letter-, classification and sounds of, 

l - :; ; value a- numerate, 70- 77. 
liberate, constr., 437. Rem. 1. 
libel and libitum tst, with the dat., 802, 

Rem. 1. 
linn, with the genit. or abl.. 

and 434, A. 
lint esse, with the ace. or dat., 169, 

Rem. 6. 
licet as conjunction, 575, V. 
Liquids, 2, D. 
tilterae, 71, 1); with distributives, 74, 

E. 
loci and foeorttm, 882, Rem. 2. 
loci and loca distinguished, 83; F. 1. 
Long syllables, ',, //. 1, 2. and note. 
longe with superlatives, 23:;, E, l, 
hmi/us, with the aec, 375, Rem. 1, and 

440, D. 



Itmgum est, for the snbj., 536, B. I. 
ludis, in answer to when f 317. Kern. 3, 
-las, la, lum, diminutives in, SO. 7. 



M. 



Jf, sound of, 3, E. 7; final, silent in 
verse, id. and 4, note. 

made and mat ti, 68, d\ and 642, Rem. 1. 

viii'jis, with comparatives, 216, F; su- 
perfluous, 227, Rem. 6. 

magnam pari* m. 2. 

vi>ti/iii, pnrvi, Ike, alter verbs of valu- 
18, A. 

magna, parvo, Sec, after verbs of buy- 
ing and selling, 434, .1. 

mafedicere, constr., 850. 4. 

malim, with the snbj., 657, A. 

iwiUi m, sense of, 55s, Rem. 2. 

mnlit, conjugated, • 

matufestuB, with the gen., 410, Rem. 8. 

Manner, ablat. of, 425, ,1 ; adverbs of, 
614, III. 2. 

Masculine gender, 483, .1 ,• nouns, 486, 
J'. I.: 491, .1, B, and C; 402, II., Ex- 
cept i-;, : .1'.'::. I). 

materfamiltas, declined, 60. 

Mean's, ablat. of. 41'.'. C; expressed by 
/in; &c., 420, Rem. 1-2. 

Measure, genitive of, :)7">, II; accusa- 
tive of, ill. Rem. l, nnd ii". /). 

vi' '/> //, with the dat., 866, .1. 

medu ari, constr., 868, Hem. 3. 

me/ins ji, litis. 642, Rem. 2. 

in, lii null , 642, Rem. 2 and note f. 
in, lias 1 rut, for/utMef, 686, B. I. 
vi, mini, with the infin. pres. 291, Rem. 
4 ; constr., :;!''■', />', and 400, Rem. 2-3. 
vu mnr. with the gen. 891. 2. 
in mt at, in ,-, nit, 401, Rem. 4. 
-/«./, Buffix, 2:'. /;, Rem. 
vu in, n , constr., 668-, 1 1 1. 
mi urn, /num. shuhi, &c. Ut, 41 1, Item. 2. 

7///, voc. ofmeiw, 10, note t ; tor mihi, 

SO, />'. 

militia, constr. 310. 6, c 
mill,- and rnilin, ",:,, ('. 
minus, declined, 106, /•',• with the gen., 

lot); without tjiuim, 105, / . 
mii-fr, with '/mxl or infin., 208, /A 
mieereor ami mi$eretco 1 constr., 401, 

Sera. l. 

mi.ont, with the ace, 344,7?; with 

the gen. 401, C. 
moofo, with the .-iihj. 577, IV. 
vi'xln — /»</'/", »;:;:,. /,». 
moner&, constr., 295, J), and 299, B. 
Monosyllables, ■". 4. 
Moods, HO. 5 : indicative, 584- 

53b; subj., 551-598; imperat. 602- 






INDEX. 



C99 



GO?; infinitive, 253-255, and 281- 

293. 
trios or moris est. constr., 2S8, Rem. 2, 

and 298, Kern. 2. 
Motion, verbs of, with ad or in, 150, .E. 
multo, with the compar., 230, Rem. 4 ; 

with the superb, 233, K. 1. 
multum, with the genit., 381, ..4. 2. 
mutant and COmmutare, COnstr., 508. 
Mutes, 2, Z>. 



N. 



ftae, 542, I. 

?wm and emm, 388 and 654. 

Names, proper, of persons and place?, 
v -. /. 4; adjectives derived from, 
506, II. ; Greek names, 196-500 ; 

of winds, months, &c., 486, D. L; 

of trees, islands, plants, &c, 486, II. 

natu, with major, minor, 214, note t, 
and 427, note. 

naius, "old," with the ace, 816, 
2; "bom of," with the abl., 545, C 

nauci habere, 308, A. 

»e, conj. with the subj., 507, II.; after 
verba of fearing, 668, III.: omitted, 

i ; with the imperat., ouo, 

Bern. 2. 

-ne, enclitic, 545, III. 

nee — nee, 634, C 
'• 17, II. 8. 
• est, constr., 171, D. 

nedum, with the subj., ".77, I\'. 

nefat, with supine, 240, C ; with sub- 
ject infin., 288, Rem. 2. 
' vc sentences, 542, II. 

Negations, two, 543, III. 

negligent with the gen., 302, Ji. 

in </(i, for non dico, 353. 

negotium, understood, 4b> ; B. 

in mo, declined, 85, /-.'. 

7/« mo est </ui, with the subj., 587, C 

nemo »">', 648, III. 

»/r no», for «f, 5G8, III. 

neo/tfe — neeiM, 684, <'. 

nequeo, conjugated, 670, 11. 

vc — guidem, 423. 

nc/uis, 04 and 66, Rem. 5. 

nest io an, 638. 

nescius, with the gen., 891. 2. 

ru 'r, how used, 507, Kern 2, and 606, 
Rem- 2 

ni eder, 98, Rem. 4. 

Neuter, nouns, 486, III. ; of the 2d 
decl., 401, B; of the 3d, 403, III.; 

of the 4th, 403, IV.; adjectives, 

used substantively. 193, A, and 194, 
Rem. 4, 5, and 6 ; with the genit., 881, 

A. 2 ; as adverbs, 610, C 2: pro- 

51) * 



nouns with the prenlt., 381, A 3 ; 

possessives used for genit. of person. 

pron., 411, Rem. 2 ; verbs, with 

the ace., 326, B, and 327, C; parti- 
ciples of, 260, Rem. 3 ; adverbs, 

With the genit., 381, A. 4. 

nihil with the genit., 22. and 3S1, A. 1. 

nihili aestimare, 399, Rem. 4. 

nihil non, 543, III. 

nikilominits, 635, E. 

nisi, with the indie, 535, III.; with 
the subj.. 551 -554. 

nisi forte with the indie, 554, Rem. 2. 

niti with the abl., 443, A. 

nocte and noctu, 316, B, and 317, Rem. 
2. 

ntilim, with the subj., 557. A. 

noUem, sense of, 55b. Rem. 2. 

nolo, conjugated, 667. 4. 

nomen tst mihi, constr., 367, C. 

nominare, with two ace, 342, C. 

Nominative, 7, A',- subject, 153, A; 
omitted, id. Rem. 1 and 2 ; two or 

more of different persons, 165, 1>; 

after verb<. 107-100 ; after interject 
"43, C. 

nomine, 409, Kern. 1. 

non, "no," 44o, IV. ; before and after 
a negation, 543, III. ; place of, 051, V. 

nondum, 325. 

non (it quod, 688, Rem. 1. 

n<»i magis (or minus) — quam, 227, 
Rem. 9. 

non moxlo — g< d. 686, EL 

non modo, for non modo non, 584, note. 

nonne, 545, II. 

n< n in mo, non nihil, 543, III. 
nunquam, 533, III. 
nonmtUus, 03, and 0">, Rem. 2. 
von nisi, only, 543, III. 
non ijno. mm <juo<I, 676, III. 
nOStri and nostrum, distinguished, 53, 
h'fin. 

Nouns, cases of, 7 j deolension of: 

l^t decl., 8. 2d deed., 10; 3d deel., 12 

- 17; 4th decl., 24 ; 6th deel., 20; plu- 
ral of all declensions, 44-51; 

compound, 60; irregular : inde- 
clinable, 61, Ef defective in case, 61, 
F; defective in number, 07 and 70- 
72; redundant, 81-84; classifi- 
cation of: common, 88. K. 1 ; collec- 
tive, id. 2 ; abstract, id. 3 ; proper, 

id. 4 ; patronymic, id. 5 ; patrials or 

gentiles, id, 6 ; diminutives. 80. 7 ; 
amplificatives, id 8 ; verbals, id ; 

• gender of, determined by their 

signification, 483-486; determined 

by declension, 401 -493; 

496-498. 
nubere. with the dat., 850, C, and note. 



700 



INDEX. 



nndius tertius, 240. 

nullius for neminis, 35, E. 

nullus est qui, with the subj., 587, C. 

nullus non, 543, III. 

num, how used, 545, III. 

Number, of nouns, 7, K; of verbs, 
112, D ; of the verb with sev- 
eral subjects, 154, C; with one sub- 
ject and cum, 155, Rem. 5. 

Numerals, cardinal, 73, B ; distribu- 
tive, 74, C; list of both classes, 76- 

78; ordinal, 94, D ; adverbial, 

id. E; list of both classes, 94-96 ; 
adverbs from, 614. 3, and II. 2, 3. 

numquid, in questions, 8, note *. 

numquis, how used, 68, A. 

nunc — nunc, 635, D. 

nunqunm mm, 543, III. 

nusquam, 613, B. I. 



0. 



0. quantity of final, 11, Rem. 2. 

o, interj., 642, B. 3 ; with num., &c, 
643, a 

ob, 623, B. 1 : place of, 652, VII. and 
Rem. 1. 

obire, constr., 332, A. 

Object, of active verbs in the ace, 
112, /•',• remote in the dat., 113, G. 

Objective genitive, 373, Rem. 2. 

Oblique cases, place of, 649, I. 

oblimsci, 399, />'. an.! 402. 

obstare with quominus and ne, 571, VI. 

occurrit ut, 297, F. 

odi, conjugated, G72. 7. 

oe, diphthong, ~i. 

officers with quominus and ne, 571, VI. 

were, constr., 327, < '. 2. 

Omission, of quam after plus, See, 227, 
C; "I" persona] pronouns before verbs, 
153, Rem. 1 ; of the antecedent, 202, 
Rem. S; of the ace. after verbs, 325. 
4; of the subject ace, 292, Rem. 12; 
of the reduplication in compounds, 
676, u ; 680, b ; 684, b and C ; of nouns 
before the genit., 375, b; of ut before 
the subj., 297, G ; of nt> after cur,-, 
606, Rem. 3. Compare Ellipsis. 

omnium, with superlatives, 218. 

-on, gen. plur. of Greek nouns, 500, 
Rem, 6. 

<; One," "people," " th^v," how ex- 
pressed, 330. 

opera alicujus, for per aliquem, 420, 
Rem. 1. 

operant dare ut, 294, C. 

opart ebut and oportiut, for the subj., 
536, B. 1. 

oportet, constr., 334, C, and 335, Rem. 2. 



oppidum in appos. with names of 
towns, 181, Rem. 12, and 309. 4, c. 

opus with supine in u, 249, C. 

opus est, constr., 436, Rem. 4. 

orare, constr., 295, D. 

Oratio Obliqua, 595, Rem. 

orbare, constr., 435, B. 

Order or rank, adverbs of, 614. 

Ordinal numeral-. 94, I) ; list, of, id. E. 

oriundus, sense of, 689 [orior). 

ortus, with the abl., 445, C. 

-os, nouns in, 16. 13 ; quantity of 
final, 51, Rem. 

o si. with the subj., 575, -1. 1. 

-osns, adjectives in, 5oU. 8. 



paene and prope, 310. 

palam, 625. 6. 

Paradigms of declension, to nouns : 
1st decl., 8; 2d decl., 10; 3d decl., 12 
-13 ; 4th decl., 24 ; 5th decl., 20 ; 

to the plural of nouns, 46-49; 

to compound nouns, 60-61; to 
Greek nouns, 496, 497, and 4'.»;i ; 

to adjectives, IS and 21; plural, 

49-50 ; to pronouns, personal, 

29-30; demonstrative, 36; inter- 
rogative, 40 ; determinative, 42 ; in- 
definite, • ; t-t;"» ; to the plural of pro- 
nouns, 53-55. Paradigms of con- 
jugation, to regular verbs, 664-665; 
to anomalous verbs, 666-671; to 
defective verbs, 671-678. On the 
special tenses, Bee Present, Imperfect) 
&c. 

parcere, with the dat., 356, .1. 

par ,,-<it. tor the BUbj., 536, B. I. 

pariter — «<\ 212, /;. l. 

pars, omitted, 198, Rem. 3. 

pars — pars with a plural verb, 154, B. 

particeps with the gen., 391. 4. 

Participles, in 7w declined, 21 ami 50. 
3, Rem. ; with the genit., 392, B ; in 

this how used, 117-119; how 

formed, 259-260; in rus seldom 
used in the genit. pi., 261, Rein. 7 ; 
used as adjectives or nouns, 260, 
Rem. 2; of neuter verbs, id. Hem. 3; 
of deponent verbs, id. Rem. 4 ; per- 
fect pass, with active sense, id. Rem. 
5 ; perfect active participle, how ren- 
dered, 261, Rem. 6 ; in the Conjuga- 
tio Ptripthrasdca, 261, D ; agree- 
ment, use, and government of. 262 ; 
used instead of clauses, 263. E ; in- 
stead of verbal nouns, id. Rem. 2 ; 
instead of the infin., 262, Rem. 3 ; 
perfect part, with habto, ieneo, &c., 



INDEX. 



701 



id. Rem. 4; part, in rns after verbs 
of motion, id. Rem. 5 ; part, in dus 
used to denote an intended effect, id. 
Rem. 6 ; in the ablative abso- 
lute : pres. and perf., 451-452 ; fu- 
ture active, 452, Rem. 2 ; future pas- 
sive, id. Rem. 3 ; perfect alone, 455. 

Particles, 7. 2. 

parti m, 336. 2, a. 

partita — partim, 635, D. 

Partitives, with the genit. pi., 383- 
384 ; with the gen. sing, of collective 
nouns, 385, Rem. 1 ; with ex, de, inte>\ 
&c, id. Rem. 6. 

Parts of speech, 6, J. 

parum, with the gen., 87, D. 

parri, parvo, see magni, magno. 

Passive voice, 160; paradigms of, 665; 

verbs, construction of, 160, A ; 

165, H; nominative after, 167, A ; 
168, B; 169. 2 ; 170. 3 ; with re- 
flexive sense, 477 ; with the accus., 
341, Rem. 4; in the constr. of the 
Ace cum Inf., 292, Rem. 9. 

patiens, with the genit., 392, B. 

Patrials or gentiles, 88. 6. 

Patronymics, 88. 5. 

pensi B.x\A.pili habere, 398, A. 

penum and penus, 82. 4. 

Penult, 6 ; when accented, 6. 2 and 3. 

percontari, constr., 341, B. 

perduim, forperdam, 141, Rem. 

Perfect tense, definite and indefinite, 

236, A ; active, formation of, 236 

-238; inflected, 238-239 ; pas- 
sive, 243-244; deponent, 245. 

perjicere ut, 296, E. 

/u rii/'/e ac, with the subj., 576. II. 

Periods, 659, IV. 

Periphrastic, forms of the verb, 131, 
D and E ; conjugations, 261, D. 

peritus with the genit., 391. 2. 

permittere, constr., 294. B. 

Persons of verbs, 110, B ; with nom- 
inatives of different persons, 155, D. 

persuadere, constr., 295, D. 

pfrtaesus, in an active sense, 260, 
Rem. 5. 

petere, constr., 295, D, and 342, Rem. 
2. 

jii'jef, witli the ace, 334, B ; with the 
genit., 401, C 

Place, whither, ace. of, 308, A ; where, 
gen. and abl. of, id. B ; whence, abl. 
of, id. C; adverbs of, 613, B. 1. 

plenas, with the genit., 391. 4. 

pleriqtte, wants the genit., 62. 7, b. 

Pluperfect tense, use of, 461; forma- 
tion of, 462, B ; inflection of, 

active, id. C; passive and deponent, 
464-465. 



Plural, of nouns and adjectives, 44- 
50 ; of pronouns, 52-55 ; of verbs 
after collective nouns, 154, B; of ab- 
stract nouns, 67, note ; of the adjec- 
tive belonging to two or more nouns, 
99, B. 

PluraUa iantum, 70-72. 

phis, declined, 104, C; with the genit., 
id. D ; without quam, 105, E. 

poenitel, constr., 334, B, and 401, C. 

pondo, 61. 5; Ubram, 375, Rem. 2. 

p>$cere, constr., 341, B. 

Position, syllables long by, 5, H. 1. 

Positive degree, 212. A. i ; with com- 
parative force after prepositions, 227, 
Rem. 5 ; for the superb after quam, 
234, Rem. 4. 

Possessive pronouns, 29 ; declined, 8, 
10, and 80 ; used for subject, genit., 
374, Rem 4. 

jwsswn, conjugated, 667. 

post, 623. B. I.; or pone, as ad- 
verbs, 624, Rem. 5. 

postea loci, 382, Hem. 2. 

postquam, with the pert', indie, 465. 

potens, with the genit., 391. 4. 

poteratj for the subj., 536, B. 

potior, constr., 343, A. 

jwtius superfluous, 227, Rem. 6. 

praebere, with two ace, 342. C. 

Predicate, 147, A ; modified or ex- 
panded, 148, C; simple or compound, 
149, E ; nouns in the after neu- 
ter and passive verbs, 167; adjective, 
pronoun, or participle, 168, B. 

praeditus, with the abl., 444, B. 

prat ( sse, with the dat., 359. 3. 

Prepositions, ti - J:>, J ,• with the ace, 
id. B. I. ; with the aid., 624. II. ; with 
ace. or abl., id. III. ; in composition, 
625-626, and 124-126 ; change of 
final consonant in, 124, Rem. 2 ; in- 
separable, 626, II.; compounded 

with verbs governing tin; dat., :>^x, 
B ; the ace'., 332, A ; the abl., 360, 

Rem. 2 ; place of, in sentences, 

652, VII. 

Present tense, active indicative, 112, 
D ; subjunctive, 141, A ; passive, 
161-163 ; deponent, 173-174. 

Preteritive verbs, 271, Rem. 9, and 
672. 

Price, genitive of, fanti, quanli, Sec, 
398, A ; ablative of. 434, A. 

primus for primnm, 187, Rem. 6. 

priusquam % constr., 578, VII. 

pro se qirisque, with a plural verb, 154, 
B, Rem. 2. 

procul, with the abl., 625, Rem. 6. 

]>foltibcre, with guominus or ne, 571, 



'02 



INDEX. 



pro nihilo putare, 399, Eem. 4. 

Pronouns, classified, 28-29; personal, 
29; possessive, 28, A. 4 ; demonstra- 
tive, 36-37 ; interrogative, 39-40 ; 
relative, 41 ; determinative, 42 ; in- 
definite, 64-66 ; plural of all 

these, 52-55. 

prope as prep, and adv., 624, Eem. 4. 

Proper nouns, 88, E. 4. 

propmum, understood, 410, B. 

proprius, with the genit., 391. 3. 

prosum, how conjugated, 667, Eem. 2. 

Protasis, 551, B. 

prudens, with the gen., 391. 2. 

-pie, suffix, 33, note *. 

pudet, with the ace, 334, B; with the 
genit., 401, C. 

pugnam pugnare, 326, B. 

punior, as deponent, 689. 

jmrgare, with the gen., 408, A. 

Purpose, indicated by ut and subj., 
566, I. ; negatively by ne, 567, II. ; 
by quo, 569, IV. ; by the relative with 
the subj., 588, D; by the supine in 
um, 248, A ; by an infinitive, gerund, 
or participle, 249, Eem. 4. 

putare, with two ace, 342, C 



Q, sound of, 3, E. 8. 

qua, correlative, 615, IV. 

qua — qua, 635, D. 

quaeso, 673. 10. 

qualis, defined, 80, B. 

qualis — talis, 208, Eem. 11. 

quam after comparatives, 225-226 ; 
omitted, 227, C; with the superla- 
tive, 233, D and E ; pro, 227, 

Eem. 7 ; qui with the subj., 

587, Eem. 3. 

quam est, sunt, &e, 225, Eem. 3, and 
226, notes. 

quamquam and quamvis, constr., 577, V. 

Quantity, of syllables, 5, H; of the 
terminations 6f nouns, 50-51 ; ad- 
verbs of, 614. 2 ; adjectives and 
nouns of, with the genit., 381, A. 

quanto with comparatives, 230, Eem. 4. 

quantum with the genit., 381, A. 2. 

quantum possum, 587, note *. 

quasi, with the subj., 576, II. 

-que, enclitic, how used, 76, H. 

-que — et, 634, C. 

queo, conjugated, 670. 10. 

Questions, how asked, 544-546 ; dis- 
junctive, 547-548; doubtful, 560, C; 
indirect, 560-562. 

qui interrogative, 39, A ; relative, 41, 
B; plural of, 54, E; agreement of, 



200, A; with the subj., 586-591 ; 
abl., for quo, 143, note t. 

quicumque, 41, C; with the indie, 
537, II. 

quid with the genit., 381, A. 3. 

quidem, declined, 64, A ; defined, 65, 
Eem. 2. 

quid plural 154, Eem. 5. 

quidquam, how used, 19, note *. 

quin with the subj., 569, V. ; with the 
indie and imper., 571, Eem. 5. 

quippe qui, 589, E. 

quis, declined, 40 ; and qui dis- 

ting., 40, Eem. 2. 

quis est qui, with the subj., 587, C 

quisnam and quinam, 40, Eem. 1. 

quisquam and quispiam, 34. 

quisque, 455-456 ; with comparatives, 
232, B ; used distributively, 650, IV. 

quisquis with the indie, 537, II. 

quo, correlative, 615, IV. ; with com- 
paratives, 230, Eem. 4 ; with the 
genit, 382, Eem. 2 and 3 ; for ut eo, 
569, IV. 

quoad, constr., 578, VI. 

quocum, quacum, quibuscum, for cum 
quo, 652, VII. 

quod for id quod, 202, Eem. 8; referring 
to res, 207, Eem. 8 ; to an entire 
clause, 208, Eem. 9 ; in restrictive 
clauses, 587, Eem. 2 ; with the genit., 
381, A. 3. 

quod, conj., "because," 320 ; "that" 
or "because," 298, //,- in explanatory 
clauses, 299, Eem. 3 ; "as to," "as 
far as," "since," id. Eem. 5. 

quominus, with the subj., 571, VI. 

quoniam, constr., 630. 

quo secius, 572, Eem. 2. 

quot — tot, 208, Eem. 11. 

quolies or quotiens t 94, E. 

quotus? 94, D. 

quum or cum, with the indie, 579, B. I, ; 
with the subj., 580, II. and III.; with 
the historical inf., 581, Eem. 2. 

quum primum, with the perf. indie, 
278. 

quum — turn, 535, D. 



R. 



raptum eunt, for eripiunt, 248, Eem. 1. 
-re, for -ris, 2d person sing, of passive 

verbs, 162, note, 
-re, insepar. prep., 626, II. 3. 
recordari, with the genit., 399, B. 
r-ecusare, with quominus and ne, 571, 

VI. 
redolere, with the ace, 327, C. 2. 
Redundant nouns, 81 - 84. 



INDEX. 



703 



Reduplication, 237, Rem. 6 ; dropped 
in compos., 676, a ; 680, b ; 684, b 
and c, &e 

refert, constr., 411, C. 

refertus, constr., 391. 1. 

Reflexive, pronouns, construction of, 
469 - 472 ; instead of demonstratives, 

472, Rem. 1 ; verbs, 477, A and 

B. 

Relative, pronouns, 41 ; plural of, 54 - 
55 ; agreement of, 200 ; person of, 
201, Rem. 4 ; antecedent repeated 
with, id. Rem. 6 ; anteced. expressed 
with the relative only, id. Rem. 6 ; 
relat. without antecedent, 202, Rem. 
8 ; attracted into the case of the an- 
tecedent, id. Rem. 9 ; referring 

to two or more nouns, 206. 1 ; to a 
collective noun, id. 2 ; to a proper 
name and a generic term, id. 3 ; in 
agreement with a descriptive noun, 

207. 4; in agreement with an adjec- 
tive, id. 5 ; in agreement with a noun 
of a different gender, id. 6 ; referring 
to an antecedent implied, id. 7; re- 
ferring to a noun of different gender, 
id. 8 ; referring to an entire clause, 

208. 9 ; in the sense of such, in con- 
sideration of, id. 10 ; adjectives, 

id. 11; used instead of demon- 
stratives, id. 12 ; followed by 

the subj., 586-590 ; place of, 

653, C; clauses, after and be- 
fore those of the antecedent, 201, 
Rem. 5, and 657, II. 

relinquitur and reliquum est tit, 297, 

F. 1. 
reliqua, "as for the rest," 336, Rem. 

2. a. 
reminisci, constr., 399, B. 
reperiuntur qui, with the subj., 587, 

C 
repugnare with qztominus and we, 571, 

VI. 
res, declined, 26, A ; how used, 29, 

note. 
respublica, declined, 61. 
rested ut, 297, F. 1. 
revertor, how used, 321, note. 
reus, with the gen., 410, Rem. 5. 
-rinnis and -ritis of verbs, quantity of, 

520, note. 
rogare, with two ace, 341, B; with ut 

or ne, 295, D. 
Roots, of nouns and adjectives, 213, 

note * ; of verbs,' 111, Rem. 1 ; 

second, of verbs, 237-238; third, 243, 

Remarks ; lists of verbs irregular in 

the 2d and 3d roots, 673-6S6. 
rudis, with the gen., 391. 2. 
rus, constr., 157, F, and 310. 6, b. 
2S 



-rus, participles in, 131, D. 2 ; denot- 
ing a purpose, 143, D, and 249, Rem. 
4; with sum, fiat, &e, 261, D; in the 
ablat. absol., 452, Rem. 2. 



S. 



S, power of, 3, E. 9 ; final, elided, 4, 
note. 

saepe, compared, 220, A. 

salve, defect, verb, 672. 8. 

sapere, with the ace, 327, C. 2. 

satis or sat, with the genit., 86. C; 
compounds of, with the dat., 359. 4. 

satus, with the abl., 545, C. 

scilicet, 546, Rem. 1. 

scito, for sci, imperat., 606, Rem. 1. 

se and suits, construction of, 469-473; 
se before infinitive omitted, 292, Rem. 
12. 

se, inseparable prefix, 626. 4. 

secus for sexus, 61, E. 5, and 375, Rem. 
2. 

sed and autem, 38, B. 

Semi-deponentia, 161. 4. 

Sentences, construction of, 147 - 150 ; 
simple and compound, 149, E; form 
of, 541 ; affirmative, 542, I. ; negative, 
id. EL; interrogative, 543-548 ; con- 
ditional, 535, III. and 551-554 ; ar- 
rangement of, 657-659. 

sequitur ut, 297, F. 1. 

sett or sive, 632, 1. 2, 550, and 388. 

Short syllables, 5, 77". 

si and nisi, with the indicat., 535, III. ; 
with the subj., 551-554. 

sicut, with the subj., 576, II. 

similis, constr., 351, D. 1. 

Simple, subject and predicate, 148, 
D ; sentences, 148. 

shmd, with the abl., 625. 6. 

si mid — simul, 635, D. 

siniul ac or atque, with the perf. indie, 
278. 

sin, sin autem, 554. 

sin minus, 554. 

Singular of nouns for the plur., 68. 6. 

Singularia tantum, 67, B. 

s'uiguli and tend, always distributive, 
74, note §. 

siqui, siquis, 64 and 554. 

sis, for si vis, 642, Rem. 1. 

sive — sive, with the indie, 537, III. 

sodes, for si audies, 642, Rem. 1. 

soleo, 161. 4, and 241. 

solum, tantum, only, 79. 

solus, declined, 40, note J. 

Space, extent of, in the ace, 440, D. 

stare, to cost, with the gen., 3U8, A; 
with the abl., 434, A. ■ ' 



'04 



INDEX. 



studere, with the dat., 356, A ; with 
the inf. or ut, 294, C. 

sludiosus, with the gen., 391. 1. 

suadeo, constr., 295, D. 

sub, constr., 151, H. 

Subject of a sentence, 147, A ; how 
expanded, 148, B ; simple and com- 
pound, id. D ; place of, 649, I. 

Subject-accusative, 2S7, A ; of pro- 
nouns omitted, 292, Eem. 12. 

Subject-nominative, agreement of verb 
with, 153, A; omitted, id. Rem. 1 
and 2 ; its place supplied by an in- 
finitive, 154, Rem. 3 ; before the his- 
torical infinitive, id. Rem. 4 ; two or 
more vrith a plural verb, id. C; with 
a singular verb, 155, Rem. 1-5 ; two 
or more of different persons, 155, D. 

Subjective genitive, explained, 373, 
Rem. 2 ; represented by the posses- 
sive pronoun, 374, Rem. 4. 

Subjunctive mood, 110. 5 ; present, 
141-142 ; use of, 142-143, and 551 ; 
first future, how expressed, 515 - 516 ; 
future perfect, 523 ; in hypo- 
thetical propositions, 551-554 ; in a 
potential sense, 557 ; expressing a 
wish, command, request, permission, 
558, C-560 ; in doubtful questions, 
560, C; in indirect questions, id. D. - 
562; after conjunctions, 566-572 and 
575-581; after relatives, 586-591; 
in interjected clauses, 595-598 ; ex- 
changing with the Ace. cum Infin., 
294-298. 

Substantives, plural of, 44-49 : classifi- 
cation and derivation of, 88 - 89 ; used 
as adjectives, 187, Rem. 5; expressed 
by a participle, 263, Rem. 2 ; verbal, 
with the case of their verb, 326. 7, a. 
See under Xouns. 

succensere, with the dat., 356, A; with 
quod, 298, H. 

sui, declined, 29, B, and 53, C. 

sui, sibi, se, how used, 469-473. 

sum, conjugated, 666 ; compounds of, 
6G7; with the dat. of the possessor, 
350, C, Rem. 1 ; with two datives, 
366, B ; with the genit. of the value, 
398, A ; with the genit. of quality 
and measure, 375, ; with the genit. 
and res, negotiant, &c. understood, 
410, B; with the abl. of qualitv, 427, 
C; with the abl. of the value, 434, 
Rem. 1. 

sunt qui with the subj., 587, C. 

siqyer and suiter, bv what cases fol- 
lowed, 344, II. Rem. 2. 

superest ut, constr., 297, F. 1. 

Superiority*, relation of, how ex- 
pressed, 212, B. 3. 



Superlative degree, 212 ; regular for- 
mation of, 213'; construction of, 

231-234; superl. of comparison, 231, 
I. ; of eminence, id. II. ; with quisque 
and quique. 232, B ; two superl. con- 
nected by ita . . . ut, 232, C; in con- 
nection with quam, quantus, qui, &C, 
233, D; its force, how increased, id. 
E. 

superstes, constr., 353. 10, and note. 

Supines, 110. 8, and 664-665 ; want- 
ing in many verbs, 249, Rem. 4 ; 

in am after verbs of motion, 248, A ; 
govern the cases of their verbs, id. B; 
in u after fas, nefas, and adjec- 
tives, 249, C; after verbs, 250, Rem. 
3 ; constructions instead of, id. Rem. 
4. 

supplicare, with the dat., 350, C, and 
note. 

sustuli not from sufferre, 669, under 

fero. 

suns distinct from ejus, 33, A, and 470, 
Rem.; construction of, 469-472. 

Syllables, 4, G ; division of words 

into, id. 3, a-d ; quantity of, 5, 

H. 

Syncopation offenses derived from the 
second root, 239, Remarks. 

Synaeresis, 4, F. 

Synecdoche, 336, Rem. 1. 

Syntax, of the accusative, 324-344 ; 
of the dative. 349-369; of the geni- 
tive, 373-412 ; of the ablative, 417- 
455. 



T. 



taedet, with the ace, 334, i?; with the 

genit., 401, C. 
talis, defined, 80, B. 
talis, tarn, &c. before qui, 586, B. 
talis — quails, constr., 201, Rem. 3, 

and 208. 11. 
tarn — quam. in comparisons, 212, B. 1. 
t'lmen. 632, II. 5. 
tamouam, with the subj., 576, II. 
tanti, quanti, &c, as gen. of price, 

398. 
tanto with comparatives, 230, Rem. 4. 
tan/am with the gemt., 103 ; adv. in 

the sense of "only," 79. 
tantum abest, ut — ut, 197, C. 
tantus before qiri, 586, B. 
iantus — quantus, constr., 201, Rem. 3, 

and 208. 11. 
taxare, constr., 398, A, and 434, A. 
-te, suffix, 29, B, Rem. 
tempore and in tempore disting., 316, 

B, Rem. 1 ; omitted, 193, Rem. 3. 



INDEX. 



705 



Tenses, 110 ; derivation of, 129-132 ; 

of the indicative how used, 527 ; 

of the subjunctive, in dependent 

clauses, 528-530 ; similar and dis- 
similar, 529, Rem. 1; of the indie, for 
the subj., 536, B. I. and 537, Rem. 1 
and 2 ; of the subj. in hypotheti- 
cal sentences, how used, 551, B. I. 
and II. ; used one for another, 552, 
Rem. 1 ; present and perfect subj. 
and future indie, for the imperative, 
606, Rem. 4; of the infinitive mood, 
see under Infinitive. Compare also 
Present, Imperfect, &c. 

tempus traducere, fatter e, &c, 479. 

tenax, with the genit., 393, Rem. 2. 

tentare, constr., 370. 

tenus, after its case, 175, B. 

-ter, adverbs in, 616, C. 1. 

Terminations of nouns and adjectives, 
50, C; of verbs, 664-665. 

ii and ci, sound of, 3, E. 10. 

Time, construction of : how long? 315, 
A ; when? 316, B ; within which, 317, 
C; how long ago? id. D ; how long 
before or after ? 318, E ; various 

other relations of, 319 ; adverbs 

of, 614, II. 

timens, with the genit., 392, B. 

timere, with ne and ut, 568, III. 

toto and tola, abl. without in, 309, 
note *. 

Towns, names of. See Places. 

tradere with the part, in dus, 264, 
Rem. 6. 

tribuere with the ace. and dat., 349, B. 

tu, declined, 29 ; plural, 52, A. 

turn — turn, 635, D. 

turn teniporis, 382, Rem. 4. 



U. 



U, sound of, 2 ; quantity of final, 24, 
A, Rem. 

vbi and ubicunque, with the genit., 382, 
Rem. 2. 

ullus declined, 65 ; use of, id. Rem. 4. 

ultra, prep., 623, B. I. ; in compos., 
626. 3. 

ulttim ire, for ulcisci, 248, Rem. 1. 

-ulus, ula, ulum, diminut. in, 89. 7. 

-urn, for orum, 47, note * ; .of distribu- 
tives, 74, note f ; adverbs in, 616. 2. 

uncle with the genit., 382, Rem. 2. 

-Hindus for endus in participles, 117, 
Rem. 

uni, unae, una, when used, 73, Rem. 1, 

unquam, 234. 

wins, declined, 73 ; how used, 75, F. 

unusquisque, 456. 



urbs, in appos. with names of towns, 
181, Rem. 12, and 309. 4, c and d. 

-tis, nouns in, 10, A ; 15, G. 14 ; 24, 
A. 

tisquam and uspictm, use of, 139, F ; 
with the genit., 382, Rem. 2. 

•usque, constr., 175. 

usus est, constr., 436, Rem. 5. 

ut, with the subj., 566 and (instead of 
the Ace. cum Inf.) 294-295; in the 
sense of so that, 567, Rem. 1 ; after 

verbs of feai-ing, for ne non, 568; 

as adverb of manner, 567, Rem. 2 ; in 
the sense of as soon as, id. ; in the 
sense of woidd that, 575 ; omit- 
ted, 297, G. 

utcunque, with the indie, 537, II. 

liter, declined, 39, A. 

xiterque and ambo, defined, 97, A ; with 
the genit. pi., 383, B. 2; with a plur. 
verb, 154, B, Rem. 2. 

uti. See id. 

trtilis, constr., 351. 2 ; with the dat. of 
the gerund, 116, b. 

utiliusfuit, for subj., 536, B. 

utinam, constr., 575, A. I. 

ut ne, 568, Rem. 3. 

ut non, 567, Rem. 1 ; for qidn, 571, 
Rem. 2. 

tdor, with the abl., 343, A. 

utpote qiti, 589, E. 

ut qui, 589, E. 

utrique, how used, 98, Rem. 3. 

utrum, in double questions, 547, II. 

uiut, with the indie, 537, II. 

uxor, omitted, 375, b. 



V, character of, 3, E. 5. 

vacare, with the abl., 435, B. 

vacuus, without the abl., 436, Rem. 3. 

vae, with the dat., 369, E. 2. 

valere, constr., 531. 

vapulo, passive, 160, A. 3. 

vel and out, 388, C; vel with the su- 
perb, 233, E. 1. 

vel — vel, 634, C. 

velim, with subj., 557, A, and 558, B. 

vellem, how used, 558, Rem. 2. 

velut and velut si with the subj., 576, II. 

vendere, with the genit., 398, A ; with 
the abl., 434, A. 

Verba sensuum et affectmim with the 
Ace. cum Infin., 288, II. 1; verba de- 
clarandi with the same, 290. 3. 

Verbals, nouns, 89. 9 ; with the ace, 
326. 7 ; adjectives, in bills with the 
dat., 353, 10 ; in ax with the genit., 
393, Rem. 2. 



•0(? 



index: 



Verbs, transitive, "neuter and depo- 
nent, 109-110 ; tenses, moods, and 
conjugations of, 110 ; principal parts 

and roots of, 111 ; conjugation 

of : regular, 664 - 665 ; anomalous, 
666-671; defective, 671-673 ; im- 
personal, 301-304; compound, 

124 - 126 ; primary and deriva- 
tive, 136; frequentatives, 136. 1; de- 
sideratives, id. 2 ; inchoatives, id. 3 ; 
diminutives, 137. 4; intensives, id. 5; 

denominatives, id. C; neuter 

want the passive, 160, Rem. 2; semi- 
deponent, 161, Rem. 4 ; preteritive, 
672 ; agreement of, 315, A; nomina- 
tive after, 167-170; omitted, 325. 5 ; 

place of, in sentences, 649, I. ; 

lists of verbs irreg. in the perf. and 
supine, 673-686 ; lists of deponent 
verbs, 686 - 689 ; lists of inchoatives, 
689-690. 

Verbs signifying tvillingness, desire, 
permission, &c., constr., 292, B, and 
297, G. 

Verbs of resolving or endeavoring, 
constr., 294, C 

Verbs of requesting, exhorting, com- 
manding, constr., 295, D. 

Verbs of causing, effecting, &c, constr., 
296, E. 

Verbs signifying joy, sorrow, surprise, 
and wonder", constr., 298, II. 

Verbs of inquiring, asking, demanding, 
with two accusatives, 341, B. 

Verbs of naming, calling, considering, 
&c, with two accusatives, 342, C. 

Verbs signifying to benefit, favor, 
please, trust" &c, with the dative, 
356, A. 

Verbs of valuing, buying, selling, &c, 
with the genit., 398, A ; with the 
ablat., 434, A. 

Verbs of reminding, rememberinq, and 
forgetting, with the genit., 399," B. 

Verbs of plenty or icant, Sec, with the 
abl., 435, B. 

Verbs denoting separation, difference, 
or distance, with the abl., 436, C. 

Verbs of placing, putting, standing, 
sitting, &c., with in, 446, F. 

rerisimile est with the Ace. cum Infin., 
288, Rem. 2 ; with ut, 297, Rem. 1. 

veritum est, impers., 334, B. 



vero, "yes," 545, IV. 2; "but," place 
of, 654, II. 

versus, prep., after its case, 344, Rem. 
1. 

verum, conj., place of, 654. 

verum est, with the Ace. cum. Inf., 
288, Rem. 2 ; with tit, 297, Rem. 1. 

vescor, with the abl., 443, A. 

vestri and vestmm, 53, Rem. 

veiare, constr., 296, Rem. 3; with quo- 
minus and ne, 571, VI. 

vicem, for vice, 336, a. 

vicinus, with the dat., 352. 5. 

videlicet, 617. 7. 

videor, I seem, 169, C. 3. 

videre ut, 294, C. 

vitam vivere, 326, B. 

vocare with two ace, 342, C. 

Vocative case, 7, H; of proper names 
in ius, 10, note f ; use of the, 643- 
644. 

Voices of verbs, active and passive, 
110. 4; conjugated, 664-665. 

volo, conjugated, 667. 3 ; with the 
nomin. and infin., 127, F ; with the 
Ace. cum Inf., 289. 2 ; with ut, 294, 
B ; with ut omitted, 297, G. 

voti or votorum damnari, 410, note. 

Vowel, before another vowel, 5, //. 3; 
before two consonants, id. 1 ; before 
a mute and liquid, id. 4. 

Vowels, sounds of, 1, C. 



Words, classification of, 6, J; order of, 
in sentences, 648-657. 



X. 

X, sound of, 3 ; nouns in, 17. 19. 

Y. 

Y, sound of, 2 ; nouns in, 16. 4. 

Z. 



Z, power of, 3. 



THE END. 



Page 


Line 


2 


15 


40 


16 


89 


12 


97 


27 


127 


28 


141 


34 


145 


1 


167 


20 


220 


36 


246 


16 


272 


36 


292 


22 


315 


12 


341 


9 


371 


14 


400 


11 


532 


15 


545 


31 


576 


41 


578 


26 


585 


9 


593 


44 


629 


23 


644 


56 


650 


18 



EEEATA 



read "fret" instead of "fre." 

read " Nom. uter," instead of " NoM. ut." 

read " puerculus," instead of " puerlulus." 

read " I have them not," instead of " I have it not." 

read " nolo," instead of " volo." 

read " comedim " for " commedim" and in the line below, 

" comedam " for " commedam." 
read " occldere" instead of " accidere." 
read " novus" instead of " novus" 
read " Lesson XCIII," instead of " Lesson LXX." 
read " Quid ei" instead of " Quid eo." 
read " (veniret,)" instead of " (veneret.)" 
read " not lawful," instead of " now lawful." 
read " Bevertitne" instead of " Bevertdtne." 
read " tondere," instead of " tondere." 
read " visere," and on the line below, " (visere)," instead 

of "visere." 
read " pristmae" instead of "pristinae" 
read " nancisci," instead of " naucisci." 
read " sine perturbatione." 
read " succenserem," instead of " succenserem." 
read " has life in him," instead of " keeps up his spirits." 
read " in itinere vestro" instead of " itinere tuo" 
read " Cujas," instead of " Cujus." 
read " They looked," instead of " They look." 
read " Quot, quantas," instead of " Quot, quantus." 
read " detrimentoque" instead of " detrimentaque." 



\- 



4006 







\ v 



,° °*. 






•/ 












.\ x * 






-/ 









'OO 1 










«* ^ 









= I 

r I 






N 









' A\ V --V 






V % 









o o x 










, 



-V 5 "%< 



" a i 






•w 



Bookkeeper proce 
aanesium Oxide 



,. ~ V- ,<' : : Deacidified using the Bookkee. 

? Neutralizing agent: Magnesium Oxide 
> v <-y Treatment Date: July 2006 

PreservationTechnologies 

•" A WORLD LEADER IN PAPER PRESERVATION 

^ -y 111 Thomson Park Drive 






.S ^ ^ 







1 1 1 Thomson Park Di 
Cranberry Township, 
(724)779-2111 






V 







































f 














V 




■ 










00 






